Folio Archives
Sri Garga-samhita
Canto One

Chapter One
Çré-Kåñëa-mähätmya-varëana
Description of Çré-Kåñëa's Glories

Text 1

oà näräyaëaà namaskåtya
     naraà caiva narottamam
devéà sarasvatéà vyäsaà
     tato jayam udérayet

     om—Om; näräyaëam—the Personality of Godhead; namaskåtya—after offering respectful obeisances; naram ca eva—and Näräyaëa Åñi; narottamam—the supermost human being; devém—the goddess; sarasvatém—the mistress of learning; vyäsam—Vyäsadeva; tataù—thereafter; jayam—all that is meant for conquering; udérayet—be announced.

     Before reciting this Garga-saàhitä, which is the very means of conquest, one should offer respectful obeisances unto the Personality of Godhead, Näräyaëa, unto Nara-Näräyaëa Åñi, the supermost human being, unto mother Sarasvaté, the goddess of learning, and unto Çréla Vyäsadeva.*

Text 2

çarad-vikaca-paìkaja-çriyam atéva-vidveñakaà
     milinda-muni-sevitaà kuliça-kaïja-cihnävåtam
sphurat-kanaka-nüpuraà dalita-bhakta-täpa-trayaà
     calad-dyuti-pada-dvayaà hådi dadhämi rädhä-pateù

     çarat—autumn; vikaca—blooming; paìkaja—lotus; sriyam—beauty; atéva-vidveñakam—reviling; milinda—bees; muni—by sages; sevitam—served; kuliça—of lightning; kaïja—lotus; cihna—with marks; ävåtam—covered; sphurat—glistening; kanaka—golden; nüpuram—anklets; dalita—broken; bhakta—of the devotees; täpa—sufferings; trayam—three; calat—moving; dyuti—splendor; pada—of feet; dvayam—pair; hådi—in my heart; dadhämi—I place; rädhä-pateù—of Rädhä's Lord.

     In my heart I place the splendid feet of Rädhä's Lord, feet that eclipse the glory of autumn lotuses, are served by hosts of bumblebee sages, are marked with lightning and lotus and decorated with glistening golden anklets, and break the three sufferings of the devotees. 

Text 3

vadana-kamala-niryadyasya péyüñam ädyaà
     pibati jana-varo 'yaà pätu so 'yaà giraà me
badara-vana-vihäraù satyavatyäù kumäraù
     praëata-durita-häraù särìga-dhanv-avatäraù

     vadana—face; kamala—lotus; niryadyasya—splendid; péyüñam—nectar; ädyam—transcendental; pibati—drink; jana-varaù—the best of men; ayam—he; pätu—may protect; saù ayam—he; giram—the words; me—of me; badara-vana—in the forest Badarikäçrama; vihäraù—enjoys pastimes; satyavatyäù—of Satyavaté; kumäraù—the son; praëata—of surrendered souls; durita—troubles; häraù—removing; särìga-dhanu—of Lord Kåñëa, who carries the Çärìga bow; avatäraù—an incarnation.

     May Satyavaté's son Vyäsa, who enjoys pastimes at Badarikäsrama, who is the best of men, who drinks the transcendental nectar of the glory of Lord Kåñëa's lotus face, and who is an incarnation of the Lord who carries the Çärìga bow, protect my words.

Text 4

kadäcin naimiñäraëye
     çré-gargo jïäninäà varaù
äyayau çaunakaà drañöuà
     tejasvé yoga-bhäskaraù

     kadäcit—one time; naimiñäraëye—in Naimiñäraëya; çré-gargaù—Çré Garga Muni; jïäninäm—of the wise; varaù—the best; äyayau—went; çaunakam—Çaunaka; drañöum—to see; tejasvé—powerful; yoga—yoga; bhäskaraù—a splendid sun.

     Once Çré Garga Muni, who was the best of the wise, very powerful, and a brilliant sun of yoga, went to see Çaunaka Muni.

Text 5

taà dåñövä sahasotthäya
     çaunako munibhiù saha
püjayäm äsa padyädyair
     upacärair vidhänataù

     tam—him; dåñövä—seeing; sahasä—at once; utthäya—rising; çaunakaù—Çaunaka; munibhiù saha—with the sages; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; padya-ädyaiù—beginning with water for washing the feet; upacäraiù—with many offerings; vidhänataù—according to religious tradition.

     Seeing him, Çaunaka and the sages at once stood up and worshiped him by washing his feet and presenting many offerings according to ancient tradition.

Text 6

çré-çaunaka uväca 
satäà paryaöanaà dhanyaà
     gåhinäà çäntaye småtam
nåëäm antas tamo-häré
     sädhur eva na bhäskaraù

     çré-çaunakaù uväca—Çré Çaunaka said; satäm—of the saintly devotees; paryaöanam—wandering; dhanyam—good fortune; gåhinäm—of the householders; çäntaye—for peace; småtam—remembered; nåëäm—of men; antaù—of the heart; tamaù—darkness; häré—removing; sädhuù—a saintly devotee; eva—certainly; na—not; bhäskaraù—the sun.

     Çré Çaunaka said: The auspicious travels of saintly devotees bring peace to they who stay at home. It is a saintly devotee, and not the sun, the removes the darkness in people's hearts.

Text 7

tasmän me hådi sambhütaà
     sandehaà näçaya prabho
katidhä çré-harer viñëor
     avatäro bhavaty alam

     tasmät—therefore; me—my; hådi—in the heart; sambhütam—born; sandeham—doubt; näçaya—please destroy; prabhaù—O lord; katidhä—how many?; çré-hareù—who removes all that is inauspicious; of Çré Hari; viñëoù—of Viñëu; avatäraù—incarnations; bhavati—are; alam—many.

     Therefore, O lord, please destroy the doubt in my heart. How often does Lord Viñëu, who removes all that is inauspicious, descend to this world?

Text 8

çré-garga uväca 
sädhu påñöaà tvayä brahman
     bhagavad-guëa-varëanam
çåëvatäà gadatäà yad vai
     påcchatäà vitanoti çam

     çré-gargaù uväca—Çré Garga Muni said; sädhu—well; påñöam—asked; tvayä—by you; brahman—O brähmaëa; bhagavat—of the Lord; guëa—the qualities; varëanam—the description; çåëvatäm—of they who hear; gadatäm—of they who speak; yat—which; vai—indeed; påcchatäm—of they who ask; vitanoti—gives; çam—auspiciousness.

     Çré Garga Muni said: O brähmaëa, you have asked a worthy question. The description of the Lord's transcendental qualities brings auspiciousness to they who hear, speak, and ask.

Text 9

atraivodäharantémam
     itihäsaà purätanam
yasya çravaëa-mätreëa
     mahä-doñaù praçamyati

     atra—here; eva—indeed; udäharanti—they speak; imam—this; itihäsam—history; purätanam—ancient; yasya—of whom; çravaëa—hearing; mätreëa—by merely; mahä—great; doñaù—fault; praçamyati—is pacified.

     Of this they tell the story of an event in ancient history, simply by hearing of which great sin is removed.

Text 10

mithilä-nägare pürvaà
     bahuläçvaù pratäpavän
çré-kåñëa-bhaktaù çäntätmä
     babhüva nirahaìkåtiù

     mithilä-nägare—in Mithilä City; pürvam—in ancient times; bahuläçvaù—Bahuläçva; pratäpavän—powerful; çré-kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; bhaktaù—a devotee; çänta—peaceful; ätmä—at heart; babhüva—was; nirahaìkåtiù—free from false ego.

     In the city of Mithilä in ancient times lived a powerful king named Bahuläçva, who was peaceful at heart, free of false ego, and a great devotee of Lord Kåñëa.

Text 11

ambaräd ägatam dåñövä
     näradaà muni-sattamam
sampüjya cäsane sthäpya
     kåtäïjalir abhäñata

     ambarät—from the sky; ägatam—come; dåñövä—seeing; näradam—Närada; muni-sattamam—the best of sages; sampüjya—worshiping; ca—and; äsane—a seat; sthäpya—giving; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; abhäñata—spoke.

     Seeing the best of sages Närada decend from the sky, (the king) worshiped him, offered him a seat, and with folded hands addressed him.

Text 12

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
yo 'nädir ätmä puruño
     bhagavän prakåteù paraù
kasmät tanuà samädhatta
     tan me brühi mahä-mate

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; yaù—who; anädiù—beginningless; ätmä—self; puruñaù—person; bhagavän—the Lord; prakåteù—matter; paraù—above; kasmät—why?; tanum—a form; samädhatta—accepted; tat—that; me—to me; brühi—please tell; mahä-mate—O wise one.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: O wise one, please tell me why the beginningless Supreme Person, who is beyond the material energy, places His transcendental form in this world?

Text 13

çré-närada uväca 
go-sädhu-devatä-vipra-
     vedänäà rakñaëäya vai
tanuà dhatte hariù säkñäd
     bhagavän ätma-lélayä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; gaù—of the cows; sädhu—devotees; devatä—demigods; vipra—brähmaëas; vedänäm—and Vedas; rakñaëäya—for protection; vai—indeed; tanum—form; dhatte—placed; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ätma—own; lélayä—by pastimes.

     To protect the cows, devotees, demigods, and Vedas, Lord Hari, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, placed His own transcendental form and pastimes in this world.

Text 14

yathä naöaù sva-léläyäà
     mohito na paras tathä
anye dåñövä ca tan-mäyäà
     mumuhus te muhur muhuù

     yathä—as; naöaù—an actor; sva-léläyäm—by His won pastimes; mohitaù—bewildered; na—not; paraù—another; tathä—so; anye—others; dåñövä—seeing; ca—also; tat—His; mäyäm—illusory potency; mumuhuù—become bewildered; te—they; muhuùmuhuù—again and again. 

     As a magician is not bewildered by His own magic tricks, although others may be bewildered, so the Supreme Personality of Godhead is not bewildered by the magic tricks He does with His illusory potency, although others who see them are bewildered again and again.

Text 15

çri-bahuläçva uväca 
katidhä çré-harer viñëor
     avatäro bhavaty alam
sädhünäà rakñaëärthaà hi
     kåpayä vadä mäà prabho

     çri-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; katidhä—how many times; çré-hareù—of Lord Hari; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; avatäraù—incarnation; bhavati—is; alam—greatly; sädhünäm—of the devotees; rakñaëa—protection; artham—for the purpose; hi—indeed; kåpayä—by the mercy; vada—please tell; mäm—me; prabhaù—O lord.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: How often does Lord Viñëu, who removes all that is inauspicious, descend to this world to protect the devotees? O lord, please kindly tell me.

Text 16

çré-närada uväca 
aàçäàço 'àças tathäveçaù
     kalä pürëaù prakathyate
vyäsädyaiç ca småöaù ñañöhaù
     paripürëatamaù svayam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; aàça—of a part; aàçaù—of a part; aàçaù—a part; tathä—then; äveçaù—entrance; kalä—a part; pürëaù—full; prakathyate—is said; vyäsa-ädyaiç—by they who have Vyäsa as their leader; ca—also; småöaù—remembered; ñañöhaù—six; paripürëatamaù—most full; svayam—personally.

     Çré Närada said: In the Småti-çästra the great sages who have Vyäsa as their leader explain that the Lord descends in six kinds of forms: 1. aàçäàça (a part of a part), 2. aàça (a part), 3. äveça (entrance into a jéva), 4. kalä (a full part), 5. pürëa (full), and 6. paripürëatama (most full).

Text 17

aàçäàças tu marécy-ädir
     aàçä brahmädayas tathä
kaläù kapila-kürmädyä
     äveçä bhärgavädayaù

     aàçäàçaù—aàçäàça; tu—indeed; maréci—with Maréci; ädiù—beginning; aàçä—aàçä; brahma—with Brahmä; ädayaù—beginning; tathä—so; kaläù—kalä; kapila—with Kapila; kürma—and Kürma; ädyäù—beginning; äveçäù—aveça; bhärgava—with Paraçuräma; ädayaù—beginning.

     The aàçäàça incarnations begin with Maréci, the aàçä incarnations begin with Brahmä, the kalä incarnations begin with Kapila and Kürmä, and the äveça incarnations begin with Paraçuräma. 

Text 18

pürëo nåsiàho rämaç ca
     çvetadvépädhipo hariù
vaikuëöho 'pi tathä yajïo
     nara-näräyaëaù småtaù

     pürëaù—full; nåsiàhaù—Nåsiàha; rämaù—Räma; ca—and; çvetadvépädhipaù—the ruler of Çvetadvépa; hariù—Hari; vaikuëöhaù—Vaikuëöha; api—also; tathä—then; yajïaù—Yajïa; nara-näräyaëaù—Nara-Näräyaëa; småtaù—decsribed in the Småti.

     The Småti-çästra explains that the pürëa incarnations are 1. Nåsiàha, 2. Räma, 3. Lord Hari, the ruler of Çvetadvépa, 4. Vaikuëöha, 5. Yajïa, and 6. Nara-Näräyaëa.

Text 19

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     goloke dhämni räjate

     paripürëatamaù—paripürëatama; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Lord; svayam—personally; asaìkhya—numberless; brahmäëòa—of universes; patiù—the ruler; goloke dhämni—in the abode of Goloka; räjate—is splendidly manifested.

     The paripürëatama form of the Lord is Çré Kåñëa, who is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself. He is the master of countless universes. He is splendidly manifest in the realm of Goloka.

Text 20

käryädhikäraà kurvantaù
     sad-aàçäç te prakirtitäù
tat-kärya-bhäraà kurvantas
     te 'àçäàçä viditäù prabhoù

     kärya—of work; adhikäram—overseeing; kurvantaù—dooing; sat—of the Lord; aàçäù—aàça incarnations; te—they; prakirtitäù—described; tat—of that; kärya—work; bhäram—the burden; kurvantaù—doing; te—they; aàçäàçä—the aàçäàça incarnations; viditäù—known; prabhoù—of the Lord.

     The aàça incarnations are said to oversee the execution of the Lord's mission (in the world). The aàçäàça incarnations are understood to perform the work of executing those missions.

Text 21

yeñäm antar-gato viñëuù
     käryaà kåtvä vinirgataù
nänäveñävatäräàç ca
     viddhi räjan mahä-mate

     yeñäm—of whom; antaù—within; gataù—gone; viñëuù—Lord Viñëu; käryam—mission; kåtvä—having done; vinirgataù—departs; nänä—various; äveña-avatärän—äveça incarnations; ca—also; viddhi—please know; räjan—O king; mahä-mate—great heart.

     O great soul, O king, please know that in the various äveça incarnations Lord Viñëu enters (a jéva), executes His mission, and then departs.

Text 22

dharmaà vijïäya kåtvä yaù
     punar antaradhéyata
yuge yuge vartamänaù
     so 'vatäraù kalä hareù

     dharmam—religious principles; vijïäya—teaching; kåtvä—having done; yaù—who; punaù—again; antaradhéyata—disappears; yuge yuge—millenium after millenium; vartamänaù—being so; saù—He; avatäraù—incarnation; kalä—kalä; hareù—of Lord Hari.

     Millennium after millennium Lord Hari's kalä incarnations teach and establish the principles of religion, and then disappear.

Text 23

catur-vyüho bhaved yatra
     dåçyante ca rasä nava
ataù paraà ca véryäëi
     sa tu pürëaù prakathyate

     catur-vyühaù—the catur-vyüha incarnations; bhavet—are; yatra—where; dåçyante—are seen; ca—also; rasäù—mellows; nava—nine; ataù—then; param—after; ca—also; véryäëi—prowess; saù—He; tu—indeed; pürëaù—pürëa; prakathyate—is said.

     The pürëa incarnations are said to include the catur-vyüha incarnations. They are said to be the places where heroic powers and the nine rasas are seen.

Text 24

yasmin sarväëi tejäàsi
     viléyante sva-tejasi
taà vadanti pare säkñät
     paripürëatamaà svayam

     yasmin—in which; sarväëi—all; tejäàsi—glories; viléyante—enter; sva-tejasi—in His own glory; tam—Him; vadanti—say; pare—others; säkñät—directly; paripürëatamam—Paripürëatama; svayam—personally.

     Others say that the form of the Lord where all powers and glories enter is His paripürëatama form, the original form of the Lord Himself.

Text 25

pürëasya lakñaëaà yatra
     taà paçyanti påthak påthak
bhävenäpi janäù so 'yaà
     paripürëatamaù svayam

     pürëasya—of the pütëa incarnation; lakñaëam—characteristic; yatra—where; tam—that; paçyanti—see; påthak påthak—specifically; bhävena—by nature; api—also; janäù—people; saù ayam—He; paripürëatamaù—Paripürëatama; svayam—personally.

     The transcendental qualities people see distributed among the Lord's pürëa incarnations are all present in the Lord's original, paripürëatama form.

Text 26

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo nänya eva hi
eka-käryärtham ägatya
     koöi-käryaà cakära ha

     paripürëatamaù—paripürëatama; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; na—not; anyaù—another; eva—certainly; hi—indeed; eka—one; kärya—mission; artham—for the purpose; ägatya—coming; koöi—millions; käryam—mission; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     The Lord's original, paripürëatama form is Çré Kåñëa and no one else. Coming (to this world) to execute one mission, He executes millions of missions.

Text 27

pürëaù puräëaù puruñottamottamaù
     parät paro yaù puruñaù pareçvaraù
svayaà sadänandamayaà kåpäkaraà
     guëäkaraà taà çaraëaà vrajämy aham

     pürëaù—perfect; puräëaù—ancient; puruña—of persons; uttama—of the best; uttamaù—the best; parät—than the greatest; paraù—greater; yaù—who; puruñaù—the Supreme Person; para—of the exalted; éçvaraù—the master; svayam—personally; sat-änandamayam—full of transcendental bliss; kåpä—of mercy; äkaram—mine; guëa—of transcendental virtues; äkaram—a mine; tam—of Him; çaraëam vrajämi aham—I take shelter.

     He is perfect and complete. He is the oldest. He is the most exalted of exalted persons. He is greater than the greatest. He is the Supreme Person. He is the master of the exalted. Of He who is full of bliss, who is jewel-mine of mercy, who is a jewel-mine of transcendental virtues, I take shelter.

Text 28

çré-garga uväca 
tac chrutvä harñito räjä
     romäïcé prema-vihvalaù
pramåçya netre 'çru-pürëe
     näradaà väkyam abravét

     çré-gargaù uväca—Çré Garga said; tat çrutvä—hearing; harçitaù—delighted; räjä—the king; romäïcé—his bodily hairs erect; prema—with love; vihvalaù—overcome; pramåçya—wiping; netre—his eyes; açru—with tears; pürëe—filled; näradam—to Närada; väkyam—a statement; abravét—said.

     Çré Garga said: Hearing this, the king became very happy. Overcome with love and the hairs of his body erect in ecstasy, he wiped his tear-filled eyes and spoke to Närada.

Text 29        

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
paripürëatamah säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo kena hetunä
ägato bhärate khaëòe
     dväravatyäà viräjate

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; paripürëatamaù—paripürëatama; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; kena—by what?; hetunä—reason; ägataù—came; bhärate khaëòe—to theland of Bhärata; dväravatyäm—in Dvärakä; viräjate—is splendidly manifested.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Why did Çré Kåñëa, the original, paripürëatama form of the Lord, come to the land of Bhärata and gloriously appear in Dvärakä?

Text 30

tasya goloka-näthasya
     golokaà dhäma sundaram
karmäëy aparimeyäni
     brühi brahman båhan-mune

     tasya—of Him; goloka-näthasya—the master of Goloka; golokaà dhäma—the realm of Goloka; sundaram—beautiful; karmäëi—activities; aparimeyäni—countless; brühi—please tell; brahman—O brähmaëa; båhat—great; mune—O sage.

     O brähmaëa, O great sage, please describe the countless deeds and beautiful Goloka realm of He who is the master of Goloka.

Text 31

yadä térthäöanaà kurvan
     chata-janma-tapaù-paraù
tadä sat-saìgam etyäçu
     çré-kåñëaà präpnuyän naraù

     yadä—when; tértha—to holy places; äöanam—journey; kurvan—doing; çata—100; janma—births; tapaù—austerities; paraù—intent; tadä—then; sat—of devotees; saìgam—the association; etya—attaining; äçu—quickly; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; präpnuyät—may attain; naraù—a human being.

     When a human being visits many holy places and devotedly performs a hundred years of austerities, he will attain the association of the devotees. Then he will attain Çré Kåñëa Himself.

Text 32

çré-kåñëa-däsasya ca däsa-däsaù
     kadä bhaveyaà manasärdra-cittaù
yo durlabho deva-varaiù parätmä
     sa me kathaà gocara ädi-devaù

     çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; däsasya—of the servant; ca—and; däsa—of the servant; däsaù—the servant; kadä—when?; bhaveyam—will I become; manasa—with thoughts; ardra—melting; cittaù—his heart; yaù—a person who; durlabhaù—rare; deva-varaiù—by the best of demigods; parätmä—the Supreme Person; saù—He; me—of me; katham—whether?; gocare—in the range of perception; ädi—the original; devaù—Lord.

     When, my heart melting with love, will I think "I am the servant of the servants of Çré Kåñëa's servants?" Will the Supreme Personality of Godhead, whom even the greatest demigods cannot attain, appear before me?

Text 33

dhanyas tvaà räja-çärdüla
     çré-kåñëeñöo hari-priyaù
tubhyaà ca darçanaà dätuà
     bhakteço 'trägamiñyati

     dhanyaù—fortunate; tvam—you; räja—of kings; çärdüla—O tiger; çré-kåñëa—Çré Kåñëa; iñöaù—honored; hari—to Lord Hari; priyaù—dear; tubhyam—to you; ca—also; darçanam—sight; dätum—to give; bhakta—of the devotees; éçaù—the Lord; atra—here; ägamiñyati—will come.

     O tiger of kings, you are fortunate. Çré Kåñëa honors you. Lord Hari loves you. The Lord of the devotees will come to reveal Himself to you. 

Text 34

tvaà nåpaà çrutadevaà ca
     dvija-devo janärdanaù
smaraty alaà dvärakäyäm
     aho bhägyaà satäm iha

     tvam—you; nåpam—king; çrutadevam—Çrutadeva; ca—also; dvija—of the brähmaëas; devaù—the Lord; janärdanaù—Kåñëa; smarati—remembers; alam—greatly; dvärakäyäm—in Dvärakä; ahaù—oh; bhägyam—the good fortune; satäm—of the devotees; iha—here.

     Lord Janärdana, the master of the brähmaëas remembers both Çrutadeva and you, the king. Ah, the good fortune of the devotees here in Dvärakä!

Chapter Two
Çré-Goloka-dhäma-nivarëanam
Description of the Abode of Çré Goloka

Text 1

jihväà labdhväpi yaù kåñëam
     kértanéyaà na kértayet
labdhväpi mokña-niçreëià
     sa närohati durmatiù

     jihväm—toungue; labdhvä—attaining; api—also; yaù—who; kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; kértanéyam—to be glorified; na—not; kértayet—glorifies; labdhvä—attaining; api—also; mokña-of liberation; niçreëim—staircase; saù—he; na—not; ärohati—climbs; durmatiù—fool.

     A person who has a tongue but does not glorify glorious Çré Kåñëa is a fool. Even if he somehow approaches the staircase to liberation, he cannot climb it.

Text 2

atha te sampravakñyämi
     çré-kåñëägamanaà bhuvi
asmin väräha-kalpe vai
     yad bhütaà tac chåëu prabho

     atha—now; te—to you; sampravakñyämi—I will speak; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; ägamanam—the arrival; bhuvi—on the earth; asmin—this; väräha-kalpe—in the Varäha-kalpa; vai—indeed; yat—what; bhütam—was; tat—that; çåëu—please hear; prabhaù—O lord.

     Now I will describe to you Çré Kåñëa's coming to this earth during the Varäha-kalpa. O lord, please hear what happened. 

Texts 3 and 4

purä dänava-daityänäm
     naräëäà khalu bhubhujäm
bhüri-bhära-samäkräntä
     påthvé go-rüpa-dhäriëé

anäthavad rudantéva
     vedayanté nija-vyatham
kampayanté nijaà gätraà
     brahmäëaà çaraëaà gatä

     purä—formerly; dänava—of the dänavas; daityänäm—and daityas; naräëäm—of the humans; khalu—indeed; bhubhujäm—of the kings; bhüri—great; bhära—with a burden; samäkräntä—overcome; påthvé—the earth; gaù—of a cow; rüpa—in the form; dhäriëé—manifesting; anätha—without a protector; vat—like; rudanté—crying; iva—like; vedayanté—describing; nija—own; vyatham—distress; kampayanté—making tremble; nijam—own; gätram—body; brahmäëam—to Lord Brahmä; çaraëam—shelter; gatä—went.

     In ancient times the earth, overcome with a burden of many daityas, dänavas, and human kings, assumed the form of a cow and, helplessly crying, trembling, and describing her troubles, took shelter of the demigod Brahmä.

Text 5

brahmäthäçvasya täà sadyaù
     sarva-deva-gaëair våtaù
çaìkareëa samaà prägäd
     vaikuëöhaà mandiraà hareù

     brahmä—Brahmä; atha—then; äçvasya—comforting; täm—her; sadyaù—at once; sarva—all; deva—of the demigods; gaëaiù—by multitudes; våtaù—surrounded; çaìkareëa—Çiva; samam—with; prägät—went; vaikuëöham—to Vaikuëöha; mandiram—the palace; hareù—of Lord Hari.

     Brahmä comforted her and then, accompanied by Çiva and the demigods, went to Lord Hari's palace in Vaikuëöha.

Text 6

natvä catur-bhujaà viñëuà
     sväbhipräyaà jagäda ha
athodvignaà deva-gaëaà
     çré-näthaù präha taà vidhim

     natvä—bowing down; catur-bhujam—with four arms; viñëum—to Lord Viñëu; sva—own; abhipräyam—intention; jagäda—explained; ha—certainly; atha—then; udvignam—distressed; deva-gaëam—to the demigods; çré-näthaù—the husband of the goddess of fortune; präha—spoke; tam—to him; vidhim—Brahmä.

     Brahmä bowed down before four-armed Lord Viñëu and explained why he had come. Then He who is the husband of the goddess of fortune spoke to Brahmä and the troubled demigods.

Text 7

çré-bhagavän uväca 
kåñëaà svayaà vigaëitäëòa-patià pareçaà
     säkñäd akhaëòam atidevam atéva-lélam
käryaà kadäpi na bhaviñyati yaà vinä hi
     gacchäçu tasya viñadaà padam avyayaà tvam

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; svayam—Himself; vigaëita—countless; aëòa—of universes; patim—the master; para—of others; éçam—the master; säkñät—directly; akhaëòam—unbroken; atidevam—beyond the demigods; atéva-lélam—who enjoys transcendental pastimes; käryam—mission; kadäpi—sometimes; na—not; bhaviñyati—will be; yam—whom; vinä—without; hi—not; gaccha—go; äçu—at once; tasya—of Him; viñadam—pure; padam—abode; avyayam—eternal; tvam—you.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Without Kåñëa, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of countless universes, perfect, above the demigods, and the enjoyer of transcendental pastimes, this problem will not be solved. You should go to His eternal and effulgent abode at once.

Text 8

çré-brahmoväca 
tvattaù paraà na jänämi
     paripürëatamaà svayam
yadi yo 'nyas tasya säkñäl
     lokaà darçaya naù prabho

     çré-brahmä uväca—Çré Brahmä said; tvattaù—than You; param—greater; na—not; jänämi—I know; paripürëatamam—most perfect; svayam—personally; yadi—if; yaù—who; anyaù—another; tasya—of Him; säkñät—directly; lokam—the world; darçaya—please show; naù—us; prabhaù—O Lord.

     Çré Brahmä said: I do not know anyone greater and more perfect than You. If there is such a person, please show Him to us, O Lord.

Texts 9 and 10

çré-närada uväca 
ity ukto 'pi hariù pürëaù
     sarvair deva-gaëaiù saha
padavéà darçayäm äsa
     brahmäëòa-çikharopari

väma-pädäìguñöha-nakha-
     bhinna-brahmäëòa-mañöake
çré-vämanasya vivare
     brahma-drava-samäkule

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; uktaù—addressed; api—indeed; hariù—Lord Hari; pürëaù—perfect; sarvaiù—all; deva-gaëaiù—the demigods; saha—with; padavém—the path; darçayäm äsa—revealed; brahmäëòa—the universes; çikhara-upari—above; väma—left; pädäìguñöha-nakha—toenail; bhinna—broken; brahmäëòa—of the universes; mañöake—on the head çré-vämanasya—of Çré Vämana; vivare—in the hole; brahma-drava—with the spiritual river; samäkule—filled.

     Çré Närada said: When this was said, perfect Lord Hari showed all the demigods a spiritual river path flowing through the hole Çré Vämana made in the universe with His toenail.

Text 11

jala-yänena märgeëa
     bahis te niryayuù suräù
kaliìga-bimba-vac cedaà
     brahmäëòaà dadåçus tv adhaù

     jala-yänena—on a boat; märgeëa—on the path; bahiù—outside; te—they; niryayuù—went; suräù—the demigods; kaliìga-bimba-vat—like a tiny kuöaja seed; ca—also; idam—this; brahmäëòam—universe; dadåçuù—saw; tu—indeed; adhaù—below.

     Going by boat on this path, the demigods left the universe. They saw the universe was like a round kuöaja fruit far below.

Text 12

indräyaëa-phalänéva
     luöhanty anyäni vai jale
vilokya vismitäù sarve
     babhuvus cakitä iva

     indräyaëa-phaläni—kuöaja fruits; iva—like; luöhanti—moving to and fro; anyäni—others; vai—certainly; jale—in the water; vilokya—seeing; vismitäù—astonished; sarve—all; babhuvuù—became; cakitäù—frightened; iva—as if.

     When the saw the other universes were like many kuöaja fruits bobbing in the water (of the Käraëa Ocean), they all became frightened and surprised.

Text 13

kotiço yojanordhvaà vai
     puräëäm añöakaà gatäù
divya-prakara-ratnädi-
     druma-vånda-manoharam

     kotiçaù—millions; yojana—or yojanas; ürdhvam—above; vai—certainly; puräëäm—of cities; añöakam—a group of eight; gatäù—went; divya-prakara—glistening; ratna—jewels; ädi—beginning with; druma—of trees; vånda—groups; manoharam—charming.

     Millions of yojanas higher they came to eight cities charming with glistening jewel-forest groves.

Text 14

tad-ürdhvaà dadåçur devä
     virajäyäs taöaà çubham
taraìgitaà kñauma-çubhraà
     sopänair bhäskaraà param

     tad-ürdhvam—above them; dadåçuù—saw; deväù—the demigods; virajäyäù—of the Virajä river; taöam—the shore; çubham—glorious; taraìgitam—with waves; kñauma—silk; çubhram—white; sopänaiù—with steps; bhäskaram—splendid; param—greatly.

     Higher still the demigods saw the Virajä river's splendid shore, which was splashed by waves white as silk and glorious with many staircases.

Text 15

taà dåñövä pracalantas te
     tat puraà jagmur uttamam
asaìkhya-koöi-martaëòa-
     jyotiñäà maëòalaà mahat

     tam—that; dåñövä—having seen; pracalantaù—going; te—they; tat puram—to that city; jagmuù—went; uttamam—great; asaìkhya—countless; koöi—millions; martaëòa—of suns; jyotiñäm—of the splendor; maëòalam—circle; mahat—great.

     After seeing this, they entered a city splendid as countless millions of suns.

Text 16

dåñövä pratäditäkñäs te
     tejasä dharñitäù sthitäù
namaskåtvätha tat-tejo
     dadhyau viñëv-äjïayä vidhiù

     dåñövä—having seen; pratädita—struck; akñäù—eyes; te—they; tejasä—by the splendor; dharñitäù—overcome; namaskåtvä—bowing down; atha—then; tat-tejaù—that splendor; dadhyau—meditated; viñëu—of Lord Viñëu; äjïayä—by the order; vidhiù—Brahmä.

     As they looked at its splendor they became overpowered, their eyes struck by the light. By Lord Viñëu's order, Brahmä offered obeisances to that light and meditated on it. 

Text 17

taj-jyotir-maëòale 'paçyat
     säkaraà dhäma çäntidam
tasmin mahädbhutaà dérghaà
     måëäla-dhavalaà param
sahasra-vadanaà çeñaà
     dåñövä nemuù suräs tataù

     taj-jyotir-maëòale—in the circle of light; apaçyat—he saw; säkaram—having a form; dhäma—an abode; çäntidam—peaceful; tasmin—there; mahä—very; adbhutam—wonderful; dérgham—long; måëäla—lotus stem; dhavalam—white; param—transcendental; sahasra—a thousand; vadanam—faces; çeñam—Lord Çeña; dåñövä—seeing; nemuù—offered obeisances; suräù—the demigods; tataù—then.

     In that circle of light he saw the form of a peaceful transcendental realm. When the demigods saw in that realm the very wonderful white lotus stem of thousand-faced Lord Çeña, they bowed down to offer respects to Him.

Texts 18 and 19

tasyotsaìge mahä-loko
     goloko loka-vanditaù
yatra kälaù kalayatäm
     éçvaro dhäma-mäninäm

räjan na prabhaven mäyä
     manaç cittaà matir hy aham
na vikäro viçaty eva
     na mahäàç ca guëäù kutaù

     tasya—of Him; utsaìge—on the head; mahä—great; lokaù—realm; golokaù—Goloka; loka—by all the worlds; vanditaù—offered obeisances; yatra—where; kälaù—time; kalayatäm—sees; éçvaraù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dhäma—abodes; mäninäm—with glory; räjan—O king; na—not; prabhavet-may prevail; mäyä—illusion; manaù—mind; cittam—heart; matiù—intelligence; hi—indeed; aham—false ego; na—not; vikäraù—change; viçati—enters; eva—certainly; na—not; mahän—Mahat-tattva; ca—and; guëäù—the modess of nature; kutaù—from where?

     On His head was the transcendental realm of Goloka, which is worshiped by all the worlds, and which is a realm where time, the conqueror of the proud, does not prevail, and where illusion, the material mind, heart, intelligence, and ego, material transformations and the mahat-tattva do enter. How can the modes of nature enter there?

Text 20

tatra kandarpa-lävaëyäù
     çyämasundara-vigrahäù
dväri gantuà cäbhyuditä
     nyañedhan kåñëa-pärñadäù

     tatra—there; kandarpa—of Kämadeva; lävaëyaù—handsomeness; çyämasundara-vigrahaù—beautiful forms; dväri—at the door; gantum—to go; ca—also; abhyuditäù—standing; nyañedhan—stayed; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; pärñadäù—the asssociates.

     Their forms very beautiful, more beautiful than Kämadeva himself, Çré Kåñëa's associates stood at the entrance.

Text 21

çré-devä ücuù 
loka-pälä vayaà sarve
     brahma-viñëu-maheçvaräù
çré-kåñëa-darçanärthäya
     çakrädyä ägatä iha

     çré-deväù ücuù—the demigods said; loka-päläù—protectors of the planets; vayam—we; sarve—all; brahma-viñëu-maheçvaräù—Brahmä, Viñëu, and Çiva; çré-kåñëa—Çré Kåñëa; darçana—seeing; arthäya—for the purpose; çakra—by Indra; ädyäù—headed;' ägatäù—come; iha—here.

     The demigods said: We, Brahmä, Viñëu, Çiva, all the protectors of the planets, and the demigods headed by Indra, have come here to see Çré Kåñëa. 

Text 22

çré-närada uväca 
tac chrutvä tad-abhipräyaà
     çré-kåñëäya sakhé-janäù
ücur deva-pratéhäräù
     gatvä cäntaù-puraà param

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tat—that; çrutvä—hearing; tad-abhipräyam—the purpose; çré-kåñëäya—for Çré Kåñëa; sakhé-janäù—friends; ücuù—said; deva—demigods; pratiharäù—doorkeepers; gatvä—having gone; ca—also; antaù-puram—inside the palace; param—then.

     Çré Närada said: Having heard this, the doorkeepers, girls who were the Lord's friends, went inside the palace and told Çré Kåñëa of (the visitors') wish.

Text 23

tadä vinirgatä käcic
     chatacandränanä sakhé
pétämbarä vetra-hastä
     säpåcchad väïhitaà surän

     tadä—then; vinirgatä—came out; käcit—a girl; çatacandränanä—Çatacandränanä; sakhé—friend; péta—yellow; ambarä—garments; vetra—a stick; hastä—in hand; sä—she; apåcchat—asked; väïhitam—wished; surän—demigods.

     Then a girl named Çatacandränanä, who was dressed in yellow garments, who held a stick in her hand, and who was Çré Kåñëa's friend, came from inside and asked the demigods what they wished.

Text 24

çré-çatacandränanoväca 
kasyäëòasyädhipä devä
     yüyaà sarve samägatäù
vadatäçu gamiñyämi
     tasmai bhagavate hy aham

     çré-çatacandränanä uväca—Çré Çatacandränanä said; kasya—of what?;äëòasya—universe; adhipäù—kings; deväù—O demigods; yüyam—you; sarve—all; samägatäù—come; vadata—please tell; äçu—at once; gamiñyämi—I will go; tasmai—to Him; bhagavate—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hi—indeed; aham—I.

     Çré Çatacandränanä said: All you demigods who have come here, of what universe are you the kings? Tell me and I shall go to the Lord at once.

Text 25

çré-devä ücuù 
aho aëòäny utänyäni
     näsmäbhir darçitäni ca
ekam aëòaà prajänémo
     'tho 'paraà nästi naù çubhe

     çré-deväù ücuù—the demgods said; ahaù—Oh; aëòäni—universes; uta—certainly; anyäni—other; na—not; asmäbhiù—by us; darçitäni—shown; ca—and; ekam—one; aëòam—universe; prajänémaù—we know; athaù—then; aparam—another; na—not; asti—is; naù—of us; çubhe—O beautiful one.

     The demigods said: We have not seen any other universes. We know only one universe. O beautiful one, there is no universe beyond ours.

Text 26

çré-çatacandränanoväca 
brahmadeva luöhantéha
     koöiço hy aëòa-räçayaù
teñäà yüyam yathä deväs
     tathäëòe 'ëòe påthak påthak

     çré-çatacandränanoväca—Çré Çatacandränanä said; brahmadeva—O demigod Brahmä; luöhanti-moving about; iha—here; koöiçaù—millions; hi—indeed; aëòa-räçayaù—universes; teñäm—of them; yüyam—you; yathä—as; deväù—demigods; tathä—so; aëòe—in an universe; aëòe—in an universe; påthak påthak—variously.

     Çré Çatacandränanä said: O demigod Brahmä, millions of universes bob up and down (in the Käraëa ocean). As you are demigods in one universe, so in each each universe there are many demigods.

Text 27

näma-grämaà na jänétha
     kadä vätra samägatäù
jaòa-buddhyä prahåñyadhve
     gåhän näpi vinirgatäù

     näma-grämam—names; na—not; jänétha—you know; kadä—when?; vä—or; atra—here; samägatäù—come; jaòa—stunted; buddhyä—with intelligence; prahåñyadhve—you are happy; gåhän—homes; na—not; api—even; vinirgatäù—having left.

     You do not even know their names. When did you even meet them? Never leaving your own homes, you remain happy with stunted minds.

Text 28

brahmäëòam ekaà jänanti
     yatra jätäs tathä janäù
mañakä ca yathäntaù-sthä
     auòumbara-phaleñu vai

     brahmäëòam—universe; ekam—one; jänanti—know; yatra—where; jätäù—born; tathä—so; janäù—people; mañakäù—mosquitoes; ca—also; yathä—as; antaù—inside; sthäù—staying; auòumbara-phaleñu—in uòumbara fruits; vai—indeed.

     You know one universe. Living entities are born in many universes, like mosquitoes in many uòumbara fruits.

Text 29

çré-närada uväca 
upahäsyaà gatä devä
     itthaà tüñëéà sthitäù punaù
cakitän iva tän dåñövä
     viñëur vacanam abravét

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; upahäsyam—the object of jokes; gatäù—attained; deväù—the demigods; ittham—thus; tüñëém—silent; sthitäù—stood; punaù—again; cakitän—frightened; iva—as if; tän—them; dåñövä—seeing; viñëuù—Lord Viñëu; vacanam—words; abravét—said.

     Çré Närada said: Mocked in this way, the demigods were silent. Seeing them intimidated, Lord Viñëu spoke some words. 

Text 30

çré-viñëur uväca 
yasminn aëòe påñëigarbho
     'vatäro 'bhüt sanätanaù
trivikrama-nakhodbhinne
     tasminn aëòe sthitä vayam

     çré-viñëuù uväca—Çré Viñëu said; yasmin—in which; aëòe—universe; påñëigarbhaù—Påçnigarbha; avatäraù—incarnation; abhüt—was; sanätanaù—eternal; trivikrama—of Lord Trivikrama; nakha—by the nails; udbhinne—broken; tasmin—in that; aëòe—universe; sthitäù—situated; vayam—we.

     Çré Viñëu said: We stay in the universe where eternal Lord Påçnigarbha descended, the universe broken by Lord Trivikrama's toenail.

Text 31

çré-närada uväca 
tac chrutvä taà ca saàçläghya
     çéghram antaù-puraà gatä
punar ägatya devebhyo
     'py äjïäm dattvä gatäù puram

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tat—that; çrutvä—hearing; tam—Him; ca—also; saàçläghya—praising; çéghram—for a long time; antaù-puram—within the palace; gatä—gone; punaù—again; ägatya—returning; devebhyaù—to the demigods; api—also; äjïäm—permission; dattvä—giving; gatäù—went; puram—to the palace.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing this, she praised Him for a long time, again entered the palace, returned, and gave the demigods permission (to enter. Then the demigods) entered the palace.

Texts 32-34

atha deva-gaëäù sarve
     golokam dadåçuù param
tatra govardhano näma
     giri-räjo viräjate

vasanta-mälinébhiç ca
     gopébhir go-gaëair våtaù
kalpa-våkña-latä-saìghai
     räsa-maëòala-maëòitaù

yatra kåñëä nadé çyämä
     tolikä-koöi-maëòitä
vaidurya-kåta-sopänä
     svacchanda-gatir uttamä

     atha—then; deva-gaëäù—the demigods; sarve—all; golokam—Goloka; dadåçuù—saw; param—then; tatra—there; govardhanaù—Govardhana; näma—named; giri—of mountains; räjaù—the king; viräjate—is splendidly manifest; vasanta—spring; mälinébhiù—with garlands; ca—also; gopébhiù—by gopés; go-gaëaiù—by cows; våtaù—surrounded; kalpa-våkña—kalpa-våkña trees; latä—lalpa-latä vines; saìghaiù—with multitudes; räsa—of the räsa dance; maëòala—with the circle; maëòitaù—decorated; yatra—where; kåñëä—the Yamunä; nadé-river; çyämä—dark; tolikä—gazebos; koöi—millions; maëòitä—decorated; vaidurya—with lapis lazuli; kåta—made; sopänä—steps; svacchanda—meandering; gatiù—paths; uttamä—supreme.

     Then the demigods saw Goloka, where the king of mountains, named Govardhana, which was filled with many cows and with gopés garlanded with forest flowers, and which was decorated with räsa-dance circles, is splendidly manifest, where the dark Yamunä river meandered as it wished, (its shores) made with lapis lazuli steps and decorated with millions of gazebos, . . .

Text 35

våndävanaà bhräjamänaà
     divya-druma-latäkulam
citra-pakñi-madhuvratair
     vaàçé-vaöa-viräjitam

     våndävanam—Våndävana; bhräjamänam—shining; divya—splendid; druma—trees; latä—and vines; äkulam—filled; citra—colorful; pakñi—birds; madhuvrataiù—with bees; vaàçé—of the flute; vaöa—the banyan tree; viräjitam—splendid.

 . . . where the forest of Våndävana, filled with splendid trees and vines, and glorious with bees, colorful birds, and the banyan tree where (Kåñëa) played the flute, was splendidly manifested, . . .

Text 36

puline çétalo vayur
     manda-gämé vahaty alam
sahasra-dala-padmänäà
     rajo vikñepayan muhuù

     puline—on the shore; çétalaù—cool; vayuù—breeze; manda—slowly; gämé—moving; vahati—blows; alam—greatly; sahasra—thousand; dala—petal; padmänäm—of lotuses; rajaù—pollen; vikñepayan—tossing; muhuù—again and again.

 . . . where, carrying the pollen of many thousand-petal lotuses, a cool breeze gently blew to the shore, . . .

Text 37

madhye nija-nikuïjo 'sti
     dva-triàçad-vana-samyutaù
prakara-parikhä-yuto
     'ruëäkñaya-vaöäjiraù

     madhye—in the midst; nija—own; nikuïjaù—forest grove; asti—is; dva-triàçat—32; vana—forests; samyutaù—endowed; präkära—with a wall; parikhä—and moat; yutaù—endowed; aruëa—red; akñaya—eternal; vaöa—banyan trees; ajiraù—courtyard.

 . . . where in the middle is the Lord's personal woodland of 32 forests, which is surrounded by walls and moats and endowed with a reddish courtyard of eternal banyan trees, . . .

Text 38

saptadhä padmarägägrä-
     jira-kuòya-vibhüñitaù
koöéndu-maëòaläkärair
     vitänair gulikä-dyutiù

     saptadhä—seven; padmaräga—ruby; agra—endge; ajira—courtyards; kuòya—walls; vibhüñitaù—decorated; koöi—millions; indu—of moons; maëòala—circle; äkäraiù—with forms; vitänaiù—with canopies; gulikä—with pearls; dyutiù—splendor.

 . . . a courtyard decorated with seven walls made of rubies and with a glory of pearls from awnings like many millions of moons, . . .

Text 39

patat-patäkair divyäbhaiù
     puñpa-mandira-vartmabhiù
jäta-bhramara-saìgéto
     matta-barhi-pika-svanaù

     patat—moving; patäkaiù—with flags; divyäbhaiù—glorious; puñpa—of flowers; mandira—palaces; vartmabhiù—with pathways; jäta—born; bhramara—of bees; saìgétaù—song; matta—maddened; barhi—peacocks; pika—and cuckoos; svanaù—the sound.

 . . . .where there were splendid flags moving (in the breeze), pathways that were flower palaces, and the singing of many bees and many maddened peacocks and cuckoos, . . .

Text 40

bälärka-kuëòala-dharäù
     çata-candra-prabhäù striyaù
svacchanda-gatayo ratnaiù
     paçyantyaù sundaraà mukham

ratnäjireñu dhävantyo
     hära-keyüra-bhüñitäù
kväëan-nüpura-kiìkinyas
     cüòä-maëi-viräjitäù

     bälärka—rising sun; kuëòala—earrings; dharäù—wearing; çata—hundred; candra—moons; prabhäù—splendor; striyaù—women; svacchanda—as they wished; gatayaù—going; ratnaiù—with jewels; paçyantyaù—seeing; sundaram—beautiful; mukham—face; ratna—jewel; ajireñu—in courtyards; dhävantyaù—running; hära—necklaces; keyüra—bracelets; bhüñitäù—decorated; kväëat—tinkling; nüpura-kiìkinyaù—anklets; cüòä—crown; maëi—jewels; viräjitäù—glorious.

 . . . where there were many women effulgent as a hundred moons, wearing sunrise earrings, walking about as they wished, noticing their beautiful faces reflected in the jewels, running in the jewel courtyard, decorated with necklaces, bracelets, and tinkling ankle-bells, and splendid with jewels in their hair, . . .

Text 42

koöiçaù koöiço gävo
     dväri dväri manoharäù
çveta-parvata-saìkäçä
     divya-bhüñaëa-bhüñitäù

     koöiçaù—millions; koöiçaù—and millions; gävaù—cows; dväri—at doorway; dväri—after doorway; manoharäù—beautiful; çveta—white; parvata—mountains; saìkäçäù—glory; divya—splendid; bhüñaëa—with ornaments; bhüñitäù—decorated.

 . . . where at door after door there were millions of millions of beautiful cows glorious as white mountains, decorated with glittering ornaments, . . .

Text 43

payasvinyas taruëyaç ca
     çéla-rüpa-guëair yutaù
sa-vatsäù péta-pucchäç ca
     vrajantyo bhävya-mürtikäù

     payasvinyaù—full of milk; taruëyaù—young; ca—also; çéla—good character; rüpa—beauty; guëaiù—and virtues; yutaù—endowed; sa—with; vatsäù—calves; péta—yellow; pucchäù—tails; ca—also; vrajantyaù—going; bhävya—of happiness; mürtikäù—forms.

 . . . young, full of milk, endowed with good character, virtues, and beauty, their tails yellow, personifications of happiness as they walked about with their calves, . . .

Text 44

ghaëöa-maïjéra-samräväù
     kiìkiné-jäla-maëòitäù
hema-çåìgyo hema-tulya-
     hära-mälä-sphurat-prabhäù

     ghaëöa—of bells; maïjéra—and anklets; samräväù—the sound; kiìkiné—with small bells; jäla—multitude; maëòitäù—decorated; hema—golden; çåìgyaù—horns; hema—gold; tulya—equal; hära—necklaces; mälä—garlands; sphurat-prabhäù—splendid.

 . . . decorated with a network of tiny bells, their bells and anklets tinkling, splendid with golden necklaces and flower garlands, their horns of gold, . . . 

Text 45

päöalä haritäs tamräù
     pétäù çyämä vicitritäù
dhümräù kokila-varëäç ca
     yatra gävas tv anekadhä

     paöaläù—pink; haritäù—green; tamräù—green; pétäù—yellow; çyämäù—black; vicitritäù—many wonderful colors; dhümräù—the color of smoke; kokila—of cuckoos; varëäç—the color; ca—and; yatra—where; gävaù—cows; tu—indeed; anekadhä—many.

 . . . many different wonderful colors, some pink, some green, some red, some yellow, some black, some smokey, and some the color of cuckoos, . . .

Text 46

samudravad-dugdhadäç ca
     taruëé-kara-cihnikäù
kuraìgavad-vilaìghadbhir
     govatsair maëòitäù çubhäù

     samudravat—with an ocean; dugdha—milk; däù—giving; ca—also; taruëé—youth; kara—making; cihnikäù—signs; kuraìgavat—like a deer; vilaìghadbhiù—with jumping; govatsaiù—with calves; maëòitäù—decorated; çubhäù—beautiful.

 . . . giving oceans of milk, marked with the signs of youth, leaping like deer, beautiful, decorated with many calves, . . .

Text 47

itas tataç calantaç ca
     go-ganeñu mahä-våñäù
dérgha-kandhara-çåìgäòhyä
     yatra dharma-dhurandharäù

     itas tataù—here and there; calantaù—wandering; ca—also; go-ganeñu—among the cows; mahä—great; våñäù—bulls; dérgha—long; kandhara—necks; çåìga—horns; aòhyäù—opulent; yatra—where; dharma-dhurandharäù—great piety.

 . . . where, wandering among the cows were many great bulls opulent with long horns and necks and very pious, . . .

Text 48

gopälä vetra-hastäç ca
     çyämä vaàçé-dharäù paräù
kåñëa-léläà pragäyanto
     rägair madana-mohanaiù

     gopäläù—cowherd boys; vetra—stick; hastäù—hand; ca—also; çyämäù—dark; vaàçé—flutes; dharäù—holding; paräù—transcendental; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; léläm—pastimes; pragäyantaù—singing; rägaiù—with melodies; madana-mohanaiù—charming.

 . . . where were many handsome cowherd boys, carrying flutes, holding sticks in their hands, and with charming melodies singing of Kåñëa's pastimes.

Text 49     

itthaà nija-nikuïjaà taà
     natvä madhye gatäù suräù
jyotiñäà maëòalaà padmaà
     sahasra-dala-çobhitam

     ittham—thus; nija—own; nikuïjam—forest grove; tam—that; natvä—bowing down; madhye—in the midst; gatäù—gone; suräù—the demigods; jyotiñäm—of light; maëòalam—a circle; padmam—a lotus; sahasra—thousand; dala—petals; çobhitam—beautiful.

     Bowing down to offer respects, the demigods entered the Lord's personal forest grove, which was a thousand-petal lotus that was a great circle of light.

Text 50

tad-ürdhvaà ñoòaça-dalaà
     tato 'ñöa-dala-paìkajam
tasyopari sphurad dérghaà
     sopäna-traya-maëòitam

     tad-ürdhvam—above that; ñoòaça—16; dalam—petals; tataù—then; añöa—8; dala—petal; paìkajam—lotus; tasya—that; upari—above; sphurat—glistening; dérgham—long; sopäna—staircases; traya—three; maëòitam—decorated.

     Above that was a sixteen-petal lotus, above that an eight-petal lotus, and above that a long path decorated with three stairways.

Text 51

siàhäsanaà paraà divyaà
     kaustubhaiù khacitaà çubhaiù
dadåçur devatäù sarväù
     çré-kåñëaà rädhayä yutam

     siàhäsanam—throne; param—great; divyam—splendid; kaustubhaiù—with kaustubha jewels; khacitam—studded; çubhaiù—beautiful; dadåçuù—saw; devatäù—the demigods; sarväù—all; çré-kåñëam—Lord Kåñëa; rädhayä—Rädhä; yutam—with.

     There all the demigods saw, sitting on a splendid throne studded with beautiful kaustubha jewels, and accompanied by Çré Rädhä, Çré Kåñëa, . . .

Text 52

divyair añöa-sakhé-saìghair
     mohiny-ädibhir anvitam
çrédämädyaiù sevyamänam
     añöa-gopäla-maëòalaiù

     divyaiù—splendid; añöa—eight; sakhé—of friends; saìghaiù—multitudes; mohiné-ädibhiù—headed by Mohiné; anvitam—with; çrédäma-ädyaiù—headed by Çrédämä; sevyamänam—being served; añöa—eight; gopäla—cowherd boys; maëòalaiù—served.

 . . . who was accompanied by eight splendid gopé friends headed by Mohiné and served by eight gopas headed by Çrédämä, . . .

Text 53

haàsäbhair vyajanändola-
     cämarair vajra-muñöibhiù
koöi-candra-pratékäçaiù
     sevitaà chatra-koöibhiù

     haàù—swans; äbhaiù—like; vyajana-andola-cämaraiù—with cämaras; vajra—diamond; muñöibhiù—handles; koöi—millions; candra—of moons; pratékäçaiù—splendid; sevitam—served; chatra—parasols; koöibhiù—with millions.

 . . . who was served with diamond-handled cämaras glorious as swans and millions of parasols like millions of moons, . . .

Text 54

çré-rädhikälaìkåta-väma-bähuà
     svacchanda-vakré-kåta-dakñiëäìghrim
vaàçé-dharaà sundara-manda-häsaà
     bhrü-maëòalämohita-käma-räçim

     çré-rädhikä—by Çré Rädhä; alaìkåta—decorated; väma—left; bähum—arm; svacchanda—as He wished; vakri-kåta—bent; dakñiëa—right; aìghrim—foot; vaàçé—a flute; dharam—holding; sundara—handsome; manda—gentle; häsam—smile; bhrü—of eyebrows; maëòala—circle; ämohita—enchanted; käma—of Kämadevas; räçim—multitude.

 . . . whose left arm was decorated by Çré Rädhikä, whose right foot was bent as He wished, who held a flute, who smiled gently and gracefully, whose eyebrows enchanted hosts of Kämadevas, . . .

Text 55

ghana-prabhaà padma-daläyutekñaëaà
     pralamba-bähuà bahu-péta-väsasam
våndävanonmatta-milinda-çabdair
     viräjitaà çré-vana-mälayä harim

     ghana—of a raincloud; prabham—splendor; padma—lotus; dala—petal; äyuta—large; ékñaëam—eyes; pralamba—long; bähum—arms; bahu—great; péta—yellow; väsasam—garments; våndävana—in Våndävan; unmatta—maddened; milinda—of bees; çabdaiù—by the sounds; viräjitam—splendid; çré—beautiful; vana—forest; mälayä—with a garland; harim—Çré Kåñëa.

 . . . who was splendid as a raincloud, whose large eyes were lotus petals, whose arms were long, who wore great yellow garments, who was splendid with a beautiful forest garland filled with the sounds of intoxicated bees.

Text 56

käïé-kalä-kaìkana-nüpura-dyutià
     lasan-manohäri-mahojjvala-smitam
çrévatsa-ratnottama-kuntala-çriyaà
     kiréöa-häräìgada-kuëòala-tviñam

     käïé-kalä—belt; kaìkana—bracelets; nüpura—anklets; dyutim—splendor; lasat—glistening; manohäri—charming; mahä—very; ujjvala—splendid; smitam—smile; çrévatsa—Çrévatsa; ratna—jewel; uttama—above; kuntala—curly hair; çriyam—handsomeness; kiréöa—crown; hära—necklace; aìgada—armlets; kuëòala—earrings; tviñam—glory.

 . . . who was splendid with bracekets, anklets, and a belt, who had a glittering, charming, very glorious smile, who was handsome with the mark of Çrévatsa and with a jewel placed in His curly locks of hair, and who was glorious with a crown, necklace, armlets, and earrings.

Text 57

dåñövä tam änanda-samudra-magna-vat
     praharñitäç cäçru-kaläkulekñaëäù
tataù suräù präïjalayo natänanä
     nemur murärià puruñaà paräyaëam

     dåñövä—seeing; tam—Him; änanda—of bliss; samudra—in an ocean; magna—plunged; vat—like; praharñitäç—delighted; ca—and; açru-kalä—with tears; äkula—filled; ékñaëäù—eyes; tataù—then; suräù—the demigods; präïjalayaù—with folded hands; nata—bowed; änanäù—heads; nemuù—offered obeisances; murärim—to Çré Kåñëa; puruñaà paräyaëam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     Very happy, as if plunged in an ocean of bliss, by seeing Him, and their eyes now filled with tears, with folded hands and bowed heads the demigods offered their respectful obeisances to Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Chapter Three
Agamanodyoga-varëanam
Description of the Lord's Appearance

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca  
mune deva mahätmänaà
     kåñëam dåñövä parät param
agre kià cakrire tatra
     tan me brühi kåpäà kuru

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; mune—O sage; deva—O lord; mahätmänaà—exalted; kåñëam—Kåñëa; dåñövä—seeing; parät—than the greatest; param—greater; agre—in the presence; kià—what?; cakrire—did; tatra—there; tat—that; me—to me; brühi—tell; kåpäà—mercy; kuru—do.

     Çré Bahuläçva said; O sage, O lord, what did they do when they saw the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa, who is greater than the greatest? Please be kind and tell me.

Text 2

çré-närada uväca 
sarveñaà paçyataà teñäà
     vaikuëöho 'pi haris tataù
utthäyäñöa-bhujaù säkñäl
     léno 'bhüt kåñëa-vigrahe

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; sarveñam—of all; paçyataà—looking; teñäà—of them; vaikuëöho—Kåñëa; api—also; haris—Lord Hari; tataù—then; utthäya—rising; äñöa-bhujaù—with eight arms; säkñät—directly; léno—entered; abhüt—became; kåñëa-vigrahe—in Kåñëa's form.

     Çré Närada said: As everyone looked on, Lord Hari, the eight-armed master of Vaikuëöha, appeared and merged in the the body of Lord Kåñëa.

Text 3

tadaiva cägataù pürëo
     nåsiàhas cäëòa-vikramaù
koöi-sürya-pratékäço
     léno 'bhüt kåñëa-tejasi

tadä—then; eva—indeed; ca—also; ägataù—came; pürëo—perfect; nåsiàhas—Nåsiàha; cäëòa-vikramaù—ferocious; koöi-sürya-pratékäço—splendid as millions of suns; léno—merged; abhüt—became; kåñëa-tejasi—in Lord Kåñëa's effulgence.

     The perfect, ferocious, and powerful Lord Nrsiàha, who was effulgent as millions of suns, merged in Lord Kåñëa's effulgence.

Text 4

rathe lakña-haye çubhre
     sthitaç cägataväàs tataù
çvetadvépädhipo bhümä
     sahasra-bhuja-maëòitaù

     rathe—in a chariot; lakña—with a hundred thousand; haye—horses; çubhre—splendid; sthitaç—standing; ca—also; ägatavän—arrived; tataù—then; çvetadvépa-adhipo—the master of Çvetadvépa; bhümä—the Lord; sahasra-bhuja-maëòitaù—decorated with a thousand arms.

     Then the master of Çvetadvépa, who was decorated with a thousand arms, came in a splendid chariot drawn by a hundred thousand horses.

Text 5

çriyä yuktaù sväyudhäòhyaù
     pärñadaiù pariñevitaù
sampraléno babhüväçu
     so 'pi çré-kåñëa-vigrahe

     çriyä—the goddess of fortune; yuktaù—with; sva—own; äyudha—with weapons; äòhyaù—opulent; pärñadaiù—by associates; pariñevitaù—served; sampraléno—merged; babhüva—became; äçu—at once; so—he; api—also; çré-kåñëa-vigrahe—in Çré Kåñëa's form.

     Opulent with many weapons, accompanied by the goddess of fortune, and served by many associates, He suddenly merged in the body of Çré Kåñëa.

Texts 6-8

tadaiva cägataù säkñäd
     rämo rajéva-locanaù
dhanur-bäëa-dharaù sétä-
     çobhito bhrätåbhir våtaù

daça-koöy-arka-saìkäçe
     cämarair dolite rathe
asaìkhya-vaëarendräòhye
     lakña-cakra-ghana-svane

lakña-dhvaje lakña-haye
     çatakaumbhe sthitas tataù
çré-kåñëa-vigrahe pürëaù
     sampraléno babhüva ha

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; ca—also; ägataù—come; säkñäd—directly; rämo—Rämacandra; rajéva—lotus; locanaù—eyes; dhanur—bow; bäëa—and arrows; dharaù—holding; sétä—with Sétä; çobhito—glorious; bhrätåbhir—by brothers; våtaù—accompanied; daça—ten; koöi—ten million; arka—of suns; saìkäçe—splendor; cämarair—with cämaras; dolite—moved; rathe—on the chariot; asaìkhya—countless; vaëara—monkey; indra—kings; aòhye—opulent; lakña—ten thousand; cakra—wheels; ghana—deep; svane—sound; lakña—ten thousand; dhvaje—flags; lakña—ten thousand; haye—horses; çatakaumbhe—golden; sthitas—standing; tataù—then; çré-kåñëa-vigrahe—in Lord Kåñëa's body; pürëaù—perfect; sampraléno—merged; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     Then, holding a bow and arrows, glorious with Sétä, and accompanied by His brothers, lotus-eyed Lord Rämacandra came in a golden chariot that was effulgent as a hundred million suns, (decorated) with swaying cämaras, opulent with countless monkey-kings, rumbling with ten thousand wheels, (decorated with) ten thousand flags, and (pulled by) ten thousand horses, and merged in the body of Lord Kåñëa.

Texts 9 and 10

tadaiva cägataù säkñäd
     yajïo näräyaëo hariù
prasphurat-pralayäöopa-
     jvalad-agni-çikhopamaù

rathe jyotirmaye dåçye
     dakñiëäòhyaù sureçvaraù
so 'pi léno babhüväçu
     çré-kåñëe çyäma-vigrahe

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; ca—also; ägataù—came; säkñäd—directly; yajïas—Yaj 24a; näräyaëo—Näräyaëa; hariù—Hari; prasphurat-pralayäöopa-jvalad-agni—in the blazing fires of cosmic devastation; çikhä—a flame; upamaù—like; rathe—ona chariot; jyotirmaye—effulgent; dåçye—beautiful; dakñiëä—with His consort Dekñiëä; òhyaù—opulent; sura—of the demigods; éçvaraù—the master; so—He; api—even; léno—merged; babhüva—became; äçu—suddenly; çré-kåñëe—in Çré Kåñëa; çyäma—dark; vigrahe—form.

     Then Lord Yajïa, who is known as Näräyaëa and Hari, who is glorious like a flame in the fire of cosmic devastation, who is the master of the demigods, and who is glorious with His consort Dakñiëa, came in a splendid and beautiful chariot and suiddenly merged in the dark form of Lord Kåñëa.

Texts 11-13

tadä cägatavän säkñän
     nara-näräyaëaù prabhuù
catur-bhujo viçäläkño
     muni-veño ghana-dyutiù

taòit-koöi-jaöäjutaù
     prasphurad-dépta-maëòalaù
munéndra-maëòalair divyair
     maëòito 'khaëòita-vrataù

sarveñäà paçyatäà teñäm
     äçcarya-manasä nåpa
so 'pi léno babhüväçu
     çré-kåñëe çyäma-sundare

     tadä—then; ca—also; ägatavän—come; säkñät—directly; nara-näräyaëaù—Nara-Näräyaëa; prabhuù—Lord; catur-bhujo—four arms; viçäla—large; akño—eyes; muni—as a muni; veño—dressed; ghana—as a dark cloud; dyutiù—splendor; taòit—of lightning flashes; koöi—millions; jaöäjutaù—matted hair; prasphurad-dépta-maëòalaù—splendid; munéndra-maëòalair—by the great sages; divyair—splendid; maëòito—decorated; akhaëòita-vrataù—observing an unbroken vow of celibacy; sarveñäà—of all; paçyatäm—looking; teñäm—of them; äçcarya—wonder; manasä—heart; nåpa—O king; so—He; api—also; léno—merged; babhüva—became; äçu—suddenly; çré-kåñëe—in Çré Kåñëa; çyäma—dark; sundare—and handsome.

     Then Lord Nara-Näräyaëa, whose eyes were large, who had four arms, who was dressed as a sage, who was splendid like a dark cloud, whose matted hair was a lightning flash, who observed an unbroken vow (of celibacy), and who was surrounded by splendid multitudes of the kings of sages, suddenly merged in the handsome dark form of Lord Kåñëa as everyone looked on, their hearts filled with wonder.

Text 14

paripürëatamaà säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaà ca svayaà prabhum
jïätvä devaù stutià cakruù
     paraà vismayam ägataù

     paripürëatamaà säkñät—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; ca—also; svayam—personally; prabhum—the Lord; jïätvä—knowing; deväù—the demigods; stutim—prayers; cakruù—did; paraà—great; vismayam—wonder; ägataù—attained.

     Filled with wonder, and now understanding that Çré Kåñëa is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, the demigods offered many prayers.

Text 15

çré-devä ücuù 
kåñëäya pürëa-puruñäya parät paräya
     yajïeçvaräya para-käraëa-käraëäya
rädhä-varäya paripürëatamäya säkñäd-
     goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëäya namaù parasmai

     çré-deväs—the demigods; ücuù—said; kåñëäya—to Kåñëa; pürëa-puruñäya—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; parät—than the greatest; paräya—greater; yajïeçvaräya—the Lord of sacrifices; para-käraëa-käraëäya—the cause of causes; rädhä-varäya—the lover of Rädhä; paripürëatamäya—the original Lord; säkñäd-goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëäya—who resides in Goloka; namaù—obeisances; parasmai—to the Supreme.

     The demigods said: Obeisances to Çré Kåñëa, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, greater than the greatest, the master of sacrifices, the cause of causes, the lover of Rädhä, the most perfect, and the Lord who resides in Goloka.

Text 16

yogeçvaraù kila vadanti mahaù paraà tväà
     tatraiva sätvatatamäù kåta-vigrahaà ca
asmäbhir adya viditaà padayor dvayaà te
     tasmai namo 'stu mahasäà pataye parasmai

     yogeçvaraù—the masters of yoga; kila—indeed; vadanti—say; mahaù—effulgence; paraà—supreme; tvaà—You; tatra—there; eva—indeed; sätvatatamäù—the devotees; kåta—done; vigrahaà—form; ca—also; asmäbhir—by us; adya—today; viditaà—known; padayor—of the feet; dvayaà—pair; te—to You; tasmai—Him; namo—obeisances; astu—may be; mahasäà—of the effulgence; pataye—the master; parasmai—to the Supreme.

     The masters of yoga say You are the Brahman effulgence, and the great devotees say You have a form. Today we understand Your feet. Obeisances to You, the master of the Brahman effulgence.

Text 17

vyaìgyena vä na na hi lakñaëayä kadäpi
     sphoöena yac ca kavayo na viçanti mukhyäù
nirdeçya-bhäva-rahitaà prakåteù paraà ca
     tväà brahma nirguëam ajaà çaraëaà vrajämaù

     vyaìgyena—by implication; vä—or; na—not; na—not; hi—indeed; lakñaëayä—indirectly; kadäpi—ever; sphoöena—manifest; yat—what; ca—and; kavayo—philosophers; na—do not; viçanti—enter; mukhyäù—primary meaning; nirdeçya—indescribable; bhäva—nature; rahitaà—without; prakåteù—to matter; param—superior; ca—and; tvam—You; brahma—the greatestBrahman; nirguëam—without qualities; ajaà—unborn; çaraëaà—shelter; vrajämaù—we go.

     We take shelter of You, the unborn Supreme, who are free from the material modes, who are beyond the world of matter, and who cannot be described. The greatest philosophers cannot describe You, either directly, indirectly, or by the most oblique hint. 

Text 18

tväà brahma kecid avayanti pare ca kälaà
     kecit prasäìkhyam apare bhuvi karma-rüpam
pürve ca yogam apare kila kartå-bhävam
     anyoktibhir na viditaà çaraëaà gatäù smaù

     tväm—You; brahma—the greatest; kecid—some; avayanti—teach; pare—others; ca—also; kälaà—time; kecit—some; prasäìkhyam—the sum of everything; apare—others; bhuvi—in the world; karma—of karma; rüpam—the form; pürve—the first; ca—also; yogam—yoga; apare—others; kila—indeed; kartå-bhävam—the doer; anya—of others; uktibhir—by the words; na—not; viditam—known; çaraëam—shelter; gatäù—gone; smaù—we.

     Some teach that You are the greatest, some that You are time, some that You are the sum total of everything, some that You are karma, some that You are yoga, and some that You are the first cause. We take shelter of You, who cannot be perfectly known by all their words.

Text 19

çreyas-karéà bhagavatas tava päda-seväà
     hitvätha tértha-yajanädi tapaç caranti
jïänena ye ca viditä bahu-vighna-saìghaiù
     santäòitäù kim u bhavanti na te kåtärthäù

     çreyas—the good; karéà—doing; bhagavatas—of the Lord; tava—of You; päda—of the feet; seväà—the service; hitvä—abandoning; atha—then; tértha—pilgrimage; yajana—sacrifice; ädi—beginning; tapas—austerity; caranti—perform; jïänena—with knowledge; ye—who; ca—and; viditä—understood; bahu-vighna-saìghaiù—with many great obstacles; santäòitäù—struck; kim u—how miserably; bhavanti—are; na—not; te—they; kåtärthäù—successful.

     O Lord, they who reject the auspicious service of Your feet, and instead visit holy places, perform sacrifices and austerities, and try to cultivate spiritual knowledge are beaten by a host of obstacles. How miserably will they fail.

Text 20

vijïäpyam adya kim u deva açeña-säkñé
     yaù sarva-bhüta-hådayeñu viräjamänaù
devair namadbhir amaläçaya-mukta-dehais
     tasmai namo bhagavate puruñottamäya

     vijïäpyam—to be known; adya—today; kim u—how?; deva—O Lord; açeña—of everything; säkñé—the witness; yaù—who; sarva—of all; bhüta—living entities; hådayeñu—in the hearts; viräjamänaù—manifest; devair—by the demigods; namadbhir—bowing down; amala—pure; äçaya—hearts; mukta—liberated; dehais—whose bodies; tasmai—to Him; namo—obeisances; bhagavate—to the Lord; puruñottamäya—the Supreme Person.

     What request shall we place before You today? The pure-hearted devotees whose forms are not material offer respectful obeisances to You, the Supreme Personality of Godhead who, the witness of everything, stays in everyone's heart. 

Text 21

yo rädhikä-hådaya-sundara-candra-häraù
     çré-gopikä-nayana-jévana-müla-häraù
goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëa-dhvaja ädi-devaù
     sa tvaà vipatsu vibudhän paripähi pähi

     yo—who; rädhikä—of Rädhä; hådaya—in the heart; sundara—handsome; candra—moon; häraù—necklace; çré-gopikä—of the gopés; nayana—of the eyes; jévana—life; müla—root; häraù—taking; goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëa—of the abode of Goloka; dhvajas—the flag; ädi—the original; devaù—Lord; sas—He; tvam—You; vipatsu—in calamities; vibudhän—the demigods; paripähi—please protect; pähi—please protect.

     O Lord, You are a necklace of moons Çré Rädhä places over Her heart. You are the source of life for the gopés' eyes. You are a flag over Goloka. You are the original Supreme Personality of Godhead. O Lord, from all calamities please protect, please protect the demigods.

Text 22

våndävaneça giriräja-pate vrajeça
     gopäla-veña-kåta-nitya-vihära-léla
rädhä-pate çrutidharädhipate 'ddhara tvaà
     govardhanoddharaëa durdhara-dharma-dhärin

     våndävana—of Våndävana; éça—O Lord; giriräja—of the king of mountains; pate—O Lord; vraja—of Vraja; éça—O Lord; gopäla-veña—as a cowherd boy; kåta—done; nitya—eternal; vihära-léla—pastimes; rädhä—of Rädhä; pate—O Lord; çrutidhara—of the great philosophers; adhipate—O Lord; uddhara—please rescue; tvaà—You; govardhana—of Govardhana Hill; uddharaëa—O lifter; durdhara—impossible dharma-dhärin—the doer. 
     O king of Våndävana, O king of the mountains' king, O king of Vraja, O king who enjoys cowherd-boy pastimes eternally, O king of Rädhä, O king of the great philosophers, O lifter of Govardhana Hill, O Lord who can do any impossible task, please save us!

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
ity ukto bhagavän säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo gokuleçvaraù
pratyäha praëatän devän
     megha-gambhérayä girä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; ukto—addressed; bhagavän säkñät—Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëo—Çré Kåñëa; gokuleçvaraù—the king of Gokula; pratyäha—replied; praëatän—offering obeisances; devän—to the demigods; megha-gambhérayä—thunder; girä—with a voice.

     Çré Närada said: Addressed in this way, Çré Kåñëa, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the king of Gokula, in a voice of thunder replied to the demigods prostrate before Him.

Text 24

çré-bhagavän uväca 
he sura-jyeñöha he çambho
     deväù çåëuta mad-vacaù
yädaveñu ca janyadhvam
     aàçaiù strébhir mad-äjïayä

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; he—O; sura—of the demigods; jyeñöha—eldest; he—O; çambho—Çiva; deväù—O demigods; çåëuta—please hear; mad—My; vacaù—words; yädaveñu—in the Yadu dynasty; ca—also; janyadhvam—please take birth; aàçaiù—by partial expansions; strébhir—with your wives; mad—by My; äjïayä—order.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O Çiva, O eldest of the demigods, O demigods, hear My words. By My order you and your wives should take birth, by your aàça expansions, in the family of the Yadus.

Text 25

ahaà cävatariñyämi
     hariñyämi bhuvo bharam
kariñyämi ca vaù käryaà
     bhaviñyämi yadoù kule

     aham—I; ca—also; avatariñyämi—will descend; hariñyämi—I will remove; bhuvo—of the earth; bharam—the burden; kariñyämi—I will do; ca—also; vaù—of you; käryaà—the work; bhaviñyämi—I will be; yadoù—of the Yadus; kule—in the family.

     I will also descend. I will remove the earth's burden. I will perform the work you (request). I will take birth in the Yadus' family.

Text 26

vedä me vacanaà viprä
     mukhaà gävas tanur mama
aìgäni devatä yüyaà
     sädhavo hy asavo hådi

     vedäù—the Vedas; me—My; vacanam—word; vipräs—the brähmaëas; mukhaà—mouth; gävas—the cows; tanur—body; mama—My; aìgäni—limbs; devatäs—demigods; yüyaà—you; sädhavo—the saintly devotees; hi—indeed; asavo—the breath; hådi—in the heart.

     The Vedas are My words. The brähmaëas are My mouth. The cows are My body. You demigods are My limbs. My devotees are the life-breath in My heart.

Text 27

yuge yuge ca badhyeta
     yadä päkhäëòibhir janaiù
dharmaù kratur dayä sakñat
     tad ätmänaà såjämy aham

     yuge yuge—millennium after millennium; ca—also; badhyeta—stopped; yadä—when; päkhäëòibhir janaiù—by blasphemers; dharmaù—religion; kratur—sacrifice; dayä—mercy; sakñat—directly; tad—then; ätmänam—Myself; såjämi—appear; aham—I.

     Millennium after millennium, whenever the blasphemers stop religion, sacrifice, and mercy, I descend Myself.

Text 28

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktavantaà jagad-éçvaraà harià
     rädhä patim präha viyoga-vihvalä
dävägninä däva-lateva mürchitä-
     çru-kampa-romäïcita-bhäva-samvåtä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; uktavantam—spoken; jagad—of the universe; éçvaraà—the master; harià—Lord Kåñëa; rädhä—Çré Rädhä; patim—Her master; präha—said; viyoga—separation; vihvalä—agitated; dävägninä—with a forest fire; däva—on fire; latä—a vine; iva—like; mürchitä—fainted; açru—tears; kampa—trembling; romäïcita—hairs standing erect; bhäva—ecstasy; samvåtä—possessing.

     Çré Närada said: When Her husband, Lord Kåñëa, the master of the universes, had spoken, Çré Rädhä, overcome with fear of being separated from Him, and now like a flowering vine burning in a great forest fire, weeping, trembling, about to faint unconscious, and the hairs of her body erect, spoke to Him.

Text 29

çré-rädhoväca

bhuvo bharaà hartum alaà bhuvaà vraja
     kåtaà paraà me çapathaà çåëuñva tat gate tvayi präëa-pate ca vigrahaà
     kadäcid atraiva na dhärayämy aham

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; bhuvo—of the earth; bharam—the burden; hartum—to remove; alam—greatly; bhuvaà—to the earth; vraja—go; kåtam—done; param—great; me—of Me; çapathaà—vow; çåëuñva—hear; tat—that; gate—gone; tvayi—when You; präëa—of life; pate—O Lord; ca—also; vigrahaà—form; kadäcid—ever; atra—here; eva—indeed; na—not; dhärayämi—maintain; aham—I.

     Çré Rädhä said: Go to the earth and remove its burden! Hear My great vow. O Lord of My life, when You are gone I will not keep my body (alive) in this place.

Text 30

yadätha me tvaà çapathaà na manyase
     dvitéya-väraà pravadämi väk-patham
präëaç ca me gantum atéva-vihvalaù
     karpüra-dhüli-kaëavad bhaviñyati

     yadä—when; atha—then; me—My; tvam—You; çapathaà—vow; na—not; manyase—think; dvitéya—a second; väram—time; pravadämi—I speak; väk-patham—the words; präëas—life; ca—also; me—of Me; gantum—to go; atéva-vihvalaù—very eager; karpüra-dhüli-kaëavad—like particles of camphor;  bhaviñyati—will be.

     If You do not believe My words, I will say them a second time. (If You go) then My life, yearning to depart, will become like camphor dust.

Text 31

çré-bhagavän uväca 
tvayä saha gamiñyämi
     mä çokaà kuru rädhike
hariñyämi bhuvo bhäraà
     kariñyämi vacas tava

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; tvayä—You; saha—with; gamiñyämi—I will go; mä—don't; çokaà—unhappiness; kuru—do; rädhike—O Rädhä; hariñyämi—I will remove; bhuvo—of the earth; bhäraà—the burden; kariñyämi—I will fulfill; vacas—words; tava—Your.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: I will go with You. O Rädhä, don't lament. I will remove the earth's burden and I will keep Your word.

Text 32

çré-rädhikoväca 
yatra våndävanaà nästi
     yatra no yamunä nadé
yatra govardhano nästi
     tatra me na manaù-sukham

     çré-rädhikä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; yatra—where; våndävanaà—Våndävana; na—not; asti—is; yatra—where; na—not; u—indeed; yamunä—the Yamunä; nadé—river; yatra—where; govardhano—Govardhana Hill; na—not; asti—is; tatra—there; me—of Me; na—not; manaù—of the heart; sukham—happiness.

     Çré Rädhä said: My heart cannot be happy where there is no Våndävana forest, no Yamunä river, and no Govardhana Hill.

Text 33

çré-närada uväca 
veda-näga-kroça-bhümià
     sva-dhamnaù çré-hariù svayam
govardhanaà ca yamunäà
     preñayäm äsa bhüpari

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; veda-näga—47; kroça—kroças; bhümià—land; sva-dhamnaù—own abode; çré-hariù—Çré Kåñëa; svayam—personally; govardhanam—Govardhana; ca—and; yamunä—Yamunä; preñayäm äsa—sent; bhü-upari—to the earth.

     Çré Närada said: Then Lord Kåñëa sent to the earth Govardhana Hill, the Yamunä river, and a 47 kroça portion of His abode.

     Note: One kroça equals two miles.

Text 34

tadä brahmä deva-gaëair
     natvä natvä punaù punaù
paripürëatamaà säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaà samuväca ha

     tadä—then; brahmä—Brahmä; deva-gaëair—with the demigods; natvä—bowing; natvä—and bowing; punaù—again; punaù—and again; paripürëatamaà säkñät—to the original Supreme Personality of Godhead çré-kåñëaà—Çré Kåñëa; samuväca ha—said.

     Bowing and bowing again and again with the demigods, Brahmä addressed the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa. 

Text 35

çré-brahmoväca 
ahaà kutra bhaviñyämi
     kutra tvaà ca bhaviñyasi
ete kutra bhaviñyanti
     kair gåhaiù kaiç ca nämabhiù

     çré-brahmä uväca—Çré Brahmä said; ahaà—I; kutra—where?; bhaviñyämi—will be; kutra—where; tvam—You; ca—also; bhaviñyasi—will be; ete—they; kutra—where; bhaviñyanti—will be; kair—with what?; gåhaiù—homes; kais—with what?; ca—also; nämabhiù—names.

     Çré Brahmä said: Where will I take birth? Where will You take birth? Where will the (demigods) take birth? In what homes? With what names?

Text 36

çré-bhagavän uväca 
vasudevasya devakyäà
     bhaviñyämi paraù svayam
rohiëyäà mat-kalä çeño
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; vasudevasya—of Vasudeva; devakyäà—in Devaké; bhaviñyämi—I will be; paraù—transcendental; svayam—personally; rohiëyäm—in Rohiëé; mat-kalä—my kalä expansion; çeño—Çeña; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: I will take birth in Devaké from Vasudeva. My transcendental kalä expansion Çeña will take birth in Rohiëé. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 37

çréù säkñäd rukmiëé bhaiñmé
     çivä jämbavaté tathä
satyä ca tulasé bhümau
     satyabhämä vasundharä

     çréù—the goddess of fortune; säkñäd—directly; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; bhaiñmé—the daughter of Bhéñmaka; çivä—Pärvaté; jämbavaté—Jämbavaté; tathä—so; satyä—Satyä; ca—also; tulasé—Tulasé; bhümau—on the earth; satyabhämä—Satyabhämä; vasundharä—Vasundharä.

     The goddess of fortune will take birth as Bhéñmaka's daughter Rukmiëé. Lord Çiva's consort will take birth as Jämbavaté. Tulasé will take birth as Satyä and Vasundharä as Satyabhämä.

Text 38

dakñiëä lakñmaëä caiva
     kälindé virajä tathä
bhadrä hrér mitravindä ca
     jähnavé päpa-näçiné

     dakñiëä—Dakñiëä; lakñmaëä—Lakñmaëä; ca—also; eva—indeed; kälindé—Kälindé; virajä—Virajä; tathä—so; bhadrä—Bhadrä; hrér—Hré; mitravindä—Mitravindä; ca—also; jähnavé—Jähnavé; päpa—sins; näçiné—destroying.

     Dakñiëä will become Lakñmaëä, Virajä will become Kälindé, Hré will become Bhadrä, and Jhnavé, who destroys sins, will become Mitravindä.

Text 39

rukmiëyäà kämadevaç ca
     pradyumna iti viçrutaù
bhaviñyati na sandehas
     tasya tvaà ca bhaviñyasi

     rukmiëyäà—in Rukmiëé; kämadevas—Kämadeva; ca—and; pradyumna—Pradyumna; iti—thus; viçrutaù—known; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; sandehas—doubt; tasya—of him; tvaà—you; ca—and; bhaviñyasi—will be.

     (Born) in Rukmiëé, Kämadeva will be known as Pradyumna. You will take birth as his son. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 40

nando droëo vasuù säkñäd
     yaçodä sä dharä småtä
våñabhänuù sucandraç ca
     tasya bharyä kalävaté

     nando—Nanda; droëo—Droëa; vasuù—Vasu; säkñäd—directly; yaçodä—Yaçodä; sä—she; dharä—Dharä; småtä—remembered; våñabhänuù—Våñabhänu; sucandras—Sucandra; ca—and; tasya—of him; bharyä—the wife; kalävaté—Kalävaté.

     The Vasu Droëa will become Nanda, and Dharä will be remembered as Yaçodä. Sucandra will take birth as Våñabhänu, and his wife Kalävaté will also take birth.

Text 41

bhümau kértir iti khyätä
     tasyäà rädhä bhaviñyati
sadä räsaà kariñyämi
     gopébhir vraja-maëòale

     bhümau—on the earth; kértir—Kérti; iti—thus; khyätä—known; tasyäm—in her; rädhä—Rädhä; bhaviñyati—will take birth; sadä—always; räsam—the räsa dance; kariñyämi—I will do; gopébhir—with the gopés; vraja—of Vraja; maëòale—in the circle.

     On the earth she will be known as Kérti. In her Rädhä will take birth. Again and again I will perform the räsa dance in the circle of Vraja with the gopés.

Chapter Four
Udyoga-praçna-varëana
Description of Questions About the Lord's Appearance

Text 1

çré-bhagavän uväca 
nandopananda-bhavane
     çrédämä subalaù sakhä
stoka-kåñëo 'rjuno 'àçuç ca
     nava-nanda-gåhe vidhe

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; nanda—of Nanda; upananda—and Upananda; bhavane—in the home; çrédämä—Çrédämä; subalaù—Subala;  sakhä—friends; stoka-kåñëaù—Stoka-kåñëa; arjunaù—Arjuna; aàçaù—partial expansions; ca—also; nava—new; nanda—of Nanda; gåhe—in the home; vidhe—O Brahmä.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: My friends Çrédämä and Subala will take birth in the homes of Nanda and Upananda. Stoka-kåñëa, Arjuna, and Aàçu will take birth in the nine homes of Nanda's relatives.

Text 2

viçälaåñabha-tejasvi-
     devaprastha-varüthapäù
bhaviñyanti sakhäyo me
     vraje sad våñabhänuñu

     viçälaåñabha-tejasvi—Viçäla, Åñabha, and Tejasvé; devaprastha-varüthapäù—Devaprastha and Varüthapa; bhaviñyanti—will be; sakhäyaù—friends; me—My; vraje—in Vraja; ñaò—six; våñabhänuñu—in the homes of the relatives of King Våñabhänu.

     My friends Viçäla, Åñabha, Tejasvé, Devaprastha, and Varüthapa will take birth among the six relatives of King Våñabhänu.

Text 3

çré-brahmoväca 
kasya vai nanda-padavé
     kasya vai våñabhänutä
vada deva-pate säkñäd
     upanandasya lakñaëam

     çré-brahmä uväca—Çré Brahmä said; kasya—of whom?; vai—indeed; nanda—of Nanda; padavé—path; kasya—of whom?; vai—indeed; våñabhänutä—of King Våñabhänu; vada—tell; deva—of the demigods; pate—O lord; säkñät—directly; upanandasya—of Upananda; lakñaëam—the characteristics.

     Çré Brahmä said: Who is Nanda? Who is Våñabhänu? O master of the demigods, please describe the nature of Upananda.

Text 4

çré-bhagavän uväca 
gäù pälayanti ghoñeñu
     sadä go-våttayo 'niçam
te gopälä mayä proktäs
     teñäà tvaà lakñaëaà çåëu

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; gäù—cows; pälayanti—protect; ghoñeñu—in the homes of the cowherds; sadä—always; gaù—for the cows; våttayaù—activities; aniçam—day and night; te—they; gopäläù—protectors of the cows; mayä—by Me; proktäù—said; teñäm—of them; tvam—you; lakñaëam—characteristics; çåëu—please hear.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: They are cowherd people. Day and night they protect the cows in the villages of cowherds. Listen and I will describe them.

Text 5

nandaù proktaù sa-gopälair
     nava-lakña-gaväà patiù
upanandaç ca kathitaù
     païca-lakña-gaväà patiù

     nandaù—Nanda; proktaù—said; sa-gopälaiù—with the gopas; nava-lakña—900,000; gaväm—of cows; patiù—the master; upanandaù—Upananda; ca—also; kathitaù—said; païca-lakña—500,000; gaväm—of cows; patiù—the master.

     The gopas say that Nanda is the master of 900,000 cows and Upananda is the master of 500,000 cows.

Text 6

våñabhänuù sa ukto yo
     daça-lakña-gaväà patiù
gaväà koöir gåhe yasya
     nanda-räjaù sa eva hi

     våñabhänuù—Våñabhänu; saù—he; uktaù—said; yaù—who; daça-lakña—one million; gaväm—of cows; patiù—the master; gaväm—of cows; koöiù—ten million; gåhe—in the home; yasya—of whom; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; saù—he; eva—certainly; hi—indeed.

     They say that Våñabhänu is the master of a million cows and at King Nanda's home are ten million cows.

Text 7

koöy-ardhaà ca gaväà yasya
     våñabhänu-varas tu saù
etädåçau vraje dvau tu
     sucandro droëa eva hi

     koöi-ardham—five million; ca—and; gaväm—of cows; yasya—of whom; våñabhänu-varaù—Våñabhänu; tu—indeed; saù—he; etädåçau—like this; vraje—in Vraja; dvau—two; tu—indeed; sucandraù—Sucandra; droëaù—Droëa; eva—indeed; hi—certainly.

     Våñabhänuvara has five million cows, and Sucandra and Droëa in Vraja each have that number.

Text 8

sarva-lakñaëa-lakñyäòhyau
     gopa-räjau bhaviñyataù
çata-candränanänäà ca
     sundaréëäà su-väsasäm
gopénäà mad-vraje ramye
     çata-yütho bhaviñyati

     sarva-lakñaëa-lakñya-aòhyau—opulent with all virtues; gopa-räjau—two gopa kings; bhaviñyataù—will be; çata—hundred; candra—moons; änanänäm—whose faces; ca—also; sundaréëäm—of beautiful girls; su-väsasäm—beautifully dressed; gopénäm—gopés; mat—My; vraje—in Vraja; ramye—beautiful; çata—hundreds; yüthaù—groups; bhaviñyati—will be.

     These two gopa kings will be rich with all virtues. In My Vraja will also be hundreds of groups of beautiful, beautifully dressed gopés, their faces like hundreds of moons.

Text 9

çré-brahmoväca 
he déna-bandho he deva
     jagat-käraëa-käraëa
yüthasya lakñaëaà sarvaà
     tan me brühi pareçvara

     çré-brahmä uväca—Çré Brahmä said; he—O; déna—of the poor; bandhaù—friend; he—O; deva—Lord; jagat—of the universes; käraëa—of the causes; käraëa—the cause; yüthasya—of the groups; lakñaëam—characteristic; sarvaà—all; tat—that; me—to me; brühi—please speak; para-éçvara—O Supreme Lord.

     Çré Brahmä said: O friend of the poor, O Lord, O cause of the universes' causes, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, please completely describe these groups (of gopés).

Text 10

çré-bhagavän uväca 
arbudaà daça-koöénäà
     munibhiù kathitaà vidhe
daçärbudaà yatra bhavet
     so 'pi yüthaù prakathyate

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; arbudam—a hundred million; daça—ten; koöénäà—ten million; munibhiù—by sages; kathitam—said; vidhe—O Brahmä; daça—ten; arbudam—a hundred million; yatra—where; bhavet—may be; saù—that; api—also; yüthaù—group; prakathyate—is said.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O Brahmä, the sages say that the number one hundred million is called one arbuda. In each group there are ten arbudas (one million).

Text 11

goloka-väsinyaù käçcit
     käçcid vai dvära-pälikäù
çåìgära-prakarä käçcit
     käçcit käçcic chayyopakärakäù

     goloka—of Goloka; väsinyaù—the residents; kaçcit—some; käçcit—some; vai—indeed; dvära-pälikäù—doorkeepers; çåìgära-prakaräù—decorators; käçcit—some; käçcit—some; käçcit—some; çayyä-upakärakäù—arranging the bed.

     Some of the gopés who live in Gokula are doorkeepers, some decorate (the divine couple), and some prepare the (divine couple's) bed.

Text 12

pärñadäkhyäs tathä käçcic
     chré-våndävana-pälikäù
govardhana-niväsinyaù
     käçcit kuïja-vidhäyikäù

     pärñadä—associates; äkhyäù—named; tathä—so; käçcit—some; çré-våndävana—of Våndävana; pälikäù—the protectors; govardhana—by Govardhana Hill; niväsinyaù—residing; käçcit—some; kuïja—in the forest groves; vidhäyikäù—arranging.

     Some of these gopé associates of the Lord protect the forest of Våndävana, some reside by Govardhana Hill, and some decorate the forest groves.

Text 13

me nikuïja-niväsinyo
     bhaviñyanti vraje mama
evaà ca yamunä-yütho
     jähnavé-yütha eva ca

     me—of Me; nikuïja—in the forest groves; niväsinyaù—residing; bhaviñyanti—will be; vraje—in Vraja; mama—My; evam—thus; ca—also; yamunä—of the Yamunä; yüthaù—the group; jähnavé—of the Ganges; yüthaù—the group; eva—certainly; ca—also.

     Some will reside in the forests of My Vraja. Some will reside by the Yamunä and some by the Ganges.

Text 14

ramäyä madhu-mädhavyä
     virajäyäs tathaiva ca
lalitäyä viçäkhäyä      mäyä-yütho bhaviñyati

     ramäyäù—of Ramä; madhu-mädhavyäù—of Madhu-Mädhavé; virajäyäù—of Virajä; tathä—so; eva—indeed; ca—and; lalitäyäù—of Lalitä; viçäkhäyäù—of Viçäkhä; mäyä-yüthaù—group; bhaviñyati—will be.

     Ramä, Madhu-Mädhavé, Virajä, Lalitä, and Viçäkhä will each lead a group.         

Text 15

eta hy añöa-sakhénäà3 ca
     sakhénäà kila ñoòaça
dvatriàçac ca sakhénäà tu
     yüthä bhävyä vraje vidhe

     etäù—they; hi—indeed; añöa—eight; sakhénäà—of friends; ca—also; sakhénäm—of friends; kila—certainly; ñoòaça—sixteen; dvatriàçat—32; ca—and; sakhénäm—of friends; tu—indeed; yüthäù—groups; bhävyäù—will be; vraje—in Vraja; vidhe—O Brahmä.

     O Brahma, in Vraja there will be groups led by eight gopé friends, by sixteen gopé friends, and by thirty-two gopé friends.

Text 16

çruti-rüpä åñi-rüpä
     maithiläù kauçaläs tathä
ayodhyä-pura-väsinyo
     yajïa-sétäù pulindakäù

     çruti—of the Vedas; rüpäù—forms; åñi—of the sages; rüpäù—forms; maithiläù—of the women of Mithilä; kauçaläù—the people of Koñalä; tathä—so; ayodhyä-pura-väsinyaù—the women of Ayodhyä; yajïa-sétäù—the Yajïa Sétäs; pulindakäù—the Pulindä girls.

     Some of the gopés to be had been Personified Vedas, some great sages, some women in Mithilä, some women in Koñalä, some women in Ayodhyä, some yajï-sétäs, and some Pulindä girls. 

Text 17

yäsäà mayä varo datto
     pürve pürve yuge yuge
täsäà yüthä bhaviñyanti
     gopénäà mad-vraje çubhe

     yäsäm—to whom; mayä—by Me; varaù—benediction; dattaù—given; pürve—before; pürve—before; yuge yuge—in different yugas; täsäm—of them; yüthäù—groups; bhaviñyanti—will be; gopénäm—of gopés; mat—My; vraje—in Vraja; çubhe—beautiful.

     In previous millennia having received a benediction from Me, they will become various groups of gopés in My beautiful Vraja.

Text 18

çré-brahmoväca 
etäù kathaà vraje bhävyäù
     kena püëyena kair varaiù
durlabhaà hi padaà tad vai
     yogibhiù puruñottama

     çré-brahmä uväca—Çré Brahmä said; etäù—they; katham—how; vraje—in Vraja; bhävyäù—will be; kena—by what?; püëyena—pious deed; kaiù—by what?; varaiù—benedictions; durlabham—difficult to attain; hi—indeed; padam—state; tat—that; vai—certainly; yogibhiù—by yogés; puruñottama—O Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     Çré Brahmä said: How will they become (gopés) in Vraja? O Supreme Personality of Godhead, because of what pious deed or what benedictions will they attain this position even the great yogés cannot attain?

Text 19

çré-bhagavän uväca 
çvetadvépe ca bhümänaà
     çrutayas tuñöuvuù param
uñatébhir giräbhiç ca
     prasanno 'bhüt sahasra-pät

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; çvetadvépe—in Çvetadvépa; ca—also; bhümänam—the Lord; çrutayaù—the personified Vedas; tuñöuvuù—offered prayers; param—greatly; uñatébhiù—beautiful; giräbhiù—with words; ca—also; prasannaù—pleased; abhüt—became; sahasra-pät—the universal form, who has a thousand feet.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: When in Çvetadvépa the personififed Vedas offered prayers to Him with eloquent words, the Lord's form who has thousands of feet became pleased.

Text 20

çré-harir uväca 
varaà våëéta yüyaà vai
     yan mano-väïchitaà mahat
yeñäà prasanno 'haà säkñät
     teñäà kià durlabhaà bhuvi

     çré-hariù uväca—Çré Hari said; varam—a benediction; våëéta—choose; yüyam—you; vai—certainly; yat—what; manaù—by the heart; väïchitam—is desired; mahat—great; yeñäm—by whom; prasannaù—pleased; aham—I am; säkñät—directly; teñäm—of them; kim—what?; durlabham—difficult to attain; bhuvi—on the earth.

     Çré Hari said: Choose a benediction, whatever your heart desires. What is difficult to attain for they with whom I am pleased?

Text 21     

çré-çrutaya ücuù 
väì-mano-gocarätétaà
     tato na jïäyate tu tat
änanda-mätram iti yad
     vandantéha pura-vidaù
tad rüpaà darçayäsmäkaà
     yadi deyo varo hi naù

     çré-çrutayaù ücuù—the personified Vedas said; väk—words; manaù—and mind; gocara—the range; atétam—beyond; tataù—therefore; na—not; jïäyate—known; tu—indeed; tat—that; änanda—bliss; mätram—only; iti—thus; yat—what; vandanti—they say; iha—here; pura-vidaù—the cholars of the Puräëas; tat—that; rüpam—form; darçaya—please show; asmäkam—to us; yadi—if; deyaù—to be given; varaù—a benediction; hi—indeed; naù—to us.

     The personified Vedas said: Because You are beyond the material mind and material words, we cannot perfectly understand You. If You wish to give us a benediction, then please directly show us Your transcendental form, which the scholars of the Puräëas say is full of bliss. 

Text 22

çré-bhagavän uväca 
çrutvaitad darçayäm äsa
     svaà lokaà prakåteù param
kevalänubhavänanda-
     mätram akñaram avyayam

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; çrutvä—having heard; etat—this; darçayäm äsa—He showed; svam—His own; lokam—realm; prakåteù—the material world; param—beyond; kevala—only; anubhava—experience; änanda—bliss; mätram—only; akñaram—changeless; avyayam—indestructible.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Hearing this, the Lord showed them His own abode, where there is only bliss and there are neither decay nor death, . . .

Text 23

yatra våndävanaà näma
     vanaà käma-dughair drumaiù
manorama-nikuïjäòhyaà
     sarvartu-sukha-samyutam

     yatra—where; våndävanam—Våndävana; näma—named; vanaà-forest; käma-dughaiù—fulfilling desires; drumaiù—with trees; manorama—beautiful; nikuïja—with forest groves; aòhyam—opulent; sarva—in all; åtu—seasons; sukha-samyutam—with happiness.

 . . . where there is the forest named Våndävana, which is opulent with beautiful forests of trees that fulfill all desires, and which brings happiness in every season, . . . 

Text 24

yatra govardhano näma
     su-nirjhara-daré-yutaù
ratna-dhätu-mayaù çrémän
     su-pakñi-gaëa-saìkulaù

     yatra—where; govardhanaù—Govardhana; näma—named; su-nirjhara—with beautiful streams; daré—and caves; yutaù—endowed; ratna—jewels; dhätu—and minerals; mayaù—consisting; çrémät—beautiful; su-pakñi-gaëa-saìkulaù—filled with beautiful birds.

 . . . where there is the hill named Govardhana, which has beautiful caves and swiftly-moving streams, which is made of jewels and precious minerals, and which is filled with graceful birds, . . .

Text 25

yatra nirmala-pänéyä
     kälindé saritäà varä
ratna-baddhobhaya-taöé
     haàsa-padmädi-saìkulä

     yatra—where; nirmala—pure; pänéyä—water; kälindé—Yamunä; saritäm—of streams; varä—the best; ratna—with jewels; baddha—studded; ubhaya—both; taöé—banks; haàsa—with swans; padma—and lotuses; ädi—beginning; saìkulä—filled.

 . . . where there is the Yamunä, which is the best of rivers, which has pure and delicious water, which is filled with lotuses, swans, and other flowers and birds, and which has shores made of precious jewels, . . .

Text 26

nänä-räsa-rasonmattaà
     yatra gopé-kadambakam
tat-kadambaka-madhya-sthaù
     kiçoräkåtir acyutaù

     nänä—various; räsa—of räsa dances; rasa—by the nectar; unmattam—intoxicated; yatra—where; gopé—of gopés; kadambakam—the multitude; tat-kadambaka—of that multitude; madhya—in the middle; sthaù—standing; kiçora—youthful; äkåtiù—form; acyutaù—the infallible Lord.

 . . . and where the infallible Lord, whose form is that of a youth, stood among many gopés intoxicated by tasting the nectar of many räsa dances.

Text 27

darçayitveti ca präha
     bruta kià karaväëi vaù
dåööo madéyo loko 'yam
     yato nästi paraà varam

     darçayitvä—having seen; iti—thus; ca—also; präha—said; bruta—please tell; kim—what?; karaväëi—shall I do; vaù—of you; dåööaù—seen; madéyaù—My; lokaù—realm; ayam—which; yataù—than which; na—not; asti—is; param—better; varam—benediction.

     Having revealed this, the Lord said: What more shall I do for you? Tell Me. You have seen My realm. There is no benediction better than (seeing it).

Text 28

çré-çrutaya ücuù 
kandarpa-koöi-lävaëye
     tvayi dåööe manäàsi naù
käminé-bhävam äsadya
     smara-kñubdhäny asaàçayam

     çré-çrutayaù ücuù—the personified Vedas said; kandarpa—of Kämadevas; koöi—millions; lävaëye—handsomeness; tvayi—when You; dåööe—are seen; manäàsi—hearts; naù—our; käminé—of beautiful and amorous girls; bhävam—the nature; äsadya—attaining; smara—by amorous desires; kñubdhäni—agitated; asaàçayam—without doubt.

     When we see You in this way, more handsome than millions of Kämadevas, our hearts become troubled with amorous desires and we yearn to become beautiful girls. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 29

yathä goloka-väsinyaù
     käminétvena gopikäù
bhajanti ramaëaà matvä
     cikérñäjani nas tathä

     yathä—as; goloka-väsinyaù—the girls of Goloka; käminétvena—with the status of being beautiful girls; gopikäù—gopés bhajanti—worship; ramaëam—a lover; matvä—considering; cikérñä—desire; ajani—is born; naù—of us; tathä—so.

     We yearn to become beautiful gopés in Goloka who worship You as their lover.

Text 30

çré-harir uväca 
durlabho durghaöaç caiva
     yuñmäkaà su-manorathaù
mayänumoditäù samyak
     satyo bhavitum arhati

     çré-hariù uväca—Çré Hari said; durlabhaù—difficult to attain; durghaöaù—impossible; ca—and; eva—indeed; yuñmäkam—your; su—beautiful; manorathaù—desire; mayä—by Me; anumoditäù—allowed; samyak—completely; satyaù—true; bhavitum—to be; arhati—is worthy.

     Çré Hari said: Although your glorious desire is impossible and can never be attained, I will grant it. It will become true.

Text 31

ägamini viriïcau tu
     jäte såööy-artham udyate
kalpa-särasvataà präpya
     vraje gopyo bhaviñyatha

     ägamini—come; viriïcau—when Brahmä; tu—indeed; jäte—is born; såööi—creation; artham—for the purpose; udyate—is manifested; kalpa-särasvatam—the Särasvata-kalpa; präpya—attaining; vraje—in Vraja; gopyaù—gopés; bhaviñyatha—you will become.

     When a new Brahmä is born to create (the universe), and the time of Särasvata-kalpa arrives, you will become gopés in Vraja.

Text 32

påthivyäà bhärate kñetre
     mäthure mama maëòale
våndävane bhaviñyämi
     preyän vo rasa-maëòale

     påthivyäm—on the earth; bhärate—in Bhärata-varña; kñetre—in the place; mäthure—in the district of Mathurä; mama—My; maëòale—circle; våndävane—in Våndävana; bhaviñyämi—I will become; preyän—the beloved; vaù—of you; rasa—of the räsa dance; maëòale—in the circle.

     On the earth, in Bhärata-varña, in the circle of Mathurä, in Våndävana, in the räsa-dance circle, I will become your beloved.

Text 33

jära-dharmeëa su-snehaà
     su-dåòhaà sarvato 'dhikam
mayi sampräpya sarvä hi
     kåtäkåtyä bhaviñyatha

     jära-dharmeëa—as a paramour; su-sneham—affection; su-dåòham—firm; sarvataù—than all; adhikam—greater; mayi—for Me; sampräpya—attaining; sarväù—all; hi—indeed; kåtäkåtyäù—usccessful; bhaviñyatha—you will become.

     Passionately loving Me as your paramour, you will all become perfect.

Text 34

çré-bhagavän uväca 
täç ca gopyo bhaviñyanti
     pürva-kalpa-varän mama
anyäsäà caiva gopénäà
     lakñaëaà çåëu tad vidhe

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; täù—they; ca—also; gopyaù—gopés; bhaviñyanti—will become; pürva—previous; kalpa—from the kalpa; varän—benedictions; mama—My; anyäsäm—of other; ca—also; eva—certainly; gopénäm—gopés; lakñaëam—characteristics; çåëu—please hear; tat—that; vidhe—O Brahmä.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Because of the previous kalpa's benediction they will become gopés. O Brahmä, now hear the description of the other gopés.

Text 35

suräëäà rakñaëärthäya
     räkñasänäà vadhäya ca
tretäyäà rämacandro 'bhüd
     véro daçarathätmajaù

     suräëäm—of the devotees; rakñaëärthäya—for protection; räkñasänäm—of the demons; vadhäya—for the killing; ca—also; tretäyäm—in Tretä-yuga; rämacandraù—Rämacandra; abhüt—was; véraù—hero; daçaratha—of Daçaratha; ätmajaù—the son.

     To protect the devotees and kill the demons the Lord appeared in Tretä-yuga as Daçaratha's son, the hero Rämacandra.

Text 36

sétä-svayamvaraà gatvä
     dhanur-bhaìgaà cakära saù
uväha jänakéà sétäà
     rämo räjéva-locanaù

     sétä—of Sétä; svayamvaram—to the svayamvara; gatvä—having gone; dhanuù—of the bow; bhaìgam—breaking; cakära—did; saù—He; uväha—married; jänakém—Janaka's daughter; sétäm—Sétä; rämaù—Räma; räjéva—lotus; locanaù—eyed.

     Lotus-eyed Räma went to Sétä's svayamvara, broke the bow, and married Janaka's daughter Sétä.

Text 37

taà dåöövä maithiläù sarväù
     purandhryo mumuhur vidhe
rahasy ücur mahätmänaà
     bhartä no bhava he ragho

     tam—Him; dåöövä—seeing; maithiläù—the women of Mithilä; sarväù—all; purandhryaù—married; mumuhuù—became agitated; vidhe—O Brahmä; rahasi—in a secluded place; ücuù—said; mahätmänam—to the Lord; bhartä—the husband; naù—of us; bhava—please become; he—O; raghaù—Raghu.

     O Brahmä, when they saw Him, all the married women of Mithilä were overcome with desire. In a secluded place they all approached the Lord and said, "O descendent of Raghu, please become our husband."

Text 38

tä äha räghavendraç ca
     mä çocaà kuruta striyaù
dväparänte kariñyämi
     bhavaténäà manoratham

     täù—to them; äha—said; räghava—of the Räghava dynasty; indraù—the king; ca—also; mä—don't; çocam—lament; kuruta—do; striyaù—women; dväpara—of Dväpara-yuga; ante—at the end; kariñyämi—I will do; bhavaténäm—of you; manoratham—the desire.

     Räma, the king of the Räghavas, said to them, "O women, don't be unhappy. At the end of Dväpara-yuga and I will fulfill your desire."

Text 39

térthaà dänaà tapo çaucaà
     samäcarata tattvataù
çraddhayä parayä bhaktyä
     vraje gopyo bhaviñyatha

     tértham—pilgrimage; dänam—charity; tapaù—austerity; çaucam—cleanliness; samäcarata—perform; tattvataù—in truth; çraddhayä—with faith; parayä—with great; bhaktyä—devotion; vraje—in Vraja; gopyaù—gopés; bhaviñyatha—you will become.

     With great faith and devotion honestly go on pilgrimages, give charity, perform austerities, and follow the rules of cleanliness. Then you will become gopés in Vraja.

Text 40

iti täbhyo varaà datvä
     çré-rämaù karuëä-nidhiù
koñalän prayayau dhanvé
     tejasä jita-bhärgavaù

     iti—thus; täbhyaù—to them; varam—benediction; datvä—giving; çré-rämaù—Çré Räma; karuëä—of mercy; nidhiù—an ocean; koñalän—to the country of the Koñalas; prayayau—went; dhanvé—with His bow; tejasä—with power; jita—conquered; bhärgavaù—Paraçuräma.

     After giving them this benediction, Çré Räma, who is an ocean of mercy and an expert bowman, with His great prowess defeated Paraçuräma and then went to the country of the Koñalas.

Text 41

märge ca kauñalä naryo
     rämaà dåööväti-sundaram
manasä vavrire taà vai
     patià kandarpa-mohanam

     märge—on the road; ca—also; kauñaläù naryaù—the women of Koñala; rämam—Lord Räma; dåöövä—seeing; ati—very; sundaram—handsome; manasä—with their hearts; vavrire—chose; tam—Him; vai—indeed; patim—as their husband; kandarpa—than many Kämadevas; mohanam—charming.

     Seeing on the path very handsome Lord Räma, who is more charming than a host of Kämadevas, the women of Koñala in their hearts chose Him to be their husband.

Text 42

manasäpi varaà rämo
     dadau täbhyo hy açeña-vit
manorathaà kariñyämi
     vraje gopyo bhaviñyatha

     manasä—with the heart; api—also; varam—choice; rämaù—Räma; dadau—gave; täbhyaù—them; hi—indeed; açeña—all; vit—knowing; manoratham—desire; kariñyämi—I will do; vraje—in Vraja; gopyaù—gopés; bhaviñyatha—you will become.

     In His heart all-knowing Räma gave them this benediction: "You will become gopés in Vraja, and then I will fulfill your desire."

Text 43

ägataà sétayä särdhaà
     sainyena raghu-nandanam
ayodhyä-pura-väsinyaù
     çrutvä drañöuà samäyayuù

     ägatam—arrived; sétayä—Sétä; särdham—with; sainyena—army; raghu-nandanam—the joy of the Raghus; ayodhyä-pura-väsinyaù—the women of Ayodhyä; çrutvä—hearing; drañöum—to see; samäyayuù—came.

     When He came with Sétä and with His army, the women of Ayodhyä went to see the joy of the Raghus.

Text 44

vékñya taà moham äpannä
     mürchitäù prema-vihvaläù
tepus tapas täù säräyü-
     tére räma-dhåta-vratäù

     vékñya—seeing; tam—Him; moham—agitation; äpannäù—attained; mürchitäù—fainted; prema—with love; vihvaläù—overcome; tepus tapaù—they performed austerities; täù—they; säräyü—of the Saräyü river; tére—on the shore; räma-dhåta-vratäù—with a vow to attain Lord Räma.

     Seeing Him, they become bewildered and fainted, overcome with love. With a vow to attain Lord Räma they performed austerities on the Saräyü's bank.

Text 45

äkäça-väg abhüt täsäà
     dväparänte manorathaù
bhaviñyati na sandehaù
     kälindé-téra-je vane

     äkäça—from the sky; väk—a voice; abhüt—was; täsäm—of them; dväpara—of Dväpara-yuga; ante—at the end; manorathaù—desire; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; sandehaù—doubt; kälindé—of the Yamunä; téra—on the bank; je—born; vane—in the forest.

     A voice from the sky (said) to them, "At the end of Dväpara-yuga, in the forest by the Yamunä's shore, (your) desire will be fulfilled. Of this there is no doubt."

Text 46

pitur väkyäd yadä rämo
     daëòakäkhyaà vanaà gataù
cacära sétayä särdhaà
     lakñmaëena dhanuñmatä

     pituù—of His father; väkyät—by the statement; yadä—when; rämaù—Räma; daëòaka—Daëòaka; äkhyam—named; vanam—to the forest; gataù—gone; cacära—went; sétayä—Sétä; särdham—with; lakñmaëena—and Lakñmaëa; dhanuñmatä—the expert bowman.

     Then, because of His father's words, He went with Sétä and the expert bowman Lakñmaëa to the Daëòaka forest.

Text 47

gopälopäsakäù sarve
     daëòakäraëya-väsinaù
dhyäyantaù satataà mäà vai
     räsärthaà dhyäna-tat-paräù

     gopäla—of Lord Gopäla; upäsakäù—worshipers; sarve—all; daëòakäraëya-väsinaù—the residents of the Daëòaka forest; dhyäyantaù—meditating; satatam—always; mäm—on Me; vai—indeed; räsa—the räsa dance; artham—for the purpose; dhyäna-tat-paräù—rapt in meditation.

     All the sages in the Daëòaka forest were worshipers of Lord Gopäla. To attain the räsa dance they always meditated on Me.

Text 48

yeñäm äçramam äsadya
     dhanur-bäëa-dharo yuvä
teñäà dhyäne gato rämo
     jaöä-mukuöa-maëòitaù

     yeñäm—of whom; äçramam—the hermitage; äsadya—attaining; dhanuù—bow; bäëa—and arrows; dharaù—holding; yuvä—young; teñäm—of them; dhyäne—in meditation; gataù—gone; rämaù—räma; jaöä-mukuöa-maëòitaù—decorated with matted locks of hair.

     He came to their äçrama as a youth carrying bow and arrows. Then He appeared in their meditation as a sage with matted hair.

Text 49

anyäkåtià te taà vékñya
     paraà vismita-mänasäù
dhyänäd utthäya dadåçuù
     koöi-kandarpa-sannibham

     anya—another; äkåtim—form; te—they; tam—Him; vékñya—seeing; param—then; vismita—surprised; mänasäù—at heart; dhyänät—from meditation; utthäya—rising; dadåçuù—they saw; koöi—millions; kandarpa—of Kämadeva's; sannibham—like.

     Surprised at heart by seeing this other form, they rose from their meditation and saw Lord Räma, who was like millions of Kämadevas.

Text 50

ücus te 'yaà nu gopälo
     vaàçé-vetre vinä prabhuù
itthaà vicärya manasä
     nemuç cakruù stutià paräm

     ücuù—said; te—they; ayam—He; nu—indeed; gopälaù—is Gopäla; vaàçé—a flute; vetre—and stick; vinä—without; prabhuù—the Lord; ittham—thus; vicärya—thinking; manasä—with their heart; nemuù—bowed down; cakruù—did; stutim—prayers; paräm—great.

     They said, "He is Lord Gopäla, who has come without His flute and stick." Thinking in this way in their hearts, they bowed down and offered eloquent prayers.

Text 51

varaà våëéta munayaù
     çré-rämas tän uväca ha
yathä sétä tathä sarve
     bhüyaù sma iti vädinaù

     varam—a benediction; våëéta—please choose; munayaù—O sages; çré-rämaù—Çré Räma; tän—to them; uväca—said; ha—indeed; yathä—as; sétä—Sétä; tathä—so; sarve—all; bhüyaù sma—let us become; iti—thus; vädinaù—saying.

     Çré Räma said to them, "O sages, please choose a benediction." They said, "As Sétä is, so let us all become."

Text 52

çré-räma uväca 
yathä hi lakñmaëo bhrätä
     tathä prärthyo varo yadi
adyaiva sa-phalo bhävyo
     bhavadbhir mat-prasaìgataù

     çré-rämaù uväca—Çré Räma said; yathä—as; hi—indeed; lakñmaëaù—Lakñmaëa; bhrätä—brother; tathä—so; prärthyaù—requested; varaù—benediction; yadi—if; adya—today; eva—indeed; sa-phalaù—fruitful; bhävyaù—will be; bhavadbhiù—by you; mat—of Me; prasaìgataù—by the association.

     Çré Räma said: If you had asked this of My brother Lakñmaëa, I would arrange that today your wish would bear its fruit.

Text 53

sétä yatheti väkyena
     durghaöo durlabho varaù
eka-patné-vrato 'haà vai
     maryädä-puruñottamaù

     sétä—Siätä; yathä—as; iti—thus; väkyena—by the statement; durghaöaù—impossible; durlabhaù—unattainable; varaù—benediction; eka—one; patné—wife; vrataù—vow; aham—I; vai—indeed; maryädä—of the rules of religion; puruña—of persons; uttamaù—the best.

     This request, to become "as Sétä is" is impossible and can never be granted. I have vowed to accept only one wife, and I am the best of they who follow the rules of religion.

Text 54

tasmät tu mad-vareëäpi
     dväparänte bhaviñyatha
manorathaà kariñyämi
     bhavatäà väïchitaà param

     tasmät—therefore; tu—indeed; mat—of Me; vareëa—by the benediction; api—also; dväpara-ante—at the end of Dväpara-yuga; bhaviñyatha—you will become; manoratham—desire; kariñyämi—I will do; bhavatäm—of you; väïchitam—desired; param—then.

     For this reason, by My benediciton, at the end of Dväpara-yuga you will become (as She). Then I will fulfill your wish.

Text 55

iti datvä varaà rämas
     tataù païcavatéà gataù
parëa-çälaà samäsädya
     vana-väsaà cakära ha

     iti—thus; datvä—having given; varam—benediction; rämaù—Räma; tataù—then; païcavatém—to the Pa 24cavaté forest; gataù—went; parëa—of leaves; çälam—a cottage; samäsadya—attaining; vana—in the forest; väsam—residence; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     After giving this benediction, Räma went to Pa 24cavaté. He went to a leaf-hut, and there He lived in the forest.

Text 56

tad-darçana-smara-rujaù
     pulindyaù prema-vihvaläù
çrémat-päda-rajo dhåtvä
     pränäàs tyaktuà samudyatäù

     tat—of Him; darçana—by the sight; smara—with amorous desires; rujaù—agitated; pulindyaù—Pulinda girls; prema—with love; vihvaläù—overcome; çrémat—of the handsome Lord; päda—of the feet; rajaù—the dust; dhåtvä—holding; pränän—life; tyaktum—to abandon; samudyatäù—were ready.

     When they saw Him, some aborigine girls became tortured with lust. Overcome with love, they grasped the dust of His feet, intent on then giving up their lives.

Text 57

brahmacäri-vapur bhütvä
     rämas tatra samägataù
uväca präëa-santyägaà
     mä küryata striyo våthä

     brahmacäri—of a brahmacäri; vapuù—the form; bhütvä—becoming; rämaù—Räma; tatra—there; samägataù—went; uväca—said; präëa—of life; santyägam—giving up; mä—don't; küryata—do; striyaù—O women; våthä—uselessly.

     Assuming the form of a brahmacäré, Räma went to them and said, "O women, do not give up your lives without good reason.

Text 58

våndävane dväparänte
     bhavitä vo manorathaù
ity uktvä brahmacäré tu
     tatraiväntarädhéyata

     våndävane—in Våndävana; dväpara-ante—at the end of Dväpara-yuga; bhavitä—will become; vaù—of you; manorathaù—the desire; iti—thus; uktvä—saying; brahmacäré—the brahmacäré; tu—certainly; tatra—there; eva—indeed; antarädhéyata—disappeared.

     "In Våndävana, at the end of Dväpara-yuga, your desire will be fulfilled." Saying this, the brahmacäré disappeared.

Text 59

atha rämo vänarendrai
     rävaëädén niçäcarän
jitvä laìkäm etya sétä-
     puñpakena puraà yayau

     atha—then; rämaù—Räma; vänara—of monkeys; indraiù—with the kings; rävaëa-ädén—beginning with rävaëa; niçäcarän—demons, who move in the night; jitvä—defeating; laìkäm—Laìkä; etya—going; sétä—Sétä; puñpakena—on a flower-chariot; puram—to His own city; yayau—went.

     Then, aided by the monkey-kings, Räma defeated the nocturnal demons headed by Rävaëa, entered Laìkä and, on a flower-chariot carrying Sétä, returned to His own city.

Text 60

sétäà tatyäja räjendro
     vane lokäpavädataù
aho satäm api bhuvi
     bhavanaà bhüri-duùkha-dam

     sétäm—Sétä; tatyäja—renouncing; räja—of kings; indraù—the king; vane—in the forest; loka—of the people; apavädataù—because of the criticism; ahaù—ah; satäm—of the saintly devotees; api—also; bhuvi—in the world; bhavanam—manifestation; bhüri—great; duùkha—pain; dam—giving.

     Then, because of the criticism of the ordinary people, Räma, the king of kings, abandoned Sétä in the forest. Ah, this brought great pain to the saintly devotees in the world.

Text 61

yadä yadäkarod yajïaà
     rämo rajéva-locanaù
tadä tadä svarëamayéà
     sétäà kåtvä vidhänataù

     yadä yadä—whenever; akarot—performed; yajïam—a sacrifice; rämaù—Räma; rajéva—lotus; locanaù—eyed; tadä—then; tadä—then; svarëamayém—golden; sétäm—Sétä; kåtvä—making; vidhänataù—according to the rules of religion.

     Whenever he performed a yajïa, lotus-eyed Räma, following the rules of religion, had made a golden Deity of Sétä.

Text 62

yajïa-sétä-samüho 'bhün
     mandire räghavasya ca
täç caitanya-ghanä bhütvä
     rantuà rämaà samägataù

     yajïa-sétä-samühaù—a multitude of these Deities; abhüt—was; mandire—in the palace; räghavasya—of Räma; ca—and; täù—they; caitanya-ghanä bhütvä—having come to life; rantum—to enjoy; rämam—to Räma; samägataù—went.

     In Räma's palace there were many of these yajïa Deities of Sétä. (One day) they came to life and approached Räma to enjoy (with Him).

Text 63

tä äha raghu-vaàçendro
     nähaà gåhnämi he priyäù
tadocus täù prema-parä
     rämaà daçarathätmajam

     täù—to them; äha—said; raghu-vaàça-indraù—the king of the Raghu dynasty; na—not; aham—I; gåhnämi—I accept; he—O; priyäù—O beloveds; tadä—then; ücuù—said; täù—they; prema-paräù—full of love; rämam—to Räma; daçaratha—of Daçaratha; ätmajam—the son.

     To them Räma, the king of the Raghu dynasty, said,  O beloved wives, I cannot accept you". Then, filled with love, they said to Räma, the son of Daçaratha, . . .

Text 64

kathaà cäsmän na gåhnäsi
     bhajantér maithiléù satéù
ardhäìgé yajïa-käleñu
     satataà kärya-sädhinéù

     katham—why?; ca—and; asmän—us; na—not; gåhnäsi—You accept; bhajantéù—the worshiping; maithiléù satéù—chaste women of Mithilä; ardha—half; aìgé—Your body; yajïa—of the yajïa; käleñu—at the times; satatam—always; kärya-sädhinéù—performing duties with You.

 . . . "Why do You not accept us? We are all Sétä, the chaste daughter of the king of Mithilä. We are half of Your body. At the time of the yajïas we were Your assistants.

Text 65

dharmiñöhas tvaà çruti-dharo
     'dharmavad bhäñase katham
karaà gåhitvä tyajasi
     tataù päpam aväpsyasi

     dharmiñöhaù—religious; tvam—You; çruti-dharaù—aware of the teachings of the Vedas; adharmavat—like an impious person; bhäñase—You speak; katham—why?; karam—hand; gåhitvä—taking; tyajasi—You reject; tataù—then; päpam—sin; aväpsyasi—You will attain.

     "You are a pious person. You know the teaching of the Vedas. Why do You speak as one who is impious? First You take our hand and then You reject us. From this You will incur sin."

Text 66

çré-räma uväca 
samécénaà vacaù satyaà
     yuñmäbhir gaditaà ca me
eka-patné-vrato 'haà hi
     räjarñiù sétayaikayä

     çré-rämaù uväca—Çré Räma said; samécénam—right; vacaù—statement; satyam—truth; yuñmäbhiù—by you; gaditam—said; ca—also; me—of Me; eka—one; patné—wife; vrataù—vow; aham—I; hi—Indeed; räja—king; åñiù—sage; sétayä—by Sétä; ekayä—alone.

     Çré Räma said: Your words are right. What you say to Me is true. (Still,) I am religious king, and I have vowed to accept only Sétä as My wife.

Text 67

tasmäd yüyaà dväparänte
     puëye våndävane vane
bhaviñyathä kariñyämi
     yuñmäkaà tu manoratham

     tasmät—therefore; yüyam—you; dväpara—of Dväpara-yuga; ante—at the end; puëye—spiritual; våndävane—in Våndävana; vane—forest; bhaviñyatha—you will be; kariñyämi—I will do; yuñmäkam—of you; tu—certainly; manoratham—the desire.

     Therefore at the end of Dväpara-yuga you will take birth in the spiritual land of Våndävana, and there I will fulfill your desire.

Text 68

tä vraje 'pi bhaviñyanti
     yajïa-sétäç ca gopikäù
anyäsäà caiva gopénäà
     lakñaëaà çåëu tad vidhe

     tç—they;a vraje—in Vraja; api—and; bhaviñyanti—will be; yajïa-sétäù—the yajï-sétäs; ca—also; gopikäù—gopés; anyäsäm—of other; ca—also; eva—indeed; gopénäm—gopés; lakñaëam—characteristics; çåëu—please hear; tat—that; vidhe—O Brahmä.

     These yajïa Deities of Sétä will also become gopés in Vraja. Now hear, O Brahmä, of the other gopés.

Chapter Five
Bhagavad-ägamanodyoga-püraëa
The Lord's Appearance

Texts 1 and 2

çré-bhagavän uväca

ramä-vaikuëöha-väsinyaù
     çvetadvépa-sakhé-janäù
ürdhva-vaikuëöha-väsinyas
     tathäjita-padäçrayäù

çré-lokäcala-väsinyaù
     çré-sakhyo 'pi samudra-jäù
tä gopyo 'pi bhaviñyanti
     lakñmé-pati-varäd vraje

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; ramä-vaikuëöha-väsinyaù—the women of Ramä-Vaikuëöha; çvetadvépa-sakhé-janäù—the women of Çvetadvépa; ürdhva-vaikuëöha-väsinyaù—the women of Urdhva-Vaikuëöha; tathä—so; ajita-pada-äçrayaù—the women who have taken shelter of Lord Ajita; çré-lokäcala-väsinyaù—the women of Lokäcala; çré-sakhyo api samudra-jäù—the women born from the ocean; täù—they; gopyaù—gopés; api—also; bhaviñyanti—will become; lakñmé-pati—of Lord Näräyaëa, the husband of Lakñmé; varät—from the benediction; vraje—in Vraja.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: The women of Ramä-Vaikuëöha, the women of Çvetadvépa, the women of Urdhva-Vaikuëöha, the women who have taken shelter of Lord Ajita's feet, the women of Lokäcala, and the daughters of Varuëa will become gopés in Vraja because of a benediction offered by Lord Näräyaëa, the husband of Lakñmé.

Text 3

käçcid divyä adivyäç ca
     tathä tri-guëa-våttayaù
bhümi-gopyo bhaviñyanti
     puëyair nänä-vidhaiù kåtaiù

     käçcit—some; divyäù—women of the heavenly planets; adivyäù—women not from the heavenly planets; ca—and; tathä—so; tri-guëa-våttayaù—the actions of the three modes; bhümi—on the earth; gopyaù—gopés; bhaviñyanti—will become; puëyaiù—by pious deeds; nänä-vidhaiù—various; kåtaiù—done.

     Some women from the heavenly planets, some women not from the heavenly planets, and some women acting in the three modes will, because of various kinds of pious activities, become gopés on the earth. 

Text 4

yajïävatäraà ruciraà
     ruci-putraà divas-patim
mohitäù pratibhävena
     vékñya deva-jana-striyaù

     yajïä—as; avatäram—incarnation; ruciram—handsome; ruci-putram—the son of Ruci; divaù—of the heavenly planets; patim—the master; mohitäù—charmed; préti-bhävena—with love; vékñya—seeing; deva-jana-striyaù—the demigoddesses. 

     When the saw handsome Yajïa-avatära, who is the son of Ruci and the master of the heavenly planets, the demigoddesses were overcome with love for Him.

Text 5

täç ca devala-väkyena
     tapas tepur himäcale
bhaktyä paramayä tä me
     gopyo bhävyä vraje vidhe

     täù—they; ca—also; devala—of Devala Muni; väkyena—by the words; tapas tepuù—performed austerities; himäcale—in the Himalayas; bhaktyä—with devotion; paramayä—great; täù—they; me—My; gopyaù—gopés; bhävyäù—will be; vraje—in Vraja; vidhe—O Brahmä.

     On Devala Muni's advice with great devotion to Me they performed austerities in the Himalayas. O Brahmä, they will become gopés in Vraja.

Text 6

antarhite bhagavati
     deve dhanvantarau bhuvi
auñadhyo duùkham äpannä
     niñphalä bhärate 'bhavan

     antarhite—disappeared; bhagavati deve dhanvantarau—when Lord Dhanvantari; bhuvi—in the earth; auñadhyaù—medicines; duùkham—unhappiness; äpannä—attained; niñphalä—fruitless; bhärate—in Bhärata-varña; abhavan—became.

     When Lord Dhanvantari disappeared from the earth, all the medicines in Bhärata-varña became unhappy. They all became useless and ineffective.

Text 7

siddhy-arthaà täs tapas tepuù
     striyo bhütvä manoharäù
catur-yuge vyatéte tu
     prasanno 'bhüd dhariù param

     siddhi—perfection; artham—for the purpose; täù—they; tapas tepuù—performed austerities; striyaù—women; bhütvä—becoming; manoharäù—beautiful; catur-yuge—when the four yugas; vyatéte—had passed; tu—indeed; prasannaù—pleased; abhüt—became; dhariù—Lord Hari; param—then.

     To regain their powers they transformed themselves into beautiful women and performed austerities. When four yugas had passed Lord Hari became pleased with them.

Text 8

varaà våëéta cety uktam
     çrutvä näryo mahä-vane
taà dåöövä moham äpannä
     ücur bhärtä bhavätra naù

     varam—a benediction; våëéta—choose; ca—also; iti-thus; uktam—said; çrutvä—hearing; naryaù—the women; mahä-vane—in the great forest; tam—Him; dåöövä—seeing; moham äpannä—became enchanted; ücuù—said; bhärtä—husband; bhava—become; atra—here; naù—of us.

     Seeing the Lord in a great forest, they became completely enchanted by Him. Hearing Him say, "Please choose a benediction," they said, "Please become our husband here". 

Text 9

çré-harir uväca 
våndävane dväparänte
     latä bhütvä manoharäù
bhaviñyatha striyo räse
     kariñyämi vacaç ca vaù

     çré-hariù uväca—Çré Hari said; våndävane—in Våndävana; dväpara-ante—at the end of Dväpara-yuga; latäù—vines; bhütvä—becoming; manoharäù—beautiful; bhaviñyatha—you will become; striyaù—women; räse—in the räsa dance; kariñyämi—I will make; vacaù—words; ca—also; vaù—of you.

     Çré Hari said: In Våndävana, at the end of Dväpara-yuga, you will become flowering vines and then you will change into women in the arena of the räsa dance. I promise this to you.

Text 10

çré-bhagavän uväca 
bhakti-bhäva-samäyuktä
     bhüri-bhägyä varäìganäù
latä-gopyo bhaviñyanti
     våndäraëye pitämaha

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; bhakti-bhäva—with devotional love; samäyuktäù—endowed; bhüri—very; bhägyäù—fortunate; vara-aìganäù—beautiful women; latä—vines; gopyaù—gopés; bhaviñyanti—will be; våndäraëye—in Våndävana; pitämaha—O Brahmä.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: In Våndävana they will become beautiful and very fortunate flowering-vine gopés filled with love (for Me).

Text 11

jälandharyaç ca yä näryo
     vékñya våndä-patià harim
ücur vayaà hariù säkñäd
     asmäkaà tu varo bhavet

     jälandharyaù—the women of Jälandhara; ca—and; yäù—who; näryaù—women; vékñya—seeing; våndä-patim—the husband of Våndä; harim—Lord Hari; ücuù—said; vayam—we; hariù—Lord Hari; säkñät—directly; asmäkam—of us; tu—indeed; varaù—choice; bhavet—is.

     When the women of the Jälandhara country saw Lord Hari, the husband of Våndä, they said (to themselves), "May Lord Hari be our chosen husband".

Text 12

äkäça-väg abhüt täsäà
     bhajatäçu ramä-patim
yathä våndä tathä yüyaà
     våndäraëye bhaviñyatha

     äkäça-väk—a voice from the sky; abhüt—was; täsäm—of them; bhajata—worship; äçu—at once; ramä-patim—the husband of the goddess of fortune; yathä—as; våndä—Våndä; tathä—so; yüyam—you; våndäraëye—in Våndävana; bhaviñyatha—will become.

     Then a voice from the sky said to them, "Worship Lord Näräyaëa, the husband of Ramä, and in Våndävana you will become like Våndä."

Text 13

samudra-kanyäù çré-matsyaà
     harià dåöövä ca mohitäù
tä hi gopyo bhaviñyanti
     çré-matsyasya varäd vraje

     samudra-kanyäù—the daughters of Varuëa; çré-matsyam—Çré Matsya; harim—Lord Harim; dåöövä—having seen; ca—and; mohitäù—enchanted; täù—they; hi—indeed; gopygopés; bhaviñyanti—will become; çré-matsyasya—of Çré Matsya; varät—by the benediction; vraje—in Vraja.

     When Varuëa's daughters saw Lord Hari as Çré Matsya, they became bewildered with love for Him. By Lord Matsya's benediction they will become gopés in Vraja.

Text 14

äséd räjä påthuù säkñän
     mamäàçaç caëòa-vikramaù
jitvä çatrün nåpa-çreñöho
     dharäà kämän dudoha saù

     äsét—was; räjä påthuù—King Påthu; säkñät—directly; mama—My; äàçaù—partial incarnation; caëòa-vikramaù—powerful; jitvä—after conquering; çatrün—His enemies; nåpa-çreñöhaù—the best of kings; dharäm—from the earth; kämän—desires; dudoha—milked; saù—He.

     There was a powerful king named Påthu who was a partial incarnation of Me. After defeating His enemies, He, the best of kings, milked many desirable things from the earth.

Text 15

barhiñmati-bhaväs tatra
     påthuà dåöövä pura-striyaù
atreù samépam ägatya
     tä ücur moha-vihvaläù

     barhiñmati-bhaväù—born in Barhiñmaté; tatra—there; påthum—Påthu; dåöövä—seeing; pura-striyaù—women of the city; atreù—of Atri Muni; samépam—near; ägatya—arriving; täù—they; ücuù—said; moha-vihvaläù—overcome with love.

     When the women of Barhiñmati City saw Lord Påthu they became overwhelmed with love for Him. Approaching Atri Muni, they said:

Text 16

ayaà tu räja-räjendraù
     påthuù påthula-vikramaù
kathaà varo bhaven no vai
     tad vada tvaà mahä-mune

     ayam—He; tu—indeed; räja—of kings; räja—of kings; indraù—the king; påthuù—Påthu; påthula-vikramaù—very powerful; katham—how?; varaù—husband; bhaven—may be; naù—of us; vai—certainly; tat—that; vada—tell; tvam—you; mahä-mune—O great sage.

     "O great sage, please tell us how powerful Påthu, the king of the kings of kings, may become our husband."

Text 17

çré-atrir uväca 
go-dohaà kurutäçv adya
     påthvéyaà dhäraëämayé
sarvaà däsyati vo durgaà
     manoratha-mahärëavam

     çré-atriù uväca—Atri said; go-doham—cow's milk; kuruta—do; äçu—at once; adya—now; påthvé iyam—the earth; dharaëämayé—in meditation; sarvam—everything; däsyati—will give; vaù—to you; durgam—difficult to attain; manoratha—of desires mahä-arëavam—the great ocean.

     Çré Atri Muni said: In meditation make an offering of milk to her and the earth will give you a great and impassable ocean of fulfilled desires.

Text 18

çré-bhagavän uväca 
manorathaà praduduhur
     manaù-pätreëa täç ca gäm
tasmäd gopyo bhaviñyanti
     våndäraëye pitämaha

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; manoratham—desire; praduduhuù—milked; manaù—of the mind; pätreëa—with a milk-pail; täù—they; ca—also; gäm—the earth; tasmät—from that; gopyaù—gopés; bhaviñyanti—will become; våndäraëye—in Våndävana; pitämaha—O Brahmä.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Using their thoughts as a milk-pail, they milked their desire from the cow-earth. In this way they will become gopés in Våndävana, O Brahmä.

Text 19

käma-senä-mohanärthaà
     divyä apsaraso varäù
näräyaëasya sahasä
     babhuvur gandha-mädane

     käma—of Kämadeva; senä—the army; mohana—bewilderment; artham—for the purpose; divyä—heavenly; apsarasaù—Apsarä girls; varäù—best; näräyaëasya—of Näräyaëa; sahasä—at once; babhuvuù—became; gandha-mädane—on Gandhamädana Mountain.

     To bewilder Kämadeva's army, on Mount Gandhamädana Näräyaëa Åñi manifested a host of the most beautiful divine Apsarä girls.

Text 20

bhärtå-kämäç ca tä äha
     siddho näräyaëo muniù
manoratho vo bhavitä
     vraje gopyo bhaviñyatha

     bhärtå—as their husband; kämäù—desiring; ca—also; täù—to them; äha—said; siddhaù—perfect; näräyaëo muniù—Näräyaëa Åñi; manorathaù—the desire; vaù—of you; bhavitä—will be; vraje—in Vraja; gopyaù—gopés; bhaviñyatha—you will become.

     When they wished Him as their husband, perfect Näräyaëa Åñi said to them, "You will become gopés in Vraja. Then your desire will be fulfilled."

Text 21

striyaù sutala-väsinyo
     vämanaà vékñya mohitäù
tapas taptvä bhaviñyanti
     gopyo våndävane vidhe

     striyaù—women; sutala—in Sutala; väsinyaù—residing; vämanam—Lord Vämana; vékñya—seeing; mohitäù—charmed; tapas taptvä—performing austerities; bhaviñyanti—will be; gopyaù—gopés; våndävane—in Våndävana; vidhe—O Brahmä.

     When the women of Sutalaloka saw Lord Vämana, they fell in love with Him and (to attain Him) they performed austerities. They will become gopé in Vraja, O Brahmä.

Text 22

nägendra-kanyakäù çeñaà
     bhejur bhaktyä varecchayä
saìkarñaëasya räsärthaà
     bhaviñyanti vraje ca täù

     näga—of snakes; indra—of the king; kanyakäù—the daughters; çeñam—Lord Çeña; bhejuù—worshiped; bhaktyä—with devotion; vara—a husband; icchayä—with the desire; saìkarñaëasya—of Lord Saìkarñaëa; räsa—of the räsa dance; artham—for the purpose; bhaviñyanti—will be; vraje—in Vraja; ca—also; täù—they.

     Snake princesses that, desiring Him as their husband, worshiped Lord Çeña, will take birth in Vraja (to attain) Lord Balaräma's räsa dance.

Text 23

kaçyapo vasudevaç ca
     devaké cäditiù parä
çüraù präëo dhruvaù so 'pi
     devako 'vatariñyati

     kaçyapaù—Kaçyapa; vasudevaù—Vasudeva; ca—and; devaké—Devaké; ca—also; äditiù—Aditi; parä—great; çüraù—Çürasena; präëaù—life; dhruvaù—Dhruva; saù—he; api—indeed; devakaù—Deavaka; avatariñyati—will descend.

     Kaçyapa will descend as Vasudeva, exalted Aditi as Devaké, Präëa Vasu as Çürasena, and Dhruva Vasu as Devaka.

Text 24

vasuç caivoddhavaù säkñäd
     dakño 'krüro dayä-paraù
hådéko dhanadaç caiva
     kåtavarmä tv apäà patiù

     vasuù—Vasu; ca—also; eva—indeed; uddhavaù—Uddhava; säkñät—directly; dakñaù—Dakña; akrüraù—Akrüra; dayä-paraù—merciful; hådékaù—Hådéka; dhanadaù—Kuvera; ca—also; eva—indeed; kåtavarmä—Kåtavarmä; tindeed; apäm—of waters; patiù—the lord.

     Vasu will decsned as Uddhava, Dakña as kind Akrüra, Kuvera as Hådéka, and Varuëa as Kåtavarmä.

Text 25

gadaù pracénabarhiç ca
     maruto hy ugrasena ut
tasya rakñaà kariñyämi
     räjyaà datvä vidhänataù

     gadaù—Gada; pracénabarhiù—Pracénabarhi; ca—and; marutaù—Maruta; hi—indeed; ugrasena—Ugrasena; ut—indeed; tasya—of him; rakñam—protection; kariñyämi—I will do; räjyam—the kingdom; datvä—having given; vidhänataù—properly.

     Pracénabarhi will descend as Gada and Maruta as Ugrasena. I will give the kingdom to Ugrasena and I will protect him.

Text 26

yuyudhänaç cämbaréñaù
     prahlädaù satyakis tathä
kñéräbdhiù çäntanuù säkñäd
     bhéñmo droëo vasüttamaù

     yuyudhänaù—Yuyudhäna; ca—and; ambaréñaù—Ambaréña; prahlädaù—Prahläda; satyakiù—Satyakis; tathä—so; kñéräbdhiù—the ocean of milk; çäntanuù—Çäntanu; säkñät—directly; bhéñmaù—Bhéñma; droëaù—Droëa; vasüttamaù—the best of the Vasus.

     Ambaréña will descend as Yuyudhäna, Prahläda as Satyaki, Kñéräbdhi as Çantanu, and Droëa Vasüttama as Bhéñma.

Text 27

çälyaç caiva divodäso
     dhåtaräñöro bhago raviù
päëòuù puñä satäà çreñöho
     dharmo räjä yudhiñöhiraù

     çälyaù—Çälya; ca—certainly; eva—indeed; divodäsaù—Divodäsa; dhåtaräñöraù—Dhåtaräñöra; bhagaù—Bhaga; raviù—Ravi; päëòuù—Päëòu; puñä—Puñä; satäm—of the devotees; çreñöhaù—the best; dharmaù—Dharma; räjä—king; yudhiñöhiraù—Yudhiñöhira.

     Divodäsa will decsend as Çälya, Bhaga as Dhåtaräñöra, Puñä as Päëòu, and King Dharma, the best of the devotees, as Yudhiñöhira.

Text 28

bhémo väyur baliñöhaç ca
     manuù sväyambhuvo 'rjunaù
çatarüpä subhadrä ca
     savitä karëa eva hi

     bhémaù—Bhéma; väyuù—Väyu; baliñöhaù—strong; ca—also; manuù—Manu; sväyambhuvaù—Sväyambhuva; arjunaù—Arjuna; çatarüpä—Çatarüpä; subhadrä—Subhadrä; ca—also; savitä—Savitä; karëa—Karëa; eva—indeed; hi—certainly.

     Powerful Väyu will descend as Bhéma, Sväyambhuva Manu as Arjuna, Çatarüpä as Subhadrä, and Savitä as Karëa.

Text 29

nakulaù sahadevaç ca
     småtau dväv açviné-sutau
dhätä bählékavéraç ca
     vahnir droëaù pratäpavän

     nakulaù—Nakula; sahadevaù—Sahadeva; ca—and; småtau—considered; dväv açviné-sutau—the two Açviné-kumäras; dhätä—Dhätä; bählékavéraù—the hero Bähléka; ca—and; vahniù—Vahni; droëaù—Droëa; pratäpavän—powerful.

     The two Açviné-kumäras will descend as Nakula and Sahadeva. Dhätä will descend as heroic Bähléka, and powerful Vahni as Droëäcärya.

Text 30

duryodhanaù kaler aàço
     'bhimanyuù soma eva ca
drauëiù säkñäc chivasyäpi
     rüpaà bhümau bhaviñyati

     duryodhanaù—Duryodhana; kaleù—of Kali; aàçaù—a part; abhimanyuù—Abhimanyu; soma—Soma; eva—certainly; ca—indeed; drauëiù—Droëa's son Açvatthämä; säkñät—directly; çivasya—of Lord Çiva; api—also; rüpam—the form; bhümau—on the earth; bhaviñyati—will be.

     A partial incarnation of Kali will descend as Duryodhana. Soma will descend as Abhimanyu. Lord Çiva will place His own form on the earth as Droëäcärya's son Açvatthämä.

Text 31

itthaà yadoù kauraväëäm
     anyeñäà bhü-bhujäà nåëäm
kule kule bhavantaç ca
     sväàçaiù stribhir mad-äjïayä

     ittham—thus; yadoù—of the Yadus; kauraväëäm—of the Kurus; anyeñäm—of others; bhü-bhujäm—kings; nåëäm—human; kule kule—in family after family; bhavantaù—being; ca—also; sva—own; aàçaiù—partial expansions; stribhiù—with their wives; mat—of Me; äjïayä—by the order.

     In this way, by My order (the demigods) and their wives will take birth in the families of the Yadus, Kurus, and other human kings.

Text 32

ye ye 'vatärä me pürvaà
     teñäà räjïyo ramäàçakäù
bhaviñyä räja-räjïéñu
     sahasräëi ca ñoòaça

     ye ye—whoever; avatäräù—incarnations; me—of Me; pürvam—previously; teñäm—of Them; räjïyaù—kings; ramä—of the goddess of fortune; aàçakäù—partial expansions; bhaviñyäù—will be; räja-räjïéñu—in queens; sahasräëi—thousands; ca—and; ñoòaça—sixteen.

     Whenever in the past I incarnated in the world, the goddess of fortune would also incarnate as My queen. This time she will incarnate as My sixteen-thousand queens.

Text 33

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvä çré-haris tatra
     brahmäëaà kamaläsanam
divya-rüpäà bhagavatéà
     yogamäyäm uväca ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; uktvä—speaking; çré-hariù—Çré Hari; tatra—there; brahmäëam—to Brahmä; kamaläsanam—who sits on a lotus throne; divya-rüpam—whose form is spiritual; bhagavatém—goddess; yogamäyäm—Yogamäayä; uväca ha—said.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these words to the demigod Brahmä, who sits on a lotus throne, Çré Hari spoke to goddess Yogamäyä, whose form is spiritual.

Texts 34 and 35

çré-bhagavän uväca 
devakyäù saptamaà garbhaà
     sannikåñya mahä-mate
vasudevasya bharyäyäà
     kaàsa-träsa-bhayät punaù

nanda-vraje sthitäyäà ca
     rohiëyäà sanniveçaya
nanda-patnyäà bhava tvaà vai
     kåtvedaà karma cädbhutam

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; devakyäù—of Devaké; saptamam—the seventh; garbham—embryo; sannikåñya—dragging; mahä-mate+O noble-hearted one; vasudevasya—of Vasudeva; bharyäyäm—in the wife; kaàsa—of Kaàsa; träsa—of the fear; bhayät—of the fear; punaù—again; nanda—of Nanda; vraje—in Vraja; sthitäyäm—staying; ca—also; rohiëyäm—in Rohiëé; sanniveçaya—place; nanda-patnyäm—in Nanda's wife; bhava—be; tvam—you; vai—certainly; kåtvä—having done; idam—this; karma—work; ca—also; adbhutam—wonderful.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O noble-hearted one, take the seventh embryo from Vasudeva's wife Devaké and place it in Rohiëé, who is staying in Vraja out of fear of Kaàsa. When you have done that wonderful deed, you yourself become an embryo in Nanda's wife.

Text 36

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvä brahmä deva-gaëair
     natvä kåñëaà parät param
bhümim äçväsya väëébhiù
     sva-dhäma nijam äyayau

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; çrutvä—hearing; brahmä—Brahmä; deva-gaëaiù—with the demigods; natvä—bowing; kåñëam—to Lord Kåñëa; parät—than the greatest; param—greater; bhümim—the earth; äçväsya—consoling; väëébhiù—with words; sva-dhäma nijam—each to their own abode; äyayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing this, Brahmä and the demigods bowed down before Lord Kåñëa, who is greater than the greatest, and, comforted the earth-goddess, and each went to his own abode.

Text 37

paripürëatamaà säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaà viddhi maithila
kaàsädénäà vadhärthäya
     präpto 'yaà bhümi-maëòale

     paripürëatamaà säkñät—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; viddhi—know; maithila—O king of Mithilä; kaàsa—by Kaàsa; ädénäm—headed by; vadha—killing; arthäya—for the purpose; präptaù—attained; ayam—He; bhümi-maëòale—on the circle of the earth.

     O king of Mithilä, please understand that Çré Kåñëa, who went to the earth to kill the demons headed by Kaàsa, is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 38

roma-mätraà tanau jihvä
     bhavantétthaà yadä nåpa
tadäpi çré-hares tasya
     varëyate na guëo mahän

     roma-mätram—hairs; tanau—on the body; jihväù—tongues; bhavanti—are; ittham—then; yadä—when; nåpa—O king; tadä—then; api—even; çré-hareù—of Çré Hari; tasya—of Him; varëyate—is described; na—not; guëaù—glory; mahän—great.

     O king, If I had as many tongues as there are hairs on my body, I could still not properly describe Çré Hari's great and glorious qualities.

Text 39

nabhaù patanti vihagä
     yathä hy ätma-samaà nåpa
tathä kåñëa-gatià divyaà
     vadantéha vipaçcitaù

     nabhaù—in the sky; patanti—go; vihagäù—birds; yathä—as; hi—certainly; ätma—self; samam—equal; nåpa—O king; tathä—so; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; gatim—activities; divyam—transcendental; vadanti—say; iha—here; vipaçcitaù—the wise.

     O king, as different birds have different capacities to fly in the sky, so the wise philosophers have different capacities to describe Lord Kåñëa's transcendental activities.

Chapter Six
Kaàsa-bala-varëana
Description of Kaàsa's Strengtù

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
kaù kaàso 'yaà purä daityo
     mahä-bala-paräkramaù
tasya janmäëi karmäëi
     brühi devarñi-sattama

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; kaù—who?; kaàsaù—is Kaàsa; ayam—he; purä—before; daityaù—a demon; mahä-bala-paräkramaù—very powerful; tasya—of him; janmäëi—births; karmäëi—deeds; brühi—describe; devarñi-sattama—O great sage.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Who was this very powerful demon Kaàsa? O great sage, please describe his births and deeds.

Text 2

çré-närada uväca 
samudra-mathane pürvaà
     kälanemir mahäsuraù
yuyudhe viñëunä särdhaà
     yuddhe tena hato balät

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; samudra—of the ocean; mathane—in churning; pürvam—before; kälanemiù—Kälanemi; mahäsuraù—a great demon; yuyudhe—fought; viñëunä—Viñëu; särdham—with; yuddhe—in the fight; tena—by Him; hataù—killed; balät—by the strength.

     Çré Närada said: At the time of churning the ocean a great demon named Kälanemi fought with Lord Viñëu and was violently killed by Him.

Text 3

çukreëa jévitas tatra
     saïjévinyä sva-vidyayä
punar viñëuà yoddhu-käma
     udyogaà manasäkarot

     çukreëa—by Çukräcärya; jévitaù—brought to life; tatra—there; saïjévinyä—saïjiviné; sva-vidyayä—by his science; punaù—again; viñëum—with Viñëu; yoddhu—to fight; kämaù—desiring; udyogam—determination; manasä—with the mind; akarot—did.

     When with his saïjéviné science Çukräcärya revived him, in his heart Kälanemi yearned to fight again with Lord Viñëu.

Text 4

tapas tepe tadä daityo
     mandaräcala-sannidhau
nityaà dürvä-rasaà pétvä
     bhajan devaà pitämaham

     tapas tepe—performed austerities; tadä—then; daityaù—the demon; mandaräcala-sannidhau—at Mount Mandara nityam—regularly; durvä—of durvä grass; rasam—juice; pétvä—drinking; bhajan—worshiping; devaà pitämaham—the demigod Brahmä.

     On Mount Mandara he performed severe austerities, drinking dürvä-grass juice and worshiping the demigod Brahmä.

Text 5

divyeñu çata-varñeñu
     vyatéteñu pitämahaù
asthi-çeñaà sa-välmékaà
     varaà brühéty uväca tam

     divyeñu—celestial; çata—a hundred; varñeñu—years; vyatéteñu—passed; pitämahaù—Brahmä; asthi—only bones; çeñam—remaining; sa-välmékam—with an anthill; varam—benediction; brühi—say; iti—thus; uväca—said; tam—to him.

     When a hundred celestial years had passed all that remained of him was bones in an anthill. Then Brahmä said to him,  Ask for a benediction," and Kälanemi spoke a reply.

Text 6

kälanemir uväca 
brahmäëòe ye sthitä devä
     viñëu-mülä mahä-baläù
teñäà hastair na me måtyuù
     pürëänäm api mä bhavet

     kälanemiù uväca—Kälanemi said; brahmäëòe—in the universe; ye—who; sthitäù—stays; deväù—demigods; viñëu—Viñëu; müläù—at the root; mahä-baläù—very powerful; teñäm—of them; hastaiù—by the hands; na—not; me—of me; måtyuù—death; pürëänäm—all; api—even; mä—may not; bhavet—be.

     Kälanemi said: May my death not come from the hands of any or all of the very powerful demigods, who have Lord Viñëu as their root.

Text 7

çré-brahmoväca 
durlabho 'yaà varo daitya
     yas tvayä prarthitaù paraù
käläntare te praptaù syän
     mad-väkyaà na måñä bhavet

     çré-brahmä uväca—Çré Brahmä said; durlabhaù—difficult to attain; ayam—this; varaù—benediction; daitya—O demon; yaù—which; tvayä—by you; prarthitaù—is asked; paraù—great; käla-antare—at this time; te—by you; präptaù—attained; syät—is; mad-väkyam—my statement; na—not; måñä—false; bhavet—is.

     Çré Brahmä said: O demon, the benediction you request is difficult to attain. Still, you have now attained it. My words are not false.

Text 8

çré-närada uväca 
ugrasenasya patnyäà kau
     janma lebhe 'suraù punaù
kaumäre 'pi mahä-mallaiù
     satataà sa yuyodha ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ugrasenasya—of Ugrasena; patnyäm—in the wife; kau—evil; janma—birth; lebhe—attained; asuraù—the demon; punaù—again; kaumäre—in childhood; api—even; mahä—great; mallaiù—with wrestlers; satatam—always; saù—he; yuyodha ha—fought.

     Çré Närada said: In Ugrasena's wife the demon attained another demonic birth. Even in childhood he would regularly fight with great wrestlers.

Text 9

jaräsandho mägadhendro
     dig-jayärthé vinirgataù
yamunä-nikaöe tasya
     çibiro 'bhüd itas tataù

     jaräsandhaù—Jaräsandha; magadha—of Magadha; indraù—the king; dik—the directions; jaya—conquest; arthé—with the purpose; vinirgataù—went; yamunä-nikaöe—by the Yamunä; tasya—of him; çibiraù—camp; abhüt—was; itas tataù—here and there.

     Wishing to conquer all directions, Jaräsandha, the king of Magadha, set his royal camp at different places by the Yamunä's shore. 

Text 10

dvipaù kuvalayäpéòaù
     sahasra-dvipa-sattva-bhåt
babhaïja çåìkhala-bandhaà
     dudräva çibirän madé

     dvipaù—elephant; kuvalayäpéòaù—Kuvalayäpéòa; sahasra—of a thousand; dvipa—elephants; sattva—the strength; bhåt—having; babhaïja—broke; çåìkhala-bandham—chains; dudräva—ran; çibirät—from the camp; madé—maddened.

     Then the elephant Kuvalayäpéòa, who was strong as thousands of other elephants, became angry, broke his chains, and ran from the royal camp.

Text 11

nipätayan sa çibirän
     mandirän bhübhåtas taöän
raìga-bhümyäm äjagäma
     yatra kaàso 'pi yudhyati

     nipätayan—causing to fall; saù—he; çibirät—from the royal camp; mandirän—to the residences; bhübhåtasmountains; taöän—surfaces; raìga-bhümyäm—the arena; äjagäma—entered; yatra—where; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; api—even; yudhyati—fights.

     It ran from the royal camp to the mountains and entered an arena where Kaàsa was fighting.

Text 12

paläyiteñu malleñu
     kaàsas taà ca samägatam
çuëòä-daëòe saìgåhétvä
     pätayäm äsa bhü-tale

     paläyiteñu—fled; malleñu—when the wrestlers; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; tam—it; ca—also; samägatam—approached; çuëòä-daëòe—the trunk; saìgåhétvä—grasping; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—to the ground.

     When wrestlers fled and the elephant approached him, Kaàsa grabbed its trunk and threw it to the ground.

Text 13

punar gåhétvä hastäbhyäà
     bhrämayitvograsenajaù
jaräsandhasya senäyäà
     cékñepa daça-yojanam

     punaù—again; gåhétvä—grabbing; hastäbhyäm—with both hands; bhrämayitvä—whirling around; ugrasenajaù—Kaàsa; jaräsandhasya—of Jarasandha; senäyäm—into the army; cékñepa—threw; daça-yojanam—80 miles.

     Again grabbing it, Kaàsa threw it into Jaräsandha's army eighty miles away.

Text 14

tad adbhutaà balaà dåöövä
     prasanno magadheçvaraù
asti-präpté dadau kanye
     tasmai kaàsaya taà dvipam

     tat—this; adbhutam—amazing; balam—strength; dåöövä—seeing; prasannaù—pleased; magadheçvaraù—the king of Magadha; asti-präpti—Asti and Prapti; dadau—gave; kanye—two daughters; tasmai—to him; kaàsäya—to Kaàsa; tam—that; dvipam—elephant.

     Pleased by seeing this amazing strength, the king of Magadha gave his two daughters, Asti and Präpti, as well as that elephant, to Kaàsa.

Text 15

açvärbhudaà hasti-lakñaà
     rathänäà ca tri-lakñakam
ayutaà caiva däsénäà
     päribarhaà jarä-sutaù

     açva—horses; arbhudam—a hundred million; hasti—elephants; lakñam—a hundred thousand; rathänäm—of chariots; ca—also; tri-lakñakam—three hundred thousand; ayutam—ten thousand; ca—and; eva—indeed; däsénäm—maidservants; päribarham—wedding present; jarä-sutaù—Jaräsandha.

     For a wedding present Jaräsandha gave a hundred million horses, a hundred thousand elephants, three hundred thousand chariots, and ten thousand maidservants.

Text 16

dvandva-yodhé tataù kaàso
     bhuja-vérya-madotkaöaù
mähiñmatéà yayau véro
     'thaikäké caëòa-vikramaù

     dvandva-yodhi—eager to fight; tataù—then; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; bhuja-vérya-madotkaöaù—proud of the strength of his arms; mahiñmatém—to Mähiñmati; yayau—went; véraù—the hero; atha—then; ekäké—alone; caëòa-vikramaù—powerful.

     Then, very proud of the strength of his arms, and eager to fight, powerful Kaàsa went, all alone, to Mähiñmaté City.

Text 17

cäëüro muñöikaù küöaù
     çalas toçalakas tathä
mähiñmaté-pateù puträ
     mallä yuddha-jayaiñiëaù

     cäëüraù—Cäëüra; muñöikaù—Muñöika; küöaù—Küöa; çalaù—Çala; toçalakaù—Toçalaka; tathä—then; mähiñmaté-pateù—of the king of Mähiñmaté; puträù—the sons; malläù—wrestlers; yuddha—in battle; jaya—to defeat; aiñiëaù—wishing.

     Cäëüra, Muñöika, Küöa, Çäla, and Toçala, who were the sons of the king of Mähiñmaté, were wrestlers very eager to defeat their opponents in fighting.

Text 18

kaàsas tän äha sämnäpi
     duryuddhaà karavämahe
ahaà däso bhaveyaà vo
     bhavanto jayino yadi

     kaàsaù—Kaàsa; tän—to them; äha—said; sämnä—calmly; api—also; duryuddham—fight; karavämahe—let us do; aham—I; däsaù—slave; bhaveyam—will be; vaù—of you; bhavantaù—you; jayinaù—victorious; yadi—if.

     Kaàsa calmly said to them: "Let us fight. If you win, I will become your servant.

Text 19

ahaà jayé ced bhavato
     däsän sarvän karomy alam
sarveñäà paçyatäà teñäà
     nägaräëäà mahätmanäm
iti pratijïäà kåtvätha
     yuyudhe tair jayaiñibhiù

     aham—I; jayé—victorious; cet—if; bhavataù—you; däsän—servants; sarvän—all; karomi—I do; alam—greatly; sarveñäm—of all; paçyatäm—looking; teñäm—of them; nägaräëäm—living in the city; mahätmanäm—great souls; iti—thus; pratijïäm—promise; kåtvä—having done; atha—then; yuyudhe—fought; taiù—with them; jaya—victory; aiñibhiùdesiring.

     "If I win, I will make you all my servants." All these great fighters looked at him and agreed. Then Kaàsa fought with them and they tried to defeat him.

Text 20

yadägataà sa cäëüraà
     gåhétvä yädaveçvaraù
bhü-påööhe pothayäm äsa
     çabdam uccaiù samuccaran

     yadä—when; ägatam—came; saù—he; cäëüram—Cäëüra; gåhétvä—grabbing; yädaveçvaraù—the Yadu king; bhü-påööhe—on the ground; pothayäm äsa—threw; çabdam—sound; uccaiù—great; samuccaran—making.

     When Cäëüra rushed at him, Kaàsa made a great sound and threw him to the ground.

Text 21

tadäyäntaà muñöikäkhyaà
     muñöibhir yudhi durgamam
ekena muñöinä taà vai
     pätayäm äsa bhü-tale

     tadä—then; äyäntam—coming; muñöikäkhyam—named Muñöika; muñöibhiù—with fists; yudhi—in a fight; durgamam—great; ekena—with one; muñöinä—fist; tam—him; vai—indeed; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—to the ground.

     When Muñöika rushed at him with ferocious punches, with one punch Kaàsa knocked him to the ground.

Text 22

küöaà samägataà kaàso
     gåhétvä pädayoç ca tam
pätayitvä bhümi-madhye
     cékñepa gagane balät

     küöam—Küöa; samägatam—come; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; gåhétvä—grabbed; pädayoù—feet; ca—and; tam—him; pätayitvä—throwing; bhümi-madhye—on the ground; cékñepa—threw; gagane—in the sky; balät—violently.

     When Küöa rushed at him, Kaàsa knowcked him to the ground, grabbed his feet, and violently threw him into the sky.

Text 23

bhujam äsphoöya dhävantaà
     çalaà nétvä bhujena saù
pätayitvä punar nitvä
     bhümau taà vicakarña ha

     bhujam—arm; äsphoöya—waving; dhävantam—running; çalam—Çäla; nétvä—bringing; bhujena—by the arm; saù—he; pätayitvä—threw; punaù—again; nitvä—bringing; bhümau—on the ground; tam—him; vicakarña—dragged; ha—indeed.

     When Çala, waving his arms, rushed at him, Kaàsa grabbed an arm, pulled him down, and dragged him about.

Text 24

atha toçalakaà kaàso
     gåhétvä bhujayor balät
nipatya bhümav utthäpya
     cékñepa daça-yojanam

     atha—then; toçalakam—Toçala; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; gåhétvä—grabbing; bhujayoù—of the arms; balät—by the power; nipatya—falling; bhümau—on the ground; utthäpya—rising; cékñepa—threw; daça-yojanam—80 miles.

     Then Kaàsa grabbed Toçala, knocked him to the ground, and, by the power of his arms, threw him eighty miles away.

Text 25

däsa-bhäve ca tän kåtvä
     taiù särdhaà yädavädhipaù
mad-väkyena jagämäçu
     pravarñaëa-girià varam

     däsa-bhäve—the status of servants; ca—also; tän—them; kåtvä—making; taiù—them; särdham—with; yädavädhipaù—the king of the Yadus; mat—of me; väkyena—by the statement; jagäma—went; äçu—at once; pravarñaëa-girim—to Pravarñaëa Mountain; varam—great.

     Then Kaàsa made them all his servants and, on my advice, went with them to great Mount Pravarañaëa.

Text 26

tasmai nivedyäbhipräyaà
     yuyudhe vänareëa saù
dvividenäpi viàçatyä
     dinaiù kaàso hy aviçramam

     tasmai—to him; nivedya—appealing; abhipräyam—intention; yuyudhe—fought; vanareëa—with the gorilla; saù—he; dvividena—Dvivida; api—also; viàçatyä—for twenty; dinaiù—days; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; hi—indeed; aviçramam—without fatigue.

     After presenting his proposal before him, Kaàsa fought with the gorilla Dvivida for twenty days without becoming tired.

Text 27

dvivido girim utpatya
     cékñepa tasya mürdhani
kaàso girià gåhétvä ca
     tasyopari samäkñipat

     dvividaù—Dvivida; girim—a mountain; utpatya—uprooting; cékñepa—threw; tasya—of him; mürdhani—on the head; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; girim—a mountain; gåhétvä—grabbing; ca—also; tasya—him; upari—on; samäkñipat—threw.

     Dvivida uprooted a mountain and threw it on Kaàsa's head. Kaàsa also grabbed a mountain and threw it on Dvivida.

Text 28

dvivido muñöinä kaàsaà
     ghätayitvä nabho gataù
dhävan kaàsas ca taà nitvä
     pätayäm äsa bhü-tale

     dvividaù—Dvivida; muñöinä—with a fist; kaàsam—Kaàsa; ghätayitvä—hitting; nabhaù—to the sky; gataù—gone; dhävan—running; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; ca—also; tam—him; nitvä—bringing; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—on the ground.

     Dvivida punched Kaàsa and jumped into the sky. Kaàsa chased him and threw him to the ground.

Text 29

mürchitas tat-prahäreëa
     paraà kañmalatäà yayau
kñéëa-sattvas cürëitästhir
     däsa-bhävaà gatas tadä

     mürchitaù—unconscious; tat-prahäreëa—by that blow; param—great; kañmalatäm—depression; yayau—attained; kñéëa-sattvaù—weak; cürëita—crushed into a powder; asthiù—bones; däsa-bhävam—the state of a servant; gataù—attained; tadä—then.

     In this way Dvivida was knocked unconscious. Dispirited, weakened, and his bones broken, he became Kaàsa's servant.

Text 30

tenaivätha gataù kaàsa
     åñyämüka-vanaà tataù
tatra keçé mahä-daityo
     haya-rüpé ghana-svanaù

     tena—by this; eva—indeed; atha—then; gataù—went; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; åñyämüka-vanam—to Åñyämüka forest; tataù—then; tatra—there; keçé—Keçé; mahä-daityaù—a great demon; haya-rüpé—in the form of a horse; ghana-svanaù—thundering.

     Then Kaàsa went to Åñyamüka forest, where there was a great demon named Keçé, who had the form of a horse whinnying like thunder.

Text 31

muñöibhir ghätayitvä taà
     vaçé-kåtväruroha tam
itthaà kaàso mahä-véryo
     mahendräkhyaà girià yayau

     muñöibhiù—with punches; ghätayitvä—hitting; tam—him; vaçé-kåtvä—subduing; äruroha—climbed; tam—on him; ittham—thus; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; mahä-véryaù—very powerful; mahendräkhyam—named Mahendra; girim—to the mountain; yayau—went.

     Punching it again and again, Kaàsa subdued the horse. Mounting it, very powerful Kaàsa rode to Mount Mahendra.

Text 32

çata-väraà cojjahära
     girim utpatya daitya-räö
punas tatra sthitaà rämaà
     krodha-samrakta-locanam

pralayärka-prabhaà dåöövä
     nanäma çirasä munim
punaù pradakñiëé-kåtyo
     tad-aìghryor nipapäta ha

     çata—a hundred; väram—times; ca—also; ujjahära—lifting; girim—the hill; utpatya—uprooting; daitya-räö—the king of mountains; punaù—again; tatra—there; sthitam—placed; rämam—räma; krodha—with anger; samrakta—red; locanam—eyes; pralaya—of devastation; arka—of the sun; prabham—the splendor; dåöövä—seeing; nanäma—bowed down; çirasä—with his head; munim—to the sage; punaù—again; pradakñiëé-kåtyaù—circumambulating; tad-aìghryoù—at His feet; nipapäta—fell; ha—certainly.

     A hundred times the demon-king Kaàsa uprooted the mountain, held it high, and set it again in its place. When he saw Lord Paraçuräma, who was as effulgent as the sun at the time of cosmic dissolution, and whose eyes were now red with anger, Kaàsa bowed his head before the sage, circumambulated Him, and fell at His feet.

Text 34

tataù çänto bhärgavo 'pi
     kaàsaà präha mahogra-dåk
he kéöa karkaöé-dimbha
     tuccho 'si mañako yathä

     tataù—then; çäntaù—pacified; bhärgavaù—Paraçuräma; api—also; kaàsam—to Kaàsa; präha—said; mahä—very; ugra—ferocious; dåk—eyes; he—O; kéöa—worm; karkaöé—crab; dimbha—baby; tucchaù—insignificant; asi—you are; mañakaù—mosquito; yathä—as.

     Pacified by this, Paraçuräma, his eyes very fierce, said to Kaàsa, "O worm! O baby crab! You are insignificant as a mosquito.

Text 35

adyaiva tväà hanmi duñöa-
     kñatriyaà véra-mäninam
mat-samépe dhanur idaà
     lakña-bhära-samaà mahat

     adya—today; eva—indeed; tväm—you; hanmi—I will kill; duñöa—wicked; kñatriyam—kñatriya; véra—strong; mäninam—thinking yourself; mat-samépe—near Me; dhanuù—bow; idam—this; lakña-bhära-samam—as heavy as a hundred thousand bhäras; mahat—great.

     Today I will kill you, who are a wicked kñatriya falsely proud of his strength. This great bow by My side weighs a hundred thousand bhäras.    

Text 36

idaà ca viñëunä dattaà
     sambhave traipure yudhi
çambhoù karäd iha präptaà
     kñatriyäëäà vadhäya ca

     idam—this; ca—and; viñëunä—by Lord Viñëu; dattam—given; sambhave traipure yudhi—in the battle with Tripura; çambhoù—of Lord Çiva; karät—from the hand; iha—here; präptam—attained; kñatriyäëäm—of the kñatriyas; vadhäya—for the killing; ca—also.

     This bow was given by Lord Viñëu in the battle for Tripura City. To kill the kñatriyas I received it from Lord Çiva's own hand.

Text 37

yadi cedaà tanoñi tvaà
     tadä ca kuçalaà bhavet
ced asya karñaëaà na syäd
     ghätayiñyämi te balam

     yadi—if; ca—and; idam—this; tanoñi—stretch; tvam—you; tadä—then; ca—also; kuçalam—auspiciousness; bhavet—may be; cet—if; asya—of it; karñaëam—drawing; na—not; syät—is; ghätayiñyämi—I will kill; te—of you; balam—the strength.

     If you can draw this bow it will be good for you. If you cannot draw it I will destroy your strength.

Text 38

çrutvä vacas tadä daityaù
     ko-daëòaà sapta-tälakam
gåhétvä paçyatas tasya
     sajjaà kåtvätha lélayä

     çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—words; tadä—then; daityaù—the demon; ko-daëòam—the bow; sapta-tälakam—made of seven palm trees; gåhétvä—holding; paçyataù—watching; tasya—of Him; sajjam—preparation; kåtvä—doing; atha—then; lélayä—easily.

     Hearing these words, the demon Kaàsa picked up the bow made of seven palm trees. As Paraçuräma watched, Kaàsa easily strung it.

Text 39

äkåñya karëa-paryantaà
     çata-väraà tatäna ha
pratyaïcäsphoöanenaiva
     öaìkäro 'bhüt taòit-svanaù

     äkåñya—drawing; karëa-paryantam—to his ear; çata-väram—a hundred times; tatäna—stretched; ha—indeed; pratyaïca äsphoöanena—by releasing the bowstring; eva—indeed; öaìkäraù—twanging sound; abhüt—was; taòit-svanaù—thunder.

     A hundred times he drew the bowstring back to his ear and released it with a thunderous sound.

Text 40

nanäda tena brahmäëdaà
     sapta-lokair bilaiù saha
vicelur dig-gajäs tärä
     'patan bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam

     nanäda—sounded; tena—by that; brahmäëdam—the universe; sapta-lokaiù—with seven planetary systems; bilaiù—with the spaces between them; saha—with; viceluù—trembled; dik—of the directions; gajäù—the elephants; täräù—the stars; apatan—fell; bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam—to the earth.

     That sound echoed in the universe of seven planetary systems and outer space. It made the elephants that support the directions tremble and it made the stars fall to the earth.

Text 41

dhanuù saàsthäpya tat kaàso
     natvä natväha bhärgavam
he deva kñatriyo näsmi
     daityo 'haà te ca kiìkaraù

     dhanuù—the bow; saàsthäpya—putting down; tat—that; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; natvä natvä—bowing down again and again; äha—said; bhärgavam—to Paraçuräma; he—O; deva—Lord; kñatriyaù—a kñatriya; na—not; asmi—I am; daityaù—a demon; aham—I am; te—You; ca—and; kiìkaraù—servant.

     Putting the bow back in its place, and bowing again and again to Lord Paraçuräma, Kaàsa said, "O Lord, I am not a kñatriya. I am a demon, and I am Your servant.

Text 42

tava däsasya däso 'haà
     pähi mäà puruñottama
çrütvä prasannaù çré-rämas
     tasmai prädäd dhanuç ca tat

     tava—of You; däsasya—of the servant; däsaù—the servant; aham—I am; pähi—protect; mäm—me; puruñottama—O Supreme Person; çrütvä—hearing; prasannaù—pleased; çré-rämaù—Çré Paraçuräma; tasmai—to him; prädät—gave; dhanuù—bow; ca—also; tat—that.

     "I am the servant of Your servant. O Supreme Person, please protect me." Hearing this, Lord Paraçuräma was pleased with him and gave him that bow.

Text 43

çré-jämadagny uväca 
yat ko-daëòaà vaiñëavaà tad
     yena bhaìgé-bhaviñyati
paripürëatamenätra
     so 'pi tväà ghätayiñyati

     çré-jämadagné uväca—Çré Paraçuräma said; yat—what; ko-daëòam—bow; vaiñëavam—of Lord Viñëu; tat—that; yena—by which; bhaìgé-bhaviñyati—will break; paripürëatamena—completely; atra—here; saù api—that person; tväm—you; ghätayiñyati—will kill.

     Çré Paraçuräma said: Whoever breaks this bow of Lord Viñëu will kill you.

Text 44

çré-närada uväca 
atha natvä munià kaàso
     vicaran sa mahotkaöaù
na ke 'pi yuyudhus tena
     räjänaç ca balià daduù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; natvä—bowing; munim—to the sage; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; vicaran—considering; saù—he; mahä-utkaöaù—very proud; na—not; ke api—whoever; yuyudhäù—fighting; tena—with that; räjänaù—kings; ca—also; balim—offering; daduù—gave.

     Çré Närada said: Then Kaàsa bowed down before the sage Paraçuräma. As Kaàsa thought of all this, he became filled with pride. No king could fight with him. They only brought him gifts.

Text 45

samudrasya taöe kaàso
     daityaà nämnä hy aghäsuram
saprakäraà ca phütkärair
     lelihänaà dadarça ha

     samudrasya—of the ocean; taöe—on the shore; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; daityam—a demon; nämnä—by name; hi—indeed; aghäsuram—Aghäsura; sarpa—of a snake; äkäram——the form; ca—also; phütkäraiù—with hissing; lelihänam—licking; dadarça ha—saw.

     On the seashore Kaàsa saw a a demon named Aghäsura who, licking its tongue and hissing, had a serpent's body.

Text 46

ägacchantaà daçantaà ca
     gåhétvä taà nipatya saù
cakära sva-gale häraà
     nirbhayo daitya-räò balé

     ägacchantam—coming; daçantam—biting; ca—and; gåhétvä—grasped; tam—it; nipatya—falling; saù—he; cakära—did; sva-gale—on the neck; häram—necklace; nirbhayaù—fearless; daitya—of the demons; räò—the king; balé—strong.

     When the serpent approached and bit him, the fearless and very powerful demon-king Kaàsa jumped on it and became like a necklace squeezing its neck.

Text 47

präcyäà tu vaìga-deçeñu
     daityo 'riñöo mahä-våñaù
tena särdhaà sa yuyudhe
     gajenäpi gajo yathä

     präcyäm—in the east; tu—also; vaìga-deçeñu—in Bengal; daityaù—a demon; ariñöaù—Ariñöa; mahä—great; våñaù—bull; tena—him; särdham—with; saù—he; yuyudhe—fought; gajena—with an elephant; api—also; gajaù—an elephant; yathä—as.

     In the east a great bull-demon named Ariñöa fought with Kaàsa as one elephant fights with another elephant.

Text 48

çåìgäbhyäà parvataà nétvä
     cékñepa kaàsa-mürdhani
kaàso girià saìgåhétvä
     präkñipat tasya mastake

     çåìgäbhyäm—with horns; parvatam—a mountain; nétvä—uprooting; cékñepa—threw; kaàsa-mürdhani—at Kaàsa's head; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; girim—a mountain; saìgåhétvä—grasping; präkñipat—threw; tasya—of it; mastake—at the head.

     With its horns it uprooted a mountain and threw it at Kaàsa's head. Then Kaàsa took a mountain and threw it at Ariñöa's head.

Text 49

jaghäna muñöinäriñöaà
     kaàso vai daitya-puìgavaù     mürchitaà taà vinirjitya
     tenodécéà diçaà gataù

     jaghäna—struck; muñöinä—with fist; ariñöam—Ariñöa; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; vai—indeed; daitya—of demons; puìgavaù—the best;      mürchitam—fainted; tam—him; vinirjitya—defeating; tena—by that; udécém—north; diçam—direction; gataù—went.

     With a single punch the great demon Kaàsa made Ariñöa fall unconscious. After this victory Kaàsa went to the north.

Text 50

prägjyotiñeçvaraà bhaumaà
     narakäkhyaà mahä-balam
uväca kaàso yuddhärthé
     yuddhaà me dehi daitya-räö

     prägjyotiña—of Prägjyotiña; éçvaram—the king; bhaumam—the son of the earth-goddess; naraka-äkhyam—named Naraka; mahä-balam—very strong; uväca—said; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; yuddha—to fight; arthé—desiring; yuddham—fight; me—to me; dehi—give; daitya-räö—O king of the demons.

     There, eager to fight, Kaàsa said to Narakäsura, Prägjyotiña City's very powerful king, who was a son of the earth-goddess, "O king of the demons, please give me a fight.

Text 51

ahaà däso bhaveyaà vo
     bhavanto jayino yadi
ahaà jayé ced bhavato
     däsän sarvän karomy aham

     aham—I; däsaù—a servant; bhaveyam—will be; vaù—of you; bhavantaù—you; jayinaù—victorious; yadi—if; aham—I; jayé—victorious; cet—if; bhavataù—of you; däsän—servant; sarvän—all; karomi—make; aham—I.

     "If you are victorious, I will become your servant. If I am victorious I will make you my servant."

Text 52

çré-närada uväca 
pürvaà pralambo yuyudhe
     kaàsenäpi mahä-balaù
mågendreëa mågendro vä
     udbhaöena yathodbhaöaù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; pürvam—before; pralambaù—Pralamba; yuyudhe—fought; kaàsena—with Kaàsa; api—also; mahä-balaù—very powerful; mågendreëa—with a lion; mågendraù—a lion; vai—indeed; udbhaöena—with a great; yathä—as; udbhaöaù—a great.

     First a very powerful demon named Pralambäsura fought with Kaàsa. They fought as one great lion fights with another great lion.

Text 53

malla-yuddhe gåhétvä taà
     kaàso bhümau nipatya ca
punar gåhétvä cékñepa
     prägjyotiña-purodare

     malla-yuddhe—in wrestling; gåhétvä—grasping; tam—him; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; bhümau—on the ground; nipatya—falling; ca—also; punaù—again; gåhétvä—grasping; cékñepa—threw; prägjyotiña-pura-udare—into Prägjyotiña City.

     Kaàsa wrestled him to the ground and threw him into Prägjyotiña City.

Text 54

ägato dhenuko nämnä
     kaàsaà jagräha roñataù
nodayäm äsa düreëa
     balaà kåtvätha däruëam

     ägataù—came; dhenukaù—Dhenuka; nämnä—by name; kaàsam—Kaàsa; jagräha—grasped; roñataù—angrily; nodayäm äsa—threw; düreëa—far away; balam—strength; kåtvä—doing; atha—then; däruëam—fearsome.

     Then a demon named Dhenuka came and grabbed Kaàsa. With fearsome strength Kaàsa angrily threw him far away.

Text 55

kaàsas taà nodayäm äsa
     dhenukaà çata-yojanam
nipatya cürëayäm äsa
     tad-aìga-muñöibhir dåòhaiù

     kaàsaù—Kaàsa; tam—him; nodayäm äsa—threw; dhenukam—Dhenuka; çata-yojanam—eight hundred miles; nipatya—falling; cürëayäm äsa—crushed; tad-aìga-muñöibhiù—with punches; dåòhaiù—hard.

     Kaàsa threw Dhenuka eight hundred miles, jumped on him, and crushed him with many hard punches.

Text 56

tåëävarto bhauma-väkyät
     kaàsaà nétvä nabho gataù
tatraiva yuyudhe daitya
     ürdhvaà vai lakña-yojanam

     tåëävartaù—Tåëävarta; bhauma-väkyät—from the words of Narakäsura; kaàsam—Kaàsa; nétvä—brought; nabhaù—in the sky; gataù—went; tatra—there; eva—indeed; yuyudhe—fought; daityaù—the demon; ürdhvam—above; vai—indeed; lakña-yojanam—eight hundred thousand miles.

     On Narakäsura's order a demon named Tåëävarta pulled Kaàsa into the sky and fought with him eight hundred thousand miles in outer space.

Text 57

kaàso 'nanta-balaà kåtvä
     daityaà nétvä tadämbarät
bhümyäà sampätayäm äsa
     vamantaà rudhiraà mukhät

     kaàsaù—Kaàsa; ananta—limitless; balam—strength; kåtvä—doing; daityam—the demon; nétvä—bringing; tadä—then; ambarät—from outer space; bhümyäm—to the earth; sampätayäm äsa—made fall; vamantam—vomiting; rudhiram—blood; mukhät—from his mouth.

     With limitless strength Kaàsa dragged the demon from outer space to the earth and made him vomit blood from his mouth.

Text 58

tuëòenätha grasantaà ca
     bakaà daityaà mahä-balam
kaàso nipätayäm äsa
     muñöinä vajra-ghätinä

     tuëòena—with its beak; atha—then; grasantam—swallowing; ca—also; bakam—Bakäsura; daityam—demon; mahä-balam—very powerful; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; nipätayäm äsa—made fall; muñöinä—with a punch; vajra-ghätinä—hard as a lightning bolt.

     When a powerful and demonic duck named Bakäsura tried to swallow him with its beak, Kaàsa made it fall with a single punch hard as a thunderbolt.

Text 59

utthäya daityo balavän
     sita-pakño ghana-svanaù
krodha-yuktaù samutpatya
     tékñna-tuëòo 'grasac ca tam

     utthäya—lifting; daityaù—the demon; balavän—powerful; sita—white; pakñaù—wings; ghana-svanaù—sound of thunder; krodha-yuktaù—angry; samutpatya—lifting; tékñna—sharp; tuëòaù—beak; agrasat—swallowed; ca—and; tam—him.

     Lifting itself up, the white-winged demon made a sound like thunder and angrily swallowed Kaàsa with its sharp beak.

Text 60

nigérëo 'pi sa vajräìgas
     tad-gale rodha-kåc ca yaù
sadyaç caccharda taà kaàsaà
     kñata-kaëöho mahä-bakaù

     nigérëaù—swallowed; api—also; saù—he; vajra—thunderbolt; aìgaù—body; tat—its; gale—throat; rodha-kåt—angry; ca—also; yaù—who; sadyaù—at once; caccharda—vomited; tam—him; kaàsam—Kaàsa; kñata—broken; kaëöhaù—neck; mahä-bakaù—great duck.

     When he was swallowed, Kaàsa became angry and his body became like a thunderbolt. Its throat breaking, the great duck Bakäsura spat Kaàsa out at once.

Text 61

kaàso bakaà saìgåhétvä
     pätayitvä mahé-tale
karäbhyäà bhrämayitvä ca
     yuddhe taà vicakarña ha

     kaàsaù—Kaàsa; bakam—the duck; saìgåhétvä—grasping; pätayitvä—threw; mahé-tale—on the ground; karäbhyäm—with both hands; bhrämayitvä—spun around; ca—also; yuddhe—in the fight; tam—it; vicakarña ha—dragged.

     Kaàsa grabbed Bakäsura and threw it to the ground. As they fought, Kaàsa grabbed it with both hands, whirled it around, and dragged it here and there.

Text 62

tat-svasäraà pütanäkhyäà
     yoddhu-kämäm avasthitäm
täm äha kaàsaù prahasan
     väkyaà me çåëu pütane

     tat—his; svasäram—sister; pütanä-äkhyäm—named Pütanä; yoddhu-kämäm—desiring to fight; avasthitäm—stood; täm—her; äha—said; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; prahasan—laughing; väkyam—words; me—my; çåëu—hear; pütane—O Pütanä.

     Then Bakäsura's sister, who was named Pütanä, came and wished to fight. Kaàsa laughed and said to her, "Hear my words, O Pütanä.

Text 63

striyä särdham ahaà yuddhaà
     na karomi kadäcana
bakäsuraù syän me bhrätä
     tvaà ca me bhaginé bhava

     striyä—a woman; särdham—with; aham—I; yuddham—a fight; na—not; karomi—I do; kadäcana—ever; bakäsuraù—Bakäsura; syät—has become; me—my; bhrätä—brother; tvam—you; ca—and; me—my; bhaginé—sister; bhava—should be.

     "I will never fight with a woman. Bakäsura has become my brother, so you should be my sister."

Text 64

tato 'nanta-balaà kaàsaà
     vékñya bhaumo 'pi dharñitaù
cakära sauhådaà kaàse      sahayyärthaà surän prati

     tataù—then; ananta—limitless; balam—strength; kaàsam—Kaàsa; vékñya—seeing; bhaumaù—Narakäsura; api—also; dharñitaù—was defeated; cakära—did; sauhådam—friendship; kaàse—with Kaàsa; sahayya-artham—for an alliance; surän—the demigods; prati—against.

     Then, seeing that Kaàsa had endless strength, Narakäsura accepted defeat. He made friendship with Kaàsa and they formed an alliance against the demigods.

Chapter Seven
Dig-vijaya-varëana
Description of the Conquest of All Directions

Text 1

atha kaàsaù pralambädyair
     anyaiù pürva-jitaiç ca taiù
çambarasya puraà prägät
     sväbhiprayaà nivedayan

     atha—then; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; pralamba-ädyair—headed by Pralamba; anyaiù—with others; pürva—before; jitais—defeated; ca—also; taiù—with them; çambarasya—of Çambara; puram—to the city; prägät—went; svä—own; abhiprayaà—intention; nivedayan—speaking.

     Then, accompanied by Pralamba and the other demons he had defeated before, Kaàsa went to the city of Çambara and made his offer.

Text 2

çambaro hy ati-véryo 'pi
     na yuyodha sa tena vai
cakära sauhådaà kaàse
     sarvair ati-balaiù saha

     çambaro—Çambara; hi—indeed; ati-véryo—very powerful; api—although; na—not; yuyodha—fought; sas—he; tena—with him; vai—indeed; cakära—made; sauhådam—friendship; kaàse—with Kaàsa; sarvair—with all; ati-balaiù—very powerful; saha—with.

     Although he was very powerful, Çambara would not fight. Instead, he made friends with Kaàsa and all his very powerful allies.

Text 3

tri-çåìga-çikhare çete
     vyomo nämäsuro balé
kaàsa-päda-prabuddho 'bhüt
     krodha-samrakta-locanaù

     tri-çåìga-çikhare—on the summit of Mount Triküöa; çete—slept; vyomo—Vyoma; näma—named; asuro—demon; balé—powerful; kaàsa—of Kaàsa; päda—by the foot; prabuddho—awakened; abhüt—became; krodha—with anger; samrakta—red; locanaù—eyes.

     A very strong demon named Vyoma slept on the summit of Mount Triküöa. When Kaàsa awakened him with a kick, his eyes became red with rage.

Text 4

kaàsaà jaghäna cotthäya
     prabalair dåòha-muñöibhiù
tayor yuddham abhüd ghoraà
     itaretara-muñöibhiù

     kaàsaà—Kaàsa; jaghäna—struck; ca—and; utthäya—stood; prabalair—with strong; dåòha—clenched; muñöibhiù—fists; tayor—of them; yuddham—fight; abhüd—was; ghoram—terribel; itaretara—of each other; muñöibhiù—with punches.

     He stood up and attacked Kaàsa with hard punches. Then they fought a terrible battle with their fists.

Text 5

kaàsasya muñöibhiù so 'pi
     niùsattvo 'bhüd bhramäturaù
bhåtyaà kåtvätha taà kaàsaù
     präptaà mäà praëanäma ha

     kaàsasya—of Kaàsa; muñöibhiù—with punches; saù api—he; niùsattvo—weakened; abhüd—became; bhrama-äturaù—dizzy; bhåtyaà—servant; kåtvä—doing; atha—then; taà—him; kaàsas—Kaàsa; präptaà—attained; mäà—me; praëanäma—bowed down; ha—indeed.

     Kaàsa's punches weakened him and made him dizzy. Kaàsa made Vyoma his servant. Then Kaàsa came to me and bowed down to offer respects.

Text 6

he deva yuddha-kaìkñästi
     kva yämi tvaà vadäçu me
proväca taà tadä gaccha
     daityaà bäëaà mahä-balam

     he—O; deva—demigod; yuddha—to fight; kaìkñä—the desire; asti—is; kva—where?; yämi—I go; tvam—you; vada—tell; äçu—quickly; me—to me; proväca—said; taà—to him; tadä—then; gaccha—go; daityaà—to the demon; bäëaà—Bäëa; mahä-balam—very powerful.

     He said, "O lord, I yearn to fight. Where should I go?" I said to him, "Go to the very powerful demon Bäëäsura."

Text 7

preritaç ceti kaàsäkhyo
     mayä yuddhi-didåkñuëä
bhuja-vérya-madonnaddhaù
     çonitäkhyaà puraà yayau

     preritas—sent; ca—also; iti—thus; kaàsa—Kaàsa; äkhyo—named; mayä—by me; yuddhi—a fight; didåkñuëä—with the desire to see; bhuja—of his arms; vérya—by the power; mada-unnaddhaù—overcome with pride; çonitä-Äkhyaà—named Çonitä; puram—to the city; yayau—went.

     Thus sent by me, Kaàsa, who was filled with pride in the strength of his arms and was looking for a fight, went to the city named Çonitä.

Text 8

bäëäsuras tat-pratijïäà
     çrütvä kruddho hy abhüd bhåçam
tatäòa lattäà bhü-madhye
     jagarja ghanavad balé

     bäëäsuras—Bäëäsura; tat-pratijïäà—his offer; çrütvä—hearing; kruddho—angry; hi—certainly; abhüd—became; bhåçam—very; tatäòa—struck; lattäm—a kick; bhü-madhye—on the ground; jagarja—roared; ghanavad—like thunder; balé—powerful.

     When he heard Kaàsa's offer, powerful Bäëäsura became very angry. He kicked the ground and roared like thunder.

Text 9

ä-jänu-bhümi-gaà lattäà
     pätäläntam upägatam
kåtvä tam äha bäëas tu
     pürvaà cainaà samuddhara

     ä-jänu—to his knees; bhümi—to the ground; gaà—gone; lattäà—kick; pätäläntam—to Patala; upägatam—gone; kåtvä—having done; tam—to him; äha—spoke; bäëas—Bäëa; tu—indeed; pürvaà—before; ca—and; enaà—this; samuddhara—lift.

     That kick pushed his leg through the ground up to his knee as his foot reached Pätälaloka. Then Bäëäsura said,  Please pull me up as I was before."

Text 10

çrütvä vacaù karäbhyäà taà
     ujjahära madotkaöaù
pracaëòa-vikramaù kaàsaù
     khara-daëòaà gajo yathä

     çrütvä—hearing; vacaù—the words; karäbhyäà—with both hands; taà—him; ujjahära—lifted;  mada-utkataù—full of pride; pracaëòa-vikramaù—powerful; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; khara-daëòam—a lotus; gajo—an elephant; yathä—as.

     Hearing these words, with both hands proud and powerful Kaàsa pulled him up as an elephant pulls up a lotus.

Text 11

tayä coddhåtayotkhätä
     lokäù sapta-talä dåòhäù
nipetur girayo 'nekä
     vicelur dåòha-dig-gajäù

     tayä—by this; ca—also; uddhåtayä—lifted; utkhätäs—devastated; lokäù—the worlds; sapta-talä—seven tala planets; dåòhäù—solid; nipetur—fell; girayo—mountains; anekäs—many; vicelur—stumbled; dåòha—sturdy; dik—of the directions; gajäù—the elephants.

     By this pulling the seven Tala planets were devastated, many great mountains fell, and the sturdy elephants holding the directions stumbled.     
Text 12

yoddhuà tam udyataà bäëaà
     dåöövägatya våñadhvajaù
sarvän sambodhayäm äsa
     proväca bali-nandanam

     yoddhum—to fight; tam—him; udyataà—eager; bäëam—Bäëa; dåöövä—seeing; ägatya—coming; våñadhvajaù—Lord Çiva; sarvän—everyone; sambodhayäm äsa—addressed; proväca—said; bali-nandanam—to Bäëa, the son of Bali.

     Seeing that Bäëäsura was very eager to fight, Lord Çiva arrived, greeted everyone, and to Bali Mahäräja's son, Bäëäsura, said:

Text 13

kåñëaà vinäparaà cainaà
     bhümau ko 'pi na jeñyati
bhärgaveëa varaà dattaà
     dhanur asmai ca vaiñëavam

     kåñëaà—Kåñëa; vinä—without; aparam—another; ca—also; enaà—him; bhümau—on the earth; ko 'pi—someone; na—not; jeñyati—will defeat; bhärgaveëa—by Paraçuräma; varaà—benediction; dattaà—given; dhanur—bow; asmai—to him; ca—also; vaiñëavam—of Lord Viñëu.

     Except for Lord Kåñëa, no one in the world can defeat him. Lord Paraçuräma gave him that benediction and also gave him Lord Viñëu's own bow.

Text 14

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvä sauhådaà hådyaà
     sadyo vai kaàsa-bäëayoù
cakära parayä çäntyä
     çivaù säkñän maheçvaraù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; uktvä—speaking; sauhådaà—friendship; hådyaà—sincere; sadyo—at once; vai—certainly; kaàsa-bäëayoù—of Kaàsa and Bäëa; cakära—did; parayä—with great; çäntyä—peacefulness; çivaù—Lord Çiva; säkñät—directly; maheçvaraù—the great Lord.

     Çré Närada said: By speaking these words Lord Çiva, who is the Supreme Lord Himself, brought peace between Kaàsa and Bäëäsura and made them great friends.

Text 15

atha kaàso dik-pratécyäà
     çrütvä vatsaà mahäsuram
tena särdhaà sa yuyudhe
     vatsa-rüpeëa daitya-räö

     atha—then; kaàso—Kaàsa; dik-pratécyäà—in the west; çrütvä—having heard; vatsaà—Vatsa; mahäsuram—a great demon; tena—him; särdhaà—with; sas—he; yuyudhe—fought; vatsa-rüpeëa—in the form of a calf; daitya-räö—the demon king.

     Hearing of a great demon named Vatsäsura who lived in the west, the demon-king Kaàsa fought with him, a demon who had the form of a calf.

Text 16

pucche gåhétvä taà vatsaà
     pothayäm äsa bhü-tale
vaçé-kåtvätha taà çéghraà
     mleccha-deçäàs tato yayau

     pucche—by the tail; gåhétvä—grabbing; taà—that; vatsaà—calf; pothayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—to the ground; vaçé-kåtvä—subduing; atha—then; taà—it; çéghraà—quickly; mleccha—of the barbarians; deçän—to the countries; tato—then; yayau—went.

     Kaàsa grabbed the calf Vatsäsura by the tail and threw it to the ground, in this way bringing it under his dominion. Then he quickly went to the countries of the barbarian mlecchas.

Text 17

man-mukhät kälayavanaù
     çrütvä daityaà mahä-balam
niryayau sammukhe yoddhuà
     rakta-smaçrur gadä-dharaù

     mat—of me; mukhät—from the mouth; kälayavanaù—Kälayavana; çrütvä—hearing; daityaà—demon; mahä—very; balam—powerful; niryayau—went; sammukhe—before; yoddhuà—to fight; rakta—red; smaçrur—beard; gadä—a club; dharaù—holding.

     Hearing about him from my mouth, red-bearded Kälayavana picked up a club and went before the powerful demon Kaàsa to fight with him.

Text 18

kaàso gadäà gåhétvä svaà
     lakña-bhära-vinirmitam
präkñipad yävanendräya
     siàha-nädam athäkarot

     kaàso—Kaàsa; gadaà—a club; gåhétvä—taking; svaà—own; lakña-bhära-vinirmitam—as heavy as a hundred thousand bhäras; präkñipad—threw; yavana—of the Yavanas; indräya—at the king; siàha—of a lion; nädam—the sound; atha—then; akarot—did.

     Kaàsa picked up his own club, which weighed a hundred thousand bhäras, threw it at the barbarian king, and then roared like a lion.

Text 19

gadä-yuddham abhüt tatra
     ghoraà hi kaàsa-kälayoù
visphuliìgän kñarantyau dve
     gade cürëé-babhüvatuù

     gadä—club; yuddham—battle; abhüt—was; tatra—there; ghoram—terrible; hi—indeed; kaàsa-kälayoù—of Kaàsa and Kälayavana; visphuliìgän—sparks; kñarantyau—tossing; dve—both; gade—clubs; cürëé-babhüvatuù—became broken into dust.

     Then Kaàsa and Kälayavana fought a terrible duel with clubs, a duel where, throwing many sparks, the clubs were ground to powder.

Text 20

kaàsaù kälaà saìgåhétvä
     pätayäm äsa bhü-tale
punar gåhétvä niñpatya
     måta-tulyaà cakära ha

     kaàsaù—Kaàsa; kälaà—Kälayavana; saìgåhétvä—grabbing; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—on the ground; punar—again; gåhétvä—grabbing; niñpatya—fell; måta—death; tulyaà—like; cakära—made; ha—indeed.

     Kaàsa grabbed Kälayavana, threw him to the gound, jumped on him, and attacked him so violently he almost died.

Text 21

bäëa-varñaà prakurvantéà
     senäà täà yavanasya ca
gadayä pothayäm äsa
     kaàso daityädhipo balé

     bäëa—of arrows; varñaà—a shower; prakurvantéà—doing; senäà—army; täà—it; yavanasya—of Kälayavana; ca—also; gadayä—with a club; pothayäm äsa—threw; kaàsas—Kaàsa; daitya—of the demons; adhipo—the king; balé—powerful.

     When Kälayavana's army showered him with arrows, the powerful demon-king Kaàsa knocked it to the ground with his club.

Text 22

gajäàs turaìgän sa-rathän
     vérän bhümau nipätya ca
jagarja ghanavad véro
     gadä-yuddhe mådhäìgane

     gajän—the elephants; turaìgän—horses; sa-rathän—with chariots; vérän—warriors; bhümau—to the ground; nipätya—knocking; ca—also; jagarja—roared; ghanavad—like thunder; véro—hero; gadä—club; yuddhe—in the fight; mådhä-aìgane—in the battlefield.

     When he knocked down the elephants, horses, chariots and warriors in the club battlefield, powerful Kaàsa roared like thunder. 
Text 23

tataç ca durdruvur mlecchäù
     tyaktvä svaà svaà raëaà param
bhétän paläyitän mlecchän
     na jaghänätha néti-vit

     tatas—then; ca—also; durdruvur—fled; mlecchäù—the barbarians; tyaktvä—abandoning; svaà svaà—their own; raëaà—battlefield; param—very; bhétän—afraid; paläyitän—fleeing; mlecchän—barbarians; na—not; jaghäna—attacked; atha—then; néti—morality; vit—knowing.

     Then the barbarians fled the battlefield. Aware of the code of chivalry, Kaàsa did not attack the frightened, fleeing barbarians.

Texts 24-26

ucca-pädo dérgha-jänuù
     stambhorur laghimä kaöiù
kapaöa-vakñaù pénäàsaù
     puñöaù präàçur båhad-bhujaù

padma-netro båhat-keço
     'ruëa-varëo 'sitämbaraù
kiréöé kuëòalé häré
     padma-mälé layärka-ruk

khaògé niñaìgi kavacé
     mudgaräòhyo dhanur-dharaù
madotkaöo yayau jetuà
     devän kaàso 'marävatém

     ucca—raised; pädo—feet; dérgha—long; jänuù—knees; stambha—pillar; ürur—thighs; laghimä—slender; kaöiù—waist; kapaöa—a great door; vakñaù—chest; péna—broad; aàsaù—shoulders; puñöaù—broad; präàçur—tall; båhad—broad; bhujaù—arms; padma—lotus; netro—eyes; båhat—great; keço—hair; aruëa—red; varëo—color; asita—black; ambaraù—garments; kiréöé—wearing a helmet; kuëòalé—wearing earrings; häré—wearing a necklace; padma—of lotuses; mälé—wearing a garland; laya—at the time of cosmic devastation; arka—sun; ruk—splendor; khaògé—wielding a sword; niñaìgi—carrying a quiver of arrows; kavacé—carrying a shield; mudgaräòhyo—carrying a club; dhanur-dharaù—carrying a bow; madotkaöo—proud; yayau—went; jetum—to conquer; devän—the demigods; kaàso—Kaàsa; amarävatém—to Amarävaté.

     Lifting his feet and knees, his thighs like pillars, his waist slender, His chest a great door, his shoulders broad, His arms massive, His eyes lotus flowers, his hair long, his complexion ruddy, his garments black, wearing a helmet, earrings, necklace, and lotus garland, effulgent as the sun at the time of cosmic dissolution, wielding a sword, shield, quiver of arrows, and club, proud Kaàsa went to Amarävaté to conquer the demigods.

Text 27

cäëüra-muñöikäriñöa-
     çala-toçala-keçibhiù
pralambena bakenäpi
     dvividena samävåtaù

tåëävartägha-küöaiç ca
     bhauma-bäëäkhya-çambaraiù
vyoma-dhenuka-vatsaiç ca
     rurudhe so 'marävatém

     cäëüra-muñöikäriñöa—with Cäëüra, Muñöik, and Ariñöa; çala-toçala-keçibhiù—with Çala, Toçala, and Keçé; pralambena—with Pralamba; bakena—with Baka; api—also; dvividena—with Dvivida; samävåtaù—accompanied; tåëävartägha—with Tåëävarta and Agha; küöais—with Küöa; ca—also; bhauma-bäëäkhya-çambaraiù—with Narakäsura; Bäëa, and Çambara; vyoma-dhenuka-vatsaiç—with Vyoma, Dhenuka, and Vatsa; ca—also; rurudhe—besieged; so—he; amarävatém—Amarävaté.

     Aided by Cäëüra, Muñöika, Ariñöa, Çala, Toçala, Keçé, Pralamba, Baka, Dvivida, Tåëävarta, Agha, Küöa, Narakäsura, Bäëa, Çambara, Vyoma, Dhenuka, and Vatsa, he besieged the city of Aamarävaté.

Text 29

kaàsädén ägatän dåöövä
     çakro devädhipaù svaräö
sarvair deva-gaëaiù särdhaà
     yoddhuà kruddho viniryayau

     kaàsa—by Kaàsa; ädén—headed; ägatän—arrived; dåöövä—seeing; çakro—Indra; deva—of the demigods; adhipaù—the king; svaräö—independent; sarvair—with all; deva-gaëaiù—the hosts of demigods; särdhaà—with; yoddhuà—to fight; kruddho—angry; viniryayau—went.

     Seeing the demons headed by Kaàsa had come, Indra, the sovereign king of the demigods became angry and, accompanied by a great host of demigods, went to fight with them.

Texts 30 and 31

tayor yuddham abhüd ghoraà
     tumulaà roma-harñaëam
divyaiç ca çastra-sampätair
     bäëais tékñnaiù sphurat-prabhaiù

çasträndhakäre saïjäte
     rathärüòho maheçvaraù
cékñepa vajraà kaàsäya
     çata-dhäraà taòid-dyuti

     tayor—of them; yuddham—battle; abhüd—was; ghoraà—terrible; tumulam—tumult; roma-harñaëam—masking the hairs stand erect; divyaiswith divine; ca—also; çastra-sampätair—weapons; bäëais—with arrows; tékñnaiù—sharp; sphurat-prabhaiù—effulgent; çastra—of weapons; andhakäre—blinding darkness; sa 24jäte—manifested; ratha—on a chariot; ärüòho—riding; maheçvaraù—king Indra; cékñepa—threw; vajraà—thunderbolt; kaàsäya—at Kaàsa; çata—a hundred; dhäraà—streams; taòid—lightning; dyuti—splendor.

     Then they fought a terrible, tumultuous battle that made hairs stand up. When hosts of sharp and glistening arrows and divine weapons created a blinding darkness, King Indra, riding on a chariot, threw his thunderbolt, flowing with a hundred streams and glittering with lightning, at Kaàsa.

Text 32

mudgareëäpi tad-vajraà
     taöädäçu mahäsuraù
papäta kuliçaà yuddhe
     chinna-dhäraà babhüva ha

     mudgareëa—with his club; api—also; tad-vajraà—the thunderbolt; taöäda—struck; äçu—at once; mahä—the great; asuraù—demon; papäta—fell; kuliçam—the thunderbolt; yuddhe—in battle; chinna—broken; dhäraà—streams; babhüva ha—became.

     With his club the great demon Kaàsa struck the thunderbolt. Its streams of lightning broken, it fell in the battle.

Text 33

tyaktvä vajraà tadä vajré
     khaògaà jagräha roñataù
kaàsaà mürdhni taöädäçu
     nädaà kåtvätha bhairavam

     tyaktvä—abandoning; vajraà—the thunderbolt; tadä—then; vajré—Indra; khaògaà—sword; jagräha—took; roñataù—angrily; kaàsaà—Kaàsa; mürdhni—on the head; taöäda—struck; äçu—at once; nädaà—a sound; kåtvä—making; atha—then; bhairavam—terrible.

     Abandoning the thunderbolt, Indra took up a sword and angrily struck Kaàsa on the head, making a terrible sound.

Text 34

sa kñato näbhavat kaàso
     mälä-hata iva dvipaù
gåhétvä sa gadäà gurvéà
     añöa-dhätu-mayéà dåòhäm

     sas—he; kñato—hurt; na—not; abhavat—was; kaàso—Kaàsa; mälä—by a garland; hatas—struck; iva—like; dvipaù—an elephant; gåhétvä—taking; sas—he; gadäà—club; gurvéà—heavy; añöa—eight; dhätu—metals; mayém—made; dåòhäm—firm.

     Kaàsa remained unhurt, like an elephant struck by a flower garland. Then he took a great and heavy club made of eight metals.

Text 35

lakña-bhära-samäà kaàsaç
     cékñependräya daitya-räö
täà samäpatatéà vékñya
     jagrähäçu purandaraù

     lakña—a hundred thousand; bhära—bhäras; samaà—like; kaàsas—Kaàsa; cékñepa—threw; indräya—at Indra; daitya-räö—the demon-king; taà—that; samäpatatéà—coming; vékñya—seeing; jagräha—took; äçu—at once; purandaraù—Indra.

     Then the demon-king Kaàsa threw that club weighing a hundred thousand bhäras at Indra. Seeing it coming, Indra caught it.

Text 36

tataç cékñepa daityäya
     gadäà namuci-südanaù
cacära yuddhe vidalann
     arén mätali-särathiù

     tatas—then; cékñepa—threw; daityäya—at the demon; gadäà—the club; namuci-südanaù—Indra, the killer of Namuci; cacära—went; yuddhe—in the fight; vidalan—breaking; arén—the enemies; mätali-särathiù—Indra, whose charioteer is Mätali.

     Indra, the killer of Namuci, threw the club back at the demon. Then Indra, cutting his enemies to pieces, and his chariot driven by Mätali, went into the battle.

Text 37

kaàso gåhétvä parighaà
     taöädäàse 'sura-dviñaù
tat-prahäreëa devendraù
     kñaëaà murchäm aväpa ha

     kaàso—Kaàsa; gåhétvä—taking; parighaà—an iron club; taöäda—struck; aàse—on the shoulder; asura-dviñaù—Indra, the enemy of the demons; tat-prahäreëa—by that blow; devendraù—the king of the demigods; kñaëaà—for a moment; murchäm—unconsciousness; aväpa—attained; ha—indeed.

     Taking an iron club, Kaàsa struck Indra on the shoulder. Because of that blow, Indra, the king of the demigods and enemy of the demons, became momentarily unconscious.

Text 38

kaàsaà marud-gaëäù sarve
     gåòhra-pakñaiù sphurat-prabhaiù
bäëaughaiç chädayäm äsuù
     pravåt-süryam ivämbudaù

     kaàsaà—Kaàsa; marud-gaëäù—the Maruts; sarve—all; gåòhra-pakñaiù—with the eagles' feathers; sphurat-prabhaiù—splendid; bäëa—of arrows; aughais—a flood; chädayäm äsuù—covered; pravåt—monsoon; süryam—sun; iva—like; ambudaù—cloud.

     Then all the Maruts coverd Kaàsa with a great and splendid flood of gådhra-feathered arrows like a monsoon cloud covering the sun.

Text 39

doù-sahasra-yuto véras
     cäpäàs öäìkärayan muhuù
tadä tän kälayäm äsa
     bäëair bäëäsuro balé

     doù—of arms; sahasra—thousands; yuto—endowed; véras—warrior; cäpän—bows; öäìkärayan—twanging; muhuù—again and again; tadä—then; tän—them; kälayäm äsa—pushed back; bäëair—with arrows; bäëäsuro—Bäëäsura; balé—powerful.

     Making a great sound as he worked many bows with his thousand arms, the powerful warrior Bänaäsura drove them back with a host of arrows.

Text 40

bäëaà ca vasavo rudrä
     ädityä åbhavaù suräù
jaghnur nänä-vidhaiù çastraiù
     sarvato 'drià yathä gajäù

     bäëaà—to Bäëa; ca—also; vasavo—the Vasus; rudräs—the Rudras; ädityäs—the Adityas; åbhavaù—the Åbhus; suräù—the Suras; jaghnur—struck; nänä-vidhaiù—with many kinds; çastraiù—with weapons; sarvato—everywhere; adrim—a mountain; yathä—as; gajäù—elephants.

     Surrounding him as a host of elephants might surround a mountain, the Vasus, Rudras, Adityas, Åbhus, and Suras attacked Bäëäsura with a great variety of weapons.

Text 41

tato bhaumäsuraù präptaù
     pralambädy-asurair nadan
tena nädena deväs te
     nipetur mürchitä raëe

     tato—then; bhaumäsuraù—Narakäsura; präptaù—attained; pralamba-ädi—headed by Pralamba; asurair—by the demons; nadan—sounding; tena—by that; nädena—sound; deväs—demigods; te—the; nipetur—fell; mürchitäs—unconscious; raëe—in the battleground.

     Then, assisted by Pralamba and the other demons, Narakäsura came and made a great sound. That sound made the demigods fall unconscious on the battleground.

Texts 42-45

utthäyäçu tadä säkro
     gajam äruhya rakta-dåk
nodayäm äsa kaàsäya
     mattam airävataà gajam

aìkuçäsphalanät kruddhaà
     pätayantaà padair dviñaù
çuëòä-daëòasya phütkarair
     märdayantam itas tataù

sravan-madaà catur-dantaà
     himädrim iva durgamam
nadantaà srìkhalaà çuëòäà
     cälayantaà muhur muhuù

ghaëöäòhyaà kiìkiné-jäla-
     ratna-kambala-maëòitam
go-sütra-caya-sindüra-
     kastüré-pätra-bhån-mukham

     utthäya—rising; äçu—quickly; tadä—then; säkro—Indra; gajam—an elephant; äruhya—mounting; rakta—red; dåk—eyes; nodayäm äsa—charged; kaàsäya—at Kaàsa; mattam—furious; airävataà—Airävata; gajam—elephant; aìkuça—of the goad; äsphalanät—by the blows; kruddhaà—angered; pätayantaà—falling; padair—with feet; dviñaù—of the enemy; çuëòä-daëòasya—of the tusk; phütkarair—with loud sounds; märdayantam—attacking; itas tataù—here and there; sravat—flowing; madam—ichor; catur—four; dantaà—tusks; hima—of snow; ädrim—mountain; iva—like; durgamam—unassailable; nadantaà—making a sound; srìkhalaà—chains; çuëòaà—trunk; cälayantaà—moving; muhur—again; muhuù—and again; ghantä—with bells; aòhyaà—opulent; kiìkiné—of tinkling ornaments; jäla—net; ratna—jewel; kambala—saddle; maëòitam—decorated; go-mütra-caya—cow's urine; sindüra—red sindüra; kastüré—musk; pätra—designs; bhåt—holding; mukham—face.

     Quickly rising, and his eyes now red, Indra mounted his furious four-tusked elephant Airävata, now provoked by the striking of the goad, trumpeting with its trunk, crushing its enemies under its moving feet, its rut flowing, unapproachable as a mountain of snow, jingling its chains, moving its trunk again and again, opulent with bells, decorated with a jewel saddle and a network of tinkling ornaments, and its face decorated with pictures and designs drawn in musk, sindüra and gomütra, and made it charge Kaàsa.

Text 46

dåòhena muñöinä kaàsas
     taà taöäda mahä-gajam
dvitéya-muñöinä çakraà
     sa jaghäna raëäìgane

     dåòhena—with a hard; muñöinä—fist; kaàsas—Kaàsa; tam—it; taöäda—struck; mahä—great; gajam—elephant; dvitéya—with a second; muñöinä—fist; çakraà—Indra; sas—he; jaghäna—struck; raëäìgane—in the battleground.

     With a hard punch Kaàsa struck the great elephant and with a second punch he struck Indra in that battleground.

Text 47

tasya muñöi-prahäreëa
     düre çakraù papäta ha
jänübhyäà dharaëéà spåñövä
     gajo 'pi vihvalo 'bhavat

     tasya—of him; muñöi-prahäreëa—by the punch; düre—far away; çakraù—Indra; papäta ha—fell; jänübhyäà—with both knees; dharaëéà—the ground; spåñövä—touching; gajo—the elephant; api—also; vihvalo—troubled; abhavat—became.

     With that punch Indra fell far away and the elephant was wounded and fell, its knees touching the ground.

Text 48

punar utthäya nägendro
     dantaiç cähatya daityapam
çuëòä-daëòena coddhåtvä
     cékñepa lakña-yojanam

     punar—again; utthäya—rising; näga—of elephants; indro—the king; dantais—with tusks; ca—and; ähatya—striking; daityapam—the king of the demons; çuëòä-daëòena—with its trunk; ca—and; uddhåtvä—lifting; cékñepa—threw; lakña-yojanam—eight hundred thousand miles.

     Again standing, the king of elephants attacked the demon-king Kaàsa with its tusks, picked him up with its trunk, and threw him eight-hundred thousand miles.

Text 49

patito 'pi sa vajräìgaù
     kiïcid-vyäkula-mänasaù
sphurad-oñöho 'ti-ruñöäìgi
     yuddha-bhümià samäyayau

     patito—fell; api—although; sas—he; vajra—lightning; aìgaù—body; kiïcid—somewhat; vyäkula—upset; mänasaù—ay heart; sphurad—trembling; oñöho—lips; ati-ruñöäìgi—very angry; yuddha-bhümià—to the battleground; samäyayau—went.

     His body hard as a thunderbolt, when he fell he was only a little upset in his heart. Angry, and his lips trembling, he returned to the battleground.

Text 50

kaàso gåhétvä nägendraà
     sannipatya raëäìgane
niñpéòya çuëòäà tasyäpi
     dantäàs cürëé-cakära ha

     kaàso—Kaàsa; gåhétvä—grabbing; nägendraà—the king of elephants; sannipatya—threw; raëäìgane—onj the battleground; niñpéòya—strangled; çuëòäà—to the trunk; tasya—of him; api—also; dantän—tusks; cürëé-cakära—broke into pieces; ha—certainly.

     Kaàsa grabbed the elephant-king Airävata, threw him onto the battleground, strangled its trunk, and broke its tusks into pieces.

Text 51

atha cairävato nägo
     dudräväçu raëäìganät
nipätayan mahä-vérän
     devadhänéà puréà gataù

     atha—then; ca—also; airävato—Airävata; nägo—elephant; dudräva—fled; äçu—quickly; raëäìganät—from the battleground; nipätayan—knocking over; mahä-vérän—great heroes; devadhänéà puréà—to the capitol of the demigods; gataù—went.

     Knocking over many great heroes, the elephant Airävata fled the battleground and went to the capitol of the demigods.

Text 52

gåhétvä vaiñëavaà cäpaà
     sajjaà kåtvätha daitya-räö
devän vidrävayäm äsa
     bäëaughaiç ca dhanuù-svanaiù

     gåhétvä—taking; vaiñëavaà—of Lord Viñëu; cäpam—the bow; sajjaà—preparation; kåtvä—having done; atha—then; daitya-räö—the king of the demons; devän—the demigods; vidrävayäm äsa—drove away; bäëa—of arrows; aughais—with floods; ca—also; dhanuh—of the bow; svanaiù—with sounds.

     Taking the bow of Lord Viñëu and stringing it, with a flood of arrows accompanied by the twanging sound of the bow, the demon-king Kaàsa made the demigods flee.

Text 53

tataù suräs tena nihanyamänä
     vidudruvur déna-dhiyo diçaà te
kecid raëe mukta-çikhä babhüvur
     bhétäù sma itthaà yudhi vädinas te

     tataù—then; suräs—the demigods; tena—by that; nihanyamänäs—being killed; vidudruvur—fled; déna—unhappy; dhiyo—at heart; diçaà—the direction; te—they; kecid—some; raëe—in the battleground; mukta—abandoned; çikhäs—helmets; babhüvur—became; bhétäù—frightened; sma—indeed; itthaà—thus; yudhi—in the fight; vädinas—saying; te—they.

     As Kaàsa was attacking and killing them, the dispirited demigods fled in all directions. Some, their helmets lost, screamed in terror.

Text 54

kecit tathä präïjalayo 'ti-déna-vat
     sannyasta-çasträ yudhi mukta-kacchakäù
sthätuà raëe kaàsa-nå-deva-sammukhe
     gatepsitäù kecid atéva-vihvaläù

     kecit—some; tathä—so; präïjalayo—with folded hands; ati-déna-vat—as a poor and humble person; sannyasta—dropped; çasträs—weapons; yudhi—in the battle; mukta—abandoned; kacchakäù—lower garments; sthätum—to stay; raëe—in the battle; kaàsa-nå-deva-sammukhe—before King Kaàsa; gata—gone; ipsitäù—desired; kecid—some; atéva—very; vihvaläù—agitated.

     Some, dropping their weapons and armor, humbly surrendered with folded hands. Others, very troubled, had lost all desire to stand before King Kaàsa.

Text 55

itthaà sa devän pragatän nirékñya tan
     nétvä ca siàhäsanam ätapatravat
sarvais tadä daitya-gaëair janädhipaù
     sva-räjadhänéà mathuräà samäyayau

     ittham—thus; sas—he; devän—the demigods; pragatän—fleeing; nirékñya—seeing; tän—them; nétvä—bringing; ca—also; siàhäsanam—throne; ätapatravat—as a parasol; sarvais—by all; tadä—then; daitya—of demons; gaëair—by the hosts; janädhipaù—the king; sva—own; räjadhänéà—capitol; mathuräà—to Mathurä; samäyayau—went.

     Seeing that the demigods had fled, Kaàsa took (Indra's) throne and parasol and returned with all the demons to his own capitol Mathurä.

Chapter Eight
Çré Rädhikä-janma-varëana
Description of Çré Rädhikä's Birth

Text 1

çré-garga uväca 
çrutvä tadä çaunaka bhakti-yuktaù
     çré-maithilo jïäna-bhåtaà variñöhaù
natvä punaù präha munià mahantaà
     devarñi-väryaà hari-bhakti-niñöhaù

     çré-gargaù uväca - Çré Garga Muni said; çrutvä - heariìg; tadä - then; çaunaka - O Çaunaka; bhakti-yuktaù - full of devotion; çré-maithilo - the King of Mithilä; jïäna-bhåtäà - of the wise; variñöhaù - the best; natvä - bowiìg doen; punaù - again; präha - said; munià - to the sage; mahantaà - great; devarñi-väryaà - the best of the divine sages; hari - to Lord Hari; bhakti - devotional service; niñöhaù - faith.

     Çré Garga Muni said: O Çaunaka, when Bahuläçva, the king of Mithilä, who was filled witù faith and devotion to Lord Hari and who was the best of the wise, heard this, he again bowed down and spoke to the great sage Närada, the best of the devarñis.

Text 2

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
tvayä kulaà kau viçadé-kåtaà me
     çubhaà harer yad yaçasämalena
çré-kåñëa-bhakta-kñaëa-saìgamena
     jano 'pi sat syäd bahunä kim u svit

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca - Çré Bahuläçva said; tvayä - by you; kulaà - the family; kau - bad; viçadé-kåtaà - purified; me - of me; çubhaà - auspicious; harer - of Lord Hari; yad - which; yaçasä - by the fame; amalena - pure; çré-kåñëa - of Çré Kåñëa; bhakta - of the devotees; kñaëa - a moment's; saìgamena - by the contact; jano - a person; api - also; sat - saint; syäd - becomes; bahunä - more; kim u svit - what?

     Çré Bahuläçva said: By giving it the narrations of Lord Hari's pure glories you purified my materialistic family and made it auspicious. By a moment's touch with Lord Kåñëa's devotee even an ordinary person will become a saint. What more need I say?

Text 3

çré-rädhayä pürëatamas tu säkñäd
     gatvä vraje kià caritaà cakära
tad brühi me deva åçe åçéça
     tri-täpa-duùkhät paripähi mäà tvam

     çré-rädhayä - with Çré Rädhä; pürëatamas - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tu - indeed; säkñäd - directly; gatvä - having gone; vraje - to Vraja; kià - what?; caritaà - activities; cakära - did; tad - that; brühi - please tell; me - to me; deva - lord; åçe - O sage; åçi - of the sages; éça - O lord; tri - three; täpa - of the sufferings; duùkhät - from the miseries; paripähi - protect; mäà - me; tvam - you.

     What did the Supreme Personality of Godhead do when He came with Çré Rädhä to Vraja? O Lord, O great sage, please tell me. O king of the sages, please save me from the three miseries.

Text 4

çré-närada uväca 
dhanyaà kulaà yan niminä nåpena
     çré-kåñëa-bhaktena parat-pareëa
pürëé-kåtaà yatra bhavän prajätaù
     çuktau hi muktä-bhavanaà na citram

     çré-näradaù uväca - Çré Närada said; dhanyaà - fortunate; kulaà - family; yat - what; niminä nåpena - by King Nimi; çré-kåñëa-bhaktena - a devotee of Çré Kåñëa; parät pareëa - greater than the greatest; pürëé-kåtaà - perfected; yatra - where; bhavän - you; prajätaù - born; çuktau - in an oyster; hi - indeed; muktä - of a pearl; bhavanaà - the birth; na - not; citram - surprising.

     Çré Närada said: The family of your birth is fortunate for it was made perfect by King Nimi, who was a very great devotee of Lord Kåñëa. It is not surprising that a pearl is born in an oyster.

Text 5

atha prabhos tasya pavitra-léläà
     su-maìgaläà saàçåëutäà parasya
abhüt satäà yo bhuvi rakñaëärthaà
     na kevalaà kaàsa-vadhäya kåñëaù

     atha - then; prabhos - of the Lord; tasya - of Him; pavitra - pure; léläà - pastimes; su-maìgaläà - very auspicious; saàçåëutäà - should be heard; parasya - of the Supreme; abhüt - was; satäm - of the devotees; yo - who; bhuvi - the earth; rakñaëärthaà - to protect; na - not; kevalaà - only; kaàsa-vadhäya - to kill Kaàsa; kåñëaù - Kåñëa.

     Please hear the purifying pastimes of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The Lord did not only come to kill Kaàsa. He also came to protect the devotees.

Text 6

athaiva rädhä våçabhänu-patnyäm
     äveçya rüpaà mahasaù paräkhyam
kalindajä-kula-nikuïja-deçe
     su-mandire sävatatära räjan

     atha - then; eva - indeed; rädhä - Rädhä; våçabhänu-patnyäm - in the wife of Våñabhänu; äveçya - entering; rüpaà - form; mahasaù - of glory; para - transcendental; äkhyam - named; kalindajä - of the Yamunä; kula - shore; nikuïja-deçe - in the forest grove; su-mandire - in a great palace; sä - She; avatatära - descended; räjan - O king.

     Then, placing Her glorious transcendental form in (the womb of) King Våñabhänu's wife, Çré Rädhä descended into a great palace in a garden by the Yamunä's shore.

Text 7

ghanävåte vyomni dinasya madhye
     bhadre site näga-tithau ca some
aväkiran deva-gaëäù sphuradbhis
     tan-mandire nandanajaiù prasünaiù

     ghana - with clouds; ävåte - covered; vyomni - the sky; dinasya - of the day; madhye - in the middle; bhädre - in the month of Bhadra; site - during the bright fortnight; näga-tithau - on the eighth day; ca - also; some - on the day of the moon (Monday); aväkiran - scattered; deva-gaëäù - the demigods; sphuradbhis - with blossoming; tan-mandire - on that palace; nandanajaiù - grown in the Nandana gardens; prasünaiù - flowers.

     In the month of Bhädra (August-September), on a Monday that was the eighth day of the bright fortnight of the moon, at midday, when the sky was covered with clouds, (to celebrate Rädhä's descent) the demigods scattered flowers that had blossomed in the Nandana gardens.

Text 8

rädhävatäreëa tadä babhüvur
     nadyo 'malämbhaç ca diçaù praseduù
vavuç ca vätä aravinda-rägaiù
     su-çétaläù sundara-manda-yänäù

     rädhä - of Çré Rädhä; avatäreëa - by the descent; tadä - then; babhüvur - became; nadyo - the rivers; amala - pure; ambhas - waters; ca - and; diçaù - the directions; praseduù - became happy and auspicious; vavus - blew; ca - also; vätäs - breezes; aravinda - of lotus flowers; rägaiù - with pollen; su-çétaläù - very cool; sundara - beautiful; manda - slowly; yänäù - going.

     Because of Rädhä's descent the rivers became very pure and clear, the directions became auspicious and happy, and graceful, gentle, cooling breezes carried the pollen of lotus flowers.

Text 9

sutäà çarac-candra-çatäbhirämäà
     dåöövätha kértir mudam äpa gopé
çubhaà vidhäyäçu dadau dvijebhyo
     dvi-lakñam änanda-karaà gaväà ca

     sutäà - daughter; çarat - autumn; candra - moons; çata - hundred; abhirämaà - beautiful; dåöövä - seeing; atha - then; kértir - Kérti; mudam - happiness; äpa - attained; gopé - the gopé; çubhaà - auspicious; vidhäya - giving; äçu - at once; dadau - gaving; dvijebhyo - to the brähmaëas; dvi-lakñam - two hundred thousand; änanda - bliss; karaà - donation; gavän - cows; ca - also.

     Gazing at her daughter beautiful as hundreds of moons, the gopé Kérti became happy. To bring auspiciousness she gave two hundred thousand cows in charity to please the brähmaëas.

Text 10

preìkhe khacid-ratna-mayükha-pürëe
     suvarëa-yukte kåta-candanäìge
andolitä sä vavådhe sakhé-janair
     dine dine candra-kaleva bhäbhiù

     preìkhe khacid-ratna-mayükha-pürëe suvarëa-yukte kåta-candanäìge andolitä sä vavådhe sakhé-janair dine dine candra-kaleva bhäbhiù

Text 11

yad-darçanaà deva-varaiù su-durlabhaà
     yajïair na väptaà jana-janma-koöibhiù
sa-vigrahaà taà våçabhänu-mandire
     lalanti lokä lalanä-pralälanaiù

     yad-darçanaà deva-varaiù su-durlabhaà yajïair na väptaà jana-janma-koöibhiù sa-vigrahaà taà våçabhänu-mandire lalanti lokä lalanä-pralälanaiù

Text 12

çré-räsa-raìgasya vikäça-candrikä
     dépävalér yä våçabhänu-mandire
goloka-cüòä-maëi-kaëöha-bhüçaëäà
     dhyätvä paräà täà bhuvi paryaöämy aham

     çré-räsa-raìgasya vikäça-candrikä dépävalér yä våçabhänu-mandire goloka-cüòä-maëi-kaëöha-bhüçaëäà dhyätvä paräà täà bhuvi paryaöämy aham

Text 13

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
våçabhäno raho-bhägyaà
     yaçä rädhä sutäbhavat
kalävatyä sucandreëa
     kià kåtaà pürva-janmani

     çré-bahuläçva uväca våçabhäno raho-bhägyaà yaçä rädhä sutäbhavat kalävatyä sucandreëa kià kåtaà pürva-janmani

Text 14

çré-närada uväca 
någa-putro mahä-bhägaù
     sucandro nåpatéçvaraù
cakravarté harer aàso
     babhüvätéva-sundaraù

     çré-närada uväca någa-putro mahä-bhägaù sucandro nåpatéçvaraù cakravarté harer aàso babhüvätéva-sundaraù

Text 15

pitåëäà manasé-kanyäs
     tisro 'bhuvan manoharäù
kalävaté ratnamälä
     menakä näma nämataù

     pitåëäà manasé-kanyäs tisro 'bhuvan manoharäù kalävaté ratnamälä menakä näma nämataù

Text 16

kalävatéà sucandräya
     harer aàsäya dhémate
vaidehäya ratnamäläà
     menakäà ca himädraye
päribarheëa vidhinä
     svecchabhiù pitaro daduù

     kalävatéà sucandräya harer aàsäya dhémate vaidehäya ratnamäläà menakäà ca himädraye päribarheëa vidhinä svecchabhiù pitaro daduù

Text 17

sétäbhüd ratnamäläyäà
     menakäyäà ca pärvaté
dvayoç caritraà viditaà
     puräëeñu mahä-mate

     sétäbhüd ratnamäläyäà menakäyäà ca pärvaté dvayoç caritraà viditaà puräëeñu mahä-mate

Text 18

sucandro 'tha kalävatyä
     gomaté-téraje vane
divyair dvädaçabhir varçais
     tatäpa brahmaëas tapaù

     sucandro 'tha kalävatyä gomaté-téraje vane divyair dvädaçabhir varçais tatäpa brahmaëas tapaù

Text 19

atho vidhis tam ägatya
     varaà brühéty uväca ha
çrutvä valméka-deçäc ca
     niryayau divya-rüpa-dhåk

     atho vidhis tam ägatya varaà brühéty uväca ha çrutvä valméka-deçäc ca niryayau divya-rüpa-dhåk

Text 20

taà natvoväca me bhüyäd
     divyaà mokñaà parat-param
tac chrutvä duùkhitä sädhvé
     vidhià präha kalävaté

     taà natvoväca me bhüyäd divyaà mokñaà parat-param tac chrutvä duùkhitä sädhvé vidhià präha kalävaté

Text 21

patir eva hi näréëäà
     daivataà paramaà småtam
yadi mokñam asau yäti
     tadä me kä gatir bhavet

     patir eva hi näréëäà daivataà paramaà småtam yadi mokñam asau yäti tadä me kä gatir bhavet

Text 22

etad vinä na jévämi
     yadi mokñaà pradäsyasi
tubhyaà çäpaà pradäsyämi
     pati-vékñepa-vihvalä

     etad vinä na jévämi yadi mokñaà pradäsyasi tubhyaà çäpaà pradäsyämi pati-vékñepa-vihvalä

Text 23

çré-brahmoväca tvac-chäpäd bhaya-bhéto 'haà
     me varo 'pi måçä na hi
tasmät tvaà präëa-patinä
     särdhaà gaccha tripiçöapam

     çré-brahmoväca tvac-chäpäd bhaya-bhéto 'haà me varo 'pi måçä na hi tasmät tvaà präëa-patinä särdhaà gaccha tripiçöapam

Text 24

bhuktvä sukhäni kälena
     yuväà bhümau bhaviçyathaù
gaìgä-yamunayor madhye
     dväparänte ca bhärate

     bhuktvä sukhäni kälena yuväà bhümau bhaviçyathaù gaìgä-yamunayor madhye dväparänte ca bhärate

Text 25

yuvayo rädhikä säkñät
     paripürëatama-priyä
bhaviçyati yadä putré
     tadä mokñaà gamiçyathaù

     yuvayo rädhikä säkñät paripürëatama-priyä bhaviçyati yadä putré tadä mokñaà gamiçyathaù

Text 26

çré-närada uväca 
itthaà brahma-vareëätha
     divyenämogha-rüpiëä
kalävaté-sucandrau ca
     bhümau tau dvau babhüvatuù

     çré-närada uväca itthaà brahma-vareëätha divyenämogha-
rüpiëä kalävaté-sucandrau ca bhümau tau dvau babhüvatuù

Text 27

kalävaté känyakuïje
     bhalandana-nåpasya ca
jäti-smarä hy abhüd divyä
     yajïa-kuëòa-samudbhavä

     kalävaté känyakuïje bhalandana-nåpasya ca jäti-
smarä hy abhüd divyä yajïa-kuëòa-samudbhavä

Text 28

sucandro våçabhänv-äkhyaù
     surabhänu-gåhe 'bhavat
jäti-smäro gopa-varaù
     kämadeva iväparaù

     sucandro våçabhänv-äkhyaù surabhänu-gåhe 'bhavat jäti-smäro gopa-varaù kämadeva iväparaù

Text 29

sambandhaà yojayäm äsa
     nanda-räjo mahä-matiù
tayoç ca jäti-smarayor
     icchator icchayä dvayoù

     sambandhaà yojayäm äsa nanda-räjo mahä-matiù tayoç ca jäti-smarayor icchator icchayä dvayoù

Text 30

våçabhänoù kalävatyä
     akhyänaà çåëute naraù
sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù
     kåñëa-säyujyam äpnuyät

     våçabhänoù kalävatyä akhyänaà çåëute naraù sarva-
päpa-vinirmuktaù kåñëa-säyujyam äpnuyät

Chapter Nine
Vasudeva-viväha-varëana
Description of Vasudeva's Wedding

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
tatraikadä çré-mathurä-pure vare
     purohitaù sarva-yadüttamaiù kåtaù
surecchayä garga iti pramäëikaù
     samäyayau sundara-räja-mandiram

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; tatra —there; ekadä —once; çré-mathurä-pure —in Mathurä City; vare —excellent; purohitaù —the priest; sarva-yaduttamaiù —by all the best of the Yadus; kåtaù —done; sura —of the demigods; icchayä —by the desire; gargaù —Garga Muni; iti —thus; pramäëikaù —great scholar; samäyayau —came; sundara —handsome; räja —of the king; mandiram —to the palace.

     Çré Närada said: One day the great scholar Garga Muni, whom all the Yadus had made their chief priest, by his own wish went in Mathurä City to the king's handsome palace, . . .

Text 2

hérä-khacid-dhema-lasat-kapäöakaà
     dvipendra-karëähata-bhrìga-näditam
ibha-sravan-nirjhara-gaëòa-dhärayä
     samardritaà mandapa-khaëòa-maëòitam

     hira —diamonds; khacit —studded; hema —gold; lasat —glistening; kapäöakam —door; dvipa —of elephants; indra —king; karëa —by the ear; ähata —struck; bhrìga —bee; näditam —sounded; ibha —elephant; sravat —flowing; nirjhara —streams; gaëòa —cheek; dhärayä —with a stream; samardritam —wet; mandapa —pavilion; khaëòa —part; maëòitam —decorated.

 . . . which had great glistening golden doors studded with diamonds, which was filled with the sounds of bees and the flapping of elephants' ears, which was wet with streams of ichor flowing from the elephants, and which was decorated with many pavilions, . . .

Text 3

mahodbhaöair véra-janaiù sa-kaïcukair
     dhanur-dharaiç carma-kåpäëa-päëibhiù
ratha-dvipäçva-dhvajiné-balädibhiù
     su-rakñitaà maëòala-maëòalébhiù

     mahodbhaöaiù —great soldiers; véra-janaiù —heroic; sa-ka 24cukaiù —wearing armor; dhanur-dharaiù —holding bows; carma —shields; kåpäëa —and swords; päëibhiù —in hand; ratha —chariots; dvipa —elephants; açva —horses; dhvajiné —of an army; bala —the might; ädibhiù —beginning with; su —well; rakñitam —protected; maëòala-maëòalébhiù —with groups.

 . . . and which was well protected by great heroic soldiers wearing armor, carrying bows, holding swords and shields in their hands, and by the great power of an army riding on chariots, elephants, and horses.

Text 4

dadarça gargo nåpadevam ähukaà
     çvaphalkinä devaka-kaàsa-sevitam
çré-çakra-siàhäsana unnate pare
     sthitaà våtaà cchätra-vitäna-cämaraiù

     dadarça —saw; gargaù —Garga; nåpadevam —the king of kings; ähukam —Ugrasena; çvaphalkinä —by Akrüra; devaka —Deavaka; kaàsa —Kaàsa; sevitam —served; çré-çakra —of Indra; siàhäsane —on the throne; unnate —raised; pare —great; sthitam —situated; våtam —surrounded; chätra —parasol; vitäna —awning; cämaraiù —and cämaras.

     There Garga Muni saw emperor Ugrasena who was accompanied Akrüra, served by Devaka and Kaàsa, and surrounded by parasols, awnings, and cämaras as he sat on Indra's great throne

Text 5

dåöövä munià taà sahasäsanäçayäd
     utthäya räjä praëanäma yädavaiù
saàsthäpya sampüjya subhadra-péöhake
     stutvä parikramya nataù sthito 'bhavat

     dåöövä —seeing; munim —sage; tam —the; sahasä —as tonce; äsanäçayät —from the throne; utthäya —rising; räjä —the king; praëanäma —bowed; yädavaiù —with the Yadus; saàsthäpya —placing; sampüjya —worshiping; subhadra-péöhake —on the throne; stutvä —offering prayers; parikramya —circumambulating; nataù —bowing; sthitaù —stood; abhavat —was.

     Seeing the sage, the emperor at once rose from his throne, offered respectful obeisances with the Yädavas, placed the sage on the throne, worshiped him, glorified him, circumambulated him, and bowed down before him.

Text 6

dattväçiñaà garga-munir nåpäya vai
     papraccha sarvaà kuçalaà nåpädiñu
çré-devakaà präha mahä-manä åñir
     mahaujasaà néti-vidaà yadüttamam

     dattvä —giving; äçiñam —benediction; garga-muniù —Garga Muni; nåpäya —to the king; vai —certainly; papraccha —asked; sarvam —all; kuçalam —welfare; nåpa-ädiñu —beginning with the king; çré-devakam —Çré Devaka; präha —said; mahä-manä —the great soul; åñiù —the sage; mahaujasam —very powerful; néti-vidam —wise; yadüttamam —the best of the Yadus.

     Garga Muni blessed the king and asked about the welfare of the king and his associates. Then the saintly sage spoke to powerful and wise Çré Devaka, the best of the Yädavas.

Text 7

çré-garga uväca 
çaurià vinä bhuvi nåpeñu varas tu nästi
     cintyo mayä bahu-dinaiù kila yatra tatra
tasmän nå-deva vasudeva-varäya dehi
     çré-devakéà tava sutäà vidhinodvahasva

     çré-gargaù uväca —Çré Garga Muni said; çaurim —Vasudeva; vinä —without; bhuvi —on the earth; nåpeñu —among the kings; varaù —best; tu —indeed; na —not; asti —is; cintyaù —considered; mayä —by me; bahu-dinaiù —with many days; kila —indeed; yatra —where; tatra —there; tasmät —from that; nå-devaù —the king; vasudeva-varäya —great Vasudeva; dehi —please give; çré-devakém —Çré Devaké; tava —your; sutäm —daughter; vidhinä — following tradition; udvahasva —marry.

     Çré Garga Muni said: After thinking for many days I have decided that in this world no king is better than Vasudeva. Therefore, O king, please give your daughter Devaké in marriage to Vasudeva.

Text 8

çré-närada uväca 
kåtvä tadaiva puri niçcaya-nägavallià
     çré-devakaù sakala-dharma-bhåtäà variñöhaù
gargecchayä tu vasudeva-varäya putréà
     kåtvätha maìgalam alaà pradadau vivähe

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; kåtvä —having done; tadä —then; eva —indeed; puri —in the city; niçcaya —decision; nägavallim —betelnuts; çré-devakaù —Çré Devaka; sakala —all; dharma —of religious principles; bhåtäm —of they who possess; variñöhaù —the best; garga —of Garga Muni; icchayä —by the desire; tu —indeed; vasudeva-varäya —to Vasudeva; putrém —daughter; kåtvä —doing; atha —then; maìgalam —auspiciousness; alam —great; pradadau —gave; vivähe —in marriage.

     Çré Närada said: After offering (the sage) betelnuts to show his assent, Çré Devaka, who was the best of all pious men, performed the auspicious ceremonies and gave his daughter in marriage to Vasudeva according to Garga Muni's desire.

Text 9

kåtodvahaù çaurir atéva-sundaraà
     rathaà prayäne samalaìkåtaà hayaiù
särdhaà tayä devaka-räja-kanyayä
     samäruhat kaïcana-ratna-çobhayä

     kåta —performed; udvahaù —marriage; çauriù —Vasudeva; atéva-sundaram —very beautiful; ratham —chariot; prayäne —in the journey; samalaìkåtam —decorated; hayaiù —horses; särdham —with; tayä —with her; devaka-räja-kanyayä —King Devaka's daughter; samäruhat —ascended; kaïcana —with gold; ratna —and jewels; çobhayä —beautiful.

     When the marriage ceremony was over Vasudeva, accompanied by King Devaka's daughter, who was beautiful with gold and jewels, climbed a very graceful decorated chariot drawn by many horses.

Text 10     

svasuù priyaà kartum atéva kaàso
     jagräha raçméàs calatäà hayänäm
uväha vähäàs caturäìginébhir
     våtaù kåpä-sneha-paro 'tha çaurau

     svasuù —to his sister; priyam —a favor; kartum —to do; atéva —very; kaàsaù —Kaàsa; jagräha —took; rasmin —the reins; calatäm —moving; hayänäm —of the horses; uväha —carried; vähän —the chariots; caturäìginébhiù —with an army; våtaù —surrounded; kåpä-sneha-paraù —filled with kindness; atha —then; çaurau —for Vasudeva.

     To please his sister, Kaàsa took the reins of the moving horses. Kind and affectionate to Vasudeva, and surrounded by an army, he drove the chariot.

Text 11

däsé-sahasraà tv ayutaà gajanänäà
     sat-päribarhaà niyutaà hayänäm
lakñaà rathänäà ca gaväà dvi-lakñaà
     pradäd duhitre nåpa-devako vai

     däsé —of maidservants; sahasram —a thousand; tu —indeed; ayutam —ten thousand; gajanänäm —of elephants; sat-päribarham —a wedding pressent; niyutam —a million; hayänäm —of horses; lakñam —a hundred thousand; rathänäm —of chariots; ca —and; gaväm —of cows; dvi-lakñam —two hundred thousand pradät —gave; duhitre —to his daughter; nåpa-devaù —King Devaka; vai —indeed.

     King Devaka gave to his daughter a wedding present of a thousand maidservants, ten thousand elephants, a million horses, a hundred thousand chariots, and two hundred thousand cows.

Text 12

bheri-mådaìgoddhara-gomukhänäà
     dhundhurya-vénänaka-veëukänäà
mahat-svano 'bhüc calatäà yadünäà
     prayäna-käle pathi maìgalaà ca

     bheri —bheris; mådaìga —mådaìgas; uddhara —uddharas; gomukhänäm —and gomukhas; dhundhurya —dhundhuryas; vénä —vénäa; anaka —anakas; veëukänäm —and venus; mahat —great; svanaù —sound; abhüt —was; calatäm —moving; yadünäm —of the Yädavas; prayäna —of departure; käle —at the time; pathi —on the path; maìgalam —auspicious; ca —and.

     At the time of the Yädavas' departure, on the path was a great auspicious sound of many bheris, mådaìgas, uddharas, gomukhas, dhundhuryas, véëäs, anakas, and veëus.    

Text 13

äkäça-väg äha tadaiva kaàsaà
     tväm añöamo hi prasavo 'ïjasäsyäù
hantä na jänäsi ca yäà ratha-sthäà
     räçmià gåhétvä vahase 'budhas tvam

     äkäça —from the sky; väk —a voice; äha —said; tadä —then; eva —indeed; kaàsam —to Kaàsa; tväm —you; añöamaù —the eighth; hi —indeed; prasavaù —son; aïjasä —certainly; asyäù —of her; hantä —killer; na —not; jänäsi —you know; ca —also; yäm —whom; ratha-sthäm —staying on the chariot; räçmén —the reins; gåhétvä —taking; vahase —you carry; abudhaù —a fool; tvam —you.

     Then a voice from the sky said to Kaàsa: You are a fool. You do not know that the eighth son of the girl riding in the chariot you drive, holding the reins, will kill you.

Text 14

kusaìga-niñöho 'ti-khalo hi kaàso
     hantuà svasäraà dhiñaëaà cakära
kace gåhitvä sita-khaòga-päëir
     gata-trapo nirdaya ugra-karmä

     ku-saìga-niñöhaù —whose friends were demons; ati-khalaù —very wicked; hi —indeed; kaàsaù —Kaàsa; hantum —to kill; svasäram —his sister; dhiñaëam —the ground; cakära —did; kace —by the hair; gåhitvä —grabbing; sita —sharp; khaòga —sword; päëiù —in his hand; gata-trapaù —shameless; nirdayaù —merciless; ugra —horrible; karmä —deeds.

     Wicked, shameless, merciless Kaàsa, whose friends were demons and whose deeds were horrible, threw his sister to the ground, grabbed her by the hair, and grasped a sharp sword in his hand to kill her.

Text 15

vaditra-kärä rahitä babhüvur
     agre sthitäù syus cakitä hi paçcät
sarveñu vä çveta-mukheñu satsu
     çauris tam ähäçu satäà variñöhaù

     vaditra —käräù —musicians; rahitäù —without; babhüvuù —became; agre-sthitäù —in the presence; syuù —were; cakitäù —afraid; hi —indeed; paçcät —behind; sarveñu —all; vä —or; çveta —white; mukheñu —faces; satsu —being so; çauriù —Vasudeva; tam —to him; äha —said; äçu —at once; satäm —of the devotees; variñöhaù —the best.

     The musicians dropped their instruments. They who were in front went to the rear. When all faces turned white, Vasudeva, the best of devotees, spoke to Kaàsa.

Text 16

çré-vasudeva uväca 
bhojendra bhoja-kula-kérti-karas tvam eva
     bhaumädi-mägadha-bakäsura-vatsa-bäëaiù
çläghyä guëäs tava yudhi pratiyoddhu-kämaiù
     sa tvaà kathaà tu bhaginém asinätra hanyät

     çré-vasudevaù uväca —Çré Vasudeva said; bhoja-indra —O king of the Bhojas; bhoja-kula —of the Bhoja family; kérti-karaù —the glory; tvam —you; eva —indeed; bhauma —narakäsura; ädi —beginning with; mägadha —the king of Magadha; bakäsura —Bakäsura; vatsa —Vatsa; bäëaiù —by bäëa; çläghyäù —glorified; guëäù —virtues; tava —your; yudhi —in battle; pratiyoddhu-kämaiù —desiring to fight; saù —he; tvam —you; katham —why?; tu —certainly; bhaginém —sister; asinä —with a sword; atra —here; hanyät —will kill.

     Çré Vasudeva said: O king of the Bhojas, you are the glory of the Bhoja dynasty. Narakäsura, Jaräsandha, Bakäsura, Vatsäsura, and Bäëäsura, who all yearned to fight with you, praise your virtues in battle. Why are you now on the verge of killing with a sword your own sister?

Text 17

jïätvä striyaà kila bakéà pratiyoddhu-kämäà
     yuddhaà kåtaà na bhavatä nåpa-néti-våttyä
sä tu tvayäpi bhaginéva kåtä praçäntyai
     säkñäd iyaà tu bhaginé kim u te vicärät

     jïätvä —understanding; striyam —a woman; kila —indeed; bakém —Pütanä; pratiyoddhu-kämäm —desiring to fight; yuddham —fight; kåtam —done; na —not; bhavatä —by you; nåpa-néti-våttyä —by the proper conduct of a king; sä —she; tu —certainly; tvayä —by you; api —also; bhaginé —a sister; iva —like; kåtä —made; praçäntyai —to pacify; säkñät —directly; iyam —she; tu —certainly; bhaginé —sister; kim u —why?; te —of you; vicärät —by the thought.

     Following the royal code of chivalry you would not fight with Pütanä, a woman who yearned to fight with you, and to pacify her you treated her as if she were your sister. This girl is your real sister. Why do you wish to act in this way?

Text 18

udväha-parvaëi gatä ca tavänujä ca
     bälä suteva kåpaëä çubhadä sadaiñä
yogyo 'si nätra mathurädhipa hantum etäà
     tvaà déna-duùkha-haraëe kåta-citta-våttiù

     udväha —of the wedding; parvaëi —the festival; gatä —gone; ca —also; tava —your; anujä —younger sister; ca —also; bälä —a girl; sutä —daughter; iva —like; kåpaëä —object of mercy; çubhadä —auspicious; sadä —always; eñä —she; yogyaù —proper; asi —are; na —not; atra —here; mathurädhipa —O king of Mathurä; hantum —to kill; etäm —her; tvam —you; déna —of the poor; duùkha —of the sufferings; haraëe —in the removal; kåta —done; citta —of the heart; våttiù —the action.

     On this, her festive wedding-day, you should be kind to your younger sister and treat her as a daughter. O king of Mathurä, you should not kill her. You should fix your heart on remving the sufferings of the distressed.

Text 19

çré-närada uväca 
nämanyathetthaà pratibodhito 'pi
     ku-saìga-niñöho 'ti-khalo hi kaàsaù
tadä hareù käla-gatià vicärya
     çauriù prasannaù punar äha kaàsam

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; na —not; ämanyatha —think; ittham —thus; pratibodhitaù —enlightened; api —even; ku-säìga-niñöhaù —whose friends were demons; ati-khalaù —very wicked; hi —certainly; kaàsaù —Kaàsa; tadä —then; hareù —of Lord Kåñëa; käla —of time; gatim —the way; vicärya —considering; çauriù —Vasudeva; prasannaù —cheerful; punaù —again; äha —said; kaàsam —to Kaàsa.

     Çré Närada said: Although given this good instruction, wicked Kaàsa, whose friends were demons, did not take it seriously. Then, reflecting on the ways of Lord Hari's time, Vasudeva, now cheerful, again spoke to Kaàsa.

Text 20

çré-vasudeva uväca 
näsyäs tu te deva bhayaà kadäcid
     yad deva-väëyä kathitaà ca tac chåëu
puträn dadäméti yato bhayaà syän
     mä te vyathäsyäù prasava-prajätät

     çré-vasudevaù uväca —Çré Vasudeva said; na —not; asyäù —of her; tu —certainly; te —of you; deva —O lord; bhayam —fear; kadäcit —ever; yat —what; deva —divine; väëyä —by the voice; kathitam —spoken; ca —also; tat —that; çåëu —listen; puträn —sons; dadämi — i will give; iti —thus; yataù —because of whom; bhayam —fear; syät —may be; mä —don't; te —of you; vyathä —agitation; asyäù —of her; prasava-prajätät —from the birth of sons.

     Çré Vasudeva said: O lord, you never need to fear this girl. Hear what the divine voice said. I will give you the sons that frighten you. Don't be afraid of the sons that may be born from her.

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvä ca niçcitya vaco 'tha çaureù
     kaàsaù praçaàsyäçu gåhaà gato 'bhüt
çauris tadä devaka-räja-putryä
     bhayävåtaù san gåham äjagäma

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; çrutvä —hearing; ca —also; niçcitya —considering; vacaù —words; atha —then; çaureù —of Vasudeva; kaàsaù —Kaàsa; praçaàsya —praising; äçu —at once; gåham —home; gataù —went; abhüt —became; çauriù —Vasudeva; tadä —then; devaka-räja-putryä —with the daughter of King Devaka; bhaya-ävåtaù —filled with fear; san —being; gåham —home; äjagäma —came.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing and agreeing with Vasudeva's words, Kaàsa praised him and then went home. Then, frightened Vasudeva, accompanied by King Devaka's daughter, went to his home.

Chapter Ten
Çré-Balabhadra-janma-varëaëa
Description of the Birth of Lord Balaräma

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
bhétah paläyate näyaà
     yoddhärah kaàsa-noditah
ayutaà çastra-samyuktä
     rurudhuh çauri-mandiraà     
     çré-näradah uväca - Çré Närada said; bhétah - frightened; paläyate - flees; na - not; ayam - he; yoddhärah - soldiers; kaàsa - by Kaàsa; noditah - sent; ayutam - ten thousand; çastra-samyuktäh - with weapons; rurudhuh - stopped; çauri - Vasudeva's; mandiram - palace.

     Frightened Vasudeva could not flee, for ten thousand armed soldiers sent by Kaàsa surrounded Vasudeva's palace.

Text 2

çaurih kälena devakyäm
     añöau puträn ajéjanat
anuvarñaà cätha kanyäm
     ekäà mäyäà sanätaném

     çaurih - Vasudeva; kälena - in time; devakyäm - in Devaké; añöau - eight; puträn - sons; ajéjanat - begat; anuvarñam - every year; ca - and; atha - then; kanyäm - daughter; ekäm - one; mäyäm - Mäyä; sanätaném - eternal.

     In the course of time, year after year, Vasudeva begat in Devaké eight sons and a daughter who was the eternal goddess Mäyä.

Text 3

kértimantaà sutaà hy ädau
     jätam änakadundubhih
nétvä kaàsa-sabhäm etya
     dadau tasmai parärtha-vit

     kértimantam - Kértiman; sutam - son; hi - certainly; ädau - in the beginning; jätam - born;  änakadundubhih - Vasudeva; nétvä - bringing; kaàsa - of Kaàsa; sabhäm - to the assembly; etya - coming; dadau - gave; tasmai - to him; para-artha-vit - knowing the supreme benefit.

     Vasudeva, who knew the ultimate goal of life, went to Kaàsa's assembly and offered his first son Kirrtimän.

Text 4

satya-väkya-sthitaà çaurià
     dåñövä kaàso ghåëé tv abhüt
duhkhaà sädhur na sahate
     satye kasya kñamä na hi

     satya-väkya-sthitam - whose word is true; çaurim - Vasudeva; dåñövä - seeing; kaàsah - Kaàsa; ghåëé - kind; tu - indeed; abhüt - became; duhkham - sadness; sädhuh - a saint; na - not; sahate - bears; satye - in truth; kasya - of what?; kñamä - tolerance; na - not; hi - indeed.

     Seeing that Vasudeva had kept his promise and his word was true, Kaàsa became softened with kindness. In truth, what suffering will a saint not bear? What will he not tolerate?

Text 5

kaàsa uväca 
eña bälo yätu gåham
     etasmän na hi me bhayam
yuvayor añöamaà garbhaà
     haniñyämi na saàsayah

     kaàsah uväca - Kaàsasaid; eñah - this; bälah - child; yätu - may go; gåham - home; etasmät - of him; na - not; hi - indeed; me - of me; bhayam - fear; yuvayoh - of you; añöamam - the eighth;  garbham - child; haniñyämi - I will kill; na - no; saàsayah - doubt.

     Kaàsa said: This child may go home. I do not fear him. I will kill your eighth son. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 6

çré-närada uväca 
ity ukto vasudevas tu
     sa-putro gåham ägatah
satyaà nämanyata manäg
     väkyaà tasya durätmanah

     çré-näradah uväca - Çré Närada said; iti - thus; uktah - said; vasudevah - Vasudeva; tu - certainly; sa-putrah - with his son; gåham - home; ägatah - went;  satyam - truth; na - not; ämanyata - thought; manäk - at all; väkyam - statement; tasya - of him; durätmanah - the demon.

     Çré Närada said: Told this, Vasudeva went home with his son. However, he did not think the demon would make his words true.

Text 7

tadämbaräd ägataà mäà
     natvä püjyograsenajah
papraccha deväbhipräyaà
     prävocaà taà nibodha me

     tadä - then; ambarät - from the sky; ägatam - come;  mäm - me; natvä - bowing; püjya - worshiping; ugrasenajah - Kaàsa; papraccha - asked; deva - of the demigods; abhipräyam - intention; prävocam - i told;  tam - him; nibodha - learn; me - from me.

     Then I came there from the sky. Kaàsa bowed before me, worshiped me, and asked me about the demigods' plans. I said to him, "Learn this from me.

Text 8

nandädyä vasavah sarve
     våñabhänv-ädayah suräh
gopyo veda-åcädyäç ca
     santi bhümau nåpeçvara

     nanda - by Nanda; ädyäh - headed; vasavah - the Vasus; sarve - all; våñabhänu - by Våñabhänu; ädayah - headed; suräh - the suras; gopyah - the gopés;  veda-åcä - by the Vedic hymns; ädyäh - headed; ca - also; santi - are; bhümau - on the earth; nåpa-éçvara - O king of kings.

     "O king of kings, all the Vasus have become the people that have Nanda as their leader. The suras have become the people that have Våñabhänu as their leader. A group that has the Vedic hymns as its leader has become gopés. They are all now on the earth.

Text 9

vasudevädayo devä
     mathuräyäà ca våñëayah
devaky-ädyäh striyah sarvä
     devatäh santi niçcayäh

     vasudeva - by Vasudeva; ädayah - headed; deväh - the demigods; mathuräyäm - in mathurä; ca - and; våñëayah - the Våñëis; devaké - by Devaké; ädyäh - headed; striyah - their wives; sarväh - all; devatäh - demigods; santi - are; niçcayäh - concluded.

     "The devas have become the Våñëis headed by Vasudeva and all the demigoddesses have become their wives, headed by Devaké.

Text 10

sapta-vära-prasaìkhyänäd
     añöamäh sarva eva hi
te hantuh saìkhyayäyaà vai
     deväëäà vämato gatih

     sapta-vära-prasaìkhyänät - after the seventh; añöamäh - the eighth; sarve - all; eva - indeed; hi - indeed;  te - they; hantuh - of the killer; saìkhyayä - by the number; ayam - he; vai - indeed; deväëäm - of the demigods; vämato gatih - crookedness.

     "Depending on how they are counted, any of Vasudeva's sons can be the eighth one. Any of them can be the one that will kill you. That is the crookedness of the demigods.

Text 11

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvä taà mayi gate
     kåte daitya-vadhodyame
kaàsah kopa-våtah sadyo
     yadün hantuà mano dadhe

     çré-näradah uväca - Çré Närada said; iti - thus; uktvä - saying; tam - to him; mayi - when I; gate - had gone; kåte - done; daitya - of the demons; vadha - killing; udyame - in determination; kaàsah - Kaàsa; kopa - with anger; våtah - filled; sadyah - at once; yadün - the Yädavas; hantum - to kill;  manah - mind; dadhe - placed.

     Çré Närada said: After I had gone, Kaàsa became filled with anger at this plan (of the demigods) to kill the demons. In his heart he decided to kill all the Yädavas.

Text 12

vasudevaà devakéà ca
     baddhvätha nigaòair dåòhaih
mamarda taà çilä-påñöhe
     devaké-garbhajaà çiçum

     vasudevam - Vasudeva; devakém - Ddvaké; ca - and;  baddhvä - binding; atha - then; nigaòaih - in chains;  dåòhaih - firm; mamarda - beat; tam - him; çilä - of stone; påñöhe - on the surface; devaké-garbhajaà çiçum - Devaké's son.

     Kaàsa tightly bound Vasudeva and Devaké in chains. Then he crushed Devaké's son against a stone surface.

Text 13

jäti-smaro viñëu-bhayäj
     jätaà jätaà jaghäna ha
iti duñöa-vibhäväc ca
     bhümau bhütaà na saàçayam

     jäti - birth; smarah - remembering; viñëu - of Lord Viñëu; bhayät - out of fear; jätam - born; jätam - born; jaghäna - killed; ha - indeed; iti - thus; duñöa-vibhävät - out of wickedness; ca - also; bhümau - on the earth; bhütam - manifested;  na - no; saàçayam - doubt.

     Remembering his previous birth, out of his demonic nature
and out of fear of Lord Viñëu he killed each son as it was born. Of this there is no doubt. 
Text 14

ugrasenas tadä kruddho
     yädavendro nåpeçvarah
värayäm äsa kaàsäkhyaà
     vasudeva-sahäya-kåt

     ugrasenah - Ugrasena; tadä - then; kruddhah - angry; yädavendrah - the king of the Yädavas; nåpeçvarah - the king of kings; värayäm äsa - stopped; kaàsäkhyam - Kaàsa; vasudeva - to Vasudeva; sahäya - help; kåt - did.

     Angry at this, emperor Ugrasena, who was the master of the Yädavas, stopped Kaàsa and helped Vasudeva.

Text 15

kaàsasya duräbhipräyaà
     dåñövottasthur mahä-bhaöäh
ugrasenänugä rakñaà
     cakrus te khaòga-päëayah

     kaàsasya - of Kaàsa; duräbhipräyam - the wicked plan;  dåñövä - seeing; uttasthuh - rose; maha-bhaöäh - great soldiers; ugrasenänugäh - followers of Ugrasena; rakñam - protection; cakruh - did; te - they; khaòga - swords; päëayah - in hand.

     Seeing Kaàsa's demonic intentions, with swords in their hands, Ugrasena's soldiers protected (Vasudeva and Devaké).

Text 16

ugrasenänugän dåñövä
     kaàsa-véräh samutthitäh
taih särdham abhavad yuddhaà
     sabhä-maëòapa-madhyatah

     ugrasenänugän - the followers of Ugrasena; dåñövä - seeing; kaàsa-véräh - Kaàsa's soldiers; samutthitäh - risen; taih - them; särdham - with; abhavat - was; yuddham - battle; sabhä-maëòapa-madhyatah - in the midst of the assembly.

     Seeing Ugrasena's soldiers, Kaàsa's soldiers rose against them and fought a great battle with them in the midst of the assembly.

Text 17

dvära-deçe 'pi véräëäà
     yuddhaà jätaà parapsparam
khaòga-prahärair ayutaà
     janänäà nidhanaà gatam

     dvära-dese - in the doorway; api - even; véräëäm - of the soldiers; yuddham - battle; jätam - was born; parapsparam - mutual; khaòga - of swords; prahäraih - with blows; ayutam - ten thousand; janänäm - of people; nidhanam - to death; gatam - went.

     The soldiers fought a great battle in the doorway. By the blows of their swords ten thousand people died.

Texts 18 and 19

kaàso gåhétvätha gadäà
     pituh senäà mamarda ha
kaàsasya gadayä spåñöah
     kecic chinna-laläöakäh

bhinna-pädä bhinna-mukhäç
     chinnäàsäs chinna-bähavah
adho-mukhä ürdhva-mukhäh
     sa-çasträh patitäh kñaëät

     kaàsah - Kaàsa; gåhétvä - grasping; atha - then; gadäm - a club; pituh - of his father; senäm - the army;  mamarda ha - crushed; kaàsasya - of Kaàsa; gadayä - by the club; spåñöah - touched; kecit - some; chinna - broken; laläöakäh - foreheads; bhinna - broken;  pädäh - legs; bhinna - broken; mukhäh - faces; chinna - broken; aàsäh - shoulders; chinna - broken; bähavah - arms; adhah - bowed down; mukhäh - faces; ürdhva - up; mukhäh - faces; sa - with; çasträh - weapons; patitäh - fallen; kñaëät - in a moment.

     Then Kaàsa took his club and crushed his father's army. Touched by his club, in a moment many fell with their weapons, their faces down or up, and their foreheads, legs, faces, shoulders, or arms broken.

Text 20

vamanto rudhiraà vérä
     mürchitä nidhanaà gatäh
sabhä-maëòapam äraktaà
     dåçyate kñataja-sravät

     vamantah - vomiting; rudhiram - blood; véräh - the soldiers; mürchitäh - fell unconscious; nidhanam - to death; gatäh - went; sabhä-maëòapam - the assembly hall; äraktam - red; dåçyate - is seen; kñataja - blood from the wounds; sravät - from the streams.

     Many soldiers vomited blood, fell unconscious, and died. The assembly hall was seen to be red with streams of blood from their wounds.

Text 21

itthaà mahotkaöah kaàsah
     sa nipätyodbhaöän ripün
krodhäòhyo räja-räjendro
     jagräha pitaraà khalah

     ittham - thus; mahotkaöah - arrogant; kaàsah - Kaàsa; sah - he; nipätya - falling; udbhaöän - on the soldiers; ripün - enemy; krodha - with anger; aòhyah - rich; räja-räjendrah - the king of kings of kings; jagräha - grabbed; pitaram - his father; khalah - demon.

     In this way Kaàsa fell upon the enemy soldiers. Then, rich with anger, the demonic king of the kings of kings grabbed his father.

Text 22

nåpäsanät saìgåhétvä
     baddhvä päçaiç ca taà khalah
tan-mitraiç ca nåpaih särdhaà
     kärägäre rurodha ha

     nåpäsanät - from the royal throne; saìgåhétvä - taking;  baddhvä - binding; päçaih - with ropes; ca - also; tam - him; khalah - the demon; tan-mitraih - with his friends; ca - also; nåpaih - kings; särdham - with; kärägäre - in a prison cell; rurodha - imprisoned; ha - indeed.

     The demon dragged him from the royal throne, bound him with ropes, and with his royal friends locked him in a prison cell.

Text 23

madhünäà çürasenänäà
     deçänäà sarva-sampadäm
siàhäsane copaviçya
     svayaà räjyaà cakära ha

     madhünäm - of the Madhus; çürasenänäm - of the Çürasenas; deçänäm - of the countries; sarva - all;  sampadäm - opulences; siàhäsane - on the throne; ca - also; upaviçya - sitting; svayam - personally; räjyam - the kingdom; cakära ha - did.

     Sitting on the throne, Kaàsa then personally ruled the opulent kingdoms of the Madhus and Çürasenas.

Text 24

péòitä yädaväh sarve
     sambandhasya miñais tvaram
catur-diço 'ntaraà deçän
     viviçuh käla-vedinah

     péòitäh - distressed; yädaväh - the Yädavas; sarve - all; sambandhasya - of the relationship; miñaih - on the preText; tvaram - quickly; catur-diçah - to the four directions; antaram - in; deçän - countries; viviçuh - entered; käla - time; vedinah - aware.

     Harassed by Kaàsa, all the Yädavas fled to other countries on the preText of visiting relatives and waited for a better time.

Texts 25 and 26

devakyäh saptame garbhe
     harña-soka-vivardhane
vrajaà praëéte rohiëyäm
     anante yogamäyayä

aho garbhah kva vigata
     ity ücur mäthurä janäh

     devakyäh - of Devaké; saptame - in the seventh; garbhe - embryo; harña - happiness; soka - and grief; vivardhane - increasing; vrajam - to Vraja; praëéte - brought; rohiëyäm - in Rohiëé; anante - Ananta; yogamäyayä - by Yogamäyä; ahah - Oh; garbhah - embryo; kva - where?; vigatah - gone; iti - thus; ücuh - said; mäthuräh janäh - the people of Mathurä. 

     When Yogamäyä carried Devaké's seventh fetus, which brought her both joy and grief, to Vraja and placed it in Rohiëé's womb, the people of Mathurä said, "Where did the child go?" 

Texts 27 and 28

atha vraje païca-dineñu bhädre
     tithau ca ñañöhyäà ca site budhe ca
uccair grahaih païcabhir ävåte ca
     lagne tuläkhye dina-madhya-deçe

sureñu varñatsu su-puñpa-varñaà
     ghaneñu muïcatsu ca väri-bindün
babhüva devo vasudeva-patnyäà
     vibhäsayan nanda-gåhaà sva-bhäsä

     atha - then; vraje - in Vraja; païca-dineñu - in five days; bhädre - in Bhadra; tithau - in the day; ca - and; ñañöhyäm - on the sixth; ca - also; site - in the bright fortnight; budhe - in mercury; ca - and; uccaih - exalted; grahaih - with planets; païcabhih - with five; ävåte - covered; ca - and; lagne - on the horizon; tula-äkhye - in Libra; dina-madhya-deçe - at midday; sureñu - as the demigods; varñatsu - showered; su - beautiful; puñpa - of flowers; varñam - a rain; ghaneñu - as the clouds; muïcatsu - released; ca - also; väri-bindün - drops of water; babhüva - became; devah - the Supreme Lord; vasudeva-patnyäm - in the wife of Vasudeva; vibhäsayan - illuminating; nanda-gåham - Nanda's home; sva - with His own; bhäsä - splendor.

     Then, in Vraja, after five days, in the month of Bhädra (August-September), on the sixth day of the bright fortnight, when Mercury, five exalted planets, and the constellation Libra were on the horizon, at midday, as the demigods showered a beautiful rain of flowers and the clouds sprinkled drops of water, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, illuminating Nanda's home with His splendor, was born from Vasudeva's wife (Rohiëé). 

Text 29

nando 'pi kurvan chiçu-jäta-karma
     dadau dvijebhyo niyutaà gaväà ca
gopän samähüya su-gäyakänäà
     rävair mahä-maìgalam ätanoti

     nandah - Nanda; api - indeed; kurvan - performing;  çiçu - of the child; jäta-karma - the birth-ceremony; dadau - gave; dvijebhyah - to the brähmaëas; niyutam - a million; gaväm - of cows; ca - also; gopän - the gopas; samähüya - calling; su-gäyakänäm - of singers;  rävaih - with the music; mahä-maìgalam - great auspiciousness; ätanoti - gave.

     Nanda performed the child's birth ceremony and gave in charity a million cows to the brähmaëas. Then he called the gopas and observed a very auspicious festival with the music of many singers and instrumentalists.

Text 30

dvaipäyano devala-devaräta-
     vaçiñöha-väcaspatibhir mayä caägatya tatraiva samästhito 'bhüt
     padyädibhir nanda-kåtaih prasannah

     dvaipäyanah - Vyäsa; devala - Devala; devaräta - Devaräta; vaçiñöha - Vaçiñöha; väcaspatibhih - with Båhaspati; mayä - with me; ca - also; ägatya - coming; tatra - there; eva - indeed; samästhitah - situated; abhüt - became; padya - with water for washing the feet; ädibhih - beginning with; nanda - by Nanda; kåtaih - done; prasannah - pleased.

     Coming there with Devala, Devaräta, Vaçiñöha, Båhaspati, and myself (Närada), Vyäsadeva was pleased when Nanda washed his feet and worshiped Him in many ways.

Text 31

çré-nanda uväca 
sundaro bälakah ko 'yaà
     na dåçyo yat-samah kvacit
kathaà païca-dinäj jätas
     tan me brühi mahä-mune

     çré-nandah uväca - Çré Nanda said; sundarah - handsome;  bälakah - boy; kah - who?; ayam - He; na - not;  dåçyah - visible; yat - with whom; samah - equal; kvacit - anywhere; katham - how?; païca - after five; dinät - days; jätah - born; tat - that; me - me; brühi - please tell; mahä-mune - O great sage.

     Çré Nanda said: Who is this handsome boy, whose equal cannot be seen anywhere? How is it He was born after only five days (in the womb)? O great sage, please tell me.

Text 32

çré-vyäsa uväca 
aho bhägyaà tu te nanda
     çiçuh çeñah sanätanah
devakyäà vasudevasya
     jäto 'yaà mathurä-pure

     çré-vyasah uväca - Çré Vyäsa said; ahah - Oh; bhägyam - good fortune; tu - indeed; te - of you; nanda - O Nanda; çiçuh - child; çeñah - Çeña; sanätanah - eternal; devakyäm - in Devaké; vasudevasya - of Vasudeva; jätah - born; ayam - He; mathurä-pure - in Mathurä City..

     Çré Vyäsa said: Nanda, you are very fortunate. This child is eternal Ananta Çeña. In Mathurä City He was conceived by Vasudeva in Devaké.

Text 33

kåñëecchayä tad-udarät
     praëéto rohiëéà çubhäm
nanda-räja tvayä dåçyo
     durlabho yoginäm api

     kåñëa - of Lord Kåñëa; icchayä - by the wish; tat - of her; udarät - from the womb; praëétah - brought; rohiëém - to Rohiëé; çubhäm - beautiful; nanda-räja - O King Nanda; tvayä - by you; dåçyah - to be seen; durlabhah - difficult; yoginäm - by the yogés; api - even.

     By Lord Kåñëa's wish He was brought to beautiful Devaké. O King Nanda, you may see Him even though the great yogés cannot.

Text 34

tad-darçanärthaà präpto 'haà
     vedavyäso mahä-munih
tasmät tvaà darçayäsmäkaà
     çiçu-rüpaà parät param

     tad-darçana-artham - to see Him; präptah - attained; aham - I; devakyä - by Devaké; asau - he; mahä-munih - a great sage; tasmät - therefore; tvam - you; darçaya - please show; asmäkam - to us; çiçu - child; rüpam - form; parät param - greater than the greatest.

     I, Vedavyäsa, have come here to see Him. Therefore, please show Him, the Supreme Person who is greater than the greatest and who now displays the form of an infant, to us.

Text 35

çré-närada uväca 
atha nandah çiçuà çeñaà
     darçayäm äsa vismitah
dåñövä preìkha-sthitaà präha
     natvä satyavaté-sutah

     çré-näradah uväca - Çré Närada said; atha - then; nandah - Nanda; çiçum - the child; çeñam - Çeña; darçayäm äsa - showed; vismitah - astonished; dåñövä - seeing; preìkha - on the swinging-cradle; sthitam - situated; präha - said; natvä - bowing; satyavaté - of Satyavaté; sutah - the son.

     Çré Närada said: Then Nanda showed them the child Aannta Çeña. Gazing at the child in the cradle, Vyäsa, struck with wonder, bowed down, and spoke.

Text 36

çré-vyäsa uväca 
devädhideva bhagavan
     käma-päla namo 'stu te
namo 'nantäya çeñäya
     säkñäd-rämäya te namah

     çré-vyäsah uväca - Çré Vyäsa said; deva - of gods; adhideva - O Lord; bhagavan - O master of opulences; käma - of desires; päla - O protector; namah - obeisances; astu - may be te - to You; namah - obeisances; anantäya çeñäya - to Lord Ananta Çeña;  säkñäd-rämäya - directly Lord Balaräma; te - to You; namah - obeisances.

     Çré Vyäsa said: O master of the demigods, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, O Lord who grants desires, obeisances to You! Obeisances to You, who are Lord Aananta Çeña! Obeisances to You, who are directly Lord Räma!

Text 37

dharä-dharäya pürëäya
     sva-dhämne séra-päëaye
sahasra-çirase nityaà
     namah saìkarñaëäya te

     dharä - of the earth; dharäya - to the holder; pürëäya - perfect and complete; sva-dhämne - self-effulgent;  séra - a plow; päëaye - in hand; sahasra - a thousand; çirase - heads; nityam - eternally; namah - obeisances; saìkarñaëäya - Saìkarñaëa; te - to You.

     Eternal obeisances to You, Lord Saìkarñaëa, the maintainer of the earth, perfect and complete, effulgent and glorious, holding a plow in Your hand, and having a thousand heads!

Text 38

revaté-ramaëa tvaà vai
     baladevo 'cyutägrajah
haläyudhah pralamba-ghnah
     pähi mäà puruñottama

     revaté-ramaëa - O husband of Revaté; tvam - You; vai - indeed; baladevah - Baladeva; acyuta - of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead; agrajah - the elder broehter; hala - plow; äyudhah - weapon; pralamba - of Pralambäsura; ghnah - the killer; pähi - protect; mäm - me; puruñottama - O Supreme Person.

     You are Baladeva, Revaté's husband and the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead's elder brother. You are armed with a plow. You are Pralambäsura's killer. O Supreme Person, please save me!

Text 39

baläya balabhadräya
     täläìkaya namo namah
nélämbaräya gauräya
     rauhiëeyäya te namah

     baläya - Bala; balabhadräya - Balabhadra; täläìkaya - whose mark is the palm tree; namah - obeisances;  namah - obeisances; néla - blue; ambaräya - garments;  gauräya - fair complexion; rauhiëeyäya - the son of Rohiëé; te - to You; namah - obeisances.

     Obeisances! Obeisances to You, who are known as Bala and Balabhadra, and who carry a palm-tree flag! Obeisances to You, Rohiëé's fair-complexioned son dressed in blue garments!

Text 40

dhenukärir muñöikärih
     küöärir balvaläntakah
rukmy-arih küpakarëärih
     kumbhaëòäris tvam eva hi

     dhenuka - of Dhenuka; arih - the enemy; muñöika - of Musöika; arih - the enemy; küöa - of Küöa; arih - the enemy; balvala - of Balvala; antakah - the end; rukmé - of Rukmé; arih - enemy; küpakarëa - of Kupakarna; arih - the enemy; kumbhaëòa - of Kumbhaëòa; arih - the enemy; tvam - You; eva - certainly; hi - certainly.

     You are the enemy of Dhenuka, Muñtika, Küöa, Rukmé, Küpakarëa, and Kumbhaëòa. You put an end to Balvala.

Text 41

kälindé-bhedano 'si tvaà
     hastinäpura-karñakah
dvividärir yädavendro
     vraja-maëòala-maëòanah

     kälindé - the yamunä; bhedanah - dividing; asi - are; tvam - You; hastinäpura - of Hastinäpura; karñakah - the puller; dvivida - of Dvivida; arih - the enemy; yädava - of the Yädavas; indrah - the king; vraja - of Vraja; maëòala - of the circle; maëòanah - the decoration.

     You divided the Yamunä and dragged Hastinäpura. You are the enemy of Dvivida. You are the king of the Yädavas and the decoration of the circle of Vraja.

Text 42

kaàsa-bhrätå-prahätäsi
     tértha-yäträkarah prabhuh
duryodhana-guruh säkñät
     pähi pähi prabho jagat

     kaàsa - of Kaàsa; bhrätå - of the brothers; prahätä - the killer; asi - You are; tértha-yäträkarah - the pilgrim who goes to holy places; prabhuh - the Lord; duryodhana-guruh - the teacher of Duryodhana; säkñät - directly; pähi - protect; pähi - protect; prabhah - O Lord; jagat - the universe.

     You are the killer of Kaàsa's brothers, a pilgrim who goes to holy places, the Supreme Master, and the teacher of Duryodhana. O Lord, please protect, please protect the world!

Text 43

jaya jayäcyuta deva parät para
     svayam ananta dig-anta-gataà yaçah
sura-munéndra-phaëéndra-varäya te
     musaline baline haline namah

     jaya - glories; jaya - glories; acyuta - O infallible; deva - Lord; parät para - greater than the greatest; svayam - personally; ananta - Ananta; dik - the directions; anta - the end; gatam - gone; yaçah - fane; sura - the demigods; muni - of sages; indra - kings; phaëi - of serpents; indra - kings; varäya - top the best; te - to You; musaline - who hold a club; baline - powerful; haline - who hold a plow; namah - obeisances.

     O infallble Lord, O greater than the greatest, O Lord Ananta, O Lord whose fame is everywhere, glory, glory to You! Obeisances to You, who hold a plow and a club and are the master of the demigods, great sages, and regal serpents!

Text 44

iha paöhet satataà stavanaà tu yah
     sa tu hareh paramaà padam ävrajet
jagati sarva-balaà tv ari-mardanaà
     bhavati tasya jayah sa-janaà dhanam

     iha - here; paöhet - reads; satatam - regularly; stavanam - prayer; tu - certainly; yah - who; sah - he; tu - certainly; hareh - of Lord Hari; paramam - the supreme; padam - abode; ävrajet - goes; jagati - in the world; sarva - all; balam - strength; tu - indeed; ari - enemies; mardanam - crushing; bhavati - becomes; tasya - of him; jayah - victory; sa-janam - with followers; dhanam - wealth.

     A person who regularly reads or recites these prayers attains Lord Hari's supreme abode. Even in this world he attains all strength. He crushes his enemies. For him are victory, wealth, and followers.

Text 45

çré-närada uväca 
balaà parikramya çataà praëamya tair
     dvaipäyano deva paräçarätmajah
viçäla-buddhir muni-bädaräyaëah
     sarasvatéà satyavaté-suto yayau

     çré-näradah uväca - Çré Närada said; balam - Lord Balaräma; parikramya - circumambulating; çatam - a hundred times; praëamya - bowing down; taih - with them; dvaipäyanah - Vyäsadeva; deva - O lord; paräçarätmajah - the son of Paräçara Muni; viçäla - great;  buddhih - intelligence; muni-bädaräyaëah - Vyäsa Muni; sarasvatém - to the Sarasvaté; satyavaté-sutah - the son of satyavaté; yayau - went.

     Çré Närada said: After circumambulating Lord Balaräma and bowing down before Him a hundred times in the company of (the other sages), intelligent Vyäsa Muni, who was the son of Paräçara and Satyavaté, went to the Sarasvaté river.

Chapter Eleven
Çré Kåñëacandra-janma-varëana
Description of Çré Kåñëacandra's Birth

Text 1

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
viveça vasudevasya
     manaù pürvaà parät paraù

     paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Lord; svayam—Himself; viveça—entered; vasudevasya—of Vasudeva; manaù—the heart; pürvam—before; parät—than the greatest; paraù—greater.

     Çré Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is greater than the greatest, personally entered Vasudeva's heart.

Text 2

suryendu-vahni-saìkäço
     vasudevo mahä-manäù
babhüvätyanta-mahasä
     säkñäd yajïa iväparaù

     surya—sun; indu—moon; vahni—fire; saìkäçaù—glorious; vasudevaù—Vasudeva; mahä-manäù—the great soul; babhüva—became; atyanta-mahasä—with great splendor; säkñät—directly; yajïaù—the Supreme Lord who is the master of all Vedic sacrifices; iva—like; aparaù—another.

     The great soul Vasudeva shone with a glory like the sun, moon, and fire. He was like a double of the Supreme Lord, the master of all sacrifices.

Text 3

devakyäm ägate kåñëe
     sarveñäm abhayaìkare
raräja tena sä gehe
     ghane saudaminé yathä

     devakyäm—in Devaké; ägate—arrived; kåñëe—when Lord Kåñëa; sarveñäm—of everyone; abhayaìkare—giving fearlessness; raräja—shone; tena—by Him; sä—she; gehe—in the home; ghane—intense; saudaminé—lightning; yathä—as.

     When Lord Kåñëa, who gives fearlessness to everyone, entered Devaké, she shone as if a great lightning flash had entered her home. 
Text 4

tejovatéà ca täà vékñya
     kaàsaù präha bhayäturaù
präpto 'yaà präëa-hantä me
     pürvam eñä na cedåçé

     tejovatém—effulgent; ca—and; täm—her; vékñya—seeing; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; präha—said; bhaya-—with fear; aturaù—overcome; präptaù—attained; ayam—this; präëa—of life; hantä—the killer; me—of me; pürvam—before; eñä—she; na—not; ca—and; édåçé—like this.

     Seeing her so effulgent, Kaàsa became frightened. He said, "Now the destroyer of my life has come. She was not like this before.

Text 5

jäta-mätraà haniñyäméty
     uktväste bhaya-vihvalaù
paçyan sarvatra ca harià
     pürva-çatruà vicintayan

     jäta—born; mätram—only; haniñyämi—I will kill; itit—thus; uktvä—sayinh; äste—is; bhaya-vihvalaù—overcome with fear; paçyan—looking; sarvatra—everywhere; ca—also; harim—Lord Hari; pürva—before; çatrum—enemy; vicintayan—thinking.

     "As soon as He is born I will kill Him." Saying this, looking in all directions, and thinking of his former enemy Lord Hari, he became filled with fear.

Text 6

aho vairänubandhena
     säkñät kåñëo 'pi dåçyate
tasmäd vairaà prakurvanti
     kåñëa-präpty-ärtham äsuräù

     ahaù—ah; vaira-anubandhena—with hatred; säkñät—directly; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; api—even; dåçyate—is seen; tasmät—from that; vairam—hatred; prakurvanti—do; kåñëa—Kåñëa; präpti-ärtham—to attain; äsuräù—the demons.

     Even by hating Him one is able to see Kåñëa. For this reason, in order to attain the association of Lord Kåñëa, the demons hate Him.

Text 7

atha brahmädayo devä
     munéndrair asmad-ädibhiù
çauri-gehopari präptäù
     stavaà cakruù praëamya tam

     atha—then; brahma-ädayaù—headed by Brahmä; deväù—the demigods; muni-indraiù—with the kings of the sages; asmad-ädibhiù—headed by me; çauri—of Vasudeva; geha—home; upari—above; präptäù—attained; stavam—prayers; cakruù—did; praëamya—bowing down; tam—to Him.

     Then the demigods headed by Brahmä and the great sages headed by me went to Vasudeva's home, bowed down before Lord Kåñëa, and offered many prayers. 
Text 8

çré-devä ücuù 
yaj-jägarädiñu bhaveñu paraà hy ahetur
     hetuù svid asya vicaranti guëäçrayena
naitad viçanti mahad-indriya-deva-saìghäs
     tasmai namo 'gnim iva viståta-visphuliìgäù

     çré-deväù ücuù—the demigods said; yat—which; jägara—waking; ädiñu—beginning with; bhaveñu—in states of being; param—supreme; hi—indeed; ahetuù—not the cause; hetuù—the cause; svit—whether?; asya—of Him; vicaranti—think; guëa—the modes; äçrayena—by the shelter; na—not; etat—this; viçanti—enter; mahat—mahat; indriya—senses; deva—demigods; saìghäù—multitudes; tasmai—to Him; namaù—obeisances; agnim—fire; iva—like; viståta—expanded; visphuliìgäù—sparks.

     The demigods said: Taking shelter of the modes of nature, the philosophers wonder, "Is the Supreme the origin of consciousness and other states of being, or is not their origin?" As sparks come from a fire (but do not enter it), so the mahat-tattva, senses, and demigods (come from Him but) do not enter Him. Obeisances to Him, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 9

naiveñituà prabhur ayaà balinäà baléyän
     mäyä na çabda uta no viñayé-karoti
tad brahma pürëam amåtaà paramaà praçäntaà
     çuddhaà parät parataraà çaraëaà gatäù smaù

     na—not; eva—indeed; éñitum—to control; prabhuù—able; ayam—He; balinäm—than the strongest; baléyän—stronger; mäyä—illusion; na—not; çabdaù—sound; uta—indeed; na—not; u—indeed; viñayé-karoti—become in the realm of perception; tat—that; brahma—Supreme; pürëam—perfect and complete; amåtam—eternal; paramam—supreme; praçäntam—peaceful; çuddham—pure; parät parataram—greater than the greatest; çaraëam—shelter; gatäù—gone; smaù—we.

     The strongest of the strong cannot conquer Him. The potency of illusion cannot conquer Him. The Vedas cannot bring Him within their realm of perception. Of Him, the perfect, complete, eternal, peaceful, and pure Supreme Personality of Godhead, we take shelter.

Text 10

aàçäàçakäàçaka-kalädy-avatära-våndäir
     äveça-pürëa-sahitaiç ca parasya yasya
sargädayaù kila bhavanti tam eva kåñëaà
     pürëat paraà tu paripürëatamaà natäù smaù

     aàça—of a part; aàçaka—of a part; aàçaka—of a part; kalä—a part; ädi—beginning; avatära—of incarnations; våndäiù—with hosts; äveça—entrance; pürëa—full; sahitaiù—with; ca—and; parasya—of the Supreme; yasya—of whom; sarga—creation; ädayaù—beginning with; kila—indeed; bhavanti—are; tam—to Him; eva—certainly; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; pürëat—than the perfect; param—better; tu—indeed; paripürëatamam—most merfect and complete; natäù—bowed down; smaù—we are.

     With His aàça-avatära, aàçäàça-avatära, kalä-avatära, äveça-avatära, pürëa-avatära, and many other avatäras, He creates (maintains, and destroys the material universes). To Him, Lord Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is greater than the pürëa-avatära, we offer our respectful obeisances.

Text 11

manvantareñu ca yugeñu gatägateñu
     kalpeñu cäàça-kalayä sva-vapur bibharñi
adyaiva dhäma paripürëatamaà tanoñi
     dharmaà vidhäya bhuvi maìgalam ätanoñi

     manvantareñu—in the manvantaras; ca—also; yugeñu—in the yugas; gata—gone; ägateñu—come; kalpeñu—in the kalpas; ca—and; aàça-kalayä—by a part; sva—own; vapuù—form; bibharñi—manifest; adya—now; eva—indeed; dhäma—abode; paripürëatamam—most perfect; tanoñi—You manifest; dharmam—religion; vidhäya—placing; bhuvi—on the earth; maìgalam—auspicious; ätanoñi—You give.

     In manvantaras, yugas, and kalpas past and future You manifest Your own form in partial incarnations, but now You manifest Your original and most perfect form. Establishing the real religion, You bring auspiciousness to the earth.

Text 12

yad durlabhaà viçada-yogibhir apy agamyaà
     gamyaà dravadbhir amaläçaya-bhakti-yogaiù
änanda-kända caratas tava manda-yänaà
     pädäravinda-makaranda-rajo dadhämaù

     yat—what; durlabham—difficult to attain; viçada—pure; yogibhiù—by the yogés; api—even; agamyam—unapproachable; gamyam—approachable; dravadbhiù—running; amala—pure; açaya—heart; bhakti-yogaiù—by they who engage in the yoga of devotional service; änanda—of bliss; kända—the root; carataù—moving; tava—of You; manda—slow; yänam—going; päda—feet; aravinda—lotus; makaranda—honey; rajaù—pollen; dadhämaù—we place.

     O blissful Lord, we place (in our hearts) the nectar-pollen gently blowing from Your lotus feet as You walk, rare pollen not attained by even the purest yogés but only by they whose pure hearts melt with love for You.

Text 13

pürvaà tathätra kamanéya-vapuñmayaà tväà
     kandarpa-koöi-çata-mohanam adbhutaà ca
goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëa-dyutim ädadhänaà
     rädhä-patià dharaëi-dhurya-dhanaà dadhämaù

     pürvam—before; tathä—so; atra—here; kamanéya—handsome; vapuñmayam—with a form; tvam—You; kandarpa—of Kämadevas; koöi-çata—a hundred million; mohanam—charming; adbhutam—wonderful; ca—and; goloka—of Goloka; dhäma—the abode; dhiñaëa—abode; dyutim—splendor; ädadhänam—taking; rädhä-patim—the master of Rädhä; dharaëi—of the earth; dhurya—to be held; dhanam—wealth; dadhämaù—we place.

     (In our hearts) we place wonderful You, whose handsome form is more charming than a hundred million Kämadevas, who are the glory of the realm of Goloka, who are the master of Rädhä and the wealth of the earth.
Text 14

çré-närada uväca

natvä harià tadä devä
     brahmädyä munibhiù saha
gäyantas taà praçaàsantaù
     sva-dhämäni yayur mudä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; natvä—offering obeisances; harim—to Lord Hari; tadä—then; deväù—the demigods; brahma-ädyäù—headed by Brahmä; munibhiù—the sages; saha—with; gäyantaù—singing; tam—Him; praçaàsantaù—praising; sva-dhämäni—to their own abodes; yayuù—went; mudä—happily.

     Çré Närada said: Bowing down to Lord Hari and singing His praises, the demigods headed by Brahmä went with the sages to their own abodes.

Text 15

atha maithila-räjendra
     janma-käle hareù sati
ambaraà nirmalaà bhütaà
     nirmaläç ca diço daça

     atha—then; maithila-räjendra—O great king of Mithilä; janma—of birth; käle—at the time; hareù—of Lord Hari; sati—being; ambaram—the sky; nirmalam—pure; bhütam—become; nirmaläù—pure; ca—also; diçaù—directions; daça—ten.

     O great king of Mithilä, at the time of Lord Hari's birth the sky and the ten directions became very pure.

Text 16

ujjvaläs tärakä jätäù
     prasannaà bhümi-maëòalam
nadä nadyaù samudräç ca
     prasannäpaù sarovaräù

     ujjvaläù—brilliant; tärakäù—stars; jätäù—born; prasannam—happy; bhümi-maëòalam—the earth; nadäù—rivers; nadyaù—streams; samudräù—oceans; ca—and; prasanna—clear; äpaù—waters; sarovaräù—lakes.

     The stars were bright, the earth happy, and the rivers, streams, oceans, and lakes filled with pure waters.

Text 17

sahasra-dala-padmäni
     çata-paträëi sarvataù
vicakäni marut-sparçaiù
     patad-gandhi-rajäàsi ca

     sahasra—thousand; dala—petal; padmäni—lotuses; çata—hundred; paträëi—leaves; sarvataù—everywhere; vicakäni—blooming; marut—of the breeze; sparçaiù—with the touch; patat—falling; gandhi—fragrant; rajäàsi—pollen; ca—and.

     The breezes' touch spreading their fragrant pollen, thousand-petal hundred-leaf lotuses bloomed everywhere.

Text 18

teñu nedur madhukarä
     nadantaç citra-pakñiëaù
çétalä manda-yänäç ca
     gandhäktä vayavo vavuù

     teñu—among them; neduù—sounded; madhukaräù—bees; nadantaù—humming; citra—colorful; pakñiëaù—birds; çétaläù—cool; manda-yänäù—slowly moving; ca—and; gandhäktäù—fragrant; vayavaù—breezes; vavuù—blew.

     Bees hummed, colorful birds sang, and fragrant cooling breezes gently blew.

Text 19

åddhä janapadä grämä
     nägarä maìgaläyanäù
devä viprä nagä gävo
     babhüvuù sukha-samvåtäù

     åddhäù—wealthy; janapadäù—countries; grämäù—villages; nägaräù—towns; maìgaläyanäù—auspicious; deväù—demigods; vipräù—brähmaëas; nagäù—trees; gävaù—cows; babhüvuù—became; sukha-samvåtäù—filled with happiness.

     The countries became wealthy, the towns and villages auspicious, and the demigods, brähmaëas, trees, and cows happy.

Text 20

deva-dundubhayo nedur
     jaya-dhvani-samäkuläù
yatra tatra mahä-räja
     sarveñäà maìgalaà param

     deva-dundubhayaù—the drums of the demigods; neduù—sounded; jaya—of victory; dhvani—with sounds; samäkuläù—filled; yatra—where; tatra—there; mahä-räja—O great king; sarveñäm—of all; maìgalam—auspiciousness; param—great.

     The drums of the demigods were filled with sounds of victory. Everywhere was great auspiciousness.

Text 21

vidyädharäç ca gandharväù
     siddha-kinnara-cäraëäù
jaguù sunäyakä deväs
     tuñöuvuù stutibhiù param

     vidyädharäù—Vidyädharas; ca—also; gandharväù—Gandharvas; siddha—Siddhas; kinnara—Kinnaras; cäraëäù—Caranas; jaguù—sang; sunäyakäù—great; deväù—demigods; tuñöuvuù—praised; stutibhiù—with prayers; param—the Supreme.

     The Vidyädharas, Gandharvas, Siddhas, Kinnaras, and Cäraëas sang, and the great demigods offered prayers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Texts 22-24

nanåtur divi gandharvä
     vidyädharyo mudänvitäù
pärijätaka-mandära-
     mälaté-sumanäàsi ca

mumucur deva-mukhyäç ca
     garjantaç ca ghanä jale
bhädre budhe kåñëa-pakñe
     dhatrarkñe harñaëe våñe
karëe 'ñöamyäm ardha-rätre
     nakñatreça-mahodaye

andhakärävåte käle
     devakyäà çauri-mandire
äviräséd dhariù säkñäd
     äraëyäm adhvare 'gni-vat

     nanåtuù—danced; divi—in heaven; gandharväù—the Gandharvas; vidyädharyaù—the Vidhyadharas; mudä-anvitäù—with happiness; pärijätaka—parijatas; mandära—mandaras; mälaté—malatis; sumanäàsi—and sumanaùs; ca—and; mumucuù—released; deva-mukhyäù—the great demigods; ca—and; garjantaù—roaring; ca—and; ghanäù—the clouds; jale—in water; bhädre—in the month of Bhadra; budhe—mercury; kåñëa-pakñe—in the dark fortnight; dhatra-åkñe—the star Rohiëé; harñaëe—harñaëa-yoga; våñe—Taurus; karëe—on the horizon; añöamyäm—on the eighth day; ardha—in the middle; rätre—of the night; nakñatreça—of the moon; mahä—great; udaye—in the rising; andhakära—with darkness; ävåte—covered; käle—at the time; devakyäm—in Devaké; çauri—of Vasudeva; mandire—in the palace; äviräsét—appeared; hariù—Lord Hari; säkñät—directly; äraëyäm—on the araëi stick; adhvare—in a yajïa; agni—fire; vat—like.

     The happy Gandharvas and Vidyädharas danced in heaven, the great demigods threw many pärijäta, mandära, mälaté, and sumanaù flowers, and the clouds thundered and sprinkled water. Then, in the month of Bhädra (August-September), during the eighth tithi of the dark fortnight, when Mercury, Taurus, and the Rohiëé star were on the horizon, and the planets were in harñaëa-yoga, in the middle of the night, when everything was covered with darkness and the moon was rising, in Vasudeva's palace Lord Hari appeared from Devaké as in a yajïa fire appears from the araëi wood.

Texts 25-29

sphurad-akña-vicitra-häriëaà
     vilasat-kaustubha-ratna-dhäriëam
paridhi-dyuti-nüpuräìgadaà
     dhåta-bälärka-kiréöa-kuëòalam

calad-adbhuta-vahni-kaìkanaà
     taòid-ürjita-guëa-mekhaläïcitam
madhubhåd-dhvani-padma-mälinaà
     nava-jämbünada-divya-väsasam

sa-taòid-ghana-divya-saubhagaà
     cala-nélälaka-vånda-bhån-mukham
calad-aàçu tamo-haraà paraà
     çubhadaà sundaram ambujekñaëam

kåta-pätra-vicitra-maëòanaà
     satataà koöi-manoja-mohanam
paripürëatamaà parät paraà
     kala-veëu-dhvani-vädya-tat-param

tam avekñya sutaà yadüttamo
     hari-janmotsava-phulla-locanaù
atha vipra-janeñu cäçu vai
     niyutaà san manasä gaväà dadau

     sphurat—glittering; akña—of jewels; vicitra—colorful; häriëam—wearing a necklace; vilasat—glittering; kaustubha—Kaustubha; ratna—jewel; dhäriëam—wearing; paridhi—circle; dyuti—light; nüpura—anklets; aìgadam—armlets; dhåta—held; bälärka—rising sun; kiréöa—helmet; kuëòalam—earrings; calat—moving; adbhuta—wonderful; vahni—fire; kaìkanam—bracelets; taòit—lightning; ürjita—glorious; guëa-mekhalä-aïcitam—wearing a belt; madhubhåt—of bees; dhvani—with the sounds; padma—of lotuses; mälinam—wearing a garland; nava—new; jämbünada—of gold; divya—splendid; väsasam—garments; sa—with; taòit—lightning; ghana—cloud; divya—splendid; saubhagam—opulence; cala—moving; néla—dark; alaka-våndä—curly locks of hair; bhåt—holding; mukham—face; calat—moving; aàçu—splendor; tamaù—darkness; haram—removing; param—supreme; çubha—auspiciousness; dam—giving; sundaram—handsome; ambuja—lotus; ékñaëam—eyes; kåta—done; pätra—pictures; vicitra—wonderful and colorful; maëòanam—decoration; satatam—always; koöi—of ten million; manoja—Kämadevas; mohanam—charming; paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; parät—than the greatest; param—greater; kala—sweet; veëu—flute; dhvani-vädya—music; tat-param—devoted; tam—Him; avekñya—seeing; sutam—his son; yadüttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; hari—of Lord Hari; janma—birth; utsava—festival; phulla—blossomed wide; locanaù—eyes; atha—then; vipra-janeñu—to the brähmaëas; ca—also; äçu—at once; vai—indeed; niyutam—a million; san—being; manasä—in his mind; gaväm—cows; dadau—gave.

     As he gazed at his son, who wore a glittering and colorful jewel necklace, a glittering Kaustubha gem, splendid armlets and anklets, earrings and a helmet like the rising sun, bracelets like wonderful flickering flames, a belt splendid as lightning, a lotus garland filled with the buzzing of bees, and splendid garments of new gold, and who was splendid as a dark cloud with lightning, His face with moving black locks of hair, His splendor removing the darkness, auspicious, handsome, His eyes lotus flowers, decorated with wonderful and colorful pictures and designs, more charming than ten million Kämadevas, and who was the Supreme Personality of Godhead, greater than the greatest and fond of sweetly playing the flute, then Vasudeva, the best of the Yädavas, his eyes blossomed wide with the festive joy of seeing the birth of Lord Hari, in his heart at once gave a million cows in charity to the brähmaëas.

Text 30

harim änakadundubhiù stavaiù
     stavanaà taà praëipatya vismitaù
akarod udita-prabhüdayo
     gata-bhéù süti-gåhe kåtäïjaliù

     harim—to Lord Hari; änakadundubhiù—Vasudeva; stavaiù—with prayers; stavanam—praise; tam—to Him; praëipatya—bowing down; vismitaù—filled with wonder; akarot—did; udita—manifested; prabhu—of the Lord; udayaù—appearance; gata—gone; bhéù—fear; süti-gåhe—in the maternity room; kåta-aïjaliù—with folded hands.

     Standing before the Lord in the maternity-room, astonished Vasudeva bowed down. Now fearless, with folded hands he glorified the Lord with many prayers.

Text 31

çré-vasudeva uväca

eko yaù prakåti-guëair anekadhäsi
     hartä tvaà janaka utäsya pälakas tvam
nirliptaù sphäöika ivädya deha-varëais
     tasmai çré-bhuvana-pate namämi tubhyam

     çré-vasudevaù uväca—Çré Vasudeva said; ekaù—one; yaù—who; prakåti—of matter; guëaiù—with the modes; anekadhä—many; asi—are; hartä—remover; tvam—you; janaka—O father; uta—indeed; asya—of him; pälakaù—protector; tvam—You; nirlpitaù—untouched; sphäöikaù—crystal; iva—like; adya—today; deha—of the body; varëaiù—with the colors; tasmai—to Him; çré-bhuvana-pate—O master of the world; namämi—I offer my respectful obeisances; tubhyam—to You.

     Although You are one, the modes of material nature make You (seem to be) many. You are the creator, maintainer, and destroyer (of the worlds). As crystal is colorless, You are untouched by material qualtities. O master of the worlds, I bow down before You.

Text 32

edhaùsu tv anala ivätra vartamäno
     yo 'nta-stho bahir api cämbaraà yathä hi
adharo dharaëir iväsya sarva-säkñé
     tasmai te nama iva sarva-go nabhasvän

     edhaùsu—in fuel; tu—indeed; analaù—fire; iva—like; atra—here; vartamänaù—being; yaù—who; antaù—within; sthaù—situated; bahiù—without; api—also; ca—also; ambaram—the sky; yathä—as; hi—indeed; adharaù—maintainer; dharaëiù—the earth; iva—like; asya—of that; sarva—of all; säkñé—the witness; tasmai—to Him; te—to You; namaù—obeisances; iva—like; sarva-gaù—all-pervading; nabhasvän—the air.

     Your are inside, like fire in fuel. You are outside, like the sky. You are the maintainer, like the earth. You see everything. You are present everywhere, like the air. Obeisances to You!

Text 33

bhü-bhärodbhaöa-haraëärtham eva
     jäto go-deva-dvija-nija-vatsa-pälako 'si
gehe me bhuvi puruñottamottamas tvaà
     kaàsän mäà bhuvana-pate prapähi päpät

     bhü—of the earth; bhära—burden; udbhaöa—soldiers; haraëa—removal; artham—for the purpose; eva—indeed; jätaù—born; gaù—of the cows; deva—demigods; dvija—brähmaëas; nija—own; vatsa—children; pälakaù—protector; asi—are; gehe—in the home; me—my; bhuvi—on the earth; puruña-uttama-uttamaù—O most exalted of exalted persons; tvam—You; kaàsät—from Kaàsa; mäm—me; bhuvana-pate—O master of the worlds; prapähi—please protect; päpät—sinful.

     You are the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, the protector of the cows, demigods, brähmaëas, and Your own children, who has taken birth in my home on earth in order to remove the great armies that now burden the earth. O master of the worlds, please protect me from sinful Kaàsa.

     Note: The "children" here are the Vaiñëavas.

Text 34

çré-närada uväca

paripürëatamaà säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaà çyäma-sundaram
jïätvä natvätha taà präha
     devaké sarva-devatä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; paripürëatamam säkñät—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; çyäma—dark; sundaram—handsome; jïätvä—understanding; natvä—bowing down; atha—then; tam—to Him; präha—said; devaké—Devaké; sarva-devatä—who was equal to all the demigods.

     Çré Närada said: Understanding that handsome and dark Çré Kåñëa was the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, Devaké, who was equal to all the demigods, bowed before Him and spoke.

Text 35

çré-devaky uväca

he kåñëa he vigaëitäëòa-pate pareça
     goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëa-dhvaja ädi-deva
pürëeça pürëa paripürëatama prabho mäà
     tvaà pähi pähi parameçvara kaàsa-päpät

     çré-devaké uväca—Çré Devaké said; he—O; kåñëa—Kåñëa; he—O; vigaëita—countless; aëòa—of universes; pate—O master; pareça—O Supreme Lord; goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëa-dhvaja—O flag of the abode of Goloka; ädi-deva—O original Lord; pürëeça—O master of the perfect; pürëa—O perfect; paripürëatama—O most perfect, original Supreme Personality of Godhead; prabhaù—O Lord; mäm—me; tvam—You; pähi—please protect; pähi—please protect; parameçvara—O Supreme Lord; kaàsa—of Kaàsa; päpät—from the atrocities.

     Çré Devaké said: O Kåñëa, O master of countless universes, O Supreme Lord, O flag of Goloka-dhäma, O original Lord, O master of the perfect, O perfect one, O most perfect original Supreme Personality of Godhead, O Supreme Controller, please protect, please protect me from Kaàsa's atrocities!

Text 36

çré-närada uväca

tac chrutvä bhagavän kåñëaù
     paripürëatamaù svayam
sa-smito devakéà çaurià
     präha sa våjinärdanaù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tat—that; çrutvä—hearing; bhagavän—Lord; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; paripürëatamaù svayam—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; sa-smitaù—with a smile; devakém—to Devaké; çaurim—and Vasudeva; präha—said; saù—He; våjina-ardanaù—the destroyer of sins.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing this, Lord Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, the destroyer of sins, smiled and spoke to Vasudeva and Devaké.

Text 37

çré-bhagavän uväca

iyaà ca påçniù pati-devatä ca
     tvaà pürva-sarge sutapä prajärthé
brahmäjïayä divya-tapo yuväbhyäà
     kåtaà paraà nirjala-bhojanäbhyäm

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; iyam—she; ca—also; påçniù—Påçni; pati-devatä—the chaste wife; ca—also; tvam—you; pürva-sarge—in the previous creation; sutapäù—Sutapä; prajä-arthé—desiring children; brahma—of Brahmä; ajïayä—by the order; divya—splendid; tapaù—austerity; yuväbhyäm—by you both; kåtam—was done; param—great; nirjala—without water; bhojanäbhyäm—or food.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: In the previous creation she was chaste Påçni, who worshiped her husband as if he were a god, and you were Sutapä, who desired to create children. By Brahmä's order you both performed great and splendid austerities, fasting from food and drink.

Text 38

käleñu manvantarake vyatéte
     tapaù paraà tat tapasaù prajärthi
tadä prasanno yuvayor abhüvaà      varaà paraà brüta mayä tadoktam

     käleñu—in time; manvantarake—when the manvantara; vyatéte—had passed; tapaù—austerity; param—great; tat—that; tapasaù—of austerity; prajä—children; arthé—desiring; tadä—then; prasannaù—happy; yuvayoù—with you both; abhüvam—I became; varam—benediction; param—great; brüta—please speak; mayä—by Me; tadä—then; uktam—said.

     When in time the manvantara had passed, your austerity to attain children continued. Then I became pleased with you and I said, "Ask a benediction."

Text 39

çrutvä yuväbhyäà kathitaà tadaiva
     bhüyas sutas tvat-sädåçaù kilävayoù
tathästu coktvätha gate mayi prajä-
     paté hy abhüta sva-kåtena dam-paté

     çrutvä—heard; yuväbhyäm—by you both; kathitam—said; tadä—then; eva—indeed; bhüyaù—will be; sutaù—son; tvat—You; sädåçaù—like; kila—indeed; avayoù—of us; tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—also; uktvä—saying; atha—then; gate—gone; mayi—when I; prajä- paté—prajäpatis; hi—indeed; abhüta—became; sva-kåtena—by that deed; dam-paté—man and wife.

     Hearing this, you both said, "May we have a son like You." I said, "So be it," and left. Then you became a prajäpati couple.

Text 40

na mat-samaù ko 'pi suto jagaty alaà
     vicärya tad väm abhavaà pareçvaraù
çré-påçnigarbho bhuvi viçrutaù punar
     dvitéya-käle 'ham upendra-vämanaù

     na—not; mat—to Me; samaù—equal; kaù api—anyone; sutaù—son; jagati—in the universe; alam—greatly; vicärya—thinking; tat—then; väm—of you; abhavam—I became; pareçvaraù—the Supreme Lord; çré-påçnigarbhaù—Çré Påçnigarbha; bhuvi—in the world; viçrutaù—famous; punaù—again; dvitéya—a second; käle—time; aham—I; upendra—the younger brother of Indra; vämanaù—Vämana.

     Thinking, "No one is like Me," I, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, became your son, famous in the world as Çré Påçnigarbha. Then a second time I again became your son as Indra's younger brother Vämana.

Text 41

tathäbhavaà hy adyatane parät paro
     nétvätha mäà präpaya nanda-mandiram
 ato na bhüyäd bhayam augrasenataù
     sutaà samädäya sukhé bhaviñyathaù

     tathä—so; abhavam—I became; hi—indeed; adyatane—today; parät—than the greatest; paraù—greater; nétvä—bringing; atha—now; mäm—Me; präpaya—give; nanda—of Nanda; mandiram—the palace; ataù—then; na—not; bhüyät—may be; bhayam—fear; augrasenataù—of Kaàsa; sutam—the daughter; samädäya—attaining; sukhé—happy; bhaviñyathaù—will be.

     Now I, the Supreme Lord, greater than the greatest, have again become your son. Take Me to Nanda's palace. Don't fear Kaàsa. Take (Nanda's) daughter and you will become happy.

Text 42

çré-närada uväca

tuñëéà bhütvä haris tatra
     tad bhüyaù paçyatos tayoù
dåçyaà hy aprakaöaà kåtvä
     bälo 'bhüt kau yathä nataù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tuñëém—silent; bhütvä—becoming; hariù—Lord Hari; tatra—there; tat—that; bhüyaù—will be; paçyatoù—looking; tayoù—of them both; dåçyam—visible; hi—indeed; aprakaöam—unmanifest; kåtvä—become; bälaù—a child; abhüt—became; kau—on the earth; yathä—as; naöaù—an actor;

     Çré Närada said: Now silent, Lord Hari became invisible and, as an actor does, reappeared as an infant on the ground.

Text 43

preìkhe dhåtvätha taà çaurir      yävad gantuà samudyataù
tävad vraje nanda-patynäà
     yogamäyäjani svataù

     preìkhe—on the cradle; dhåtvä—taking; atha—then; tam—Him; çauriù—Vasudeva;  yävat—as; gantum—to go; samudyataù—about; tävat—then; vraje—in Vraja; nanda—of Nanda; patynäm—in the wife; yogamäyä—Yogamäyä; ajani—was born; svataù—herself.

     As Vasudeva was placing the infant in a cradle and was about to depart, goddess Yogamäyä was born in Vraja from Nanda's wife.

Text 44

tayä çayäne viçvasmin
     rakñakeñu svapatsu ca
dvärä udghaöitäù sarväù
     prasphuöac-chrìkhalärgaläù

     tayä—with her; çayäne—on the bed; viçvasmin—everywhere; rakñakeñu—as the guards; svapatsu—slept; ca—also; dvärä—by the doors; udghaöitäù—opened; sarväù—all; prasphuöat—opened; çrìkhala—shackles; argaläù—and bolts.

     Goddess Yogamyä put all the guards to sleep, unfastened the shackles and locks, and opened all the doors.

Text 45

nirgate vasudeve ca
     mürdhni çré-kåñëa-çobhite
süryodaye yathä sadyas
     tamo-näço 'bhavat svataù

     nirgate—gone; vasudeve—Vasudeva; ca—also; mürdhni—on the head; çré-kåñëa—with Çré Kåñëa; çobhite—beautified; sürya-udaye—in the sunrise; yathä—as; sadyaù—at once; tamaù—of the darkness; näçaù—destruction; abhavat—became; svataù—spontaneously.

     When, his head decorated with Çré Kåñëa, Vasudeva left, the darkness became at once destroyed, as if the sun had suddenly risen.

Text 46

ghaneñu vyomni varñatsu
     sahasra-vadanaù svaräö
nivärayan dérgha-phäëair
     äsäraà çaurim anvagät

     ghaneñu—as the clouds; vyomni—in the sky; varñatsu—rained; sahasra-vadanaù—thousand-faced Lord Ananta; svaräö—independent; nivärayan—warding off; dérgha—long; phäëaiù—with hoods; äsäram—torrents of rain; çaurim—Vasudeva; anvagät—followed.

     As the clouds in the sky rained, thousant—headed Ananta Çeña, His great hoods giving protection from the torrents of rain, followed Vasudeva.

Text 47

ürmy-ävartäkulävegaiù
     siàha-sarpädi-vähiné
sadyo märgaà dadau tasmai
     kälindé saritäà varä

     ürmi—waves;ävartä—whirlppols; äkula—filled; ävegaiù—with turbulence; siàha—lions; sarpa—and snakes; ädi—beginning with; vähiné—river; sadyaù—at once; märgam—a path; dadau—gave; tasmai—to him; kälindé—the Yamunä; saritäà varä—the best of rivers.

     Filled with great waves and whirlpools and (its shores) filled with lions, snakes, and other wild creatures, the Yamunä, the best of rivers, gave a path to Vasudeva.

Text 48

nanda-vrajaà sametyäsau
     prasuptaà sarvataù param
çiçuà yäsodä-çayane
     nidhäyäçu dadarça täm

     nanda-vrajam—Nanda's Vraja; sametya—attaining; asau—he; prasuptam—asleep; sarvataù—all; param—transcendental; çiçum—infant; yäsodä-çayane—on Yaçodä's bed; nidhäya—placing; äçu—at once; dadarça—saw; täm—her.

     Entering Nanda's Vraja, he placed the sleeping infant on Yaçodä's bed and glanced at Yogamäyä.

Text 49

tat-sutäà samupädäya
     punar gehäj jagäma saù
tértvä çré-yamunäà çauriù
     svägäre pürvavat sthitaù

     tat-sutäm—her daughter; samupädäya—taking; punaù—again; gehät—from the house; jagäma—went; saù—he; tértvä—crossing; çré-yamunäm—Çré Yamunä; çauriù—Vasudeva; svägäre—to his own prison cell; pürvavat—as before; sthitaù—situated.

     Picking up the infant Yogamäyä, Vasudeva left the house, crossed the Yamunä, entered his prison cell, and became as he had been before.

Text 50

sutaà sutäà vä jätaà cä-
     jïätvä gopé yaçomaté
pariçräntä sva-çayane
     suñväpänanda-nidrayä

     sutam—a son; sutäm—a daughter;  vä—or; jätam—born; ca—also; ajïätvä—not knowing; gopé—the gopé; yaçomaté—Yaçodä; pariçräntä—exhausted; sva-çayane—on her bed; suñväpa—slept; änanda—of bliss; nidrayä—with a sleep.

     Not knowing whether a son or daughter had been born, exhausted Yaçodä-gopé slept in bed with a sleep of bliss.

Text 51

atha bäla-dhvanià çrutvä
     rakñakäù samupasthitäù
ücuù kaàsäya véräya
     gatvä tad-räja-mandiram

     atha—then; bäla—of an infant; dhvanim—the sound; çrutvä—hearing; rakñakäù—the guards; samupasthitäù—standing by; ücuù—said; kaàsäya—to Kaàsa; véräya—the warrior; gatvä—having gone; tad-räja-mandiram—to his royal palace.

     Hearing the sounds of an infant, the guards went to the royal palace and told the warrior Kaàsa.

Text 52

süti-gåhaà tvaraà prägät
     kaàso vai bhayakäturaù
svasätha bhrätaraà präha
     rudaté dénavat saté

     süti-gåham—to the maternity room; tvaram—quickly; prägät—went; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; vai—indeed; bhayaka—with fear; äturaù—overcome; svasä—the sister; atha—then; bhrätaram—to the brother; präha—said; rudaté—weeping; dénavat—like a wretched person; saté—the chaste woman.

     Overcome with fear, Kaàsa rushed to the maternity room. Weeping like the most wretched person, the chaste sister (Devaké) spoke to her brother (Kaàsa).

Text 53

çré-devaky uväca

sutäm ekaà dehi me tvaà
     putreñu pramåteñu ca
striyaà hantuà na yogyo 'si
     bhrätas tvaà déna-vatsalaù

     çré-devaké uväca—Çré Devaké said; sutäm—daughter; ekäm—one; dehi—give; me—to me; tvam—you; putreñu—sons; pramåteñu—died; ca—and; striyam—a woman; hantum—to kill; na—not; yogyaù—is right; asi—you are; bhrätaù—O brother; tvam—you; déna—to they who suffer; vatsalaù—kind.

     Çré Devaké said: Now that my sons are dead, please give me this one daughter. O brother, it is not right for you to kill a girl. You are kind to they who are miserable.

Text 54

te 'nujähaà hata-sutä
     kärägäre nipätitä
dätum arhasi kalyäëa
     kalyäëéà tanujäà ca me

     te—of you; anujä—the younger sister; aham—I am; hata—killed; sutä—sons; kärägäre—in a prison cell; nipätitä—thrown; dätum—to give; arhasi—you deserve; kalyäëa—O noble one; kalyäëém—beautiful; tanujäm—daughter; ca—also; me—to me.

     I am your younger sister. You killed my sons and threw me in a prison cell. O noble one, please give this beautiful daughter to me.

Text 55

çré-närada uväca

açru-mukhyä mohitayä
     samäcchädyätmajaà bahu
prärthito 'ìkäd vinirbhartsya
     täà sa acicchide khalaù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; açru—tears; mukhyä—face; mohitayä—bewildered; samäcchädya—covering; ätmajäm—daughter; bahu—many times; prärthitaù—begged; aìkät—from the lap; vinirbhartsya—rebuking; täm—her; saù—he; äcicchide—attacked; khalaù—the demon.

     Çré Närada said: Bewildered, and her face covered with tears, Devaké pleased and tried to hold the child in her lap. The demon Kaàsa rebuked her and grabbed the child.

Text 56

kusaìga-nitaraù päpaù
     khalo yadu-kulädhamaù
svasuù sutäà çilä-påñöhe
     gåhétväìghryor nyapätayat

     ku-saìga-nitaraù—whose friends were demons; päpaù—sinful; khalaù—demon; yadu-kulädhamaù—the lowest of the Yädavas; svasuù—of his sister; sutäm—the daughter; çilä-påñöhe—on a stole slab; gåhétva—brabbing; aìghryoù—by the feet; nyapätayat—threw.

     Then the sinful demon Kaàsa, the lowest of the Yädavas, his friends all demons, holding his sister's daughter by her feet, threw her against a stone slab.

Text 57

kaàsa-hastät samutpatya
     tvaraà sä cämbare gatä
çata-patre rathe divye
     sahasra-haya-sevite

     kaàsa—of Kaàsa; hastät—from the hand; samutpatya—rising; tvaram—quickly; sä—she; ca—also; ambare—to the sky; gatä—went; çata-patre—a hundred-petal lotus; rathe—on a chariot; divye—splendid; sahasra—thousand; haya—horses; sevite—served.

     Form Kaàsa's hand the girl flew into the sky and entered a splendid hundred-petal-lotus chariot pulled by a thousand horses.

Text 58

cämarändolite çubhre
     sthitädåçyata divya-dåk
säyudhäñöa-bhujä mäyä      pärñadaiù parisevitä
çata-sürya-pratékäçä
     kaàsam äha ghana-svanä

     cämara—with cämaras; ändolite—moved; çubhre—splendid; sthita—situated; adåçyata—was seen; divya—divine; dåk—appearance; sa—with; äyudha—weapons; añöa—eight; bhujä—arms; mäyä—the goddess Yogamäyä; pärñadaiù—by associates; parisevitä—served; çata—a hundred; sürya—suns; pratékäçä—splendor; kaàsam—to Kaàsa; äha—said; ghana-svanä—with a voice like thunder.

     He saw her standing on a splendid chariot with moving cämaras. Then Goddess Yogamäyä, served by many attendants, her glorious form splendid as a hundred suns, her eight arms holding weapons, and her voice like thunder, spoke to Kaàsa.

Text 59

çré-yogamäyoväca 
paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
jätaù kva vä tu te hantä
     våthä dénäà dunoñi vai

     çré-yogamäyä uväca—Çré Yogamäyä said; paripürëatamaù säkñät—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa bhagavän—Lord; svayam—personally; jätaù—born; kva—where?; vä—or; tu—indeed; te—of you; hantä—the killer; våthä—uselessly; dénäm—this poor girl; dunoñi—you trouble; vai—certainly.

     Çré Yogamäyä said: Lord Çré Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, is already born. Where is He born? He will kill you. You torture this poor girl in vain.

Text 60

çré-närada uväca

ity uktvä taà tato devé
     gatä vindhyäcale girau
yogamäyä bhagavaté
     bahu-nämä babhüva ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; uktvä—speaking; tam—to him; tataù—then; devé—the goddess; gatä—went; vindhyäcale—to the Vindhya Hills; girau—on a hill; yogamäyä—Yogamäyä; bhagavaté—goddess; bahu—many; nämä—names; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: After saying this, the goddess went to the Vindhya hills. There goddess Yogamäyä assumed many names.

Text 61

atha kaàso vismito 'bhüc
     chrutvä mätä-vacaù param
devakéà vasudevaà ca
     mocayäm äsa bandhanät

     atha—then; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; vismitaù—astonished; abhüt—became; çrutvä—hearing; mätä—of his mother; vacaù—the words; param—then; devakém—Devaké; vasudevam—Vasudeva; ca—and; mocayäm äsa—released; bandhanät—from bondage.

     At this Kaàsa became astonished. Listening to his mother's words, he released Vasudeva and Devaké from their bonds.

Text 62

kaàsa uväca

päpo 'haà päpa-karmähaà
     khalo yadu-kulädhamaù
yuñmat-putra-prahantäraà
     kñamadhvaà me kåtaà bhuvi

     kaàsaù uväca—Kaàsa said; päpaù—sinful; aham—I am; päpa—sinful; karmä—deeds; aham—I am; khalaù—a demon; yadu-kula—of the Yadu family; adhamaù—the lowest; yuñmat—of you; putra—the sons; prahantäram—the killer; kñamadhvam—please forgive; me—by me; kåtam—done; bhuvi—in the world.

     Kaàsa said: I am a sinner. I have done many sins. I am a demon. I am the lowest of the Yädavas. Please forgive what I have done in this world. (Please forgive) the killer of your sons.

Text 63

he svasaù çånu me çaure
     manye käla-kåtaà tv idam
yena niçcalyamäno vä
     väyuneva ghanävaliù

     he svasaù—O sister; çånu—listen; me—to me; çaure—O Vasudeva; manye—I think; käla—by time; kåtam—done; tu—certainly; idam—this; yena—by which; niçcalyamänaù—immovable; vä—or; väyunä—by the wind; iva—like; ghana—of clouds; ävaliù—a host.

     O sister, hear me. O Vasudeva, I think this was all done by time, which, as the wind moves the clouds, moves what cannot be moved.

Text 64

viçvasto 'haà deva-väkye
     deväs te 'pi måñä-giraù
na jänämi kva me çatrur
     jätaù kau kathito 'nayä

     viçvastaù—believed; aham—I; deva—of the demigods; väkye—in the words; deväù—the demigods; te—they; api—also; måñä—false; giraù—words; na—not; jänämi—I know; kva—where; me—of me; çatruù—the enemy; jätaù—born; kau—on the earth; kathitaù—said; anayä—by her.

     I believed the words of the demigods. The demigods also lie. She said my enemy is already born on the earth. Where? I don't know.

Text 65

çré-närada uväca

itthaà kaàsas tad-aìghryoç ca
     patito 'çru-mukho rudan
cakära seväà paramäà
     sauhådaà darçayaàs tayoù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—in this way; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; tad-aìghryoù—at his feet; ca—also; patitaù—fallen; açru—tears; mukhaù—face; rudan—weeping; cakära—did; seväm—service; paramäm—great; sauhådam—friendship; darçayaàù—showing; tayoù—to them.

     Çré Närada said: Weeping, and his face covered with tears, Kaàsa fell at their feet. He rendered great service to them and he showed friendship to them.

Text 66

aho çré-kåñëacandrasya
     paripürëatama-prabhoù
däna-dakñaiù kaöäkñaiç ca
     kià na syäd bhümi-maëòale

     ahaù—oh; çré-kåñëacandrasya—of Çré Kåñëacandra; paripürëatama-prabhoù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; däna—charity; dakñaiù—expert; kaöäkñaiù—with sidelong glances; ca—also; kim—whether; na—not; syät—may be; bhümi-maëòale—on the circle of the earth.

     Ah, will the charitable glances of Çré Kåñëacandra, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, not come to the circle of the earth?

Text 67

prätaù-käle tadä kaàsaù
     pralambädén mahäsurän
samähüya khalas tebhyo
     'vadad uktaà ca mäyayä

     prätaù—morning; käle—at the time; tadä—then; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; pralamba-ädén—headed by Pralamba; mahä—great; asurän—demons; samähüya—calling; khalaù—the demon; tebhyaù—to them; avadat—spoke; uktam—said; ca—and; mäyayä—by Yogamäyä.

     Early in the morning the demon Kaàsa called together the great demons headed by Pralambäsura and told them what Yogamäyä said.

Text 68

kaàsa uväca

jäto me hy anta-kåd bhümau
     kathito yogamäyayä
anirdaçän nidarçäàs ca
     çiçün yüyaà haniñyatha

     kaàsaù uväca—Kaàsa said; jätaù—born; me—of me; hi—indeed; anta—the end; kåt—doing; bhümau—on the earth; kathitaù—spoken; yogamäyayä—by Yogamäyä; anirdaçän—younger than ten days; nidarçän—older than ten days; ca—and; çiçün—infants; yüyam—you; haniñyatha—should kill.

     Kaàsa said: Yogamäyä said the person that will bring my end is already born on the earth. Therefore all of you please kill all infants, whether they are younger or older than ten days.

Text 69

daityä ücuù 
sajjasya dhanuño yuddhe
     bhavatä dvandva-yodhinä
täìkärenodgatä devä
     manyase taiù kathaà bhayam

     daityäù—the demons; ücuù—said; sajjasya—preparing; dhanuñaù—bows; yuddhe—in the battle; bhavatä—by you; dvandva-yodhinä—in a duel; täìkärena—with the sound of the bow udgatäù—come; deväù—the demigods; manyase—you think; taiù—by them; katham—how?; bhayam—fear.

     The demons said: When you ready your bow for a fight, the twang of its string makes the demigods flee. Why do you fear them?

Text 70

go-vipra-sädhu-çrutayo
     devä dharmädayaù pare
viñëoç ca tanavo hy eñäà
     näçe daitya-balaà småtam

     gaù—the cows; vipra—brähmaëas; sädhu—devotees; çrutayaù—and Vedas; deväù—the demigods; dharma—the principles of religion; ädayaù—beginning with; pare—others; viñëoç—of Lord Viñëu; ca—also; tanavaù—bodies; hi—indeed; eñäm—of them; näçe—in the destruction; daitya—of the demons; balam—the power; småtam—remembered.

     The cows, brähmaëas, devotees, Vedas, demigods, and others headed by the principles of religion, are the limbs of Lord Viñëu. When they are destroyed, the power of the demons will be remembered.

Text 71

jäto yadi mahä-viñëus
     te çatrur yo mahé-tale
ayaà caitad vadhopäyo
     gavädénäà vihiàsanam

     jätaù—born; yadi—if; mahä-viñëuù—Lord Mahä-Viñëu; te—your; çatruù—enemy; yaù—who; mahé—of the earth; tale—on the surface; ayam—He; ca—also; etat—this; vadha—killing; upäyaù—means; gava—cows; ädénäm—beginning with; vihiàsanam—violence.

     If your enemy Lord Mahä-Viñëu is indeed born on the earth then the way to kill Him is to attack the cows and these others.

Text 72

çré-närada uväca

itthaà mahodbhaöä duñöä
     daiteyäù kaàsa-noditäù
dudruvuù khaà gavädibhyo
     jaghnur jätäàs ca bälakän

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; mahä—great; udbhaöäù—powerful; duñöäù—wicked; daiteyäù—demons; kaàsa—by Kaàsa; noditäù—sent; dudruvuù—ran; kham—to the sky; gava—by the cows; ädibhyaù—headed; jaghnuù—killed; jätän—born; ca—also; bälakän—infants.

     Çré Närada said: Sent by Kaàsa, these powerful and sinful demons flew in the sky. They killed many newborn infants and many cows and other pious beings. 
Text 73

ä-samudräd bhümi-tale
     viçantaç ca gåhe gåhe käma-rüpa-dhara-daityäç
     ceruù sarpa iväbhavan

     ä-samudrät—from the ocean; bhümi-tale—to the land; viçantaù—going; ca—also; gåhe gåhe—from house to house; käma—according to their own desire; rüpa—forms; dhara—accepting; daityäù—demons; ceruù—went; sarpäù—serpents; iva—like; abhavan—became.

     From sea to sea traveling over the earth and entering house after house, these demons, who could assume any form they wished, moved about like so many snakes.

Text 74

utpathä udbhaöä daityäs
     taträpi kaàsa-noditäù
kapiù suräpo 'li-hato
     bhüta-grasta iväbhavan

     utpathäù—left the path; udbhaöäù—great; daityäù—demons; tatra—there; api—also; kaàsa-noditäù—sent by Kaàsa; kapiù—a monkey; suräpaù—a drunkard; ali—by drink; hataù—destroyed; bhüta—by a ghost; grastaù—haunted; iva—like; abhavan—became.

     The great demons sent by Kaàsa were far from the path (of religion). They were like a monkey, or a drunkard destroyed by drink, or a man possessed by a ghost.

Text 75

vaideha maithila narendra upendra-bhakta
     dharmiñöha-mukhya sutapo janaka pratäpin
etat satäà ca bhuvi helanam aìga räjan
     sarvaà chinatti bahuläçva catuñpadärthän

     vaideha—O king of Videha; maithila—O king of Mithilä; nara—of men; indra—O lord; upendra—of Lord Upendra; bhakta—O devotee; dharmiñöha—of they who follow the principles of religion; mukhya—O first; sutapaù—O austere one; janaka—O father; pratäpin—O powerful one; etat—this; satäm—of the devotees; ca—also; bhuvi—on earth; helanam—harassment; aìga—O pious one; räjan—O king; sarvam—everything; chinatti—broke; bahuläçva—O Bahuläçva; catuñpada-arthän—the four goals of life.

     O king of Videha, O king of Mithilä, O lord of men, O devotee of Lord Upendra, O first of the pious, O austere one, O father, O powerful one, in this way (the demons) harassed the devotees on the earth. O pious king Bahuläçva, (the demons) broke apart the four goals of pious life.

Chapter Twelve
Çré Nanda-mahotsava-varëana
Description of Çré Nanda's Festival

Text 1

atha putrotsavaà jätaà
     çrutvä nanda uñaù-kñaëe
brähmaëäàç ca samähüya
     kärayäm äsa maìgalam

     atha—then; putra—of his son; utsavam—festival; jätam—born; çrutvä—hearing; nandaù—Nanda; uñaù-kñaëe—at dawn; brähmaëän—the brähmaëas; ca—also; samähüya—calling; kärayäm äsa—made; maìgalam—auspciousness.

     Hearing the happy news of his son's birth, Nanda called the brähmaëas at dawn and had them perform the auspicious ceremonies. 

Text 2

sa-vidhi jätakaà kåtvä
     nanda-räjo mahä-manäù
viprebhyo dakñiëäbhiç ca
     mudä lakñaà gaväà dadau

     sa-vidhi—following tradition; jätakam—the birth ceremony; kåtvä—having done; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; mahä-manäù—who had a noble-heart; viprebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; dakñiëäbhiù—with priestly rewards; ca—also; mudä—happily; lakñam—a hundred thousand; gaväm—cows; dadau—gave.

     When the traditional birth-ceremony was performed, noble-hearted King Nanda happily gave the brähmaëas a hundred thousand cows as dakñiëä. 

Text 3

kroça-mätraà rätna-sänün
     suvarëa-çikharän girén
sa-rasän sapta-dhanyänäà
     dadau viprebhya änataù

     kroça—two miles; mätram—size; rätna—of jewels; sänün—mountain peaks; suvarëa—of gold; çikharän—mountain peaks; girén—mountains; sa-rasän—with nectar; sapta—seven; dhanyänäm—of wealth; dadau—gave; viprebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; änataù—his head bowed.

     With bowed head he gave many hills of seven grains with peaks of jewels and gold to the brähmaëas.

Text 4

mådaìga-véëä-çaìkhädyä
     nedur dundubhayo muhuù
gäyakäç ca jagur dväre
     nanåtur vära-yoñitaù

     mådaìga-véëä-çaìkhädyäù—beginning with mådaìgas, véëäs, and çaìkhas; neduù—sounded; dundubhayaù—drums; muhuù—again and again; gäyakäù—singers; ca—also; jaguù—sang; dväre—at the door; nanåtuù—danced; vära-yoñitaù—väräaganäs.

     Mådaìgas, véëäs, çaìkhas, dundubhis, and other instruments sounded again and again, singers sang, and at the entrance väräaganäs danced.

Text 5

patäkair hema-kalaçair
     vitänais toraëaiù çubhaiù
aneka-varëaiç citraiç ca
     babhau çré-nanda-mandiram

     patäkaiù—with flags; hema—golden; kalaçaiù—with pots; vitänaiù—with awnings; toraëaiù—with arches; çubhaiù—glorious; aneka—many; varëaiù—colors; citraiù—wonderful; ca—also; babhau—shone; çré-nanda-mandiram—Çré Nanda's palace.

     Decorated with beautiful and wonderfully colorful flags, awnings, gateways, and golden pots, Çré Nanda's palace was glorious.

Text 6

rathyä véthyäç ca dehälyo
     bhitti-praìgana-vedikäù
tolikä-maëòapa-sabhä
     rejur gandha-jalämbaraiù

     rathyä—highways; véthyäù—footpaths; ca—also; dehalyaù—entranceways; bhitti—walls; praìgana—courtyards; vedikäù—platforms; tolikä-maëòapa-sabhä—gazebos and assembly-halls; rejuù—shone; gandha—fragrant; jala-ambaraiù—with water.

     The highways, footpaths, entanceways, walls, courtyards, platforms, gazebos, and assembly-halls glistened with drops of fragrant water.

Text 7

gävaù suvarëa-çåagyaç ca
     hema-mälä-lasad-galäù
ghaëöä-maïjéra-jhaìkärä
     rakta-kambala-maëòitäù

     gävaù—the cows; suvarëa—gold; çåagyaù—wiith horns; ca—also; hema—of gold; mälä—with necklaces; lasat—shining; galäù—necks; ghaëöä—bells; maïjéra—and tinkling ornaments; jhaìkäräù—thinking; rakta—red; kambala—blankets; maëòitäù—decorated.

     The cows were decorated with red cloths and their horns were covered with gold. Their necks glistened with golden necklaces and they tinkled with many bells and ornaments.

Text 8

péta-pucchä sa-vatsäç ca
     taruëé-kara-cihnikäù
haridra-kuakumair yuktäs
     citra-dhätu-vicitritäù

     péta—yellow; pucchäù—tails; sa-vatsäù—with calves; ca—also; taruëé—of young girls; kara—of the hand; cihnikäù—with the marks; haridra—with turmeric; kuakumaiù—and kuakuma; yuktäù—endowed; citra—colorful; dhätu—with mineral pigments; vicitritäù—decorated with pictures and designs.

     Their tails were yellow, their calves were by their sides, they were decorated with taruëé-karas, they were anointed with turmeric and kuakuma, and they were decorated with designs and pictures drawn in mineral colors. 

Text 9

barhi-pucchair gandha-jalair
     våñä dharma-dhurandharäù
itas tato virejuù çré-
     nanda-dväri manoharäù

     barhi—peacock; pucchaiù—with feathers; gandha—scented; jalaiù—with water; våñä—bulls; dharma-dhurandharäù—bearing the principles of religion; itas tataù—here and there; virejuù—shone; çré-nanda-dväri—at Nanda's door; manoharäù—handsome.

     Decorated with peacock feathers and sprinkled with scented water, many bulls bearing the principles of religion shone gloriously at Çré Nanda's door.

Text 10

go-vatsä hema-mäläòhyä
     muktä-hära-viräjitäù
itas tato vilaìghanto
     maïjéra-caraëäù sitäù

     go-vatsäù—calves; hema—gold; mälä—necklaces; ädhyäù—opulent; muktä—of pearls; hära—necklaces; viräjitäù—splendid; itas tataù—here and there; vilaìghantaù—leaping; maïjéra—tinkling ornaments; caraëäù—hooves; sitäù—white.

     Opulent with golden necklaces, spkendid with strands of pearls, and their hooves decorated with tinkling ornaments, white calves jumped here and there.

Text 11

çrutvä putrotsavaà tasya
     våñabhänu-varas tathä
kalävatyä gajärüòho
     nanda-mandiram äyayau

     çrutvä—hearing; putra—of the son; utsavam—the festival; tasya—of him; våñabhänu-varaù—King Våñabhänu; tathä—so; kalävatyä—with kalävaté; gaja-ärüòhaù—on an elephant; nanda-mandiram—to Nanda's palace; äyayau—went.

     Hearing of the festival celebrating a son's birth, King Våñabhänu and Kalävati came, riding on an elephant, to Nanda's palace.

Text 12

nandä navopanandäç ca
     tathä ñaò våñabhänavaù
nänopäyana-samyuktäù
     sarve te 'pi samäyayuù

     nandäù—Nandas; nava—nine; upanandäù—Upanandas; ca—also; tathä—then; ñaò—six; våñabhänavaù—Våñabhänus; nänä—various; upäyana—gifts; samyuktäù—bearing; sarve—all; te—they; api—also; samäyayuù—came.

     The nine Nandas and Upanandas and the six Våñabhänus all came, bringing many gifts.   

Text 13

uñëéçopari mäläòhyäù
     péta-kaïcuka-çobhitäù
barha-guïja-baddha-keçä
     vana-mälä-vibhüñaëäù

     uñëéça—turban; upari—above; mälä—with garlands; äòhyäù—opulent; péta—yellow; kaïcuka—upper garment; çobhitäù—decorated; barha—peacock feather; guïjä—and gunja; baddha—tied; keçäù—hair; vana—forest; mälä—garlands; vibhüñaëäù—decorated.

     Their turbans opulent with flower garlands and their hair tied with guïä and peacock feathers, they were decorated with forest garlands and handsome with yellow garments.

Text 14

vaàsé-dhärä vetra-hastäù
     su-pätra-tilakärcitäù
baddha-varëäù parékärä
     gopäs te 'pi samäyayuù

     vaàsé—flutes; dhäräù—holding; vetra—sticks; hastäù—in hand; su-pätra—with beautiful pictures and designs; tilaka—with tilaka; arcitäù—anointed; baddha-barhäù—with peacock feathers; parékäräù—multitudes; gopäù—gopas; te—they; api—also; samäyayuù—came.

     Carrying flutes, sticks in hand, and decorated with peacock feathers and tilaka decorations, many cowherd men came.

Text 15

nåtyantaù parigäyanto
     dhunvanto vasanäni ca
nänopäyana-samyuktäù
     smaçruläù çiçavaù pare

     nåtyantaù—dancing; parigäyantaù—singing; dhunvantaù—shaking; vasanäni—garments; ca—and; nänä—various; upäyana—gifts; samyuktäù—with; smaçruläù—bearded men; çiçavaù—children; pare—others.

     Dancing, singing, and shaking their garments, many bearded men, accompanied by their sons, brought many different gifts.

Text 16

haiyaìgavina-dugdhänäà
     dadhy-ajyänäà balén bahün
nétvä våddhä yañöi-hastä
     nanda-mandiram äyayuù

     haiyaìgavina—of fresh butter; dugdhänäm—milk; dadhi—yogurt; ajyänäm—and ghee; balén—offerings; bahün—many; nétvä—bringing; våddhäù—elderly; yañöi—sticks; hastäù—in hand; nanda—of Nanda; mandiram—to the palace; äyayuù—came.

     Sticks in hand, and bringing many offerings of butter, ghee, milk, and yogurt, many elder cowherd men came to Nanda's palace.

Text 17

putrotsavaà vrajeçasya
     kathayantaù parasparam
prema-vihvala-bhävaiù svair
     änandäçru-samäkuläù

     putra-utsavam—the festival of a son; vrajeçasya—of the king of Vraja; kathayantaù—talking; parasparam—among themselves; prema-vihvala-bhävaiù—overcome with love; svaiù—own; änanda—of bliss; açru—with tears; samäkuläù—filled.

     Overcome with love and their eyes filled with tears of bliss, they talked about the birth-festival of the king of Vraja's son.

Text 18

jäte putrotsave nandaù
     svänandäçrv-äkulekñaëaù
pujayäm äsa tän sarväàs
     tilakädyair vidhänataù

     jäte—manifested; putrotsave—the festival of a son; nandaù—Nanda; svänanda—of bliss; açru—with tears; äkula—filled; ékñaëaù—eyes; pujayäm äsa—worshiped; tän—them; sarvän—all; tilakädyaiù—beginning with tilaka; vidhänataù—by placing.

     His eyes filled with tears of bliss, Nanda worshiped everyone with tilaka and other gifts during the festival celebrating his son's birth.

Text 19

çré-gopä ücuù 
he vrajeçvara he nanda
     jätaù putrotsavas tathä
anapatyasyecchato 'lam
     ataù kià maìgalaà param

     çré-gopäù ücuù—the cowherd men said; he—O; vrajeçvara—king of Vraja; he—O; nanda—Nanda; jätaù—born; putrotsavaù—the festival of a son; tathä—so; anapatyasya—of one who is childless; icchataù—desiring; alam—greatly; ataù—then; kim—what?; maìgalam—auspiciousness; param—greater.

     The cowherd men said: O king of Vraja, O Nanda, for a chuldless man who desires a son, what can be more auspicious than this festival of a son's birth? 

Text 20

daivena darçitaà cedaà
     dinaà vo bahubhir dinaiù
kåta-kåtyäç ca bhütäù smo
     dåñövä çré-nanda-nandanam

     daivena—by fate; darçitam-shown; ca—also; idam—this; dinam—day; vaù—of us; bahubhiù—with many; dinaiù—days; kåta-kåtyäù—successful; ca—also; bhütäù—become; smaù—we; dåñövä—seeing; çré-nanda-nandanam—the son of Nanda.

     After many days, destiny shows this day to us. As we gaze at Nanda's son, our lives have attained success.

Text 21

he mohaneti dürät tam
     aìkaà nétvä gadiñyasi
yadä lälana-bhävena
     bhavitä nas tadä sukham

     he—O; mohana—charming one; iti—thus; dürät—from far away; tam—Him; aìkam—on the lap; nétvä—taking; gadiñyasi—You will say; yadä—when; lälana-bhävena—with fondling; bhavitä—will be; naù—of us; tadä—then; sukham—happiness.

     When, placing Him on your lap, you fondle Him and say, {.sy 168}O my charming one," then we will be happy.

Text 22

çré-nanda uväca 
bhavatäm äçiñaù puëyäj
     jätaà saukhyam idaà çubham
äjïä-värté hy ahaà gopä
     gopänäà vraja-väsinäm

     çré-nandaù uväca—Çré Nanda said; bhavatäm—of you; äçiñaù—the blessings; puëyät—from piety; jätam—born; saukhyam—happiness; idam—this; çubham—auspiciousness; äjïä—the order; värté—speaking; hi—indeed; aham—I; gopä—O cowherd men; gopänäm—of the cowherd men; vraja-väsinäm—of the residents of Vraja.

     Çré Nanda said: Your pious blessings make me very happy. O cowherd men, I am a servant obedient to the orders of the cowherd men of Vraja.

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
çré-nanda-räja-suta-sambhavam adbhutaà ca
     çrutvä visåjya gåha-karma tadaiva gopyaù
türëaà yayuù sa-balayo vraja-räja-gehän
     udyat-pramoda-paripürita-hån-mano-'agäù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; çré-nanda-räja—of King Nanda; suta—of the son; sambhavam—the birth; adbhutam—wonderful; ca—also; çrutvä—hearing; visåjya—abandoning; gåha—household; karma—duties; tadä—then; eva—indeed; gopyaù—the gopés; türëam—quickly; yayuù—went; sa-balayaù—with offerings; vraja-räja-gehän—to the palace of the king of Vraja; udyat—rising; pramoda—happiness; paripürita—flooded; håt—hearts; manaù—minds; 'agäù—and limbs.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing of the wonderful birth of King Nanda's son, the gopés at once abandoned their household duties. Their hearts, minds, and limbs flooded with rising happiness, they rushed with gifts to the palace of Vraja's king.

Text 24

ä-nanda-mandira-purät sva-gåhäd vrajantyaù
     sarvä itas tata uta tvaram ävrajantyaù
yäna-çlathad-vasana-bhüñaëa-keça-bandhä
     rejur narendra pathi bhüpari mukta-muktäù

     ä—up to; nanda-of Nanda; mandira-purät—the palace; sva—own; gåhat—from the home; vrajantyaù—going; sarväù—all; itas tataù—here and there; uta—indeed; tvaram—quickly; ävrajantyaù—coming; yäna—from coming; çlathat—loosened; vasana—garments; bhüñaëa—ornaments; keça-bandhäù—and hair; rejuù—shone; narendra—O king; pathi—on the path; bhüpari—on the ground; mukta—released; muktäù—pearls.

     O king, running from their own homes to Nanda's palace, their garments, ornaments, and hair becoming loose as they went, and dropping pearls on the ground, they all were splendidly beautiful.

Text 25

jhaìkära-nüpura-naväagada-hema-céra-
     maïjéra-hära-maëi-kuëòala-mekhaläbhiù
çré-kaëöha-sütra-bhuja-kaìkana-bindukäbhiù
     pürëendu-maëòala-nava-dyutibhir virejuù

     jhaìkära—jingling; nüpura—anklets; nava—new; aìgada—armlets; hema—golden; céra—garments; maïjéra—ornaments; hära—necklaces; maëi—jewels; kuëòala—earrings; mekhaläbhiù—with belts; çré-kaëöha-sütra—necklaces; bhuja-kaìkana—with bracelets; bindukäbhiù—with dots; pürëa—full; indu—moon; maëòala—circle; nava—new; dyutibhiù—with splendor; virejuù—shone.

     Decorated with tinkling anklets, armlets, gold céras, anklebells, necklaces, jewel earrings, sashes, kaëöùa-sütras, bracelets, and bindukäs, they shone with the glory of a host of full moons. 

Text 26

çré-räjika-lavaëa-rätri-viçeña-cürëair
     go-dhüma-sarñapa-yavaiù kara-lälanaiç ca
uttärya bälaka-mukhopari cäçiñäs täù
     sarvä dadur nåpa jagur jagadur yaçodäm

     çré-räjika-lavaëa-rätri-viçeña-cürëaiù—with ground mustard and salt; go-dhüma-sarñapa-yavaiù—with wheat and barley flour; kara—of the hand; lälanaiù—with gentle strokes; ca—also; uttärya—lifting; bälaka—of the child; mukha—face; upari—above; ca—and; äçiñäù—benedictions; täù—they; sarväù—all; daduù—gave; nåpa—O king; jaguù—they sang; jagaduù—they spoke; yaçodäm—to Yaçodä.

     With gentle strokes they anointed the child's face with a paste of wheat and barley flours, black mustard, and salt. They all gave many blessings. O king, they sang, and then they spoke to Yaçodä.

Text 27

çré-gopya ücuù 
sädhu sädhu yaçode te
     diñöyä diñöyä vrajeçvari
dhanyä dhanyä parä kukñir
     yayäyäà janitaù sutaù

     çré-gopyaù ücuù—the gopés said; sädhu—well done; sädhu—well done; yaçode—O Yasodä; te—to you; diñöyä—by good fortune; diñöyä—by good fortune; vraja—of Vraja; éçvari—O queen; dhanyä—fortunate; dhanyä—fortunate; parä—exalted; kukñiù—womb; yayä—by which; ayam—He; janitaù—born; sutaù—son.

     The gopés said: O Yaçodä, well done! Well done! O queen of Vraja, your fortune is very great! Your fortune is very great! Your noble womb, which gave birth to such a son, is very fortunate, very fortunate!

Text 28

icchä-yuktaà kåtaà te vai
     devena bahu-kälataù
rakña bälaà padma-netraà
     su-smitaà çyäma-sundaram

     icchä—desire; yuktam—endowed; kåtam—done; te—by you; vai—indeed; devena—by the Lord; bahu-kälataù—after a long time; rakña—please protect; bälam—the child; padma—lotus; netram—eyes; su-smitam—with a charming smile; çyäma—dark; sundaram—and handsome.

     After a long time the Lord fulfilled your desire. (O Lord,) please protect this lotus-eyed, sweetly smiling, handsome, dark boy.

Text 29

çré-yaçodoväca 
bhavadéya-dayäçérbhir
     jätaà saukhyaà paraà ca me
bhavaténäm api paraà
     diñöyä bhüyäd ataù param

     çré-yaçodä uväca—Çré Yaçodä said; bhavadéya—your; dayä—of mercy; äçérbhiù—with blessings; jätam—created; saukhyam—happiness; param—great; ca—also; me—of me; bhavaténäm—of you; api—also; param—then; diñöyä—by good fortune; bhüyät—may be; ataù param—then.

     Çré Yaçodä said: Your kind blessings bring me great happiness. May you always be very fortunate.

Text 30

he rohiëi mahä-buddhe
     püjanaà tu vrajaukasäm
ägatänäà sat-kulänäà
     yatheñöaà hépsitaà kuru

     he rohiëi—O Rohiëé; mahä—very; buddhe—intelligent; püjanam—worship; tu—indeed; vraja-okasäm—of the people of Vraja; ägatänäm—arrived; sat-kulänäm—of good families; yathä—as; iñöam—desired; hi—indeed; épsitam—desire; kuru—please fulfill.

     O very intelligent Rohiëé, please worship the noble people of Vraja who have come here. Please fulfill their desires.

Text 31

çré-närada uväca 
rohiëé räja-kanyäpi
     tat-karau däna-çélinau
taträpi noditä däne
     dadäv ati-mahä-manäù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; rohiëé—Rohiëé; räja—of a king; kanyä—the daughter; api—even; tat—that; karau—hands; däna-çélinau—generous; tatra—there; api—also; noditä—sent; däne—charity; dadau—gave; ati-mahä-manäù—very noble-hearted.

     Çré Närada said: Even though she was a princess, when asked in this way noble-hearted Rohiëé gave charity with two generous hands.

Text 32

garua-varëä divya-väsä
     ratnäbharaëa-bhüñitä
vyacarad rohiëé säkñät
     püjayanté vrajaukasaù

     garua—fair; varëä—color; divya—glistening; väsä—garments; ratna—jewel; äbharaëa—ornaments; bhüñitä—decorated; vyacarat—did; rohiëé—Rohiëé; säkñät—directly; püjayanté—worshiping; vraja-okasaù—the people of Vraja.

     Then fair-complexioned, splendidly dressed, jewel decorated Rohiëé worshiped the people of Vraja.

Text 33

paripürëatame säkñäc
     chré-kåñëe vrajam ägate
nadatsu nara-türyeñu
     jaya-dhvanir abhün mahän

     paripürëatame—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëe—Çré Kåñëa; vrajam—to Vraja; ägate—came; nadatsu—sounding; nara-türyeñu—the four kinds of men; jaya—of victory; dhvaniù—sound; abhüt—became; mahän—great.

     When Çré Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, came to Vraja Village, many türyas sounded and a great cry of "Victory!" rose up.    

Text 34

dadhi-kñéra-ghåtair gopä
     gopyo haiyaìgavair navaiù
çiçicur harñitäs tatra
     jagur uccaiù parasparam

     dadhi—with yogurt; kñéra—milk; ghåtaiù—and ghee; gopäù—the gopas; gopyaù—gopés; haiyaìgavair navaiù—with fresh butter; çiçicuù—sprinkled; harñitäù—jubilant; tatra—there; jaguù—sang; uccaiù—loudly; parasparam—together.

     Then the happy gopas and gopés sprinkled each other with fresh butter and loudly sang.

Text 35

     bahir antaù-pure jäte
     sarvato dadhi-kardame
våddhäç ca sthüla-dehäç ca
     petur häsyaà kåtaà paraiù

     bahiù—outside; antaù-pure—inside their homes; jäte—created; sarvataù—completely; dadhi—with yogurt; kardame—mud; våddhäù—elder; ca—and; sthüla—large; dehäù—bodies; ca—also; petuù—fell; häsyam—laughter; kåtam—done; paraiù—by the others.

     When a large elder gopa fell in the yogurt-mud that was everywhere, inside and outside the homes, the others laughed.

Text 36

sütäù pauraëikäù proktä
     mägadhä vaàsa-saàçakäù
vandinas tv amala-prajïäù
     prastäva-sadåçoktayaù

     sütäù—the sütas; pauraëikäù—the pauraëikas; proktäù—said; mägadhäù—the mägadhas; vaàça-saàçakäù—the reciters of genealogies; vandinaù—the vandis; tu—also; amala—pure; prajïäù—children; prastava—prayers; sadåça—like that; uktayaù—words.

     Then many intelligent and pure sütas, pauräëikas, mägadhas, vaàça-çaàsakas, and vandés recited many prayers.

Text 37

tebhyo nando mahä-räjo
     sahasraà gäù påthak påthak
vaso-'laìkära-ratnäni
     hayebhän akhilän dadau

     tebhyaù—to them; nandaù—Nanda; mahä-räjaù—the great king; sahasram—a thousand; gäù—cows; påthak påthak—to each; vasaù—garments; alaìkära—ornaments; ratnäni—jewels; haya—horses; ibhän—and elephants; akhilän—all; dadau—gave.

     To each one Nanda Mahäräja gave a thousand cows and many garments, ornaments, jewels, horses, and elephants.

Text 38

vandibhyo mägadhebhyaç ca
     sarvebhyo bahulaà dhanam
vavarña dhanavad-gopo
     nanda-räjo vrajeçvaraù

     vandibhyaù—to the vandis; mägadhebhyaù—to the magadhas; ca—and; sarvebhyaù—to everyone; bahulam—abundant; dhanam—wealth; vavarña—showered; dhanavat—wealthy; gopaù—gopa; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; vrajeçvaraù—the ruler of Vraja.

     King Nanda, the wealthy gopa ruler of Vraja, showered great wealth on the vandés, mägadhas, and everyone else.

Text 39

nidhiù siddhiç ca våddhiç ca
     bhuktir muktir gåhe gåhe
véthyäà véthyäà luöhantéva
   tad-icchä kasyacin na hi

     nidhiù—wealth; siddhiù—mystic perfection; ca—and; våddhiù—glory; ca—and; bhuktiù—sense gratification; muktiù—liberation; gåhe gåhe—at every home; véthyäà véthyäm—on every pathway; luöhanti—roll on the ground; iva—as if; tad-icchä—the desire; kasyacin—of someone; na—not; hi—indeed.

     Wealth, mystic powers, glory, sense gratification, and liberation rolled about on the ground in every home and on every pathway. No one had any desires left to be fulfilled.

Text 40

sanat-kumära-kapila-
     çuka-vyäsädibhiù saha
haàsa-datta-pulastyädyair
     mayä brahma jagäma ha

     sanat-kumära-kapila-çuka-vyäsädibhiù—headed by Sanat-kumära, Kapila, Çuka, and Vyäsa; saha—with; haàsa-datta-pulastyädyaiù—those headed by Haàsa, Datta, and Pulastya; mayä—with me; brahma—Brahmä; jagäma ha—went.

     Then, accompanied by me and by the great sages headed by Sanat-kumära, Kapila, Çukadeva, Vyäsa, Haàsa, Datta, and Pulastya, the demigod Brahmä went there. 

Text 41

haàsärüòho hema-varëo
     mukuöé kuëòalé sphuran
catur-mukho veda-kartä
     dyotayan maëòalaà diçam

     haàsa—on a swan; ärüòhaù—riding; hema-varëaù—golden color; mukuöé—wearing a crown; kuëòalé—wearing earrings; sphuran—splendid; catur-mukhaù—with four faces; veda—of the Vedas; kartä—the author; dyotayan—illuminating; maëòalaà diçam—the directions.

     Wearing a crown and earings, his complexion the color of gold, and filling the directions with light, four-faced Brahmä, the author of the Vedas, came, riding on a swan.

Text 42

tathä tam anu bhütäòhyo
    våñärüòho maheçvaraù
rathärüòho raviù säkñäd
     gajärüòhaù purandaraù

     tathä—so; tam—him; anu—after; bhüta—by ghosts and demons; äòhyaù—accompanied; våña-ärüòhaù—riding on a bull; maheçvaraù—Lord Çiva;  ratha-ärüòhaù—riding on a chariot; raviù—the sun-god; säkñät—directly; gaja-ärüòhaù—riding on an elephant; purandaraù—Indra.

     Accompanied by many ghosts and demons, Lord Çiva came, riding on a bull. The sun-god came riding on a chariot. Indra came riding on an elephant.

Text 43

väyuç ca khaïjanärüòho
     yamo mahiña-vähanaù
dhanadaù puñpakärüòho
     mågärüòho kñapeçvaraù

     väyuù—Väyus; ca—also; khaïjana-ärüòhaù—riding on a khanjana bird; yamaù—Yama; mahiña-vähanaù—riding on a buffalo; dhanadaù—Kuvera; puñpaka-ärüòhaù—riding on a flower chariot; måga-ärüòhaù—riding on a deer; kñapeçvaraù—the moon-god.

     Väyu came riding on a khaïjana bird. Yamaräja came riding on a buffalo. Kuvera came riding on a flower chariot. The moon-god came riding on a deer.

Text 44

ajärüòho vétihotro
     varuëo makara-sthitaù
mayüra-sthaù kärttikeyo
     bhäraté haàsa-vahiné

     aja-ärüòhaù—riding on a ram; vétihotraù—Agni; varuëaù—Varuëa; makara-sthitaù—riding on a shark; mayüra-sthaù—riding on a peacock; kärttikeyaù—Kärttikeya; bhäraté—Sarasvaté; haàsa-vahiné—riding on a swan.

     Agni came riding on a ram. Varuëa came riding on a shark. Kärttikeya came riding on a peacock. Sarasvaté came riding on a swan.

Text 45

lakñméç ca garuòärüòhä
     durgäkhyä siàha-vähiné
go-rüpa-dhäriëé påthvé
     vimäna-sthä samäyayau

     lakñméù—Lakñmé; ca—and; garuòa-ärüòhä—riding on Garuòa; durgä-äkhyä—Durgä; siàha-vähiné—riding on a lion; go-rüpa-dhäriëé—manifesting the form of a cow; påthvé—the earth-goddess; vimäna-sthä—riding in a airplane; samäyayau—came.

     Lakñmé came riding on Garuòa. Durgä came riding on a lion. Manifesting the form of a cow, the earth-goddess came riding in an airplane.

Text 46

dolärüòhä divya-varëä
     mukhyäù ñoòaça-mätåikäù
ñañöhé ca çibikärüòhä
     khaòginé yañöi-dhäriëé

     dola-ärüòhäù—riding in a swing; divya—splendid; varëäù—colors; mukhyäù—the most important; ñoòaça-mätåikäù—the sixteen Mätåikäs; ñañöhé—Ñañöhé; ca—also; çibika-ärüòhä—riding on a palanquin; khaòginé—holding a sword; yañöi-dhäriëé—holding a stick.

     The sixteen Mätåkäs came riding on a swing, and Goddess Ñañthé, holding a sword and club, came riding on a palanquin.

Text 47

maìgalo vanarärüòho
     bhäsärüòho budhaù småtaù
géñpatiù kåñëasära-sthaù
     çukro gavaya-vähanaù

     maìgalaù—the ruler of the planet mars; vänara-ärüòhaù—riding on a gorilla; bhäsa-ärüòhaù—riding on a rooster; budhaù—the ruler of the planet mercury; småtaù—considered; géñpatiù—the ruler of the planet jupiter; kåñëasära-sthaù—riding on a black-deer; çukraù—the ruler of the planet Venus; gavaya-vähanaù—riding on an ox.

     The ruler of the planet Mars came riding on a gorilla. The ruler of the planet Mercury came riding on a rooster. The ruler of the planet Jupiter came riding on a black stag. The ruler of the planet Venus came riding on an ox.

Text 48

çaniç ca makarärüòha
     uñöra-sthaù siàhika-sutaù
koöi-bälärka-saìkäça
     äyayau nanda-mandiram

     çaniù—the ruler of the planet Saturn; ca—also; makara-ärüòhaù—riding on a shark; uñöra-sthaù—riding on a camel; siàhikä-sutaù—the ruler of the planet Rahu; koöi—millions; bälärka—of rising suns; saìkäçäù—splendid; äyayau—they came; nanda—of Nanda; mandiram—to the palace.

     The ruler of the planet Saturn came riding on a shark. The ruler of the planet Rähu came riding on a camel. Splendid as millions of suns, they came to Nanda's palace.

Text 49

kolähala-samäyuktaà
     gopa-gopé-gaëäkulam
nanda-mandiram abhyetya
     kñaëaà sthitvä yayuù suräù

     kolähala—with a tumult; samäyuktam—endowed; gopa—of gopas; gopé—and gopés; gaëa—with multitudes; äkulam—filled; nanda-mandiram—Nanda's palace; abhyetya—attaining; kñaëam—for a moment; sthitvä—standing; yayuù—went; suräù—the dmeigods.

     Finally coming to Nanda's palace, which was filled with many gopas and gopés making a great tumult, the demigods paused for a moment, and then entered.

Text 50

paripürëatamaà säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaà bäla-rüpiëam
natvä dåñövä tadä deväs
     cakrus tasya stutià paräm

     paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; bäla-rüpiëam—in the form of a child; natvä—offering obeisances; dåñövä—seeing; tadä—then; deväù—the demigods; cakruù—did; tasya—to Him; stutim—prayers; paräm—excellent.

     After offering obeisances to Him and gazing at Him, the demigods offered many eloquent prayers to Çré Kåñëa who, although manifesting the form of a child, was the original Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 51

vékñya kåñëaà tadä devä
     brahmädyä åñibhiù saha
sva-dhämäni yayuù sarve
     harñitäù prema-vihvaläù

     vékñya—seeing; kåñëam—Lord Kåñëa; tadä—then; deväù—the demigods; brahmädyäù—headed by Brahmä; åñibhiù—the sages; saha—with; sva—own; dhämäni—to the abodes; yayuù—went; sarve—all; harñitäù—happy; prema—with love; vihvaläù—overcome.

     After gazing at Lord Kåñëa, Brahmä and the demigods and sages, now very happy and overwhelmed with feelings of love, went to their own abodes. .pa

Chapter Thirteen
Pütanä-mokña
The Liberation of Pütanä

Texts 1 and 2

çré-närada uväca 
çaury-anämaya-påcchärthaà
     karaà dätuà nåpasya ca
putrotsavaà kathayituà
     nande çré-mathuraà gate

kaàsena preñitä duñöä
     pütanä ghäta-käriëé
pureñu gräma-ghoñeñu
     caranté gharghara-svanä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; çauri—of Vasudeva; anämaya—the welfare; påcchä—question; artham—for the purpose; karam—tax; dätum—to give; nåpasya—to the king; ca—also; putra—of his son; utsavam—the festival; kathayitum—to describe; nande—when Nanda; çré-mathuram—to Çré Mathurä; gate—went; kaàsena—by Kaàsa; preñitä—sent; duñöä—demon; pütanä—Pütanä; ghäta-käriëé—murderess; pureñu in cities; gräma—towns; ghoñeñu—and cowherd villages; caranté—going; gharghara-svanä—making a rumbling sound.

     While, to ask about Vasudeva's welfare, to pay his tax to the king, and to describe his son's birth-festival, Nanda was in Çré Mathurä, the murderess Pütanä, sent by Kaàsa, was traveling among cities, towns, and cowherd villages, making a menacing rumbling sound.

Text 3

atha gokulam äsädya
     gopa-gopé-gaëäkulam
rüpaà dadhära sä divyaà
     vapuù ñoòaça-varñikam

     atha—then; gokulam—Gokula; äsädya—attaining; gopa—of gopas; gopé—and gopés; gaëa—with multitudes; äkulam—filled; rüpam—a form; dadhära—assumed; sä—she; divyam—glorious; vapuù—form; ñoòaça—sixteen; varñikam—years.

     Coming to Gokula, which was filled with many gopas and gopés, the demoness assumed the form of a splendid sixteen-year old girl.

Text 4

na ke 'pi rurudhur gopäù
     sundaréà täà ca gopikäù
çacéà väëéà ramäà rambhäà
     ratià ca kñipatém iva

     na—not; ke api—anyone; rurudhuù—stopped; gopäù—gopas; sundarém—beautiful; täm—her; ca—also; gopikäù—gopés; çacém—Çacé; väëém—Sarasvaté; ramäàlakñmé; rambhäm—Rambhä; ratim—Rati; ca—also; kñipatém—eclipsing; iva—as if.

     No gopa or gopé stopped this beautiful girl, who seemed to eclipse the goddesses Çacé, Sarasvaté, Lakñmé, Rambhä, and Rati.

Text 5

rohiëyäà ca yaçodäyäà
     dharñitäyäà sphurat-kucä
aìkam ädäya taà bälaà
     lälayanté punaù punaù

     rohiëyäm—when Rohiëé; ca—also; yaçodäyäm—Yaçodä; dharñitäyäm—were arrogantly ignored; sphurat—manifest; kucä—breasts; aìkam—on her lap; ädäya—taking; tam—Him; bälam—the infant; lälayanté—fondling; punaù punaù—again and again.

     Ignoring Rohiëé and Yaçodä, she took the infant on her lap, fondled Him again and again, and then exposed her breasts.

Text 6

dadau çiçor mahä-ghorä
     käläkütävåtaà stanam
präëaiù särdhaà papau dugdhaà
     kaöuà roñävåto hariù

     dadau—placed; çiçoù—of the infant; mahä—very; ghorä—terrible; käläküta—with poison; ävåtam—covered; stanam—breast; präëaiù—life breath; särdham—with; papau—drank; dugdham—milk; kaöum—bitter; roña—with anger; ävåtaù—filled; hariù—Lord Hari.

     When the very horrible demoness gave her poison-covered breast to Him, infant Lord Hari became angry and drank her life-breath along with the bitter milk.

Text 7

muïca muïca vadantétthaà
     dhavanté piòita-stanä
nétvä bahir gatä taà vai
     gata-mäyä babhüva ha

     muïca—leave!; muïca—leave!; vadanté—saying; ittham—thus; dhavanté—running; piòita—tortured; stanä—breasts; nétvä—bringing; bahiù—outside; gatä—gone; tam—Him; vai—indeed; gata—gone; mäyä—illusion; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     Screaming "Leave me! Leave me!", and her breast filled with pain, she ran outside, bringing the infant with her and her magical illusion now gone.

Text 8

patan-neträ çveta-gäträ
     rudanté patitä bhuvi
nanäda tena brahmäëòaà
     sapta lokair bilaiù saha

     patat—falling; neträ—eyes; çveta—perspiring; gäträ—limbs; rudanté—screaming; patitä—fallen; bhuvi—to the ground; nanäda—made a sound; tena—by that; brahmäëòam—the universe; sapta-lokaiù—the seven planetary systems; bilaiù—and the expanses of outer space; saha—with.

     Screaming, her eyes bulging and limbs perspiring, she fell to the ground, making a sound that filled the universe with its seven planetary systems and empty regions of outer space.

Texts 9 and 10

cacäla vasudhä dvépais
     tad adbhutam iväbhavat
ñaö-kroçaà sä dåòhän dérghän
     våkñän påñöha-tale gatän

cürëé-cakära vapuñä
     vajräagena nåpeçvara
vadantas te gopa-gaëä
     vékñya ghoraà vapur mahat

     cacäla—moved; vasudhä—the earth; dvépaiù—with its continents; tat—that; adbhutam—a wonder; iva—like; abhavat—was; ñaö-kroçam—twelve miles; sä—she; dåòhän—hard; dérghän—tall; våkñän—trees; påñöha-tale—to the ground; gatän—went; cürëé-cakära—broke into pieces; vapuñä—with the body; vajräagena—lightning bolt; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; vadantaù—saying; te—they; gopa-gaëäù—the gopas; vékñya—seeing; ghoram—horrible; vapuù—form; mahat—great.

     A great wonder happened. The earth and all its continents moved. She became twelve mils long and her thunderbolt body broke many tall and strong trees and made them fall to the ground. O king of kings, when the gopas saw her horrible gigantic body, they said:

Texts 11 and 12

asyä aìguli-go bälo
     na jévati kadäcana
tasyä urasi sänandaà
     kréòantaà su-smitaà çiçum

dugdhaà pitvä jåmbhamänaà
     taà dåñövä jagåhuù striyaù
yaçodayä ca rohiëyä
     nidhäyorasi vismitäù

     asyäù—of her; aìguli-gaù—gone on a finger; bälaù—infant; na—not; jévati—lives; kadäcana—ever; tasyäù—of her; urasi—on the breast; sänandam—happily; kréòantam—playing; su-smitam—smiling; çiçum—child; dugdham—milk; pitvä—having drunk; jåmbhamänam—yawning; tam—Him; dåñövä—seeing; jagåhuù—grabbed; striyaù—the women; yaçodayä—by Yaçodä; ca—also; rohiëyä—by Rohiëé; nidhäya—placing; urasi—on the breast; vismitäù—astonished.

     "The child was crushed by her fingers. He could not have remained alive." Then, seeing the smiling infant yawn after drinking the demoness' milk, and then play on her breast, the astonished women, along with Yaçodä and Rohiëia, grabbed Him, and pulled Him down from the breast.

Text 13

sarvato bälakaà nétvä
     rakñäà cakrur vidhänataù
kälindé-puëya-måt-toyair
     go-puccha-bhramaëädibhiù

     sarvataù—completely; bälakam—the infant; nétvä—taking; rakñäm—protection; cakruù—did; vidhänataù—properly; kälindé—of the Yamunä; puëya—sacred; måt—with mud; toyaiù—and water; gaù—of the cows; puccha—tails; bhramaëa—with the movements; ädibhiù—beginning.

     Then they took the child and acted to give Him protection by anointing Him with the Yamunä's sacred water and clay, by having a cow wave its tail before Him, and by doing other things also.

Text 14

go-mütra-go-rajobhiç ca
     snäpayitvä tv idaà jaguù

     gaù—cow; mutra—urine; gaù—cow; rajobhiù—with dust; ca—and; snäpayitvä—bathing; tu—indeed; idam—this; jaguù—sang.

     Bathing Him with cow dust and cow urine, they chanted:

Text 15

çré-gopya ücuù 
çré-kåñëas te çiraù pätu
     vaikuëöhaù kaëöham eva hi
çvetadvépa-patiù karëau
     näsikaà yajïa-rüpa-dhåk

     çré-gopyaù ücuù—the gopés said; çré-kåñëaù—may Çré Kåñëa; te—Your; çiraù—head; pätu—protect; vaikuëöhaù—may Lord Vaikuëöha; kaëöham—neck; eva—certainly; hi—indeed; çvetadvépa-patiù—the Lord od Çvetadvépa; karëau—ears; näsikam—nose; yajïa-rüpa-dhåk—He who has the form of Lord Yajïa.

     The gopés said: May Çré Kåñëa protect Your head. May Lord Vaikuëöha protect Your neck. May the Lord of Çvetadvépa protect Your ears. May Lord Yajïa protect Your nose.

Text 16

nåsiàho netra-yugmaà ca
     jihväà daçarathätmajaù
adharäv avatäà te tu
     nara-näräyanäv åñé

     nåsiàhaù—Nåsiàha; netra—eyes; yugmam—pair; ca—and; jihväm—tongue; daçarathätmajaù—Lord Räma, the son of Daçaratha; adharau—lips; avatäm—may protect; te—Your; tu—indeed; nara-näräyanau åñé—Nara-Näräyaëa Åñi.

     May Lord Nåsiàha protect Your two eyes. May Lord Räma protect Your tongue. May Lord Nara-Näräyaëa Åñi protect Your lips.

Text 17

kapolau päntu te säkñät
     sanakädyäù kalä hareù
bhalaà te sveta-väräho
     närado bhrü-late 'vatu

     kapolau—cheeks; päntu—may protect; te—they; säkñät—directly; sanakädyäù—the four Kumäras; kaläù—kalä expansions; hareù—of Lord Hari; bhalam—forehead; te—Your; sveta-värähaù—Çveta Varäha; näradaù—Närada; bhrü-late—the two vines of Your eyebrows; avatu—may protect.

     May the four Kumäras. who are Lord Hari's kalä expansions, protect Your cheeks. May Lord Çveta Varäha protect Your forehead. May Lord Närada protect the two vines of Your eyebrows.

Text 18

cibukaà kapilaù pätu
     dattätreya uro 'vatu
skandhau dväv åñabhaù pätu
     karau matsyaù prapätu te

     cibukam—chin; kapilaù—Kapila; pätu—may protect; dattätreya—Dattätreya; uraù—chest; avatu—may protect; skandhau—shoulders; dvau—two; åñabhaù—Åñabha; pätu—may protect; karau—hands; matsyaù—Matsya; prapätu—may protect; te—Your.

     May Lord Kapila protect Your chin. May Lord Dattätreya protect Your chest. May Lord Åñabha protect both Your shoulders. May Lord Matsya protect Your hands.

Text 19

dor-daëòaà satataà rakñet
     påthuù påthula-vikramaù
udaraà kamaöhaù pätu
     näbhià dhanvantariç ca te

     dor-daëòam—arms; satatam—always; rakñet—may protect; påthuù—Påthu; påthula-vikramaù—very powerful; udaram—belly; kamaöhaù—Lord Kürma; pätu—may protect; näbhim—navel; dhanvantariù—Dhanvantari; ca—and; te—Your.

     May powerful Lord Påthu always protect Your arms. May Lord Kürma protect Your abdomen. May Lord Dhanvantari protect Your navel.

Text 20

mohiné guhya-deçaà ca
     kaöià te vämano 'vatu
påñöhaà paraçurämaç ca
     tavorü bädaräyaëaù

     mohiné—Mohiné; guhya-deçam—private parts; ca—also; kaöim—hips; te—Your; vämanaù—Vämana; avatu—may protect; påñöham—back; paraçurämaù—Paraçuräma; ca—also; tava—Your; ürü—thighs;' bädaräyaëaù—Vyäsa.

     May Çrématé Mohiné protect Your private parts. My Lord Vämana protect Your hips. May Lord Paraçuräma protect Your back. May Lord Vyäsa protect Your thighs.

Text 21

balo jänu-dvayaà pätu
     jaìghe buddhaù prapätu te
padau pätu sa-gulphau ca
     kalkir dharma-patiù prabhuù

     balaù—Balaräma; jänu-dvayam—two knees; pätu—may protect; jaìghe—legs; buddhaù—Buddha; prapätu—may protect; te—Your; padau—feet; pätu—may protect; sa—with; gulphau—ankles; ca—also; kalkiù—Kalki; dharma—of religion; patiù—the master; prabhuù—the Lord.

     May Lord Balaräma protect Your knees. May Lord Buddha protect Your shins. May Lord Kalki, the master of religion, protect Your ankles and feet.

Text 22

sarva-rakñä-karaà divyaà
     çré-kåñëa-kavacaà param
idaà bhagavatä dattaà
     brahmaëe näbhi-paìkaje

     sarva-rakñä-karam—all protection; divyam—glorious; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; kavacam—the armor; param—great; idam—this; bhagavatä—by the Lord; dattam—given; brahmaëe—to Brahmä; näbhi—navel; paìkaje—on the lotus.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead gave this glorious and transcendental Çré Kåñëa-kavaca (armor of Lord Kåñëa), which gives all protection, to the demigod Brahmä on the lotus flower of His navel. 

Text 23

brahmaëä çambhave dattaà
     çambhur durväsase dadau
durväsäù çré-yaçomatyai
     prädäc chré-nanda-mandire

     brahmaëä—by Brahmä; çambhave—to Lord Çiva; dattam—givem; çambhuù—Lord Çiva; durväsase—to Durväsä; dadau—gave; durväsäù—Durväsä; çré-yaçomatyai—to Çré Yaçodä; prädät—gave; çré-nanda—of Çré Nanda; mandire—in the palace.

     Then Brahmä gave it to Lord Çiva. Lord Çiva gave it to Durväsä Muni. Durväsä Muni gave it to Çré Yaçodä in Çré Nanda's palace.

Text 24

anena rakñäà kåtväsya
     gopébhiù çré-yaçomaté
päyayitvä stanaà dänaà
     viprebhyaù pradadau mahat

     anena—by it; rakñäm—protection; kåtvä—doing; asya—of Him; gopébhiù—by the gopés; çré-yaçomaté—Çré Yaçodä; päyayitvä—causing to drink; stanam—breast; dänam—charity; viprebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; pradadau—gave; mahat—great.

     In this way Çré Yaçodä and the gopés gave protection to (infant Kåñëa). Then Çré Yaçodä gave Him her breast milk to drink, and then she gave great charity to the brähmaëas.

Text 25

tadä nandädayo gopä
     ägatä mathurä-purät
dåñövä ghoraà pütanäkhyaà
     babhüvur bhaya-vihvaläù

     tadä—then; nanda-ädayaù—headed by Nanda; gopäù—the gopas; ägatäù—arrived; mathurä-purät—from the city of Mathurä; dåñövä—seeing; ghoram—horror; pütanä-äkhyam—named Pütanä; babhüvuù—became; bhaya—with fear; vihvaläù—overwhelmed.

     When, just returned from Mathurä City, the gopas headed by Nanda saw horrible Pütanä, they were overcome with fear.

Text 26

chitvä kuöhärais tad-dehaà
     gopäù çré-yamunä-taöe
anekäç ca citäù kåtvä
     dahayäm äsur eva tam

     chitvä—cutting; kuöhäraiù—with axes; tad-deham—her body; gopäù—the gopas; çré-yamunä-taöe—on the Yamunä's shore; anekäù—many; ca—also; citäù—pyres; kåtvä—making; dahayäm äsuù—burned; eva—indeed; tam—it.

     Cutting it up with axes, and making many pyres by Çré Yamunä's shore, the gopas burned her body.

Text 27

elä-lavaìga-çrékhaëòa-
     tagaräguru-gandhi-bhåt
dhümo dagdhasya dehasya
     pavitrasya samutthitaù

     elä-lavaìga-çrékhaëòa—of elä, lavaìga, and çrékhaëòa; tagara—of tagara; äguru—and of aguru; gandhi—the scent; bhåt—manifesting; dhümaù—smoke; dagdhasya—of the burned; dehasya—body; pavitrasya—purified; samutthitaù—risen.

     The smoke that rose from her now purified burning body was fragrant as elä, lavaìga, çrékhaëòa, tagra, and aguru.

Text 28

aho kåñëam åte kaà vä
     vrajäma çaraëaà tv iha
pütanäyai mokña-gatià
     dadau patita-pävanaù

     ahaù—oh; kåñëam—for Kåñëa; åte—except; kam—to whom?; vä—or; vrajäma—we go; çaraëam—shelter; tu—certainly; iha—here; pütanäyai—to Pütanä; mokña-gatim—the destination of liberation; dadau—gave; patita—of the fallen; pävanaù—the purifier.

     Of whom else but Kåñëa will we take shelter? The purifier of the fallen, He gave liberation to Pütanä.

Text 29

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
keyaà vä rakñasé pürvaà
     pütanä bäla-ghätiné
viña-stanä duñöa-bhävä
     paraà mokñaà kathaà gatä

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; kä—who?; iyam—she; vä—or; rakñasé—the demoness; pürvam—before; pütanä—Pütanä; bäla—of children; ghätiné—the murderess; viña—poison; stanä—breast; duñöa-bhävä—wicked; param—ultimate; mokñam—libreation; katham—how?; gatä—attained.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Who was this demoness in her previous birth? Why did evil Pütanä, who murdered children by giving them her poisoned breast, attain ultimate liberation?

Text 30

çré-närada uväca 
bali-yajïe vämanasya
     dåñövä rüpam ataù param
bali-kanyä ratnamälä
     putra-snehaà cakära ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; bali—of Bali Mahäräja; yajïe—in the sacrifice; vämanasya—of Lord Vämana; dåñövä—seeing; rüpam—the form; ataù param—then; bali—of Bali; kanyä—the daughter; ratnamälä—Ratnamälä; putra—to a son; sneham—affection; cakära ha—did.

     Seeing the form of Lord Vämana in Bali Mahäraja's yajïa, Bali's daughter Ratnamälä felt for the Lord (a mother's) love for her son.

Text 31

etädåço yadi bhaved
     bälas taà hi çuci-smitam
päyayämi stanaà tena
     prasannaà me manas tadä

     etädåçaù—like that; yadi—if; bhavet—would be; bälaù—boy; tam—Him; hi—certainly; çuci—pure; smitam—smile; päyayämi—I give to drink; stanam—breast; tena—by that; prasannam—happy; me—my; manaù—heart; tadä—then.

     (She thought:) If I had a son like Him, then I would give that gloriously smiling son the milk from my breast to drink. In that way my heart would become happy.

Text 32

baleù parama-bhaktasya
     sutäyai vämano hariù
manorathas tu te bhuyän
     manasy api varaà dadau

     baleù—of Bali Mahäräja; parama—great; bhaktasya—devotee; sutäyai—to the daughter; vämanaù—Vämana; hariù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; manorathaù—the desire; tu—certainly; te—of you; bhuyät—may be; manasi—in His heart; api—also; varam—the benediction; dadau—gave.

     "may your desire be fulfilled." In this way the Personality of Godhead, Lord Vämana, gave a blessing in his heart to the daughter of His great devotee Bali Mahäräja.

Text 33

säbhavad dväparänte vai
     pütanä näma viçrutä
çré-kåñëa-sparça-sambhütä
     paraà präpta-manorathä

     sä—she; abhavat—became; dväpara-ante—at the end of Dväpara-yuga; vai—indeed; pütanä—Pütanä; näma—named; viçrutä—famous; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; sparça—by the touch; sambhütä—manifested; param—then; präpta—attained; manorathä—desire.

     At the end of Dväpara-yuga she became known as Pütanä. Then, by Lord Kåñëa's touch, she attained her desire.

Text 34

yaù pütanä-mokñam imaà çåëoti
     kåñëasya devasya parät parasya
bhaktir bhavet prema-yutäpi tasya
     tri-varga-çuddhiù kim u maithilendra

     yaù—who; pütanä—of Pütanä; mokñam—liberation; imam—the; çåëoti—hears; kåñëasya devasya—of Lord Kåñëa; parät parasya—greater than the greatest; bhaktiù—devotion; bhavet—is; prema-yutä—with love; api—also; tasya—of Him; tri-varga—in the three goals of life; çuddhiù—purification; kim u—what to speak of?; maithila-indra—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, a person who hears of Pütanä's liberation will become purified of the three material desires and will attain pure love and devotion for Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is greater than the greatest.

Chapter Fourteen
Çakaöäsura-tåëävarta-mokñaù
The Liberation of Çakaöäsura and Tåëävarta

Text 1

çré-garga uväca 
ity evaà kathitaà divyaà
     çré-kåñëa-caritaà varam
yaù çåëoti naro bhaktyä
     sa kåtärtho na saàçayaù

     çré-gargaù uväca—Çré Garga Muni said; iti—thus; evam—in thjis way; kathitam—said; divyam—transcendental; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; caritam—pastimes; varam—excellent; yah—one who; çåëoti—hears; naraù—a person; bhaktyä—witù devotion; saù—he; kåtärthaù—successful; na—not; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Çré Garga Muni said: A person who with devotion hears Lord Kåñëa's transcendental pastimes becomes perfect and successful. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 2

çré-çaunaka uväca 
sudhä-käëòät paraà miñöaà
     çré-kåñëa-caritaà çubham
çrutvä tan-mukhataù säkñät
     kåtärthäù smo vayaà mune

     çré-çaunakaù uväca—Çré Garga said; sudhä-käëòät—than nectar; param—more; miñöam—sweet; çré-kåñëa-caritam—Çré Kåñëa's pastimes; çubham—beautiful; çrutvä—hearing; tan-mukhataù—from his mouth; säkñät—directly; kåtärthäù—successful; smaù—become; vayam—we; mune—O sage.

     Çré Çaunaka said: O sage, hearing from your mouth Çré Kåñëa's beautiful pastimes, which are sweeter than nectar, we have now become successful.

Text 3

çré-kåñëa-bhaktaù çäntätmä
     bahulaçvaù satäà varaù
atho munià kià papraccha
     tan me brühi tapo-dhana

     çré-kåñëa-bhaktaù—a devotee of Çré Kåñëa; çänta—peaceful; ätmä—at heart; bahulaçvaù—Bahuläçva; satäm—of the pious; varaù—the best; athaù—then; munim—the sage; kim—what?; papraccha—asked; tat—that; me—to me; brühi—please tell; tapaù—austerity; dhana—wealth.

     What did Bahuläçva, who was a peaceful-hearted devotee of Lord Kåñëa, and who was the best of the pious, ask the sage then? O saint wealthy in austerity, please tell me this.

Text 4

çré-garga uväca 
atha räjä maithilendro
     harñitaù prema-vihvalaù
näradaà präha dharmätmä
     paripürëatamaà smaran

     çré-gargaù uväca—Çré Garga said; atha—then; räjä maithilendraù—the kin gof Mithilä; harñitaù—happy; prema—with love; vihvalaù—overcome; näradam—to Närada; präha—said; dharma—of religion; ätmä—the heart; paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; smaran—remembering.

     Çré Garga Muni said: Happy, overcome with love, and meditating on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the saintly-hearted king of Mithilä spoke to Närada.

Text 5

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
dhanyo 'haà ca kåtärtho 'haà
     bhavatä bhüri-karmaëä
saìgo bhagavadéyänäà
     durlabho durghaöo 'sti hi

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; dhanyaù—fortunate; aham—I am; ca—and; kåtärthaù—successful; aham—I; bhavatä—by you; bhüri—great; karmaëä—deeds; saìgaù—association; bhagavadéyänäm—of the great devotees of the Lord; durlabhaù—difficult to attain; durghaöaù—difficult to be; asti—is; hi—indeed.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Because of you, whose devotional service is very great, I have become fortunate and successful. Association with the Lord's great devotees is very rare and difficult to attain.

Text 6

çré-kåñëas tv arbhakaù säkñäd
     adbhuto bhakta-vatsalaù
agre cakära kià citraà
     caritaà vada me mune

     çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; tu—indeed; arbhakaù—infant; säkñät—directly; adbhutaù—wonderful; bhakta—to the devotees; vatsalaù—affectionate; agre—in the first; cakära—did; kim—what?; citram—wonderful; caritam—activities; vada—please tell; me—me; mune—O sage.

     What wonderful activities did wonderful infant Kåñëa, who loves His devotees, do? O sage, please tell me.

Text 7

çré-närada uväca 
sädhu påñöaà tvayä räjan
     bhavatä kåñëa-dharmiëä
saìgamaù khalu sädhünäà
     sarveñäà vitanoti çam

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; sädhu—well; påñöam—asked; tvayä—by you; räjan—O king; bhavatä—by you; kåñëa-dharmiëä—a devotee of Lord Kåñëa; saìgamaù—association; khalu—indeed; sädhünäm—of saintly devotees; sarveñäm—all; vitanoti—gives; çam—happiness and auspiciousness.

     Çré Närada said: O king, as a devotee of Lord Kåñëa, you have asked a very good question. Association with saintly devotees brings happiness and auspicious to everyone.

Text 8

ekadä kåñëa-janmarkñe
     yaçodä nanda-gehiné
gopé-gopän samähüya
     maìgalaà cäkarod dvijaiù

     ekadä—one day; kåñëa-janma-åkñe—on the day of Kåñëa's birth-star; yaçodä—Yañodä; nanda-gehiné—Nanda's wife; gopé—the gopés; gopän—and gopas; samähüya—calling; maìgalam—auspiciousness; ca—also; akarot—did; dvijaiù—by the brähmaëas.

     On the day of Kåñëa's birth-star, Nanda's wife Yaçodä called together the gopas and gopés and had the brähmaëas perform auspicious ceremonies.

Text 9

raktämbaraà kanaka-bhüñaëa-bhüñitäìgaà
     bälaà pragåhya kalitäïjana-padma-netram
çyämaà sphurad-dhari-nakhävåta-candra-häraà
     devän praëamya su-dhanaà pradadau dvijebhyaù

     rakta—red; ambaram—garments; kanaka—golden; bhüñaëa—ornaments; bhüñita—decorated; aìgam—body; bälam—boy; pragåhya—taking; kalita—decorated; aïjana—black aïjana; padma—lotus; netram—eyes; çyämam—dark; sphurat—glittering; hari—lion; nakha—nails; ävåta—filled; candra—moon; häram—neclace; devän—to the demigods; praëamya—bowing down; su-dhanam—great wealth; pradadau—gave; dvijebhyaù—to the brähmaëas.

     Taking her dark boy, who was dressed in red garments and who, His limbs decorated with golden ornaments and His lotus eyes with black aïjana, wore a glittering moon necklace of lion's nails, she offered respectful obeisances to the demigods and gave great wealth to the brähmaëas.

Text 10

preìkhe nidhäya nijam ätmajam äçu gopé
     sampüjya maìgala-dine prati gopikäs täù
naiväçåëot su-ruditasya sutasya çabdaà
     gopeñu maìgala-gåheñu gatägateñu

     preìkhe—on the cradle; nidhäya—placing; nijam—own; ätmajam—son; äçu—at once; gopé—the gopé; sampüjya—respectfully greeting; maìgala-dine—on that auspicious day; prati—to; gopikäù—gopés; täù—the; na—not; eva—indeed; açåëot—heard; su-ruditasya—crying; sutasya—son; çabdam—the sound; gopeñu—among the gopas; maìgala—auspicious; gåheñu—in the homes; gata—going; ägateñu—and coming.

     On that auspicious day she placed her son in His cradle, and quickly greeted the gopés. As the cowherd people came and went in the auspicious rooms, the gopé Yaçodä did not hear the sound of her crying son.

Text 11

tatraiva kaàsa-khala-nodita utkacäkhyo
     daityaù prabhaïjana-tanuù çakaöaà sa etya
bälasya mürdhni paripätayituà pravåttaù
     kåñëo 'pi taà kila tatäòa padäruëena

     tatrai—there; eva—indeed; kaàsa-khala—by the demon Kaàsa; noditaù—sent; utkaca-äkhyaù—named Utkaca; daityaù—a demon; prabhaïjana—made of the wind; tanuù—a body; çakaöam—the cart; saù—he; etya—entering; bälasya—of the boy; mürdhni—on the head; paripätayitum—to throw to the ground; pravåttaù—engaged; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; api—even; tam—him; kila—indeed; tatäòa—struck; padä—with a foor; aruëena—red.

     Then, when a demon named Utkaca, who had been sent by the demon Kaàsa, and who had a body made of air, went to a cart and tried to make it fall on Kåñëa's head, infant Kåñëa kicked the cart with the red sole of His foot.

Text 12

cürëe gate 'tha çakaöe patite ca daitye
     tyaktvä prabhaïjana-tanuà vimalo babhüva
natvä harià çata-hayena rathena yukto
     goloka-dhäma nija-lokam alaà jagäma

     cürëe—to pieces; gate—gone; atha—then; çakaöe—when the cart; patite—fell; ca—also; daitye—the demon; tyaktvä—abandoning; prabha 24jana—of air; tanum—body; vimalaù—pure; babhüva—became; natvä—offering obeisances; harim—to Lord Hari; çata—a hundred; hayena—horses; rathena—with a chariot; yuktaù—endowed; goloka-dhäma—to the abode of Goloka; nija-lokam—His own abode; alam—greatly; jagäma—went.

     When the cart broke into pieces the demon fell. Leaving his body of air, he attained a pure spiritual body and, after respectfully bowing down before Lord Hari, in a chariot pulled by a hundred horses went to the Lord's own abode of Goloka.

Text 13

nandädayo vraja-janä vraja-gopikäç ca
     sarve sametya yugapat påthukäàs tad ähuù
eña svayaà ca patitaù sakaöaù kathaà hi
     jänétha he vraja-sutäù su-gatäç ca yüyam

     nanda—with Nanda; ädayaù—beginning; vraja-janä—the people of Vraja; vraja-gopikäù—the gopés of Vraja; ca—and; sarve—all; sametya—going; yugapat—at the same moment; påthukän—to the children; tat—this; ähuù—said; eñaù—this; svayam—by itself; ca—and; patitaù—fallen; sakaöaù—cart; katham—how?; hi—indeed; jänétha—you know; he—he; vraja—of Vraja; sutäù—O children; su-gatäù—present; ca—also; yüyam—you all.

     Headed by Nanda, the men and gopés of Vraja at once converged on that place and asked the children, "How could this cart have fallen by itself? O children of Vraja, you were here. You know."

Text 14

çré-bälä ücuù 
preìkha-stho 'yaà kñipan pädau
     rudan dugdhärtham eva hi
tatäòa pädaà çakaöe
     tenedaà patitaà khalu

     çré-bäläù ücuù—the children said; preìkha—on the cradle; sthaù—situated; ayam—He; kñipan—kicking; pädau—both feet; rudan—crying; dugdha—milk; artham—for the purpose; eva—indeed; hi—certainly; tatäòa—struck; pädam—on foot; çakaöe—on the cart; tena—by that; idam—it; patitam—fell; khalu—certainly.

     The children said: Staying in the cradle, crying for milk, and kicking His feet, the child hit the cart with one foot and it fell.

Text 15

çraddhäà na cakrur bälokte
     gopä gopyaç ca vismitäù
traimäsikaù kva bälo 'yaà
     kva caitad bhära-bhåt tv anaù

     çraddhäm—faith; na—not; cakruù—did; bäla—of the children; ukte—in the words; gopäù—the gopas; gopyaù—gopés; ca—and; vismitäù—amazed; traimäsikaù—three months old; kva—where?; bälaù—infant; ayam—He; kva—where?; ca—and; etat—this; bhära—a great burden; bhåt—holding; tu—indeed; anaù—cart.

     Astonished, the gopas and gopés did not believe the childrens' words. "What is this three-month old infant in comparison to this heavily-burdened cart?"

Text 16

bälam aìke sä gåhétvä
     yaçodä graha-çaìkitä
kärayäm äsa vidhi-vad
     yajïaà vipraiù su-tarpitaiù

     bälam—the infant; aìke—on the lap; sä—she; gåhétvä—taking; yaçoda—Yaçodä; graha—a ghost; çaìkitä—fearing; kärayäm äsa—caused to be done; vidhi-vat—according to the rules; yajïam—a sacrifice; vipraiù—by the brähmaëas; su-tarpitaiù—pleased.

     Fearing a ghost had come, Yaçodä took the infant on her lap, gave offerings to the brähmaëas and had them perform a traditional yajïa.

Text 17

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
ko 'yaà pürvaà tu kuçalé
     daitya utkaca-näma-bhäk
aho kåñëa-päda-sparçäd
     gato mokñaà mahä-mune

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; kaù—who?; ayam—he; pürvam—before; tu—indeed; kuçalé—fortunate; daityaù—demon; utkaca-näma-bhäk—named Utkaca; ahaù—oh; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; päda—of the foot; sparçät—from the touch; gata—attained; mokñam—liberation; mahä—great; mune—O sage.

     O great sage, in his previous birth who was this fortunate demon named Utakaca, who attained liberation by the touch of Lord Kåñëa's foot?

Text 18

çré-närada uväca 
hiraëyäkña-suto daitya
     utkaco näma maithila
lomaçasyäçrame gacchan
     våkñäàç cürëé-cakära ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; hiranyäkña-sutaù—the son of Hiranyäkña; daityaù—the demon; utkaco näma—named Utkaca; maithila—O king of Mithilä; lomaçasya—of Lomaça Muni; äçrame—in the hermitage; gacchan—going; våkñän—trees; cürëé-cakära ha—broke.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, one day the demon named Utkaca, who was Hiraëyäkña's son, went to Lomaça Muni's hermitage and broke some trees.

Text 19

taà dåñövä sthüla-dehäòhyaà
     utkacäkhyaà mahä-bälam
çaçäpa roña-yug vipro
     videho bhava durmate

     tam—him; dåñövä—seeing; sthüla—big; deha—body; äòhyam—opulent; utkaca-äkhyam—named Utkaca; mahä-bälam—very powerful; çaçäpa—cursed; roña-yuk—angry; vipraù—brähmaëa; videhaù—without a body; bhava—become; durmate—O evil-hearted one.

     Seeing the powerful giant named Utkaca, the brähmaëa became angry and cursed him, "O evil-hearted one, become bodyless!"

Text 20

sarpa-kaïcukavad-deho
     'patat karma-vipäkataù
sadyas tac-caraëopante
     patitvä präha daitya-räö

     sarpa—a snake; kaïcukavat—like the skin; dehaù—body; apatat—fell; karma—of deeds; vipäkataù—by the fruition; sadyaù—at once; tat—of him; caraëa-upante—at the feet; patitvä—falling; präha—said; daitya-räö—the king of demons.

     From this deed his body at once fell away as a snake's old skin also falls away. The king of demons then fell at the brähmaëa's feet and spoke.

Text 21

utkaca uväca 
he mune he kåpä-sindho
     kåpäà kuru mamopari
te prabhävaà na jänämi
     dehaà me dehi he prabho

     utkacaù uväca—Utkaca said; he—O; mune—sage; he—O; kåpä—of mercy; sindhaù—ocean; kåpäm—mercy; kuru—do; mama upari—to me; te—your; prabhävam—power; na—not; jänämi—I know; deham—a body; me—to me; dehi—please give; he—O; prabhaù—lord.

     Utcaka said: O sage, O ocean of mercy, please be kind to me. I did not know your power. O lord, please give me a body.

Text 22

çré-närada uväca 
tadä prasannaù sa munir
     dåñöaà naya-çataà vidheù
satäà roño 'pi varado
     varo mokñärtha-daù kim u

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; prasannaù—pleased; saù—that; muniù—sage; dåñöam—seen; naya—morals; çatam—a hundred; vidheù—from Brahmä; satäm—of saintly persons; roñaù—anger; api—even; vara—blessing; daù—giving; varaù—blessing; mokña-artha-daù—giving liberation; kim u—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: Then the sage, who had studied a hundred lessons in morality from the demigod Brahmä, became pleased. The anger of saintly persons brings a blessing. How great is that blessing, which brings liberation?

Text 23

çré-lomaça uväca 
väta-dehas tu te bhüyäd
     vyatéte cakñuñäntare
vaivasvatäntare muktir
     bhavitä ca padä hareù

     çré-lomaçaù uväca—Çré Lomaça said; väta—of air; dehaù—a body; tu—indeed; te—of you; bhüyät—may be; vyatéte—passed; cakñuñäntare—the cakñuña-manvantara; vaivasvatäntare—in the vaivasvata-manvantara; muktiù—liberation; bhavitä—will be; ca—also; padä—by the foot; hareù—of Lord Hari.

     Çré Lomaça said: You may have a body made of air. When the cakñuñ-manvantara is over and the vaivasvata-manvantra has come, Lord Hari's foot will give you liberation.

Text 24

çré-närada uväca 
tasmäd utkaca-daityas tu
     mukto lomaça-tejasä
sadbhyo namo 'stu ye nünaà
     samarthä vara-çäpayoù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tasmät—from that; utkaca-daityaù—the demon Utkaca; tu—indeed; muktaù—liberated; lomaça-tejasä—by the power of Lomaça; sadbhyaù—to the saintly devotees; namaù—obeisances; astu—should be; ye—who; nünam—indeed; samarthäù—are able; vara—to bless; çäpayoù—or curse.

     Çré Närada said: In this way the power of Lomaça Muni gave liberation to the demon Utkaca. I offer my respectful obeisances to the saintly devotees of the Lord, who have the power both to bless and to curse.

Text 25

utsaìge kréòitaà bälaà
     lälayanty ekadä nåpa
giri-bhäraà na sehe sä
     voòhuà çré-nanda-gehiné

     utsaìge—on the lap; kréòitam—playing; bälam—infant; lälayanté—fondling; ekadä—once; nåpa—O king; giri—of a mountain; bhäram—the weight; na—not; sehe—was able; sä—she; voòhum—to carry; çré-nanda-gehiné—Nanda's wife.

     O king, one day, as He played on her lap and she fondled Him, Nanda's wife could not longer hold her infant boy, for he had become as heavy as a mountain.

Text 26

aho giri-samo bälaù
     kathaà syäd iti vismitä
bhümau nidhäya taà sadyo
     nedaà kasmai jagäda ha

     ahaù—Oh; giri—to a mountain; samaù—equal; bälaù—infant; katham—how?; syät—may be; iti—thus; vismitä—astonished; bhümau—on the ground; nidhäya—placing; tam—Him; sadyaù—at once; na—not; idam—this; kasmai—for what reason?; jagäda ha—said.

     She was astonished, "How has my infant boy become heavy as a mountain?" She placed Him on the ground at once.  How has this happened?" she said.

Text 27

kaàsa-praëodito daityas
     tåëävarto mahä-bälaù
jahära bälaà kréòantaà
     väta-vartena sundaram

     kaàsa-praëoditaù—sent by Kaàsa; daityaù—demon; tåëävartaù—Tåëävarto; mahä-bälaù—very powerful; jahära—took; bälam—the infant boy; kréòantam—playing; väta-vartena—with a whirlwind; sundaram—handsome.

     The powerful demon Tåëävarta, who had been sent by Kaàsa, with a circling whirlwind grabbed the handsome, playing infant boy.

Text 28

rajo-'ndha-käro 'bhüt tatra
     ghora-çabdaç ca gokule
rajasvaläni cakñüàñi
     babhüvur ghaöikä-dvayam

     rajaù—of dust; andha-käraù—a blinding darkness; abhüt—was; tatra—there; ghora—terrible; çabdaù—sound; ca—also; gokule—in Gokula; rajasvaläni—filled with dust; cakñüàñi—eyes; babhüvuù—became; ghaöikä-dvayam—for an hour.

     In Gokula there was blinding darkness and a terrible roar. For an hour the dust stopped everyone's vision.

Text 29

tato yaçodä näpaçyat
     putraà taà mandiräjire
mohitä rudaté ghoñän
     paçyanté gåha-çekharän

     tataù—then; yaçodä—Yaçodä; na—not; äpaçyat—saw; putram—son; tam—Him; mandira—of the house; ajire—in the courtyard; mohitä—bewildered; rudaté—crying; ghoñän—of Vraja; paçyanté—looking; gåha—of the houses; çekharän—at the tops.

     Yaçodä did not see her son in the courtyard. Bewildered and crying, she gazed at the roofs of the houses in Vraja. 
Text 30

adåñöe ca yadä putre
     patitä bhuvi mürchitä
uccai ruroda karuëaà
     måta-vatsä yathä� hi gauù

     adåñöe—not seen; ca—also; yadä—when; putre—her son; patitä—fallen; bhuvi—on the ground; mürchitä—fainted; uccaiù—loudly; ruroda—cried; karuëaàpitifully; måta—died; vatsä—whose calf; yathä—as; hi—indeed; gauù—a cow.

     When she did not see her son, she fell to the ground unconscious. She loudly and pitifully wept, like a cow whose calf has died.

Text 31

ruruduç ca tadä gopyaù
     prema-sneha-samäkuläù
açru-mukhyo nanda-sünuà
     paçyantyas tä itas tataù

     ruruduù—wept; ca—also; tadä—then; gopyaù—the gopés; prema-sneha-samäkuläù—filled with love; açru—tears; mukhyaù—faces; nanda-sünum—the son of Nanda; paçyantyaù—looking; täù—they; itas tataù—here and there.

     Filled with love, and their faces covered with tears, the gopés also wept as here and there they searched for Nanda's son.

Text 32

tåëävarto nabhaù präpta
     ürdhvaà vai lakña-yojanam
skandhe sumeruvad bälaà
     manyamänaù prapéòitaù

     tåëävartaù—Tåëävarta; nabhaù—the sky; präptaù—attained; ürdhvam—high; vai—indeed; lakña-yojanam—eight hundred thousand miles; skandhe—on his shoulder; sumeruvat—like Mount Sumeru; bälam—the infant; manyamänaù—considering; prapéòitaù—tormented.

     Going eight hundred thousand miles into outer space, Tåëävarta was troubled, thinking the infant on his shoulder was as heavy as Mount Sumeru.

Text 33

atha kåñëaà patayituà
     daityas tatra samudyataù
galaà jagräha tasyäpi
     paripürëatamaù svayam

     atha—then; kåñëam—Kåñëa; patayitum—to drop; daityaù—the demon; tatra—there; samudyataù—was eager; galam—the neck; jagräha—grasped; tasya—of him; api—also; paripürëatamaù svayam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     The demon wanted to drop Kåñëa right there, but the tiny Supreme Personality of Godhead steadfastly held his neck.

Text 34

muïca muïceti gadite
     daitye kåñëo 'dbhuto 'rbhakaù
gala-gräheëa mahatä
     vyasuà daityaà cakära ha

     muïca—let go!; muïca—let go!; iti—thus; gaditeù—poken; daitye—the demon; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; adbhutaù—astonishing; arbhakaù—infant; gala—neck; gräheëa—by pulling; mahatä—great; vyasum—dead; daityam—the demon; cakära ha—made.

     When the demon cried "Let go! Let go!" the wonderful infant Kåñëa strangled and killed him.

Text 35

taj-jyotiù çré-ghana—çyäme
     lénaà saudäminé yathä
daityo 'mbarän nipätitaù
     çiläyäà çiçunä saha

     tat—of Him; jyotiù—the effulgence; çré-ghana—çyäme—dark as a monsoon cloud; lénam—entered; saudäminé—lighting; yathä—as; daityaù—the demon; ambarät—from the sky; nipätitaù—fell; çiläyäm—on a boulder; çiçunä—the infant; saha—with.

     Then the demon merged in Lord Kåñëa's effulgence as lightning merges in a dark monsoon cloud. Then the demon and the infant fell from the sky onto a boulder.

Text 36

viçérëa-vayavasyäpi
     patitasya svanena vai
vineduç ca diçaù sarväù
     kampitaà bhümi-maëòalam

     viçérëa—broken; avayavasya—of the body; api—also; patitasya—fallen; svanena—by the sound; vai—certainly; vineduù—resounded; ca—also; diçaù—the directions; sarväù—all; kampitam—trembled; bhümi-maëòalam—the earth.

     The sound of the fallen body breaking into pieces filled all the directions and make the earth tremble.

Text 37

tat-påñöha-sthaà çiçuà tuñëéà
     rudantyo gopikäs tataù
dadåçur yugapat sarvä
     nétvä mätre dadur jaguù

     tat-påñöha-stham—on the back; çiçum—the infant; tuñëém—silent; rudantyaù—wailing; gopikäù—gopé; tataù—then; dadåçuù—saw; yugapat—at once; sarväù—all; nétvä—bringing; mätre—to His mother; daduù—gave; jaguù—spoke.

     The weeping gopés saw the infant sitting silently on the demon's back. They quickly brought Him to His mother, gave Him to her, and then spoke.

Text 38

çré-gopya ücuù 
na yogyäsi yaçode tvaà
     bälaà lälayituà manäk
na ghåëä te kvacid dåñöä
     kruddhäsi kathitena vai

     çré-gopyaù ücuù—the gopés said; na—not; yogyä—suitable; asi—you are; yaçode—O Yaçodä; tvam—you; bälam—infant; lälayitum—to love; manäk—at all; na—not; ghåëä—kindness; te—of you; kvacit—at all; dåñöä—seen; kruddhä—cruel; asi—you are; kathitenaby the words; vai—indeed.

     The gopés said: Yaçodä, you have no right to embrace this child. You have no kindness. Your own words show how cruel you are.

Text 39

präpte 'ndhakare svärohät
     ko 'pi bälaà jahäti hi
tvayä nirghåëayä bhümau
     dhåto bälo mahä-bhaye

     präpte—attained; andhakare—blinding darkness; sva—own; ärohät—from the lap; kaù—who?; api—indeed; bälam—an infant; jahäti—puts down; hi—indeed; tvayä—by you; nirghåëayä—merciless; bhümau—on the ground; dhåtaù—placed; bälaù—infant; mahä—great; bhaye—in fear.

     In that blinding darkness who took an infant from their lap and abandoned it? You were so merciless that in that terrifying moment you placed your own infant boy on the ground.

Text 40

çré-yaçodoväca 
na jänämi kathaà bälo
     bhära-bhüto giréndra-vat
tasmän mayä kåto bhümau
     cakraväte mahä-bhaye

     çré-yaçodä uväca—Çré Yaçodä said; na—not; jänämi—I know; katham—how?; bälaù—infant; bhära-bhütaù—become very heavy; giri-indra-vat—as the king of mountains; tasmät—because of that; mayä—by me; kåtaù—done; bhümau—on the ground; cakraväte—in the whirlwind; mahä-bhaye—terrifying.

     Çré Yaçodä said: How did my child become as heavy as the king of mountains? I don't know. That is why during the terrible whirlwind I placed Him on the ground.

Text 41

çré-gopya ücuù 
mä måñä vada kalyäëi
     he yaçode gata-vyathe
ayaà dugdha-mukho bälo
     laghu kusuma-tüla-vat

     çré-gopyaù ücuù—the gopés said; mä—don't; måñä—lies; vada—tell; kalyäëi—O beautiful one; he—O; yaçode—Yaçodä; gata—gone; vyathe—anxiety; ayam—He; dugdha—milk; mukhaù—in His mouth; bälaù—infant; laghu—light; kusuma-tüla-vat—as a flower.

     The gopés said: O beautiful one, don't lie! O Yaçodä now free from all trouble, this infant, the milk still in His mouth, is as light as a flower!

Text 42

çré-närada uväca 
tadä gopyo 'tha gopäç ca
     nandädyä ägate çiçau
atéva-modaà sampräpur
     vadantaù kuçalaà janaiù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; gopyaù—the gopés; atha—then; gopäù—the gopas; ca—and; nanda-ädyäù—headed by Nanda; ägate—came; çiçau—child; atéva-modam—great happiness; sampräpuù—attained; vadantaù—speaking; kuçalam—auspicious words; janaiù—by the people.

     Çré Närada said: When infant Kåñëa was returned the gopés and gopas headed by Nanda became very happy and happily spoke among themselves.

Text 43

yaçodä bälakaà nétvä
     päyayitvä stanaà muhuù
äghräyorasi vastreëa
     rohiëéà präha mohitä

     yaçodä—Yaçodä; bälakam—the infant; nétvä—bringing; päyayitvä—made drink; stanam—breast; muhuù—again and again; äghräya—smelling; urasi—on the chest; vastreëa—with garments; rohiëém—to Rohiëé; präha—said; mohitä—bewildered.

     Yaçodä took the infant, made Him again and again drink from her breast, smelled His head, and dressed Him in nice clothes. Then, bewildered, she spoke to Rohiëé.

Text 44

çré-yaçodoväca 
eko daivena datto 'yaà
     na puträ bahavaç ca me
tasyäpi bahavo 'åñöä
     ägacchanti kñaëena vai

     çré-yaçodä uväca—Çré Yaçodä said; ekaù—one; daivena—by fate; dattaù—given; ayam—Him; na—not; puträù—sons; bahavaù—many; ca—aslo; me—of me; tasya—of Him; api—also; bahavaù—many; aåñöäù—dangers; ägacchanti—come; kñaëena—at every moment; vai—certainly.

     Çré Yaçodä said: Fate has given me only one son. I do not have many sons. But to that one son many dangers come at every moment.

Text 45

adya måtyu-mukhän mukto
     bhaviñyat kim ataù paraà
kià karomi kva gacchämi
     kutra väso bhaved ataù

     adya—today; måtyu—of death; mukhän—from the mouth; muktaù—freed; bhaviñyat—would be; kim—what?; ataù param—then; kim—what?; karomi—I do; kva—where?; gacchämi—I go; kutra—where?; väsaù—residence; bhavet—would be; ataù—then.

     Today He escaped from death's mouth. If He had died what would have happened? What would I do? Where would I go? Where would I live then?

Text 46

vajra-säräç ca ye daityä
     nirdayä ghora-darçanäù
vairaà kurvanti me bäle
     daiva daiva kutaù sukham

     vajra—as a thunderbolt; säräù—strong; ca—aslo; ye—which; daityäù—demons; nirdayäù—merciless; ghora—terrible; darçanäù—to see; vairam—hatred; kurvanti—do; me—to my; bäle—son; daiva—O fate; daiva—O fate; kutaù—where?; sukham—happiness.

     Many demons who are strong as thunderbolts and terrible to see hate my son. O fate, fate, how will we be happy?

Text 47

dhanaà deho gåhaà saudho
     ratnäni vividhäni ca
sarveñäà tu hy avaçyaà vai
     bhüyän me kuçalé çiçuù

     dhanam—wealth; dehaù—body; gåham—home; saudhaù—a palace; ratnäni—jewels; vividhäni—various; ca—and; sarveñäm—of all; tu—certainly; hi—indeed; avaçyam—inevitably; vai—indeed; bhüyät—may become; me—of me; kuçalé—happy; çiçuù—child.

     My wealth, body, palace, and many jewels are all only so my son will be happy.

Text 48

harer arcäà dänam iñöaà
     pürtaà devälayaà çatam
kariñyämi tadä bälo
     'riñöebhyo vijayé yadä

     hareù—of Lord Hari; arcäm—worship; dänam—charity; iñöam pürtam—public welfare activities; devälayam—temples; çatam—a hundred; kariñyämi—I will do; tadä—then; bälaù—boy; ariñöebhyaù—over dangers; vijayé—conquering; yadä—when.

     I will worship Lord Hari, give charity, do great public welfare works, and build a hundred temples. Then my boy will be victorious over all dangers.

Text 49

eka-bälena me saukhyam
     andha-yañöir iva priye
bälaà nétvä gamiñyämi
     deçe rohiëé nirbhaye

     eka—with one; bälena—child; me—of me; saukhyam—of happiness; andha—a blind; yañöiù—stick; iva—as if; priye—O dear one; bälam—boy; nétvä—bringing; gamiñyämi—I will go; deçe—in the country; rohiëi—O Rohiëé; nirbhaye—without fear.

     My son will make me happy. I will become like a blind stick immobile with bliss. O dear Rohiëé, I will take my son and go to the kingdom of fearlessness.

Text 50

çré-närada uväca 
tadaiva viprä vidväàsa
     ägatä nanda-mandiram
yaçodayä ca nandena
     püjitä äsana-sthitäù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; eva—certainly; vipräù—the brähmaëas; vidväàsaù—wise; ägatäù—came; nanda-mandiram—to Nanda's palace; yaçodayä—with Yaçodä; ca—and; nandena—with Nanda; püjitä—worshiped; äsana—on a seat; sthitäù—situated.

     Çré Närada said: Then many learned brähmaëas came to Nanda's palace. Nanda and Yaçodä worshiped them and gave them seats.

Text 51

çré-brähmaëä ücuù 
mä çocaà kuru he nanda
     he yaçode vrajeçvari
kariñyämaù çiço rakñäà
     ciraï-jévé bhaved ayam

     çré-brähmaëäù ücuù—the brähmaëas said; mä—don't; çocam—lamentation; kuru—do; he—O; nanda—Nanda; he—O; yaçode—Yaçodä; vrajeçvari—O queen of Vraja; kariñyämaù—we will do; çiçoù—of the boy; rakñäm—protection; cirat—a long time; jévé—living; bhavet—will be; ayam—He.

     The brähmaëas said: O Nanda, O Yaçodä queen of Vraja, don't lament. We will protect your son. He will live for a long time.

Texts 52 and 53

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvä dvija-mukhyäs te
     kuçägrair nava-pallavaiù
pavitra-kuçalais toyair
     åg-yajuù-säma-jaiù stavaiù

paraiù svasty-ayanair yajïaà
     kärayitvä vidhänataù
agnià sampüjya vidhi-vad
     rakñäà vidadhire çiçoù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; uktvä—saying; dvija-mukhyäù—the great brähmaëas; te—they; kuça-agraiù—with tips of kuça grass; nava-pallavaiù—and new twigs; pavitra—pure; kuçalaiù—auspicious; toyaiù—with water; åg-yajuù-säma-jaiù—from the Åg, Säma, and Yajur Vedas; stavaiù—with prayers; paraiù—transcendental; svasty-ayanaiù—with blessings; yajïam—sacrifice; kärayitvä—performing; vidhänataù—according to proper procedure; agnim—fire; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhi-vat—properly; rakñäm—protection; vidadhire—did; çiçoù—of the child.

     After saying this, the great brähmaëas, with new twigs, kuça grass, pure sacred water, prayers from the Åg, Säma, and Yajur Vedas, and many auspicious blessings, properly performed a yajïa and properly worshiped the sacred fire. In this way they established the protection of child Kåñëa. 
Text 54

çré-brähmaëä ücuù 
dämodaraù pätu pädau
     jänüni vistara-çraväù
ürü pätu harir näbhià
     paripürëatamaù svayam

     çré-brähmaëäù ücuù—the brähmaëas said; dämodaraù—Lord Dämodara; pätu—may protect; pädau—feet; jänüni—knees; vistara-çraväù—Lord Vistara-çraväù; ürü—thighs; pätu—may protect; hariù—Lord Hari; näbhim—navel; paripürëatamaù svayam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     The brähmaëas said: May Lord Dämodara protect Your feet. May Lord Vistaraçravä protect Your knees. May Lord Hari protect Your thighs. May the Supreme Personality of Godhead protect Your navel.

Text 55

kaöià rädhä-patiù pätu
     péta-väsas tavodaram
hådayaà padma-näbhaç ca
     bhujau govardhanoddharaù

     kaöim—hips; rädhä-patiù—the Lord of Rädhä; pätu—may protect; péta-väsaù—who wears yellow garments; tava—Your; udaram—abdomen; hådayam—chest; padma-näbhaù—the Lord whose navel is a lotus; ca—and; bhujau—arms; govardhana-uddharaù—the lifter of Govardhana Hill.

     May the Lord of Rädhä protect Your hips. May the Lord who wears yellow garments protect Your abdomen. May the Lord whose navel is a lotus flower protect Your chest. May the Lord who lifted Govardhana Hill protect Your arms.

Text 56

mukhaà ca mathurä-nätho
     dvärakeçaù çiro 'vatu
påñöhaà pätv asura-dhvaàsé
     sarvato bhagavän svayam

     mukham—face; ca—and; mathurä-näthaù—the Lord of Mathurä; dvärakeçaù—the Lord of Dvärakä; çiraù—head; avatu—may protect; påñöham—back; pätu—may protect; asura-dhvaàsé—the killer of the demons; sarvataù—completely; bhagavän svayam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     May the Lord of Mathurä protect Your face. May the Lord of Dvärakä protect Your head. May the Lord who kills the demons protect Your back. May the Supreme Personality of Godhead give You all protection.

Text 57

çloka-trayam idaà stotraà
     yaù paöhen mänavaù sadä
mahä-saukhyaà bhavet tasya
     na bhayaà vidyate kvacit

     çloka-trayam—three verses; idam—this; stotram—prayer; yaù—one who; paöhet-recites; mänavaù—a human being; sadä—regularly; mahä-saukhyam—great happiness; bhavet—will be; tasya—of him; na—not; bhayam—fear; vidyate—is; kvacit—at any time.

     A human being who regularly recites this prayer of three verses will always be very happy. He will never fear.

Text 58

çré-närada uväca 
nandas tebhyo gaväà lakñaà
     suvarëaà daça-lakñakam
sahasraà nava-ratnänäà
     vastra-lakñaà dadau param

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; nandaù—Nanda; tebhyaù—to them; gaväm—of cows; lakñam—a hundred thousand; suvarëam—gold; daça-lakñakam—a million; sahasram—a thousand; nava—new; ratnänäm—jewels; vastra—of garments; lakñam—a hundred thousand; dadau—gave; param—then.

     Çré Närada said: To them Nanda gave a hundred thousand cows, a million gold coins, a thousand new jewels, and a hundred thousand opulent garments.

Text 59

gateñu dvija-mukhyeñu
     nando gopän niyamya ca
bhojayäm äsa sampüjya
     vastrair bhüñair manoharaiù

     gateñu—were gone; dvija-mukhyeñu—when the great brähmaëas; nandaù—Nanda; gopän—the gopas; niyamya—attaining; ca—also; bhojayäm äsa—fed; sampüjya—worshiping; vastraiù—with garments; bhüñaiù—with ornaments; manoharaiù—beautiful.

     When the great brähmaëas had gone, Nanda invited the gopas, fed them sumptuously, honored them, and gave them many beautiful garments and ornaments.

Text 60

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
tåëävartaù pürva-käle
     ko 'yaà sukåta-kån naraù
paripürëatame säkñäc
     chré-kåñëe lénatäà gataù

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; tåëävartaù—Tåëävarta; pürva-käle—in his previous time; kaù—who?; ayam—he; sukåta-kåt—performer of pious deeds; naraù—person; paripürëatame säkñät—in the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëe—Çré Kåñëa; lénatäm—merging; gataù—attained.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: What pious deeds did Tåëävarta perform in his previous birth that he merged into Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead?

Text 61

çré-närada uväca 
päëòu-deçodbhavo räjä
     sahasräkñaù pratäpavän
hari-bhakto dharma-niñöho
     yajïa-kåd däna-tat-paraù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; päëòu-deça—in the country of Päëòu; udbhavaù—born; räjä—king; sahasräkñaù—Sahasräkña—eyes; pratäpavän—powerful; hari—of Lord Hari; bhaktaù—a devotee; dharma-niñöhaù—a follower of religion; yajïa-kåt—performer of sacrifices; däna-tat-paraù—devoted to giving charity.

     Çré Närada said: He was Sahasräkña, a powerful king of Päëòu-deça. He was a devotee of Lord Hari, a follower of religion, a performer of yajïas, and a giver of charity.

Text 62

revä-taöe mahä-divye
     latä-vetra-samäkule
näréëäà ca sahasreëa
     ramamäëo cakära ha

     revä—of the Revä; taöe—on the bank; mahä-divye—very splendid; latä-vetra-samäkule—filled with vines; näréëäm—of women; ca—also; sahasreëa—with a thousand; ramamäëaù—enjoying; cakära ha—did.

     On the shore of the Revä, in a very splendid place filled with flowering vines, he enjoyed pastimes with a thousand beautiful women.

Text 63

durväsasaà munià säkñäd
     ägataà na nanäma ha
tadä munir dadau çäpaà
     räkñaso bhava durmate

     durväsasam munim—Durväsä Muni; säkñät—directly; ägatam—arrived; na—not; nanäma ha—offered obeisances; tadä—then; muniù—the sage; dadau—gave; çäpam—a curse; räkñasaù—a demon; bhava—become; durmate—O evil-hearted one.

     When Durväsä Muni came there the king did not bow down to offer respects to him. Then the sage cursed him, "O evil-hearted one, become a demon!" 
Text 64

punas tad-aìghryoù patitaà
     nåpaà prädäd varaà muniù
çré-kåñëa-vigraha-sparçän
     muktis te bhavitä nåpa

     punaù—again; tat—of him; aìghryoù—at the feet; patitam—fallen; nåpam—to the king; prädät—gave; varam—a blessing; muniù—the sage; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; vigraha—of the body; sparçät—by the touch; muktiù—liberation; te—of you; bhavitä—will be; nåpa—O king.

     When the king fell at his feet, the sage gave a blessing, "O king, the touch of Çré Kåñëa's form will give you liberation."

Text 65

çré-närada uväca 
so 'pi durväsasaù çäpät
     tåëävarto 'bhavat bhuvi
çré-kåñëa-vigraha-sparçät
     paraà mokñam aväpa ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; saù—he; api—also; durväsasaù—of Durväsä; çäpät—from the curse; tåëävartaù—Tåëävarta; abhavat—became; bhuvi—on earth; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; vigraha—of the form; sparçät—by the touch; paraà mokñam—liberation; aväpa—attained; ha—certainly.

     Çré Närada said: Because of Durväsä's curse he became Tånävarta on the earth and by the touch of Çré Kåñëa's form he attained liberation.

Chapter Fifteen
Nanda-patnyä viçva-rüpa-darçanam
Revelation of the Universal Form to Nanda's Wife

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
preìkhe harià kanaka-ratna-maye çayänaà
     çyämaà çiçuà jana-mano-hara-manda-häsam
dåñöyärti-häri mañi-bindu-dharaà yaçodä
     sväìke cakära dhåta-kajjala-padma-netram

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; preìkhe—on the cradle; harim—Lord Hari; kanaka—of gold; ratna—and jewels; maye—made; çayänam—resting; çyämam—dark; çiçum—infant; jana—of the people; manaù—the hearts; hara—enchanting; manda—gentle;; häsam—smile; dåñöyä—by a glance; arti—sufferings; häri—removing; mañi—of mañi; bindu—a dot; dharam—wearing; yaçodä—Yaçodä; svaìke—on her lap; cakära—did; dhåta—held; kajjala—of black kajjala; padma—lotus; netram—eyes.

     Çré Närada said: Yaçodä took dark Lord Hari, whose gentle smile enchants the people's hearts, whose glance takes away their troubles, who was decorated with dots of mañi, whose lotus eyes were anointed with black kajjala, and who was resting in a cradle of gold and jewels, on her lap.

Text 2

padaà pibantam ati-caïcalam adbhutäìgaà
     vakrair vinéla-nava-komala-keça-bandhaiù
çréman-nåkeçari-nakha-sphurad-ardha-candraà
     taà lälayanty ati-ghåëä mudam äpa gopé

     padam—foot; pibantam—drinking; ati-ca 24calam—very restless; adbhuta—wonderful; aìgam—limbs; vakraiù—with curly; vinéla—black; nava—new; komala—soft; keça-bandhaiù—hair; çrémat—handsome; nåkeçari—lion's; nakha—nails; sphurat—glistening; ardha—half; candram—moon; tam—Him; lälayanté—fondling; ati-ghåëä—with kindness; mudam—happiness; äpa—attained; gopé—the gopé.

     Filled with tender motherly love, the gopé attained great happiness as she caressed the restless child now licking His foot, decorated with a glittering half-moon necklace of lion's nails, His limbs very wonderful, and handsome with curly new black hairs.

Text 3

bälasya péta-payaso nåpa jåmbhitasya
     tattväni cäsya vadane sakale 'viräjan
mätä surädhipa-mukhaiù prayutaà ca sarvaà
     dåñövä paraà bhayam aväpa nimélitakñé

     bälasya—of the infant; péta—drunk; payasaù—milk; nåpa—O king; jåmbhitasya—yawned; tattväni—the truths; ca—and; asya—of Him; vadane—in the mouth; sakale—all; aviräjan—manifested; mätä—the mother; surädhipa-mukhaiù—by the great leaders of the demigods; prayutam—joined; ca—also; sarvam—all; dåñövä—seeing; param—great; bhayam—fear; aväpa—attained; nimélita—closed; akñé—eyes.

     O king, when the child, finished with drinking milk, yawned, all the elements of the universe suddenly appeared in His mouth. Seeing the entire universe and all the demigods suddenly present in her son's mouth, mother Yaçodä, now closing her eyes, became very afraid.

Text 4

räjan parasya paripürëatamasya säkñät
     kåñëasya viçvam akhilaà kapaöena sä hi
nañöa-småtiù punar abhüt sva-sute ghåëärtä
     kià varëayämi sutapo bahu nanda-patnyäù

     räjan—O king; parasya paripürëatamasya säkñät kåñëasya—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa; viçvam—the universe; akhilam—the entire; kapaöena—as a trick; sä—she; hi—indeed; nañöa—destroyed; småtiù—memory; punaù—again; abhüt—became; sva-sute—for her son; ghåëä—with material kindness; ärtä—overwhelmed; kim—what?; varëayämi—I say; sutapaù—the great austerities; bahu—many; nanda-patnyäù—of Nanda's wife.

     O king, her memory of seeing the entire universe destroyed by the Supreme Lord Kåñëa's illusory potency, she became overpowered with maternal love for her son. How can I describe the many great austerities Nanda's wife must have performed?

Text 5

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
nando yaçodayä särdhaà
     kià cakära tapo mahat
yena çré-kåñëacandro 'pi
     putré-bhüto babhüva ha

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; nandaù—Nanda; yaçodayä—Yaçodä; särdham—with; kim—what?; cakära—did; tapaù—austerities; mahat—great; yena—by which; çré-kåñëacandraù—Lord Kåñëacandra; api—even; putré—son; bhüto babhüva ha—became.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: What great austerities did Nanda and Yaçodä do that Çré Kåñëacandra became their son?

Text 6

çré-närada uväca 
añöänäà vai vasünäà ca
     droëo mukhyo dharä-patiù
anapatyo viñëu-bhakto
     deva-räjyaà cakära ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; añöänäm—eight; vai—certainly; vasünäm—of the Vasus; ca—also; droëaù—Droëa; mukhyaù—the first; dharä-patiù—the husband of Dharä; anapatyaù—without children; viñëu-bhaktaù—devoted to Lord Viñëu; deva-räjyam—kingdom; cakära ha—did.

     Çré Närada said: Nanda, Dharä's husband, was the best of the eight Vasus. Childless, and a great devotee of Lord Viñëu, he ruled a kingdom in the realm of the demigods.

Text 7

ekadä putra-kaìkñé ca
     brahmaëä nodito nåpa
mandarädrià gatas taptuà
     dharayä bharyayä saha

     ekadä—one day; putra—a son; kaìkñé—desiring; ca—also; brahmaëä—by Brahmä; noditaù—sent; nåpa—O king; mandarädrim—to Mount Mandara; gataù—gone; taptum—to perform austerities; dharayä—Dharä; bharyayä—his wife; saha—with.

     He desired a child. Sent by the demigod Brahmä, he went with his wife Dharä to Mount Mandara to perform austerities.

Text 8

kanda-müla-phalähärau
     tataù parëäçanau tataù
jala-bhakñau tatas tau tu
     nirjalau nirjane sthitau

     kanda-müla—of roots; phala—and fruits; ähärau—eating; tataù—then; parëa—leaves; açanau—eating; tataù—then; jala—water; bhakñau—eating; tataù—then; tau—they; tu—certainly; nirjalau—without water; nirjane—in a secluded place; sthitau—stayed.

     First they ate only fruits and roots. Then they ate only leaves. Then they only drank water. Then, staying in a secluded place, they did not even drink water.

Text 9

arñäëäm arbude yäte
     tapas tat tapator dvayoù
brahma prasannas täv etya
     varaà brühéty uväca ha

     varñäëäm—of years; arbude—a hundred million; yäte—passed; tapaù—austerities; tat—that; tapatoù—performing; dvayoù—both; brahmä—Brahmä; prasannaù—pleased; tau—both; etya—going; varam—benediction; brühi—please ask; iti—thus; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     After they has spent a hundred million years performing these austerities, the demigod Brahmä, pleased with them, approached and said, "Ask a benediction".

Text 10

valmékän nirgato droëo
     dhärayä bharyayä saha
natvä vidhià ca sampüjya
     harñitaù„ präha taà prabhum

     valmékän—from an anthill; nirgataù—emerged; droëaù—Droëa; dhärayä—Dharä; bharyayä—his wife; saha—with; natvä—bowing down; vidhim—Brahmä; ca—and; sampüjya—worshiping; harñitaù—happy; präha—said; tam—to him; prabhum—master.

     Emerging from an anthill with his wife, Dharä, jubilant Droëa, bowing down and worshiping him, spoke to Lord Brahmä. 
Text 11

çré-droëa uväca 
paripürëatame kåñëe
     putré-bhüte janärdane
bhaktiù syäd ävayor brahman
     satataà prema-lakñaëä

     çré-droëaù uväca—Çré Droëa said; paripürëatame—to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kåñëe—Kåñëa; putré-bhüte—as a son; janärdane—the Lord who removes His devotees' sufferings; bhaktiù—devotion; syät—may be; ävayoù—of us; brahman—O Brahmä; satatam—eternally; prema—by love; lakñaëä—characterized.

     Çré Droëa said: O Brahmä, may Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, become our son, and may we both always have love and devotion for him, the Lord who removes the sufferings of His devotees.

Text 12

yayäïjasä tarantéha
     dustaraà bhava-sägaram
nänyaà paraà väïchitaà syäd
     ävayos tapator vidhe

     yayä—by whom; aïjasä—quickly; taranti—cross; iha—here; dustaram—difficult to cross; bhava—of repeated birth and death; sägaram—the ocean; na—not; anyam—another; param—superior; väïchitam—desired; syät—is; ävayoù—of us; tapatoù—performing austerities; vidhe—O Brahmä.

     Love and devotion for Him enables the living entities to cross the impassable ocean of repeated birth and death. O Brahmä, we two who are performing austerities desire nothing else.

Text 13

çré-brahmoväca 
yuväbhyäà yäcitaà yan me
     durghaöaà durlabhaà varam
tathäpi bhüyät sa-phalaà
     yuvayor anya-janmani

     çré-brahmä uväca—Çré Brahmä said; yuväbhyäm—by you two; yäcitam—requested; yat—what; me—for me; durghaöam—impossible; durlabham—difficult; varam—benediction; tathäpi—still; bhüyät—may become; sa-phalam—fruitful; yuvayoù—for you both; anya—in another; janmani—birth.

     Çré Brahamä said: Although I myself cannot attain the benediction you request, I grant that your desire will be fulfilled in another birth.

Text 14

çré-närada uväca 
droëo nando 'bhavad bhümau
     yaçodä sä dharä småtä
kåñëo brahma-vacaù kartuà
     präpto ghoñe pituù purät

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; droëaù—Droëa; nandaù—Nanda; abhavat—became; bhümau—on the earth; yaçodä—Yaçodä; sä—she; dharä—Dharä; småtä—remembered; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; brahma-vacaù—the words of Brahmä; kartum—to do; präptaù—attained; ghoñe—in Vraja; pituù—of the father; purät—from the city.

     Çré Närada said: Droëa was born as Nanda on the earth and Dharä was born as Yaçodä. To fulfill Brahmä's words, Lord Kåñëa went from His father's palace to the village of Vraja.

Text 15

sudhä-khaëòät paraà miñöaà
     çré-kåñëa-caritaà çubham
gandhamädana-çåìge vai
     näräyaëa-mukhäc chrutam

     sudhä-khaëòät—than nectar; param—more; miñöam—sweet; çré-kåñëa-caritam—Çré Kåñëa's pastimes; çubham—beautiful; gandhamädana-çåìge—on the summit of Mount Gandhamädana; vai—indeed; näräyaëa-mukhät—from the mouth of Lord Näräyaëa; çrutam—heard.

     On the summit of Mount Gandhamädana I heard these beautiful, sweeter than nectar pastimes of Lord Kåñëa from the mouth of Näräyaëa Åñi.

Text 16

kåpayä ca kåtärtho 'haà
     nara-näräyaëasya ca
mayä tubhyaà ca kathitaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     kåpayä—by mercy; ca—also; kåtärthaù—successful; aham—I; nara-näräyaëasya—of Lord Nara-Näräyaëa; ca—also; mayä—by me; tubhyam—to you; ca—and; kathitam—spoken; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—do you wish.

     By the mercy of Lord Nara-Näräyaëa I attained the goal of life. I have told you what They said. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 17

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
nanda-gehe hariù säkñäc
     chiçu-rüpaù sanätanaù
kià cakära balenäpi
     tan me brühi mahä-mune

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; nanda—of Nanda; gehe—in the home; hariù—Lord Hari; säkñät—directly; çiçu—of a child; rüpaù—the form; sanätanaù—eternal; kim—what?; cakära—did; balena—with Balaräma; api—also; tat—that; me—to me; brühi—tell; mahä-mune—O great sage.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: When He displayed His eternal form of a child in Nanda's home, what pastimes did Lord Hari enjoy with Balaräma. O great sage, please tell me this.

Text 18

çré-närada uväca 
ekadä çiñya-sahito
     gargäcäryo mahä-muniù
çauriëä noditaù säkñäd
     äyayau nanda-mandiram

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ekadä—one day; çiñya—disciples; sahitaù—with; gargäcäryaù—Garga Acärya; mahä-muniù—the great sage; çauriëä—by Vasudeva; noditaù—sent; säkñät—directly; äyayau—came; nanda-mandiram—to Nanda's palace.

     One day, sent by Vasudeva, the great saint Garga Muni came with his disciples to Nanda's palace.

Text 19

nandaù sampüjya vidhivat
     pädyädyair muni-sattamam
tataù pradakñiëé-kåtya
     säñöäìgaà praëanäma ha

     nandaù—Nanda; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhivat—according to the rules of tradition; pädya-ädyaiù—beginning with offering water to wash the feet; muni-sattamam—the great sage; tataù—then; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; säñöäìgaà praëanäma ha—offered daëòavat obeisances.

     Following the rules of tradition, Nanda worshiped the great sage, washing his feet and offering him many things. Then he circumambulated him and offered obeisances, falling down like a stick.

Text 20

çré-nanda uväca 
adya naù pitaro deväù
     santuñöä agnayaç ca naù
pavitraà mandiraà jätaà
     yuñmac-caraëa-reëubhiù

     çré-nandaù uväca—Çré Närada said; adya—today; naù—with us; pitaraù—the Pitäs; deväù—the demigods; santuñöäù—pleased; agnayaù—the fire-gods; ca—also; naù—our; pavitram—purified; mandiram—house; jätam—born; yuñmat—of you; caraëa—of the feet; reëubhiù—by the dust.

     Çré Nanda said: Today the pious forefathers, demigods, and fire-gods are all pleased with us. Our home is now purified by the dust of your feet.

Text 21

mat-putra-näma-karaëaà
     kuru dvija mahä-mune
puëyais térthaiç ca duñpräpyaà
     bhavad-ägamanaà prabho

     mat—my; putra—son's; näma-karaëam—name-giving ceremony; kuru—please perform; dvija—O brähmaëa; mahä-mune—O great sage; puëyaiù—sacred; térthaiù—by pilgrimages; ca—also; duñpräpyam—difficult to attain; bhavat—of you; ägamanam—the arrival; prabhaù—O lord.

     O great brähmaëa sage, please perform my son's name-giving ceremony. O lord, even by many sacred pilgrimages one cannot attain what is attained by your visit.

Text 22

çré-garga uväca 
te putra-näma-karaëaà
     kariñyämi na saàçayaù
pürva-värtäà gadiñyämi
     gaccha nanda rahaù-sthalam

     çré-gargaù uväca—Çré Garga said; te—your; putra—son's; näma-karaëam—name-giving ceremony; kariñyämi—I will perform; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; pürva—previous; värtäm—story; gadiñyämi—I will tell; gaccha—go; nanda—O Nanda; rahaù-sthalam—to a secluded place.

     Çré Garga Muni said: I will perform your son's name-giving ceremony. Of this there is no doubt. I will tell who He was before. O Nanda, go to a secluded place.

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
utthäya gargo nandena
     bäläbhyäà ca yaçodayä
ekänte go-vraje gatvä
     tayor näma cakära ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; utthäya—rising; gargaù—Garga; nandena—with Nanda; bäläbhyäm—with the two boys; ca—and; yaçodayä—with Yaçodä; ekänte—to a secluded place; go-vraje—in the barn; gatvä—going; tayoù—of Them; näma—the name; cakära ha—did.

     Garga Muni rose and went with Nanda, Yaçodä, and the two boys, to a secluded place in the cow shed. There he performed the name-giving ceremony.

Text 24

sampüjya gaëanäthädén
     grahan saàçodhya yatnataù
nandaà präha prasannäìgo
     gargäcäryo mahä-muniù

     sampüjya—worshiping; gaëanätha-ädén—beginning with Gaëeça; grahän—the planets; saàçodhya—appeasing; yatnataù—carefully; nandam—to Nanda; präha—said; prasanna—pleased; aìgaù—in every limb; gargäcäryaù—Garga Muni; mahä-muniù—the great sage.

     After worshiping the deities headed by Gaëeça, and after carefully appeasing the deities of the planets, the great saint Garga Muni, happy in every limb, spoke to Nanda.

Texts 25 and 26

çré-garga uväca

rohiëé-nandanasyäsya
     nämoccaraà çåëuñva ca
ramante yogino hy asmin
     sarvatra ramatéti vä

gunaiç ca rämayan bhaktäàs
     tena rämaà viduù pare
garbha-saìkarñaëäd asya
     saìkarñaëa iti småtaù

     çré-gargaù uväca—Çré Garga said; rohiëé-nandanasyäsya—Rohiëé's son; näma—name; uccaram—declaration; çåëuñva—please hear; ca—also; ramante—are delighted; yoginaù—the yogés; hi—indeed; asmin—with Him; sarvatra—in all respects; ramati—enjoys; iti—thus; vä—or; gunaiù—with His transcendental qualities; ca—also; rämayan—delighting; bhaktän—the devotees; tena—by this; rämam—Räma; viduù—know; pare—others; garbha—from the womb; saìkarñaëät—because of being pulled; asya—of Him; saìkarñaëa—Saìkarñaëa; iti—thus; småtaù—remembered.

     Çré Garga Muni said: Please hear the explanation of Rohiëé's son's name. The yogés find their happiness (ramante) in Him, or he is the greatest enjoyer (ramati), or with His transcendental qualities He delights (rämayati) the devotees. For these reasons the sages know Him as Räma. Because He was pulled (saìkarñaëa) from the womb He is also known as Saìkarñaëa.

Text 27

sarvävaseñädyaà çeñaà
     balädhikyäd balaà viduù
sva-putrasyäpi nämäni
     çåëu nanda hy atandritaù

     sarva—everything; avaseña—remaining; ädyam—beginning; çeñam—Çeña; bala-ädhikyät—because of great strength; balam—Bala; viduù—know; sva-putrasya—of your own son; api—also; nämäni—the names; çåëu—please hear; nanda—O Nanda; hi—indeed; atandritaù—without being fatigued.

     Because when the universe is annihilated He alone remains (avaçeña), the sages know Him as Çeña. Because He is extremely strong (bala), they know Him as Bala. O Nanda, please be attentive and hear the names of your son.

Text 28

sadyaù präëi-paviträëi
     jagatäà maìgaläni ca
ka-käraù kamalä-känta
     å-käro räma ity api

     sadyaù—at once; präëi—the living entities; paviträëi—purifying; jagatäm—of the universes; maìgaläni—the auspiciousness; ca—also; ka-käraù—the letter k; kamalä-käntaù—the lover of the goddess of fortune; å-käraù—the letter å; rämaù—the enjoyer; iti—thus; api—also;

     His names at once purify the living entities. His names are the auspiciousness of all the universes. In His name the letter K stands for Kamalä-känta (the husband of the goddess of fortune). Å stands for Räma (the supreme enjoyer).

Text 29

ña-käraù ñaò-guëa-patiù
     çvetadvépa-niväsa-kåt
ëa-käro närasiàho 'yam
     a-karo hy akñaro 'gni-bhuk

     ña-käraù—the letter ñ; ñaò-guëa-patiù—the master of six opulences; çvetadvépa-niväsa-kåt—who resides at Çvetadvépa; ëa-käraù—the letter ë; närasiàhaù—Lord Nrsiàha; ayam—this; a-karaù—the letter a; hi—indeed; akñaraù—the immortal; agni—through the fire; bhuk—eats.

     Ñ stands for Ñaò-guëa-pati (the master of six opulences) or Çvetadvépa-niväsa-kåt (The Lord who resides in Çvetadvépa). Ë stands for Lord Nåsiàha. A stands for Akñara (the immortal) or Agni-bhuk (the Lord who enjoys the offerings of agni-hotra yajïas).

Text 30

visargau ca tathä hy etau
     nara-näräyaëäv åñé
sampralénäç ca ñaö pürëä
     yasmin cchuddhe mahätmani

     visargau—the letter ù; ca—also; tathä—so; hi—indeed; etau—They; nara-näräyaëau—Nara-Näräyaëa Åñis; sampralénäù—entered; ca—also; ñaö—six; pürëäù—full; yasmin—in whom; çuddhe—pure; mahätmani—Supreme Person.

     The letter Ù stands for Nara-Näräyaëa Åñi. In this way these six letters combine to become the name of the pure Supreme Person.

     Note: In the Sanskrit alphabet the letter Ù is represented by two dots. An example follows in parenthesis (:). The two dots stand for the two sages Nara-Näräyaëa.

Text 31

paripürëatame säkñät
     tena kåñëaù prakértitaù
çuklo raktas tathä péto
     varëo 'syänu-yugaà dhåtaù

     paripürëatame—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; tena—by this; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; prakértitaù—is said; çuklaù—white; raktaù—red; tathä—so; pétaù—yellow; varëaù—color; asya—of Him; anu—following; yugam—the yugas; dhåtaù—held.

     In this way the Supreme Personality of Godhead is known as Kåñëaù. In white, red, and yellow forms He appears in the yugas one after another.

Text 32

dväparänte kaler ädau
     bälo 'yaà kåñëatäà gataù
tasmät kåñëa iti khyäto
     nämnäyaà nanda-nandanaù

     dväpara—of the Dväpara-yuga; ante—at the end; kaleù—of Kali-yuga; ädau—atb the beginning; bälaù—boy; ayam—He; kåñëatäm—a dark complexion; gataù—attained; tasmät—therefore; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; iti—thus; khyätaù—celebrated; nämnä—by name; ayam—He; nanda—of Nanda; nandanaù—the son.

     Now, at the end of Dväpara-yuga and the beginning of Kali-yuga, He has a dark (kåñëa) complexion. For this reason He is named Kåñëa. He is this boy, the son of Nanda.

Text 33

vasavaç cendriyäëéti
     tad devaç cittam eva hi
tasmin yas ceñöate so 'pi
     väsudeva iti småtaù

     vasavaù—vasu; ca—and; indriyäëi—the senses; iti—thus; tat devaù—deva; cittam—the heart; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; tasmin—in that; yaù—who; ceñöate—acts; saù—He;  api—also; väsudeva—Väsudeva; iti—thus; småtaù—remembered.

     The word "vasu" means "the senses", and the word "deva" means "the heart". Because He acts in the hearts and senses of the living entities, He is known as Väsudeva.

Text 34

våñabhänu-sutä rädhä
     yä jätä kérti-mandire
tasyäù patir ayaà säkñät
     tena rädhä-patiù småtaù

     våñabhänu—of King Våñabhänu; sutä—the daughter; rädhä—Çré Rädhä; yä—who; jätä—born; kérti—of Kérti; mandire—in the palace; tasyäù—of Her; patiù—the husband; ayam—He; säkñät—directly; tena—by that; rädhä-patiù—as Rädhä-pati; småtaù—remembered.

     He is the husband (pati) of Rädhä, King Våñabhänu's daughter born in the palace of Queen Kérti, and therefore He is known as Rädhä-pati.

Text 35

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaù bhagavän svayam
asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     goloke dhämni räjate

     paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Lord; svayam—Himself; asaìkhya—countless; brahmäëòa—of universes; patiù—the master; goloke dhämni—in the abode of Goloka; räjate—shines.

     He is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa, the master of countless universes. He is splendidly manifest in transcendental abode of Goloka.

Text 36

so 'yaà tava çiur jäto
     bhärävataraëäya ca
kaàsädénäà vadhärthäya
     bhaktänäà rakñaëäya ca

     saù ayam—this person; tava—your; çiuù—son; jätaù—born; bhära—burden; avataraëäya—for removing; ca—and; kaàsa-ädénäm—of the demons beginning with Kaàsa; vadha-arthäya—for killing; bhaktänäm—of the devotees; rakñaëäya—for protection; ca—also.

     That same Supreme Personality of Godhead is now born as your child. He has come to remove the earth's burden, to kill the demons headed by Kaàsa, and to protect the devotees.

Text 37

anantäny asya nämäni
     veda-guhyäni bhärata
léläbhiç ca bhaviñyanti
     tat-karmasu na vismayaù

     anantäni—endless; asya—of Him; nämäni—names; veda—to the Vedas; guhyäni—confidential; bhärata—O descendent of KIng Bharata; léläbhiù—with pastimes; ca—also; bhaviñyanti—will be; tat-karmasu—in His deeds; na—no; vismayaù—surprise.

     O descendent of King Bharata, according to His different pastimes Your son will have names without end, names that are secret even from the Vedas. Do not be surprised at what He is able to do.

Text 38

aho bhägyaà tu te nedaà
     säkñäc chri-puruñottamaù
tvad-gåhe vartamäno 'yaà
     çiu-rüpaù parät paraù

     ahaù—ah; bhägyam—good fortune; tu—certainly; te—of you; na—not; idam—this; säkñät—directly; çri-puruñottamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tvat—of you; gåhe—in the home; vartamänaù—being; ayam—He; çiu—of a child; rüpaù—in the form; parät paraù—greater than the greatest.

     Ah, how fortunate you are! Appearing as a small child, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is greater than the greatest, now stays in your home.    
Text 39

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvätha gate garge
     svätmänaà pürëam äçiñam
mene pramuditaù patnyä
     nanda-räjo mahä-matiù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; uktvä—saying; atha—then; gate—gone; garge—Garga; svätmänam—own; pürëam—perfect; äçiñam—benediction; mene—considered; pramuditaù—joyful; patnyä—with his wife; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; mahä-matiù—great hearted.

     Çré Närada said: Garga Muni said this and left. Then noble-hearted King Nanda, along with his wife, thought about the great blessing they had received.

Text 40

atha gargo jïäni-varo
     jïäna-do muni-sattamaù
kälindé-téra-çobhäòhyaà
     våñabhänu-puraà gataù

     atha—then; gargaù—Garga; jïäni-varaù—the best of philosophers; jïäna-daù—great teacher; muni-sattamaù—great sage; kälindé-téra—on the sdhore of the Yamunä; çobha-äòhyam—beautiful; våñabhänu-puram—to the palace of King Våñabhänu; gataù—went.

     Then the great philosopher, teacher, sage Garga Muni went to King Våñabhänu's beautiful palace on the Yamunä's shore.

Texts 41-45

chätreëa çobhitaà vipraà
     dvitéyam iva väsavam
daëòena räjitaà säkñäd
     dharma-räjam iva sthitam

tejasä dyotita-diçaà
     säkñät süryam iväparam
pustaké-mekhalä-yuktaà
     dvitéyam iva padmajam

çobhitaà çukla-väsobhir
     devaà viñëum iva sthitam
taà dåñövä muni-çardülaà
     sahasotthäya sädaram

praëamya çirasä sadyaù
     sammukho 'bhüt kåtäïjaliù
munià ca péöhake sthäpya
     pädyädyair upacära-vit

püjayäm äsa vidhivac
     chré-gargaà jïäninäà varam
tataù pradakñiëé-kåtya
     våñabhänu-varo mahän

     chätreëa—with a parasol; çobhitam—decorated; vipram—brähmaëa; dvitéyam—a second; iva—like; väsavam—Indra; daëòena—with a rod; räjitam—glorious; säkñät—directly; dharma-räjam—Yamaräja; iva—like; sthitam—situated; tejasä—with glory; dyotita—illuminated; diçam—the directions; säkñät—directly; süryam—the sun; iva—like; aparam—another; pustaké—a book; mekhalä—belt; yuktam—endowed;  dvitéyam—a second; iva—like; padmajam—Brahmä; çobhitam—decorated; çukla—white; väsobhiù—with garments; devam—Lord; viñëum—Viñëu; iva—like; sthitam—situated; tam—him; dåñövä—seeing; muni—of sages; çardülam—the tiger; sahasä—at once; utthäya—rising; sa—with; ädaram—respect; praëamya—offering obeisances; çirasä—with his head; sadyaù—at once; sammukhaù—facing; abhüt—became; kåtäïjaliù—with folded palms; munim—the sage; ca—also; péöhake—on a throne; sthäpya—seating; pädya-ädyaiù—beginning with water for washing his feet; upacära—worship; vit—understanding; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; vidhivat—according to the rules of tradition; çré-gargam—Çré Garga Muni; jïäninäm—of philosophers; varam—the best; tataù—then; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; våñabhänu-varaù—King Våñabhänu; mahän—noble.

     Seeing Garga Muni, who was the greatest of philosophers, who was the brähmaëa tiger of sages, who, decorated with a parasol was like a second King Indra, holding a stick was like a second Yamaräja, his bodily luster illuminating the directions was like a second sun-god, a great book at his belt was like a second Lord Brahmä, and who, dressed in white garments, stood like Lord Viñëu Himself, noble King Våñabhänu rose up at once with great respect, bowed his head, stood with folded hands, placed the sage on a great throne, washed his feet, presented many offerings, circumambulated him, and worshiped him according to the rules of scripture. 
Text 46

çré-våñabhänur uväca 
satäà paryanöanaà çäntaà
     gåhiëäà çäntaye småtam
nåëäm antas-tamo-häré
     sädhur eva na bhäskaraù

     çré-våñabhänuù uväca—Çré Våñabhänu said; satäm—of the saintly devotees; paryaöanam—the wandering; çäntam—peaceful; gåhiëäm—of the householders; çäntaye—for peacefulness; småtam—remembered; nåëäm—of men; antaù—in the heart; tamaù—the darkness; häré—removing; sädhuù—saint; eva—certainly; na—not; bhäskaraù—the sun.

     Çré Våñabhänu said: The peaceful wandering of saints is meant to bring peace to householders. It is a saint, and not the sun, that removes the darkness in the hearts of men.

Text 47

térthé-bhütä vayaà gopä
     jätäs tvad-darçanät prabho
térthäni térthé-kurvanti
     tvädåçaù sädhavaù kñitau

     térthé-bhütäù—gone on pilgrimage; vayam—we; gopäù—gopas; jätäù—born; tvat—of you; darçanät—by the sight; prabhaù—O lord; térthäni—the places of pilgrimage; térthé-kurvanti—make places of pilgrimage; tvädåçaù—like you; sädhavaù—saints; kñitau—on the earth.

     O lord, by seeing you we gopas have gone on pilgrimage. Saints like you sanctify the sacred places in this world.

Text 48

he mune rädhikä-näma
     kanyä me maìgaläyanä
kasmai varäya datavyä
     vada tvaà me su-niçcitam

     he mune—O sage; rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; näma—name; kanyä—daughter; me—my; maìgala—of auspiciousness; ayanä—the abode; kasmai—to what?; varäya—husband; datavyä—should be given; vada—please tell; tvam—you; me—me; su-niçcitam—opinion.

     O sage, my daughter is named Rädhikä. She is the abode of great auspiciousness. To whom should I give Her in marriage? Please tell me your opinion.

Text 49

tvaà paryaöann arka iva
     tri-lokéà divya-darçanaù
varo 'nayä samo yo vai
     tasmai däsyämi kanyakäm

     tvam—you; paryaöan—wandering; arkaù—the sun; iva—like; tri-lokém—the three worlds; divya—splendid; darçanaù—sight; varaù—husband; anayä—with Her; samaù—equal; yaù—who; vai—indeed; tasmai—to Him; däsyämi—I will give; kanyakäm—daughter.

     Like the sun, your goodness can travel everywhere in the three worlds. I wish to give my daughter to a splendid husband who will be Her equal.

Text 50

çré-närada uväca 
hastaà gåhétvä çré-gargo
     våñabhänor mahä-muniù
jagäma yamunä-téraà
     nirjanaà sundara-sthalam

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; hastam—hand; gåhétvä—taking; çré-gargaù—Çré Garga; våñabhänoù—of Våñabhänu; mahä-muniù—the great sage; jagäma—went; yamunä—of the Yamunä; téram—to the shore; nirjanam—secluded; sundara—beautiful; sthalam—place.

     Çré Närada said: Taking Våñabhänu's hand, the great sage Çré Garga Muni went to a beautiful and secluded place on the Yamunä's shore.

Text 51

kälindé-jala-kallola-
     kolahala-samäkulam
tatropaveçya gopeçaà
     munéndraù präha dharma-vit

     kälindé—of the Yamunä; jala—water; kallola—waves; kolähala—tumult; samäkulam—filled; tatra—there; upaveçya—sitting; gopa—of the gopas; éçam—to the king; muni—of sagesl indraù—the king; präha—said; dharma—the truth of religion; vit—knowing.

     Making the gopa-king Våñabhänu sit down at a place where the Yamunä's waves made a great sound, Garga Muni, the king of sages and the knower of religion, spoke.

Texts 52 and 53

çré-garga uväca 
he gopa guptam äkhyanaà
     kathanéyaà na ca tvayä
paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaù bhagavän svayam

asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     golokeçaù parät paraù
tasmät paro varo nästi
     jäto nanda-gåhe patiù

     çré-gargaù uväca—Çré Garga said; he gopa—O gopa; guptam—secret; äkhyanam—story; kathanéyam—to be told; na—not; ca—also; tvayä—by you; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Lord; svayam—Himself; asaìkhya—countless; brahmäëòa—of universes; patiù—the master; goloka—of Goloka; éçaù—the master; parät paraù—greater than the greatest; tasmät—than Him; paraù—better; varaù—husband; na—not; asti—is; jätaù—born; nanda—of Nanda; gåhe—in the home; patiù—the Lord.

     Çré Garga Muni said: O gopa, do not tell this secret. Çré Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself, who is the master of countless universes, the king of Goloka, greater than the greatest, and the Lord than whom there is no better husband, has taken birth in Nanda's home.

Text 54

çré-våñabhänur uväca 
aho bhägaym aho bhägyaà
     nandasyäpi mahä-mune
çré-kåñëasyävatärasya
     sarvaà tvaà vada käraëam

     çré-våñabhänuù uväca—Çré Våñabhänu said; ahaù—ah; bhägaym—good fortune; ahaù—ah; bhägyam—good fortune; nandasya—of Nanda; api—also; mahä-mune—O great sage; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; avatärasya—descended; sarvam—everything; tvam—you; vada—please tell; käraëam—the reason.

     Çré Våñabhänu said: How fortunate! How fortunate for Nanda! O great sage, please tell everything of why Çré Kåñëa has descended to this world.

Text 55

çré-garga uväca 
bhuvo bhärävatäräya
     kaàsädénäà vadhäya ca
brahmaëä prärthitaù kåñëo
     babhüva jagaté-tale

     çré-gargaù uväca—Çré Garga said; bhuvaù—of the earth; bhära—the burden; avatäräya—to remove; kaàsa-ädénäm—of the demons headed by Kaàsa; vadhäya—for killing; ca—also; brahmaëä—by Brahmä; prärthitaù—requested; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; babhüva—has taken birth; jagaté-tale—in the world.

     Çré Garga Muni said: To remove the earth's burden and to kill the demons headed by Kaàsa, on the demigod Brahmä's request Lord Kåñëa has taken birth on the surface of the earth.

Text 56

çré-kåñëa-paööa-räjïé yä
     goloke rädhikäbhidhä
tvad-gåhe säpi saïjätä
     tvaà na jänäsi täà paräm

     çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; paööa-räjïé—the chief queen; yä—who; goloke—in Goloka; rädhikäbhidhä—named Rädhikä; tvat—of you; gåhe—in the home; sä—She; api—also; saïjätä—is born; tvam—you; na—not; jänäsi—know; täm—Her; paräm—supreme.

     Çré Rädhikä, who is Lord Kåñëa's chief queen in Goloka, has taken birth in your home. You do not understand Her exalted position.

Text 57

çré-närada uväca 
tadä praharñito gopo
     våñabhänuù su-vismitaù
kalävatéà samähüya
     tayä särdhaà vicärya ca

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; praharñitaù—delighted; gopaù—the gopa; våñabhänuù—Våñabhänu; su-vismitaù—astonished; kalävatém—Kalävaté; samähüya—calling; tayä—her; särdham—with; vicärya—considered; ca—and.

     Çré Närada said: Delighted and astonished, Våñabhänu called Kalävaté and they both thought (about what Garga Muni said).

Text 58

rädhä-kåñëänubhävaà ca
     jïätvä gopa-varaù paraù
änandäçru-kaläà muïcan
     punar äha mahä-munim

     rädhä—of Rädhä; kåñëa—and Kåñëa; anubhävam—great glory; ca—also; jïätvä—knowing; gopa-varaù—the exalted gopa; paraù—great; änanda—of bliss; açru-kaläm—tears; muïcan—wiping; punaù—again; äha—said; mahä—great; munim—to the sage.

     Understanding the exalted position of Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa, and shedding tears of bliss, the exalted gopa spoke to the great sage.

Text 59

çré-våñabhänur uväca 
tasmai däsyämi he brahman
     kanyäà kamala-locanäm
tvayä panthä darçito me
     tvayä käryo 'yam udvahaù

     çré-våñabhänuù uväca—Çré Våñabhänu said; tasmai—to Him; däsyämi—I will give; he—O; brahman—brähmaëa; kanyäm—my daughter; kamala-locanäm—lotus-eyed; tvayä—by you; panthä—the path; darçitaù—revealed; me—to me; tvayä—by you; käryaù—should be performed; ayam—this; udvahaù—wedding.

     Çré Våñabhänu said: O brähmaëa, I will give my lotus-eyed daughter to Him. You have revealed this path. You should perform the wedding ceremony.

Text 60

çré-garga uväca 
ahaà na kärayiñyämi
     viväham anayor nåpa
tayor viväho bhavitä
     bhäëòére yamunä-taöe

     çré-gargaù uväca—Çré Garga said; aham—I; na—not; kärayiñyämi—will perform; viväham—the wedding; anayoù—of Them; nåpa—O king; tayoù—of Them; vivähaù—the wedding; bhavitä—will be; bhäëòére—in Bhäëòéravana; yamunä—of the Yamunä; taöe—on the shore.

     Çré Garga Muni said: O king, I will not perform Their wedding ceremony. Their wedding will be in Bhäëòéravana by the Yamunä's shore.

Text 61

våndävana-samépe ca
     nirjane sundara-sthale
parameñöhé samägatya
     vivähaà kärayiñyati

     våndävana—Våndävana; samépe—near; ca—also; nirjane—secluded; sundara—in a beatiful; sthale—placed; parameñöhé—Brahmä; samägatya—arriving; viväham—the wedding; kärayiñyati—will perform.

     The demigod Brahmä will come and perform the wedding in a beautiful secluded place near Våndävana forest.

Text 62

tasmäd rädhäà gopa-vara
     viddhy ardhäìgéà varasya ca
loke cüòä-maëiù säkñäd
     räjïéà goloka-mandire

     tasmät—from that; rädhäm—Rädhä; gopa-vara—O best of gopas; viddhi—please know; ardha—half; aìgém—the body; varasya—of Her husband; ca—and; loke—in the world; cüòä—the crown; maëiù—jewel; säkñät—directly; räjïém—queen; goloka—of Goloka; mandire—in the palace.

     Because of this please know that Rädhä is half of the Supreme Personality of Godhead's body. In the palace of Goloka She is the queen of He who is the world's crest-jewel.

Text 63

yüyaà sarve 'pi gopälä
     golokäd ägatä bhuvi
tathä gopé-gaëä gävo
     goloke rädhikecchayä

     yüyam—you; sarve—all; api—also; gopäläù—gopas; golokät—from Goloka; ägatäù—come; bhuvi—to the earth; tathä—so; gopé-gaëäù—gopés; gävaù—cows; goloke—in Goloka; rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; icchayä—by the desire.

     You gopas have all come from Goloka. By Çré Rädhikä's wish the cows and gopés have also come from Goloka.

Text 64

yad-darçanaà durlabham eva durghaöaà
     devaiç ca yajïair na ca janmabhiù kim u
sa-vigrahäà täà tava mandiräjire
     lakñyanti guptaà bahu-gopa-gopikäù

     yat—of whom; darçanam—the sight; durlabham—difficult to attain; eva—indeed; durghaöam—impossible; devaiù—by the demigods; ca—also; yajïaiù—by sacrifices; na—not; ca—and; janmabhiù—by many births; kim u—what to speak of?; sa-vigraham—transcendental form; täm—Her; tava—your; mandira—in the palace; ajire—in the courtyard; lakñyanti—see; guptam—hidden; bahu—many; gopa—gopas; gopikäù—and gopés.

     She whom even the demigods, what to speak of others who perform sacrifices for many births, cannot see, many gopas and gopés now see hidden in the courtyard of your palace.

Text 65

çré-närada uväca 
tadä ca vismitau räjan
     dam-paté harñitau param
rädhä-kåñëa-prabhävaà ca
     çrutvä çré-gargam ücatuù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; ca—also; vismitau—astonished; räjan—O king; dam-paté—the husband and wife; harñitau—joyful; param—then; rädhä-kåñëa—of Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa; prabhävam—the exalted position; ca—also; çrutvä—hearing; çré-gargam—to Çré Garga Muni; ücatuù—said.

     Çré Närada said: O king, joyful and filled with wonder by hearing of Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa's exalted glories, the husband and wife spoke to Çré Garga.

Text 66

çré-dam-paté ücatuù 
rädhä-çabdasya he brahman
     vyäkhyänaà vada tattvataù
tvatto na saàçaya-cchettä
     ko 'pi bhümau mahä-mune

     çré-dam-paté ücatuù—the husband and wife said; rädhä—Rädhä; çabdasya—of the word; he—O; brahman—brähmaëa; vyäkhyänam—the story; vada—please tell; tattvataù—in truth; tvattaù—from you; na—not; saàçaya—doubt; cchettä—cutting; ko 'pi—anyone; bhümau—on the earth; mahä—great; mune—O sage.

     The husband and wife said: O brähmaëa, please truthfully explain the meaning of the name Rädhä. O great sage, save for you, no one in this world can cut our doubts.

Text 67

çré-garga uväca 
säma-vedasya bhävärthaà
     gandhamädana-parvate
çiñyenäpi mayä tatra
     näräyaëa-mukhäc chrutam

     çré-gargaù uväca—Çré Garga said; säma-vedasya—of the Säma Veda; bhäva-artham—the meaning; gandhamädana-parvate—on Mount Gandhamädana; çiñyena—by the disciple; api—also; mayä—by me; tatra—there; näräyaëa-mukhät—from the mouth of Näräyaëa Åñi; çrutam—heard.

     Çré Garga Muni said: As a disciple I heard this from the mouth of Näräyaëa Åñi as on Mount Gandhamädana He was explaining the Säma Veda:

Text 68

ramayä tu ra-käraù syäd
     ä-käras tv ädi-gopikä
dha-käro dharayä hi syäd
     ä-käro virajä nadé

     ramayä—as the goddess of fortune; tu—indeed; ra-käraù—the letter R; syät—is; ä-käraù—the letter A; tu—indeed; ädi-gopikä—the first gopé; dha-käraù—the letter DH; dharayä—by the earth; hi—indeed; syät—is; ä-käraù—the letter A; virajä nadé—the Virajä river.

     R stands for Ramä (the goddess of fortune), A stands for Adi-gopikä (the forst of the gopés), DH stands for Dharä (the earth), and A stands for Virajä-nadé (the Virajä river).

Text 69

çré-kåñëasya parasyäpi
     caturdhä tejaso 'bhavat
lélä-bhüù çréç ca virajä
     catasraù patnya eva hi

     çré-kåñëasya—of Lord Kåñëa; parasya—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; api—also; caturdhä—in four ways; tejasaù—potency; abhavat—became; lélä—Lélä; bhüù—Bhü; çréç—Çré; ca—and; virajä—Virajä; catasraù—four; patnyaù—wives; eva—indeed; hi—certainly.

     The four potencies of Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, became His four wives: Lélä, Bhü, Çré, and Virajä.

Text 70

sampralénäç ca täù sarvä
     rädhäyäà kuïja-mandire
paripürëatamäà rädhäà
     tasmäd ähur manéñiëaù

     sampralénäù—entered; ca—also; täù—they; sarväù—all; rädhäyäm—Rädhä; kuïja—in the forest; mandire—in the palace; paripürëatamäm—the supreme goddess of fortune; rädhäm—Rädhä; tasmät—therefore; ähuù—say; manéñiëaù—the wise.

     Because all these goddesses have now entered the form of Çré Rädhä, the wise say that Çré Rädhä is the original supreme goddess of fortune.

Text 71

çré-närada uväca 
rädhä-kåñëeti he gopa
     ye japanti punaù punaù
catuñpadärthaà kià teñäà
     säkñät kåñëo 'pi labhyate

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; rädhä-kåñëa—Rädhä-Kåñëa; iti—thus; he gopa—O gopa; ye—who; japanti—chant; punaù punaù—again and again; catuñpadärtham—the four goals of life; kim—what?; teñäm—of them; säkñät—directly; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; api—even; labhyate—is attained.

     Çré Närada said: O gopa, they who again and again chant the names of Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa attain Lord Kåñëa directly. What are the four goals of life to them?

Text 72

tadäti-vismito räjan
     våñabhänuù priyä-yutaù
rädhä-kåñëa-prabhävaà taà
     jïätvänanda-mayo hy abhüt

     tadä—then; ati-vismitaù—filled with wonder; räjan—O king; våñabhänuù—Våñabhänu; priyä-yutaù—with his dear wife; rädhä-kåñëa prabhävam—the exalted position of Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa; tam—that; jïätvä—understanding; änanda-mayaù—filled with bliss; hi—indeed; abhüt—became.

     O king, when they understood Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa's exalted glories, King Våñabhänu and his dear wife became filled with wonder and bliss.

Text 73

itthaà gargo jïäni-varaù
     püjitaù våñabhänunä
jagäma sva-gåhaà säkñän
     munéndraù sarva-vit kaviù

     ittham—thus; gargaù—Garga; jïäni—of philosophers; varaù—the best; püjitaù—worshiped; våñabhänunä—by Våñabhänu; jagäma—went; sva-gåham—to his own home; säkñät—directly; muni-indraù—the king of sages; sarva-vit—all knowing; kaviù—wise.

     Then, after King Våñabhänu had worshiped him, all-knowing Garga Muni, who was the best of philosophers and the king of sages, went to his own home.

Chapter Sixteen
Çré Rädhikä-viväha-varëana
Description of Çré Rädhikä's Wedding

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
gäç cärayan nandanam aìka-deçe
     samlälayan düratamaà sakäçät
kalindajä-téra-saméra-kampitaà
     nando 'pi bhäëòéravanaà jagäma

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; gäù—the cows; cärayan—herding; nandanam—son; aìka-deçe—on the lap; samlälayan—caressing; düratamam—for a long time; sakäçät—in the presence; kalindajä—of the Yamunä; téra—on the shore; saméra—the breeze; kampitam—moving; nandaù—Nanda; api—even; bhäëòéravanam—Bhäëòéravana; jagäma—went.

     Herding the cows and holding His infant son in his arms, Nanda went to Bhäëòéravana, which trembled with the breezes coming from the Yamunä's shore. 

Text 2

kåñëecchayä vegataro 'tha väto
     ghanair abhün meduram ambaraà ca
tamäla-népa-druma-pallavaiç ca
     patadbhir ejadbhir atéva-bhékaiù

     kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; icchayä—by the desire; vegataraù—quickly; atha—then; vätaù—breeze; ghanaiù—with clouds; abhüt—became; meduram—thick;  ambaram—the sky; ca—and; tamäla—tamäla; népa—and kadamba; druma—trees; pallavaiù—with twigs; ca—and; patadbhiù—falling; ejadbhiù—trembling; atéva—very; bhékaiù—frightening.

     Then, by Kåñëa's wish, the sky became filled with clouds and a strong wind fearfully moved the new tamäla and kadamba twigs and made them fall.

Text 3

tad-andha-käre mahati prajäte
     bäle rudaty aìka-gate 'ti-bhéte
nando bhayaà präpa çiçuà sa bibhrad
     dharià pareçaà çaraëaà jagäma

     tad-andha-kare—blinding darkness; mahati—great; prajäte—manifest; bäle—the boy; rudati—crying; aìka-gate—on his arm; ati-bhéte—very frightened; nandaù—Nanda; bhayam—fear; präpa—attained; çiçum—infant; saù—he; bibhrat—holding; harim—of Lord Hari; para-éçam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çaraëaà jagäma—took shelter.

     When a great and blinding darkness came and the frightened infant in his arm cried, Nanda became afraid. Clutching his boy, he took shelter of Lord Hari, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 4

tadaiva koöy-arka-samüha-déptir
     ägacchatéväcalati diçäsu
babhüva tasyäà våñabhänu-putréà
     dadarça rädhäà nava-nanda-räjaù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; koöi—millions; arka—of suns; samüha—multitude; déptiù—splendor;  ägacchati—came; iva—as if; äcalati—moves; diçäsu—in the directions; babhüva—became; tasyäm—in that; våñabhänu—of King Våñabhänu; putrém—the daughter; dadarça—saw; rädhäm—Rädhä; nava-nanda-räjaù—Nanda Mahäräja, the king of the nine Nandas.

     Then, as an effulgence greater than millions of suns converged on him from all directions, Nanda Mahäräja, the king of the nine Nandas, saw Våñabhänu's daughter Rädhä, . . .

Text 5

koöéndu-bimba-dyutim ädadhänäà
     nélämbaräà sundaram ädi-varëäm
maïjéra-dhéra-dhvani-nüpuräëäm
     äbibhratéà çabdam atéva maïjum

     koöi—millions; indu-bimba—of moons; dyutim—glory; ädadhänam—manifesting; néla—blue; ambaram—garments; sundaram—handsome; ädi-varëam—first class; maïjéra—of anklets; dhéra—soft; dhvani—sound; nüpuräëäm—ankle-bells; äbibhratém—wearing; çabdam—sound; atéva—very; maïjum—beautiful.

 . . . who was fair and splendid as millions of moons, dressed in blue garments, decorated with anklets and anklebells that tinkled sweetly, . . .

Text 6

käïcé-kalä-kaìkana-çabda-miçräà
     häräìguléyäìgada-visphurantém
çré-näsikä-mauktika-haàçikébhiù
     çré-kanöùa-cüòä-maëi-kuëòaläòhyäm

     käïcé-kalä—of a belt; kaìkana—bracelets; çabda—sound; miçram—mixed; häù—necklace; aìguléya—rings; aìgada—armlets; visphurantém—splendid; çré-näsikä—on Her nose; mauktika—a pearl; haàçikébhiù—with anklets; çré-kanöùa—on Her neck; cüòä—crest; maëi—jewel; kuëòala—earrings; äòhyäm—opulent.

 . . . who wore tinkling bracelets and a tinkling belt, who was splendid with armlets, rings, and a necklace, and who was opulent with a nose-pearl, anklets, a necklace-jewel, and earrings.

Text 7

tat-tejasä dharñita äçu nando
     natvätha täm äha kåtäïjaliù san
ayaà tu säkñät puruñottamas tvaà
     priyäsya mukhyäsi tadaiva rädhe

     tat—of Her; tejasä—by the splendor; dharñitaù—overwhelmed; äçu—at once; nandaù—Nanda;  natvä—bowing; atha—then; täm—to Her; äha—said; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; san—being; ayam—He; tu—indeed; säkñät—directly; puruñottamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tvam—You; priyä—the beloved; asya—of Him; mukhyä—most important; asi—are; tadä—then; eva—indeed; rädhe—O Rädhä.

     Overwhelmed by Her effulgence, Nanda bowed down and with folded hands said, "He is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, and You, O Rädhä, are His first beloved.

Text 8

guptaà tv idaà garga-mukhena vedmi
     gåhäëa rädhe nija-nätham aìkät
enaà gåhaà präpaya megha-bhétaà
     vadämi cetthaà prakåter guëäòhyaù

     guptam—secret; tu—certainly; idam—this; garga-mukhena—from Garga Muni's mouth; vedmi—I know; gåhäëa—please take; rädhe—O Rädhä; nija—Your own;  nätham—Lord; aìkät—from my arms; enam—Him; gåham—home; präpaya—please take; megha—of the clouds; bhétam—frightened; vadämi—I say; ca—and; ittham—thus; prakåteù—of matter; guëa—with the modes; äòhyaù—enriched.

     "I know this secret from the mouth of Garga Muni. O Rädhä, please take Your Lord from my arms. Now that the clouds have frightened Him, please take Him home. As if I were a person controlled by the modes of material nature, I say this (that He is frightened).

Text 9

namämi tubhyaà bhuvi rakña mäà tvaà
     kåñëa-priyäsi prakåteù paräà tvam çrutvä vacas tasya tadaiva rädhä
     candrävalé gopa-patim tam äha

     namämi—I offer my respectful obeisances; tubhyam—to You; bhuvi—in this world; rakña—please protect;  mäm—me; tvam—You; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; priyä—the beloved; asi—You are; prakåteù—the modes of nature; paräm—beyond; tvam—You; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—words; tasya—of him; tadä—then; eva—indeed; rädhä—Rädhä; candra—of moons; ävalé—a host; gopa—of the gopas; patim—to the king; tam—to him; äha—said.

     "I offer my respectful obeisances to You. Please protect me in this world. You are Kåñëa's dearmost. You are beyond the modes of material nature."
     Hearing these words, Çré Rädhä, who was splendid as a host of moons, spoke to the king of the gopas.

Text 10

çré-rädhoväca 
varaà paraà brühi mahä-mate tvaà
     yathepsitam sarva-janair duräpam
ahaà prasannä tava bhakti-bhävän
     mad-darçanaà durlabham eva nanda

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; varam—benediction;  param—supreme; brühi—please say; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one; tvam—you; yathä—as; ipsitam—desired; sarva—by all; janaiù—people; duräpam—difficult to attain; aham—I; prasannä—am pleased; tava—of you; bhakti-bhävät—by devotion;  mat—of Me; darçanam—sight; durlabham—difficult to attain; eva—indeed; nanda—O Nanda.

     Then Çré Rädhä said: O noble-hearted one, ask for a benediction, for anything you wish, for anything impossible for anyone to attain. I am pleased by your sincere devotion. O Nanda it is very difficult for anyone to see Me.

Text 11

çré-nanda uväca 
yadi prasannäsi tadä bhaven me
     bhaktir dåòhä kau yuvayoù padäbje
satäà ca bhaktis tava bhakti-bhäjäà
     saìgaù sadä me 'tha yuge yuge ca

     çré-nandaù uväca—Çré Nanda said; yadi—if; prasannä—pleased; asi—You are; tadä—then; bhavet—may be; me—to Me; bhaktiù—devotion; dåòhä—firm; kau—in this world; yuvayoù—of You both; pada-abje—for the lotus feet; satäm—of the devotees; ca—also; bhaktiù—devotion; tava—to You; bhakti-bhäjäm—who have devotion; saìgaù—association; sadä—always; me—of me; atha—then; yuge yuge—millennium after millennium; ca—and.

     If You are pleased then let me have firm devotion for the lotus feet of You both, and let me have devotion for Your devotees, and let me have their company. Let me have this millennium after millennium.

Text 12

çré-närada uväca 
tathästu coktvätha harià karäbhyäà
     jagräha rädhä nija-nätham aìkät
gate 'tha nande praëate vrajeçe
     tadä hi bhäëòéravanaà jagäma

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—also; uktvä—saying; atha—then; harim—Lord Hari; karäbhyäm—with both hands; jagräha—taking; rädhä—Rädhä; nija-nätham—Her own Lord; aìkät—from the arms; gate—gone; atha—then; nande—when Nanda; praëate—bowing down; vraja—of Vraja; éçe—the king;  tadä—then; hi—indeed; bhäëòéravanam—to Bhäëòéravana; jagäma—went.

     Çré Närada said: Saying "So be it", with both hands Rädhä took Lord Hari from Nanda's arms. When Vraja's king Nanda offered his obeisances and left, She went to Bhäëòéravana forest. 

Text 13

goloka-lokäc ca purä samägatä
     bhümir nijaà svaà vapur ädadhänä
yä padmarägädi-khacit-suvarëä
     babhüva sä tat-kñaëam eva sarvä

     goloka-lokät—from the realm of Goloka; ca—also; purä—previously; samägatä—come; bhümiù—earth; nijam—own; svam—own; vapuù—form; ädadhänä—manifesting; yä—who; padmaräga—rubies; ädi—beginning with; khacit—studded; suvarëä—gold;  babhüva—became; sä—She; tat-kñaëam—at that moment; eva—indeed; sarvä—all.

     Then the spiritual ground came from the realm of Goloka. In a moment everything was golden and studded with rubies and many jewels.

Text 14

våndävanaà divya-vapur dadhänaà
     våkñair varaiù käma-dughaiù sahaiva
kalinda-putré ca suvarëa-saudhaiù
     çré-ratna-sopänamayé babhüva

     våndävanam—Våndävana; divya—transcendental and splendid; vapuù—form; dadhänam—manifesting; våkñaiù—with trees; varaiù—excellent; käma-dughaiù—fulfilling all desires; saha—with; eva—indeed; kalinda-putré—the Yamunä; ca—also; suvarëa—golden; saudhaiù—with palaces; çré—beautiful; ratna—jewel; sopänamayé—with staircases; babhüva—became.

     Våndävana forest manifested a splendid transcendental form with beautiful desire-trees, and the Yamunä's shore had jewel steps and golden palaces.

Text 15

govardhano ratna-çilämayo 'bhüt
     suvarëa-çåìgaiù paritaù sphuradbhiù
mattälibhir nirjhara-sundarébhir
     därébhir uccäìga-karéva räjan

     govardhanaù—Govardhana; ratna—jewel; çilä—stones; mayaù—made of; abhüt—became; suvarëa—golden; çåìgaiù—with peaks; paritaù—everywhere; sphuradbhiù—glistening; matta—maddened; alibhiù—with bumblebees; nirjhara—swiftly flowing mountain streams; sundarébhiù—beautiful; därébhiù—with caves; ucca—great; aìga—body; karé—elephant; iva—like; räjan—O king.

     Govardhana was made of jewels and had glistening golden peaks everywhere, maddened bees, and caves beautiful with swiftly-flowing streams. O king, it was like a great, gigantic elephant.

Text 16

tadä nikuïjo 'pi nijaà vapur dadhat
     sabhä-yutaà praìgana-divya-maëòapam
vasanta-mädhurya-dharaà madhuvratair
     mayüra-pärävata-kokila-dhvanim

     tadä—then; nikuïjaù—forest grove; api—also; nijam—own; vapuù—form; dadhät—manifested; sabhä—assembly-halls; yutam—with; praìgana—courtyards; divya—splendid;  maëòapam—pavilions; vasanta—of spring; mädhurya—sweetness; dharam—holding; madhuvrataiù—with bees; mayüra—peacocks; pärävata—pärävatas; kokila—and cuckoos; dhvanim—the sound.

     Then the forest grove assumed its real form with many assembly houses, courtyards, splendid pavilions, bumblebees, and the cooing of peacocks, pärävatas, and cuckoos. It was filled with the sweetness of spring.

Text 17

suvarëa-ratnädi-khacit-patair våtaà
     patat-patäkävalibhir viräjitam
saraù-sphuöadbhir bhramarävaléòhitair
     vicarcitaà käïcana-cäru-paìkajaiù

     suvarëa—gold; ratna—jewels; ädi—beginning with; khacit—studded; paöaiù—woth roofs; våtam—filled; patat—fluttering; patäkä-avalibhiù—with rows of flags; viräjitam—splendid; saraù—a lake;  sphuöadbhiù—blossoming; bhramara—by bees; avaléòhitaiù—licked; vicarcitam—anointed; kä 24cana—golden; cäru—beautiful; paìkajaiù—with lotus flowers.

     It was filled with roofs of gold and jewels, splendid with fluttering flags, and anointed with beautiful blossoming lake-growing golden lotuses licked by swarms of black bees.

Text 18

tadaiva säkñät puruñottamottamo
     babhüva kaiçora-vapur ghana-prabhaù
pétämbaraù kaustubha-ratna-bhüñaëo
     vaàçé-dharo manmatha-räçi-mohanaù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; säkñät—directly; puruñottamottamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; babhüva—became; kaiçora—adolescent; vapuù—form; ghana—as a dark cloud; prabhaù—splendor; péta—yellow; ambaraù—garments; kaustubha-ratna—the Kaustubha jewel; bhüñaëaù—decoration; vaàçé—the flute; dharaù—holding; manmatha—of Kämadevas; räçi—multitude; mohanaù—enchanting.

     Then the Supreme Personality of Godhead became a teen-age youth splendid as a dark cloud, dressed in yellow garments, decorated with the Kaustubha gem, holding a flute, and more enchanting than a great host of Kämadevas.

Text 19

bhujena saìgåhya hasan priyäà harir
     jagäma madhye su-viväha-maëòapam
viväha-sambhära-yutaù sa-mekhalaà
     sudarbhamad-väri-ghaöädi-maëòitam

     bhujena—with an arm; saìgåhya—taking; hasan—smiling; priyäm—His beloved; hariù—Lord Hari; jagäma—went; madhye—to the middle; su—beautiful; viväha—marriage; maëòapam—pavilion;  viväha—for the marriage; sambhära—paraphernalia; yutaù—with; sa-mekhalam—with a belt; su-darbha-mat—with kuça grass; väri—water; ghaöa—pots; ädi—beginning with; maëòitam—decorated.

     Smiling, Lord Hari took His beloved by the arm, and with the wedding paraphernalia went to the wedding-pavilion, which was decorated with mekhaläs, kuça grass, waterpots, and many other things.

Text 20

tatraiva siàhäsana udgate vare
     parasparaà sammalitau virejatuù
paraà bruvantau madhuraà ca dam-paté
     sphurat-prabhau khe ca taòid-ghanäv iva

     tatra—there; eva—indeed; siàhäsane—on a throne; udgate—manifested; vare—excellent; parasparam—together; sammälitau—caressing; virejatuù—were splendidly manifested; param—then; bruvantau—conversing; madhuram—sweetly; ca—also;  dam-paté—husband and wife; sphurat-prabhau—splendid;  khe—in the sky; ca—also; taòit—lighting; ghanau—and cloud; iva—like.

     Embracing and sweetly conversing on a beautiful throne there, They shone like a splendid lightning flash and a dark cloud in the sky.

Text 21

tadämbaräd deva-varo vidhiù prabhuù
     samägatas tasya parasya sammukhe
natvä tad-aìghré hy uçaté giräbhiù
     kåtäïjaliç cäru catur-mukho jagau

     tadä—then; ambarät—from the sky; deva-varaù—the best of the demigods; vidhiù—Brahmä; prabhuù—Lord; samägataù—came; tasya—of Him; parasya—the Supreme; sammukhe—facing; natvä—bowing down; tad-aìghré—at His feet; hi—" uçaté giräbhiù—with sweet words; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; cäru—eloquently; catur-mukhaù—four-headed Brahmä; jagau—said.

     Then Lord Brahmä, the best of the demigods, came from the sky. Bowing down before Lord Kåñëa, with folded hands he eloquently and sweetly spoke.

Text 22

çré-brahmoväca 
anädim ädyaà puruñottamottamaà
     çré-kåñëacandraà nija-bhakta-vatsalam
svayaà tv asaìkhyäëòa-patià parät paraà
     rädhä-patià tväà çaraëaà vrajämy aham

     çré-brahmä uväca—Lord Barham‘ said; anädim—without beginning; ädyam—the beginning; puruñottamottamam—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëacandram—Çré Kåñëacandra; nija—own; bhakta—devotees; vatsalam—affectionate; svayam—personally; tu—indeed; asaìkhya—countless;  aëòa—of universes; patim—the master; parät param—greater than the greatest; rädhä-patim—the master of Rädhä; tväm—of You; çaraëaà vrajämy aham—I take shelter.

     Çré Brahmä said: I take shelter of You, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëacandra, without beginning, the beginning of everything, affectionate to Your devotees, the master of countless universes, greater than the greatest, and the husband of Rädhä.

Text 23

goloka-näthas tvam atéva-lélo
     lélävatéyaà nija-loka-lélä
vaikuëöha-nätho 'si yadä tvam eva      lakñmés tadeyaà våñabhänujä hi

     goloka-näthaù—the master of Goloka; tvam—You; atéva-lélaù—playful; lélävaté—playful; iyam—she;  nija—own; loka—realm; lélä—pastimes; vaikuëöha-näthaù—the master of Vaikuëöha; asi—You are;  yadä—when; tvam—You; eva—indeed; lakñméù—Lakñmé; tadä—then; iyam—She; våñabhänujä—the daughter of Våñabhänu; hi—certainly.

     You are the playful king of Goloka and She is Your playful companion. When You are the king of Vaikuëöha, She, the daughter of Våñabhänu, is Goddess Lakñmé.

Text 24

tvaà rämacandro janakätmajeyaà
     bhümau haris tvaà kamalälayeyam
yajïävatäro 'si yadä tadeyaà
     çré-dakñiëä stré prati-patné-mukhyä

     tvam—You; rämacandraù—Rämacandra; janakätmajä—the daughter of Janaka; iyam—She; bhümau—on the earth; hariù—Lord Hari; tvam—You; kamalälayä—the abode of Kamalä; iyam—She; yaj 24ävatäraù—Yajïa-avatära; asi—You are; yadä—when; tadä—thenl iyam—She; çré-dakñiëä—Çré Dakñiëä; stré—wife; prati-patné-mukhyä—the best of wives.

     When in this world You are Rämacandra, She is Janaka's daughter Sétä. When You are Lord Hari, She is Kamalä. When You are Yajïa-avatära, She is Çré Dakñiëä, the best of wives.

Text 25

tvaà närasiàho 'si ramä tadeyaà
     näräyaëas tvaà ca nareëa yuktaù
tad tv iyaà çäntir atéva säkñäc
     chäyeva yätä ca tavänurüpä

     tvam—You; närasiàhaù—Nåsiàha; asi—You are; ramä—Ramä; tadä—then; iyam—She; näräyaëaù—Näräyaëa; tvam—You; ca—and; nareëa—with Nara; yuktaù—accompanied; tat—then; tu—indeed; iyam—She; çäntiù—Goddess Çänti; atéva—greatly; säkñät—directly; chäyä-—a shadow;  iva—as if; yätä—come; ca—also; tava—You;  anurüpä—following.

     When You are Nåsiàha, She is Ramä. When You are Nara's friend Näräyaëa Åñi, She becomes Goddess Çänti and follows You like a shadow.

Text 26

tvaà brahma ceyaà prakåtis taöasthä
     kälo yademaà ca viduù pradhänam
mahän yadä tvaà jagad-aìkuro 'si
     rädhä tadeyaà sa-guëä ca mäyä

     tvam—You; brahma—Brahman; ca—and; iyam—She; prakåtiù—material nature; taöasthä—borderline; kälaù—time; yadä—when; imam—She; ca—also; viduù—they know; pradhänam—pradhäna; mahän—mahat-tattva; yadä—when;  tvam—You; jagat—the universe; aìkuraù—sprouting; asi—You are; rädhä—Rädhä; tadä—then; iyam—She; sa-guëä—with the three modes;  ca—also; mäyä—illusory potency.

     When You are Brahman, She is Prakåti. When You are Time, the wise know She is Pradhäna. When You are the Mahat-tattva, from which the universes have sprouted, Rädhä is the potency Mäyä, filled with the three modes.

Text 27

yadäntarätmä viditaç caturbhis
     tadä tv iyaà lakñaëä-rüpa-våttiù
yadä viräò-deha-dharas tvam eva
     tadäkhilaà vä bhuvi dhäraëeyam

     yadä—when; antarätmä—within the heart; viditaù—known; caturbhiù—by four; tadä—then; tu—indeed; iyam—She; lakñaëä-rüpa-våttiù—Lakñaëä-våtti; yadä—when; viräò-deha-dharaù—the universal form; tvam—You; eva—indeed; tadä—then; akhilam—everything; vä—or; bhuvi—on the earth; dhäraëä—the earth; iyam—She.

     When You become the four things in the heart, She becomes the power of understanding something from a hint. When You become the universal form, which includes everything, She becomes the earth.

     Note: The four things in the heart are the heart, mind, intelligence, and false-ego.   

Text 28

çyämaà ca gauraà viditaà dvidhä mahas
     tavaiva säkñät puruñottamottamam
goloka-dhämädhipatià pareçaà
     parät paraà tvaà çaraëaà vrajämy aham

     çyämam—dark; ca—and; gauram—fair; viditam—known; dvidhä—in two; mahaù—splendor; tava—of You; eva—indeed; säkñät—directly; puruñottamottamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; goloka-dhäma—the abode of Goloka; adhipatim—the master;  pareçam—the Supreme Lord; parät—than the greatest; param—greater; tvam—You; çaraëaà vrajämy aham—I take shelter.

     I take shelter of You, who are the Supreme Personality of Godhead, greater than the greatest, the master of Goloka-dhäma, and who now appear as a fair and a dark splendor.

Text 29

sadä paöhed yo yugala-stavaà paraà
     goloka-dhäma-pravaraà prayäti saù
ihaiva saundarya-samåddhi-siddhayo
     bhavanti tasyäpi nisargataù punaù

     sadä—regularly; paöhet—recites; yaù—who; yugala—of the divine couple; stavam—prayer; param—transcendental; goloka-dhäma-pravaram—to the transcendental abode of Goloka; prayäti—goes; saù—he; iha—here; eva—indeed; saundarya—with beauty; samåddhi—opulence; siddhayaù—perfections;  bhavanti—here; tasya—of him; api—also; nisargataù-naturally; punaù—again.

     A person who regularly recites these prayers describing the divine couple will go to the transcendental abode of Goloka. Even in this world he will be endowed with handsomeness, opulence, and many perfections.

Text 30

yadä yuväà préti-yutau ca dam-paté
     parät parau täv anurüpa-rüpitau
tathäpi loka-vyavahära-saìgrahäd
     vidhià vivähasya tu kärayämy aham

     yadä—when; yuväm—for You both; préti-yutau—endowed with love; ca—also; dam-paté—husband and wife; parät parau—greater than the greatest; tau—both; anurüpa-rüpitau—suitable for each other; tathäpi—still; loka-vyavahära-saìgrahät—according to the ways of this world; vidhim—the ceremony; vivähasya—of marriage; tu—certainly; kärayämi—perform; aham—I.

     Greater than the greatest and perfect for each other, You are already a loving husband and wife. Still, following the ways of this world, I will now perform Your wedding-ceremony.

Text 31

çré-närada uväca 
tadä sa utthäya vidhir hutäçanaà
     prajvalya kuëòe sthitayos tayoù puraù
çruteù kara-gräha-vidhià vidhänato
     vidhäya dhätä samavasthito 'bhavat

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; saù—he; utthäya—rising; vidhiù—Brahmä; hutäçanam—the sacred fire; prajvalya—kindling; kuëòe—in a pit; sthitayos-standing; tayoù—Them;  puraù—before; çruteù—of the Vedas; kara—hand;  gräha—taking; vidhim—the ceremony; vidhänataù—the rules; vidhäya—performing; dhätä—Brahmä; samavasthitaù—stood; abhavat—became.

     Then Brahmä rose, ignited the sacred fire, and performed the Vedic wedding-ceremony of the divine couple. 

Text 32

sa vähayäm äsa harià ca rädhikäà
     pradakñiëaà sapta-hiraëya-retasaù
tataç ca tau taà praëamayya veda-vit
     tau päöhayäm äsa ca sapta-mantrakam

     saù—He; vähayäm äsa—married; harim—Lord Hari;  ca—and; rädhikäm—Rädhä; pradakñiëam—circumambulation; sapta-hiraëya-retasaù—of the fire; tataù—then; ca—also; tau—Them; tam—that; praëamayya—making bow down; veda—the Vedas; vit—knowing; tau—to Them; päöhayäm äsa—recited; ca—also; sapta—seven; mantrakam—mantras.

     Brahmä performed the wedding-ceremony of Lord Hari and Çré Rädhikä. He had Them circumambulate the sacred fire and bow down before it, and then Brahmä, the knower of the Vedas, recited the seven mantras.

Text 33

tato harer vakñasi rädhikäyäù
     karaà ca saàsthäpya hareù karaà punaù
çré-rädhikäyäù kila påñöha-deçake
     saàsthäpya manträàç ca vidhiù prapäöhayan

     tataù—then; hareù—of Lord Hari; vakñasi—on the chest; rädhikäyäù—of Rädhä; karam—the hand; ca—also; saàsthäpya—placing; hareù—of Lord Hari;  karam—on the hand; punaù—again; çré-rädhikäyäù—of Çré Rädhä; kila—certainly; påñöha-deçake—on the back; saàsthäpya—placing; manträn—mantras; ca—also; vidhiù—Brahmä; prapäöhayan—reciting.

     Placing Çré Rädhikä's hand on Lord Hari's chest and Lord Hari's hand on Çré Rädhikä's back, Brahmä recited many mantras.

Text 34

rädhä karäbhyäà pradadau ca mälikäà
     kiïjalkinéà kåñëa-gale 'linädiném
hareù karäbhyäà våñabhänujä gale
     tataç ca vahnià praëamayya veda-vit

     rädhä—Rädhä; karäbhyäm—with both hands; pradadau—gave; ca—also; mälikäm—a garland; kiïjalkiném—of lotus flowers; kåñëa-gale—on Kåñëa's neck; ali—of bees; nädiném—filled with the humming; hareù—of Lord Hari; karäbhyäm—with both hands; våñabhänujä—the daughter of Våñabhänu; gale—on the neck; tataù—then; ca—and; vahnim—the fire; praëamayya—having bow down; veda-vit—the knower of the Vedas.

     Then with both hands Çré Rädhä placed on Lord Kåñëa's neck a lotus garland filled the the humming of bees. Then with both hands Lord Hari placed on Çré Rädhä's neck a similar garland. Then Brahmä had Them bow down before the sacred fire.

Text 35

samväsayäm äsa su-péöhayoç ca tau
     kåtäïjalé mauna-yutau pitämahaù
tau päöhayäm äsa tu païca-mantrakaà
     samarpya rädhäà ca piteva kanyakäm

     samväsayäm äsa—placed; su-péöhayoù—on two thrones;  ca—also; tau—Them; kåtäïjalé—with folded hands; mauna-yutau—silent; pitämahaù—Brahmä; tau—Them; päöhayäm äsa—recited; tu—indeed; païca-mantrakam—five mantras; samarpya—giving;  rädhäm—Rädhä; ca—and; pitä—a father; iva—like; kanyakäm—a daughter.

     Placing the silent divine couple on two thrones, with folded hands Brahmä recited five mantras. Then, as a father gives away his daughter, Brahmä gave away Çré Rädhä.

Text 36

puñpäni devä vavåñus tadä nåpa
     vidyädharébhir nanåtuù suräìganäù
gandharva-vidyädhara-cäraëäù kalaà
     sa-kinnaräù kåñëa-su-maìgalaà jaguù

     puñpäni—flowers; deväù—the demigods; vavåñuù—showered; tadä—then; nåpa—O king; vidyädharébhiù—with the Vidyädgharés; nanåtuù—danced; suräìganäù—the demigoddesses; gandharva—Gandharva; vidyädhara—Vidyadhara; cäraëäù—and Cäraëas; kalam—sweetly; sa-kinnaräù—with thr Kinnaras; kåñëa—for Lord Kåñëa; su-maìgalam—great auspiciousness;  jaguù—sang.

     O king, then the demigods showered flowers, and the demigoddesses danced with the Vidyädharés. The Gandharvas, Vidyädharas, Cäraëas, and Kinnaras sang auspicious songs glorifying Lord Kåñëa.

Text 37

mådaìga-véëä-muru-yañöi-veëavaù
     çaìkhänakä dundubhayaù sa-tälakäù
nedur muhur deva-varair divi sthitair
     jayety abhün maìgala-çabdam uccakaiù

     mådaìga-véëä-muru-yañöi-veëavaù—mådaìgas, véëäs, murus, yañöis, and veëus; saìkhänakä—çaìkhas and anakas; dundubhayaù—dundubhis; sa-tälakäù—with tälakas; neduù—sounded; muhuù—again and again; deva-varaiù—by the great demigods; divi—in heaven; sthitaiù—staying; jaya—glories!; iti-thus; abhüt—was; maìgala—auspicious; çabdam—sound; uccakaiù—loudly.

     Again and again the great demigods in heaven sounded many mådaìgas, véëäs, murus, yañöis, veëus, çaìkhas, anakas, and tälakas. Calling out "Glory!" they made an auspicious sound. 

Text 38

uväca tatraiva vidhià hariù svayaà
     yathepsitaà tvaà vada vipra dakñiëäm
tadä harià präha vidhiù prabho me
     dehi tvad-aìghryor nija-bhakti-dakñiëam

     uväca—said; tatra—there; eva—indeed; vidhim—to Brahmä; hariù—Lord Hari; svayam—personally; yathä—as; ipsitam—desired; tvam—you; vada—say; vipra—O brähmaëa; dakñiëäm—reward; tadä—then; harim—to Lord Hari; präha—said; vidhiù—Brahmä; prabhaù—O Lord; me—to me; dehi—please give; tvad-aìghryoù—for Your feet; nija—own; bhakti—devotion; dakñiëäm—reward.

     When Lord Hari said to Brahmä, "Please ask whatever you wish as dakñiëä," Brahmä replied to Lord Hari, "O Lord, as dakñiëä please give me devotion for Your feet."

Text 39

tathästu väkyaà vadato vidhir hareù
     çré-rädhikäyäç ca pada-dvayaà çubham
natvä karäbhyäà çirasä punaù punar
     jagäma gehaà praëataù praharñitaù

     tathä—so; astu—be it; väkyam—words; vadataù—saying; vidhiù—Brahmä; hareù—of Lord Hari;  çré-rädhikäyä—of Çré Rädhä; ca—also; pada-dvayam—feet; çubham—auspicious; natvä—bowing down;  karäbhyäm—with both hands; çirasä—with his head; punaù punaù—again and again; jagäma—went; geham—home; praëataù—bowing down; praharñitaù—happy.

     When Lord Hari said "So be it", Brahmä again and again placed His head at the beautiful and auspicious feet of Lord Hari and Çré Rädhikä. Then, happy and humbly bowing down, Brahmä left for his own home.

Text 40

tato nikuïjeñu catur-vidhännaà
     divyaà manojïaà priyayä pradattam
jaghäsa kåñëaù prahasan parätmä
     kåñëena dattaà kramukaà ca rädhä

     tataù—then; nikuïjeñu—in the forest groves;  catur-vidha—four kinds; annam—of food; divyam—divine; manojïam—delicious; priyayä—by His beloved; pradattam—given; jaghäsa—ate; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; prahasan—laughing; parätmä—the Supreme Lord; kåñëena—by Kåñëa; dattam—given; kramukam—betelnuts; ca—also; rädhä—Rädhä.

     Then, in the forest groves the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa, ate four kinds of delicious divine foods His beloved offered, and Çré Rädhä chewed betelnuts Kåñëa offered.

Text 41

tataù kareëäpi karaà priyäyä
     harir gåhétvä pracacäla kuïje
jagäma jalpan madhuraà präpaçyan
     våndävanaà çré-yamunäà latäç ca

     tataù—then; kareëa—with a hand; api—also; karam—the hand; priyäyäù—of His beloved; hariù—Lord Hari; gåhétvä—taking; pracacäla—went; ku 24je—to tyhe forest grove; jagäma—went; jalpan—talking; madhuram—sweetly; prapaçyan—looking; våndävanam—at Våndävana; çré-yamunäm—Çré Yamunä; latäù—the flowering vines; ca—and.

     Taking His beloved's hand, Lord Hari walked in the forest grove. Taking sweetly as He gazed at the beautiful Yamunä, Våndävana forest, and the many flowering vines, He walked.

Text 42

çrimal-latä-kuïja-nikuïja-madhye
     niléyamänaà prahasantam eva
vilokya çäkhäntaritaà ca rädhä
     jagräha pétämbaram ävrajanté

     çrimat—beautiful; latä—of flowering vines; kuïja—grove; nikuïja—grove; madhye—in teh midst; niléyamänam—entering; prahasantam—smiling; eva—indeed; vilokya—seeing;  çäkha—a branch; antaritam—hidden behind; ca—also; rädhä—Rädhä; jagräha—grasped; péta—yellow; ambaram—grament; ävrajanté—following.

     Kåñëa laughed and disappeared in a grove of beautiful flowering vines. Seeing Him hiding behind a tree, Rädhä went up to Him and grasped His yellow garment.

Text 43

dudräva rädhä hari-hasta-padmäj
     jhaìkäram aìghryoù pratikurvaté kau
niléyamänä yamunä-nikuïje
     punar vrajanté hari-hasta-mäträt

     dudräva—ran; rädhä—Rädhä; hari—of Lord Hari;  hasta—hand; padmät—lotus; jhaìkäram—tinkling;  aìghryoù—of the feet; pratikurvaté—doing; kau—on the ground; niléyamänä—disappearing; yamunä-niku 24je—in the grove by the Yamunä; punaù—again; vrajanté—going; hari-hasta-mäträt—only by Lord Hari's hand.

     Fleeing from Lord Hari's lotus hand, Her feet thumping against the ground, She disappeared in a forest by the Yamunä, but was pulled out again by Lord Hari's hand.

Text 44

yathä tamälaù kala-dhauta-vallyä
     ghane yathä caïcalayä cakästi
nélo 'dri-räjo nikañäçma-khanyä
     çré-rädhayädyästu tayä ramaëyä

     yathä—as; tamälaù—a tamala tree; kala-dhauta-vallyä—with a vine of golden flowers; ghanaù—a dark cloud; yathä—as; caïcalayä—with lightning; cakästi—shines; nélaù—dark; adri—of mountains; räjaù—king; nikañäçma-khanyä—with a mine of nikaña stones; çré-rädhayä—with Çré Rädhä; adya—now; astu—is; tayä—with Her; ramaëyä—beautiful.

     As a tamäla tree with a vine of golden flowers, as a dark cloud with a lightning flash, and as a dark mountain with a mine of nikaña stones, so Lord Hari was with beautiful Çré Rädhä.

Text 45

çré-räsa-raìge jana-varjite pare
     reme haré räsa-raseëa rädhayä
våndävane bhåìga-mayüra-küjal-
     late caraty eva ratéçvaraù paraù

     çré—beautiful; räsa—of the räsa dance; raìge—in the arena; jana—people; varjite—without; pare—transcendental; reme—enjoyed; hariù—Lord Hari; räsa-raseëa—with the nectar of the räsa dance; rädhayä—with Rädhä; våndävane—in Våndävana; bhåìga—bees; mayüra—peacocks; küjat—cooing; late—vine; carati—moves; eva—indeed; rati—of amorous pastimes; éçvaraù—the master; paraù—transcendental.

     In the beautiful secluded räsa-dance arena Lord Hari enjoyed the nectar of the räsa dance with Çré Rädhä. Lord Hari, the transcendental master of amorous pastimes, walked in Våndävana forest filled with flowering vines and the sounds of peacocks and bees.

Text 46

çré-rädhayä kåñëa-hariù parätmä
     nanarta govardhana-kandaräsu
mattäliñu prasravanaiù sarobhir
     viräjitäsu dyutimal-latäsu

     çré-rädhayä—with Çré Rädhä; kåñëa-hariù—Kåñëa Hari;  parätmä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; nanarta—danced; govardhana—of Govarhdana Hill; kandaräsu—in the caves; matta—intoxicated; aliñu—bees; prasravanaiù—with swiftly moving streams, rapids, and waterfalls; sarobhiù—with lakes; viräjitäsu—shining; dyutimat—splendid; latäsu—vines.

     The Supreme Lord, Kåñëa-Hari, danced with Çré Rädhä in the caves of Govardhana Hill, by the lakes and the swiftly moving streams, rapids, and waterfalls, and among the splendid flowering vines filled with intoxicated bumblebees.

Text 47

cakära kåñëo yamunäà sametya
     varaà vihäraà våñabhänu-putryä
rädhä-karäl lakña-dalaà sa padmaà
     dhävan gåhétvä yamunä-jaleñu

     cakära—did; kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; yamunäm—to the Yamunä; sametya—going; varam—excellent; vihäram—pastime; våñabhänu-putryä—with King Våñabhänu's daughter; rädhä—of Rädhä; karät—from the hand; lakña—a hundred thousand; dalam—petals; saù—He; padmam—a lotus flower; dhävan—running; gåhétvä—taking; yamunä—of the Yamunä; jaleñu—in the waters.

     When They came to the Yamunä, Kåñëa enjoyed a charming pastime with King Våñabhänu's daughter. Taking the hundred-thousand-petal lotus from Rädhä's hand, He suddenly dove into the Yamunä's waters.

Text 48

rädhä hareù péta-paöaà ca vaàçéà
     vetraà gåhétvä sahasä hasanté
dehéti vaàçéà vadato hareç ca
     jagäda rädhä kamalaà nu dehi

     rädhä—Rädhä; hareù—of Lord Hari; péta—yellow;  paöam—garment; ca—and; vaàçém—flute; vetram—and stick; gåhétvä—taking; sahasä—suddenly;  hasanté—laughing; dehi—give; iti—thus; vaàçém—the flute; vadataù—saying; hareù—of Lord Hari; ca—also; jagäda—said; rädhä—Rädhä; kamalam—the lotus; nu—certainly; dehi—give.

     Laughing Rädhä quickly took Lord Hari's flute, stick, and yellow cloth. When Lord Hari said, "Give back My flute!" She mocked Him and said, "You give back My lotus!"     

Text 49

tasyai dadau deva-varo 'tha padmaà
     rädhä dadau péta-paöaà ca vaàçém
vetraà ca tasmai haraye tayoù punar
     babhüva lélä yamunä-taöeñu

     tasyai—to Her; dadau—gave; deva-varaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; atha—then; padmam—the lotus; rädhä—Rädhä; dadau—gave; péta-paöam—yellow cloth; ca—and; vaàçém—flute; vetram—stick; ca—and; tasmai—to Him; haraye—Lord Hari; tayoù—of Them; punaù—again; babhüva—was; lélä—pastime; yamunä-taöeñu—on the shore of the Yamunä.

     Lord Hari, the master of the demigods, gave Her the lotus, Rädhä gave Lord Hari His flute, stick, and yellow cloth, and They continued to enjoy pastimes by the Yamunä's shone.

Text 50

tataç ca bhäëòéravane priyäyäs
     cakära çåìgäram alaà manojïam
paträvaléyävaka-kajjalädyaiù
     puñpaiù su-ratnair vraja-gopa-ratnaù

     tataù—then; ca—also; bhäëòéravane—in Bhäëòéravana; priyäyäù—of His beloved; cakära—did; çåìgäram—decoration; alam—greatly; manojïam—beautiful; patra—pictures and designs;  avali-many; yävaka—red lac; kajjala—black kajjala; ädyaiù—beginning with; puñpaiù—with flowers; su-ratnaiù—with beautiful jewels; vraja—of Vraja; gopa—of the cowherd people; ratnaù—the jewel.

     Then, in Bhäëòéravana forest, with many flowers, beautiful jewels, and pictures drawn in red yävaka, black kajjala, and many other colors, He who is the jewel of the Vraja-gopas beautifully decorated His beloved.

Text 51

hareç ca çåìgäram alaà prakartuà
     samudyatä tatra yadä hi rädhä
tadaiva kåñëas tu babhüva bälo
     vihäya kaiçora-vapuù svayaà hi

     hareù—of Lord Hari; ca—and; çåìgäram—decoration; alam—greatly; prakartum—to do; samudyatä—eager; tatra—there; yadä—when; hi—indeed; rädhä—Rädhä; tadä—then; eva—certainly; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; tu—indeed; babhüva—became; bälaù—child; vihäya—abandoning; kaiçora—teen-age; vapuù—form;  svayam—personally; hi—indeed.

     As Rädhä was about to decorate Him, Lord Kåñëa suddenly abandoned His teen-age form and again became an infant.

Text 52

nandena dattaà çiçum eva yädåçaà
     bhümau luöhantaà prarudantam äyayau
harià vilokyäçu rurodha rädhikä
     tanoñi mäyäà nu kathaà hare mayi

     nandena—by Nanda; dattam—given; çiçum—child;  eva—indeed; yädåçam—like which; bhümau—on the ground; luöhantam—crawling; prarudantam—crying;  äyayau—went; harim—Lord Hari; vilokya—seeing;  äçu—at once; rurodha—cried; rädhikä—Rädhä; tanoñi—You manifest; mäyäm—illusion; nu—indeed; katham—why?; hare—O Lord Hari; mayi—to Me.

     He became an infant crawling on the ground and crying, just as Nanda had given Him before. When She saw Lord Hari in this way, Çré Rädhikä cried out, "O Lord Hari, why do You show this illusion to Me?"

Text 53

itthaà rudantéà sahasä viñaëëäm
     äkäça-väg äha tadaiva rädhäm
çocaà nu rädhe iha mä kuru tvaà
     manorathas te bhaviyä hi paçcät

     ittham—thus; rudantém—weeping; sahasä—at once; viñaëëäm—despondent; äkäça—from the sky; väk—a voice; äha—spoke; tadä—then; eva—indeed; rädhäm—to Rädhä; çocam—lamentation; nu—indeed; rädhe—O Rädhä; iha—here; mä—don't; kuru—do; tvam—You; manorathaù—desire; te—Your; bhaviyä—will be fulfilled; hi—indeed; paçcät—later.

     As despondent Rädhä wept, a voice from the sky said,  O Rädhä, don't lament. In time Your desire will be fulfilled."

Text 54

çrutvätha rädhä hi harià gåhétvä
     gatäçu gehe vraja-räja-patnyäù
dattvä ca bälaà kila nanda-patnyä
     uväca dattaù pathi te ca bharträ

     çrutvä—hearing; atha—then; rädhä—Rädhä; hi—indeed; harim—Lord Hari; gåhétvä—taking; gatä—went; äçu—at once; gehe—home; vraja-räja-patnyäù—of the wife of Vraja's king; dattvä—giving; ca—also; bälam—the infant; kila—indeed; nanda-patnyä—with Nanda's wife; uväca—spoke; dattaù—placed; pathi—on the pathway; te—of you; ca—also; bharträ—by Your husband.

     Hearing this, Rädhä took Lord Hari and quickly went to the home of Vraja's queen. Giving the child to Nanda's wife, She said, "Your husband gave Him to Me on the path."

Text 55

uväca rädhäà nåpa-nanda-gehiné
     dhanyäsi rädhe våñabhänu-kanyake
tvayä çiçur me parirakñito bhayän
     meghävåte vyomni bhayäturo vane

     uväca—said; rädhäm—to Rädhä; nåpa-nanda-gehiné—the wife of King Nanda; dhanyä—fortunate; asi—You are; rädhe—O Rädhä; våñabhänu-kanyake—O daughter of Våñabhänu; tvayä—by You; çiçuù—child;  me—my; parirakñitaù—protected; bhayät—from danger; megha—by clouds; ävåte—covered; vyomni—when the sky; bhayäturaù—fearful; vane—in the forest.

     King Nanda's wife said to Rädhä, "O Rädhä, O daughter of King Våñabhänu, You are fortunate. When the sky was covered with clouds and my child became frightened in the forest, You protected Him."     

Text 56

sampüjitä çläghita-saò-guëä sä
     su-nanditä çré-våñabhänu-putré
tadä hy anujïäpya yaçomatéà sä
     çanaiù sva-gehaà hi jagäma rädhä

     sampüjitä—worshiped; çläghita—praised; sat—transcendental; guëä—virtues; sä—She; su-nanditä—very pleased; çré-våñabhänu-putré—Çré Våñabhänu's daughter; tadä—then; hi—indeed; anuj 24äpya—taking permission; yaçomatém—from Yaçodä; sä—She; çanaiù—slowly; sva—to Her own; geham—house; hi—indeed; jagäma—went; rädhä—Rädhä.

     After She was greatly honored and Her transcendental virtues praised, Çré Våñabhänu's happy daughter, taking permission from Mother Yaçodä, slowly returned to Her own home.

Text 57

itthaà harer gupta-kathä ca varëitä
     rädhä-vivähasya su-maìgalävåtä
çrutä ca yair vä paöhitä ca päöhitä
     tän päpa-våndä na kadä spåçanti

     ittham—thus; hareù—of Lord Hari; gupta—secret; kathä—narrative; ca—also; varëitä—described; rädhä—with Rädhä; vivähasya—of the wedding; su-maìgala-ävåtä—filled with great auspiciousness; çrutä—heard; ca—also; yaiù—by whom; vä—heard; paöhitä—read silently; ca—and; päöhitä—read aloud; tän—to them; päpa-våndä—a host of sins; na—not; kadä—ever; spåçanti—touch.

     Sins will never touch they who hear, read silently, or recite aloud this auspicious and confidential narration of the wedding of Çré Rädhä.

Chapter Seventeen
Dadhi-steya-varëana
Description of the Yogurt Theft

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
ataù bälau kåñëa-rämau
     gaura-çyämau manoharau
lélayä cakratur alaà
     sundaraà nanda-mandiram

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ataù—then; bälau—the two boys; kåñëa-rämau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; gaura-çyämau—fair and dark; manoharau—charming; lélayä—with pastimes; cakratuù—did; alam—much; sundaram—handsome; nanda-mandiram—Nanda's palace.

     Çré Närada said: With Their pastimes the two handsome fair and dark boys, Kåñëa and Balaräma, made Nanda's palace beautiful.

Text 2

riìgamänau ca jänubhyäà
     päëébhyäà saha maithila
vrajatälpena kälena
     bruvantau madhuraà vraje

     riìgamänau—crawling; ca—also; jänubhyäm—with knees; päëébhyäm—hands; saha—with; maithila—O king of Mithilä; vrajatä—gone; alpena—a little; kälena—time; bruvantau—talking; madhuram—sweetly; vraje—in Vraja.

     O king of Mithilä, They crawled on Their hands and knees and soon They were speaking sweet words in Vraja.

Text 3

yaçodayä ca rohiëyä
     lälitau poñitau çiçü
kadä vinirgatäv aìkät
     kvacid aìkaà samästhitau

     yaçodayä—by Yaçodä; ca—and; rohiëyä—Rohiëé; lälitau—caressed; poñitau—nourished; içü—the two boys; kadä—when?; vinirgatau—gone; aìkät—from the lap; kvacit—where?; aìkam—a lap; samästhitau—staying.

     Yaçodä and Rohiëé fed, fondled and caressed the two boys. When did the boys leave their laps? To whose lap did They go?

Text 4

maïjéra-kiìkiné-rävaà
     kurvantau täv itas tataù
tri-lokéà mohayantau dvau
     mäyä-bälaka-vigrahau

     maïjéra—of anklets; kiìkiné—and bells; rävam—sounds; kurvantau—making; tau—They; itas tataù—here and there; tri-lokém—the three worlds; mohayantau—enchanting; dvau—both; mäyä—by the Yogamäyä potency; bälaka—children; vigrahau—forms.

     Tinkling Their anklets and small bells, They enchanted the three worlds as They went here and there. By the influence of Their Yogamäyä potency They manifested the forms of two small boys. 

Text 5

kréòantam ädäya çiçuà yaçodä-
     jire luöhantaà vraja-bälakaiç ca
tad-dhüli-lepävåta-dhüñaräìgaà
     cakre hy alaà prokñaëam ädareëa

     kréòantam—playing; ädäya—taking; çiçum—boy; yaçodä— Yaçodä; ajire—in the ourtyard; luöhantam—rolling about; vraja—of Vraja; bälakaiù—with the boys; ca—and; tat—of that; dhüli—dust; lepä—ointment; ävåta—covered; dhüñara—darkened; aìgam—limbs; cakre—id; hi—indeed; alam—greatly; prokñaëam—sprinkling; ädareëa—with respect.

     When her son's limbs were dark, anointed with dust by playing in the courtyard with the boys of Vraja, Yaçodä took Him and bathed Him with great care.

Text 6

jänu-dvayäbhyäà ca samaà karäbhyäà
     punar vrajan praìganam etya kåñëaù
mätr-aìka-deçe punar ävrajan san
     babhau vraje keçari-bäla-lélaù

     jänu-dvayäbhyäm—both knees; ca—and; samam—with; karäbhyäm—both hands; punaù—again; vrajan—going; praìganam—to the courtyard; etya—going; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; mätå—of His mother; aìka-deçe—on the lap; punaù—again; ävrajan—returning; san—being so; babhau—was splendidly manifested; vraje—in Vraja; keçari—lion; bäla—cub; lélaù—pastimes.

     On His hands and knees crawling first to the courtyard and then to His mother's lap, Kåñëa was like a lion cub splendidly playing in Vraja. 

Text 7

taà sarvato haimana-citra-yuktaà
     pétämbaraà kaïcukam ädadhänam
sphurat-prabhaà ratnamayaà ca maulià
     dåñövä sutaà präpa mudaà yaçodä

     tam—Him; sarvataù—completely; haimana—golden; citra—designs; yuktam—endowed; pétämbaraà kaïcukam—yellow garments; ädadhänam—wearing; sphurat-prabham—splendid; ratnamayam—jeweled; ca—and; maulim—crown; dåñövä—seeing; sutam—her son; präpa—attained; mudam—happiness; yaçodä—Yaçodä.

     Gazing at her son dressed in yellow garments decorated with gold and splendid with a crown of jewels, Yaçodä became happy.

Text 8

bälaà mukundam ati-sundara-bäla-kelià
     dåñövä paraà mudam aväpur atéva gopyaù
çré-nanda-räja-vrajam etya gåhaà vihäya
     sarväs tu vismåta-gåhäù sukha-vigrahäs täù

     bälam—child; mukundam—Mukunda; ati-sundara—very handsome; bäla—childhood; kelim—pastimes; dåñövä—seeing; param—great; mudam—happiness; aväpuù—attained; atéva—great; gopyaù—gopés; çré-nanda-räja-vrajam—the cowherd village of King Nanda; etya—attaining; gåham—home; vihäya—leaving; sarväù—all; tu—certainly; vismåta—forgotten; gåhäù—homes; sukha—happy; vigrahäù—forms; täù—they.

     Forgetting their homes, leaving them behind and coming to King Nanda's cowherd village, all the gopés gazed at the charming and playful child Mukunda and became very happy.

Text 9

çré-nanda-räja-gåha-kåtrima-siàha-rüpaà
     dåñövä vrajan pratiravan nåpa bhiruvad yaù
nétvä ca taà nija-sutaà gåham ävrajantéà
     gopyo vraje sa-ghåëayä hy avadan yaçodäm

     çré-nanda-räja—of King Nanda; gåha—in the home; kåtrima—artificial; siàha—lion; rüpam—form; dåñövä—seeing; vrajan—going; pratiravan—roaring a challenge; nåpa—O king; bhiruvat—frightening; yaù—who; nétvä—leading; ca—and; tam—Him; nija—his own; sutam—son; gåham—home; ävrajantém—coming; gopyaù—the gopés; vraje—in Vraja; sa-ghåëayä—with compassion; hi—indeed; avadan—told; yaçodäm—Yaçodä.

     When infant Kåñëa saw the statue of a lion at the entrance to King Nanda's home, He became frightened and began to cry. The gopés took Him inside and compassionately spoke to Yaçodä.

Text 10

çré-gopya ücuù 
kréòärthaà cäpalaà hy enaà
     mä bahiù kärayäìganät
bäla-kelià dugdha-mukhaà
     käka-pakña-dharaà çubhe

     çré-gopyaù ücuù—the gopés said; kréòä—playing; artham—for the purpose; cäpalam—restless; hi—indeed; enam—He; mä—don't; bahiù—outside; käraya—take; aìganät—from the courtyard; bäla—child's; kelim—playing; dugdha—milk; mukham—in His mouth; käka—crow's; pakña—feathers; dharam—wearing; çubhe—O beautiful one.

     The gopés said: O beautiful one, don't take this restless and playful boy decorated with crows' feathers and the milk still in His mouth out of the courtyard to play. 

Text 11

ürdhva-danta-dvayaà jätaà
     pürvaà mätula-doña-dam
asyäpi mätulo nästi
     te sutasya yaçomati

     ürdhva—upper; danta—teeth; dvayam—two; jätam—born; pürvam—before; mätula—of the maternal uncle; doña—fault; dam—giving; asya—of Him; api—even; mätulaù—maternal uncle; na—not; asti—is; te—of your; sutasya—sun; yaçomati—O Yaçodä.

     O Yaçodä, your son's two front teeth have now appeared. Now his maternal uncle should perform a ceremony to ward off inauspiciousness, but your son has no maternal uncle.

Text 12

tasmäd dänaà tu kartavyaà
     vighnänäà näça-hetave
go-vipra-sura-sädhünäà
     chandasaà püjanaà tathä

     tasmät—therefore; dänam—charity; tu—certainly; kartavyam—should be given; vighnänäm—of obstacles; näça—destruction; hetave—for the cause; gaù—tp the cows; vipra—brähmaëas; sura—demigods; sädhünäm—and saintly devotees; chandasam—Vedic mantras; püjanam—worship; tathä—so.

     Therefore, to destroy all obstacles you should give charity, chant Vedic prayers, and worship the cows, brähmaëas, demigods, and saintly devotees.

Text 13

çré-närada uväca 
tadä yaçodä-rohiëyau
     suta-kalyäna-hetave
vastra-ratna-navännänäà
     dänaà nityaà ca cakratuù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; yaçodä-rohiëyau—Yaçodä and Rohiëé; suta—of the son; kalyäna-hetave—for the auspiciousness; vastra—garments; ratna—jewels; nava—new; annänäm—and grains; dänaà-charity; nityam—regularly; ca—and; cakratuù—did.

     Then, to bring auspiciousness to their sons, Yaçodä and Rohiëé regularly gave garments, jewels, and new grains in charity.

Text 14

atha vraje räma-kåñëau
     bäla-siàhävalokanau
padbhyäà calantau ghoñeñu
     vardhamänau babhüvatuù

     atha—then; vraje—in Vraja; räma—Balaräma; kåñëau—and Kåñëa; bäla-siàha—lion cubs; avalokanau—glance; padbhyäm—with their feet; calantau—walking; ghoñeñu—in the cowherds' homes; vardhamänau—growing; babhüvatuù—became.

     Now walking on their two feet among the gopas's homes, and their glances like those of a lion's cub, Kåñëa and Balaräma grew in the village of Vraja.

Text 15

çrédäma-subalädyaiç ca
     vayasyair vraja-bälakaiù
yamunä-sikate çubhre
     luöhantau sa-kutühalau

     çrédäma-subalädyaiù—headed by Çrédäma and Subala; ca—also; vayasyaiù—with friends; vraja-bälakaiù—the boys of Vraja; yamunä—of the Yamunä; sikate—on the beach; çubhre—beautiful; luöhantau—wandering; sa-kutühalau—playing.

     With the boys of Vraja, Their friends headed by Çrédämä and Subala, They played on the Yamunä's sandy shore.

Text 16

kälindy-upavane çyämais
     tamälaiù sa-ghanair våte
kadamba-kuïja-çobhäòhye
     ceratü räma-keçvau

     kälindé—of the Yamunä; upavane—in the gardens; çyämaiù—with dark; tamälaiùtamala trees; sa-ghanaiù—sturdy; våte—filled; kadamba—of kadamba trees; kuïja—grove; çobhä—beauty; aòhye—rich; ceratuù—moved; räma-keçvau—Kåñëa and Balaräma.

     In the Yamunä's forests opulent with kadamba groves and sturdy black tamäla trees, Kåñëa and Balaräma walked.

Text 17

janayan gopa-gopénäm
     änandaà bäla-lélayä
vayasyaiç corayäm äsa
     navanétaà ghåtaà hariù

     janayan—creating; gopa-gopénäm—of the gopas and gopés; änandam—bliss; bäla-lélayä—with childhood pastimes; vayasyaiù—with friends; corayäm äsa—stole; navanétam—butter; ghåtam—and ghee; hariù—Lord Hari.

     Delighting the gopas and gopés with His childhood pastimes, with His friends Lord Hari stole butter and ghee.

Text 18

ekadä hy upanandasya
     patné nämnä prabhävaté
çré-nanda-mandiraà präptä
     yaçodäà präha gopikä

     ekadä—once; hi—indeed; upanandasya—of Upananda; patné—the wife; nämnä—by name; prabhävaté—Prabhävaté; çré-nanda-mandiram—to Nanda's palace; präptä—come; yaçodäm—to Yaçodä; präha—said; gopikä—the gopé.

     One day Prabhävaté-gopé, who was Upananda's wife, came to Nanda's palace and spoke to Yaçodä.

Text 19

çré-prabhävaty uväca 
navanétaà ghåtaà dugdhaà
     dadhià takraà yaçomati
ävayor bheda-rahitaà
     tvat-prasädäc ca me 'bhavat

     çré-prabhävaté uväca—Çré Prabhävaté said; navanétam—butter; ghåtam—ghee; dugdham—milk; dadhim—yogurt; takram—buttermilk; yaçomati—Yaçodä; ävayoù—of us; bheda—difference; rahitam—without; tvat-prasädät—by your mercy; ca—also; me—of me; abhavat—was.

     Çré Prabhävaté said: O Yaçodä, for the two of us there is no separate property in butter, ghee, milk, yogurt, and buttermilk. By your kindness yours is also mine.

Text 20

nähaà vadämi cänena
     steyaà kuträpi çikñitam
çikñaà karoñi na sute
     navanéta-muñi svataù

     na—not; aham—I; vadämi—say; ca—also; anena—by Him; steyam—to be stolen; kuträpi—somewhere; çikñitam—taught; çikñam—teaching; karoñi—you do; na—not; sute—to your son; navanéta—butter; muñi—stealing; svataù—by Himself.

     I don't say you taught Him to steal. You didn't teach Him. Your son steals butter on His own.

Text 21

yadä mayä kåtä çikñä
     tadä dhåñöas taväìgajaù
gäli-pradänaà dattvayaà
     dravati praìganän mama

     yadä—when; mayä—by me; kåtä—done; çikñä—instruction; tadä—then; dhåñöaù—bold; tava—your; aìgajaù—son; gäli—bad words; pradänam—gift; dattvä—giving; ayam—He; dravati—runs; praìganät—from the courtyard; mama—my.

     When I try to give Him good instruction, Your arrogant son gives me bad words and runs from my courtyard.

Text 22

vrajädhéçasya putro 'yaà
     bhütvä steyaà samäcaret
na mayä kathitaà kiïcid
     yaçode tava gauravät

     vrajädhéçasya—of the king of Vraja; putraù—the son; ayam—He; bhütvä—having become; steyam—theft; samäcaret—may perform; na—not; mayä—by me; kathitam—told; kiïcit—something; yaçode—O Yaçodä; tava—for you; gauravät—out of respect.

     He is the son of Vraja's king. He should not steal. O Yaçodä, there are some other things also that, out of respect for you, I have not told.

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvä prabhävaté-väkyaà
     yaçodä nanda-gehiné
bälaà nirbhartsya täm äha
     sämnä prema-paräyanä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; çrutvä—hearing; prabhävaté-väkyam—Prabhavati's words; nanda—Nanda's; gehiné—wife; bälam—the boy; nirbhartsya—rebuking; tam—to Him; äha—said; sämnä—with sweet words; prema-paräyanä—full of love.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing Prabhävaté's words, Yaçodä, the wife of Nanda, rebuked her son, and with great love gently spoke to Prabhävaté.

Text 24

çré-yaçodoväca 
gaväà koöir gåhe me 'sti
     gorasair arditäcalä
na jäne dadhi-muì bälo
     nätti so 'tra kadäcana

     çré-yaçodä uväca—Çré Yaçodä said; gaväm—of cows; koöiù—ten million; gåhe—in the home; me—of me; asti—is; gorasaiù—with milk; arditä—overcome; acalä—cannot move; na—not; jäne—I know; dadhi—milk; muk—in the mouth; bälaù—child; na—not; atti—eats; saù—He; atra—here; kadäcana—ever.

     Çré Yaçodä said: I have ten million cows. There is so much yogurt in the house I cannot move. I do not know why my little boy never drinks any of the yogurt here.

Text 25

anena muñitaà gavyaà
     tat-samaà tvaà gåhäëa me
te çiçau me çiçau bhedo
     nästi kiïcit prabhävati

     anena—by Him; muñitam—stolen; gavyam—yogurt; tat-samam—like that; tvam—you; gåhäëa—give; me—to me; te—your; çiçau—boy; me—my; çiçau—boy; bhedaù—difference; na—not; asti—is; kiïcit—at all; prabhävati—O Prabhävaté.

     Bring this yogurt-thief to me. O Prabhävaté, there is no difference between your son and my son.

Text 26

navanéta-mukhaà cainam
     atra tvaà hy änayiñyasi
tadä çikñäà kariñyämi
     bhartsanaà bandhanaà tathä

     navanéta-mukham—butter on His mouth; ca—also; enam—Him; atra—here; tvam—you; hi—indeed; änayiñyasi—will bring; tadä—then; çikñäm—a lesson; kariñyämi—I will do; bhartsanam—rebuke; bandhanam—tying up; tathä—then.

     You bring that boy here with butter in His mouth and I will give Him a lesson. I will scold Him and tie Him up.

Text 27

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvä väkyaà tadä gopé
     prasannä gåham ägatä
ekadä dadhi-cauryärthaà
     kåñëas tasyä gåhaà gataù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; çrutvä—hearing; väkyam—these words; tadä—then; gopé—the gopé; prasannä—happy; gåham—home; ägatä—came; ekadä—one day; dadhi—of yogurt; caurya—theft; artham—for the purpose; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; tasyä—of her; gåham—to the home; gataù—went.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these words, the gopé became happy and went home. Then one day Kåñëa went to her home to steal yogurt.

Text 28

vayasyair bälakaiù särdhaà
     pärçva-kuòye gåhasya ca
hastäd dhastaà saìgåhétvä
     çanaiù kåñëo viveça ha

     vayasyaiù—with His friends; bälakaiù—the boys; särdham—with; pärçva—side; kuòye—on the wall; gåhasya—of the house; ca—also; hastät—by a hand; hastam—to a hand; saìgåhétvä—grasping; çanaiù—gradually; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; viveça ha—entered.

     Grasping it with one hand after another, Kåñëa and His boy friends gradually scaled the outer wall and entered the courtyard.

Text 29

çikya-sthaà gorasaà dåñövä
    hastägrähyaà hariù svayam
ulükhale péöhake ca
     gopän sthäpyäruroha tam

     çikya-stham—suspended on ropes; gorasam—yogurt; dåñövä—seeing; hasta-with a hand; agrähyam—not graspable; hariù—Lord Hari; svayam—personally; ulükhale—on a grinding-mortar; péöhake—footstool; ca—and; gopän—the gopas; sthäpya—placing; äruroha—climbed; tam—that.

     Seeing the yogurt was in a jug hanging on ropes beyond His hand's reach, by arranging a footstool, a grinding mortar, and the gopa boys, Lord Hari climbed up to it.

Text 30

tad api praàçunälabhyaà
     gorasaà çikya-saàsthitam
çrédämnä subalenäpi
     daëòenäpi tatäòa ca

     tat—that; api—and; praàçunä—tall; alabhyam—not attainable; gorasam—yogurt; çikya-saàsthitam—in the jug hanging on ropes; çrédämnä—by Çrédämä; subalena—by Subala; api—also; daëòena—with a stick; api—also; tatäòa—struck; ca—and.

     When even from that height the yogurt-jar hanging from ropes could not be reached, Çrédämä and Subala hit the jar with sticks.

Text 31

bhagna-bhäëòät sarva-gavyaà
     vahad bhümau manoharam
jaghäsa subalo markair
     bälakaiù saha mädhavaù

     bhagna—broken; bhäëòät—from the jar; sarva—all; gavyam—the yogurt; vahat—flowing; bhümau—to the ground; manoharam—charming; jaghäsa—ate; subalaù—Subala; markaiù—with the monkeys; bälakaiù—the boys; saha—with; mädhavaù—Kåñëa.

     As all the beautiful yogurt flowed from the broken jug to the ground, Kåñëa, Subala, the boys, and some monkeys, all ate it.

Text 32

bhagna-bhäëòa-svanaà çrutvä
     präpta gopé prabhävaté
paläyiteñu bäleñu
     jagräha çré-karaà hareù

     bhagna—broken; bhäëòa—jug; svanam—the sound; çrutvä—hearing; präptä—came; gopé—the gopé; prabhävaté—Prabhävaté; paläyiteñu—fled; bäleñu—when the boys; jagräha—grabbed; çré-karam—the beautiful hand; hareù—of Lord Hari.

     Hearing the sound of the jug breaking, the gopé Prabhävaté came. As the boys fled, she grabbed Lord Hari's beautiful hand.

Text 33

nétvä måñäçru bhéruà ca
     gacchanté nanda-mandiram
agre nandaà sthitaà dåñövä
     mukhe vastraà cakära ha

     nétvä—bringing; måñä—false; açru—tears; bhérum—frightened; ca—and; gacchanté—going; nanda—Nanda's; mandiram—to the palace; agre—before; nandam—Nanda; sthitam—standing; dåñövä—seeing; mukhe—in the mouth; vastram—cloth; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     As frightened Kåñëa shed false tears, she brought Him to Nanda's palace. Seeing Nanda standing there, she covered Kåñëa's face with the edge of His garment.

Text 34

harir vicintayann itthaà
     mätä daëòaà pradäsyati
dadhära tad-bäla-rüpaà
     svacchanda-gatir éçvaraù

     hariù—Lord Hari; vicintayan—thinking; ittham—thus; mätä—His mother; daëòam—a stick; pradäsyati—gave; dadhära—manifested; tad-bäla-rüpam—that child's form; svacchanda-gatiù—independent; éçvaraù—Supreme Controller.

     Lord Hari thought, "My mother will hit Me with a stick." The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who can do whatever He likes, then manifested the form of Prabhävaté's son.

Text 35

sä yaçodä sametyäçu
     präha gopé ruñänvitä
bhäëòaà bhagné-kåtaà sarvaà
     muñitaà dadhy anena vai

     sä—she; yaçodä—Yaçodä; sametya—coming; äçu—quickly; präha—said; gopé—gopé; ruñänvitä—angry; bhäëòam—the jug; bhagné-kåtam—broken; sarvam—everything; muñitam—stolen; dadhi—yogurt; anena—by Him; vai—certainly.

     Yaçodä quickly came. The angry gopé said, "He broke a jug and stole all the yogurt in it."

Text 36

yaçodä tat-sutaà vékñya
     hasanté präha gopikäm
vasträntaà ca mukhäd gopi
     düré-kåtya vadäàhasaù

     yaçodä—Yaçodä; tat-sutam—her son; vékñya—looking; hasanté—laughing; präha—said; gopikäm—to the gopé; vastra—garment; antam—end; ca—and; mukhät—from the mouth; gopé—the gopé; düré-kåtya—taking far away; vada—tell; aàhasaù—the offense.

     Seeing Her son, Yaçodä smiled and said to the gopé, “O gopé, take the edge of the garment from His face and tell the mischief He has done.

Text 37

apavädo yadä deyo
     nirväsaà kuru me purät
yuñmat-putra-kåtaà cauryaà
     asmat-putra-kåtaà bhavet

     apavädaù—the account of His offense; yadä—when; deyaù—given; nirväsam—sending away; kuru—do; me—of me; purät—from the house; yuñmat—your; putra—son; kåtam—done; cauryam—theft; asmat—my; putra—son; kåtam—done; bhavet—may be.

     "When it may be said my son has done mischief you may throw Him out of my house. Your son did the theft you say my son did."

Text 38

jana-lajjä-samäyuktä
     düré-kåtya mukhämbaram
säpi präha nijaà bälaà
     vékñya vismita-mänasä

     jana—of the people; lajjä—embarrassment; samäyuktä—with; düré-kåtya—put far away; mukha—face; ambaram—cloth; sä—she; api—also; präha—said; nijam—to her own; bälam—boy; vékñya—looking; vismita—surprised; mänasä—heart.

     Ashamed of what people might think, she took the cloth from His face. Seeing her own son, she was surprised at heart and said:

Text 39

niñpadas tvaà kutaù präpto
     vraja-säro 'sti me kare
vadantétthaà ca taà nétvä
     nirgatä nanda-mandirät

     niñpadaù—without walking; tvam—you; kutaù—how?; präptaù—come; vraja—of Vraja; säraù—the treasure; asti—is; me—of me; kare—in the hand; vadanté—saying; ittham—thus; ca—and; tam—him; nétvä—bringing; nirgatä—left; nanda—of Nanda; mandirät—the palace.

     "How did you come here without walking? I have the treasure of Vraja in my hand!" Saying this, and taking him with her, she left Nanda's palace.

Text 40

yaçodä rohiëé nando
     rämo gopaç ca gopikäù
jahäsuù kathayantas te
     dåñöo 'nyäyo vraje mahän

     yaçodä—Yaçodä; rohiëé—Rohiëé; nandaù—Nanda; rämaù—Balaräma; gopäù—the gopas; ca—and; gopikäù—gopés; jahäsuù—laughed; kathayantaù—talking; te—they; dåñöaù—seen; anyäyaù—injustice; vraje—in Vraja; mahän—great.

     Yaçodä, Rohiëé, Nanda, Balaräma, and the gopas and gopés laughed, saying, "Today we saw a great injustice in Vraja."

Text 41

bhagaväàs tu bahir véthyäà
     bhütvä çré-nanda-nandanaù
prahasan gopikäà präha
     dhåñöäìgaç caïcalekñaëaù

     bhagavän—the Lord; tu—certainly; bahiù—outside; véthyäm—on the path; bhütvä—becoming; çré-nanda-nandanaù—the son of Nanda; prahasan—laughing; gopikäm—to a gopé; präha—said; dhåñöäìgaù—bold; caïcala—restless; ékñaëaù—eyes.

     On the path outside again becoming Nanda's son, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, smiling, confident, and His eyes restless, spoke to the gopé Prabhävaté.

Text 42

çré-bhagavän uväca 
punar mäà yadi gåhëäsi
     kadäcit tvaà he gopike
te bhärtå-rüpas tu tadä
     bhaviñyämi na saàçayaù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; punaù—again; mäm—to Me; yadi—if; gåhëäsi—you are kind; kadäcit—sometime; tvam—you; he gopike—O gopé; te—of you; bhärtå—of the husband; rüpaù—in the form; tu—certainly; tadä—then; bhaviñyämi—I will become; na—not; saàçayaù—doubt.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O gopé, if you capture Me again, I will take the form of your husband. There is no doubt of it.

Text 43

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvä sä vismitä gopé
     gatä gehe 'tha maithila
tadä sarva-gåhe gopyo
     na gåhëanti harià hriyä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; çrutvä—hearing; sä—she; vismitä—struck with wonder; gopé—the gopé; gatä—went; gehe—home; atha—then; maithila—O king of Mithilä; tadä—then; sarva-gåhe—in every home; gopyaù—the gopés; na—not; gåhëanti—took; harim—Lord Hari; hriyä—out of embarrassment.

     O king of Mithilä, when she heard this, the astonished gopé went home. From then on, in every home, impelled by fear of embarrassment, the gopés would not capture Kåñëa.
.pa

Chapter Eighteen
Brahmäëòa-darçanam
Vision of the Universal Form

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
gopé-gåheñu vicaran navanéta-cauraù
     çyämo manohara-vapur nava-kaïja-netraù
çré-bäla-candra iva våddhi-gato naräëäà
     cittaà harann iva cakära vraje ca çobhäm

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; gopé—of the gopés; gåheñu—in the homes; vicaran—thinking; navanéta—of butter; cauraù—the thief; çyämaù—dark; manohara—charming; vapuù—form; nava—new; kaïja—lotus; netraù—eyes; çré—handsome; bäla—rising; candraù—moon; iva—like; våddhi-gataù—full; naräëäm—of men; cittam—the heart; haran—stealing; iva—like; cakära—did; vraje—in Vraja; ca—also; çobhäm—beauty.

     Çré Närada said: Wandering from one to another of the gopés' homes and stealing the hearts of the cowherd people, that charming, handsome, blossoming-lotus-eyed dark butter-thief, like a rising full moon, brought great beauty to Vraja.

Text 2

çré-nanda-nandanam atéva calaà gåhétvä
     gehaà nidhäya mumuhur nava-nanda-gopäù
sat-kandukaiç ca satataà paripälayanto
     gäyanta ürjita-sukhä na jagat smarantaù

     çré-nanda-nandanam—the son of Nanda; atéva—very; calam—restless; gåhétvä—taking; geham—home; nidhäya—placing; mumuhuù—became enchanted; nava-nanda-gopäù—the nine Nanda-gopas; sat-kandukaiù—with toy balls; ca—and; satatam—always; paripälayantaù—protecting; gäyantaù—singing; ürjita-sukhäù—very happy; na—not; jagat—the world; smarantaù—remembering.

     Taking Nanda's restless ball-playing son into their homes, protecting Him, feeding Him, singing His glories, and so happy they did not remember anything else in the world, the nine Nanda-gopas were completely enchanted.

Text 3

çré-räjoväca 
navopananda-nämäni
     vada deva-åñe mama
aho bhägyaà tu yeñäà vai
     te pürvaà ke ihägatäù

tathä ñaò-våñabhänünäà
     karmäëi maìgaläni ca

     çré-räjä uväca—the king said; nava-upananda-nämäni—named the nine Upanandas; vada—tell; deva-åñe—O sage of the demigods; mama—to me; ahaù—Oh; bhägyam—good fortune; tu—indeed; yeñäm—of whom; vai—indeed; te—they; pürvam—before; ke—who?; iha—here; ägatäù—arrived; tathä—so; ñaò-våñabhänünäm—of the six Våñabhänus; karmäëi—activities; maìgaläni—auspicious; ca—and.

     The king said: Who were the fortunate nine Upanandas in their previous birth? What were the auspicious deeds of the six Våñabhänus? O sage of the demigods, please tell me.

Texts 4 and 5

çré-närada uväca 
gäyaç ca vimalaù çréçaù
     çrédharo maìgaläyanaù

maìgalo raìgavalléço
     raìgojir devanäyakaù
nanda-nandäç ca kathitä
     babhüvur gokule vraje

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; gäyaù—Gäya; ca—and; vimalaù—Vimala; çréçaù—Çréça; çrédharaù—Çrédhara; maìgaläyanaù—Maìgaläyana; maìgalaù—Maìgala; raìgavalléçaù—Raìgavalléça; raìgojiù—Raìgoji; devanäyakaù—Devanäyaka; nava-nandäù—the nine Nandas; ca—also; kathitäù—said; babhüvuù—were; gokule—in Gokula; vraje—in Vraja.

     Çré Närada said: Gäya, Vimala, Çréça, Çrédhara, Maìgaläyana, Maìgala, Raìgavalléça, Raìgoji, and Devanäyaka were the nine Nandas in Gokula Vraja.

Text 6

vétihotro 'gni-bhuk sämbaù
     çrékaro gopatiù çrutaù
vrajeçaù pävanaù çänta
     upanandäù prakértitäù

     vétihotraù—Vitihotre; agnibhuk—Agnibhuk; sämbaù—Samba; çrékaraù—Srikara; gopatihGopati; çrutaù—Sruta; vrajeçaù—Vrajesa; pävanaù—Pavana; çäntas+Santa; upanandäù—the Upanandas; prakértitäù—were said.

     Vétihotra, Agnibhuk, Sämba, Çrékara, Gopati, Çruta, Vrajeça, Pävana, and Çänta were called the Upanandas. 

Text 7

nétivin märgadaù çuklaù
     pataìgo divyavähanaù
gopeñtäç ca vraje räjan
     jätäù ñaò-våñabhänavaù

     nétivin—Nitivin; märgadaù—Margada; çuklaù—Sukla; pataìgaù—Patanga; divyavähanaù—Divyavahana; gopeñtäù—Gopesta; ca—and;' vraje—in Vraja; räjan—O king; jätäù—born; ñaò-våñabhänavaù—the six Våñabhänus.

     Nétivin, Märgada, Çukla, Pataìga, Divyavähana, and Gopeñöa were the six Våñabhänus in Vraja, O king.

Text 8

goloke kåñëacandrasya
     nikuïja-dväram äçritäù
vetra-hastäù çyämaläìgä
     nava-nandäç ca te småtäù

     goloke—in Goloka; kåñëacandrasya—of Lord Kåñëacandra; nikuïja-dväram—two groves. äçritäù—sheltered; vetra-hastäù—with sticks in their hands; çyämaläìgäù—dark bodies; nava-nandäù—the nine Nandas; ca—also; te—they; småtäù—remembered.

     Småti-çästra explains that the nine Nandas, who have dark complexions and hold sticks in their hands, reside in two forest-groves in Lord Kåñëacandra's Goloka.

Text 9

nikuïje koöiço gävas
     täsäà pälana-tat-paräù
vaàçé-mäyüra-pakñäòhyä
     upanandäç ca te småtäù

     nikuïje—in the forest grove; koöiçaù—millions; gävaù—of cows; täsäm—of them; pälana—to protection; tat-paräù—devoted; vaàçé—flutes; mäyüra-pakña—and peacock feathers; äòhyäù—wealthy; upanandäù—the Upanandas; ca—also; te—they; småtäù—remembered.

     Småti-çästra explains that the nine Nandas, wealthy in flutes and peacock feathers, are devoted to protecting the millions of cows in their forest grove.

Text 10

nikuïja-durga-rakñäyäà
     daëòa-päça-dharäù sthitäù
ñaò-dväram ästhitäù ñaò vai
     kathitä våñabhävanaù

     nikuïja—the forest grove; durga—of the fortress; rakñäyäm—in protection; daëòa—sticks; päça—and nooses; dharäù—holding; sthitäù—standing; ñaò-dväram—six gates; ästhitäù—situated; ñaò—six; vai—indeed; kathitäù—called; våñabhävanaù—the Våñabhänus.

     The men who, holding sticks and nooses, stand at six gates to protect the fortress of this forest grove are called the six Våñabhänus.

Text 11

çré-kåñëasyecchayä sarvaà
     golokäd ägatä bhuvi
teñäà prabhävaà vaktuà hi
     na samarthaç catur-mukhaù

     çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; icchayä—by the desire; sarvam—all; golokät—from Goloka; ägatäù—came; bhuvi—to the earth; teñäm—of them; prabhävam—the glory; vaktum—to say; hi—indeed; na—not; samarthaù—Brahmä; catur-mukhaù—who has four mouths.

     By Lord Kåñëa's wish they all went from Goloka to this earth. Even the demigod Brahmä is not able to describe their glories.

Text 12

ahaà kim u vadiñyämi
     teñäà bhägyaà mahodayam
yeñäm äroham ästhäya
     bäla-kelir babhau hariù

     aham—I; kim u—how?; vadiñyämi—will describe; teñäm—of them; bhägyam—the good fortune; mahä-udayam—great; yeñäm—of whom; äroham—the exalted position; ästhäya—accepting; bäla—childhood; keliù—pastimes; babhau—manifested; hariù—Lord Hari.

     How can I describe their good fortune? As He manifested His childhood pastimes, Lord Hari treated them with great respect.

Text 13

ekadä yamunä-tére
     måt kåñëenävaléòhitä
yaçodäà bälakäù prähur
     atti bälo mådaà tava

     ekadä—one day; yamunä-tére—on the shore of the Yamunä; måt—clay; kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; avaléòhitä—was eaten; yaçodäm—to Yaçodä; bälakäù—the boys; prähuù—said; atti—ate; bälaù—the boy; mådam—clay; tava—your.

     One day Kåñëa ate clay on the Yamunä's bank. The boys said to Yaçodä, "Your boy ate clay."

Text 14

balabhadre ca vadati
     tadä sä nanda-gehiné
kare gåhitvä sva-sutaà
     bhéru-netram uväca ha

     balabhadre—when Balaräma; ca—also; vadati—said; tadä—then; sä—she; nanda-gehiné—Nanda's wife; kare—by the hand; gåhitvä—taking; sva—own; sutam—son; bhéru—frightened; netram—eyes; uväca ha—said.

     When Balaräma also said it, Nanda's wife took her frightened-eyed son by the hand and spoke to Him.

Text 15

çré-yasodoväca 
kasmän mådaà bhakñitavän rasajïo
     bhavän vayasyäç ca vadanti säkñät
jyäyän balo 'yaà vadati prasiddhaà
     mä evam arthaà na jahäti neñöum

     çré-yasodä uväca—Çré Yaçodä said; kasmät—why?; mådam—clay; bhakñitavän—ate; rasajïaù—who knows what is good to eat; bhavän—You; vayasyäù—friends; ca—also; vadanti—say; säkñät—directly; jyäyän—elder brother; balaù—Balaräma; ayam—He; vadati—says; prasiddham—proved; mä—O mother; evam—in this way; artham—meaning; na—not; jahäti—abandons; neñöum—clay.

     Çré Yaçodä said: Why did You, who know what is good to eat, eat clay? Your friends say You did. Your elder brother Balaräma said, "O mother, it is true. He would not leave the clay."

Text 16

çré-bhagavän uväca 
sarve måñä-väda-ratä vrajärbhakä
     mätar mayä kväpi na måt prabhakñitä
yadä samécénam anena väk-pathaà
     tadä mukhaà paçya madéyam aïjasä

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; sarve—all; måñä-väda-ratäù—lying; vrajärbhakäù—the boys of Vraja; mätaù—O mother; mayä—by Me; kväpi—ever; na—not; måt—clay; prabhakñitä—eaten; yadä—when; samécénam—truth; anena—by this; väk-patham—words; tadä—then; mukham—mouth; paçya—look; madéyam—My; aïjasä—at once.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: The boys of Vraja are all lying. I never ate clay. I speak the truth. Look in My mouth.

Text 17

çré-närada uväca 
atha gopé bälakasya
     paçyanté sundaraà mukham
prasäritaà ca dadåçe
     brahmäëòaà racitaà guëaiù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; gopé—the gopé; bälakasya—of the boy; paçyanté—looking; sundaram—handsome; mukham—mouth; prasäritam—manifested; ca—and; dadåçe—saw; brahmäëòam—the universe; racitam—created; guëaiù—by the modes of nature.

     Çré Närada said: When the gopé looked in her boy's handsome mouth she saw the entire material universe created by the modes of nature.

Texts 18 and 19

sapta-dvépän sapta-sindhün
     sa-khaëòän sa-girén dåòhän
ä-brahmalokäl lokäàs trén
     svätmabhiù sa-vrajaiù saha

dåñövä nimilitäkñé sä
     bhütvä çré-yamunä-taöe
bälo 'yaà me hariù säkñäd
     iti jïänamayé hy abhüt

     sapta-dvipän—seven continents; sapta-sindhün—seven oceans; sa-khaëòän—with their divisions; sa-girén—with mountains; dåòhän—great; ä-brahmalokät—from Brahmaloka; lokän—planets; trén—three; svätmabhiù—with her relatives; sa-vrajaiù—the people of Vraja; saha—with; dåñövä—seeing; nimilita—closed; akñé—eyes; sä—she; bhütvä—becoming; çré-yamunä-taöe—on the shore of the Yamunä; bälaù—boy; ayam—this; me—my; hariù—Lord Hari; säkñät—directly; iti—thus; jïänamayé—having the knowledge; hi—indeed; abhüt—became.

     Seeing there the seven continents, seven oceans, the many countries and great mountain ranges, the three planetary systems up to Brahmaloka, her own relatives, and the people of Vraja, she closed her eyes as she stood by the Yamunä's shore. Then she understood, "My boy is Lord Hari Himself!"

Text 20

tadä jahäsa çré-kåñëo
     mohayann iva mäyayä
yaçodä vaibhavaà dåñöaà
     na sasàära gata-småtiù

     tadä—then; jahäsa—smiled; çré-kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; mohayan—bewildering; iva—as if; mäyayä—with His Yogamäyä potency; yaçodä—Yaçodä; vaibhavam—glory; dåñöam—seen; na—not; sasàära—remembered; gata—gone; småtiù—memory.

     Then, as if He were casting a spell on her with His Yogamäyä potency, Çré Kåñëa smiled. From that moment Yaçodä could not remember the glory and opulence she had seen. She forgot everything.
.pa

Chapter Nineteen
Yamalärjuna-bhaìga
Breaking of the Two Arjuna Trees

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
ekadä gokule gopyo
     mamanthur dadhi sarvataù
gåhe gåhe pragäyantyo
     gopäla-caritaà param

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ekadä—one day; gokule—in Gokula; gopyaù—the gopés; mamanthuù—churned; dadhi—yogurt; sarvataù—completely; gåhe gåhe—in home after home; pragäyantyaù—singing; gopäla—of Gopäla; caritam—the pastimes; param—transcendental.

     Çré Närada said: Churning yogurt in their Gokula homes, the gopés sang of Lord Gopäla's transcendental pastimes, 

Text 2

yaçodäpi samutthäya
     prätaù çré-nanda-mandire
bhäëòe gavyaà vinikñipya
     mamantha dadhi sundaré

     yaçodä—Yaçodä; api—also; samutthäya—rising; prätaù—in the morning; çré-nanda-mandire—in Nanda's palace; bhäëòe—on a jug; gavyam—milk products; vinikñipya—placing; mamantha—churned; dadhi—yogurt; sundaré—beautiful.

     Rising early in Nanda's palace, beautiful Yaçodä put yogurt in a jug and churned it.

Text 3

maïjéra-rävaà saìkurvan
     bälaù çré-nanda-nandanaù
nanarta navanétärthaà
     gavyädäna-kutühalät

     maïjéra—of her anklets; rävam—sound; saìkurvan—making; bälaù—boy; çré-nanda-nandanaù—Nanda's son; nanarta—danced; navanéta—butter; artham—for; gavya—milk products; ädäna—taking; kutühalät—because of eagerness.

     His anklets jingling, Nanda's son eagerly danced to get some butter.

Text 4

bäla-kelir babhau nåtyan
     mätuù parçvam anubhraman
sunädi-kiìkiné-saìgha-
     jhaìkäraà kärayan muhuù

     bäla—child; keliù—pastimes; babhau—manifested; nåtyan—dancing; mätuù—of His mother; parçvam—the side; anubhraman—following; sunädi—melodious; kiìkiné—tinkling ornaments; saìgha—multitude; jhaìkäram—tinkling; kärayan—making; muhuù—again and again.

     Dancing, following His mother, and making His ornaments jingle sweetly, He played as a child.

Text 5

haiyaìgavénaà satataà navénaà
     yäcan sa mätur madhuraà bruvan saù
ädäya haste 'çmasutaà ruñä su-dhér
     bibheda kåñëo dadhi-mantha-pätram

     haiyaìgavénam—butter; satatam—repeatedly; navénam—fresh; yäcan—begging; saù—He; mätuù—of His mother; madhuram—sweetly; bruvan—saying; saù—He; ädäya—taking; haste—in His hand; açmasutam—emerald; ruñä—with anger; su-dhéù—intelligent; bibheda—broke; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; dadhi—yogurt; mantha—churning; pätram—jug.

      After again and again begging His mother for some fresh butter, intelligent Kåñëa finally took an emerald in His hand and angrily broke the yogurt-churn.

Text 6

paläyamänaà sva-sutaà yaçodä
     prabhävaté präpa na hasta-mäträt
yogéçvaräëäm api yo duräpaù
     kathaà sä mätur grahaëe prayäti

     paläyamänam—fleeing; sva—own; sutam—son; yaçodä—Yaçodä; prabhävatésplendid; präpa—attained; na—not; hasta—a hand; mäträt—only; yogi—of the yogés; éçvaräëäm—of the kings; api—also; yaù—who; duräpaù—cannot be attained; katham—how?; saù—He; mätuù—of His mother; grahaëe—in the grip; prayäti—goes.

     Beautiful Yaçodä could not catch her fleeing son, for He was always a hand's length away. Even the kings of the yogés cannot attain Him. Why should He fall in His mother's grip?

Text 7

tathäpi bhakteñu ca bhakta-vaçyatä
     pradarçitä çré-hariëä nåpeçvara
bälaà gåhétvä sva-sutaà yaçomaté
     babandha rajjvätha ruñä hy ulükhale

     tathäpi—nevertheless; bhakteñu—among the devotees; ca—also; bhakta—by the devotees; vaçyatä—control; pradarçitä—revealed; çré-hariëä—by Lord Hari; nåpa-éçvara—O king of kings; bälam—the boy; gåhétvä—grasping; sva-sutam—her own son; yaçomaté—Yaçodä; babandha—bound; rajjvä—with rope; atha—then; ruñä—angrily; hi—indeed; ulükhale—to the grinding mortar.

     O king of kings, then Lord Hari showed that He places Himself under the control of His devotees. Yaçodä caught her son and angrily tied Him with rope to the grinding mortar.

Text 8

ädäya yad yad bahu däma tat tat
     sv-alpaà prabhütaà sva-sute yaçodä
guëair na baddhaù prakåteù paro yaù
     kathaà sa baddho bhavatéha dämnä

     ädäya—taking; yad yat—whatever; bahu—great; däma—rope; tat tat—that; su—very; alpam—small; prabhütam—become; sva-sute—on her son; yaçodä—Yaçodä; guëaiù—with ropes; na—not; baddhaù—bound; prakåteù—the material world; paraù—above; yaù—who; katham—how?; saù—He; baddhaù—bound; bhavati—is; iha—here; dämnä—with rope.

     The ropes all became very small on her son. He who is beyond the material world cannot be bound with rope. How can He be bound with rope?

Text 9

yadä yaçodä gata-bandhanecchä
     khinnä niñaëëä nåpa khinna-mänasä
äsét tadäyaà kåpayä sva-bandhe
     svacchanda-yänaù sva-vaço 'pi kåñëaù

     yadä—when; yaçodä—Yaçodä; gata—gone; bandhana—binding; icchä—desire; khinnä—depressed; niñaëëä—morose; nåpa—O king; khinna—unhappy; mänasä—at heart; äsét—was; tadä—then; ayam—He; kåpayä—mercifully; sva-bandhe—in His bondage; svacchanda-yänaù—independent; sva-vaçaù—independent; api—even; kåñëaù—Kåñëa.

     When, frustrated and depressed, Yaçodä stopped trying, then independent Kåñëa kindly allowed her to bind Him.

Text 10

eña prasädo na hi véta-karmaëäà
     na jïäninäà karma-dhiyäà kutaù punaù
mätur yathäbhün nåpa eña tasmän
     muktià vyadhäd bhaktim alaà na mädhavaù

     eñaù—this; prasädaù—kindness; na—not; hi—indeed; véta—abandoned; karmaëäm—fruitive work; na—not; jïäninäm—of the philosophers; karma—work; dhiyam—conception; kutaù—where? punaù—again; mätuù—of His mother; yathä—as; abhüt—became; nåpa—O king; eñaù—this; tasmät—from this; muktim—liberation; vyadhät—gave; bhaktim—devotional service; alam—greatly; na—not; mädhavaù—Kåñëa.

     O king, the mercy He gave His mother He never gave to the renunciants and philosophers, what to speak of the fruitive workers. Lord Kåñëa gives them liberation, not devotional service.

Text 11

tadaiva gopyas tu samägatäs tvaraà
     dåñövätha bhagnaà dadhi-mantha-bhäjanam
ulükhale baddham atéva dämabhir
     bhétaà çiçuà vékñya jagur ghåëäturäù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; gopyaù—gopés; tu—indeed; samägatäù—arrived; tvaram—quickly; dåñövä—seeing; atha—then; bhagnam—broken; dadhi—yogurt; mantha—churning; bhäjanam—jug; ulükhale—on the grinding mortar; baddham—bound; atéva—greatly; dämabhiù—with ropes; bhétam—frightened; çiçum—child; vékñya—seeing; jaguù—sang; ghåëä—with kindness; äturäù—overcome.

     The gopés quickly came. Seeing the broken yogurt-churn and the frightened child tightly bound with ropes to the grinding mortar, they became filled with compassion and spoke.

Text 12

çré-gopya ücuù 
asmad-gåheñu päträëi
     bhinatti satataà çiçuù
tad apy enaà no vadämaù
     käruëyän nanda-gehini

     çré-gopyaù ücuù—the gopés said; asmat—our; gåheñu—in the homes; päträëi—jugs; bhinatti—break; satatam—always; çiçuù—child; tad api—still; enam—Him; na—not; u—indeed; vadämaù—we say; käruëyät—out of compassion; nanda—of Nanda; gehini—O wife.

     The gopés said: In our homes the children break these clay jugs all the time. O wife of Nanda, we say that you are not kind.

Text 13

gata-vyathe hy akaruëe
     yaçode he vrajeçvari
yañöyä nirbhartsito bälas
     tvayä baddho ghaöa-kñayät

     gata—gone; vyathe—anxiety; hi—indeed; akaruëe—unkind; yaçode—O Yaçodä; he—O; vrajeçvari—queen of Vraja; yañöyä—with a stick; nirbhartsitaù—punished; bälaù—boy; tvayä—by you; baddhaù—bound; ghaöa—a jug; kñayät—because of breaking.

     O cold, merciless Yaçodä, O queen of Vraja, you beat this boy with a stick and tied Him up only because He broke a clay jug. 

Text 14

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktäyäà yaçodäyäà
     vyagräyäà gåha-karmasu
karñann ulükhalaà kåñëo
     bälaiù çré-yamunäà yayau

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; uktäyäm—said; yaçodäyäm—when Yaçodä; vyagräyäà-agitated; gåha-karmasu—in housework; karñan—pulling; ulükhalam—the grinding mortar; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; bälaiù—with friends; çré-yamunäm—to the Yamunä; yayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: After this was spoken and Yaçodä became absorbed in her housework, Kåñëa, dragging the mortar along, went with the boys to the Yamunä.

Text 15

tat-taöe ca mahä-våkñau
     puräëau yamalärjunau
tayor madhye gataù kåñëo
     hasan dämodaraù prabhuù

     tat-taöe—on its shore; ca—also; mahä-våkñau—two great trees; puräëau—old; yamala—twin; arjunau—arjuna trees; tayoù—of them; madhye—in the middle; gataù—gone; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; hasan—smiling; dämodaraù—His belly bound by a rope; prabhuù—the Lord.

     His belly bound with a rope, smiling Lord Kåñëa wandered between two great old arjuna trees by the Yamunä's shore.

Text 16

cakarña sahasä kåñëas
     tiryag-gatam ulükhalam
karñaëena sa-mülau dvau
     petatur bhümi-maëòale

     cakarña—pulled; sahasä—at once; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; tiryak-gatam—sideways; ulükhalam—grinding mortar; karñaëena—by pulling; sa-mülau—with their roots; dvau—both; petatuù—fell; bhümi-maëòale—to the ground.

     Kåñëa tugged at the sideways grinding mortar. By His tug the two trees were uprooted and fell to the ground.

Text 17

pätatenäpi sabdo 'bhüt
     pracaëòo vajra-pätavat
vinirgatau ca våkñäbhyäà
     devau dväv edhaso 'gni-vat

     pätatena—by the falling; api—also; çabdaù—sound; abhüt—was; pracaëòaù—violent; vajra-pätavat—like a thunderbolt; vinirgatau—emerged; ca—also; våkñäbhyäm—from the two trees; devau—demigods; dvau—two; edhasaù agni-vat—effulgent as fires.

     The violent sound of their falling was like thunder. From the two trees emerged two demigods splendid as fire.

Text 18

dämodaraà parikramya
     pädau spåñöau sva-maulinä
kåtaïjalé harià natvä
     tau tu tat-sammukhe sthitau

     däma—rope; udaram—belly; parikramya—circumambulating; pädau—feet; spåñöau—touching; sva-maulinä—with their helmets; kåtaïjalé—with folded hands; harim—to Lord Hari; natvä—offering obeisances; tau—they; tu—indeed; tat-sammukhe—in His presence; sthitau—stood.

     Circumambulating Lord Dämodara, touching His feet with their helmets, and offering obeisances to Him, the two demigods stood before Him with folded hands.

Text 19

çré-deväv ücatuù 
äväà muktau brahma-daëòät
     sadyas te 'cyuta darçanät
mäbhüt te nija-bhaktänäà
     helanaà hy ävayor hare

     çré-devau ücatuù—the demigods said; äväm—we; muktau—liberated; brahma-daëòät—from the punishment of a brähmaëa; sadyaù—at once; te—by You; acyuta—O infallible Lord; darçanät—by the sight; mä—not; abhüt—was; te—of You; nija-bhaktänäm—of the devotees; helanam—insult; hi—indeed; avayoù—of us; hare—O Lord Hari.

     The two demigods said: O infallible Lord, by seeing You we are now free from a brähmaëa's punishment. We should not have offended Your devotees.

Text 20

karuëä-nidhaye tubhyaà
     jagan-maìgala-çéline
dämodaräya kåñëäya
     govindäya namo namaù

     karuëä—of mercy; tubhyam—to You; jagat—of the universes; maìgala—auspiciousness; çéline—whose nature; dämodaräya—whose belly is bound with a rope; kåñëäya—to Lord Kåñëa; govindäya—the pleasure of the cows, land, and senses; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     Obeisances, obeisances to You, Lord Kåñëa, the pleasure of the cows, land, and senses, the auspiciousness of the worlds, an ocean of mercy, the Lord whose belly is bound with a rope!

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
iti natvä harià tau dvau
     udécéà ca diçaà gatau
tadaiva hy ägatäù sarve
     nandädyä bhaya-kätaräù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; natvä—offering obeisances; harim—to Lord Hari; tau dvau—to them; udécém—north; ca—also; diçam—direction; gatau—gone; tadä—then; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; ägatäù—come; sarve—all; nandädyäù—headed by Nanda Mahäräja; bhaya-kätaräù—frightened.

     Çré Närada said: Bowing down to Lord Hari, the two demigods left for the north. Then, headed by Nanda Mahäräja, the frightened cowherd people arrived.

Text 22

kathaà våkñau präpatitau
     vinä vätaà vrajärbhakäù
vadatäçu tadä bälä
     ücuù sarve vrajaukasaù

     katham—how?; våkñau—two trees; präpatitau—thrown down; vinä—without; vätam—wind; vraja—of Vraja; arbhakäù—O children; vadata—please tell; äçu—at once; tadä—then; bäläù—the boys; ücuù—said; sarve—all; vraja—in Vraja; okasaù—who had homes.

     When they were asked, "How did these two trees fall down without any wind? O children of Vraja, please tell us," the children of Vraja spoke.

Text 23

çré-bälä ücuù 
anena patitau våkñau
     täbhyäà dvau puruñau sthitau
enaà natvä gatäv adya
     täv udécyäà sphurat-prabhau

     çré-bäläù ücuù—the children said; anena—by Him; patitau—thrown down; våkñau—the two trees; täbhyäm—from them; dvau—two; puruñau—men; sthitau—standing; enam—to Him; natvä—bowing down; gatau—gone; adya—now; tau—they; udécyäm—to the north; sphurat-prabhau—effulgent.

     The children said: Kåñëa made the two trees fall. From the trees two effulgent men came. They bowed down to Kåñëa and then went to the north.

Text 24

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä vacas teñäà
     na te çraddadhire tataù
mumoca nandaù svaà bälaà
     dämnä baddham ulükhale

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—the words; teñäm—of them; na—not; te—they; çraddadhire—believed; tataù—then; mumoca—released; nandaù—Nanda; svam—own; bälam—boy; dämnä—by ropes; baddham—bound; ulükhale—to the grinding mortar.

     Çré Närada said: The gopas did not believe what they heard from the boys. Then Nanda untied His boy bound to the grinding mortar with ropes.

Text 25

samlälayan sväìka-deçe
     samäghräya çiçuà nåpa
nirbhartsya bhäminéà nando
     viprebhyo go-çataà dadau

     samlälayan—caressing; sväìka-deçe—on his lap; samäghräya—smelling; çiçum—his boy; nåpa—O king; nirbhartsya—rebuking; bhäminém—his wife; nandaù—Nanda; viprebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; gaù—of cows; çatam—a hundred; dadau—gave.

     Then Nanda placed his boy on his lap, embraced Him, smelled Him, rebuked his wife, and gave a hundred cows in charity to the brähmaëas.

Text 26

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
käv imau puruñau divyau
     vada devarñi-sattama
kena doñeëa våkñatvaà
     präpitau yamalärjunau

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; kau—who?; imau—they; puruñau—persons; divyau—effulgent; vada—tell; devarñi-sattama—O best of the demigod sages; kena—by what?; doñeëa—fault; våkñatvam—the state of being trees; präpitau—attained; yamala-arjunau—two arjuna trees.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Who were those two effulgent men? O best of the demigod sages, please tell me. Because of what sin did they become two arjuna trees?

Text 27

çré-närada uväca 

nalaküvara-maëigrévau
     räja-räja-sutau parau
jagmatur nandana-vanaà
     mandäkinyäs taöe sthitau

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; nalaküvara-maëigrévau—Nalaküvara and Maëigrévau; räja-räja-sutau—the sons of the great king of kings; parau—great; jagmatuù—went; nandana-vanam—to the Nandana forest; mandäkinyäù—of the celestial Ganges; taöe—on the shore; sthitau—situated.

     Çré Närada said: They were the two demigods Nalaküvara and Maëigréva, the two demigod sons of the great king (Kuvera). (One day) they both went to the Nandana forest by the shore of the celestial Ganges.

Text 28

apsarobhir géyamänau
     ceratur gata-väsasau
varuëé-madirä-mattau
     yuvanau dravya-darpitau

     apsarobhiù—by apsaras; géyamänau—sung; ceratuù—went; gata-väsasau—without clothing; varuëé-madirä—by varuëé wine; mattau—intoxicated; yuvanau—young; dravya—of their possessions; darpitau—proud.

     Drunk on varuëé wine and proud of their possesions, they walked naked as many apsaräs sang to them.

Text 29

kadäcid devalo näma
     munéndro veda-päragaù
nagnau dåñövä ca täv äha
     duñöa-çélau gata-småté

     kadäcit—one time; devalaù—Devala; näma—named; muni-indraù—the king of sages; veda—of the Vedas; pära—to the farther shore; gaù—gone; nagnau—the two naked men; dåñövä—seeing; ca—and; tau—to them; äha—said; duñöa-çélau—wicked; gata-småté—forgetful.

     One day the great sage named Devala, who had gone to the farther shore of the Vedas, saw the two degenerate, naked, forgetful men and spoke to them.

Text 30

çré-devala uväca 

yuväà våkña-samau dåñöau
     nirlajjau dravya-darpitau
tasmäd våkñau tu bhüyas taà
     varñäëäà çatakaà bhuvi

     çré-devalaù uväca—Çré Devala said; yuväm—you both; våkña—trees; samau—equal to; dåñöau—seen; nirlajjau—without shame; dravya-darpitau—proud of possessions; tasmät—then; våkñau—trees; tu—indeed; bhüyaù—become; tam—that; varñäëäm—of years; çatakam—a hundred; bhuvi—on the earth.

     Çré Devala Muni said: I see You two shameless and proud men have become like trees. For this reason you will now be trees for a hundred years on the earth.

Text 31

dväparänte bhärate ca
     mäthure vraja-maëòale
kalinda-nandiné-tére
     mahävana-samépataù

paripürëatamaà säkñät
     kåñëaà dämodaraà harim
goloka-näthaà taà dåñövä
     pürva-rüpau bhaviñyathaù

     dväpara-ante—at the end of Dväpara-yuga; bhärate—in Bhärata-varña; ca—also; mäthure—in Mathurä; vraja-maëòale—in the circle of Vraja; kalinda-nandiné-tére—on the Yamunä's shore; mahävana-samépataù—near Mahävana forest; paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; kåñëam—Kåñëa; dämodaram—Dämodara; harim—Hari; goloka-nätham—the master of Goloka; tam—Him; dåñövä—seeing; pürva—previous; rüpau—form; bhaviñyathaù—you will attain.

     At the end of Dväpara-yuga, in Bhärata-varña, in Mäthura district, in the circle of Vraja, on the Yamunä's shore near Mahävana forest, you will see the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, who is the master of Goloka, and who is known as Dämodara and Hari. When you see Him, you will regain your original forms.

Text 33

itthaà devala-çäpena
     våkñatvaà präpitau nåpa
nalaküvara-maëigrévau
     çré-kåñëena vimocitau

     ittham—thus; devala—of Devala; çäpena—by the curse; våkñatvam—the state of being trees; präpitau—attained; nåpa—O king; nalaküvara—Nalaküvara; maëigrévau—and Maëigréva; çré-kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; vimocitau—released.

     In this way, by Devala Muni's curse, Nalaküvara and Maëigréva became trees and were liberated by Lord Kåñëa.

Chapter Twenty
Durväsaso mäyä-darçanaà çré-nanda-nandana-stotra-varëana
Description of Durväsä Muni's Vision of the Mäyä Potency and Offering of Prayers to Nanda's Son

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
ekadä kåñëacandrasya
     darçanärthaà parasya ca
durväsä muni-çardülo
     vraja-maëòalam äyayau

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; ekadä —one day; kåñëacandrasya —of Lord Kåñëacandra; darçana —seeing; artham —for the purpose; parasya —the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca —also; durväsä —Durväsä; muni —of sages; çardülaù —the tiger; vraja —of Vraja; maëòalam —to the circle; äyayau —came.

     One day Durväsä, the tiger of sages, came to the circle of Vraja to see Lord Kåñëacandra, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 2

kälindé-nikaöe puëye
     saikate ramaëa-sthale
mahävana-samépe ca
     kåñëam äräd dadarça ha

     kälindé-nikaöe —on the shore of the Yamunä; puëye —sacred; saikate —sandy shore; ramaëa —beautiful; sthale —place; mahävana-samépe —near mahävana; ca —also; kåñëam —Kåñëa; ärät —near; dadarça ha —saw.

     Near Mahävana, in a beautiful place on the Yamunä's sandy shore, he saw Lord Kåñëa.

Texts 3 and 4

çréman-madana-gopälaà
     luöhantaà bälakaiù saha
parasparaà prayuddhyantaà
     bäla-kelià manoharam

dhüli-dhüsara-sarväìgaà
     vakra-keçaà dig-ambaram
dhävantaà bälakaiù särdhaà
     harià vékñya sa vismitaù

     çréman-madana-gopälam —Lord Kåñëa, the cowherd boy more handsome than Kämadeva; luöhantam —rolling about on the ground; bälakaiù —boys; saha —with; parasparam —each other; prayuddhyantam —fighting; bäla —boy's; kelim —game; manoharam —charming; dhüli —with dust; dhüsara —darkened; sarva —all; aìgam —limbs; vakra —curly; keçam —hair; dik —with the directions; ambaram —clothed; dhävantam —running; bälakaiù —the boys; särdham —with; harim —Lord Hari; vékñya —seeing; saù —he; vismitaù —astonished.

     Seeing Lord Hari a cowherd boy more handsome than Kämadeva, now rolling on the ground as He played at fighting with the other boys and now running with them, clothed only by the directions and all His limbs dark with dust, the sage became filled with wonder.

Text 5

çré-munir uväca 
sa éçvaro 'yaà bhagavän
     kathaà bälair luöhan bhuvi
ayaà tu nanda-putro 'sti
     na çré-kåñëaù parät paraù

     çré-muniù uväca —the sage said; saù —He; éçvaraù —the supreme controller; ayam —He; bhagavän —the supremely opulent Personality of Godhead; katham —why?; bälaiù —with children; luöhan —rolling; bhuvi —on the ground; ayam —He; tu —certainly; nanda-putraù —Nanda's son; asti —is; na —not; çré-kåñëaù —Çré Kåñëa; parät paraù —who is greater than the greatest.

     The sage said: Why would the supremely opulent Personality of Godhead, who controls everything, roll on the ground with some children? This must be a boy who is the son of someone named Nanda. He is not the Çré Kåñëa who is greater than the greatest.

Text 6

çré-närada uväca 
itthaà mohaà gate tatra
     durväsasi mahä-munau
kréòan kåñëas tat-samépe
     tad-aìke hy ägataù svayam

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; ittham —thus; moham —bewilderment; gate —attained; tatra —there; durväsasi —Durväsä; mahä-munau —the great sage; kréòan —playing; kåñëaù —Kåñëa; tat-samépe —near him; tad-aìke —on the lap; hi —indeed; ägataù —came; svayam —of His own accord.

     Çré Närada said: As the great sage Durväsä was bewildered in this way, playing Kåñëa approached and of His own accord sat on the sage's lap.

Text 7

punar vinirgato hy aìkäd
     bäla-siàhävalokanaù
hasan kalaà bruvan kåñëaù
     sammukhaù punar ägataù

     punaù —again; vinirgataù —emerged; hi —indeed; aìkät —from the lap; bäla —cub; siàha —lion; avalokanaù —glance; hasan —smiling; kalam —gently; bruvan —said; kåñëaù —Kåñëa; sammukhaù —in the presence; punaù —again; ägataù —came.

     Then He left the lap and then, gently laughing, speaking some words, and His glance like that of a lion cub, Kåñëa again approached.

Text 8

     hasatas tasya ca mukhe
     praviñöaù çvasanair muniù
dadarçänyaà mahä-lokaà
     saraëyaà jana-varjitam

     hasataù —laughing; tasya —of Him; ca —and; mukhe —in the face; praviñöaù —entered; çvasanaiù —with sighs; muniù —the sage; dadarça —saw; anyam —another; mahä-lokam —great realm; saraëyam —shelter; jana —people; varjitam —without.

     As Kåñëa laughed the sage entered Lord Kåñëa's mouth as He breathed. There the sage saw a great realm where there were no people.

Text 9

araëyeñu bhramaàs tatra
     kutaù präpta iti bruvan
tadaiväjagareëäpi
     nigérëo 'bhün mahä-muniù

     araëyeñu —in forests; bhraman —wandering; tatra —there; kutaù —where?; präptaù —attained; iti —thus; bruvan —saying; tadä —then; eva —indeed; äjagareëa —by a snake; api —even; nigérëaù —swallowed; abhüt —was; mahä-muniù —the great sage.

     Wandering in many forests, he said, "Where am I?" It was as if the great sage was swallowed by a serpent.

Text 10

brahmäëòaà tatra dadåçe
     sa-lokaà sa-bilaà param
bhraman dvépeñu sa muniù
     sthito 'bhüt parvate site

     brahmäëòam —the universe; tatra —there; dadåçe —saw; sa-lokam —with many planets; sa-bilam —with outer space; param —greatly; bhraman —wandering; dvépeñu —on the continents; saù —he; muniù —the sage; sthitaù —stood; abhüt —became; parvate —on a mountain; site —white.

     There he saw the entire universe, with its many planets and with outer space. Wandering the continents, he stood on a great white mountaintop.

Text 11

tapas tatäpa varñäëäà
     çata-kotiù prabhuà bhajan
naimittikäkhye pralaye
     präpte viçva-bhayaìkare

ägacchantaù samudras te
     plävayanto dharä-talam
vahaàs teñu ca durväsä
     na präpäntaà jalasya ca

     tapaù —austerities; tatäpa —performed; varñäëäm —years; sata-kotiù —a billion; prabhum —the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhajan —worshiping; naimittika —regular; äkhye —named; pralaye —t —cosmic devastation; präpte —attained; viçva —the universe; bhayaìkare —fearful; ägacchantaù —coming; samudräù —the oceans; te —they; plävayantaù —flooding; dharä-talam —the surface of the earth; vahan —carrying; teñu —in them; ca —also; durväsä —Durväsä; na —not; präpa —attained; antam —end; jalasya —of the water; ca —and.

     Worshiping the Supreme Lord, he performed austerities for a billion years. When the scheduled time of cosmic devastation arrived, the universe became a fearful place. Rushing oceans flooded the earth's surface, and Durväsä could not find an end to all the water.

Text 13

vyatéte yuga-sähasre
     magno 'bhüd vigata-småtiù
punar jaleñu vicarann
     aëòam anyaà dadarça ha

     vyatéte —passed; yuga —of yugas; sähasre —a thousand; magnaù —submerged; abhüt —was; vigata —gone; småtiù —memory; punaù —again; jaleñu —in the waters; vicaran —wandering; aëòam —universe; anyam —another; dadarça ha —saw.

     A thousand yugas passed. Submerged in the water, he had forgotten everything. As he wandered through the waters, he saw another universe.

Text 14

tac-chidre ca praviñöo 'sau
     divyaà såñöià gatas tataù
tad-aëòa-mürdhni lokeñu
     vidher äyuù-samaà caran

     tat-chidre —in that opening; ca —also; praviñöaù —entered; asau —he; divyam —divine; såñöim —creation; gataù —attained; tataù —then; tad-aëòa —of that universe; mürdhni —at the top; lokeñu —in the realms; vidheù —of Brahmä; äyuù —life; samam —equal; caran —passing.

     He entered that universe and went to the heavenly planets within it. There, at the highest part of the universe, he passed a liftetime as long as Brahmä's.

Text 15

evaà chidraà tatra vékñya
     präviçat sa harià smaran
bahir vinirgato hy aëòäd
     dadarçäçu mahä-jalam

     evam —thus; chidram —opening; tatra —there; vékñya —seeing; präviçat —entered; saù —he; harim —Lord Hari; smaran —remembering; bahiù —outside; vinirgataù —came; hi —indeed; aëòät —from the universe; dadarça —saw; äçu —at once; mahä-jalam —a great ocean.

     He saw an opening and entered it. Meditating on Lord Hari, he went outside the universe. There he saw a great ocean. 

Text 16

tasmin jale tu lakñyante
     kotiço hy aëòa-räçayaù
tato munir jalaà paçyan
     dadarça virajäà nadém

     tasmin —in that; jale —water; tu —indeed; lakñyante —are seen; kotiçaù —by the millions; hi —indeed; aëòa —of universes; räçayaù —multitudes; tataù —then; muniù —the sage; jalam —water; paçyan —looking; dadarça —saw; virajäà nadém —the Virajä river.

     In that ocean he saw many millions of universes. Gazing at the ocean, the sage saw the Virajä river.

Text 17

tat-paraà prägataù sakñad
     golokaà präviçan muniù
våndävanaà govardhanaà
     yamunä-pulinaà çubham

dåñövä prasannaù sa munir
     nikuïjaà präviçat tadä
gopa-gopé-gaëa-våtaà
     gaväà koöibhir anvitam

     tat-param —beyond that; prägataù —went; sakñat —directly; golokam —to Goloka; präviçat —entered; muniù —the sage; våndävanam —Våndävana; govardhanam —Govardhana; yamunä-pulinam —the shore of the Yamunä; çubham —beautiful; dåñövä —seeing; prasannaù —happy; saù —the; muniù —sage; nikuïjam —a forest grove; präviçat —entered; tadä —then; gopa-gopé-gaëa-våtam —filled with gopas and gopés; gaväm —of cows; koöibhiù —with millions; anvitam —endowed.

     Crossing it, the sage entered the realm of Goloka. Gazing at Våndävana forest, Govardhana Hill, and the Yamunä's shore, the sage became happy. Then he entered a forest grove that was filled with gopas, gopés, and millions of surabhi cows.

Texts 19 and 20

asaìkhya-koöi-martaëòa-
     jyotiñäà maëòale tataù
divye lakña-dale padme
     sthitaà rädhä-patià harim

paripürëatamaà säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaà puruñottamam
asaìkhya-brahmäëda-patià
     golokeçaà dadarça ha

     asaìkhya —countless; koöi —millions; martaëòa —of suns; jyotiñäm —effulgence; maëòale —in the circle; tataù —there; divye —splendid; lakña —with a hundred thousand; dale —petals; padme —on a lotus flower; sthitam —standing; rädhä-patim —the husband of Rädhä; harim —Lord Hari; paripürëatamam —the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät —directly; çré-kåñëam —Çré Kåñëa; puruñottamam —the supreme person; asaìkhya —countless; brahmäëda —of universes; patim —the master; goloka —of Goloka; éçam —the master; dadarça —saw; ha —indeed.

     There, in a circle of light splendid as countless millions of suns, on a splendid divine lotus of a hundred thousand petals, he saw Çré Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of Rädhä, the king of Goloka and of countless universes.

Text 21

çré-kåñëasyäpi hasataù
     praviñöas tan-mukhe muniù
punar vinirgato 'paçyad
     bälaà çré-nanda-nandanam

     çré-kåñëasya —of Çré Kåñëa; api —also; hasataù —laughing; praviñöaù —entered; tan-mukhe —in His mouth; muniù —the sage; punaù —again; vinirgataù —emerged; apaçyat —saw; bälam —the child; çré-nanda —of Çré Nanda; nandanam —the son.

     As Çré Kåñëa was laughing, the sage within His mouth was expelled. The sage gazed at the boy who was Nanda's son.

Text 22

kälindé-nikaöe puëye
     saikate ramaëa-sthale
bälakaiù sahitaà kåñëaà
     vicarantaà mahä-vane

tadä muniç ca durväsä
     jïätvä kåñëaà parät param
çré-nanda-nandanaà natvä
     natvä präha kåtäïjaliù

     kälindé-nikaöe —near the Yamunä; puëye —sacred; saikate —on the sandy bank; ramaëa-sthale —in a beautiful place; bälakaiù —boys; sahitam —with; kåñëam —Kåñëa; vicarantam —wandering; mahä-vane —in Mahävana; tadä —then; muniù —the sage; ca —also; durväsä —Durväsä; j 24ätvä —understanding; kåñëam —Kåñëa; parät param —greater than the greatest; çré-nanda-nandanam —the son of Nanda; natvä natvä —bowing down again and again; präha —said; kåtäïjaliù —with folded hands.

     Now understanding that Nanda's son, Kåñëa, who with some boys was wandering in a beautiful place on the Yamunä's sandy shore near Mahävana, is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, greater than the greatest, Durväsä Muni bowed down to Him again and again and with folded hands spoke to Him some words.

Text 24

çré-munir uväca 
bälaà navéna-çata-patra-viçäla-netraà
     bimbädharaà sajala-megha-rucià manojïam
manda-smitaà madhura-sundara-manda-yänaà
     çré-nanda-nandanam ahaà manasä namämi

     çré-muniù uväca —the sage said; bälam —a boy; navéna —new; çata-patra —hundred petal lotus flower; viçäla —large; netram —eyes; bimba —bimba fruit; adharam —lips; sajala-megha —monsoon cloud; rucim —glory; manojïam —charming; manda —gentle; smitam —smile; madhura —sweet; sundara —handsome; manda —gentle; yänam —motion; çré-nanda-nandanam —the son of Nanda; aham —I; manasä —with my heart; namämi —bow.

     The sage said: With all my heart I bow down before Nanda's gently-smiling, sweetly graceful, handsome son, whose large eyes are hundred-petal lotuses, whose lips are bimba fruits, and whose complexion is splendid as a monsoon cloud.

Text 25

maïjéra-nüpura-raëan-nava-ratna-käïcé-
     çré-hära-keçari-nakha-pratiyantra-saìgham
dåñöyärti-häri-mañi-bindu-viräjamänaà
     vande kalinda-tanujä-taöa-bäla-kelim

     maïjéra —ornaments; nüpura —anklets; raëat —tinkling; nava —nine; ratna —jewels; kä 24cé —belt;  çré-hära —beautiful necklaces; keçari —lion's; nakha —nails; pratiyantra-saìgham —a necklace; dåñöi —whose glance; ärti —sufferings; häri —removing; mañi —musk; bindu —dot; viräjamänam —glorious; vande —I offer my respectful obeisances; kalinda-tanujä —of the Yamunä; taöa —on the shore; bäla —child; kelim —pastimes.

     I offer my respectful obeisances to He who, decorated with jingling anklets and ornaments, a belt of nine jewels, a beautiful necklace, and a string of lion's nails, glorious with dots of black musk, and His glance removing all sufferings, plays as a child on the Yamunä's shore.

Text 26

pürëendu-sundara-mukhopari kuïcitägräù
     kesä navéna-ghana-néla-nibhäù sphuranti
räjanta änata-çiraù-kumudasya yasya
     nandätmajäya sa-baläya namo namas te

     pürëa —full; indu —moon; sundara —handsome; mukha —face; upari —above; kuïcita-agräù —curly; kesäù —hairs; navéna —new; ghana —clopuds; néla —dark; nibhäù —like; sphuranti —shines; räjante —shine; änata —bowed; çiraù —head; kumudasya —of the lotus; yasya —of which; nanda-ätmajäya —to nanda's son; sa-baläya —with Balaräma; namaù —obeisances; namaù —obeisances; te —to You.

     Obeisances, obeisances to You, who are Balaräma's companion and Nanda's son, whose bowed head is a lotus flower, and above whose full-moon face curly locks of hair glisten like new dark monsoon clouds.

Text 27

çré-nanda-nandana-stotraà
     prätar utthäya yaù paöhet
tan-netra-gocaro yäti
     sänandaà nanda-nandanaù

     çré-nanda-nandana —to Nanda's son; stotram —prayer; prätaù —early; utthäya —rising; yaù —one who; paöhet —recites; tat —of him; netra —of the eyes; gocaraù —in the range of perception; yäti —goes; sänandam —happily; nanda-nandanaù —Nanda's son.

     Nanda's son happily comes within the vision of a person who rises early and recites these prayers glorifying Him.

Text 28

çré-närada uväca 
iti praëamya çré-kåñëaà
     durväsä muni-sattamaù
taà dhyäyan prajapan prägäd
     badary-äçramam uttamam

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; iti —thus; praëamya —bowing; çré-kåñëam —to Çré Kåñëa; durväsä —Durväsä; muni —of sages; sattamaù —the best; tam —on Him; dhyäyan —meditating; prajapan —chanting; prägät —went; badary-äçramam —to badaré äçrama; uttamam —north.

     Çré Närada said: Durväsä, the best of sages, bowed down before Lord Kåñëa and, meditating on Him and chanting His glories, went north to Badaré-äçrama.

Text 29

çré-garga uväca 
itthaà devarñi-varyeëa
     näradena mahätmanä
kathitaà kåñëa-caritaà
     bahuläçväya dhémate

     çré-garga uväca —Çré Garga said; ittham —thus; devarñi-varyeëa —by the best of divine sages; näradena —by Närada; mahätmanä —the great soul; kathitam —told; kåñëa-caritam —Kåñëa's pastimes; bahuläçväya —to Bahuläçva; dhémate —intelligent.

     In this way the great soul Närada, who was the best of the demigod-sages, narrated Lord Kåñëa's transcenbdental pastimes to intelligent King Bahuläçva.

Text 30

mayä te kathitaà brahman
     yaçaù kali-maläpaham
catuñpadärthadaà divyaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     mayä —by me; te —to you; kathitam —told; brahman —O brähmaëa; yaçaù —the glory; kali —of Kali-yuga; mala —dirt; apaham —removing; catuñpadärthadam —giving the four goals of life; divyam —divine; kim —what?; bhüyaù —more; çrotum —to hear; icchasi —you wish.

     O brähmaëa, now I have described to you Lord Kåñëa's splendid transcendental glories, which wash the sins of Kali-yuga and fulfill the four goals of life. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 31

çré-çaunaka uväca 
bahuläçvo maithilendraù
     kià papraccha mahä-munim
näradaà jïänadaà çäntaà
     tan me brühi tapo-dhana

     çré-çaunaka uväca —Çré Çaunaka said; bahuläçvaù —Bahuläçva; maithilendraù —the king of Mithilä; kim —what?; papraccha —asked; mahä-munim näradam —the great sage Närada; jïänadam —giver of knowledge; çäntam —peaceful; tat —that; me —to me; brühi —tell; tapaù —austerity; dhana —wealth.

     Çré Çaunaka said: What did Mithilä's king Bahuläçva then ask the great sage Närada, the peaceful teacher of transcendental knowledge? O sage whose wealth is austerity, please tell me that.

Text 32

çré-garga uväca 
näradaà jïänadaà natvä
     mänado maithilo nåpaù
punaù papraccha kåñëasya
     caritaà maìgaläyanam

     çré-gargaù uväca —Çré Garga Muni said; näradam —Närada; jïänadam —the giver of knowledge; natvä —bowing down; mänadaù —respectful; maithilo nåpaù —the king of Mithilä; punaù —again; papraccha —asked; kåñëasya —of Lord Kåñëa; caritam —pastimes; maìgaläyanam —auspicious.

     Çré Garga Muni said: The respectful king of Mithilä then bowed down before his teacher Närada and again asked about Lord Kåñëa's auspicious transcendental pastimes.

Text 33

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
çré-kåñëo bhagavän säkñät
     paramänanda-vigrahaù
paraà cakära kià citraà
     caritraà vada me prabho

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca —Çré Bahuläçva said; çré-kåñëaù —Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän säkñät —the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; paramänanda —transcendental bliss; vigrahaù —form; param —then; cakära —did; kim —what?; citram —wonderful; caritram —activities; vada —please tell; me —me; prabhaù —O master.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: What wonderful activities did Çré Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead then do? O master, please tell me that.

Text 34

pürvävatäraiç caritaà
     kåtaà vai maìgälayanam
aparaà kintu kåñëasya
     pavitraà caritaà param

     pürva —previous; avatäraiù —by incarnations; caritam —activities; kåtam —done; vai —indeed; maìgaläyanam —auspicious; aparam —peerless; kintu —however; kåñëasya —of Lord Kåñëa; pavitram —pure; caritam —activities; param —transcendental.

     The activities of the Lord's previous incarnations are all-auspicious. Still, Lord Kåñëa's activities are the most pure.

Text 35

çré-närada uväca 
sädhu sädhu tvayä påñöaà
     caritraà maìgalaà hareù
tat te 'haà sampravakñyämi
     våndäraëye ca yad-yaçaù

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; sädhu —well; sädhu —well; tvayä —by you; påñöam —asked; caritram —activities; maìgalam —auspicious; hareù —of Lord Hari; tat —that; te —to you; aham —I; sampravakñyämi —will tell; våndäraëye —in Våndävana; ca —also; yat —of whom; yaçaù —the glory.

     Çré Närada said: Good! Good! You have asked about Lord Hari's auspicious pastimes. I will tell you of the glory He showed in Våndävana.

Text 36

idaà goloka-khaëòaà ca
     guhyaà paramam adbhutam
çré-kåñëena prakathitaà
     goloke räsa-maëòale

     idam —this; goloka —of Goloka; khaëòam —canto; ca —also; guhyam —confidential; paramam —supreme; adbhutam —wonderful; çré-kåñëena —by Çré Kåñëa; prakathitam —spoken; goloke —in Goloka; räsa —of the räsa dance; maëòale —in the circle.

     Çré Kåñëa Himself spoke this very wonderful and confidential Goloka-khaëòa in Goloka's räsa-dance circle.

Text 37

nikuïje rädhikäyai ca
     rädhä mahyaà dadäv idam
mayä tubhyaà çrävitaà ca
     dattaà sarvärthadaà param

     nikuïje —in a forest grove; rädhikäyai —to Çré Rädhä; ca —and; rädhä —Çré Rädhä; mahyam —to me; dadau —gave; idam —this; mayä —by me; tubhyam —to you; çrävitam —caused to hear; ca —also; dattam —given; sarvärthadam —fulfilling all desires; param —great.

     In a forest grove Lord Kåñëa gave to Çré Rädhä this Goloka-khaëòa, which fulfills all desires. Rädhä gave it to me, and now I am have given it to you.

Texts 38 and 39

idaà paöhitvä vipras tu
     sarva-çästrärtha-go bhavet
çrutvedaà cakravarté syät
     kñatriyaç caëòa-vikramaù

vaiçyo nidhi-patir bhüyäc
     chüdro mucyeta bandhanät
niñkämo yo 'pi jagati
     jévan muktaù sa jäyate

     idam —this; paöhitvä —having read; vipraù —a brähmaëa; tu —indeed; sarva-çästrärtha-gaù —learned in all the scriptures; bhavet —becomes; çrutvä —hearing; idam —this; cakravarté —the ruler of the world; syät —becomes; kñatriyaç —a kñatriya; caëòa-vikramaù —powerful; vaiçyaù —a vaiçya; nidhi —of wealth; patiù —the master; bhüyät —becomes; çüdraù —a çüdra; mucyeta —becomes released; bandhanät —from the bonds of servitude; niñkämaù —who has no desires; yaù —one who; api —also; jagati —in the material world; jévan —living; muktaù —liberated; saù —he; jäyate —is born.

     By reading it a brähmaëa becomes learned in all the scriptures, a powerful kñatriya becomes king of the world, a vaiçya becomes a master of great wealth, a çüdra becomes released from the bonds of service, and a person who has no desires becomes free from material bondage even while living in this world.

Text 40

yo nityaà paöhate samyag
     bhakti-bhäva-samanvitaù
sa gacchet kåñëacandrasya
     golokaà prakåteù param

     yaù —who; nityam —regularly; paöhate —reads; samyak-properly; bhakti-bhäva-samanvitaù —with devotion; saù —he; gacchet —goes; kåñëacandrasya —of Lord Kåñëacandra; golokam —to Goloka; prakåteù —the material world; param —beyond.

     A person who reads it regularly, properly, and with devotion, goes to Lord Kåñëacandra's abode of Goloka beyond the material world.

Canto Two

Chapter One
Våndävanägamanodyoga-varëaëa
Description of the Entrance in Våndävana 

Text 1

kåñëä-tére kokilä-keli-kére
     guïjä-puïje deva-puñpädi-kuïje
kambu-grévau kñipta-bähü calantau
     rädhä-kåñëau maìgalaà me bhavetäm

     kåñëä —of the Yamunä; tére —on the shore; kokilä —cuckoos; keli —pastimes; kére —parrots; guïjä —of gunja; puïje —an abundance; deva —of the demigods; puñpa —flowers; ädi —beginning with; kuïje —in a grove; kambu —conch-shell; grévau —neck; kñipta —tossed; bähü —arms; calantau —going; rädhä-kåñëau —Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa; maìgalam —ayuspiciousness; me —of me; bhavetäm —may be.

     May Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa who, Their arms raised and their necks like conchshells, wander on the Yamunä's shore, where are many playful cuckoos and parrots, guïä bushes, and groves of splendid flowers, grant auspiciousness to me.

Text 2

ajïäna-timirändhasya
     jïänäïjana-çaläkayä
cakñur unmélitaà yena
     tasmai çré-gurave namaù

     ajïäna —of ignorance; timirändhasya —of the blinding darkness; jïa —of knowledge; anäïjana-çaläkayä —with the anointing stick; cakñuù —eyes; unmélitam —opened; yena —by whom; tasmai —to him; çré-gurave —my spiritual master; namaù —obeisances.

     I was born in thr darkness of ignorance, and my spiritual master opened my eyes with the torch of knowledge. I offer my respectful obeisances unto him.*

Texts 3 and 4

çré-närada uväca 
ekadopadravaà vékñya
     nando nandän sahäyakän
våñabhänüpanandäàç ca
     våñabhänu-varäàs tathä

samähüya parän våddhän
     sabhäyäà tän uväca ha

çré-nanda uväca 
kià kartavyaà tu vadatot-
     pätäù santi mahä-vane

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; ekadä —one day; upadravam —calamity; vékñya —seeing; nandaù —Nanda; nandän —the Nandas; sahäyakän —helpful; våñabhänüpanandäàç —the Våñabhänus and the Upanandas; ca —and; våñabhänu-varäàù —Våñabhänu; tathä —so; samähüya —calling; parän —others; våddhän —elder; sabhäyäm —in the assembly; tän —to them; uväca —said; ha —indeed; çré-nanda —Nanda; uväca —said; kim —what?;; kartavyam —should be done; tu —indeed; vadata —please tell; utpätäù —calamities; santi —are; mahä-vane —in Mahävana.

     Çré Närada said: One day, seeing that many great calamities had come, Nanda called his friends: the Våñabhänus, the Upanandas, and other elders, and in the assembly he said to them, "Please tell what should be done. Many calamities have come to Mahävana."

Text 5

çré-närada uväca 
teñäà çrutvätha sannando
     gopo våddho 'ti-mantra-vit
aìke nétvä räma-kåñëau
     nanda-räjam uväca ha

     çré-närada uväca —Çré Närada said; teñäm —of them; çrutvä —hearing; atha —then; sannandaù —Sannanda; gopaù —gopa; våddhaù —elder; ati-mantra-vit —learned in giving good advice; aìke —on the lap; nétvä —placing; räma-kåñëau —Kåñëa and Balaräma; nanda-räjam —to King Nanda; uväca —said; ha —indeed.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing this, the elderly gopa Sannanda, who was expert at giving advice, placed Kåñëa and Balaräma on his lap and spoke to King Nanda.

Text 6

çré-sannanda uväca 
utthatavyam ito 'smäbhiù
     sarvaiù parikaraiù saha
gantavyaà cänya-deçeñu
     yatrotpätä na santi hi

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; utthatavyam —should be risen; itaù —from here; asmäbhiù —by us; sarvaiù —all; parikaraiù —associates; saha —with; gantavyam —should gone; ca —and; anya-deçeñu —to another place; yatra —where; utpätäù —calamities; na —not; santi —are; hi —indeed.

     Çré Sannanda said: All of us and all our friends should leave this place and go to another place where there are no calamities.

Text 7

bälas te präëavät kåñëo
     jévanaà vraja-väsinäm
vraje dhanaà kule dépo
     mohano bäla-lélayä

     bälaù —a child; te —your; pranavät —like life; kåñëaù —Kåñëa; jévanam —life; vraja-väsinäm —of the residents of Vraja; vraje —in Vraja; dhanaàthe wealth; kule —in the family; dépaù —a lamp; mohanaù —charming; bäla-lélayä —with childhood pastimes.

     This boy Kåñëa is your very life. He is the life of the residents of Vraja. He is the wealth of Vraja. He is the shining lamp of your family. He is charming with His child's playing.

Text 8

ha bäkyä çakaöenäpi
     tåëävartena bälakaù
mukto 'yaà druma-pätena
     hy utpätaà kim ataù param

     hä —alas; bäkyä —by Putana; çakaöena —by the cart-demon; api —also; tåëävartena —by Trnavarta; bälakaù —the boy; muktaù —freed; ayam —this; druma —of trees; pätena —falling; hy —indeed; utpätam —calamity; kim —what?; ataù param —next.

     This boy escaped Pütanä, an (overturned) cart, Tånävarta, and falling trees. What calamity will happen next?

Text 9 

tasmäd våndävanaà sarvair
     gantavyaà bälakaiù saha
utpateñu vyatéteñu
     punar ägamanaà kuru

     tasmät —therefore; våndävanam —to Våndävana; sarvaiù —by all; gantavyam —should be gone; bälakaiù —the children; saha —with; utpateñu —in calamities; vyatéteñu —gine; punaù —again; ägamanam —return; kuru —do.

     Therefore we and our children should go to Våndävana. When the calamities have passed we will return.

Text 10

çré-nanda uväca 
kati-kroçair viståtaà tad
     vanaà våndävanaà vrajät
tal-lakñaëaà tat-sukhaà ca
     vada buddhimatäà vara

     çré-nanda uväca —Çré Nanda said; kati —how many?; kroçaiù —kroças; viståtam —far; tat —that; vanam —forest; våndävanam —Våndävana; vrajät —from Vraja; tal-lakñaëam —that nature; tat-sukham —that happiness; ca —and; vada —please tell; buddhimatäm —of the wise; vara —O best.

     Nanda said: How many kroças is Våndävana forest from Vraja? O best of the wise, tell me what it is like and how it is a happy place.

Text 11

çré-sannanda uväca 
präg udécyäà bärhiñado
     dakñiëäsyäà yadoù purät
paçcimäyäà çoëapurän
     mäthuraà maëòalaà viduù

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; präg —east; udécyäm —north; bärhiñadaù —of Barhiñat; dakñiëäsyäàsouth; yadoù —of the Yadus; purät —of the city; paçcimäyäm —west; çoëapurän —of Sonapuri; mäthuram —Mathura; maëòalam —the circle; viduù —they know..

     Çré Sannanda said: The wise know that Mathurä-maëòala is northeast of the country of Bärhiñat, south of the Yadus' capitol city, and west of the city of Çoëa.

Text 12

viàçad-yojana-vistérëaà
     särdhaà yad yojanena vai
mäthuraà maëòalaà divyam
     vrajam ähur manéñiëaù

     viàçat —20; yojana —yojana; vistérëam —extended; särdham —with; yat —which; yojanena —by a  yojana; vai —indeed; mäthuraà maëòalam —the circle of Mathurä; divyam —transcendental; vrajam —Vraja; ahuù —said; manéñiëaù —the wise.

     The wise say the splendid transcendental land of Vraja Mathurä-maëòala is 21 yojanas in circumference.

Text 13

mathuräyäà çauri-gåhe
     gargäcärya-mukhäc chrutam
mäthuraà maëòalaà divyaà
     tértha-räjena püjitam

     mathuräyäm —in Mathurä; çauri-gåhe —in the home of Vasudeva; gargäcärya-mukhät —from the mouth iof Garga Muni; çrutam —heard; mäthuraà maëòalam —Mathurä-maëòala; divyam —transcendental; tértha-räjena —by the king of holy  places; püjitam —worshiped.

     In Vasudeva's palace I heard from Garga Muni's mouth that even Prayäga, the king of holy places, worships splendid and transcendental Mathurä-maëòala.

Text 14 

vanebhyas tatra sarvebhyo
     vanaà våndävanaà varam
paripürëatamasyäpi
     lélä-kréòäà manoharam

     vanebhyaù —than the forests; tatra —there; sarvebhyaù —all; vanam —forest; våndävanam —Våndävana ; varam —the best; paripürëatamasya —of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; api —also; lélä-kréòäm —transcendental pastimes; manoharam —charming.

     In that place is Våndävana forest, which is the best of all forests and beautiful with the pastimes of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 15

vaikuëöhän näparo loko
     na bhüto na bhaviñyati
ekaà våndävanaà näma
     vaikuëöhäc ca parät param

     vaikuëöhät —than Vaikuëöha; na —not; aparaù —better; lokaù —planet; na —not; bhütaù —was; na —not; bhaviñyati —will be; ekam —one; våndävanam —Våndävana; näma —named; vaikuëöhät —than  Vaikuëöha; ca —and; parät —than the greatest; param —greater.

     No place is better than Vaikuëöha. There never was such a place, nor will there ever be. Still, better than Vaikuëöha is the place named Våndävana. . .  

Text 16

yatra govardhano näma
     giri-räjo viräjate
kälindé-nikaöe yatra
     pulinaà maìgaläyanam

     yatra —where; govardhanaù —Govardhana; näma —named; giri-räjaù —the king of mountains; viräjate —is splendidly manifested; kälindé-nikaöe —near the Yamunä; yatra —where; pulinam —the shore; maìgaläyanam —is auspicious.

 . . . where a mountain named Govardhana is splendidly manifest, where the shores of the Yamunä are the abode of auspiciousness, . . .

Text 17

båhat-sänur girir yatra
     yatra nandéçvaro giriù
kroçänäà ca catur-viàçad-
     viståtaiù känanair våtam

     båhat —great; sänuù —peak; giriù —mountain; yatra —where; yatra —where; nandéçvaraù —Nandéçvara; giriù —mountain; kroçänäm —of kroças; ca —also; catur-viàçat —24; viståtaiù —expanse; känanaiù —with forests; våtam —filled.

 . . . where is the mountain Båhatsänu, where is the mountain Nandéçvara, and where there are great forests for 24 kroças.    

Text 18

paçavyaà gopa-gopénäà
     gaväà sevyaà manoharam
latä-kuïjävåtaà tad vai
     vanaà våndävanaà småtam

     paçavyam —suitable for the cows; gopa-gopénäm —of the gopas and gopés; gaväm —by the cows; sevyam —served; manoharam —beautiful; latä —vines; kuïja —groves; ävåtam —filled; tat —that; vai —indeed; vanam —forest; våndävanam —Våndävana; småtam —remembered.

     Beautiful Våndävana forest is known to be an ideal place for the cows, gopas, and gopés, a place filled with vines and groves.

Text 19

çré-nanda uväca 
kadä vrajo 'yaà sannanda
     tértha-räjena püjitaù
etad veditum icchämi
     paraà kautühalaà hi me

     çré-nandaù uväca —Çré Nanda said; kadä —when?; vrajaù —in Vraja; ayam —this; sannanda —Sannanda; tértha-räjena —by the king of holy  places; püjitaù —worshiped; etat —this; veditum —to know; icchämi —I wish; param —great; kautühalam —curiosity; hi —certainly; me —of me.

     Çré Nanda said: O Sannanda, when did the king of holy places worship Vraja? That I wish to know. I am very curious.

Text 20

çré-sannanda uväca 
çaìkhäsuro mahä-daityaù
     purä naimittike laye
svapato brahmaëaù so 'pi
     veda-drug daitya-puìgavaù

jitvä devän brahmalokäd
     dhåtvä vedän gato 'rëave
gateñu teñu vedeñu
     devänäà ca gataà balam

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; çaìkhäsuraù —Çaìkhäsura; mahä-daityaù —the great demon; purä —before; naimittike —at the regular; laye —time of cosmic devastation; svapataù —sleeping; brahmaëaù —from Brahmä; saù —he; api —even; veda —of the Vedas; druk — —the enemy; daitya —of demons; puìgavaù —the greatest; jitvä —defeating; devän —the demigods; brahmalokät —from Brahmaloka; dhåtvä —taking; vedän —the Vedas; gataù —went; arëave —in the ocean; gateñu —gone; teñu —them; vedeñu —the Vedas; devänäm —of the demigods; ca —also; gatam —gone; balam —the strength.

     Çré Sannanda said: As Brahmä slept during a regularly scheduled period of cosmic devastation, the great conch demon Çaìkäsura, a sworn enemy of the Vedas, defeated the demigods, stole the Vedas, and hid in the ocean. When the Vedas were gone the demigods' strength was also gone.

Text 22

tadä säkñäd dhariù pürëo
     dhåtvä matsyaà vapuù param
naimittika-layämbhodhau
     yuyudhe tena yajïa-räö

     tadä —then; säkñät —directly; dhariù —Lord Hari; pürëaù —perfect; dhåtvä —taking; matsyam —of Lord Matsya; vapuù —the form; param —transcendental; naimittika —regular; laya —of cosmic devastation; ambhodhau —on the ocean; yuyudhe —fought; tena —with him; yajïa-räö —the king of yajnas.

     Then, assuming the form of a fish, perfect Lord Hari, the master of all yajïas, fought with him in the ocean of cosmic devastation.

Text 23

çülaà cikñepa haraye
     çaìkho daityo mahä-balaù
sva-cakreëa hariù säkñät
     tac-chülaà çatadhäkarot

     çülam —tridfent; cikñepa —threw; haraye —at Lord Hari; çaìkhaù —Çaìkhäsura; daityaù —the demon; mahä-balaù —very powerful; sva-cakreëa —with Hiis cakra; hariù —Lord Hari; säkñät —directly; tac-chülam —that trident; çatadhä —in a hundred pieces; akarot —made.

     The very powerful demon Çaìkhäsura threw a trident at Lord Hari. With His cakra Lord Hari broke the trident in a hundred pieces.

Text 24

harià tatäòa çirasä
     çaìkho viñëum uraù-sthale
tasya mürdha-prahäreëa
     na cacäla parät paraù

     harim —Lord Hari; tatäòa —struck; çirasä —with his head; çaìkhaù —Çaìkhäsura; viñëum —Lord Viñëu; uraù-sthale —on the chest; tasya —of Him; mürdha —of the head; prahäreëa —with the blow; na —not; cacäla —moved; parät —than the greatest; paraù —greater.

     With his head Çaìkhäsura struck Lord Viñëu on the chest. Although struck by his head, Lord Hari, who is greater than the greatest, did not waver.

Text 25

tadä gadäà samädäya
     matsya-rüpa-dharo hariù
påñöhe jaghäna taà daityaà
     çaìkha-rüpaà mahä-balam

     tadä —then; gadäm —a club; samädäya —taking; matsya-rüpa-dharaù —assuming the form of a fish; hariù —Lord Hari; påñöhe —on the back; jaghäna —struck; tam —him; daityam —the demon; çaìkha-rüpam —in the form of a conch; mahä-balam —very powerful.

     Taking a club, Lord Hari in the form of a fish struck the powerful conch demon on the back.

Text 26

gadä-prahära-vyathitaù
     kiïcid-vyäkula-mänasaù
punar utthäya sarveñäà
     muñöinä sa tatäòa ha

     gadä —of the club; prahära —by the blow; vyathitaù —wounded; kiïcit —somewhat; vyäkula —distresed; mänasaù —in mind; punaù —again; utthäya —rising; sarveñäm —of all; muñöinä —with a fist; sa —he; tatäòa —struck; ha —certainly.

     Wounded by the club, and now unhappy at heart, the demon rose again and with his fist struck the Lord.

Text 27

tadä viñëuù sva-cakreëa
     sa-çåìgaà tac-chiro dåòham
jahära kupitaù säkñäd
     bhagavän kamalekñaëaù

     tadä —then; viñëuù —Lord Viñëu; sva-cakreëa —with His cakra; sa-çåìgam —with its horn; tac-chiraù —his head; dåòham —hard; jahära —took; kupitaù —angry; säkñät —directly; bhagavän —the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kamalekñaëaù —lotus eyed.

     With His cakra angry lotus-eyed Lord Viñëu then severed the demon's hard horned head.

Text 28

jitvä çaìkhaà deva-varaiù
     särdhaà viñëur vrajeçvara
prayägam etya sa harir
     vedäàs tän brahmaëe dadau

     jitvä —having defeated; çaìkham —the conch demon; deva-varaiù —by the great demigods; särdham —with; viñëuù —Lord Viñëu; vrajeçvaraù —O king of Vraja; prayägam —to Prayäga; etya —going; sa —He; hariù —Lord Hari; vedäàù —the Vedas; tän —them; brahmaëe —to Brahmä; dadau —gave.

     O king of Vraja, after defeating the conch demon, Lord Viñëu, accompanied by the great demigods, went to Prayäga and returned the Vedas to Brahmä.

Text 29

yajïaà cakära vidhi-vat
     sarva-veda-gaëaiù saha
prayägaà ca samähüya
     tértha-räjaà cakära ha

     yajïam —a yajna; cakära —performing; vidhi-vat —according to the Vedic rules; sarva-veda-ganaiù —with all the Vedas; saha —with; prayägam —to Ptayaja; ca —and; samähüya —calling; tértha-räjam —the king of holy places; cakära —did; ha —indeed.

     Accompanied by all the Vedas, Brahmä performed a Vedic yajïa. Then, calling Prayäga, he crowned it king of the holy places.

Text 30

tat säkñäd akñaya-vaöaù
     kåto lélätapatravat
muni-bhänu-sute 'thormi-
     cämarais taà virejatuù

     tat —that; säkñät —directly; akñaya —imperishable; vaöaù —banyan tree; kåtaù —made; lélä —toy; atapatra —parasol; vat —like; muni —of a sage; bhänu —of the sun-god; sute —the daughters; atha —then; ürmi —of waves; cämaraiù —with cämaras; tam —him; virejatuù —served.

     As if it were a toy parasol, an eternal banyan tree shaded Prayäga. The Ganges and Yamunä fanned it with cämaras.

Text 31

tadaiva sarva-térthäni
     jambudvépa-sthitäni ca
nitvä balià samäjagmus
     tértha-räjäya dhémate

     tadä —then; eva —ndeed; sarva —all; térthäni —holy places; jambudvépa-sthitäni —situated on Jambudviipa; ca —and; nitvä —bringing; balim —offerings; samäjagmuù —came; tértha-räjäya —to the kiing of holy places; dhémate —wise.

     Then all the holy places in Jambudvépa came, bringing offerings to Prayäg, the wise king of holy places.

Text 32

tértha-räjaà ca sampüjya
     natvä térthäni sarvataù
sva-dhämäni yayur nanda
     harau devair gate sati

     tértha-räjam —the king of holy places; ca —and; sampüjya —worshiping; natvä —bowing down; térthäni —the holy places; sarvataù —in all respects; sva-dhämäni —to their own abodes; yayuù —went; nanda —O Nanda; harau —when Lord Hari; devaiù —with the demigods; gate sati —had left.

     Bowing down, the holy places worshiped Prayäga, the king of holy places. O Nanda, when Lord Hari and the demigods departed, the holy places returned to their own abodes.

Text 33

tadaiva näradaù präpto
     munéndraù kalaha-priyaù
siàhäsane bhräjamänaà
     tértha-räjam uväca ha

     tadä —then; eva —indeed; näradaù —Närada; präptaù —attained; munéndraù —the king of sages; kalaha-priyaù —fond of a quarrel; siàhäsane —on the throne; bhräjamänam —shining; tértha-räjam —to the king of holy places; uväca —said; ha —certainly.

     Then Närada, the king of sages, who is fond of a quarrel, approached and spoke to Prayäga, the king of holy places, as it gloriously sat on its throne.

Text 34

çré-närada uväca 
térthaiù präpüjitas tvaà vai
     tértha-räja mahä-tapaù
tubhyaà ca sarva-térthäni
     mukhyänéha balià daduù

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; térthaiù —by the holy places; präpüjitaù —worshiped; tvam —you; vai —indeed; tértha-räja —O king of holy places; mahä-tapäù —great austerities; tubhyam —to you; ca —also; sarva-térthäni —all holy places; mukhyäni —important; iha —here; balim —offerings; daduù —gave.

     Çré Närada said: O very austere king of holy places, all the important holy places worshiped you and gave offerings to you.

Text 35

vrajäd våndävanädéni
     nägatänéha te puraù
térthänäà räja-räjas tvaà
     pramattais tais tiras-kåtaù

     vrajät —from Vraja; våndävanädéni —beginning with Våndävana ; na —not; ägatäni —come; iha —here; te —you; puraù —before; térthänäm —of holy places; räja-räjaù —the king of kings; tvam —you; pramattaiù —mad; taiù —by them tiras-kåtaù —eclipsed.

     The holy places headed by Våndävana did not come to you from Vraja. You who are the king of the kings of holy places were insulted by these madly proud places.

Text 36

çré-sannanda uväca 
iti prabhäñya taà säkñäd
     gate devarñi-sattame
tértha-räjas tadä kruddho
     hari-lokaà jagäma ha

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; iti —thus; prabhäñya —speaking; tam —him; säkñät —directly; gate —gone; devarñi-sattame —the best of demigod sages; tértha-räjaù —the king of holy places; tadä —then; kruddhaù —angry; hari-lokam —to the planet of Lord Hari; jagäma ha —went.

     Çré Sannanda said: After speaking these words, the great sage of the demigods left. Angry, the king of holy places went to the realm of Lord Hari.

Text 37

natvä harià parikramya
     puraù sthitvä kåtäïjaliù
sarva-térthaiù parivåtaù
     çré-näthaà präha tértha-räö

     natvä —bowing down; harim —to Lord Hari; parikramya —circumambulating; puraù —in the presence; sthitvä —standing; kåtäïjaliù —with folded hands; sarva-térthaiù —by all the holy places; parivåtaù —surrounded; çré-nätham —to the Lord of the goddess of fortune; präha —said; tértha-räö —the king of holy places.

     Bowing down before Lord Hari, the master of the goddess of fortune, circumambulating Him, and with folded hands standing before Him, in the company of all the holy places, Prayäga, the king of holy places, spoke.

Text 38

çré-tértha-räja uväca 
he deva-deva präpto 'haà
     tértha-räjas tvayä kåtaù
balià dadur me térthäni
     mathurä-maëòalaà vinä

     çré-tértha-räjaù uväca —the king of holy places said; he —O; deva-deva —Lord of lords; präptaù —attained; aham —II am; tértha-räjaù —the king of holy places; tvayä —by You; kåtaù —made; balim —offerings; daduù —gave; me —to me; térthäni —holy places; mathurä-maëòalam —Mathurä-maëòala; vinä —except for.

     The king of holy places said: O Lord of lords, You made me king of holy places. Except for Mathurä-maëòala, all holy places have brought offerings to me.

Text 39

pramattair vraja-térthaiç ca
     tair ahaà tu tiraskåtaù
tasmät tubhyaà ca kathituà
     präpto 'haà tava mandire

     pramattaiù —mad with pride; vraja-térthaiç —the holynplaces of Vraja; ca —also; taiù —by them; aham —I; tu —indeed; tiraskåtaù —insulted; tasmät —therefore; tubhyam —to You; ca —also; kathitum —to tell; präptaù —come; aham —I; tava —to Your; mandire —palace.

     The holy places of Vraja have insulted me. I have come to Your palace to tell You.

Text 40

çré-bhagavän uväca 
dharäyäà sarva-térthänäà
     tvaà kåtas tértha-räì mayä
kintu svasya gåhasyäpi
     na kåto räö tvam eva hi

     çré-bhagavän uväca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; dharäyäm —on the earth; sarva-térthänäm —of all holy places; tvam —you; kåtaù —made; tértha-räj —king of holy places; mayä — —by Me; kintu —however; svasya —own; gåhasya —of the home; api —even; na —not; kåtaù —made; räö —king; tvam —you; eva —indeed; hi —indeed.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: I made you king of all holy places on earth, but I did not make you king of My own home.

Text 41

kià tvaà me mandiraà lipsur
     mattavad bhäñase vacaù
tértha-räja gåhaà gaccha
     çåëu väkyaà çubhaà ca me

     kim —why; tvam —you; me —My; mandiram —home; lipsuù —desiring to attain; mattavat —as if mad with pride; bhäñase —you speak; vacaù —words; tértha-räja —O king of holy places; gåham —home; gaccha —go; çåëu —hear; väkyam —words; çubham —auspicious; ca —and; me —My.

     Why, as if you wish to become the place where I live, do you speak in this mad way? O king of holy places, hear My auspicious words, and then return to your home.

Text 42

mathura-maëòalaà säkñän
     mandiraà me parät param
loka-trayät paraà divyaà
     pralaye 'pi na saàhåtam

     mathura-maëòalam —Mathura-maëòalaà; säkñän —directly; mandiram —home; me —My; parät —than the greatest; param —greater; loka-trayät —than the three worlds; param —supreme ; divyam —transcendental; pralaye —in cosmic devastation; api —even; na —not saàhåtam —removed.

     Mathurä-maëòala is My home. It is My transcendental abode above the three worlds. At the time of cosmic devastation it is not destroyed. 

Text 43

çré-sannanda uväca 
iti çrutvä tértha-räjo
     vismito 'bhüd gata-smayaù
ägatya natvä sampüjya
     mäthuraà vraja-maëòalam

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; iti —thus; çrutvä —hearing; tértha-räjaù —the king of holy places; vismitaù —astonished; abhüt —became; gata —gone; smayaù —pride; ägatya —arriving; natvä —bowing down; sampüjya —worshiping; mäthuram —Mathurä; vraja-maëòalam —Vraja-maëòala.

     Çré Sannanda said: Hearing this, the king of holy places was very surprised. His pride gone, he approached the Vraja-maëòala of Mathurä, bowed before it, and worshiped it.

Text 44

tataù pradakñiëé-kåtya
     sva-dhäma gatavän punaù
dharäyä mäna-bhaìgärthaà
     pürvaà me tat-pradarçitam
mayä tavägre kathitaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     tataù —then; pradakñiëé-kåtya —circumambulating; sva-dhäma —own abode; gatavän —went; punaù —again; dharäyäù —of the earth; mäna —the pride; bhaìga —breaking; artham —for the purpose; pürvam —previously; me —of me; tat-pradarçitam —revealed; mayä —by me; tava —of you; agre —in the presence; kathitam —spoken; kim —what?; bhüyaù —more; çrotum —to hear; icchasi —you desire.

     He circumambulated it, and then returned to his own abode. I have now told you about Mathurä Vraja-maëòala, which I personally saw break the earth's pride. What more do you wish to hear?
    
Text 45

çré-nanda uväca 
dharäyä mäna-bhaìgärthaà
     kena pürvaà pradarçitam
etan me vada gopeça
     mäthuraà vraja-maëòalam

     çré-nandaù uväca —Çré Nanda said; dharäyä —of the earth; mäna —of pride; bhaìga —breaking; artham —purpose; kena —by whom?; pürvam —before; pradarçitam —revealed; etan —this; me —to me; vada —please tell; gopeça —O king of the gopas; mäthuram —Mäthura; vraja-maëòalam —Vraja-maëòala.

     Çré Nanda said: Why did Mathurä Vraja-maëòala break the earth's pride. O king of the gopas, please tell me.

Text 46

çré-sannanda uväca 
ädau väräha-kalpe 'smin
     harir varäha-rüpa-dhåk
rasätalät samuddhåtya
     gäà babhau daàsörayä prabhuù

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; ädau —in the beginning; väräha-kalpe —in the Varäha-kalpa; asmin —in this; hariù —Lord Hari; varäha —of a boar; rüpa —the form; dhåk —manifesting; rasätalät —from Rasätala; samuddhåtya —lifting; gäm —the earth; babhau —was splendidly manifested; daàsörayä —with His tusks; prabhuù —the Supreme Lord.

     Çré Sannanda said: In the beginning of this Väräha-kalpa, Lord Hari assumed the form of a boar. With His tusk lifting the earth from the realm of Rasätala, He shone with great splendor.

Text 47

gacchantaà väri-våndeçu
     bhagavantaà rameçvaram
daàsörägre çobhitä påthvé
     präha devaà janärdanam

     gacchantam —going; väri-våndeçu —in the waters; bhagavantam —the Lord; rameçvaram —the master of the goddess of fortune; daàsöra —of His tusk; agre —on the tip; çobhitä —splendid; påthvé —the earth; präha —said; devam —to the Lord; janärdanam —who saves the living entities from distress.

     Glorious on the tip of His tusk, the earth spoke to the Supreme Person, the goddess of fortune's husband and the deliverer from sufferings, as He traveled through the waters.

Text 48

çré-dharoväca deva 
kutra sthale tvaà vai
     sthäpanaà me kariñyasi
jala-pürëaà jagat-sarvaà
     dåçyate vada he prabho

     çré-dharä uväca —the earth said; deva —O Lord; kutra —in what?; sthale —place; tvam —You; vai —indeed; sthäpanam —placing; me —of me; kariñyasi —will do; jala-pürëam —full of water; jagat-sarvam —the entire universe; dåçyate —is seen; vada —please tell; he —O; prabhaù —Lord.

     The earth-goddess said: Where will You put me down? Please tell me, O Lord. I see the entire universe is flooded with water.

Text 49

çré-varäha uväca 
yadä våkñäù pradåñöä hi
     bhavanty udvegatä jale
tadä te sthäpanä bhüyät
     paçyanti gaccha bhüruhän

     çré-varähaù uväca —Çré Varäha said; yadä —when; våkñäù —the trees; pradåñöä —are seen; hi —indeed; bhavanty —are; udvegatä —still; jale —in the water; tadä —then; te —of you; sthäpanä —placing; bhüyät —again; paçyanti —looking; gaccha —go; bhüruhän —for trees.

     Çré Varäha said: When you see trees standing up from the water I will put you down. Look for trees.

Text 50

çré-dharoväca 
sthävaräëäà tu racanä
     mamopari samästhitä
anyästi kià vä dharaëé
     tv ahaà hi dhäraëämayé

     çré-dharä uväca —the earth said; sthävaräëäm —of steady places; tu —indeed; racanä —created; mama- —me; upari —above; samästhitä —situated; anyä —another; asti —is; kim —what?; vä —or; dharaëé —the earth; tv —indeed; aham —I; hi —indeed; dhäraëämayi —steadfast.

     The earth-goddess said: All immovable things rest on me. What other thing is their steady resting-place? It is I on which all things rest.

Text 51

çré-sannanda uväca 
vadantétthaà dadarçägre
     jale våkñän manoharän
vékñya påthvé harià präha
     sarvato vigata-smayä

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; vadanti —speaking; ittham —thus; dadarça —saw; agre —ahead; jale —in the water; våkñän —trees; manoharän —beautiful; vékñya —seeing; påthvé —the earth; harim —to Lord Hari; präha —sppoke; sarvataù —completely; vigata —gone; smayä —her pride.

     Çré Sannanda said: As she spoke in this way she saw some beautiful trees just ahead. Her pride now gone, the earth-goddes glanced at Lord Hari and spoke.

Text 52

çré-dharoväca 
deva kasmin sthale våkñäù
     santi hy ete sa-pallaväù
idaà manasi me citraà
     vada yajïa-pate prabho

     çré-dharä uväca —the earth-goddess said; deva —O Lord; kasmin —in what?; sthale —place; våkñäù —these trees; santi —are; hy —indeed; ete —they; sa-pallaväù —with twigs and leaves; idam —this; manasi —in the heart; me —of me; citram —wonder; vada —tell; yajïa-pate —O Lord of sacrifices; prabhaù —O master.

     The earth-goddess said: Lord, in what place do these trees with twigs and leaves grow? They fill my heart with wonder. O Lord of yajïas, O master, please tell me. 

Text 53

çré-varäha uväca 
mäthuraà maëòalaà divyaà
     dåçyate 'gre nitambini
goloka-bbümi-samyuktaà
     pralaye 'pi na saàhåtam

     çré-varähaù uväca —Lord Varäha said; mäthuram —Mathurä; maëòalam —Maëòala; divyam —transcendental; dåçyate —is seen; agre —ahead; nitambini —O beautiful one; goloka-bbümi-samyuktam —with the land of Goloka; pralaye —at the time of cosmic devastation; api —even; na —not; saàhåtam —is destroyed.

     Çré Varäha said: O beautiful one, you see transcendental Mathurä-maëòala, which is part of the realm of Goloka, and is not destroyed at the time of cosmic devastation.

Text 54

çré-sannanda uväca 
tac chrutvä vismitä påthvé
     gata-mänä babhüva ha
tasmän nanda mahä-bäho
     vrajo 'yaà sarvato 'dhikaù

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; tac —that; çrutvä —heart; vismitä —astonished; påthvé —the earth; gata-mänä —whose pride was gone; babhüva ha —became; tasmän —from that; nanda —O Nanda; mahä-bähaù —O great-armed one; vrajaù —Vraja; ayam —this; sarvataù —than all; adhikaù —greater.

     Çré Sannanda said: Hearing this the earth-goddess became both astonished and prideless. O great-armed Nanda, for this reason Vraja is the best of all places.

Text 55

çrutvedaà vraja-mähätmyaà
     jévan mukto bhaven naraù
tértha-räjät paraà viddhi
     mäthuraà vraja-maëòalam

     çrutvä —hearing; idam —this; vraja —of Vraja; mähätmyam —the glory; jévan —living; muktaù —liberated; bhaven —becomes; naraù —a person; tértha —of holy places; räjät —than the king; param —better; viddhi —know; mäthuram —Mathuräm; vraja-maëòalam —the circle of Vraja.

     A person who hears this description of Vraja's glories becomes liberated even as he continues to live in this world. Please know that Mathurä Vraja-maëòala is more exalted than Prayäga, the king of holy places.
.pa

Chapter Two
Girirjotpatti-kathanam
Description of Giriräja Govardhana's Birth 

Text 1

çré-nanda uväca 
he sannanda mahä-prajïa
     sarvajïo 'si bahu-çrutaù
vraja-maëòala-mähätmyaà
     vadatas te mukhäc chrutam

     çré-nanda uväca —Çré Nanda said; he —O; sannanda —Sannanda; mahä-prajïa —very intelligent; sarvajïaù —all-knowing; asi —you are; bahu-çrutaù —have heard much; vraja-maëòala-mähätmyam —the glory of Vraja-mandala; vadataù —speaking; te —of you; mukhäc —from the mouth; chrutam —heard.

     Çré Nanda said: O very intelligent Sannanda, you have heard much and you know everything. We have heard from your mouth the glories of Vraja-maëòala.

Text 2

girir govardhano näma
     tasyotpattià ca me vada
kasmäd enaà giri-varaà
     giri-räjaà vadanti hi

     girir govardhanaù —Govardhana Hill; näma —named; tasya —of it; utpattim —the birth; ca —also; me —to me; vada —tell; kasmät —why?; enam —he; giri-varaàthe best of moutnains; giri-räjam —the king of mountains; vadanti —they say; hi —indeed.

     Now please tell me about the birth of the mountain named Govardhana. Why do they call it the best of mountains and the king of mountains?

Text 3

yamuneyaà nadé säkñät
     kasmäl lokät samägatä
tan-mähätmyaà ca vada me
     tvam asi jïäninäà varaù

     yamunä —the Yamunä; iyam —it; nadé —river; säkñät —directly; kasmäl —from what?; lokät —world; samägatä —come; tan-mähätmyam —the glory of it; ca —also; vada —tell; me —me; tvam —you; asi —are; jïäninäm —of the wise; varah —the best.

     From what world did the Yamunä river come? You are the best of the wise. Please explain to me its glories.

Text 4

çré-sannanda uväca 
ekadä hästinapure
     bhéñmaà dharma-bhåtäà varam
papraccha päëòur itthaà taà
     janänäà cänuçåëvatäm

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; ekadä —one day; hastinapure —in Hastinapura; bhéñmam —to Bhisma; dharma —-bhåtäàpious; varam —benediction; papraccha —asked; päëòuù —Pandu; ittham —thus; tam —him; janänäm —of people; ca —and; anuçåëvatäm —listening;

     One day in Hastinapura, as many people listened, King Päëòu asked pious Bhéñma:

Texts 5 and 6

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     golokädhipatiù prabhuù

bhuvo bhärävatäräya
     gacchan devo janärdanaù
rädhäà präha priye bhéru
     gaccha tvam api bhü-tale

     paripürëatamaù säkñät —the Supreme Personality of Godhead çré-kåñëaù —Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän —the Lord; svayam —Himself; asaìkhya —countless; brahmäëòa —of universes; patiù —the master; golokädhipatiù —the king of Goloka; prabhuù —the Lord; bhuvaù —of the earth; bhära —the burden; avatäräya —for removing; gacchan —about to depart; devaù —Lord; janäradanaù —Janärdana; rädhäm —to Rädhä; präha —said; priye —O beloved; bhéru —frightened; gaccha —go; tvam —You; api —also; bhü-tale —to the earth.

     As the Original Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa, who is the king of Goloka and the master of countless universes was about to depart in order to remove the earth's burden, He said to Rädhä: O beloved, O frightened one, You should also go to the earth.

Text 7

çré-rädhoväca 
yatra våndävanaà nästi
     na yatra yamunä nadé
yatra govardhano nästi
     tatra me na manaù-sukham

     çré-rädhä uväca —Çré Rädhä said; yatra —where; våndävanam —Våndävana; na —not; asti —is; na —not; yatra —where; yamunä —Yamuna; nadé —river; yatra —where; govardhanaù —Govardhana; na —not; asti —is; tatra —there; me —My; na —not; manaù —of the heart; sukham —happiness.

     Çré Rädhä said: My heart cannot be happy in a place where there is no Våndävana forest, no Yamunä River, and no Govardhana Hill.

Text 8

çré-sannanda uväca 
veda-näga-kroça-bbümià
     sva-dhämnaù çré-hariù svayam
govardhanaà ca yamunäà
     preñayäm äsa bhüpari

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; veda-näga-kroça —47 kroças; bbümim — —land; sva-dhämnaù —own abode; çré-hariù —Lord Hari; svayam —personally; govardhanam —Govardhana; ca —and; yamunäm —Yamunä; preñayäm äsa —sen; bhü-upari —to the earth.

     Çré Sannanda said: Then Lord Hari sent a 47 kroça portion of His own abode, along with Govardhana and the Yamunä, to the earth.

     Note: A kroça equals two miles.

Text 9

veda-näga-kroça-bbümiù
     säpi cätra samägatä
catur-viàçad-vanair yuktä
     sarva-lokaiç ca vanditä

     veda-näga-kroça-bbümiù —a land of 47 kroças; sä —that; api —also; ca —and; atra —here; samägatä —come; catur-viàçat —24; vanaiù —forests; yuktä —with; sarva-lokaiç —by all the worlds; ca —and; vanditä —worshiped.

     Worshiped by all the worlds and filled with 24 forests, that land of Våndävana has now come to the earth.

Text 10

bhäratät paçcima-diçi
     çalmalé-dvépa-madhyataù
govardhano janma lebhe
     patnyäà droëäcalasya ca

     bhäratät —from Bharata; paçcima-diçi —in the west; çalmalé-dvépa-madhyataù —in the midst of Salmali-dvipa; govardhanaù —Govardhana; janma —birth; lebhe —attained; patnyäm —in the wife; droëäcalasya —of Dronacala; ca —and.

     West of Bhärata-varña, in the middle of Çalmalé-dvépa, Govardhana was born from the wife of Mount Droëa.

Text 11

govardhanopari suräù
     puñpa-varñaà pracakrire
himälaya-sumerv-ädyäù
     çailäù sarve samägatäù

     govardhana —Govardhana; upari —on; suräù —the demigods; puñpa-varñam —a shower of flowers; pracakrire —did; himälaya-sumerv-ädyäù —headed by Himalaya and Sumeru; çailäù —the mountains; sarve —all; samägatäù —came.

     The demigods showered flowers on Govardhana. Headed by Himälaya and Sumeru, all the mountains came.

Text 12

natvä pradakñiëé-kåtya
     püjaà kåtvä vidhänataù
govardhanasya paramäà
     stutià cakrur mahädrayaù

     natvä —bowing down; pradakñiëé-kåtya —circumambulating; püjam —worshipo; kåtvä —doiing; vidhänataù —properly; govardhanasya —of Govardhana; paramäm —great; stutim —prayers; cakruù —did; mahädrayaù —the great mountains.

     The great mountains bowed down, circumambulated, properly worshiped, and eloquently glorified Govardhana with these words:

Text 13

çré-çailä ücuù 
tvaà säkñät kåñëacandrasya
     paripürëatamasya ca
goloke go-gaëair yukte
     gopé-gopäla-saàyute

     çré-çailäù ücuù —the mountains said; tvam —you; säkñät —directky; kåñëacandrasya —of Lord Kåñëacandra; paripürëatamasya —the Original Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca —and; goloke —in Goloka; go-gaëaiù —multitudes of cows; yukte —with; gopé —gopés; gopäla — —gopas; saàyute —with.

     In Goloka, which is filled with gopas, gopés, and cows, you are the mountain of Lord Kåñëacandra, the Original Supreme Personality of Godhead. 

Text 14

tvaà hi govardhano näma
     våndäraëye viräjase
tvaà no giréëäà sarveñäà
     giri-räjo 'si sämpratam

     tvam —you; hi —indeed; govardhanaù —Govardhana; näma —named; våndäraëye —in Våndävana; viräjase —shine; tvam —you; naù —of us; girénäm —mountains; sarveñäm —all; giri-räjaù —the king of mountains; asi —are; sämpratam —now.

     You are named Govardhana. You are splendidly manifest in the world of Våndävana and you are the king of all us mountains.

Text 15

namo våndävanäìkäya
     tubhyaà goloka-mauline
pürëa-brahmätapaträya
     namo govardhanäya ca

     namaù —obeisances; våndävana —of Våndävana; aìkäya —on the lap; tubhyam —to you; goloka-mauline —the crown of Goloka; pürëa-brahma —of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; atapaträya —the parasol; namaù —obeisances; govardhanäya —to Govardhana; ca —and.

     Obeisances to you, who are the crown of Goloka and who sit on Våndävana's lap! Obeisances to Govardhana, the parasol of the Supreme Personality of Godhead!

Text 16

çré-sannanda uväca 
iti stutvätha girayo
     jagmuù svaà svaà gåhaà tataù
çailo giri-varo säkñäd
     giri-räja iti småtaù

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; iti —thus; stutvä —offering prayers; atha —then; girayaù —the mountains; jagmuù —went; svam svam —to their own; gåham —homes; tataù —then; çailaù —the mountain; giri-varaù —the best of mountains; säkñät —directly; giri-räja —the king of mountains; iti —thus; småtaù —remembered.

     After speaking these prayers the mountains returned to their homes. For this reason Govardhana is known as the best of mountains and the king of mountains.

Texts 17-20

ekadä tértha-yäyé ca
     pulastyo muni-sattamaù
droëäcala-sutaà çyämaà
     girià govardhanaà varam

mädhavé-latikä-puñpaà
     phala-bhära-samanvitam
nirjharair näditaà çäntaà
     kandära-maìgälayanam

tapo-yogyaà ratnamayaà
     çata-çåìgaà manoharam
citra-dhätu-viciträìgaà
     sa-taìkaà pakñi-saìkulam

mågaiù çäkhämåtair vyäptaà
     mayüra-dhvani-maëòitam
mukti-pradaà mumukñünäà
     taà dadarça mahä-muniù

     ekadä —one day; tértha-yäyé —going on pilgrimage; ca —and; pulastyaù —Pulastya Muni; muni-sattamaù —teh best of sages; droëäcala —of Mount Droëa; sutaà-the son; çyämam —dark; girim —mountain; govardhanam —Govardhana; varam —best; mädhavé-latikä-puñpam —with flowers on madhavi vines; phala-bhära-samanvitam —filled with fruits; nirjharaiù —with mountain streams; näditam —with the sounds; çäntam —peaceful; kandära-maìgälayanam —with auspicious caves; tapo-yogyam —suitable for performing austerities; ratnamayam —filled with jewels; çata-çåìgam —with a hundred peaks; manoharam —beautiful; citra-dhätu-viciträìgam —with wonderfully colorful mineral pigments; sa-öaìkam —with beautiful slopes; pakñi-saìkulam —filled with birds; mågaiù —with deer; çäkhämåtaiù —with nectar trees; vyäptam —filled; mayüra-dhvani-maëòitam —decorated with the sounds of peacocks; mukti-pradam —giving liberation; mumukñünäm —to they who yearn for liberation; tam —it; dadarça —saw; mahä-muniù —the great sage.

     One day, as he was traveling to holy places, the great sage Pulastya saw Mount Droëa's son Govardhana, who was filled with flowering mädhavé vines, heavy with abundant fruits, filled with the sounds of gushing streams, peaceful, auspicious with many caves, suitable for performing austeritiies, filled with jewels, charming, wonderful with many colorful minerals, beautiful with graceful slopes, filled with many birds, deer, and nectar trees, and decorated with peacock calls, and which gave liberation for they who yearn for it.

Text 21

tal-lipsur muni-çärdülo
     droëa-pärçvaà samägataù
püjito droëa-giriëä
     pulastyaù präha taà girim

     tat —him; lipsuù —desiring to attain; muni-çärdülaù —the tiger of sages; droëa-pärçvam —to the side of Drona; samägataù —went; püjitaù —worshiped; droëa-giriëä —by Mount Drona; pulastyaù —Pulastya; präha —said; tam —to him; girim —the mountain.

     Pulastya, the tiger of sages, approached Mount Droëa and, wishing to get his son, spoke.

Text 22

çré-pulastya uväca 
he droëa tvaà giréndro 'si
     sarva-devaiç ca püjitaù
divyauñadhi-samäyuktaù
     sadä jévana-do nåëäm

     çré-pulastyaù uväca —Çré Pulastay said; he —O; droëa —Drona; tvam —you; giréndraù —the king of mountains; asi —are; sarva-devaiç —by all the demigods; ca —also; püjitaù —worshiped; divyauñadhi-samäyuktaù —filled with transcendental medicinal herbs; sadä —always; jévana-daù —giving life; nåëäm —to the people.

     Çré Pulastya said: O Droëa, you are the king of mountains. You are worshiped by all the demigods. You are filled with transcendental medicinal herbs and thus you always restore the peoples' lives. 
Text 23

arthé taväntike präptaù
     käçé-stho 'haà mahä-muniù
govardhanaà sutaà dehi
     nänyair me 'tra prayojanam

     arthé —wishing; tava —of you; antike —nearness; präptaù —attained; käçé-sthaù —staying in Varanasi; aham —I;; mahä-muniù —a great sage; govardhanam —Govardhana; sutam —son; dehi —please give; na —not; anyaiù —by others; me —of me; atra —here; prayojanam —need.

     I come to you with a request. I am a great sage. I live in Käçé. Please give me your son Govardhana. I do not wish anything else.

     Note: Käçé is a name of Väräëasé.

Text 24

viçveçvarasya devasya
     käçé-nämnä mahä-puré
yatra päpé måtaù sadyaù
     paraà mokñaà prayäti hi

     viçveçvarasya —of Viçveçvara; devasya —Lord; käçé-nämnä —named kasi; mahä-puré —great city; yatra —where; päpé —a sinner; måtaù —does; sadyaù —at once; param —ultimate; mokñam —liberation; prayäti —attains; hi —indeed.

     The great city named Käçé is the home of Lord Viç/veçvara. A sinner who dies there at once attains liberation.

Text 25

yatra gaìgägatä säkñäd
     viçvanätho 'pi yatra vai
tatraiva sthäpayiñyämi
     yatra ko 'pi na parvataù

     yatra —where; gaìgä —the Ganes; ägatä —come; säkñät —directky; viçvanäthaù —Viç/vanätha; api —also; yatra —where; vai —indeed; tatra —there; eva —indeed; sthäpayiñyämi —I will place; yatra —where; ko 'pi —any; na —not; parvataù —mountain.

     The Ganges flows there, and Lord Viçvanätha resides there. There, where there is no mountain, I will place your son.

Text 26

govardhane tava sute
     latä-vrkña-samäkule
tasmiàs tapaù kariñyämi
     jäto 'yaà me manorathaù

     govardhane —on Govardhana; tava —your; sute —son; latä-vrkña-samäkule —filled with trees and vines; tasmin —there; tapaù —austerities; kariñyämi —I will perform; jätaù —manifested; ayam —this; me —my; manorathaù —desire.

     I will perform austerities on your son Govardhana, who is filled with trees and vines. That is my desire.

Text 27

çré-sannanda uväca 
pulastya-vacanaà çrutvä
     sva-suta-sneha-vihvalaù
açru-pürëo droëa-giris
     taà munià väkyam abravét

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; pulastya-vacanam —Pulastya's words; çrutvä —hearing; sva-suta-sneha —with love for his son; vihvalaù —overwhelmed; açru-pürëaù —filled with tears; droëa-giriù —Mount Droëa; tam —to him; munim —the sage; väkyam —words; abravét —spoke.

     Çré Sannanda said: Hearing Pulastya's words, Droëa became filled with love for his son. His eyes filled with tears, he spoke to the sage.

Text 28

çré-droëa uväca 
putra-snehäkulo 'haà vai
     putro me 'yam ati-priyaù
te çäpa-bhaya-bhéto 'haà
     vadämy enaà mahä-mune

     çré-droëaù uväca —Çré Droëa said; putra-snehäkulaù —filled with love for my son; aham —I am; vai —indeed; putraù —son; me —my; ayam —he; ati-priyaù —very dear; te —of you; çäpa —of the curse; bhaya-bhétaù —afraid; aham —I; vadämy —say; enam —this; mahä-mune —O great sage.

     Çré Droëa said: I am filled with love for my son. My son is very dear to me. O great sage, I fear your curse. Let me  speak to him.

Text 29

he putra gaccha muninä
     bhärate karmake çubhe
traivargyaà labhyate yatra
     nåbhir mokñam api kñaëät

     he —O; putra —son; gaccha —go; muninä —with the sage; bhärate —to Bharata-varsa; karmake —the land of karma; çubhe —beautiful; traivargyam —the three goals of life; labhyate —are obrained; yatra —where; nåbhiù —by human beings; mokñam —liberation; api —also; kñaëät —in a moment.

     O son, go with this sage to beautiful Bhärata-varña, the land of karma, where the people attain the three goals of life, and even liberation, in a single moment.

Text 30

çré-govardhana uväca 
mune kathaà mäà nayasi
     lambitaà yojanäñöakam
yojana-dvayam uccäìgaà
     païca-yojana-viståtam

     çré-govardhanaù uväca —Çré Govardhana said; mune —O sage; katham —how?; mäm —me; nayasi —you take; lambitam —extended; yojanä —yojanas; añöakam —eight; yojana-dvayam —two yojanas; ucca —tall; aìgam —body; païca-yojana —five yojanas; viståtam —extended.

     Çré Govardhana said: O sage, how will you take me? I am eight yojanas long, five yojanas wide, and two yojanas tall.

     Note: A yojana is eight miles.

Text 31

çré-pulastya uväca 
upaviçya kare me tvaà
     gaccha putra yathä-sukham
vahayämi kare tvaà vai
     yävat käçéà samägataù

     çré-pulastyaù uväca —Çré Pulastya said; upaviñya —sit; kare —in the hand; me —of me; tvam —you; gaccha —go; putra —son; yathä-sukham —as you wish; vahayämi —I will carry; kare —in my hand; tvam —you; vai —indeed; yävat —until; käçém —Kasi; samägataù —I arrive.

     Çré Pulastya said: My son, please sit in my hand and I will carry you to Käçé.

Text 32

çré-govardhana uväca 
mune yatra sthale bbümyäà
     sthäpanaà me kariñyasi
kariñyämi na cotthänaà
     tad-bbümyaù çapatho mama

     çré-govardhanaù uväca —Çré Govardhana said; mune —O sage; yatra —where; sthale —in the place; bbümyäm —on earth; sthäpanam —placing; me —of me; kariñyasi —you will do; kariñyämi —I will do; na —not; ca —again; utthänam —rising; tad-bbümyaù —from that place; çapathaù —because of a vow; mama —of mine.

     Çré Govardhana said: I will stay where you place me. I will not leave that place. I promise you this.

Text 33

çré-pulastya uväca 
aham ä-çalmalé-dvipän
     maryädé-kåtya kauçalam
na sthäpanaà kariñyämi
     çapathas te 'pi me pathi

     çré-pulastyaù uväca —Çré Pulastya said; aham —I; ä-çalmalé-dvipän —fropm Salmali-dvipa; maryädé-kåtya —crossing the boundary; kauçalam —the country of Ayodhya; na —not; sthäpanam —placing; kariñyämi —I will do; çapathaù —promise; te —to you; api —also; me —of me; pathi —on the path.

     Çré Pulastya said: As I take you from Çälmalé-dvépa to the country of Kauçala I will not put you down along the way. I promise you this.

Text 34

çré-sannanda uväca 
muneù kara-tale tasminn
     äruroha mahäcalaù
praëamya pitaraà droëaà
     açru-pürëakulekñaëaù

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; muneù —of the sage; kara-tale —in the plam of the hand; tasminn —there; äruroha —climbed; mahäcalaù —the great miountain; praëamya —bowing down; pitaram —to his father; droëam —Droëa; açru-pürëakulekñaëaù —his eyes filled with tears.

     Çré Sannanda said: His eyes filled with tears, the great mountain Govardhana bowed down before his father, Droëa, and then climbed onto the sage's hand.

Text 35

munis taà dakñiëa-kare
     dhåtvä gacchan chanaiù çanaiù
sva-tejo darçayan nåëäà
     präpto 'bhüd vraja-maëòale

     muniù —the sage; tam —to him; dakñiëa-kare —in the right hand; dhåtvä —holding; gacchan —going; çanaiù çanaiù —little by little; sva-tejaù —his own power; darçayan —showing; nåëäm —of the people; präptaù —attained; abhüt —became; vraja-maëòale —Vraja-maëòala.

     Carrying the mountain in his right hand, he showed his great power to the people. Moving very slowly, he finally came to Vraja-maëòala.

Texts 36 and 37

jäti-smaro giris tatra
     prähedaà pathi cintayan
paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chåé-kåñëo bhagavän svayam

asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     vraje 'trävatariñyati
bäla-léläà ca kaiçoréà
     ceñöäà gopäla-bälakaiù

     jäti —previous birth; smaraù —remembering; giriù —the mountain; tatra —there; präha —said; idam —thus; pathi —on the path; cintayan —thinking; paripürëatamaù —the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñäc —directly; chåé-kåñëaù —Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän —the Lord; svayam —Himself; asaìkhya —countless; brahmäëòa —of universes; patiù —the master; vraje —in Vraja; atra —here; avatariñyati —will descend; bäla-léläm —childhood pastimes; ca —and; kaiçorém —of a youth; ceñöäm —the activities; gopäla-bälakaiù —with cowherd boys.

     Remembering his previous life, as he traveled, Mount Govardhana said to himself: Çré Kåñëa, the Original Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the master of countless universes, will decscend to this place, Vraja, and enjoy childhood playing with the cowherd boys, and then the pastimes of youth.

Text 38

däna-léläà mäna-léläà
     harir atra kariñyati
tasmän mayä na gantavyaà
     bbümiç ceyaà kalindajä

     däna —of paying a toll; léläm —pastimes; mäna —of jealous anger; léläm —pastimes; hariù —Lord Hari; atra —here; kariñyati —will do; tasmän —therefore; mayä —by me; na —not; gantavyam —should be gone; bbümiç —earth; ca —and; iyam —this; kalindajä —the Yamunä.

     Here Lord Hari will enjoy pastimes of paying a toll and pastimes of jealous anger. For this reason I should not leave this place where the Yamunä flows.

Text 39

golokäd rädhayä särdhaà
     çré-kåñëo 'trägamiñyati
kåta-kåtyo bhaviñyämi
     kåtvä tad-darçanaà param

     golokät —from Goloka; rädhayä —Rädhä; särdham —with; çré-kåñëaù —Çré Kåñëa; atra —here; ägamiñyati —will come; kåta-kåtyaù —successful; bhaviñyämi —I will become; kåtvä —having done; tad-darçanam —the sight of Him; param —great.

     From Goloka Çré Kåñëa will come here with Rädhä. By seeing Him I will make my life perfect.

Text 40

evaà vicärya manasä
     bhüri bhäraà dadau kare
tadä muniç ca çränto 'bhüd
     bhüta-pürvaà gata-småtiù

     evam —thus; vicärya —thinking; manasä —in his mind; bhüri —great; bhäram —burden; dadau —gave; kare —on the hand; tadä —then; muniç —the sage; ca —and; çräntaù —exhausted; abhüt —became; bhüta-pürvam —done before; gata —gone; småtiù —memory.

     Thinking this in his mind, Govardhana made himself very heavy in the sage's hand. Overcome with exhaustion, the sage could not remember what had happened before.

Text 41

karäd uttärya taà çailaà
     nidhäya vraja-maëòale
laghu-çaìkäjayärthaà hi
     gato 'bhüd bhära-péòitaù

     karät —from his hand; uttärya —taking; tam —him; çailam —the mountain; nidhäya —placing; vraja-maëòale —in Vraja-mandala; laghu-çaìkäjayärthaàto lighten the burden; hi —iindeed; gataù —gone; abhüt —became; bhära —of the weight; péòitaù —tormented.

     Tormented by the mountain's great weight, to lighten his burden the sage put him down in Vraja-maëòala.

Text 42

kåtvä çaucaà jale snätvä
     pulastyo muni-sattamaù
uttiñöheti muniù präha
     girià govardhanaà param

     kåtvä —having done; çaucam —purification; jale —in teh water; snätvä —having bathed; pulastyaù —Pulastya; muni-sattamaù —the best of sages; uttiñöha —rise up; iti —thus; muniù —the sage; präha —said; girim —to the mountain; govardhanam —Govardhana; param —then.

     After bathing in the water there and becoming clean, the great sage Pulastya said to Mount Govardhana: "Stand up!"

Text 43

notthitaà bhüri-bhäräòhyaà
     karäbhyäà taà mahä-muniù
sva-tejasä balenäpi
     gåhétum upacakrame

     na —not; utthitam —stood up; bhüri-bhäräòhyam —very heavy; karäbhyäm —with both hands; tam —him; mahä-muniù —the great sage; sva-tejasä —by his potency; balenäpi —and strength; gåhétum —to take; upacakrame —did.

     When the very heavy mountain did not stand up, the great sage grasped it with his mystic strength.

Text 44

muninä saìgåhéto 'pi
     giri-räjo girärdrayä
na cäcäläìgulià kiïcit
     tad api droëa-nandanaù        
     muninä —by the sage; saìgåhétaù —grasped; api —although; giri-räjaù —the king of mountains; girä —with words; ärdrayä —sweet; na —not; cäcäla —moved; aìgulim —a finger; kiïcit —at all;; tat —that; api —also; droëa-nandanaù —the son of Mount Droëa. 

     Although the sage embarced him and spoke sweet words, Mount Govardhana, the son of Droëa, did not move even for the space of a finger.

Text 45

çré-pulastya uväca 
gaccha gaccha giri-çreñöha
     bhäraà mä kuru mä kuru
mayä jïäto 'si ruñöas tvaà
     abhipräyaà vadäçu me

     çré-pulastyaù uväca —Çré Pulastya said; gaccha —go; gaccha —go; giri-çreñöha —O best of mountains; bhäram —weight; mä —don't; kuru —do; mä —don't; kuru —do; mayä —by me; jïätaù —known; asi —you are; ruñöaù —angry; tvam —you; abhipräyam —reason; vada —tell; äçu —at once; me —to me.

     Çré Pulastya said: Come! Come! O best of mountains, don't make yourself heavy! Don't make yourself heavy! I know you are angry. Tell me why at once!

Text 46

çré-govardhana uväca 
mune 'tra me na doño 'sti
     tvayä me sthäpanä kåtä
kariñyämi na cotthänaà
     pürvaà me çapathaù kåtaù

     çré-govardhanaù uväca —Çré Govardhana said; mune —O sage; atra —here; me —O sage; na —not; doñaù —fault; 'sti —is; tvayä —by you; me —of me; sthäpanä —establishing; kåtä —done; kariñyämi —I will do; na —not; ca —and; utthänam —rising; pürvam —before; me —of me; çapathaù —the promise; kåtaù —done.

     Çré Govardhana said: O sage, there is no fault on my part. You have put me down, and now I will never move from this place. That was the promise I made to you.

Text 47

pulastyo muni-çärdülaù
     krodhät pracalitendriyaù
sphurad-oñöho droëa-puraà
     çaçäpa vigatodyamaù

     pulastyaù —Pulastya; muni-çärdülaù —the tiger of sages; krodhät —out of anger; pracalita —trembling; indriyaù — —senses; sphurat —trembling; oñöhaù —lips; droëa-putram —the son of Droëa; çaçäpa —cursed; vigata —gone; udyamaù —effort.

     Then, abandoning his attempt (to move the mountain), Pulastya, the tiger of sages, his senses filled with anger and his lips trembling, cursed Govardhana, the son of Droëa.

Text 48

çré-pulastya uväca 
gire tvayäti-dhåñöena
     na kåto me manorathaù
tasmät tu öila-mätraà hi
     nityaà tvaà kñiëatvaà vraja

     çré-pulastyaù uväca —Çré Pulastya said; gire —O mountain; tvayä —by you; ati-dhåñöena —very arrogant; na —not; kåtaù —done; me —to me; manorathaù —desire; tasmät —therefore; tu —indeed; öila-mätram —the size of a sesame seed; hi —indeed; nityam —always; tvam —you; kñiëatvam —diminution; vraja —go.

     Çré Pulastya said: O arrogant mountain, you would not fulfill my desire! Therefore every day you will become smaller by the size of a sesame seed.

Text 49

çré-sannanda uväca 
käçéà gate pulastyarñäv
     ayaà govardhano giriù
nityaà saìkñéyate nanda
     öila-mätraà dine dine

     çré-sannandaù uväca —Çré Sannanda said; käçém —to Kasi; gate —went; pulastyarñau —when Pulastya Åñi; ayam —he; govardhano giriù —Mount Govardhana; nityam —always; saìkñéyate —diminishes; nanda —O Nanda; öila-mätram —by the size of s sesame seed; dine —day; dine —after day.

     Çré Sannanda said: O Nanda, when Pulastya Åñi left for Käçé, Mount Govardhana beagn to shrink by the size of a sesame seed day after day.

Text 50

yävad bhägirathé gaìgä
     yävad govardhano giriù
tävat kaleù prabhävas tu
     bhaviñyati na karhicit

     yävat —as; bhägirathé —the the daughter of King Bhagiratha; gaìgä —the Ganges; yävat —as; govardhanaù —Govardhana; giriù —Mount; tävat —so; kaleù —of Kali-yuga; prabhävaù —the power; tu —indeed; bhaviñyati —will be; na —not; karhicit —at all.

     As long as the Bhägérthé Ganges is present, and as long as Mount Govardhana is present, the power of Kali-yuga will not be present.

Text 51

govardhanasya prakaöaà caritraà
     nåëäà mahä-päpa-haraà pavitram
mayä tavägre kathitaà vicitraà
     su-mukti-daà kau ruciraà na citram

     govardhanasya —of Givardhana; prakaöam —the manifestation; caritram —the story; nåëäm —of men; mahä-päpa-haram —m —removes the greatest sins; pavitram —pure; mayä —by me; tava —of you; agre —in the presence; kathitam —told; vicitram —wonderful; su-mukti-dam —giving liberation; kau —on the earth; ruciram —beautiful; na —not; citram —a wonder.

     I have spoken to you the story of Mount Govardhana's appearance in this world, a sacred story that removes from human beings the greatest sins, that is very wonderful, and that gives the greatest liberation. It is not surprising that this story is so beautiful and glorious in this world.

Chapter Three
Kälindy-ägamana-varëaëa
Description of the Yamunä's Arrival

Text 1

çré-sannanda uväca 
goloke hariëäjïäptä
     kälindé saritäà varä
kåñëaà pradakñiëé-kåtya
     gantum abhyudyatäbhavat

     çré-sannandaù uväca—Çré Sannanda said; goloke—in Goloka; hariëä—by Lord Hari; jïäptä—informed; kälindé—Yamunä; saritäm—of rivers; varä—the best; kåñëam—Lord Kåñëa; pradakñiné-kåtya—circumambulating; gantum—to go; abhyudyata—about; abhavat—became.

     Çré Sannanda said: Ordered by Lord Kåñëa in Goloka, Yamunä, the best of rivers, circumambulated the Lord and was about to go (to the earth).

Text 2

tadaiva virajä säkñad
     gaìgä brahma-dravodbhavä
dve nadyau yamunäyäà tu
     sampraléne babhüvatuù

     tadä—then; eva—certainly; virajä—Viraja; säkñat—directly; gaìgä—the Ganges; brahma-dravodbhavä—spiritual river; dve—two; nadyau—rivers; yamunäyäm—in the yamuna; tu—indeed; sampraléne—merged; babhüvatuù—became.

     Then the Virajä river and the spiritual Gaìgä river both entered the Yamunä.

Text 3

paripürëatamäà kåñëäà
     tasmät kåñëasya nanda-räö
paripürëatamasyäpi
     patta-räjïià vidur janäù

     paripürëatamam—the supreme; kåñëam—the Yamunä; tasmät—from that; kåñëasya—of Kåñëa; nanda-räö—King Nanda; paripürëatamasya—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; api—even; paööaräjïim—the most important queen; viduù—know; janäù—the people.

     O king Nanda, for this reason the people know that the Yamunä is the greatest of rivers and the first queen of Lord Kåñëa.

Text 4

tato vegena mahatä
     kälindé saritäà varä
bibheda virajä-vegaà
     nikuïja-dvära-nirgatä

     tataù—then; vegena—with power; mahatä—great; kälindé—the Yamunä; saritäm—of rivers; varä—the best; bibheda—broke; virajä-vegam—the current of the Virajä; nikuïja—of a forest grove; dvära—to the gate; nirgatä—gone.

     Then, with great force breaking through the current of the Virajä, the Yamunä left the gate of the transcendental forest grove. 

Text 5

asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-cayaà
     spåñövä brahma-dravaà gatä
bhindanti taj-jalaà dérghaà
     sva-vegena mahä-nadé

     asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-cayam—countless universes; spåñövä—touching; brahma-dravam—the spiritual river; gatä—gone; bhindanti—breaking; taj-jalam—that water; dérgham—long; sva-vegena—by its own power; mahä-nadé—great river.

     Touching countless universes, she came to the spiritual Gaìgä. With great force the great Yamunä river broke through the Gaìgä's waters.

Text 6

väma-pädäìguñöha-nakha-
     bhinna-brahmäëòa-mastake
çré-vämanasya vivare
     brahma-drava-samäkule

     vama—left; pädäìguñöha—toe; nakha—nail; bhinna—broken; brahmäëòa—of the universe; mastake—on the head; çré-vämanasya—of Lord Vämana; vivare—in the opening; brahma-drava-samäkule—through which the spiritual Gaìgä flowed.

     Then the Yamunä came to an opening Lord Vämana's left toe had made in the top of a universe, an opening through which the spiritual Gaìgä flowed.

Text 7

tasmin çré-gaìgayä särdhaà
     praviñöäbhüt sarid-varä     vaikuëöhaà cäjita-padaà
     sampräpya dhruva-maëòale

     tasmin—in that place; çré-gaìgayä—Çré Gaìga; särdham—with; praviñöä abhüt—endered; sarid-varä—the best of rivers; vaikuëöham—Vaikuntha; ca—amd; ajita—of the unconquerable; padam—the abode; sampräpya—attaining; dhruva—of Dhruva; maëòale—in the realm.

     With Çré Gaìgä entering that opening, the Yamunä, the best of rivers, then came to the unconquerable Lord's abode of Vaikuëöha in the planet of Mahäräja Dhruva.

Text 8

brahmalokam abhivyäpya
     patanti brahma-maëòalät
tataù suräëäà çataço
     lokäl lokaà jagäma ha

     brahmalokam—Brahmaloka; abhivyäpya—attaining; patanti—falling; brahma-maëòalät—from the planet of Brahma; tataù—then; suräëäm—of the demigods; çataçaù—hundreds; lokäl—from planet; lokam—to planet; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     Then the Yamunä came to Brahmaloka. Falling from Brahmä's planet, she went to the hundreds of planets of the demigods. She went from one planet to another.    

Text 9

tataù papäta vegena
     sumeru-giri-mürdhani
giri-küöän atikramya
     bhittvä gaëòa-çilä-taöän

     tataù—then; papäta—fell; vegena—with great force; sumeru-giri-mürdhäni—on top of Mount Sumeru; giri-küöän—the mountain peaks; atikramya—passing; bhittvä—breaking; gaëòa-çilä-taöän—the stone face of the mountain.

     Then with great force she fell on Mount Sumeru. Flowing from its peaks, she broke the stones on its slope.

Text 10

sumeror dakñiëa-diçaà
     gantum abhyuditäbhavät
tataù çré-yamunä säkñäc
     chré-gaìgäyäà vinirgatä

     sumeroù—from Sumeru; dakñiëa-diçam—to the south; gantum—to go; abhyuditä abhavät—began; tataù—then; çré-yamunä—Çré Yamunä; säkñät—directly; çré-gaìgäyäm—in Çré Gaìgä; vinirgatä—left.

     Then, in order to go south from Mount Sumeru, Çré Yamunä left Çré Gaìgä's path.

Text 11

gaìgä tu prayayau çailaà
     himavantaà mahä-nadé
kåñëä tu prayayau çailaà
     kälindaà präpya sa tadä

     gaìgä—the Gaìgä; tu—indeed; prayayau—went; çailam—to the mountains; himavantam—Himalaya; mahä-nadé—the great river; kåñëa—Yamunä; tu—indeed; prayayau—went; çailam—to mount; kalindam—kalinda; präpya—attaining; sa—she; tadä—then.

     Then the Gaìgä went to Mount Himavat and the great river Yamunä went to Mount Kalinda.

Texts 12 and 13

kälindéti samäkhyätä
     kalinda-prabhavä yadä
kälinda-giri-sänünäà
     gaëòa-çaila-taöän dådhän

bhittvä luöhanti bhü-khaëòe
     kåñëa vegavaté saté
deçän punanté kälindé
     präptä vai khäëòave vane

     kälindé—the daughter of Kalinda; iti—thus; samäkhyatä—named; kalinda—from Kalinda; prabhavä—born; yadä—when; kälinda-giri—of Mount Kalinda; sänünäm—of the peaks; gaëòa-çaila-taöän—the slopes with stones; dådhän—firm; bhittvä—breaking; luöhanti—moving on the ground; bhü-khaëòe—on the earth; kåñëa—the Yamunä; vegavaté——powerful; saté—sacred; deçän—the countries; punanti—purifying; kälindé—the Yamunä; präptä—attained; vai—indeed; khäëòave vane—the Khandava forest.

     Because she is thus Mount Kalinda's daughter, she is named Kälindé. Flowing from Mount Kalinda's peaks, and breaking the hard rocks on his slopes, the sacred Kälindé swiftly flowed on the earth, purifying the countries she passed. Then she entered the Khäëòava forest.

Text 14

paripürëatamaà säkñac
     chré-kåñëaà varam icchanté
dhåtvä vapuù paraà divyaà
     tapas tepe kalindajä

     paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñac—directly; chré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; varam—as her husband; icchanti—wishing; dhåtvä—manifesting; vapuù—a form; param—then; divyam—transcendental; tapaù—austerity; tepe—performed; kalindajä—the Yamunä.

     Wishing to attain Lord Kåñëa, the Original Supreme Personality of Godhead, as her husband, the Kälindé assumed a splendid spiritual form and performed great austerities.

Text 15

piträ vinirmite gehe
     jale 'dyäpi samäçritä
tato vegena kälindé
     präptäbhüd vraja-maëòale

     piträ—by her father; vinirmite—made; gehe—in a house; jale—in the water; adya—today; api—even; samäçritä—sheltered; tataù—then; vegena—with force; kälindé—the Kalindi; präptä abhüt—attained; vraja-maëòale—Vraja-maëòala.

     Even today she stays in a water-house her father made for her. Then the Kälindé swiftly entered Vraja-maëòala.

Text 16

våndävana-samépe ca
     mathurä-nikaöe çubhe
çré-mahävana-pärçve cä
     saikate ramaëa-sthale

     våndävana—Våndävana; samépe—near; ca—and; mathurä—Mathura; nikaöe—near; çubhe—beautiful; çré-mahävana—of Çré Mahavana; pärçve—by the side; ca—and; sä—she; ekate—secluded; ramaëa—beautiful; sthale—in a place.

     Then she flowed through Våndävana, beautiful Mathurä, and beautiful secluded Mahävana.

Text 17

çré-goloke ca yamunä
     yuthé-bhütväti-sundaré
çré-kåñëacandra-räsärthaà
     nija-väsaà cakära ha

     çré-goloke—on Çré Goloka; ca—and; yamunä—Yamunä; yuthé-bhütvä—becoming a leader of many gopés; ati—very; sundaré—beautiful; çré-kåñëacandra—of Lord Kåñëacandra; räsa—the rasa dance; artham—for the purpose; nija—own; väsam—home; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     As the very beautiful leader of many gopés, Çré Yamunä made her home in Çré Goloka to perform the räsa dance with Çré Kåñëacandra.    

Text 18

atho vrajäd vrajanté sä
     vraja-vikñepa-vihvalä
premänandäçru-samyuktä
     bhütvä paçcima-vähiné

     athaù—then; vrajät—from Vraja; vrajanti—going; sä—she; vraja—of Vraja; vikñepa—leaving; vihvalä—overwhelmed; prema—of love; änanda—of bliss; açru—with tears; samyuktä—endowed; bhütvä—becoming; paçcima—west; vähiné—flowing.

     As she left Vraja she became overwhelmed by feelings of separation. Filled with tears of bliss and love, she turned west (and returned to Vraja).

Text 19

tatas tri-varaà vegenä
     natvätho vraja-maëòale
deçän punanté prayayau
     prayägaà tértha-sattamam

     tataù—then; tri-varam—three times; vegenä—quickly; natvä—bowing down; athaù—then; vraja-maëòale—in Vraja-mandala; deçän—to coutnries; punanti—purifying; prayayau—went; prayägam—to Prayag; tértha-sattamam—the best of holy places.

     Then, bowing three times to Vraja-maëòala, she went to very holy Prayäga, purifying the countries she passed.

Text 20

punaù çré-gaìgayä särdhaà
     kñéräbdhià sa jagäma ha
deväù suvarñaà puñpänäà
     cakrur divi jaya-dhvanim

     punaù—again; çré-gaìgayä—Çré Gaìgä; särdham—with; kñéräbdhim—to the milk-ocean; sa—she; jagäma—went; ha—indeed; devaù—the demigods; suvarñam—a shower; puñpänäm—of flowers; cakruù—did; divi—in heaven; jaya-dhvanim—sounds of "victory!".

     When, flowing with Çré Gaìgä, she entered the Kñéra ocean, the demigods in heaven showered flowers and exclaimed  victory!"

Text 21

kåñëä çré-yamunä säkñät
     kälindé saritäà varä
samudram etya çré-gaìgäà
     präha gadgadayä girä

     kåñëä—dark; çré-yamunä—Çré Yamunä; säkñät—directly; kälindé—the daughter of Mount Kalinda; saritäm—of rivers; varä—the best; samudram—to the ocean; etya—going; çré-gaìgäm—to Çré Gaìgä; präha—said; gadgadayä—choked with emotion; girä—with words.

     When dark Çré Yamunä, who was the best of rivers and the daughter of Mount Kalinda, entered the ocean, she spoke to Çré Gaìgä with words choked with emotion.

Text 22

çré-yamunoväca 
he gaìge tvaà tu dhanyäsi
     sarva-brahmäëòa-pävané
kåñëa-pädäbja-sambhütä
     sarva-lokaika-vanditä

     çré-yamunä uväca—Çré Yamunä said; he—O; gaìge—Gaìgä; tvam—you; tu—indeed; dhanyä—fortunate; asi—are; sarva—all; brahmäëòa—universes; pävané—purifying; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; pädäbja—from the lotus feet; sambhütä—born; sarva—by all; loka—people; eka—alone; vanditä—offered respects.

     Çré Yamunä said: O Gaìgä, you are fortunate. You purify all the universes. You were born from Lord Kåñëa's lotus foot. Everyone bows down before you alone.

Text 23

ürdhvaà yämi harer lokaà
     gaccha tvam api he çubhe
tvat-samänaà hi divyaà ca
     na bhütaà na bhaviñyati

     ürdhvam—up; yämi—I go; hareù—of Lord Hari; lokam—to the world; gaccha—go; tvam—you; api—also; he—O; çubhe—beautiful one; tvat—to you; samänam—equal; hi—indeed; divyam—glorious; ca—and; na—not; bhütam—was; na—not; bhaviñyati—will be.

     Now I will ascend to Lord Hari's abode. O beautiful one, you come also. There never was, nor will there ever be, anyone as glorious as you.     

Text 24

çré-gaìgoväca 
sarva-tértha-mayé gaìgä
     tasmät tväà praëamämy ahaà
yat kiïcid vä prakathitaà
     tat kñamasva su-maìgale

     çré-gaìgä uväca—Çré gaìgä said; sarva-tértha-mayé—consisting of all holy places; gaìgä—Gaìgä; tasmät—therefore; tvam—you; praëamämi—bow down; aham—I; yat—what; kiïcit—something; vä—or; prakathitam—said; tat—that; kñamasva—please forgive; su-maìgale—O auspicious one.

     Çré Gaìgä said: I, the Gaìgä, who contain all holy places, bow down before you. O auspicious one, please forgive any improper words I may have said.

Text 25

he kåñëe tvaà tu dhanyäsi
     sarva-brahmäëòa-pävané
kåñëa-vamäàsa-sambhütä
     paramänanda-rüpiëé

     he—O; kåñëe—dark yamunä; tvam—you; tu—indeed; dhanyä—fortunate; asi—are; sarva—all; brahmäëòa—universes; pävané—purifying; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; väma—left; äàsa—from the shoulder; sambhütä—born; parama—transcendental; änanda—bliss; rüpiëé—the form.

     O dark Yamunä, you are the fortunate one. You purify all the universes. You were born from Lord Kåñëa's left shoulder. Your form is full of transcendental bliss.

Text 26

paripürëatamä säkñät
     sarva-lokaika-vanditä
paripürëatamasyäpi
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù

     paripürëatamä—most perfect; säkñät—directly; sarva-lokaika-vanditä—offered respect by all; paripürëatamasya—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; api—also; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the great one.

     You are most perfect and complete. You are worshiped by all. You are dear to Çré Kåñëa, the great Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 27

paööa-räjïià paraà kåñëe
     kåñëaà tväà praëamämy aham
térthair devair durlabhaà tvaà
     goloke 'pi ca durghaöä

     paööa-räjïià paräm—the most important queen; kåñëe—O dark one; kåñëam—to the dark one; tvam—you; praëamämi—bow down; aham—I; térthaiù—with holy places; devaiù—with demigods; durlabham—difficult to attain; tvam—you; goloke—in Goloka; api—even; ca—and; durghaöä—difficult to attain.

     O dark Yamunä, I bow down to you, the first queen of Lord Kåñëa. The holy places and demigods find it difficult to attain you. Even in Goloka it is difficult to attain you.    

Text 28

ahaà yäsyämi pätälaà
     çré-kåñëasyäjïayä çubhe
tvad-viyogäturähaà vai
     yänaà kartuà na ca kñamä

     aham—I; yäsyämi—will go; pätälam—to Patalaloka; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; äjïayä—by the order; çubhe—O beautiful one; tvat—from you; viyoga—by separation; aturä—afflicted; aham—I; vai—indeed; yänam—journey; kartum—to make; na—not; ca—and; kñamä—able.

     By Lord Kåñëa's order I must go to Pätälaloka now. I am unhappy to leave you, but I cannot go with you.

Text 29

yüthé-bhütvä bhaviñyämi
     çré-vraje räsa-maëòale
yat kiïcin me prakathitaà
     tat kñamasva hari-priye

     yüthé—a leader of many gopés; bhütvä—having become; bhaviñyämi—I will be; çré-vraje—in Çré Vraja; räsa-maëòale—in the circle of the räsa dance; yat—what; kiïcit—something; me—of me; prakathitam—said; tat—that; kñamasva—please forgive; hari-priye—O beloved of Lord Hari.

     I will become a leader of many gopés in the räsa-dance circle in Çré Vraja. O beloved of Lord Hari, please forgive any improper words I may have said.

Text 30

çré-sannanda uväca 
itthaà parasparaà natvä
     dve nadyau yayatur drutaà
lokän pavitré-kurvanté
     pätäle svaù-sarid gatä

     çré-sannandaù uväca—Çré Sannanda said; ittham—thus; parasparam—to each other; natvä—bowing down; dve—two; nadyau—rivers; yayatuù—-went; drutam—quickly; lokän—to the planets; pavitré-kurvanti—purifying; pätäle—to Patala; svaù-sarit—the heavenly Gaìgä; gatä—went.

     Çré Sannanda said: Bowing down before each other, the two rivers then quickly went their respective ways. The heavenly Gaìgä went to Pätälaloka, purifying the planets as she passed.

Text 31

säpi bhogavaté-nämnä
     babhau bhogavaté-vane
yaj-jalaà sa-trinayanaù
     çeño mürdhnä bibharti ha

     sä—she; api—also; bhogavaté-nämnä—by the name Bhagavaté; babhau—is manifested; bhogavaté-vane—in Bhogavaté forest; yaj-jalam—the water of ehom; sa-trinayanaù—with Lord Çiva; çeñaù—Lord Çeña; mürdhnä—on His head; bibharti—carries; ha—certainly.

     There she is named Bhogavaté, for she flows through the Bhogavaté forest. Lord Çeña and Lord Çiva carry her water on Their heads.

Text 32

atha kåñëä sva-vegena
     bhittvä saptäbdhi-maëòalam
säpta-dvépa-mahé-påñöhe
     luöhanti vegavat tarä

     atha—then; kåñëä—the Yamunä; sva-vegena—quickly; bhittvä—breaking; saptäbdhi-maëòalam—the seven oceans; sapta-dvépa-mahé-påñöhe—on the seven continents; luöhanti—moving; vegavattarä—quickly.

     Quickly traversing the seven oceans, the dark Yamunä quickly flowed through the world of seven islands.

Text 33

gatvä svarëamayéà bhümià
     lokälokäcalaà gatä
tat-sänu-gaëòa-çailänäà
     taöaà bhittvä kälindajä

     gatvä—coming; svarëamayém—golden; bhümim—to the land; lokalokäcalam—Mount Lokaloka; gatä—gone; tat-sänu—on its peaks; gaëòa-çailänäm—of rocks; taöam—slope; bhittvä—breaking; kälindajä—the Yamunä.

     Then the Yamunä flowed to the golden land and then Mount Lokäloka where, flowing from its peaks, she broke the rocks on its slopes.

Text 34

tan-mürdhni cotpapätäçu
     sphäravaj-jala-dhärayä
udgacchanti tad-ürdhvaà sä
     yayau svargaà tu näkinäm

     tan-mürdhni—on its head; ca—also; utpapäta—rose; äçu—quickly; sphäravaj-jala-dhärayä—a great stream of water; udgacchanti—rising; tad-ürdhvam—above that; sä—she; yayau—went; svargam—to Svargaloka; tu—indeed; näkinäm—of the heavenly planets.

     Then she rose again to its peaks and, with a great stream of water, rose to Svargaloka in the heavenly worlds.

Text 35

ä-brahmalokaà lokäàs tän
     abhivyäpya hareù padam
brahmäëòa-randhraà çré-brahma-
     drava-yuktaà sametya sä

     ä-brahmalokam—up to Brahmaloka; lokän—the planets; tän—them; abhivyäpya—passing; hareù—of Lord Hari; padam—to the abode; brahmäëòa—of universe; randhraàthe opening; çré-brahma-drava-yuktam—with the Gaìgä; sametya—meeting; sä—she.

     She passed through the planets on the way to Brahmaloka and, meeting the Gaìgä at the opening in the universe, went to Lord Hari's abode.

Text 36

puñpa-varñaà pravarñatsu
     deveñu praëateñu ca
punaù çré-kåñëa-golokaà
     äruroha sarid-varä

     puñpa—of flowers; varñam—a shower; pravarñatsu—showering; deveñu—as the demigods; praëateñu—bowing down; ca—and; punaù—again; çré-kåñëa-golokam—to Çré Kåñëa's Goloka; äruroha—ascended; sarid-varäthe best of rivers.

     As the demigods showered flowers and bowed down to offer respects, Çré Yamunä, the best of rivers, returned to Çré Kåñëa's abode of Goloka.

Text 37

kälinda-giri-nandiné-nava-caritram etac chubhaà
     çrutaà ca yadi paöhitaà bhuvi tanoti sanmaìgalam
jano 'pi yadi dhärayet kila paöhec ca yo nétyaçaù
     sa yäti paramaà padaà nija-nikuïja-lélävåtam

     kälinda-giri-nandiné—of the daughter of Mount Kalinda; nava—new; caritram—pastimes; etat—this; çubham—auspicious; çrutam—heard; ca—and; yadi—if; paöhitam—read; bhuvi—on earth; tanoti—gives; sanmaìgalam—auspiciousness; janaù—a person; api—even; yadi—if; dhärayet— remembers;kila paöhec—reads; ca—or; yaù—who; nétyaçaù—regularly; sa—he; yäti—goes; paramam—to the supreme; padam—abode; nija—own; nikuïja—forest groves; lélä—with pastimes; ävåtam—filled.

     If a person in this world hears or reads this auspicious and ever-new pastime of Mount Kalinda's daughter Yamunä, he will attain great auspiciousness. If one regularly reads or remembers this pastime, he will attain the transcendental forest groves where the Supreme Lord enjoys His pastimes.
.pa

Chapter Four
Vatsäsura-mokña
The Liberation of Vatsäsura

Text 1

sannandasya vacaù çrutvä
     gantuà nandaù samudyataù
sarvair gopa-gaëaiù särdhaà
     mudito 'bhün mahä-manaù

     sannandasya—of sannanda; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; gantum—to go; nandaù—Nanda; samudyataù—about; sarvaiù—with all; gopa-gaëaiù—the ghopas; särdham—with; muditaù—joyful; abhüt—became; mahä-manaù—noble-hearted.

     After hearing Sannanda's words, noble-hearted Nanda became happy. He decided to go there with all the cowherd people, . . .

Text 2

yaçodayä ca rohiëyä
     sarva-gopé-gaëaiù saha
açvai rathair véra-janair
     maëòito vipra-maëòalaiù

     yaçodayä—with Yaçodä; ca—and; rohiëyä—with Rohiëé; sarva-gopé-gaëaiù—with all the gopés; saha—with; açvai—horses; rathaiù—chariots; véra-janaiù—soldiers; maëòitaù—decorated; vipra-maëòalaiù—with brähmaëas.

     Decorated with Yaçodä, Rohiëé, all the gopés, many horses, chariots, soldiers, and brähmaëas, . . .

Text 3

gobhiç ca çakaöair yukto
     våddhair bälais tathänugaiù
gäyakair géyamänaiç ca
     çaìkha-dundubhi-niùsvanaiù

     gobhiù—cows; ca—and; çakaöaiù—carts; yuktaù—engaged; våddhaiù—with elder; bälaiù—boys; tathä—so; anugaiù—following; gäyakaiù—with singers; géyamänaiù—singing; ca—and; çaìkha-dundubhi-niùsvanaiù—with sounds of çaìkhas and dundubhis.

 . . . with many cows, carts, adults followed by children, musicians playing çaìkhas and dundubhis, . . .

Text 4

puträbhyäà räma-kåñëäbhyäà
     nanda-räjo mahä-matiù
ratham äruhya he räjan
     vanaà våndävanaà yayau

     puträbhyäm—with two sons; räma-kåñëäbhyäm—Kåñëa and Balaräm; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; mahä-matiù—noble-hearted; ratham—chariot; äruhya—climbing; he—O; räjan—king; vanam—forest; våndävanam—Våndävana; yayau—went.

 . . . and with His two sons, Kåñëa and Balaräma, noble-hearted King Nanda, riding on a chariot, went, O king, to Våndävana forest.

Texts 5 and 6

våñabhänu-varo gopo
     gajam äruhya bhäryayä
aìke nétvä sutäà rädhäà
     géyamänaç ca gäyakaiù

mådaìga-täla-véëänäà
     venünäà kala-niùsvanaiù
gopäla-go-gaëaiù särdhaà
     våndäraëyaà jagäma ha

     våñabhänu-varaù—Våñabhänu; gopaù—the gopa; gajam—an elephant; äruhya—climbing; bhäryayä—with his wife; aìke—on his lap; nétvä—placed; sutam—daughter; rädhäm—Rädhä; géyamänaù—being sun; ca—and; gäyakaiù—by singers; mådaìga-tala-véëänäm—mådaìgas, talas and véëäs; venünäm—flutes; kala-niùsvanaiù—sweet sounds; gopäla—gopas; go-gaëaiù—and cows; särdham—with; våndäraëyam—to Våndävana forest; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     Then, with his daughter on his lap and his wife by his side, and accompanied by many cows and gopas, King Våñabhänu, riding on an elephant as many musicians sweetly played mådaìgas, talas, véëäs, and flutes, also went to Våndävana forest. 

Text 7

upanandas tathä nandas
     tathä ñaò våñabhänavaù
sarvaiù parikaraiù särdhaà
     jagmur våndävanaà vanam

     upanandaù—Upananda; tathä—then; nandaù—Nanda; tathä—then; sat—the six; våñabhänavaù—Våñabhänus; sarvaiù—with all; parikaraiù—associates; särdham—with; jagmuù—went; våndävanam—to Våndävana; vanam—forest.

     then the Nandas, the Upanandas, and the six Våñabhänus, accompanied by all their associates, also went to Våndävana forest.

Text 8

våndävane sampraviçya
     gopäù sarve sahänujäù
ghoñän vidhäya vasatir
     väsaà cakrur itas tataù

     våndävane—Våndävana forest; sampraviçya—entering; gopäù—the gopas; sarve—all; sahänujäù—with their associates; ghoñän—residences; vidhäya—making; vasatiù—residence; väsam—residence; cakruù—did; itaù—here; tataù—and there.

     When they entered Våndävana forest all the gopas and their followers made homes for themselves here and there.

Texts 9 and 10

sabhä-maëòapa-samyuktaà
     sa-durgaà parikhä-yutam
catur-yojana-vistérëaà
     sapta-dvära-samanvitam

sarovaraiù parivåtaà
     räja-märgaà manoharam
sahasra-kuïjaà ca puraà
     våñabhänur acéklpat

     sabhä—with assembly rooms; maëòapa—and pavilions; samyuktam—endowed; sa-durgam—with a fort; parikhä-yutam—with a moat; catuù—four; yojana—yojanas; vistérëam—in size; sapta-dvära-samanvitam—with seven gates; sarovaraiù—with lakes; parivåtam—surrounded; räja-märgam—a royal road; manoharam—beautiful; sahasra—a thousand; kuïjam—groves; ca—and; puram—a city; våñabhänuù—King Våñabhänu; acéklpat—built.

     Mahäräja Våñabhänu built a beautiful city with many assembly-houses, pavilions, lakes, royal roads, and a thousand gardens. Everything was surrounded by a fortress with seven gates and a moat four yojanas around.

Text 11

çré-kåñëo nanda-nagare
     våñabhänu-pure 'rbhakaiù
cacära kréòana-paro
     gopénäà prétim ävahan

     çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; nanda-nagare—in the city of Nanda; våñabhänu-pure—in the city of  Våñabhänu; arbhakaiù—with the boys; cacära—went; kréòana-paraù—intent on playing; gopénäm—for the gopés; prétim—love; ävahan—bearing.

     Filled with love for the gopés, and intent on enjoying many pastimes, Çré Kåñëa wandered in Nanda's city and Våñabhänu's city with the boys.

Text 12

atha våndävane räjan
     sarva-gopäla-sammatau
babhüvatur vatsa-pälau
     räma-kåñëau manoharau

     atha—then; våndävane—in Våndävana; räjan—O king; sarva-gopäla-sammatau—with all the gopas; babhüvatuù—were; vatsa-pälau—to protectors of the calves; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; manoharau—handsome.

     O king, then handsome Kåñëa and Balaräma, as well as the other gopa boys, were given the duty of protecting the calves in Våndävana.

Text 13

cärayäm äsatur vatsän
     gräma-sémny arbhakaiù saha
kälindé-nikaöe puëye
     puline räma-keçavau

     cärayäm äsatuù—herded; vatsän—the calves; gräma—of the village; sémni—on the outskirts; arbhakaiù—the boys; saha—with; kälindé—of the Yamunä; nikaöe—near; puëye—sacred; puline—on the shore; räma—Balaräma; keçavau—and Kåñëa.

     Accompanied by the boys, Kåñëa and Balaräma herded the calves on the sacred outskirts of the village near the Yamunä's shore.

Text 14

nikuïjeñu ca kuïjeñu
     sampralénäv itas tataù
riìgamänau ca kuträpi
     nandantau ceratur vane

     nikuïjeñu—in gardens; ca—and; kuïjeñu—in groves; sampralénäv—entered; itaù—here; tataù—and there; riìgamänau—crawling; ca—and; kuträpi—somewhere; nandantau—enjoyed; ceratuù—went; vane—in the forest.

     Passing here and there through many groves and gardens, enjoying many pastimes as They went, and sometimes even crawing on the ground, Kåñëa and Balaräma, walked in the forest. 

Text 15

kiìkiné-jala-samyuktau
     siïjan-maïjira-nüpurau
néla-pétämbara-dharau
     hära-keyüra-bhüñitau

     kiìkiné—of tinkling ornaments; jala—with a network; samyuktau—endowed; siïjan-maïjira-nüpurau—with tinkling anklets; néla-pétämbara-dharau—wearing blue and yellow garments; hära-keyüra-bhüñitau—decorated with necklaces and bracelets.

     Wearing a network of tinkling ornaments and tinkling anklets, wearing garments of blue and yellow, decorated with necklaces and bracelets, . . .

Text 16

kñepaëaiù kñipatau bälair
     vaàçé-vädana-tat-parau
mukhena kiìkiné-çabdaà
     kurvadbhir bälakaiç ca tau

     kñepaëaiù—throwing; kñipatau—throwing; bälaiù—with the boys; vaàçé-vädana-tat-parau—intently playing Their flutes; mukhena—with the mouth; kiìkiné-çabdam—tinkling sounds of the ornaments; kurvadbhiù—making; bälakaiù—with the boys; ca—and; tau—They.

 . . . throwing things with the boys, intently playing Their flutes, along with the boys making an array of noises with their mouths, . . .

Text 17

dhävantau pakñibhiç chäyäà
     rejatu räma-keçavau
mayüra-pakña-samyuktau
     puñpa-pallava-bhüñitau

     dhävantau—running; pakñibhiù—with the birds; chäyäm—the shadow; rejatu—shone; räma-keçavau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; mayüra—peacock; pakña—feathers; samyuktau—with; puñpa—flowers; pallava—and leaves; bhüñitau—decorated.

 . . . and chasing the birds' shadows, Kåñëa and Balaräma, decorated with flowers, leaves, and peacock feathers, were very splendid and glorious.

Text 18

ekadä vatsa-våndeñu
     präptaà vatsäsuraà nåpa
kaàsa-präëoditaà jïätvä
     çanais tatra jagäma ha

     ekadä—one time; vatsa-våndeñu—among the calves; präptam—attained; vatsäsuram—Vastäsura; nåpa—O king; kaàsa—by Kaàsa; präëoditam—sent; jïätvä—understanding; çanaiù—slowly; tatra—there; jagäma—went; ha—certainly.

     O king, aware that the demon Vatsäsura had entered among the calves on Kaàsa's order, Kåñëa stealthily approached him.

Text 19

dhävan gopeñu sarvatra
     laìgulaà cälayan muhuù
daityaù paçcima-pädäbhyäà
     harim aàse tatäda ha

     dhävan—running; gopeñu—among the gopas; sarvatra—everywhere; laìgulam—his tail; cälayan—moving; muhuù—again and again; daityaù—the demon; paçcima-pädäbhyäm—with his hind legs; harim—Kåñëa; aàse—on the shoulder; tatäda—struck; ha—certainly.

     Moving his tail as he ran among the gopas, with his hind legs the demon struck Kåñëa on the shoulder.

Text 20

paläyiteñu bäleñu
     kåñëas taà pädayor dvayoù
gåhétvä bhrämayitvätha
     pätayäm äsa bhü-tale

     paläyiteñu—fled; bäleñu—as the boys; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; tam—him; pädayoù—feet; dvayoù—both; gåhétvä—grasping; bhrämayitvä—whirling about; atha—then; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—to the ground.

     As the boys fled, Kåñëa grasped the demon's two legs, whirled him about, and threw him to the ground.

Text 21

punar nétvä karäbhyäà taà
     kapitthe prähinod dhariù
tadä måtyuà gate daitye
     kapittho 'pi mahä-drumaù

     punaù—again; nétvä—bringing; karäbhyäm—with both hands; tam—him; kapitthe—into a kapittha tree; prahinot—threw; dhariù—Kåñëa; tadä—then; måtyum—death; gate—attained; daitye—the demon; kapitthaù—hapittha; api—also; mahä-drumaù—great tree.

     Picking him up again, with both hands Kåñëa threw the demon into a kapittha tree. When the demon died the great kapittha tree . . .
 
Text 22

kapitthän pätayäm äsa
     tad adbhutam iväbhavat
vismiteñu ca bäleñu
     sädhu-sädhv-iti-vädiñu

     kapitthänthe kapittha trees; pätayäm äsa—causing top fall; tat—that; adbhutam—wonder; iva—like; abhavat—was; vismiteñu—astonished; ca—and; bäleñu—among the boys; sädhu-sädhu—well done! well done! iti—thus; vädiñu—saying.

 . . . made the other kapittha trees fall. As the astonished boys called out "Well done! Well done!", . . .    

Text 23

divi devä jaya-ravaiù
     puñpa-varñaà pracakrire
tad daityasya mahaj jyotiù
     kåñëe lénaà babhüva ha

     divi—in heaven; devä—the demigods; jaya-ravaiù—with sounds of "Victory!"; puñpa-varñam—a shower of flowers; pracakrire—did; tat—that; daityasya—of the demon; mahat—great; jyotiù—light; kåñëe—in Kåñëa; lénam—entered; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

 . . . the demigods in heaven showered flowers amid shouts of "Victory!" Then from the demon came a great light then entered Lord Kåñëa.

Text 24

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
aho pürvaà su-kåta-kåt
     ko 'yaà vatsäsuro mune
çré-kåñëe lénatäà präptä
     çré-prapürëe parät pare

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; ahaù—Oh; pürvam—previous; su-kåta-kåt—great pious deeds done; kaù—what?; ayam—this; vatsäsuraù—Vatsäsura; mune—O sage; çré-kåñëe—in Çré Kåñëa; lénatäm—entering; präptä—attained; çré-prapürëe—the full Supreme Personality of Godhead; parät—than the greatest; pare—greater.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: O sage, what pious deeds did Vatsäsura do in his previous life so that now he is able to enter Lord Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is greater than the greatest?

Text 25

çré-närada uväca 
muru-putro mahä-daityaù
     pramilo näma deva-jit
vasiñöhasyäçrame präpto
     nandinéà gäà dadarça ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; muru-putraù—the son of Muru; mahä-daityaù—a great demon; pramilaù—Pramila; näma—named; deva-jit—conquering the demigods; vasiñöhasya—of Vasiñöha; äçrame—in the äçrama; präptaù—attained; nandiném—Nandiné; gäm— acow; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: He was a great demon who was named Pramila and was the son of Muru. After conquering the demigods, he entered Vasiñöha Muni's äçrama and saw a cow named Nandiné.

Text 26

tal-lipsur brahmaëo bhütvä
     yayäce gäà manoharäm
tuñëéà sthite gaur uväca
     vasiñöhe divya-darçane

     tat—that; lipsuù—desiring; brahmaëaù—a brahmana; bhütvä—becoming; yayäce—begged; gäm—for the cow; manoharäm—beautiful; tuñëém—silence; sthite—situated; gauù—the cow; uväca—said; vasiñöhe—to vaiñöha; divya-darçane—who had divine vision.

     Desiring that cow, the demon transformed himself into a brähmaëa and begged for the beautiful cow. As Vaiñöha, who had divine vision, stood silent, the cow spoke.

Text 27

çré-nandiny uväca 
munénäà gäà samähartuà
     bhütvä vipraù samägataù
daityo 'si muru-jas tasmäd
     go-vatso bhava durmate

     çré-nandiné uväca—Çré Nandiné said; munénäm—of the sages; gam—the cow; samähåtum—to take; bhütvä—become; vipraù—a brahmana; samägataù—come; daityaù—a demon; asi—you are; muru-jaù—the son of Muru; tasmät—therefore; go-vatsaù—a calve; bhava—become; durmate—O wicked-hearted one.

     Çré Nandiné said: You are a demon, Muru's son, and you have assumed the form of a brähmaëa to steal the sages' cow. Therefore, O wicked-hearted one, now you become a calf!

Text 28

çré-närada uväca 
tadaiva vatsa-rüpo 'bhün
     muru-putro mahäsuraù
vasiñöhaà gäà parikramya
     natvä trähéty uväca ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; eva—indeed; vatsa-rüpaù—the form of a calf; abhüt—became; muru-putraù—the son of Muru; mahäsuraù—a great demon; vasiñöham—Vasiñöha; gäm—the cow; parikramya—circumambulating; natvä—bowing down; trähi—please protect; iti—thus; uväca—said; ha—certainly.

     The great demon that was Muru's son at once became a calf. He circumambulated Vasiñöha and the cow, bowed down, and said, "Please save me!"

Text 29

çré-gaur uväca 
dväparänte mahä-daitya
     våndäraëye yadä tava
go-vatseñu gatasyäpi
     tadä muktir bhaviñyati

     çré-gaur uväca—the cow said; dväpara—of Dvapara-yuga; ante—at the end; mahä-daitya—a great demon; våndäraëye—in Våndävana forest; yadä—when; tava—of you; go-vatseñu—among the calves; gatasya—gone; api—also; tadä—then; muktiù—liberation; bhaviñyati—will be.

     The cow said: O great demon, at the end of Dväpara-yuga, when you go among many calves, you will attain liberation. 

Text 30

çré-närada uväca 
paripürëatame säkñät
     kåñëe patita-pävane
tasmäd vatsäsuro daityo
     léno 'bhün na hi vismayaù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; paripürëatame—in the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; kåñëe—Çré Kåñëa; patita-pävane—the savior of the fallen; tasmät—from that; vatsäsuraù—Vatsäsura; daityaù—the demon; lénaù—entered; abhüt—became; na—not; hi—indeed; vismayaù—surprise.

     Çré Närada said: For this reason the demon Våndävana Vatsäsura entered Lord Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is not very surprising.
.pa

Chapter Five
Bakäsura-mokña
The Liberation of Bakäsura

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
ekadä cärayan vatsän
     sa-rämo bälakair hariù
yamunä-nikaöe präptaà
     bäkaà daityaà dadarça ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ekadä—once; cärayan—herding; vatsän—the calves; sa-rämaù—with Balaräma; bälakaiù—with the boys; hariù—Kåñëa; yamunä-nikaöe—near the Yamunä; präptam—attained; bäkam—a duck; daityam—demon; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: One day, as He was herding the calves in the company of Balaräma and the boys, Kåñëa saw a great duck demon by the Yamunä's shore.

Text 2

çveta-parvata-saìkäço
     båhat-pädo ghana-dhvaniù
paläyiteñu bäleñu
     vajra-tuëòo 'grasad dharim

     çveta-parvata-saìkäçaù—like a great white mountain; båhat-pädaù—with gigantic feet; ghana-dhvaniù—the rumbling of clouds; paläyiteñu—fled; bäleñu—the boys; vajra—thunderbolt; tuëòaù—beak; agrasat—swallowed; harim—Kåñëa.

     Its form a white mountain, its feet gigantic, its quacking the rumbling of clouds, and its beak a thunderbolt, the demon swallowed Lord Kåñëa as the boys fled.

Text 3

rudanto bälakäù sarve
     gata-praëä iväbhavan
hä-hä-käraà tadä kåtvä
     deväù sarve samägatäù

     rudantaù—crying; bälakäù—the boys; sarve—all; gata-praëä—their live breathj gone; iva—as if; abhavan—became; hä-hä-käram—alas! alas!; tadä—then; kåtvä—doing; deväù—the demigods; sarve—all; samägatäù—came.

     All the boys wept as if they had lost their lives. All the demigods came and cried out, "Alas! Alas!"

Text 4

indro vajraà tadä nétvä
     taà tatäda mahä-balam
tena ghäöena patito
     na mamära samutthitaù

     indraù—Indra; vajram—thunderbolt; tadä—then; nétvä—bringing; tam—it; tatäda—struck; mahä-balam—very powerful; tena—by that; ghäöena—blow; patitaù—fallen; na—not; mamära—died; samutthitaù—stood up.

     Bringing his very powerful thunderbolt, Indra struck the demon. With that blow the demon fell, but he did not die. Again the demon stood up.

Text 5

brahmäpi brahma-daëòena
     taà tatäda ruñänvitaù
tena ghäöena patito
     mürchito ghäöikä-dvayam

     brahmä—Brahmä; api—also; brahma-daëòena—with his brahma-weapon; tam—him; tatäda—struck; ruñänvitaù—angry; tena—by that; ghäöena—blow; patitaù—fell; mürchitaù—unconscious; ghäöikä-dvayam—for two ghatikas.

     Then Brahmä became angry and with his brahma-daëòa struck the demon. With that blow the demon fell and was unconscious for two ghaöikäs.

     Note: One ghaöikä equals 24 minutes.

Text 6

vidhunvan sva-tanuà vegäj
     jåmbhitaù punar utthitaù
na mamära tadä daityo
     jagarja ghanavad balé

     vidhunvan—shaking; sva-tanum—his body; vegät—quickly; jåmbhitaù—yawned; punaù—again; utthitaù—rose; na—not; mamära—died; tadä—then; daityaù—the demon; jagarja—roared; ghanavat—like a cloud; balé—powerful.

     The demon powerful did not die. He shook his body, yawned, again stood up, and roared like a cloud.

Text 7

trilocanas tri-çülena
     taà jaghäna mahäsuram
chinnaika-pakño daityo 'pi
     na måto 'ti-bhayaìkaraù

     trilocanaù—Çiva; tri-çülena—with his trident; tam—him; jaghäna—struck; mahäsuram—the great demon; chinna—cut; eka—one; pakñaù—wing; daityaù—the demon; api—even; na—not; måtaù—died; ati-bhayaìkaraù—very fearful.

     With his trident Çiva struck the great demon. One wing was cut off, but still the very fearful demon did not die.

Text 8

väyavyästreëa väyus taà
     saïjaghäna bäkaà tataù
uccacäla bäkas tena
     punas tatra sthito 'bhavat

     väyavya-astreëa—with his wind-weapon; väyuù—Väyu; tam—him; saïjaghäna—struck; bäkam—the duck; tataù—then; uccacäla—flew away; bäkaù—the duck; tena—by that; punaù—again; tatra—there; sthitaù—stood; abhavat—became.

     With his wind-weapon Väyu struck the duck demon. The duck flew away and then returned.

Text 9

yamas taà yama-daëòena
     tädayäm äsa cägrataù
tena daëòena na måto
     bako vai caëòa-vikramaù

     yamaù—Yama; tam—him; yama-daëòena—with his yama-daëòa; tädayäm äsa—struck; ca—and; agrataù—from that; tena—by that; daëòena—weapon; na—not; måtaù—died; bakaù—the duck; vai—indeed; caëòa-vikramaù—very powerful.

     With his yama-daëòa Yama struck the demon. With that blow the very powerful duck did not die.

Text 10

daëòo 'pi bhagnatäà prägät
     sa kñato näbhavad bakaù
tadaiva cägrataù präptas
     caëòäàçuç caëòa-vikramaù

     daëòaù—the weapon; api—even; bhagnatäm—the state of being broken; prägät—attained; sa—he; kñataù—broken; na—not; abhavat—was; bakaù—the duck; tadä—then; eva—indeed; ca—and; agrataù—in the presence; präptaù—attained; caëòäàçuù—Sürya; caëòa-vikramaù—powerful.

     Indeed, the yama-daëòa became broken, but the duck was not hurt. Then powerful Sürya approached.

Text 11

çata-bäëair bakaà daityaà
     saïjaghäna dhanur-dharaù
tékñnaiù pakña-gatair bäëair
     na mamära bakas tataù

     çata—hundred; bäëaiù—with arrows; bakam—the duck; daityam—demon; saïjaghäna—struck; dhanuù—a bow; dharaù—hilding; tékñnaiù—sharp; pakña-gataiù—gone to the wing; bäëaiù—with arrows; na—not; mamära—died; bakaù—the duck; tataù—then.

     The archer Sürya struck the demon duck with a hundred sharp arrows flying to his wing. The duck did not die.

Text 12

dhanadas taà ca khaògena
     su-tékñëena jaghäna ha
chinna-dvitéya-pakño 'bhün
     na måto daitya-puìgavaù

     dhanadaù—Kuvera; tam—him; ca—and; khaògena—with a sword; su-tékñëena—very sahrp; jaghäna—struck; ha—indeed; chinna—cut; dvitéya—the second; pakñaù—wing; abhün—was; na—not; måtaù—died; daitya-puìgavaù—the best of demons.

     With a sharp sword Kuvera attacked the demon. His second wing was cut away, but the great demon did not die.

Text 13

néhärästreëa taà somaù
     saïjaghäna mahä-bakam
çétärto mürchito daityo
     na måtaù punar utthitaù

     néhära-astreëa—with his ice-weapon; tam—him; somaù—Soma; saïjaghäna—struck; mahä-bakam—the great duck; çéta—with cold; ärtaù—pained; mürchitaù—fainted; daityaù—the demon; na—not; måtaù—died; punaù—again; utthitaù—stood.

     With his ice-weapon Soma struck the great duck. Tormented by the cold, the demon fainted, but then again he stood up.

Text 14

ägneyyästreëa taà hy agniù
     santatäda mahä-bakam
bhasma-romäbhavad daityo
     na mamära mahä-khalaù

     ägneyya-astreëa—with his fire-weapon; tam—him; hi—indeed; agniù—Agni; santatäda—struck; mahä-bakam—the great duck; bhasma—ashes; romä—feathers; abhavat—became; daityaù—the demon; na—not; mamära—died; mahä-khalaù—very wicked.

     With his fire-weapon Agni struck the great duck. Even though his feathers were burned to ashes, the very wicked demon did not die.

Text 15

apäà patis taà päçena
     baddhvä kau vicakärña ha
karñaëät sa mahä-päpaç
     chinno 'bhün na måtaç ca vai

     apäm—of the waters; patiù—the lord; tam—him; päçena—with a rope; baddhvä—bound; kau—on the ground; vicakärña—dragged; ha—indeed; karñaëät—from dragging; sa—he; mahä-päpaù—great sinner; chinnaù—broken; abhüt—was; na—not; måtaù—dead; ca—and; vai—indeed.

     Varuëa bound him with a rope and dragged him across the ground. From the dragging the great sinner was hurt, but he did not die.

Text 16

tatäda gadayä taà vai
     bhadrakälé tarasviné
mürchitas tat-prahäreëa
     paraà kaçmalatäà yayau

     tatäda—struck; gadayä—with a club; tam—him; vai—indeed; bhadrakälé—Bhadrakälé; tarasviné—powerful; mürchitaù—fainted; tat-prahäreëa—by the blow; param—great; kaçmalatäm—coma; yayau—attained.

     Then powerful goddess Bhadrakälé struck him with a mace. With that blow he fainted and fell into a deep coma.

Text 17

kñata-mürdhä samutthäya
     vidhunvan sva-tanuà punaù
jagarja ghanavad véro
     bako daityo mahä-khalaù

     kñata—wounded; mürdhä—head; samutthäya—rose; vidhunvan—shaking; sva-tanum—his body; punaù—again; jagarja—roared; ghanavat—like a cloud; véraù—heroic; bakaù—duck; daityaù—demon; mahä-khalaù—very wicked.

     His head broken, the very wicked and powerful demon duck rose, shook his body, and roared like a thundering cloud.

Text 18

tadä çakti-dharaù çaktià
     tasmai cikñepa sa-tvaraù
tayaika-pädo bhagno 'bhün
     na måtaù pakñiëäà varaù

     tadä—then; çakti-dharaù—kärttikeya; çaktim—sakti; tasmai—to him; cikñepa—threw; sa-tvaraù—quickly; tayä—by that; eka—one; pädaù—foot; bhagnaù—broken; abhün—was; na—not; måtaù—died; pakñiëäm—of birds; varaù—the best.

     Then Kärttikeya threw his çakti-weapon at him. Although one of his feet was cut, that demon, the best of birds, did not die.

Text 19

tadä krodhena sahasä
     dhävan daityas taòit-svanaù
devän vidrävayäm äsa
     sva-caïcvä tékñëa-tuëòayä

     tadä—then; krodhena—with anger; sahasä—at once; dhävan—running; daityaù—the demon; taòit-svanaù—making a sound of thunder; devän—the demigods; vidrävayäm äsa—put to flight; sva-caïcvä—with his beak; tékñëa-tuëòayä—very sharp.

     Then, roaring like thunder, the demon angrily chased the demigods and with his sharp beak made them flee.

Text 20

agre paläyitän devän
     anvadhävad bako 'mbare
punas tatra gato daityo
     nädayan maëòalaà diçam

     agre—ahead; paläyitän—fleeing; devän—demigods; anvadhävat—followed; bakaù—the duck; ambare—in the sky; punaù—again; tatra—there; gataù—went; daityaù—the demon; nädayan—filling with sound; maëòalam—the circle; diçam—of the directions.

     The demigods flew into the sky and the demon, filling the circle of the directions with sound, flew after them.

Text 21

tadä devarñayaù sarve
     sarve brahmarñayo dvijäù
çré-nanda-nandanäyäçu
     sa-phalaà cäçiñaà daduù

     tadä—then; devarñayaù—the devarñis; sarve—all; sarve—all; brahmarñayaù—the brahmarñis; dvijäù—the brahmanas; çré-nanda-nandanäya—to the son of Nanda; äçu—at ocne; sa-phalam—with results; ca—and; äçiñam—blessing; daduù—gave.

     Then all the devarñis, brahmarñis, and brähmaëas offered blessings to Nanda's son, Kåñëa.

Text 22

tadaiva kåñëas tan-madhye
     tatäna vapur ujjvalam
caccharda kåñëaà sahasä
     kñata-kaëöho mahä-bakaù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; tan-madhye—in the midst of the demon; tatäna—expanded; vapuù—form; ujjvalam—glorious; caccharda—vomited; kåñëam—Kåñëa; sahasä—at once; kñata—broken; kaëöhaù—throast; mahä—the great; bakaù—duck.

     Then, from inside the duck Kåñëa expanded His glorious form. His throat broken, the great duck at once vomited Kåñëa out.

Text 23

punaù kåñëaà samähartuà
     tékñnayä tuëòayägatam
pucche gåhétvä taà kåñëaù
     pothayäm äsa bhü-tale

     punaù—again; kåñëam—Kåñëa; samähartum—to grab; tékñnayä—with his sharp; tuëòayägatam—beak; pucche—the tail; gåhétvä—grasping; tam—him; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; pothayäm äsa—thre; bhü-tale—to the ground.

     When the duck came to catch Kåñëa in his beak, Kåñëa grasped the duck's tail and threw him to the ground.

Text 24

punar utthäya tuëòaà svaà
     prasaryyävasthitaà bakam
dadära tuëòe hastäbhyäà
     kåñëaù çäkhäà gajo yathä

     punaù—again; utthäya—rising; tuëòam—beak; svam—own; prasaryya—opening; avasthitam—situated; bakam—duck; dadära—split; tuëòe—in the beak; hastäbhyäm—with both hands; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; çäkhäm—a tree-branch; gajaù—an elephant; yathä—as.

     The duck stood up again and opened his beak. With both hands Kåñëa split the duck's beak as an elephant breaks a tree-branch.

Text 25

tadä måtasya daityasya
     jyotiù kåñëe samäviçat
devatä vavåñuù puñpair
     jayärävaiù samanvitäù

     tadä—then; måtasya—dead; daityasya—from the demon; jyotiù—light; kåñëe—in Lord Kåñëa; samäviçat—entered; devatä—the demigods; vavåñuù—showered; puñpaiù—flowers; jaya—of victory; ärävaiù—with sounds; samanvitäù—with.

     Then the demon died. A light left his body and entered Lord Kåñëa. With shouts of "Victory!", the demigods showered flowers.

Text 26

gopälä vismitäù sarve
     kåñëaà saàçliñya sarvataù
ücus tvaà kusalé-bhüto
     mukto måtyu-mukhät sakhe

     gopäläù—the gopas; vismitäù—surprised; sarve—all; kåñëam—Kåñëa; saàçliñya—embracing; sarvataù—in all respects; ücuù—said; tvam—You; kusalé-bhütaù—are well; muktaù—freed; måtyu—of death; mukhät—from the mouth; sakhe—O friend.

     Filled with wonder, all the gopas embraced Kåñëa and said, "Friend, You are saved from death's mouth!"

Text 27

evaà kåñëo bakaà hatvä
     sa-balo bälakaiù saha
go-vatsair harñito gäyann
     äyayau räja-mandire

     evam—thus; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; bakam—the duck; hatvä—having killed; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; bälakaiù—the boys; saha—with; go-vatsaiù—with the calves; harñitaù—joyful; gäyan—singing; äyayau—came; räja-mandire—to the royal palace.

     After killing the duck, Kåñëa, cheerful and singing as He went, returned with the boys and calves to (His father's) palace.

Text 28

paripürëatamasyäsya
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù
jagur gåhe gatä bälaù
     çrutvedaà te 'ti-vismitäù

     paripürëatamasyäsya—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëasya—Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Lord; jaguù—sang; gåhe—in the home; gatäù—went; bälaù—the boys; çrutvä—hearing; idam—this; te—they; ati-vismitäù—very surprised.

     When they entered the house, the boys told what Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, had done, and when the people heard it they became filled with wonder. 

Text 29

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
ko 'yaà daityaù pürva-kale
     kasmät kena bako 'bhavat
pürëa-brahmaëi sarveçe
     çré-kåñëe lénatäà gataù

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said:  kaù—who?; ayam—this; daityaù—demon; pürva-kale—in the previous time; kasmät—why?; kena—by whom?; bakaù—a duck; abhavat—became; pürëa-brahmaëi—in the Supreme Brahman; sarveçe—the master of all; çré-kåñëe—Çré Kåñëa; lénatäm—merging; gataù—attained.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Who was this demon before? Why did he become a duck? Why was he able to enter Çré Kåñëa, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the master of all?

Text 30

çré-närada uväca 
hayagréva-suto daitya
     utkalo näma he nåpa
raëe 'marän vinirjitya
     çakra-cchatraà jahära ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; hayagréva-sutaù—the son of hayagréva; daitya—a demon; utkalaù—Utkala; näma—named; he—O; nåpa—king; raëe—in battle; amarän—the demigods; vinirjitya—defeating; çakra—of Indra; chatram—the parasol; jahära—stole; ha—certainly.

     Çré Närada said: O king, he was a demon named Utkala, who was Hayagréva's son. He defeated many demigods in battle and he stole Indra's parasol.

Text 31

tathä nåëäà nåpänäà ca
     räjyaà håtvä mahä-balaù
cakära varñäëi çataà
     räjyaà sarva-vibhütimat

     tathä—so; nåëäm—of men; nåpänäm—of kings; ca—and; räjyam—the kingdom; håtvä—taking; mahä-balaù—very powerful; cakära—did; varñäëi—years; çatam—a hundred; räjyam—kingdom; sarva-vibhütimat—having all opulences.

     Stealing from the kingdoms of many human kings, for a hundred years this powerful demon ruled a kingdom full of all opulence.

Text 32

ekadä vicaran daityaù
     sindhu-sägara-saìgame
jäjaler muni-siddhasya
     parëa-çäla-samépataù

     ekadä—one day; vicaran—going; daityaù—the demon; sindhu—of the river; sägara—and the ocean; saìgame—at the meeting; jäjaleù—of jajali; muni-siddhasya—the best of sages; parëa-çäla-samépataù—near a leaf-hut.

     One day the demon came near Jäjali's Muni's leaf hut at the place where the Gaìgä meets the ocean.

Text 33

jale nékñipya baòiçaà
     ménän äkarñayan muhuù
niñedhito 'pi muninä
     nämanyata sa durmatiù

     jale—in the water; nékñipya—throwing; baòiçam— a fishhook; ménän—a fgish; äkarñayan—caught; muhuù—again and again; niñedhitaù—forbidden; api—even; muninä—by the sage; na—not; ämanyata—respected; sa—he; durmatiù—wicked-hearted.

     Casting a fishhook into the water, the demon caught a fish. Although forbidden again and again, the wicked-hearted demon gave no respect (to the sage's words).

Text 34

tasmai çäpaà dadau siddho
     jäjalir muni-sattamaù
bakavat tvaà jhañän atsi
     tvaà bako bhava durmate

     tasmai—to him; çäpam—a curse; dadau—gave; siddhaù—perfect; jäjaliù—Jäjali; muni-sattamaù—the best of sages; bakavat—like a duck; tvam—you; jhañän—fish; atsi—eat; tvam—you; bakaù—a duck; bhava—become; durmate—O demon.

     The perfect sage Jäjali cursed him: "O demon, you eat fish like a duck, then become a duck!"

Text 35

tat-kñaëäd baka-rüpo 'bhud
     bhrasta-tejä gata-smayaù
patitaù pädayos tasya
     natvä präha kåtäïjaliù

     tat-kñaëät—from that moment; baka—of a duck; rüpaù—the form; abhut—became; bhrasta—broken; tejä—power; gata—gone; smayaù—pride; patitaù—fallen; pädayoù—at the feet; tasya—of him; natvä—bowing down; präha—said; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands.

     In a moment he became a duck. His powers lost and his pride and arrogance gone, he fell with folded hands at the sage's feet and spoke to him.

Text 36

utkala uväca 
na jäne te tapaç-caëòaà
     mune mäà pähi jäjale     sädhünäà bhavatäà saìgaà
     mokña-dväraà paraà viduù

     utkalaù uväca—Utkala said; na—not; jäne—I know; te—your; tapaç-caëòam—power of austerity; mune—O sage; mäm—me; pähi—protect; jäjale—O Jäjali; sädhünäm—of saints; bhavatäm—of you; saìgam—association; mokña—to liberation; dväram—the door; param—great; viduù—they know.

     Utkala said: O sage, save me! I did not know the power of your austerities. (The wise) know that association with great saints like yourself is the great door to liberation.

Text 37

mitre çatrau samä mäne
     'pamäne hema-loñöayoù
sukhe duùkha-samä ye vai
     tvädåçäù sädhavaç ca te

     mitre—friend; çatrau—and enemy; samä—the same; mäne—honor; apamäne—and dishonor; hema—gold; loñöayoù—and a clod of earth; sukhe—in happiness; duùkha—and unhappiness; samä—the same; ye—who; vai—indeed; tvädåçäù—like you; sädhavaù—saints; ca—and; te—they.

     Saints like yourself see friends and enemies equally. They see that honor and dishonor, gold and a clod of earth, and happiness and unhappiness are all the same.

Text 38

kià kià na jätaà mahatäà
     darçanät kau mune nåëäm
pärameñöhyaà ca sämräjyaà
     aindra-yoga-padaà labhet

     kim—what?; kim—what?; na—not; jätam—born; mahatäm—of the saints; darçanät—from the sight; kau—on earth; mune—O sage; nåëäm—of men; pärameñöhyam—of Brahmä; ca—and; sämräjyam—the kingdom; aindra-yoga-padam—the post of Indra; labhet—may obtain.

     O sage, what, what does one not obtain by seeing great saints? By seeing them one obtains Brahmä's kingdom and Indra's station.

Text 39

jäjale muni-çärdüla
     traivargyaà kim abhüj janaiù
sädhünäà kåpayä säkñät
     pürëaà brahmäpi labhyate

     jäjale—O Jäjali; muni-çärdüla—O tiger of sages; traivargyam—the three goals of life; kim—what?; abhüt—become; janaiù—by men; sädhünäm—of sdaints; kåpayä—by the mercy; säkñät—directly; pürëam—the full; brahma—Supreme; api—even; labhyate—is attained.

     O Jäjali, O tiger of sages, what is the use of the three goals of life? By the mercy of great saints one can attain the Supreme Brahman.

Text 40

çré-närada uväca 
tadä prasannaù sa munir
     jäjalis tam uväca ha
varña-ñañöi-sahasräëi
     tapas taptaà ca yena vai

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; prasannaù—pleased; sa—he; muniù—the sage; jäjaliù—Jäjali; tam—to him; uväca—said; ha—indeed; varña—years; ñañöi—60; sahasräëi—thousand; tapaù—austerities; taptam—to perform; ca—and; yena—by that; vai—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: Pleased, Jäjali Muni, who had performed austerities for sixty-thousand years, spoke to him.

Text 41

çré-jäjalir uväca

vaivasvatäntare präpte
     hy añöa-viàçatime yuge
dväparänte bhärate 'pi
     mäthure vraja-maëòale

     çré-jäjalir uväca—Çré Jäjali said; vaivasvata-antare—in the Vaivasvata-manvantara; präpte—attained; hi—indeed; añöa-viàçatime—in the twennty-eighth; yuge—yuga; dväpara—of the Dväpara-yuga; ante—at the end; bhärate—in Bhärata-varña; api—also; mäthure—in Mathurä; vraja-maëòale—in the circle of Vraja.

     Çré Jäjali said: In the Vaivasvata-manvantara, in the twenty-eighth yuga-cycle, at the end of Dväpara-yuga, in Bhärata-varña, in Mathurä, in the circle of Vraja, . . .

Text 42

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
våndävane gaväà vatsäàç
     cärayan vicariñyati

     paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñäc—directly; chré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Lord; svayam—Himself våndävane—in Våndävana; gaväm—of cows; vatsän—calves; cärayan—herding; vicariñyati—will walk.

 . . . Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, will herd many calves in Våndävana forest.

Text 43

tadä tan-mayataà kåñëe
     yäsyasi tvaà na saàçayaù
hiranyäkñädayo daityäù
     vaireëäpi paraà gatäù

     tadä—then; tan-mayatam—the state of being of them; kåñëe—in Kåñëa; yäsyasi—you will attain; tvam—you; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; hiranyäkña-ädayaù—headed by Biranyakas; daityäù—demons; vaireëa—with hatred; api—even; param—the Supreme; gatäù—attained.

     Then you will enter into Lord Kåñëa. Of this there is no doubt. Even by hating Him, many demons, such as Hiraëyäkña, have already attained the Supreme.

Text 44

itthaà bakäsuro daitya
     utkalo jäjaler varät
çré-kåñëe lénatäà präptaù
     sat-saìgät kià na jäyate

     ittham—thus; bakäsuraù—Bakäsura; daitya—the demon; utkalaù—Utkala; jäjaleù—of Jäjali; varät—from the blessing; çré-kåñëe—in Çré Kåñëa; lénatäm—entrance; präptaù—attained; sat—of great saints; saìgät—from the association; kim—what?; na—not; jäyate—is born.

     In this way, by Jäjali's blessing, the demon Utkala became Bakäsura and entered into Çré Kåñëa. What is not possible by the association of great saints?
.pa

Chapter Six
Aghäsura-mokña
The Liberation of Aghäsura

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
ekadä bälakaiù säkaà
     go-vatsäàç cärayan hariù
kälindé-nikaöe ramye
     bäla-kréòaà cakära ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ekadä—once; bälakaiù—the boys; säkam—with; go-vatsän—the calves; cärayan—herding; hariù—Kåñëa; kälindé-nikaöe—on the shore of the Yamunä; ramye—beautiful; bäla-kréòam—childhood pastimes; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: Once, as, near the beauitful Yamunä, with the boys He was herding the calves, Kåñëa enjoyed the pastimes of childhood.

Text 2

aghäsuro näma mahä-
     daityas tatra sthito 'bhavat
kroça-dérghaà vapuù kåtvä
     prasarya mukha-maëòalam

     aghäsuraù—Aghäsura; named; näma—named; mahä-daityaù—a great demon; tatra—there; sthitaù—situated; abhavat—was; kroça—two miles; dérgham—long; vapuù—body; kåtvä—doing; prasarya—opening; mukha-maëòalam—his mouth.

     A great demon named Aghäsura stayed there. His body was two miles long and his mouth wide open.

Text 3

düräd yaà parvatäkäraà
     vékñya våndävane vane
gopä jagmur mukhe tasya
     vatsaiù kåtväïjalé-dhvanim

     dürät—from far away; yam—what; parvatäkäram—the body of a mountain; vékñya—seeing; våndävane—in Våndävana; vane—forest; gopä—the gopas; jagmuù—went; mukhe—in the mouth; tasya—of him; vatsaiù—with the calves; kåtvä—making; aïjalé—of the hands; dhvanim—the sound.

     From afar they saw him, his body like a great mountain. Approaching, and clapping their hands, they entered his mouth with the calves.

Text 4

tad-rakñärthaà ca sa-bälas
     tan-mukhe praviçad dhariù
nigérëeñu sa-vatseñu
     bäleñu tv ahi-rüpiëä

hä-çabdo 'bhüt suräëäà tu
     daityänäà harña eva hi
kåñëo vapuù svaà vairäjaà
     tatänäghodare tataù

     tad-rakñärthaà-to protect them; ca—and; sa-bälaù—with the boys; tan-mukhe—in his mouth; praviçat—entered; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; nigérëeñu—swallowed; sa-vatseñu—with the calves; bäleñu—and boys; tv—indeed; ahi-rüpiëä—in the form of a snake; hä—of ala; çabdaù—the sound; abhüt—weas; suräëäm—of the demigods; tu—indeed; daityänäm—of the demons; harña—joy; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; vapuù—form; svam—own; vairäjam—universal; tatäna—manifested; agha—of Agha; udare—in the belly; tataù—then.

     To protect them, Kåñëa entered the mouth along with the boys. When the demon in the form of a snake had swallowed the boys and calves, the demigods cried out, "Alas!" and the demons became happy. Then Kåñëa expanded His universal form inside Aghäsura's stomach.

Text 6

tasya samrodha-gaù präëäù
     çiro bhittvä vinirgatäù
tan-mukhän nirgatäù kåñëo
     bälair vatsaiç ca maithila

     tasya—of him; samrodha-gaù—stopped; präëäù—the life breath; siraù—head; bhittvä—breaking; vinirgatäù—left; tan-mukhän—from his mouth; nirgatäù—left; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; bälaiù—with the boys; vatsaiù—and calves; ca—and; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     It's movements stopped, the demon's life-breath broke through the demon's skull and left. Then Kåñëa and the boys and calves left his mouth, O king of Mithilä.

Text 7

sa-vatsakän çiçün dåñövä
     jévayäm äsa mädhavaù
taj-jyotiù çré-ghana-çyäme
     lénaà jätaà taòid yathä

     sa-vatsakän—with the calves; çiçün—the boys; dåñövä—seeing; jévayäm äsa—restored to life; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; taj-jyotiù—his effulgence; çré-ghana-çyäme—in Kåñëa, who was dark as a monsoon cloud; lénam—entered; jätam—born; taòit—lightning flash; yathä—like.

     With a glance Kåñëa brought the boys and calves to life. Then a light that was like a lightning flash (left the demon's body) and entered Kåñëa, who was dark as a monsoon cloud.

Text 8

tadaiva vavåñur devaù
     puñpa-varñäëi pärthiva
evaà çrutvä muner väkyaà
     maithilo väkyam abravét

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; vavåñuù—showered; devaù—the demigods; puñpa-varñäëi—with showers of flowers; pärthiva—O king; evam—thus; çrutvä—hearing; muneù—of the sage; väkyam—the words; maithilaù—the king of Mithilä; väkyam—words; abravét—said.

     O king, then the demigods showered flowers.

     After hearing the sage's words, the king of Mithilä spoke.

Text 9

çré-räjoväca 
ko 'yaà daityaù pürva-käle
     çré-kåñëe lénataà gataù
aho vairänubandhena
     çéghraà daityo harià gataù

     çré-räjä uväca—the king said; kaù—who?; ayam—this; daityaù—demon; pürva-käle—in the previous time; çré-kåñëe—in Çré Kåñëa; lénatam—entering; gataù—attained; ahaù—Oh; vaira-anubandhena—with hatred; çéghram—quickly; daityaù—the demon; harim—Lord Kåñëa; gataù—attained.

     The king said: Who was this demon in his previous birth that he was able to enter Lord Kåñëa? Simply by hating Him, this demon quickly attained Lord Kåñëa.

Text 10

çré-närada uväca 
çaìkhäsura-suto räjann
     agho näma mahä-balaù
yuväti-sundaraù säkñät
     kämadeva iväparaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said;  çaìkhäsura-sutaù—the son of Sankhasura; räjann—O king; aghaù—Agha; näma—named; mahä—very; balaù—powerful yuvä—young; ati-sundaraù—very handsome; säkñät—directly; kämadeva—Kämadeva; iva—like; aparaù—another.

     Çré Närada said: O king, he was Çaìkhacüòa's son, and his name was Agha. He was young, strong, and very handsome. He was like another Kämadeva.

Text 11

añöavakraà munià yäntaà
     virüpaà malayäcale
dåñövä jahäsa tam aghaù
     ku-rüpo 'yam iti bruvan

     añöavakram munim—Añöavakra Muni; yäntam—going; virüpam—disfigured; malayäcale—in the Malaya Mountains; dåñövä—seeing; jahäsa—laughed; tam—at him; aghaù—Agha; ku-rüpaù—ungly; ayam—this; iti—thus; bruvan—saying.

     When he saw the disfigured sage Añöavakra Muni walking by the Malaya Hills, Agha laughed and said, "Who is this ugly person?"

Text 12

taà çaçäpa mahä-duñöaà
     tvaà sarpo bhava durmate
kurüpa vakra-ga jätiù
     sarpäëäà bhümi-maëòale

     tam—him; çaçäpa—cursed; mahä-duñöam—very wicked; tvam—you; sarpaù—a snake; bhava—become; durmate—O wicked-hearted one; kurüpa—ugly; vakra-ga—difigured; jätiù—birth; sarpäëäm—of snakes; bhümi-maëòale—on the circle of the earth.

     Then the sage cursed the demon Agha: "O wicked-hearted one, you will become a snake. You will be the ugliest snake in the circle of the earth."

Text 13

tat-pädayor nipatitaà
     daityaà dénaà gata-smayam
prasannaù sa munir
     varaà tasmai dadau punaù

     tat-pädayoù—at his feet; nipatitam—fallen; daityam—the demon; dénam—poor; gata-smayam—his arrogance gone; dåñövä—seeing; prasannaù—satisfied; sa—he; muniù—the sage; varam—benedication; tasmai—to him; dadau—gave; punaù—again.

     Seeing that the demon, his pride and arrogance now gone, had fallen at his feet, the sage became pleased with him and gave him a benediction.

Text 14

çré-añöavakra uväca 
koöi-kandarpa-lävaëyaù
     çré-kåñëas tu tavodare
yadägacchet sarpa-rüpät
     tadä muktir bhaviñyati

     çré-añöavakra uväca—Çré Añöavakra said; koöi-kandarpa-lävaëyaù—handsome as millions of Kämadevas; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; tu—indeed; tava—of you; udare—in the stomach; yadä—when; ägacchet—enters; sarpa-rüpät—from the form of a snake; tadä—then; muktiù—liberation; bhaviñyati—will be.

     Çré Añöavakta said: Çré Kåñëa, who is more handsome than many millions of Kämadevas, will enter your stomach. Then you will be free from having a snake's form.

Text 15

çré-närada uväca 
añöavakrasya çäpena
     sarpo bhütvä hy aghäsuraù
tad-varät paramaà mokñaà
     gato devaiç ca durlabhaà

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; añöavakrasya—of Añöavakra; çäpena—by the curse; sarpaù—a snake; bhütvä—becoming; hi—indeed; aghäsuraù—Aghäsura; tad-varät—by that benediction; paramam—ultimate; mokñam—liberation; gataù—attained; devaiù—by the demigods; ca—and; durlabham—difficult to attain.

     By Añöavakra's curse Aghäsura became a snake, and by Añöavakra's blessing Aghäsura attained a liberation even the demigods cannot attain.

Text 16

vatsäd baka-mukhän muktaà
     tato muktaà hy aghäsurät
çrutvä kati-dinaiù kåñëaà
     yaçodäbhud bhayäturä

     vatsät—from vatsäsura; baka-mukhän—from Baka's mouth; muktam—freed; tataù—then; muktam—freed; hi—indeed; aghäsurät—from Aghäsura; çrutvä—hearing; kati-dinaiùfor some days; kåñëam—Kåñëa; yaçodä—Yaçodä; abhut——become; bhaya—with fear; äturä—overcome.

     Hearing how in only a few days Kåñëa was rescued from Vatsäsura, Bakäsura's beak, and now from Aghäsura, Yaçodä became filled with fears.

Texts 17 and 18

kalävatéà rohiëéà ca
     gopé-gopänvayädhikän
våñabhänu-varaà gopaà
     nandaräjaà vrajeçvaram

navopanandän nandäàç ca
     våñabhänün vrajeçvarän
samähuya tad-agre ca
     vacaù präha yaçomaté

     kalävatém—Kalävaté; rohiëém—Rohiëé; ca—and; gopé-gopänvayädhikän—the most important gopas and gopés; våñabhänu-varam—King Våñabhänu; gopam—the gopa; nandaräjam—King Nanda; vrajeçvaram—the master of Vraja; nava—nine; upanandän—Upanandas; nandän—Nandas; ca—and; våñabhänün—the Våñabhänus; vrajeçvarän—the rulers of Vraja; samähuya—calling; tad-agre—in their presence; ca—and; vacaù—words; präha—said; yaçomaté—Yaçodä.

     Calling together Kalävaté, Rohiëé, the most important gopas and gopés, the gopa king Våñabhänu, Vraja's king Nanda, the nine Upanandas, the Nandas, the Våñabhänus, and the various leaders of Vraja, Yaçodä spoke to them.

Text 19

çré-yaçodoväca 
kià karomi kva gacchämi
     kalyänäà me kathaà bhavet
mat-sute bahavo 'riñöäù
     ägacchanti kñaëe kñaëe

     çré-yaçodä uväca—Çré Yaçodä said; kim—what?; karomi—shall I do?; kva—where; gacchämi—shall I go; kalyänäm—auspiciousness; me—for me; katham—how?; bhavet—will be; mat-sute—for my son; bahavaù—many; ariñöäù—calamities; ägacchanti—come; kñaëe—moment Kåñëa; kñaëe—after moment.

     Çré Yaçodä said: What shall I do? Where shall I go? How will I be happy? Moment after moment many calamities have fallen on my son.

Text 20

pürvaà mahä-vanaà tyaktvä
     våndäraëye gatä vayam
etat tyaktvä kva yasyämo
     deçe vadata nirbhaye

     pürvam—before; mahä-vanam—Mahävana; tyaktvä—leaving; våndäraëye—in Våndävana; gatä—gone; vayam—we; etat—this; tyaktvä—leaving; kva—where?; yasyämaù—we will go; deçe—in a country; vadata—tell; nirbhaye—that will not be fearful.

     First we left Mahävana and came to Våndävana. If we leave Våndävana to what safe country, where there will be no fearful calamities, could we go? Please tell me.

Text 21

caïcalo 'yaà bälako me
     kréòan düre prayäti hi
bälakäç caïcaläù sarve
     na mänyante vaco mama

     caïcalaù—restless; ayam—thjis; bälakaù—boy; me—of mine; kréòan—playing; düre—far away; prayäti—goes; hi—indeed; bälakäù—boys; caïcaläù—restless; sarve—all; na—not; mänyante—are considered; vacaù—words; mama—my.

     When He plays, my restless boy goes far away. All the boys are restless. I am not the only one to say that.

Text 22

bakäsuraç ca me bälaà
     tékñëa-tuëòo 'grasad balé
tasmän muktaà tu jagrähär-
     bhakair dinam aghäsuraù

     bakäsuraù—Bakasura; ca—and; me—my; bälam—boy; tékñëa-tuëòaù—a sharp beak; agrasat—swallowed; balé—powerful; tasmän—from that; muktam—rescued; tu—indeed; jagräha—grabbed; arbhakaiù—with the boys; dinam—one day; aghäsuraù—Aghäsura.

     Powerful and sharp-beaked Bakäsura swallowed my boy. Somehow He was rescued. Another day Aghäsura swallowed my boy and all the other boys.

Text 23

vatsäsuras taj-jighäàçuù
     so 'pi daivena märitaù
vatsärthaà sva-gåhäd bälaà
     na bahiù karayämy aham

     vatsäsuras-Vatsasura; taj-jighäàçuù—yearning to kill Him; saù—he; api—even; daivena—by fate; märitaù—was killed; vatsärtham—for the sake of the calves; sva-gåhät—from His own home; bälam—the boy; na—not; bahiù—outside; karayämi—cause to do; aham—I.

     When he tried to kill my boy, Vatsäsura was himself killed by his own fate. Now I do not allow my boy to go outside to care for the calves.

Text 24

çré-närada uväca 
itthaà vadantéà satataà rudantéà
     yaçomatéà vékñya jagäda nandaù
äçväsayäm äsa su-garga-väkyair
     dharmärtha-vid dharma-bhåtäà variñöhaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; vadantém—speaking; satatam—again and again; rudantém—weeping; yaçomatém—Yaçodä; vékñya—seeing; jagäda—spoke; nandaù—Nanda; äçväsayäm äsa—comforted; su-garga-väkyaiù—with the words of Garga Muni; dharmärtha-vit—who understood the meaning of religion; dharma-bhåtäm—of the pious; variñöhaù—the best.

     Çré Närada said: Glancing at Yaçodä as she spoke these words and wept, Nanda, who was the best of the pious and who understood the true meaning of religion, spoke to her. He comforted her by repeating the words of Garga Muni.

Text 25

çré-nandaräja uväca 
garga-väkyaà tvayä sarvaà
     vismåtaà he yaçomati
brähmaëänäà vacaù satyaà
     näsatyaà bhavati kvacit

     çré-nandaräja uväca—Nanda Mahäräja said; garga—of Garga Muni; väkyam—the words; tvayä—by you; sarvam—all; vismåtam—forgotten; he yaçomati—O Yaçodä; brähmaëänäm—of the brahmanas; vacaù—the words; satyam—true; na—not; asatyam—untrue; bhavati—are; kvacit—ever.

     Nanda Mahäräja said: O Yaçodä, you have completely forgotten Garga Muni's words. The words of the brähmaëas are always true. They are never untrue.

Text 26

tasmäd dänaà prakartavyaà
     sarväriñöa-niväraëam
dänät paraà tu kalyäëaà
     na bhütaà na bhaviñyati

     tasmät—therefore; dänam—charity; prakartavyam—should be given; sarva—all; ariñöa—calamities; niväraëam—dispeling; dänät—than charity; param—better; tu—indeed; kalyäëam—good fortune; na—not; bhütam—manifested; na—not; bhaviñyati—will be.

     Therefore charity should be given. That will dispel all calamities. There has never been nor will there ever be a source of good fortune better than giving charity.

Text 27

çré-närada uväca 
tadä yaçodä viprebhyo
     nava-ratnaà mahä-dhanam
svälaìkaräàç ca bälasya
     sa-balasya dadau nåpa

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; yaçodä—Yaçodä; viprebhyaù—to the brahmanas; nava-ratnam—nine jewels; mahä—great; dhanam—wealth; svälaìkarän—own ornaments; ca—and; bälasya—of the boy; sa-balasya—with Balaräma; dadau—gave; nåpa—O king.

     Çré Närada said: O king, on behalf of her boy and Balaräma, Yaçodä then gave to the brähmaëas great wealth, seven kinds of precious jewels, and even her own ornaments.

Text 28

ayutaà våñabhänäà ca
     gaväà lakñaà manoharam
dvi-lakñam anna-bhäräëäà
     nando dänaà dadau tataù
        ayutam—ten thousand; våñabhänäm—bulls; ca—and; gaväm—cows; lakñam—a hundred thousand; manoharam—beautiful; dvi-laksam—two hundred thousand; anna—of grains; bhäräëäm—bharas; nandaù—Nanda; dänam—charity; dadau—gave; tataù—then.

     The Nanda gave in charity ten thousand bulls, a hundred thousand beautiful cows, and two hundred thousand bhäras of grain.       .pa

Chapter Seven
Vatsa-vatsapäla-haraëa
Kidnapping of the Calves and Cowherd Boys

Text 1

athänyac chåëu räjendra
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù
kaumäre kréòanaà cedaà
     paugaëòe kértanaà yathä

     atha—then; anyat—another; çåëu—please hear; räjendra—O king of kings; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kaumäre—in childhood; kréòanam—playing; ca—and; idam—this; paugaëòe——in pauganda; kértanam—glory; yathä—as.

     O king of kings, please listen as I describe other pastimes Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, enjoyed in His kaumara and paugaëòa years.

Text 2

çré-kåñëo 'gha-mukhän måtyo
     rakñitvä vatsa-vatsapän
yamunä-pulinaà gatvä
     prähedaà harña-vardhanam

     çré-kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; agha-mukhät—from Agha's mouth; måtyaù—from death; rakñitvä—saving; vatsa—the calves; vatsapän—and the calfherd-boys; yamunä-pulinam—to the shore of the Yamunä; gatvä—going; präha—said; idam—this; harña—joy; vardhanam—increasing.

     After rescuing the calves and gopas from death in Aghäsura's mouth, Çré Kåñëa went to the Yamunä's shore and spoke the following delightful words:

Texts 3-5

aho 'ti-ramyaà pulinaà
     priyaà komala-välukam
çarat-praphulla-padmänäà
     parägaiù paripüritam

väyunä tri-vidhäkhyena
     sugandhena sugandhitam
madhupa-dhvani-samyuktaà
     kuïja-druma-latäkulam

atropaviçya gopälä
     dinaika-prahare gate
bhojanasyäpi samayaà
     tasmät kuruta bhojanam

     ahaù—Oh; ati-ramyam—very beautiful; pulinam—shore; priyam—favorite; komala—soft; välukam—sand; çarat—autumn; praphulla—blooming; padmänäm—of lotuses; parägaiù—with pollen; paripüritam—filled; väyunä—by the breeze; tri-vidhäkhyena—named trividha; sugandhena—with the fragrance; sugandhitam—scented; madhupa—of bees; dhvani—the sound; samyuktam—with; kuïja—forest; druma—trees; latä—vines; äkulam—filled; atra—here; upaviçya—entering; gopälä—O gopas; dina—of the day; eka—one; prahare—a period of three hourse; gate—passed; bhojanasya—of lunch; api—also; samayam—the time; tasmät—from that; kuruta—do; bhojanam—lunch.

     O gopas, let us go to this beautiful and pleasing riverbank of soft sands, which is flooded with pollen from the lotuses blossoming in autumn, fragrant with a breeze carrying three scents, and filled with trees, vines, and the humming of bees, and, now that three hours have passed and it is time for lunch, let us take our lunch here.

Text 6

atra bhojana-yogyä bhür
     dåçyate mådu-välukä
vatsakäù salilaà pitvä
     te cariñyanti çädvalam

     atra—here; bhojana-yogya—suitable for lunch; bhüù—place; dåçyate—was seen; mådu—soft; välukä—sands; vatsakäù—the calves; salilam—water; pitvä—drinking; te—they; cariñyanti—will go; çädvalam—to the new grasses.

     I see that this place with soft sands is a very good place for our lunch. The calves will drink the water here, and then they will go to the new grasses there.

Text 7

iti kåñëa-vacaù çrutvä
     tathety ähuç ca bälakäù
prakartuà bhojanaà sarve
     hy upaviñöäù sarit-taöe

     iti—thus; kåñëa—of Kåñëa; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; tathä—so be it; iti—thus; ähuù—said; ca—and; bälakäù—the boys; prakartum—to do; bhojanam—lunch; sarve—all; hi—indeed; upaviñöäù—sat down; sarit—of the river; taöe—on the bank.

     Hearing Kåñëa's words, the boys said, "So be it." They all sat down on the riverbank to take lunch.

Text 8

atha kecid bälakäç ca
     yeñäà pärçve na bhojanam
te tu kåñëasya karëänte
     jagadur dénayä girä

     atha—then; kecit—some; bälakäù—boys; ca—and; yeñäm—of them; pärçve—on the side; na—not; bhojanam—lunch; te—they; tu—indeed; kåñëasya—of Kåñëa; karëänte—in the ear; jagaduù—spoke; dénayä girä—with a whisper.

     Some boys, who had not brought lunch, whispered in Kåñëa's ear:

Text 9

vayaà tu kià kariñyämo
     'smät pärçve na tu bhojanam
nanda-grämaà tu düraà hi
     gacchämo vatsakair vayaà

     vayam—we; tu—indeed; kim—what; kariñyämaù—will do; asmät—of us; pärçve—on the side; na—not; tu—indeed; bhojanam—lunch; nanda—of Nanda; grämam—the village; tu—indeed; düram—far away; hi—indeed; gacchämaù—we go; vatsakaiù—with the calves; vayam—we.

     We did not bring any lunch. With the calves we have come very far from Nanda's village.

Text 10

iti çrutvä hariù präha
     mä çokaà kuruta priyäù
ahaà däsyämi sarveñäà
     prayatnenäpi bhojanam
tasmän mad-väkya-niratäù
     sarve bhavata bälakäù

     iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; hariù—Kåñëa; präha—said; mä—don't; çokam—lament; kuruta—do; priyäù—dear friends; aham—I; däsyämi—will give; sarveñäm—of all; prayatnena—carefully; api—also; bhojanam—the lunch; tasmät—therefore; mat—of Me; väkya—on the words; niratäù—intent; sarve—all; bhavata—become; bälakäù—O boys; 

     Hearing this, Kåñëa said: Dear friends, don't lament. I will carefully give lunch to everyone. All you boys just follow My words.

Text 11

iti kåñëasya vacanät
     kåñëa-pärçve ca te sthitäù
muktvä çikyäni sarve 'nye
     bubhujuù kåñëa-samyutäù

     iti—thus; kåñëasya—of Kåñëa; vacanät—from the words; kåñëa-pärçve—at Kåñëa's side; ca—and; te—they; sthitäù—situated; muktvä—giving up; çikyäni—ropes; sarve—all; anye—others; bubhujuù—ate; kåñëa-samyutäù—in Kåñëa's company.

     On Kåñëa's word all the boys assembled around Kåñëa, put down their gopa-ropes, and ate their lunch in Kåñëa's company.

Text 12

cakära kåñëaù kila räja-maëòaléà
     gopäla-bälaiù purataù prapüritaiù
aneka-varëair vasanaiù prakalpitair
     madhye sthito péta-paöena bhüñitäù

     cakära—made; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; kila—indeed; räja-maëòalém—a royal circle; gopäla-bälaiù—with gopa boys; purataù—in the presence; prapüritaiù—filled; aneka-varëaiù—with many different kinds; vasanaiù—with garments; prakalpitaiù—made; madhye—in the middle; sthitaù—situated; péta-paöena—with a yellow garment; bhüñitäù—decorated.

     With the gopa boys dressed in garments of many colors, Kåñëa made a royal circle, with Himself, dressed in yellow, in the center.

Text 13

reje tataù so vara-gopa-därakair
     yathämareço hy amaraiç ca sarvataù
punar yathämbhoruha-komalair dalair
     madhye tu vaideha suvarëa-karëikä

     reje—shone; tataù—then; saù—He; vara-gopa-därakaiù—with the gopa boys; yathä—as; amara—of the demigods; éçaù—the king; hi—indeed; amaraiù—with the demigods; ca—and; sarvataù—all; punaù—again; yathä—as; ambhoruha—lotus; komalaiù—soft; dalaiù—with petals; madhye—in the middle; tu—indeed; vaideha—O king of Videha; suvarëa—golden; karëikä—whorl.

     O king of Videha, surrounded by the gopa boys as Indra is surrounded by the demigods or a lotus whorl is surrounded by many soft petals, Kåñëa shone with great splendor.

Text 14

kusumair aìkuraiù kecit
     pallavaiç ca dalaiù phalaiù
hastair dåçadbhiù çigbhiç ca
     jakñus te kåta-bhäjanäù

     kusumaiù—with flowers; aìkuraiù—with grass; kecit—some; pallavaiù—with twigs; ca—and; dalaiù—with leaves; phalaiù—with fruits; hastaiù—with hands; dåçadbhiù—with stones; çigbhiù—with rope; ca—and; jakñuù—ate; te—they; kåta—having made; bhäjanäù—dishes.

     Making lunch-trays out of flowers, grass, twigs, leaves, fruit, rocks, rope, or their hands, the boys ate.

Text 15

tatraiko bälakäù çéghraà
     kåñëäya kavalaà dadau
kåñëas tu kavalaà bhuktvä
     sarvän paçyann idaà jagau

     tatra—there; ekaù—one; bälakäù—boy; çéghram—quickly; kåñëäya—to Kåñëa; kavalam—a morsel; dadau—gave; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; tu—indeed; kavalam—the morsel; bhuktvä—ate; sarvän—all; paçyann—seeing; idam—this; jagau—said.

     Then one boy suddenly gave a morsel to Kåñëa. Kåñëa ate it, glanced at everyone, and said:

Text 16

anyän nidarçayan svädu
     nähaà jänämi vai sakhe
tathety uktvä sa bäläç ca
     nétvänyän kavalän dadau

     anyän—the others; nidarçayan—showing; svädu—delicious; na—not; aham—I; jänämi—know; vai—indeed; sakhe—O friend; tathä—so be it; iti—thus; uktvä—saying; sa—He; bälaù—the boy; ca—and; nétvä—bringing; anyän—others; kavalän—morsels; dadau—gave.

     Showing the others, Kåñëa said: Friend, I do not know of anything more delicious than this.      The boy said: It is so.      Then the boy gave morsels of that food to the others.    

Text 17

bhuktvä te kathayäm äsuù
     prahasantaù parasparam
punas taträpi subalo
     haraye kavalaà dadau

     bhuktvä—eating; te—they; kathayäm äsuù—said; prahasantaù—laughing; parasparam—among themselves; punaù—again; tatra—there; api—also; subalaù—Subala; haraye—to Kåñëa; kavalam— amorsel; dadau—gave.

     Joking and laughing, the boys ate. Then Subala gave a morsel of food to Kåñëa.

Text 18

kåñëas tu kavalaà kiïcid
     bhuktvä tatra jahäsa ha
ye bhukta-kavalä bäläs
     te sarve jahasuù sphuöam

     kåñëaù—Kåñëa; tu—indeed; kavalam—the morsel; kiïcit—a little bit; bhuktvä—eating; tatra—there; jahäsa—laughed; ha—Ah!; ye—who; bhukta—eating; kavalaù—the morsel; bäläù—the boys; te—they; sarve—all; jahasuù—laughed; sphuöam—aloud.

     Kåñëa tasted the morsel and laughed. All the boys that tasted that food laughed aloud.

Text 19

çré-bäla ücuù 
yasya mätämahä müòhä
     çåëu nanda-kumäraka
na jïänaà bhojane tasya
     tasmät svädu na vidyate

     çré-bälaù ücuù—the boys said; yasya—of whom; mätämahä—the grandmother; müòhä—bewildered; çåëu—listen; nanda—of Nanda; kumäraka—O son; na—not; jïänam—knowledge; bhojane—in eating; tasya—of him; tasmät—therefore; svädu—delicious; na—not; vidyate—is.

     The boys said: O son of Nanda, his bewildered grandmother does not know how to cook. That was not delicious.

Text 20

tato dadau ca kavalaà
     çrédämä mädhaväya ca
anyän sarvän bahu-çreñöhaà
     jaguù sarve vrajärbhakäù

     tataù—then; dadau—gave; ca—and; kavalam—a morsel; çrédämä—Çrédämä; mädhaväya—to Kåñëa; ca—and; anyän—the others; sarvän—all; bahu-çreñöham—the best; jaguù—said; sarve—all; vraja—of Vraja; arbhakäù—the boys.

     Then Çrédämä gave a morsel to Kåñëa and the other boys. All the boys of Vraja declared, "This is the best." 

Text 21

punaù kåñëäya pradadau
     kavalaà ca varüthapaù
anyän bäläàs tathä sarvän
     kiïcit kiïcit prayatnataù

     punaù—again; kåñëäya—to Kåñëa; pradadau—gave; kavalam—a morsel; ca—and; varüthapaù—varüthapa; anyän—to the other; bälän—boys; tathä—then; sarvän—all; kiïcit—something; kiïcit—something; prayatnataù—carefully.

     Then Varüthapa earnestly gave a morsel to Kåñëa and all the other boys.

Text 22

bhuktvä tu jahasuù sarve
     çré-kåñëädyä vrajärbhakäù

çré-bäla ücuù 
tädåçaà bhojanaà cäsya
     yädåçaà subalasya vai

     bhuktvä—eating; tu—indeed; jahasuù—laughed; sarve—all; çré-kåñëädyä—headed by Kåñëa; vrajärbhakäù—the boys of Vraja; çré-bäläù ücuù—the boys said; tädåçam—like that; bhojanam—food; ca—and; asya—of him; yädåçam—like which; subalasya—of Subala; vai—indeed.

     When they ate it, Kåñëa and all the boys of Vraja laughed. The boys said, "This is like Subala's food.

Text 23

bhuktväty-udvigna-manasaù
     sarve vayam ataù kila
evaà påthak påthak sarve
     darçayantaù sva-bhojanam

     bhuktvä—eating; aty-udvigna-manasaù—very unhappy at heart; sarve—all; vayam—we; ataù—therefore; kila—indeed; evam—thus; påthak påthak—individually; sarve—all; darçayantaù—showing; sva-bhojanam—own lunch.

     "by eating this we have all become very unhappy at heart." In this way each boy showed his lunch to the others.

Text 24

häsayanto hasantaç ca
     cakruù kréòäà parasparam
jaöharasya paöe veëuà
     vetraà çåìgaà ca kakñake

     häsayantaù—making others laugh; hasantaù—laughing; ca—and; cakruù—did; kréòäm—pastimes; parasparam—together; jaöharasya—of the abdomen; paöe—in the cloth; veëum—flute; vetram—stick; çåìgam—horn; ca—and; kakñake—in the hiding place.

     Laughing and making each other laugh, the boys enjoyed pastimes. Tucked into the cloth about His waist His flute, stick, and horn, . . .

Text 25

väme päëau ca kavalaà
     hy aìguliñu phaläni ca
çirasä mukuöaà bibhrat
     skandhe péta-paöaà tathä

     väme—in the left; päëau—hand; ca—and; kavalam—a morsel of food; hi—indeed; aìguliñu—in the fingers; phaläni—fruits; ca—and; çirasä—by the head; mukuöam—a crown; bibhrat—holding; skandhe—on the shoulders; péta-paöam—yellow garments; tathä—so.

 . . . in His left hand a morsel of food, on His fingers pieces of fruit, on His head a crown, over His shoulder a yellow cloth, . . .

Text 26

hådaye vana-mäläà ca
     kaöau käïcéà tathaiva ca
pädayor nüpurau bibhrac
     chrévatsaà kaustubhaà hådi

     hådaye—on the chest; vana-mäläm— a forest garland; ca—and; kaöau—on the hips; käïcém— abelt; tathä—so; eva—indeed; ca—and; pädayoù—on His feet; nüpurau—anklets; bibhrat—wearing; çrévatsam—Çrévatsa; kaustubham—and Kautubha; hådi—om His chest.

 . . . on His chest a forest garland, on His hips a belt, on His feet anklets, on His chest a Kaustubha jewel and Çrévatsa mark, . . .

Text 27

tiñöhan madhye gopa-goñöhyäà
     häsayan narmabhiù svakaiù
svarge loke ca miñati
     bubhuje yajïa-bhug ghariù

     tiñöhan—situated; madhye—in the center; gopa-goñöhyäm—of the gopas; häsayan—making laugh; narmabhiù—with jokes; svakaiù—own; svarge—on Svargaloka; loke—on the other planets; ca—and; miñati—gazing; bubhuje—enjoyed; yajïa-bhuk—the enjoyer of sacrifices; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

 . . . staying in the midst of the gopas and making them laugh with His joking words as the people of Svargaloka and the other planets gazed with wonder, Lord Kåñëa, the enjoyer of sacrifices, enjoyed many pastimes. 

Text 28

evaà kåñëätma-natheñu
     bhuïjaneñv arbhakeñu ca
viviçur gahvare düraà
     tåëa-lobhena vatsakäù

     evam—thus; kåñëa—Kåñëa; ätma—own; natheñu—Lord; bhuïjaneñu—eating; arbhakeñu—among the boys; ca—and; viviçuù—entered; gahvare—the deep forest; düram—far away; tåëa-lobhena—eager for grass; vatsakäù—the calves.

     As the boys, for whom Kåñëa was the Lord of their lives, ate, the calves, greedy for more grass, went far away, deep in the forest.

Text 29

vilokya tän bhaya-trastän
     gopän kåñëa uväca ha
yüyaà gacchantu mähaà tu
     hy äneñye vatsakän iha

     vilokya—seeing; tän—them; bhaya-trastän—frightened; gopän—teh gopas; kåñëa—Kåñëa; uväca—said; ha—O; yüyam—you; gacchantugo; mä—don't; aham—I; tu—indeed; hi—indeed; äneñye—will bring; vatsakän—the calves; iha—here.

     Seeing that the gopas were frightened, Kåñëa said to them, "Don't go. I shall bring the calves here."

Text 30

ity uktvä kåñëa utthäya
     gåhitvä kavalaà kare
vicikäya daré-kuïja-
     gahvare vatsakän svakän

     iti—thus; uktvä—saying; kåñëa—Kåñëa; utthäya—rising; gåhitvä—taking; kavalam—a morsel of food; kare—in His hand; vicikäya—to search; daréthe caves; kuïja-gahvare—and forest groves; vatsakän—the calves; svakän—own.

     Saying this, Kåñëa stood up, took a morsel of food in His hand, and left to search the caves and forests for the calves. 

Text 31

tadaiva cämbhoja-bhavaù samägato
     vilokya muktià hy agha-räkñasasya ca
dadarça kåñëaà puline yathä-ruci
     bhuïjänam annaà vraja-bälakaiù saha

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; ca—and; ambhoja-bhavaù—Brahmä; samägataù—came; vilokya—seeing; muktim—liberation; hi—indeed; agha-räkñasasya—of Aghäsura; ca—and; dadarça—saw; kåñëam—Kåñëa; puline—on the shore; yathä-ruci—as He pleased; bhuïjänam—eating; annam—lunch; vraja-bälakaiù—the boys of Vraja; saha—with.

     Then the demigod Brahmä, who had already seen the liberation of Aghäsura, came and gazed at Kåñëa happily eating lunch with the boys on the riverbank.

Text 32

dåñövä ca kåñëaà manasä sa üce
     tv ayaà hi gopo na hi deva-devaù
harir yadi syäd bahu-kutsitänne
     kathaà rato vä vraja-gopa-bälaiù

     dåñövä—seeing; ca—and; kåñëam—Kåñëa; manasä—in his mind; sa—he; üce—said; tv—indeed; ayam—He; hi—indeed; gopaù—a gopa; na—not; hi—indeed; deva-devaù—the master of the demigods; hariù—Lord Hari; yadi—if; syät—is; bahu—very; kutsita—wretched; anne—in food; katham—how?; rataù—enjoying; vä—or; vraja-gopa-bälaiù—with Vraja's gopa boys.

     As he gazed at Kåñëa, Brahmä said in his mind, "This must be a gopa. He cannot be Lord Hari, the Personality of Godhead. Why would Lord Hari enjoy such wretched food with the gopa boys of Vraja?"

Text 33

ity uktvä mohito brahmä
     mäyayä paramätmanaù
drañöuà maïju mahattvaà tu
     manaç cakre hy aho nåpa

     iti—thus; uktvä—speaking; mohitaù—bewildered; brahmä—Brahmä; mäyayä—by the illusory potency; paramätmanaù—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; drañöum—to see; maïju—beautiful; mahattvam—glory; tu—indeed; manaù—mind; cakre—did; hi—indeed; ahaù—Oh; nåpa—king.

     After speaking these words, Brahmä became bewildered by the Lord's illusory potency. O king, he set his heart on seeing the beautiful glories of the Lord.

Text 34

sarvän vastän ito gopän
     nétvä khe 'vasthitaù purä
antardadhe vismito 'jo
     dåñöväghäsura-mokñaëam

     sarvän—all; vastän—the calves; itaù—from there; gopän—the gopas; nétvä—taking; khe—in the sky; avasthitaù—situated; purä—before; antardadhe—disappeared; vismitaù—surprised; ajaù—Brahmä; dåñövä—having seen; aghäsura-mokñaëam—the liberation of Aghäsura.

     As he stood in the sky, Brahmä, and who was very surprised to see Aghäsura's liberation, stole all the calves and boys and disappeared.
.pa

Chapter Eight
Çré Kåñëa-darçana-varëana
Description of Seeing Lord Kåñëa

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
adåñövä vatsakän etya
     vatsapän puline hariù
ubhau vicinvän vipine
     mene karma vidheù kåtam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said: ; adåñövä—not seeing; vatsakän—the calves; etya—going; vatsapän—to the gopas; puline—on the shore; hariù—Kåñëa; ubhau—both; vicinvän—searching; vipine—in the forest; mene—thought; karma—the work; vidheù—of Brahmä; kåtam—done.

     Çré Närada said: Not seeing the calves, returning to the riverbank and not seeing the gopas, and then searching in the forest for them both, Kåñëa thought, "This must be Brahmä's work."

Text 2

tato gaväà gopékänäà
     mudaà kartuà sa lélayä
sarvaà tu viçva-kåc cakre
     hy ätmänam ubhayäyitam

     tataù—then; gaväm—of the cows; gopékänäm—of the gopés; mudam—happiness; kartum—to do; sa—He; lélayä—playfully; sarvam—all; tu—indeed; viçva-kåt—the creator of the universes; cakre—made; hi—indeed; ätmänam—Himself; ubhayäyitam—both.

     Then, to please the cows and gopés, Lord Kåñëa, who is the creator of the universes, made Himself into (the calves and boys).

Texts 3 and 4

yävat vatsapa-vatsänäà
     vapuù päëi-padädikän
yävad yañöi-visanädén
     yävac chéla-guëädikän

yävad bhüñana-vasträdén
     tävac chré-hariëä svataù
sarvaà viñëumayaà viçvaà
     iti väkyaà pradarçitam

     yävat—as; vatsapa—gopas; vatsänäm—and calves; vapuù—forms; päëi-padädikän—beginning weith feet and hands; yävat—as; yañöi—sticks; visana—horns; ädén—beginning with; yävac—as; çéla—character; guëa—and qualities; ädikän—beginning with; yävat—as; bhüñana-vasträdén—beginning with graments and ornaments; tävac—so; chré-hariëä—by Lord Kåñëa; svataù—pwrsonally; sarvam—all; viñëumayam—consisting of Lord Viñëu; viçvam—the universe; iti—thus; väkyam—the statement; pradarçitam—demonstrated.

     Whatever were the gopas' and calves' forms, with their hands, feet, and other parts, whatever were their sticks, horns, and other possessions, whatever were their characters, qualities, and other features, and whatever were their clothes, ornaments, and other things, Lord Kåñëa perfectly copied. In this way He proved the Vedic statement: "sarvaà viñëumayaà viçvam" (The entire universe is Lord Viñëu).

Text 5

ätma-vatsän ätma-gopaiç
     cärayan kréòayä hariù
praviçan nanda-nagaraà
     añöam-giri-gate ravau

     ätma—self; vatsän—calves; ätma—self; gopaiù—with gopas; cärayan—hering; kréòayä—with pastimes; hariù—Kåñëa; praviçan—entered; nanda-nagaram—the village of Nanda; añöam-giri-gate—on the western horizon; ravau—the sun.

     As the sun was setting on the western horizon, Kåñëa, herding calves that were in truth Himself, and accompanied by gopas that were also Himself, playfully entered Nanda's village.

Text 6

tat-tad-goñöhe påthaì nétvä
     tat-tad-vatsän praveçya ca
kåñëo 'bhavat tat-tad-ätmä
     tat-tad-gehaà praviñöavän

     tat-tad-goñöhe—to the various barns; påthak—variously; nétvä—bringing; tat-tad-vatsän—the various calves; praveçya—bringin ginside; ca—and; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; abhavat—became; tat-tad-ätmä—various; tat-tad-geham—various homes; praviñöavän—entered.

     The many gopas, who were all Kåñëa, led the various calves, who were also Kåñëa, to their respective barns. Then the gopas entered their own homes.

Text 7

çrutvä vaàçé-ravaà gopyaù
     sambhramac chéghram utthitaù
payäàsi päyayäm äsur
     lälayitvä sutän påthak

     çrutvä—hearing; vaàçé—of the flute; ravam—the sound; gopyaù—the gopés; sambhramat—fainted; çéghram—at once3; utthitaù—stood up; payäàsi—milk; päyayäm äsuù—made flow; lälayitvä—embracing; sutän—sons; påthak—individually.

     Hearing the sound of the flute, the gopés fainted and then suddenly stood up. As milk flowed from them, each embraced her son.

Text 8

svän svän vätàsäàs tathä gävo
     rambhamänän nirékñya ca
lihantyo jihvayäìgäni
     payäàsi ca hy apäyayan

     svän svän—their own; vätàsän—calves; tathä—so; gävaù—the cows; rambhamänän—mooing; nirékñya—seeing; ca—and; lihantyaù—licking; jihvayäìgäni—iwth the tongue; payäàsi—milk; ca—and; hi—indeed; apäyayan—made drink.

     Seeing their calves, the cows mooed. They licked the calves with their tongues, and made the calves drink their milk.

Text 9

abhavan mätaraù sarvä
     gopyo gävo harer aho
ati-snehaà ca vavådhe
     pürvato hi catur-guëam

     abhavan—became; mätaraù—mothers; sarvä—all; gopyaù—the gopés; gävaù—cows; hareù—of Kåñëa; ahaù—Oh; ati-sneham—great love; ca—and; vavådhe—expanded; pürvataù—than before; hi—indeed; catur-guëam—four times.

     In this way all the gopés and cows became Kåñëa's mothers. Their love for their children became four times what it had been.

Text 10

sva-puträn lälayitvä tu
     majjanonmardanädibhiù
paçcäd gopyaç ca kåñëasya
     darçanaà kartum äyayuù

     sva-puträn—own sons; lälayitvä—embracing; tu—indeed; majjana—bathing; unmardana—massaging; ädibhiù—beginning with; paçcät—then; gopyaù—the gopés; ca—and; kåñëasya—of Kåñëa; darçanam—the sight; kartum—to do; äyayuù—attained.

     As they embraced, bathed, massaged, and in other ways served their sons, the gopés now gazed on Lord Kåñëa.

Text 11

anekänäà tu bälänäà
     udvähäù kåñëa-rüpiëam
babhüvus täù vraje vadhvo
     ratäù kåñëe tu koöiçaù

     anekänäm—many; tu—indeed; bälänäm—of boys; udvähäù—weddings; kåñëa—Kåñëa; rüpiëam—the forms; babhüvuù—were; täù—they; vraje—in Vraja; vadhvaù—the girls; ratäù—in love; kåñëe—with Kåñëa; tu—indeed; koöiçaù—millions.

     Then the millions of gopé girls, who were all deeply in love with Kåñëa, were married to the many gopa boys, who at that time were all forms of Kåñëa.

Text 12

vatsa-päla-miñenäpi
     svätmänaà hy ätmanä hareù
pälito vatsaraç caiko
     babhüva vraja-maëòale

     vatsa-päla—of being gopa boys; miñena—on the preText; api—also; svätmänam—Himself; hi—indeed; ätmanä—Himself; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; pälitaù—protected; vatsaraù—year; ca—and; ekaù—one; babhüva—was; vraja-maëòale—in the circle of Vraja.

     In the circle of Vraja one year passed with Kåñëa disguising Himself as both the calves and gopas. He was the calves and He was the gopas protecting the calves.

Text 13

sa-rämaç caikadhä vatsäàç
     cäraëyaà cärayan yayau
häyanäpüraëéñv atra
     païcañäsu ca ratriñu

     sa-rämaù—with Balaräm; ca—and; ekadhä—one day; vatsän—trhe calves; ca—and; äraëyam—to the forest; cärayan—herding; yayau—went; häyana—one year; apüraëéñu—unfulfilled; atra—there; païcañäsu—five; ca—and; ratriñu—nights.

     On the day when there were only five nights remaining to complete the year, Kåñëa and Balaräma went to the forest as They herded the calves.

Text 14

taträpi düräc carataç ca gävo
     vatsän upavrajya gireç ca çåìgät
lihanti cäìgäni vilokayantyo
     hy apäyayaàs ta ämåtäni sadyaù

     taträpi—still; düräc—from far away; carataù—going; ca—and; gävaù—the cows; vatsän—to the calves; upavrajya—approaching; gireù—from the mountain; ca—and; çåìgät—from the top; lihanti—licks; ca—and; aìgäni—limbs; vilokayantyaù—gazing; hi—indeed; apäyayan—gave to drink; ta—they; ämåtäni—nectar; sadyaù—at once.

     From far away on the summit of Govardhana Hill the cows ran to their calves, licked their bodies, gazed on them, and made them drink the nectar of their milk.

Text 15

govardhanäd adho vatsän
     péta-dugdhän vilokya ca
snehävåtaù sthitä gäç ca
     gopäla dädåçur nåpa

     govardhanät—Govardhana Hill; adhaù—below; vatsän—the calves; péta—drunk; dugdhän—the milk; vilokya—seeing; ca—and; snehävåtaù—filled with affection; sthitä—situated; gäù—the cows; ca—and; gopäla—gopas; dädåçuù—saw; nåpa—O king.

     O king, the cowherd men saw the calves, who had already drunk their (mothers') milk, staying below Govardhana Hill, and they saw the cows, overcome with love for their calves, also staying there.

Text 16

tataù krodhena mahatä
     parvatäd avatérya ca
tädanärthe sva-puträëäà
     äjagmuù kacchato drutam

     tataù—then; krodhena—with anger; mahatä—great; parvatät—from the hill; avatérya—descending; ca—and; tädana-arthe—to punish; sva-puträëäm—own sons; äjagmuù—came; kacchataù—vicinity; drutam—quickly.

     As the men came down from the hill to hit the cows, they suddenly came upon their own sons.

Text 17

tadägatä samipe tu
     puträëäà gopa-näyakäù
svän svän sutäàs tadonnéyä
     hy aìke kåtvä milanti vai

     tadä—then; ägatäù—come; samipe—near; tu—indeed; puträëäm—of sons; gopa-näyakäù—the gopa men; svän svän—own; sutäàù—sons; tadä—then; unnéyä—placing; hi—indeed; aìke—on the lap; kåtvä—doing; milanti—meet; vai—indeed.

     Meeting them, the gopa men immediately placed their sons on their laps.

Text 18

yathä yuväno våddhäç cä
     snehäd açru-pariplutäù
svän svän pauträn gåhétvä tu
     hy upaviñöä milanti hi

     yathä—as; yuvänaù—young; våddhäù—old; cä—and; snehät—out of love; açru-pariplutäù—drowning in tears; svän—own; svän—own; pauträn—grandsons; gåhétvä—taking; tu—indeed; hi—indeed; upaviñöä—sat; milanti—meet; hi—indeed.

     Young and old were flooded with tears of love. The men embraced their sons and grandsons and sat down with them.

Text 19

evaà prema-parän sarvän
     dåñövä saìkarñaëo balaù
bahu-prakäraà sandehaà
     kåtvä manasi so 'bravét

     evam—thus; prema-parän—filled with love; sarvän—all; dåñövä—seeing; saìkarñaëaù—Balaräma; balaù—powerful; bahu-prakäram—many kinds; sandeham—doubt; kåtvä—doing; manasi—in the mind; saù—He; abravét—said.

     Seeing everyone so affectionate, powerful Balaräma had many doubts. In His mind he said:

Text 20

aho kià vatsarät präpto
     na jïäto 'pi vraje mayä
ati-snehas tu sarveñäà
     vardhate ca dine dine

     ahaù—-Oh; kim—what?; vatsarät—from a year; präptaù—attained; na—not; jïätaù—understood; api—even; vraje—in Vraja; mayä—by Me; ati-snehaù—very affectionate; tu—indeed; sarveñäm—of all; vardhate—increases; ca—also; dine dine—day after day.

     I do not understand what has happened for the past year. Everyone is so affectionate, and their love increases day after day.

Text 21

keyaà mäyä samäyätä
     deva-gandharva-rakñasäm
nänyä me mohiné mäyä
     vinä kåñëasya sämpratam

     kä—what?; iyam—this; mäyä—illusion; samäyätä—come; deva-gandharva-rakñasäm—of the devas, gandharvas, and raksasas; na—not; anyä—another; me—Me; mohiné—bewildering; mayä—illusion; vinä—without; kåñëasya—Kåñëa; sampratam—now.

     Is this an illusion made by the devas, gandharvas, or räkñasas? No one but Kåñëa can bewilder Me.

Text 22

evaà vicärya rämas tu
     locane sve nyamilayat
bhütaà bhävyaà bhaviñyaà ca
     divyäkñäbhyäà dadarça ha

     evam—in this way; vicärya—thinking; rämaù—Balaräma; tu—indeed; locane—eyes; sve—own; nyamilayat—closed; bhütam—was; bhävyam—is; bhaviñyam—will be; ca—and; divya—transcendental; akñäbhyäm—with eyes; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Thinking this, Balaräma closed His eyes. Then with transcendental eyes He looked at the past, present, and future.

Text 23

sarvän vatsäàs tathä gopän
     vaàçé-vetra-vibhüñitän
barhi-pakña-dharän çyämän
     bhågv-aìghri-kåta-kautukän

     sarvän—all; vatsän—the calves; tathä—and; gopän—gopas; vaàçé-vetra-vibhüñitän—decorated with flutes and sticks; barhi-pakña-dharän—wearing peacock feathers; çyämän—dark; bhågv-aìghri-kåta-kautukän—wearing the mark of Bhågu Muni's foot.

     He saw that all the calves and gopas had become dark boys, each decorated with a flute and stick, peacock feathers, Bhågu Muni's footprint, . . . 

Text 24

jälakänäà maëénäà ca
     guïjänäà sragbhir eva ca
padmänäà kumudänäà ca
     hy eñäà srägbhir vibhüñitän

     jälakänäm—of flowers; maëénäm—of jewels; ca—and; guïjänäm—of jewels; sragbhiù—with necklaces; eva—indeed; ca—and; padmänäm—of lotuses; kumudänäm—of water lilies; ca—and; hi—indeed; eñäm—of them; srägbhiù—with garlands; vibhüñitän—decorated.

 . . . necklaces of flowers, jewels, guïjä, lotuses, and water lilies, . . .

Text 25

uñëéçair mukuöair divyaiù
     kuëòalair alakair våtän
änanda-varñän kurvanän
     çarat-padma-dåçair api

     uñëéçaiù—with turbans; mukuöaiù—crowns; divyaiù—splendid; kuëòalaiù—with earrings; alakaiù—with curly locks of hair; våtän—covered; änanda—of bliss; varñän—showers; kurvanän—doing; çarat—autumn; padma—lotus; dåçaiù—with eyes; api—also.

 . . . turbans, crowns, and splendid earrings, endowed with curly locks of hair, making showers of bliss with the glances of their autumn-lotus eyes, . . .

Text 26

koöi-kandarpa-lävaëyän
     näsa-mautika-çobhitän
sikha-bhüñaëa-samyuktän
     päëi-bhüñana-bhüñitän

     koöi—millions; kandarpa—of Kämadevas; lävaëyän—handsome; näsa—nose; mautika—pearl; çobhitän——decorated; çikhä-bhüñaëa-samyuktän—with ornaments on top of the head; päëi-bhüñana-bhüñitän—decorated with ornaments on Their hands.

 . . . more handsome than millions of Kämadevas, their noses decorated with pearls and their heads and hands decorated with many ornaments, . . .

Text 27

dvi-bhujän péta-vastraiç ca
     käïcé-kaöaka-nüpuraiù
prabhätara-vikoöénäà
     çobhäbhiù çobhitän çubhän

     dvi-bhujän—two arms; péta-vastraiù—with yellow garments; ca—and; käïcé—with belts; kaöaka—with bracelets; nüpuraiù—with anklets; prabhätara-vikoöénäm—splendid as millions of rising suns; çobhabhiù—with splendor; çobhitän—glorious; subhän—glorious.

 . . . having two arms, glorious with yellow garments, belts, bracelets, and anklets, and more glorious than millions of rising suns.

Text 28

uttare giri-räjasya
     yamunäyäç ca dakñiëe
acañöa våndakäraëye
     sarvän kåñëaà haläyudhaù

     uttare—on the top; giri-räjasya—of the king of mountains; yamunäyäù—of the Yamunä; ca—and; dakñiëe—in the south; acañöa—saw; våndakäraëye—in Våndävana; sarvän—all; kåñëam—Kåñëa; haläyudhaù—Balaräma.

     Balaräma saw that all these forms on top of Govardhana Hill, and in Våndävana forest south of the Yamunä were all Kåñëa.

Text 29

jïätvä kåñëa-kåtaà karma
     tathä vidhi-kåtaà balaù
punar vatsän vatsapäàç ca
     paçyan kåñëam uväca ha

     jïatvä—understanding; kåñëa-kåtam—done by Kåñëa; karma—work; tathä—so; vidhi-kåtam—done by Brahmä; balaù—Balaräma; punaù—again; vatsän—the calves; vatsapän—the gopas; ca—and; paçyan—seeing; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     Understanding what Brahmä had done and what Kåñëa had done, and looking again at the calves and gopas, Balaräma said to Kåñëa:

Text 30

brahmänanto dharma indraù çivaç ca
     sevante taà bhakti-yuktaù sadaite
svätmarämaù pürëa-kämaù pareçaù
     srañöuà çaktaù koöiço 'ëòäni yaù khe

     brahmä—Brahmä; anantaù—Ananta; dharma—yama; indraù—Indra; sivaù—Çiva; ca—and; sevante—serve; tam—him; bhakti-yuktaù—with devotion; sadä—always; ete—they; svätmarämaù—self-satisfied; pürëa-kämaù—desires always fulfilled; pareçaù—the Supreme Lord; srañöum—to create; çaktaù—able; koöiçaù—millions; aëòäni—of universes; yaù—who; khe—in the sky.

     The devotees Brahmä, Ananta, Yama, Indra, and Çiva always worship the Supreme Lord, who is the controller of everything, who is self-satisfied, whose desires are always fulfilled, and who has the power to create many millions of universes in the sky.

Text 31

çré-närada uväca 
evaà bruvati çré-rame
     tavat taträgato vidhiù
dadarça kåñëaà rämaà ca
     vatsakair vatsapaiù samam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; bruvati—says; çré-rame—as Balaräm; tavat—then; tatra—there; ägataù—came; vidhiù—Brahmä; dadarça—saw; kåñëam—Kåñëa; rämam—Balaräma; ca—and; vatsakaiù—with the calves; vatsapaiù—and gopas; samam—with.

     Çré Närada said: As Balaräma was speaking, Brahmä came there and saw Kåñëa, Balaräma, the calves, and the gopas.

Text 32

aho kåñëena cänétä
     yatra sarve dhåtä mayä
iti bruvan yayau sthäne
     tatra sarvän dadarça saù

     ahaù—Oh; kåñëena—by Kåñëa; ca—and; änétä—brought; yatra—where; sarve—all; dhåtä—held; mayä—by me; iti—thus; bruvan—saying; yayau—went; sthäne—in the place; tatra—there; sarvän—all; dadarça—saw; saù—he.

     Saying, "Kåñëa brought back all the (calves and gopas) I took away," Brahmä left and saw them all still there (where he had hid them).

Text 33

dåñövä prasuptän sarväàs tu
     sa ägatya vraje punaù
vatsapälair harià vékñya
     manasi präha vismitaù

     dåñövä—seeing; prasuptän—asleep; sarvän——all; tu—indeed; sa—her; ägatya—coming; vraje—to Vraja; punaù—again; vatsapälaiù—with the gopas; harim—Lord Kåñëa; vékñya—seeing; manasi—in his mind; präha—said; vismitaù—astonished.

     Seeing them all still asleep, he returned to Vraja and gazed again at Kåñëa and the gopas. Astonished, in his mind he said:

Text 34

aho vicitraà te sarve
     kutra sthänät samägataù
kréòanto pürvavac cätra
     säkaà kåñëena kréòanaiù

     ahaù—O; vicitram—a wonder; te—they; sarve—all; kutra—from what?; sthänät—place; samägataù—come; kréòantaù—playing; pürvavat-as before; ca—and; atra—here; säkam—with; kåñëena—Kåñëa; kréòanaiù—with pastimes;

     This is a great wonder. From where did all these boys come that now they are playing with Kåñëa just as before?

Text 35

mat-truöir vatsaraç caiko
     vyatito 'bhün mahé-tale
sarve prasannatäà präptä
     na jïätaù kenacit kvacit

     mat—of me; truöiù—a moment; vatsaraù—year; ca—and; ekaù—one; vyatitaù—passed; abhün—hjas been; mahé-tale—on the earth; sarve—all; prasannatäm—happiness; präptä—attained; na—nor; jïätaù—understood; kenacit—how; kvacit—where.

     What is for me only a moment is a year on earth. I don't understand how they are still manifested as before.

Text 36

evaà sammohayan brahmä
     mohanaà viçva-mohanam
sva-mäyayändha-käreëa
     sva-gätraà naiva dåñöavän

     evam—thus; sammohayan—bewildering; brahmä—Brahma; mohanam—bewilderment; viçva-mohanam—bewilderment of the universe; sva—own; mäyayä—by illusion; andha-käreëa—with blinding dsrkness; sva-gätram—own body; na—not; eva—indeed; dåñöavän—saw.

     In this way Brahmä, who bewilders the entire universe, was so blinded by Kåñëa's illusion that he could not see even his own body.

Text 37

vatsapäläpaharaëät
     kim abhüj jagataù pateù
aho khadyota-vad vedhä
     çré-kåñëa-ravi-sammukhe

     vatsapäla—of the gopas; apaharaëät—from kidnapping; kim—what?; abhüt—was; jagataù—of the universe; pateù—the master; ahaù—Oh; khadyota-vat—like a firefly; vedhä—Brahmä; çré-kåñëa—Çré Kåñëa; ravi—the sun; sammukhe—before.

     What happened to Brahmä, the master of the universe, after he stole the gopas? The creator Brahmä became like a firefly standing before the sun of Çré Kåñëa.

Text 38

evaà vimuhyati sati
     jaòé-bhüte ca brahmaëi
sva-mäyäà kåpayäkåñya
     kåñëaù svaà darçanaà dadau

     evam—thus; vimuhyati—bewildered; sati—being so; jaòé-bhüte—stunned; ca—and; brahmaëi—Brahmä; sva-mäyäm—own illusion; kåpayä—mercifully; äkåñya—pulling away; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; svam—own; darçanam—sight; dadau—gave.

     As Brahmä stood, stunned and bewildered, Kåñëa mercifully removed His own illusory potency and revealed Himself.

Text 39

evaà tatra sakåd brahmä
     go-vatsän gopa-därakän
sarvän äcañöa çré-kåñëaà
     bhaktyä vijïäna-locanaiù

     evam—thus; tatra—there; sakåt—at once; brahmä—Brahma; go-vatsän—the calves; gopa-därakän—the gopas boys; sarvän—all; äcañöa—saw; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; bhaktyä—with devotion; vijïäna—of knowledge; locanaiù—with eyes.

     With eyes of knowledge Brahmä devotedly gazed at the calves and gopa boys and saw that they were all Çré Kåñëa.

Text 40

dadarçätha vidhis tatra
     bahir antaù çarérataù
svätmanä sahitaà räjan
     sarvaà viñëumayaà jagat

     dadarça—saw; atha—then; vidhiù—Brahmä; tatra—there; bahiù—outside; antaù—inside; çarérataù—the body; svätmanä—own self; sahitam—with; räjan—O king; sarvam—everything; viñëumayam—consisting of Lord Viñëu; jagat—the universe.

     O king, Brahmä then saw that the entire universe, including all that was inside and outside his body, and including his own self, was all the potency of Lord Viñëu.

Text 41

evaà vilokya brahmä tu
     jado bhütvä sthiro 'bhavat
våndävad våndakäraëye
     prädåçyeta yathä tathä

     evam—thus; vilokya—seeing; brahmä—Brahma; tu—indeed; jadaù—stunned; bhütvä—becoming; sthiraù—stationary; abhavat—became; våndävat—like a tulasé plant; våndakäraëye—in Våndävana forest; prädåçyeta—was seen; yathä—as; tathä—so.

     Gazing at this, Brahmä became stunned. He looked like an unmoving tulasé plant in Våndävana forest.

Text 42

svätmano mahimaà drañöuà
     hy anése 'pi ca brahmaëi
cacchäda sapadi jïätvä
     mäyä-javanikäà hariù

     svätmanaù—of his self; mahimam—the glory; drañöum—to see; hi—indeed; anése—unable; api—although; ca—and; brahmaëi—Brahmä; cacchäda—pulled the cover; sapadi—at once; jïatvä—understanding; mäyä—of illusion; javanikäm—the curtain; hariù—Kåñëa.

     Aware that Brahmä had no power to continue gazing at the Lord's glories, Kåñëa at once pulled the curtain of His illusory potency.

Text 43

tataù pralabdha-nayanaù
     srañöa supta ivotthitaù
unmélya nayane kåcchrad

     dadarçedaà sahätmanä

     tataù—from that; pralabdha—bewildered; nayanaù—eyes; srañöa—the creator; supta—asleep; iva—as if; utthitaù—rose; unmélya—opening; nayane—his eyes; kåcchrat—with difficulty; dadarça—saw; idam—this; saha—with; ätmanä—himself.

     Then, his eyes covered, the creator Brahmä became as if asleep. Awakening, and with difficulty opening his eyes, he saw Våndävana and he also saw himself.

Text 44

samähitas tatra bhütvä
     sadyo 'paçyad diço daça
çrémad-våndävanaà ramyaà
     vasanté-latikänvitam

     samähitaù—calm; tatra—there; bhütvä—having become; sadyaù—at once; apaçyat—saw; diçaù—directions; daça—ten; çrémat—beautiful; våndävanam—Våndävana; ramyam—delightful; vasanté-latikä—vasanti vines; anvitam—with.

     Now composed and peaceful, in the ten directions he saw, filled with flowering vasanté vines, charming and beautiful Våndävana, . . .

Text 45

çardüla-bälakair yatra
     kréòanti måga-bälakaù
çyenaiù kapotä nakulaiù
     sarpä vaira-vivarjitäù

     çardüla—tiger; bälakaiù—with cubs; yatra—where; kréòanti—play; måga-bälakaù—fawns; syenaiù—with eagles; kapotäù—doves; nakulaiù—with mongeese; sarpä—snakes; vaira—enmity; vivarjitäù—without.

 . . . where without any enmity fawns play with tiger cubs, doves play with eagles, and snakes play with mongeese.

Text 46

tataç ca våndakäraëye
     sa-päëi-kavalaà vidhiù
vatsän sakhén vicinvantaà
     ekaà kåñëaà dadarça saù

     tataù—then; ca—and; våndakäraëye—in Våndävana forest; sa-päëi-kavalam—with a handful of food; vidhiù—Brahma; vatsän—the calves; sakhén—friends; vicinvantam—searching; ekam—alone; kåñëam—Kåñëa; dadarça—saw; saù—he.

     Then Brahmä saw Kåñëa, with a morsel of food in His hand, searching for His calves and friends in Våndävana forest.

Text 47

dåñövä gopäla-veñeëa
     guptaà goloka-vallabham
jïätvä säkñäd dharià brahmä
     bhéto 'bhüt sva-kåtena ca

     dåñövä-having seen; gopäla-veñeëa—in the form of a gopa; guptam—hidden; goloka-vallabham—the beloved of Goloka; jïätvä—understanding; säkñät—at once; harim—Lord Hari; brahmä—Brahmä; bhétaù—frightened; abhüt—became; sva-kåtena—because of what he had done; ca—and.

     Gazing at Him, and suddenly understanding that Kåñëa was Lord Hari, the beloved of Goloka, the Supreme Personality of Godhead now disguised as an ordinary gopa, Brahmä became afraid for what he had done.

Text 48

taà prasädayituà räjan
     jvalantaà sarvato diçam
lajjayäväë-mukho bhütvä
     hy avatérya sva-vähanät

     tam—Him; prasädayitum—to please; räjan—O king; jvalantam—shining; sarvataù—in all; diçam—directions; lajjayä—with embarrassment; aväk-mukhaù—silent; bhütvä—becoming; hi—indeed; avatérya—descended; sva-vähanät—from his carrier.

     O king, to beg for pardon from the Lord, whose glory filled all directions, Brahmä, speechless with embarrassment, descended from his swan-carrier.

Text 49

çanair upasasäreçaà
     prasédeti vadan naman
sravad-varñäçru-dattärghaù
     sa papätäthä daëòavat

     çanaiù—slowly; upasasära—approached; éçam—the Lord; praséda—be kind; iti—thus; vadan—saying; naman—bowing down; sravat—flowing; varña—shower; açru—tears; datta—offered; ärghaù—arghya; sa—he; papäta—fell down; athä—then; daëòavat—like a stick.

     Slowly he approached the Lord. Saying, "Please be kind", bowing down, and with a streams of tears offering arghya, he fell down like a stick.

Text 50

utthäyäçvasya taà kåñëaù
     priyaà priya iva spåçan
surän su-bhüvi düra-sthän
     äluloka sudhärdra-dåk

     utthäya—rising; äçvasya—appeasing; tam—Him; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; priyam—beloved; priya—a lover; iva—like; spåçan—touching; surän—the demiogds; su-bhüvi—on the earth; düra-sthän—far away; äluloka—saw; sudhä—nectar; ardra—wet; dåk—eyes.

     Pulling Brahmä up, comforting him, and gently touching him as a lover touches his beloved, Lord Kåñëa, His eyes wet with nectar, glanced at the many demigods now standing far away.

Text 51

tato jaya-jayety-uccaiù
     stuvatäà namatäà samam
tad-dayädåñöa-dåñöänäà
     sänandaù sambhramo 'bhavat

     tataù—then; jaya-jayety-uccaiù—with loud calls of Victory! Victory!; stuvatäm—praying; namatäm—bowing down; samam—with; tad-dayä—His mercy; adåñöa-dåñöänäm—a slight glance; sänandaù—blissful; sambhramaù—respectful; abhavat—became.

     When the demigods received Lord Kåñëa's merciful glance they called out, "Glory! Glory!", bowed down, and offered prayers. Pleased with them, Kåñëa offered them all respect.

Text 52

dåñövä harià tatra samasthitaà vidhir
     nanäma taà bhakti-manaù kåtäïjaliù
stutià cakäräçu sa daëòaval luöhan
     prahåñöa-roma bhuvi gadgadäkñaraù

     dåñövä—seeing; harim—Kåñëa; tatra—there; samasthitam—manifested; vidhiù—Brahma; nanäma—bowed down; tam—to Him; bhakti—with devotion; manaù—in his heart; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; stutim—prayers; cakära—offered; äçu—at once; sa—he; daëòavat—like a stick; luöhan—falling to the ground; prahåñöa-romäù—his bodily hairs erect; bhuvi—on the gorund; gadgada-akñaraù—in a choked voice.

     Gaizing at Lord Kåñëa standing there, and his heart filled with devotion, with folded hands Brahmä bowed down. Falling like a stick to the ground, the hairs of his body erect in ecstasy, and his voice choked with emotion, Brahmä offered prayers.

Chapter Nine 
Brahma-stuti
Brahmä's Prayers

Text 1

çré-brahmoväca 
kåñëäya megha-vapuñe capalämbaräya
     péyüña-miñöa-vacanäya parät paräya
vaàçé-dharäya çikhi-candrikayänvitäya
     deväya bhrätå-sahitäya namo 'stu tasmai

     çré-brahmä uväca—Çré Brahma said; kåñëäya—to Kåñëa; megha-vapuñe—whose form is a cloud; capalämbaräya—who wears garments of lightning; péyüña—with nectar; miñöa—sweet; vacanäya—words; parät—than ther greatest; paräya—greater; vaàçé-dharäya—holding a flute; çikhi—peacock; candrikayä—feather; anvitäya—with; deväya—to the Lord; bhrätå-sahitäya—accompanied by His brother; namaù—obeisances; astu—maybe; tasmai—to Him.

     Çré Brahmä said: Obeisances to Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, greater than the greatest, holding a flute, wearing a peacock feather, staying in His brother's company, His form a monsoon cloud, His garments lightning, and His words sweet as nectar.

Text 2

kåñëas tu säkñät puruñottamaù svayaà
     pürëaù pareçaù prakåteù paro hariù
yasyävatäräàça-kalä vayaà suräù
     såjäma viçvaà kramato 'sya çaktibhiù

     kåñëaù—Kåñëa; tu—indeed; säkñät—directly; puruñottamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—Himself; pürëaù—perfect; pareçaù—the supreme master; prakåteù—of the material energy; paraù—above; hariù—Lord Hari; yasya—of whom; avatära—incarnations; aàça—partrs; kalä—and parts of a part; vayam—we; suräù—demigods; såjäma—create; viçvam—the universe; kramataù—accordingly; asya—of Him; çaktibhiù—with the potencies.

     Kåñëa is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, the perfect and complete supreme master, who stays above the material energy. We demigods, who are the parts of the parts of His incarnations, create this world with the aid of His potencies.

Text 3

sa tvaà säkñät kåñëacandrävatäro
     nandasyäpi putratäm ägataù kau
våndäraëye gopa-veçena vatsän
     gopair mukhyaiç cärayan bhräjase vai

     saù—He; tvam—You; säkñät—directly; kåñëacandrävatäraù—the incarnation Lord Kåñëacandra; nandasya—of nanda; api—even; putratäm—in the status og being the son; ägataù—come; kau—to the earth; våndäraëye—in Våndävana; gopa-veçena—in the garments of a gopa; vatsän—the calves; gopaiù—with the gopas; mukhyaiù—most important; cärayan—herding; bhräjase—You are splendidly manifested; vai—certainly.

     You are the same Lord Kåñëacandra. You have come to the earth and become the son of Mahäräja Nanda. Appearing like an ordinary cowherd boy, and herding the calves in the company of many gopas, You are splendidly manifest.

Text 4

harià koöi-kandarpa-léläbhirämaà
     sphurat-kaustubhaà çyämalaà péta-vastram
vrajeçaà tu vaàçé-dharaà rädhikeçaà
     paraà sundaraà taà nikuïje namämi

     harim—Lord Hari; koöi—millions; kandarpa—of Kämadevas; lélä—playfulness; abhirämam—handsomeness; sphurat—glittering; kaustubham—Kaustubha jewel; çyämalam—dark; péta-vastram—yellow garments; vrajeçam—the king of Vraja; tu—indeed; vaàçé-dharam—holding a flute; rädhikeçam—the master of Rädhä; param—supreme; sundaraàhandsome; tam—Him; nikuïje—in the forest; namämi—I offer my respectful obeisances.

     In this forest grove I offer my respectful obeisances to handsome and dark Lord Hari, more playful and charming than millions of Kämadevas, decorated with yellow garments and glistening Kaustubha gem, clutching a flute, the king of Vraja and the Lord of Çré Rädhä.

Text 5

taà kåñëaà bhaja harim ädi-devam asmin
     kñetra-jïaà kham iva vilipta-megham eva
svacchäìgaà param adhi-yajïa-caitya-rüpaà
     bhakty-ädyair viçada-viräga-bhäva-saìghaiù

     tam—Him; kåñëam— bhaja—worship; harim—Hari; ädi-devam—the original Lord; asmin—here; kñetra—the place; jïam—knowing; kham—the sky; iva—like; vilipta—anointed; megham—clouds; eva—indeed; svaccha—splendid; aìgam—body; param—transcendental; adhi-yajïa-caitya-rüpam—the form of the Lord of sacrifices; bhakty-ädyaiù—beginning weith devotional service; viçada—pure; viräga—renunciation; bhäva—condition; saìghaiù—with multitudes.

     With devotion, purity, and renunciation, worship Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, pure as a cloudless sky, His limbs splendid, the master of sacrifices, the master of consciousness, the all-knowing Supersoul.

Text 6

yävan manaç ca rajasä prabalena vidvan
     saìkalpa eva tu vikalpaka eva tävat
täbhyäà bhaven manasijas tv abhimäna-yogas
     tenäpi buddhi-vikåtià kramataù prayänti

     yävat—as; manaç—the mind; ca—and; rajasä—with passion; prabalena—powerful; vidvän—wise; saìkalpa—acceptance; eva—indeed; tu—indeed; vikalpaka—rejection; eva—indeed; tävat—so; täbhyäm—with them; bhavet—may be; manasijaù—the desire for sense gratification; tv—indeed; abhimäna—pride; yogaù—contact; tena—by that; api—also; buddhi—of intelligence; vikåtim——ruination; kramataù—gradually; prayänti—attain.

     O wise one, when the mind is influenced by passion it accepts the materially pleasant and rejects the materially unpleasant. By these two actions material desires and arrogant pride breed in the heart. In this way the intelligence is gradually disfigured.

Text 7

vidyud-dyutis tv åtu-guëo jala-madhya-rekhä
     bhütolmukaù kapaöa-pantha-ratir yathä� ca
itthaà tathäsya jagatas tu mukhaà måñeti
     duùkhävåtaà viñaya-ghürëam aläta-cakram

     vidyut—lightning; dyutiù—splendor; tv—indeed; åtu—of the seasons; guëaù—the quality; jala—water; madhya—middle; rekhä—a line; bhüta—manifested; ulmukaù—firebrand; kapaöa—false; pantha—path; ratiù—making; yathä—as; ca—and; ittham—thus; tathä—so; asya—of this; jagataù—material universe; tu—indeed; mukham—tha face; måñä—false; iti—thus; duùkha—with sufferings; ävåtam—filled; viñaya—sense objects; ghürëam—whirling; aläta-cakram—a firebrand circle.

     Like a fleeting lightning flash, a ripple on the water, the passing seasons, and the false, blurred line of a moving spark, the face, filled with sufferings, of the material world is temporary and untrue. The whirl of sense happiness is the seeming-stationary circle of a quickly-moving spark.

Text 8

våkñä jalena calatäpi calä ivätra
     netreëa bhüri-calitena caleva bhüç ca
evaà guëaiù prakåti-jair bhramato jana-sthaà
     satyaà vaded guëa-sukhäd idam eva kåñëa

     våkñäù—trees; jalena—by the water; calatä—moving; api—even; cala—moving; iva—like; atra—here; netreëa—by the eye; bhüri-calitena—moving greatly; cala—moving; iva—like; bhüç—earth; ca—and; evam—thus; guëaiù—by the modes; prakåti-jaiù—born from matter; bhramataù—bewildering; janain the people; stham—situated; satyam—truth; vadet—may speak; guëa—quality; sukhät—out of happiness; idam—this; eva—indeed; kåñëa—O Kåñëa.

     When water moves, the trees reflected on it seem to move also. When the eyes are tossed to and fro, the earth seems to move. O Kåñëa, bewildered by the modes of material nature, the people say material sense pleasures are real.

Text 9

duùkhaà sukhaà ca manasä prabhavaà ca supte
     mithyä bhavet punar aho bhuvi jägare 'sya
itthaà viveka-ghaöitasya janasya sarvaà
     svapna-bhramädåta-jagat satataà bhaved dhi

     duùkham—suffering; sukham—pleasure; ca—and; manasä—by the mind; prabhavam—birth; ca—and; supte—in a dream; mithyä—false; bhavet—is; punaù—again; ahaù—Oh; bhuvi—on the earth; jagare—of a person awake; asya—of him; ittham—thus; viveka-ghatitasya—discriminating; janasya—of a person; sarvam—everything; svapna—of a dream; bhrama—illusion; ädåta—honored; jagat—the world; satatam—always; bhavet—is; hi—certainly.

     Pains and pleasures are created by the mind. A person awake knows what he saw in a dream is false. A wise man knows the entire material world is a dream.

Text 10

jïäné visåjya mamatäm abhimäna-yogaà
     vairägya-bhäva-rasikaù satataà niréhaù

dépena dépa-kaçataà ca yathä prajätaà
     paçyet tathätma-vibhavaà bhuvi caika-tattvam

     jïäné—a wise man; visåjya—renouncing; mamatäm—possessiveness; abhimäna-yogam—with false-ego; vairägya—renunciation; bhäva—the state; rasikaù—enjoying; satatam—always; niréhaù—without material activities; dépena—with a lamp; dépa—of the lamp; kaçatäm—the light; ca—and; yathä—as; prajätam—masnifested; paçyet—may see; tathä—so; atma—of the self; vibhavam—glory; bhuvi—on the earth; ca—and; eka—one; tattvam—principle.

     A wise man who stays aloof from material deeds, renounces the world, and tastes the nectar of spiritual love, can see, as one sees with the light of a lamp, the spiritual glory of the Supreme Lord, who stays as the Supersoul in this world.

Text 11

bhakto bhajed aja-patià hådi väsudevaà
     nirdhüma-vahnir iva mukta-guëa-sva-bhävaù
paçyan ghaöeñu sa-jaleñu yathendum ekaà
     etädåçaù paramahaàsa-varaù kåtärthaù

     bhaktaù—a devotee; bhajet—may worship; aja-patim—the master of Brahmä; hådi—in his heart; väsudevam—Lord Väsudeva; nirdhüma—without smoke; vahniù—fire; iva—like; mukta—freed; guëa—from the modes of nature; sva-bhävaù—whose character; paçyan—seeing; ghateñu—in pots; sa-jaleñu—filled with water; yathä—as; indum—moon; ekam—one; etädåçaù—like that; paramahaàsa-varaù—the best of the swanlike saints; kåtärthaù—who has attained perfection.

     A devotee like a smokeless flame free from the touch of the material modes, who worships Lord Väsudeva in his heart and sees the one Lord Väsudeva present in everyone's heart as one moon is reflected in many pots of water, is perfect, the best of swanlike saints. 
Text 12

stuvanti vedäù satataà ca yaà sadä
     harer mahimnaù kila ñoòaçéà kaläm
kadäpi jänanti na te tri-loke
     vaktuà guëäàç tasya jano 'sti kaù paraù

     stuvanti—offer prayers; vedäù—the Vedas; satatam—always; ca—and; yam—to whom; sadä—always; hareù—of Lord Hari; mahimnaù—of the glory; kila—indeed; ñoòaçém—sixteenth; kaläm—part; kadäpi—sometimes; jänanti—know; na—not; te—of You; tri-loke—in the three woirlds; vaktum—to say; guëän—the qualities; tasya—of Him; janaù—a person; asti—so; kaù—who?; paraù—is able.

     Athough they always praise Him, the Vedas do not understand even one sixteenth of Lord Hari's glories. Who in the three worlds has the power to describe His qualities?

Text 13

vaktaiç caturbhis tv aham eva devaù
     çré-païcavaktraù kila païca-vaktraiù
sahasraçérñas tu sahasra-vaktrair
     yaà stauti seväà kurute ca tasya 
     vaktaiù—with mouths; caturbhiù—four; tv—indeed; aham—I; eva—indeed; devaù—the lord; çré-païcavaktraù—Çiva; kila—indeed; païca—with five; vaktraiù—mouths; sahasraçérñaù—Ananta; tu—indeed; sahasra—with a thousand; vaktraiù—mouths; yam—whom; stauti—praise; seväm—service; kurute—do; ca—and; tasya—of Him. 
     Ananta praises Him with a thousand mouths, Çiva with five mouths and I with four mouths. We serve Lord Hari. 
Text 14

viñëuç ca vaikuëöha-niväsa-kåc ca
     kñéroda-väsé harir eva säkñät
näräyaëo dharma-sutas tathäpi
     goloka-näthaà bhajate bhavantam

     viñëuù—Lord Viñëu; ca—and; vaikuëöha-niväsa-kåc—who resides in Vaikuëöha; ca—and; kñéroda-väsé—residing on the milk-ocean; hariù—Lord Hari; eva—indeed; säkñät—directly; näräyaëaù—Näräyaëa; dharma-sutaù—the son of Dharma; tathäpi—still; goloka-nätham—the Lord of Goloka; bhajate—wprships; bhavantam—You.

     Lord Viñëu who stays in Vaikuëöha, Lord Hari who stays on the milk-ocean, and Näräyaëa Åñi, the son of Dharma, all worship You, the master of Goloka.

Text 15

aho 'ti-dhanyo mahimä murärer
     jänanti bhümau munayo na mänaväù
suräsurä vä manavo budhäù punaù
     svapne 'pi paçyanti na tat-pada-dvayam

     ahaù—Oh; ati—very; dhanyaù—opulent; mahimä—glory; muräreù—of Kåñëa; jänanti—know; bhümau—on the earth; munayaù—sages; na—not; mänaväù—humans; sura—demigods; asuräù—demons; vä—or; manavaù—Manus; budhäù—philosophers; punaù—again; svapne—in dream; api—even; paçyanti—see; na—not; tat-pada-dvayam—His feet.

     Lord Kåñëa's glories are very great. Even in their dreams the sages, humans, demigods, demons, manus, and philosophers do not see His feet.

Text 16

varaà harià guëäkäraà
     su-mukti-daà parät param
rameçvaraà guëeçvaraà
     vrajeçvaraà namämy aham

     varam—great; harim—Lord Hari; guëäkäram—a jewel mine of virtues; su-mukti-dam—granting liberation; parät—than the greatest; param—greater; ramä—of the goddess of fortune; éçvaram—the master; guëa—of transcendental virtues; éçvaraàthe master; vraja—of Vraja; éçvaram—to the master; namämy—offer obeisances; aham—I.

     I offer my respectful obeisances to Lord Hari, greater than the greatest, a jewel mine of transcendental virtues, the giver of liberation, the master of the goddess of fortune, the master of transcendental virtues, and the master of Vraja.

Text 17

tämbüla-sundara-mukhaà madhuraà bruvantaà
     bimbädharaà smita-yutaà sita-kunda-dantam
nélälakävåta-kapola-manoharäbhaà
     vande calat-kanaka-kuëòala-maëòanärham

     tämbüla—with betelnuts; sundara—handsome; mukham—face; madhuram—sweet; bruvantam—speaking; bimbädharam—bimba-fruit lips; smita—a smile; yutam—with; sita—white; kunda—jasmine; dantam—teeth; néla—black; älaka—curling locks of hair; ävåta—covered; kapola—cheeks; manohara—charming; äbham—glory; vande—I offer my respectful obeisances; calat—moving; kanaka—gold; kuëòala—earrings; maëòana-arham—decorated.

     I offer my respectful obeisances to smiling, sweetly speaking Lord Hari, His mouth handsome with betelnuts, His lips bimba fruits, His teeth white jasmine flowers, and His handsome cheeks covered by curly black locks and decorated with swinging gold earrings.

Text 18

sundaraà tu tava rüpam eva hi
     manmathasya manaso haraà param
ävirästu mama netrayoù sadä
     çyämalaà makara-kuëòalävåtam

     sundaram—handsome; tu—indeed; tava—Your; rüpam—form; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; manmathasya—of Kämadrva; manasaù—the heart; haram—enchanting; param—great; ävirastu—may appear; mama—of me; netrayoù—on the eyes; sadä—always; çyämalam—dark; makara-kuëòalävåtam—with shark-shaped earrings.

     May Your dark handsome form, decorated with shark-shaped earrings and stealing Kämadeva's heart, appear before my eyes. 
Text 19

vaikuëöha-lélä-pravaraà manoharaà
     namas-kåtaà deva-gaëaiù paraà varam
gopäla-léläbhiyutaà bhajämy ahaà
     goloka-näthaà çirasä namämy aham

     vaikuëöha—in Vaikunööha; lélä—pastimes; pravaram—excellent; manoharam—charming; namas-kåtam—offered obeisances; deva-gaëaiù—by the demigods; param—supreme; varam—great; gopäla-léläbhiyutam—enjoying pastimes as a gopa; bhajämy—worship; aham—I; goloka-nätham—the master of Goloka; çirasä—with the head; namämy—bow down; aham—I.

     I bow my head before Goloka's handsome king, who plays as a gopa, enjoys in Vaikuëöha, and receives the demigods' obeisances.

Text 20

yuktaà vasanta-kalakaëöha-vihaìgamaiç ca
     saugandhikaà tvaraëa-pallava-çäkhi-saìgam
våndävanaà sudhita-dhéra-saméra-léläà
     gacchan harir jayati pätu sadaiva bhaktän

     yuktam—endowed; vasanta—spring; kalakaëöha—cuckoo; vihaìgamaiù—birds; ca—and; saugandhikam—fragrant; tvaraëa—quick; pallava—buds; çäkhi—trees; saìgam—company; våndävanam—Våndävana; sudhita-dhéra-saméra-léläm—with playful nectar breezes; gacchan—going; hariù—Lord Hari; jayati—all glories; pätu—may protect; sadä—always; eva—certainly; bhaktän—the devotees.

     Glory to Lord Hari, who walks in fragrant Våndävana forest, which is filled with sweet-throated spring cuckoos, newly-budding trees, and gentle, playful, nectar breezes. May He always protect the devotees.

Text 21

harati kamala-mänaà lola-muktäbhimänaà
     dharaëi-rasika-dänaà kämadevasya bäëam
çravaëa-vidita-yänaà netra-yugma-prayänaà
     bhaja yad uta samakñaà däna-dakñaà kaöäkñam

     harati—removes; kamala—of the lotus; mänam—the pride; lola—moving; muktä—pearl; abhimänam—pride; dharaëi—on the earth; rasika—they who taste nectar; dänam—gift; kämadevasya—of Kämadeva; bäëam—the arrow; çravaëa—to the ears; vidita—known; yänam—journey; netra-yugma—eyes; prayänam—journey; bhaja—worship; yat—whcih; uta—indeed; samakñam—before the eyes; däna-dakñam—expert atgiving charity; kaöäkñam—the sidelong glance.

     Worship Kåñëa's sidelong glance, which eclipses the pride of the lotus and the moving string of pearls, which travels almost to His ears, which is Kämadeva's arrow, and which, laden with gifts for they who taste nectar in this world, is expert at giving charity.

Text 22

        çarac-candräkäraà nakha-maëi-samühaà sukha-karaà
     su-raktaà håt-pürëaà prakaöita-tamaù-khaëòana-karam
bhaje 'haà brahmäëòe sakala-nara-päpäbhidalanaà
     harer viñëor devair divi bharata-khaëòe stutam alam

     çarat—autumn; candra—moon; äkäram—form; nakha—nails; maëi—jewels; samüham—multitude; sukha-karam—delighting; su-raktam—red; håt—chest; pürëam—full; prakaöita—manifested; tamaù—darkness; khaëòana-karam—breaking; bhaje—worship; aham—I; brahmäëòe—in the universe; sakala—all; nara—people; päpa—sins; abhidalanam—destruction; hareù—of Lord Hari; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; devaiù—by the the demigods; divi—in heaven; bharata-khaëòe—on the earth; stutam—praised; alam—greatly.

     I worship handsome Lord Viñëu's delightful reddish jewel nails, which fill the heart, break the darkness, crush the sins of everyone in the universe, and are praised on the earth and by the demigods in heaven.

Text 23

mahä-padme kià vä paridhir iva cäbhäti satataà
     kadäcid ity asphurjad-ratha-caraëa itthaà dhvani-dharaù
yathä nyastaà cakraà çata-kiraëa-yuktaà tu hariëä
     sphurac-chré-maïjéraà hari-caraëa-padme tv adhigatam

     mahä-padme—a great lotus; kim—whether?; vä—or; paridhiù—a circle of light; iva—like; ca—and; äbhäti—shines; satatam—always; kadäcit—sometimes; ity—thus; asphurjad-ratha-caraëaù—asm chariot wheel; ittham—thus; dhvani-dharaù—making sounds; yathä—as; nyastam—placed; cakram—cakra; çata-kiraëa-yuktam—with a hundred points of light; tu—indeed; hariëä—by Lord Hari; sphura—manifest; çré-maïjéram—ankles; hari-caraëa-padme—on Lord Hari's lotus feet; tv—indeed; adhigatam—understood.

     Is this a circle of light around a great lotus flower, a great rumbling chariot wheel, the Sudarçana-cakra, the sun with its hundred points of light, or the graceful anklets on Lord Hari's lotus feet?

Text 24

kaöyäà pétämbaraà divyaà
     kñudra-ghaëöikayänvitam
bhajämy ahaà citta-haraà
     kåñëasyäkliñöa-karmaëaù

     kaöyäm—on the hips; pétämbaram—yellow garments; divyam—splendid; kñudra-ghaëöikayänvitam—decorated with small bells; bhajämy—worship; aham—I; citta-haram—charming; kåñëasya—of Kåñëa; akliñöa-karmaëaù—whose actions are full of bliss.

     I worship the splendid, charming, decorated with small bells yellow garment on the hips of Lord Kåñëa, whose every act is full of bliss.

Text 25

bhaje kåñëa-kroòe bhågu-muni-padaà çré-gåham alaà
     tathä çrévatsäìkaà nikaça-ruci-yuktaà dyuti-param
gale hérähärän kanaka-maëi-muktävali-dharän
     sphurat-täräkärän bhramara-vali-bhärän dhvani-karän

     bhaje—I worship; kåñëa-kroòe—on Kåñëa's chest; bhågu-muni-padam—the footprint of Bhågu Muni; çré-gåham—the homr of the goddess of fortune; alam—greatky; tathä—then; çrévatsäìkam—marked with Çrévatsa; nikaça-ruci-yuktam—with a gluttering golden streak; dyuti-param—splendid; gale—on the neck; hérähärän—diamon necklaces; kanaka—gold; maëi—jewels; muktävali—pearls; dharän—wearing; sphurat-täräkärän—glittering stars; bhramara—bees; vali-bhärän—manifesting; dhvani-karän—making a sound.

     On Lord Kåñëa's chest I worship Bhågu Muni's footprint, Lakñmé-devi's home, the mark of Çrévatsa, the splendid golden nikaña line, and, suspended from His neck, the many necklaces of diamonds, gold, jewels, and pearls splendid as glistening stars, and the many flower garlands filled with buzzing bees.

Text 26

vaàçé-vibhüñitam alaà dvija-däna-çélaà
     sindüra-varëam ati-kécakaräva-léläm
hemäìguléya-nikaraà nakha-candra-yuktaà
     hasta-dvayaà smara kadamba-sugandha-påktam

     vaàçé—with a flute; vibhüñitam—decorated; alam—greatly; dvija-däna-çélam—giving charity to the brahmanas; sindüra-varëam—the color of red sindura; ati-kécakaräva-léläm—the playful soundof the bamboos; hemäìguléya-nikaram—golden rings; nakha-candra-yuktam—with the moons of the nails; hasta-dvayam—two ahnds; smara—remember; kadamba-sugandha-påktam—with the scent of a kadamba flower.

     Remember Kåñëa's hands, decorated with a flute, expert at giving charity to the brähmaëas, the color of sindüra, expert at playing the bamboo flute, with gold rings and moonlike fingernails, and fragrant with a kadamba flower. 
Text 27

çanaiç calan mänasa-räja-haàsa-
     gréväkåtau kandhara ucca-deçe
kädambiné-mäna-harau karau ca
     bhajämi nityaà hari-käka-pakñau

     çanaiù—gradually; calan—going; mänasa—of the mind; räja-haàsa—the royal swan; gréväkåtau—in the form of a neck; kandhara—neck; ucca-deçe—broad; kädambiné—of monsoon clouds; mäna—the pride; harau—removing; karau—hands; ca—and; bhajämi—I worship; nityam—always; hari—of Lord Hari; käka—crow; pakñau—feathers.

     On the slowly-moving swan of Lord Hari's neck again and again I worship two black crow-feathers, which remove the pride of the black monsoon clouds.

Text 28

kala-darpaëa-vad viçadaà sukha-daà
     nava-yauvana-rüpa-dharaà nåpatim
maëi-kuëòala-kuntala-çäli-ratià
     bhaja gaëòa-yugaà ravi-candra-rucim

     kala-darpaëa-vat—like a splendid mirror; viçadam—clear; sukha-dam—delightful; nava-yauvana-rüpa-dharam—newly youthful; nåpatim—king; maëi—jewel; kuëòala—earrings; kuntala-çäli—locks of heari; ratim—delight; bhaja—worship; ganda-yugam—cheeks; ravi-candra-rucim—splendid as the sun and moon.

     Please worship the delightful young prince splendid as a glistening mirror, handsome with jewel earrings and curly locks of hair, and glorious as the sun and moon, that is Lord Hari's cheeks.

Text 29

khacita-kanaka-muktä-rakta-vaidürya-väsaà
     madana-vadana-lélä-sarva-saundarya-räsam
aruëa-vidhu-sakäçaà koöi-sürya-prakäçaà
     ghaöita-çikhi-su-vétaà naumi viñëoù kiréöam

     khacita—studded; kanaka—gold; muktä—pearls; rakta—red; vaidürya—vaidurya jewels; väsam—the abode; madana—of Kämadeva; vadana—face; lélä—pastimes; sarva—all; saundarya—handsomeness; räsam—the räsa dance; aruëa—red; vidhu—moon; sakäçam——shining; koöi—millions; sürya—suns; prakäçam—shining; ghaöita-çikhi-su-vétam—with a peacock feather; naumi—I glorify; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; kiréöam—the crown.

     I praise Lord Viñëu's crown, deocrated with a peacock feather, glorious as a red moon, splendid as millions of suns, the home of gold, pearls, and vaidürya jewels, and the räsa circle of all of Kämadeva's playful handsomeness.

Text 30

yad-dväri deçe na gatir guhendra-
     gaëeça-täreça-diväkaräëäm
äjïäà vinä yänti na kuïja-maëòalaà
     taà kåñëacandraà jagad-éçvaraà bhaje

     yad-dväri—at the door; deçe—in the place; na—not; gatiù—going; guha—Kärttikeya; indra—Indra; gaëeça—Gaëeça; täreça—Candra; diväkaräëäm—and Sürya; äjïäm—the order; vinä—without; yänti—go; na—not; kuïja-maëòalam—to the forest; tam—Him; kåñëacandram—Kåñëacandra; jagad-éçvaram—the master of the universes; bhaje—I worship.

     I worship Kåñëacandra, the master of the universes. Kärttikeya, Indra, Gaëeça, Candra, and Sürya cannot enter the door to His realm. Without His permission no one can enter the circle of His forest.

Text 31

iti kåtvä stutià brahmä
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù
punaù kåtäïjalir bhütvä
     sva-vijïäptià cakära ha

     iti—thus; kåtvä—doing; stutim—prayers; brahmä—Brahmä; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—tyeh Supreme Personality of Godhead; punaù—again; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; bhütvä—being; sva-vijïäptim—appeal; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     After speaking these prayers, Brahmä folded his hands and begged the Supreme Personality of Godhead:

Text 32

aparädhaà tu putrasya
     mätåvat tvaà kñamasva ca
ahaà tvan-näbhi-kamalät
     sambhavo 'haà jagat-pate

     aparädham—offense; tu—indeed; putrasya—of a son; mätåvat—like a mother; tvam—You; kñamasva—please forgive; ca—and; aham—I; tvat—of You; näbhi—navel; kamalät—from the lotus; sambhavaù—birth; aham—I; jagat—of the universe; pate—O master.

     O Lord of the universe, I was born from the lotus of Your navel. As a mother forgives her son's offense, please forgive me.

Text 33

kvähaà loka-patiù kva tvaà
     koöi-brahmäëòa-näyakaù
tasmäd vraja-pate deva
     rakña maà madhusüdana

     kva—where?; aham—I; loka-patiù—the king of a planet; kva—where?; tvam—You; koöi-brahmäëòa-näyakaù—the ruler of millions of universes; tasmät—therefore; vraja-pate—O master of Vraja; deva—O Lord; rakña—protect; mam—me; madhusüdana—O Kåñëa.

     What am I, the king of one planet, in comparison to You, the ruler of many millions of universes? O master of Vraja, O Lord, O Kåñëa, please save me!

Text 34

mäyayä yasya muhyanti
     deva-daitya-narädayaù
sva-mäyayä tan-mohayä
     mürkho 'haà hy udyato 'bhavam

     mäyayä—by the illusory potency; yasya—of whom; muhyanti—bewidlered; deva—demigods; daitya—demons; nara—humans; ädayaù—beginning with; sva-mäyayä—by His own illusory potency; tan-mohayä—bewildering; mürkhaù—bewildered; aham—I; hy—indeed; udyataù—engaged; abhavam—have become.

     By Your illusory potency the demigods, demons, humans, and other living entities are bewildered. Bewildered by Your illusory potency, I diligently perform my duties.

Text 35

näräyaëas tvaà govinda
     nähaà näräyaëo hare
brahmäëòaà tvaà vinirmäya
     çeñe näräyaëaù purä

     näräyaëaù—Näräyaëa; tvam—You; govinda—O Govinda; na—not; aham—I; näräyaëaù—Näräyaëa; hare—O Hari; brahmäëòam—a universe; tvam—You; vinirmäya—creating; çeñe—on Çeña; näräyaëaù—Näräyaëa. purä—in ancient times.

     O Govinda, O Hari, You are Näräyaëa. I am not Näräyaëa. You are the same Näräyaëa that in ancient times created the universe and then rested on Ananta Çeña.

Text 36

yasya çré-brahmaëi dhämni
     präëaà tyaktvä tu yoginaù
yatra yäsyanti tasmiàs tu
     sa-kulä putanä gatä

     yasya—of whom; çré-brahmaëi—in Brahman; dhämni—in the abode; präëam—life; tyaktvä—abandoning; tu—indeed; yoginaù—yogis; yatra—where; yäsyanti—will go; tasmiàù—in that; tu—indeed; sa-kulä—with their families; putanä—Pütanä; gatä—went.

     Puitanä and her family entered the same Brahman effulgence the yogés attain when they leave this life.

Text 37

vatsänäà vatsapänäà ca
     kåtvä rüpäëi mädhava
vicacära vane tvaà tu
     hy aparädhän mama prabho

     vatsänäm—of the calves; vatsapänäm—and gopas; ca—and; kåtvä—making; rüpäëi—forms; mädhava—O Kåñëa; vicacära—wander; vane—in the forest; tvam—You; tu—indeed; hy—indeed; aparädhän—offenses; mama—my; prabhaù—O Lord.

     O Mädhava, after creating the forms of the calves and gopas, You wandered in the forest. O Lord, please forgive my offenses.

Text 38

tasmät kñamasva govinda
     praséda tvaà mamopari
agaëayyäparädhäà me
     sutopari pitä yathä

     tasmät—therefore; kñamasva—please forgive; govinda—O Govinda; praséda—be merciful; tvam—You; mama upari—to me; agaëayya—not counting; aparädham—the offense; me—of me; suta upari—to a son; pitä—a father; yathä—as.

     O Govinda, please forgive me. Please be merciful to me. As a father does not consider his son's actions an offense, please do not take offense with me.

Text 39

tvad-abhaktä ratä jïäne
     teñäà kleço viçiñyate
pariçramät karñakänäà
     yathä� kñetre tuñärthinäm

     tvad-abhaktäù—they who are not Your devotees; ratä—engaged; jïäne—in impersonal speculation; teñäm—of them; kleçaù—suffering; viçiñyate—is; pariçramät—out of fatigue; karñakänäm—of farmers; yathä—as; kñetre—in the firld; tuñärthinäm—threshing chaff.

     They who are not devoted to You but instead are earnestly engaged in impersonal speculation gain only trouble for all their efforts. They are like a farmers that thresh empty husks.

Text 40

tvad-bhakti-bhäve niratä
     bahavas tvad-gatià gatäù
yogino munayaç caiva
     tathä ye vraja-väsinaù

     tvad-bhakti-bhäve—in devotion to YTou; niratä—engaged; bahavaù—many; tvad-gatim—the destination of You; gataù—attained; yoginaù—yogis; munayaù—sages; ca—and; eva—indeed; tathä—so; ye—who; vraja—of Vraja; väsinaù—the residents.

     As many yogés and sages became devoted to You and attained You, so the residents of Vraja also became devoted to You and attained You.

Text 41

dvidhä ratir bhaved varä
     çrutäc ca darçanäc ca vä
aho hare tu mäyayä
     babhüva naiva me ratiù

     dvidhä—two kinds; ratiù—love; bhavet—is; varä—excellent; çrutät—from hearing; ca—and; darçanät—from seeing; ca—and; vai—indeed; ahaù—Oh; hare—Lord Hari; tu—indeed; mäyayä—by the illusory potency; babhüva—became; na—not; eva—indeed; me—of me; ratiù—love.

     Love is created in two ways: by hearing and by seeing. O Lord Hari, bewildered by Your illusory potency, I have not attained love for You.

Text 42

ity uktväçru-mukho bhütvä
     natvä tat-päda-paìkajau
punar äha vidhiù kåñëaà
     bhaktyä sarvaà kñamäpayan

     ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; açru—tears; mukhaù—on his face; bhütvä—becoming; natvä—bowing down; tat-päda-paìkajau—to His lotus feet; punaù—again; äha—spoke; vidhiù—Brahmä; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; bhaktyä—with devotion; sarvam—all; kñamäpayan—appealing for forgiveness.

     Speaking these words, bowing before Kåñëa's lotus feet, and tears gliding down his face, Brahmä earnestly begged for forgiveness. 
Text 43

ghoñeñu väsinäm eñäà
     bhütvähaà tvat-padämbujam
yadä bhajeyaà su-gatis
     tadä bhüyän na cänyathä

     ghoñeñu—in the cowherd villages; väsinäm—of the residents; eñäm—of them; bhütvä—becoming; aham—I; tvat-padämbujam—Your lotus feet; yadä—when; bhajeyam—I worship; su-gatiù—an auspicious condition; tadä—then; bhüyän—will be; na—not; ca—and; anyathä—otherwise.

     When I take birth among the residents of these cowherd villages, and when I worship Your lotus feet, then I will attain auspiciousness. Nothing else will be auspicious for me.

Text 44

vayaà tu gopa-deçeñu
     saàsthitäç ca çivädayaù
sakåt kåñëaà tu paçyantas
     tasmäd dhanyäç ca bhärate

     vayam—we; tu—indeed; gopa-deçeñu—in the places of the gopas; saàsthitäç—situated; ca—and; çivädayaù—headed by Lord Çiva; sakåt—once; kåñëam—Kåñëa; tu—indeed; paçyantaù—seeing; tasmät—from that; dhanyäç—fortunate; ca—and; bhärate—on the earth.

     When we demigods, who have Çiva as our leader, enter the lands of the gopas and once gaze on Lord Kåñëa, then we will be fortunate.

Text 45

aho bhägyaà tu çré-kåñëa
     mätä-pitros tava prabho
tathä ca gopa-gopénäà
     pürëas tvaà dåçyate vraje

     ahaù—Oh; bhägyam—good fortune; tu—indeed; çré-kåñëa—O Çré Kåñëa; mätä-pitroù—of the mother and father; tava—of You; prabhaù—O Lord; tathä—so; ca—and; gopa-gopénäm—of the gopas and gopés; pürëaù—perfect; tvam—You; dåçyate—are seen; vraje—in Vraja.

     O Lord, how fortunate are Your parents, the gopas, and the gopés, who see You in Your original form in Vraja!

Text 46

muktä-häraù sarva-viçvopakaraù
     sarvädhäraù pätu mäà viçva-käraù
lélägäraù çüri-kanyä-vihäraù
     kréòäpäraù kåñëacandrävatäraù

     muktä—of pearls; häraù—with a necklace; sarva-viçvopakaraù—the maintainer of all the universes; sarvädhäraù—the resting place of everything; pätu—may protect; mäm—me; viçva-käraù—the creator of the universes; lélägäraù—the abode of transcendental pastimnes; çüri-kanyä—by the Yamunä; vihäraù—who enjoys pastimes; kréòäpäraù—playful; kåñëacandrävatäraù—the descent of Lord Kåñëa.

     May Lord Kåñëa, who wears a pearl necklace, in whom everything rests, who creates and maintains all the universes, and who, enjoying by the Yamunä, is the playful abode of transcendental pastimes, protect me.

Text 47

çré-kåñëa våñëi-kula-puñkara nanda-putra
     rädhä-pate madana-mohana deva-deva
sammohitaà vraja-pate bhuvi te 'jäya mäà
     govinda gokula-pate paripähi pähi

     çré-kåñëa—O Çré Kåñëa; våñëi-kula-puñkara—O lotus flower in the family of Våñëi; nanda-putra—O son of Nanda; rädhä-pate—O Lord of Rädhä; madana-mohana—O enchanter of Käma; deva-deva—O master of the demigods; sammohitam—bewildered; vraja-pate—O master of Vraja; bhuvi—on earth; te—of You; ajayä—by the illusory potency; mäm—to me; govinda—O Govinda; gokula-pate—O master of Gokula; paripähi—please protect; pähi—please protect.

     O Çré Kåñëa, O lotus growing in King Våñëi's family, O son of Nanda, O Lord of Rädhä, O enchanter of Kämadeva, O master of the demigods, O king of Vraja, O king of Gokula, O Govinda, please protect, please protect me, who am now bewildered by Your illusory potency!

Text 48

karoti yaù kåñëa-hareù pradakñiëaà
     bhavej jagat-tértha-phalaà ca tasya tu
te kåñëalokaà sukhadaà parät paraà
     goloka-lokaà pravaraà gamiñyati

     karoti—does; yaù—one who; kåñëa-hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; pradakñiëam—circumambulation; bhavet— may be; jagat—of the universe; tértha—the holy places; phalam—the result; ca—and; tasya—of him; tu—indeed; te—of You; kåñëalokam—Kåñëaloka; sukhadam—blissful; parät—than the greatest; param—greater; goloka—of Goloka; lokam—the realm; pravaram—best; gamiñyati—will go.

     A person who circumambulates Lord Kåñëa attains the result of visiting all the holy places in the universe. He will go to Your Kåñëaloka, the best of spiritual realms.

Text 49

çré-närada uväca 
ity abhiñöüya govindaà
     çrémad-våndävaneçvaram
natvä tri-väraà lokeças
     cakära tu pradakñiëam

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; abhiñöüya—offering prayers; govindam—to Govinda; çrémat—glorious; våndävana—of Våndävana; éçvaram—to the master; natvä—bowing down; tri-varam—three times; lokeçaù—Brahmä, the king of the worlds; cakära—did; tu—indeed; pradakñiëam—circumambulation.

     Çré Närada said: After offering these prayers and bowing down, three times Brahmä circumambulated Lord Govinda, the glorious master of Våndävana. 
Text 50

tatra cälakñito bhütvä
     vatsän bälän pitämahaù
varaà dattvä prayänärthaà
     yacanaà sa cakära ha

     tatra—there; ca—and; alakñitaù—invisible; bhütvä—becopming; vatsän—the calves; bälän—and boys; pitämahaù—Brahmä; varam—benediction; dattvä—giving; prayäna—departure; artham—for the purpose; yacanam—request; sa—he; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     First becoming invisible, and then offerings blessing to the calves and boys, grandfather Brahmä asked permission to leave.

Text 51

tataç ca brahmaëe tasmai
     netreëäjïäà dadau hariù
punaù praëamya svaà lokaà
     ätma-bhüù pratyapadyata

     tataù—then; ca—and; brahmaëe—to Brahmä; tasmai—to him; netreëa—with an eye; äj 24äm—permission; dadau—givinmg; hariù—Lord Hari; punaù—again; praëamya—bowing down; svam—to his own; lokam—planet; ätma-bhüù—Brahmä; pratyapadyata—went.

     With a glance Kåñëa gave His permission. Then Brahmä bowed again and returned to his own world.

Text 52

atha kåñëo vanäc chéghraà
     änayäm äsa vatsakän
yaträpi puline räjan
     gopänäà räja-maëòalé

     atha—then; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; vanät—from the forest; çéghram—quickly; änayäm äsa—led; vatsakän—the calves; yatra—where; api—also; puline—on the shore; räjan—O king; gopänäm—of the gopas; räja-maëòalé—in a royal circle.

     O king, then Kåñëa quickly led the calves from the forest to the Yamunä's shore, where Kåñëa was in the midst of a glorious circle of gopas.

Text 53

gopärbhakäç ca çré-kåñëaà
     vatsaiù särdhaà samägatam
kñaëärdhaà menire vékñya
     kåñëa-mäyä-vimohitäù

     gopa—gopa; arbhakäù—boys; ca—and; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; vatsaiù—with the calves; särdham—with; samägatam—come; kñaëa—a moment; ardham—half; menire—considered; vékñya—seeing; kåñëa-mäyä-vimohitäù—bewildered by Kåñëa's illusory potency.

     Bewildered by Kåñëa's yogamäyä potency, when they saw Kåñëa with the calves, the gopa boys thought He had been gone for only half a moment. 
Text 54

ta ücur vatsakaiù kåñëa
     tvaraà tvaà tu samägataù
kuruñva bhojanaà cätra
     kenäpi na kåtaà prabho

     te—they; ücuù—said; vatsakaiù—with the calves; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; tvaram—quickly; tvam—You; tu—indeed; samägataù—come; kuruñva—please do; bhojanam—lunch; ca—and; atra—here; kenäpi—somehow; na—not; kåtam—done; prabhaù—O Lord.

     They said: O Kåñëa, You have come so quickly with the calves! O Lord, come and take lunch. Somehow we have not finished our lunch.

Text 55

tataç ca vihasan kåñëo
     'bhyavahåtyärbhakaiù saha
darçayäm äsa sarvebhyas
     carmäjagaram eva ca

     tataù—then; ca—and; vihasan—laughing; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; abhyavahåtya—taking lunch; arbhakaiù saha—wityh the boys; darçayäm äsa—showed; sarvebhyaù—to all; carma—the skin; äjagaram—of the snake; eva—indeed; ca—also.

     Laughing, Kåñëa took lunch with the boys. Then He showed them the skin of the dead snake Aghäsura.

Text 56

säyam-käle sa-rämas tu
     kåñëo gopaiù parävåtaù
agre kåtvä vatsa-våndaà
     hy äjagäma çanair vrajam

     säyam-käle—in the evening; sa-rämaù—with Balaräma; tu—indeed; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; gopaiù—by the goppas; parävåtaù—accompanied; agre—in the front; kåtvä—placing; vatsa-våndam—the calves; hy—indeed; äjagäma—returned; çanaiù—slowly; vrajam—to Vraja.

     Then Kåñëa, placing the calves in front and accompanied by Balaräma and the gopas, slowly returned to the village of Vraja in the evening.

Text 57

go-vatsakaiù sita-sitäsita-péta-varëai
     raktädi-dhümra-haritair bahu-çéla-rüpaiù
gopäla-maëòala-gataà vraja-päla-putraà
     vande vanät sukhada-goñöhakam ävrajantam

     go-vatsakaiù—with the calves; sita—white; sitäsita—black; péta—yellow; varëaiù—with colors; rakta—red; ädi—beginning; dhümra—smokey; haritaiù—green; bahu-çéla-rüpaiù—with many different forms and natures; gopäla-maëòala-gatam—gone to the circle of gopas; vraja-päla—of the king of Vraja; putram—to the son; vande—I bow down; vanät—from the forest; sukhada—blissful; goñöhakam—to the gopa village; ävrajantam—returning.

     As, encircled by gopas and by calves of many different forms and natures and of many colors beginning with white, black, yellow, red, green, and smokey, He returns from the forest to the blissful village of gopas, I bow down before Lord Kåñëa, the prince of Vraja.

Text 58

änando gopikänäà tu
     hy äsét kåñëasya darçane
yäsäà yena vinä räjan
     kñaëo yuga-samo 'bhavat

     änandaù—the bliss; gopikänäm—of thr gopés; tu—indeed; hy—indeed; äsét—was; kåñëasya—of Lord Kåñëa; darçane—in the sight; yäsäm—of wehom; yena—by which; vinä—without; räjan—O king; kñaëaù—a moment; yuga-samaù—equal to a yuga; abhavat—became.

     When they saw Kåñëa, the gopés became filled with bliss. O king, for them a moment's separation from Him seemed like a yuga.

Text 59

kåtvä goñöhe påthag vatsän
     bäläù svaà svaà gåhän gatäù
jaguç cäghäsura-vädhaà
     ätmano rakñaëaà hareù

     kåtvä—doing; goñöhe—in Vraja; påthag—specific; vatsän—calves; bäläù—boys; svaà svam—each their own; gåhän—home; gatäù—went; jaguù—sang; ca—nd; aghäsura—of Aghäsura; vädham—the slaying; ätmanaù—of themselves; rakñaëaàthe protection; hareù—of Lord Hari.

     After placing the calves in their barns, the boys went to their own homes. There they told how Kåñëa killed Aghäsura and saved them.

Chapter Ten
Çré Kåñëa-go-cäraëa-varëana
Description of Çré Kåñëa's Herding the Cows

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
gopecchayä räma-kåñëau
     gopälau tau babhüvatuù
gäç cärayantau gopälair
     vayasyaiç ceratur vane

     çré-närada uväca —Çré Närada said; gopa —of ther gopas; icchayä —by teh desire; räma-kåñëau —Kåñëa and Balaräma; gopälau —gopas; tau —They; babhüvatuù —became; gäù —the cows; cärayantau —herding; gopälaiù —with the gopas; vayasyaiù —friends; ceratuù —went; vane —in the forest.

     Çré Närada said: By the wish of the adult gopas, Kåñëa and Balaräma were placed in charge of protecting the cows. Herding the cows with Their gopa friends, Kåñëa and Balaräma would walk in the forest.

Text 2

agre påñöhe tadä gävas
     carantyaù pärçvayor dvayoù
çré-kåñëasya balasyäpi
     paçyantyaù sundaraà mukham

     agre —in front; påñöhe —behind; tadä —then; gävaù —the cpws; carantyaù —going; pärçvayoù —on the sides; dvayoù —two; çré-kåñëasya —of Çré Kåñëa; balasya —of Balaräma; api —and; paçyantyaù —seeing; sundaram —handsome; mukham —face.

     Walking before, behind, and on both sides, the cows gazed at Kåñëa and Balaräma's handsome faces.

Text 3

ghaëöä-maïjéra-jhaìkäraà
     kurvantyas tä itas tataù
kiìkiëé-jäla-samyuktä
     hema-mälä-lasad-galäù

     ghaëöä —bells; maïjéra —anklets; jhaìkäram —tinkling; kurvantyaù —doing; tä —they; itaù —here; tataù —and there; kiìkiëé —of small bells; jäla —with a network; samyuktäù —endowed; hema —golden; mälä —necklaces; lasat —glistening; galäù —necks.

     The cows wore glittering golden necklaces, a network of small bells, and tinkling anklets.

Text 4

muktä-gucchair barhi-picchair
     lasat-pucchäccha-keçaraù
sphuratäà nava-ratnänäà
     mälä-jälair viräjitaù

     muktä —of pearls; gucchaiù —with bunches; barhi-picchaiù —with peacock feathers; lasat-pucchäccha-keçaraù —splendid tails; sphuratäm —manifested; nava-ratnänäm —of nine jewels; mälä-jälaiù —with many necklaces; viräjitaù —splendid.

     Their tails were decorated with peacock feathers and bunches of pearls. They were splendid with necklaces of nine jewels.

Text 5

çåìgayor antare räjan
     çiro-maëi-manoharäù
hema-raçmi-prabhä-sphürjac-
     chåìga-pärçva-praveñöanäù

     çåìgayoù —horns; antare —between; räjan —O king; çiro-maëi-manoharäù —neautiful; wityh a crow jewel; hema —gold; raçmi-prabhä —splendor; sphürjat —shining; çåìga —horn; pärçva —side; praveñöanäù —entered.

     O king, a crown jewel placed between their horns made them beautiful. Their horns were plated with gold.

Text 6

ärakta-tilakäù käçcit
     péta-pucchärunäìghrayaù
kailäsa-giri-saìkäçäù
     çéla-rüpa-mahä-guëäù

     ärakta —red; tilakäù —tilaka; käçcit —some; péta —yellow; puccha —tails; aruëa —red; aìghrayaù —feet; kailäsa —Kailasa; giri —Mount; saìkäçäù —splendor; çéla —noble character; rüpa —beauty; mahä-guëäù —virtues.

     Some had yellow tails and red hooves. They were decorated with red tilaka. They were like many Mount Kailäsas. They had virtues, good character, and beauty.

Text 7

sa-vatsä manda-gäminya
     üòho-bhäreëa maithila
kuëòoghnyaù päöaläù käçcil
     lakñantyo bhavya-mürtayaù

     sa-vatsä —with calves; manda-gäminya —walking slowly; üòho-bhäreëa —with full milk-bags; maithila —O King of Mithila; kuëòoghnyaù —with great udders; päöaläù —red patala flowers; käçcil —some; lakñantyaù bhavya-mürtayaù —beautiful forms.

     O king of Mithilä, accompanied by their calves, they walked slowly, their udders full. Some were like great red päöala flowers. They were very beautiful.

Text 8

käçcit pétä viciträç ca
     çyämäç ca haritäs tathä
tämrä dhümrä ghana-çyämä
     ghana-çyäme gatekñaëäù

     käçcit —some; pétä —yellow; viciträç —multicolored; ca —and; çyämäç —black; ca —and; haritäù —green; tathä —so; tämrä —brown; dhümrä —smokey; ghana-çyämä —the color of clouds; ghana-çyäme —on Kåñëa, who was dark as a cloud; gata —gone; ékñaëäù —eyes.

     Some were yellow, some multicolored, some black, some green, some smoke-colored, and some cloud-colored. All their eyes were placed on Kåñëa, His form dark as a cloud.

Text 9

laghu-çåìgyo dérgha-çåìgya
     ucca-çåìgyo våñaiù saha
måga-çåìgyo vakra-çåìgyaù
     kapilä maìgaläyanäù

     laghu —small; çåìgyaù —horns; dérgha —long; çåìgya —horns; ucca —high; çåìgyaù —horns; våñaiù —bulls; saha —with; måga —deer; çåìgyaù —horns; vakra —bent; çåìgyaù —horns; kapilä —brown; maìgaläyanäù —auspicious.

     Some had short horns, some long horns, some high horns, some bent horns, and some horns like a deer's antlers. Some were with many bulls. Some were brown and beautiful.

Text 10

çädvalaà komalaà käntaà
     vékñantyo 'pi vane vane
koöiçaù koöiço gävas
     carantyaù kåñëa-pärçvayoù

     çädvalam —grass; komalam —soft; käntam —desirable; vékñantyaù —seeing; api —also; vane —in forest; vane —after forest; koöiçaù —millions; koöiçaù —on millions; gävaù —of cows; carantyaù —herded; kåñëa-pärçvayoù —by Kåñëa's side.

     Searching for tender and delicious grasses, millions and millions of cows walked at Kåñëa's side through forest after forest.

Texts 11-13

puëyaà çré-yamunä-téraà
     tamälaiù çyämalair vanam
népaiù nimbaiù kadambaiç ca
     pravälaiù panasair drumaiù

kadalé-kovidärämrair
     jambu-bilvair manoharaiù
açvatthaiç ca kapitthaiç ca
     mädhavébhiç ca maëòitam

babhau våndävanaà divyaà
     vasantartu-manoharaà
nandanaà sarvato-bhadraà
     kñipac caitrarathaà vanam

     puëyam —sacred; çré-yamunä-téram —the shore of the Yamunä; tamälaiù —with tamala trees; çyämalaiù —dark; vanam —forest; népaiù —with nipa trees; nimbaiù —with nim trees; kadambaiù —with kadamba trees; ca —and; pravälaiù —with pravala trees; panasaiù —with panasa trees; drumaiù —withb trees; kadalé —with kadali trees; kovidära —with kovidara trees; amraiù —wityh mango trees; jambu —with jambu trees; bilvaiù —with bilva trees; manoharaiù —beautiful; açvatthaiç —with asvattha trees; ca —and; kapitthaiù —with kappitha trees; ca —and; mädhavébhiç —with madhavi vines; ca —and; maëòitam —decorated; babhau —was splendidly manifested; våndävanam —Våndävana; divyam —transcendental; vasantartu-manoharam —beautiful in the springtime; nandanam —nandana; sarvatobhadram —Sarvatobhadraà; kñipac —eclisping; caitraratham —Caitraratha; vanam —forest.

     Its Yamunä shore very pure and sacred, and its groves decorated with many dark tamäla trees and many beautiful népa, nimba, kadamba, praväla, panasa, kadalé, kovidära, mango, jambu, bilva, açvattha, and kapittha trees, as well as many mädhavé vines, beautiful in the springtime, and its glory eclipsing the nandana, sarvatobhadra, and caitraratha forests of heaven, transcendental Våndävana forest was splendidly manifest.

Texts 14-17

yatra govardhano näma
     su-nirjhara-daré-yutaù
ratna-dhätu-mayaù çrémän
     mandära-vana-saìkulaù

çrékhaëòa-badaré-rambhä-
     devadäru-vaöair våtaù
paläça-plakñäçokaiç cä-
     riñöärjuna-kadambakaiù

pärijätaiù päöalaiç ca
     campakaiù pariçobhitaù
karaïja-jäla-kuïjäòhyaù
     çyämair indrayavair våtaù

kalakaëöhaiù kokilaiç ca
     puàs-kokila-mayüra-bhåt
gäç cärayaàs tatra kåñëo
     vicacära vane vane

     yatra —where; govardhanaù —Govardhana; näma —named; su-nirjhara-daré-yutaù —with caves and streams; ratna-dhätu-mayaù —made of jewels; çrémän —beautiful; mandära-vana-saìkulaù —filled with forests of mandara trees; çrékhaëòa-badaré-rambhä-devadäru-vaöaiù —with çrékhaëòa, badaré, rambhä, devadäru, and vaöatrees; våtaù —filled; paläça-plakñäçokaiù —with paläça, plakña, and açoka trees; ca —and; ariñöärjuna-kadambakaiù —with ariñöa, arjuna, and kadambaka trees; pärijätaiù —with parijata trees; päöalaiç —with patala trees; ca —and; campakaiù —with campaka trees; pariçobhitaù —beautiful; karaïja-jäla-kuïjäòhyaù —opulent with many karanja trees; çyämaiù —black; indrayavaiù —withj indrayava trees; våtaù —filled; kalakaëöhaiù —with kalkanthas; kokilaiç —kokilas; ca —and; puàs-kokila —male kokilas; mayüra —peacocks; bhåt —manifested; gäç —cows; cärayaàù —herding; tatra —there; kåñëaù —Kåñëa; vicacära —went; vane —in forest; vane —after forest.

     In Våndävana forest, on the beautiful hill named Govardhana, which was made of precious gems, had many glorious caves and swiftly-moving streams, and was filled with many beautiful mandära, çrékhaëòa, badaré, rambhä, devadäru, vaöa, paläça, plakña, açoka, ariñöa, arjuna, kadambaka, pärijäta, päöala, campaka, karaïja, and çyäma-indrayava trees, and many kalakaëöhas, kokilas, puàs-kokilas, and peacocks, Kåñëa wandered from forest to forest as He herded the cows.

Texts 18-22

våndävane madhuvane
     pärçve tälavanasya ca
kumud-vane bähule ca
     divya-käma-vane pare

båhat-sänu-gireù pärçve
     girer nandéçvarasya ca
sundare kokilavane
     kokila-dhvani-saìkule

ramye kuçavane saumye
     latä-jäla-samanvite
mahä-puëye bhadravane
     bhäëòéropavane nåpa

lohärgale ca yamunä-
     tére tére vane vane
péta-väsaù parékäro
     naöa-veño manoharaù

vetra-bhåd vädayan vaàçéà
     gopénäà prétim ävahan
mayüra-picchä-bhån maulé
     sragvé kåñëo babhau nåpa

     våndävane —in Våndävana; madhuvane —Madhuvana; pärçve —on the side; tälavanasya —of Talavana; ca —and; kumud-vane —Kumud-vana; bähule —Bahula; ca —qand; divya-käma-vane —splendid Kamavana; pare —great; båhat-sänu-gireù —on the top of the hill; pärçve —on the side; gireù —of the hill; nandéçvarasya —of Nandisvara; ca —and; sundare —beautiful; kokilavane —Kokilavana; kokila-dhvani-saìkule —filled with the sounds of cuckoos; ramye —beautiful; kuçavane —Kusavana; saumye —beautiful; latä-jäla-samanvite —filled with vines; mahä-puëye —very sacred; bhadravane —bhadravana; bhäëòéropavane —in Bhandiravana; nåpa —O king; lohärgale —in Lohargala; ca —and; yamunä —of the Yamunä; tére —on the shore; tére —on the shore; vane —in forest; vane —after forest; péta-väsaù-parikäraù —dressed in yellow garments; naöa-veñaù —dressed as a dancer; manoharaù —handsome; vetra-bhåt —holding a stick; vädayan —playing; vaàçém —the flute; gopénäm —of the gopés; prétim —pleasure; ävahan —bringing; mayüra-picchä-bhån —wearing a peacock feather; maulé —with a crown; sragvé —with a garland; kåñëaù —Kåñëa; babhau —shone; nåpa —O king.

     O king, in Våndävana, Madhuvana, Tälavana, Kumudvana, Bähulavana, Divya-kämavana, on the summit and slopes of Nandéçvara Hill, in beautiful Kokilavana, which was filled with the singing of cuckoos, in beautiful Kuçavana, which was filled with many flowering vines, in beautiful and sacred Bhadravana, in Bhäëòéropavana, in Lohärgala, in shore after shore by the Yamunä, and in forest after forest, handsome Kåñëa, in yellow garments, dressed as a dancer, holding a stick, decorated with peacock feathers, a crown, and many garlands, playing His flute, and delighting the gopés, was splendidly manifest.

Text 23

agre kåtvä gaväà våndaà
     säyam-käle hariù svayam
rägaiù samérayan vaàçéà
     çré-nanda-vrajam aviçat

     agre —in front; kåtvä —placing; gaväm —the cows; våndam —multitude; säyam-käle —in the evening; hariù —Kåñëa; svayam —personally; rägaiù —with many melodies; samérayan —playing; vaàçém —the flute; çré-nanda-vrajam —to the gopa village of Nanda; aviçat-entered.

     Placing the cows in front and playing many melodies on His flute, Kåñëa returned to Nanda's village in the evening.

Texts 24 and 25

veëu-vaàçé-dhvanià çrutvä
     çré-vaàçévaöa-märgataù
go-rajobhir nabho vyaptaà
     vékñya gehäd vinirgatäù

düré-kartuà hy ädhibädhäà
     ähartuà sukham uttamam
vismartuà na samarthäs taà
     drañöuà gopyaù samäyayuù

     veëu-vaàçé-dhvanim —the sound of the flute; çrutvä —hearing; çré-vaàçévaöa-märgataù —from the path to Vamsivata; go-rajobhiù —with the dust of the cows; nabhaù —the air; vyaptam —filled; vékñya —seeing; gehät —from their homes; vinirgatäù —left; düré-kartum —to put far away; hy —indeed; ädhibädhäm —anxiety; ähartum —to attain; sukham —happiness; uttamam —the highest; vismartum —to forget; na —not; samarthäù —able; tam —Him; drañöum —to see; gopyaù —the gopés; samäyayuù —went.

     Hearing the sound of the flute, and seeing the cows' dust fill the sky along the Vaàçévaöa path, the gopés, to put their anxieties far away and to taste the highest happiness, and unable to forget Him, went to see Kåñëa.

Text 26

saìkoca-véthéñu na saìgåhétaù
     sanaiç calan go-gaëa-saìkuläsu
siàhävaloko gaja-bäla-lélair
     vadhü-janaiù paìkaja-patra-netraù

su-maëòitaà maithila go-rajobhir
     nélaà paraà kuntalam ädadhänaù
hemäìgadé mauli-viräjamäna
     ä-karëa-vakré-kåta-dåñöi-bäëaù

go-dhülibhir maëòita-kunda-häraù
     karëopari sphürjita-karëikäraù
pétämbaro veëu-ninäda-käraù
     pätu prabhur vo håta-bhüri-bhäraù

     saìkoca-véthéñu —on the paths; na —not; saìgåhitäù —taken; sanaiç —slowly; calan —going; go-gaëa-saìkuläsu —among the cows; siàhävalokaù —with a lion's glance; gaja-bäla-lélaiù —with the playfulness of a baby elephant; vadhü-janaiù —by the girls; paìkaja-patra-netraù —lotus-petal eyes; su-maëòitam —decorated; maithila —O King of Mithila; go-rajobhiù —with the cows' dust; nélam —black; param —then; kuntalam —hair; ädadhänaù —taking; hemäìgadé —golden bracelets; mauli-viräjamäna —with a splendid crown; ä-karëa —from His ears; vakré-kåta —crooked; dåñöi —of glances; bäëaù —with arrows; go-dhülibhiù —with cows' dust; maëòita —decorated; kunda —of jasmine flowers; häraù —garland; karëopari —pn His ear; sphürjita-karëikäraù —the whorl of a blossomed lotus; pétämbaraù —wearing yellow garments; veëu-ninäda-käraù —plkaying the flute; pätu —may protect; prabhuù —the Lord; vaù —you; håta-bhüri-bhäraù —who removed the great burden of the earth.

     May Lord Kåñëa, who did not leave the path, who slowly brought the cows with Him, whose glance was like a lion's, whose playfulness was like a baby elephant's, whose eyes were lotus petals, who was the object of the gopés' glances, who was decorated with cows' dust, who had handsome black hair, who wore golden armlets, who was glorious with a crown, who shot arrows of crooked glances from large eyes that seemed to touch His ears, whose jasmine-garland was decorated with cows' dust, who wore the whorl of a blossoming lotus on His ear, who wore yellow garments, who played the flute, and who removed the earth's great burden, protect you all.
.pa

Chapter Eleven
Dhenukäsura-mokña
The Liberation of Dhenukäsura

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
ekadä sa-balaù kåñëaç
     cärayan gä manoharäù
gopälaiù sahitaù sarvair
     yayau tälavanaà navam

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; ekadä —one day; sa-balaù —with Balaräma; kåñëaç —Kåñëa; cärayan —herding; gä —the cows; manoharäù —beautiful; gopälaiù —with the gopas; sahitaù —with; sarvaiù —all; yayau —went; tälavanam —to Talavana; navam —new.

     One day, as He was herding the beautiful cows with Balaräma and all the gopas, Kåñëa went to newly-blossoming Tälavana forest.

Text 2

dhenukasya bhayäd gopä
     na gatäs te vanäntaram
kåñëo 'pi na gatas tatra
     bala eko viveça ha

     dhenukasya —of an ass; bhayät —out of fear; gopä —the gopas; na —not; gatäù —went; te —they; vanäntaram —to the forest; kåñëaù —Kåñëa; api —even; na —not; gataù —wednt; tatra —there; bala —Balaräma; ekaù —alone; viveça —entered; ha —indeed.

     Out of fear of an ass, Dhenuka, the gopas did not enter that forest. Even Kåñëa did not enter. Only Balaräma entered.

Text 3

nélämbaraà kaöau baddhvä
     baladevo mahä-balaù
paripakva-phalärthaà hi
     tad-vane vicacära ha

     néla —blue; ambaram —garments; kaöau —on His hip; baddhvä —bound; baladevaù —Balaräma; mahä-balaù —very powerful; paripakva —ripe; phala —fruits; artham —for the purpose; hi —indeed; tad-vane —to that forest; vicacära —went; ha —indeed.

     Tying the blue sash at His waist, very powerful Balaräma entered that forest to get its ripe fruit.

Text 4

bähübhyäà kämpayaàs tälän
     phala-saìghaà nipätayan
garjaàç ca nirbhayaà säkñäd
     ananto 'nanta-vikramaù

     bähübhyäm —with both arms; kämpayaàù —shaking; tälän —the tala trees; phala-saìgham —many fruits; nipätayan —causing to fall; garjan —roaring; ca —and; nirbhayam —without fear; säkñät —directly; anantaù —Lord Ananta; ananta-vikramaù —whose strength had not limit.

     Roaring fearlessly, Balaräma, who was Lord Ananta Himself, and whose strength had no limit, with both arms shook the täla trees and made many fruits fall.    

Text 5

phalänäà patatäà çabdaà
     çrutvä krodhävåtaù kharaù
madhyähne sväpa-kåd duñöo
     bhémaù kaàsa-sakho bali

     phalänäm —of the fruits3; patatäm —falling; çabdam —the sound; çrutvä —heariung; krodha —with anger; ävåtaù —filled; kharaù —the ass; madhyähne —in the middle of the day; sväpa-kåt —napping; duñöaù —the demon; bhémaù —powerful; kaàsa-sakhaù —a friend of Kaàsa; balé —strong.

     When he heard the sound of the falling fruits, the ass-demon Dhenuka, who was very powerful, who was a friend of Kaàsa, and who had been taking his midday nap, became filled with anger.

Texts 6-9

äyayau sammukhe yoddhuà
     baladevasya dhenukaù
balaà paçcima-pädäbhyäà
     nihatytorasi sa-tvaram

cakära khara-çabdaà svaà
     paridhävan muhur muhuù
gåhétvä� dhenukaà çéghraà
     balaù paçcima-pädayoù

cékñepa täla-våkñe ca
     hastenaikena lélayä
tena bhagnaç ca tälo 'pi
     tälän pärçva-sthitän bahün

pätayäm äsa räjendra
     tad adbhutam iväbhavat
punar utthäya daityendro
     balaà jagräha roñataù

     äyayau —came; sammukhe —in the presence; yoddhum —to fight; baladevasya —Balaräma; dhenukaù —Dhenuka; balam —Balaräma; paçcima —behind; pädäbhyäm —with both feet; nihatyta —struck; urasi —on the chest; sa-tvaram —quickly; cakära —did; khara-çabdam —an ass sound; svam —own; paridhävan —running; muhuù —again; muhuù —and again; gåhétvä —taking; dhenukam —Dhenuka; çéghram —at once; balaù —Balaräma; paçcima-pädayoù —by the hind hooves; cikñepa —threw; täla-våkñe —into a tala tree; ca —and; hastenaikena —with one hand; lélayä —playfully; tena —by Him; bhagnaç —broken; ca —and; tälaù —the tala tree; api —even; tälän —the tal trees; pärçva-sthitän —by its side; bahün —many; pätayäm äsa —caused to fall räjendra —O king of kings; tat —that; adbhutam —wonder; iva —like; abhavat —was; punaù —again; utthäya —rising; daityendraù —the king of demons; balam —Balaräma; jagräha —grabbed; roñataù —angrily.

     Coming before the Lord to fight, with his hind hooves Dhenuka suddenly kicked Balaräma's chest and neighed. Balaräma chased Dhenuka, quickly caught his hind legs, and with one hand playfully threw him into a täla tree. When that tree fell it made and many other täla trees nearby also fall. O king of kings, all this was very surprising. Then that king of demons again stood up and angrily grabbed Balaräma.

Text 10

yojanaà nodayäm äsa
     gajaà prati gajo yathä
gåhétvä taà balaù sadyo
     bhrämayitvätha dhenukam

     yojanam —for eight miles; nodayäm äsa —threw; gajam —one elephant; prati —to; gajaù —one elephant; yathä —as; gåhétvä —grabbing; tam —him; balaù —Balaräma; sadyaù —at once; bhrämayitvä —whirling around; atha-then; dhenukam —Dhenuka.

     Then Balaräma suddenly grabbed Dhenuka, whirled him around, and, as one elephant throws another elephant, threw him for eight miles. 

Text 11

bhü-påñöhe pothayäm äsa
     mürcchito bhagna-mastakaù
kñaëena punar utthäya
     krodha-samyukta-vigrahaù

     bhü-påñöhe —on the ground; pothayäm äsa —threw; mürcchitaù —fainted; bhagna —broken; mastakaù —head; kñaëena —in a moment; punaù —again; utthäya —standing; krodha-samyukta-vigrahaùhis body filled with anger.

     When Dhenuka struck the ground, his head became badly wounded, and he fell unconscious. In a moment he stood up, and this time his body was filled with anger.

Text 12

mürdhni kåtvä catuù-çåìgaà
     dhåtvä rüpaà bhayaìkaram
gopän vidrävayäm äsa
     çåìgais tékñnair bhayaìkaraiù

     mürdhni —on his head; kåtvä —making; catuù-çåìgam —four horns; dhåtvä —placing; rüpam —a form; bhayaìkaram —terrifying; gopän —the gopas; vidrävayäm äsa —making flee; çåìgaiù —with horns; tékñnaiù —sharp; bhayaìkaraih —terrifying.

     Then Dheunka manifested a terrifying form with four horns. With his sharp and terrifying horns he made the gopas flee.

Text 13

agre paläyitän gopän
     dudräväçu madotkaöaù
çrédämä taà ca daëòena
     subalo muñöinä tathä

     agre —before; paläyitän —fleeing; gopän —gopas; dudräva-chased; açu —quickly; mada-utkaöaù —angry; çrédämä —Çrédämä; tam —him; ca —and; daëòena —with a stick; subalaù —Subala; muñöinä —with a fist; tathä —then.

     When the boys fled, Dhenuka chased them. Angry Çrédämä hit Dhenuka with a stick, and Subala hit him with his fist.

Text 14

stokaù päçena taà daityaà
     sa tatäòa mahä-balam
kñepaëenärjuno 'àçuç ca
     daityaà lattikayä kharam

     stokaù —Stoka; päçena —with a rope; tam —him; daityam —the demon; sa —he; tatäòa —hit; mahä-balam —very powerful; kñepaëena —by throwing; arjunaù —Arjuna; aàçuù —Amçu; ca —and; daityam —the demon; lattikayä kharam —the ass.

     Stoka Kåñëa whipped the powerful demon with a rope. Arjuna and Aàçu threw him far away.

Text 15

viçälarñabha etyäçu
     pädena sva-balena ca
tejasvé hy ardhacandreëa
     devaprasthaç capeöakaiù

     viçäla —Viçäla; rñabha —amd Åñabha; etya —coming; äçu —at once; pädena —by the foot; sva-balena —with their own strength; ca —and; tejasvé —Tejasvi; hi —indeed; ardhacandreëa —by strangling; devaprasthaç —Devaprasdtha; capeöakaiù —with slaps.

     Viçäla and Åñabha kicked the demon. Tejasvé tried to strangle him. Devaprastha slapped him.

Texts 16 and 17

varüthapaù kandukena
     santatäòa mahä-kharam
atha kåñëo 'pi taà nétvä
     hastäbhyäà dhenukäsuram

bhrämayitväçu cékñepa
     giri-govardhanopari
çré-kåñëasya prahäreëa
     mürcchito ghaöikä-dvayam

     varüthapaù —Varuthapa; kandukena —with a ball; santatäòa —hit; mahä-kharam —thge great ass; atha —then; kåñëaù —Kåñëa; api —also; tam —him; nétvä —taking; hastäbhyäm —with both hands; dhenukäsuram —Dhenukasara; bhrämayitvä —whirling about; äçu —at once; cékñepa —threw; giri-govardhanopari —onto Govardhana Hill; çré-kåñëasya —of Çré Kåñëa; prahäreëa —by the blow; mürcchitaù —fainted; ghaöikä-dvayam —for an hour.

     Varüthapa hit the great demon with a ball. Then Kåñëa grabbed Dhenukäsura with both hands, whirled him around, and threw him onto Gocvardhana Hill. By the force of this the demon was unconscious for an hour.

Text 18

punar utthäya sva-tanuà
     vidhunvan därayan mukham
çåìgäbhyäà çré-harià nétvä
     dhävan daityo nabho-gataù

     punaù —again; utthäya —raising; sva-tanum —his own form; vidhunvan —shaking; därayan —breaking apart; mukham —face; çåìgäbhyäm —with horns; çré-harim —Kåñëa; nétvä —taking; dhävan —runinng; daityaù —the demon; nabho-gataù —went to the sky.

     Shaking off this form, the demon again manifested his original form. With his horns the demon grabbed Kåñëa and carried Him into the sky.

Texts 19 and 20

cakära tena khe yuddhaà
     ürdhvaà vai lakña-yojanam
gåhétvä� dhenukaà daityaà
     çré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam

cékñepädho bhümi-madhye
     cürëitästhiù sa mürcchitaù
punar utthäya çåìgäbhyäà
     nädaà kåtväti-bhairavam

     cakära —did; tena —by him; khe —in the sky; yuddham —battle; ürdhvam —high; vai —indeed; lakña-yojanam —eight hundred thousand miles; gåhétvä —taking; dhenukam —Dhenuka; daityam —the demon; çré-kåñëaù —Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän svayam —the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; cikñepa —threw; adhaù —below; bhümi-madhye —to the earth; cürëita —broken; asthiù —bones; sa —he; mürcchitaù —fainted; punaù —again; utthäya —rising; çåìgäbhyäm —with two horns; nädam —a sound; kåtva —making; ati-bhairavam —veryy terrible.

     Eight hundred thousand miles in the sky they fought. Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, grabbed Dhenukäsura and threw him to the earth. His bones broken, the demon fell unconscious. Again rising, the demon made a very terrible sound with his two horns.

Text 21

govardhanaà samutpäöya
     çré-kåñëe prähiëot kharaù
girià gåhétvä� çré-kåñëaù
     präkñipat tasya mastake

     govardhanam —Govardhana Hill; samutpäöya —uprotting; çré-kåñëe —at Çré Kåñëa; prähiëot —threw; kharaù —Dhenukasura; girim —the hill; gåhétvä —taking; çré-kåñëaù —Çré Kåñëa; präkñipat —threw; tasya —on his; mastake —head.

     Uprooting Govardhana Hill, Dhenukäsura threw it at Çré Kåñëa. Catching the hill, Kåñëa threw it at Dhenuka's head.

Text 22

daityo girià gåhétvätha
     çré-kåñëe prähiëod balé
kåñëo govardhanaà nétvä
     pürva-sthäne samäkñipat

     daityaù —the demon; girim —the hill; gåhétvä —taking; atha —then; çré-kåñëe —at Çré Kåñëa; prähiëot —threw; balé —strong; kåñëaù —Kåñëa; govardhanam —Govardhana; nétvä —taking; pürva-sthäne —it its previous place; samäkñipat —threw.

     The demon caught the hill and threw it again at Çré Kåñëa. Kåñëa caught Govardhana Hill and threw it back to its former place.

Text 23

punar dhävan mahä-daityaù
     çåìgäbhyäà därayan bhuvam
balaà paçcima-pädäbhyäà
     täòayitvä jagarja ha

     punaù —again; dhävan —running; mahä-daityaù —the great demon; çåìgäbhyäm —with two horns; därayan —braking apart; bhuvam —the ground; balam —Balaräma; paçcima-pädäbhyäm —with his hind legs; täòayitvä —striking; jagarja —roared; ha —certainly.

     Breaking the gorund with his horns, the demon charged Balaräma, kicked him with his hind hooves, and roared.

Texts 24 and 25

nanäda tena brahmäëòaà
     praijad bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam
hastäbhyäà saìgåhétvä taà
     baladevo mahä-balaù

bhü-påñöhe pothayäm äsa
     mürcchitaà bhagna-mastakam
punas tatäòa taà daityaà
     muñöinä hy acyutägrajaù

     nanäda —sounded; tena —by that; brahmäëòam —the universe; praijat —shook; bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam —to the earth; hastäbhyäm —with both hands; saìgåhétvä —grabbing; tam —him; baladevaù —Balaräma; mahä-balaù —very powerful; bhü-påñöhe —to the ground; pothayäm äsa —threw; mürcchitam —fainted; bhagna-mastakam —his head broken; punaù —again; tatäòa —struck; tam —him; daityam —the demon; muñöinä —with a fist; hy —indeed; acyuta —of infallible Kåñëa; agrajaù —the elder brother.

     With that roar the universe echoed and the earth shook. Then with both hands powerful Balaräma grabbed the demon and threw him to the ground. His head broken, the demon fell unconscious. Then Kåñëa's elder brother, Balaräma, punched the demon with His fist.

Text 26

tena muñöi-prahäreëa
     sadyo vai nidhanaà gataù
tadaiva vavåñur devaù
     puñpair nandana-sambhavaiù

     tena —by that; muñöi-prahäreëa —punch; sadyaù —at once; vai —indeed; nidhanam —to death; gataù —went; tadä —then; eva —certainly; vavåñuù —showered; devaù —the demigods; puñpaiù —with flowers; nandana-sambhavaiù —grown in the nandana gardens.

     With that punch the demon died. Then the demigods showered flowers from the nandana gardens.

Texts 27-31

dehäd vinirgataù so 'pi
     çyämasundara-vigrahaù
sragvé pétämbaro devo
     vana-mälä-vibhüñitaù

lakña-pärñada-samyuktaù
     sahasra-dhvaja-çobhitaù
sahasra-cakra-dhvani-bhåd
     dhayäyuta-samanvitaù

lakña-cämara-çobhäòhyo
     'ruëa-varëo 'ti-ratna-bhåt
divya-yojana-vistérëo
     mano-yäyé manoharaù

kiìkiëé-jäla-samyukto
     ghaëöä-maïjéra-samyutaù
harià pradakñiëé-kåtya
     sa-balaà divya-rüpa-dhåk

divyaà rathaà samäruhya
     dyotayan maëòalaà diçam
jagäma daityo he räjan
     golokaà prakåteù param

     dehät —from the body; vinirgataù —gone; saù —he; api —also; çyämasundara-vigrahaù —a handsome dark form like that of Lord Kåñëa; sragvé —garlanded; pétämbaraù —dressed in yellow graments; devaù —the Lord; vana-mälä-vibhüñitaù —decorated with forest flowers; lakña-pärñada-samyuktaù —with a hundred thousand associates; sahasra-dhvaja-çobhitaù —splendid with a thousand flags; sahasra-cakra-dhvani-bhåt —with a thousand rubling wheels; dhayäyuta-samanvitaù —drawn by ten thousand horses; lakña-cämara-çobhäòhyaù —splemndid with a hundred thousand camaras; aruëa-varëaù —red; ati-ratna-bhåt —studded with many jewels; divya-yojana-vistérëaù —eight miles long; mano-yäyé —traveling as fast as the mind; manoharaù —beautiful; kiìkiëé-jäla-samyuktaù —with a network of tinkling ornaments; ghaëöä-maïjéra-samyutaù —with many bells; harim —Kåñëa; pradakñiëé-kåtya —circumambulating; sa-balam —with Balaräma; divya-rüpa-dhåk —a transcendental form manifesting; divyam —transcendental; ratham —chariot; samäruhya —climbing; dyotayan —glistening; maëòalam —the circle; diçam —the directions; jagäma —went; daityaù —the demon; he —O; räjan —king; golokam —to Goloka; prakåteù —the material world; param —above.

     Leaving his body, Dhenuka manifested a splendid and handsome dark form wearing yellow garments and decorated with a forest flower garland. Then a chariot, filled with a hundred thousand of the Lord's associates, decorated with a thousand flags, rumbling with a thousand wheels, pulled by ten thousand horses, glorious with a hundred thousand cämaras, yellow, studded with many jewels, eight miles long, beautiful, traveling as fast as the mind, and decorated with many bells and tinkling ornaments, suddenly appeared. O king, the demon circumambulated Kåñëa and Balaräma, and then, filling the circle of the directions with light, he ascended the chariot and went to Goloka, far beyond the material realm.

Text 32

çré-kåñëo dhenukaà hatvä
     sa-balo bälakaiù saha
tad-yaças tu pragäyadbhir
     babhau gokula-go-gaëaiù

     çré-kåñëaù —Çré Kåñëa; dhenukam —Dhenuka; hatvä —killing; sa-balaù —with Balaräma; bälakaiù —the boys; saha —with; tad-yaçaù —His glories; tu —indeed; pragäyadbhiù —singing; babhau —was manifested; gokula-go-gaëaiù —with the cows of Gokula.

     When Dhenuka was killed, Kåñëa was surrounded by the cows, Balaräma, and the boys, who were all singing His glories.

Text 33

çré-räjoväca 
mune muktià kathaà präptaù
     pürvaà ko dhenukäsuraù
kathaà kharatvam äpanna
     etan me brühi tattvataù

     çré-räjä uväca —the king said; mune —O sage; muktim —liberation; katham —how?; präptaù —attained; pürvam —previous; kaù —who?; dhenukäsuraù —Dhenukasura; katham —why?; kharatvam —the body of an ass; äpanna —attained; etat —this; me —to me; bruhi —please tell; tattvataù —in truth.

     The king said: O sage, Why did he attain liberation? Who was Dhenukäsura in his previous birth? Why did he get the body of an ass? Please tell me this in truth.

Text 34

çré-närada uväca 
vairocaner baleù putro
     nämnä sähasiko balé
narénäà daça-sähasrai
     reme vai gandhamädane

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; vairocaneù —the son of Virocana; baleù —of Bali; putraù —the son; nämnä —named; sähasikaù —Sahasika; balé —powerful; narénäm —of women; daça-sähasrai —ten thousand; reme —enjoyed; vai —indeed; gandhamädane —on Gandhamadana Mountain.

     Çré Närada said: He was the powerful son of King Bali, who was the son of Virocana, and his name was Sähasika. One time he enjoyed pastimes with ten thousand women on Gandhamädana Mountain.

Texts 35-37

väditräëäà nupuräëäà
     çabdo 'bhüt tad-vane mahän
guhäyäm ästhitasyäpi
     çré-kåñëaà smarato mune

durväsaso 'tha tenäpi
     dhyäna-bhagno babhüva ha
nirgataù pädukärüòho
     durväsaù kåña-vigrahaù

dérgha-çmaçrur yañöi-dharaù
     krodha-puïjänala-dyutiù
yasya çäpäd viçvam édaà
     kampate sa jagäda ha

     väditräëäm —of musical instruments; nupuräëäm —of anklebells; çabdaù —the sound; abhüt —was; tad-vane —in that forest; mahän —great; guhäyäm —in a cave; ästhitasya —situated; api —even; çré-kåñëam —on Çré Kåñëa; smarataù —meditating; muneù —of a sage; durväsasaù —Durvasa; atha —then; tena —by that; api —also; dhyäna —meditation; bhagnaù —broken; babhüva —became; ha —indeed; nirgataù —left; päduka-ärüòhaù —wearing wooden sandals; durväsaù —Durväsä; kåña-vigrahaù —very thin; dérgha —a long; çmaçruù —beard; yañöi —a stick; dharaù —holding; krodha-puïja —of great anger; anala —with the fire; dyutiù —glowing; yasya —of whom; çäpät —from the curse; viçvam —teh universe; édam —this; kampate —trembles; sa —he; jagäda —said; ha —indeed.

     The sounds in that forest of the many musical instuments and ankle-bells broke the trance of Durväsä Muni, who in a cave nearby was meditating on Lord Kåñëa. Very thing, with a long beard, walking with wooden sandals, holding a stick, and glowing with flames of anger, Durväasä, whose gurse makes the universe tremble, left his cave and spoke (to Sähasika).

Texts 38 and 39

çré-durväsä uväca 
uttiñöha gardabhäkära
     gardabho bhava durmate
varñäëäà tu catur-lakñaà
     vyatéte bhärate punaù

mäthure maëòale divye
     puëye tälavane vane
baladevasya hastena
     muktis te bhavitäsura

     çré-durväsä uväca —Çré Durvasa said; uttiñöha —rise; gardabhäkära —O you who have the form of an ass; gardabhaù —an ass; bhava —become; durmate —O fool; varñäëäm —of years; tu —indeed; catur-lakñam —four hundred thousand; vyatéte —past; bhärate —on the earth; punaù —again; mäthure maëòale —in the circle of Mathura; divye —transcendental; puëye —sacred; tälavane —in Talavan; vane —forest; baladevasya —of Lord Balaräma; hastena —by the hand; muktiù —liberation; te —of you; bhavitä —will be; asura —O demon.

     Fool! Ass-like person! Rise! Become an ass! O demon, after four hundred thousand years, in the transcendental circle of Mathurä, in the sacred forest of Tälavana, you will attain liberation by Lord Balaräma's hand.

Text 40

çré-närada uväca 
tasmäd balasya hastena
     çré-kåñëas taà jaghäna ha
prahlädäya varo datto
     na vadhyo me tavänvayaù

     çré-näradaù uväca —Çré Närada said; tasmät —from that; balasya —of Lord Balaräma; hastena —by teh hand; çré-kåñëaù —Çré Kåñëa; tam —him; jaghäna —killed; ha —indeed; prahlädäya —to Prahläda; varaù —benediction; dattaù —given; na —not; vadhyaù —to be killed; me —by Me; tava —of you; anvayaù —the descendants.

     Çré Närada said: Because he had given Prahläda Mahäräja the benediction, "Your descendents will not be killed by Me",  Kåñëa arranged that Dhenukäsura was killed by Lord Balaräma's hand.

Chapter Twelve
Käliya-damanaà davägni-pänam
Subduing Käliya and Drinking the Forest Fire

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
balaà vinätha gopälais
     cärayan gä hariù svayam
kälindé-külam ägatya
     yayau väri-viñävåtam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; balam—Balaräma; vinä—without; atha—then; gopälaiù—with the gopas; cärayan—herding; gäù—the cows; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally; kälindé-külam—to the shore of the Yamunä; ägatya—coming; yayau—went; väri—water; viña—with poison; ävåtam—filled.

     Çré Närada said: One day, as in Balaräma's absence He was herding the cows with the gopas as His company, Kåñëa came to the shore of the Yamunä, which at that time was filled with poisoned water.

Text 2

käliyena phaëéndreëa
     jalaà yatra vidüñitam
pétvä nipetur vyasavo
     gävo gopä jaläntike

     käliyena—by Kaliya; phaëéndreëa—the king of snakes; jalam—the water; yatra—where; vidüñitam—polluted; pétvä—having drunk; nipetuù—fell; vyasavaù—dead; gävaù—the cows; gopä—gopas; jala—the water; antike—near.

     When they drank the water poisoned by the snake-king Käliya, the cows and gopas at once fell dead at the water's edge.

Text 3

tadä tän jévayäm äsa
     dåñöyä péyüña-pürëayä
ardra-citto hariù säkñäd
     bhagavän våjinärdanaù

     tadä—then; tän—them; jévayäm äsa—restored to life; dåñöyä—with aglance; péyüña-pürëayä—filled with nectar; ardra—melting with compassion; cittaù—whos eheart; hariù—Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; våjina—from distresses; ardanaù—the savior.

     Then with a nectar-filled glance Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the savior from distress, His heart melting with compassion, brought them back to life.

Text 4

kaöau péta-paöaà baddhvä
     népam äruhya mädhavaù
papätottuìga-viöapät
     tat-toye viña-düñite

     kaöau—at His waist; péta-paöam—the yellow sahs; baddhvä—tying; népam—a kadamba tree; äruhya—climbing; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; papäta—dived; uttuìga-viöapät—from the tall tree; tat-toye—into the water; viña-düñite—poisoned.

     Tightening the yellow sash about His waist and climbing a kadamba tree, Kåñëa dove from that tall tree into the poisoned water.

Text 5

uccacäla jalaà duñöaà
     kåñëa-saìghäta-ghürëitam
tat-sarpa-mandire nadyäà
     bhåìgé-bhütaà babhüva ha

     uccacäla—rose; jalam—the water; duñöam—poisoned; kåñëa-saìghäta-ghürëitam—by the thrashing of Kåñëa; tat-sarpa-mandire—in the abode of that snake; nadyäm—in the river; bhåìgé-bhütam—become a wasp; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     As Kåñëa thrashed about, the poisoned water rose in great waves. Kåñëa was like a wasp that had entered the snake's river-palace.

Text 6

tadaiva käliyaù kruddhaù
     phaëé phaëa-çatävåtaù
daçan dantaiç ca bhujayä
     cacchäda nåpa mädhavam

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; käliyaù—Kaliya; kruddhaù—angry; phaëé—snake; phaëa-çatävåtaù—with a hundred hoods; daçan—biting; dantaiù—with many fangs; ca—and; bhujayä—with coils; cacchäda—covered; nåpa—O king; mädhavam—Kåñëa.

     Then the snake Käliya, who had a hundred heads, coiled himself around Kåñëa and with many fangs bit Him.

Texts 7 and 8

kåñëo dérghaà vapuù kåtvä
     bandhanän nirgataç ca tam
pucche gåhétvä sarpendraà
     bhrämayitvä tv itas tataù

jale nipatya hastäbhyäà
     cikñepäçu dhanuù-çatam
punar utthäya sarpendro
     lelihäno bhayaìkaraù

     kåñëaù—Kåñëa; dérgham—a long; vapuù—form; kåtvä—manifesting; bandhanän—from the bondage; nirgataç—gone; ca—and; tam—him; pucche—on the tail; gåhétvä—grabbing; sarpendram—the king of snakes; bhrämayitvä—whirling about; tv—indeed; itas tataù—here and there; jale—into the water; nipatya—fallen; hastäbhyäm—with both hands; cékñepa—threw; äçu—suddenly; dhanuù-çatam—two hundred yards; punaù—again; utthäya—rising; sarpendraù—the king of snakes; lelihänaù—licking his tongue; bhayaìkaraù—terrifying.

     Expanding His form, Kåñëa broke free of the snake's clutches. With both hands grabbing its tail, Kåñëa whirled the snake-king and tossed it two hundred yards away in the water. When the terrifying snake-king rose again, it was licking its tongue.

Text 9

väma-haste harià sarpo
     ruñä jagräha mädhavam
harir dakñiëa-hastena
     gåhétvä taà mahä-khalam

     väma-haste—the left hand; harim—Kåñëa; sarpaù—the snake; ruñä—angrily; jagräha—grabbed; mädhavam—Kåñëa; hariù—Kåñëa; dakñiëa-hastena—with His right hand; gåhétvä—grabbing; tam—him; mahä-khalam—the great demon.

     The snake angrily grabbed Kåñëa's left hand. Then with His right hand Kåñëa grabbed the demon-snake.

Text 10

taj-jale pothayäm äsa
     suparëa iva pannagam
sarpo mukha-çataà dérghaà
     prasärya punar ägataù

     taj-jale—in the water; pothayäm äsa—threw; suparëa—Garuòa; iva—like; pannagam—a snake; sarpaù—the snake; mukha-çatam—who had a hundred faces; dérgham—long; prasärya—opening; punaù—again; ägataù—came.

     Kåñëa threw the snake far away, as Garuòa would have thrown it. Expanding its hundred hoods, the snake returned.

Text 11

pucche gåhétvä taà kåñëas
     cakarñäçu dhanu-çatam
kåñëa-hastäd viniñkramya
     sarpas taà vyadaçat punaù

     pucche—on the tail; gåhétvä—grabbing; tam—him; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; cakarña—did; äçu——at once; dhanu-çatam—two hundred yards; kåñëa-hastät—from Kåñëa's hand; viniñkramya—escaping; sarpaù—the snake; tam—Him; vyadaçat—bit; punaù—again.

     Then Kåñëa grabbed the snake's tail and suddenly threw it two hundred yards away. As it was being thrown by Kåñëa's hand, the snake bit the Lord again.

Text 12

tatäòa muñöinä sarpaà
     trailokya-bala-dharakaù
kåñëa-muñöi-prahäreëa
     mürcchito vigata-småtiù

     tatäòa—struck; muñöinä—with a fist; sarpam—the sanke; trailokya-bala-dharakaù—who had all the strength in the three worlds; kåñëa—of Kåñëa; muñöi-prahäreëa—with a punch; mürcchitaù—fainted; vigata-småtiù—unconscious.

     Then Kåñëa, who has all the strength in the three worlds, punched the snake. With Kåñëa's punch, the snake fell unconscious.

Texts 13-15

nataà kåtvänana-çataà
     sthito 'bhüt kåñëa-sammukhe
äruhya tat-phaëi-çataà
     maëi-vånda-manoharam

nanarta naöavat kåñëo
     naöa-veño manoharaù
gäyan sapta-svarai rägaà
     saìgitaà ca sa-tälakam

puñpair deveñu varñatsu
     täëòave naöa-räja-vat
vädayan sa mudä véëä-
     nakadundubhi-veëukän

     natam—bowed down; kåtvä—masking; anana-çatam—hundred heads; sthitaù—situated; abhüt—became; kåñëa-sammukhe—in Kåñëa's presence; äruhya—climbing; tat-phaëi-çatam—on the hundred hoods; maëi-vånda-manoharam—beautiful with many jewels; nanarta—danced; naöavat—like a dancer; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; naöa-veñaù—appearing like a dancer; manoharaù—handsome; gäyan—singing; sapta-svarai—with the seven notes; rägam—melody; saìgitam—sung; ca—and; sa-tälakam—with rhythm; puñpaiù—with flowers; deveñu—as the demigods; varñatsu—showered; täëòave—in the agressive dancing; naöa-räja-vat—like the king of dancers (Lord Çiva); vädayan—sounding; sa—He; mudä—happily; véëä-vinas; anakadundubhi—drums; veëukän—and flutes.

     When the snake's heads were down, handsome Kåñëa climbed on its hundred jewel-decorated hoods. Singing melodies in the seven-note scale and playing the flute, drum, and véëä, as the demigods showered flowers, Kåñëa furiously danced, as does Lord Çiva, the king of dancers.

Text 16

sa-tälaà pada-vinyäsais
     tat-phaëän sojjvalän bahün
babhaïja çvasataù kåñëaù
     käliyasya mahätmanaù

     sa-tälam—with rhythm; pada-vinyäsaiù—with steps; tat-phaëän—the hoods; sojjvalän—splendid; bahün—many; babhaïja—broke; çvasataù—hissing; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; käliyasya—of Kaliya; mahätmanaù—the great soul.

     With rhythmic dance-steps, Kåñëa broke the many splendid hoods of the great saint that was the hissing snake Käliya.

Text 17

tadaiva näga-patnyas tä
     ägata bhaya-vihvaläù
natvä kåñëa-padaà devaà
     ücur gadgadayä girä

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; näga—of the snake; patnyaù—the wives; tä—they; ägata—came; bhaya-vihvaläù—overcome with fear; natvä—bowing down; kåñëa—of Kåñëa; padam—to the feet; devam—to the Lord; ücuù—said; gadgadayä—with choked up; girä—words.

     Terrified, the snake's wives came. Bowing to Kåñëa's feet, with words choked with emotion, they spoke to the Lord. 
Text 18

çré-näga-patnya ücuù 
namaù çré-kåñëacandräya
     goloka-pataye namaù
asaìkhyäëòädhipataye
     paripürëatamäya te

     çré-näga-patnyaù ücuù—the snake's wives said; namaù—obeisances; çré-kåñëacandräya—to Çré Kåñëacandra; goloka-pataye—the master of Goloka; namaù—obeisances; asaìkhya—countless; aëòa—of universes; adhipataye—to the ruler; paripürëatamäya—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; te—to You.

     The snake's wives said: Obeisances to You, Çré Kåñëacandra, the master of Goloka! Obeisances to You, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of numberless universes!

Text 19

çré-rädhä-pataye tubhyaà
     vrajädhéçäya te namaù
namaù çré-nanda-puträya
     yaçodä-nandanäya te

     çré-rädhä-pataye—the master of Rädhä; tubhyam—to You; vrajädhéçäya—the master of Vraja; te—to You; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances; çré-nanda-puträya—to the son of Nanda; yaçodä-nandanäya—to the joy of Yaçodä; te—to You.

     Obeisances to You, the master of Rädhä, the master of Vraja! Obeisances to You, the son of Nanda, the joy of Yaçodä!

Text 20

pähi pähi para-deva pannagaà      tvat-paraà na çaraëaà jagat-traye
tvaà parät parataro hariù svayaà
     lélayä kila tanoñi vigraham

     pähi—save; pähi—save; para-deva—O Supreme Lord; pannagaà —this snake; tvat-param—devoted to You; na—not; çaraëam—shelter; jagat—worlds; traye—in the three; tvam—You; parät—than the greatest; parataraù—greater; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally; lélayä—with pastimes; kila—indeed; tanoñi—manifest; vigraham—this form.

     Save, Save this snake, O Supreme Lord! In the three worlds there is no shelter but You! You are Lord Hari, who is greater than the greatest. As You enjoy Your pastimes You appear in many forms.

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
näga-patni-stutaù kåñëaù
     käliyaà vigata-smayam
visasarja hariù säkñät
     paripürëatamaù svayam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; näga—of the snake; patni—by the wives; stutaù—offered prayers; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; käliyam—Kaliya; vigata—gone; smayam—pride; visasarja—made; hariù—Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—Himself.

     Çré Närada said: When the snake's wives offered these prayers, Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, made Käliya completely prideless.

Text 22

pähéti pravadantaà taà
     käliyaà bhagavän hariù
praëataà sammukhe präptaà
     präha devo janärdanaù

     pähi—save; iti—thus; pravadantam—saying; tam—to him; käliyam—Kaliya; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåñëa; praëatam—bowed down; sammukhe—in the presence; präptam—attained; präha—said; devaù—the Lord; janärdanaù—the savior from miseries.

     When Käliya bowed down and said, "Please save me!" Lord Kåñëa, the savior from miseries, spoke to him.

Text 23

çré-bhagavän uväca 
dvépaà ramaëakaà gaccha
     sa-kalatra-suhåd-våtaù
suparëo 'dyatanät tvaà vai
     nädyän mat-päda-laïchitam

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; dvépam ramaëakaà-Ramanaka-dvipa; gaccha—go; sa-kalatra—with wives; suhåt—friends; våtaù—with; suparëaù—garuòa; adyatanät—from today; tvam—you; vai—indeed; na—not; adyät—will eat; mat-päda-laïchitam—My footprint.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: With Your wives and relatives go the Ramaëaka-dvépa. From today on Garuòa will not eat you, because you are marked with My footprints.

Text 24

çré-närada uväca 
sarpaù kåñëaà tu sampüjya
     parikramya praëamya tam
kalatra-putra-sahito
     dvépaà ramaëakaà yayau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; sarpaù—the snake; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; tu—indeed; sampüjya—worshiping; parikramya—circumambulating; praëamya—bowing down; tam—to Him; kalatra-putra-sahitaù—with his wives and children; dvépaà ramaëakam—to Ramanaka-dvipa; yayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: After worshiping, circumambulating, and bowing down before Lord Kåñëa, the snake, with its wives and children, went to Ramaëaka-dvépa.

Text 25

atha çrutvä käliyena
     saìgrastaà nanda-nandanam
taträjagmur gopa-gaëä
     nandädyaù sakalä janäù

     atha—then; çrutvä—after hearing; käliyena—by Käliya; saìgrastam—grabbed; nanda-nandanam—Kåñëa; tatra—there; äjagmuù—came; gopa-gaëäù—the gopas; nandädyaù—headed by Nanda; sakalä—all; janäù—the people.

     Hearing that Kåñëa was captured by Käliya, Nanda Mahäräja and all the cowherd people came there.

Text 26

jaläd vinirgataà kåñëaà
     dåñövä mumudire janäù
äçliñya sva-sutaà nandaù
     paräà mudam aväpa ha

     jalät—from the water; vinirgatam—emerged; kåñëam—Kåñëa; dåñövä—seeing; mumudire—rejoiced; janäù—the people; äçliñya—embracing; sva-sutam—his son; nandaù—Nanda; paräm—supreme; mudam—happiness; aväpa—attained; ha—certainly.

     Seeing Kåñëa emerge from the water, the people rejoiced. As he embraced his son, Nanda attained the highest bliss.

Text 27

sutaà labdhva yaçodä sä
     suta-kalyäëa-hetave
dadau dänaà dvijätibhyaù
     sneha-snuta-payodharä

     sutam—son; labdhva—attaining; yaçodä—Yaçodä; sä—she; suta-kalyäëa-hetave—for the auspiciousness of her son; dadau—gave; dänam—charity; dvijätibhyaù—to the brähmaëas; sneha-snuta-payodharä—milk flowing from her breasts.

     When Yaçodä attained her son, milk flowed from her breasts. For her son's welfare she gave charity to the brähmaëas. 

Text 28

tatraiva çayanaà cakrur
     gopäù sarve pariçramät
kälindé-nikaöe räjan
     gopé-gopa-gaëaiù saha

     tatra—there; eva—indeed; çayanam—rest; cakruù—did; gopäù—the cowherd peoiple; sarve—all; pariçramät—from exhaustion; kälindé—the Yamunä; nikaöe—near; räjan—O king; gopé-gopa-gaëaiù—the gopas and gopés; saha—with.

     Then the exhausted gopas and gopés napped by the Yamunä's shore.

Text 29

veëu-saìgharñanodbhüto
     dävägniù pralayägni-vat
niçéthe sarvato gopän
     dagdhum ägatavän sphuran

     veëu—of the bamboos; saìgharñaëa—by the fricton; udbhütaù—born; dävägniù—a forest fire; pralayägni-vat—like the fire at the time of cosmic devastation; niçéthe—in the middle of the night; sarvataù—everywhere; gopän—the gopas; dagdhum—to burn; ägatavän—came; sphuran—manifesting.

     Born from the natural fricton of the bamboos, a forest fire like the great fire at the end of creation came in the middle of the night to consume the gopas.

Text 30

gopä vayasyäù çré-kåñëaà
     sa-balaà çaraëaà gatäù
natvä kåtäïjalià kåtvä
     tam ücur bhaya-kätaräù

     gopäù—the gopas; vayasyäù—friends of the same age; çré-kåñëam—to Çré Kåñëa; sa-balam—with Balaräma; çaraëam—to the shelter; gatäù—went; natvä—bowing down; kåtäïjalià kåtvä—with folded hands; tam—to Him; ücuù—said; bhaya-kätaräù—overcome with fear.

     Overcome with fear, the gopas took shelter of Kåñëa and Balaräma. Bowing down and folding their hands, they spoke to Him.

Text 31

çré-gopä ücuù 
kåñëa kåñëa mahä-bäho
     çaraëägata-vatsala
pähi pähi vane kañöäd
     dävägneù sva-janän prabho

     çré-gopäù ücuù—the gopas said; kåñëa—Kåñëa; kåñëa—Kåñëa; mahä-bähaù—O mighty-armed çaraëägata—to they who take shelter; vatsala—affectionate; pähi—save; pähi—save; vane—in the forest; kañöät—from calamity; dävägneù—forest fire; sva-janän—your own people; prabhaù—O Lord.

     The gopas said: Kåñëa! Kåñëa! O mighty-armed one! O Lord affectionate to the surrendered souls who take shelter of You! Save us! Save us, Your own people, from this terrible forest-fire!

Text 32

sva-locanäni mäbhaiñöa
     nyamélayata mädhavaù
ity uktvä vahnim apibad
     devo yogeçvareçvaraù

     sva-locanäni—your eyes; mä—don't; abhaiñöa—be afraid; nyamélayata—close; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; ity—thus; uktvä—saying; vahnim—the fire; apibat—drank; devaù—the Lord; yogeçvareçvaraù—the king of the kings of yoga.

     Saying, "Don't be afraid! Just close your eyes", Lord Kåñëa, the king of the kings of yoga, drank up the forest fire.

Text 33

prätar gopa-gaëaiù särdhaà
     vismitair nanda-nandanaù
go-gaëaiù sahitaù çrémad-
     vraja-maëòalam äyayau

     prätaù—early in the morning; gopa-gaëaiù—the gopas; särdham—with; vismitaiù—astonished; nanda-nandanaù—Nanda's son; go-gaëaiù—the cows; sahitaù—with; çrémat—beautiful; vraja-maëòalam—to the circle of Vraja; äyayau—came.

     Then, early in the morning, with the cows and the astonished gopas, Kåñëa went to the pastures of Vraja.
.pa

Chapter Thirteen
Çeñopäkhyäna-varëana
The Story of Çeña

Text 1

çré-vaideha uväca 
yad-rajo durlabhaà loke
     yoginäà bahu-janmabhiù
tat-pädäbjaà hareù säkñäd
     babhau käliya-mürdhasu

     çré-vaidehaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; yat—of whom; rajaù—the dust; durlabham—difficult to attain; loke—in this world; yoginäm—by the yogis; bahu——with many; janmabhiù—births; tat—of Him; päda—feet; abjam—lotus; hareù—of Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; babhau—was manifested; käliya-mürdhasu—on the heads of Kaliya.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: After many births even the great yogés in this world cannot attain the dust of the Lord's feet. Still, Lord Kåñëa placed His lotus feet directly on Käliya's heads.

Text 2

ko 'yaà pürvaà kuçala-kåt
     käliyo phaëinäà varaù
enaà veditum icchämi
     brühi devarñi-sattama

     kaù—who?; ayam—he; pürvam—previously; kuçala-kåt—having done a pious deed; käliyaù—kaliya; phaëinäm—of snakes; varaù—the best; enam—this; veditum—to know; icchämi—I wish; brühi—please tell; devarñi-sattama—O best of the divine sages.

     What pious deeds did Käliya, the best of snakes, do in his previous birth? This I wish to know. Please tell me this, O best of divine sages.

Text 3

çré-närada uväca 
sväyambhuväntare pürvaà
     nämnä vedaçirä muniù
vindhyäcale tapo 'karñéd
     bhågu-vaàça-samudbhavaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; sväyambhuväntare—in the Svayambhuva-manvantara; pürvam—before; nämnä—by name; vedaçirä muniù—Vedasira Muni; vindhyäcale—in the Vindhya Hills; tapaù—austerities; akarñét—performed; bhågu-vaàça-samudbhavaù—born in the Bhågu dynasty.

     Çré Närada said: In ancient times, during the Sväyambhuva-manvantara, a sage named Vedaçirä Muni, who was a descendent of Bhågu Muni, performed austerities in the Vindhya Hills.

Text 4

tad-äçrame tapaù kartuà
     präpto hy açväçirä muniù
taà  vékñya rakta-nayanaù
     präha vedaçirä ruñä

     tad-äçrame—at his äçrama; tapaù—uasterities; kartum—to do; präptaù—attained; hy—indeed;; açväçirä muniù—Asvasira Muni; tam—to him; vékñya—seeing; rakta-nayanaù—red eyes; präha—said; vedaçirä—Vedasira; ruñä—angrily.

     Then, one day a sage named Açvaçirä Muni came to perform austerities at this sage's äçrama. With red eyes staring at his guest, Vedaçirä Muni angrily spoke.

Text 5

çré-vedaçirä uväca 
mamäçrame tapo vipra
     mä kuryäù sukhadaà na hi
anyatra te tapo-yogyä
     bhümir nästi tapo-dhana

     çré-vedaçirä uväca—Vedasira said; mama—my; äçrame—in the asrama; tapaù—austerities; vipra—O brähmaëa; mä—don't; kuryäù—do; sukhadam—giving happiness; na—not; hi—indeed; anyatra—in another place; te—of you; tapo-yogyä—sutiable for yoga; bhümiù—place; na—not; asti—is; tapo-dhana—O sage whose wealth is austerity.

     Çré Vedaçirä said: O brähmaëa, don't perform austerities in my äçrama. O sage whose wealth is austerity, is there no other place where you can happily perform austerities?

Text 6

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvätha vedaçiraso
     väkyaà hy äçvaçirä muniù
krodha-yukto rakta-netraù
     präha taà muni-puìgavam

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; çrutvä—hearing; atha—then; vedaçirasaù—of Vedasira; väkyam—the words; hy—indeed; äçvaçirä—Asvasira; muniù—Muni; krodha-yuktaù—angry; rakta-netraù—his eyes red; präha—said; tam—to him; muni—of sages; puìgavam—the best.

     Çré Närada said: When he heard Vedaçirä's words, Açvaçirä Muni became angry. With red eyes he spoke to the best of sages.

Text 7

çré-açvaçirä uväca 
mahä-viñëor iyaà bhümir
     na te me muni-sattama
katibhir munibhiç cätra
     na kåtaà tapa uttamam

     çré-açvaçirä uväca—Açvaçirä said; mahä-viñëoù—of Lord mahä-Viñëu; iyam—this; bhümiù—place; na—not; te—of you; me—of me; muni-sattama—O best of sages; katibhiù—by how many?; munibhiç—sages; ca—and; atra—here; na—not; kåtam—done; tapa—austerities; uttamam—great.

     Çré Açvaçirä said: O best of sages, this place belongs to Lord Mahä-Viñëu. It does not belong to you or me. Have not many sages already performed great austerities here?
 
Text 8

çvasan sarpa iva tvaà bho
     våthä krodhaà karoñi hi
tadä sarpo bhava tvaà hi
     bhüyät te garuòäd bhayam

     çvasan—hissing; sarpa—a snake; iva—like; tvam—you; bhaù—O; våthä—uselessly; krodham—angry; karoñi—are; hi—indeed; tadä—then; sarpaù—a snake; bhava—become; tvam—you; hi—indeed; bhüyät—may be; te—of you; garuòät—from garuòa; bhayam—fear.

     You are angry for no reason. You hiss as if you were a snake. Become a snake! You will be terrified of Garuòa.

Text 9

çré-vedaçirä uväca 
tvaà mahä-durabhipräyo
     laghu-drohe mahodyamaù
käryärthé käka iva kau
     tvaà käko bhava durmate

     çré-vedaçirä uväca—Çré Vedasira said; tvam—you; mahä-durabhipräyaù—don't understand anything; laghu—for a slight; drohe—offense; mahä-great; udyamaù—endeavor; käryärthé—wishing to do; käka—a crow; iva—like; kau—on the earth; tvam—you; käkaù—a crow; bhava—become; durmate—O fool.

     Çré Vedaçirä said: Fool, for a slight offense you plot a great revenge! On this earth you are like a crow. Fool, become a crow!

Text 10

çré-närada uväca 
äviräsét tato viñëur
     itthaà ca çapatos tayoù
sva-sva-çäpäd duùkhitayoù
     säntvayäm äsa tau girä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; äviräsét—appeared; tataù—then; viñëuù—Lord Viñëu; ittham—thus; ca—and; çapatoù—of the two cursing sages; tayoù—of them; sva-sva-çäpät—each from his own curse; duùkhitayoù—unhappy; säntvayäm äsa—comforted; tau—them both; girä—with words.

     Çré Närada said: Then Lord Viñëu appeared and consoled the two sages, who were now unhappy with their curses.

Texts 11-14

çré-bhagavän uväca 
yuväà tu me samau bhaktau
     bhujäv iva tanau muné
sva-väkyaà tu måñä kartuà
     samartho 'haà munéçvarau

bhakta-väkyaà måña kartuà
     necchämi çapatho mama
te mürdhni he vedaçiras
     caraëau me bhaviñyataù

tadä te garuòa-bhétir
     na bhaviñyati karhicit
çåëu me 'çvaçiro väkyaà
     çocaà mä kuru mä kuru

käka-rüpo 'pi su-jïänaà
     te bhaviñyati niçcitam
paraà trailokikaà jïänaà
     samyutaà yoga-siddhibhiù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; yuväm—you both; tu—indeed; me—to Me; samau—equal; bhaktau—devotees; bhujau—arms; iva—like; tanau—on the body; muni—sages; sva-väkyam—own words; tu—indeed; måñä—false; kartum—to make; samarthaù—able; aham—I; munéçvarau—O kings of sages; bhakta—of a devotee; väkyam—the words; måña—false; kartum—to do; na—not; icchämi—I wish; çapathaù—as a vow; mama—of Me; te—of you; mürdhni—on the head; he—O; vedaçiraù—Vedasira; caraëau—the feet; me—of me; bhaviñyataù—will be; tadä—then; te—of you; garuòa-bhétiù—fear of Garuòa; na—not; bhaviñyati—will be; karhicit—ever; çåëu—hear; me—Me; açvaçiraù—O Asvasira; väkyam—the words; çocam—lament; mä—don't; kuru—do; mä—don't; kuru—do; käka-rüpaù—the form of a crow; api—although; su-jïänam—transcendental} knowledge; te—of you; bhaviñyati—will be; niçcitam—indeed; param—great; trailokikam—in the three worlds; jïänam—knowledge; samyutam—with; yoga-siddhibhiù—the mystic perfections.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: You are both equally devoted to Me. O sages, you are like the two arms of My body. O kings of the sages, I can make My own words false, but I do not wish to allow the words of my devotees to become false. That is My vow. O Vedaçirä, I will place My footprints on your head. Because of them you will never fear Garuòa. O Açvaçirä, hear My words. Don't lament. Please don't lament. You will have the form of a crow, but you will have transcendental knowledge. You will have yoga-siddhis and the highest knowledge in the three worlds.

Text 15

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvätha gate viñëau
     munir açvaçirä nåpa
säkñät käka-bhuñuëòo 'bhüd
     yogéndro néla-parvate

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said: ; ity—thus; uktvä—saying; atha—then; gate—gon3; viñëau—Lord Viñëu; munir açvaçirä—Asvasira Muni; nåpa—O king; säkñät—directly; käka-bhuñuëòaù—the crow Bhuñuëòa; abhüt—became; yogéndraù—the king of sages; néla-parvate—on Mount Néla.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these words, Lord Viñëu departed. O king, then the sage Açvaçirä became the crow Bhuñuëòa on Mount Néla.

Text 16

räma-bhakto mahä-tejäù
     sarva-çästrärtha-dépakaù
rämäyaëaà jagau yo vai
     garuòäya mahätmane

     räma—of Lord Rämacandra; bhaktaù—a devotee; mahä-tejäù—very powerful; sarva—of all; çästra—scriptures; artha—the meaning; dépakaù—a lamp; rämäyaëam—the Rämäyaëa; jagau—recited; yaù—who; vai—indeed; garuòäya—to mgaruòa; mahätmane—the great soul.

     He was devoted to Lord Rämacandra. He was very powerful. He was a lamp shining on the meanings of all the scriptures. To Garuòa he recited the Rämäyaëa.

Text 17

cäkñuñe hy antare präpte
     dakñaù pracetaso nåpa
kaçyapäya dadau kanyä
     ekädaça manoharäù

     cäkñuñe—the Caksusa-manvantara; hy—indeed; antare—in; präpte—attained; dakñaù—Dakña; pracetasaù—to the prajapati; nåpa—O king; kaçyapäya—to Kaçyapa; dadau—gave; kanyä—daughters; ekädaça—eleven; manoharäù—beautiful.

     O king, during the Cäkñuña-manvantara Prajäpati Dakña gave his eleven beautiful daughters in marriage to Kaçyapa Muni.

Text 18

täsäà kadrüç ca yä çreñöhä
     sädyaiva rohiëé småtä
vasudeva-priyä yasyäà
     baladevo 'bhavat sutaù

     täsäm—of them; kadrüù—Kadrü; ca—and; yä—who; çreñöhä—the best; sä—she; adya—now; eva—even; rohiëé—as Rohiëé; småtä—is known; vasudeva-priyä—dear to King Vasudeva; yasyäm—in whom; baladevaù—Balaräma; abhavat—became; sutaù—the son.

     Kadrü was the best of them. Today Kadrü is Rohiëé. She is dear to Mahäräja Vasudeva. Lord Balaräma was born as her son.

Texts 19 and 20

sä kadrüç ca mahä-sarpän
     janayäm äsa koöiçaù
mahodbhaöän viña-balän
     ugrän païca-çatänanän

mahä-maëi-dharän käàçcid
     duùsahäàç ca çatänanän
teñäà vedaçirä näma
     käliyo 'bhud mahä-phaëé

     sä-she; kadrüç—Kadru; ca—and; mahä-sarpän—great snakes; janayäm äsa—gave birth; koöiçaù—millions; mahodbhaöän—very powerful; viña—poison; balän—strong; ugrän—horrible; païca-çat—five hundred; änanän—heads; mahä—great; maëi—jewels; dharän—having; käàçcit—some; duùsahäàç—invincible; ca—and; çatänanän—a hundred heads; teñäm—of them; vedaçirä—Vedasira; näma—named; käliyaù—Kaliya; abhut—became; mahä—great; phaëé—snake.

     Kadrü gave birth to many millions of great, powerful, invincible jewel-decorated, and very poisonous snakes, some having five-hundred heads, and others having a hundred heads. Among them Vedaçirä became the great snake Käliya.

Text 21

teñäm ädau phaëéndro 'bhüc
     cheño 'nantaù parät paraù
so 'dyaiva baladevo 'sti
     rämo 'nanto 'cyutägrajaù

     teñäm—of them; ädau—the first; phaëéndraù—the king of snakes; abhüt—became; çeñaù anantaù—Ananta Çeña; parät—than the greatest; paraù—greater; saù—He; adya—now; eva—indeed; baladevaù—Balaräma; asti—is; rämaù—Räma; anantaù—limitless; acyuta—of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead; agrajaù—the elder brother.

     Ananta Çeña, the king of snakes, who is greater than the greatest, was the first of them. Today Ananta is Balaräma, the elder brother of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 22

ekadä çré-hariù säkñäd
     bhagavän prakåteù paraù
çeñaà präha prasannätmä
     megha-gambhérayä girä

     ekadä—one day; çré-hariù—Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; prakåteù—matter; paraù—beyond; çeñam—to çeña; präha—said; prasanna—pleased; ätmä—at heart; megha—cloud; gambhérayä—deep; girä—with words.

     One day Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is beyond the worlkd of matter and is always happy at heart, with words like the rumbling of clouds, spoke to Ananta Çeña.    

Text 23

çré-bhagavän uväca 
bhü-maëòalaà samädhätuà
     sämarthyaà kasyacin na hi
tasmäd enaà mahé-golaà
     mürdhni tvaà hi samuddhara

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; bhü-maëòalam—the earth; samädhätum—to hold up; sämarthyam—ability; kasyacit—of someone; na—not; hi—indeed; tasmät—from that; enam—this; mahé-golam—the earth; mürdhni—on the head; tvam—You; hi—indeed; samuddhara—please hold.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: No one else has the power to hold up the planets of Bhü-maëòala. You please carry these planets on Your head.

Text 24

ananta-vikramas tvaà vai
     yato 'nanta iti småtaù
idaà käryaà prakartavyaà
     jana-kalyäëa-hetave

     ananta—limitless; vikramaù—power; tvam—You; vai—indeed; yataù—therefore; ananta—limitless; iti—thus; småtaù—known; idam—this; käryam—duty; prakartavyam—should be done; jana—of the people; kalyäëa-hetave—for the welfare.

     Your power is endless, and therefore You are known as Ananta (the endless). Please accept this duty for the welfare of the people.

Text 25

çré-çeña uväca 
avadhià kuru yävat tvaà
     dharoddharasya me prabho
bhü-bhäraà dhärayiñyämi
     tävat te vacanäd iha

     çré-çeñaù uväca—Çré Çeña said; avadhim—limit; kuru—please do; yävat—as; tvam—You; dharä-uddharasya—of holding up the planets; me—of Me; prabhaù—O Lord; bhü-bhäram—the burden of thre worlds; dhärayiñyämi—I will hold; tävat—so; te—of You; vacanät—from the words; iha—here.

     Çré Çeña said: O Lord, please put some limit on how long I must hold the world. Then, according Your word, I will hold up Bhü-maëòala.

Text 26

çré-bhagavän uväca 
nityaà sahasra-vadanair
     uccäraà ca påthak påthak
mad-guëa-sphuratäà nämnäà
     kuru sarpendra sarvataù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; nityam—always; sahasra-vadanaiù—with a thousand heads; uccäram—holding up; ca—and; påthak påthak—specific natures; mad-guëa-sphuratäm—the manifestation of My qualities; nämnäm—of names; kuru—do; sarpendra—O king of snakes; sarvataù—in all respects.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O king of snakes, with Your thousand mouths always chant My names, names that reveal My transcendental qualities.

Text 27

man-nämäni ca divyäni
     yadä yänty avasänatäm
tadä bhü-bhäram uttärya
     phaëis tvaà su-sukhé bhava

     man-nämäni—My names; ca—and; divyäni—transcendental; yadä—when; yanty—go; avasänatäm—to the end; tadä—then; bhü-bhäram—burden; uttärya—lifting; phaëiù—snake; tvam—You; su-sukhé—very happy; bhava—become.

     When You come to the end of all My transcendental names You can put down the burden of Bhü-maëòala and relax.

Text 28

çré-çeña uväca 
ädhäro 'yaà bhaviñyämi
     mad-ädhäraç ca ko bhavet
nirädhäraù kathaà toye
     tiñöhämi kathaya prabho

     çré-çeñaù uväca—Çré Çeña said; ädhäraù—holding up; ayam—that; bhaviñyämi—I will become; mad-ädhäraù—holding up Me; ca—and; kaù—who?; bhavet—will be; nirädhäraù—without someone to hold Me up; katham—how?; toye—in the water; tiñöhämi—I will stand; kathaya—please tell; prabhaù—O Lord.

     Çré Çeña said: I will hold up Bhü-maëòala. But who will hold Me up? Without support how can I stand in the water? O Lord, please tell Me.

Text 29

çré-bhagavän uväca 
ahaà ca kamaöho bhütvä
     dhärayiñyämi te tanum
mahä-bhära-mayéà dérghaà
     mä çocaà kuru mat-sakhe

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; aham—I; ca—and; kamaöhaù—a turtle; bhütvä—having become; dhärayiñyämi—I will hold up; te—of You; tanum—the form; mahä-bhära-mayém—holding a great burden; dérgham—long; mä—don't; çocam—lament; kuru—do; mat—My; sakhe—friend.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: I will become a turtle and then I will hold You up. O My friend, don't be unhappy to hold such a great burden for such a long time.

Text 30

çré-närada uväca 
tadä çeñaù samutthäya
     natvä çré-garuòa-dhvajam
jagäma nåpa pätäläd
     adho vai lakña-yojanam

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; çeñaù—Çeña; samutthäya—rising; natvä—bowing; çré-garuòa-dhvajam—the flag of Garuòa; jagäma—went; nåpa—O king; pätälät—from Patalaloka; adhaù—below; vai—indeed; lakña-yojanam—eight hundred thousand miles.

     Çré Närada said: O king, then Lord Çeña rose, bowed down before Lord Kåñëa who holds the flag of Garuòa, and went eight hundred thousand miles below Pätälaloka

Text 31

gåhétvä sva-kareëedaà
     gariñöhaà bhümi-maëòalam
dadhära sva-paëe çeño
     'py ekasmiàç caëòa-vikramaù

     gåhétvä—holding; sva-kareëa—with His own hand; idam—this; gariñöham—great; bhümi-maëòalam—earth; dadhära—held; sva-paëe—in His hand; çeñaù—Lord Çeña; api—also; ekasmiàç—in one; caëòa-vikramaù—very powerful.

          Then very powerful Ananta Çeña picked up Bhü-maëòala and held it in one hand.

Text 32

saìkarñane 'tha pätäle
     gate 'nante parät pare
anye phaëéndras tam anu
     viviçur brahmaëoditäù

     saìkarñane—when Lord Saìkarñaëa; atha—then; pätäle—to palataloa; gate—went; anante—Lord Ananta; parät—than the greatest; pare—greater; anye—other; phaëéndraù—great snakes; tam—him; anu viviçuù—followed; brahmaëä—of Brahmä; uditäù—ordered.

     When Saìkarñaëa Ananta went to Pätälaloka, by Brahmä's order the other great snakes followed Him.

Text 33

atale vitale kecit
     sutale ca mahätale
talätale tathä kecit
     sampräptäs te rasätale

     atale—Atale; vitale—Vitala; kecit—some; sutale—Sutala; ca—and; mahätale—Mahatala; talätale—Talatala; tathä—so; kecit—some; sampräptäù—attained; te—indeed; rasätale—Rasatala.

     Some went to Atalaloka and others to Sutalaloka, Mahätalaloka, Talätalaloka, and Rasätalaloka.

Text 34

tebhyas tu brahmaëä dattaà
     dvépaà ramaëakaà bhuvi
käliya-pramukhäs tasmin
     avasan sukha-samvåtäù

     tebhyaù—to them; tu—indeed; brahmaëä—by Brahmä; dattam—given; dvépaà ramaëakam—REamaëaka-dvépa; bhuvi—in the world; käliya-pramukhäù—headed by Kaliya; tasmin—in that place; avasan—lived; sukha-samvåtäù—happy.

     Many snakes headed by Käliya happily lived in Ramaëaka-dvépa, the home Brahmä gave to them.

Text 35

iti te kathitaà räjan
     käliyasya kathänakam
bhuktidaà muktidaà säraà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     iti—thus; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; räjan—O king; käliyasya—of Kaliya; kathänakam—the story; bhuktidam—giving sense happiness; muktidam—giving liberation; säram—the best; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—do you wish.

     O king, thus I have told you Käliya's story, which grants both happiness in this world and also liberation. What more do you wish to hear?

Chapter Fourteeen
Käliyopäkhyäna-varëana
Description of Käliya's Story

Text 1

çré-räjoväca 
dvépe ramaëake brahman
     sarpänanyän vinä katham
etan me brühi sakalaà
     käliyasyäbhavad bhayam

     çré-räjä uväca—the king said; dvépe ramaëake—on Ramaëaka-dvépa; brahman—O brähmaëa; sarpa—snakes; ananyän—without other; vinä—without; katham—how; etan—this; me—to me; brühi—tell; sakalam—all; käliyasya—of Kaliya; abhavat—was; bhayam—fear.

     The king said: If only snakes lived on Ramaëaka-dvépa, why was Käliya afraid. O brähmaëa, please tell me this.

Text 2

çré-närada uväca 
tatra nägantako nityaà
     näga-saìghaà jaghäna ha
gata-kñobhaà caikadhä te
     tärkñyaà prähur bhayäturaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tatra—there; nägäntakaù—Garuòa, the killer of snakes; nityam—always; näga-saìgham—the snakes; jaghäna—killed; ha—Oh; gata-kñobham—peaceful; ca—and; ekadha—one day; te—they; tarkñyam—to Garuòa; prahuù—said; bhaya-äturaù—frightened.

     Çré Närada said: Garuòa would go there and kill many snakes. One day, when Garuòa was in a peaceful mood, the frightened snakes spoke to him.

Text 3

nägä ücuù 
he garutman namas tubhyaà
     tvaà säkñäd viñëu-vähanaù
asmän atsi yadä sarpän
     kathaà no jévanaà bhavet

     nägäù ücuù—the snakes said; he—O; garutman—garuòa; namaù—obeisances; tubhyam—to you; tvam—you; säkñät—directly; viñëu—of Lord Viñëu; vähanaù—the carrier; asmän—to us; atsi—you eat; yadä—when; sarpän—snakes; katham—why?; naù—of us; jévanam—life; bhavet—will be.

     O Garuòa, obeisances to you! You are Lord Viñëu's personal carrier. If You eat all us snakes, how will we continue to live?

Text 4

tasmäd balià gåhäëäçu
     mäse mäse gåhät påthak
vanaspati-sudhännänäà
     upacärair vidhänataù

     tasmät—therefore; balim—an offering; gåhäëa—please accept; äçu—promtly; mäse—month; mäse—after month; gåhät—from the home; påthak—specific; vanaspati-sudhännänäm—of the nectar of trees; upacäraiù—with offerings; vidhänataù—according to.

     Please accept from us each month an offering from a different house, an offering sweet as the honey of trees. 

Text 5

çré-garuòa uväca 
ekaù sarpas tu me deyo
     bhavadbhir vä gåhät påthak
kathaà pacämi tam åte
     balià véöakavat param

     çré-garuòaù uväca—Çré Garuòa said; ekaù—one; sarpaù—snake; tu—indeed; me—to me; deyaù—should be given; bhavadbhiù—by you; vä—or; gåhät—from the house; påthak—specific; katham—why?; pacämi—I shall eat; tam—that; åte—without; balim—offering; véöakavat—like betelnuts; param—great.

     Çré Garuòa said: Give me one snake from a designated house. Why should I eat any snake but this offering sweet as betelnuts.

Text 6

çré-närada uväca 
tathästu coktäs te sarve
     garuòäya mahätmane
go-péthäyätmano räjan
     nityaà divyaà balià daduù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tathä—so; astu—may be; ca—and; uktäù—said; te—they; sarve—all; garuòäya—to Garuòa; mahätmane—the great soul; go-péthäya—for protection; ätmanaù—own; räjan—O king; nityam—regularly; divyam—splendid; balim—offering; daduù—gave.

     Çré Närada said: To Garuòa, the great soul, they all said, "So be it." In this way for their own protection they regularly gave a splendid offering.

Text 7

käliyasya gåhasyäpi
     samayo 'bhüd yadä nåpa
tadä tärkñyaà balià sarvaà
     bubhuje käliyo balät

     käliyasya—of Kaliya; gåhasya—of the home; api—also; samayaù—the time; abhüt—came; yadä—when; nåpa—O king; tadä—then; tärkñyam—to garuòa; balim—offering; sarvam—all; bubhuje—ate; käliyaù—Kaliya; balät—because of strength.

     When the time came for an offering from Käliya's house, Käliya himself forcibly ate the offering intended for Garuòa.

Text 8

tadägataù prakupito
     vegataù käliyopari
cakära päda-vékñepaà
     garuòaç caëòa-vikramaù

     tadä—then; ägataù—came; prakupitaù—angry; vegataù—violently; käliyopari—on kaliya; cakära—did; päda-vékñepam—kicking; garuòaù—Garuòa; caëòa-vikramaù—powerful.

     When powerful Garuòa came he was very angry. He forcefully kicked Käliya.

Text 9

garuòäìghri-prahäreëa
     käliyo mürchito 'bhavat
punar utthäya jihväbhiù
     prävaléòhaà mukhaà çvasan

     garuòäìghri-prahäreëa—by the kicks of Garuòa; käliyaù—Kaliya; mürchitaù—fainted; abhavat—became; punaù—again; utthäya—rising; jihväbhiù—with tongues; prävaléòham—licking; mukham—mouth; çvasan—hissing.

     Garuòa kicked Käliya unconscious. Then Käliya again stood up, licking his tongue and hissing.

Text 10

prasärya svaà phaëa-çataà
     käliyaù phaëinäà varaù
vyadaçad garuòaà vegäd
     dadbhir viñamayair balé

     prasärya—expanding; svam—his; phaëa-çatam—hundred hoods; käliyaù—Kaliya; phaëinäm—of snakes; varaù—the best; vyadaçat—bit; garuòam—Garuòa; vegät—strongly; dadbhiù—with many fangs; viñamayaiù—poisonous; balé—strong.

     Then Käliya, the best of snakes, expanded his hundred hoods and with many fangs savagely bit Garuòa.

Text 11

gåhétvä taà ca tuëòena
     garuòo divya-vähanaù
bhü-påñöhe pothayäm äsa
     pakñäbhyäà täòayan muhuù

     gåhétvä—taking; tam—him; ca—and; tuëòena—by teh beak; garuòaù—Garuòa; divya-vähanaù—the transcendental carrier; bhü-påñöhe—to the earth; pothayäm äsa—threw; pakñäbhyäm—with both wongs; täòayan—beating; muhuù—again and again.

     With his beak the transcendental carrier Garuòa grabbed Käliya, threw him to the ground, and beat him with both wings again and again.

Text 12

tuëòäd vinirgataù sarpas
     tat-pakñän vicakarña ha
tat-pädau veñöayaàs tudyan
     phutkäraà vyadadhan muhuù

     tuëòät—from the beak; vinirgataù—escaped; sarpaù—the snake; tat-pakñän—from the wiongs; vicakarña—dragged; ha—indeed; tat-pädau——to his feet; veñöayan—surrounding; tudyan—striking; phutkäram—spitting; vyadadhan—doing; muhuù—again and again.

     Escaping from the beak, Käliya attacked Garuòa's wings. Coiling around Garuòa's feet, he spat poison again and again.

Text 13

kupito garuòas taà vai
     nétvä tuëòena käliyam
nipätya bhümyaà sahasä
     tat-tanuà vicakarña ha

     kupitaù—anghry; garuòaù—garuòa; tam—him; vai—indeed; nétvä—bringing; tuëòena—with the beak; käliyam—Kaliya; nipätya—throwing; bhümyäm—to the ground; sahasä—violently; tat-tanum—his body; vicakarña—dragged; ha—indeed.

     Then Garuòa became angry. Taking Käliya in his beak, he threw him to the ground and savagely dragged him here and there.

Text 14

tadä dudräva tat-tuëòät
     käliyo bhaya-vihvalaù
tam anvadhävat sahasä
     pakñi-räö caëòa-vikramaù

     tadä—then; dudräva—ran; tat-tuëòät—from the beak; käliyaù—Kaliya; bhaya-vihvalaù—terrified; tam—him; anvadhävat—chased; sahasä—quickly; pakñi—of birds; räö—the king; caëòa-vikramaù—very powerful.

     Terrified Käliya ran from Garuòa's beak. Garuòa, the king of birds, ardently chased him.

Text 15

sapta-dvépän sapta-khaëòän
     sapta-sindhüàs tataù phaëé
yatra yatra gatas tarkñyaà
     tatra tatra dadarça ha

     sapta-dvépänthe seven dvipas; sapta-khaëòän—the seven khandas; sapta-sindhüàù—the seven oceans; tataù—then; phaëé—the snake; yatra yatra—wherever; gataù—went; tarkñyam—Garuòa; tatra tatra—there; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Wherever he went in the seven dvépas, the seven khaëòas, and the seven oceans, the snake Käliya saw Garuòa.

Text 16

bhürlokaà ca bhuvarlokaà
     svarlokaà pragataù phaëé
maharlokaà tato dhävan
     janalokaà jagäma ha

     bhürlokam—Bhurloka; ca—aND; bhuvarlokam—Bhuvarloka; svarlokam—Svarloka; prägataù—went; phaëé—the snake; maharlokam—Maharloak; tataù—then; dhävan—runinng; janalokam—Janaloka; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     The snake Käliya fled to Bhürloka, Bhuvarloka, Svarloka, Maharloka, and Janaloka.

Text 17

yatraiva garuòe präpte
     'dho 'dho lokaà punar gataù
çré-kåñëasya bhayät ke 'pi
     rakñäà tasya na sandadhuù

     yatra—where; eva—indeed; garuòe—Garuòa; präpte—attained; adhaù—lower; adhaù—and lower; lokam—worlds; punaù—again; gataù—gone; çré-kåñëasya—of Kåñëa; bhayät—from the fear; ke api—someone; rakñäm—protection; tasya—of him; na—not; sandadhuù—gave.

     Then he fled to the lower planets, going lower and lower. Wherever he went, Garuòa was there. No one saved him from his fear of Lord Kåñëa's devotee.

Text 18

kuträpi na sukhe jäte
     käliyo 'pi bhayäturaù
jagäma deva-devasya
     çeñasya caraëäntike

     kuträpi—somewhere; na—not; sukhe—in happiness; jäte—born; käliyaù—Kaliya; api—even; bhayäturaù—terrified; jagäma—went; deva-devasya—of the master of the demigods; çeñasya—Çeña; caraëäntike—to the feet.

     Käliya could not find happiness. He was always afraid. Finally he approached the feet of Lord Ananta, the master of the demigods.

Text 19

natvä praëamya taà çeñaà
     parikramya kåtäïjaliù
déno bhayäturaù präha
     dérgha-påñöhaù prakampitaù

     natvä praëamya—bowing down; tam—to Him; çeñam—Çeña; parikramya—circumambulating; kåtäïaliù—folded hands; dénaù—humble; bhayäturaù—frightened; präha—said; dérgha-påñöhaù—the snake; prakampitaù—trembling.

     Bowing down before Lord Çeña and circumambulating Him with folded hands, the humbled, trembling, frightened snake spoke.

Text 20

käliya uväca 
he bhümi-bhartar bhuvaneça bhüman
     bhü-bhära-håt tvaà hy asi bhüri-lélaù
mäà pähi pähi prabhaviñëu-pürëaù
     parät paras tvaà puruñaù puräëaù

     käliyaù uväca—Çré Kaliya said; he—O; bhümi-bhartaù—maintainer of the world; bhuvaneça—O master of the world; bhüman—O Lord; bhü-bhära-håt—O holder of thr worlds; tvam—You; hi—indeed; asi—are; bhüri-lélaù—enjoying many pastimes; mäm—me; pähi—protect; pähi—protect; prabhaviñëu-pürëaù—powerful; parät—than the greatest; paraù—greater; tvam—You; puruñaù—person; puräëaù—ancient.

     Käliya said: O Lord, O master of the worlds, O maintainer of the worlds, O holder of the worlds' burden, You enjoy many pastimes. You are all-powerful. You are the ancient Supreme Person, greater than the greatest. Please, please protect me!

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
dénaà bhayäturaà dåñövä
     käliyaà çré-phaëéçvaraù
väcä madhurayä préëan
     präha devo janärdanaù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; dénam—humble; bhayäturam—frigthened; dåñövä—seeing; käliyam—Kaliya; çré-phaëéçvaraù—the king of snakes; väcä—with words; madhurayä—sweet; préëan—pleasing; präha—said; devaù—Lord; janärdanaù—the savior from miseries.

     Çré Närada said: Seeing Käliya so frightened and humble, Lord Ananta, the king of snakes and the savior from miseries, spoke in a sweet voice pleasing to Käliya.

Text 22

çré-çeña uväca *
he käliya mahä-buddhe
     çåëu me paramaà vacaù
kuträpi na hi te rakñä
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     çré-çeña uväca—Çré Çeña said; he—O; käliya—Kaliya; mahä-buddhe—very intelligent; çåëu—hear; me—my; paramam—supreme; vacaù—words; kuträpi—somewhere; na—not; hi—indeed; te—of you; rakña—protection; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Çré Çeña said: Intelligent Käliya, hear My divine words. There is no shelter for you anywhere. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 23

äsét purä muniù siddhaù
     çaubharir näma nämataù
våndäraëye tapas tapto
     varñäëäm ayutaà jale

     äsét—was; purä—before; muniù—a sage; siddhaù—perfect; çaubhariù—Çaubhari; näma—named; nämataù—named; våndäraëye—in Våndävana; tapas taptaù—performed austerities; varñäëäm—years; ayutam—ten thousand; jale—in the water.

     In ancient times there was a perfect sage named Çaurabhi Muni who performed austerities for ten thousand years in the waters in Våndävana.

Text 24

ména-räja-vihäraà yo
     vékñya geha-spåho 'bhavat
sa uväha mahä-buddhir
     mändhätus tanujä-çatam

     ména—of the fish; räja—of the king; vihäram—the pastimes; yaù—who; vékñya—seeing; geha—household life; spåhaù—desiring; abhavat—became; sa—he; uväha—married; mahä-buddhiù—very intelligent; mändhätuù—of mandhata Muni; tanujä—daughters; çatam—hundred.

     Watching the king of fish enjoy pastimes, Çaurabhi Muni desired to become a householder. He then married the hundred daughters of Mandhätä Muni.

Text 25

tasmai dadau hariù säkñät
     paräà bhägavatéà çriyaà
vékñya täà nåpa mändhätä
     vismito 'bhüd gata-smayaù

     tasmai—to him; dadau—gave; hariù—Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; paräm—great; bhägavatém—like the LOrd's; çriyam—opulence; vékñya—seeing; täm—it; nåpa—O king; mändhätä—Mandhata; vismitaù—astonished; abhüt—became; gata-smayaù—humbled.

     Lord Kåñëa gave Çaurabhi divine wealth and opulence. O king, when Mandhätä Muni saw that opulence, he became humbled and filled with wonder.

Text 26

yamunäntar-jale dérghaà
     çaubhares tapatas tapaù
paçyatas tasya garuòo
     ména-räjaà jaghäna ha

     yamunä—of the Yamunä; antaù—within; jale—in the water; dérgham—for a long time; çaubhareù—of Çaubhari; tapataù—performing; tapaù—austerities; paçyataù—seeing; tasya—of him; garuòaù—Garuòa; ména-räjam—the king of fish; jaghäna—killed; ha—indeed.

     As, in the midst of his austerities, Çaurabhi Muni was watching, Garuòa killed the king of the fish.

Text 27

ménän su-duùkhitän dåñövä
     duùkha-hä déna-vatsalaù
tasmai çäpaà dadau kruddhaù
     çaubharir muni-sattamaù

     ménän—the fish; su-duùkhitän—very unhappy; dåñövä—seeing; duùkha-hä—the destroyer of unhappiness; déna-vatsalaù—kind to the unhappy; tasmai—to him; çäpam—a curse; dadau—gave; kruddhaù—angry; çaubhariù—Çaurabhi; muni-sattamaù—the best of sages.

     Seeing the fish stricken with grief, the great sage Çaurabhi Muni, who was kind to the suffering and eager to stop their troubles, became angry and cursed Garuòa.

Text 28

çré-çaubharir uväca 
ménän adyatanäd atra
     yady atsi tvaà baläd dvi-räö
tadaiva präëa-näças te
     bhüyän me çapatas tvaram

     çré-çaubharir uväca—Çré ÇaubhaRI SAID; ménän—the fish; adyatanät—from this day on; atra—here; yadi—if; atsi—eat; tvam—you balät—violently; dvi-räö—O king of birds; tadä—then; eva—indeed; präëa—of life; näçaù—destruction; te—of you; bhüyät—will be; me—of me; çapataù—by the curse; tvaram—at once.

     Çré Çaubhari said: O Garuòa, O king of birds, if from today on you eat the fish here you will die at once. That is my curse.

Text 29

çré-çeña uväca 
tad-dinät tatra näyäti
     garuòaù çäpa-vihvalaù
tasmät käliya gacchäçu
     våndäraëye harer vane

     çré-çeñaù uväca— Çré Çeça said; tad-dinät—from that day; tatra—there; na—not; äyäti—comes; garuòaù—Garuòa; çäpa—because of the curse; vihvalaù—agitated; tasmät—therefore; käliya—O Kaliya; gaccha—go; äçu—at once; våndäraëye—to Våndävana; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; vane—the forest.

     Çré Çeña said: Afraid of the curse, from that day on Garuòa has not come there. O Käliya, for that reason you should go at once to Lord Kåñëa's forest of Våndävana.

Text 30

kälindyäà ca nijaà väsaà
     kuru mad-väkya-noditaù
nirbhayas te bhayaà tärkñyän
     na bhaviñyati karhicit

     kälindyäm—in the Yamunä; ca—and; nijam—own; väsam—home; kuru—do; mad-väkya-noditaù—on My instruction; nirbhayaù—fearless; te—of you; bhayam—fear; tärkñyän—garuòa; na—not; bhaviñyati—will be; karhicit—ever.

     By My order make your home in the Yamunä. There you will be fearless. You will never fear Garuòa.

Text 31

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktaù käliyo bhétaù
     sa-kalatraù sa-putrakaù
kälindyäà väsa-kåd räjan
     çré-kåñëena viväsitaù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; uktaù—addressed; käliyaù—Kaliya; bhétaù—frightened; sa-kalatraù—with his wives; sa-putrakaù—with his children; kälindyäm—in the Yamuna; väsa-kåt—masking his home; räjan—O king; çré-kåñëena—by Çré Kåñëa; viväsitaù—sent away.

     Çré Närada said: When he was told this, Käliya went with his wives and children to the Yamunä, where he lived until Çré Kåñëa sent him out.
.pa

Chapter Fifteen
Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa-premodyoga-varëana
Description of Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa's Falling in Love

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
idaà mayä te kathitaà
     käliyasyäpi mardanam
çré-kåñëa-caritaà puëyaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—told; käliyasya—of Kaliya; api—also; mardanam—the defeat; çré-kåñëa-caritam—Çré Kåñëa's pastimes; puëyam—sacred; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to her; icchasi—you wish.

     Çré Närada said: I have recounted to you Çré Kåñëa's sacred pastime of crushing Käliya. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 2

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
çré-kåñëasya kathäà çrutvä
     bhaktas tåptià na yäti hi
yathämaraù sudhäà pitvä
     yathäliù padma-karëikäm

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; katham—the topics; çrutvä—hearing; bhaktaù—the devotee; tåptim—satiation; na—not; yäti—attains; hi—indeed; yathä—as; amaraù—a demigod; sudhäm—nectar; pitvä—drinking; yathä—as; aliù—a bee; padma—of a lotus; karëikäm—the whorl.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: As a demigod never tires of drinking nectar and a bee never tires of drinking from the whorl of a lotus, so a devotee never tires of hearing Çré Kåñëa's pastimes.

Text 3

räsaà kartuà harau jäte
     çiçu-rüpe mahätmäni
bhäëòire deva-väg äha
     çré-rädhäà khinna-mänasäm

     räsam—the rasa dance; kartum—to perform; harau—when Lord Kåñëa; jäte—was manifested; çiçu-rüpe—in the form of a child; mahätmani——the Lord; bhäëòire—in Bhandiravana; deva—of a demigod; väk—the voice; äha—said; çré-rädhäm—to Çré Rädhä; khinna-mänasäm—who was unhappy at heart.

     When Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, was a child, and Çré Rädhä was unhappy at heart because She yearned to enjoy the räsa dance with Him, in Bhäëòiravana forest a divine voice said: 

Text 4

çocaà ma kuru kalyäëi
     våndäraëye manohare
manorathas te bhavitä
     çré-kåñëena mahätmanä

     çocam—lamentation; ma—don't; kuru—do; kalyäëi—O beautiful one; våndäraëye—in Våndävana forest; manohare—beautiful; manorathaù—desire; te—Your; bhavitä—will be; çré-kåñëena—with Lord Kåñëa; mahätmanä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     O beautiful one, don't lament. In beautiful Våndävana forest Your desire to enjoy with Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, will be fulfilled.

Text 5

itthaà deva-girä prokto
     manoratha-mahärëavaù
kathaà babhüva bhagavän
     våndäraëye manohare

     ittham—thus; deva-girä—by the divine voice; proktaù—addressed; manoratha—of desires; mahä—a great; arëavaù—ocean; katham—how?; babhüva—became; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; våndäraëye—in Våndävana; manohare—beautiful.

     After the divine voice spoke these words how did the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is a great ocean of fulfilled desires, come to beautiful Våndävana forest??

Text 6

kathaà çré-rädhayä särdhaà
     räsa-kréòäà manoharäm
cakära våndakäraëye
     paripürëatamaù svayam

     katham—how?; çré-rädhayä—Çré Rädhä; särdham—with; räsa-kréòäm—the rasa pastime; manoharäm—beautiful; cakära—did; våndakäraëye—in Våndävana; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—Himself.

     In beautiful Våndävana forest how did the Supreme Personality of Godhead enjoy the räsa-dance pastime with Çré Rädhä?

Text 7

çré-närada uväca 
sädhu påñöhaà tvayä räjan
     bhagavac-caritaà çubham
guptaà vadämi devaiç ca
     léläkhyänaà manoharam

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; sädhu—well; påñöham—asked; tvayä—by you; räjan—O king; bhagavac-caritam—the Lord's pastimes; çubham—auspicious; guptam—secret; vadämi—I tell; devaiç—by the demigods; ca—and; léläkhyänam—the story of pastimes; manoharam—beautiful.

     Çré Närada said: O king, you have asked well. I will tell the Lord's beautiful and auspicious pastime, which is hidden even from the demigods.

Text 8

ekadä mukhya-sakhyau dve
     viçäkhä-lalite çubhe
våñabhänor gåhaà präpya
     taà rädhäà jagmatü rahaù

     ekadä—one day; mukhya-sakhyau—the two most important friends; dve—two; viçäkhä-lalite—Viçäkhä and Lalitä; çubhe—beautioful; våñabhänoù—of King Våñabhänu;  gåham—to the home; präpya—attaining; tam—to Her; rädhäm—Rädhä; jagmatü—wnet; rahaù—in private.

     One day Her two most intimate friends, beautiful Lalitä and Viçäkhä, went to Mahäräja Våñabhänu's palace and approached Rädhä in private. 

Text 9

çré-sakhyäv ücatuù 
yaà cintayasi rädhe tvaà
     yad-guëaà vadasi svataù
so 'pi nityaà samäyäti
     våñabhänu-pure 'rbhakaiù

     çré-sakhyau ücatuù—the two friends said; yam—whom; cintayasi—You meditate; rädhe—O Rädhä; tvam—You; yad-guëam—whose virtues; vadasi—You say; svataù—Himself; saù—He; api—aslo; nityam—always; samäyäti—comes; våñabhänu-pure—to the palace of King Våñabhänu; arbhakaiù—with many boys.

     The two friends said: He on whom You meditate and whose virtues You praise, with many boys again and again comes to King Våñabhänu's palace.

Text 10

prekñaëéyas tvayä rädhe
     darçanéyo 'ti-sundaraù
paçcimäyäà niçéthinyäà
     go-cäraëa-vinirgataù

     prekñaëéyaù—should be seen; tvayä—by You; rädhe—O Rädhä; darçanéyaù—should be seen; ati-sundaraù—very handsome; paçcimäyäm—in the west; niçéthinyäm—in the evening; go-cäraëa—from herding the cows; vinirgataù—returning.

     O Rädhä, in the evening He comes from the west, returning with the cows. You should see Him. He is very handsome.

Text 11

çré-rädhoväca 
likhitvä tasya citraà hi
     darçayäçu manoharam
tarhi tat-prekñaëaà paçcät
     kariñyämi na saàçayaù

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; likhitvä—having drawn; tasya—His; citram—picture; hi—indeed; darçaya—show; äçu—at once; manoharam—handsome; tarhi—then; tat-prekñaëam—seeing Him; paçcät—from the west; kariñyämi—I will do; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Çré Rädhä said: Draw a handsome picture of Him. Then I will look for Him in the west. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 12

çré-närada uväca 
atha sakhyau vyalikhatäà
     citraà nanda-çiçoù çubham
nava-yauvana-mädhuryaà
     rädhäyai dadatus tvaram

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; sakhyau—the two friends; vyalikhatäm—drew; citram—a picture; nanda—of Nanda; çiçoù—of the son; çubham—handsome; nava-yauvana-mädhuryam—sweet with new youth; rädhäyai—to Rädhä; dadatuù—gave; tvaram—at once.

     The two friends drew a picture, handsome and filled with the sweetness of new youth, of Nanda's son, Kåñëa, and gave it to Rädhä.

Text 13

tad dåñövä harñitä rädhä
     kåñëa-darçana-lälasä
citraà kare präpaçyanté
     suñväpänanda-saìkulä

     tat—that; dåñövä—seeing; harñitä—happy; rädhä—Rädhä; kåñëa-darçana-lälasä—yearning to see Kåñëa; citram—picture; kare—in Her hand; prapaçyanté—gazing; suñväpa—fainted; änanda—with bliss; saìkulä—filled.

     When Rädhä saw the picture She became very happy. Gazing at the picture in Her hand, yearning to see Kåñëa, and now overcome with bliss, She fainted. 

Text 14

dadarça kåñëaà bhavane çayänä
     ghana-prabhaà péta-paöaà dadhänam
bhäëòéra-deçe yamunäà sametya
     nåtyantam äräd våñabhänu-putré

     dadarça—saw; kåñëam—Kåñëa; bhavane—in Her home; çayänä—resting; ghana-prabham—splendid as a monsoon cloud; péta-paöam—wearing yellow garments; dadhänam—wearing; bhäëòéra-deçe—in Bhandiravana; yamunäm—to the Yamunä; sametya—going; nåtyantam—dancing; ärät—near; våñabhänu-putré—Våñabhänu's daughter.

     As She slept in Her home, Våñabhänu's daughter Rädhä  dreamed of going to the Yamunä, where She gazed at Kåñëa, dark as a monsoon cloud, dressed in yellow garments, and dancing in Bhäëòéravana forest.

Text 15

tadaiva rädhä çayanät samutthitä
     parasya kåñëasya viyoga-vihvalä
saïcintayanté kamanéya-rüpiëaà
     mene trilokéà tåëavad videha-räö

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; rädhä—Rädhä; çayanät—from sleep; samutthitä—rising; parasya—of the Supreme; kåñëasya—Kåñëa; viyoga-vihvalä—in the anguish of separation; saïcintayanté—remembering; kamanéya-rüpiëam—handsome; mene—considered; trilokém—the three worlds; tåëavat—like a blade of grass; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, when Rädhä rose from sleep, She was filled with the anguish of separation from Kåñëa. Always thinking of His handsome form, She thought the three worlds had become like a single blade of grass.

Text 16

tarhy ävrajantaà sva-vanäd vrajeçvaraà
     saìkoca-véthyäà våñabhänu-paööane
gaväkñam etyäçu sakhé-pradarçitaà
     dåñövä tu murcchäà samaväpa sundaré

     tarhi—then; ävrajantam—coming; sva-vanät—from His forest; vrajeçvaram—the king of Vraja; saìkoca-véthyäm—on a narrow path; våñabhänu-paööane—in Våñabhänu's palace; gaväkñam—to the window; etya—going; äçu—at once; sakhé—by Her friends; pradarçitam—shown; dåñövä—seeing; tu—indeed; murcchäm—fainting; samaväpa—attained; sundaré—the beautiful girl.

     Going to a window and, as Her two friends pointed to Him, gazing at Kåñëa, the master of Vraja as He walked on the narrow path from His own forest to King Våñabhänu's palace, beautiful Rädhä fainted.

Text 17

kåñëo 'pi dåñövä våñabhänu-nandinéà
     surüpa-kauçalya-yutäà guëäçrayäm
kurvan mano rantum atéva mädhavo
     lélä-tanuù sa prayayau sva-mandiram

     kåñëaù—Kåñëa; api—also; dåñövä—seeing; våñabhänu-nandiném—the daughter of Våñabhänu; surüpa-kauçalya-yutam—beautiful; guëäçrayam—where many transcendental virtues are sheltered; kurvan—doing; manaù—the heart; rantum—to rejoice; atéva—greatly; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; lélä-tanuù—pastime form; sa—He; prayayau—went; sva-mandiram—to His own palace.

     Glancing at Våñabhänu's beautiful daughter Rädhä, who sheltered a host of transcendental virtues, and deciding in His heart to enjoy with Her, playful Kåñëa went on to His own palace.

Text 18

evaà tataù kåñëa-viyoga-vihvaläà
     prabhüta-käma-jvara-khinna-mänasäm
samvékñya rädhäà våñabhänu-nandinéà
     uväca väcaà lalitä sakhé varä

     evam—thus; tataù—from that; kåñëa-viyoga-vihvaläm—anxious in separation from Kåñëa; prabhüta-käma-jvara—by the flames of desire; khinna—tormented; mänasäm—heart; samvékñya—seeing; rädhäm—Rädhä; våñabhänu-nandiném—Våñabhänu's daughter; uväca—said; väcam—words; lalitä—Lalitä; sakhé—friend; varä—best.

     Seeing Her anguished by Kåñëa's absence and Her heart tortured by flames of love for Him, beautiful Lalitä-sakhé spoke to Våñabhänu's daughter Rädhä.

Text 19

çré-lalitoväca 
kathaà tvaà vihvalä rädhe
     mürcchitäti-vyathäà gatä
yadécchasi harià su-bhru
     tasmin snehaà dåòhaà kuru

     çré-lalitä uväca—Çré Lalitä said; katham—why?; tvam—You; vihvalä—overcome; rädhe—O Rädhä; mürcchitäti-vyathäm—fasinting; gatä—attained; yadi—if; icchasi—You wish; harim—to Kåñëa; su-bhru—O girl with the beautiful eyebrows; tasmin—in Him; sneham—love; dåòham—strong. kuru—do.

     Çré Lalitä said: O Rädhä, why are You unconscious? O beautiful-eyebowed one, if You wish to attain Kåñëa, then give all Your love to Him.

Text 20

lokasyäpi sukhaà sarvaà
     adhikåtyästi sämpratam
duùkhägni-håt pradahati
     kumbhakärägni-vac chubhe

     lokasya—of the world; api—even; sukham—the happiness; sarvam—all; adhikåtya—attaining; asti—is; sämpratam—now; duùkha—of misery; agni—fire; håt—heart; pradahati—burns; kumbhakärägni-vat—like a potter's fire; çubhe—O beautiful one.

     O beautiful one, even now that You have found the person that brings all happiness to the world, Your heart still burns like the fire in a potter's kiln.

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
lalitäyäç ca lalitaà
     vacaù çrutvä vrajeçvaré
netre unmélya lalitäà
     präha gadgadayä girä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; lalitäyäç—of Lalitä; ca—and; lalitam—eloquent; vacaù—words; çrutvä—hearing; vrajeçvaré—the queen of Vraja; netre—eyes; unmélya—opening; lalitäm—to lalitä; präha—said; gadgadayä—choked up; girä—with a voice.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing Lalitä's graceful words, Vraja's goddess, Rädhä, opened Her eyes and spoke in a faltering voice.

Text 22

çré-rädhoväca 
vrajälaìkära-caraëau
     na präptau yadi me kila
kadäcid vigrahaà tarhi
     na hi svaà dhärayämy aham

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; vraja—of Vraja; alaìkära—the decoration;caraëau— na—whose feet; präptau—attained; yadi—if; me—by Me; kila—indeed; kadäcit—at some time; vigraham—the form; tarhi—then; na—not; hi—indeed; svam—own; dhärayämi—I maintain; aham—I.

     Çré Rädhä said: If I cannot attain His feet, which now decorate this land of Vraja, I will not keep My body alive.

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä vacas tasyä
     lalitä bhaya-vihvalä
çré-kåñëa-pärçvaà prayayau
     kåñëä-tére manohare

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—the words; tasyä—of Her; lalitä—Lalitä; bhaya—with fear; vihvalä—overcome; çré-kåñëa-pärçvam—to Lord Kåñëa's side; prayayau—went; kåñëä-tére—on the Yamunä's shore; manohare—beautiful.

     Çré Närada said: Terrified by hearing these words, Lalitä went to Kåñëa by the Yamunä's beautiful shore.

Text 24

mädhavé-jäla-samyukte
     madhura-dhvani-saìkule
kadamba-müle rahasi
     präha caikäkinaà harim

     mädhavé—of madhavi vines; jäla—with a network; samyukte—endowed; madhura-dhvani-saìkule—filled with sweet sounds; kadamba-müle—at the root of a kadamba tree; rahasi—in a secluded place; präha—said; ca—and; ekäkinam—all alone; harim—to Kåñëa.

     Finding Kåñëa all alone under a kadamba tree in a solitary place laced with a network of flowering mädhavé vines and filled with sweet sounds, Lalitä spoke.

Text 25

çré-lalitoväca 
yasmin dine ca te rüpaà
     rädhayä dåñöam adbhutam
tad-dinät stambhatäà präptä
     putrikeva na väkti kim

     çré-lalitä uväca—Çré Lalitä said; yasmin—in which; dine—day; ca—and; te—of You; rüpam—the form; rädhayä—by Rädhä; dåñöam—seen; adbhutam—wonderful; tad-dinät—from that day; stambhatäm—the state of being stunned; präptä—attained; putrikä—a puppet; iva—like; na—not; väkti—speaks; kim—why?

     Çré Lalitä said: Since the day She first saw Your wonderful form, Rädhä has been stunned. She is like a motionless puppet. She does not even speak.

Texts 26 and 27

alaìkäras tv arcir iva
     vastraà bharja-rajo yathä
sugandhiù kaöuvad yasya
     mandiraà nirjanaà vanam

puñpaà bäëaà candra-bimbaà
     viña-kandam avehi bhoù
tasyai sandarçanaà dehi
     rädhayai duùkha-näçanam

     alaìkäraù—an ornament; tv—indeed; arciù—the sun; iva—like; vastram—garments; bharja-rajaù—sparks; yathä—as; sugandhiù—fragrance; kaöuvat—as if bitter; yasya—of whom; mandiram—the placae; nirjanam—solitary; vanam—wilderness; puñpam—flower; bäëam—arrow; candra-bimbam—the circle of the moon; viña-kandam—a pot of poison; avehi—know; bhoù—O; tasyai—to Her; sandarçanam—sight; dehi—please give; rädhayai—to Rädhä; duùkha—of sufferings; näçanam—destruction.

     Please know that Her ornaments have become for Her like dazzling suns, Her clothing like a shower of sparks, Her perfumes bitter, Her palace a solitary wilderness, Her flowers sharp arrows, and the moon a pot of poison. O, please give to Rädhä the sight of You, a sight that will destroy Her sufferings.

Text 28

te säkñiëaù kià viditaà na bhü-tale
     såjasy alaà päsi harasy atho jagat
yadä samäno 'si janeñu sarvatas
     tathäpi bhaktän bhajase pareçvara

     te—of You; säkñiëaù—witness; kim—whether?; viditam—known; na—not; bhü-tale—on the surface of the earth; såjasi—You create; alam—greatly; päsi—You maintain; harasi—You remove; athaù—then; jagat—the universe; yadä—when; samänaù—equal; asi—You are; janeñu—to the people; sarvataù—in all respects; tathäpi—still; bhaktän—the devotees; bhajase—You worship; pareçvara—O Supreme Lord.

     You see everything. In this world what do You not know? You create, protect, and destroy the universe. O Supreme Lord. although You are equal to all, You worship Your devotees.

Text 29

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä hariù säkñäl
     lalitaà lalitä-vacaù
uväca bhagavän devo
     megha-gambhérayä girä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; hariù—Kåñëa; säkñäl—directly; lalitam—garceful; lalitä—of Lalitä; vacaù—teh words; uväca—said; bhagavän—the Lord; devaù—the Lord; megha—of clouds; gambhérayä—deep; girä—with words.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing Lalitä's graceful words, Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, spoke with words deep as thunder.

Text 30

çré-bhagavän uväca 
sarvaà hi bhävaà manasaù parasparaà
     na hy ekato bhämini jäyate tataù
premaiva kartavyam ato mayi svataù
     premëä samänaà bhuvi nästi kiïcit

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; sarvam—all; hi—indeed; bhävam—love; manasaù—of theheart; parasparam—mutual; na—not; hi—indeed; ekataù—from one; bhämini—O noble lady; jäyate—is born; tataù—therefore; prema—love; eva—indeed; kartavyam—should be done; ataù—then; mayi—in Me; svataù—personally; premëä—with love; samänam—equality; bhuvi—in the world; na—not; asti—is; kiïcit—at all.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: We both feel this love in Our hearts. O noble girl, it is not that only one of Us feels it. She should love Me. In this world there is nothing equal to the love She bears for Me.

Text 31

yathä hi bhäëòéravane manoratho
     babhüva tasyä hi tathä bhaviñyati
ahaitukaà prema ca sadbhir äçritaà
     tac cäpi santaù kila nirguëaà viduù

     yathä—as; hi—indeed; bhäëòéravane—in Bhandiravana; manorathaù—the desire; babhüva—was; tasya—of Her; hi—indeed; tathä—so; bhaviñyati—will be; ahaitukam—causeless; prema—love; ca—and; sadbhiù—by the saintly devotees; äçritam—sheltered; tac—that; ca—and; api—also; santaù—the devotees; kila—indeed; nirguëam—beyond the modes of nature; viduù—know.

     The desire She felt in Bhäëòéravana forest will be fulfilled. Saintly devotees take shelter of pure unalloyed love for Me. Saintly devotees know that love for Me is beyond the touch of the matter.

Text 32

ye rädhikäyäà mayi keçave manäg
     bhedaà na paçyanti hi dugdha-çauklavat
ta eva me brahma-padaà prayänti tad
     ahaituka-sphurjita-bhakti-lakñaëäù

     ye—they who; rädhikäyäm—in Rädhä; mayi—in M; keçave—Kåñëa; manäg—at all; bhedam—difference; na—not; paçyanti—see; hi—indeed; dugdha—milk; çaukla—white; vat—like; te—they; eva—indeed; me—My; brahma-padam—spiritual abode; prayänti—go; tat—that; ahaituka-sphurjita-bhakti-lakñaëaù—pure unalloyed devotees.

     Pure devotees who see no difference between Çré Rädhä and Myself, Lord Kåñëa, attain My spiritual abode, which is pure as the whitest milk.

Text 33

ye rädhikäyäà mayi keçave harau
     kurvanti bhedaà ku-dhiyo janä bhuvi
te käla-sütraà prapatanti duùkhitä
     rambhoru yävat kila candra-bhäskarau

     ye—who; rädhikäyäm—in Çré Rädhä; mayi—in Me; keçave—Lord Kåñëa; harau—Lord Hari; kurvanti—do; bhedam—difference; ku-dhiyaù—fools; janäù—persons; bhuvi—in the world; te—they; käla—of time; sutram—the rope; prapatanti—fall; duùkhitä—miserable; rambhoru—O girl whose thighs are like banana trees; yävat—as; kila—indeed; candra—the moon; bhäskarau—and the shining sun.

     Fools who see a difference between Çré Rädhä and Myself, Lord Kåñëa, fall onto the string of time. O girl with thighs like banana trees, they are tortured for as long the sun and moon exist.

Text 34

çré-närada uväca 
itthaà çrutvä vacaù kåtsnaà
     natvä taà lalitä sakhé
rädhäà sametya rahasi
     präha prahasitänanä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—words; kåtsnam—all; natvä—bowing down; tam—to Him; lalitä—Lalitä; sakhé—friend; rädhäm—to Rädhä; sametya—going; rahasi—in a secluded place; präha—said; prahasita—smiling; änanä—face.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing all these words, and after bowing before the Lord, Lalitä-sakhé, her face full of smiles, approached Rädhä in a solitary place and spoke to Her.

Text 35

çré-lalitoväca 
tvam icchasi yathä� kåñëaà
     tathä tvaà madhusüdanaù
yuvayor bheda-rahitaà
     tejas tv aikaà dvidhä janaiù

     çré-lalitä uväca—Çré Lalitä said; tvam—You; icchasi—desire; yathä—ass; kåñëam—Kåñëa; tathä—so; tvam—You; madhusüdanaù—Kåñëa; yuvayoù—of You both; bheda-rahitam—without difference; tejaù—power; tv—indeed; aikam—one; dvidhä—in two; janaiù—by the people.

     Çré Lalitä said: As You desire Kåñëa, so Kåñëa desires You. There is no difference between You. You are one. Only fools think You are two.

Text 36

tathäpi devi kåñëäya
     karma niñkäraëaà kuru
yena te väïchitaà bhüyäd
     bhaktyä paramayä sati

     tathäpi—still; devi—O goddess; kåñëäya—for Kåñëa; karma—work; niñkäraëam—causeless; kuru—do; yena—by which; te—of You; väïchitam—desired; bhüyät—may be; bhaktyä—with devotion; paramayä—great; sati—O saintly one.

     O goddess, You should serve Kåñëa without any other desire. O saintly one, by serving Him with great devotion, Your desire will be fulfilled.

Text 37

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä sakhé-väkyaà
     rädhä räseçvaré nåpa
candränanäà präha sakhéà
     sarva-dharma-vidäà varäm

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said: ; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; sakhé-väkyam—the words of Her friend; rädhä—Rädhä; räseçvaré—the goddess of the räsa dance; nåpa—O king; candränanäm—to Candränanä; präha—said; sakhém—friend; sarva-dharma-vidäm—of they who know all the principles of religion; varäm—the best.

     Çré Närada said: O king, after hearing Her friend's words, Çré Rädhä, the goddess of the räsa dance, spoke to Her friend Candränanä, the best of the knowers of religion.

Text 38

çré-rädhoväca 
çré-kåñëasya prasannärthaà
     paraà saubhägya-vardhanam
mahä-puëyaà väïchita-daà
     püjanaà vada kasyacit

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; çré-kåñëasya—to Çré Kåñëa; prasanna-making happy; artham—for the purpose; param—great; saubhägya—good fortune; vardhanam—increase; mahä-puëyam—great piety; väïchita—desire; dam—fulfilling; püjanam—worship; vada—please tell; kasyacit—of someone.

     Çré Rädhä said: Please tell Me what kind of worship I should perform to please Çré Kåñëa, worship that will bring auspiciousness, piety, and the fulfillment of My desire.

Text 39

tvayä bhadre dharma-çästraà
     gargäcärya-mukhäc chrutam
tasmäd vrataà püjanaà vä
     brühi mahyaà mahä-mate

     tvayä—by you; bhadre—O beautiful one; dharma-çästram—the scriptures of religion; gargäcärya-mukhät—from the mouth of Garga Muni; çrutam—heard; tasmät—from that; vratam—vow; püjanam—worship; vä—or; brühi—tell; mahyam—to Me; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     O beautiful one, You heard the religious scriptures from Garga Muni's own mouth. O noble-hearted one, please tell Me what vow or what worship I should perform.

Chapter Sixteen
Tulasé-püjana
The Worship of Tulasé

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
rädhä-väkyaà tataù çrutvä
     räjan sarva-sakhé-varä
candränanä pratyuväca
     samvicärya kñaëaà hådi

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rädhä-väkyam—the words of Çré Rädhä; tataù—then; çrutvä—hearing; räjan—O king; sarva—all; sakhé—friends; varä—the best; candränanä—Candränanä; pratyuväca—replied; samvicärya—considering; kñaëam—for a moment; hådi—in her heart.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing Rädhä's words, and reflecting on them in her heart for a moment, Candränanä, the best of all friends, replied.

Text 2

çré-candränanoväca 
paraà saubhägya-daà rädhe
     mahä-puëyaà vara-pradam
çré-kåñëasyäpi labdhy-arthaà
     tulasé-sevanaà matam

     çré-candränanä uväca—Çré Candränanä said; param—great; saubhägya-dam—giving good fortune; rädhe—O Rädhä; mahä-puëyam—very sacred; vara-pradam—granting blessings; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; api—even; labdhy-artham—to attain; tulasé—of Tulasé; sevanam—the service; matam—is considered.

     Çré Candränanä said: O Rädhä, service to Tulasé gives the greatest piety, the greatest good fortune, and the greatest benediction. It gives Lord Kåñëa's association.

Text 3

dåñöä spåñöäthavä dhyatä
     kértitä namitä stutä
ropitä siïcitä nityaà
     püjitä tulaséñöa-dä

     dåñöä—seen; spåñöä—touched; athavä—or; dhyatä—remembered; kértitä—glorified; namitä—bowed down; stutä—offered prayers; ropitä—planted; siïcitä—watered; nityam—always; püjitä—worshiped; tulasé—Tulasé; iñöa—desires; dä—granting.

     You should always gaze on Tulasé, touch her, remember her, glorify her, bow down before her, offer prayers to her, plant her, and worship her. Then she will grant Your desire.

Text 4

navadhä tulasé-bhaktià
     ye kurvanti dine dine
yuga-koöi-sahasräëi
     te yänti sukåtaà çubhe

     navadhä—nine kinds; tulasé-bhaktim—devotional service to Tulasé; ye—who; kurvanti—do; dine—day; dine—after day; yuga—of yugas; koöi——ten million; sahasräëi—thousands; te—they; yänti—attain; sukåtam—piety; çubhe—O beautiful one.

     They who day after day serve Tulasé in these nine ways attain the result of pious deeds performed in many thousands of millions of yugas.

Texts 5 and 6

yävac chäkhä-praçäkhäbhir
     béja-puñpa-dalaiù çubhaiù
ropitä tulasé martyair
     vardhate vasudhä-tale

teñäà vaàçeñu ye jätä
     ye bhaviñyanti ye gatäù
ä-kalpa-yuga-sähasraà
     teñäà väso harer gåhe

     yävat—as; chäkhä—branches; praçäkhäbhiù—and sub-branches; béja—seeds; puñpa—flowers; dalaiù—leaves; çubhaiù—beautiful and auspicious; ropitä—planted; tulasé—Tulasé; martyaiù—by human beings; vardhate—increases; vasudhä-tale—on the surface of the earth; teñäm—of them; vaàçeñu—in the families; ye—who; jätä—born; ye—who; bhaviñyanti—will be; ye—who; gatäù—have gone; ä-kalpa-yuga-sähasram—a thousand kalpa-yugas; teñäm—of them; väsaù—residence; hareù—of Lord Hari; gåhe—in the home.

     A person who who plants Tulasé liberates his family. As many branches, sub-branches, seeds, flowers, and leaves as are on the Tulasé he has planted, so many ancestors and descendents in his family for thousands of kalpa-yugas will go to Lord Kåñëa's transcendental abode.

Text 7

yat phalaà sarva-patreñu
     sarva-puñpeñu rädhike
tulasé-dalena caikena
     sarvadä präpyate tu tat

     yat—what; phalam—result; sarva-patreñu—on all leaves; sarva-puñpeñu—on all flowers; rädhike—O Rädhä; tulasé-dalena—by a Tulasé leaf; ca—and; ekena—by one; sarvadä—always; präpyate—is attained; tu—indeed; tat—that.

     O Rädhä, by offering Lord Kåñëa a single Tulasé leaf one attains the result of offering Him every flower and leaf that exists.

Text 8

tulasé-prabhavair patrair
     yo naraù püjayed dharim
lipyate na sa päpena
     padma-patram ivämbhasä

     tulasé—from Tulasé; prabhavaiù—grown; patraiù—with leaves; yaù—who; naraù—a person; püjayet—worships; harim—Kåñëa; lipyate—is touched; na—not; saù—he; päpena—by sin; padma-patram—a lotus leaf; iva—like; ambhasa—by water.

     A person who with offerings of Tulasé-leaves worships Lord Kåñëa is not touched by sin as a lotus-leaf is not touched by water.

Text 9

suvarëa-bhära-çatakaà
     rajataà yac-catur-guëam
tat-phalaà samaväpnoti
     tulasé-vana-pälanät

     suvarëa—of gold; bhära—bharas; çatakam—a hundred; rajatam—silver; yac-catur-guëam—four times; tat-phalam—that result; samaväpnoti—attains; tulasé—of Tulasé; vana—of a forest; pälanät—from protection.

     By protecting a Tulasé forest one attains the result of giving in pious charity a hundred bhäras of gold or four hundred bhäras of silver.

Text 10

tulasé-känanaà rädhe
     gåhe yasyävatiñöhati
tad-gåhaà tértha-rüpaà hi
     na yänti yama-kiìkaräù

     tulasé—of Tulasé; känanam—a forest; rädhe—O Rädhä; gåhe—in the home; yasya—of whom; avatiñöhati—stays; tad-gåham—that home; tértha—of a pilgrimage place; rüpam—teh form; hi—not; na—indeed; yänti—go; yama—of Yamaräja; kiìkaräù—the servants.

     A home in the midst of a Tulasé forest is a sacred pilgrimage place. Yamaräja's servants will never enter that home.

Text 11

sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     kämadaà tulasé-vanam
ropayanti naräù çreñöhäs
     te na paçyanti bhäskarim

     sarva—all; päpa—sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; kämadam—fulfilling desires; tulasé—Tulasé; vanam—forest; ropayanti—plants; naräù—people; çreñöhäù—the best; te—they; na—not; paçyanti—see; bhäskarim—Yamaräja.

     They who plant a sacred Tulasé forest, which fulfills desires and removes all sins, are the best of people. They will never see Yamaräja.

Text 12

ropanät pälanät sekäd
     darçanät sparçanän nåëäm
tulasé dahate päpaà
     väì-manaù-käya-saïcitam

     ropanät—from planting; pälanät—from maintaining; sekät—from watering; darçanät—from seeing; sparçanän—from touching; nåëäm—of men; tulasé—Tulasé; dahate—burns; päpam—sin; väk—words; manaù—mind; käya—body; sa{—.sy 24citam—accumulated.

     For persons who plant, protect, water, see, or touch her, Tulasé burns the sins committed with the body, mind, and words.

Text 13

puñkarädyäni térthäni
     gaìgädyäù saritas tathä
väsudevädayo devä
     vasanti tulasé-dale

     puñkara—with Puñkara Lake; ädyäni—beginning; térthäni—holy places; gaìgä—the Gaìgä; ädyäù—beginning with; saritaù—rivers; tathä—so; väsudeva—with Lord Väsudeva; ädayaù—beginning with; devä—Deities; vasanti—reside; tulasé—Tulasé; dale—on a single leaf.

     On a single Tulasé leaf the holy places beginning with Puñkara, the sacred rivers beginning with the Gaìgä, and the Deities headed by Lord Väsudeva reside.

Text 14

tulasé-maïjaré-yukto
     yas tu präëän vimuïcati
yamo 'pi nekñituà çakto
     yuktaà päpa-çatair api

     tulasé-maïjaré-yuktaù—with a Tulasé-ma 24jaré; yaù—one whop; tu—indeed; präëän—life; vimuïcati—abandons; yamaù—Yamaräja; api—even; na—not; ékñitum—to see; çaktaù—is able; yuktam—endowed; päpa—of sins; çataiù—with hundreds; api—even.

     Even though stained with a hundred sins, a person who touches a Tulasé-maïjaré as he leaves this life does not see Yamaräja.

Text 15

tulasé-kañöha-jaà yas tu
     candanaà dhärayen naraù
tad dehaà na spåçet päpaà
     kriyamäëam apéha yat

     tulasé—Tulasé; kañöha—wood; jam—born; yaù—one who; tu—indeed; candanam—sandal paste; dhärayen—wears; naraù—a person; tat—that; deham—body; na—not; spåçet—touches; päpam—sin; kriyamänam—doing; api—even; iha—here; yat—which.

     Sin does not touch the the body of a sinner anointed with Tulasé-paste.

Text 16

tulasé-vipina-cchäyä
     yatra yatra bhavec chubhe
tatra çräddhaà prakartavyaà
     pitåëäà dattam akñayam

     tulasé—of Tulasé; vipina—of a forest; chäyä—the shade; yatra yatra—wherever; bhavec—may be; çubhe—auspicious; tatra—there; çräddham—sraddha; prakartavyam—should be performed; pitåëäm—to the pitas; dattam—offered; akñayam—akñaya.

     Wherever is the beautiful shade of a Tulasé forest, there çräddha should be offered. There akñaya should be offered to the pitäs.

Text 17

tulasyäù sakhi mähätmyaà
     ädidevaç catur-mukhaù
na samartho bhaved vaktuà
     yathä� devasya çärìgiëaù

     tulasyäù—of Tulasé; sakhi—) friend; mähätmyam—the glory; ädidevaç—Brahmä; catur-mukhaù—who has four heads; na—not; samarthaù—is able; bhavet—may be; vaktum—to speak; yathä—as; devasya—of the Lord; çärìgiëaù—who carries the çärìga bow.

     O friend, as four-faced Brahmä cannot describe all the glories of Lord Kåñëa, who holds the çärìga bow, so he cannot descibe all the glories of Tulasé.

Text 18

çré-kåñëacandra-caraëe
     tulaséà candanair yutam
yo dadäti pumän stré vä
     yathoktaà phalam äpnuyät

     çré-kåñëacandra-caraëe—at the feet of Çré Kåñëacandra; tulasém—Tulasé; candanaiù—with sandal paste; yutam—endowed; yaù—who; dadäti—gives; pumän—man; stré—woman; vä—or; yathä—as; uktam—spoken; phalam—result; äpnuyät—attains.

     A man or woman who offers sandal-paste and Tulasé to Çré Kåñëacandra's feet attains the results I have told to You.

Text 19

tulasé-sevanaà nityaà
     kuru tvaà gopa-kanyake
çré-kåñëo vaçyatäà yäti
     yena vä sarvadaiva hi

     tulasé—to Tulasé; sevanam—service; nityam—regularly; kuru—do; tvam—You; gopa-kanyake—O gopé; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; vaçyatäm—to control; yäti—will go; yena—by which; vä—or; sarvadä—always; eva—indeed; hi—certainly.

     O gopé, serve Tulasé every day. Then Çré Kåñëa will always be Your submissive servant.

Text 20

çré-närada uväca 
itthaà candränanä-väkyaà
     çrutvä räseçvaré nåpa
tulasé-sevanaà säkñäd
     ärebhe hari-toñaëam

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; candränanä-väkyam—the words of Candränanä; çrutvä—hearing; räseçvaré—the queen of the räsa dnace; nåpa—O king; tulasé-sevanam—the service of Tulasé; säkñät—directly; ärebhe—began; hari-toñaëamto please Lord Hari.

     Çré Närada said: O king, after hearing Candränanä's words, Çré Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance, in order to please Lord Kåñëa, began to serve Çré Tulasé.

Texts 21-25

ketaké-vana-madhye ca
     çata-hastaà su-vartulam
uccair hema-khacid-bhitti-
     padmaräga-taöaà çubham

harid-dhéraka-muktänäà
     präkäreëa mahollasat
sarvatas tolikä-yuktaà
     cintämaëi-su-maëòitam

hema-dhvaja-samayuktaà
     uttoraëa-viräjitam
haimair vitänaiù parito
     vaijayantam iva sphurat

etädåçaà çré-tulasé-
     mandiraà su-manoharam
tan-madhye tulaséà sthäpya
     harit-pallava-çobhitam

abhijin-näma-nakñatre      tat-seväà sä cakära ha
samähütena gargeëa
     diñöena vidhinä saté

     ketaké—of ketaki trees; vana—the forest; madhye—in the middle; ca——and; çata-hastam—a hundred hastas; su-vartulam—round; uccaiù—high; hema—gold; khacit—studded; bhitti—wall; padmaräga—rubies; taöam—sides; çubham—beautiful; harit—of emeralds; héraka—diamonds; muktänäm—and pearls; präkäreëa—with an outer wall; mahollasat—very splendid; sarvataù—everywhere; tolikä-yuktam—with gates; cintämaëi—with cintämaëi gams; su-maëòitam—nicely decorated; hema-dhvaja-samayuktam—with gold flags; uttoraëa-viräjitam—splendid with archways; haimaiù—with gold; vitänaiù—awnings; paritaù—everywhere; vaijayantam—Indra's palace; iva—like; sphurat—manifest; etädåçam—like that; çré-tulasé—of Çré Tulasé;  mandiram—the temple; su-manoharam—beautiful; tan-madhye—inh the middle; tulasém—Tulasé; sthäpya—placing; harit—green; pallava—leaves; çobhitam—beautiful; abhijin-näma-nakñatre —the star named abhijit; tat-seväm—the service of her; sä—She; cakära—did; ha—indeed; samähütena—called; gargeëa—by Garga Muni; diñöena—instructed; vidhinä—by the rules; saté—the saintly girl.

     Taking Tulasé, beautiful with many green leaves, to the middle of a ketaké forest, and placing her in a Tulasé-temple that was round, tall, a hundred hastas in size, beautiful with walls of gold and rubies, splendid with an outer wall of emeralds, diamonds, and pearls, decorated with cintämaëi gems, arched gateways, gold flags, and gold awnings everywhere, and glorious like Indra's palace, at the time of the star abhijit, saintly Rädhä, following Garga Muni's instructions, served Çré Tulasé.

Text 26

çré-kåñëa-toñaëärthäya
     bhaktyä paramayä saté
iñu-pürëäà samärabhya
     caitra-pürëävadhi vratam

     çré-kåñëa-toñaëärthäya—tom please Çré Kåñëa; bhaktyä—with devotion; paramayä—great; saté—the saintly girl; iña—Septembeù—October; pürëäm—full-moon; samärabhya—beginning; caitra—March-April; pürëa—full moon; avadhi—until; vratam—vow.

     Beginning with the full moon of the month of Açvina (September-October), and ending with the full moon of the month of Caitra (March-April), to please Çré Kåñëa, saintly Rädhä followed a vow with great devotion.

Texts 27 and 28

kåtvä nyasiïcad dugdhena
     tathä cekñu-räsena vai
drakñayämra-raseëäpi
     sitayä bahu-miñöayä

païcämåtena tulaséà
     mäse mäse påthak påthak
udyäpana-samärambhaà
     vaiçäkha-pratipad-dine

     kåtvä—doing; nyasiïcat—watered; dugdhena—with milk; tathä—so; ca—and; ikñu-räsena—with sugar-cane juice; vai—indeed; drakñayä—with grape; amra-raseëa—with mango juice; api—also; sitayä—cool; bahu-miñöayä—with many sweet liquids; païcämåtena—with païcämåta; tulasém—Tulasé; mäse—month; mäse—after month; påthak påthak—individually; udyäpana—samärambhaà vaiçäkha—of April-May; pratipad-dine—on the first day after the full moon.

     Month after month She sprinkled Tulasé with milk, sugar-cane juice, grape-juice, mango-juice, païcämåta, and many kinds of sweet and cool juice. On the first day of Vaiçäkha (April-May), She ended the vow.

Text 29

garga-diñöena vidhinä
     våñabhänu-sutä nåpa
ñaö-païcäçattamair bhogair
   brähmaëänäà dvi-lakñakam

     garga-diñöena vidhinä—with the rules given by Garga Muni; våñabhänu-sutä—Rädhä, the daughter of KIng  Våñabhänu; nåpa—O king; ñaö-païcäçattamaiù—with fifty-six; bhogaiù—kinds of food; brähmaëänäm—of brähmaëas; dvi-lakñakam—two hundred thousand.

     O king, following Garga Muni's instructions, King Våñabhänu's daughter Rädhä then pleased two hundred thousand brähmaëas with a great feast of fifty-six courses.

Text 30

santarpya vastra-bhüñädyair
     dakñiëäà rädhikä dadau
divyänäà sthüla-muktänäà
     lakña-bhäraà videha-räö

     santarpya—pleasing; vastra—with garments; bhüñädyaiù—and ornaments; dakñiëäm—priestly reward; rädhikä—Rädhä; dadau—gave; divyänäm—splendid; sthüla-muktänäm—of great pearls; lakña-bhäram—a hundred thousand; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, then Rädhä gave them dakñiëä of a hundred-thousand splendid large pearls and many costly garments and ornaments.

Text 31

koöi-bhäraà suvarëaëaà
     gargäcäryäya sä dadau
çata-bhäraà suvarëänäà
     muktänäà ca tathaiva hi
bhaktyä paramayä rädhä
     brähmaëe brähmaëe dadau

     koöi-bhäram—ten millions bharas; suvarëaëam—of gold; gargäcäryäya—to Garga Muni; sä—She; dadau—gave; çata-bhäram—a hundred bharas; suvarëänäm—of gold; muktänäm—of pearls; ca—and; tathä—so; eva—certainly; hi—certainly; bhaktyä—devotion; paramayä—with great; rädhä—Rädhä; brähmaëe brähmaëe—to each brähmaëa; dadau—gave.

     Rädhä gave ten million bhäras of gold to Garga Muni. With great devotion She gave a hundred bhäras of gold and pearls to each brähmaëa. 

Text 32

deva-dundubhayo nedur
     nanåtuç cäpsaro-gaëäù
tan-mandiropari suräù
     puñpa-varñaà pracakrire

     deva—of the demigods; dundubhayaù—the drums; neduù—sounded; nanåtuç—danced; ca—and; apsaro-gaëäù—the apsaras; tan-mandiropari—over the temple; suräù—the demigods; puñpa-varñam—a shower of flowers; pracakrire—did.

     The demigods' drums sounded and the apsaräs danced. The demigods showered flowers on the Tulasé-temple.

Text 33

tadäviräsét tulasé hari-priyä
     suvarëa-péöhopari çobhitäsanä
caturbhujä padma-paläça-vékñaëä
     çyämä sphurad-dhema-kiréöa-kuëòalä

     tadä—then; äviräsét—appeared; tulasé—Tulasé; hari-priyä—who is dear to Lord Kåñëa; suvarëa-péöhopari—on a golden pedestal; çobhita—glorious; äsanä—on a throne; caturbhujä—with four arms; padma-paläça-vékñaëä—with lotus-petal eyes; çyämä—beautiful; sphurat—glittering; hema—golden; kiréöa—crown; kuëòalä—and earrings.

     Then, seated on a glorious throne on a gold pedestal, her eyes lotus petals, and her gold crown and earrings glittering, beautiful four-armed Tulasé, who is dear to Lord Kåñëa, appeared.

Text 34

pétämbaräc chädita-sarpa-veëéà
     srajaà dadhänaà nava-vaijayantém
khagät samuttérya ca raìga-vallé
     cucumba rädhäà parirabhya bähubhiù

     pétämbarät—by a yellow cloth; chädita—covered; sarpa—snake; veëém—braids; srajam—garland; dadhänam—wearing; nava—new; vaijayantém—vaijayanti; khagät—from the sky; samuttérya—rising; ca—and; raìga-vallé—beautiful as a flowering vine; cucumba—kissed; rädhäm—Rädhä; parirabhya—embracing; bähubhiù—with four arms.

     Descending from the sky, Tulasé, beautiful as a flowering vine, with her four arms embraced and then kissed Rädhä, who wore a new vaijayanté garland, and whose snake-braids were covered with a yellow cloth.

Text 35

çré-tulasy uväca 
ahaà prasannäsmi kalavaté-sute
     tvad-bhakti-bhävena jitä nirantaram
kåtaà ca loka-vyavahära-saìgrahät
     tvayä vrataà bhämini sarvato-mukham

     çré-tulasé uväca—Çré Tulasé said; aham—I; prasannä—pleased; asmi—am; kalavaté-sute—O daughter of Kalävaté; tvat—of You; bhakti-bhävena—by the devotion; jitä—defeated; nirantaram—always; kåtam—done; ca—and; loka-vyavahära-saìgrahät—according to the activities of the world; tvayä—by You; vratam—vow; bhämini—O beautiful one; sarvato-mukham—present everywhere.

     Çré Tulasé said: O daughter of Kalävaté, I am pleased with You. I am eternally conquered by Your loving devotion. O beautiful one, as if You were an ordinary human being, You very carefully followed this vow.

Text 36

manorathas te sa-phalo 'tra bhüyäd
     buddhéndriyaiç citta-manobhir agrataù
sadänukülatvam alaà pateù paraà
     saubhägyam evaà parikértanéyam

     manorathaù—the desire; te—of You; sa-phalaù—fulfilled; atra—here; bhüyät—will be; buddhi—by the intelligence; indriyaiù—and senses; citta-manobhiù—by the heart and mind; agrataù—in the presence; sadä—always; anukülatvam—love; alam—great; pateù—of the Lord; param—great; saubhägyam—good fortune; evam—thus; parikértanéyam—should be said.

     The desire that fills Your heart, mind, intelligence, and senses, will be attained. Lord Kåñëa will be kind to You. You are very fortunate.

Text 37

çré-närada uväca 
evaà vadantéà tulaséà hari-priyäà
     natvätha rädhä våñabhänu-nandiné
pratyäha govinda-padäravindayor
     bhaktir bhaven me viditä hy ahaituké

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; vadantém—speaking; tulasém—to Tulasé; hari-priyäm—dear to Lord Kåñëa; natvä—bowing down; atha—then; rädhä—Rädhä; våñabhänu—of King Våñabhänu; nandinéthe daughter; pratyäha—replied; govinda-padäravindayoù—for the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa; bhaktiù—devotion; bhavet—may be; me—of me; viditä—known; hy—indeed; ahaituké—unmotivated.

     Çré Närada said: To Tulasé, who has spoken these words and who was dear to Lord Kåñëa, Rädhä, the daughter of King Våñabhänu, bowed down and said: May I have unalloyed devotion for Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet.

Text 38

tathästu coktä tulasé hari-priyä-
     thäntardadhe maithila räja-sattama
tathaiva rädhä våñabhänu-nandiné
     prasanna-cittä sva-pure babhüva ha

     tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—and; uktä—said; tulasé—Tulasé; hari-priyä—dear to Lord Kåñëa; atha—then; antardadhe—disappeared; maithila—O King of Mithilä; räja-sattama—O best of kings; tathä—so; eva—certainly; rädhä—Rädhä; våñabhänu-nandiné—the daughter of King Våñabhänu; prasanna—happy; cittä—at heart; sva-pure—in Her own home; babhüva—was; ha—indeed;

     Saying, "So be it", Kåñëa's beloved Tulasé disappeared. O ruler of Mithilä, O best of kings, then Rädhä, King Våñabhänu's daughter, went home happy at heart.

Text 39

çré-rädhikäkhyänäm idaà vicitraà
     çåëoti yo bhakti-paraù påthivyäà
traivargya-bhävaà manasä sametya
     räjaàs tato yäti naraù kåtärthatäm

     çré-rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; äkhyänäm—story; idam—this; vicitram—wonderful; çåëoti—hears; yaù—who; bhakti-paraù—devoted; påthivyäm—on the earth; traivargya-bhävam—the three goals of life; manasä—by the mind; sametya—attaining; räjan—O king; tataù—then; yäti—goes; naraù—a person; kåtärthatäm—to success.

     O king, a devotee who hears this wonderful story of Çré Rädhä attains first the three goals of material life and then the supreme spiritual goal of life.
.pa

Chapter Seventeen
Çré-Rädhä-Kåñëa-saìgama 
The Meeting of Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
rädhä-kåñëasya caritaà
     çåëvanto me mano mune
na tåptià yäti çaradaù
     paìkaje bhramaro yathä

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; rädhä-kåñëasya—pf Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa; caritam—the pastimes; çåëvantaù—hearing; me—of me; manaù—the mind; mune—O sage; na—not; tåptim—satiated; yäti—goes; çaradaù—autumn; paìkaje—to a lotus flower; bhramaraù—a bee; yathä—as.

     O sage, as a bee never tires of autumn lotus flowers, so my mind does not tire as I hear the pastimes of Rädhä and Kåñëa.

Text 2

räseçvaryä kåñëa-patnyä
     tulasé-sevane kåte
yad babhüva tato brahmaàs
     tan me brühi tapo-dhana

     räsa—of the räsa dance; éçvaryä—with the queen; kåñëa-patnyä—Kåñëa's wife; tulasé-sevane—in the service of Tulasé; kåte—did; yat—what; babhüva—was; tataù—then; brahman—O brähmaëa; tan—that; me—to me; brühi—please tell; tapo-dhana—O sage whose wealth is austerity.

     O brähmaëa whose wealth is austerity, please tell me what happened after Lord Kåñëa's wife Rädhä, who is the queen of the räsa dance, served Tulasé.

Text 3

çré-närada uväca 
rädhikäyaç ca vijïäya
     tulasé-sevane tapaù
prétià parékñin chré-kåñëo
     våñabhänu-puraà yayau

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; rädhikäyaç—of Rädhä; ca—and; vijïäya—understanding; tulasé-sevane—service to Tulasé; tapaù—austerity; prétim—love; parékñit—examining; chré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; våñabhänu-puram—to Våñabhänu's palace; yayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: Understanding the austerity Rädhä had undergone in Her service to Tulasé, and wishing to test Rädhä's love, Çré Kåñëa went to King Våñabhänu's palace.

Texts 4-9

adbhutaà gopikä-rüpaà
     calan-jhaìkära-nüpuram
kiìkiëé-ghaëöikä-çabdaà
     aìguléyaka-bhüñitam

ratna-kaìkana-keyüra-
     mükta-hära-viräjitam
bälärkatä-taìka-lasat-
     kabaré-päça-kauçalam

näsa-mauktikä-divyäbhaà
     çyäma-kuntala-saìkulam
dhåtväsau våñabhänoç ca
     mandiraà sandadarça ha

prakära-parikhä-yuktaà
     catur-dvära-samanvitam
karéndraiù kajjaläkärair
     dväri dväri manoharam

väyu-vegair mano-vegaiç
     citra-varëais turaìgamaiù
hära-cämara-samyuktaà
     prollasan-maëòapäjiram

gaväà gaëaiù sa-vatsaiç ca
     våñair dharma-dhurandharaiù
gopälä yatra gäyante
     vaàçé-vetra-dhärä nåpa

     adbhutam—wonderful; gopikä-rüpam—the form of a gopé; calan-jhaìkära-nüpuram—with tinkling anklets; kiìkiëé-ghaëöikä-çabdam—the sound of tinkling bells; aìguléyaka-bhüñitam—decorated with rings; ratna-kaìkana-keyüra—with jewel bracelets and armlets; mükta—pearl; hära—necklace; viräjitam—splendid; bälärkatä—rising sun; taìka—sword; lasat—glistening; kabaré-päça—braids; kauçalam—beautiful; näsa—nose; mauktikä—pearl; divyäbham—splendor; çyäma-kuntala-saìkulam—with dark hair; dhåtvä—manifesting; asau—He; våñabhänoù—of Våñabhänu; ca—and; mandiram—to the palace; sandadarça—saw; ha—indeed; prakära—with walls; parikhä-yuktam—surrounded by a moat; catur-dvära-samanvitam—with four gates; karéndraiù—with the kings of elephants; kajjala—black kajjala; äkäraiù—with forms; dväri dväri—at each gate; manoharam—beautiful; väyu-vegaiù—by teh breeze; mano-vegaiç—as fast as the mind; citra-varëaiù—colorful; turaìgamaiù—with horses; hära—with necklaces; cämara—and camaras; samyuktam—endowed; prollasan-maëòapäjiram—splendid pavilions and courtyards; gaväm—of cows; gaëaiù—with multitudes; sa-vatsaiù—with calves; ca—and; våñaiù—with bulls; dharma-dhurandharaiù—the maintainers of religion; gopälä—cowherds; yatra—where; gäyante—sing; vaàçé—flutes; vetra—and sticks; dhäräù—holding; nåpa—O king.

     O king, transforming Himself into a wonderfully beautiful gopé decorated with tinkling anklets, bells, rings, jewel bracelets, armlets, pearl necklaces, and a splendid nose-pearl, and with beautiful dark braids like a sword with the glory of sunrise, Kåñëa gazed at King Våñabhänu's beautiful palace, which was surrounded by walls and a moat, which had four gates, each guarded by regal elephants black as kajjala, which had many colorful horses that could run as fast as the wind or the mind, and which had many necklaces, cämaras, splendid pavilions, courtyards, cows, calves, saintly bulls, and cowherds that held flute and sticks and sang very sweetly.

Text 10

våñabhänu-varasyaivaà
     paçyan mandira-kauçalam
mäyä-yuvati-veño 'sau
     tato hy antaù-puraà yayau

     våñabhänu-varasya—of King Våñabhänu; evam—thus; paçyan—seeing; mandira—of the palace; kauçalam—the glory; mäyä—false; yuvati—of a young girl; veñaù—appearance; asau—then; tataù—then; hy—indeed; antaù-puram—inside the palace; yayau—went.

     Magically assuming the appearance of a young girl, Kåñëa gazed at the glory of King Våñabhänu's palace, and then entered the women's quarters, . . .

Text 11

yatra koöi-ravi-sphurjat-
     kapäöa-stambha-paìktayaù
ratnäjireñu çobhante
     lalanä-ratna-samyutäù

     yatra—where; koöi—ten million; ravi—suns; sphurjat—shining; kapäöa—doors; stambha—of pillars; paìktayaù—rows; ratna—jewel; ajireñu—in courtyards; çobhante—shine; lalanä—women; ratna—jewels; samyutäù—with.

 . . . where there were many columns and doors splendid as ten million suns, where there were jewel courtyards in which many jewellike women glistened, . . .

Text 12

véëä-täla-mådaìgädén
     vädayantyo manoharäù
puñpa-yañöi-samäyuktäù
     gäyantyo rädhikä-guëam

     véëä—vinas; täla—karayalas; mådaìga—mrdangas; ädén—beginning; vädayantyaù—playing; manoharäù—beautiful; puñpa—flowers; yañöi—sticks; samäyuktäù—with; gäyantyaù—singing; rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; guëam—virtues.

 . . . and where beautiful women, holding flowers and playing véëäs, karatälas, mådaìgas, and other instruments, sang of Çré Rädhä's virtues. 

Text 13

tasminn antaù-pure divyaà
     bhräjäc copavanaà mahat
daòimé-kunda-mandära-
     nimbünnata-drumävåtam

     tasmin—in that; antaù-pure—inner apartments; divyam—splendor; bhräjäc—shining; ca—and; upavanam—a garden; mahat—great; daòimé—pomegranate; kunda—jasmine; mandära—mandara; nimbu—nimbu; unnata-drumävåtam—filled with great trees.

     In those inner apartments of the palace there was a large and splendid garden filled with many great pomegranate, kunda, mandära, and nimbu trees, . . .

Text 14

ketaké-mälaté-våndair
     mädhavébhir viräjitam
tatra rädhä-nikuïjo 'sti
     kalpa-våkña-sugandhi-bhåt

     ketaké—ketaki; mälaté—malati; våndaiù—with many; mädhavébhiù—madhavi vines; viräjitam—splendid; tatra—there; rädhä—of Çré Rädhä; nikuïjaù—the garden; asti—is; kalpa-våkña—with kalpavåkña trees; sugandhi-bhåt—fragrant.

 . . . and splendid with many ketaké, mälaté, and mädhavé vines. In that place was Çré Rädhä's garden, which was fragrant with many kalpa-våkña trees, . . .

Texts 15-17

patanti yatra bhramarä
     madhumattä nåpeçvara
gandhäktaù çétalo väyur
     manda-gämé vahaty alam

sahasra-dala-padmänäà
     rajo vékñepayan muhuù
puàs-kokiläù kokiläç ca
     mayüräù sarasäù çukäù

küjante madhuraà nädaà
     nikuïja-çikhareñu ca
puñpa-çayyä-sahasräëi
     jala-kulyäù sahasraçaù

     patanti—fly; yatra—where; bhramarä—bees; madhumattä—mad after honey; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; gandhäktaù—fragrant; çétalaù—cool; väyuù—breeze; manda-gämé—gentle; vahaty—blows; alam—greatly; sahasra-dala-padmänäm—of thousand-petal lotuses; rajaù—the pollen; vékñepayan—scattreing; muhuù—at every moment; puàs-kokiläù—male cuckoos; kokiläù—fermale cuckoos; ca—and; mayüräù—peacocks; sarasäù—cranes; çukäù—parrots; küjante—coo; madhuram—sweetly; nädam—sound; nikuïja-çikhareñu—in the groves of trees; ca—and; puñpa—flower; çayyä—couches; sahasräëi—thousands; jala-kulyäù—streams; sahasraçaù—thousands.

 . . . where many bees, mad after honey, flew, where a fragrant, cool, gentle breeze blew, scattering the pollen of many thousand-petal lotus flowers, where cuckoo couples, peacocks, cranes, and parrots cooed sweetly in the groves, where there were thousands of flower-couches and thousands of artifical streams, O king of kings, . . .

Texts 18 and 19

procchalanti sphurat-sphärä
     yatra vai megha-mandire
bälärka-kuëòala-dharäs
     citra-vasträ varänanäù

vartante koöiço yatra
     sakhyas tat-karma-kauçaläù
tan-madhye rädhikä rajïé
     bhramanté mandiräjire

     procchalanti—shining; sphurat-sphärä—very splendid; yatra—where; vai—indeed; megha—cloud; mandire—in a palace; bälärka—the rising sun; kuëòala—earrings; dharäù—wearing; citra—colorful; vasträ—garments; vara—beautiful; änanäù—faces; vartante—are; koöiçaù—millions; yatra—where; sakhyaù—friends; tat-karma-kauçaläù—expert workers; tan-madhye—in their midst; rädhikä—Rädhä; raj 24é—queen; bhramanté—wandering; mandira—of the palace; ajire—in the courtyard.

 . . . and where there were many millions of glittering and expert gopé-friends, their faces very beautiful, their garments wonderfully colorful, and their earrings rising suns in a temple of clouds. In their midst Queen Rädhä wandered in the palace courtyard, . . .

Text 20

käçméra-paìka-samyukte
     sükñma-vastra-viräjite
çiréña-puñpa-kñitija-
     dalair ä-gulpha-pürake
mälaté-makarandänäà
     kñaradbhir bindubhir våte

     käçméra—with kunkuma; paìka—paste; samyukte—endowed; sükñma—exquiaite; vastra—garments; viräjite—splendid; çiréña-puñpa—sirisa flowers; kñitija-dalaiù—with petals; ä-gulpha—up to the ankles; pürake—filled; mälaté—of malati flowers; makarandänäm—of honey; kñaradbhiù—flowing; bindubhiù—with drops; våte—filled

 . . . which was anointed with kuìkuma paste, splendid with fine curtains, and filled up to Her ankles with çiréña petals anointed with drops of mälaté honey.

Text 21

koöi-candra-pratékäçä
     tanvé komala-vigrahä
çanaiù çanaiù päda-padmaà
     calayanté ca komalam

     koöi—millions; candra—of moons; pratékäçä—splendid; tanvé—slender; komala-vigrahä—delicate form; çanaiù çanaiù—very languidly; päda—feet; padmam—lotus; calayanté—moving; ca—and; komalam—delicate.

     There slender delicate Rädhä, glorious like many millions of moons, languidly moved Her delicate lotus feet.

Text 22

samägatäà täà maëi-mandiräjire
     dadarça rädhä våñabhänu-nandiné
yat-tejasä tal-lalanä-håta-tviño
     jätäs tvaraà candramaseva tärakäù

     samägatäm—arrived; täm—Her; maëi-mandiräjire—in the jewel courtyard of the palace; dadarça—saw; rädhä—Rädhä; våñabhänu—of King Våñabhänu; nandiné—the daughter; yat-tejasä—by whose splendor; tal-lalanä—of the other women; håta—eclipsed; tviñaù—the splendor; jätäù—manifested; tvaram—at once; candramasä—by the moon; iva—like; tärakäù—the stars.

     Then King Våñabhänu's daughter Rädhä saw the disguised Kåñëa enter the palace courtyard. His splendor elipsed the splendor of all the other girls as the moon eclipses the stars.

Text 23

vijïäya tad-gauravam uttamaà mahad
     utthäya dorbhyäà parirabhya rädhikä
divyäsane sthäpya su-loka-rétyä
     jalädikaà cärhaëam ärabhac chubham

     vijïäya—understanding; tad-gauravam—His greatness; uttamam—supreme; mahat—great; utthäya—rising; dorbhyäm—with both arms; parirabhya—embracing; rädhikä—Rädhä; divyäsane—on a splendid throne; sthäpya—placing; su-loka-rétyä—as an exalted person; jalädikam—beginning with water; ca—and; arhaëam—worship; ärabhat—did; çubham—glorious.

     Understanding the greatness of this visitor, with both arms Rädhä embraced the disguised Kåñëa, placed Him on a glorious throne, and worshiped Him with arghya and other objects as if He were a very important person.

Text 24

çré-rädhoväca 
svägataà te sakhé çubhe
     nämadheyaà vadäçu me
bhüri-bhägyaà mamaivädya
     bhavatyägatayä svataù

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; svägatam—welcome; te—to You; sakhé—O friend; çubhe—beautiful; nämadheyam—name; vada—please tell; äçu—at once; me—to Me; bhüri—great; bhägyam—good fortune; mama—of Me; eva—indeed; adya—today; bhavatyä—by You; ägatayä—coming; svataù—of Your own accord.

     Çré Rädhä said: Beautiful friend, welcome! Please tell Me Your name. I am very fortunate that today You have come.

Text 25

tvat-samänäà divya-rüpaà
     dåçyate na hi bhü-tale
yatra tvaà vartase su-bhru
     pattanaà dhanyam eva tat

     tvat-samänäm—equal to You; divya-rüpam—splendid form; dåçyate—is seen; na—not; hi—indeed; bhü-tale—on the earth; yatra—where; tvam—You; vartase—stay; su-bhru—O girl with the beautiful eyebrows; pattanam—city; dhanyam—fortunate; eva—indeed; tat—that.

     On this earth I do not see anyone glorious like You. O girl with the beautiful eyebrows, the city where You stay is very fortunate.

Text 26

vada devi sa-vistäraà
     hetum ägamanasya ca
mama yogyaà ca yat-käryaà
     vaktavyaà tat tvayä khalu

     vada—tell; devi—O goddess; sa-vistäram—elaborately; hetum—the reason; ägamanasya—come; ca—and; mama—of Me; yogyam—proper; ca—and; yat-käryam—mission; vaktavyam—should be told; tat—that; tvayä—by You; khalu—certainly.

     O goddess, please elaborately explain why You have come. Please tell what I may do to assist You.

Text 27

kaöäkñeëa su-déptyä ca
     vacasä su-smitena vai
gatyä kåtya çrépativad
     dåçyate sämprataà mayä

     katäkñeëa—with a sidelong glance; su-déptyä—very splendid; ca—and; vacasä—with words; su-smitena—with a pleasing smile; vai—indeed; gatyä—with gestures; kåtya—done; çrépativat—like Lord Näräyaëa, the husband of the goddess of fortune; dåçyate—is seen; sämpratam—now; mayä—by Me.

     I see that Your glistening splendor, Your sidelong glance, Your words, Your pleasing smile, and Your graceful motions are all like those of Lord Näräyaëa, the husband of the goddess of fortune.

Text 28

nityaà çubhe me milanärtham ävraja
     na cet sva-saìketam alaà vidhehi
yenaiva saìgo vidhinä bhaved dhi
     vidhir bhavatyä sa sadä vidheyaù

     nityam—always; çubhe—O beautiful one; me—me; milanärtham—for the purpose of meeting; ävraja—come; na—not; cet—if; sva-saìketam—a meeting with You; alam—greatly; vidhehi—give; yena—by which; eva—indeed; saìgaù—meeting; vidhinä—by arrangement; bhavet—may be; dhi—indeed; vidhiù—arrangement; bhavatyä—by You; sa—that; sadä—always; vidheyaù—should be done.

     O beautiful one, come here and meet with Me every day, or if not that, then give a place where We may meet. Arrange that We may always meet.

Text 29

ayi tvad-ätmäti-paraà priyo me
     tvad-äkåtiù çré-vraja-räja-nandanaù
yenaiva me devi håtaà tu cetas
     tvayä nanändeva vadhür dadhämi tam

     ayi—O; tvat—You; ätma-ati-param—greater than My own self; priyaù—dear; me—to Me; tvad-äkåtiù—Your form; çré-vraja-räja-nandanaù—the son of Vraja's king; yena—by which; eva—indeed; me—of Me; devi—O goddess; håtam—enchanted; tu—indeed; cetaù—heart; tvayä—by You; nanända—delighted; iva—like; vadhüù—a woman; dadhämi—I place; tam—that.

     You are more dear to Me than My own self. Your form is like that of Vraja's prince, who has captured My heart. I am happy as if I were with Him.

Text 30

çré-närada uväca 
evaà rädhä-vacaù çrutvä
     mäyä-yuvati-veña-dhåk
uväca bhagavän kåñëo
     rädhäà kamala-locanäm

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; rädhä-vacaù—Rädhä's words; çrutvä—hearing; mäyä-yuvati-veña-dhåk—magically disguised as a girl; uväca—said; bhagavän—Lord; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; rädhäm—to Rädhä; kamala-locanäm—lotus-eyed.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing Rädhä's words, Lord Kåñëa, who was magically transformed into a young girl, spoke to lotus-eyed Rädhä.

Text 31

çré-bhagavän uväca 
rambhoru nanda-nagare
     nanda-gehasya cottare
gokule vasatir me 'sti
     nämnähaà gopadevatä

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; rambhoru—O girl whose thighs are like banana trees; nanda-nagare—in the city of nanda; nanda-gehasya—of Nanda's home; ca—and; uttare—in the north; gokule—in Gokula; vasatiù—home; me—My; asti—is; nämnä—by name; aham—I; gopadevatä—Gopadevatä.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O girl whose thighs are graceful as banana trees, I live in Gokula, just north of Nanda's palace in Nandanagara. My name is Gopadevatä.

Text 32

tvad-rüpa-guëa-mädhuryaà
     çrutaà me lalitä-mukhät
tad drañöuà caïcaläpäìgi
     tvad-gåhe 'haà samägatä

     tvat—Your; rüpa—beauty; guëa—and virtues; mädhuryam—the sweetness; çrutam—heard; me—by Me; lalitä—of lalitä; mukhät—from the mouth; tat—that; drañöum—to see; caïcaläpäìgi—O girl with the restless glance; tvad-gåhe—to Your home; aham—I; samägatä—have come.

     From Lalitä's mouth I heard of the sweetness of Your beauty and virtues. O girl with the restless glance, now I have come to Your home to see it.

Text 33

çrémal-laväìga-latikä-sphuöa-modinénäà
     guïjä-nikuïja-madhupa-dhvani-kuïja-puïjam
dåñöaà çrutaà nava-navaà tava kaïja-netre
     divyaà purandara-pure 'pi na yat-samänam

     çrémat—beautiful; laväìga-latikä—lavanga vine; sphuöa—manifested; modinénäm—fragrance; gu 24jä—gunja; nikuïja—grove; madhupa—bees; dhvani—sounds; kuïja—groves; pu 24jam—abundance; dåñöam—seen; çrutam—heard; nava-navam—newer and newer; tava—Your; kaïja-netre—O lotus-eyed one; divyam—splendid; purandara-pure—in the city of Indra; api—even; na—not; yat-samänam—the equal.

     O girl with the lotus eyes, You are a lotus flower with the fragrance of lavaìga flowers and the buzzing of bees in a grove of guïjä. Even in the city of Indra no one has ever seen or heard of anyone like You.

Text 34

çré-närada uväca 
evaà tayor melanaà tad
     babhüva mithileçvara
prétià parasparaà kåtvä
     vane tatra virejatuù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; tayoù—of Them; melanam—the meeting; tat—that; babhüva—was; mithileçvara—O king of Mithilä; prétim—love; parasparam—mutual; kåtvä—doing; vane—in the forest; tatra—there; virejatuù—They manifested.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, in that way They met. In that garden They fell in love 

Text 35

hasantyau te ca gäyantyau
     puñpa-kanduka-lélayä
paçyatyau vana-våkñäàç ca
     ceratur maithileçvara

     hasantyau—laughing; te—They; ca—and; gäyantyau—singing; puñpa—of flowers; kanduka—balls; lélayä—with playing; paçyatyau—glancing; vana-våkñän—among the trees; ca—and; ceratuù—walking; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, laughing, singing, playing with a toy ball made of flowers, and glancing at each other, they walked among the trees in that garden.

Text 36

kalä-kauçala-sampannäà
     rädhäà kamala-locanäm
girä madhurayä räjan
     prähedaà gopadevatä

     kalä—in art; kauçala—wioth expertise; sampannäm—endowed; rädhäm—Rädhä; kamala-locanäm—lotus-eyed; girä—with words; madhurayä—sweet; räjan—O king; präha—said; idam—this; gopadevatä—Gopadevatä.

     With sweet words Gopadevatä spoke to lotus-eyed, artistic Rädhä.

Text 37

çré-gopadevatoväca 
düre vai nanda-nagaraà
     sandhyä jätä vrajeçvari
prabhäte cägamiñyämi
     tvat-sakäçaà na saàçayaù

     çré-gopadevatä uväca—Çré Gopadevatä said; düre—far away; vai—certainly; nanda-nagaram—in nandanagara; sandhyä—sunset; jätä—has come; vrajeçvari—O queen of Vraja; prabhäte—at sunrise; ca—and; ägamiñyämi—I will come; tvat-sakäçam—near You; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Çré Gopadevatä said: O queen of Vraja, sunset has come. Nandanagara is far away. At sunrise I will return to You. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 38

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvä vacas tasya tu tad vrajeçvaré
     nikñipya sadyo nayanämbu-santatim
romäïca-harñodgama-bhäva-samvåtä
     rambheva bhümau patitä marud-dhatä

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—words; tasya—of Him; tu—indeed; tat—that; vrajeçvaré—the queen of Vraja; nikñipya—casting; sadyaù—at once; nayanämbu-santatim—tears fgrom the eyes; romäïca-harñodgama-bhäva-samvåtä—hairs standing erect; rambhä—a banana tree; iva—like; bhümau—to the ground; patitä—fell; marut-hatä—struck by the wind.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing His words, Rädhä, the queen of Vraja began to weep. The hairs of her body erect, She fell to the ground like a banana tree struck by the wind.

Text 39

çaìkägatäs tatra sakhé-gaëäs tvaraà
     su-véjayantyau vyajanair vyavasthitäù
çrékhaëòa-puñpa-drava-carcitäàçukäà
     jagäda rädhäà nåpa gopadevatä

     çaìkägatäù—worried; tatra—there; sakhé-gaëäù—friends; tvaram—quickly; su-véjayantyau—fanning; vyajanaiù—with fans; vyavasthitäù—arranged; çrékhaëòa—sandal; puñpa—flower; drava—liquid; carcita—anointed; aàçukäm—garments; jagäda—spoke; rädhäm—to Rädhä; nåpa—O king; gopadevatä—Gopadevatä.

     O king, Her worried friends quickly came and fanned Her with many fans. Then Gopadevatä spoke to Rädhä, whose garments were anointed with sandal paste and the nectar of flowers.

Text 40

çré-gopadevatoväca 
prabhäte ägamiñyämi
     mä çokaà kuru rädhike
goç ca bhrätur go-rasasya
     çapatho me na ced idam

     çré-gopadevatä uväca—Çré Gopadevatä said; prabhäte—at sunrise; ägamiñyämi—I will come; mä—don't; çokam—lament; kuru—do; rädhike—O Rädhä; goù—of the cow; ca—and; bhrätuù—of the brother; go-rasasya—of milk; çapathaù—promise; me—of Me; na—not; cet—if; idam—that.

     Çré Gopadevatä said: At sunrise I will return. O Rädhä, don't lament. If I don't go I will break the promise I made to milk My brother's cow.

Text 41

çré-närada uväca 
evam uktvä haré rädhäà
     samäçväsya nåpeçvara
mäyä-yuvati-veño 'sau
     yayau çré-nanda-gokulam

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; hariù—Kåñëa; rädhäm—to Rädhä; samäçväsya—comforting; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; mäyä-yuvati-veñaù—magically disguised as a young girl; asau—He; yayau—went; çré-nanda-gokulam—to Nanda-gokula.

     Çré Närada said: O king of kings, after comforting Rädhä with these words, Lord Kåñëa, who was magically transformed into a young woman, went to Nanda's Gokula.
.pa

Chapter Eighteen
Çré Kåñëacandra-darçana
The Sight of Çré Kåñëacandra

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
atha rätryäà vyatétäyäà
     mäyä-yoñid-vapur hariù
rädhä-duùkha-praçänty-arthaà
     våñabhänor gåhaà yayau

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; rätryäm—at night; vyatétäyäm—passed; mäyä-yoñid-vapuù—trasnformed into a young woman; hariù—Kåñëa; rädhä—of Rädhä; duùkha—to sufferings; praçänti—pacification; artham—for the purpose; våñabhänoù—of King Våñabhänu; gåham—to the home; yayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: When the night had passed, Lord Kåñëa, again magically transformed into a woman, went to King Våñabhänu's palace to quiet Rädhä's distress.

Text 2

rädhä tam ägataà vékñya
     samutthäyäti-harñitä
dattäsanä vidhänena
     püjayäm äsa maithila

     rädhä—Rädhä; tam—Him; ägatam—arrived; vékñya—seeing; samutthäya—rising; ati-harñitä—very happy; datta—offered; äsanä—a seat; vidhänena—properly; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     When She saw He had come, Rädhä became very happy. Standing up, She offered Him a seat and worshiped Him according to custom.

Text 3

çré-rädhoväca 
tvayä vinähaà niçi duùkhitäsaà
     tvayy ägatäyäà sakhi labdha-vastu-vat
pürvaà hy apathyasya sukhaà yathä� tato
     duùkhaà tathä bhämini sat-prasaìgataù

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; tvayä—You; vinä—without; aham—I; niçi—at night; duùkhitä—unhappy; äsam—was; tvayy—in You; ägatäyäm—come; sakhé—O friend; labdha—attained; vastu—vaulable; vat—like; pürvam—before; hy—indeed; apathyasya—of what is not beneficial; sukham—happiness; yathä—as; tataù—so; duùkham—unhappiness; tathä—so; bhämini—O beautiful one; sat-prasaìgataù—from the company.

     Çré Rädhä said: I was very unhappy at night without You. O friend, now that You have come I am like one who has found a great treasure. O beautiful one, first You made Me happy and then You made Me sad.

Text 4

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvätha tad-väkyaà
     vimanä gopadevatä
na kiïcid üce çré-rädhäà
     duùkhiteva vyavasthitä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; atha—then; tad-väkyam—Her words; vimanä—sad; gopadevatä—Gopadevatä; na—not; kiïcit—anything; üce—sdaid; çré-rädhäm—to Çré Rädhä; duùkhitä—unhappy; iva—as if; vyavasthitä—situated.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these words, Gopadevatä became sad. As if She were morose, She did not say anything to Çré Rädhä.

Text 5

vijïäya kheda-sampannäà
     rädhikä gopadevatäm
sakhébhiù samvicäryätha
     jagäda sneha-tat-parä

     vijïäya—understanding; kheda-sampannäm—unhappy; rädhikä—Rädhä; gopadevatäm—Gopadevatä; sakhébhiù—by the friends; samvicärya—considered; atha—then; jagäda—spoke; sneha-tat-parä—full of affection.

     Understanding that Gopadevatä had become unhappy, Rädhä and Her friends considered the situation. Full of affection, Rädhä spoke.

Text 6

çré-rädhoväca 
vimanäs tvaà kathaà bhadre
     vada mäà gopadevate
mäträ bhärträ nanändrä vä
     çvaçrä krodhena bhartsitä

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; vimanäù—unhappy; tvam—You; katham—why?; bhadre—O beautiful one; vada—tell; mäm—Me; gopadevate—O Gopadevatä; mäträ—by Your mother; bhärträ—brother; nanändrä—sister-in-law; vä—or; çvaçrä—sister; krodhena—angrily; bhartsitä—rebuked.

     Çré Rädhä said: Beautiful one, why are You unhappy? O Gopadevatä, please tell Me. Did Your mother, brother, sister, or sister-in-law speak angry words to You?

Text 7

sapatné-kåta-doñeëa
     sva-bhartur virahena vä
anyatra lagna-cittena
     vimanäù kià manohare

     sapatné—by a co-wife; kåta—done; doñeëa—by a fault; sva-bhartuù—of Your own brother; virahena—by separation; vä—or; anyatra—somewhere else; lagna—placed; cittena—heart; vimanäù—unhappy; kim—why?; manohare—O beautiful one.

     Did a co-wife fault You? Are You separated from Your brother? Does something else trouble Your heart? O beautiful one, why are You unhappy?

Text 8

märga-khedena vä kaccid
     vihvaläbhüd rujäthavä
çéghraà vada mahä-bhäge
     svasya duùkhasya käraëam

     märga—on the path; khedena—by trouble; va—or; kaccit—something; vihvalä—agitated; abhüt——became; rujä—with sickness; athavä—or; çéghram—for a long time; vada—tell; mahä-bhäge—O beautiful one; svasya—own; duùkhasya—suffering; käraëam—the cause.

     Did some trouble happen on the way here? Do You have a sickness? O beautiful one, please tell me at length why You are unhappy.

Text 9

kåñëa-bhaktam åte vipraà
     yena kenäpi kutsitam
kathitaà te 'tha rambhoru
     tac-cikitsäà karomy aham

     kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; bhaktam—a devotee; åte—without; vipram—a brähmaëa; yena kenäpi—by someone; kutsitam—treated with contempt; kathitam—spoken; te—by You; atha—then; rambhoru—O girl whose thighs are like banana trees; tac-cikitsäm—the cure for that; karomy—do; aham—I will.

     Did some brähmaëa who was not a devotee of Kåñëa speak ill to You? O girl whose thighs are like banana trees, describe it, and I will cure Your unhappiness.

Text 10

gajäçvädéni ratnäni
     vasträëi ca dhanäni ca
mandiräëi viciträëi
     gåhäëa tvaà yadécchasi

     gaja—elephants; açva—horses; ädéni—beginning with; ratnäni—jewels; vasträëi—garments; ca—and; dhanäni—wealth; ca—and; mandiräëi—palaces; viciträëi—wonderful; gåhäëa—take; tvam—You; yadi—if; icchasi—You wish.

     If You wish, please take many elephants, horses, jewels, costly garments, coins, and wonderful palaces.

Text 11

dhanaà dattvä tanuà rakñet
     tanuà dattvä trapaà vyadhät
dhanaà tanuà trapaà dadyän
     mitra-käryärtham eva hi
dhanaà dattvä ca satataà
     rakñet präëän nirantaram

     dhanam—wealth; dattvä—having given; tanum—body; rakñet—may protect; tanum—body; dattvä—having given; trapam—modesty; vyadhät—may give; dhanam—wealth; tanum—body; trapam—modesty; dadyän—may guve; mitra-käryärtham—for the benefit of a friend; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; dhanam—welath; dattvä—having given; ca—and; satatam—always; rakñet—may protect; präëän—life; nirantaram—always.

     By giving wealth one preserves another's body. By preserving the body one gives modesty. For the welfare of a friend, one should give Her wealth and thus preserve Her body and Her modesty. By always giving wealth one always preserves the lives of Her friends.

Text 12

yo mitratäà niñkapaöaà karoti
     niñkäraëaà dhanyatamaù sa eva
vidhäya maitréà kapaöaà vidadhyät
     taà lampaöaà hetu-paöaà naöaà dhik

     yaù—one who; mitratäm—friendship; niñkapaöam—sincere; karoti—does; niñkäraëam—unmotivated; dhanyatamaù—the most fortunate; sa—sh; eva—indeed; vidhäya—placing; maitrém—friendship; kapaöam—false; vidadhyät—places; tam—that; lampaöam—cheater; hetu-paöam—false reason; naöam—and actor; dhik—fie.

     One who is a sincere, unselfish friend is glorious. One who is not sincere in her friendship is a cheater, or an actor. Fie on her! 

Text 13

tasyäù prema-vacaù çrutvä
     bhagavän gopadevatä
prahasann äha räjendra
     çré-rädhäà kérti-nandiném

     tasyäù—of Her; prema-vacaù—words of love; çrutvä—hearing; bhagavän—the Lord; gopadevatä—Gopadevatä; prahasann—smiling; äha—said; räjendra—O king; çré-rädhäm—to Çré Rädhä; kérti-nandiném—the daughter of Kérti.

     O king, when He heard Her words of love, Lord Gopadevatä smiled and spoke to Kérté's daughter Rädhä.

Text 14

çré-gopadevatoväca 
rädhe vrajan sänu-gires taöéñu
     saìkoca-véthéñu manoharäsu
yäntéà svato mäà dadhi-vikrayärthaà
     rurodha märge nava-nanda-putraù

     çré-gopadevatä uväca—Çré Gopadevatä said; rädhe—O Rädhä; vräjan—going; sänu-gireù—of the mountain; taöéñu—on the sides; saìkoca—narrow; véthéñu—on the path; manoharäsu—beautiful; yäntém—going; svataù—personally; mäm—to Me; dadhi—yogurt; vikraya—selling; artham—for the purpose; rurodha—stopped; märge—om the path; nava-nanda-putraù—Nanda's son.

     Çré Gopadevatä said: As He was walking on the beautiful narrow pathways by the hillside, and I was also walking there to sell some yogurt, Nanda's son, Kåñëa, stopped Me.

Text 15

vaàçé-dharo vetra-karaù kare mäà
     tvaraà gåhétvä prahasan vilajjaù
mahyaà karädäna-dhanäya dänaà
     dehéti jalpan vipine rasajïaù

     vaàçé—a flute; dharaù—holding; vetra—a stick; karaù—in His hand; kare—in the hand; mäm—Me; tvaram—quickly; gåhétvä—taking; prahasan—laughing; vilajjaù—shameless; mahyam—to Me; karädäna-dhanäya—to pay atoll; dänam—payment; dehi—give; iti—thus; jalpan—speaking; vipine—in the forest; rasajïaù—expert at tasting nectar.

     Carrying a flute and holding a stick in His hand, the shameless fellow grabbed My hand, laughed, and said: "Now You must pay a tax to Me!" Talking in this way, He enjoyed in the forest.

Text 16

tubhyaà na dasyämi kadäpi dänaà
     svayambhuve gorasa-lampaöäya
evaà mayokte vacane 'tha bhäëòaà
     nétvä viçérëé-kåtavän sa dadhnaù

     tubhyaàto You; na—not; dasyämi—I will give; kadäpi—ever; dänam—money; svayambhuve—independent; gorasa—for milk products; lampaöäya—greedy; evam—thus; mayä—by Me; ukte—spoken; vacane—words; atha—then; bhäëòam—the pot; nétvä—taking; viçérëé-kåtavän—broke; saù—He; dadhnaù—of yogurt.

     When I said, "I will never pay anything to You, a rake greedy after yogurt", He took the yogurt-pot and broke it.

Text 17

bhäëòaà sa bhittvä dadhi kià ca pétvä
     nétvottaréyaà mama ced uréyam
nandéçvarädrer vidiçaà jagäma
     tenäham äräd vimanäù sma jätä

     bhäëòaàthe pot; sa—He; bhittvä—breaking; dadhi—yogurt; kià ca—furthermore; pétvä—drinking; nétvä—taking; uttaréyam—bodice; mama—My; cet—if; uréyam—on the breasts; nandéçvarädreù—of Nandéçvara Hill; vidiçam—in the direction; jagäma—went; tena—by Him; aham—I; ärät—from afar; vimanäù—depressed; sma—indeed; jätä—become.

     After breaking the pot, He drank the yogurt, grabbed My bodice, and then ran off toward Nandéçvara Hill. That is why I am unhappy.

Text 18

jätyä sa gopaù kila kåñëa-varëo
     'dhuné na véro na hi çéla-rüpaù
yasmiàs tvayä prema kåtaà su-çéle
     tyajäçu nirmohanam adya kåñëam

     jätyä—by birth; sa—He; gopaù—a gopa; kila—indeed; kåñëa-varëaù—a çüdra; adhuné—now; na—not; véraù—hero; na—not; hi—indeed; çéla-rüpaù—handsome; yasmin—in which; tvayä—by You; prema—love; kåtam—done; su-çéle—O saintly girl; tyaja—abandon; äçu—at once; nirmohanam—free from illusion; adya—today; kåñëam—Kåñëa.

     Although by birth He is a gopa, today He has become a low-class çüdra. He is not a hero, and He does not have good character. O saintly girl, today You should be free of illusion. Give up Your love for this Kåñëa.

Text 19

itthaà sa-vairaà paruñaà vacas tac
     chrutvä ca rädhä våñabhänu-nandiné
su-vismitä väkya-pade sarasvaté-
     padaà smayanté nijagäda täà prati

     ittham—thus; sa-vairam—with hatred; paruñam—harsh; vacaù—words; tac—that; chrutvä—hearing; ca—and; rädhä—Rädhä; våñabhänu—of King Våñabhänu; nandiné—the daughter; su-vismitä—; väkya-pade—in the words; sarasvaté—of eloquence; padam—the words; smayanté—smiling; nijagäda—spoke; täm—Her; prati—to.

     Surprised to hear these harsh and hateful words, King Våñabhänu's daughter Rädhä smiled and eloquently spoke to Her.

Texts 20 and 21

çré-rädhoväca 
yat-präptaye vidhi-hara-pramukhäs tapanti
     vahnau tapaù paramayä nija-yoga-rétyä
dattaù çukaù kapila äsurir aìgirä yat-
     pädäravinda-makaranda-rajaù spåçanti

taà kåñëam ädi-puruñaà paripürëa-devaà
     lélävatäram ajam arti-haraà janänäm
bhü-bhüri-hära-bharaëäya satäà çubhäya
     jätaà vinindasi kathaà sakhi durvinéte

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; yat-präptaye—to attain whom; vidhi-hara-pramukhäù—headed by Brahmä and Çiva; tapanti—perform austerities; vahnau—in the fire; tapaù—burning; paramayä—with great; nija-yoga-rétyä—yoga activities; dattaù—Dattätreya; çukaù—Çukadeva; kapila—Kapila; äsuriù—Asuri; aìgirä—and Aìgirä; yat—of whom; pädäravinda—of the lotus feet; makaranda-rajaù—the pollen; spåçanti—touch; tam—Him; kåñëam—Kåñëa; ädi-puruñam—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; paripürëa-devam—the perfect Lord; lélävatäram—who has descended to enjoy transcendental pastimes; ajam—unborn; arti—of miseries; haram—the remover; janänäm—of the people; bhü—of the earth; bhüri—the great; bhära—burden; haraëäya——to remove; satäm—of the devotees; çubhäya—for the welfare; jätam—born; vinindasi—You criticise; katham—why?; sakhi—O friend; durvinéte—uncivilized and foolish.

     Çré Rädhä said: Foolish friend, why do You criticize Lord Kåñëa, the original and perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead who, to enjoy pastimes, remove the earth's burden, and bring auspiciousness to the devotees, has descended to the earth, to attain whom Brahmä Çiva and all the demigods perform great yoga austerities, and the honey pollen of whose lotus feet Dattätreya, Çukadeva, Kapila, Asuri, and Aìgirä touch?

Text 22

gäù pälayanti satataà rajaso gaväà ca
     gaìgäà spåçanti na japanti gaväà su-nämnäm
prekñanty ahar-niçam alaà su-mukhaà gaväà ca
     jätiù parä na viditä bhuvi gopa-jäteù

     gäù—the cows; pälayanti—protect; satatam—always; rajasaù—the dust; gaväm—of the cows; ca—and; gaìgäm—the Gaìgä; spåçanti—touch; na—not; japanti—chant; gaväm—of the cows; su-nämnäm—the names; prekñanty—see; ahar-niçam—day and night; alam—greatly; su-mukham—handsome face; gaväm—of the cows; ca—and; jätiù—birth; parä—greater; na—not; viditä—known; bhuvi—on the earth; gopa-jäteù—than birth as a gopa.

     The gopas protect the cows. Without touching water, they are covered by cows' dust. The chant the cows' names. Day and night they see the cows' beautiful faces. On this earth no birth better than a gopas' birth.

Text 23

tat-kåñëa-varëa-vilasat-su-kaläà samékñya
     tasmin vilagna-manasä su-sukhaà vihäya
unmatta-vad vrajati dhävanti nélakaëöho
     bibhrat kaparda-viña-bhasma-kapäla-sarpän

     tat—of Him; kåñëa—the dark; varëa—color; vilasat—glistening; su-kalam—beautiful; samékñya—seeing; tasmin—in that; vilagna—attached; manasä—minds; su-sukham—happy; vihäya—giving up; unmatta-vat—like a madman; vrajati—go; dhävanti—run; nélakaëöhaù—Çiva; bibhrat—holding; kaparda—matted hair; viña—poison; bhasma—ashes; kapäla—skulls; sarpän—and snakes.

     Gazing at Kåñëa's dark handsomeness, Çiva became attached to Him. Giving up all normal happiness, wearing matted hair, drinking poison, covered with ashes, and decorated with snakes and skulls, Çiva now walks and runs about like a madman.

Text 24

svarloka-siddha-muni-yakña-marud-gaëänäà
     päläù samasta-nara-kinnara-näga-näthäù
yat-päda-padmam aniçaà praëipatya bhaktyä
     labdha-çriyaù kila balià pradaduù sma tasmai

     svarloka—of Svarloka; siddha—the siddhas; muni—munis; yakña—yaksas; marud-gaëänäm—and maruts; päläù—the protector; samasta—all; nara—humans; kinnara—khinnbaras; näga—and nagas; näthäù—the Lord; yat-päda-padmam—whose lotus feet; aniçam—day and night; praëipatya—bowing down; bhaktyä—with devotion; labdha—attained; çriyaù—glory; kila—indeed; balim—offerings; pradaduù—gave; sma—indeed; tasmai—to Him.

     He is the protector of the svarlokas, siddhas, munis, yakñas, and maruts. He is the master of all the humans, kinnaras, and nägas. Day and night the glorious great souls devotedly bow before His lotus feet and make offerings to Him.

Text 25

vatsägha-käliya-bakärjuna-dhenukänäà
     äcakraväta-çakaöäsura-pütanänäm
eñäà vadhaù kim uta tasya yaço murärer
     yaù koöiço 'ëòa-nicayodbhava-näça-hetuù

     vatsa—Vatsasura; agha—Agha; käliya—Kaliya; baka—Baka; arjuna—the arjuna trees; dhenukänäm—and Djenuka; äcakraväta—Trnavarta; çakaöäsura—Satakatasura; pütanänäm—and Putana; eñäm—of them; vadhaù—the death; kim uta—indeed; tasya—of Him; yaçaù—glory; muräreù—of Kåñëa; yaù—how great?; koöiçaù—many millions; aëòa-nicaya—universes; udbhava—creation; näça—and destruction; hetuù—the cause.

     He killed Vatsäsura, Agha, Käliya, Baka, the arjuna trees, Dhenuka, Tåëävärta, Sakaöäsura, and Pütanä! How great are His glories? He is the creator and destroyer of many millions of universes!

Text 26

bhaktät priyo na viditaù puruñottamasya
     çambhur vidhir na ca ramä na ca rauhiëeyaù
bhaktän anuvrajati bhakti-nibaddha-cittas
     cüòä-maëiù sakala-loka-janasya kåñëaù

     bhaktät—than a devotee; priyaù—more dear; na—not; viditaù—known; puruñottamasya—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çambhuù—of çiva; vidhiù—Brahmä; na—not; ca—and; ramä—the goddess of fortune; na—not; ca—and; rauhiëeyaù—Balaräma; bhaktän—the devotees; anuvrajati—follows; bhakti—with devotion; nibaddha—bound; cittaù—heart; cüòä-maëiù—the crest jewel; sakala-loka-janasya—of all people; kåñëaù—Kåñëa.

     To Him, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, no one is more dear than His devotee. Neither Çiva, Brahmä, Lakñmé, nor Balaräma is more dear. Lord Kåñëa, the crest-jewel of all persons, His heart now bound with love, becomes the humble follower of His devotees.

Text 27

gacchan nijaà janam anu prapunäti lokän
     ävedayan hari-jane sva-rucià mahätmä
tasmäd atéva bhajatäà bhagavän mukundo
     muktià dadäti na kadäpi su-bhakti-yogam

     gacchan—going; nijam—to His own; janam—people; anu—following; prapunäti—pruifies; lokän—the people; ävedayan—proclaiming; hari-jane—for the devotees; sva-rucim—His own love; mahätmä—the Lord; tasmät—from that; atéva—greatlly; bhajatäm—of the devotees; bhagavän—the Lord; mukundaù—Mukunda; muktim—liberation; dadäti—gives; na—not; kadäpi—ever; su-bhakti-yogam—pure devotional service.

     Following His devotees here and there, He purifies the worlds. He loudly declares His love for His devotees. To those who worship Him, Lord Kåñëa easily gives liberation, but He does not easily give pure devotional service.

Text 28

çré-gopadevatoväca 
rädhe tvadéya-dhiñaëä dhiñaëaà hasanté
     väëéà çrutià prakuçalena viòambayanté
aträgamiñyati yadätha hariù pareçaù
     satyaà dadäti vacanaà tava devi manye

     çré-gopadevatä uväca—Çré Gopadevatä said; rädhe—O Rädhä; tvadéya—of You; dhiñaëä—intelligence; dhiñaëam—Båhaspati; hasanté—laughs; väëém—words; çrutim—the Vedas; prakuçalena—expertly; viòambayanté—mocking; atra—here; ägamiñyati—will come; yadä—then; atha—then; hariù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; pareçaù—the SZupreme Lord; satyam—truth; dadäti—gives; vacanam—words; tava—of You; devi—O goddess; manye—I think.

     O Rädhä, Your intelligence laughs at Båhaspati and Your works cleverly mock the Vedas. When the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself comes here and confirms Your words, only then will I believe them.

Text 29

çré-rädhoväca 
yathägamiñyati yadädya hariù pareçaù
     kià kärayämi bhavatéà vada tarhi su-bhru
ced ägamo na hi bhaved vana-mälinaù svaà
     sarvaà dhanaà ca bhavanaà na dadämi tubhyam

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; yathä—as; ägamiñyati—will come; yadä—when; adya—today; hariù pareçaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kim—what?; kärayämi—I will make; bhavatém—You; vada—tell; tarhi—then; su-bhru—O girl with the beautiful eyebrows; cet—if; ägamaù—the Vedas; na—not; hi—indeed; bhavet—may be; vana-mälinaù—of He who wears a forest garland; svam—own; sarvam—all; dhanam—wealth; ca—and; bhavanam—home; na—not; dadämi—I give; tubhyam—to You.

     Çré Rädhä said: O girl with the beautiful eyebrows, tell Me, if the Supreme Personality of Godhead personally comes here, what will I do about You? If the Lord who wears a forest garland comes, I will not be able to give My palace and all My wealth to You. 

Text 30

çré-närada uväca 
atha rädhä samutthäya
     natvä çré-nanda-nandanam
upaviçyäsane dadhyau
     dhyäna-stimita-locanä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; rädhä—Rädhä; samutthäya—rising; natvä—bowing; çré-nanda-nandanam—the son of Nanda; upaviçya äsane—giving a seat; dadhyau—gave; dhyäna—in meditation; stimita—closed; locanä—eyes.

     Çré Närada said: Rädhä stood up, bowed before Kåñëa, and gave Him a seat. Then She closed Her eyes in meditation.

Texts 31 and 32

utkaëöhitäà sveda-yuktäà
     bäñpa-kaëöhéà priyäà hariù
açru-pürëa-mukhéà vékñya
     bibhrat svaà pauruñéà tanum

paçyanténäà sakhénäà ca
     sahasä bhakta-vatsalaù
rädhäà präha prasannätmä
     megha-gambhérayä girä

     utkaëöhitäm—filled with longing; sveda-yuktäm—perspiring; bäñpa—tears; kaëöhém—neck; priyäm—beloved; hariù—Kåñëa; açru—with tears; pürëa—filled; mukhém—face; vékñya—seeing; bibhrat—manifesting; svam—own; pauruñém—male; tanum—form; paçyanténäm—looking on; sakhénäm—friends; ca—and; sahasä—at once; bhakta—to the devotees; vatsalaù—affectionate; rädhäm—to Rädhä; präha—spoke; prasanna—pleased; ätmä—at heart; megha—clouds; gambhérayä—deep; girä—with words.

     Watching His beloved perspiring and full of longings, and watching Her face fill with tears than ran down Her neck, as Her friends looked on, Lord Kåñëa, who is kind to His devotees, became pleased at heart with Her, suddenly manifested His own male form, and spoke to Her in a voice deep as thunder.

Text 33

çré-kåñëa uväca 
rambhoru candra-vadane vraja-sundaréçe
     rädhe priye navala-yauvana-mäna-çéle
unmélya netram api paçya samägataà mäà
     türëaà tvayä madhurayä ca giropahütam

     çré-kåñëa uväca—Çré Kåñëa said; rambhoru—O girl whose thighs are like banana trees; candra-vadane—O girl whose face is like the moon; vraja-sundaréçe—O queen of the beautiful girls of Vraja; rädhe—O Rädhä; priye—O beloved; navala-yauvana-mäna-çéle—O girl with all the virtues of youth; unmélya—opening; netram—eyes; api—also; paçya—look; samägatam—come; mäm—Me; türëam—at once; tvayä—by You; madhurayä—sweet; ca—and; girä—withwords; upahütam—called.

     Çré Kåñëa said: O girl whose thighs are like banana trees, O girl whose face is like the moon, O queen of the beautiful girls of Vraja, O Rädhä, O beloved, O girl with all the virtues of youth, open Your eyes! Look! Called by Your sweet words, I have come!

Text 34

ägaccha kåñëa iti väkyam ataù çrutaà me
     sadyo visåjya nija-gokula-gopa-våndam
vaàçé-vaöäc ca yamunä-nikaöät pradhävaàs
     tvat-prétaye 'tha lalane 'tra samägato 'smi

     ägaccha—come; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; iti—thus; väkyam—wordw; ataù—then; çrutam—heard; me—by Me; sadyaù—at once; visåjya—abandoning; nija—own; gokula—Gokula; gopa-våndam—gopas; vaàçé-vaöät—from vaàçéväöa; ca—and; yamunä-nikaöät—from the Yamunä's shore; pradhävan—running; tvat—You; prétaye—for the pleasure; atha—then; lalane—O beautiful one; atra—here; samägataù—come; asmi—I am.

     When I heard You say, "O Kåñëa, please come", I at once left the gopas at Vaàçéväöa by the Yamunä's shore and ran here to please You. O beautiful one, I have come.

Text 35

mayy ägate sati gati gatä sakhi-rüpiëé
     kä yakñyäsuré sura-vadhü kila kinnaré vä
mäyävaté chalayituà bhavatéà ca tasmäd
     viçväsa eva na vidheya uraìga-patnyäm

     mayy—when I; ägate—had come; sati—O saintly girl; gati—gone; gatä—gone; sakhi-rüpiëé—in the form of a gopé firend; kä—who?; yakñy—a yaksi; äsuré—and demoness; sura-vadhü—a demigoddess; kila—kindeed; kinnaré—kinnaré; vä—or; mäyävaté—a magician; chalayitum—tocover; bhavatém—You; ca—and; tasmät—therefore; viçväsa—belief; eva—indeed; na—not; vidheya—should be done; uraìga-patnyäm—in a snake-girl.

     O saintly one, I am here. What yakñé, asuré, demigoddess, or kinnaré could have fooled You with magic as I have? You would not have believed them. Nor would You have believed a snake-goddess either.

Text 36

çré-närada uväca 
atha rädhä harià dåñövä
     natvä tat-päda-paìkajam
mudam äpa paraà räjan
     sadyaù pürëa-manorathä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; rädhä—Rädhä; harim—to Kåñëa; dåñövä—seeing; natvä—bowing down; tat-päda-paìkajam—to His lotus feet; mudam—happiness; äpa—attained; param—great; räjan—O king; sadyaù—at once; pürëa—fulfilled; manorathä—desire.

     Çré Närada said: O king, Rädhä gazed at Kåñëa and bowed before His lotus feet. Her desires fulfilled, She was very happy.

Text 37

evaà çré-kåñëacandrasya
     caritäny adbhutäni ca
yaù çåëoti naro bhaktyä
     sa kåtärtho bhaven naraù

     evam—thus; çré-kåñëacandrasya—of Çré Kåñëacandra; caritäny—the pastimes; adbhutäni—wonderful; ca—and; yaù—who; çåëoti—hears; naraù—a person; bhaktyä—with devotion; sa—he; kåtärthaù—successful; bhaven—becomes; naraù—a person.

     A person who with devotion hears these wonderful pastimes of Lord Kåñëacandra attains the supreme goal of life.

Chapter Nineteen
Räsa-kréòä
The Räsa-dance Pastime

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
rädhäyai darçanaà dattvä
     kåtvä prema-parékñaëam
agre cakära kaà léläà
     bhagavän ätma-lélayä

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; rädhäyai—to Rädhä; darçanam—sight; dattvä—giving; kåtvä—doing; prema—love; parékñaëam—test; agre—before; cakära—did; kam—what?; léläm—pastime; bhagavän—the Lord; ätma-lélayä—with playfulness.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: After He tested Rädhä's love and then revealed Himself to Her, what pastime did the Lord enjoy?

Text 2

çré-närada uväca 
mädhavo mädhave mäsi
     mädhavébhiù samäkule
våndävane samärebhe
     räsaà räseçvaraù svayam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; mädhave—in teh springtime; mäsi—month; mädhavébhiù—with madhavi vines; samäkule—filled; våndävane—in Våndävana; samärebhe—began; räsam—the rasa dance; räseçvaraù—the king of the rasa dance; svayam—Himself.

     Çré Närada said: In the month of Mädhava (April-May), when Våndävana forest was filled with blossoming mädhavé vines, Lord Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance, began the räsa-dance pastime.

Text 3

vaiçäkha-mäsi païcamyäà
     jäte candrodaye çubhe
yamunopavane reme
     räseçvaryä manoharaù

     vaiçäkha-mäsi—in the month of Madhava; pa 24camyäm—on the fifth day; jäte—manifested; candrodaye—the moonrise; çubhe—beautiful; yamuna—by the Yamunä; upavane—in a gardenb; reme—enjoyed; räseçvaryä—with thequeen of the rasa dance; manoharaù—handsome Kåñëa.

     On the fifth day of the month of Mädhava, as the moon beautifully rose, in a garden by the Yamunä's shore handsome Kåñëa enjoyed with Çré Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance.

Text 4

purä maithila golokäd
     bhümir ya kau samägatä
sarvä babhüva sauvarëa-
     padmarägamayé tvaram

     purä—previously; maithila—O king of Mithilä; golokät—from Goloka; bhümiù—the land; ya—who; kau—to the earth; samägatä—come; sarvä—all; babhüva—became; sauvarëa—gold; padmarägamayé—made of rubies; tvaram—at once.

     O king of Mithilä, in an instant the gold and ruby ground of Goloka came to the the earth.

Text 5

våndävanaà divya-vapur
     dadhät käma-dughair drumaiù
mädhavébhir latäbhiç ca
     prakñipan nanda-nandanam

     våndävanam—Våndävana; divya—transcendental; vapuù—form; dadhät—manifested; käma-dughaiù—with kalpa-våkña; drumaiù—trees; mädhavébhiù—with madhavi; latäbhiù—vines; ca—and; prakñipat—eclipsed; nanda-nandanam—the Nandana gardens of Indra.

     Then Våndävana forest manifested its transcendental form. Filled with mädhavé vines and kalpa-våkña trees, it eclipsed the Nandana gardens of Indra.

Text 6

ratna-sopäna-sampannä
     sphurat-sauvarëa-tolikä
raräja yamunä räjan
     haàsa-padmädi-saìkulä

     ratna—jewel; sopäna—stairways; sampannä—with; sphurat—glistening; sauvarëa—golden; tolikä—archways; raräja—shone; yamunä—the Yamunä; räjan—O king; haàsa—swans; padma—lotuses; ädi—beginning with; saìkulä—filled.

     O king, with jewel stairways, glittering golden arches, and many swans and lotuses, the Yamunä shone with great splendor.

Texts 7 and 8

ratna-dhätu-mayaù çrémad-
     ratna-çåìga-sphurad-dyutiù
sa-pakñi-gaëa-samyukto
     latä-puñpa-manoharaù

nirjhäraiù sundarébhiç ca
     därébhir bhramaré-våtaù
reje govardhano näma
     giri-räjaù karéndra-vat

     ratna-dhätu-mayaù—made of jewels; çrémat—beautiful; ratna—jewel; çåìga—peaks; sphurad-dyutiù—glistening; sa-pakñi-gaëa-samyuktaù—with many birds; latä—vines; puñpa—flowers; manoharaù—beautiful; nirjhäraiù—with swifty-moving streams; sundarébhiù—beautiful; ca—and; därébhiù—with caves; bhramaré-våtaù—filled with bees; reje—shone; govardhanaù—Govardhana; näma—named; giri-räjaù—the king of mountains; karéndra-vat—like the king of elephants.

     It's rocks jewels, its beautiful glittering peaks made of jewels, beautiful with many birds, flowering vines, swiftly-moving streams, beautiful caves, and many bumblebees, the king of mountains, which was named Govardhana, was splendidly manifest as if it were the king of elephants.

Texts 9 and 10

sarve nikuïjäù parito
     rejur divya-vapur-dharäù
sabhä-maëòapa-véthébhiù
     präìgana-stambha-paìktibhiù

patat-patäkair divyäbhair
     sauvarëaiù kalaçair nåpa
çvetäruëaiù puñpa-dalaiù
     puñpa-mandira-vartibhiù

     sarve—all; nikuïjäù—the forest groves; paritaù—everywhere; rejuù—shone; divya-vapur-dharäù—a transcendental form; sabhä—with assembly-houses; maëòapa—pavilions; véthébhiù—and pathways; präìgana—with courtyards; stambha—of columns; paìktibhiù—with rows; patat—fluttering; patäkaiù—with flags; divyäbhaiù—splendid; sauvarëaiù—gold; kalaçaiù—domes; nåpa—O king; çveta—white; aruëaiù—and red; puñpa-dalaiù—with flower petals; puñpa-mandira-vartibhiù—with flower palaces.

     Manifesting their spiritual forms, all the forest groves were splendidly manifest with many assembly-houses, pavilions, pathways, courtyards, rows of pillars, fluttering flags, and flower palaces with splendid golden domes and red and white flower petals. 

Texts 11 and 12

vasanta-mädhurya-dharäù
     küjat-kokila-särasäù
pärävatair mayüraiç ca
     yatra tatra niküjitäù

rädhä-kåñëa-kathäà puëyaà
     gäyamänair madhuvrataiù
patadbhir madhu-mattaiç ca
     kuïjäù sarve viräjitäù

     vasanta—of springtime; mädhurya—the sweetness; dharäù—manifesting; küjat—cooing; kokila—cuckoos; särasäù—and cranes; pärävataiù—with paravatas; mayüraiù—peacocks; ca—and; yatra—where; tatra—there; niküjitäù—cooing; rädhä-kåñëa-kathäm—topics of Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa; puëyam—sacred; gäyamänaiù—singing; madhuvrataiù—with bees; patadbhiù—flying; madhu-mattaiù—intoxicated by drinking honey; ca—and; kuïjäù—the forest groves; sarve—all; viräjitäù—splendidly manifested.

     Filled with the sweetness of spring, with cooing cuckoos, cranes, pärävatas, peacocks, and with honey-intoxicated bees singing the sacred stories of Çré Çré Rädhä and Kåñëa, all the forest groves shone with great glory. 

Text 13

puline çétalo väyur
     manda-gämé vahaty alam
sahasra-dala-padmänäà
     rajo vékñepayan muhuù

     puline—on the riverbank; çétalaù—cool; väyuù—breeze; manda-gämé—gentle; vahaty—blows; alam—greatly; sahasra-dala-padmänäm—of the thousand-petal lotuses; rajaù—pollen; vékñepayan—tossing; muhuù—again and again.

     Carrying the pollen of thousand-petal lotuses, a gentle and cool breeze blew along the riverbank.

Text 14

käçcid goloka-väsinyaù
     käçcic chäyyopakärikäù
çåìgära-prakaräù käçcit
     käçcid vai dvära-pälikäù

     käçcit—some; goloka-väsinyaù—of the girls living in Gokula; käçcic—some; çaäyya—beds; upakärikäù—arranging; çåìgära-prakaräù—decorators; käçcit—some; käçcit—some; vai—indeed; dvära-pälikäù—guarding the entrances.

     Some of the gopés were residents of Goloka, some arranged the couches, some made decorations, some guarded the entrances, . . .

Text 15

pärñadäkhyäù sakhé-janäs
     chatra-cämara-päëayaù
puñpäbharaëa-käriëyaù
     çré-våndävana-pälikäù

     pärñadä-äkhyäù—called associates; sakhé-janäù—gopé friends; chatra-cämara-päëayaù—holding parasols and camaras in their hands; puñpa—flower; äbharaëa—ornaments; käriëyaù—in their hands; çré-våndävana-pälikäù—protectors of Çré Våndävana.

 . . . some were Rädhä's associates and friends, some carried parasols, cämaras, and flower decorations in their hands, some were protectors of Våndävana forest, . . .

Text 16

govardhana-niväsinyaù
     käçcit kuïja-vidhäyikäù
tan-nikuïja-niväsinyo
     nartakyo vädya-tat-paräù

     govardhana-niväsinyaù—living on Govardhana Hill; käçcit—some; kuïja—the groves; vidhäyikäù—arranging; tan-nikuïja-niväsinyaù—residing in the forest groves; nartakyaù—dancers; vädya-tat-paräù—instrumentalists.

 . . . some lived on Govardhana Hill, some decorated the forest groves, some stayed in the forest groves, some were dancers, and some played musical instruments.

Text 17

sarvä vai candra-vadanäù
     kiçora-vayaso nåpa
äsäà dvädaça-yüthäç cä-
     jagmuù çré-kåñëa-sannidhim

     sarväù—all; vai—indeed; candra-vadanäù—faces like the moon; kiçora-vayasaù—youthful; nåpa—O king; äsäm—of them; dvädaça—twelve; yüthäù—groups; ca—and; äjagmuù—came; çré-kåñëa-sannidhim—near Çré Kåñëa.

     O king, they were all young and they all had faces glorious as the moon. In twelve groups they approached Çré Kåñëa.

Text 18

tathaiva yamunä säkñäd
     yüthé-bhütvä samäyayau
nélämbarä ratna-bhüñä
     çyämä kamala-locanä

     tathä—so; eva—indeed; yamunä—the Yamunä; säkñät—directly; yüthé-bhütvä—becoming a gopé; samäyayau—came; nélämbarä—in blue garments; ratna-bhüñä—decorated with jewels; çyämä—dark; kamala—lotus; locanä—eyes.

     Then the Yamunä became a dark-complexioned, lotus-eyed, dressed in blue and decorated with jewels leader of a group of gopés, and came there.

Text 19

tathaiva jahnavé gaìgä
     yüthé-bhütvä samäyayau
çvetämbarä çveta-varëä
     muktäbharaëa-bhüñitä

     tathä—so; eva—indeed; jahnavé gaìgä—the Gaìgä;yüthé-bhütvä samäyayau—becoming a gopé; çveta-varëä—with a fair complexion; muktäbharaëa-bhüñitä—decorated with pearls.

     Then the Gaìgä became a fair-complexioned, dressed in white and decorated with pearls leader of a group of gopés, and she also came there.

Text 20

tathäyayau ramä säkñäd
    yüthé-bhütväruëämbarä
candra-varëä manda-häsä
     padmaräga-vibhüñitä

     tathä—so; äyayau—came; ramä—the goddess of fortune; säkñät—directly; yüthé-bhütvä—become a gopé; aruëämbarä—wearing red garments; candra—of the moon; varëä—the color; manda-häsä—with a gentle smile; padmaräga-vibhüñitä—decorated with rubies.

     Then goddess Ramä became a gently smiling, moon-complexioned, dressed in red and decorated with rubies leader of a group of gopés, and she also came there.

Text 21

tathäyayau kåñëa-patné
     nämnä yä madhu-mädhavé
padma-varëä puñpa-bhüñä
     yüthé-bhütä çubhämbarä

     tathä—then; äyayau—came; kåñëa-patné—Lord Kåñëa's wife; nämnä—by the name; yä—who; madhu-mädhavé—madhumädhavé; padma—of a lotus; varëä—the color; puñpa-bhüñä—decorated with flowers; yüthé-bhütä—becoming a gopé; çubhämbarä—with splendid garments.

     Then Lord Kåñëa's wife named Madhumädhavé become a lotus-complexioned, dressed in beautiful garments and decorated with flowers leader of a group of gopés, and she also came there.

Text 22

tathaiva virajä säkñäd
     yüthé-bhütvä samäyayau
harid-vasträ gaura-varëä
     ratnälaìkära-bhüñitä

     tathä—so; eva—indeed; virajä—the Virajä; säkñät—directly; yüthé-bhütvä—becoming a gopé; samäyayau—came; harid-vasträ—in green garments; gaura-varëä—golden complexion; ratnälaìkära-bhüñitä—decorated with jewels.

     Then the Virajä river became a golden-complexioned, dressed in green and decorated with jewels leader of a group of gopés, and she also came there.

Text 23

lalitayä viçäkhäyä
     mäyä-yüthäù samäyayau
evaà tv añöa-sakhénäà ca
     sakhénäà kila ñoòaça

     lalitäyäù—of lalitä; viçäkhäyäù—of Viçäkhä; mäyä—of Goddess Lakñmé; yüthäù—the groups; samäyayau—came; evam—thus; tv—indeed; añöa—eight; sakhénäm—of friends; ca—and; sakhénäm—of gopé friends; kila—indeed; ñoòaça—sixteen.

     Then the groups led by Lalitä, Viçäkhä, and goddess Lakñmé came. In this way the eight principal friends of Çré Rädhä came and sixteen more friends also came.

Text 24

dvä-triàçac ca sakhénäà ca
     yüthä sarve samäyayuù
raräja bhagavän räjan
     stré-gaëai räsa-maëòale

     dvä-triàçat—thirty-tw; ca—and; sakhénäm—of friends; ca—and; yüthä—groups; sarve—all; samäyayuù—came; raräja—shone; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; räjan—O king; stré-gaëai—with the women; räsa-maëòale—in the räsa dance circle.

     Then thirty-two more groups of gopés came. O king, accompanied by these many women, the Lord was splendidly manifest in the räsa-dance circle.

Text 25

våndävane yathäkäçe
     candras tärä-gaëair yathä
péta-väsaù-parikäro
     naöa-veño manoharaù

     våndävane—in Våndävana; yathä—as; äkäçe—in the sky; candraù—the moon; tärä-gaëaiù—with the stars; yathä—as; péta—yellow; väsaù—garments; parikäraù—wearing; naöa-veñaù—as a dancer; manoharaù—handsome.

     Then in Våndävana forest Lord Kåñëa became like a handsome dancer dressed in yellow garments. He became like a moon accompanied by many stars in the sky.

Texts 26 and 27

vetra-bhåd vädayan vaàçéà
     gopénäà prétim ävahan
mayüra-pakña-bhån-maulé
     sragvé kuëòala-maëòitaù

rädhayä çuçubhe räse
     yathä ratyä ratéçvaraù
evaà gäyan hariù säkñät
     sundaré-gaëa-samvåtaù

     vetra—a stick; bhåt—holding; vädayan—playing; vaàçém—the flute; gopénäm—of the gopés; prétim—love; ävahan—bearing; mayüra—peacock; pakña—feather; bhåt—wearing; maulé—as a crown; sragvé—garlanded; kuëòala—with earrings; maëòitaù—decorated; rädhayä—with Rädhä; çuçubhe—shone; räse—in the rasa dance; yathä—as; ratyä—with Rati; ratéçvaraù—Kämadeva; evam—so; gäyan—singing; hariù—Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; sundaré-gaëa-samvåtaù—surrounded by beautiful women.

     Holding a stick, wearing a garland, earrings, and a peacock-feather crown, playing the flute, singing, surrounded by the beautiful gopés, and full of love for them, Lord Kåñëa shone with Rädhä in the räsa dance, as Kämadeva shines with Rati.

Text 28

yamunä-pulinaà puëyaà
     äyayau rädhayä yutaù
gåhétvä hasta-padmena
     padmäbhaà sva-priyä-karam

     yamunä-pulinam—the Yamunä's shore; puëyam—sacred; äyayau—came; rädhayä—with Rädhä; yutaù—with; gåhétvä—taking; hasta—hand; padmena—lotus; padmäbham—glorious as a lotus; sva-priyä-karam—His beloved's hand.

     Taking His beloved Rädhä's lotus hand in His lotus hand, Lord Kåñëa went to the Yamunä's sacred shore.

Text 29

niñasäda hariù kåñëa-
     tére néra-manohare
punar jalpan su-madhuraà
     paçyan våndävanaà priyam

     niñasäda—sat down; hariù—Kåñëa; kåñëa—of the Yamunä; tére—on the shore; néra—water; manohare—beautiful; punaù—again; jalpan—speaking; su-madhuram—sweetly; paçyan—looking; våndävanam—at Våndävana; priyam—dear.

     Looking at His beloved Våndävana forest, and sweetly conversing, Lord Kåñëa sat down by the Yamuna's beautiful waters.

Text 30

calan hasan rädhikayä
     kuïjaà kuïjaà cacära ha
kuïje niléyamänaà taà
     tvaraà tyaktvä priyä-karam

     calan—walking; hasan—laughing; rädhikayä—with Rädhä; kuïjam—grove; kuïjam—after grove; cacära—walked; ha—indeed; ku 24je—in a grove; niléyamänam—disappearing; tam—Him; tvaram—quickly; tyaktvä—leaving; priyä-karam—the hand of His beloved.

     Smiling and laughing, He walked with Rädhä from forest grove to forest grove. Suddenly slipping from His beloved's hand, He hid among the trees.

Text 31

vilokya çäkhäntaritaà
     rädhä jagräha mädhavam
rädhä dudräva tad-dhastäj
     jhaìkäraà kurvaté pade

     vilokya—seeing; çäkha-antaritam—in the trees; rädhä—Rädhä; jagräha—grabbed; mädhavam—Kåñëa; rädhä—Rädhä; dudräva—ran; tad-dhastät—from His hand; jhaìkäram—tinkling; kurvaté—doing; pade—with Her feet.

     Seeing Him hiding among the trees, Rädhä captured Kåñëa. Then Rädhä slipped from His hand and ran away, Her anklets tinkling.

Text 32

niléyamänä kuïjeñu
     paçyato mädhavasya ca
dhävan harir gato yävat
     tävad rädhä tato gatä

     niléyamänä—hiding; kuïjeñu—among the trees; paçyataù—looking; mädhavasya—Kåñëa; ca—and; dhävan—running; hariù—Kåñëa; gataù—went; yävat—as; tävat—so; rädhä—transcendental; tataù—then; gatä—went.

     Kåñëa looked as She hid among the trees. Wherever Rädhä ran, Kåñëa ran after Her.

Text 33

våkña-pärçve hasta-mäträd
     itaç cetaç ca dhävaté
tamälo hema-vally eva
     ghanaç caïcalayä yathä

     våkña—of a tree; pärçve—by the side; hasta-mäträt—only a hand away; itaù—here; ca—and; itaù—there; ca—and; dhävaté—running; tamälaù—a tamala tree; hema—gold; vallé—vine; eva—indeed; ghanaù—a monsoon cloud; ca 24calayä—with lightning; yathä—as.

     Only a hand away, She ran among the trees. They were like a tamäla tree and a golden vine or a monsoon cloud and a lightning flash.

Text 34

hema-khanyeva nélädré
     reje rädhikayä hariù
rädhayä viçva-mohinyä
     babhau madana-mohanaù

     hema-khanyä—a gold mine; iva—like; néla—a dark; adré—mountain; reje—shone; rädhikayä—with Rädhä; hariù—Kåñëa; rädhayä—with Rädhä; viçva—the universe; mohinyä—charming; babhau—shone; madana—than Kämadeva; mohanaù—more charming.

     Like a dark mountain and a gold mine, Lord Kåñëa, who is more enchanting then Kämadeva, shone with Rädhä, the most enchanting girl in the world.

Text 35

våndävane räsa-raìge
     ratyeva madano yathä
dhåtvä rüpäni tävanti
     yävanti vraja-yoñitaù

     våndävane—in Våndävana; räsa-raìge—in the rasa-dance arena; ratyä—with Rati; iva—like; madanaù—Kämadeva; yathä—as; dhåtvä—taking; rüpäni—the forms; tävanti—so; yävanti—as; vraja-yoñitaù—the women of Vraja.

     It was as if Kämadeva and Rati had taken the forms of Lord Kåñëa and the girls of Vraja in the räsa-dance arena.

Text 36

nanarta räsa-raìge 'sau
     raìga-bhümyäà naöo yathä
gäyantyaç cäpi nåtyantyaù
     sarvä gopyo manoharäù

     nanarta—danced; räsa-raìge—in the rasa-dance arena; asau—He; raìga-bhümyäm—in the arena; naöaù—a dancer; yathä—as; gäyantyaù—singing; ca—and; api—also; nåtyantyaù—dancing; sarvä—all; gopyaù—the gopés; manoharäù—beautiful.

     Lord Kåñëa danced in the räsa-dance arena and all the beautiful gopés also sang and danced.

Text 37

virejuù kåñëacandraiç ca
     yathä çakraiù suräìganäù
varaà vihäraà kåñëäyäà
     cakära madhusüdanaù

     virejuù—they shone; kåñëacandraiù—with many Kåñëacandras; ca—and; yathä—as; çakraiù—with Indras; suräìganäù—demigoddesses; varam—excellent; vihäram—pastime; kåñëäyäm—in the Yamunä; cakära—did; madhusüdanaù—Kåñëa.

     The gopés shone with many Lord Kåñëacandras as the demigoddesses shine with many Indras. Then Lord Kåñëa enjoyed pastimes in the Yamunä.

Text 38

sarvair gopé-gaëaiù särdhaà
     yakñébhir yakña-räò iva
kabaré-keça-päçäbhyäà
     prasünaiù pracyutaiù çubhaiù
citra-varëair babhau kåñëo
     yathoñëiì-mudritä tathä

     sarvaiù—with all; gopé-gaëaiù—the gopés; särdham—with; yaksibhih—with the yaksis; yakña-räò——the king of the yaksas; iva—like; kabari-keça-päçäbhyäm—with braids; prasünaiù—with flowers; pracyutaiù—falling; çubhaiù—beautiful; citra-varëaiù—colorful; babhau—shone; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; yathä—as; uñëik-mudritä—marked with usnik; tathä—so.

     Lord Kåñëa enjoyed pastimes with the gopés as the Yakña king enjoys with many yakñés. Splendid with many wonderfully colorful and beautiful flowers fallen from the gopés' braids, Lord Kåñëa seemed to be marked with many verses written in the meter uñëik.

Text 39

mådaìga-tälair madhura-dhvani-svanair
     jagur yaças tä madhusüdanasya
präpur mudaà pürëa-manorathaç calat-
     prasüna-härä hariëä gata-vyathäù

     mådaìga—of the mrdangas; tälaiù—with karatalas; madhura-dhvani-svanaiù—with sweet sounds; jaguù—sang; yaçaù—the glory; tä—they; madhusüdanasya—of Lord Kåñëa; präpuù—attained; mudam—happiness; pürëa-manorathaù—fulfilled desires; calat—moving; prasüna—flower; härä—garlands; hariëä—with Kåñëa; gata—gone; vyathäù—distress.

     Accompanied by the sweet sounds of måaìgas and karatälas, and their flower garlands moving to and fro, they sang the glories of Lord Kåñëa. Free of troubles and their desires now fulfilled, they attained great happiness.

Text 40

çré-hasta-santäòita-väri-bindubhiù
     sphäräsama-sphurjita-çékara-dyutiù
våndävaneço vraja-sundarébhé
     reje gajébhir gaja-räò iva svayam

     çré—beautiful; hasta—hand; santäòita—struck; väri—of water; bindubhiù—with drops; sphära—great; asama—unequalled; sphurjita—manifested; çékara—splash; dyutiù—splendor; våndävaneçaù—the king of Våndävana; vraja-sundarébhé—with the beautiful girls of Vraja; reje—shone; gajébhiù—with female elephants; gaja-räò—an elephant king; iva—like; svayam—personally.

     With His glorious hand splashing an unequalled shower of water drops, Lord Kåñëa, the king of Våndävana, enjoyed with the beautiful girls of Vraja as an elephant king enjoys with many female elephants.

Text 41

vidyädharyo deva-gandharva-patnyaù
     paçyantyas tä räsa-raìgaà divi-sthäù
devaiù särdhaà cakrire puñpa-varñaà
     mohaà präptäù praçlathad-vastra-névyaù

     vidyädharyaù—Vidyädharés; deva—of the devas; gandharva—and gandharvas; patnyaù—the wives; paçyantyaù—looking; tä—they; räsa—odf the rasa dance; raìgam—at the arena; divi-sthäù—staying in the heavenly planets; devaiù—the demigods; särdham—with; cakrire—did; puñpa-varñam—a shower of flowers; moham—enchantment; präptäù—attained; praçlathat—loosened; vastra—garments; névyaù—and belts.

     As in the sky they looked on, the wives of the vidyädharas, devas, and gandharvas became entranced and their garments and tight belts became loosened. With the demigods they showered flowers on the räsa-dance arena.
.pa

Chapter Twenty
Räsa-kréòä
The Räsa-dance Pastime

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
atha kåñëo harir väri-
     léläà kåtvä manoharaù
sarvair gopé-gaëaiù särdhaà
     girià govardhanaà yayau

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; hariù—Hari; väri—water; léläm—pastimes; kåtvä—doing; manoharaù—handsome; sarvaiù—with all; gopé-gaëaiù—the gopés; särdham—with;; girim—Hill; govardhanam—Govardhana; yayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: After enjoying water pastimes, handsome Lord Kåñëa went with the gopés to Govardhana Hill.

Text 2

govardhane kandaräyäà
     ratna-bhümyäà hariù svayam
räsaà ca rädhayä särdhaà
     räseçvaryä cakära ha

     govardhane—on Govardhana Hill; kandaräyäm—in a cave; ratna-bhümyäm—in a jeweled place; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally; räsam—rasa dance; ca—and; rädhayä—Rädhä; särdham—with; räseçvaryä—the queen of the rasa dance; cakära—did; ha—certainly.

     On Govardhana Hill, in a cave where the ground was made of jewels, Lord Kåñëa enjoyed a räsa dance with Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance.

Text 3

tatra siàhäsane ramye
     tasthatuù puñpa-saìkule
taòid-ghaëäv iva girau
     rädhä-kåñëau virejatuù

     tatra—there; siàhäsane—on a throne; ramye—beautiful; tasthatuù—stayed; puñpa-saìkule—filled with flowers; taòit—lightning; ghaëau—and a cloud; iva—like; girau—on a hill; rädhä-kåñëau—Rädhä and Kåñëa; virejatuù—shone.

     Sitting on a flower throne, Çré Çré Rädhä and Kåñëa shone like a monsoon cloud and lightning on the hill.

Text 4

sväminyäs tatra çåìgäraà
     cakruù sakhyo mudänvitaù
çrékhaëòa-kuìkumädyaiç ca
     yävakäguru-kajjalaiù

     sväminyäù—of their mistress; tatra—there; çåìgäram—decoration; cakruù—did; sakhyaù—the friends; mudänvitaù—happy; çrékhaëòa—sandal; kuìkuma—kunkuma; ädyaiù—beginning with; ca—and; yävaka—yavaka; aguru—aguru; kajjalaiù—and kajjala.

     There the happy gopé friends decorated their queen, Rädhä, with sandal, kuìkuma, yävaka, aguru, and kajjala.

Text 5

makarandaiù kérti-sutäà
     samabhyarcya vidhänataù
dadau çré-yamunä säkñäd
     rädhäyai nüpuräëy alam

     makarandaiù—with honey; kérti-sutäm—Kérti's daughter; samabhyarcya—Rädhä; vidhänataù—according to custom; dadau—gave; çré-yamunä—Çré  Yamunä; säkñät—directly; rädhäyai—to Rädhä; nüpuräëy—anklebells; alam—greatly.

     The gopés worshiped Kérti's daughter Rädhä with offerings of honey. Çré Yamunä gave nüpura anklets to Her.

Text 6

maïjéra-bhüñaëaà divyaà
     çré-gaìgä jahnu-nandiné
çré-ramä kiìkiëé-jälaà
     häraà çré-madhu-mädhavé

     maïjéra-bhüñaëam—manjira anklets; divyam—splendid; çré-gaìgä—Çré Gaìgä; jahnu-nandiné—the daughter of Jahnu Muni; çré-ramä—Çré Ramä; kiìkiëé-jälam—a network of tinkling ornaments; häram—a necklace; çré-madhu-mädhavé—Çré Madhumädhavé.

     Çré Gaìgä gave splendid maïjéra anklets, Çré Ramä gave a network of tinkling ornaments, and Madhumädhavé gave a necklace.

Text 7

candra-häraà ca virajä
     koöi-candrämalaà çubham
lalitä kaïcuka-maëià
     viçäkhä kaëöha-bhüñaëam

     candra-häram—a necklace of candrakänta jewels; ca—and; virajä—Viarajä; koöi-candrämalam—splendid as millions of moons; çubham—beautiful; lalitä—Lalitä; kaïcuka—bodice; maëim—jewels; viçäkhä—Viçakhä; kaëöha-bhüñaëam—ornament for the neck.

     Virajä gave a beautiful candrakänta necklace splendid as millions of moons, Lalitä gave a jewel bodice, and Viçäkhä gave a neck ornament.

Text 8

aìguléyaka-ratnäni
     dadau candränanä tadä
ekädaçé rädhikäyai
     ratnäòhyaà kaìkana-dväyäm

     aìguléyaka—rings; ratnäni—jewel; dadau—gave; candränanä—Candränanä; tadä—then; ekädaçé—Ekädaçé; rädhikäyai—to Rädhä; ratnäòhyam—opulent with jewels; kaìkana-dväyäm—two bracelets.

     Candränanä gave many jewel rings and Ekädaçé gave to Rädhä two bracelets rich with many jewels.

Text 9

bhuja-kaìkaëa-ratnäni
     çatacandränanä dadau
tasya madhumaté säkñät
     sphurad-ratnäìgada-dvayam

     bhuja-kaìkana—armlets; ratnäni—jewels; çatacandränanä—Çatacandränanä; dadau—gave; tasyai—to Her; madhumaté—Madhumaté; säkñät—directly; sphurat—glittering; ratna—jewel; aìgada—armlets; dvayam—two.

     Çatacandränanä gave many jewel bhuja-kaìkaëa armlets, and Madhumaté gave a pair of glittering aìgada armlets. 

Text 10

täöaìka-yugalaà bandé
     kuëòale sukha-däyiné
änandé yä sakhé mukhyä
     rädhäyai bhäla-toraëam

     täöaìka-yugalam—earrings; bandé—bandé; kuëòale—earrings; sukha-däyiné—Sukhadäyiné; änandé—Anandé; yä—who; sakhé—friend; mukhyä—first; rädhäyai—to Rädhä; bhäla-toraëam—an ornament for the forehead.

     Bandé gave täöaìka earrings, Sukhadäyiné gave kuëòala earrings, and the close friend Anandé gave a bhäla-toraëa ornament to Rädhä.

Text 11

padmä sad-bhäla-tilakaà
     binduà candrakalä dadau
näsä-mauktikam älolaà
     dadau padmavaté saté

     padmä—Padmä; sad-bhäla-tilakam—tilaka for the forehead; bindum—drop; candrakalä—Candrakalä; dadau—gave; näsä—nose; mauktikam—pearl; älolam—moving; dadau—gave; padmavaté—Padmavaté; saté—saintly.

     Padmä gave beautiful forehead-tilaka, Candrakalä gave a bindu, and Padmavaté gave a nose-pearl that moved to and fro.

Text 12

bälärka-dyuti-samyuktaà
     bhäla-puñpaà manoharam
çré-rädhäyai dadau räjaàs
     candrakäntä sakhé çubhä

     bälärka—the rising sun; dyuti—splendor; samyuktam—with; bhäla—for the forehead; puñpam—flower; manoharam—beautiful; çré-rädhäyai—to Çré Rädhä; dadau—gave; räjan—O king; candrakäntä—Candrakäntä; sakhé—friend; çubhä—beautiful.

     O king, Her beautiful friend Candrakäntä gave Rädhä a charming bhälapuñpa splendid as the rising sun.

Texts 13-16

çiromaëià sundaré ca
     ratna-veëéà praharñiëé
bhüñaëe candra-süryäkhye
     vidyut-koöi-sama-prabhe

rädhikäyai dadau devé
     våndä våndävaneçvaré
evaà çåìgära-saàsphurjad-
     rüpayä rädhayä hariù

giri-räje babhau räjan
     yajïo dakñiëayä yathä
yatra vai rädhayä räse
     çåìgäro 'käri maithila

tatra govardhane jätaà
     sthalaà çåìgära-maëòalam
atha kåñëaù sva-priyäbhir
     yayau candra-sarovaram

     çiromaëim—a crest jewel; sundaré—Sundaré; ca—and; ratna-veëém—braid jewels; praharñiëé—Praharñiëé; bhüñaëe—two ornaments; candra-süryäkhye—named candra and sürya; vidyut-koöi-sama-prabhe—splendid as ten million lightning flashes; rädhikäyai—to Rädhä; dadau—gave; devé—goddess; våndä—Våndä; våndävaneçvaré—the queen of Våndävana; evam—thus; çåìgära—with ornaments; saàsphurjat—shining; rüpayä—form; rädhayä—with Rädhä; hariù—Kåñëa; giri-räje—on the king of mountains; babhau—was splendidly manifest; räjan—O king; yajïaù—Yajïa; dakñiëayä—with Dakñiëä; yathä—as; yatra—where; vai—indeed; rädhayä—with r; räse—in the rasa dance; çåìgäraù—decoration; akäri—was; maithila—O king of Mithilä; tatra—ther; govardhane—on Govardhana Hill; jätam—born; sthalam—place; çåìgära-maëòalam—çåìgära-maëòalam; atha—then; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; sva-priyäbhiù—with his beloveds; yayau—went; candra-sarovaram—to Candra-sarovara.

     Sundaré gave a crest-jewel, Praharñiëé gave a braid-jewel, and Goddess Våndä, the queen of Våndävana, gave candra and sürya ornaments glittering like ten million lightning flashes. Accompanied by brilliantly decorated Rädhä on the king of mountains, Lord Kåñëa shone with great glory. The place on Govardhana Hill where Rädhä was decorated is known as çåìgära-maëòala. Then, accompanied by His beloved gopés, Lord Kåñëa went to the lake Candra-sarovara.

Texts 17-21

cakära taj-jale kréòäà
     gajébhir gaja-räò iva
tatra candraù samägatya
     candrakäntau mäëé çubhau

sahasra-dala-padme dve
     svaminyai haraye dadau
atha kåñëo hariù säkñät
     paçyan våndävana-çriyam

prayayau bähulavanaà
     latä-jäla-samanvitam
tatra sveda-samäyuktaà
     vékñya sarvaà sakhé-janam

rägaà tu megha-malläraà
     jagau vaàçé-dharaù svayam
sadyas tatraiva vavåñur
     meghä ambu-kaëäàs tathä

tadaiva çétalo väyur
     vavau gandha-manoharaù
tena gopé-gaëäù sarve
     sukhaà präptä videha-räö

     cakära—did; taj-jale—in the water; kréòäm—pastimes; gajébhiù—with female elephants; gaja-räò—an elephgant king; iva—like; tatra—there; candraù—the moon; samägatya—arriving; candrakäntau—Candrakänta; mäëé—two jewels; çubhau—beautiful; sahasra-dala-padme—thusand-petal lotuses; dve—two; svaminyai—to queen Rädhä; haraye—to Kåñëa; dadau—gave; atha—then; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; hariù—Hari; säkñät—directly; paçyan—looking; våndävana-çriyam—at the beauty of Våndävana forest; prayayau—went; bähulavanam—to bahulavana; latä-jäla-samanvitam—filled with a network of vines; tatra—there; sveda-samäyuktam—perspiring; vékñya—seeing; sarvam—all; sakhé-janam—tÙis gopé friends; rägam—the raga; tu—indeed; megha-malläram—megha-mallara; jagau—playged; vaàçé—the flute; dharaù—holding; svayam—personally; sadyaù—at once; tatra—there; eva—indeed; vavåñuù—rained; meghä—the clouds; ambu-kaëän—drops of water; tathä—so; tadä—then; eva—indeed; çétalaù—cool; väyuù—breeze; vavau—blew; gandha-manoharaù—pleasantly fragrant; tena—by that; gopé-gaëäù—the gopés; sarve—all; sukham—happiness; präptä—attained; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     In the water there the Lord enjoyed pastimes with the gopés as the king of elephants enjoys with many female elephants. Then Candra came and offered two sahasra-dala (thousand-petal) lotuses and two beautiful candrakänta jewels to Rädhä and Kåñëa. After gazing at the beauty of Våndävana forest, Kåñëa went to Bähulavana forest, which was filled with a network of flowering vines. Noticing that all the gopés were perspiring, He played the megha-mallära räga (cloud melody) on His flute, and at once many clouds rained fine drops of water. Then a fragrant cool breeze blew, and all the gopés became happy, O king of Videha.

Text 22

jagur yaçaù çré-murärer
     uccais tatra samanvitäù
tasmät tälavanaà prägäc
     chré-kåñëo rädhikä-patiù

     jaguù—sag; yaçaù—the gloriesd; çré-muräreù—of Çré Kåñëa; uccaiù—loudly; tatra—there; samanvitaù—with; tasmät—from that; tälavanaàto Talavaan; prägäc—went; chré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; rädhikä-patiù—the Lord of Rädhä.

     The gopés loudly sang Çré Kåñëa's glories. Then Çré Kåñëa, the Lord of Rädhä, went to Tälavana. 

Text 23

räsa-maëòalam ärebhe
     gäyan vraja-vadhü-våtaù
tatra gopé-gaëäù sarve
     sveda-yuktäs tåñäturäù

     räsa-maëòalam—the rasa dance circle; ärebhe—began; gäyan—singing; vraja-vadhü-våtaù—accompanied by the girls of Vraja; tatra—there; gopé-gaëäù—the gopés; sarve—all; sveda-yuktäù—perspiring; tåñä—with thirst; äturäù—afflicted.

     Singing, the Lord formed a räsa-dance circle with the girls of Vraja. Then the gopés began to perspire. They were tortured with thirst.

Text 24

ücü räseçvaraà räse
     kåtäïjalé-puöäù çanaiù
düraà vai yamunä deva
     tåñä jätä paraà hi naù

     ücü—said; räseçvaram—to the king of the rasa dance; räse—in the rasa dance; kåtäïjalé-puöäù—with folded hands; çanaiù—slowly; düram—far away; vai—indeed; yamunä—Yamunä; deva—O Lord; tåñä—thirst; jätä—born; param—greatly; hi—indeed; naù—of us.

     Folding their hands in the middle of the räsa dance, the gopés slowly said to Lord Kåñëa, the master of the räsa dance: "O Lord, the Yamunä is far away, and we have become very thirsty.

Text 25

kartavyaà bhavatätraiva
     räse divyaà manoharam
väräà vihäraà pänaà ca
     kariñyämo hare vayam

     kartavyam—should be done; bhavatä—by You; atra—here; eva—indeed; räse—in the rasa dance; divyam—splendid; manoharam—beautiful; väräm—water; vihäram—pastimes; pänam—drinking; ca—and; kariñyämaù—do; hare—O Kåñëa; vayam—we.

     "O Kåñëa, please do something so that in this räsa dance arena we may drink water and enjoy water pastimes.

Text 26

jagat-kartä pälakas tvaà
     saàhärasyäpi näyakaù
tac chrutvä vetra-daëòena
     kåñëo bhümià tatäòa ha

     jagat-kartä—the creator of the universes; pälakaù—the protector; tvam—You; saàhärasya—of devastation; api—also; näyakaù—the leader; tac—that; çrutvä—hearing; vetra-daëòena—with His stick; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; bhümim—the earth; tatäòa—struck; ha—indeed.

     "You are the creator, protector and destroyer of the worlds." 
     Hearing this, Lord Kåñëa struck the ground with His stick.

Text 27

tadaiva nirgataù çroto
     vetra-gaìgeti kathyate
yaj-jala-sparça-mätreëa
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate
tatra snatvä naraù ko 'pi
     golokaà yäti maithila

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; nirgataù—came; çrotaù—a stream; vetra-gaìgä—the Vetra-gaìgä; iti—thus; kathyate—called; yaj-jala—the water of which; sparça—touch; mätreëa—only; brahma-hatyä—the killing of a brähmaëa; pramucyate—one becomes free; tatra—there; snatvä—bathing; naraù—a person; ko 'pi—someone; golokam—to Goloka; yäti—goes; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     At once a stream called the Vetra-gaìgä sprang up. Simply by touching it one becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa. O king of Mithilä, anyone who bathes there goes to Goloka.

Text 28

gopébhé rädhayä särdhaà
     çré-kåñëo bhagavän hariù
väräà vihäraà kåtavän
     devo madana-mohanaù

     gopébhé—with the gopés; rädhayä—Rädhä; särdham—with; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Lord; hariù—Hari; väräm—water; vihäram—pastimes; kåtavän—did; devaù—the Lord; madana—thena Kämadeva; mohanaù—more charming; 

     Then Çré Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is more charming than Kämadeva, enjoyed water pastimes with Çré Rädhä and the gopés.

Text 29

tataù kumudvanaà präpto
     latä-våndaà manoharam
bhramara-dhvani-samyuktaà
     cakre räsaà sakhé-janaiù

     tataù—then; kumudvanam—Kumudvana; präptaù—attained; latä-våndam—with many vines; manoharam—beautiful; bhramara—of bees; dhvani—the sound; samyuktam—with; cakre—did; räsam—the rasa dance; sakhé-janaiù—with gopé friends. 
     Then Çré Kåñëa went to Kumudvana forest, which was filled with the sounds of humming bees, and again He enjoyed the räsa dance with the gopés. 

Text 30

rädhä tatraiva çåìgäraà
     çré-kåñëasya cakära ha
puñpair nänä-vidhair dravyaiù
     paçyanténäà vrajaukasäm

     rädhä—Rädhä; tatra—there; eva—indeed; çåìgäram—decoration; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; cakära—did; ha—indeed; puñpaiù—with flowers; nänä—various; vidhaiù—kinds; dravyaiù—things; paçyanténäm—looking on; vrajaukasäm—of the residents of Vraja. 

     Then, as the girls of Vraja looked on, Rädhä decorated Çré Kåñëa with many flowers and ornaments.

Texts 31 and 32 

campakodyat-parikaraù
     svarëa-yüthé-bhujäìgadaù
sahasra-dala-räjéva-
     karëikä-vilasac-chrutiù
mohiné-mäliné-kunda-
     ketaké-hära-bhåd dhariù

     campaka—campaka; udyat—blossoming; parikaraù—belt; svarëa-yüthé—svarnayuthi; bhujäìgadaù—armlets; sahasra-dala-räjéva—thousand petal lotus; karëikä—whorl; vilasat—splendid; çrutiù—ears; mohiné—mohini; mäliné—malini; kunda—kunda; ketaké—and ketaki; hära—garland; bhåt—wearing; hariù—Kåñëa.

     In this way Lord Kåñëa' belt was decorated with campaka flowers, and His armlets with svarëa-yüthé flowers. He wore a garland of mohiné, mäliné, kunda, and ketaké flowers. His ears were made splendid with the whorls of thousand-petal lotuses.

Text 33

kadamba-puñpa-vilasat-
     kiréöa-kaöakojjvalaù
mandära-puñpottaréya-
     padma-yañöi-dharaù prabhuù

     kadamba-puñpa—kadamba flowers; vilasat—splendid; kiréöa—crown; kaöaka—bracelet; ujjvalaù—splendid; mandära—mandara; puñpa—flowers; uttaréya—upper garment; padma—lotus; yañöi—stick; dharaù—holding; prabhuù—the Lord.

     Lord Kåñëa's crown and bracelets were made splendid with kadamba flowers, His upper garment was decorated with mandära flowers, and His stick was decorated with lotuses.

Texts 34-37

tulasé-maïjaré-yukta-
     vana-mälä-vibhüñitaù
evaà çåìgäratäà präptaù
     çré-kåñëaù priyayä svayä

babhau kumudvane räjan
     vasanto harñito yathä
mådaìga-véëä-vaàçébhir
     muru-yañöi-sukäàsyakaiù

täla-çeñais talair yuktä
     jagur gopyo manoharaà
bhairavaà megha-malläraà
     dépakaà mälakoçakaà

çré-rägaà cäpi hindolaà
     rägam eva påthak påthak
añöa-tälais tribhir grämaiù
     svaraiù saptabhir agrataù

     tulasé-maïjaré-yukta—with tulasé-ma 24jarés; vana-mälä-vibhüñitaù—decorated with a forest garland; evam—thus; çåìgäratäm—decoration; präptaù—attained; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; priyayä—by His beloved; svayä—own; babhau—was splendidly manifest; kumudvane—in Kumudvana forest; räjan—O king; vasantaù—springtime; harñitaù—pleased; yathä—as; mådaìga-véëä—with mådaìgas and véëäs; vaàçébhiù—with flutes; muru-yañöi—with muru drums; sukäàsyakaiù täla-çeñaiù talaiù——karatälas; yuktä—with; jaguù—sang; gopyaù—the gopés; manoharam—beautiful; bhairavam—bhairava-raga;  megha-malläram—megha-mallara-raga; dépakam—dipaka; mälakoçakam—malakosam; çré-rägam—sri-raga; ca—also; api—and; hindolam—hindola; rägam—raga; eva—indeed; påthak påthak—specifically; añöa——eight; tälaiù—rhythms; tribhiù—three; grämaiù—scales; svaraiù—with notes; saptabhiù—seven; agrataù—in the presence.

     O king, then He was decorated with a garland of tulasé-maïjarés and forest flowers. In this way Lord Kåñëa was decorated. Accompanied by His beloved, He was happy and splendid as if He were the Deity of springtime personified. Then, with mådaìgas, véëäs, flutes, murus, yañöis, and karatälas, the gopés played melodies in three scales of seven notes in the rägas bhairava, megha-mallära, dépaka, mälakoçaka, çré-räga, and hindola.

Texts 38 and 39

nåtyair nänä-vidhai ramyair
     häva-bhäva-samanvitaiù
toñayantyo harià rädhäà
     kaöäkñair vraja-gopikäù

gäyan madhuvanaà prägät
     sundaré-gaëa-samvåtaù
räseçvaryä räsa-léläà
     cakre räseçvaraù svayam

     nåtyaiù—with dancing; nänä-vidhai—of various kinds; ramyaiù—beautiful; häva-bhäva-samanvitaiù—with amorous gestures; toñayantyaù—pleasing; harim—Kåñëa; rädhäm—Rädhä; kaöäkñaiù—with sidelong glances; vraja-gopikäù—the vraja-gopés; gäyan—singing; madhuvanam—to madfhuvana; prägät—went; sundaré-gaëa-samvåtaù—accompanied by the beautiful girls; räseçvaryä—with the queen of the rasa dance; räsa-léläm—the rasa dance pastime; cakre—did; räseçvaraù—the king of the rasa dance; svayam—personally.

     With many different dances, with amorous gestures, and with sidelong glances the gopés pleased Kåñëa. Then, accompanied by the gopés as He sang Çré Rädhä's glories, Lord Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance, went to Madhuvana forest, where He enjoyed a räsa dance with Çré Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance.

Texts 40 and 41

vaiçäkha-candra-kaumudyä
     mälaté-gandha-väyunä
sphurat-saugandha-kahlära-
     patat-reëütkareëa vai

vikacan-mädhavé-våndaiù
     çobhite nirjane vane
reme gopé-gaëaiù kåñëo
     nandane våtra-hä yathä

     vaiçäkha—of Vaiçäkha; candra—of the moon; kaumudyä—with the light; mälaté—of malati flowers; gandha—with the scent; väyunä—with a breeze; sphurat—blossoming; saugandha—fragrant; kahlära—of kahlara lotuses; patat—flying; reëu—pollen; utkareëa—with a multitude; vai—indeed; vikacat—blossoming; mädhavé-våndaiù—with madhavi vines; çobhite—beautiful; nirjane—secluded; vane—in the forest; reme—enjoyed; gopé-gaëaiù—with the gopés; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; nandane—in the Nandana gardens; våtra-hä—Indra; yathä—as.

     In this way, during the month of Vaiçäkha (April-May), in a secluded forest beautiful with flowering mälaté vines and a breeze carrying the fragrance of mälaté flowers and the fragrant pollen of blossoming kahlära lotuses, Lord Kåñëa enjoyed with the gopés as Indra enjoys in the Nandana gardens. .pa

Chapter Twenty-one
Räsa-kréòä
The Räsa-dance Pastime

Texts 1-4

itthaà kundavane ramye
     mälaténäà vane çubhe
amräëäà nägaraìgäëäà
     nimbünäà sa-ghane vane

däòiménäà ca drakñäëäà
     badämänäà vane nåpa
kadambänäà çréphalänäà
     kuöajänäà tathaiva ca

vaöänäà panasänäà ca
     pippalänäà vane çubhe
tulasé-kovidäräëäà
     ketaké-kadalé-vane

karilla-kuïja-bakula-
     mandäräëäà vane hariù
caran kämavanaà prägäd
     räjan vraja-vadhü-våtaù

     ittham—thus; kundavane—in Kundavana; ramye—beautiful; mälaténäm—of malati flowers; vane—in the forest; çubhe—beautiful; amräëäm—of mango trees; nägaraìgäëäm—of orange trees; bindünäm—of lime trees; sa-ghane—thick; vane—in the forest; däòiménäm—of pomegranatesd; ca—and; drakñäëäm—of grapes; badämänäm—of badamas; vane—in the forest; nåpa—O king; kadambänäm—of kadambas; çréphalänäm—of sriphalas; kuöajänäm—of kutajas; tathä—so; eva—indeed; ca—and; vaöänäm—of banyan trees; panasänäm—of panasa trees; ca—and; pippalänäm—of pippala trees; vane—in the forest; çubhe—beautiful; tulasé—of tulasé; kovidäräëäm—of kovidaras; ketaké—of ketakis; kadalé—of kadalis; vane—in the forest; karilla—karilla; ku 24ja—forest; bakula—bakula; mandäräëäm—and mandaras; vane—in the forest; hariù—Kåñëa; caran—walking; kämavanam—to Kamavana; prägät—went; räjan—O king; vraja—of Vraja; vadhü—with the girls; våtaù—accompanied.

     O king, walking in the gopés' company in beautiful Kundavana forest, past many beautiful groves of mälaté, mango, orange, lime, pomegranate, grape, badämäna, kadamba, çréphala, kuöaja, banyan, panasa, pippala, tulasé, kovidära, ketaké, kadalé, karilla, bakula, and mandära, Lord Kåñëa came to Kämavana forest.

Text 5

tatraiva parvate kåñëo
     nanäda muralé-kalam
murcchitä vihvalä jätäs
     tan-nädena vrajäìganäù

     tatra—there; eva—indeed; parvate—on the hill; kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; nanäda—enjoyed; muralé-kalam—the sweet sound of the flute; murcchitä—fainted; vihvalä—overcome; jätäù—manifested; tan-nadena—by that sound; vrajäìganäù—the girls of Vraja.

     On a hill there Lord Kåñëa sweetly played the flute. That music made the girls of Vraja faint.

Text 6

manoja-bäëa-bhinnäìgäù
     çlathan-névyaù suraiù saha
kaçmalaà präyayu räjan
     vimäneñv amaräìganäù

     manoja—of Kämadeva; bäëa—by the arrow; bhinnäìgäù—wounded; çlathan—loosened; névyaù—belts; suraiù—the demigods; saha—with; kaçmalam—fainting; präyayu—attained; räjan—O king; vimäneñu—in airplanes; amaräìganäù—the demigoddesses.

     O king, wounded by Kämadeva's arrows, and their tight belts now loosened, the demigoddesses also fainted because of that music as they flew in airplanes with the demigods.

Text 7

catur-vidhä jéva-saìghäù
     sthavarair moham ästhitäù
nadyo nadäù sthiré-bhütäù
     parvatä dravatäà gatäù

     catuù—four; vidhäù—kinds; jéva-saìghäù—living entities; sthavaraiù—with immobile living entities; moham—fainting; ästhitäù—attained; nadyaù—the rivers; nadäù—streams; sthiré-bhütäù—stunned; parvatä—the hills; dravatäm—melting; gatäù—attained.

     Because of that music the four kinds of moving and unmoving living entities fainted, the rivers and streams became stunned, and the hills and mountains melted.

Text 8

tat-päda-cihna-samyukto
     giriù kämavane 'bhavat
tasya darçana-mätreëa
     naro yäti kåtärthatäm

     tat-päda-cihna-samyuktaù—endowed with His footprints; giriù—the hill; kämavane—in Kämavana forest; abhavat—became; tasya—of Him; darçana-mätreëa—simply by the sight; naraù—a person; yäti—goes; kåtärthatäm—to success.

     That hill in Kämavana became decorated with Lord Kåñëa's footprints. Simply by seeing that hill one attains the goal of life.

Text 9

atha gopé-gaëaiù säkaà
     çré-kåñëo rädhikä-patiù
nandéçvara-båhat-sänu-
     taöe räsaà cakära ha

     atha—then; gopé-gaëaiù—the gopés; säkam—with; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; rädhikä-patiù—the master of Rädhä; nandéçvara—of Nandéçvara Hill; båhat-sänu-taöe—on the great summit; räsam—a rasa dance; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Then Çré Kåñëa, the Lord of Rädhä, enjoyed a räsa dance with the gopés on the great peak of Nandéçvara Hill.

Text 10

tatra gopyo 'ti-mäninyo
     babhüvur maithileçvara
täs tyaktvä rädhayä särdhaà
     tatraiväntardadhe hariù

     tatra—there; gopyaù—the gopés; ati-mäninyaù—very proud; babhüvuù—became; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä; täù—them; tyaktvä—abandoning; rädhayä—Rädhä; särdham—with; tatra—there; eva—indeed; antardadhe—disappeared; hariù—Kåñëa.

     O king of Mithilä, at that time the gopés became very proud, so Lord Kåñëa left them. He disappeared with Rädhä.

Text 11

gopyaç ca sarvä virahäturä bhåçäà
     kåñëaà vinä maithila nirjane vane
tä babhramuç cäçru-kuläkuläkñyo
     yathä hariëyaç cakitä itas tataù

     gopyaù—the gopés; ca—and; sarvä—all; virahäturä—overcome with feelings of separation; bhåçäm—greatly; kåñëam—Kåñëa; vinä—without; maithila—O king of Mithilä; nirjane—in a secluded; vane—forest; tä—they; babhramuù—wandering; cäçru-kuläkuläkñyaù—their eyes filled with tears; yathä—as; hariëyaù—does; cakitäù—frightened; itaù tataù—here and there.

     O king of Mithilä, separated from Kåñëa, the gopés were overcome with sorrow. Their eyes filled with tears, they wandered here and there in the forest wilderness as if they were frightened deer.

Text 12

kåñëaà hy apaçyantya iti vyathäà gatä
     yathä kariëyaù kariëaà vane vane
yathä kuraryaù kuraraà vrajäìganäù
     sarvä rudantyo virahäturä bhåçäm

     kåñëam—Kåñëa; hy—indeed; apaçyantya—not seeing; iti—thus; vyathäm—distress; gatä—attained; yathä—as; kariëyaù—femnale elephants; kariëam—to a male elephant; vane vane—in forest after forest; yathä—as; kuraryaù—female kurari birds; kuraram—to a male kurari bird; vrajäìganäù—the girls of Vraja; sarvä—all; rudantyaù—crying; virahäturä—overcome with separation; bhåçäm—greatly.

     Not seeing Kåñëa anywhere, they became filled with sorrow. They became like female elephants that cannot find their mate or kuraré birds that cannot find their husband. Separated from Kåñëa, all the girls of Vraja wept.

Text 13

unmattavad våkña-latä-kadambakaà
     sarvä militvä ca påthag vane vane
papracchur ärän nåpa nanda-nandanaà
     kutra sthitaà taà vadatäçu bhüruhäù

     unmatta—mad; vat—like; våkña—trees; latä—and vines; kadambakam—many; sarvä—all; militvä—meeting; ca—and; påthag—specififc; vane vane—forest after forest; papracchuù—asked; ärät—nearby; nåpa—O king; nanda-nandanam—the son of Nanda; kutra—where; sthitam—situated; tam—Him; vadata—please tell; äçu—at once; bhüruhäù—O trees.

     O king, in forest after forest they approached the trees and vines and asked, as if they had become mad, "Where is the son of Nanda? O trees and plants, please tell us."

Text 14

çré-kåñëa kåñëeti girä vadantyaù
     çré-kåñëa-pädämbuja-lagna-mänasäù
çré-kåñëa-rüpäs tu babhüvur aìganäs
     citraà na peças-kåtam etya kéöa-vat

     çré-kåñëa—O Çré Kåñëa; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; iti—thus; girä—with words; vadantyaù—speaking; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; päda—feel; ambuja—lotus; lagna—attached; mänasäù—hearts and minds; çré-kåñëa-rüpäù—Çré Kåñëa's form; tu—indeed; babhüvuù—became; aìganäù—the girls; citram—wonder; na—not; peças-kåtam—the form; etya—attaining; kéöa-vat—like an insect.

     The girls called out, "O Çré Kåñëa! O Kåñëa!" their hearts paasionately attached to Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet. Then they pretended to have become Kåñëa. This is not surprising. They were like bumblebees attracted to Çré Kåñëa's glory.

Text 15

çré-pädukädhaù-sthala-gopé-gopyaù
     çré-pädukäbjaà çaraëaà präpannäù

     çré-päduka—the feet; adhaù—below; sthala—place; gopi-gopyaù—gopés; çré-pädukäbjam—to the lotus feet; çaraëam—surrender; präpannäù—attained.

     Approaching Kåñëa's footprints on the ground, the gopés surrendered to His lotus feet.

Text 16

tatas tu tat-prasädena
    tat-padärcana-darçanät
dadåçur gäà tadä gopyo
     bhagavat-päda-cihnitäm

     tataù—then; tu—indeed; tat-prasädena—by His mercy; tat—His; pada—feet; arcana—worship; darçanät—because of seeing; dadåçuù—saw; gäm—the earth; tadä—then; gopyaù—the gopés; bhagavat-päda-cihnitäm—marked with the footprints of the Lord.

     When He saw them worship His feet, the Lord became merciful. For this reason the gopés were able to see a place marked with the Lord's footprints.

Text 17

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
rädheço rädhayä särdhaà
     hitvä gopér yayau kva bhoù
tad-darçanaà kathaà jätaà
     gopénäà vada me prabho

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; rädheçaù—the master oif Rädhä; rädhayä—Rädhä; särdham—with; hitvä—abandoniung; gopéù—teh gs; yayau—went; kva—where?; bhoù—O; tad-darçanam—by His sight; katham—how?; jätam—attained; gopénäm—of th4e gopés; vada—tell; me—me; prabhaù—O lord.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: When He left the gopés, where did Kåñëa take Rädhä? How did the gopés again see Kåñëa? O lord, please tell me.

Text 18

çré-närada uväca 
çré-kåñëo rädhayä särdhaà
     saìketa-vaöam äviçat
priyäyäù kabaré-puñpa-
     racanaà sa cakära ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; rädhayä—Rädhä; särdham—with; saìketa-vaöam—a banyan-forest rendezvous; äviçat—entered; priyäyäù—of His beloved; kabaré-puñpa—kabari flowers; racanam—making; sa—He; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: Kåñëa and Rädhä entered a banyan forest. There Kåñëa decorated His beloved with kabaré flowers.

Text 19

çré-kåñëa-kuntale néle
     vakratvaà rädhikäkarot
citra-paträvaléù kåñëa-
     pürëendu-mukha-maëòale

     çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; kuntale—on the hair; néle—black; vakratvam— curliness; rädhikä—Rädhä; akarot—did; citra-paträvaléù—many wonderful pictures and designs; kåñëa—of Kåñëa; pürëa—full; indu—moon; mukha—face; maëòale—on the circle.

     There Rädhä made curls on Kåñëa's black hair and wonderful pictures and designs on the circle of His full-moon face.

Text 20

evaà kåñëo bhadravanaà
     khadiräëäà vanaà mahat
bilvänäà ca vanaà paçyan
     kokiläkhyaà vanaà gataù

     evam—thus; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; bhadravanam—to Bhadravana; khadiräëäà vanam—Khadiravaan; mahat—great; bilvänäm—Bilvavana; ca—and; vanam—forest; paçyan—seeing; kokiläkhyam—named Kokila; vanam—the forest; gataù—went.

     Then, gazing at the great forests Bhadravana, Khadiravana, and Bilvavana as He went, Kåñëa entered the forest named Kokilavana.

Text 21

gopyaù kåñëaà vicinvantyo
     dadåçus tat-padäni ca
yava-cakra-dhvaja-cchatraiù
     svastikäìkuça-bindubhiù

     gopyaù—the gopés; kåñëam—for Kåñëa; vicinvantyaù—searching; dadåçuù—saw; tat-padäni—His footprints; ca—and; yava—with the barleycorn; cakra—cakra; dhvaja—flag; chatraiù—and parasol; svastika—svastika; aìkuça—elephant-goad; bindubhih——and bindus;

     As they searched for Kåñëa, the gopés found His footprints marked with a barleycorn, cakra, flag, parasol, svastika, elephant-goad, bindu, . . .

Text 22

añöa-koëena vajreëa
     padmenäbhiyutäni ca
néla-çaìkha-ghaöair matsya-
     tri-koëeñürdhva-dhärakaiù

     añöa-koëena—eight-pointed star; vajreëa—thunderbolt; padmena—lotus; abhiyutäni—endowed; ca—and; nélaçaìkha—conchshell; ghaöaiù—waterpot; matsya—fish; tri-koëa—tirangle; iñu—arrow; ürdhva-dhärakaiùurdhva-rekha line.

 . . . eight-pointed star, thunderbolt, lotus, conchshell, waterpot, fish, triangle, ürdhva-rekhä line, . . .

Text 23

dhanur-go-khura-candrärdha-
     çobhitäni mahätmanaù
tat-padäny anusäreëa
     vrajantyo gopikäs tataù

     dhanuù—bow; gaù—cow's; khura—footprint; candra—mmon; ardha—half; çobhitäni—decorated; mahätmanaù—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tat-padäny—His footprints; anusäreëa—follwing; vrajantyaù—going; gopikäù—the gopés; tataù—then.

 . . . bow, cow's hoofprint, and half-moon. As the gopés followed the Supreme Lord's footprints, . . .    

Text 24

tad-rajaù satataà nétvä
     dhåtvä mürdhni vräjäìganäù
padäny anyäni dadåçur
     anya-cihnänvitäni ca

     tat—His; rajaù—dust; satatam—again and again; nétvä—taking; dhåtvä—holding; mürdhni—to the head; vräjäìganäù—the girls of Vraja; padäny—footprints; anyäni—other; dadåçuù—saw; anya-cihnänvitäni—marked with other signs; ca—and.

 . . . and as they again and again took the dust from those footprints and placed it to their heads, the girls of Vraja saw another set of footprints marked with different signs, . . .

Text 25

ketu-padmätapatraiç ca
     yavenäthordhva-rekhäyä
cakra-candrärdhäìkuçakair
     bindubhiù çobhitäni ca

     ketu—flag; padma—lotus; atapatraiù—parasol; ca—and; yavena—barleycorn; atha—then; ürdhva-rekhayä—urdhva-rekha line; cakra—cakra; candrärdha—half-moon; aìkuçakaiù—elephant-goad; bindubhiù—bindus; çobhitäni—beautiful; ca—and.

 . . . marked with a flag, lotus, parasol, barleycorn, ürdhva-rekhä line, cakra, half-moon, elephant-goad, many bindus, . . .

Text 26

laväìga-latikäbhiç ca
     viciträëi videha-räö
gadä-päöhéna-çaìkhaiç ca
     giri-räjena çaktibhiù

     laväìga-latikäbhiù—clove ives; ca—and; viciträëi—wonderful; videha-räö—O king of Videha; gadä—club; päöhéna—fish; çaìkhaiù—conch; ca—and; giri-räjena—the king of mountains; çaktibhiù—sakti weapon.

 . . . many clove vines, a club, fish, conchshell, mountain-king, many çakti-weapons, . . .

Text 27

siàhäsana-rathäbhyäà ca
     bindu-dvaya-yutäni ca
vékñya prähü rädhikayä
     gato 'sau nanda-nandanaù

     siàhäsana—throne; rathäbhyäm—chariot; ca—and; bindu-dvaya-yutäni—with two bindus; ca—and; vékñya—seeing; prähü—said; rädhikayä—with Rädhä; gataù—gone; asau—He; nanda-nandanaù—the son of Nanda.

 . . . throne, chariot, and two bindus. O king, looking at these wonderful footprints, the gopés said, "The son of Nanda has come here in Rädhä's company."

Text 28

paçyantyas tat-päda-padmaà
     kokiläkhyaà vanaà gatäù
gopé-kolähalaà çrutvä
     rädhikäà präha mädhavaù

     paçyantyaù—lloking; tat-päda-padmam—lotus feet; kokiläkhyam—named Kokila; vanam—the forest; gatäù—gone; gopé—of the gopés; kolähalam—the tumult; çrutvä—hearing; rädhikäm—to Rädhä; präha—said; mädhavaù—Kåñëa.

     The gopés followed these lotus footprints into Kokilavana forest. When He heard the tumultous sounds of the gopés as they came, Kåñëa said to Rädhä:

Text 29

koöi-candra-pratékäçe
     rädhe sarpa tvaraà priye
ägatä gopikäù sarväs
     tväà neñyanti hi sarvataù

     koöi—millions; candra—of moons; pratékäçe—glory; rädhe—O Rädhä; sarpa—go; tvaram—quickly; priye—O beloved; ägatä—come; gopikäù—the gopés; sarväù—all; tväm—You; neñyanti—will lead; hi—indeed; sarvataù—in all respects.

     O Rädhä, O beloved, O girl splendid as ten million moons, go quickly, All these gopés have come to take You from Me.

Text 30

tadä mänavaté rädhä
     bhütvä präha ramä-patim
rüpa-yauvana-kauçalya-
     çéla-garva-samanvitä

     tadä—then; mänavaté—proud; rädhä—Rädhä; bhütvä—becoming; präha—said; ramä-patim—to Kåñëa, the master of the goddess of fortune; rüpa—beauty; yauvana—youth; kauçalya—intelligence; çéla—good character; garva—pride; samanvitä—with.

     Then Rädhä, feeling proud of Her beauty, youthfulness, intelligence, and good character, spoke to Lord Kåñëa, the husband of the goddess of fortune.

Text 31

çré-rädhoväca 
calituà na samarthähaà
     mandirän na vinirgatä
sukumäré sveda-yuktä
     kathaà mäà nayasi priya

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; calitum—to move; na—not; samarthä—able; aham—I am; mandirän—from the palace; na—not; vinirgatä—come; sukumäré—delicate; sveda-yuktä—perspiring; katham—how?; mäm—Me; nayasi—You will lead; priya—O beloved.

     I cannot move. I cannot leave this palace. I am only a delicate girl. I am perspiring. O beloved, how can You lead Me away from here?

Text 32

çré-närada uväca 
iti väkyaà tataù çrutvä
     çré-kåñëo rädhikeçvaraù
pétämbareëa divyena
     väyuà tasyai cakära ha

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; väkyam—words; tataù—then; çrutvä—hearing; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; rädhikeçvaraù—the master of Rädhä; pétämbareëa—with His yellow garments; divyena—transcendental; väyum—a breeze; tasyai—to Her; cakära—did; ha—indeed;

     Hearing these words, Çré Kåñëa, the master of Rädhä, made for Her a breeze by fanning Her with His yellow garments.

Text 33

hastaà gåhétvä täm äha
     gaccha rädhe yathä-sukham
kåñëenäpi tadä proktä
     na yayau tena vai punaù

     hastam—hand; gåhétvä—taking; täm—to Her; äha—said; gaccha—go; rädhe—O Rädhä; yathä-sukham—as You wish; kåñëena—in a moment; api—also; tadä—ten; proktä—addressed; na—not; yayau—went; tena—with Him; vai—indeed; punaù—again.

     Then Kåñëa took Her hand and said, "O Rädhä, walk as fast You like." Even though Kåñëa said this, still Rädhä did not move.

Text 34

påñöhaà dattvätha haraye
     tüñëém-bhütä sthitä punaù
priyäà mänavatéà rädhäà
     präha kåñëaà satäà priyaù

     påñöham—back; dattvä—giving; atha—then; haraye—to Lord Kåñëa; tüñëém-bhütä—silent; sthitä—standing; punaù—again; priyäm—to His beloved; mänavatém—proud; rädhäm—Rädhä; präha—said; kåñëaù——Lord Kåñëa; satäm—of the devotees; priyaù—the beloved.

     Turning Her back to Kåñëa, Rädhä stood silent. Then Kåñëa, who is dear to the saintly devotees, spoke to His proud beloved Rädhä.

Text 35

çré-bhagavän uväca 
vihäya gopér iha kämayänä
     bhajämy ahaà mänini cetasä tvam
yat te priyaà tat prakaromi rädhe
     me skandham äruhya sukhaà vrajäçu

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; vihäya—abandoning; gopéù—the gopés; iha—here; käma—desire; yänä—going; bhajämy—worship; aham—I; mänini—O proud one; cetasä—with the mind; tvam—You; yat—what; te—of You; priyam—dear; tat—that; prakaromi—I will do; rädhe—O Rädhä; me—of Me; skandham—on the shoulders; äruhya—climbing; sukham—easily; vraja—go; äçu—quickly.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Let us leave behind these gopés that wish to come with Us. O noble girl, I worship You with all My heart. O Rädhä, I will do whatever You wish. Climb on My shoulders and You will quickly and easily flee from them.

Text 36

çré-närada uväca 
evaà priyäà priyatamaù
     skandha-yänepsitäà nåpa
vihäyäntardadhe kåñëo
     svacchanda-gatir éçvaraù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; priyäm—dear; priyatamaù—most dear; skandha—on the shoulders; yäna—traveling; ipsitäm—desired; nåpa—O king; vihäya—leaving; antardadhe—disappeared; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; svacchanda-gatiù—independent; éçvaraù—Supreme Controller.

     Çré Närada said: O king, as Rädhä was about to climb His shoulders, Lord Kåñëa, the supremely independent Personality of Godhead suddenly disappeared.

Text 37

gata-mänä kérti-sutä
     bhagavad-virahäturä
uccai ruroda räjendra
     kokiläkhye vane pare

     gata—gone; mänä—pride; kérti-sutä—the daughter of Kérti; bhagavat—from the Lord; viraha—with separation; äturä—distressed; uccai—loudly; ruroda—cried; räjendra—O king of kings; kokiläkhye—named Kokila; vane—in the forest; pare—great.

     Distressed by Kåñëa's departure, and Her pride now gone, Rädhä loudly wept in Kokilavana forest.

Text 38

tadaiva yüthä sampräptä
     gopénäà maithileçvarä
tad-rodanaà duùkhataraà
     çrutvä jagmus tapäturäù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; yüthä—group of gopés; sampräptä—came; gopénäm—of the gopés; maithileçvarä—O king of Mithilä; tad-rodanam—Her weeping; duùkhataram—most unhappy; çrutvä—hearing; jagmuù—went; tapa—with unhappiness; äturäh——afflicted.

     O king of Mithilä, when the gopés came and heard Rädhä's sorrowful weeping they also became filled with sorrow.

Text 39

käçcit taà makarandaiç ca
     snäpayäà cakrur éçvarém
candanäguru-kastüré-
     kuìkuma-drava-sékaraiù

     käçcit—some; täm—Her; makarandaiù—with honey; ca—and; snäpayäà cakruù—bathed; éçvarém—the goddess; candana—with sandal; aguru—aguru; kastüré—musk; kuìkuma—saffron; drava—liquid; sékaraiù—with drops.

     Some gopés showered Her with a spray of honey, sandal, aguru, musk, and saffron.

Text 40

väyuà cakrus tad-aìgeñu
     vyajanändola-cämaraiù
äçväsya vägbhiù paramaà
     nänänunaya-kovidaiù

     väyum—a breeze; cakruù—did; tad-aìgeñu—on Her limbs; vyajana—fans; ändola—moving; cämaraiù—with cämaras; äçväsya—comforting; vägbhiù—with words; paramam—greatly; nänä—various; anunaya—comforting words; kovidaiù—expert.

     Some made a breeze on Her limbs by fanning Her with fans and cämaras, and some, expert at comforting others, comforted Her with many words.

Text 41

tan-mukhän mänino mänaà
     çrutvä kåñëasya gopikäù
mänavantyo maithilendra
     vismayaà paramaà yayuù

     tan-mukhät—from the face; mäninaù—proud; mänam—pride; çrutvä—hearing; kåñëasya—of Kåñëa; gopikäù—the gopés; mänavantyaù—proud; maithilendra—O king of Mithilä; vismayam—astonishment; paramam—great; yayuù—attained.

     O king of Mithilä, when they heard from Her mouth how arrogant Kåñëa treated Her badly, the proud gopés were astonished.
.pa

Chapter Twenty-two
Räsa-kréòä
The Räsa-dance Pastime

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
atha kåñëa-guëän ramyän
     sametäù sarva-yoñitaù
jagus täla-svarai ramyaiù
     kåñëägamana-hetave

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; kåñëa-guëän—the virtues of Kåñëa; ramyän—delightful; sametäù—assembled; sarva—all; yoñitaù—the women; jaguù—sang; täla-svarai—with karatalas; ramyaiù—delightful; kåñëa—of Kåñëa; ägamana—the arrival; hetave—to cause.

     Çré Närada said: Then, to attract Kåñëa there, all the girls came together and, sweetly playing the karatälas, sang songs about the beautiful virtues of Kåñëa.

Text 2

çré-gopya ücuù 
lokäbhiräma jana-bhüñaëa viçva-dépa
     kandarpa-mohana jagad-våjinärti-härin
änanda-kanda yadu-nandana nanda-süno
     svacchanda-padma-makaranda namo namas te

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; loka—of the worlds; abhiräma—) delight; jana-bhüñaëa—ornament of the people; viçva-dépa—lamp of the worlds; kandarpa-mohana—more charming than Kämadeva; jagat—of the worlds; våjina—sins; arti—sufferings; härin—removing; änanda—of bliss; kanda—O root; yadu—of the yadus; nandana—O joy; nanda-sünaù—O son of Nanda; svacchanda—independent; padma—lotus; makaranda—nectar; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances; te—to You.

     The gopés said: O delight of the worlds, O decoration of the people, O lamp of the universe, O Lord more charming than Kämadeva, O Lord who removes the sufferings sins bring to the worlds, O root of bliss, O delight of the Yadus, O son of Nanda, O independent Lord, O Lord sweeter than honey from the lotus, obeisances, obeisances to You!

Text 3

go-vipra-sädhu-vijaya-dhvaja deva-vandya
     kaàsädi-daitya-vadha-hetu-kåtävatära
çré-nanda-räja-kula-padma-dineça deva
     devädi-mukta-jana-darpaëa te jayo 'stu

     gaù—cows; vipra—brähmaëas; sädhu—saints; vijaya—victory; dhvaja—flag; deva—by the demigods; vandya—honored; kaàsa—with Kaàsa; ädi—beginning; daitya—demons; vadha—killing; hetu—for the purpose; kåta—done; avatära—incarnation; çré-nanda-räja—of King Nanda; kula—of the family; padma—the lotus; dineça—O sun; deva—O Lord; devädi—beginning with the demigods; mukta-jana—the liberated souls; darpaëa—eye; te—to You; jayaù—glory; astu—may be.

     O victory flag of the cows, brähmaëas, and saints, O Lord honored by the demigods, O Lord who descended to this world to kill the demons headed by Kaàsa, O sun who makes the lotus of King Nanda's family blossom wide, O eye of the demigods and the liberated souls, glories to You!

Text 4

gopäla-sindhu-para-mauktikä-rüpa-dhärin
     gopäla-vaàça-giri-néla-maëe parätman
gopäla-maëòala-sarovara-kaïja-mürte
     gopäla-candana-vane kalahaàsa-mukhya

     gopäla—of the gopas; sindhu—in the ocean; para—the supreme; mauktikä—pearl; rüpa—form; dhärin—manifesting; gopäla—of the gopas; vaàça—in the family; giri—mountain; néla-maëe—sapphire; parätman—O Supreme Soul; gopäla—of the gopas; maëòala—in the circle; sarovara—in the lake; ka 24ja—of a lotus; mürte—in the form; gopäla—of gopas; candana—sandal; vane—in the forest; kalahaàsa—swan; mukhya—O most important.

     O supreme pearl in the ocean of the gopas, O sapphire in the mountain of the gopa dysnasty, O lotus in the lake of the gopas, O great swan in the sandal forest of the gopas, O Supreme Personality of Godhead!

Text 5

çré-rädhikä-vadana-paìkaja-ñaöpadas tvaà
     çré-rädhikä-vadana-candra-cakora-rüpaù
çré-rädhikä-hådaya-sundara-candra-hära-
     çré-rädhikä-madhu-latä-kusumäkaro 'si

     çré-rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; vadana—face; paìkaja—lotus; ñaöpadaù—bee; tvam—You; çré-rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; vadana—face; candra—moon; cakora—cakora bird; rüpaù—form; çré-rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; hådaya—heart; sundara—hnadsome; candra—of canrakanti jewels; hära—necklace; çré-rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; madhu-latä-kusumäkaraù—the form of a mädhavi flower; asi—You are.

     You are a bumblebee drawn to the lotus of Çré Rädhä's face. You are a cakora bird drawn to the moon of Çré Rädhä's face. You are a necklace of candrakänti jewels over Çré Rädhä's heart. You are Çré Rädhä's mädhavé flower.

Text 6

yo räsa-raìga-nija-vaibhava-bhüri-lélo
     yo gopikä-nayana-jévana-müla-häraù
mänaà cakära rahasä kila mänavatyäà
     so 'yaà harir bhavatu no nayanägra-gämé

     yaù—who; räsa—of the rasa dance; raìga—in the arena; nija—own; vaibhava—glory; bhüri—great; lélaù—whose pastimes; yaù—who; gopikä—of the gopés; nayana—for the eyes; jévana—the life; müla—the root; häraù—taking; mänam—pride; cakära—did; rahasä—in secret; kila—indeed; mänavatyäm—in a proud girl; saù ayam—He; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; bhavatu—may be; naù—of us; nayana—the eyes; agra—before; gämi—going.

     May Lord Kåñëa, who enjoys glorious pastimes in the räsa dance arena, who brings life to the gopés' eyes, and who in a secret place roughly treated a girl filled with pride, appear before our eyes.

Text 7

yo gopikä-sakala-yütham alaïcakära
     våndävanaà ca nija-päda-rajobhir adrim
yaù sarva-loka-vibhaväya babhüva bhümau
     taà bhüri-léläm uragendra-bhujaà bhajämaù

     yaù—who; gopikä-sakala-yütham—all the gopés; alaïcakära—decorated; våndävanam—Våndävana; ca—and; nija—own; päda—feet; rajobhiù—with the dust; adrim—a mountain; yaù—who; sarva—all; loka—worlds; vibhaväya—for the glory; babhüva—became; bhümau—on the earth; tam—that; bhüri-léläm—who enjoys many pastimes; uraga—of snakes; indra—king; bhujam—whose arms; bhajämaù—we worship.

     We worship Lord Kåñëa, whose arms are two kings of serpents, who enjoys many pastimes, who came to the earth to show His glories to all the worlds, and who with the dust of His feet decorated Våndävana forest, Govardhana Hill, and all the gopés. 

Text 8

candraà pratapta-kiraëa-jvalanaà prasannaà
     sarvaà vanäntam asi-patra-vana-praveçam
bäëaà prabhaïjanam atéva su-manda-yänaà
     manyämahe kila bhavantam åte vyathärtäù

     candram—a moon; pratapta-kiraëa-jvalanam—briliant; prasannam—pleasing; sarvam—all; vana—forests; antam—end; asipatra—sugarcane; vana—forest; praveçam—entranbce; bäëam—arrow; prabha 24janam—breaking; atéva—great; su-manda-yänam—slowly traveling; manyämahe—we meditate; kila—indeed; bhavantam—on You; åte—without; vyathärtäù—being distressed.

     Even when we are not filled with sorrow we meditate on You as a pleasing moon, a brilliant sun, a grove of sugarcane in the forest, a sharp arrow, and a gentle breeze.

Text 9

saudäsa-räja-mahiñé-virahäd atéva
     jätaà sahasra-guëitaà nala-paööa-räjïäù
tasmät tu koöi-guëitaà janakätma-jäyäs
     tasmäd anantam ati-duùkham alaà hare naù

     saudäsa-räja—of King Saudäsa; mahiñé—of the queen; virahät—from separation; atéva—great; jätam—born; sahasra—a thousand times; guëitam—multiplied; nala—of Nala; paööa-räj 24äù—of the king; tasmät—from that; tu—indeed; koöi-guëitam—multiplied ten million times; janakätma—-jäyäù—of Janaka's daughter; tasmät—from that; anantam—limitless; ati-duùkham—great suffering; alam—great; hare—O Kåñëa; naù—of us.

     O Kåñëa, our sorrow is a thousand times greater than King Saudäsa's queen felt away from her husband, ten million times greater than Nala's queen felt, and more without limit than King Janaka's daughter felt.

Text 10

çré-uddhavaù sakala-bhakta-çiro-maëéças
     tat-päda-padma-vara-mukhy-adhikära-käré
tasmäd vayaà ca caraëau çaraëaà gatäù smaù
     çréman kåpäà kuru çaraëya-pade saraëye

     çré-uddhavaù—Çré Uddhava; sakala-bhakta-çiro-maëéçaù—the crest jewel of all devotees; tat-päda-padma—of Your lotus feet; vara—best; mukhy-adhikära-käré—most qualified; tasmät—from that; vayam—we; ca—and; caraëau—feet; çaraëam—shelter; gatäù—gone; smaù—have; çréman—O glorious one; kåpäm—mercy; kuru—do; çaraëya-pade— saraëye—shelter.

     Çré Uddhava is the crest jewel of all the devotees. He is qualified to approach Your lotus feet. It is because of Him that we take shelter of Your feet. O glorious one, please be kind to us! Please give us shelter!

Text 11

çré-närada uväca 
itthaà räjan rudanténäà
     gopénäà kamalekñaëaù
ävirbabhüva sahasä
     svayam artham ivätmanaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; räjan—O king; rudanténäm—weeping; gopénäm—of the gopés; kamala—lotus; ékñaëaù—eyes; ävirbabhüva—became manifested; sahasä—suddenly; svayam—personally; artham—benefit; iva—as if; ätmanaù—of the self.

     Çré Närada said: O king, as the gopés wept, lotus-eyed Kåñëa suddenly appeared, as if to fulfill their desire.

Texts 12 and 13

sphurat-kiréöa-keyüra-
     kuëòaläìgada-bhüñaëam
snigdhämala-sugandhäòhya-
     néla-kuïcita-kuntalam

ägataà vékñya yugapat
     samuttasthur vräjäìganäù
tan-mäträëi ca yaà dåñövä
     yathä jïänendriyäëi ca

     sphurat—glittering; kiréöa—crown; keyüra—armlets; kuëòala—earrings; aìgada—bracelets; bhüñaëam—ornament; snigdha—glistening; amala—pure; sugandha—fragrant; aòhya—opulent; néla—black; ku 24cita—curly; kuntalam—hair; ägatam—come; vékñya—seeing; yugapat—at once; samuttasthuù—stood up; vräjäìganäù—the girls of Vraja; tan-mäträëi—the tan-matras; ca—and; yam—which; dåñövä—seeing; yathä—as; jïäna—knowledge; indriyäëi—senses; ca—and.

     Seeing that Kåñëa, decorated with a glittering crown, armlets, earrings, bracelets, and His handsome glistening black curly hair very glorious, had come, the gopés at once stood up, as the senses stand up when they see the sense-objects.

Text 14

harir nanarta tan-madhye
     vaàçé-vädana-tat-paraù
rädhayä sahito räjan
     yathä ratyä ratéçvaraù

     hariù—Lor5d k; nanarta—danced; tan-madhye—in their midst; vaàçé-vädana-tat-paraù—playing the flute; rädhayä—with Rädhä; sahitaù—with; räjan—O king; yathä—as; ratyä—with Rati; ratéçvaraù—Kämadeva.

     Playing the flute in their midst, Lord Kåñëa danced with Rädhä as Kämadeva dances with Rati.

Text 15

yävatér gopikäù sarväs
     tävad rüpa-dharo hariù
gacchaàs täbhir vraje reme
     svävasthäbhir mano yathä

     yävatéù—as many; gopikäù—gopés; sarväù—a;;; tävat—that many; rüpa-dharaù—manifesting forms; hariù—Kåñëa; gacchaàù—going; täbhiù—with them; vraje—in Vraja; reme—enjoyed; svävasthäbhiù—as they were; manaù—in the heart; yathä—as.

     Then Lord Kåñëa expanded Himself into as many forms as there were gopés. Going among them, He enjoyed with them to their heart's content.

Text 16

vanoddeçe sthitaà kåñëaà
     gata-duùkhä vräjäìganäù
kåtäïjalé-puöä ücur
     girä gadgadayä harià

     vana-uddeçe—in the forest; sthitam—situated; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; gata-duùkhä—their sorrows gone; vräjäìganäù—the girls of Vraja; kåtäïjalé-puöä—with folded hands; ücuù—said; girä—with words; gadgadayä—faltering; harim—to Lord Kåñëa.

     Their sorrows gone, the girls of Vraja approached Kåñëa in the forest and with folded hands and faltering words spoke to Him.

Text 17

çré-gopya ücuù 
kva gatas tvaà vada hare
     tyaktvä gopé-gaëo mahän
sarvaà jagat tåëé-kåtya
     tvat-pade präpta-mänasam

     çré-gopyaù ücuù—the gopés said; kva—where?; gataù—gone; tvam—You; vada—tell; hare—O Kåñëa; tyaktvä—leaving; gopé-gaëaù—the gopés; mahän—great; sarvam—all; jagat—the universe; tåëé-kåtya—making into a blade of grass; tvat-pade—at Your feet; präpta—attained; mänasam—heart.

     The gopés said: O Kåñëa, when You left us gopés the whole world became for us as important as a single blade of grass. Now we have again attained out heart's desire at Your feet. While You were gone where did You go? Please tell us.

Text 18

çré-bhagavän uväca 
he gopyaù puñkara-dvépe
     haàso näma mahä-muniù
samudre dadhi-mandode
     tatäpäntar-gatas tapaù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—The Supreme Personality of Godhead said; he—O; gopyaù—gopés; puñkara-dvépe—on Puñkara-dvépa; haàsaù—Haàsa; näma—named; mahä—great; muniù—sage; samudre—in the ocean; dadhi-mandode—of yogurt; tatäpa—performed austerities; antar-gataù——gone in; tapaù—austerities.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O gopés, on Puñkara-dvépa there is a great sage named Haàsa who performed austerities while submerged in the ocean of yogurt.

Text 19

cakärähaitukéà bhaktià
     mama dhyäna-paräyaëaù
vyatétaà tasya tapato
     gopyo manvantara-dvayam

     cakära—he did; ahaitukém—unmotivated; bhaktim—devotional service; mama—of Me; dhyäna—meditation; paräyaëaù—intent; vyatétam—passed; tasya—of him; tapataù—austerities; gopyaù—O gopés; manvantara-dvayam—two manvantaras.

     O gopés, He spent two manvantaras meditating on Me in pure devotion.

Text 20

öam adyaivägrasan matsyo
     yojanärdha-vapur dharaù
tan nirjagära pauëòus tu
     matsya-rüpa-dharo 'suraù

     tam—him; adya—now; eva—indeed; agrasat—swalloed; matsyaù—a fish; yojanärdha-vapuù—four miles long; dharaù—holding; tat—that; nirjagära—swallowed; pauëòuù—white; tu—indeed; matsya-rüpa-dharaù—manifesting the form of a fish; asuraù—a demon.

     Today a four-mile-long fish swallowed him. Then a demon in the form of an even larger white fish swallowed that fish.

Texts 21 and 22

evaà sampräpta-kañöasya
     haàsasyäpi muner aham
gatvätha çéghreëa tayoù
     çiraç chittväriëä munim

mocayitvätha gatavän
     çvetadvépe vrajäìganäù
kñéräbdhau çeña-paryaìke
     çayanaà tu mayä kåtam

     evam—thus; sampräpta—attained; kañöasya—catastrophe; haàsasyäpi—of Haàsa; muneù—Muni; aham—I; gatvä—going; atha—then; çéghreëawith a very long; tayoù—of them both; çiraù—the head; chittvä—cutting; ariëä—with a sword; munim—the sage; mocayitvä—liberating; atha—then; gatavän—went; çvetadvépe—to Çvetadvépa; vrajäìganäù—O gopés; kñéräbdhau—on the milk-ocean; çeña—of Çeña; paryaìke—on the couch; çayanam—resting; tu—indeed; mayä—by Me; kåtam—done.

     With a very great knife I cut the heads of those two fish and saved the sage Haàsa from his distress. O gopés, then I went to Çvetadvépa and, lying down on the couch of Çeña in the ocean of milk, I took a nap.

Text 23

duùkhitä bhavatér jïätvä
     nidraà tyaktvä tataù priyäù
sahasä bhakta-vaçyo 'haà
     punar ägatavän iha

     duùkhitä—unhappy; bhavatéù—You; j 24ätvä—understanding; nidram—sleep; tyaktvä—leaving; tataù—then; priyäù—O beloveds; sahasä—at once; bhakta—by devotion; vaçyaù—conquered; aham—I; punaù—again; ägatavän—came; iha—here.

     O My beloveds, when I became aware that You were suffering, I left my nap and came here at once. Your pure devotion has transformed Me into your submissive servant.

Text 24

jänanti santaù sama-darçino ye
     dantä mahäntaù kila nairapekñyäù
te nairapekñyaà paramaà sukhaà me
     jïänendriyädéni yathä rasädén

     jänanti—know; santaù—the saintly devotees; sama-darçinaù—who see equally; ye—who; dantä—self-controlled; mahäntaù—great souls; kila—indeed; nairapekñyäù—neutral; te—they; nairapekñyam—neutrality; paramam—great; sukham—happiness; me—of Me; j 24änendriyädéni—the senses; yathä—as; rasa—taste; ädén—beginning with.

     Saintly devotees who have generous hearts, who see everyone equally, who control their senses, and who are aloof from material things, find in their renunciation a great happiness that I give to them. They find it just as the senses find happiness in the sensations that being with taste.

Text 25

çré-gopya ücuù 
kñéräbdhau çeña-paryaìke
     yad rüpaà ca tvayä dhåtam
tad-rüpa-darçanaà dehi
     yadi préto 'si mädhava

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; kñéräbdhau—on the ocean of milk; çeña-paryaìke—on the couch of Çeña; yat—what; rüpam—form; ca—sand; tvayä—by You; dhåtam—manifested; tad-rüpa-darçanam—the sight of that form; dehi—please give; yadi—if; prétaù—pleased; asi—You are; mädhava—O Kåñëa.

     The gopés said: O Kåñëa, if You are pleased with us please show us the form You displayed as You rested on Çeña in the ocean of milk.

Text 26

çré-närada uväca 
tathästu coktvä bhagavän
     gopé-vyühasya paçyataù
dadhäräñöa-bhujaà rüpaà
     çré-rädhä-rüpam eva ca

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; tathä—so; astu—be it; coktvä—saying; bhagavän—the Lord; gopé-vyühasya—of the gopés; paçyataù—looking; dadhära—manifested; añöa-bhujam—eight-armed; rüpam—form; çré-rädhä-rüpam—the form of Çré Rädhä; eva—indeed; ca—and.

     Çré Närada said: The Lord said, "So be it." Then, as the gopés watched, Rädhä and Kåñëa changed Themselves into eight-armed forms of Lakñmé and Näräyaëa.

Text 27

tatra kñéra-samudro 'bhül
     lola-kallola-maëòitaù
divyäni ratna-saudhäni
     babhüvur maìgaläni ca

     tatra—there; kñéra-samudraù—the ocean of milk; abhüt—became; lola—moving; kallola-maëòitaù—decorated with many waves; divyäni—splendid; ratna—jewel; saudhäni—palaces; babhüvuù—became; maìgaläni—beautiful; ca—and.

     That place suddenly became the milk-ocean decorated with many waves. Many beautiful jewel-palaces suddenly appeared.

Text 28

tatra çeño bisa-çvetaù
     kuëòalé-bhüta-saàsthitaù
bälärka-mauli-sähasra-
     phaëä-chatra-viräjitaù

     tatra—there; çeñaù—Çeña; bisa-çvetaù—with white coils; kuëòalé-bhüta-saàsthitaù—curled up; bälärka—a rising sun; mauli—crown; sähasra—thousands; phaëä—hoods; chatra—parasol; viräjitaù—splendidly manifested.

     Then Seña appeared. His white body was coiled around and around, and the splendid parasol of His thousand hoods was decorated with many crowns glorious as the rising sun.

Text 29

tasmin vai çeña-paryaìke
     sukhaà suñväpa mädhavaù
tasya çré-rüpiëé rädhä
     päda-seväà cakära ha

     tasmin—in that; vai—indeed; çeña-paryaìke—on the Çeña couch; sukham—happily; suñväpa—slept; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; tasya—of Him; çré-rüpiëé—in the form of the goddess of fortune; rädhä—Rädhä; päda-seväm—service to His feet; cakära—did; ha—certainly.

     Then Kåñëa happily slept on the couch of Çeña and Rädhä, in the form of goddess Lakñmé, served His feet.

Text 30

tad-rüpaà sundaraà dåñövä
     koöi-märtaëòa-sannibham
natvä gopé-gaëäù sarve
     vismayaà paramaà gatäù

     tad-rüpam—that form; sundaram—handsome; dåñövä—seeing; koöi—ten million; märtaëòa—suns; sannibham—like; natvä—bowing down; gopé-gaëäù—the gs; sarve—all; vismayam—astonishment; paramam—great; gatäù—attained.

     Gazing at that handsome form splendid as ten million suns, all the gopés bowed down to offer their respects. They were filled with wonder.

Text 31

gopébhyo darçanaà dattaà
     yatra kåñëena maithila
tatra kñetraà mahä-puëyaà
     jätaà päpa-praëäçanam

     gopébhyaù—to the gopé; darçanam—sight; dattam—giving; yatra—where; kåñëena—by Kåñëa; maithila—O king of Mithilä; tatra—there; kñetram—that place; mahä-puëyam—very sacred; jätam—born; päpa—sins; praëäçanam—destroying.

     O king of Mithilä, the place where Lord Kåñëa showed this form is very sacred. It destroys all sins.

Text 32

atha gopé-gaëaiù särdhaà
     yamunäm etya mädhavaù
kälindé-jala-vegeñu
     jala-kelià cakära ha

     atha—then; gopé-gaëaiù—the gopés; särdham—with; yamunäm—to the Yamunä; etya—going; mädhavaù—Lord Kåñëa; kälindé-jala—of the water if the Yamunä; vegeñu—in the currents; jala-kelim—water pastimes; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Then Lord Kåñëa entered the Yamunä and enjoyed water pastimes with the gopés.

Text 33

rädhä-karäl lakña-dalaà
     padmaà nétvämbaraà tathä
dhävan jaleñu gatavän
     prahasan mädhavaù svayam

     rädhä—of Rädhä; karät—from the hand; lakña-dalam—with a hundred thousand petals; padmam—a lotus; nétvä—taing; ambaram—nearby; tathä—then; dhävan—running; jaleñu—in tyhe water; gatavän—went; prahasan—laughing; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally.

     Snatching from Rädhä's hand a lotus of a hundred thousand petals and a cloth, Kåñëa ran, laughing, into the water.

Text 34

rädhä hareù péta-paöaà
     vaàçé-vetra-sphurat-prabham
gåhétvä prahasanté sä
     gacchanté yamunä-jale

     rädhä—Rädhä; hareù—of Kåñëa; péta-paöam—yellow garment; vaàçé—flute; vetra—stick; sphurat-prabham—splendor; gåhétvä—taking; prahasanté—laughing; sä—She; gacchanté—going; yamunä-jale—in the water of the Yamunä.

     Snatching Kåñëa's flute, stick, and yellow cloth, Rädhä also ran, laughing, into the Yamunä's water.

Text 35

vaàçéà dehéti vadataù
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù
rädhä jagäda kamalaà
     väso dehéti mädhava

     vaàçém—flute; dehi—give; iti—thus; vadataù—saying; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; rädhä—Rädhä; jagäda—said; kamalam—lotus; väsaù—garment; dehi—give; iti—thus; mädhava—O Kåñëa.

     When Lord Kåñëa said, "Give back My flute!" Rädhä said, "Give back, O Kåñëa, My lotus and cloth!"

Text 36

kåñëo dadau rädhikäyai
     padmam ambaram eva ca
rädhä dadau péta-paöaà
     vetraà vaàçéà mahätmane

     kåñëaù—Kåñëa; dadau—gave; rädhikäyai—to Rädhä; padmam—the lotus; ämbaram—cloth; eva—indeed; ca—and; rädhä—Rädhä; dadau—gave; péta-paöam—yellow cloth; vetram—stick; vaàçém—flute; mahätmane—to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     Kåñëa returned the lotus and cloth to Rädhä, and Rädhä returned the flute, stick, and yellow cloth to the Lord.

Text 37

atha kåñëaù kalaà gäyan
     mäläm ä-jänu-lambitäm
vaijayantém ädadhänaù
     çré-bhäëòéraà jagäma ha

     atha—then; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; kalam—sweetly; gäyan—singing; mäläm—garland; ä-jänu-lambitäm—hanging down to His knees; vaijayantém—vaijayanti; ädadhänaù—wearing; çré-bhäëòéram—to Bhandiravana; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     Then Lord Kåñëa, wearing a vaijayanté garland that hung to His knees, and sweetly singing as He went, traveled to Bhäëòéravana forest.

Text 38

priyäyäs tatra çåìgäraà
     cakära kuçaleçvaraù
paträvalé-yävakägraiù
     puñpaiù kajjala-kuìkumaiù

     priyäyäù—of His beloved; tatra—there; çåìgäram—decoration; cakära—did; kuçaleçvaraù—the master of all skilfull artists; paträvalé—pictures and designs; yävakägraiù—with red lac; puñpaiù—with flowers; kajjala—with kajjala; kuìkumaiù—and kunkuma.

     There Lord Kåñëa, the master of all skillful artists, decorated His beloved with many pictures and designs drawn with colors made from flowers, yävaka, kajjala, and kuìkuma.

Text 39

candanäguru-kastüré
     keçarädyair harer mukhe
patraà cakära çåìgäre
     manojïaà kérti-nandiné

     candana—candana; aguru—aguru; kastüré—musk; kesara—and kesara; ädyaiù—beginning with; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; mukhe—on the face; patram—a design; cakära—did; çåìgäre—in decoration; manoj 24am—beautiful; kérti-nandiné—Rädhä.

     The Rädhä, the daughter of Kérti, decorated Lord Kåñëa's face with many beautiful designs drawn in sandal, aguru, musk, and kesara.
.pa

Chapter Twenty-three
Räsa-kréòäyäà çaìkhacüòa-vadhaù
The Killing of Çaìkhacüòa During the Räsa-dance Pastime

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
atha kåñëo gopikäbhir
     lohajäìghavanaà yayau
vasanta-mädhavébhiç ca
     latäbhiù saìkulaà nåpa

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; gopikäbhiù—with the gopés; lohajäìghavanam——to Lohajäìghavana; yayau—went; vasanta—springtime; mädhavébhiù—witn madhavi vines; ca—and; latäbhiù—with vines; saìkulam—filled; nåpa—O king.

     Çré Närada said: O king, then Lord Kåñëa and the gopés went to Lohajaìghavana forest, which was filled with flowering mädhavé vines. 

Text 2

tat-puñpa-dhäma-nicayaiù
     sphurat-saugandhi-çälibhiù
sarväsäà hariëä tatra
     kabaryo gumphitäs tataù

     tat-puñpa-dhäma-nicayaiù—with the many flowers; sphurat-saugandhi-çälibhiù—very fragrant; sarväsäm—of all; hariëä—by Kåñëa; tatra—there; kabaryaù—braids; gumphitäù—tied; tataù—then.

     Lord Kåñëa decorated all the gopés' braids with the fragrant flowers there.

Text 3

bhramara-dhvani-samyukte
     sugandhänila-väsite
kälindé-nikaöe kåñëo
     vicacära priyänvitaù

     bhramara—of bumblebees; dhvani—the sounds; samyukte—with; sugandha—fragrant; anila—breeze; väsite—scented; kälindé—the Yamunä; nikaöe—near; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; vicacära—went; priyä—His beloved; anvitaù—with.

     With His beloved, Lord Kåñëa walked by the Yamunä, which was filled with the sounds of bees and scented with a fragrant breeze.

Text 4

karillaiù pélubhiù çyämais
     tamälaiù saìkula-drumaiù
mahä-puëyavanaà kåñëo
     yayau räseçvaro hariù

     karillaiù—with karilla; pélubhiù—pilu; çyämaiù—dark; tamälaiù—tamalas; saìkula-drumaiù—with many trees; mahä—very; puëya—sacred; vanaàforest; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; yayau—went; räseçvaraù—the king of the rasa dance; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Lord Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance, walked there in a very sacred forest filled with karilla, pélu, and black tamäla trees.

Text 5

tatra räsaà samärebhe
     räseçvaryä samanvitaù
géyamänaç ca gopébhir
     apsarobhir sva-räò iva

     tatra—there; räsam—a rasa dance; samärebhe—began; räseçvaryä—with the queen of the rasa dance; samanvitaù—with; géyamänaù—singing; ca—and; gopébhiù—with the gopé; apsarobhiù—with the apsaräs; sva-räò—the king of heaven; iva—like.

     Singing, the Lord started a räsa dance with Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance, and with the many gopés. He danced as Indra, the king of Svargaloka, dances with the apsaräs.

Text 6

tatra citram abhüd räjan
     çåëu tvaà tan mukhän mama
çaìkhacüòo näma yakño
     dhanadänucaro balé

     tatra—there; citram—a wonder; abhüt—became; räjan—O king; çåëu—hear; tvam—You; tat—that; mukhät—from the mouth; mama—of me; çaìkhacüòaù—Çaìkhacüòa; näma—named; yakñaù—uaksa; dhanada—of Kuvera; anucaraù—follower; balé—powerful.

     O king, then a wonderful thing happened. Please hear of it from my mouth. There once was a very powerful yakña named Çaìkhacüòa, who was a follower of Kuvera.

Text 7

bhü-tale tat-samo nästi
     gadä-yuddha-viçäradaù
man-mukhäd augraseneç ca
     balaà çrutvä mahotkaöam

     bhü—of the earth; tale—on the surface; tat-samaù—his equal; na—not; asti—is; gadä—club; yuddha—fighting; viçäradaù—expert; mat-mukhät—from my mouth; augraseneù—of Kaàsa; ca—and; balam—the strength; çrutvä—hearing; mahä—great; utkaöam—great.

     In fighting with a club no one was his equal on the surface of the earth. From my mouth he heard of Kaàsa's great strength.

Text 8

lakña-bhära-mayéà gurvéà
     gadäm ädäya yakña-räö
sva-sakäçän madhu-puréà
     äyayau caëòa-vikramaù

     lakña—a hundred thousand; bhära—bharas; mayém—consisting of; gurvém—heavy; gadäm—club; ädäya—taking; yakña-räö—the king of the yaksas; sva-sakäçät—from his own place; madhu-purém—to Mathurä; äyayau—went; caëòa-vikramaù—very powerful.

     Taking a great club that weighed a hundred thousand bhäras, this very strong yakña king left his own home and went to Mathurä City.

Text 9

sabhäyäm ästhitaà präha
     kaàsaà natvä madoddhataù
gadä-yuddhaà dehi mahyaà
     trailokya-vijayé bhavän

     sabhäyäm—in the assembly; ästhitam—situated; präha—said; kaàsam—to kaàsa; natvä—bowing down; madoddhataù—filled with pride; gadä—club; yuddham—fight; dehi—please give; mahyam—to me; trailokya-vijayé—conqueror of the three worlds; bhavän—you.

     Filled with pride, he bowed before Kaàsa in the royal assmebly and said, "O conqueror of the three worlds, please give a club-duel to me."

Text 10

ahaà daço bhaveyaà vai
     bhaväàç ca vijayé yadi
ahaà jayé codbhavantaà
     däsaà çéghraà karomy aham

     aham—I; daçaù—servant; bhaveyam—will be; vai—indeed; bhavän—you; ca—and; vijayé—victorious; yadi—if; aham—I; jayé—victorious; ca—and; udbhavantam—manifested; däsam—servant; çéghram—for a long time; karomy—do; aham—I.

     If You are victorious, I will become your servant. If I am victorious, I will make you my servant for a very long time.

Text 11

tathästu coktvä kaàsas tu
     gåhétvä mahätéà gadäm
çaìkhacüòena yuyudhe
     raìga-bhümau videha-räö

     tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; tu—indeed; gåhétvä—taking; mahätém—great; gadäm—club; çaìkhacüòena—with Çaìkhacüòa; yuyudhe—fought; raìga-bhümau—in a fighting ground; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, saying, "So be it," and taking up a very great club, in a fighting-ground Kaàsa fought with Çaìkhacüòa.

Text 12

tayoç ca gadayä yuddhaà
     ghora-rüpaà babhüva ha
taòanäc caöcaöä-çabdaà
     käla-megha-taòid-dhvani

     tayoù—of them both; ca—and; gadayä—with club; yuddham—fight; ghora-rüpam—horrible; babhüva—was; ha—indeed; taòanät—from the blows; caöcaöä-çabdam—the sound caöcaöä; käla—black; megha—clouds; taòid-dhvani—thunder.

     They fought a terrible club-duel. The caöcaöä sound of their blows was like the lightning of black clouds.

Text 13

çuçubhäte raìga-madhye
     mallau naöye naöäv iva
ibhendräv iva dérghäìgau
     mågendräv iva codbhaöau

     çuçubhäte—shone; raìga-madhye—in the fighting-ground; mallau—wrestkers; naöye—in a dance; naöau—dancers; iva—like; ibhendrau——two elephant-kings; iva—like; dérgha—long; aìgau—limbs; mågendrau—lion-kings; iva—like; ca—and; udbhaöau—fighters.

     The two fighters were very glorious. They were like two wrestlers in a fighting-ground, two dancers in a dance, two regal elephants, or two long-limbed lions.

Text 14

dvayoç ca yudhyato räjan
     paraspara-jigéñayä
visphuliìgän kñarantyau dvau
     gade cürëé-babhüvatuù

     dvayoù—of the two of them; ca—and; yudhyataù—fighting; räjan—O king; paraspara-jigéñayä—with a desire to defeat each other; visphuliìgän—sparks; kñarantyau—throwing; dvau—both; gade—clubs; cürëé-babhüvatuh—broken into pieces.

     O king, as, each trying to defeat the other, they fought, sparks flew from their clubs. Their clubs were eventually broken into pieces.

Text 15

kaàsaù prakupitaà yakñaà
     muñöinäbhijaghäna ha
çaìkhacüòo 'pi taà kaàsaà
     muñöinä taà tatäòa ca

     kaàsaù—Kaàsa; prakupitam—to the angry; yakñam—yaksa; muñöinä—with fists; ahijaghäna—hit; ha—indeed; çaìkhacüòaù—Çaìkhacüòa; api—also; tam—him; kaàsam—Kaàsa; muñöinä—with fists; tam—him; tatäòa—punched; ca—and.

     Then Kaàsa punched the angry yakña, and Çaìkhacüòa punched Kaàsa.

Text 16

muñöämuñöi tayor äséd
     dinänäà sapta-viàçatiù
dvayor akñiëa-balayor
     vismayaà gatayos tataù

     muñöämuñöi—hand to hand; tayoù—of them both; äsét—was; dinänäm—of days; sapta-viàçatiù—twenty-seven; dvayoù—of them both; akñiëa—undiminished; balayoù—strength; vismayam—wonder; gatayoù—attained; tataù—of them.

     They fought hand-to-hand for twenty-seven days. Neither one weakened. They were both amazed.

Text 17

çaìkhacüòaà saìgåhétvä
     kaàso daityädhipo balé
baläc cikñepa sahasä
     vyomni taà çata-yojanam

     çaìkhacüòam—Çaìkhacüòa; saìgåhétvä—grabbing; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; daityädhipaù—the king of demons; balé—strong; baläc—violently; cikñepa—threw; sahasä—suddenly; vyomni—into the sky; tam—him; çata-yojanam—eight-hundred miles.

     Grabbing Çaìkhacüòa, the powerful demon-king Kaàsa suddenly threw him eight-hundred miles into the sky.

Text 18

çaìkhacüòaù prapatitaù
     kiïcid vyäkula-mänasaù
kaàsaà gåhétvä nabhasi
     cikñepäyuta-yojanam

     çaìkhacüòaù—Çaìkhacüòa; prapatitaù—fell; ki 24cit—somewhat; vyäkula-mänasaù—disturbed; kaàsam—to Kaàsa; gåhétvä—grabbing; naqbhasi—into the sky; cikñepa—threw; ayuta-yojanam—eighty-thousand miles.

     When Çaìkhacüòa fell he was a somewhat disturbed. Grabbing Kaàsa, Çaìkhacüòa threw him eighty-thousand miles into the sky.

Text 19

äkäçät patitaù kaàsaù
     kiïcid vyäkula-mänasaù
yakñaà gåhétvä sahasä
     pätayäm äsa bhü-tale

     äkäçät—from the sky; patitaù—fallen; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; kiïcit—somewhat; vyäkula-mänasaù—disturbed; yakñam—the yaksa; gåhétvä—grabbing; sahasä—suddenly; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—to the ground.

     When Kaàsa fell he was a somewhat disturbed. Grabbing the yakña Çaìkhacüòa, Kaàsa suddenly threw him to the ground. 
Text 20

çaìkhacüòas taà gåhétvä
     pothayäm äsa bhü-tale
evaà yuddhe sampravåtte
     cakampe bhümi-maëòalam

     çaìkhacüòaù—Çaìkhacüòa; tam—him; gåhétvä—grabbing; pothayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—to the ground; evam—thus; yuddhe—in the fight; sampravåtte—manifested; cakampe—trembled; bhümi-maëòalam—the circle of the earth.

     Then Çaìkhacüòa grabbed Kaàsa and threw him to the ground. As they fought in this way, the circle of the earth trembled.

Text 21

munéndraù sarva-vit säkñäd
     gargäcäryaù samägataù
raìgeñu vanditas täbhyäà
     kaàsaà prähorjayä girä

     munéndraù—the king of sages; sarva-vit—all-knowing; säkñät—directly; gargäcäryaù—Garga MUni; samägataù—came; raìgeñu—to the fighting-ground; vanditaù—offered obeisances; täbhyäm—by them both; kaàsam—to Kaàsa; präha—spoke; urjayä—with strong; girä—words.

     Then Garga Acärya, the all-knowing king of sages, came to the fighting-ground. The two fighters both offered respectful obeisances to him. With strong words he spoke to Kaàsa. 

Text 22

çré-garga uväca 
yuddhaà mä kuru räjendra
     viphalo 'yaà raëo 'tra vai
tvat-samäno hy ayaà véraù
     çaìkhacüòo mahä-balaù

     çré-garga uväca—Çré Garga said; yuddham—fight; ma—don't; kuru—do; räjendra—O king of kings; viphalaù—useless; ayam—this; raëaù—battle; atra—here; vai—indeed; tvat-samänaù—your equal; hy—indeed; ayam—he; véraù—warrior; çaìkhacüòaù—Çaìkhacüòa; mahä-balaù—powerful.

     Çré Garga said: O king of kings, don't continue this fight. This fight has no meaning. The powerful warrior Çaìkhacüòa is your equal.

Text 23

tava muñöi-prahäreëa
     bhåçäm airävato gajaù
jänubhyäà dharaëéà spåñövä
     kaçmalaà paramaà yayau

     tava—of you; muñöi-prahäreëa—by the punches; bhåçäm—greatly; airävataù—Auravata; gajaù—the elephant; jänubhyäm—on both knees; dharaëém—the earth; spåñövä—touching; kaçmalam—distress; paramam—great; yayau—has attained.

     The blows of your fists have made the elephant Airävata faint. His knees now touch the ground. 

Text 24

anye 'pi balino daityä
     muñöinä te måtià gatäù
çaìkhacüòo na patitaù
     sandeho nästi tac chåëu

     anye—other; api—indeed; balinaù—powqerful; daityä—demons; muñöinä—with fists; te—they; måtim—death; gatäù—attained; çaìkhacüòaù—Çaìkhacüòa; na—not; patitaù—fallen; sandehaù—doubt; na—not; asti—is; tat—that; çåëu—hear.

     Other powerful demons would have died from your punches, but Çaìkhacüòa has not even fallen. Of this there is no doubt. Please hear the reason.

Text 25

paripürëatamo yo vai
     so 'pi tvaà ghätayiñyati
tathainaà çaìkhacüòäkhyaà
     çivasyäpi varorjitam

     paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; yaù—who; vai—indeed; saù—who; api—also; tvam—you; ghätayiñyati—will kill; tathä—in the same way; enam—him; çaìkhacüòäkhyam—named Çaìkhacüòa; çivasya—of Çiva; api—also; vara—by the blessing; ürjitam—powerful.

     As the Supreme Personality of Godhead is destined to kill you, so He will also kill Çaìkhacüòa, and as you are very strong by Lord Çiva's blessings, so is he.

Text 26

tasmät prema prakartavyaà
     çaìkhacüòe yadüdvaha
yakña-räö ca tvayä kaàse
     kartavyaà prema niçcitam

     tasmät—therefore; prema—love; prakartavyam—should be done; çaìkhacüòe—for Çaìkhacüòa; yadüdvaha—O king of the Yadus; yakña-räö—the king of the yaksa; ca—and; tvayä—by you; kaàse—for Kaàsa; kartavyam—should be done; prema—love; niçcitam—certainly.

     Therefore, O king of the Yadus, you should make friends with Çaìkhacüòa, and you, O king of the yakñas should make friends with Kaàsa.

Text 27

çré-närada uväca 
gargeëoktau tadä tau dvau
     militväpi parasparam
paramäà cakratuù prétià
     çaìkhacüòa-yadüdvahau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; gargeëa—by Garga Muni; uktau——addressed; tadä—then; tau—they; dvau—both; militvä—meeting; api—also; parasparam—together; paramäm—great; cakratuù—did; prétim—friendship; çaìkhacüòa-yadüdvahau—Çaìkhacüòa and Kaàsa.

     Çré Närada said: In this way, by Garga Muni's words, Çaìkhacüòa and Kaàsa became great friends.

Text 28

atha kaàsam anujïäpya
     gåhaà gantuà samudyataù
gacchan märge 'çåëod rätrau
     räsa-gänaà manoharam

     atha—then; kaàsam—Kaàsa; anuj 24äpya—inviting; gåham—home; gantum—to go; samudyataù—begun; gacchan—going; märge—on the path; açåëot—heard; rätrau—at night; räsa-gänam—the musico0f the rasa dance; manoharam—beautiful.

     Then Çaìkhacüòa invited Kaàsa to his home. Traveling on the road at night, they heard the beautiful singing of the räsa dance.

Text 29

täla-çabdänusäreëa
     sampräptau räsa-maëòale
räseçvaryä samaà räse
     'paçyad räseçvaraà harim

     täla—of the karatälas; çabda—the sound; anusäreëa—following; sampräptau—attained; räsa-maëòale—the circle of the rasa dance; räseçvaryä—the queen of the rasa dance; samam—with; räse—in the rasa dance; apaçyat—saw; räseçvaram—the king of the rasa dance; harim—Lord Kåñëa.

     Following the sounds of the karatälas, they came to the räsa-dance circle, where they saw Çré Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance, and Lord Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance, . . .

Text 30

çré-rädhayälaìkåta-väma-bähuà
     svacchanda-vakré-kåta-dakñiëäìghrim
vaàçé-dharaà sundara-mända-häsaà
     bhrü-maëòalair mohita-käma-räçim

     çré-rädhayä—by Çré Rädhä; alaìkåta—decorated; väma—left; bähum—arm; svacchanda—as He wished; vakré-kåta—crooked; dakñiëa—left; aìghrim—foot; vaàçé-dharam—holding a flute; sundara-mända-häsam—with a handsome smile; bhrü-maëòalaiù—with the eyebrows; mohita—bewildering; käma—of Kämadevas; räçim—many multitudes.

 . . . whose left arm was decorated by Çré Rädhä, whose left foot was playfully tilted, who held a flute, who had a handsome and gentle smile, whose eyebrows bewildered many multitudes of Kämadevas, . . .

Text 31

vrajäìganä-yütha-patià vrajeçvaraà
     su-sevitaà cämara-cchatra-koöibhiù
vijïäya kåñëaà hy ati-komalaà çiçuà
     gopéà samahärtum alaà mano 'karot

     vrajäìganä-yütha-patim—the master of the girls of Vraja; vrajeçvaram—trhe master of Vraja; su-sevitam—served; cämara-cchatra-koöibhiù—with ten million parasols and camaras; vijïäya—thinking; kåñëam—Kåñëa; hy—indeed; ati-komalam—very delicate; çiçum—boy; gopéàa gopé; samahärtum—to abduct; alam—greatly; manaù—mind; akarot—did.

 . . . who was the master of Vraja and Vraja's girls, and who was served with ten million parasols and cämaras. Thinking Kåñëa only a fragile boy, Çaìkhacüòa decided to kidnap one of the gopés.

Text 32

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
kià babhüva tato räse
     çaìkhacüòe samägate
etan me brühi viprendra
     tvaà parävara-vittamaù

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; kim—what?; babhüva—happened; tataù—then; räse—inm the rasa dance; çaìkhacüòe—when Çaìkhacüòa; samägate—came; etat—that; me—to me; brühi—tell; viprendra—O king of brähmaëas; tvam—you; parävara-vittamaù—the best of they who know everything.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: What happened when Çaìkhacüòa came to the räsa dance. Please tell me that, O king of brähmaëas, O best of the wise.

Text 33

çré-närada uväca 
vyäghränanaà kåñëa-varëaà
     täla-våkña-daçocchritam
bhayaìkaraà lalaj-jihvaà
     dåñövä gopyo 'pi tatrasuù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; vyäghra—tiger; ananam—face; kåñëa-varëam—black complexion; täla-våkña—palm trees; daça—ten; ucchritam—tall; bhayaìkaram—fearsome; lalat—moving; jihvam—tongue; dåñövä—seeing; gopyaù—the gopés; api—also; tatrasuù—becane afraid.

     Çré Närada said: When the gopés saw fearsome Çaìkhacüòa, who was black, tall as ten palm trees, and who had a tiger's face with a lolling tongue, they became afraid.

Text 34

dudruvuù sarvato gopyo
     mahän kolahalo 'bhavat
hä-hä-käras tadaiväséc
     chaìkhacüòe samägate

     dudruvuù—ran; sarvataù—everywhere; gopyaù—teh gopés; mahän—great; kolahalaù—tumult; abhavat—was; hä-hä-käraù—alas! alas!; tadä—then; eva-indeed; asit—was; çaìkhacüòe—when Çaìkhacüòa; samägate—came.

     When Çaìkhacüòa came there was a great commotion. Crying, "Alas! Alas!" the gopés ran in all directions.

Text 35

çatacandränanäà gopéà
     gåhétvä yakña-räö khalaù
dudräväçüttaräm äçäà
     niùsaìkaù käma-péòitaù

     çatacandränanäm—Çatacandränanä; gopém—gopé; gåhétvä—taking; yakña-räö—the king of yaksas; khalaù—the demon; dudräva—ran; äçu—at once; uttaräm äçäm—to the north; niùsaìkaù—fearless; käma-péòitaù—oppressed by lust.

     Fearless, and tortured by lust, the demon Çaìkhacüòa grabbed Çatacandränanä-gopé and ran to the north.

Text 36

rudantéà kåñëa kåñëeti
     kroçantéà bhaya-vihvaläm
tam anvadhävac chré-kåñëaù
     çäla-hasto ruñä bhåçäm

     rudantém—screaming; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; kåñëeti—O Kåñëa; kroçantém—wailing; bhaya-vihvaläm—terrified; tam—him; anvadhävat-chased; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; çäla—with a plam tree; hastaù—in His hand; ruñä—angry; bhåçäm—very.

     As terrified Çatacandränanä-gopé screamed, "Kåñëa! Kåñëa!" Çré Kåñëa, a çäla tree in His hand, angrily chased the demon.

Text 37

yakño vékñya tam äyäntaà
     kåtäntam iva durjayam
gopéà tyaktvä jévitecchuù
     prädravad bhaya-vihvalaù

     yakñaù—the yaksa; vékñya—seeing; tam—Him; äyäntam—coming; kåtantam—death; iva—like; durjayam—invincible; gopém—the gopé; tyaktvä—abandoning; jévita—life; icchuù—desiring; prädravat—ran; bhaya-vihvalaù—overcome with fear.

     Seeing Kåñëa approaching like invicible death, the yakña demon became afraid, left the gopé behind, and ran for his life.

Text 38

yatra yatra gato dhävan
     çaìkhacüòo mahä-khalaù
tatra tatra gataù kåñëaù
     çäla-hasto bhåçäà ruñä 
     yatra yatra—wherever; gataù—went; dhävan—running; çaìkhacüòaù—Çaìkhacüòa; mahä-khalaù—the great demon; tatra tatra—there; gataù—went; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; çäla-hastaù—a sala tree in His hand; bhåçäm—very; ruñä—angrily. 

     Wherever the great demon Çaìkhacüòa ran, angry Kåñëa, a çäla tree in His hand, followed.

Text 39

himäcala-taöaà präptaù
     çälam udyamya yakña-räö
tasthau tat-sammukhe räjan
     yuddha-kämo viçeñataù

     himäcala-taöam—the Himalayas; präptaù—attained; çälam—a sala tree; udyamya—taking; yakña-räö—the king of the yaksas; tasthau—stood; tat-sammukhe—facing HIm; räjan—O king; yuddha-kämaù—desiring to fight; viçeñataù—specifically.

     O king, when he came to the Himalayas, Çaìkhacüòa uprooted a çäla tree and, eager for a fight, stood before Kåñëa.

Text 40

tasmai cikñepa bhagavän
     çäla-våkñaà bhujaujasä
tena ghätena patito
     våkño väta-hato yathä

     tasmai—at him; cikñepa—threw; bhagavän—the Lored; çäla-våkñam—the sala tree; bhujaujasä—with the strength of His arms; tena—by that; ghätena—blow; patitaù—fell; våkñaù—the tree; väta—by the wind; hataù—struck; yathä—as.

     With His mighty arm the Lord threw the çäla tree at him. The demon fell like  a tree struck by a hurricane.

Text 41

punar utthäya vaikuëöhaà
     muñöinä taà jaghäna ha
jagarga sahasä duñöo
     nädayan maëòalaà diçäm

     punaù—again; utthäya—rising; vaikuëöham—to Lord Kåñëa; muñöinä—with a fist; tam—Him; jaghäna—hit; ha—indeed; jagarga—roared; sahasä—at once; duñöaù—the demon; nädayan—fiulling with sound; maëòalaà diçäm—all the directions.

     Getting up, the demon punched Kåñëa and roared with a great sound that echoed in the circle of the directions.

Text 42

gåhétvä taà harir dorbhyäà
     bhrämayitvä bhujaujasä
pätayäm äsa bhü-påñöhe
     vätaù padmam ivoddhåtam

     gåhétvä—grabbing; tam—him; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; dorbhyäm—with both arms; bhrämayitvä—whirling around; bhujaujasä—with the power of His arms; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-påñöhe—to the ground; vätaù—wind; padmam—a lotus flower; iva—like; uddhåtam—uprooted.

     Grabbing him with His powerful arms, Kåñëa whirled the demon around and threw him to the ground as a hurricane uproots and throws a lotus flower.

Text 43

çaìkhacüòas taà gåhétvä
     pothayäm äsa bhü-tale
evaà yuddhe sampravåtte
     cakampe bhümi-maëòalam

     çaìkhacüòaù—Çaìkhacüòa; tam—Him; gåhétvä—grabbing; pothayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—to the ground; evam—thus; yuddhe—in the fight; sampravåtte—engaged; cakampe—trembled; bhümi-maëòalam—the circle of the earth.

     Then Çaìkhacüòa grabbed Kåñëa and threw Him to the ground. As they fought in this way the circle of the earth shook.

Text 44

muñöinä tac-chiraç chittvä
     tasmäc cüòä-maëià hariù
jagräha mädhavaù säkñät
     sukåté çevadhià yathä

     muñöinä—with a punch; tac-chiraù—his head; chittvä—cutting; tasmäc—from that; cüòä-maëim—the crest jewel; hariù—Kåñëa; jagräha—took; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; sukåté—a pious man; çevadhim—a treasure; yathä—as.

     With a great punch Kåñëa severed the demon's head. Then, as a pious man takes the great treasure he has earned, Kåñëa took the jewel from the demon's crown.

Text 45

taj-jyotir nirgataà dérghaà
     dyotayan maëòalaà diçäm
çrédämni çré-kåñëa-sakhe
     lénaà jätaà vraje nåpa

     taj-jyotiù—his effulgence; nirgatam—gone; dérgham—fro a long time; dyotayan—illuminating; maëòalam—the circle; diçäm—of the directions; çrédämni—in Çré dämä; çré-kåñëa-sakhe—Çré Kåñëa's friend; lénam—entered; jätam—born; vraje—in Vraja; nåpa—O king.

     O king, an effulgence left the demon's body and for a long time lit up the circle of the directions until it finally  entered Çré Kåñëa's friend Çrédämä, who was born in Vraja.

Text 46

evaà hatvä çaìkhacüòaà
     bhagavän madhusüdanaù
maëi-päëiù punaù çéghraà
     äyayau räsa-maëòalam

     evam—thus; hatvä—having killed; çaìkhacüòam—Çaìkhacüòa; bhagavän—the Lord; madhusüdanaù—Kåñëa; maëi-päëiù—the jwel in His hand; punaù—again; çéghram—after a long time; äyayau—arrived; räsa-maëòalam—at the circle of the räsa dance.

     Thus killing Çaìkhacüòa, Lord Kåñëa, the jewel in His hand, returned to the circle of the räsa dance after a long time.

Text 47

candränanäyai ca maëià
    dattvä taà déna-vatsalaù
punar gopé-gaëaiù särdhaà
     räsaà cakre hariù svayam

     candränanäyai—to Candränanä; ca—and; maëim—the jewel; dattvä—giviong; tam—that; déna-vatsalaù—kind to the poor; punaù—again; gopé-gaëaiù—the gopés; särdham—with; räsam—the rasa dance; cakre—did; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally.

     After giving that jewel to Candränanä-gopé, Lord Kåñëa continued His räsa dance with the gopés.
.pa

Chapter Twenty-four
Räsa-kréòäyäm äsury-upäkhyänam
The Story of Asuri Muni in the Räsa-dance Pastime

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
atha gopé-gaëaiù särdhaà
     paçyan çré-yamunä-taöam
vihartum äyayau kåñëo
     våndäraëyaà manoharam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; gopé-gaëaiù—with ther gopés; särdham—with; paçyan—seeing; çré-yamunä—of the Yamunä; taöam—the shore; vihartum—to enjoy pastimes; äyayau—came; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; våndäraëyam—to Våndävana; manoharam—beautiful.

     Çré Närada said: Noticing that He had come to the Yamunä's shore, Lord Kåñëa proceeded to beautiful Våndävana forest to enjoy pastimes with the gopés.

Text 2

våndävane cauñadhayo
     lénä jätä harer varät
täù sarväç cäìganä bhütvä
     yüthé-bhütvä samäyayuù

     våndävane—in Våndävana; ca—and; auñadhayaù—the plants; lénä—entered; jätä—born; hareù—of Kåñëa; varät—from the blessing; täù—they; sarväù—all; ca—and; aìganä—girls; bhütvä—becoming; yüthé-bhütvä—joining the groups of gopés; samäyayuù—came.

     With Lord Kåñëa's blessing all the plants in Våndävana became transformed into beautiful girls. Joining the gopés, they approached Kåñëa.

Text 3

latä-gopé-samühena
     citra-varëena maithila
reme våndävane räjan
     harir våndävaneçvaraù

     latä-gopé-samühena—with the plants transformed into gopés; citra-varëena—wonderful; maithila—O king of Mithilä; reme—enjoyed; våndävane—in Våndävana; räjan—O king; hariù—Kåñëa; våndävaneçvaraù—the king of Våndävana.

     O king of Mithilä, Lord Kåñëa, the master of Våndävana, then enjoyed pastimes with the plants transformed into wonderful gopés.

Texts 4 and 5

kalinda-nandiné-tére
     kadambäc chädite çubhe
tri-vidhena saméreëa
     sarvataù surabhé-kåte

vilasat-puline ramye
     vaàçévaöa-viräjite
sthito 'bhüd rädhayä särdhaà
     räsa-çrama-samanvitaù

     kalinda-nandiné-tére—on the Yamunä's shore; kadambäc—from the kadamba tree; chädite—shaded; çubhe—beautiful; tri-vidhena—three kinds; saméreëa—with breezes; sarvataù—everywhere; surabhé-kåte—fragrant; vilasat—splendid; puline—on ther shore; ramye—beautiful; vaàçévaöa-viräjite—splendid with Vamsivata; sthitaù—situated; abhüt—was; rädhayä—Rädhä; särdham—with; räsa-çrama-samanvitaù—exhausted from the rasa dance.

     Exhausted from the räsa dance, Rädhä and Kåñëa rested in a kadamba tree's shade at beautiful Vaàçéväöa, fragrant with three kinds of breezes by the Yamunä's shore.

Text 6

véëä-täla-mådaìgädi-
     muru-yañöi-yutäni ca
vaditräëy ambare neduù
     surair gopé-gaëaiù saha

     véëä-täla-mådaìgädi—with vinas, karatalasa, mrdangas, and other instruments; muru-yañöi-yutäni—with murus and yastis; ca—and; vaditräëy—instruments; ambare—in the sky; neduù—sounded; suraiù—by the demigods; gopé-gaëaiù—the gopés; saha—with.

     Then the demigods in the sky and the gopés on earth played véëäs, karatälas, mådaìgas, murus, yañöis, and other musical instruments.

Text 7

deveñu puñpaà varñatsu
     jaya-dhvani-yuteñu ca
toñayantyo harià gopyo
     jagus tad-yaça uttamam

     deveñu—as the demigods; puñpam—flowers; varñatsu—showered; jaya-dhvani-yuteñu—with sounds of Victory!; ca—and; toñayantyaù—pleasing; harim—Kåñëa; gopyaù—the gopés; jaguù—sang; tad-yaça—His glory; uttamam—transcendental.

     As the demigods showered flowers and called out  Victory!" the gopés pleased Lord Kåñëa by singing songs about His transcendental glories.

Texts 8 and 9

käçcid vai megha-malläraà
     dépakaà ca tathäparäù
mälakoçaà bhairavaà ca
     çré-rägaà ca tathaiva ca

hindolaà ca jaguù käçcid
     räjan sapta-svaraiù saha
käçcit täsäà pramugdhäç ca
     käçcin mugdhäù striyo nåpa

     käçcit—some; vai—indeed; megha-malläram—megha-mallära; dépakam—dépaka; ca—and; tathä—so; aparäù—others; mälakoçam—mälakoça; bhairavam—bhairava; ca—and; çré-rägam—çré-räga; ca—and; tatha—so; eva—indeed; ca—and; hindolam—hindola; ca—and; jaguù—sang; käçcit—some; räjan—O king; sapta-svaraiù—with seven notes; saha—with; käçcit—some; täsäm—of them; pramugdhäù—with the charm of youth; ca—and; käçcin—some; mugdhäù—a little older; striyaù—women; nåpa—O king.

     Some sang in the räga megha-mallära, and others in dépaka, mälakoça, bhairava, çré-räga, and many melodies of seven notes. O king, some had the sweet charm of submissive youth, and some had the charm of being a little more independent.

Text 10

käçcit prauòhäù prema-paräù
     çré-kåñëe lagna-mänasäù
jarä-dharmeëa govindaà
     käçcid gopyo bhajanti hi

     käçcit—some; prauòhäù—agressive and independent; prema-paräù—filled with love; çré-kåñëe—to Çré Kåñëa; lagna—attached; mänasäù—whose hearts; jarä-dharmeëa—with the relationship of a paramour; govindam—Kåñëa; käçcit—some; gopyaù—gopés; bhajanti—worshiped; hi—indeed.

     Some were agressive and independent, some were passionately in love, their hearts attached to Çré Kåñëa, and some worshiped Kåñëa as their paramour.

Text 11

käçcic chré-kåñëa-sahitaù
     kanduka-kréòaëe ratäù
käçcit puñpaiç ca hariëä
     kréòäà cakruù parasparam

     käçcit—some; çré-kåñëa-sahitaù—with Çré Kåñëa; kanduka-kréòaëe—in playing ball; ratäù—attached; käçcit—some; puñpaiù—with flowers; ca—and; hariëä—with Kåñëa; kréòäm—pastimes; cakruù—did; parasparam—among themselves.

     Some were attached to playing ball-games with Çré Kåñëa. Others played flower-games with Kåñëa.

Text 12

käçcil latäsu dhävantyaù
     kvaëan-nüpura-mekhaläù
käçcit pibanti satataà
     balät kåñëädharämåtam

     käçcit—some; latäsu—among the vines; dhävantyaù—running; kvaëan-nüpura-mekhaläù—with tinkling belts and anklets; käçcit—some; pibanti—drink; satatam—always; balät—by force; kåñëädharämåtam—the nectar of Kåñëa's lips.

     Some, their belts and anklets tinkling, run with Him among the flowering vines. Again and again some passionately drink the nectar of His lips.

Text 13

käçcid bhujäbhyäà çré-kåñëaà
     yoginäm api durlabham
saìgåhétvä prahasyäräc
     cakrur äliìganaà mahat

     käçcit—some; bhujäbhyäm—with both arms; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; yoginäm—of the yogis; api—even; durlabham—hard to attain; saìgåhétvä—taking; prahasya—smiling; ärät—close; cakruù—do; äliìganam—embrace; mahat—great.

     Smiling, some tightly embrace Çré Kåñëa, whom even the great yogés cannot attain.

Text 14

manojïo yadu-räjaç ca
     gopénäà bhagavän hariù
käçméra-mudrito reme
     vane våndävaneçvaraù

     manojïaù—handsome; yadu-räja—the king of the Yadus; ca—and; gopénäm—of the gopés; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåñëa; käçméra—with kunkuma; mudritaù—anointed; reme—enjoyed; vane—in the forest; våndävaneçvaraù—the king of Våndävana.

     Anointed with kuìkuma, Çré Kåñëa, who is the Lord of the gopés, the master of Våndävana, and the king of the Yadus, enjoyed pastimes in the forest.

Text 15

käçcid véëäà vädayantyaù
     samaà vaàçé-dhareëa vai
käçcin mådaìgaà vadantyo
     gäyantyo bhagavad-guëam

     käçcit—some; véëäm—a vina; vädayantyaù—playing; samam—with; vaàçé-dhareëa—Kåñëa, who held a flute; vai—indeed; käçcin—some; mådaìgam—mrdanga; vadantyaù—playing; gäyantyaù—sininging; bhagavad-guëam—the virtues of the Lord.

     Some played the véëä as Kåñëa played the flute. Some played the mådaìga and sang songs of Lord Kåñëa's glories.

Text 16

käçcid vai madhuraà tälaà
     täòayantyo hareù puraù
mura-yañöià saìgåhétvä
     hariëä mädhavé-tale

     käçcit—some; vai—indeed; madhuram—sweetly; tälam—the karatalas; täòayantyaù—playing; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; puraù—again; mura-yañöim—murus and yastis; saìgåhétvä—taking; hariëä—with Kåñëa; mädhavé-tale—among the madhavi vines.

     Some sweetly play karatälas before Lord Kåñëa. Others play murus and yañöis with Lord Kåñëa among the flowering mädhavé vines.

Texts 17 and 18

gäyantyaù su-sthirä bhümau
     vismåtya jagataù sukham
käçcil latäsu çré-kåñëaà
     bhuje bähuà nidhäya ca

våndävanasya paçyantyo
     çobhaà räjann itas tataù

     gäyantyaù—singing; su-sthirä—with steadiness; bhümau—on the ground; vismåtya—forgetting; jagataù—the worlds; sukham—happily; käçcil—some; latäsu—among the vines; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; bhuje—in arm; bähum—arm; nidhäya—placing; ca—and.

     Some gracefully sing Kåñëa's glories. O king, some, oblivious to all other happinesses in the universe, walk arm in arm with Kåñëa among the flowering vines and gaze at the beauty of Våndävana forest.

Texts 19-22

latä-jälaiù samvalitaà
     gopénäà hära-saïcayam
påthak cakära govindaù
     spåñövä täsäm uraù-sthalam
gopénäà näsikä-muktä-
     valià tat-kuntalaà svayam

çanaiù çanaiù çobhanaà tac
     cakre çré-nanda-nandanaù
tämbülaà carvitaà hy ardhaà
     nétvä sadyo 'tha gopikäù

carvayantyaù sugandhäòhyaà
     aho täsäà tapo mahat
käçcic chyäma-kapoleñu
     dvy-aìgulena çanaiù çanaiù

hasantyas täòayantyas täù
     kadambeñu balät påthak

     våndävanasya—of Våndävana; paçyantyaù—seeing; çobham—beauty; räjann—O king; itaù—here; tataù—and there; latä—of vines; jälaiù—with networks; samvalitam—surrounded; gopénäm—of gopés; hära-saïcayam—garlands; påthak—specific; cakära—did; govindaù—Kåñëa; spåñövä—touching; täsäm—of them; uraù-sthalam—breasts; gopénäm—of the gopés; näsikä-muktä-—nose pearl; avalim—series; tat-kuntalam—hair; svayam—personally; çanaiù çanaiù—gradually; çobhanam—decoration; tac—that; cakre—did; çré-nanda-nandanaù—Kåñëa; tämbülam—betelnuts; carvitam—chewed; hy—indeed; ardham—half; nétvä—taking; sadyaù—at once; atha—then; gopikäù—the gopés; carvayantyaù—chewing; sugandhäòhyam—fragrant; ahaù—Oh; täsäm—of them; tapaù—austerity; mahät—great; käçcic—some; chyäma—dark; kapoleñu—on the cheeks; dvy-aìgulena—with two fingers; çanaiù çanaiù—gradually; hasantyaù—smiling; täòayantyaù—stricking; täù—they; kadambeñu—among the kadamba trees; balät—forcibly; påthak—specific.

     Hidden by the flowering vines, Kåñëa decorated some gopés, gently touching their hair, nose-pearl, and breasts. He gave very fragrant half-chewed betelnuts to some gopés and they chewed them. This happened because they had performed many pious activities in the past. Among the kadamba trees some gopés smiled and with two fingers stroked Kåñëa's dark cheeks. 

Text 23 

pum-veña-näyakäù käçcin
     mauli-kuëòala-maëòitäù
nåtyantyaù kåñëa-purataù
     çré-kåñëa iva maithila

rädhä-veña-dharä gopyaù
     satcandränanä-prabhäù
toñayantyaç ca rädhäà taà
     tathä rädhä-patià jaguù

     pum—of males; veña—dress; näyakäù—heroes; käçcin—some; mauli-kuëòala-maëòitäù—decorated with crown and earrings; nåtyantyaù—dancing; kåñëa-purataù—before Lord Kåñëa; çré-kåñëa—Çré Kåñëa; iva—like; maithila—O kin gof Mithilä; rädhä-veña-dharä—dressed as Rädhä; gopyaù—gopés; satcandränanä-prabhäù—splendid as a hundred moons; toñayantyaù—pleasing; ca—and; rädhäm—Rädhä; tam—Her; tathä—then; rädhä-patim—the master of Rädhä; jaguù—sang. 

     O king of Mithilä, some gopés dressed as Lord Kåñëa, with crown and earrings, and danced before Lord Kåñëa, and some, glorious as a hundred moons, dressed as Rädhä, and by singing songs gave pleasure to Rädhä and Kåñëa.

Text 24

käçcit täù sattvikair bhävaiù
     samyuktäù prema-vihvaläù
yogéva cästhitä bhümau
     paramänanda-samplutäù

     käçcit—some; täù—they; sattvikaiù—with sattvika; bhävaiù—bhava; samyuktäù—endowed; prema-vihvaläù—overcome with love; yogé—a yogi; iva—like; ca—and; ästhitä—situated; bhümau—on the ground; paramänanda-samplutäù—filled with bliss.

     Some, overcome with ecstatic love, sat down on the ground as if they were yogés filled with bliss.

Text 25

käçcil latäsu våkñeñu
     bhümyäà vai viditäsu ca
paçyantyaù çré-patià devaà
     svasmin vä maunam ästhitäù

     käçcit—some; latäsu—among the vines; våkñeñu—and trees; bhümyäm—on the ground; vai—indeed; viditäsu—known; ca—and; paçyantyaù—looking; çré-patià devam—at Lord Kåñëa, the master of the goddess of fortune; svasmin—own; vä—indeed; maunam—in silence; ästhitäù—situated.

     Some sat among the trees and vines and silently gazed as Lord Kåñëa, the master of the goddess of fortune.

Text 26

evaà räse gopa-vadhvaù
     sarväù pürëa-manorathäù
babhüvur etya govindaà
     sarveçaà bhakta-vatsalam

     evam—thus; räse—in the rasa dance; gopa-vadhvaù—the gopés; sarväù—all; pürëa-manorathäù—desires fulfilled; babhüvuù—became; etya—attaining; govindam—Lord Kåñëa; sarveçam—the master of all; bhakta-vatsalam—kind to the devotees.

     In this way the gopés approached Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who dearly loves His devotees, and their desires were all fulfilled.

Text 27

yat-prasädas tu gopénäà
     präpto räjan mahä-mate
jïäninäm api nästy evaà
     karmiëäà tu kutaç ca saù

     yat—of whom; prasädaù—the mercy; tu—indeed; gopénäm—of ther gopés; präptaù—attained; räjan—O king; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted; jïäninäm—of the great philosophers; api—also; na—not; asti—is; evam—thus; karmiëäm—of the karmis; tu—indeed; kutaù—where?; ca—and; saù—He.

     O noble-hearted king, the gopés attained mercy even the greatest philosophers, what to speak of fruitive workers, cannot attain.

Text 28

evaà çré-kåñëacandrasya
     hare rädhä-pateù prabhoù
räse citraà yad babhüva
     tac chåëuñva mahä-mate

     evam—thus; çré-kåñëacandrasya—of Çré Kåñëa; hare——Lord Hari; rädhä-pateù—the Lord of Çré Rädhä; prabhoù—the master; räse—in the rasa dance; citram—wonder; yat—what; babhüva—happened; tac—that; chåëuñva—please hear; mahä-mate—O great-hearted one.

     O noble-hearted one, please hear of a great wonder that happened in the räsa dance of Rädhä's master, Çré Kåñëa.

Texts 29-31

munéndra äsurir näma
     çré-kåñëeñöo mahä-tapäù

näradädrau tapas tepe
     harau dhyäna-paräyaëaù
håt-puëòaréke çré-kåñëaà
     jyotir-maëòalam ästhitam

manojïaà rädhayä särdhaà
     nityaà dhyäne dadarça ha
ekadä dhyäna-madhye tu
     rätrau kåñëo na cägataù

     munéndra—a king of sages; äsuriù—Asuri; näma—named; çré-kåñëeñöaù—a devotee of Kåñëa; mahä-tapäù—very austere; näradädrau—on Mount Narada; tapas tepe—performed austerities; harau—for Lord Hari; dhyäna-paräyaëaù—intently meditation; håt-puëòaréke—on the lotus of the heart; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; jyotir-maëòalam—in a circle of light; ästhitam—situated; manojïam—handsome; rädhayä—Rädhä; särdham—with; nityam—always; dhyäne—in meditation; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed; ekadä—one day; dhyäna-madhye—in the middle of his meditation; tu—indeed; rätrau—at night; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; na—not; ca—and; ägataù—camne.

     There was a very austere saint named Asuri Muni, who was a king of sages and a great devotee of Çré Kåñëa. He performed austerities on Närada Mountain and in his meditation he always saw handsome Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa standing in a circle of light on the lotus of his heart. Then, one night, Kåñëa was suddenly no longer present in his meditation.

Text 32

väraà väraà kåtaà dhyänaà
     khinno jäto mahä-muniù
dhyänäd utthäya sa muniù
     kåñëa-darçana-lälasaù

     väraà väram—again and again; kåtam—done; dhyänam—meditation; khinnaù—morose; jätaù—became; mahä-muniù—the great sage; dhyänät—from meditation; utthäya—rising; sa—hbe; muniù—the sage; kåñëa-darçana-lälasaù—yearning to see Lord Kåñëa.

     Again and again he meditated. The great sage felt frustrated and depressed. Yearning to see Lord Kåñëa, he came out of his meditative trance.

Text 33

näräyaëäçramaà prägäd
     badaré-khaëòa-maëòitam
na dadarça harià devaà
     nara-näräyaëaà muniù

     näräyaëäçramam—to Näräyaëäçrama; prägät—went; badaré-khaëòa-maëòitam—decorated with badari bushes; na—not; dadarça—saw; harià devam—Lord Hari; nara-näräyaëam— Nara-Näräyaëa; muniù—the sage.

     When the sage went to badaré-decorated Näräyaëa-äçrama, he could not find Lord Kåñëa in His form as Çré Nara-Näräyaëa Åñi.

Text 34

tadäti-vismito vipro
     lokäloka-girià yayau
sahasra-çirasaà devaà
     na dadarça sa tatra vai

     tadä—then; ati-vismitaù—very surprised; vipraù—the brähmaëa; lokäloka-girim—to Lokaloka Mountain; yayau—went; sahasra-çirasam—thousand-headed; devam—the Lord; na—not; dadarça—saw; sa—he; tatra—there; vai—indeed.

     Then the brähmaëa sage went to Lokäloka Mountain where, to his great surprise, he could not find thousand-headed Lord Çeña.

Text 35

papraccha pärñadaàs tatra
     kva gato bhagavän itaù
na vidmo bho vayaà cokto
     muniù khinna-manäs tadä

     papraccha—asked; pärñadaàù—the associates; tatra—there; kva—where?; gataù—gone; bhagavän—the Lord; itaù—here; na—not; vidmaù—we know; bhaù—Oh; vayam—we; ca—and; uktaù—addressed; muniù—the sage; khinna-manäù—depressed; tadä—then.

     When he asked the Lord's associates there, "Where did the Lord go?" they said, "We do not know." Then the sage became morose at heart.

Text 36

çvetadvépaà yayau divyaà
     kñéra-sägara-çobhitam
taträpi çeña-paryaìke
     na dadarça harià punaù

     çvetadvépam—to Svetadvipa; yayau—went; divyam—splendid; kñéra-sägara-çobhitam—glorious in the milk ocean; taträpi—there also; çeña-paryaìke—on the couch of Çeña; na—not; dadarça—saw; harim—Lord Kåñëa; punaù—again.

     When he went to glorious Çvetadvépa in the milk ocean, again he could not find Lord Kåñëa reclining on the couch of Çeña.

Text 37

tadä muniù khinna-manäù
     premëä pulakitänanaù
papraccha pärñadäàs tatra
     kva gato bhagavän itaù

     tadä—then; muniù—the sage; khinna-manäù—depressed; premëä—with love; pulakitänanaù—the hair of his body erect; papraccha—asked; pärñadän—the associates; tatra—there; kva—where; gataù—gone; bhagavän—the Lord; itaù—from here.

     Depressed, and the hairs of his body erect with spiritual love, the sage asked the Lord's associates there, "Where did the Lord go?"

Text 38

na vidmo bho vayaà cokto
     muniç cinta-paräyaëaù
kià karomi kva gacchämi
     darçanaà tat kathaà bhavet

     na—not; vidmaù—know; bhaù—O; vayam—we; coktaù—addrewsssed; muniù—the sage; cinta-paräyaëaù—thoughtful and anxious; kim—what?; karomi—I will do; kva—where?; gacchämi—I will go; darçanam—sight; tat—that; katham—how; bhavet—may be.

     They said, "We do not know." Then the sage became anxious. He thought, "What sould I do, or where should I go in order to see the Lord?"

Text 39

evaà bruvan mano-yäyé
     vaikuëöhaà präptavaàs tataù
näpaçyat tatra deveçaà
     ramäà vaikuëöha-väsiném

     evam—thus; bruvan—speaking; mano-yäyé—traveling at the speed of mind; vaikuëöham—to Vaikuëöha; präptavaàù—went; tataù—then; na—not; aapaçyat—saw; tatra—there; deveçam—the Supreme Lord; ramäm—the goddess of fortune; vaikuëöha-väsiném—who resides in Vaikuëöha

     Thinking in this way, he traveled at the speed of mind to the spiritual world of Vaikuëöha. There he could not find Lord Näräyaëa and goddess Lakñmé.

Text 40

na dåñöas tatra bhakteñu
     muninäsuriëä nåpa
tato munéndro yogéndro
     golokaà sa jagäma ha

     na—not; dåñöaù—seen; tatra—there; bhakteñu—among the devotees; muninä asuriëä—by Asuri Muni; nåpa—O king; tataù—there; munéndraù—the king of sages; yogéndraù—the king of yogis; golokam—to Goloka; sa—he; jagäma—went; ha—certainly.

     Not finding Them, Asuri Muni, who was the king of sages and yogés, went, O king, to the world of Goloka.

Text 41

våndävane nikuïje 'pi
     na dadarça parät param
tadä muniù khinna-manäù
     çré-kåñëa-virahäturaù

     våndävane—in Våndävana; nikuïje—in the forest; api—even; na—not; dadarça—saw; parät—than the greatest; param—greater; tadä—then; muniù—the sage; khinna-manäù—depressed; çré-kåñëa-virahäturaù—anguished by separation from Çré Kåñëa.

     Even in Våndävana forest he could not find the Supreme Lord. Then, separated from Lord Kåñëa, the sage became filled with anguish.

Texts 42 and 43

papraccha pärñadäàs tatra
     kva gato bhagavän itaù
ücus taà pärñadäs gopä
     vämanäëòe manohare

påçnigarbho yatra jätas
     tatraiva bhagavän svayam
ity uktä äsuris tasmäd
     asmin aëòe samägataù

     papraccha—asked; pärñadäàù—the associates; tatra—there; kva—where?; gataù—gone; bhagavän—the Lord; itaù—from here; ücuù—said; tam—to him; pärñadäù—the associates; gopä—gopas; vämana—of Lord Vämana; aëòe—in the univesre; manohare—beautiful; påçnigarbhaù—Påçnigarbha; yatra—where; jätaù—born; tatra—there; eva—certainly; bhagavän—the Lord; svayam—Himself; ity—thus; uktä—addressed; äsuriù—Asuri; tasmät—from there; asmin—in this; aëòe—universe; samägataù—came.

     When he asked the Lord's gopa friends there, "Where did the Lord go?" they said, "The Lord went to the beautiful material universe where Vämana and Påçnigarbha appeared." Asuri Muni went at once to that universe.

Text 44

harià hy apaçyan pracalan
     kailäsaà präptavän muniù
tatra sthitaà mahä-devaà
     kåñëa-dhyäna-paräyaëam

     harim—Lord Kåñëa; hy—indeed; apaçyan—not seeing; pracalan—going; kailäsam—to Mount Kailasa; präptavän—went; muniù—the sage; tatra—there; sthitam—situated; mahä-devam—Lord Çiva; kåñëa-dhyäna-paräyaëam—rapt in meditation on Lord Kåñëa.

     Not finding Lord Kåñëa in that universe, the sage went to Mount Kailäsa, where he did find Lord Çiva, who was rapt in meditation on Lord Kåñëa.

Text 45

natvä papraccha tad rätrau
     kinna-cetä mahä-muniù

çré-äsurir uväca 
bhagavan sarva-brahmäëòaà
     mayä dåñöam itas tataù

     natvä—bowing down; papraccha—asked; tat—that; rätrau—night; kinna-cetä—depressed; mahä-muniù—the great sage; çré-äsuriù—Çré Asuri; uväca—said; bhagavan—O Lord; sarva-brahmäëòam—all the universes; mayä—by me; dåñöam—seen; itaù—here; tataù—and there.

     Unhappy at heart, the great sage bowed down before Lord Çiva and spoke. Çré Asuri said: O Lord, I have looked in all the universes . . .

Text 46

ä-vaikuëöhäc ca golokäd
     bhramatä tad-didrkñuëä
kuträpi deva-devasya
     darçanaà na babhüva me
kuträste bhagavän adya
     vada sarva-vidäà vara

     ä-vaikuëöhät—from Vaikuntha; ca—and; golokät—from Goloka; bhramatä—wandering; tad-didrkñuëä—yearning to see Him; kuträpi—somewhere; deva-devasya—of the master of the demigods; darçanam—sight; na—not; babhüva—was; me—of me; kutra—where?; aste—is; bhagavän—the Lord; adya—now; vada—please tell; sarva-vidäà vara—O best of the all-knowing.

 . . . and I went even to Vaikuëöha and Goloka looking for Him, but I could not find the Supreme Lord anywhere. Where is the Lord now? O best of all-knowing philosophers, please tell.

Text 47

çré-mahädeva uväca 
dhanyas tvam äsure brahman
     kåñëa-bhakto 'sy ahaiktukaù
didrkñuëä tvayäyäsaà
     kåtaà vedmi mahä-mune

     çré-mahädeva uväcaÇré Çiva said; dhanyaù—fortunate; tvam—you; äsure—O Asuri; brahman—O brähmaëa; kåñëa-bhaktaù—a devotee of Lord Kåñëa; asi—you are; ahaiktukaù—pure and unmotivated; didrkñuëä—withj a desire to see; tvayä—by you; ayäsam—effort; kåtam—done; vedmi—I know; mahä-mune—O great sage.

     Çré Çiva said: O brähmaëa Asuri, you are fortunate. You are a pure devotee of Lord Kåñëa. O great sage, I know the trouble you have taken to find Lord Kåñëa.

Texts 48 and 49

karmendriyäëéha yathä rasädéàs
     tathä sa-kämä munayaù sukhaà yat
manäì na jänanti janair apekñyaà
     güòhaà paraà nirguëa-lakñaëaà tat

haàsaà munià duùkha-gataà mahodadhau
     yaù sarvato mocayituà gatas tvaram
so 'dyaiva våndävipine sakhé-janaiù
     karoti räsaà rasikeçvaraù svayam

     karma-indriyäni—the working senses; iha—here; yathä—as; rasädéàù—the obejcts, bgeinning with taste, of the senses, tathä—so; sa-kämä—with desire; munayaù—sages; sukham—happiness; yat—what; manän—slightly; na—not; jänanti—know; janaiù—by the people; apekñyam—not seen; güòham—hidden; param—very; nirguëa-lakñaëam—beyond the modes of nature; tat—that; haàsam—Haàsa; munim—Muni; duùkha-gatam—unhappy; mahodadhau—in the great ocean; yaù—who; sarvataù—completely; mocayitum—to rescue; gataù—gone; tvaram—at once; saù—He;. adya—now; eva—indeed; våndävipine—in Våndävana; sakhé-janaiù—with gopé friends; karoti—does; räsam—the rasa dance; rasikeçvaraù—the king of the rasa dance; svayam—Himself.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead, whom the materialistic philosophers cannot enjoy as the working senses cannot enjoy the objects of the knowledge-acquiring senses, and who, being beyond the modes of material nature, cannot be seen by the people in genaral, went to save Haàsa Muni from great troubles in the great ocean. Now Lord Kåñëa has become the king of the räsa dance. Now He is enjoying a räsa dance with many gopés in Våndävana forest.

Text 50

ñaë-mäsiké cädya kåtä niçéthiné
     sva-mäyayä deva-vareëa bho mune
ahaà gamiñyämi tad eva drañöuà
     tvam eva gacchäçu manorathaà yathä

     ñaë-mäsiké—six months long; ca—and; adya—now; kåtä—making; niçéthiné—the middle of the night; sva-mäyayä—by His maya potency; deva-vareëa—by the blessing ofg the Lord; bhaù—O; mune—sage; aham—I; gamiñyämi—will go; tat—that; eva—indeed; drañöum—to see; tvam—you; eva—indeed; gaccha—go; äçu—at once; manoratham—desire; yathä—as.

     By His mäyä potency the Lord has transformed the middle of the night into a period of six months. With the Lord's blessings I will now go there to see that dance. O sage, if you wish, you may also go.
.pa

Chapter Twenty-five
Räsa-kréòä
The Räsa-daïce Pastime

Text 1

evaà vicintya manasä
     çivo väsuriëä saha
tau kåñëa-daåñëärthäya
     jagmatur vraja-maëòalam

     evam—thus; vicintya—considering; manasä—with his heart; çivaù—Lord Çiva; vä—or; äsuriëä—Asuri Muni; saha—with; tau—both; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; daåñëa—the sight; arthäya—for the purpose; jagmatuù—went; vraja-maëòalam—to the circle of Vraja.

     Thinking in this way, Çiva and Asuri went to the circle of Vraja to see Lord Kåñëa.

Text 2

divya-druma-latä-kuïja-
     tolikä-puïja-çobhitam
paçyantau tau divya-bhümià
     kälindé-nikaöe gatau

     divya—splendid; druma—trees; latä—vines; kuïja—groves; tolikä—archways; pu 24ja—filled; çobhitam—beautified; paçyantau—seeing; tau—they; divya-bhümim—splendid transcendental place; kälindé-nikaöe—near the Yamunä; gatau—went.

     Near the Yamunä they went to a splendid transcendental place filled with splendid groves of trees, vines, and archways.

Text 3

goloka-väsinyo naryo
     vetra-hastä mahä-baläù
cakrur balät tan-niñedhaà
     märga-sthä dvära-pälikäù

     goloka-väsinyaù—residing in Goloka; naryaù—women; vetra-hastä—with sticks in their hands; mahä-baläù—very strong; cakruù—did; balät—forcibly; tan-niñedham—forbidding them; märga-sthä—standing on the path; dvära-pälikäù—guarding the entrance.

     Many very powerful, stick-wielding women of Goloka guarded the entrance. Blocking the path, they and forbade them to enter.

Text 4

täv ücatuç cägatau svaù
     kåñëa-darçana-lälasau
täv ähur nåpa-çärdüla
     märga-sthä dvära-pälikäù

     tau ücatuù—they said; ca—and; ägatau—come; svaù—own; kåñëa-darçana-lälasau—yeanring to see Kåñëa; tau—they; ähuù—said; nåpa-çärdüla—O tiger of kings; märga-sthä—standing on the path; dvära-pälikäù—the doorkeepers.

     The two of them said, "Yearning to see Lord Kåñëa, we have come here". O tiger of kings, as they blocked the path, the entrance-guards spoke to them.
     
Text 5

çré-dvära-pälikä ücuù 
sarvato våndakäraëyaà
     koöiçaù koöiço vayam
räsa-rakñäà sadä kurmo
     nyastä kåñëena bho dvijau

     çré-dvära-pälikä ücuù—the gatekeepers said; sarvataù—everywhere; våndakäraëyam—in Våndävana; koöiçaù koöiçaù—in millions and millions; vayam—we; räsa-rakñäm—protecting the rasa dance; sadä—always; kurmaù—do; nyastä—placed; kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; bhaù—O; dvijau—brähmaëas.

     The entrance guards said: There are many millions of millions of us everywhere in Våndävana. Appointed by Lord Kåñëa, we eternally guard the räsa dance.

Text 6

eko 'sti puruñaù kåñëo
     nirjane räsa-maëòale
anyo na yäti rahasi
     gopé-yüthaà vinä kvacit

     ekaù—one; asti—is; puruñaù—male; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; nirjane—secluded; räsa-maëòale—in the rasa-dance circle; anyaù—another; na—not; yäti—goes; rahasi—in secret; gopé-yütham—gopés; vinä—without; kvacit—anywhere.

     In this secluded räsa-dance circle Kåñëa is the only male. Except for Him there are only gopés here.

Text 7

ced didåkñü yuväà tasya
     snänaà mäna-sarovare
kurutaà tatra gopétvaà
     präpyäçu vrajataà muné

     cet—if; didåkñü—with a desire to see; yuväm—you; tasya—of Him; snänam—bath; mäna-sarovare—in mana-sarivara lake; kurutam—you will do; tatra—there; gopétvam—status of being gopés; präpya—attaining; äçu—at once; vrajatam—go; muné—O sages.

     O sages, if you wish to see Lord Kåñëa, then please bath in the Mäna-sarovara lake. In that way you will become gopés, and then you may enter.

Text 8

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktau tau muni-çivau
     snätvä mäna-sarovare
gopétvaà präpya sahasä
     jagmatü räsa-maëòale

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; uktau—addressed; tau—they; muni-çivau—Asuri Muni and Lord çiva; snätvä—bathing; mäna-sarovare—in mana-sarivaras; gopétvam—the status of gopés; präpya—attaining; sahasä—at once; jagmatü—went; räsa-maëòale—to the rasa dance circle.

     Bathing in Mäna-sarovara, and at once becoming gopés, Lord Siva and Asuri Muni went to the circle of the räsa dance.

Text 9

sauvarëa-prakhacit-padma-
     räga-bhümi-manohare
mädhavé-latikä-våndä-
     kadambäcchädite çubhe

     sauvarëa—with gold; prakhacit—paved; padmaräga—rubies; bhümi
—ground; manohare—beautiful; mädhavé-latikä-vånda—with madhavi vines; kadamba—and kadamba trees; äcchädite—shaded; çubhe—beautiful.

     In a beautiful place paved with gold and rubies, shaded by kadamba trees and flowering mädhavé vines, . . .

Text 10

vasanta-candra-kaumudyä
     pradépte sarva-kauçale
yamunä-ratna-sopäna-
     tolikäbhir viräjite

     vasanta-candra-kaumudyä-—with spring moonlight; pradépte—illumined; sarva-kauçale—ausopicious and beautiful; yamunä—to the Yamunä; ratna—jewel; sopäna—stairways; tolikäbhiù—and arches; viräjite—splendid.

 . . . filled with all beauty, splendid with spring moonlight, glorious with arches and jewel stairways leading to the Yamunä, . . .    

Text 11

mayüra-haàsa-datyüha-
     kokilaiù kujite pare
yamunänila-nélaijat-
     taru-pallava-çobhite

     mayüra—peacocks; haàsa—swans; datyüha—datyuhas; kokilaiù—cuckoos; kujite—cooing; pare—on the other shore; yamunä—of the Yamunä; anila—breeze; néla—dark; aijat—going; taru—trees; pallava—leaves; çobhite—beautiful.

 . . . filled with cooing peacocks, swans, datyühas, and cuckoos, fanned by the Yamunä's breezes, beautiful with newly-blossoming trees, . . .

Text 12

sabhä-maëòapa-véthébhiù
     präìgana-stambha-paìktibhiù
patat-patäkair divyäbhaiù
     sauvarëaiù kalaçair våte

     sabhä-maëòapa-véthébhiù—with assembly-houses; präìgana—courtyards; stambha-paìktibhiù—with rows of columns; patat-patäkaiù—with fluttering flags; divyäbhaiù—splendid; sauvarëaiù—golden; kalaçaiù—with domes; våte—filled.

 . . . filled with meeting houses that had courtyards with rows of pillars, splendid fluttering flags, and golden domes, . . .

Text 13

çvetäruëaiù puñpa-saìghaiù
     puñpa-mandira-vartmabhiù
ali-kolähalair vyapte
     väditra-madhura-dhvanau

     çveta—white; aruëaiù—and red; puñpa-saìghaiù—flowers; puñpa-mandira-vartmabhiù—with the path to flower palaces; ali—of bees; kolähalaiù—with a tumult; vyapte—filled; väditra-madhura-dhvanau—with the sweet sounds of musical instruments.

 . . . filled with flower-palaces of red and white blossoms, the buzzing of bees, and sweet sounds of musical instruments, . . .

Text 14

sahasra-dala-padmänäà
     väyunä manda-gäminä
çétalena su-puëyena
     sarvataù surabhé-kåte

     sahasra-dala-padmänäm—thousand petal lotuses; väyunä—with a breeze; manda-gäminä—gentle; çétalena—cool; su-puëyena—very pure; sarvataù—everywhere; surabhé-kåte—scented.

 . . . and fragrant with pure and cooling breezes carrying the scent of thousand-petal lotuses, . . .

Texts 15-20

tasmin nikuïje çré-kåñëaà
     koöi-candra-prakäçayä
padminyä haàsa-gäminyä
     rädhayä samalaìkåtam

stré-ratnair ävåtaà çaçvad
     räsa-maëòala-madhya-gam
koöi-manmatha-lävaëyaà
     çyämasundara-vigraham

vaàçé-dharaà péta-paöaà
     vetra-päëià manoharam
çrévatsäìkaà kaustubhinaà
     vana-mälä-viräjitam

kvaëan-nüpura-maïjéra-
     käïcé-keyüra-bhüñitam
hära-kaìkana-bälärka-
     kuëòala-dvaya-maëòitam

koöi-candra-pratékäça-
     maulinaà nanda-nandanam
däna-dakñaiù kaöäkñaiç ca
     harantaà yoñitäà manaù

düräd apaçyataà räjann
     äsuréçau kåtäïjalé
gopé-janänäà sarveñäà
     paçyatäà nåpa-sattama
natvä çré-kåñëa-pädäbjaà
     ücatur harña-vihvalau

     tasmin—in that; nikuïje—grove; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; koöi-candra-prakäçayä—with the light of ten millions moons; padminyä—like a lotus; haàsa-gäminyä—graceful as a swan; rädhayä—with Rädhä; samalaìkåtam—decorated; stré-ratnaiù—with jewellike women; ävåtam—surrounded; çaçvat—eternally; räsa-maëòala-madhya-gam—in the midde of the rasa dance; koöi-manmatha-lävaëyam—more handsome than ten million kämadevas; çyämasundara-vigraham—whose form is dark and handsome; vaàçé-dharam—holding a flute; péta-paöam—wearing yeellow garments; vetra-päëim—a stick in His hand; manoharam—charming to the heart; çrévatsäìkam—marked with Çrévatsa; kaustubhinam—wearing the Kaustubha gem; vana-mälä-viräjitam—splendid with a forest garland; kvaëan—tinkling; nüpura-ma 24jéra—anklets; käïcé—belts; keyüra—armlet; bhüñitam—decorated; hära—necklace; kaìkana—bracelets; bälärka—the rising sun; kuëòala-dvaya—with earrings; maëòitam—decorated; koöi-candra-pratékäça—splendid as ten million moons; maulinam—wearing a crown; nanda-nandanam—Çré Kåñëa, the son of Nanda Mahäräja; däna-dakñaiù—generous; kaöäkñaiù—with sidelong glances; ca—and; harantam—stealing; yoñitäm—of the women; manaù—the hearts; dürät—from far away; apaçyatam—seeing; räjann—O king; äsuréçau—Asuri and Çiva; kåtä 24jalé—with folded hands; gopé-janänäm—of the gopés; sarveñäm—all; paçyatam—seeing; nåpa-sattama—O best of kings; natvä—bowing; çré-kåñëa-pädäbjam—to Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet; ücatuù—spoke; harña-vihvalau—filled with joy.

 . . . bowing down to the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa, who in that forest grove was splendid as as ten million moons, who was decorated by lotuslike, swan-graceful Çré Rädhä's company, who, surrounded by jewellike women, eternally stayed the middle of the räsa-dance circle, who was handsome as ten million Kämadevas, whose form was dark and handsome, who was dressed in yellow garments, who held a flute and stick in His hand, who bore the mark of Çrévatsa, who was decorated with the Kaustubha gem, who was splendid with a forest garland, who was decorated with tinkling anklets, belt, and armlets, and with necklaces, bracelets, and earrings splendid as two rising suns, who wore a crown splendid as ten million suns, who with generous sidelong glances stole the gopés' hearts, and whom the gopés gazed at from afar, Lord Çiva and Asuri Muni, now overcome with happiness, spoke.

Text 21

dväv ücatuù 
kåñëa kåñëa mahä-yogin
     deva-deva jagat-pate
puëòarékäkña govinda
     garuòa-dhvaja te nämaù

     dvau ücatuù—the two said; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; mahä-yogin—O great yogi; deva-deva—O master of the demiogds; jagat-pate—O master of the universes; puëòaréka—lotus; akña—eyes; govinda—O Govinda; garuòa-dhvaja—who holds the flag of Garuòa; te—to You; nämaù—obeisances.

     The two of them said: O Kåñëa, O Kåñëa, O great yogé, O master of the demigods, O Lord of the universes, O lotus-eyed one, O Govinda, O Lord who carries a flag with the emblem of Garuòa, obeisances to You!

Text 22

janärdana jagannätha
     padmanäbha trivikrama
dämodara håñékeça
     väsudeva namo 'stu te

     janärdana—O savior from miseries; jagannätha—O mastre of the universes; padmanäbha—O lotus-naveled one; trivikrama—O Lord who took three steps; dämodara—O Lord bound at the waist by a rope; håñékeça—O master of the sense; väsudeva—O son of Vasudeva; namaù—obeisances; astu—are; te—to You.

     O savior from miseries, O Lord of the universes, O lotus-naveled one, O Lord who took three steps, O Lord bound at the waist with a rope, O master of the senses, O son of King Vasudeva, obeisances to You!

Text 23

adyaiva deva paripürëatamas tu säkñäd
     bhü-bhüri-bhära-haraëäya satäà çubhäya
präpto 'si nanda-bhavane parataù paras tvaà
     kåtvä hi sarva-nija-lokam açeña-çünyam

     adya—toady; eva—indeed; deva—O Lord; paripürëatamaù—supremely perfe4ct; tu—indeed; säkñät—directly; bhü-bhüri-bhära—the great burden of the earth; haraëäya—to remove; satäm—of the devotees; çubhäya—for the welfare; präptaù—attained; asi—You are; nanda-bhavane—in Nanda's home; parataù—than the greatest; paraù—greater; tvam—You; kåtvä—having done; hi—indeed; sarva-nija-lokam—qll Your planets; açeña-çünyam—completely void.

     O Supreme Personality of Godhead, leaving all Your transcendental abodes and making them devoid of Your presence, You have now come to Nanda's home to remove the earth's great burden and to bring auspiciousness to Your devotees.

Text 24

aàçäàçakäàça-kalayäbhirutäbhirämaà
     äveça-pürëa-nicayäbhir atéva yuktaù
viçvaà bibharñi rasa-räsam alaìkaroñi
     våndävanaà ca paripürëatamaù svayaà tvam

     aàça-aàçaka-aàça-kalayä—with a part of a part of a part of a part; abhiruta—said; abhirämam—delightful; äveça-pürëa-nicayäbhiù—with avesa incvarnations; atéva—greatly; yuktaù—endowed; viçvam—universe; bibharñi—maintain; rasa-räsam—the sweet rasa dance; alaìkaroñi—decorate; våndävanam—Våndävana; ca—and; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—personally; tvam—You.

     You are the original and perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, glorious with incarnations that display a part, a part of a part, or a part of a part of a part of Your power. With Your many empowered inacarnations You maintain the universe. With the sweet räsa dance You decorate the forest of Våndävana.

Text 25

goloka-nätha giriräja-pate pareça
     våndävaneça kåta-nitya-vihära-léla
rädhä-pate vraja-vadhü-jana-géta-kérte
     govinda gokula-pate kila te jayo 'stu

     goloka—of Goloka; nätha—O master; giriräja-pate—O Lord of the king of mountains; pareça—O Supreme Lord; våndävaneça—O Lordf of Våndävana; kåta—done; nitya—eternal; vihära-léla—pastimes; rädhä-pate—O master of Rädhä; vraja-vadhü-jana—by the girls of Vraja; géta—sung; kérte—whose glories; govinda—O Govinda; gokula-pate—O master of Gokula; kila—indeed; te—to You; jayaù—glory; astu—is.

     O master of Goloka, O master of the king of mountains. O supreme master, O master of Våndävana, O enjoyer of eternal pastimes, O master of Rädhä, O master whose glories are sung by the girls of Vraja, O master of Gokula, O Govinda, all glories to You!

Text 26

çréman-nikuïja-latikä-kusumäkaras tvaà
     çré-rädhikä-hådaya-kaëöha-vibhüñaëas tvam
çré-räsa-maëòala-patir vraja-maëòaleço      brahmäëòa-maëòala-mahé-paripälako 'si

     çrémat—beautiful; nikuïja—forest; latikä—vines; kusuma—flowers; äkaraù—form; tvam—You; çré-rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; hådaya—heart; kaëöha—and neck; vibhüñaëaù—ornament; tvam—Yoiu; çré-räsa-maëòala-patiù—the master of the rasa dance circle; vraja-maëòaleçaù—the master if the circle of Vraja; brahmäëòa-maëòala-mahé-paripälakaù—the protector of the universes; asi—You are.

     You are decorated with beautiful flowers taken from Våndävana's vines. You are the ornament Çré Rädhä wears on Her neck and over Her heart. You are the master of the räsa-dance circle. You are the master of the circle of Vraja. You are the protector of the circle of the universes.

Text 27

çré-närada uväca 
tadä prasanno bhagavän
     rädhayä sahito hariù
manda-smito munià präha
     megha-gambhérayä girä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—thyen; prasannaù—pleased; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; rädhayä—Rädhä; sahitaù—with; hariù—Kåñëa; manda-smitaù—gently smiling; munim—to the sage; präha—said; megha-gambhérayä—deep as thunder; girä—with words.

     Çré Närada said: Pleased and gently smiling as He stood by Çré Rädhä's side, with words like thunder Lord Kåñëa spoke to the sage.

Text 28

çré-bhagavän uväca 
çañöi-varña-sahasräëi
     yuvayos tapatos tapaù
mad-darçanaà tena jätaà
     sarvato nairapekñayoù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; çañöi-varña-sahasräëi—sixty-thousand years; yuvayoù—of you both; tapatoù—austerities; tapaù—austerities; mad-darçanam—to see Me; tena—by that; jätam—produced; sarvataù—everywhere; nairapekñayoù—renounced.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Renouncing everything, the two of you performed austerities for sixty-thousand years in order to see Me.

Text 29

niñkiïcano yo çäntaç cä-
     jäta-çatruù sa mat-sakhä
tasmäd yuväbhyäà manasä
     vriyatäm épsito varaù

     niñkiïcanaù—with no material wealth; yaù—one who; çäntaù—peaceful; ca—and; ajäta—not born; çatruù—enemies; sa—he; mat-sakhä—My friend; tasmät—from that; yuväbhyäm—of you both;  manasä—with the heart; vriyatäm—may be chosen; épsitaù—desired; varaù—benediction.

     You do not crave material wealth, you are peaceful, you do not think anyone your enemy, and you are my friends. Therefore, please choose a benediction. Choose whatever your hearts desire.

Text 30

çiväsuré ücatuù 
namo 'stu bhüman yuvayoù padäbje
     sadaiva våndävana-madhya-väsa
na rocate no 'nyam atas tvad-aìghrer
     namo yuväbhyäà hari-rädhikäbhyäm

     çiväsuré ücatuù—Lord Sivaand Asuri Muni said; namaù—obeisances; astu—are; bhüman—O Lord; yuvayoù—of You; padäbje—at the lotus feet; sadä—eternally; eva—indeed; våndävana-madhya-väsa-—O Lord who resides in Våndävana; na—not; rocate—pleases; naù—not; anyam—another; ataù—therefore; tvad-aìghreù—of Your feet; namaù—obeisances; yuväbhyäm—to You both; hari-rädhikäbhyäm—Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa.

     Lord Çiva and Asuri Muni said: O Lord who resides in Våndävana, we eternally offer our obeisances to Your lotus feet. Nothing other than Your lotus feet gives us any happiness. O Çré Çré Rädhä-Kåñëa, we offer our respectful obeisances to You!

Text 31

çré-närada uväca 
tathästu coktvä bhagavän
     våndäraëye manohare
kälindé-nikaöe räjan
     räsa-maëòala-maëòite

nikuïja-pärçve puline
     vaàçévaöa-samépataù
çivo 'pi cäsuri-munir
     nityaà väsaà cakära ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tathästu—so be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying; bhagavän—the Lord; våndäraëye—in Våndävana; manohare—beautiful; kälindé-nikaöe—near the Yamunä; räjan—O king; räsa-maëòala-maëòite—decorated by the circle of the rasa dance; nikuïja-pärçve—in the side of the forest; puline—on the shore; vaàçévaöa-samépataù—near Vamsivata; çivaù—Lord Çiva; api—and; ca—and; äsuri-muniù—Asuri Muni; nityam—eternally; väsam—residence; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     The Lord then said, "So be it." From that moment Lord Çiva and Asuri Muni made their residence there, at Vaàçévaöa, where the forest grove by the Yamunä's shore is decorated with the circle of the räsa dance.

Text 33

atha kåñëo räsa-léläà
     cakre padmäkare vane
patat-sugandhi-rajasi
     gopébhir bhramaräkule

     atha—then; kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; räsa-léläm—rasa dance pastime; cakre—did; padmäkare—in Padmäkara; vane—forest; patat-sugandhi-rajasi—filled with fragrant pollen; gopébhiù—with the gopés; bhramara-äkule—filled with bees.

     Then Lord Çré Kåñëa enjoyed a räsa dance with the gopés in Padmäkara forest, which was filled with buzzing bees and fragrant flower pollen.

Text 34

evaà ñaë-mäsiké ratriù
     kåtä kåñëena maithila
gopénäà räsa-léläyäà
     vyatétä kñaëavat sukhaiù

     evam—thus; ñaë-mäsiké—six months; ratriù—night; kåtä—done; kåñëena—with Kåñëa; maithila—O kin gof Mithilä; gopénäm—of the gopés; räsa-léläyäm—in the rasa pastime; vyatétä—passed; kñaëavat—like a moment; sukhaiù—happily.

     O king of Mithilä, although in truth it lasted for six months, the night Lord Kåñëa enjoyed the räsa dance with the gopés seemed to Them only a single moment of great happiness when it was over.

Text 35

aruëodaya-veläyäà
     sva-gåhän vraja-yoñitaù
yüthé-bhütvä yayü räjan
     sarväù pürëa-manorathäù

     aruëodaya-veläyäm—at sunrise; sva-gåhän—to their own homes; vraja-yoñitaù—the girls of Vraja; yüthé-bhütvä—becoming groups; yayuù—went; räjan—O king; sarväù—all; pürëa—fulfilled; manorathäù—desires.

     At sunrise all the gopés, their desires fulfilled, returned to their homes.

Text 36

çré-nanda-mandiraà säkñät
     präyayau nanda-nandanaù
våñabhänu-puraà prägäd
     våñabhänu-sutä tvaram

     çré-nanda-mandiram—Çré Nanda's palace; säkñät—directly; präyayau—went; nanda-nandanaù—Kåñëa; våñabhänu-puram—to King Våñabhänu's palace; prägät—went; våñabhänu-sutä—Rädhä; tvaram—quickly.

     Lord Kåñëa went to Nanda's palace and Çré Rädhä hurried to King Våñabhänu's palace.

Texts 37 and 38

evaà çré-kåñëacandrasya
     räsäkhyänaà manoharam
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     käma-daà maìgaläyanam

trivargya-daà janänäà tu
     mumukñüëäà su-mukti-dam
mayä tavägre kathitaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     evam—thus; çré-kåñëacandrasya—of Çré Kåñëacandra; räsäkhyänam—named rasa; manoharam—beautiful; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—pure; käma-dam—fulfilling desires; maìgaläyanam—auspicious; trivargya-dam—granting the three goals of life; janänäm—of the people; tu—indeed; mumukñüëäm—of they who desire liberation; su-mukti-dam—giving liberation; mayä—by me; tava—of you; agre—in the presence; kathitam—spoken; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     Thus I have described to You Çré Kåñëacandra's beautiful and sacred räsa dance, which removes all sins, fulfills all desires, brings auspiciousness, gives to the people the three goals of life, and gives to they who yearn for liberation the highest kind of liberation. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Twenty-six
Çaìkhacüòopäkhyänam
The Story of Çaìkhacüòa

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
aghäsurädi-daityänäà
     jyotiù kåñëe samäviçat
çrédämni sakhacüòäsya
     kasmäl lénaà babhüva ha

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; aghäsurädi-daityänäm—of the demons headed by Aghasura; jyotiù—the light; kåñëe—in Kåñëa; samäviçat—entered; çrédämni—in Çrédama; sakhacüòäsya—of sankhacuda; kasmäl—why?; lénam—merging; babhüva—was; ha—indeed.

     The spiritual sparks that emerged from Aghäsura and the other demons entered Lord Kåñëa. Why did the spark of light from Çaìkhacüòa enter Çrédämä?

Text 2

etad vada mahä-buddhe
     tvaà parävara-vittama
aho çré-kåñëacandrasya
     caritaà paramädbhutam

     etat—this; vada—tell; mahä-buddhe—O wise one; tvam—You; parävara-vittama—the best of they who know everything; ahaù—Oh; çré-kåñëacandrasya—of Çré Kåñëa; caritam—the pastimes; paramädbhutam—very wonderful.

     O intelligent one, O best of they who know everything, please describe to me this very wonderful pastime of Lord Kåñëacandra.

Text 3

çré-närada uväca 
purä goloka-våttantaà
     näräyaëa-mukhäc chrutam
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     çåëu räjan mahä-mate

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; purä—previously; goloka-våttantam—story of Goloka; näräyaëa-mukhät—from the mouth of Näräyaëa Åñi; çrutam—heard; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; çåëu—hear; räjan—O king; mahä-mate—noble-hearted.

     Çré Närada said: O noble-hearted king, please hear this story, which describes pastimes that happened in Goloka, and which I heard from the mouth of Näräyaëa Åñi.

Text 4

rädhä çrér virajä bhüç ca
     tisro patnyo 'bhavan hareù
täsäà rädhä priyätéva
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù

     rädhä—Rädhä; çréù—Çré; virajä—Virajä; bhüù—Bhü; ca—and; tisraù—three; patnyaù—wives; abhavan—were; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; täsäm—of them; rädhä—Rädhä; priyätéva—the most dear; çré-kåñëasya—of Lord Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     Rädhä, Çré, Virajä, and Bhü were the four wives of Lord Kåñëa. Of them Rädhä was most dear to Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 5

rädhikä-samayä räjan
     koöi-candra-prakäçayä
kuïje virajayä reme
     ekänte caikadhä prabhuù

     rädhikä-samayä—equal to Rädhä; räjan—O king; koöi-candra-prakäçayä—the splendor of ten million moons; kuïje—in theb forest; virajayä—Viaraj; reme—enjoyed; ekänte—alone; ca—and; ekadhä—once; prabhuù—the Supreme Lord.

     O king, one day in a secluded forest grove the Lord enjoyed pastimes with Virajä, who was splendid as ten million moons and very much like Rädhä.

Text 6

sapatné-sahitaà kåñëaà
     rädhä çrutvä sakhé-mukhät
atéva vimanä jätä
     sapatné-saukhya-duùkhitä

     sapatné-sahitam—with rivalry; kåñëam—Kåñëa; rädhä—Rädhä; çrutvä—hearing; sakhé-mukhät—from a friend's mouth; atéva—very; vimanä—jealous; jätä—bacme; sapatné-saukhya-duùkhitä—unhappy at a rival's happiness.

     When from a friend's mouth She heard that Kåñëa had enjoyed pastimes with Her rival, Rädhä, unhappy at Her rival's happiness, became filled with jealous anger.

Texts 7-9

çata-yojana-vistäraà
     çata-yojanam ürdhva-gam
koty-açviné-samayuktaà
     koöi-sürya-sama-prabham

vicitra-ratna-sauvarëa-
     muktä-däma-vilambitam
patäka-hema-kalaçaiù
     koöibhir maëòitaà ratham

samäruhya sakhénäà sa
     vetra-hastair daçärbudaiù
harià drañöuà jagämäçu
     çré-rädhä bhagavat-priyä

     çata-yojana-vistäram—eight hundred mills long; çata-yojanam—eight hundred miles; ürdhva-gam—high; koty—ten million; açviné—horses; samayuktam—with; koöi-sürya-sama-prabham—splendid as ten million suns; vicitra-ratna-sauvarëa—with wonderful jewels and gold; muktä-däma-vilambitam—with strings of pearls; patäka—flags; hema—gold; kalaçaiù—domes; koöibhiù—with ten million; maëòitam—decorated; ratham—chariot; samäruhya—mounting; sakhénäm—of friends; sa—She; vetra-hastaiù—with a stick in and; daçärbudaiù—with one billion; harim—Kåñëa; drañöum—to see; jagäma—went; äçu—at once; çré-rädhä—Çré Rädhä; bhagavat-priyäKåñëa's beloved.

     Ascending a chariot made of wonderful jewels, gold, and pearls, and decorated with ten million flags and golden domes, clutching a stick, and accompanied by a billion gopé friends, the Lord's beloved, Çré Rädhä, rushed to see Lord Kåñëa. 

Text 10

tan-nikuïje dvära-pälaà
     çrédämänaà mahä-balam
hari-nyastaà samälokya
     taà nibhartsya sakhé-janaiù

     tan-nikuïje—in that forest; dvära-pälam—the guards of the door; çrédämänam—of Çrédama; mahä-balam—great power; hari—by Kåñëa; nyastam—placed; samälokya—seeing; tam—him; nibhartsya—rebuking; sakhé-janaiù—by the gopés.

     Seeing powerful Çrédämä guarding the entrance by Kåñëa's order, Rädhä and Her friends rebuked him with many words.

Text 11

vetraiù santäòya sahasä
     dväri gantuà samudyatä
sakhé-kolähalaà çrutvä
     harir antaradhéyata

     vetraiù—with sticks; santäòya—hitting; sahasä—at once; dväri—at the door; gantum—to go; samudyatä—about; sakhé—of the gopés; kolähalam—commotion; çrutvä—hearing; hariù—Kåñëa; antaradhéyata—disappeared.

     Eager to enter, Rädhä and Her friends began to hit Çrédämä with sticks. Hearing the great commotion the gopés were making, Lord Kåñëa disappeared.

Text 12

rädhä-bhayäc ca virajä
     nadé bhütvävahat tadä
koöi-yojana-mäyäyaà
     goloke sahasä nadé

     rädhä-bhayät—ot of fear of Rädhä; ca—and; virajä—Viarajä; nadé—a river; bhütvä—becoming; avahat—flowed; tadä—then; koöi-yojana-mäyäyam—eighty-million miles; goloke—in Goloka; sahasä—at once; nadé—river.

     Out of fear of Rädhä, Virajä transformed herself into a river that flowed for eighty-million miles around Gokula.

Text 13

sahasä kuëòalé-kåtvä
     çuçubhe 'bdhir ivävanim
ratna-puñpair viciträìgä
     yathoñëiì-mudritä tathä

     sahasä—at once; kuëòalé-kåtvä—encircling; çuçubhe—shone; abdhiù—an ocean; iva—like; avanim—the earth; ratna-puñpaiù—with jewel flowers; viciträìgä—wonderful form; yathoñëiì-mudritä—as if crowned; tathä—then.

     She then encircled Goloka as an ocean encircles a continent. She was glorious as if she were decorated with flowers and jewels and decorated with a crown.

Text 14

harià gataà taà vijïäya
     nadé-bhütaà ca taà tathä
älokya tan-nikuïjaà ca
     sva-kuïjaà rädhikä yayau

     harim—Kåñëa; gatam—gone; tam—Him; vij 24äya—knowing; nadé-bhütam—become a river; ca—and; tam—Him; tathä—so; älokya—seeing; tan-nikuïjam—that forest; ca—and; sva-ku 24jam—own forest; rädhikä—Rädhä; yayau—went.

     Looking at the forest there and the river (that Viarajä had become), and thinking that Lord Kåñëa had gone, Çré Rädhä went to Her own forest grove.

Text 15

atha kåñëo nadé-bhütaà
     virajäà virajämbaräm
sa-vigrahaà cakäräçu
     sva-vareëa nåpeçvara

     atha—then; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; nadé-bhütam—become a river; virajäm—to Viurajä; virajämbaräm—dressed in splendid garments; sa-vigraham—with form; cakära—did; äçu—at once; sva-vareëa—by His blessing; nåpeçvara—O king of kings.

     O king of kings, then Lord Kåñëa transformed Virajä from being a river to being a girl dressed in glittering garments.

Text 16

punar virajayä särdhaà
     virajä-téraje vane
nikuïja-våndakäraëye
     cakre räsaà hariù svayam

     punaù—again; virajayä—Virajä; särdham—with; virajä-téraje—born on the Viraja's shore; vane——in the forest; nikuïja-våndakäraëye—in Våndävana; cakre—did; räsam—rasa dance; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally.

     Then Lord Kåñëa again enjoyed a räsa dance with Virajä in the forest by the Virajä river.

Text 17

virajäyäà sapta sutä
     babhüvuù kåñëa-tejasä
nikuïjaà te hy alaïcakruù
     çiçavo bäla-lélayä

     virajäyäm—in Viaraj; sapta—seven; sutä—sons; babhüvuù—were; kåñëa-tejasä—by Lord Kåñëa's power; nikuïjam—the forest; te—they; hy—indeed; alaïcakruù—ornamented; çiçavaù—boys; bäla-lélayä—with childhood games.

     By Lord's Kåñëa's power seven sons were born to Virajä. With their childhood games they decorated the forest there.

Text 18

ekadä taiù kalir abhül
     laghur jyeñöhaiç ca täòitaù
paläyamäno bhaya-bhån
     mätuù kroòe jagäma ha

     ekadä—one day; taiù—by them; kaliù— a quarrel; abhül—was; laghuù—younger; jyeñöhaiù—elder; ca—and; täòitaù—hit; paläyamänaù—fleeing; bhaya-bhån—frightened; mätuù—of his mother; kroòe—on the lap; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     One day they quarreled. Hit by his elders, the youngest boy fled to his mother's lap.

Text 19

tal-lälanaà samärebhe
     samäçväsya sutaà saté
tadä vai bhagavän säkñät
     tatraiväntaradhéyata

     tal-lälanam—caressing; samärebhe—began; samäçväsya—comforting; sutam—son; saté—pious lady; tadä—then; vai—indeed; bhagavän—the Lord; säkñät—directly; tatra—there; eva—indeed; antaradhéyata—disappeared.

     As the pious lady hugged and consoled her son, Lord Kåñëa suddenly disappeared.

Text 20

ruñä sutaà çaçäpeyaà
     çré-kåñëa-virahäturä
tvaà jalaà bhava durbuddhe
     kåñëa-viccheda-kärakaù

     ruñä—with anger; sutam—to her son; çaçäpa—cursed; iyam—she; çré-kåñëa-viraha—with separation form Çré Kåñëa; äturä—upset; tvam—you; jalam—water; bhava—become; durbuddhe—fool; kåñëa-viccheda-kärakaù—that separated me from Kåñëa.

     Grieving over her separation from Kåñëa, she cursed her son, "Fool that separated me from Kåñëa, become water!"

Text 21

kadäpi taj-jalaà martyä
     na pibantu kadäcana
jyeñöhän chaçäpa vrajata
     medinéà kali-kärakäù

     kadäpi—ever; taj-jalam—thatwater; martyä—human beings; na—not; pibantu—drink; kadäcana—ever; jyeñöhän—elder; çaçäpa—cursed; vrajata—go; mediném—to the earth; kali-kärakäù—making a quarrel.

     "The people will never drink your water." The older sons she cursed with the words, "Quarrelsome children, go to the earth!

Text 22

jala-rüpäù påthag-yänä
     na sametä bhaviñyatha
naimittikaà ca bhavatäà
     melanaà syät sadä laye

     jala-rüpäù—the form of water; påthag-yänä—going; na—not; sametä—met; bhaviñyatha—will be; naimittikam—regular; ca—and; bhavatäm—will be; melanam—meeting; syät—is; sadä—always; laye—in devastation.

     "You will become bodies of water, each in his own place. You will not meet. Only at the time of cosmic devastation will you meet."

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
itthaà te mätå-çäpena
     dharaëéà vai samägataù
priyavrata-rathäìgänäà
     parikhäsu samästhitäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; te—thus; mätå-çäpena—by their mother's curse; dharaëém—to the earth; vai—indeed; samägataù—went; priyavrata-rathäìgänäm—of the chariot wheels of King Priyavrata; parikhäsu—in the ruts; samästhitäù—situated.

     Çré Närada said: In this way, by their mother's curse, they went to the earth. They lived in the ruts left by the wheels of King Priyavrata's chariot.

Text 24

lavaëekñu-surä-sarpir-
     dadhi-dugdha-jalärëaväù
babhüvuù sapta te räjann
     akñobhyäç ca duratyayäù

     lavaëa—salt; ikñu—sugar cane juice; surä—liquor; sarpiù—ghee; dadhi—yogurt; dugdha—milk; jala—and fresh-water; arëaväù—oceans; babhüvuù—became; sapta—seven; te—they; räjann—O king; akñobhyäù—undisturbed; ca—and; duratyayäù—difficult to cross.

     The seven boys became seven peaceful and impaasable oceans of salt-water, sugarcane juice, liquor, ghee, yogurt, milk, and fresh-water.

Text 25

durvigahyäç ca gambhérä
     äyämaà lakña-yojanät
dvi-guëaà dvi-guëaà jätaà
     dvépe dvépe påthak påthak

     durvigahyäù—impassable; ca—and; gambhérä—deep; äyämam—extent; lakña-yojanät—eight-hundred-thousand miles; dvi-guëam—doubled; dvi-guëam—doubled; jätam—manifest; dvépe—island; dvépe—after island; påthak—one; påtha—after the other.

     They were deep and impassable. The first ocean was a eight-hundred-thousand miles across, the next one was double that size, and each succeeding one was double the size of the one before.

Text 26

atha putreñu yäteñu
     putra-snehäti-vihvalä
sva-priyäà täà virahiëéà
     etya kåñëo varaà dadau

     atha—then; putreñu—when her sons; yäteñu—were gone; putra-snehäti-vihvalä—overcomewith love for her sons; sva-priyäm—own beloved; täm—her; virahiëém—unhappy in separation; etya—going; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; varam—benediction; dadau—gave.

     After her sons had departed, she became filled with love for them. Then Lord Kåñëa approached His beloved Virajä, who was unhappy to be separated from her sons. The Lord gave her a benediction.

Text 27

kadä na te me vicchedo
     mayi bhéru bhaviñyati
sva-tejasä sva-puträëäà
     sadä rakñäà kariñyasi

     kadä—when?; na—not; te—of you; me—of me; vicchedaù—separation; mayi—in Me; bhéru—O frightened one; bhaviñyati—will be; sva-tejasä—own power; sva-puträëäm—of sons; sadä—always; rakñäm—protection; kariñyasi—you will do.

     "O frightened one, you will never be separated from Me. Still, with your own power you will always protect your sons."

Text 28

atha rädhäà virahiëéà
     jïätvä kåñëo hariù svayam
çrédämnä saha vaideha
     tan-nikuïjaà samäyayau

     atha—then; rädhäm—to Rädhä; virahiëém—anguished in separation; jïätvä—knowing; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; hariù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—personally; çrédämnä—Çrédama; saha—with; vaideha—O king of Videha; tan-nikuïjam—to Her forest; samäyayau—went.

     O king of Videha, aware that Rädhä was suffering in His separation, Lord Kåñëa went with Çrédämä to Her forest.

Text 29

nikuïja-dväri sampräptaà
     sa-sakhaà präëa-vallabham
vékñya mänavaté bhütvä
     rädhä präha harià vacaù

     nikuïja-dväri—at the entrance to the forest; sampräptam—come; sa-sakham—with friend; präëa-vallabham—more dear than life; vékñya—seeing; mänavaté—jealkous; bhütvä—becoming; rädhä—Rädhä; präha—said; harim—to Kåñëa; vacaù—words.

     Seeing that Kåñëa, who is more to hear than Her own life, had come with His friend to to door of Her forest grove, Rädhä became filled with jealous anger. She spoke the following words to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 30

çré-rädhoväca 
tatraiva gaccha yaträbhüt
     snehas te nutano hare
nadé-bhütä hi virajä
     nado bhavitum arhasi
kuru väsaà tan-nikuïje
     mayä te kià prayojanam

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; tatra—there; eva—indeed; gaccha—go; yatra—where; abhüt—was; snehaù—affection; te—for you; nutanaù—new; hare—O Kåñëa; nadé-bhütä—become a river; hi—indeed; virajä—Virajä; nadaù—a river; bhavitum—to become; arhasi—You deserve; kuru—do; väsam—residence; tan-nikuïje—in this forest; mayä—with Me; te—for You; kim—what?; prayojanam—is the need.

     Çré Rädhä said: O Kåñëa, go where Your love is. Virajä has become a river. You become a river also. Why would You want to stay with Me in this forest?

Text 31

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvätha bhagaväàs
     tan-nikuïjaà jagäma ha
çré-kåñëa-mitraù çrédämä
     rädhäà präha ruñä vacaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvätha—hearing; bhagavän——the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tan-nikuïjam—to that forest; jagäma—went; ha—indeed; çré-kåñëa-mitraù—Çré Kåñëa's friend; çrédämä—Çrédama; rädhäm—to Rädhä; präha—said; ruñä—with anger; vacaù—words.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these words, Lord Kåñëa went to Virajä's forest. Then Kåñëa's friend Çrédämä angrily spoke to Rädhä.

Text 32

çré-çrédämoväca 
paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     golokeço viräjate

     çré-çrédämä uväca—Çré Çrédama said; paripürëatamaù säkñät—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—Lord; svayam—Himself; asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patiù—the master of countless universes; golokeçaù—the master of Goloke; viräjate—is splendidly manifested.

     Çré Çrédämä said: Çré Kåñëa is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is the master of countless universes. He is the master of Goloka.

Text 33

tvädåçiù koöiçaù çaktiù
     kartuà çaktaù parät paraù
na vinindasi rädhe tvaà
     mänaà mä kuru mä kuru

     tvädåçiù—of Him; koöiçaù—many millions; çaktiù—potencies; kartum—to do; çaktaù—able; parät—than the greatest; paraù—greater; na—not; vinindasi—You criticize; rädhe—O Rädhä; tvam—You; mänam—jealous anger; mä—don't; kuru—do; mä—don't; kuru—do.

     He has many millions of transcendental potencies. He can do whatever He likes. He is greater than the greatest. O Rädhä, please don't, don't criticize Him.

Text 34

çré-rädhoväca 
he müòha pitaraà stutvä
     mätaraà mäà vinindasi
rakñaso bhava durbuddhe
     golokäc ca bahir bhava

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; he—O; müòha—fool; pitaram—father; stutvä—praise; mätaram—mother; mäm—Me; vinindasi—criticize; rakñasaù—a demon; bhava—become; durbuddhe—fool; golokäc—from Goloka; ca—and; bahiù—outside; bhava—be.

     Çré Rädhä said: O fool, you praise your father and criticize Me, your mother. Fool, leave Goloka and become a demon!

Texts 35 and 36

çré-çrédämoväca 
anukülena kåñëena
     jätaà mänaà çubhe tava
tasmäd bhuvi parät kåñëät
     paripürëatamät prabhoù

çata-varñaà te viyogo
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     çré-çrédämä uväca—Çré Çrédama said; anukülena—favorable; kåñëena—by Kåñëa; jätam—born; mänam—jealous anger; çubhe—O beautiful one; tava—of You; tasmät—therefore; bhuvi—on the earth; parät—supreme; kåñëät—from Kåñëa; paripürëatamät prabhoù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çata-varñam—for a hundred years; te—of You; viyogaù—separation; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Çré Çrédämä said: O beautiful one, even though Lord Kåñëa was kind to You, still You were angry and jealous. Therefore You will go to the earth and for a hundred years be separated from Çré Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 37

çré-närada uväca 
evaà parasparaà çäpät
     sva-kåtäd bhaya-bhétayoù
atéva cintäà gatayor
     äviräsét svayaà prabhuù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; parasparam—each other; çäpät—from the cursing; sva-kåtät—done themselves; bhaya-bhétayoù—frightened; atéva—very; cintäm—anxiety; gatayoù—attained; äviräsét—appeared; svayam—personally; prabhuù—the Lord.

     Çré Närada said: When they had thus cursed each other they became anxious and frightened. At that moment the Lord appeared there.

Text 38

çré-bhagavän uväca 
vacanaà vai sva-nigamaà
     düré-kartuà kñamo 'smy aham
bhaktänäà vacanaà rädhe
     düré-kartuà na ca kñamaù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; vacanam—words; vai—indeed; sva-nigamam—spoken by Me; düré-kartum—to put far away; kñamaù—able; asmi—I am; aham—I; bhaktänäm—of the devotees; vacanam—words; rädhe—O Rädhä; düré-kartum—to put far away; na—not; ca—and; kñamaù—able.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O Rädhä, I have the power to negate My own words and throw them far away, but I do not have the power to negate and throw away the words of My devotees.

Text 39

mä çocaà kuru kalyäëi
     varaà me çåëu rädhike
mäsaà mäsaà viyogänte
     darçanaà me bhaviñyati

     mä—don't; çocam—lament; kuru—do; kalyäëi—O beautiful one; varam—benediction; me—of Me; çåëu—hear; rädhike—O Rädhä; mäsam—month; mäsam—after month; viyogänte—at the end of the period of separation; darçanam—sight; me—of Me; bhaviñyati—will be.

     O beautiful one, don't lament. O Rädhä, please hear the blessing I give to You: After many months, when the period of Our separation is over, You will see Me again.

Text 40

bhuvo bhärävatäräya
     kalpe väräha-samjïake
bhaktänäà darçanaà dätuà
     gamiñyämi tvayä saha

     bhuvaù—of the earth; bhära—of the burden; avatäräya—for removal; kalpe—in the kalpa; väräha-samjïake—named Varaha; bhaktänäm—of the devotees; darçanam—the sight; dätum—to give; gamiñyämi—I will go; tvayä—You; saha—with.

     At the time of the Varäha-kalpa, I will go with You to the earth to relieve the earth's burden and allow the devotees to see Me.

Text 41

çrédäman chåëu me väkyaà
     aàçena tv asuro bhava
vaivasvatäntare räse
     helanaà me kariñyasi

     çrédäman—O Çrédama; chåëu—hear; me—My; väkyam—words; aàçena—with a part; tv—indeed; asuraù—a demon; bhava—become; vaivasvatäntare—in the Vaivasvata-manvantara; räse—in the rasa dance; helanam—fight; me—with Me; kariñyasi—will be.

     O Çrédämä, hear My words. By a partial expansion of yourself you will become a demon. During the Vaivasvata-manvantara you will fight with Me.

Text 42

mad-dhastena ca te måtyur
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù
punaù sva-vigrahaà pürvaà
     präpsyasi tvaà varän mama

     mad-hastena—by My hand; ca—and; te—of you; måtyuù—the death; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; punaù—again; sva-vigraham—own form; pürvam—as before; präpsyasi—you will attain; tvam—you; varän—by the benediction; mama—My.

     You will then die by My hand. Of this there is no doubt. By My blessings You will again attain the form you had before.

Text 43

çré-närada uväca 
evaà çäpena çrédämä
     pura puëyajanälaye
sudhanasya gåhe janma
     lebhe räjan mahä-tapaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; çäpena—by the curse; çrédämä—Çrédama; pura—before; puëyajanälaye—in the abode of the yaksas; sudhanasya—of Sudhana; gåhe—in the home; janma—birth; lebhe—attained; räjan—O king; mahä-tapaù—very austere.

     Çré Närada said: O austere king, because of this curse Çrédämä took birth among the yakñas in the home of Sudhana.

Text 44

çaìkhacüòa iti khyäto
     dhanadänucaro 'bhavat
tasmäc chrédämni taj-jyotir
     lénaà jätaà videha-räö

     çaìkhacüòa—Çaìkhacüòa; iti—thus; khyätaù—known; dhanadänucaraù—a follower of Kuvera; abhavat—became; tasmäc—from that; çrédämni—into Çrédama; taj-jyotiù—his light; lénam—entrance; jätam—manifested; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     He was named Çaìkhacüòa and he became a follower of Kuvera. O king of Videha that is why the spark of light from Çaìkhacüòa entered the body of Çrédämä.

Text 45

svätmäramo lélayä sarva-käryaà
     svasmin dhämni hy advitéyaù karoti
yaù sarveçaù sarva-rüpo mahätmä
     citraà nedaà naumi kåñëäya tasmäi

     svätmäramaù—happy in the self; lélayä—by pastimes; sarva-käryam—own activity; svasmin—in His own; dhämni—abode; hy—indeed; advitéyaù—without a second; karoti—does; yaù—who; sarveçaù—the Lord of all; sarva-rüpaù—who has all forms; mahätmä—the Supreme Lord; citram—wonder; na—not; idaàthis; naumi—glorify; kåñëäya—Çré Kåñëa; tasmäi—Him.

     I glorify Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead who is one without a second, for whom nothing is surprising, who has the power to assume any form, who is self-satisfied, who enjoys transcendental pastimes, and who stays in His own abode.

Text 46

idaà mayä te kathitaà manoharaà
     vaideha våndävana-khaëòam agrataù
çåëoti caitac caritaà naro varaù
     paraà padaà puëyatamaà prayäti saù

     idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; manoharam—beautiful; vaideha—O king of Videha; våndävana-khaëòam—Våndävana-khaëòa; agrataù—before; çåëoti—hears; ca—and; etat—this; caritam—pastime; naraù—person; varaù—best; param—supreme; padam—abode; puëyatamam—most sacred; prayäti—attains; saù—he.

     O king of Videha, thus I have spoken to you the beautiful Våndävana-khaëòa. A person who hears these pastimes attains the most pure and sacred supreme transcendental abode.

Canto Three

Chapter One
Çré Giriräja-püjä-vidhi
The Worship of Çré Giriräja

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca

kathaà dadhära bhagavän
     girià govardhanaà varam
ucchiléndhraà yathä bälo
     hastenaikena lélayä

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; katham—why?; dadhära—lifted; bhagavän—the Lord; girim—Hill; govardhanam—Govardhana; varam—best; ucchiléndhram—a mushroom; yathä—as; bälaù—achild; hastenaikena—with one hand; lélayä—playfully.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Why did Lord Kåñëa lift Govardhana Hill as a child playfully lifts a mushroom.

Text 2

paripürëatamasyäsya
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù
vadaitac caritaà divyaà
     adbhutaà muni-sattama

     paripürëatamasya—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; asya—of Him; çré-kåñëasya—Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme; vada—please tell; etat—that; caritam—pastime; divyam—transcendental and glorious; adbhutam—wonderful; muni-sattama—O best of sages.

     O best of sages, please tell that wonderful and glorious transcendental pastime of Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 3

çré-närada uväca

varñikaà hi karaà räjïe
     yathä çakräya vai tathä
balià dadu prävåd-ante
     gopäù sarve kåñévalaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; varñikam—annual; hi—indeed; karam—tribute; räjïe—to the king; yathä—as; çakräya—to Indra; vai—indeed; tathä—so; balim—offering; daduù—gave; prävåd-ante—at thne end of the monsoon season; gopäù—the gopas; sarve—all; kåñévalaù—farmers.

     Çré Närada said: As citizens pay an annual tax to their king, so the gopas, farmers all, at the end of each monsoon season offered a tribute to Indra. 

Text 4

mahendra-yäga-sambhära-
     cayaà dåñövaikadä hariù
nandaà papraccha sadasi
     ballavänäà ca çåëvatäm

     mahendra-yäga-sambhära-cayam—the arrangements for the indra-yajïa; dåñöva—seeing; ekadä—one day; hariù—Kåñëa; nandam—to Nanda; papraccha—asked; sadasi—in the assmbly; ballavänäm—of gopas; ca—and; çåëvatäm—listening.

     Noticing the arrangements for the indra-yajï, as the gopas listened, Kåñëa asked a question of King Nanda.

Text 5

çré-bhagavän uväca

çakrasya püjanaà hy etat
     kià phalaà cäsya vidyate
laukikaà vä vadanty etad
     athavä para-laukikam

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; çakrasya—of Indra; püjanam—worship; hy—indeed; etat—this; kim—what?; phalam—result; ca—and; asya—of this; vidyate—is; laukikam—of the material world; vä—or; vadanty—say; etat—this; athavä—or; para-laukikam—beyond the material world.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: What is the result of this worship of Indra? Do they say it brings a material result or a spiritual result?

Text 6

çré-nanda uväca

çakrasya püjanaà hy etad
     bhukti-mukti-karaà param
etad vinä naro bhümau
     jäyate na sukhé kvacit

     çré-nandaù uväca—Çré Nanda said; çakrasya—of Indra; püjanam—worship; hy—indeed; etat—this; bhukti-mukti-karam—gives sense gratification and liberation; param—further; etat—this; vinä—without; naraù—a person; bhümau—on the earth; jäyate—is born; na—not; sukhé—happi; kvacit—at all.

     Çré Nanda said: Worship of Indra brings both sense gratification and liberation. Without it a person cannot be happy in this world.

Text 7

çré-bhagavän uväca

çakrädayo deva-gaëäç ca sarvato
     bhuïjanti ye svarga-sukhaà sva-karmabhiù
viçanti te martya-padaà çubha-kñaye
     tat-sevanaà viddhi na mukti-käraëam

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; çakrädayaù—of Indra; deva-gaëäç—the demigods; ca—and; sarvataù—in all respewcts; bhuïjanti—enjoy; ye—who; svarga-sukham—heavenly happiness; sva-karmabhiù—by their own karma; viçanti—enter; te—they; martya-padam—the world of human beings; çubha—of good karma; kñaye—on the exhaustion; tat-sevanam—that service; viddhi—know; na—not; mukti-käraëam—the cause of liberation.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Indra and the other demigods enjoy living in Svargaloka because of their past karma. When their good karma is exhausted they again enter the world of humans. Please understand that worshiping them does not bring liberation.

Text 8

bhayaà bhaved vai parameñöhino yato
     värtä tu ka kau kila tat-kåtätmanäm
tasmät paraà kälam anantam eva hi
     sarvaà baliñöhaà su-budhä viduù pare

     bhayam—fear; bhavet—is; vai—indeed; parameñöhinaù—of Brahmä; yataù—because; värtä—message; tu—indeed; ka—what?; kau—on the earth; kila—indeed; tat-kåtätmanäm—of they who have done that; tasmät—from that; param—greater; kälam—time; anantam—endless; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; sarvam—all; baliñöham—strongest; su-budhä—very wise; viduù—know; pare—others.

     Even the demigod Brahmä is afraid of that, so what may be said of fruitive workers on the earth? They are are actually wise say that endless time is the most powerful, the supreme. 

Text 9

tatas tam äçritya su-karmabhiù paraà
     bhajed dharià yajïä-patià sureçvaram
viçrjya sarvaà manasä kåteù phalaà
     vrajet paraà mokñam asau na cänyathä

     tataù—then; tam—him; äçritya—taking shelter; su-karmabhiù—by karma; param—suopreme; bhajet—worship; dharim—Lord Hari; yajïä-patim—the master of sacrifices; sureçvaram—the master of the demigods; viçrjya—abandoning; sarvam—all; manasä—by the mind; kåteù—done; phalam—result; vrajet—obtains; param—ultimate; mokñam—liberation; asau—he; na—not; ca—and; anyathä—otherwise.

     With all their heart renouncing all material pious results, the wise take shelter of the Supreme Personality of Godhead and worship Him with the best of pious deeds. They, and not others, attain final liberation.

Text 10

go-vipra-sädhv-agni-suräù çrutis tathä
     dharmaç ca yajïädhipater vibhütayaù
dhiñëyeñu caiteñu harià bhajanti ye
     sa tv ihämutra sukhaà vrajanti te

     gaù—cows; vipra—brähmaëas; sädhu—saintly persons; agni—fire-gods; suräù—demigods; çrutiù—Vedas; tathä—so; dharmaç—religion; ca—and; yajïädhipateù—of the Lord of sacrifices; vibhütayaù—potencies; dhiñëyeñu—in places; ca—and; eteñu—these; harim—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhajanti—worship; ye—who; sa—and; tu—indeed; iha—here; amutra—in the next life; sukham—happiness; vrajanti—attain; te—they.

     The cows, saintly persons, fire-gods, demigods, Vedas, and principles of religion are all potencies of Lord Hari, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. They who, instead of worshiping the demigods, worship Lord Hari, attain happiness in this life and the next.

Text 11

samutthito 'sau hari-vakñaso girir
     govardhano näma giréndra-räja-räö
samägato hy atra pulastya-tejasä
     yad-darçanäj janma punar na vidyate

     samutthitaù—born; asau—it; hari—of Lord Kåñëa's; vakñasaù—chest; girir govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; näma—named; giréndra—the king of moutnains; räja-räö—the king of the king; samägataù—came; hy—indeed; atra—here; pulastya-tejasä—by the power of Pulastya Muni; yad-darçanät—by seeing it; janma—birth; punaù—again; na—not; vidyate—is.

     The hill named Govardhana is the king of the kings of the kings of mountains. It was born from Lord Hari's own chest. It has come here by the power of Pulastya Muni. By seeing it one becomes free from having to take birth again in this world. 
Text 12

sampüjya go-vipra-surän mahädraye
     dätavyam adyaiva paraà hy upäyanam
eña priyo me makha-räja eva hi
     na ced yathecchästi tathä kuru vraja

     sampüjya—worshiping; go-vipra-surän—the cows, brähmaëas, and demigods; mahädraye—to the great hill; dätavyam—should be given; adya—now; eva—indeed; param—great; hy—indeed; upäyanam—method; eña—this; priyaù—dear; me—to Me; makha-räja—the king of sacrifices; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; na—not; cet—if; yathä—as; icchä—desire; asti—is; tathä—so; kuru—do; vraja—go.

     First worship the cows, brähmaëas, and demigods, and then make a great offering to Govardhana Hill. That offering is the king of yajïas and it is very dear to Me. If you do not desire to make that offering, then do whatever you wish.

Text 13

çré-närada uväca

teñäà madhye 'tha sannando
     gopo våddho 'ti-néti-vit
ati-prasannaù çré-kåñëaà
     aha nandasya çåëvataù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; teñäm—of them; madhye—in the midst; atha—then; sannandaù—Sannanda; gopaù—gopa; våddhaù—elderly; ati-néti-vit—learned in the principles of proper conduct; ati-prasannaù—very happy; çré-kåñëam—to Çré Kåñëa; aha—said; nandasya—of Nanda; çåëvataù—listening.

     Çré Närada said: Among them the elderly gopa Sannanda, who throughly knew the real principles of religion, became very pleased. As bewildered Nanda listened, Sannanda spoke to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 14

çré-sannanda uväca

he nanda-süno he täta
     tvaà säkñäj jïäna-çevadhiù
kartavyä kena vidhinä
     püjädrer vada tattvataù

     çré-sannanda uväca—Çré Sannanda said; he—O; nanda-sünaù—son of Nanda; he—O; täta—dear one; tvam—You; säkñäj—directly; jïäna—of knowledge; çevadhiù—the treasure; kartavyä—should be done; kena—by what?; vidhinä—method of worship; püjä—the worship; adreù—of the hill; vada—please tell; tattvataù—in truth.

     Çré Sannanda said: Dear son of Nanda, You are wealthy with a great treasury of transcendental knowledge. How should the hill be worshiped? Please truthfully tell.

Text 15

çré-bhagavän uväca

älipya go-mayenäpi
     giri-räja-bhuvaà hy adhaù
dhåtvätha sarva-sambhäraà
     bhakti-yogo jitendriyaù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; älipya—anointing; go-mayena—with cow-dung; api—even; giri-räja-bhuvam—the ground of the king of mountains; hy—indeed; adhaù—beneath; dhåtvätha—accepting; sarva-sambhäram—all ingredients; bhakti-yogaù—devotional service; jita—conquered; indriyaù—the senses.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: A person who controls his senses and engages in devotional service should collect the ingredients for the worship, anoint Govardhana Hill with cow-dung, . . .

Text 16

sahasra-çérña-mantreëä-
     draye snänaà ca kärayet
gaìgä-jalena yamunä-
     jalenäpi dvijaiù saha

     sahasra-çérña-mantreëa—with the mantra for the thousand-headed Puruña; adraye—the hill; snänam—bathing; ca—and; kärayet—should do; gaìgä—Gaìgä; jalena—with water; yamunä—Yamunä; jalenäpi—with water; dvijaiù—brähmaëas; saha—with.

 . . . and, as he chants the mantras for the thousand-headed Puruña, with other brähmaëas bathe the hill with Gaìgä water and Yamunä water.    

Text 17

çukla-go-dugdha-dhäräbhis
     tataù païcämåtair girim
snäpayitvä gandha-puñpaiù
     punaù kåñëä-jalena vai

     çukla—white; gaù—cows'; dugdha—milk; dhäräbhiù—with streams; tataù—then; païcämåtaiù—with pancamrta; girim—the hill; snäpayitvä—bathing; gandha-puñpaiù—wioth fragrant flowers; punaù—again; kåñëä-jalena—with Yamunä water; vai—indeed.

     Then he should bathe the hill with streams of white milk, païämåta, fragrant flowers, and then Yamunä water again.

Text 18

vastraà divyaà ca naivedyaà
     äsanaà sarvato 'dhikam
mälälaìkära-nicayaà
     dattvä dépävalià paräm

     vastram—garments; divyam—splendid; ca—and; naivedyam—food; äsanam—a seat; sarvataù—than all; adhikam—better; mälä—garlands; alaìkära—ornaments; nicayam—many; dattvä—giving; dépävalim—a series of lamps; paräm—great.

     Then he should offer splendid garments, food, a great throne, many garlands and ornaments, and many lamps.

Text 19

tataù pradakñiëäà kuryän
     namaskuryät tataù param
kåtäïjali-puöo bhütvä
     tv idam evam udérayet

     tataù—then; pradakñiëäm—circumambulation; kuryän—should do; namaskuryät—offer obeisances; tataù—then; param—then; kåtäïjali-puöaù—with folded hands; bhütvä—becoming; tv—indeed; idam—this; evam—thus; udérayet—should recite.

     Then he should circumambulate the hill, offer obeisances, and with folded hands recite this mantra:

Text 20

namo våndävanäìkäya
     tubhyaà goloka-mauline
pürëa-brahmätapaträya
     namo govardhanäya ca

     namaù—obeisances; våndävanaìkäya—to the lap of Våndävana; tubhyam—to You; goloka-mauline—the crowen of Goloka; pürëa-brahma—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; atapaträya—the umbrella; namaù—obeisances; govardhanäya—to Govardhana Hill; ca—and.

     Obeisances to you, who are Goloka's crown and the lap where Våndävana forest grows! Obeisances to Govardhana Hill, the Supreme Personality of Godhead's parasol!

Text 21

puñpäïjalià tataù kuryän
     néräjanam ataù param
ghaëöä-kaàsya-mådaìgädyair
     väditrair madhura-svanaiù

     puñpa—of flowers; aïjalim—handful; tataù—then; kuryän—should do; néräjanam—arati; ataù param—then; ghaëöä-kaàsya—karatals; mådaìga—mrdangas; ädyaiù—beginning with; väditraiù—with musical instruments; madhura-svanaiù—with sweet sounds.

     Then he should offer a handful of flowers and then, as mådaìgas, karatälas and other musical instruments make sweet sounds, he should offer ärati to Govardhana Hill.

Text 22

vedäham etaà mantreëa
     varña-läjaiù samäcaret
tat-samépe cänna-küöaà
     kuryäc chraddhä-samanvitaù

     veda—know; aham—I; etam—this; mantreëa—with mantra; varña-läjaiù—with a shower of grains; samäcaret—should worship; tat-samépe—near it; ca—and; anna—of food; küöam—a hill; kuryäc—should do; chraddhä-samanvitaù—with faith.

     Then he should chant the mantra that begins with  vedäham", and then he should throw a shower of grains. In this way he should worship the hill. Then with great faith he should place a hill of food near Govardhana Hill.

     Note: The mantra here is Çré Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 3.8:

vedäham etaà puruñaà mahantam
     äditya-varëaà tamasaù purastät
tam eva viditväti-måtyum eti
     nänyaù panthä vidyate 'yanäya

     "I know that Supreme Personality of Godhead who is transcendental to all material conceptions of darkness. Only he who knows Him can transcend the bonds of birth and death. There is no way for liberation other than this knowledge of the Supreme Person."*

Text 23

kacolänäà catuù-çañöi-
     païca-paìkti-samanvitam
tulasé-dala-misraiç ca
     çré-gaìgä-yamunä-jalaiù

     kacolänäm—of cups; catuù-çañöi-païca-paìkti-samanvitam—with rows of four, six and five; tulasé-dala-misraiç—mixed with tulasé leaves; ca—and; çré-gaìgä-yamunä-jalaiù—with Gaìgä and Yamunä water.

     Then he should offer four, six, and five cups of Gaìgä and Yamunä water mixed with tulasé leaves.

Text 24

ñaö-païcäçattamair bhägair
     kuryät seväà samähitaù
tato 'gnén brähmaëän püjya
     gäù surän gandha-puñpakaiù

     ñaö-païcäçattamaiù—with fifty-six; bhägaiù—kinds; kuryät—should do; seväm—service; samähitaù—with a peaceful heart; tataù—then; agnén—the fire-gods; brähmaëän—the brähmaëas; püjya—worshipinf; gäù—the cows; surän—the demigods; gandha-puñpakaiù—with fragrant flowers.

     Then, with a peaceful heart, he should serve Govardhana Hill by offering it a feast of fifty-six kinds of food. Then with fragrant flowers he should worship the fire-gods, brähmaëas, cows, and demigods.

Text 25

bhojayitvä dvija-varän
     saugandhair miñöa-bhojanaiù
anyebhyaç cäçvapäkebhyo
     dadyäd bhojanam uttamam

     bhojayitvä—after feeding; dvija-varän—the brähmaëa; saugandhaiù—with fragrant; miñöa-bhojanaiù—delicious food; anyebhyaç—others; ca—and; ä-çvapäkebhyaù—down to the dogeaters; dadyät—should give; bhojanam—food; uttamam—the best.

     After feeding the exalted brähmaëas with fragrant and delicious foods, he should also give excellent foods to the others, even down to the dogeaters.

Text 26

gopé-gopäla-våndaiç ca
     gaväà nåtyaà ca kärayet
maìgalair jaya-çabdaiç ca
     kuryäd govardhanotsavam

     gopé-gopäla-våndaiù—by the gopas and gopés; ca—and; gaväm—of the cows; nåtyam—dancing; ca—and; kärayet—should make; maìgalaiù—auspicious; jaya—victory; çabdaiù—with sounds; ca—and; kuryät—should do; govardhana—for Govardhana Hill; utsavam—a festival.

     Then he should have the gopas and gopés dance among the cows and call out "Victory!" In this way he should perform a festival to worship Govardhana Hill.

Text 27

yatra govardhanäbhävas
     tatra püjä-vidhià çåëu
go-mayair vardhanaà kuryät
     tad-äkäraà paronnatam

     yatra—where; govardhana—Govardhana Hill; abhävaù—is not; tatra—there; püjä-vidhim—the method of worship; çåëu—hear; go-mayaiù—with cow-dung; vardhanam—increased; kuryät—should do; tad-äkäram—the form of Govardhana Hill; para-unnatam—lofty.

     Now please hear how this worship should be performed when one is not near Govardhana Hill. One should make from cow-dung a model of Govardhana Hill.

Text 28

puñpa-vyühair latä-jälair
     éñikäbhiù samanvitaù
püjanéyaù sadä martyair
     girir govardhano bhuvi

     puñpa-vyühaiù—with many flowers; latä-jälaiù—with a network of vines; éñikäbhiù—with grass; samanvitaù—with; püjanéyaù—the object of worship; sadä—always; martyaiù—by human beings; giriù govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; bhuvi—on the earth.

     Human beings on this earth should decorate thet model with many flowers, blades of grass, and a network of vines, and regularly offer worship to it. 

Text 29

çilä-samänaà puraöaà
     kñiptvädrau tac-chiläà nayet
gåhëéyäd yo vinä svarëaà
     sa mahä-rauravaà vrajet

     çilä-samänam—nuggets; puraöam—gold; kñiptvä—ignoring; adrau—on the hill; tac-chiläm—the stone; nayet—takes; gåhëéyät—may take; yaù—who; vinä—without; svarëam—gold; sa—he; mahä-rauravam—to a great hell; vrajet—goes.

     A person who has a mountain of gold but does not use it to worship a stone he has taken from Govardhana Hill, goes to a terrible hell.

Text 30

çälagrämasya devasya
     sevanaà kärayet sadä
pätakaà na spåçet taà vai
     padma-patraà yathä jalam

     çälagrämasya—of Çälagräma; devasya—of the Lord; sevanam—service; kärayet—should do; sadä—regularly; pätakam—to hell; na—not; spåçet—may touch; tam—him; vai—indeed; padma—lotus; patram—leaf; yathä—as; jalam—water.

     A person who regularly worships the Lord's form as Çälagräma-çilä is not touched by hell as a lotus leaf is not touched by water.

Text 31

giri-räja-çilä-seväà
     yaù karoti dvijottamaù
sapta-dvépa-mahi-térthä-
     vagäha-phalam eti saù

     giri-räja—of Govardhana Hill; çilä—stone; seväm—service; yaù—one who; karoti—does; dvijottamaù—the best of brähmaëas; sapta-dvépa—of the seven continents; mahi-tértha—in the great holy places; avagäha—of bathing; phalam—the result; eti—attains; saù—he.

     An exalted brähmaëa who reularly serves a stone from Govardhana Hill attains the result of having bathed in all the holy rivers and lakes in the seven worlds.

Text 32

giri-räja-mahä-püjäà
     varñe varñe karoti yaù
iha sarva-sukhaà bhuktvä-
     mutra mokñaà prayäti saù

     giri-räja—of Govardhana Hill; mahä—great; püjäm—worship; varñe—year; varñe—after year; karoti—does; yaù—who; iha—here; sarva-sukham—all happiness; bhuktvä-—enjoying; amutra—in the next life; mokñam—liberation; prayäti—attains; saù—he.

     A person who year after year elaborately worships Govardhana Hill attains all happiness in this life and liberation in the next.
.pa

Chapter Two
Çré Giriräja-mahotsava
The Great Festival of Çré Giriräja

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvä vaco nanda-sutasya säkñäc
     chré-nanda-sannanda-varä vrajeçäù
su-vismitäù pürva-kåtaà vihäya
     pracakrire çré-giriräja-püjäm

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—the words; nanda-sutasya—of Nanda's son; säkñäc—directly; çré-nanda-sannanda-varä—Nanda and Sannanda; vrajeçäù—the rulers of Vraja; su-vismitäù—struck with wonder; pürva-kåtam—previously done; vihäya—placing; pracakrire—did; çré-giriräja-püjam—the worship of Govardhana Hill.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing Çré Kåñëa's words, Nanda, Sannanda, and the other rulers of Vraja were filled with wonder. Abandoning what they had done, they performed the worship of Govardhana Hill.

Text 2

nitvä balén maithila nanda-räjaù
     sutau samänéya ca räma-kåñëau
yaçodayä çré-giri-püjanärthaà
     samutsuko garga-yutaù prasannaù

     nitvä—taking; balén—offerings; maithila—O king of Mithilä; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; sutau—sons; samänéya—bringing; ca—and; räma—Balaräma; kåñëau—and Kåñëa; yaçodayä—with Yaçodä; çré-giri-püjanärtham—to worship Govardhana Hill; samutsukaù—eager; garga-yutaù—with Garga Muni; prasannaù—happy.

     O king of Mithilä, taking many offerings, King Nanda, Yaçodä, their two sons Kåñëa and Balaräma, and Garga Muni, all eager and joyful, went to worship Govardhana Hill.

Text 3

tvaraà samäruhya mahonnataà gajaà
     vicitra-varëaà dhåta-hema-çåìkhalam
govardhanäntaà prayayau gaväà gaëaiù
     çarad-dhanaiù çakra iva priyä-yutaù

     tvaram—atb once; samäruhya—mounting; mahonnatam—a tall; gajam—elephant; vicitra-varëam—wonderfully colored; dhåta—wearing; hema—golden; çåìkhalam—shackles; govardhanäntam—the edge of Govardhana Hill; prayayau—approached; gaväm—of cows; gaëaiù—with the herds; çarad-dhanaiù—with the wealth of the autumn harvest; çakraù—Indra; iva—like; priyä-yutaù—with his beloved.

     Quickly climbing on a wonderfully decorated great elephant chained with golden shackles, Nanda went, with the many cows and with the wealth of the autumn harvest, to the edge of Govardhana Hill. He looked like Indra Himself, accompanied by his beloved.

Text 4

nandopanandä våñabhänavaç ca
     putraiç ca pautraiç ca sahäìganäbhiù
samäyayuù çré-giriräja-pärçvaà
     sarvaà samänéya ca yajïa-bhäram

     nanda-upanandäù—the Nandas and Upanandas; våñabhänavaù—the Våñabhänus; ca—and; putraiù—with children; ca—and; pautraiù—with grandchildren; ca—and; saha—with; aìganäbhiù—wives; samäyayuù—went; çré-giriräja-pärçvam—to the side of Govardhana Hill; sarvam—all; samänéya—taking; ca—and; yajïa-bhäram—ingredients for the yajna.

     Bringing the ingredients for the performing the yajïa, the Nandas, Upanandas, and Våñabhänus, along with their wives, children, and grandchildren, went to Govardhana Hill.

Text 5

sahasra-bälärka-parisphurad-dyutià
     äruhya rädhä çibikäà sakhé-gaëaiù
çacéva divyämbara-ratna-bhüñaëä
     babhau cakoré-bhramaré-samäkulä

     sahasra—a thousand; bälärka—rising suns; parisphurad-dyutim—splendid; äruhya—climbing; rädhä—Rädhä; çibikäm—a palanquin; sakhé-gaëaiù—with Her friends; çacé—Çacé; iva—like; divyämbara-ratna-bhüñaëä—with splendid garmenbts and ornaments; babhau—shone; cakoré-bhramaré-samäkulä—accompanied by cakoris and beees.

     Dressed in splendid garments and jewel ornaments, and eager as a cakoré bird or a bumblebee, as She rode in a palanquin with Her friends, Rädhä looked like Çacé herself.

Text 6

samägate pärçva-gate sv-alaìkåte
     räjan sakhé-koöi-samavåte pare
sakhyau vibhäte lalitä-viçäkhe
     candränane cälita-cäru-cämare

     samägate—come; pärçva-gate—to the side of the hill; sv-alaìkåte—nicely devorated; räjan—O king; sakhé-koöi-samavåte—surrounded by millions of friends; pare—supreme; sakhyau—friends; vibhäte—manifested; lalitä-viçäkhe—Lalitä and Viçäkhä; candränane—their faces shining like the moon; cälita—moving; cäru—beautiful; cämare—camaras.

     O king, nicely decorated, gracefully moving two beautiful cämaras, accompanied by millions of gopé friends, and their faces splendid as two moons, Rädhä's best friends, Lalitä and Viçäkhä, gloriously stood by Her side.

Text 7

evaà ramä vai virajä ca mädhavé
     mäyä ca kåñëä nåpa jahnu-nandiné
dva-triàçad-añöau ca tathä hi ñoòaça
     sakhyaç ca täsäà kila yütha ägataù

     evam—thus; ramä—Ramä; vai—indeed; virajä—Virajä; ca—and; mädhavé—Mädhavé; mäyä—Mäyä; ca—and; kåñëä—Yamunä; nåpa—O king; jahnu-nandiné—Gaìgä; dva-triàçat—32; añöau—eight; ca—and; tathä hi—furthermore; ñoòaça—16; sakhyaù—friends; ca—and; täsäm—of them; kila—indeed; yütha—groups; ägatah—arrived.

     Then Ramä, Virajä, Mädhavé, Mäyä, Yamunä, and Gaìgä, accompanied by thirty-two, eight, and sixteen groups of gopés, arrived.

Text 8

çré-maithilänäà kila kosalänäà
     tathä çruténäà åñi-rüpa-käraëam
tathä tv ayodhyä-pura-väsinénäà
     çré-yajïa-sétä-vana-väsinénäm

     çré-maithilänäm—of the residents of Mithilä; kila—indeed; kosalänäm—of the residents of Kosala; tathä—so; çruténäm—of personified Vedas; åñi-rüpakänäm—of the sages; tathä—so; tv—indeed; ayodhyä-pura-väsinénäm—of the residnts of Ayodhyä; çré-yajïa-sétä—of the Yajïa-Sétäs; vana—of the forest; väsinénäm—of the residents.

     In their previous births these gopés had been the women of Mithilä, the women of Kosala, the personified Vedas, the great sages, the women of Ayodhyä, the Yajïa-Sétäs, the women of the forest, . . .

Text 9

ramädi-vaikuëöha-niväsinénäà
     tathordhva-vaikuëöha-niväsinénäm
mahojjvala-dvépa-niväsinénäà
     dhruvädi-lokäcala-väsinénäm

     ramä—with ramä; ädi—beginning; vaikuëöha-niväsinénäm—the women of Vaikuëöha; tathä—so; ürdhva-vaikuëöha-niväsinénäm—the women of the highest Vaikuëöha planet; mahojjvala-dvépa-niväsinénäm—the women of the most splendid continents; dhruva—Dhruvaloka; ädi—beginning with; lokäcala—Lokacalka; väsinénäm—residents.

 . . . the women of Vaikuëöha, who have Ramä as their leader, the women of the highest Vaikuëöha realm, the women of various effulgent realms, the women of Dhruvaloka and Lokäcala, . . .

Text 10

samudrajä-divya-guëa-trayäëäà
     adivya-vaimanikajausädhinäm
jalandharénäà ca samudra-kanyä-
     barhiñmatéjä-sutala-sthitänäm

     samudrajä-divya-guëa-trayäëäm—the goddess of fortune's friends, who have three transcendental virtues; adivya-vaimanikajä—the women riding in airplanes; ausädhinäm—the vines and plants; jalandharénäm—the Jalandharis; ca—and; samudra-kanyä—the daughters of the ocean; barhiñmatéjä—the daughters of King barhiñmati; sutala-sthitänäm—the women of Sutalaloka.

 . . . Lakñmé's friends splendid with three transcendental virtues, the women riding in airplanes, vines and plants, jälandharés, the daughters of the ocean, the daughters of King Barhiñmati, the women of Sutalaloka, . . .

Text 11

tathäpsaraù-sarva-phaëéndra-jänäm
     äsäà ca yütha-vraja-väsinénäm
samäyayuù çré-giriräja-pärçvaà
     sv-alaìkåtäù päëi-bali-pradépäù

     tathä—so; apsaraù—apsaräs; sarva-phanéndra-jänäm—all the daughters of then king of serpents; äsäm—of them; ca—and; yütha—groups; vraja—of Vraja; väsinénäm—of the residents; samäyayuù—came; çré-giriräja-pärçvam—to the side of Govardhana Hill; sv-alaìkåtäù—nicely decorated; päëi—hands; bali—with offerings; pradépäù—splendid.

 . . . the apsaräs, and all the serpent king's daughters. Now, as girls of Vraja, nicely decorated, and their hands splendid with many offerings, they approached Govardhana Hill.

Text 12

gopaç ca våddhaù çiçavo yuvänaù
     pétambaroñëéçaka-barha-maëòitäù
çré-hära-guïjä-vana-mälikäbhé
     rejuù sametä nava-yañöi-veëubhiù

     gopaù—gopas; ca—and; våddhaù—adults; çiçavaù—boys; yuvänaù—youths; péta—yellow; ambara—garments; uñëéçaka—turbans; barha—with peacock feathers; maëòitäù—decorated; çré-hära—beautiful necklaces; guïjä—gunja; vana—forest; mälikäbhiù—with garlands; rejuù—shone; sametä—assembled; nava—new; yañöi—sticks; veëubhiù—and flutes.

     Then the gopa men, adolescents, and boys, dressed in yellow garments, wearing turbans crowned with peacock feathers, decorated with beautiful necklaces, guïjä, and forest garlands, and holding new flutes and sticks, came.

Text 13

çrutvotsavaà çaila-varasya man-mukhäd
     gaìgä-dharo baddha-kaparda-maëòalaù
kapäla-bhånn asthija-bhasma-rüñitaù
     sarpäli-mälä-valayair vibhüñitaù

     çrutvä—hearing; utsavam—the festival; çaila-varasya—of the king of mountains; man-mukhät—from my mouth; gaìgä-dharaù—carrying the Ganges; baddha-kaparda-maëòalaù—matted hair; kapäla-bhånn—with a necklace of skulls; asthija-bhasma-rüñitaù—anointed with dust from bones; sarpäli—serpents; mälä-valayaiù—with garlands and bracelets; vibhüñitaù—decorated;

     Hearing of the Govardhana festival from my mouth, carrying the Gaìgä in his matted locks, wearing a necklace of skulls, his body anointed with the powder of bones, decorated with a necklace and bracelets of many snakes, . . . 

Text 14

dhattüra-bhaìga-viña-päna-vihvalo
     himädri-putré-sahito gaëävåtaù
äruhya nandéçvaram ädi-vähanaà
     samäyayau çré-giriräja-maëòalam

     dhattüra-bhaìga-viña-päna-vihvalaù—agitated by haviung drunk dhattura poison; himädri-putré-sahitaù—accompasnied by Pärvaté; gaëävåtaù—accompanied by many associates; äruhya—climbing; nandéçvaram—Nandi; ädi-vähanam—his transcendental carrier; samäyayau—came çré-giriräja-maëòalam—to the circle of Govardhana Hill.

 . . . reeling from having drunk dhattura poison, acompanied by Pärvaté and his many associates, and riding on his carrier Nandé, Lord Çiva came to the circle of Govardhana Hill.

Text 15

räjarñi-viprarñi-surarñayaç ca
     siddheça-yogeçvara-haàsa-mukhyäù
äjagmur äräd giri-darçanärthaà
   sahasraço vipra-gaëäù sametäù

     räjarñi-viprarñi-surarñayaù—the räjarñis, viprarñis, and surarñis; ca—and; siddheça-yogeçvara-haàsa—the siddheças, yogeçvaras, and haàsas; mukhyäù—headed by; äjagmuù—came; ärät—near; giri-darçanärtham—to see Govardhana Hill; sahasraçaù—many thousands; vipra-gaëäù—brähmaëas; sametäù—come.

     Many thousands of räjarñis, viprarñis, surarñis, siddheças, yogeçvaras, paramahaàsas, and brähmaëas came to see Govardhana Hill.

Text 16

govardhano ratna-çilä-mayo 'bhüt
     suvarëa-çåìgaiù paritaù sphuradbhiù
mattälibhir nirjhara-sundarébhir
     därébhir uccäìga-karéva räjan

     govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; ratna-çilä-mayaù—whose stones were jewels; abhüt—became; suvarëa-çåìgaiù—with golden peaks; paritaù—everywhere; sphuradbhiù—splendid; mattälibhiù—with intoxicated bees; nirjhara-sundarébhiù—with beautiful flowing streams; därébhiù—with caves; uccäìga—lofty; karé—elephant; iva—like; räjan—O king.

     O king, its stones jewels, its many peaks golden, and its form splendid with intoxicated bees, beautiful caves,and swiftly-flowing streams, Govardhana Hill was like a great elephant.

Text 17

tadaiva çailäù kila mürtimantaù
     sopäyanä meru-himäcalädyäù
nemur girià maìgala-päëayas taà
     govardhanaà rüpa-dhäraà giréndräù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; çailäù—the hill; kila—indeed; mürtimantaù—personified; sa—with; upäyanä—artival; meru—Meru; himäcala—the Himlayas; ädyäù—beginning with; nemuù—bowed down; girim—to the hill; maìgala-päëayaù—with auspicious offerings in their hands; tam—to it; govardhanam—Govardhana Hill; rüpa-dhäram—having a form; giri—of mountains; indräù—the kings.

     Then, manifesting humanlike forms and bearing auspicious gifts in their hands, the mountain kings, headed by Mount Meru and Mount Himalaya, offered their respectful obeisances, bowing down to the humanlike form of Govardhana Hill.

Text 18

dvijaiç ca govardhana-deva-püjanaà
     kåtväcyutoktaà dvija-vahni-go-dhanam
sampüjya dhåtvä sudhanaà mahä-dhanaà
     balià dadau çré-giraye vrajeçvaraù

     dvijaiù—by the brähmaëas; ca—and; govardhana—of Govardhana Hill; deva—of the Deity; püjanam—the worship; kåtvä—having done; acyuta—of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead; uktam—said; dvija—brähmaëas; vahni—fire-gods; go-dhanam—and cows; sampüjya—worshiping; dhåtvä—holding; sudhanam mahä-dhanam balim—an offering of great wealth; dadau—gave; çré-giraye—to Govardhana Hill; vrajeçvaraù—the king of Vraja.

     Following Kåñëa's instruction, Nanda, the king of Vraja, had many brähmaëas worship Govardhana Hill. Then Nanda worshiped the brähmaëas, fire-gods, and cows, and then gave a very opulent offering to Govardhana Hill.

Text 19

nandopanandair våñabhänubhiç ca
     gopé-gaëair gopa-gaëaiù praharñitaù
gäyadbhir änartana-vädya-tat-parais
     cakära kåñëo 'dri-vara-pradakñiëäm

     nanda—by the Nandas; upanandaiù—Upanandas; våñabhänubhiç—Våñabhänu; ca—and; gopé-gaëaiù—gopés; gopa-gaëaiù—gopas; praharñitaù—delighted; gäyadbhiù—singing; änartana—dancing; vädya—and instrumental; music; tat-paraiù—earnest; cakära—did; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; adri-vara—the best of mountains; pradakñiëäm—circumambulation.

     Pleased by the earnestly singing Nandas, Upanandas, Våñabhänus, gopas, and gopés, Lord Kåñëa circumambulated Govardhana Hill, the king of mountains.

Text 20

deveñu varñatsu ca puñpa-varñaà
     janeñu varñatsu ca laja-saìgham
reje mahä-räja ivädhvare janair
     govardhano näma giréndra-räja-räö

     deveñu—as the demigods; varñatsu—showered; ca—and; puñpa-varñam—a shower of flowers; janeñu—the people; varñatsu—showering; ca—and; läja-saìgham—grains; reje—shone; mahä-räja—a great king; iva—as; adhvare—in the yajna; janaiù—by the people; govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; näma—named; giréndra-räja-räö—the king of the kings of the kings of mountains.

     As the demigods showered flowers and the Vrajaväsés showered grains, Govardhana Hill, the great king of the kings of the kings of mountains, glistened with great glory, as if it were a great monarch in the midst of a yajïa.

Text 21

kåñëo 'pi säkñäd vraja-çaila-madhyäd
     dhåtväti-dérghaà kila cänya-rüpam
çailo 'smi lokän iti bhäñayan san
     jaghäsa sarvaà kåtam anna-küöam

     kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; api—also; säkñät—directly; vraja-çaila-madhyät—from the midst of the hill of Vraja; dhåtvä—manifesting; ati-dérgham—very tall; kila—indeed; ca—and; anya—another; rüpam—form; çailaù—the hill; asmi—I am; lokäto the people;n— iti—thus; bhäñayan—proclaiming; san—being so; jaghäsa—ate; sarvam—all; kåtam—done; anna—of food; küöam—the hill.

     Manifesting a gigantic form different from His own, Lord Kåñëa appeared from the midst of Govardhana Hill. Declaring,  I am this hill," He ate the entire hill of food that was offered.

Text 22

gopäla-gopé-gaëa-vånda-mukhyä
     ücuù svayaà vékñya gireù prabhävam
dätuà varaà tatra samudyataà taà
     su-vismitä harñita-mänasäs te

     gopäla—gopas; gopé—gopés; gaëa-vånda—multitudes; mukhyä—geaded by; ücuù—said; svayam—personally; vékñya—seeing; gireù—of the hill; prabhävam—the power; dätum—to give; varam—blessing; tatra—there; samudyatam—eager; tam—that; su-vismitä—astonished; harñita—delighted; mänasäù—at heart; te—they.

     Seeing Govardhana Hill's great power and opulence, and their hearts full of joy and wonder, the gopas and gopés asked the hill to grant them a benediction.

Text 23

jïäto 'si gopair giriräja-devaù
     pradarçito nanda-sutena säkñät
no go-dhanaà va kila bandhu-varyo
     våddhià samäyätu dine dine kau

     jïätaù—known; asi—You are; gopaiù—by the gopas; giriräja-devaù—the Deity of the kings of mountains; pradarçitaù—seen; nanda-sutena—by Nanda's son; säkñät—directly; naù—of us; go-dhanam—the cows; va—or; kila—indeed; bandhu-varyaù—best friend; våddhim—prosperity; samäyätu—may attain; dine—day; dine—after day; kau—on this earth.

     They said, "The gopas know that You are the Deity worshiped by the kings of mountains. Nanda's son Kåñëa has shown Your true nature to us. Please grant that day after day our relatives, friends, and cows may prosper."

Text 24

tathästu coktvä giriräja-räjo
     govardhano divya-vapur dadhänaù
kiréöa-keyüra-manoharäìgaù
     kñaëena taträntaradhéyatärät

     tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying; giriräja-räjaù—the king of the kings of mountains; govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; divya-vapuù—a transcendental form; dadhänaù—manifesting; kiréöa—crown; keyüra—armlets; manohara—handsome; aìgaù—limbs; kñaëena—in a moment; tatra—there; antaradhéyata—disappeared; ärät—far away.

     Manifesting a handsome divine form decorated with crown and armlets, Govardhana Hill, the king of the kings of mountains, said, "So be it," and suddenly disappeared.

Texts 25 and 26

nandopanandä våñabhänavaç ca
     bäläù sucandro våñabhänu-räjaù
çré-nanda-räjaç ca hariç ca gopä
     gopyaç ca sarva nija-go-dhanaiç ca

dvijäç ca yogeçvara-siddha-saìghäù
     sivädayaç cänya-janäç ca sarve
natvätha sampüjya girià prasannäù
     svaà svaà gåhaà jagmur anicchayä ca

     nandopanandä—the Nandas and Upanandas; våñabhänavaç—the Våñabhänus; ca—and; bälaù—the boy; sucandraù—Sucandra; våñabhänu-räjaù—King Våñabhänu; çré-nanda-räjaç—King Nanda; ca—and; hariç—Kåñëa; ca—and; gopä—the gopas; gopyaç—and gopés; ca—and; sarva—all; nija-go-dhanaiù—with their cows; ca—and; dvijäù—the brähmaëas; ca—and; yogeçvara-siddha-saìghäù—the siddhas and the masters of yoga; sivädayaç—headed by Lord Çiva; ca—and; anya-janäù—other people; ca—and; sarve—all; natvä—bowing down; atha—then; sampüjya—worshiping; girim—the hill; prasannäù—happy; svam svam—each to their own; gåham—hom; jagmuù—went; anicchayä—without any further desires; ca—and.

     The Nandas, Upanandas, Våñabhänus, Balaräma, Sucandra, King Våñabhänu, King Nanda, Kåñëa, all the gopas, gopés, and cows, the brähmaëas, the siddhas and yogeçvaras headed by Lord Çiva, as well as everyone else bowed down and worshiped Govardhana Hill. Then, happy at heart, and all their desires fulfilled, they returned to their own homes.

Text 27

çré-kåñëacandrasya paraà caritraà
     giréndra-räjasya mahotsavaà ca
mayä tavägre kathitaà vicitraà
     nåëäà mahä-päpa-haraà pavitram

     çré-kåñëacandrasya—of Çré Kåñëacandra; param—transcendental; caritram—pastime; giréndra-räjasya—of the king of the kings of mountains; mahotsavam—the great festuival; ca—and; mayä—by me; tava—of you; agre—in th epresence; kathitam—spoken; vicitram—wonderful; nåëäm—of people; mahä-päpa—great sins; haram—removing; pavitram—purifying.

     In this way I have described to you Çré Kåñëacandra's transcendental pastime of offering a great festival to worship Govardhana Hill, the king of the kings of mountains. This wonderful and purifying narration frees the people from the greatest sins.

.pa

Chapter Three
Çré Govardhanoddharaëa
The Lifting of Çré Govardhana 

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
atha man-mukhataù çrutvä
     svätma-yägasya näçanam
govardhanotsavaà jätaà
     kopaà cakre purandaraù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; man-mukhataù—from my mouth; çrutvä—hearing; svätma-yägasya—of his own yajna; näçanam—the destruction; govardhanotsavam—a festival for Govardhana Hill; jätam—manifested; kopam—anger; cakre—did; purandaraù—Indra.

     Çré Närada said: When from my mouth he heard that his sacrifice had been stopped and a festival for Govardhana Hill performed in its place, Indra became furious.

Text 2

sämvartakaà näma gaëaà
     pralaye mukta-bandhanam
indro vraja-vinäçäya
     preñayäm äsa sa-tvaram

     sämvartakam—Sämvartaka; näma—named; gaëam—clouds; pralaye—at cosmic devastation; mukta-bandhanam—freed from bondage; indraù—Indra; vraja—of Vraja; vinäçäya—for the destruction; preñayäm äsa—sent; sa-tvaram—at once.

     Unleashing the sämvartaka clouds used at the time of cosmic destruction, Indra sent them to destroy Vraja.

Text 3

atha megha-gaëäù kruddhä
     dhvanantaç citra-varëinaù
kåñëäbhäù pétabhäù kecit
     kecic ca harita-prabhäù

     atha—then; megha-gaëäù—the clouds; kruddhä—angry; dhvanantaç—thundering; citra-varëinaù—wonderfully colored; kåñëäbhäù—black; pétabhäù—yellow; kecit—some; kecic—some; ca—and; harita-prabhäù—green.

     The clouds thundered with anger. They were many wonderful colors, some black, some yellow, some green, . . .

Text 4

indragopa-nibhäù kecit
     kecit karpüravat-prabhäù
nänä-vidhäç ca ye meghä
     néla-paìkaja-su-prabhäù

     indragopa-nibhäù—the color of an indrgopa insect; kecit—some; kecit—some; karpüravat-prabhäù—the color of camphor; nänä—various; vidhäù—kinds; ca—and; ye—which; meghä—clouds; néla-paìkaja-su-prabhäù—the color of a blue lotus.

 . . . some the color of an indragopa insect, some the color of camphor, and some the color of blue lotuses.

Text 5

hasti-tulyän väri-bindün
     vavåñus te madoddhatäù
hasti-ñuëòä-samäbhiç ca
     dhäräbhiç caïcaläç ca ye

     hasti—to an elephant; tulyän—equal; väri-bindün—raindrops; vavåñuù—rained; te—they; madoddhatäù—furious; hasti—elephant; ñuëòä—trunks; samäbhiù—equal to; ca—and; dhäräbhiç—with streams; caïcaläù—lightning; ca—and; ye—which.

     Furious, they showered raindrops as big as elephants and thunderbolts as big as elephants' trunks.

Text 6

nipetuù koöiçaç cädri-
     küöa-tulyopalä bhåçäm
vätä vävuù pracaëòäç ca
     kñepayantas tarün gåhän

     nipetuù—fell; koöiçaç—millions; ca—and; adri—mountain; küöa—tops; tulya—equal to; upaläù—stones; bhåçäm—greatly; vätä—the wind; vävuù—blew; pracaëòäù—fruious; ca—and; kñepayantaù—throwing; tarün—trees; gåhän—houses.

     Big as mountain peaks, millions of rocks fell. The wind threw away many trees and houses.

Text 7

pracaëòo vajra-pätänäà
     meghänäm anta-käriëäm
mahä-çabdo 'bhavad bhümau
     maithilendra bhayaìkaraù

     pracaëòaù—ferocious; vajra-pätänäm—of thunder; meghänäm—of the clouds; anta-käriëäm—putting an end to all; mahä—great; çabdaù—sound; abhavat—was; bhümau—on the earth; maithilendra—O king of Mithilä; bhayaìkaraù—fearful.

     O king of Mithilä, the earth was filled with ferocious, terrifying, and devastating sounds of thunder.

Text 8

nanäda tena brahmäëòaà
     sapta-lokair bilaiù saha
vicelur dig-gajäs tärä
     hy apatan bhümi-maëòalam

     nanäda—sounded; tena—by that; brahmäëòam—the universe; sapta-lokaiù—with seven planetary systems; bilaiù—outser space; saha—with; viceluù—shook; dig-gajäù—the elephants holding the directions; tarä—the stars; hy—indeed; apatan—fell; bhümi-maëòalam—to the circle of the earth.

     The entire universe, with the seven planetary systems and the expanses of outer space, echoed with the sounds of thunder. The elephants holding the directions trembled. The stars fell to the circle of the earth.

Text 9

bhaya-bhétä gopa-mukhyäù
     sa-kuöumbä jigéñavaù
çiçün svän svän puraskåtya
     nanda-mandiram äyayuù

     bhaya-bhétä—terrified; gopa-mukhyäù—the gopas; sa-kuöumbä—with their families; jigéñavaù—wishing to be safe; çiçün—children; svän svänpown; puraskåtya—placing in front; nanda-mandiram—to Nanda's palace; äyayuù—came.

     Wishing to save themselves, the gopas and their families, with the children in front, ran to Nanda's palace.

Text 10

çré-nanda-nandanaà natvä
     sa-balaà parameçvaram
ücur vrajaukasaù sarve
     bhayärtäù çaraëaà gatäù

     çré-nanda-nandanam—to Nandas's son; natvä—bowing down; sa-balam—with Balaräma; parameçvaram—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ücuù—said; vrajaukasaù—the residents of Vraja; sarve—all; bhayärtäù—terrified; çaraëam—shelter; gatäù—took.

     Terrified, the people of Vraja bowed down before the two Supreme Lords, Kåñëa and Balaräma, surrendered to Them, and took shelter of Them.

Text 11

çré-gopä ücuù 
räma räma mahä-bäho
     kåñëa kåñëa vrajeçvara
pähi pähi mahä-kañöhäd
     indra-dattän nijän janän

     çré-gopäù ücuù—the gopas said; räma—Balaräma; räma—Balaräma; mahä-bähaù—O mighty-armed; kåñëa—Kåñëa; kåñëa—Kåñëa; vrajeçvara—O Lord of Vraja; pähi—save; pähi—save; mahä-kañöhät—from great calamities; indra-dattän—brought by Indra; nijän—Your own; janän—people.

     The gopas said: Balaräma! Balaräma! O mighty-armed! Kåñëa! Kåñëa! O master of Vraja! Save, save Your people from these calamities brought by Indra!

Text 12

hitvendra-yägaà tvad-väkyät
     kåto govardhanotsavaù
adya çakre prakupite
     kartavyaà kià vadäçu naù

     hitvä—abandoning; indra-yägam—the indra-yajna; tvad-väkyät—because of Your word; kåtaù—done; govardhanotsavaù—a festival for Govardhana Hill; adya—now; çakre—Indra; prakupite—angry; kartavyam—should be done; kim—what?; vada—tell; äçu—at once; naù—us.

     By Your word we stopped the indra-yajïa and offered a festival for Govardhana Hill. Now Indra is angry. What should we do? Please tell us!

Text 13

çré-närada uväca 
vyäkulaà gokulaà vékñya
     gopé-gopäla-saìkulam
sa-vatsakaà gokulaà ca
     gopän äha niräkulaù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said: ; vyäkulam—agitated; gokulam—Gokula; vékñya—seeing; gopé-gopäla-saìkulam—the gopas and gopés; sa-vatsakam—with the calves; gokulam—the cows; ca—and; gopän—to the gopas; äha—said; niräkulaù—peaceful at heart.

     Seeing the gopas, gopés, cows, calves, and all of Gokula very upset, calm and peaceful Kåñëa spoke to the gopas.

Text 14

çré-bhagavän uväca 
ma bhaiñöa yätädri-taöaà
     sarvaiù parikaraiù saha
vaù püjä prahåtä yena
     sa rakñaà samvidhasyati

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead saod; ma—don't; bhaiñöa—be afraid; yäta—go; adri-taöam—to Govardhana Hill; sarvaiù—with all; parikaraiù—associates; saha—with; vaù—of us; püjä—worship; prahåtä—accepted; yena—by whom; sa—He; rakñam—protection; samvidhasyati—will offer.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Don't be afraid. With your dependents go to Govardhana Hill. He accepted our worship. He will protect us.

Text 15

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvä sva-janaiù särdhaà
     etya govardhanaà hariù
samutpäöya dadhärädrià
     hastenaikena lélayä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said: ; ity—thus; uktvä—saying; sva-janaiù—with his own people; särdham—with; etya—going; govardhanam—to Govardhana Hill; hariù—Kåñëa; samutpäöya—lifting; dadhära—held; adrim—the hill; hastena—hand; ekena—with one; lélayä—playfully.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these words, Lord Kåñëa went, with His own people, to Govardhana Hill. Lifting the hill, Kåñëa playfully held it aloft with one hand.

Text 16

yathocchiléndhraà çiçur açramo gajaù
     sva-puñkareëaiva ca puñkaraà girim
dhåtvä babhau çré-vraja-räja-nandanaù
     kåpä-karo 'sau karuëämayaù prabhuù

     yathä—as; ucchiléndhram—a mushroom; çiçuù—of a child; açramaù—without fatigue; gajaù—and elephant; sva-puñkareëa—with a lotus; eva—indeed; ca—and; puñkaram—a lotus; girim—the hill; dhåtvä—holding; babhau—shone; çré-vraja-räja-nandanaù—the prince of Vraja; kåpä-karaù—kind; asau—He; karuëämayaù—compassionate; prabhuù—the Lord.

     As a child effortlessly holds a mushroom, or as an elephant holds a lotus in its tongue, so Çré Kåñëa, the prince of Vraja, the kind Supreme Personality of Godhead, held Govardhana Hill.

Text 17

athäha gopän viçatädri-gartaà
     he täta mätar vraja-ballaveçäù
sopaskaraiù sarva-dhanaiç ca gobhir
     atraiva çakrasya bhayaà na kiïcit

     atha—then; äha—said; gopän—to the gopas; viçata—enter; adri—of the hill; gartam—the opening; he—O; täta—father; mätaù—mother; vraja—of Vraja; ballava—of the gopas; éçäùO kings; sa—with; upaskaraiù—with househo,d paraphernalia; sarva-dhanaiç—with all your wealth; ca—and; gobhiù—with your cows; atra—there; eva—indeed; çakrasya—of Indra; bhayam—fear; na—not; kiïcit—at all.

     Lord Kåñëa said to the gopas: Father, mother, kings of the gopas, take your relatives, associates, household paraphernalia, wealth, and cows, and go beneath the hill. There you need not fear Indra.

Text 18

itthaà harer vacaù çrutvä
     gopä go-dhana-samyutaù
sa-kuöumbopaskaraiç ca
     viviçuù çré-gires talam

     ittham—thus; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; gopa—the gopas; go-dhana-samyutaù—with their cows; sa-kuöumba—with their familites; upaskaraiù—with their household paraphernaila; ca—and; viviçuù—entered; çré-gireù talam—under the hill.

     When they heard Lord Kåñëa word's, the gopas took their families, cows, and household paraphernalia, and went under the hill.

Text 19

vayasyä bälakä sarve
     kåñëoktäù sa-balä nåpa
svän sväàç ca laguòän adrer
     avañöambhän pracakrire

     vayasyäù—friends; bälakä—boys; sarve—all; kåñëa—by Kåñëa; uktäù—toild; sa-balä—with Balaräma; nåpa—O king; svän svän—their own; ca—and; laguòän—sticks; adreù—of the hill; avañöambhän—holding up; pracakrire—did.

     O king, when Kåñëa asked, Balaräma and all the boys His age steadied the the hill with their sticks.

Text 20

jalaugham ägataà vékñya
     bhagaväàs tad-girer adhaù
sudarçanaà tathä çeñaà
     mänasäjïäà cakära ha

     jala—of water; augham—a flood; ägatam—come; vékñya—seeing; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tad-gireù—the hill; adhaù—beneath; sudarçanam—Sudarçana-cakra; tathä—so; çeñam—Çeña; mänasa—with the mind; äj{—.sy 24äm—order; cakära—did; ha—certainly. 

     Seeing a great flood of water coming, in His mind Lord Kåñëa ordered Lord Çeña and the Sudarçana-cakra to come under the hill.

Text 21

koöi-sürya-prabhaà cädrer
     ürdhvaà cakraà sudarçanaà
dhärä-sampätam apibad
     agastya iva maithila

     koöi-sürya-prabham—splendid as ten million suns; ca—and; adreù—the hill; ürdhvam—above; cakram—the cakra; sudarçanam—Çudarçana; dhärä—streams; sampätam—falling; apibat—drank; agastya—Agastya Muni; iva—like; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     Brilliant as ten million suns, the Sudarçana-cakra hovered above the hill and drank up the falling streams of water as Agastya Muni drank up the ocean.

Text 22

adho 'dhas taà gireù çeñaù
     kuëòalé-bhüta ästhitaù
rurodha taj-jalaà dérghaà
     yathä velä mahodadhim

     adhaù adhaù—lower and lower; tam—that; gireù—of the hill; çeñaù—Çeña; kuëòalé-bhüta—coiled up; ästhitaù—stood; rurodha—stopped; taj-jalam—that water; dérgham—great; yathä—as; velä—the shoreline; mahodadhim—the great ocean.

     Coiling Himself around the hill, Çeña stopped the incoming flood as a shoreline stops the waters of an ocean.

Text 23

saptähaà su-sthiras tañöhau
     govardhana-dharo hariù
çré-kåñëacandraà paçyantaù
     cakorä iva te sthitäù

     sapta—for seven; aham—days; su-sthiraù—steady; tañöhau—stood; govardhana-dharaù—holding Govardhana Hill; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; çré-kåñëacandram—at Çré Kåñëacandra; paçyantaù—gazing; cakorä—cakora birds; iva—like; te—they; sthitäù—stood.

     For seven days Lord Kåñëa steadily held Govardhana Hill. As if they had become cakora birds, the stunned gopas gazed at Lord Kåñëacandra.

Text 24

mattam airävataà nägaà
     samäruhya purandaraù
sa-sainyaù krodha-samyukto
     vraja-maëòalam äyayau

     mattam—angry; airävatam—Airävata; nägam—welephant; samäruhya—climbing; purandaraù—Indra; sa-sainyaù—with his army; krodha-samyuktaù—angry; vraja-maëòalam—to the circle of Vraja; äyayau—came.

     Mounting his maddened elephant Airävata, and accompanied by his armies, furious Indra went to the circle of Vraja.

Text 25

düräc cikñepa vajraà svaà
     nanda-goñöha-jighaàsayä
stambhayäm äsa çakrasya
     sa-vrajaà mädhavo bhujam

     dürätfrom far away; cikñepa—threw; vajram—thunderbolt; svam—own; nanda-goñöha-jighaàsayä—wishing to destroy Nanda's village; stambhayäm äsa—paralyzed; çakrasya—of Indra; sa-vrajam—with the thunderbolt; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; bhujam—arm.

     Wishing to destroy Nanda's village, Indra threw his thunderbolt from far away. Kåñëa suddenly paralyzed both the thunderbolt and the arm that threw it.

Text 26

bhaya-bhétas tadä çakraù
     sämvartaka-gaëaiù saha
dudräva sahasä devaiù
     yathebhaù siàha-täòitaù

     bhaya-bhétaù—terrified; tadä—then; çakraù—Indra; sämvartaka-gaëaiù—with the samvartaka clouds; saha—with; dudräva—fled; sahasä—at once; devaiù—with the demigods; yathä—as; ibhaù—an elephant; siàha—by a lion; täòitaù—wounded.

     Terrified, Indra fled with the demigods and sämvartaka clouds as if he were an elephant wounded by a lion.

Text 27

tadaivärkodayo jäto
     gatä meghä itas tataù
vätä uparatäù sadyo
     nadyaù sv-alpa-jalä nåpa

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; arka—sun; udayaù—rising; jätaù—manifested; gatä—gone; meghä—the clouds; itaù—here; tataù—and there; vätä—winds; uparatäù—stopped; sadyaù—at once; nadyaù—the streams; sv-alpa-jalä—with very littel water; nåpa—O king.

     Suddenly the sun rose. The clouds were gone, the winds stopped, and the streams carried very little water.

Text 28

vipaìkaà bhü-talaà jätaà
     nirmalaà khaà babhüva ha
catuñpadäù pakñiëaç ca
     sukham äpus tatas tataù

     vipaìkam—free of mud; bhü-talam—the ground; jätam—manifested; nirmalam—spotless; kham—the sky; babhüva—became; ha—indeed; catuñpadäù—the animals; pakñiëaç—the birds; ca—and; sukham—happiness; äpuù—attained; tataù—then; tataù—then.

     The ground dried up, the sky became clear, and the animals and birds became happy.

Text 29

hariëoktas tadä gopä
     niryayur giri-gartataù
svaà svaà dhanaà go-dhanaà ca
     samädäya çanaiù çanaiù

     hariëä—by Kåñëa; uktaù—told; tadä—then; gopä—teh gopas; niryayuù—left; giri-gartataù—from under the hill; svaà svam—their own; dhanam—wealth; go-dhanam—cows; ca—and; samädäya—taking; çanaiù çanaiù—slowly.

     By Kåñëa's order the gopas, taking their wealth and cows with them, slowly emerged from under the hill. 

Text 30

niryäteti vayasyäàç ca
     präha govardhanoddharaù
te tam ähuç ca nirgaccha
     dhärayämo 'drim ojasä

     niryätaù—leave; iti—thus; vayasyäàç—friends; ca—and; präha—said; govardhanoddharaù—the lifter of Govardhana Hill; te—they; tam—to Him; ähuç—said; ca—and; nirgaccha—You go; dhärayämaù—we will hold; adrim—th hill; ojasä—with our power.

     Then Kåñëa, the lifter of Govardhana Hill, said to His friends, "Go out." They said to Him, "You go first. We will hold the hill with our own strength."

Text 31

iti väda-parän gopän
     govardhana-dharo hariù
tad-ardhaà ca girer bharaà
     prädät tebhyo mahä-manäù

     iti—thus; väda-parän—talkative; gopän—to the gopas; govardhana-dharaù—the lifter of Govardhana Hill; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; tad-ardham—half; ca—and; gireù—of the hill; bharam—the weight; prädät—gave; tebhyaù—to them; mahä-manäù—noble-hearted.

     Then Lord Kåñëa, the lifter of Govardhana Hill, shifted half of the hill's weight to the talkative gopa boys.

Text 32

patitäs tena bhareëa
     gopa-bälaç ca nirbaläù

     patitäù—fallen; tena—by that; bhareëa—weight; gopa-bälaç—the gopa boys; ca—and; nirbaläù—devastated.

     That burden made the gopa boys fall, devastated, to the ground.

Text 33

kareëa tän samutthäya
     sva-sthäne pürvavad girim
sarveñäà paçyatäà kåñëaù
     sthäpayäm äsa lélayä

     kareëa—with one hand; tän—them; samutthäya—pullingup; sva-sthäne—in its own place; pürvavat—as before; girim—the hill; sarveñäm—of all; paçyatäm—watching; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; sthäpayäm äsa—placed; lélayä—playfully.

     With one hand Kåñëa picked them all up. Then, as everyone watched, with a playful flourish Kåñëa set the hill down where it was before.

Text 34

tadaiva gopé-gaëa-gopa-mukhyäù
     sampüjya kåñëaà nåpa nanda-sünum
gandhäkñatädyair dadhi-dugdha-bhogair
     jïätvä paraà nemur atéva sarve

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; gopé-gaëa-gopa-mukhyäù—the gopoas and gopés; sampüjya—worshiping; kåñëam—Kåñëa; nåpa—O king; nanda-sünum—the son of Nanda; gandha—with fragrances; akñata—with unbroken grains of rice;dyaiù— dadhi-dugdha-bhogaiù—with many foods made with milk and yogurt; jïätvä—understanding; param—to be the Supreme; nemuù—bowed down; atéva—greatly; sarve—all.

     O king, the gopas and gopés, now understanding that Nanda's son Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, worshiped Him, showered Him with unbroken grains of rice, offered Him many foods made with milk and yogurt, and humbly bowed down before Him.

Text 35

nando yaçodä nåpa rohiëé ca
     balaç ca sannanda-mukhäç ca våddhäù
äliìgya kåñëaà pradadur dhanäni
     çubhäçiñä samyuyujur ghåëärtäù

     nandaù—nanda; yaçodä—with Yaçodä; nåpa—O king; rohiëé—Rohiëé; ca—and; balaç—Balaräma; ca—and; sannanda-mukhäç—the gopas headed by Sannanda; ca—and; våddhäù—adult; äliìgya—embracing; kåñëam—Kåñëa; pradaduù—gave; dhanäni—wealkth; çubhäçiñä—with blessings; samyuyujuù—placed; ghåëärtäù—filled with kindness.

     O king, then Nanda, Yaçodä, Rohiëé, and the gopa elders headed by Sannanda, embraced Kåñëa, gave Him great wealth, and, filled with kindness and love, spoke many benedictions blessing Him. 
Text 36

saàçläghya taà gäyana-vädya-tat-parä
     nåtyanta ärän nåpa nanda-nandanam
äjagmur eva sva-gåhän vrajaukaso
     harià puraskåtya manorathaà gatäù

     saàçläghya—praising; tam—Him; gäyana-vädya-tat-parä—earnestlky singing and playing muscial instruments; nåtyanta—dancing; ärän—near; nåpa—O king; nanda-nandanam—to Nanda's son; äjagmuù—came; eva—indeed; sva-gåhän—from the own homes; vrajaukasaù—the residents of Vraja; harim—to Lord Kåñëa; puraskåtya—worshiping; manoratham—desire; gatäù—attained.

     O king, singing, dancing, and playing musical instruments, the people of Vraja approached Lord Kåñëa and worshiped Him. In this way all their desires were fulfilled.

Text 37

tadaiva devä vavåñuù praharñitäù
     puñpaiù çubhaiù sundara-nandanodbhavaiù
jagur yaçaù çré-giriräja-dhäriëo
     gandharva-mukhyä divi siddha-saìghäù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; devä—the demigods; vavåñuù—showered; praharñitäù—jubilant; puñpaiù—with flowers; çubhaiù—beautiful; sundara—beautiful; nandana—in the Nandana gardens; udbhavaiù—grown; jaguù—sang; yaçaù—the glories; çré-giriräja-dhäriëaù—of the lifter of Govardhana Hill; gandharva-mukhyä—the Gandharvas; divi—in heaven; siddha-saìghäù—the siddhas.

     Then the jubilant demigods showered beautiful flowers grown in the beautiful Nandana gardens, and the Gandharvas and Siddhas in the higher planets sang the glories of Çré Kåñëa, the lifter of Govardhana Hill.
.pa

Chapter Four
Çré Kåñëäbhiñeka
The Coronation-Bathing of Çré Kåñëa

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
atha deva-gaëaiù särdhaà
     çakras tatra samägataù
gatamäno girau kåñëaà
     rahasi praëanäma ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; deva-gaëaiù—the demigods; särdham—with; çakraù—Indra; tatra—there; samägataù—came; gatamänaù—going; girau—on the hill; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; rahasi—in a secluded place; praëanäma—bowed down; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: Then, accompanied by the demigods, Indra went to a secluded place on Govardhana Hill and bowed down before Lord Kåñëa.

Text 2

çré-indra uväca 
tvaà deva-devaù parameçvaraù prabhuù
     pürëaù puräëaù puruñottamottamaù
parät paras tvaà prakåteù paro harir
     mäà pähi pähi dyu-pate jägat-pate

     çré-indraù uväca—Çré Indra said; tvam—You; deva-devaù—the master of the demigods; parameçvaraù—the supreme controller; prabhuù—the master; pürëaù—perfect; puräëaù—the oldest; puruñottamottamaù—the supreme person; parät—than the greatest; paraù—greater; tvam—You; prakåteù—to material nature; paraù—superior; hariù—Lord Hari; mäm—me; pähi—please save; pähi—please save; dyu-pate—O Lord of the spiritual sky; jägat-pate—O master of the universes.

     Çré Indra said: You are the master of the demigods, the supreme controller, the Lord who is perfect and complete, the oldest, the supreme person greater than the greatest and above the material energy, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Hari. O master of the spiritual sky, O master of the universes, please save me! Please save me! 

Text 3

daçävatäro bhagaväàs tvam eva
     rirakñayä dharma-gaväà çruteç ca
adyaiva jätaù paripürëa-devaù
     kaàsädi-daityendra-vinäçanäya

     daça—ten; avatäraù—incarnations; bhagaväàù—Lord; tvam—You; eva—indeed; rirakñayä—with a desire to protect; dharma-gaväm—the cow of religion; çruteù—the Vedas; ca—and; adya—today; eva—indeed; jätaù—born; paripürëa-devaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kaàsädi—headed by Kaàsa; daityendra——the kings of the demons; vinäçanäya—to destroy.

     You are the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, perfect and complete, who descends as the ten avatäras. Desiring to protect the Vedic scriptures and the cows of piety, and desiring also to kill the demons headed by Kaàsa, You have taken birth in this world. 

Text 4

tvan-mäyayä mohita-citta-våttià
     madoddhataà helana-bhäjanaà mäm
piteva putraà dyu-pate kñamasva
     praséda deveça jagan-niväsa

     tvan-mäyayä—by Your illusory potency; mohita—bewilderd; citta—of the mind; våttim—the cations; madoddhatam—inflated with pride and anger; helana—of insults; bhäjanam—a reservoir; mäm—me; pitä—a father; iva—like; putram—to a son; dyu-pate—O master of the spiritual sky; kñamasva—please forgive; praséda—please be kind; deveça—O master of the demigods; jagan-niväsa—O home of the universes.

     O master of the spiritual sky, as a father forgives his son, please forgive me, a proud fool bewildered by Your illusory potency, a fool who has become a great reservoir of offenses to You. O master of the demigods, O home where the universes dwell, please be kind to me.

Text 5

     oà namo govardhanoddharaëäya govindäya gokula-niväsäya gopäläya gopäla-pataye gopé-jana-bhärtre giri-gajoddhärtre karuëä-nidhaye jagad-vidhaye jagan-maìgaläya jagan-niväsäya jagan-mohanäya koöi-manmatha-manmathäya våñabhänu-sutä-varäya çré-nanda-räja-kula-pradépäya çré-kåñëäya paripürëatamäya te 'saìkhya-brahmäëòa-pataye goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëädhipataye svayam-bhagavate sa-baläya namas te namas te.

     om—Om; namaù—obeisances; govardhana—of Govardhana Hill; uddharaëäya—to the lifter; govindäya—the pleasure of the cows, land, and senses; gokula-niväsäya—who resides in Gokula; gopäläya—a gopa boy; gopäla-pataye—the master of the gopas; gopé-jana-bhärtre—the husband of the gopés; giri-gajoddhärtre—the lifter of Govardhana Hill, the great elephant of mountains; karuëä-nidhaye—an ocean of mercy; jagad-vidhaye—the creator of the universes; jagan-maìgaläya—the auspiciiusness of the universes; jagan-niväsäya—the home where the universes dwell; jagan-mohanäya—He who charms the universes; koöi-manmatha-manmathäya—who bewilders many millions of Kämadevas; våñabhänu-sutä-varäya—the lover of Çré Rädhä; çré-nanda-räja-kula-pradépäya—the lamp of King nanda's family; çré-kåñëäya—Çré Kåñëa; paripürëatamäya—the perfect and complete one; te—to You; asaìkhya—countless; brahmäëòa—of universes; pataye—to the master; goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëädhipataye—to the master of the abode of Goloka; svayam-bhagavate—the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself; sa-baläya—with Balaräma; namaù—obeisances; te—to You; namaù—obeisances; te—to You.

     Oà. Obeisances! Obeisances to You! Obeisances to You, the lifter of Govardhana Hill, the pleasure of the cows, land, and senses, the Lord who resides in Gokula as the protector of the cows, the master of the gopas, the husband of the gopés, the lifter of the elephant among mountains, an ocean of mercy, the creator of the universes, the auspiciousness of the universes, the home where the universes dwell, the enchanter of the universes, the enchanter of many millions of Kämadevas, the lover of King Våñabhänu's daughter, a lamp shining in King Nanda's family, all-attractive Çré Kåñëa, the perfect and complete original Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of countless universes, the master of the transcendental abode of Goloka, the companion of Balaräma!

Text 6

çré-närada uväca 
iti çakra-kåtaà stotraà
     prätar utthäya yaù paöhet
sarvä siddhir bhavet tasya
     saìkaöän na bhayaà bhavet

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çakra-kåtam—done by Indra; stotram—prayer; prätaù—in the morning; utthäya—rising; yaù—one who; paöhet—recites; sarvä—all; siddhiù—perfection; bhavet—is; tasya—of him; saìkaöät—from danger; na—not; bhayam—fear; bhavet—is.

     Çré Närada said: A person who, rising in the morning, recites these prayers of Indra attains all perfections. Dangers will not make him fear.

Text 7

iti stutvä harià devaà
     sarvair deva-gaëaiù saha
kåtäïjali-puöo bhütvä
     praëanäma purandaraù

     iti—thus; stutvä—praying; harim—to Lord Kåñëa; devam—the Lord; sarvaiù—with all; deva-gaëaiù—the demigods; saha—with; kåtäïjali-puöaù—folded hands; bhütvä—becoming; praëanäma—bowed down; purandaraù—Indra.

     After offering these prayers, Indra folded his hands and, accompanied by all the demigods, bowed down before Lord Kåñëa.

Text 8

atha govardhane ramye
     surabhir gauù samudra-jä
snäpayäm äsa gopeçaà
     dugdha-dhäräbhir ätmanaù

     atha—then; govardhane—on Govardhana Hill; ramye—beautiful; surabhiù—surabhi; gauù—cow; samudra-jä—born from the ocean of milk; snäpayäm äsa—bathed; gopa—of the gopas; éçam—the king; dugdha-dhäräbhiù—with streams of milk; ätmanaù—own.

     Then, on beautiful Govardhana Hill, the surabhi cow born from the milk-ocean bathed the gopa-king Kåñëa with great streams of milk.

Text 9

çuëòä-daëòaiç caturbhiç ca
     dyu-gaìgä-jala-püritaiù
çré-kåñëaà snäpayäm äsa
     matta airävato gajaù

     çuëòä-daëòaiù—with trunks; caturbhiç—four; ca—and; dyu-gaìgä-jala-püritaiù—filled with water from the celestial Gaìgä; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; snäpayäm äsa—bathed; matta—intoxicated; airävataù—Airävata; gajaù—elephant.

     Its four trunks filled with celestial Gaìgä water, the intoxicated elephant Airävata bathed Lord Kåñëa.

Text 10

åñibhiù çrutibhiù sarvair
     deva-gandharva-kinnaräù
tuñöuvus te harià räjan
     harñitäù puñpa-varñiëaù

     åñibhiù—by the sages; çrutibhiù—by the Vedas; sarvaiù—all; deva-gandharva-kinnaräù—by the devas gandharvas and kinnaras; tuñöuvuù—offered prayers; te—they; harim—to Kåñëa; räjan—O king; harñitäù—happy; puñpa-varñiëaù—showering flowers.

     Then the joyful devas, kinnaras, gandharvas, åñis, and personified Vedas offered prayers to Lord Kåñëa and showered HIm with flowers.

Text 11

kåñëäbhiñeke saïjäte
     giri-govardhano mahän
dravé-bhüto 'vahad räjan
     harñänandäditas tataù

     kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; abhiñeke—the coronation bathing; saïjäte—completed; giri-govardhanaù—on Govardhana Hill; mahän—great; dravé-bhütaù—become liquid; avahat—flowed; räjan—O king; harñänandäditaù—from the bliss; tataù—then.

     When the coronation bathing of Çré Kåñëa was completed noble Govardhana Hill became to melt with joy.

Text 12

prasanno bhagaväàs tasmin
     kåtavän hasta-paìkajam
tad-dhastaà cihnam adyäpi
     dåçayte tad-girau nåpa

     prasannaù—pleased; bhagaväàù—the Lord; tasmin—in that; kåtavän—did; hasta-paìkajam—lotus hand; tad-dhastam—His hand; cihnam—mark; adya—today; api—even; dåçayte—is seen; tad-girau—on that hill; nåpa—O king.

     Pleased, the Lord left the mark of His lotus hand on the melting hill. O king, even today that handprint can be seen on Govardhana Hill.

Text 13

tat térthaà ca paraà bhütaà
     naräëäà päpa-näçanam
tad eva pada-cihnaà syät
     tat térthaà viddhi maithila

     tat—that; tértham—holy place; ca—and; param—great; bhütam—become; naräëäm—of human beings; päpa-näçanam—destroying sins; tat—that; eva—indeed; pada-cihnam—footprint; syät—is; tat—that; tértham—holy place; viddhi—know; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, know that the footprints Kåñëa left there are a great holy place that destroys the people's sins.

Text 14

etävat tasya tatraiva
     päda-cihnaà babhüva ha
surabheù pada-cihnäni
     babhüvus tatra maithila

     etävat—like that; tasya—of Him; tatra—there; eva—indeed; päda-cihnam—footprint; babhüva—was; ha—indeed; surabheù—of the surabhi cow; pada-cihnäni—hoofprints; babhüvuù—were; tatra—there; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, next to Lord Kåñëa footprints were the surabhi cow's hoofprints.

Text 15

dyu-gaìgä-jala-pätena
     kåñëa-snänena maithila
tatra vai mänasi gaìgä
     girau jätägha-näçiné

     dyu—celestial; gaìgä—Ganges; jala—water; pätena—falling; kåñëa—Lord Kåñëa; snänena—bathing; maithila—O king of Mithilä; tatra—there; vai—indeed; mänasé gaìgä—the Mänasa-gaìgä; girau—on Govardhana Hill; jäta—manifested; agha—sins; näçiné—destroying.

     O king of Mithilä, the celestial Gaìgä water that bathed Lord Kåñëa on Govardhana Hill became the Mänasa-gaìgä lake, which destroys all sins.

Text 16

surabher dugdha-dhäräbhir
     govinda-snänato nåpa
jäto govinda-kuëòo 'drau
     mahä-päpa-haraù paraù

     surabheù—of the surabhin cow; dugdha-dhäräbhiù—with streams of milk; govinda-snänataù—from bathing Kåñëa; nåpa—O king; jätaù—born; govinda-kuëòaù—Govinda-kuëòa; adrau—on the hill; mahä-päpa-haraù—destroying the greatest sins; paraù—great.

     O king, the streams of the surabhi cow's milk that bathed Lord Kåñëa on Govardhana Hill became the Govinda-kuëòa lake, which destroys the greatest sins.

Text 17

kadäcit tasmin dugdhasya
     svädutvaà pratipadyate
tatra snätvä naraù säkñäd
     govinda-padam äpnuyät

     kadäcit—sometimes; tasmin—thgere; dugdhasya—of milk; svädutvam—deliciousness; pratipadyate—is manifested; tatra—there; snätvä—having bathed; naraù—a person; säkñät—directly; govinda-padam—the feet of Lord Kåñëa; äpnuyät—attains

     Sometimes the water in that lake tastes like delicious milk. One who bathes there attains Lord Kåñëa's feet.

Text 18

pradakñiëé-kåtya harià praëamya vai
     dattvä baléàs tatra purandarädayaù
jaya-dhvanià kåtya su-puñpa-varñiëo
     yayuù suräù saukhya-yutäs triviñöapam

     pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; harim—Lord Kåñëa; praëamya—bowing down; vai—certainly; dattvä—givving; baliàù—offerings; tatra—there; purandara—by Indra; ädayaù—headed; jaya—victory; dhvanim—sound; kåtya—doing; su-puñpa-varñiëaù—showering flowers; yayuù—went; suräù—the demigods; saukhya-yutäù—happy; triviñöapam—to the celestial worlds.

     Circumambulating Lord Kåñëa, bowing down, making many offerings, calling out, "All glories!" and showering Him with flowers, the happy demigods returned to their celestial abode.

Text 19

kåñëäbhiñekasya kathäà çåëoti yo
     daçäçvamedhävabhåthädhikaà phalam
präpnoti räjendra sa eva bhüyasaù
     paraà padaà yäti parasya vedhasaù

     kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; abhiñekasya—of the ceremonial bathing; kathäm—narration; çåëoti—hears; yaù—one who; daça—ten; açvamedha—asvamedha-yajnas; avabhåtha—bathing; adhikam—more; phalam—result; präpnoti—attains; räjendra—O king of kings; sa—he; eva—indeed; bhüyasaù—better; paraà padam—the supreme abode; yäti—attains; parasya—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vedhasaù—the creator.

     A person who hears this narration of Çré Kåñëa's ceremonial bathing attains a result much greater than the result of ten açvamedha-yajïas. He attains the supreme creator's transcendental abode.
.pa

Chapter Five
Gopa-viväda
The Dispute Among the Gopas

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
ekadä sarva-gopälä
     gopyo nanda-sutasya tat
adbhutaà caritaà dåñövä
     nandam ähur yaçomatim

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ekadä—one day; sarva-gopälä—all the gopas; gopyaù—gopés; nanda-sutasya—of Kåñëa; tat—that; adbhutam—wonderful; caritam—pastimes; dåñövä—seeing; nandam—to nanda; ähuù—said; yaçomatim—Yaçodä.

     Çré Närada said: Having seen Kåñëa wonderful and surprising pastimes, the gopas and gopés said to Nanda and Yaçodä:

Text 2

he gopa-räja tvad-vaàçe
     ko 'pi jäto na cädri-dhåk
na kñamas tvaà çiläà dhartuà
     saptähaà he yaçomati

     he—O; gopa—of the gopas; räja—king; tvad-vaàçe—in your family; ko 'pi—someone; jätaù—born; na—not; ca—and; adri—a hill; dhåk—lifter; na—not; kñamaù—able; tvam—you; çiläm—a rock; dhartum—to hold; sapta—for seven; aham—days; he—O; yaçomati—Yaçodä.

     O king of the gopas, no one in your family could lift a hill. O Yaçodä, you could not hold even a single rock for seven days.

Text 3

kva sapta-häyano bälaù
     kvädri-räjasya dhäraëam
tena no jäyate çaìkä
     tava putre mahä-bale

     kva—where; sapta-häyanaù—seven years old; bälaù—boy; kva—where?; adri-räjasya—the king of mountains; dhäraëam—holding; tena—by that; naù—of us; jäyate—is born; çaìkä—doubt; tava—of you; putre—in the son; mahä-bale—very powerful.

     What is the strength of a seven-year-old boy? How strong must one be to lift Govardhana Hill, the king of mountains? We have begun to doubt the identity of your unnaturally strong boy.

Text 4

ayaà bibhrad giri-varaà
     kamalaà gaja-räò iva
ucchiléndhraà yathä bälo
     hastenaikena lélayä

     ayam—He; bibhrat—holding; giri-varam—the greatest of mountains; kamalam—a lotus flower; gaja-räò—the king of elephants; iva—like; ucchiléndhram—a mushroom; yathä—as; bälaù—a boy; hastena ekena—with one hand; lélayä—playfully.

     With one hand He playfully held up the greatest of mountains as an elephant holds up a lotus flower or a child holds up a mushroom.

Text 5

gaura-varëä yaçodä tvaà
     nanda tvaà gaura-varëa-dhåk
ayaà jäta kåñëa-varëä
     etat-kula-vilakñaëam

     gaura-varëa—fair; yaçodä—Yaçodä; tvam—you; nanda—Nanda; tvam—you; gaura-varëa-dhåk—fair; ayam—He; jäta—born; kåñëa-varëä—dark; etat-kula—in this family; vilakñaëam—unusual.

     O Yaçodä, your complexion is fair. O Nanda, your complexion is also fair. This boy is very dark. He is different from the rest of the family.

Text 6

yad västu kñatriyäëäà tu
     bäla etädåço yathä
balabhadre na doñaù syäc
     candra-vaàça-samudbhave

     yat—what; vä—or; astu—may be; kñatriyäëäm—of the kñatriyas; tu—indeed; bäla—boy; etädåçaù—like this; yathä—as; balabhadre—for Balaräma; na—not; doñaù—a fault; syäc—is; candra-vaàça-samudbhave—born in the ksatriya dynasty of the moon-god.

     This boy is like a kñatriya. For Balaräma a kñatriya's nature is not unexpected. He was born in a kñatriya family descended from the moon-god.

Text 7

jïätes tyägaà kariñyämo
     yadi satyaà na bhäñase
gopeñu cäsya votpattià
     vada cen na kalir bhavet

     jïäteù—of the family; tyägam—renunciation; kariñyämaù—we will do; yadi—if; satyam—truth; na—not; bhäñase—you tell; gopeñu—among the gopas; ca—and; asya—of Him; vä—or; utpattim—birth; vada—tell; cen—if; na—not; kaliù—a quarrel; bhavet—may be.

     If you don't tell us the truth, we will leave the community. Was this boy really born in a family of gopas? If you don't tell us, there will be a great quarrel.

Text 8

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvä gopäla-vacanaà
     yaçodä bhaya-vihvalä
nanda-räjas tadä präha
     gopän krodha-prapüritän

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çrutvä—hearings; gopäla-vacanam—the gopas' words; yaçodä—Yaçodä; bhaya-vihvalä—overcome with fear; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; tadä—then; präha—said; gopän—to the gopas; krodha-prapüritän—filled with anger.

     Çré Närada said: As she heard the gopas' words, Yaçodä became gripped with fear. Then King Nanda spoke to the angry gopas.

Text 9

çré-nanda uväca 
gargasya väkyaà he gopä
     vadiñyämi samähitaù
yena gopa-gaëä yüyaà
     bhavatäçu gata-vyathäù

     çré-nanda uväca—Çré Nanda said; gargasya—of Garga Muni; väkyam—the words; he—O; gopä—gopas; vadiñyämi—I will speak; samähitaù—attentive; yena—by which; gopa-gaëä—O gopas; yüyam—you; bhavata—will be; äçu—at once; gata-vyathäù—free of distress.

     Çré Nanda said: O gopas, I will carefully tell you what Garga Muni said. O gopas, by his words you wil be quickly free of your anxiety. Garga Muni said to me:

Text 10

ka-käraù kamala-känto
     å-käro räma ity api
ña-käraù ñaò-guëa-patiù
     çvetadvépa-niväsa-kåt

     ka-käraù—the letter k; kamala-käntaù—the lover of the goddess of fortune; å-käraù—r; räma—Räma; ity—thus; api—also; ña-käraù—ñ; ñaò-guëa-patiù—the Lord who has six transcendental opulences; çvetadvépa-niväsa-kåt—the Lord who resides in Çvetadvépa.

     In the word "Kåñëa" the letter "k" means "the lover of the goddess of fortune", "å" means  Lord Rämacandra", "ñ" means "the Lord of six opulences" or "the Lord who resides in Çvetadvépa".

Text 11

ëa-käro narasiàho 'yaà
     a-käro hy akñaro 'gni-bhuk
visargau ca tathä hy etau
     nara-näräyaëäv åñé

     ëa-käraù—ë; narasiàhaù—Lord Nåsiàha; ayam—He; a-käraù—hy—a;; akñaraù—the eternal; agni-bhuk—He who enjoys what is offered int he sacrificial fire; visargau—ù; ca—and; tathä—so; hy—indeed; etau—both; nara-näräyaëäu åñé—Nara-Näräyaëa Åñi.

     "Ë" means "Lord Nåsiàha", "a" means "the eternal one" or "the Lord who enjoys what is offered in the sacrifical fire", and "ù" means "the Nara-Näräyaëa Åñis".

Text 12

sampralénaç ca ñaö-pürëä
     yasmin chabde mahätmäni
paripürëatame säkñät
     tena kåñëaù prakértitaù

     sampralénaù—entered; ca—and; ñaö—six; pürëä—full; yasmin—in which; chabde—sopund; mahätmäni—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; paripürëatame—perfect and complete; säkñät—directky; tena—by that; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; prakértitaù—is called. 

     These six letters combine to form the name of the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is perfect and complete. That is why this boy is named Kåñëa.

Text 13

çuklo raktas tathä péto
     varëo 'syänu-yugaà dhåtaù
dväparänte kaler ädau
     bälo 'yaà kåñëatäà gataù

     çuklaù—white; raktaù—red; tathä—so; pétaù—yellow; varëaù—colors; asya—of Him; anu-yugam—in each yuga; dhåtaù—held; dväparänte—at the end of Dvapara-yuag; kaleù—of kali-yuga; ädau—at the beginning; bälaù—boy; ayam—this; kåñëatäm—the state of being dark-complexioned Kåñëa; gataù—attains.

     In the other yugas He is white, red, or yellow, but at the end of Dväpara-yuga and the beginning of Kali-yuga, this boy becomes dark-complexioned (kåñëa).

Texts 14 and 15

tasmät kåñëa iti khyäto
     nämnäyaà nanda-nandanaù

vasavaç cendriyäëéti
     tad devaç citta eva hi
tasmin yaç ceñöate so 'pi      väsudeva iti småtaù

     tasmät—therefore; kåñëa—Kåñëa; iti—thus; khyätaù—named; nämnä—by the name; ayam—He; nanda-nandanaù—the son of Nanda; vasavaç—the Vasus; ca—and; indriyäëi—the senses; iti—thus; tat—that; devaç—Lord; citta—in the heart; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; tasmin—in that; yaç—who; ceñöate—acts; saù—He; api—indeed; väsudeva—väsudeva; iti—thus; småtaù—remembered.

     That is why Nanda's son has the name Kåñëa. Because He is the Lord (deva) that rules over the eight vasus (the heart, mind, intelligence, and the five senses), He is also called Väsudeva.

Text 16

våñabhänu-sutä rädhä
     yä jäta kérti-mandire
tasyäù patir ayaà säkñät
     tena rädhä-patiù småtaù

     våñabhänu-sutä—King Våñabhänu's daughter; rädhä—Rädhä; yä—who; jäta—is born; kérti-mandire—in Kérti's palace; tasyäù—of Her; patiù—the Lord; ayam—He; säkñät—directly; tena—by Him; rädhä-patiù—the Lord of Rädhä; småtaù—remembered.

     Because He is the husband (pati) of King Våñabhänu's daughter Rädhä, who was born in the palace of Kérti-devé, He is also called Rädhä-pati.

Text 17

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     goloke dhämni räjate

     paripürëatamaù—perfect and complete; säkñäc—directly; chré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—Himself; asaìkhya—countless; brahmäëòa—of universes; patiù—the master; goloke—in Goloka; dhämni—in the abode; räjate—is gloriously manifested.

     Çré Kåñëa is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is perfect and complete. He is the master of countless universes. In the transcendental abode of Goloka He shines with transcendental glory.

Text 18

so 'yaà tava çiçur jäto
     bhärävataraëäya ca
kaàsädénäà vadhärthäya
     bhaktänäà pälanäya ca

     saù—He; ayam—that very person; tava—of you; çiçuù—the son; jätaù—born; bhärävataraëäya—to relieve the burden; ca—and; kaàsädénäm—of the demons headed by Kaàsa; vadhärthäya—for killing; bhaktänäm—of the devotees; pälanäya—for protection; ca—and.

     In order to relieve the earth of its burden, kill the demons headed by Kaàsa, and protect the devotees, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead has now become your son.

Text 19

anantäny asya nämäni
     veda-guhyäni bhärata
léläbhiç ca bhaviñyanti
     tat-karmasu na vismayaù

     anantäni—endless; asya—of Him; nämäni—names; veda-guhyäni—hidden from the Vedas; bhärata—O descendent of Bharata; léläbhiç—with pastimes; ca—and; bhaviñyanti—will be; tat-karmasu—in His deeds; na—not; vismayaù—wonder.

     O descendent of Bharata, His names are endless. His names are hidden even from the Vedas. His transcendental pastimes will show what His names are. Do not be surprised by them.

Text 20

iti çrutvätmaje gopäù
     sandehaà na karomy aham
veda-väkyaà brahma-vacaù
     pramäëaà hi mahé-tale

     iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; atmaje—about his son; gopäù—the gopas; sandeham—doubt; na—not; karomy—did; aham—I; veda-väkyam—the words of the Vedas; brahma-vacaù—the words of a brähmaëa; pramäëam—evidence; hi—indeed; mahé-tale—on the earth.

     When I heard Garga Muni say this about my son, I did not doubt his words. The words of the Vedas and the words of a brähmaëa are the final proof of what is true in this world.

Text 21

çré-gopä ücuù 
yady ägatas tava gåhe
     gargäcäryo mahä-muniù
tat-kñaëe näma-karaëe
     nähüta jïätayas tvayä

     çré-gopäù ücuù—the gopas said; yady—if; ägataù—come; tava—of you; gåhe—in thebhome; gargacaryaù—Garga Muni; mahä-muniù—the great sage; tat-kñaëe—at that moment; näma-karane—in the name-giving ceremony; na—not; ähütä—called; jïätayaù—relatives; tvayä—by you.

     Ther gopas said: If the great sage Garga Muni actually came to your home and performed the name-giving ceremony, why did you not call your relatives to come and witness it?

Text 22

sva-gåhe näma-käraëaà
     bhavatä ca kåtaà çiçoù
tava caitädåçé rétir
     guptaà sarvaà gåhe 'pi yat

     sva-gåhe—in the home; näma-käraëam—the name-giving ceremony; bhavatä—by you; ca—and; kåtam—done; çiçoù—of the child; tava—of you; ca—and; etädåçé—like this; rétiù—method; guptam—hidden; sarvam—all; gåhe—in the home; api—even; yat—what.

     You kept the name-giving ceremony a secret even when it was performed in your own home!

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
evaà vadantas te gopä
     nirgatä nanda-mandirät
våñabhänu-varaà jagmuù
     krodha-pürita-vigrahäù

     çré-näradaù uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; vadantaù—speaking; te—the; gopä—gopas; nirgatä—left; nanda-mandirät—from Nanda's palace; våñabhänu-varam—to King Våñabhänu; jagmuù—went; krodha-pürita-vigrahäù—their bodies filled with anger.

     Çré Närada said: Their bodies filled with anger as they spoke these words, the gopas left Nanda's palace and went to King Våñabhänu.

Text 24

våñabhänu-varaà säkñän
     nanda-räja-sahäyakam
prähur gopa-gaëäù sarve
     jïäter mada-samanvitäù

     våñabhänu-varam—to King Våñabhänu; säkñän—directlky; nanda-räja-sahäyakam—King Nanda's assistant; prähuù—said; gopa-gaëäù—the gopas; sarve—all; jïäteù—for their relative; mada-samanvitäù—filled with anger.

     Filled with anger for their kinsman Nanda, all the gopas spoke to Nanda's friend, King Våñabhänu.

Text 25

çré-gopä ücuù 
våñabhänu-vara tvaà vai
     jïäti-mukhyo mahä-manäù
nanda-räjaà tyaja jïäter
     he gopeçvara bhü-pate

     çré-gopäù ücuù—the gopas said; våñabhänu-vara—O King Våñabhänu; tvam—you; vai—indeed; jïäti-mukhyaù—the best of the family; mahä-manäù—noble-hearted; nanda-räjam—King Nanda; tyaja—reject; jïäteù—of the relative; he—O; gopeçvara—king of the gopas; bhü-pate—O king.

     The gopas said: O King Våñabhänu, you have a noble heart. You are the best person in our community. O king, O leader of the gopas, you should sever your ties of friendship with King Nanda.

Text 26

çré-våñabhänu-vara uväca 
ko doño nanda-räjasya
     jïätes tvaà santyajämy aham
gopeñöo jïäti-mukuöo
     nanda-räjo mama priyaù

     çré-våñabhänu-vara uväca—King Våñabhänu said; kaù—what?; doñaù—is the fault; nanda-räjasya—of King Nanda; jïäteù—of the kinsman; tvam—you; santyajämy—I shall abandon; aham—I; gopeñöaù—worshiped by the gopas; jïäti—of the family; mukuöaù—the crown; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; mama—to me; priyaù—dear.

     Çré Våñabhänu said: What wrong has King Nanda done that I should sever my ties of friendship with him? King Nanda is worshiped by the gopas. He is the crown that gloriously decorates our community. He is my dear friend.

Text 27

çré-gopä ücuù 
na cet tyajasi taà räjaàs
     tyajämas tväà vrajaukasaù
tvad-gåhe vardhitä kanyo-
     dvaha-yogyä mahä-mune

     çré-gopäù ücuù—the gopas said; na—not; cet—if; tyajasi—you reject; tam—him; räjaàù—O king; tyajämaù—we reject; tväm—you; vrajaukasaù—the residents of Vraja; tvad-gåhe—in your home; vardhitä—increased; kanyä—of the daughter; udvaha—for marriage; yogyä—suitable; mahä-mune—O thoughtful one.

     The gopas said: O king, if you do not sever your ties of friendship with him, we, the people of Vraja, will sever our ties of friendship with you. O thoughtful one, in your home you have a grown-up daughter of marriageable age.

Text 28

bhavatä jïäti-mukhyena
     sampad-unmada-sälinä
na dattä vara-mukhyäya
     kaluñaà tava vidyate

     bhavatä—by you; jïäti-mukhyena—the first person in the community; sampad-unmada-sälinä—mad with opulence; na—not; dattä—given; vara-mukhyäya—to a bridegroom; kaluñam—fault; tava—of you; vidyate—will be.

     If you, the first person in our community, who have now become maddened with your wealth and opulences, find yourself unable to give Her in marriage to a suitable bridegroom, the fault will be yours alone.

Text 29

adya tvaà jïäti-sambhrañöam
     påthäì manyämahe nåpa
na cec chéghraà nanda-räjam
     tyaja tyaja mahä-mate

     adya—now; tvam—you; jïäti—from the community; sambhrañöam—fallen; påthän—specific; manyämahe—we think; nåpa—O king; na—not; cec—if; chéghram—for a long time; nanda-räjam—King nanda; tyaja—reject; tyaja—reject; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     If you do not for a long time sever your ties of friendship with King Nanda, we will ostracize you from our community. O noble-hearted one, reject, reject King Nanda.

Text 30

çré-våñabhänu-vara uväca 
gargasya väkyaà he gopä
     vadiñyämi samähitaù
yena gopa-gaëä yüyaà
     bhavatäçu gata-vyathäù

     çré-våñabhänu-vara uväca—King Våñabhänu said; gargasya—of Garga; väkyam—the words; he—O; gopä—gopas; vadiñyämi—I will tell; samähitaù—careful; yena—by which; gopa-gaëä—O gopas; yüyam—you; bhavata—will become; äçu—at once; gata-vyathäù—free of anxiety.

     Çré Våñabhänu said: O gopas, I will repeat for you Garga Muni's words. Those words will make you free of all these anxieties. Garga Muni said:

Text 31

asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     golokeçaù parät paraù
tasmät paro varo nästi
     jäto nanda-gåhe çiçuù

     asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patiù—the master of countless universes; golokeçaù—themaster of Goloka; parät—than the greatest; paraù—greater; tasmät—than Him; paro varaù—greate; na—not; asti—is; jätaù—born; nanda-gåhe—in nanda's home; çiçuù—the boy.

     The boy that was born in Nanda's home is the master of countless universes. He is the master of Goloka. He is greater than the greatest. No one is greater than Him.

Text 32

bhuvo bhärävatäräya
     kaàsädénäà vadhäya ca
brahmaëä prärthitaù kåñëo
     babhüva jagaté-tale

     bhuvaù—of the earth; bhärävatäräya—to remove the burden; kaàsädénäm—beginning with Kaàsa; vadhäya—for killing; ca—and; brahmaëä—by Brahmä; prärthitaù—requested; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; babhüva—became; jagaté-tale—on the earth.

     On the demigod Brahmä's request, Kåñëa came to this universe to remove the earth's burden and kill the demons headed by Kaàsa.

Text 33

çré-kåñëa-paööa-räjïé yä
     goloke rädhikäbhidhä
tvad-gåhe so 'pi saïjätä
     tvaà na jänäsi täà paräm

     çré-kåñëa-paööa-räjïé—Çré Kåñëa's frist queen; yä—who; goloke—in Goloka; rädhikäbhidhä—named Rädhä; tvad-gåhe—in your home; saù—He; api—also; saïjätä—born; tvam—you; na—not; jänäsi—know; tam—that; param—great.

     Çré Rädhä, who in the realm of Goloka is Çré Kåñëa's first queen, has taken birth in your home. You do not know how exalted She is.

Text 34

ahaà na kärayiñyämi
     viväham anayor nåpa
tayor viväho bhavitä
     bhäëòére yamunä-taöe

     aham—I; na—not; kärayiñyämi—will arrange; viväham—the marriage; anayoù—of Them; nåpa—O king; tayoù—of Them; vivähaù—the marriage; bhavitä—will be; bhäëòire—in Bhandiravana; yamunä—of the Yamunä; taöe—on the shore.

     I will not arrange the marriage of Rädhä and Kåñëa. They will be married in Bhäëòéravan forest by the Yamunä's shore.

Text 35

våndävana-samépe ca
     nirjane sundare sthale
parameñöhé samägatya
     vivähaà kärayiñyati

     våndävana-samépe—near Våndävana forest; ca—and; nirjane—in a secluded spot; sundare—beautiful; sthale—place; parameñöhé—the demigod Brahmä; samägatya—coming; viväham—the marriage; kärayiñyati—will perform.

     In a beautiful secluded place near Våndävana forest the demigod Brahmä will perform their wedding.

Text 36

tasmäd rädhäà gopa-varä
     viddhy ardhäìgéà parasya ca
loka-cüòä-maëeù säkñäd
     räjïéà goloka-mandire

     tasmät—therefor3; rädhäm—Rädhä; gopa-varä—O best of gopas; viddhy—know; ardhäìgém—half of the body; parasya—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca—and; loka—of the worlds; cüòä—the crest; maëeù—jewel; säkñät—directly; räjïém—the queen; goloka-mandire—in the palace of Goloka.

     O best of the gopas, please understand that, in the palace of Goloka, Rädhä is the first queen of Çré Kåñëa, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the crest jewel of the worlds.

Text 37

yüyaà sarve 'pi gopälä
     golokäd ägatä bhuvi
tathä gopé-gaëä gävo
     gokule rädhikecchayä

     yüyam—you; sarve—all; api—also; gopälä—O gopas; golokät—from Goloka; ägatä—come; bhuvi—in the earth; tathä—so; gopé-gaëä—the gopés; gävaù—the cows; gokule—in Gokula; rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; icchayä—by the desire.

     From Goloka all you gopas have come to the earth. The gopés and cows have also come, by Rädhä's wish from Goloka.

Text 38

evam uktvä gate säkñäd
     gargäcärye mahä-munau
tad-dinäd atha rädhäyaà
     sandehaà na karomy aham

     evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; gate—gone; säkñät—directlky; gargäcärye—Garga Muni; mahä-munau—great sage; tad-dinät—from that day; atha—then; rädhäyam—in Rädhä; sandeham—doubt; na—not; karomy—do; aham—I.

     After speaking these words, the great sage Garga Muni left. From that day I have not doubted Rädhä's exalted position.

Text 39

veda-väkyaà brahma-vacaù
     pramäëaà hi mahé-tale
iti vaù kathitaà gopäù
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchatha

     veda-väkyam—the words of the Vedas; brahma-vacaù—the words of a brähmaëa; pramäëam—evidence; hi—indeed; mahé-tale—on the earth; iti—thus; vaù—by us; kathitam—spoken; gopäù—O gopas; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchatha—do you wish.

     The words of the Vedas and the words of a brähmaëa are the final proof of what is true in this world. O gopas, now I have explained all this to you. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Six
Çré Hari-parékñaëa
The Test of Çré Kåñëa

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
våñabhänu-varasyedaà
     vacaù çrutvä vrajaukasaù
ücuù punaù çänti-gatä
     vismitä mukta-saàçayäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; våñabhänu-varasya—of zking Våñabhänu; idam—this; vacaù——statement; çrutvä—hearing; vrajaukasaù—the residents of Vraja; ücuù—said; punaù—again; çänti-gatä—peaceful; vismitä—astonished; mukta-saàçayäù—free from doubt.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing King Våñabhänu's words, the surprised people of Vraja became peaceful and free of all doubts.

Text 2

çré-gopä ücuù 
samicénäà varo räjan
     rädheyaà tu hari-priyä
tat-prabhävena te dérghaà
     vaibhavaà dåçyate bhuvi

     çré-gopä ücuù—the gopas said; samicénäm—truth; varaù—best; räjan—O king; rädhä—Rädhä; iyam—She; tu—indeed; hari-priyä—dear to Lord Hari; tat-prabhävena—by His power; te—indeed; dérgham—long; vaibhavam—glory; dåçyate—is seen; bhuvi—on the earth. 

     The gopas said: O king, you speak the truth. Rädhä is Lord Hari's beloved. His potencies have made you become opulent and glorious in this world.

Texts 3-5

sahasraço gajä mattäù
     koöiço 'çväç ca caïcaläù
rathäç ca deva-dhiñëyäbhäù
     çibikäù koöiçaù çubhäù

koöiçaù koöiço gävo
     hema-ratna-manoharäù
mandiräëi viciträëi
     ratnäni vividhäni ca

sarvaà saukhyaà bhojanädi
     dåçyate sämprataà tava
kaàso 'pi dharñito jäto
     dåñövä te balam adbhutam

     sahasraçaù—thousands; gajä—elephants; mattäù—maddened; koöiçaù—millions; açväù—horses; ca—and; caïcaläù—restless; rathäù—chariots; ca—and; deva-dhiñëyäbhäù—splendid as the homes of the demigods; çibikäù—palanquins; koöiçaù—millions; çubhäù—glory; koöiçaù—millions; koöiçaù—and millions; gävaù—cows; hema-ratna-manoharäù—beautiful with gold and jewels; mandiräëi—palaces; viciträëi—wonderful; ratnäni—jewels; vividhäni—various; ca—and; sarvam—all; saukhyam—happiness; bhojanädi—beginning with enjoymwent; dåçyate—is seen; sämpratam—now; tava—of you; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; api—even; dharñitaù—defeated; jätaù—born; dåñövä—seeing; te—of you; balam—the strength; adbhutam—wonderful.

     We see that you have thousands of intoxicated elephants, tens of millions of restless horses, tens of millions of chariots glorious as the demigods' airplanes, tens of millions of beautiful palanquins, many millions and millions of cows beautiful with gold and jewels, many wonderful jewel palaces, and all possible pleasures. Even Kaàsa himself is defeated when he sees your wonderful strength.

Text 6

känyakubja-pateù säkñäd
     bhalandana-nåpasya ca
jämätä tvaà mahä-véra
     kuvera iva koçavän

     känyakubja-pateù—the king of Kanyakubja; säkñät—directly; bhalandana-nåpasya—of King Bhalandana; ca—and; jämätä—the son-in-law; tvam—you; mahä-véra—Ogreat hero; kuvera—Kuvera; iva—like; koçavän—rich.

     You are the son-in-law of King Bhalandana, the ruler of Känyakubja. You are as rich as Kuvera.

Text 7

tvat-samaà vaibhavaà nästi
     nanda-räja-gåhe kvacit
kåñévalo nanda-räjo
     go-patir déna-mänasaù

     tvat—to you; samam—equal; vaibhavam—glory; na—not; asti—is; nanda-räja-gåhe—in the home of King Nanda; kvacit—anywhere; kåñévalaù—farmer; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; go-patiù—the matser of cows; déna-mänasaù—unhappy at heart.

     Even King Nanda's home does not have wealth and opulence equal to yours. The farmer King Nanda, who is the master of many cows, is poor-hearted in comparison to you.

Text 8

yadi nanda-sutaù säkñät
     paripürëatamo hariù
sarveñäà paçyatäà nas tat
     parékñäà käraya prabho

     yadi—if; nanda-sutaù—nanda's son; säkñät—directiy; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hariù—Lord Hari; sarveñäm—of all; paçyatäm—looking on; naù—of us; tat—of Him; parékñäm—a test; käraya—please make; prabhaù—O lord.

     O master, if Nanda's son is in truth the Supreme Personality of Godhead, then please put Him to a test that will reveal His divinity as we all watch.

Text 9

çré-närada uväca 
teñäà väkyaà tataù çrutvä
     våñabhänu-varo mahän
cakära nanda-räjasya
     vaibhavasya parékñaëam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; teñäm—of them; väkyam—the wprds; tataù—then; çrutvä—hearing; våñabhänu-varaù—King Våñabhänu; mahän—great; cakära—did; nanda-räjasya—of King Nanda; vaibhavasya—of the opulence; parékñaëam—test.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing their words, King Våñabhänu devised a test to determine the extent of King Nanda's wealth.

Texts 10 and 11

koöi-dämäni muktänäà
     sthülänäà maithileçvara
ekaikä yeñu muktäç ca
     koöi-maulyäù sphurat-prabhäù

nidhäya täni pätreñu
     våëänaiù kuçalair janaiù
preñayäm äsa nandäya
     sarveñäà paçyatäà nåpa

     koöi—ten million; damäni—strings; muktänäm—of pearls; sthülänäm—great; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä; ekaikä—one by one; yeñu—in which; muktäç—pearls; ca—and; koöi-maulyäù—ten million crowns; sphurat-prabhäù—splendid; nidhäya—placing; täni—them; pätreñu—in caskets; våëänaiù—with messengers bearing a proposal of marriage; kuçalaiù—handsome; janaiù—by men; preñayäm äsa—sent; nandäya—to Nanda; sarveñäm—of all; paçyatäm—watching; nåpa—O king.

     O king of Mithilä, as everyone watched, King Våñabhänu took ten million necklaces of giant pearls, each pearl splendid as ten million glittering crowns, placed them in many jewel caskets, and had many handsome men take them to King Nanda with a proposal for his son's marriage.

Text 12

nanda-räja-sabhäà gatvä
     våëänäù kuçaläù bhåçäà nidhäya däma-päträëi
     nandam ähuù praëamya tam

     nanda-räja-sabhäm—to King Nanda's assembly; gatvä—going; våëänäù—the men bearin ghe marriage-proposal; kuçaläù—handsome; bhåçäm—greatly; nidhäya—placing; däma-päträëi—the caskets of pearls; nandam—to Nanda; ähuù—said; praëamya—bowing down; tam—to him.

     Entering King Nanda's assembly, bowing down, and presenting the caskets of pearls, the handsome men bearing the marriage-proposal spoke to Nanda.

Texts 13 and 14

våëänä ücuù 
viväha-yogyäà nava-kaïja-neträà
     koöéndu-bimba-dyutim ädadhänäm
vijïäya rädhäà våñabhänu-mukhyas
     cakre vicäraà su-varaà vicinvan

taväìgajaà divyam anaìga-mohanaà
     govardhanoddharaëa-doù-samudbhaöam
samvékñya casmän våñabhänu-vanditaù
     sampreñayäm äsa viçämpate prabho

     våëänä ücuùthe men bearing the marriage-proposal; viväha—for marriage; yogyäm—suitable; nava-kaïja-neträm—whose eyes are new lotus flowers; koöi—ten million; indu—moons; bimba—circles; dyutim—splendor; ädadhänäm—taking; vijïäya—understanding; rädhäm—Rädhä; våñabhänu-mukhyaù—King Våñabhänu; cakre—did; vicäram—consideration; su-varam—a suitable husband; vicinvan—selected; tava—of you; aìgajam—the son; divyam—glorious; anaìga-mohanam—more charming than Kämadeva; govardhana—Govardhana Hill; uddharaëa—lifting; doù—arm; samudbhaöam—power; samvékñya—seeing; ca—and; asmän—us; våñabhänu-vanditaù—glorious King Våñabhänu; sampreñayäm äsa—sent; viçämpate—O king of the vaiçyas; prabhaù—O master.

     The men bearing a marriage-proposal said: Aware that his daughter Rädhä, who is splendid as ten million moons and whose eyes are like new lotus flowers, is now old enough to be married, King Våñabhänu has given some thought to who should be Her husband. He has decided on your son, who is charming as Kämadeva himself, and whose powerful arm lifted Govardhana Hill. O master, O king of the vaiçyas, seeing us, glorious King Våñabhänu sent us with this message. 

Text 15

varasya cäìke bharaëäya pürvaà
     muktä-phalänäà nicayaà gåhäëa
itaç ca kanyärtham alaà pradehi
     saiñä hi cäsmät kulajä prasiddhiù

     varasya—of the bridegroom; ca—and; aìke—on the lap; bharaëäya—for holding; pürvam—before; muktä-phalänäm—of pearls; nicayam—abundance; gåhäëa—please take; itaù—from this; ca—and; kanyä—girl; artham—wealth; alam—great; pradehi—please give; sa—she; eñä—She; hi—indeed; ca—and; asmät—from that; kulajä—respectable; prasiddhiù—glorious.

     Please accept these pearls as a wedding-gift. Please give a similar gift to this girl. She is very respectable and glorious.

Text 16

çré-närada uväca 
dåñövä dravyaà paro nando
     vismito 'pi vicärayan
prañöuà yaçodäà tat-tulyaà
     nitvä cäntaù-puraà yayau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; dåñövä—seeing; dravyam—thing; paraù—great; nandaù—Nanda; vismitaù—astonished; api—even; vicärayan—considering; prañöum—to ask; yaçodäm—Yaçodä; tat-tulyam—equal to that; nitvä—bringing; ca—and; antaù-puram—to the inner rooms of the palace; yayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: Gazing at the precious gift, Nanda became filled with wonder. Thinking to ask Yaçodä if they had anything equal to that gift, he went to the palace's inner rooms.

Text 17

ciraà dadhyau tadä nando
     yaçodä ca yasaçviné
etan-muktä-samänaà tu
     dravyaà nästi gåhe mama

     ciram—a long time; dadhyau—gave; tadä—then; nandaù—Nanda; yaçodä—Yaçodä; ca—and; yasaçviné—glorious; etan-muktä—to those pearls; samänam—equal; tu—indeed; dravyam—something; na—not; asti—is; gåhe—in the homne; mama—my.

     Thinking for a long time, King Nanda and glorious Yaçodä came to the same conclusion: "In our home there is nothing equal to these pearls.

Text 18

loke lajjä gatä sarvä
     häsaù syäc ced dhanodbhåtam
kià kartavyaà tat prati yac
     chré-kåñëodväha-karmaëi

     loke—before the people; lajjä—embarrassment; gatä—attained; sarvä—all; häsaù—laughter; syäc—will be; cet—if; dhana—wealth; udbhåtam—held; kim—what?; kartavyam—should be done; tat—that; prati—to; yac—what; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; udväha—marriage; karmaëi—in the deed.

     "If we do not give a proper gift we will be embarrassed before everyone. Everyone will laugh at us. What should we do? What can we give on the occasion of Çré Kåñëa's wedding?"

Texts 19-21

tato 'yogyaà tad-grahaëaà
     paçcät käryaà dhanägame
evaà cintayatas tasya
     nandasyaiva yaçodayä

älakñya ägatas tatra
     bhagavän våjiëärdanaù
nétvä däma-çataà teñu
     bahiù-kñetreñu sarvataù

muktä-phaläni caikaikaà
     präkñipat sva-kareëa vai
yathä béjäni cännänäà
     sva-kñetreñu kåñévalaù

     tataù—then; ayogyam—unsuitable; tad-grahaëam—acceptance of that; paçcät—then; käryam—to be done; dhana—wealth; ägame—in the arrival; evam—thus; cintayataù—thinking; tasya—of him; nandasya—King Nanda; eva—indeed; yaçodayä—with Yaçodä; älakñya—seeing; ägataù—come; tatra—there; bhagavän—the Lord; våjiëärdanaù—the savior from sins; nétvä—taking; däma-çatam—a hundred necklaces; teñu—in them; bahiù-kñetreñu—in the fields; sarvataù—everywhere; muktä-phaläni—pearls; ca—and; eka-ekam—one by one; präkñipat—threw; sva-kareëa—with His own hand; vai—indeed; yathä—as; béjäni—seeds; ca—and; annänäm—of grains; sva-kñetreñu—in His own fields; kåñévalaù—a farmer.

     Observing that Nanda and Yaçodä thought they had nothing suitable to give in return, Lord Kåñëa, the savior from distress, took one hundred of the pearl necklaces and, with His own hand, planted the pearls one by one as if He were a farmer planting grains. 

Text 22

atha nando 'pi gaëayan
     kalikä-nicayaà punaù
çataà nyünaà ca tad dåñövä
     sandehaà sa jagäma ha

     atha—then; nandaù—Nanda; api—also; gaëayan—counting; kalikä-nicayam—the pearl necklaces; punaù—again; çatam—one hundred; nyünam—diminished; ca—and; tat—that; dåñövä—seeing; sandeham—doubt; sa—he; jagäma—attained; ha—indeed.

     When he again counted the pearl necklaces, and found they were one hundred necklaces less, Nanda became filled with doubt.

Text 23

çré-nanda uväca 
nästi pürvaà yat-samänaà
     taträpi nyünatäà gatam
aho kalaìko bhavitä
     jïätiñu sveñu sarvataù

     çré-nanda uväca—Çré Nanda said; na—not; asti—is; pürvam—before; yat-samänam—equal to that; tatra—there; api—also; nyünatäm—diminution; gatam—attained; ahaù—Oh; kalaìkaù—fault; bhavitä—will be; jïätiñu—among the relatives; sveñu—own; sarvataù—in al, respects.

     Çré Nanda said: There are fewer necklaces than before. Alas, this is the fault of my own relatives!

Text 24

athavä kréòanärthaà hi
     kåñëo yadi gåhétavän
baladevo 'thavä bälas
     tau påcche déna-mänasaù

     athavä—or; kréòanärtham—in order to play; hi—indeed; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; yadi—if; gåhétavän—took; baladevaù—Baladeva; athavä—or; bälaù—boys; tau—They; påcche—I will ask; déna-mänasaù—poor at heart.

     Now I am unhappy at heart. I will ask whether Kåñëa or Balaräma took the necklaces for their playing.

Text 25

çré-närada uväca 
itthaà vicärya nando 'pi
     kåñëaà papraccha sädaram
prahasan bhagavän nandaà
     präha govardhanoddharaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; vicärya—considering; nandaù—Nanda; api—also; kåñëam—Kåñëa; papraccha—asked; sädaram—respectfully; prahasan—laughing; bhagavän—the Lord; nandam—to Nanda; präha—said; govardhanoddharaù—the lifter of Govardhana Hill.

     Çré Närada said: Thinking in this way, Nanda asked Kåñëa. Lord Kåñëa, the lifter of Govardhana Hill, smiled and respectfully spoke to King Nanda.

Text 26

çré-bhagavän uväca 
kåñévalä vayaà gopäù
     sarva-béja-prarohakäù
kñetre muktä-prabéjäni
     vikérëé-kåta-vähanam

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; kåñévalä—farmers; vayam—we; gopäù—gopas; sarva-béja—all seeds; prarohakäù—planting; kñetre—in the fields; muktä-prabéjäni—seeds of pearls; vikérëé-kåta-vähanam—scattering.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: We gopas are farmers. We plant all kinds of seeds. I planted some pearls in the fields.

Text 27

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvätha svätmajenoktaà
     taà nirbhartsya vrajeçvaraù
täni netuà tat-sahitas
     tat-kñeträëi jagäma ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çrutvä—hearing; atha——then; svätmajena—by his own son; uktam—spoken; tam—Him; nirbhartsya—rebuking; vraja—of Vraja; éçvaraù—the king; täni—them; netum—to bring; tat-sahitaù—with Him; tat-kñeträëi—to the fields; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing his son's words, and rebuking Him, Nanda, the king of Vraja, went with Him to the fields to retrieve the pearls.

Text 28

tatra muktä-phälänäà tu
     çäkhinaù çataçaù çubhäù
dåçyate dérgha-vapuño
     harit-pallava-çobhitäù

     tatra—there; muktä-phälänäm—of pearls; tu—indeed; çäkhinaù—trees; çataçaù—hundreds; çubhäù—beautiful; dåçyate—is seen; dérgha-vapuñaù—tall; harit—green; pallava—leaves; çobhitäù—handsome.

     There they saw hundreds of beautiful, tall, green-leaved pearl trees.

Text 29

muktänäà stabakänäà tu
     koöiçaù koöiço nåpa
saìghä vilambitä rejur
     jyotiàséva nabhaù-sthale

     muktänäm—of pearls; stabakänäm—clusters; tu—indeed; koöiçaù—ten millions; koöiçaù—ten millions; nåpa—O king; saìghä—multitude; vilambitä—hanging; rejuù—shone; jyotiàsi—stars; iva—like; nabhaù-sthale—in the sky.

     O king, in that place millions upon millions of bunches of pearls shone like many stars in the sky.

Text 30

tadäti-harñito nando
     jïätvä kåñëaà pareçvaram
muktä-phaläni divyäni
     pürva-sthüla-samäni ca

     tadä—then; ati—very; harñitaù—pleased; nandaù—Nanda; jïätvä—understood; kåñëam—Kåñëa; pareçvaram—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; muktä-phaläni—pearls; divyäni—glittering; pürva-sthüla-samäni—bigger than the previous ones; ca—indeed.

     Then the dlighted Nanda could understand that Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. These glittering pearls were bigger even than the first ones.

Text 31

teñäà tu koöi-bhäräëi
     nidhäya çakaöeñu ca
dadau tebhyo våëänebhyo
     nanda-räjo vrajeçvaraù

     teñäm—of them; tu—indewed; koöi-bhäräëi—millions of bharas; nidhäya—placing; çakaöeñu—on carts; ca—and; dadau—gave; tebhyaù—them; våëänebhyaù—to messengers bearing amrriage proposal; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; vrajeçvaraù—the king of Vraja.

     Placing many millions of bhäras of these pearls on many wagons, Nanda, the king of Vraja, gave them to the men carrying the marriage-proposal.

Text 32

te gåhétvätha tat sarvaà
     våñabhänu-varaà gataù
sarveñäà çåëvatäà nanda-
     vaibhavaà prajagur nåpa

     te—they; gåhétvä—taking; atha—then; tat—that; sarvam—all; våñabhänu-varam—to King Våñabhänu; gataù—went; sarveñäm—of all; çåëvatäm—hearing; nanda-—of Nanda; vaibhavam—the wealth; prajaguù—glorified; nåpa—O king.

     They took the gift and gave it all to King Våñabhänu. O king, everyone who saw this pastime praised the great wealth of King Nanda.

Text 33

tadäti-vismitäù sarve
     jïätvä nanda-sutaà harim
våñabhänu-varaà nemur
     niùsandehä vrajaukasaù

     tadä—then; ati-vismitäù—astonished; sarve—all; jïätvä—understanding; nanda-sutam—Nanda's son; harim—Lord Hari; våñabhänu-varam—to King Våñabhänu; nemuù—bowed down; niùsandehä—free from doubt; vrajaukasaù—the residents of Vraja.

     Filled with wonder, free of doubt, and now convinced that Nanda's son really was the Supreme Personality of Godhead, all the people of Vraja bowed down before King Våñabhänu.

Text 34

rädhä hareù priyä jïätä
     rädhäyaç ca priyo hariù
jïäto vraja-janaiù sarvais
     tad-dinän maithileçvara

     rädhä—Rädhä; hareù—of Lord Hari; priyä—beloved; jïätä—understood; rädhäyäù—of Rädhä; ca—and; priyaù—beloved; hariù—Lord Hari; jïätaù—understood; vraja-janaiù—by the people of Vraja; sarvaiù—all; tad-dinän—from that day; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, from that day on everyone in Vraja understood that Rädhä was Kåñëa's beloved and Kåñëa was Rädhä's beloved.

Text 35

muktä-kñepaù kåto yatra
     hariëä nanda-sünunä
muktä-sarovaras tatra
     jäto maithila tértha-räö

     muktä—the pearls; kñepaù—tossing; kåtaù—did; yatra—where; hariëä—by Lord Hari; nanda-sünunä—the son of Nanda; muktä-sarovaraù—Muktä-sarovara; tatra—there; jätaù—manifested; maithila—O king of Mithilä; tértha—of holy places; räö—the king.

     O king of Mithilä, the place where Nanda's son planted pearls became the lake Muktä-sarovara, the king of holy places.

Text 36

ekaà muktä-phalasyäpi
     dänaà tatra karoti yaù
lakña-muktä-däna-phalaà
     samäpnoti na saàçayaù

     ekam—one; muktä-phalasya—of a pearl; api—even; dänam—a string; tatra—there; karoti—does; yaù—who; lakña—a hundred thousand; muktä—pearls; däna—gift; phalam—result; samäpnoti—attains; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who at that place gives in charity a single pearl attains the result of giving a hundred thousand pearls. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 37

evaà te kathito räjan
     giriräja-mahotsavaù
bhukti-mukti-prado nåëäà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     evam—thus; te—to you; kathitaù—spoken; räjan—O king; giriräja-mahotsavaù—the festival of the king of mountains; bhukti—sense gratification; mukti—and liberation; pradaù—giving; nåëäm—of human beings; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     O king, in this way I have described to you Govardhana Hill's festival, which brings with it both sense gratification and liberation. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Seven
Çré Giriräja-tértha
The Holy Places of Çré Giriräja

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
kati mukhyäni térthäni
     giriräje mahätmani
etad brühi mahä-yogin
     säkñät tvaà divya-darçanaù

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; kati—how many; mukhyäni—important; térthäni—holy places; giriräje—on Govardhana Hill; mahätmani—the great soul; etat—that; brühi—please tell; mahä-yogin—O great yogi; säkñät—directly; tvam—you; divya-darçanaù—transcendental vision.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: How many holy places are on noble-hearted Govardhana Hill? O great yogé, you have transcendental vision. Please tell me this.

Text 2

çré-närada uväca 
räjan govardhanaù sarvaù
     sarva-tértha-varaù småtaù
våndävanaà ca goloka-
     mukuöo 'driù präpüjitaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; räjan—O king; govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; sarvaù—all; sarva-tértha-varaù—the best of all holy places; småtaù—considered; våndävanam—Våndävana; ca—and; goloka—of Goloka; mukuöaù—the crown; adriù—the hill; präpüjitaù—worshiped.

     Çré Närada said: O king, Våndävana forest and Govardhana Hill, which is the crown of Goloka, are both worshiped as the best of holy places.

Text 3

gopa-gopé-gaväà rakña-
     pradaà kåñëa-priyo mahän
pürëa-brahmätapatro yas
     tasmät tértha-varas tu kaù

     gopa-gopé-gaväm—of the gopas, gopis, and cows; rakña—proetction; pradam—giving; kåñëa-priyaù—dear to Lord  Kåñëa; mahän—great; pürëa—full; brahma—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; atapatraù—the parasol; yaù—who; tasmät—from that; tértha-varaù—the best of holy places; tu—indeed; kaù—what?

     Noble Govardhana Hill is dear to Lord Kåñëa. It is the Supreme Personality of Godhead's parasol. It protects the cows, gopas, and gopés. What holy place is better than Govardhana Hill?

Text 4

indra-yägaà vinirbhartsya
     sarvair nija-janaiù saha
yat-püjanaà samärebhe
     bhagavän bhuvaneçvaraù

     indra—for Indra; yägam—the sacrifice; vinirbhartsya—criticizing; sarvaiù—by all; nija-janaiù—His own people; saha—with; yat—of which; püjanam—the worship; samärebhe—performed; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhuvaneçvaraù—the master of the worlds.

     Lord Kåñëa, the master of all the worlds, mocked the indra-yajna. Accompanied by His relatives, He worshiped Govardhana Hill.

Text 5

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     golokeçaù parät paraù

     paripürëatamaù—supremely perfect; säkñäc—direwctly; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—Himself; asaìkhya—countless; brahmäëòa—of universes; patiù—the master; golokeçaù—the master of Goloka; parät—than the greatest; paraù—greater.

     Çré Kåñëa is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, greater than the greatest, the master of Goloka, the ruler of countless universes.

Text 6

yasmin sthitaù sadä kréòäà
     arbhakaiù saha maithila
karoti tasya mähätmyaà
     vaktuà nälaà catur-mukhaù

     yasmin—in whom; sthitaù—situated; sadä—always; kréòäm—pastimes; arbhakaiù—with boys; saha—with; maithila—O king of Mithilä; karoti—does; tasya—of it; mähätmyam—the glory; vaktum—to say; na—not; alam—able; catur-mukhaù—four-faced Brahmä.

     O king of Mithilä, even the demigod Brahmä cannot properly glorify Govardhana Hill, where Lord Kåñëa eternally plays with the gopa boys, . . . 

Text 7

yatra vai mänasé gaìgä
     mahä-päpaugha-näçiné
govinda-kuëòaà viçadaà
     çubhaà candra-sarovaram

     yatra—where; vai—indeed; mänasé gaìgä—the Mäbasa Gaìgä; mahä-päpaugha-näçiné—which destroys the greatest sisn; govinda-kuëòam—Govinda-kuëòa; viçadam—pure; çubham—beautiful; candra-sarovaram—Candra-sarivara.

 . . . where are the Mänasa-gaìgä, which destroys a flood of the greatest sins, pure Govinda-kuëòa, beautiful Candra-sarovara, . . . 

Text 8

rädhä-kuëòaù kåñëa-kuëòo
     lalitä-kuëòa eva ca
gopäla-kuëòas tatraiva
     kusumäkara eva ca

     rädhä-kuëòaù—Rädhä-kuëòa; kåñëa-kuëòaù—Çyäma-kuëòa; lalitä-kuëòa—Lalitä-kuëòa; eva—indeed; ca—and; gopäla-kuëòaù—Gopäla-kuëòa; tatra—there; eva—indeed; kusumäkara—Kusuma-sarovara; eva—indeed; ca—and.

 . . . Rädhä-kuëòa, Çyäma-kuëòa, Lalitä-kuëòa, Gopäla-kuëòa, and Kusuma-sarovara.

Text 9

çré-kåñëa-mauli-saàsparçän
     mauli-cihnä çiläbhavat
tasyä darçana-mätreëa
     deva-maulir bhavej janaù

     çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; mauli—the crown; saàsparçät—from the touch; mauli—of the crown; cihnä—the mark; çilä—stone; abhavat—was; tasyä—of that stone; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; deva-mauliù—the Lord's crown; bhavet—is; janaù—a person.

     By the touch of Çré Kåñëa's crown a certain stone was marked with the sign of a crown. Anyone who sees that stone becomes the crown of the Supreme Lord.

Text 10

yasyäà çiläyaà kåñëena
     citräëi likhitäni ca
adyäpi citritä puëyä
     nämnä citra-çilä girau

     yasyäm—on which; çiläyam—stone; kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; citräëi—pictures; likhitäni—drawn; ca—and; adya—today; api—even; citritä—drawn; puëyä—sacred; nämnä—by name; citra-çilä—Citra-çilä; girau—on the hill.

     Even today on Govardhana Hill is a sacred stone marked with pictures originally drawn by Lord Kåñëa, and now named Citra-çilä (the picture-stone).

Text 11

yaà çiläm arbhakaiù kåñëo
     vädayan kréòane rataù
vädané sa çilä jätä
     mahä-päpaugha-näçiné

     yam—which; çiläm—stone; arbhakaiù—with the boys; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; vädayan—making to sound; kréòane—in pastimes; rataù—attached; vadané sä çilä—vädanéçilä; jätä—manifested; mahä-päpaugha-näçiné—destroying a flood of great sins.

     When Kåñëa was intently playing with the boys, He played musical rhythms on a certain stone. That stone, named vädané-çilä (the musical stone), destroys the greatest sins.

Text 12

yatra çré-kåñëacandreëa
     gopälaiù saha maithila
kåta vai kanduka-kréòä
     tat-kñetraà kandukaà småtam

     yatra—where; çré-kåñëacandreëa—by Çré Kåñëa; gopälaiù—with the gopas; saha—with; maithila—O king of Mithilä; kåta—done; vai—indeed; kanduka—of ball; kréòä—a game; tat-kñetram—that field; kandukam—the ball; småtam—remembered.

     The place where Kåñëacandra played ball-games with the boys is called kanduka-kñetra (the ballgame-field).

Text 13

dåñövä çakra-padaà yäti
     natvä brahma-padaà ca tat
viluöhan yasya rajasä
     säkñäd viñëu-padaà vrajet

     dåñövä—seeing; çakra-padam—the abode of Indra; yäti—attains; natvä—bowing down; brahma-padam—to the abode of Brahman; ca—and; tat—that; viluöhan—rolling on the gorund; yasya—of which; rajasä—with the dust; säkñät—directly; viñëu-padam—the abode of Lord Viñëu; vrajet—attains.

     A person who sees the place Indra-pada on Govardhana Hill, bows down at the place Brahma-pada, or rolls about in the dust of these places, attains the abode of Lord Viñëu.

Text 14

gopänäm uñëiñäny atra
     corayäm äsa mädhavaù
auñëiñaà näma tat térthaà
     mahä-päpa-haraà girau

     gopänäm—of the gopas; uñëiñäny—the turbans; atra—here; corayäm äsa—stole; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; auñëiñam—auñëiña; näma—named; tat—that; tértham—holy place; mahä-päpa-haram—removing the greatest sins; girau—on the hill.

     The place on Govardhana Hill where Lord Kåñëa stole the gopas' turbans is called Auñniña-tértha. It removes the greatest sins.

Text 15

tatraikadä vai dadhi-vikrayärthaà
     vinirgato gopa-vadhü-samühaù
çrutvä kvaëan-nüpura-çabdam äräd
     rorodha tan-märgam anaìga-mohé

     tatra—there; ekadä—once; vai—indeed; dadhi-vikrayärtham—to sell yogurt; vinirgataù—gone; gopa-vadhü-samühaù—the gopés; çrutvä—hearing; kvaëan-nüpura-çabdam—tinkling anklets; ärät—nearby; rorodha—stopped; tan-märgam—their pathway; anaìga-mohé—more charming than Kämadeva.

     One day, hearing tinkling anklets as the gopés walked nearby on their way to sell yogurt, Kåñëa, who is more charming than Kämadeva, stopped them on the path.

Text 16

vaàçé-dharo vetra-vareëa gopaiù
     puraç ca täsäà vinidhäya pädam
mahyaà karädäna-dhanäya dänaà
     dehéti gopér nijagäda märge

     vaàçé-dharaù—holding a flute; vetra-vareëa—with a stick; gopaiù—with the gopas; puraù—ahead; ca—and; tasam—of them; vinidhäya—placing; pädam—foor; mahyam—to me; karadana-dhanäya dänam—a toll; dehi—give; iti—thus; gopéù—to the gopés; nijagäda—said; märge—on the pathway.

     Holding a flute and a stick, and going ahead of the gopas, Kåñëa confronted the gopés on the path and demanded, "You must pay a toll to Me."

Text 17

çré-gopya ücuù 
vakras tvam eväsi samasthitaù pathi
     gopärbhakair gorasa-lampaöo bhåçäà
mäträ cä piträ saha kärayämo
     baläd bhavantaà kila kaàsa-bandhane

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; vakraù—crooked; tvam—You; eva—indeed; asi—are; samasthitaù—standing; pathi—on the path; gopärbhakaiù—with the gopa boys; gorasa-lampaöaù—greedy for yogurt; bhåçäm—greatly; mäträ—by Your mother; cä—and; piträ—father; saha—with; kärayämaù—we will do; balät—forcibly; bhavantam—You; kila—indeed; kaàsa-bandhane—in the bonds of Kaàsa.

     The gopés said: You are crooked. You and Your gopa boys now block our path. You are greedy after yogurt. We will see to it that You, Your mother, and Your father are all locked up in Kaàsa's prison.

Text 18

çré-bhagavän uväca 
kaàsaà haniñyämi mahogra-daëòaà
     sa-bändhavaà me çapatho gaväà ca
evaà kariñyämi yadoù pure balän
     neñye sadähaà giriräja-bhümeù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; kaàsam—Kaàsa; haniñyämi—I will kill; mahogra-daëòam—ferocious; sa-bändhavam—with his friends; me—of Me; çapathaù—a vow; gaväm—of the cows; ca—and; evam—thus; kariñyämi—I will do; yadoù—of the Yadus; pure—in the city; balän—forcibly; neñye—I will bring; sadä—always; aham—I; giriräja-bhümeù—on Govardhana Hill.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: I will kill ferocious Kaàsa and all his friends. That is My solemn vow. Every day I will take the cows from Mathurä to Govardhana Hill.

Text 19

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvä dadhi-päträëi
     bälair nétvä påthak påthak
bhü-påñöhe pothayäm äsa
     sänandaà nanda-nandanaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; dadhi-päträëi—the pots of yogurt; bälaiù—with the boys; nétvä—taking; påthak påthak—sepcific; bhü-påñöhe—on tyhe ground; pothayäm äsa—placed; sänandam—with joy; nanda-nandanaù—Nanda's son.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these words, Kåñëa and the boys took the jars of yogurt and joyfully placed them on the ground.

Texts 20 and 21

aho eña paraà dhåñöo
     nirbhayo nanda-nandanaù
niraìkuço bhäñaëéyo
     vane véraù pure 'balaù

bruvämahe yaçodäyai
     nandäya ca kilädya vai
evaà vadantyas tä gopyaù
     sa-smitäù prayayur gåhän

     ahaù—oh; eña—He; param—very; dhåñöaù—arrogant; nirbhayaù—fearless; nanda-nandanaù—Nanda's son; niraìkusaù—merciless; bhäñaëéyaù—talkative; vane—in the forest; véraù—a hero; pure—in the city; abalaù—a weakling; bruvämahe—we will tell; yaçodäyai—Yaçodä; nandäya—Nanda; ca—and; kila—certainly; adya—now; vai—indeed; evam—thus; vadantyaù—speaking; täù—the; gopyaù—gopés; sa-smitäù—smiling; prayayuù—went; gåhän—to their homes.

     Saying "Kåñëa is a bold, fearless, ferocious, and talkative hero here in the secluded forest, but in the city, surrounded by many men, He is only a weakling. We will certainly tell Nanda and Yaçodä what He has done," the smiling gopés went to their homes.

Text 22

népa-päläça-paträëäà
     kåtvä droëäni mädhavaù
jaghäsa bälakaiù särdhaà
     picchaläni dadhéni ca

     népa-päläça-paträëäm—nipa and palasa leaves; kåtvä—making; droëäni—cups; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; jaghäsa—ate; bälakaiù—the boys; särdham—with; picchaläni—picchala; dadhéni—yogurt; ca—and.

     Then, making cups of népa and päläça leaves, Kåñëa and the boys ate the yogurt and picchala.

Text 23

droëäkäräëi paträëi
     babhüvuù çäkhinäà tadä
tat-kñetraà ca mahä-puëyaà
     droëaà näma nåpeçvara

     droëäkäräëi—cups; paträëi—leaves; babhüvuù—were; çäkhinäm—of the trees; tadä—then; tat-kñetram—that place; ca—and; mahä-puëyam—very sacred; droëam—Droëa; näma—named; nåpeçvara—O king of kings.

     O king of kings, that very sacred place, where the trees' leaves became cups, is called Droëa-tértha.

Text 24

dadhi-dänaà tatra kåtvä
     pétvä patra-dhåtaà dadhi
namaskuryän naras tasya
     golokän na cyutir bhavet

     dadhi—of yogurt; dänam—the giving; tatra—there; kåtvä—doing; pétvä—drinking; patra-dhåtam—held in a leaf-cup; dadhi—yogurt; namaskuryät-bowing down; naraù—a person; tasya—of him; golokät—from Goloka; na—not; cyutiù—falling; bhavet—will be.

     A person who at this place gives yogurt in charity, drinks yogurt from a leaf-cup, and then bows down to offer his respectful obeisances, never falls from Goloka.

Text 25

netre tv äcchädya yatraiva
     léno 'bhün mädhavo 'rbhakaiù
tatra térthaà laukikaà ca
     jätaà päpa-praëäçanam

     netre—eyes; tu—indeed; äcchädya—covering; yatra—where; eva—indeed; lénaù—disappeared; abhüt—became; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; arbhakaiù—with the boys; tatra—there; tértham—the holy place; laukikam—in this world; ca—and; jätam—manifested; päpa-praëäçanam—destroying sins.

     The place where Kåñëa and the boys played games of closing their eyes and hiding is called Laukika-tértha. It destroys all sins.

Text 26

kadamba-khaëòa-térthaà ca
     lélä-yuktaà hareù sadä
tasya darçana-mätreëa
     naro näräyaëo bhavet

     kadamba-khaëòa-tértham—Kadamba-khaëòa-tértha; ca—and; lélä-yuktam—with pastimes; hareù—of Lord Hari; sadä—always; tasya—of Him; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; naraù—a pewrson; näräyaëaù—like Lord Näräyaëa; bhavet—becomes.

     Simply by seeing Kadamba-khaëòa-tértha, where Kåñëa enjoyed many pastimes, a person attains a form like that of Lord Näräyaëa Himself.

Text 27

yatra vai rädhayä räse
     çåìgäro 'käri maithila
tatra govardhane jätaà
     sthale çåìgära-maëòalam

     yatra—where; vai—indeed; rädhayä—with Rädhä; rase—in the räsa dance; çåìgäraù—decoration; akäri—did; maithila—O king of Mithilä; tatra—there; govardhane—on Govardhana Hill; jätam—manifested; sthale—in the place; çåìgära-maëòalam—Çåìgära-maëòala.

     O king of Mithilä, the place on Govardhana Hill where Rädhä was decorated during the räsa dance is called Çåìgära-maëòala (the decoration place).

Text 28

yena rüpeëa kåñëena
     dhåto govardhano giriù
tad rüpaà vidyate tatra
     nåpa çåìgära-maëòalam

     yena—by which; rüpeëa—form; kåñëena—by Kåñëa; dhåtaù—held; govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; giriù—the hill; tat—that; rüpam—form; vidyate—is; tatra—there; nåpa—O king; çåìgära-maëòalam—Çåìgära-maëòala.

     O king, the form Lord Kåñëa showed as He lifted Govardhana Hill is still present at Çåìgära-maëòala.

Texts 29 and 30

abdäç catuù-sahasräëi
     tathä cäñöau çatäni ca
gatas tatra kaler ädau
     kñetre çåìgära-maëòale

giriräja-guhä-madhyät
     sarveñäà paçyatäà nåpa
svataù-siddhaà ca tad-rüpaà
     hareù prädurbhaviñyati

     abdäù—years; catuù-sahasräëi—four thousand; tathä—so; ca—and; añöau—eight; çatäni—hundred; ca—and; gataù—gone; tatra—there; kaleù—of Kali-yuga; ädau—at the beginning; kñetre—in the place; çåìgära-maëòale—Çåìgära-maëòala; giriräja—of Govardhana Hill; guhä-madhyät—from a cave; sarveñäm—as all; paçyatäm—watch; nåpa—O king; svataù-siddham—perfect; ca—and; tad-rüpam—His form; hareù—of Lord Hari; prädurbhaviñyati—will be manifested.

     O king, 4,108 years after the beginning of Kali-yuga, as everyone watches, Lord Kåñëa will emerge from a cave on Govardhana Hill and reveal His transcendental form at Çåìgära-maëòala.

Text 31

çré-näthaà deva-damanaà
     taà vadiñyanti saj-janäù
govardhane girau räjan
     sadä léläà karoti yaù

     çré-nätham—Çrénätha; deva-damanam—the master of the demigods; tam—Him; vadiñyanti—will call; saj-janäù—the saintly devotees; govardhane girau—on Govardhana Hill; räjan—O king; sadä—always; léläm—pastimes; karoti—does; yaù—who.

     O king, the saintly devotees will call this form of the Lord Çrénätha. He will always enjoy pastimes on Govardhana Hill.

Text 32

ye kariñyanti neträbhyäà
     tasya rüpasya darçanam
te kåtärthä bhaviñyanti
     maithilendra kalau janaù

     ye—who; kariñyanti—will do; neträbhyäm—with both eyes; tasya—of Him; rüpasya—the form; darçanam—the sight; te—they; kåtärthä—successful; bhaviñyanti—will become; maithilendra—O king of Mithilä; kalau—in Kali-yuga; janaù—people.

     O king of Mithilä, the people in Kali-yuga who with their eyes see this form of the Lord will attain all spiritual success.

Text 33

jagan-nätho raìga-nätho
     dvärakä-nätha eva ca
badré-näthaç catuñ-koëe
     bhäratasyäpi pärvate

     jagan-näthaù—Jagan-nätha; raìga-näthaù—Raìga-nätha; dvärakä-nätha—Dvärakä-nätha; eva—indeed; ca—and; badré-näthaù—Badré-nätha; catuñ-koëe—in the four corners; bhäratasya—of Bharata-varña; api—also; pärvate—on the mountain.

     On the four corners of Govardhana Hill are the forms of Lord Jagannätha, Lord Raìganätha, Lord Dvärakänätha, and Lord Badrénätha.

Text 34

madhye govardhanasyäpi
     nätho 'yaà vartate nåpa
pavitre bhärate varñe
     païca näthäù sureçvaräù

     madhye—in the middle; govardhanasya—of Govardhana Hill; api—also; näthaù—Lord; ayam—this; vartate—is; nåpa—O king; pavitre—pure; bhärate varñe—in Bharata-varña; païca—five; näthäù—Lords; sureçvaräù—the masters of the demigods.

     Çrénätha is in the middle of Govardhana Hill. O king, these five forms of the Lord are manifested in sacred Bhärata-varña.

Text 35

sad-dharma-maëòapa-stambhä
     ärta-traëa-paräyaëäù
teñäà tu darçanaà kåtvä
     naro näräyaëo bhavet

     sad-dharma—of eternal reliugion; maëòapa—of the temple; stambhä—pillars; ärta-traëa-paräyaëäù—intent on protecting from troubles; teñäm—of Them; tu—indeed; darçanam—the sight; kåtvä—having done; naraù—a person; näräyaëaù—like Lord Näräyaëa; bhavet—becomes.

     These four Deities are four pillars in the temple of eternal religion. They are determined to protect Their devotees from all troubles. A person who sees Them attains a transcendental form like that of Lord Näräyaëa Himself.

Text 36

caturëäà bhuvi näthänäà
     kåtvä yäträà naraù sudhéù
na paçyed deva-damanaà
     sa na yäträ-phalaà labhet

     caturëäm—of the four; bhuvi—in the world; näthänäm—of the Lords; kåtvä—having done; yäträm—journey; naraù—a person; sudhéù—intelligent; na—not; paçyet—may see; deva-damanam—the Supreme Lord; sa—he; na—not; yäträ—of the pilgrimage; phalam—the result; labhet—attains.

     An intelligent person who visits the places of these Deities but does not see the Lord there does not attain the real result of his visit.

Text 37

çré-näthaà deva-damanaà
     paçyed govardhane girau
caturëäà bhuvi näthänäà
     yäträyäù phalam äpnuyät

     çré-nätham—Çrénätha; deva-damanam—Lord; paçyet—sees; govardhane girau—on Govardhana Hill; caturëäm—of the four; bhuvi—on the earth; näthänäm—Lords; yäträyäù—of the visit; phalam—the result; äpnuyät—attains.

     A person who sees Lord Çrénätha attains the result of seeing all four Deities on Govardhana Hill.

Text 38

airävatasya surabheù
     päda-cihnäni yatra vai
tatra natvä naraù päpé
     vaikuëöhaà yäti maithila

     airävatasya—of Airävata; surabheù—of Surabhi; päda-cihnäni—the footprints; yatra—where; vai—certainly; tatra—there; natvä—bowing down; naraù—a person; päpé—sinful; vaikuëöham—to Vaikuëöha; yäti—goes; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, a sinner who bows down before the footprints of Airävata and Surabhi on Govardhana Hill goes to Vaikuëöha.

Text 39

hasta-cihnaà päda-cihnaà
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù
dåñövä natvä naraù kaçcit
     säkñät kåñëa-padaà vrajet

     hasta-cihnam—handprint; päda-cihnam—footprint; çré-kåñëasya—of Lord Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dåñövä—seeing; natvä—bowing down; naraù—a person; kaçcit—someone; säkñät—directly; kåñëa-padam—the abode of Lord Kåñëa; vrajet—goes.

     A person who sees the handprint and footprint of Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and bows down to offer respects to them, goes to Lord Kåñëa's transcendental abode.

Text 40

etäni nåpa térthäni
     kuëòädyäyatanäni ca
aìgäni giriräjasya
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     etäni—these; nåpa—O king; térthäni—the holy places; kuëòa—with lakes; ädya—beginning; äyatanäni—manifested; ca—and; aìgäni—the limbs; giriräjasya—of Govardhana Hill; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     O king, these are the lakes and other holy places that are the limbs of Govardhana Hill. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Eight
Çré Giriräja-vibhüti
The Opulences of Çré Giriräja

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
keñu keñu tad-aìgeñu
     kià kià térthaà samäçritam
vada deva mahä-deva
     tvaà parävara-vittamaù

     çré-bahuläçvaù uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; keñu keñu—on which?; tad-aìgeñu—of its limbs; kià kim—what?; tértham—holy place; samäçritam—sheltered; vada—tell; deva—O Lord; mahä-deva—O great Lord; tvam—You; parävara-vittamaù—the best of they who know everything.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: What holy places are situated on what limbs? O great master, O best of the wise, please tell.

Text 2

çré-närada uväca 
yatra yasya prasiddhiù syät
     tad-aìgaà paramaà viduù
kramato nästy aìga-cayo
     giriräjasya maithila

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; yatra—where; yasya—of that; prasiddhiù—fame; syät—is; tad-aìgam—of its limb; paramam—great; viduù—know; kramataù—one by one; na—not; asty—is; aìga-cayaù—limbs; giriräjasya—of Govardhana Hill; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, the sages know only the most famous limbs of Govardhana Hill. They do not know them all, one by one.

Text 3

yathä sarva-gataà brahma
     sarväìgäni ca tasya vai
vibhüter bhavataù çaçvat
     tathä vakñyämi mänada

     yathä—as; sarva-gatam—all-pervading; brahma—Brahman; sarväìgäni—all limbs; ca—and; tasya—of it; vai—indeed; vibhüteù—of thr opulence; bhavataù—being so; çaçvat—directly; tathä—so; vakñyämi—I will tell; mänada—O noble one.

     As Brahman is present everywhere, so the opulences of the Lord are always present on all the limbs of Govardhana Hill. O noble one, I will now describe them to you.

Text 4

çåìgära-maëòalasyädho
     mukhaà govardhanasya ca
yatränna-küöaà kåtavän
     bhagavän vraja-väsibhiù

     çåìgära-maëòalasya—Çåìgära-maëòala; adhaù—below; mukham—the mouth; govardhanasya—of Govardhana Hill; ca—and; yatra—where; anna-küöam—the hill of food; kåtavän—made; bhagavän—the Lord; vraja-väsibhiù—with the residents of Vraja.

     Below Çåìgära-maëòala is Govardhana Hill's mouth, where the Lord and the people of Vraja made a hill of food.

Text 5

netre vai mänasé gaìgä
     näsä candra-sarovaraù
govinda-kuëòo hy adharas
     cibukaà kåñëa-kuëòakaù

     netre—eyes; vai—indeed; mänasé gaìgä—Mänasa-gaìgä; näsä—nose; candra-sarovaraù—Candra-sarovara; govinda-kuëòaù—Govinda-kuëòa; hy—indeed; adharaù—lips; cibukam—chin; kåñëa-kuëòakaù—Çyäma-kuëòa.

     Mänasa-gaìga is Govardhana Hill's eyes, Candra-sarovara its nose, Govinda-kuëòa its lips, Çyäma-kuëòa its chin, . . .

Text 6

rädhä-kuëòaà tasya jihvä
     kapolau lalitä-saraù
gopäla-kuëòaù karëaç ca
     karëäntaù kusumäkaraù

     rädhä-kuëòam—Rädhä-kuëòa; tasya—its; jihvä—tongue; kapolau—cheeks; lalitä-saraù—Lalitä-kuëòa; gopäla-kuëòaù—Gopasla-kuëòa; karëaù—ears; ca—and; karëäntaù—within the ear; kusumäkaraù—Kusuma-sarovara.

 . . . Rädhä-kuëòa its tongue, Lalitä-kuëòa its cheeks, Gopäla-kuëòa its ears, Kusuma-sarovara its inner ear, . . .

Text 7

mauli-jihvä çilä tasya
     laläöaà viddhi maithila
siraç citra-çilä tasya
     grévä vai vädané çilä

     mauli-jihvä—marked with Kåñëa's crown; çilä—stone; tasya—ofit; laläöam—the forehead; viddhi—please know; maithila—O king of Mithilä; siraù—the head; citra-çilä—the picture stone; tasya—of it; grévä—the n3eck; vai—indeed; vädané çilä—the musical stone.

     O king of Mithilä, please know that the stone marked with Lord Kåñëa's crown (mauli-çilä) is Govardhana Hill's forehead, the stone decorated with pictures (citra-çilä) is its head, and the musical stone (vädané çilä) is its throat.

Text 8

kändukaà pärçva-deçaà ca
     auñëiñaà kaöir ucyate
droëa-térthaà påñöha-deçe
     laukikaà codare småtam

     kändukam—Kanduka-tértha; pärçva-deçam—sides; ca—and; auñëiñam—auñniña-tértha; kaöiù—hips; ucyate—is said; droëa-tértham—Droëa-tértha; påñöha-deçe—back; laukikam—Laukika-tértha; ca—and; udare—belly; småtam—considered.

     Känduka-tértha is said to be its two sides, Auñiña-tértha its waist, Droëa-tirtha its back, and Laukika-tértha its belly.

Text 9

kadamba-khaëòam urasi
     jévaù çåìgära-maëòalam
çré-kåñëa-päda-cihnaà tu
     manas tasya mahätmanaù

     kadamba-khaëòam—Kadamba-khaëòa; urasi—chest; jévaù—life; çåìgära-maëòalam—Çåìgära-maëòala; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; päda-cihnam—footprint; tu—and; manaù—the heart; tasya—of it; mahätmanaù—noble-hearted.

     Kadamba-khaëòa is its chest, and Çåìgära-maëòala is its life. Çré Kåñëa's footprint is the heart of noble-hearted Govardhana Hill. 

Text 10

hasta-cihnaà tathä buddhir
     airävata-padaà padam
surabheù päda-cihneñu
     pakñau tasya mahätmanaù

     hasta-cihnam—handprint; tathä—of it; buddhiù—intelligence; airävata-padam—the footprint of Airävata; padam—the feet; surabheù—of Surabhi; päda-cihneñu—in the footprints; pakñau—wings; tasya—of it; mahätmanaù—noble-hearted.

     Lord Kåñëa's handprint is its intelligence, and Airävata's footprint is its feet. Surabhi's hoofprints are the wings of noble-hearted Govardhana Hill.

Text 11

puccha-kuëòe tathä pucchaà
     vatsa-kuëòe balaà småtam
rudra-kuëòe tathä krodhaà
     kämaà çakra-sarovare

     puccha-kuëòe—Puccha-kuëòa; tathä—so; puccham—tail; vatsa-kuëòe—Vatsa-kunda; balam—strength; småtam—considered; rudra-kuëòe—Rudra-kundas; tathä—so; krodham—anger; kämam—desire; çakra-sarovare—Çakra-sarovara.

     Puccha-kuëòa is its tail, Vatsa-kuëòa its strength, Rudra-kuëòa its anger, and Çakra-sarovara its desire.

Text 12

kuvera-térthaà codyogaà
     brahma-térthaà prasannatäm
yama-térthe hy ahaìkäraà
     vadantétthaà pura-vidaù

     kuvera-tértham—Kuvera-tértha; ca—and; udyogam—determination; brahma-tértham—Brahma-tirtha; prasannatäm—cheerfulness; yama-térthe—Yama-tirtha; hy—indeed; ahaìkäram—ego; vadanti—say; ittham—thus; pura-vidaù—the wise.

     The wise say that Kuvera-tértha is Govardhana Hill's determination, Brahma-tértha its cheerfulness, and Yama-tértha its ego.

Text 13

evam aìgäni sarvatra
     giriräjasya maithila
kathitäni mayä tubhyaà
     sarva-päpa-haräëi ca

     evam—thus; aìgäni—the limbs; sarvatra—everywhere; giriräjasya—of Govardhana Hill; maithila—O king of Mithilä; kathitäni—described; mayä—by me; tubhyam—to you; sarva-päpa-haräëi—removing all sins; ca—and.

     O king of Mithilä, in this way I have described to you Govardhana Hill's limbs, which remove all sins.

Text 14

giriräja-vibhütià ca
     yaù çåëoti narottamaù
sa gacched dhäma paramaà
     golokaà yogi-durlabham

     giriräja—of Govardhana Hill; vibhütim—tyhe glory and opulence; ca—and; yaù—one who; çåëoti—hears; narottamaù—the best of men; sa—he; gacchet—attains; dhäma—the abode; paramam—supreme; golokam—Goloka; yogi-durlabham—which even the greatest yogés cannot attain.

     One who hears about the glories and opulences of Govardhana Hill becomes the best of persons and goes to Goloka, the supreme abode, which even the greatest yogés cannot attain.

Text 15

samutthito 'sau hari-vakñaso girir
     govardhano näma giréndra-räja-räö
samägato hy atra pulastya-tejasä
     yad-darçanäj janma punar na vidyate

     samutthitaù—risen; asau—it; hari-vakñasaù—from Lord Kåñëa's chest; giriù govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; näma—named; giréndra-räja-räö—the king of the kings of the kings of mountains; samägataù—arrived; hy—indeed; atra—here; pulastya-tejasä—by the power of Pulastya Muni; yad-darçanät—by seeing which; janma—birth; punaù—again; na—not; vidyate—is.

     By seeing Govardhana Hill, which was born from Lord Hari's chest, which is the king of the kings of the kings of mountains, and which was brought to the earth by Pulastya Muni's power, one becomes free from taking birth again in this world.
.pa

Chapter Nine
Çré Giriräjotpatti
The Birth of Çré Giriräja

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
aho govardhanaù säkñäd
     giriräjo hari-priyaù
tat-samänaà na térthaà hi
     vidyate bhu-tale divi

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; ahaù—Oh; govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; säkñät—directly; giriräjaù—the king of mountains; hari—to Kåñëa; priyaù—dear; tat-samänam—equal to it; na—not; tértham—holy place; hi—indeed; vidyate—is; bhu-tale—on the earth; divi—in heaven.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Govardhana Hill is dear to Lord Hari. It is the king of mountains. No holy place in the earthly or heavenly planets is equal to it.

Text 2

kadä babhüva çré-kåñëa-
     vakñaso 'yaà giréçvaraù
etad vada mahä-buddhe
     tvaà säkñäd dhari-mänasaù

     kadä—when?; babhüva—was manifested; çré-kåñëa-—of Çré Kåñëa; vakñasaù—from the chest; ayam—it; giréçvaraù—the king of mountains; etat—this; vada—tell; mahä-buddhe—O intelligent one; tvam—you; säkñät—directly; hari-mänasaù—the heart of Lord Kåñëa.

     When was Govardhana Hill born from Lord Kåñëa's chest? O wise and intelligent one, please tell me that. You know what is in Lord Kåñëa's heart.

Text 3

çré-närada uväca 
golokoöpatti-våttantaà
     çåëu räjan mahä-mate
catuñ-padärtha-daà nåëäà
     ädya-lélä-samanvitam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; goloka—of Goloka; uöpatti—the birth; våttantam—the stoory; çåëu—hear; räjan—O king; mahä-mate—noble-hearted; catuñ-padärtha-dam—granting the four goals of life; nåëäm—of human beings; ädya-lélä-samanvitam—with the first pastimes.

     Çré Närada said: O noble-hearted king, please hear the story of Goloka's birth, a story that brings to human beings the four goals of life, a story filled with transcendental pastimes.

Text 4

anädir ätmä puruño
     nirguëaù prakåteù paraù
paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän prabhuù

     anädiù—beginningless; ätmä—self; puruñaù—person; nirguëaù—free from the material modes of nature; prakåteù—matter; paraù—above; paripürëatamaù—perfect and complete; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Lord; prabhuù—Himself.

     Çré Kåñëa is the Supreme Lord. He is a person. He has no beginning. He is perfect and complete. He is the master of all opulences. He is beyond the modes of nature. He is above the realm of matter. 

Text 5

pratyag-dhämä svayaà-jyoté
     ramamäno nirantaraà
yatra kälaù kalayatäm
     éçvaro dhäma-mäninäm

     pratyag-dhämä—in His own abode; svayaà-jyoté—self-effulgent; ramamänaù—enjoying; nirantaram—eternally; yatra—where; kälaù—time; kalayatäm—manifest; éçvaraù—able; dhäma-mäninäm—considering the abode.

     Time has no existence in the transcendental abode where the self-effulgent Supreme Personality of Godhead enjoys pastimes eternally.

Text 6

räjan na prabhaven mäyä
     na mahäàç ca guëäù kutaù
na viçanti kvacid räjan
     manaç citto matir hy aham

     räjan—O king; na—not; prabhaven—has power; mäyä—illusion; na—not; mahäàù—the mahat-tattva; ca—and; guëäù—the modes; kutaù—where?; na—no; viçanti—enter; kvacit—somehwre; räjan—O king; manaù—heart; cittaù—mind; matiù—intelligence; hy—indeed; aham—ego.

     O king, illusion has no power in that realm. Neither do the mahat-tattva, nor the material modes of nature have any power there. How can they? O king, the material heart, mind, intelligence and false-ego cannot enter there.

Text 7

sva-dhämni brahma säkäraà
     icchayä vyaracékarat
prathamaà cäbhavac cheño
     biña-çveto båhad-vapuù

     sva—own; dhämni—in the abode; brahma—Brahman; säkäram—who has form; icchayä—with a desire; vyaracékarat—created; prathamam—first; ca—and; abhavat—was; çeñaù—Çeña; biña-çvetaù—with white coils; båhad-vapuù—a great body.

     In His own abode the Supreme Personality of Godhead, whose form is spiritual, desired to expand, and so He manifested the form of Lord Çeña, who has gigantic white coils.

Text 8

tad-utsaìge mahä-loko
     goloko loka-vanditaù
yaà präpya bhakti-samyuktaù
     punar ävartate na hi

     tad-utsaìge—on His lap; mahä-lokaù—the great realm; golokaù—Goloka; loka-vanditaù—worshiped by all the worlds; yam—which; präpya—attaining; bhakti-samyuktaù—a devotee; punaù—again; ävartate—returns; na—not; hi—indeed.

     The Lord's realm, Goloka, is worshiped by all the worlds. A devotee who goes there never returns to the world of birth and death.

Text 9

asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-pater
     golokädhipateù prabhoù
punaù pädäbja-sambhütaù
     gaìgä tri-patha-gäminé

     asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-pateù—the master of countless universes; golokädhipateù—the ruler of Goloka; prabhoù—of the Lord; punaù—again; pädäbja-sambhütaù—manifested from the lotus feet; gaìgä—the Ganges; tri-patha-gäminé—traveling through the three worlds.

     The Gaìgä, which travels through the three material worlds, was born from the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa, who is the master of countless material universes and the ruler of the spiritual realm of Goloka.

Text 10

punar vämäàçatas tasya
     kåñëäbhüt saritäà varä
reje çåìgära-kusumair
     yathoñëiì-mudritä nåpa

     punaù—again; väma—left; aàçataù—from the shoulder; tasya—of Him; kåñëä—the Yamunä; abhüt—was; saritäm—of rivers; varä—the best; reje—shone; çåìgära-kusumaiù—with flower decorations; yathä—as; uñëiì-mudritä—wearing a turban; nåpa—O king.

     O king, the Yamunä, the best of rivers, who wore a turban and many flower ornaments, was manifested from Lord Kåñëa's left shoulder.

Text 11

çré-räsa-maëòalaà divyaà
     hema-ratna-samanvitam
nänä-çåìgära-pätälaà
     gulphäbhyäà çré-hareù prabhoù

     çré-räsa-maëòalam—the rasa dance circle; divyam—splendid; hema-ratna-samanvitam—with gold and jewels; nänä—various; çåìgära-pätälam—with many decorations; gulphäbhyäm—from the ankles; çré-hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; prabhoù—the Lord.

     The splendid räsa-dance circle, made of gold and jewels, and decorated with many ornaments, was manifested from Lord Kåñëa's ankles.

Texts 12 and 13

sabhä-präìgana-véthibhir
     maëòapaiù pariveñöitaù
vasanta-mädhurya-dhäräù
     küjat-kokila-saìkulaù

mayüraiù ñaöpadair vyäptaù
     sarobhiù pariñevitaù
jäto nikuïjo jaìghäbhyäà
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù

     sabhä—assembly-houses; präìgana—courtyards; véthibhiù—with pathways; maëòapaiù—with pavilions; pariveñöitaù—filled; vasanta—springtime; mädhurya—sweetness; dhäräù—flooded with streams; küjat-kokila-saìkulaù—filled with cooing cuckoos; mayüraiù—with peacocks; ñaöpadaiù—beees; vyäptaù—filled; sarobhiù—with lakes; pariñevitaù—decorated; jätaù—born; nikuïjaù—forest; jaìghäbhyäm—from the legs; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     Filled with assembly-houses, courtyards, pathways, pavilions, peacocks, bees, and cooing cuckoos, flooded with the sweetness of spring, and decorated with many lakes, a forest grove was manifested from Lord Kåñëa's legs.

Text 14

våndävanaà ca jänübhyäà
     räjan sarva-vanottamam
lélä-sarovaraù säkñäd
     urübhyäà paramätmanaù

     våndävanam—Våndävana; ca—and; jänübhyäm—from the knees; räjan—O king; sarva-vanottamam—the best of all forests; lélä-sarovaraù—Lila-sarivara; säkñät—directly; urübhyäm—from the thighs; paramätmanaù—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     O king, Våndävana, the best of all forests, was manifested from Lord Kåñëa's knees, and Lélä-sarovara lake was manifested from His thighs.

Text 15

kaöi-deçät svarëa-bhümer
     divya-ratna-khacit-prabhä
udare roma-räjiç ca
     mädhavyo viståtä latäù

     kaöi-deçät—from His hips; svarëa-bhümeù—a golden land; divya-ratna-khacit-prabhä—splendid with glittering jewerls; udare—on the belly; roma-räjiù—the line of hairs; ca—and; mädhavyaù—madhavi; viståtä—expanded; latäù—vines.

     A golden place splendid with gold and jewels was manifested from His hips. Many flowering mädhavé vines were manifested from the line of hairs on His abdomen.

Text 16

nänä-pakñi-gaëair vyaptä
     dhvanad-bhramara-bhüñitäù
su-puñpa-phala-bhäraiç ca
     natäù sat-kulajä iva

     nänä-pakñi-gaëaiù—with many different birds; vyaptä—filled; dhvanad-bhramara-bhüñitaù—decorated with humming bees; su-puñpa-phala-bhäraiù—with many fruits and flowers; ca—and; natäù—bowed down; sat-kulajä—saintly girls; iva—like.

     These vines were filled with many different birds and decorated with buzzing bees. Burdened with many flowers and fruits, they bowed down as if they were many saintly girls.

Text 17

çré-näbhi-paìkajät tasya
     paìkajäni sahasraçaù
saraùsu hari-lokasya
     täni rejur itas tataù

     çré-näbhi-paìkajät—from the lotus navel; tasya—of Him; paìkajäni—lotuses; sahasraçaù—thousands; saraùsu—in lakes; hari—of Lord Kåñëa; lokasya—of the realm; täni—they; rejuù—shone; itaù—here; tataù—and there.

     From the Lord's lotus navel many thousands of lotus flowers were manifested. They shone very splendidly in the many lakes of Lord Kåñëa's transcendental abode.

Text 18

tri-bali-präntato väyur
     manda-gämy ati-çétalaù
jätru-deçäc chubhä jätä
     mathurä dvärakä-puré

     tri-bali-präntataù—from the three folds of skin; väyuù—the breeze; manda-gämy—gentle; ati-çétalaù—cooling; jätru-deçät—from the collar; çubhä—beautiful; jätä—born; mathurä—Mathurä; dvärakä-puré—Dvärakä City;

     From the three folds of skin at the Lord's waist was manifested a gentle and cooling breeze. From His collar were manifested the cities of Mathurä and Dvärakä.

Text 19

bhujäbhyäà çré-harer jätä
     çrédämädy-añöa-pärñadaù
nandaç ca maëi-bandhäbhyäà
     upanandaù karägrataù

     bhujäbhyäm—from the arms; çré-hareù—of LordKåñëa; jätä—born; çrédämädy-añöa-pärñadaù—the eight close friends headed by Çrédama; nandaù—Nanbda; ca—and; maëi-bandhäbhyäm—from the wrists; upanandaù—Upananda; karägrataù—from the hands.

     From Lord Kåñëa's arms were manifested His eight friends headed by Çrédämä. From the Lord's wrists Nanda was manifested, and from the Lord's hands Upananda was manifested.

Text 20

çré-kåñëa-bähu-müläbhyäà
     sarve vai våñabhänavaù
kåñëa-roma-samudbhütäù
     sarve gopa-gaëä nåpa

     çré-kåñëa-bähu-müläbhyäm—from Çré Kåñëa's shoulder blades; sarve—all; vai—indeed; våñabhänavaù—the Våñabhänus; kåñëa-roma-samudbhütäù—from the hairs of Lord Kåñëa's body; sarve—all; gopa-gaëä—the gopas; nåpa—O king.

     O king, from Çré Kåñëa's shoulder-blades all the Våñabhänus were manifested. From the hairs of Çré Kåñëa's body all the gopas were manifested.

Text 21

çré-kåñëa-manaso gävo
     våñä dharma-dhurandharäù
buddher yävasa-gulmäni
     babhüvur maithileçvara

     çré-kåñëa-manasaù—from Çré Çré Kåñëa's mind; gävaù—cows; våñä—bulls; dharma-dhurandharäù—the upholderers of religion; buddheù—from the intelligence; yävasa—grass; gulmäni—and bushes; babhüvuù—were; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, from Çré Kåñëa's mind were manifested the cows and bulls, the upholders of religion. From Çré Kåñëa's intelligence were manifested the grass, plants, and shrubs.

Text 22

tad-vämäàçät samudbhütaà
     gauraà tejaù sphurat-prabham
lélä çrér bhüç ca virajä
     tasmäj jätä hareù priyäù

     tad-vämäàçät—from the left shoulder; samudbhütam—manifested; gauram—fair; tejaù—splendor; sphurat-prabham—glistening; lélä—Lélä;  çréù—Çré; bhüç—Bhü; ca—and; virajä—Virajä; tasmäj—from that; jätä—born; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; priyäù—the beloveds.

     From the Lord's left shoulder was manifested a golden splendor that was His beloveds: Lélä, Çré, Bhü, and Virajä.

Text 23

lélävaté priyä tasya
     täà rädhäà tu viduù pare
çré-rädhäyä bhujäbhyäà tu
     viçäkhä lalitä sakhé

     lélävaté—Lélävaté; priyä—bloved; tasya—of Him; tam—Her; rädhäm—Rädhä; tu—indeed; viduù—know; pare—others; çré-rädhäyä—of Çré Rädhä; bhujäbhyäm—fromn the arms; tu—indeed; viçäkhä—Viçäkhä; lalitä—Lalitä; sakhé—friend.

     One of His beloveds is Lélävaté. The wise know His dearest beloved is Rädhä. From Rädhä's arms are manifested Her friends Lalitä and Viçäkhä.

Text 24

sahacaryas tathä gopyo
     rädhä-romodbhavä nåpa
evaà goloka-racanaà
     cakära madhusüdanaù

     sahacaryaù—assistants; tathä—then; gopyaù—gopés; rädhä-romodbhavä—manifested from the hairs of Rädhä's body; nåpa—O king; evam—thus; goloka—of Goloka; racanam—creation; cakära—did; madhusüdanaù—Lord Kåñëa.

     O king, Her gopé-assistants were manifested from the hairs of Rädhä's body. In this way Lord Kåñëa manifested the world of Goloka.

Text 25

vidhäya sarvaà nija-lokam itthaà
     çré-rädhayä tatra raräja räjan
asaìkhya-lokäëòa-patiù parätmä
     paraù pareçaù paripürëa-devaù

     vidhäya—placing; sarvam—everything; nija-lokam—His own realm; ittham—thus; çré-rädhayä—with Rädhä; tatra—there; raräja—shone; räjan—O king; asaìkhya-lokäëòa-patiù—the Lord of countless universes; parätmä—the Supreme Self; paraù—the Supreme; pareçaù—the master oif all; paripürëa-devaù—theperfect Lord.

     After thus manifesting His own abode, Lord Kåñëa, the perfect and complete Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the master of countless universes, shone with great glory in Çré Rädhä's company there.

Texts 26-28

tatraikadä sundara-räsa-maëòale
     spurat-kvaëan-nüpura-çabda-saìkule
su-cchatra-muktä-phala-dämajävåta-
     sravad-båhad-bindu-viräjitäìgane

çré-mälaténäà su-vitäna-jälataù
     svataù-sravat-san-makaranda-gandhite
mådaìga-täla-dhvani-venu-nädite
     su-kaëöha-gétädi-manohare pare

çré-sundaré-räsa-rase manorame
     madhya-sthitaà koöi-manoja-mohanam
jagäda rädhä-patim urjayä girä
     kåtvä kaöäkñaà rasa-däna-kauçalam

     tatra—there; eka—one; sundara-räsa-maëòale—in the beautiful rasa-dance circle; spurat-kvaëan-nüpura-çabda-saìkule—filledwith the tinkling of anklets; su-cchatra—a glorious parasol; muktä-phala-dämajä—strings of pearls; ävåta—filled; sravad-båhad-bindu—with great drops; viräjita—glorious; aìgane—courtyard; çré-mälaténäm—of malati vines; su-vitäna-jälataù—froma  great network; svataù-sravat-san-makaranda—with spontaneously flowing nectar; gandhite—fragrant; mådaìga-täla-dhvani-venu-nädite—filled with the sounds of flute and mådaìga; su-kaëöha-gétädi—with beautiful songs from beautiful necks; manohare—beautiful; pare—other; çré-sundaré-räsa-rase—in the nectar of the rasa dance of beautiful girlws; manorame—beautiful; madhya-sthitam—staying in the middle; koöi-manoja-mohanam—more charming than ten million Kämadevas; jagäda—spoke; rädhä-patim—to the aLord of Rädhä; urjayä—withg earnest; girä—words; kåtvä—doing; kaöäkñam—a sidelong glance; rasa-däna-kauçalam—expert at giving nectar.

     One day, in the beautiful räsa-dance circle, which was filled with the tinkling of anklets and with courtyards splendid with pearls and parasols, awnings of flowering mälaté vines fragrant with nectar honey, sounds of flute and mådaìga, and beautiful singing from beautiful throats, and which was beautiful with many beautiful girls, Rädhä cast a sidelong glance at Lord Kåñëa, who is more charming that many millions of Kämadevas, and who generously gives the sweetest nectar. She spoke to Him the following words.

Text 29

çré-rädhoväca 
yadi räse prasanno 'si
     mama premëä jagat-pate
tadähaà prärthanäà tväà tu
     karomi manasi sthitäm

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; yadi—if; räse—in the rasa dance; prasannaù—pleased; asi—You are; mama—of Me; premëä—with the love; jagat-pate—O Lord of the worlds; tadä—then; aham—I; prärthanäm—request; tväm—to You; tu—indeed; karomi—I do; manasi—in the heart; sthitäm—situated.

     Çré Rädhä said: O Lord of the worlds, if You are pleased with My love in this räsa-dance, then there is a desire in My heart I would like to place before You.

Text 30

çré-bhagavän uväca 
icchäà varäya vämoru
     yä te manasi vartate
na deyaà yadi yad vastu
     premëä däsyämi tat priye

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; icchäm—desire; varäya—please choose; vämoru—O girl with the beautiful thighs; yä—what; te—of You; manasi—in the heart; vartate—is; na—not; deyam—to be given; yadi—if; yat—what; vastu—things; premëä—with love; däsyämi—I will give; tat—that; priye—O beloved.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O girl with the beautiful thighs, You may ask for whatever Your heart desires. O beloved, if I have not already given it, I will lovingly give whatever You wish.

Text 31

çré-rädhoväca 
våndävane divya-nikuïja-pärçve
     kåñëä-taöe räsa-rasäya yogyam
rahaù-sthalaà tvaà kurutän manojïaà
     manoratho 'yaà mama deva-deva

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; våndävane—in Våndävan; divya-nikuïja-pärçve—in the splendid groves; kåñëä—of the Yamunä; taöe—on the shore; räsa-rasäya—for the nectar of a rasa dance; yogyam—suitable; rahaù-sthalam—secluded place; tvam—You; kurutän—may do; manojïäm—beautiful; manorathaù—desire; ayam—this; mama—My; deva-deva—O Lord of lords.

     Çré Rädhä said: In splendid Våndävana forest, in a beautiful and secluded place by the Yamunä's shore, please make an arena for a nectar räsa-dance. O Lord of lords, this is My desire.

Text 32

çré-närada uväca 
tathästu coktvä bhagavän
     raho-yogyaà vicintayan
sva-netra-paìkajäbhyäà tu
     hådayaà sandadarça ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tathästu—so be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; raho-yogyam—secluded; vicintayan—considering; sva-netra-paìkajäbhyäm—with His lotus eyes; tu—undeed; hådayam—heart; sandadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: Saying, "So be it", the Lord meditated. With His lotus eyes he looked inside His heart.

Text 33

tadaiva kåñëa-hådayäd
     gopé-vyühasya paçyataù
nirgataà sa-jalaà tejo
     'nurägasyeva cäìkuram

     tadä—then; eva—certainly; kåñëa-hådayät—from Lord Kåñëa's heart; gopé-vyühasya—a host of gopés; paçyataù—watching; nirgatam—came out; sa-jalam—with water; tejaù—fire; anurägasya—of love; iva—like; ca—and; aìkuram—a sprout.

     As the gopés watched, Kåñëa's love, in a form of fire and water, came from His heart as a sprout comes up from the ground.

Text 34

patitaà räsa-bhümau tad
     vavådhe parvatäkåté
ratna-dhätu-mayaà divyaà
     su-nirjhära-daré-våtam

     patitam—fallen; räsa-bhümau—on the ground of the räsa-dance; tat—that; vavådhe—grew; parvatäkåté—in the form of a mountain; ratna-dhätu-mayam—made of jewels; divyam—splendid; su-nirjhära-daré-våtam—filled with caves and mountain-streams.

     Falling onto the ground of the räsa-dance circle, that love grew into a great mountain filled with many caves and swiftly-moving streams, . . .

Text 35

kadamba-bakuläçoka-
     latä-jäla-manoharam
mandära-kunda-våndäòhyaà
     su-pakñi-gaëa-saìkulam

     kadamba—kadamba; bakula—bakula; açoka—asoka; latä—vines; jäla—network; manoharam—beautiful; mandära—mandara; kunda—kunds; vånda—multitudes; äòhyam—opulent; su-pakñi-gaëa-saìkulam—filled with birds.

 . . . beautiful with kadamba, bakula, and açoka trees and a great network of flowering vines, opulent with mandära and kunda flowers, and filled with graceful birds.

Text 36

kñaëa-mätreëa vaideha
     lakña-yojana-viståtam
çata-koöir yojanänäà
     lambitaà çeñavat punaù

     kñaëa-mätreëa—in onlky a moment; vaideha—O king of Videha; lakña-yojana-viståtam—eight hundred thousand miles; çata-koöiù—one billion; yojanänäm—yojanas; lambitam—in extent; çeñavat—like Çeña; punaù—again.

     O king of Videha, in a single moment that mountain became eight hundred thousand miles wide and eight billion miles long. It was like another Ananta Çeña.

Text 37

ürdhvaà samunnataà jätaà
     païcäçat-koöi-yojanam
karéndra-vat sthitaà çaçvat
     païcäçat-koöi-viståtam

     ürdhvam—up; samunnatam—raised; jätam—born; païcäçat-koöi-yojanam—4,000,000,000 miles; karéndra-vat—like the king of elephants; sthitam—situated; çaçvat—eternally; païcäçat-koöi-viståtam—five hundred million.

     It was four billion miles tall. It is four billion miles tall eternally. It was like a gigantic elephant.

Text 38

koöi-yojana-dérghäìgaiù
     çåìgänäà çatakaiù sphurat
uccakaiù svarëa-kalaçaiù
     präsädam iva maithila

     koöi-yojana—eithy million miles; dérgha—tall; aìgaiù—with limbs; çåìgänäm—of peaks; çatakaiù—with a hundred; sphurat—manifested; uccakaiù—tall; svarëa-kalaçaiù—with many golden domes; präsädam—a palace; iva—like; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     It had a hundred eighty-million-mile-tall peaks. O king of Mithilä, it was like a great palace with many golden domes.

Text 39

govardhanäkhyaà tac cähuù
     çata-çåìgaà tathäpare
evam-bhütaà tu tad api
     vardhitaà mänasotsukam

     govardhanäkhyam—named Govardhana Hill; tat—that; ca—and; ähuù—said; çata-çåìgam—hundred peaks; tathä—so; apare—others; evam-bhütam—in this way; tu—indeed; tat—that; api—also; vardhitam—increased; mänasa—of the heart; utsukam—the eagerness.

     Some called this mountain Govardhana and others called it Çataçåìga (a hundred peaks). The mountain expanded as much as its heart wished.

Text 40

kolähale tadä jäte
     goloke bhaya-vihvale
vékñyotthäya hariù säkñäd
     dhastenäçu tatäda taà

     kolähale—chaos; tadä—then; jäte—was maniufested; goloke—inj Goloka; bhaya-vihvale—filled with fear; vékñya—seeing; utthäya—rising; hariù—Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; hastena—with one hand; äçu—at once; tatäda—struck; tam—it.

     As the mountain expanded, Goloka became filled with fear and there was a great uproar. Lord Kåñëa at once stood up and slapped the mountain with His hand

Text 41

kià vardhase bho pracchinnaà
     lokam äcchädya tiñöhasi
kià vä na caite vasituà
     tac-chäntim akarod dhariù

     kim—why?; vardhase—do you expand; bhaù—O; pracchinnam—covered; lokam—realm; äcchädya—coving; tiñöhasi—you stand; kim—why?; vä—or; na—not; ca—and; ete—they; vasitum—to reside; tat-çäntim—peace; akarot—did; hariù—Kåñëa.

     He said, "Why do You expand so much? You have covered the entire realm! Why do you not stop at once?" In this way Kåñëa stopped the mountain from growing any further.

Text 42

samvékñya taà giri-varaà
     prasannä bhagavat-priyä
tasmin rahaù-sthale räjan
     raräja hariëä saha

     samvékñya—seeing; tam—this; giri-varam—best of mountains; prasannä—pleased; bhagavat-priyä—the Lord's beloved; tasmin—in that; rahaù-sthale—in a secluded pkace; räjan—O king; raräja—shone; hariëä—Kåñëa; saha—with.

     Gazing at this best of mountains, Lord Kåñëa's beloved Rädhä was very pleased. O king, She enjoyed pastimes with Kåñëa in a secluded place on that mountain.

Text 43

so 'yaà giri-varaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëena praëoditaù
sarva-tértha-mayaù çyämo
     ghana-çyämaù sura-priyaù

     saù—this; ayam—this; giri-varaù—the best of mountains; säkñäc—directly; çré-kåñëena—by Kåñëa; praëoditaù—sent; sarva-tértha-mayaù—consisting of all holy places; çyämaù—dark; ghana-çyämaù—dark as a cloud; sura-priyaù—dear to the Lord.

     In this way Govardhana Hill, which is the best of mountains, which is dear to the Lord, which is dark as a monsoon cloud, and which contains within itself all holy places, was manifested by Lord Kåñëa.

Text 44

bhäratät päçcima-diçi
     salmali-dvépa-madhyataù
govardhano janma lebhe
     patnyäà droëäcalasya ca

     bhäratät—from Bharata varsa; päçcima-diçi—in the w4est; salmali-dvépa-madhyataù—in Slamali-dvipa; govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; janma—birth; lebhe—attained; patnyäm—in the wife; droëäcalasya—of Mount Droëa; ca—and.

     In Çälmalé-dvépa, to the west of Bhärata-varña, Govardhana Hill was born from the wife of Mount Droëa.

Text 45

pulastyena samänéto
     bharate vraja-maëòale
vaideha tasyägamanaà
     mayä tubhyaà puroditam

     pulastyena—by Pulastya Muni; samänétaù—brought; bharate—to Bharata varsa; vraja-maëòale—in Vraja-maëòala; vaideha—O king of Videha; tasya—of him; ägamanam—the arrival; mayä—by me; tubhyam—to you; purä—before; uditam—described.

     Pulastya Muni brought Govardhana to Bhärata-varña. O king of Videha, I have already described this to you.

Text 46

yathä purä vardhitum utsuko 'yaà
     tathäpidhänaà bhavitä bhuvo vä
vicintya çäpaà muninä pareço
     droëätmajayeti dadau kñayärtham

     yathä—as; purä—before; vardhitum—to 3expand; utsukaù—eager; ayam—this; tathä—so; apidhänam——covered; bhavitä—will be; bhuvaù—of the earth; vä—or; vicintya—considering; çäpam—curse; muninä—by the sage; pareçaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; droëätmajaya—to the son of Mount Droëa; iti—thus; dadau—gave; kñayärtham—to decrease.

     Because Govardhana Hill had been so eager to expand unlimitedly, Lord Kåñëa arranged that the sage Pulastya curse it to decrease day by day.
.pa

Chapter Ten
Çré Giriräja-mähätmya
The Glory of Çré Giriräja

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
atraivodäharantémaà
     itihäsaà purätanam
yasya çravaëa-mätreëa
     mahä-päpaà praëaçyati

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atra—here; eva—indeed; udäharanti—say; imam—thus; itihäsam—history; purätanam—ancient; yasya—of which; çravaëa-mätreëa—simply by hearing; mahä-päpam—great sin; praëaçyati—is destroyed.

     Çré Närada said: This is the most ancient history of Goloka. When one hears it, all his sins are destoryed.

Text 2

vijayo brähmaëaù kaçcid
     gotamé-téra-väsa-kåt
äyayau svam åëaà netuà
     mathuräà päpa-näçiném

     vijayaù—Vijaya; brähmaëaù—brähmaëa; kaçcit—a certain; gotamé-téra-väsa-kåt—residing on the bank of the Gotamé river; äyayau—went; svam—own; åëam—debt; netum—to repay; mathuräm—to Mathurä; päpa-näçiném—destroyer of sins.

     One day, in order to repay the debt he owed the sages and ancestors, a certain brähmaëa named Vijaya went to Mathurä, the holy place that removes all sins.

Text 3

kåtvä käryaà gåhaà gacchan
     govardhana-taöéà gataù
vartulaà tatra päñäëaà
     caikaà jagräha maithila

     kåtvä—doing; käryam—duty; gåham—home; gacchan—going; govardhana-taöém—to Govardhana Hill; gataù—went; vartulam—round; tatra—there; päñäëam—stone; ca—and; ekam—one; jagräha—took; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, after performing his religious duties, he went to Govardhana Hill and took one of the stones there.

Text 4

çanaiù çanair vanoddeçe
     nirgato vraja-maëòalät
agre dadarça cäyantaà
     räkñasaà ghora-rüpiëam

     çanaiù çanaiù—gradually; vanoddeçe—in the forest; nirgataù—went; vraja-maëòalät—from the circle of Vraja; agre—before; dadarça—saw; ca—and; äyantam—coming; räkñasam—a raksasa; ghora-rüpiëam—horrible.

     Going in a leisurely way from forest to forest, he finally left the circle of Vraja. At that moment he saw a horrible räkñasa monster approaching.

Text 5

hådaye ca mukhaà yasya
     trayaù pädaù bhujaç ca ñaö
hasta-trayaà ca sthüloñöho
     näçä hasta-samunnatä

     hådaye—in the chest; ca—and; mukham—face; yasya—of whom; trayaù—fear; pädaù—feet; bhujaç—arms; ca—and; ñaö—six; hasta-trayam—three hands; ca—and; sthüloñöhaù—huge lips; näçä—nose; hasta-samunnatä—raised hands.

     The monster had three heads, three chests, six arms, six legs, three hands, huge lips, and a huge nose. His hands were raised in the air.

Text 6

sapta-hastä lalaj-jihvä
     kaëöakäbhäs tanüruhäù
aruëe akñiëé dérghe
     dantä vakrä bhayaìkaräù

     sapta-hastä—seven hands; lalaj-jihvä—lolling tongue; kaëöakäbhäù—like a thorn bush; tanüruhäù—the hairs of the body; aruëe—red; akñiëé—eyes; dérghe—long; dantä—teeth; vakra—curved; bhayaìkaraù—fearsome.

     His seven-hands-long tongue moved to and fro, the hairs of his body were like a tangle of thorns, his eyes were red, and he had long, curved, frightening fangs.

Text 7

räkñaso ghurghura-çabdaà
     kåtvä cäpi bubhukñitaù
äyayau sammukhe räjan
     brähmaëasya sthitasya ca

     räkñasaù—the monster; ghurghura-çabdam—a snorting sound; kåtvä—making; ca—and; api—and; bubhukñitaù—wishing to eat; äyayau—came; sammukhe—in the presence; räjan—O king; brähmaëasya—of the brähmaëa; sthitasya—standing there; ca—and.

     O king, wishing to eat him, the snorting monster approached the brähmaëa.

Text 8

giriräjodbhavenäsau
     päñäëena jaghäna tam
giriräja-çilä-sparçät
     tyaktväsau räkñaséà tanum

     giriräja—on Govardhana Hill; udbhavena—manifested; asau—he; päñäëena—the stone; jaghäna—hit; tam—him; giriräja-çilä—of the stone from Govardhana Hill; sparçät—from the touch; tyaktvä—gave up; asau—he; räkñasém—of the monster; tanum—the body.

     With his Govardhana-stone the brähmaëa struck the monster. Hit by the Govardhana-stone, the monster gave up his body.

Texts 9 and 10

padma-patra-viçäläkñaù
     çyämasundara-vigrahaù
vana-mälé péta-väsä
     mukuöé kuëòalänvitaù

vaàçé-dharo vetra-hastaù
     kämadeva iväparaù
bhütvä kåtäïjalir vipraà
     praëanäma muhur muhuù

     padma—lotus; patra—petal; viçäla—large; akñaù—eyes; çyäma—dark; sundara—handsome; vigrahaù—form; vana-mälé—wearing a forest garland; péta-väsä—yellow garments; mukuöé—wearign a crown; kuëòalänvitaù—wearing earrings; vaàçé—a flute; dharaù—holding; vetra-hastaù—a stick in his hand; kämadeva—Kämadeva; iva—like; aparaù—another; bhütvä—becoming; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; vipram—to the brähmaëa; praëanäma—offered obeisances; muhuù—again; muhuù—and again.

     Suddenly transformed into a handsome dark person with large lotus-petal eyes, dressed in yellow garments, garlanded with forest flowers, wearing a crown and earrings, holding a flute and stick, glorious as another Kämadeva, and his features like those of Lord Kåñëa, with folded hands he bowed before the brähmaëa again and again.

Text 11

çré-siddha uväca 
dhanyas tvaà brähmaëa-çreñöha
     para-träëa-paräyaëaù
tvayä vimocito 'haà vai
     räkñasatvän mahä-mate

     çré-siddha uväca—the liberated soul said; dhanyaù—fortunate; tvam—you; brähmaëa-çreñöha—O best of brähmaëas; para-träëa-paräyaëaù—devoted to the protection of others; tvayä—by you; vimocitaù—freed; aham—I am; vai—indeed; räkñasatvät—from the state of being a monster; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     The liberated soul said: O best of brähmaëas, you earnestly work for the salvation of others. O noble-hearted one, you have rescued me from a monster's life.

Text 12

päñäëa-sparça-mätreëa
     kalyäëaà me babhüva ha
na ko 'pi mäà mocayituà
     samartho hi tvayä vinä

     päñäëa—of the stone; sparça—by the touch; mätreëa—simply; kalyäëam—auspiciousness; me—of me; babhüva—became; ha—Oh; na—not; ko 'pi—anyone; mäm—me; mocayitum—to deliver; samarthaù—is able; hi—indeed; tvayä—for you; vinä—except.

     Good fortune has come to me simply by the touch of this stone. No one but you could have delivered me.

Text 13

çré-brähmaëa uväca 
vismitas tava väkye 'haà
     na tvaà mocayituà kñamaù
päñäëa-sparçana-phalaà
     na jäne vada suvrata

     çré-brähmaëa uväca—the brähmaëa said; vismitaù—surprised; tava—of you; väkye—the words; aham—I am; na—not; tvam—you; mocayitum—to deliver; kñamaù—am able; päñäëa-sparçana-phalam—the result of a stone's touch; na—not; jäne—I understand; vada—please tell; suvrata—O saintly one.

     The brähmaëa said: I am astonished by your words. I have no power to deliver you. I don't know how, simply by a stone's touch, this has happened. O saintly one, please tell me how this happened.

Text 14

çré-siddha uväca 
giriräjo hare rüpaà
     çrémän govardhano giriù
tasya darçana-mätreëa
     naro yäti kåtärthatäm

     çré-siddha uväca—the liberated souls said; giriräjaù—the king of mountains; hare—of Lord Kåñëa; rüpam—the form; çrémän—glorious; govardhanaù—Govardhana Hill; giriù—hill; tasya—of it; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; naraù—a person; yäti—becomes; kåtärthatäm—successful.

     The liberated soul said: Glorious Govardhana Hill, the king of mountains, is the person form of Lord Kåñëa. Simply by seeing it, a person attains the supreme goal of life.

Text 15

gandhamädana-yäträyäà
     yat phalaà labhate naraù
tasmät koöi-guëaà puëyaà
     giriräjasya darçane

     gandhamädana-yäträyäm—on a journey to Gandhamadama Mountain; yat—what; phalam—result; labhate—attains; naraù—a person; tasmät—than that; koöi-guëam—multiplied millions of times; puëyam—piety; giriräjasya—of Govardhana Hill; darçane—in seeing.

     By seeing Govardhana Hill one attains a pious result many millions of times greater than the result of a pligrimage to Mount Gandhamadana.

Text 16

païca-varña-sahasräëi
     kedare yat tapaù-phalam
tac ca govardhane vipra
     kñaëena labhate naraù

     païca-varña-sahasräëi—five thousand years; kedare—on Mount Kedara; yat—what; tapaù-phalam—the result of austerities; tac—that; ca—and; govardhane—on Govardhana Hill; vipra—O brähmaëa; kñaëena—in a moment; labhate—attains; naraù—a person.

     O brähmaëa, the same result one attains by performing austerities for five thousand years on Mount Kedära is attained in a single moment on Govardhana Hill.

Text 17

malayädrau svarëa-bhära-
     dänasyäpi ca yat phalam
tasmät koöi-guëaà puëyaà
     giriräje hi mäsikam

     malayädrau—in the Malaya Hills; svarëa—of gold; bhära—of a bhara; dänasya—of charity; api—even; ca—and; yat—that; phalam—result; tasmät—than that; koöi-guëam—multiplied millions of times; puëyam—piety; giriräje—on Govardhana Hill; hi—indeed; mäsikam—one month.

     By staying for one month on Govardhana Hill one attains a pious result many millions of times greater than the result of giving in charity a bhära of gold in the Malaya Hills.

Text 18

parvate maìgala-prasthe
     yo dadyäd dhema-dakñiëäm
sa yäti viñëu-särüpyaà
     yuktaù päpa-çatair api

     parvate maìgala-prasthe—on Mount Maìgala; yaù—one who; dadyät—gives; dhema-dakñiëäm—gold in daksina; sa—he; yäti—attains; viñëu-särüpyam—a form like Lord Viñëu's; yuktaù—engaged; päpa-çataiù—with hundreds of sins; api—even.

     Even though he has committed hundreds of sins, a person who on Mount Maìgala gives gold in charity attains a spiritual form like Lord Viñëu's.

Text 19

tat padaà hi naro yäti
     giriräjasya darçanät
giriräja-samaà puëyaà
     anyat térthaà na vidyate

     tat—that; padam—state; hi—indeed; naraù—aperson; yäti—attains; giriräjasya—of Govardhana Hill; darçanät—from seeing; giriräja-samam—like Govardhana Hill; puëyam—piety; anyat—another; tértham—holy place; na—not; vidyate—is.

     That same result is attained simply by seeing Govardhana Hill. No other holy place is as sacred as Govardhana Hill.

Texts 20 and 21

åñabhädrau küöakädrau
     kolakädrau tathä naraù
suvarëa-çåìga-yuktänäà
     gaväà koöir dadäti yaù

mahä-puëyaà labhet so 'pi
     viprän sampüjya yatnataù
tasmäl lakña-guëaà puëyaà
     girau govardhane dvija

     åñabhädrau—on Mount Åñabha; küöakädrau—on Mount küöaka; kolaka—on Mount Kolaka; tathä—so; naraù—a person; suvarëa—gold; çåìga—horns; yuktänäm—with; gaväm—of cows; koöiù—tewn million; dadäti—gives; yaù—one who; mahä-puëyam—great piety; labhet—attains; saù—he; api—also; viprän—brähmaëas; sampüjya—worshiping; yatnataù—carefully; tasmäl—than that; lakña-guëam—a hunbdred thousand times; puëyam—piety; girau govardhane—on Govardhana Hill; dvija—O brähmaëa.

     O brähmaëa, simply by visiting Govardhana Hill one attains piety a hundred thousand times greater than the piety he would attain if on the sacred mountains Åñabha, Küöaka, and Kolaka he had worshiped many brähmaëas and given in charity ten million cows with golden horns.

Texts 22 and 23

åñyamükasya sahyasya
     tathä deva-gireù punaù
yäträyäà labhate puëyaà
     samastäya bhuvaù phalam

giriräjasya yäträyäà
     tasmät koöi-guëaà phalam
giriräja-samaà térthaà
     na bhütaà na bhaviñyati

     åñyamükasya—of Åñyamüka; sahyasya—borne; tathä—so; deva-gireù—of Devagiri; punaù—again; yäträyäm—on pilgrimage; labhate—attains; puëyam—piety; samastäya—all; bhuvaù—of tyhe world; phalam—the result; giriräjasya—of Govardhana Hill; yäträyäm—on pilgrimage; tasmät—than that; koöi-guëam—multiplied ten million times; phalam—result; giriräja-samam—equal to Govardhana Hill; tértham—holy place; na—not; bhütam—was; na—not; bhaviñyati—will be.

     By going on pilgrimage to Govardhana Hill one attains piety ten million times greater than the piety he would attain by going on pilgrimage to Åñyamüka or Devagiri. There never was, nor will there ever be a holy place equal to Govardhana Hill.

Texts 24 and 25

çré-çaile daça varñäni
     kuëòe vidyädhare naraù
snänaà karoti sukåté
     çata-yajïa-phalaà labhet

govardhane pucche-kuëòe
     dinaikaà snäna-kån naraù
koöi-yajïa-phalaà säkñät
     puëyam eti na saàçayaù

     çré-çaile—on Çré Saila; daça—ten; varñäni—years; kuëòe vidyädhare—in Vidyadhara-kunda; naraù—a person; snänam—bath; karoti—does; sukåté—pious; çata-yajïa-phalam—the result of a hundred yajnas; labhet—attains; govardhane—on Govardhana Hill; pucche-kuëòe—in Puccha-kunda; dinaikam—one day; snäna-kån—bathing; naraù—a person; koöi-yajïa-phalam—the result of ten million yajnas; säkñät—direct; puëyam—piety; eti—attains; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     By bathing every day for ten years in Vidyädhara-kuëòa on Çré Çaila, one attains the result of a hundred yajïas. By once bathing in Puccha-kunda on Govardhana Hill one attains the result of ten million yajïas. Of this there is no doubt.

Texts 26 and 27

veìkatädrau väri-dhäre
     mahendre vindhya-parvate
yajïäà kåtvä hy açvamedhaà
     naro näka-patir bhavet

govardhane 'smin yo yajïaà
     kåtvä dattvä su-dakñiëäm
näke padaà samvidhäya
     sa viñëoù padam ävrajet

     veìkatädrau—on Venkata Hill; väri-dhäre—on Mounta Varidhara; mahendre—on Mount Mahendra; vindhya-parvate—in the Vindhya mountains; yajïam—a yajna; kåtvä—performing; hy—indeed; açvamedham—asvamedha; naraù—a person; näka-patiù—the king of heaven; bhavet—becomes; govardhane—on Govardhana Hill; asmin—there; yaù—who; yajïam—a yajna; kåtvä—performs; dattvä—giving; su-dakñiëäm—daksina; näke—in the heaven; padam—the realm; samvidhäyasurpassing; sa—he; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; padam—the abode; ävrajet—attains.

     A person who performs an açvamedha-yajïa on the mountains Veìkaöa, Väridhära, Mahendra, or Vindhya, attains the post of King Indra. A person who performs an açvamedha-yajïa on Govardhana Hill and gives proper dakñiëä goes beyond the realm of Indra and attains the abode of Lord Viñëu. 

Texts 28-30

citraküöe payasvinyäà
     çré-räma-navamé-dine
pariyätre tåtéyäyäà
     vaiçäkhasya dvijottama

kukurädrau ca pürëäyäà
     nilädrau dvädaçé-dine
indrakéle ca saptamyäà
     snänaà dänaà tapaù kriyä

tat sarvaà koöi-guëitaà
     bhavatétthaà hi bhärate
govardhane tu tat sarvaà
     anantaà jäyate dvija

     citraküöe—on Citraküöa; payasvinyäm—in Payasvini; çré-räma-navamé-dine—on Çré Räma-navamé day; pariyätre—pilgrimage; tåtéyäyäm—on the third; vaiçäkhasya—during Visakha; dvijottama—O best of brähmaëas; kukurädrau—on Mount Kukura; ca—and; pürëäyäm—during the full moon day; nilädrau—on Mount Nila; dvädaçé-dine—on the dvadasi day; indrakéle—on Indrakila; ca—and; saptamyäm—on the saptami; snänam—bath; dänam—charity; tapaù—asterity; kriyä—pious deed; tat—that; sarvam—all; koöi-guëitam—multiplied by ten million times; bhavati—is; ittham—thus; hi—indeed; bhärate—in Bharata varsa; govardhane—on Govardhana Hill; tu—but; tat—that; sarvam—all; anantam—endless; jäyate—is manifested; dvija—O brähmaëa.

     O best of brähmaëas, bathing in sacred rivers, giving charity, performing austerities, and performing pious deeds, all these performed during Çré Räma-navamé on Mount Citraküöa, during the third day of Viçäkhä on Pariyätra, during the full-moon on Mount Kukura, during Dvädaçé on Mount Néla, or during Saptamé at Indrakéla bring a great pious result. That pious result is multiplied ten million times by visiting Bhärata-varña. It is multiplied unlimited times by visiting Govardhana Hill.

Texts 31-37

godävaryäà girau siàhe
     mäyäpuryäà tu kumbhage
puñkare puñya-nakñatre
     kurukñetre ravi-grahe

candra-grahe tu käçyäà vai
     phälgune naimiñe tathä
ekädaçyäà çükare ca
     kärtikyäà gaëa-mukti-de

janmäñöamyäà madhoù puryäà
     khäëòave dvädaçé-dine
kärtikyäà pürëimäyäà tu
     vaöeçvara-mahä-vaöe

makarärke prayäge tu
     barhiñmatyäà hi vaidhåtau
ayodhyä-sarayü-tére
     çré-räma-navamé-dine

evaà çiva-caturdaçyäà
     vaijanätha-çubhe vane
tathä darçe soma-väre
     gaìgä-sägara-saìgame

daçamyäà setubandhe ca
     çré-raìge saptamé-dine
eñu dänaà tapaù snänaà
     japo deva-dvijärcanam

tat sarvaà koöi-guëitaà
     bhavatéha dvijottama
tat-tulyaà puëyam äpnoti
     girau govardhane vare

     godävaryäm—in thre Godavari; girau siàhe—in Mount Simha; mäyäpuryäm—in Mayapuri; tu—indeed; kumbhage—during kumbhaga; puñkare—during puskara; puñya-nakñatre—during pusya-naksatra; kurukñetre—at Kuruksetra; ravi-grahe—on Sunday; candra-grahe—during the moon; tu—indeed; käçyäm—at Varanasi; vai—indeed; phälgune—in the month of Phalguna; naimiñe—in Naimisaranya; tathä—so; ekädaçyäm—duting ekadasi; çükare—in siükara; ca—and; kärtikyäm—in kartika; gaëa-mukti-de—giving liberation; janmäñöamyäm—in janmastami; madhoù puryäm—in Mathura City; khäëòave—in the khandava forest; dvädaçé-dine—on Dvadasi; kärtikyäm—in Kartika; pürëimäyäm—on the full moon; tu—indeed; vaöeçvara-mahä-vaöe—at the great vatesvara banyan tree; makarärke—in markara; prayäge—in Prayaga; tu—indeed; barhiñmatyäm—in Barhismati; hi—indeed; vaidhåtau—in Vaidhrti; ayodhyä-sarayü-tére—on ther shore of the Sarayu at Ayodhya; çré-räma-navamé-dine—on Çré Räma-navami; evam—thus; çiva-caturdaçyäm—on Siva caturdasi; vaijanätha-çubhe vane—in brautiful vaijanatha forest; tathä—so; darçe—in darsa; soma-väre—on monday; gaìgä-sägara-saìgame—at Ganga-sagara; daçamyäm—on dasami; setubandhe—at Setubandha; ca—and; çré-raìge—at Çré Ranga; saptamé-dine—on saptami; eñu—in these; dänam—charity; tapaù—austerity; snänam—bathing; japaù—chanting mantras; deva-dvijärcanam—worshiping the Lord and the ds; tat—that; sarvam—all; koöi—ten million times; guëitam—multitplied; bhavati—is; iha—here; dvijottama—O best of brähmaëa; tat-tulyam—equal to that; puëyam—piety; äpnoti—attains; girau govardhane vare—on Govardhana Hill.

     By giving charity, performing austerities, bathing in sacred rivers, chanting sacred mantras, or worshiping the brähmaëas and the Supreme Personality of Godhead at the Godävaré, Mount Siàha, Mäyäpuré, Kumbhaga, Puñkara, Puñya-nakñatra, Kurukñetra, Ravi-graha, Candra-graha, Käçé, Phälguna, Naimiña, Ekädaçé, Çükara, Kärtiké, Gaëamuktida, Janmäñöamé, Madhupuré, Khäëòava, Dvädaçé, Kärtiké, Pürëimä, Vaöeçvara-mahä-vaöa, Makarärka, Prayäga, Barhiñmaté, Vaidhåti, Ayodhyä-sarayü-téra, Çré Räma-navamé-dina, Çiva-caturdaçé, vaijanätha-çubha-vana, Darça, Soma-vära, Gaìgä-sägara-saìgama, Daçamé, Setubandha, Çré Raìga, or Saptamé-dina, on attains a great pious result. O best of brähmaëas, by visiting Govardhana Hill one attains a pious result ten million times greater than all those pious deeds together.

Text 38

govinda-kuëòe viçade
     yaù snäti kåñëa-mänasaù
präpnoti kåñëa-särüpyaà
     maithilendra na saàçayaù

     govinda-kuëòe—Gpvinda-kunda; viçade—sacred; yaù—who; snäti—bathes; kåñëa-mänasaù—thinking og Kåñëa; präpnoti—attains; kåñëa-särüpyam—a form like Kåñëas's; maithilendra—O king of Mithilä; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     One who, thinking of Lord Kåñëa, bathes in sacred Govinda-kuëòa, attains a transcendental form like Lord Kåñëa's. O king of Mithilä, of this there is no doubt.

Text 39

açvamedha-sahasräëi
     räjasüya-çatäni ca
mänasé-gaìgayä tulyaà
     na bhavanty atra no girau

     açvamedha-sahasräëi—thousand asvamedha-yajnas; räjasüya-çatäni—a hundred rajasuya-yajnas; ca—and; mänasé-gaìgayä—with manasa-gaìgä; tulyam—equal; na—not; bhavanty—is; atra—here; na—not; u—indeed; girau—on Govardhana Hill.

     Neither a thousand açvamedha-yajïas nor a hundred räjasüya-yajïas are equal to visiting Mänasa-gaìgä on Govardhana Hill.

Text 40

tvayä vipra kåtaà säkñäd
     giriräjasya darçanam
sparçanaà ca tataù snänaà
     na tvatto 'py adhiko bhuvi

     tvayä—by you; vipra—O brähmaëa; kåtam—done; säkñät—directly; giriräjasya—of Govardhana Hill; darçanam—sight; sparçanam—touch; ca—and; tataù—there; snänam—bath; na—not; tvattaù—than you; api—even; adhikaù—greater; bhuvi—on the earth.

     O brähmaëa, you have directly seen and touched Govardhana Hill. You have bathed in its sacred waters. In this world no one is more fortunate than you.

Text 41

na manyase cen mäà paçya
     mahä-pätakinaà param
govardhana-çilä-sparçät
     kåñëa-särüpyatäà gataù

     na—not; manyase—you consider; cen—if; mäm—me; paçya—look; mahä-pätakinam—great sinner; param—gret; govardhana—Govardhana; çilä—stone; sparçät—by the touch; kåñëa-särüpyatäm—teh state of having a transcendental form like Lord Kåñëa's; gataù—attained.

     If you don't believe my words, consider the story of the great sinner who, because he was touched by a Govardhana-stone, attained a transcendental form like Lord Kåñëa's.
.pa

Chapter Eleven
Çré Giriräja-prabhäva
The Power of Çré Giriräja

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä siddha-väkyaà
     brähmaëo vismayaà gataù
punaù papraccha taà räjan
     giriräja-prabhäva-vit

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; siddha-väkyam—the words of the liberated soul; brähmaëaù—of the brähmaëa; vismayam—wonder; gataù—attained; punaù—again; papraccha—asked; tam—him; räjan—O king; giriräja-prabhäva-vit—the knower of the powers of Govardhana Hill.

     Çré Närada said: When he heard the liberated soul's words, the brähmaëa became struck with wonder. Then he asked another question of the liberated soul, who knew the power and glory of Govardhana Hill.

Text 2

çré-brähmaëa uväca 
purä janmani kas tvaà bhos
     tvayä kià kaluñaà kåtam
sarvaà vada mahä-bhäga
     tvaà säkñäd-divya-darçanaù

     çré-brähmaëa uväca—the brähmaëa said; purä—before; janmani—birth; kaù—who?; tvam—you; bhoù—Oh; tvayä—by you; kim—how?; kaluñam—sin; kåtam—done; sarvam—all; vada—tell; mahä-bhäga—O fortunate one; tvam—you; säkñäd-divya-darçanaù—can see everything perfectly.

     The brähmaëa said: Who were you in your previous birth? What sin did you commit. O fortunate one, you have spiritual eyes to see all this directly.

Text 3

çré-siddha uväca 
purä janmani vaiçyo 'haà
     dhané vaiçya-suto mahän
ä-bälayäd dyüta-nirato
     viöa-goñöhi-viçäradaù

     çré-siddha uväca—the liberated soul said; purä—previous; janmani—birth; vaiçyaù—a vaisya; ahaà-I; dhäni—wealthy; vaiçya—of a vaisya; sutaù—the son; mahän—great; ä-bälayät—from childhood; dyüta-nirataù—addicted to gambling; viöa-goñöhi-viçäradaù—a rake.

     The liberated soul said: In my previous birth I was a wealthy vaiçya's son. From childhood I was a compulsive gambler. I became a great rake.

Text 4

veçyä-rataù ku-märgo 'haà
     madirä-mada-vihvalaù
mäträ piträ bhäryayäpi
     bhartsito 'haà sadä dvija

     veçyä—with a prostitute; rataù—in love; ku-märgaù—on the wrong path; aham—I; madirä-mada-vihvalaù—a drunkard; mäträ—by my mother; piträ—father; bhäryayä—wife; api—and; bhartsitaù—rebuked; aham—I; sadä—always; dvija—O brähmaëa.

     I became a drunkard addicted to chasing prostitutes. O brähmaëa, my father, mother, and wife rebuked me again and again.

Text 5

ekadä tu mayä vipra
     pitarau garadänataù
märitau ca tathä bhäryä
     khaògena pathi märitä

     ekadä—one day; tu—indeed; mayä—by me; vipra—O brähmaëa; pitarau—parents; garada-änataù—poisoned; märitau—died; ca—and; tathä—then; bhäryä—wife; khaògena—with a sword; pathi—on the highway; märitä—killed.

     Then one day with poison I killed my parents and with a sword I killed my wife on a pathway.

Text 6

gåhitvä tad-dhanaà sarvaà
     veçyayä sahitaù khalaù
dakñiëäçaà ca gatavän
     dasyu-karmäti-nirdayaù

     gåhitvä—taking; tad-dhanam—that wealth; sarvam—all; veçyayä—with a prostitute; sahitaù—with; khalaù—rascal; dakñiëäçam—to the south; ca—and; gatavän—went; dasyu-karmäti-nirdayaù—a merciless thief.

     Then I took all their money and went with my prostitute beloved to the south, where I became a merciless thief.

Text 7

ekadä tu mayä veçyä
     niùkñiptä hy andha-küpake
dasyunä hi mayä päçair
     märitäù çataço naräù

     ekadä—one day; tu—indeed; mayä—by me; veçyä—the prostitute; niùkñiptä—thrown; hy—indeed; andha-küpake—into a blind well; dasyunä—by a thief; hi—indeed; mayä—by me; päçaiù—with ropes; märitäù—killed; çataçaù—hundreds; naräùpeople.

     One day I threw the prsotitute into a blind well and left her there to die. Indeed, with ropes I killed many hundreds of people as I robbed them.

Text 8

dhana-lobhena bho vipra
     brahma-hatyä-çataà kåtam
kñatra-hatyä vaiñya-hatyäù
     çüdra-hatyäù sahasraçaù

     dhana-lobhena—greedy; bhaù—O; vipra—brähmaëa; brahma-hatyä-çatam—killing hunderds of brähmaëa; kåtam—done; kñatra-hatyä—the murder of ksatriyas; vaiñya-hatyäù—the murder of vaisyas; çüdra-hatyäù—the murder of sudras; sahasraçaù—thousands.

     O brähmaëa, I was so greedy after money that as a highwayman I murdered many hundreds of brähmaëas and many thousands of kñatriyas, vaiçyas, and çüdras.

Text 9

ekadä mäàsam änetuà
     mågän hantuà vane gatam
sarpo 'daçat padä spåñöo
     duñöaà mäà nidhanaà gatam

     ekadä—one day; mäàsam—meat; änetum—to get; mågän—deer; hantum—to kill; vane—in the forest; gatam—went; sarpaù—snake; adaçat—bit; padä—by the foot; spåñöaù—touched; duñöam—wicked; mäm—me; nidhanam—to death; gatam—went.

     One day, as I was hunting deer in the forest, I stepped on a snake. The snake bit me and I died.

Text 10

santäòya mudgarair ghorair
     yamadütä bhayaìkaräù
baddhvä mäà narakaà ninyur
     mahä-pätakinaà khalam

     santäòya—beating; mudgaraiù—with clubs; ghoraiù—terrible; yamadütä—the yamadutas; bhayaìkaräù—feearsome; baddhvä—binding; mäm—me; narakam—to hell; ninyuù—led; mahä-pätakinam—great sinner; khalam—wicked.

     Fearsome Yamadütas beat me with terrible clubs, tied me up, and dragged me, a great sinner, to hell.

Text 11

manvantaraà tu patitaù
     kumbhépäke mahä-khale
kalpaikaà tapta-sürmau ca
     mahä-duùkhaà gataù khalaù

     manvantaram—for a manvantara; tu—certainly; patitaù—fallen; kumbhépäke—into Kumbhipaka; mahä-khale—great hell; kalpa ekam—for one kalpa; tapta—molten; sürmau—the iron form of a woman; ca—and; mahä-duùkham—tormented; gataù—attained; khalaù—wicked.

     I fell into the terrible hell named Kumbhépäka and I stayed there for a manvantara. For a kalpa I was forced to embrace the red-hot iron statue of a woman. I, a great sinner, suffered greatly.

Text 12

catur-açéti-lakñäëäà
     narakänäà påthak påthak
varñaà varñaà nipatito
     nirgato 'haà yamecchayä

     catur-açéti-lakñäëäm—eight million four hundred thousand; narakänäm—of hells; påthak—one; påthak—after another; varñam—place; varñam—after place; nipatitaù—fallen; nirgataù—went; aham—I; yama-icchayä—by the desire of Yamaräja.

     By the desire of Yamaräja I was thrown into eight million four-hundred thousand different hells.

Text 13

tatas tu bhärate varñe
     präpto 'haà karma-väsanäm
daça-väraà sükaro 'haà
     vyäghro 'haà çata-janmasu

     tataù—then; tu—indeed; bhärate varñe—in Bharata-varsa; präptaù—attained; aham—I; karma-väsanäm—by the karma; daça-väram—ten times; sükaraù— pig; aham—I; vyäghraù—I tiger; aham—I; çata-janmasu—in a hundred births.

     Then my karma took me to Bhärata-varña. For ten births I was a pig, and for a hundred births I was a tiger.

Text 14

uñöro 'haà janma-çatakaà
     mahiñaù çata-janmasu
sarpo 'haà janma-sähasraà
     märito duñöa-mänavaiù

     uñöraù—a camel; aham—I; janma-çatakam—for a hundred births; mahiñaù—a buffalo; çata-janmasu—for a hundred births; sarpaù—a snake; aham—I; janma-sähasram—for a hundred births; märitaù—killed; duñöa-mänavaiù—by wicked men.

     For a hundred births I was a camel. For another hundred births I was a buffalo. For a thousand births I was a snake. Wicked men killed me again and again.

Text 15

evaà varñäyutänte tu
     nirjale vipine dvija
räkñasaç cedåço jäto
     vikarälo mahä-khalaù

     evam—thus; varñ—years; ayuta—ten thousand; ante—at the end; tu—indeed; nirjale vipine—in a desert; dvija—O  brähmaëa; räkñasaç—a manoster; ca—and; idåçaù—like this; jätaù—born; vikarälaù—gruesome; mahä-khalaù—wicked.

     O brähmaëa, after ten thousand years of these births I was born in a desert as a grotesque and wicked monster.

Text 16

kasya çüdrasya dehaà vai
     samäruhya vrajaà gataù
våndävanasya nikaöe
     yamunä-nikaöäc chubhät

     kasya çüdrasya—of a sudra; deham—the body; vai—indeed; samäruhya—taking; vrajam—to Vraja; gataù—went; våndävanasya—Våndävana forest; nikaöe—near; yamunä-nikaöät—near the Yamunä; çubhät—sacred.

     One day I assumed the form of a çüdra and I went to Vraja. I came near to Våndävana and the sacred Yamunä.

Text 17

samutthitä yañöi-hastäù
     çyämaläù kåñëa-pärñadäù
tais täòito dharñito 'haà
     vraja-bhümau paläyitaù

     samutthitä—risen; yañöi-hastäù—with sticks in their hands; çyämaläù—handsome; kåñëa-pärñadäù—Kåñëa's associates; taiù—by them; täòitaù—beaten; dharñitaù—defeated; aham—I; vraja-bhümau—from Vraja; paläyitaù—fled.

     With sticks in their hands, some of Lord Kåñëa's handsome friends beat me severely and I fled from the land of Vraja.

Text 18

bubhukñito bahu-dinais
     tväà khäditum ihägataù
tävat tvayä täòito 'haà
     giriräjäçmanä mune

     bubhukñitaù—hungry; bahu-dinaiù—from many days; tväm—you; khäditum—to eat; iha—here; ägataù—came; tävat—from then; tvayä—by you; täòitaù—hit; aham—I; giriräja—of Govardhana Hill; açmanä—by a stone; mune—O sage.

     Hungry for many days, I came here to eat you. Then you hit me with a stone from Govardhana Hill.

Text 19

çré-kåñëa-kåpayä säkñät
     kalyäëaà me babhüva ha

     çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; kåpayä—by the mercy; säkñät—directly; kalyäëam—auspiciousness; me—of me; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     Then, by Lord Kåñëa's kindness, I became very fortunate.

Text 20

çré-närada uväca 
evaà pravadatas tasya
     golokäc ca mahä-rathaù
sahasräditya-saìkäço
     hayäyuta-samanvitaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; pravadataù—speaking; tasya—of him; golokät—from Goloka; ca—and; mahä-rathaù—a great chariot; sahasräditya-saìkäçaù—splendid as a thousand suns; hayäyuta-samanvitaù—drawn by ten thousand horses.

     Çré Närada said: As the liberated soul was speaking these words, a chariot, splendid as a thousand suns and drawn by ten thousand horses, came from Goloka.

Text 21

sahasra-cakra-dhvani-bhål
     lakña-pärñada-maëòitaù
maïjéra-kiìkiné-jälo
     manoharataro nåpa

     sahasra—a thousand; cakra—wheels; dhvani-bhåt—with the sound; lakña-pärñada-maëòitaù—decorated with a hundred thousand associates of the Lord; maïjéra-kiìkiné-jälaù—with a network of bells and thinkling ornamentsd; manoharataraù—extremely beautiful; nåpa—O king.

     The chariot rumbled with a thousand wheels. It was decorated with a hundred thousand associates of the Lord. It had a great network of bells and tinkling ornaments. It was extremely beautiful.

Text 22

paçyatas tasya viprasya
     tam änetuà samägataù
tam ägataà rathaà divyaà
     nematur vipra-nirjarau

     paçyataù—looking on; tasya—of him; viprasya—the brähmaëa; tam—him; änetum—to take; samägataù—came; tam—that; ägatam—went; ratham—chariot; divyam—splendid; nematuù—bowed down; vipra—the brähmaëa; nirjarau—and the liberated soul.

     As the brähmaëa looked one, the chariot approached. The brähmaëa and the liberated soul bowed down before the chariot.

Text 23

tataù samäruhya rathaà sa siddho
     viraïjayan maithila maëòalaà diçam
çré-kåñëalokaà prayayau parät paraà
     nikuïja-lélä-lalitaà manoharam

     tataù—then; samäruhya—ascending; ratham—the chariot; sa—he; siddhaù—the liberated soul; viraïjayan—renouncing; maithila—O king of Mithilä; maëòalaà diçam—the material world; çré-kåñëalokam—to the planet of Çré Kåñëa; prayayau—went; parät—than the greatest; param—greater; nikuïja-lélä-lalitam—beautiful with pastime forests; manoharam—pleasing to the heart.

     Climbing the chariot, and at that moment losing all interest in his heart to stay in the material world, the liberated soul went to Çré Kåñëa's beautiful abode, graceful with many pastime gardens, the highest of all spiritual realms.

Text 24

vipro 'pi tasmät punar ägato girià
     govardhanaà sarva-giréndra-daivatam
pradakñiëé-kåtya punaù praëamya taà
     yayau gåhaà maithila tat-prabhäva-vit

     vipraù—the brähmaëa; api—even; tasmät—from that; punaù—again; ägataù—went; girià govardhanam—to Govardhana Hill; sarva-giréndra-daivatam—the Deity of the kings of mountains; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; punaù—again; praëamya—bowing down; tam—to it; yayau—went; gåham—home; maithila—O king of Mithilä; tat-prabhäva-vit—aware of the power of Govardhana Hill.

     Then the brähmaëa returned to Govardhana Hill, the Deity worshiped by the kings of mountains. Circumambulating the hill, bowing down before it, and now aware of its great power and glory, the brähmaëa went to his home.

Text 25

idaà mayä te kathitaà pracaëòaà
     su-mukti-daà çré-giriräja-khaëòam
çrutvä janaù päpy api na pracaëòaà
     svapne 'pi paçyed yamam ugra-daëòam

     idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—told; pracaëòam—great; su-mukti-dam—granting liberation; çré-giriräja—of Govardhana Hill; khaëòam—canto; çrutvä—hearing; janaù—a person; päpé—a sinner; api—even; na—not; pracaëòam—ferocious; svapne—in dream; api—even; paçyet—sees; yamam—yamaräja; ugra—fearsome; daëòam—punishment.

     Now I have spoken to you the glorious Çré Giriräja-khaëòa, which brings liberation. Anyone, even if he is very sinful, who hears this khaëòa, will never see fearsome Yamaräja, even in a dream.

Text 26

yaù çåëoti giriräja-yasaçyaà      gopa-räja-nava-keli-rahasyam
deva-räja iva so 'tra sameti
     nanda-räja iva çäntim amutra

     yaù—one who; çåëoti—hears; giriräja-yasaçyaà —the glory of Govardhana Hill; gopa-räja—of the king of gopas; nava—new; keli—pastimes; rahasyam—secret; deva-räja—the king of the demigods; iva—like; saù—he; atra—here; sameti—attains; nanda-räja—King Nanda; iva—like; çäntim—peace; amutra—in the next life.

     One who hears the glories of Govardhana Hill, glories that are filled with the secrets of Lord Kåñëa's ever-new transcendental pastimes, will become as fortunate as King Indra in this life, and as fortunate as King Nanda in the next.

Canto Four 

Chapter One
Sruti-rüpopäkhyäna
The Story of the Personified Vedas

Text 1

asaté-kusumopameya-käntir
     yamunä-küla-kadamba-madhya-varté
nava-gopa-vadhü-viläsa-çälé
     vana-mälé vitanotu maìgaläni

     asaté-kusuma—and asati flower; upameya—like; käntiù—glory; yamunä-küla-kadamba-madhya-varté—staying on the Yamunä's shore; nava-gopa-vadhü—with the young gopés; viläsa-çälé—pastimes; vana-mälé—a forest garland; vitanotu—may grant; maìgaläni—auspiciousness.

     Glorious as an atasi flower, garlanded with forest flowers, and enjoying pastimes with the youthful gopés in a kadamba forest by the Yamunä's shore, may Lord Kåñëa grant auspiciousness to us. 

Text 2

parikaré-kåta-péta-paöaà harià
     çikhi-kiréöa-nati-kåta-kandharam
lakuöa-veëu-karaà cala-kuëòalaà
     paöutaraà naöa-veña-dharaà bhaje

     parikaré-kåta—a sash; péta—yellow; paöam—cloth; harim—Kåñëa; çikhi—peacock feather; kiréöa—crown; nati-kåta—sloping; kandharam—neck; lakuöa—a stick; veëu—and flute; karam—in hand; cala-kuëòalam—swinging earrings; paöutaram—most expert; naöa—of a dancer; vesä—appearance; dharam—wearing; bhaje—I worship.

     Dressed as a dancer, with a yellow sash, a peacock-feather crown, swinging earrings, a graceful neck, and a stick and flute in His hand, Lord Kåñëa is the object of my worship.

Text 3

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
çruti-rüpädayo gopyo
     bhüta-pürvä varän mune
kathaà çré-kåñëacandreëa
     jätäù pürëa-manorathäù

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Sré Bahuläçva said; çruti-rüpädayaù—headed by the Personified Vedas; gopyaù—the gs; bhüta-pürvä—before; varät—from a benediction; mune—O sage; katham—how?; çré-kåñëacandreëa—by Sré Kåñëa; jätäù—born; pürëa—fulfilled; manorathäù—desires.

     Sré Bahuläçva said: O sage, how did Sré Kåñëacandra fulfill the desires of the personified Vedas that were blessed to take birth as gopés?

Text 4

gopäla-kåñëa-caritaà
     pavitraà paramädbhutam
etad vada mahä-buddhe
     tvaà parävara-vittamaù

     gopäla-kåñëa-caritam—the pastimes of Gopäla Kåñëa; pavitram—sacred; paramädbhutam—very wonderful; etat—this; vada—please tell; mahä-buddhe—O wise one; tvam—you; parävara-vittamaù—the best of they who know everything.

    O wise one, you are the best of they who know everything. Please tell this sacred and wonderful pastime of Lord Gopäla Kåñëa.

Text 5

çré-närada uväca 
çruti-rüpäç ca yä gopyo
     gopänäà su-kule vraje
lebhire janma vaideha
     çeñaçäyé-varäc chrutät

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; çruti-rüpäù—the personified Vedas; ca—and; yä—which; gopyaù—gopés; gopänäm—of gopas; su-kule—in good families; vraje—in Vraja; lebhire—attained; janma—birth; vaideha—O king of Videha; çeñaçäyé-varät—by the benediction of Señaçayé Viñëu; çrutät—from hearing.

     Sré Närada said: O king of Videha, because of a benediction given by Lord Señaçayé Viñëu, some personified Vedas took birth as gopés in the sainty gopa families of Vraja.

Text 6

kamanéyaà nanda-sutaà
     vékñya våndävane ca täù
våndävaneçvaréà våndäà
     lebhire tad-varecchayä

     kamanéyam—handsome; nanda-sutam—Kåñëa; vékñya—seeing; våndävane—in Våndävana; ca—and; täù—they; våndävaneçvarém—the queen of Våndävana; våndäm—Våndä; lebhire—attained; tad-varecchayä—by that benediction.

     In Våndävana forest seeing handsome Kåñëa, and yearning to attain Him, they approached Våndä-devé, the ruler of Våndävana.

Text 7

våndä-dattäd varäd äçu
     prasanno bhagavän hariù
nityaà täsäà gåhe yäti
     räsärthaà bhakta-vatsalaù

     våndä—by Vrnda; dattät—given; varät—from the benediction; äçu—at once; prasannaù—pleased; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåñëa; nityam—always; täsäm—of them; gåhe—in the home; yäti—goes; räsärtham—to enjoy the rasa dance; bhakta-vatsalaù—kind to the devotees.

     Pleased with Våndä's benediction, Lord Kåñëa, who is always kind to His devotees, every day entered the gopés homes to enjoy the räsa dance.

Text 8

ekadä tu niçéthinyä
     vyatéte prahara-dvaye
räsärthaà bhagavän kåñëaù
     präptaväàs tad-gåhän nåpa

     ekadä—once; tu—indeed; niçéthinyä—of the night; vyatéte—passed; prahara-dvaye—six hours; räsärtham—to enjoy the rasa dance; bhagavän—Lord; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; präptaväàù—went; tad-gåhän—to their homes; nåpa—O king.

     O king, once, when six hours of the night had already passsed, Lord Kåñëa came, very late, to their homes.

Text 9

tadä utkaëöhitä gopyaù
     kåtvä tat-püjanaà param
papracchuù parayä bhaktyä
     girä madhurayä prabhum

     tadä—then; utkaëöhitä—aqnxious; gopyaù—the gopés; kåtvä—making; tat-püjanam—His worship; param—great; papracchuù—asked; parayä—with great; bhaktyä—devotion; girä—with words; madhurayä—sweet; prabhum—the Lord.

     The anxious gopés worshiped Him and with sweet words asked a question.

Text 10

çré-gopya ücuù 
kathaà na cägataù çéghraà
     no gåhän våjinärdana
utkaëöhitänäà gopénäà
     tvayi candre cakora-vat

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; katham—why?; na—not; ca—and; ägataù—come; çéghram—long; naù—our; gåhän—homes; våjinärdana—O savior from distress; utkaëöhitänäm—anxious; gopénäm—gopés; tvayi—to You; candre—to the moon; cakora-vat—like a cakora bird.

     The gopés said: O savior from troubles, why did You not come sooner? As cakora birds yearn to see the moon, we gopés always yearn to see You.

Text 11

çré-bhagavän uväca 
yo yasya citte vasati
     na sa düre kadäcana
khe süryaà kamalaà bhümau
     dåñövedaà sphuöati priyäù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; yaù—who; yasya—of whom; citte—in the heart; vasati—resides; na—not; sa—He; düre—far away; kadäcana—ever; khe—in the sky; süryam—the sun; kamalam—a lotus; bhümau—on the earth; dåñövä—seeing; idam—this; sphuöati—blooms; priyäù—O beloveds.

     The Supreme Lord said: O My beloveds, a person who lives in someone's heart is never far away. Gazing at the sun in the sky, a lotus on the earth is inspired to blossom wide.

Text 12

bhäëòére me guruù säkñäd
     durväsä bhagavän muniù
ägato 'dya priyäs tasya
     sevärthaà gatavän aham

     bhäëòére—in Bhandiravan; me—My; guruù—guru; säkñät—directly; durväsä—Durvasa; bhagavän—Lord; muniù—Muni; ägataù—come; adya—today; priyäù—O beloveds; tasya—of him; sevärtham—to serve; gatavän—went; aham—I.

     O My beloveds, today My spiritual master, Lord Durväsä Muni, came to Bhäëòéravana forest, and I went to serve him.

Text 13

gurur brahmä gurur viñëur
     guru devo maheçvaraù
guruù säkñät paraà brahma
     tasmai çré-gurave namaù

     guruù—the guru; brahmä—Brahma; guruù—the guru; viñëuù—Viñëu; guru—the guru; devaù—Lord; maheçvaraù—Siva; guruù—the guru; säkñät—directly; paraà brahma—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tasmai—to him; çré-gurave—Sré Guru; namaù—obeisances.

       The spiritual master is like Lord Brahmä. The spiritual master is like Lord Viñëu. The spiritual master is like Lord Siva. The spiritual master is like the Supreme Personality of Godhead. I offer my respectful obeisances to my glorious spiritual master.

Text 14

ajïäna-timirändhasya
     jïänäïjana-çaläkayä
cakñur unmélitam yena
     tasmai çré-gurave namaù

     ajïäna—of ignorance; timirändhasya—the blinding darkness; jïäna—of knowledge; a 24jana—the ointment; çaläkayä—the surgical tool; cakñuù—eyes; unmélitam—opened; yena—by whom; tasmai—to him; çré-gurave—my spiritual master; namaù—obeisances.

     I was born in the darkest ignorance, and My spiritual master opened my eyes with the torch of knowledge. I offer My respectful obeisances to him.*

Text 15

sva-guruà mäà vijanéyän
     nävamanyeta karhicit
na martya-buddhyä seveta
     sarva-deva-mayo guruù

     sva-gurum—the spiritual master; mäm—Myself; vijanéyän—one should know; na avamanyeta—one should never disrespect; karhicit—at any time; na—never; martya-buddhyä—with the ideas of being an ordinary man; seveta—should consider; sarva-deva—of all the demigods; mayaù—the representative; guruù—the spiritual master.

     One should know the spiritual master as Myself and never disrespect him in any way. One should not envy him, thinking him an ordinary man, for he is the representative of all the demigods.*

Text 16

tasmät tat-püjanaà kåtvä
     natvä tat-päda-paìkajam
ägato 'haà vilambena
     bhavaténäà gåhän priyaù

     tasmät—therefore; tat-püjanam—his worship; kåtvä—doing; natvä—bowing down; tat-päda-paìkajam—to his lotus feet; ägataù—come; aham—I; vilambena—with a delay; bhavaténäm—of you; gåhän—to the homes; priyäù—O beloveds.

     O My beloveds, I worshiped him and offered respects to his lotus feet. That is why I was late in coming to your homes.

Text 17

çré-närada uväca 
çrutvä tat paramaà väkyaà
     gopyaù sarväs tu vismitäù
kåtäïjali-puöä ücuù
     çré-kåñëaà namra-kandharäù

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; çrutvä—hearing; tat—that; paramam—supreme; väkyam—words; gopyaù—the gs; sarväù—all; tu—indeed; vismitäù—filled with wonder; kåtäïjali-puöäù—with folded hands; ücuù—said; çré-kåñëam—to Sré Kåñëa; namra-kandharäù—with bowed heads.

     Sré Närada said: Filled with wonder to hear these words, with bowed heads and folded hands the gopés spoke to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 18

çré-gopya ücuù 
paripürëatamasyäpi
     durväsäs te guruù småtaù
aho tad-darçanaà kartuà
     mano naç codyataà prabho

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; paripürëatamasya—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; api—even; durväsäù—Durvasa Muni; te—of You; guruù—the guru; småtaù—considered; ahaù—Oh; tad-darçanam—to see him; kartum—to do; manaù—heart; naù—of us; ca—and; udyatam—yearns; prabhaù—O Lord.

     The gopés said: You are the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead. Durväsä Muni is Your spiritual master! O Lord, our hearts yearn to see him.

Text 19

adya deva niçéthinyä
     vyatéte prahara-dvaye
kathaà tad-darçanaà bhüyäd
     asmäkaà parameçvara

     adya—now; deva—O Lord; niçéthinyä—of the night; vyatéte—passed; prahara-dvaye—six hours; katham—how?; tad-darçanam—the sight of him; bhüyät—may be; asmäkam—of us; parameçvara—O Supreme Lord.

     O Supreme Lord, how can we see him now that six hours of the night have passed?

Text 20

tathä madhye dérgha-nadé
     yamunä pratibandhikä
kathaà tat-taraëaà navaà
     åte deva bhaviñyati

     tathä—so; madhye—in the middle; dérgha-nadé—the great river; yamunä—Yamunä; pratibandhikä—an obstaclke; katham—how?; tat-taraëam—crossing it; navam—a boat; åte—without; deva—O Lord; bhaviñyati—will be.

     The great Yamunä river is a great obstacle. O Lord, how can we cross it without a boat?

Text 21

çré-bhagavän uväca 
avaçyam eva gantavyaà
     bhavatébhir yadä priyäù
yamunäm etya caitad vai
     vaktavyaà märga-hetave

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; avaçyam—unavoidably; eva—indeed; gantavyam—should be gone; bhavatébhiù—by you; yadä—when; priyäù—O beloveds; yamunäm—the Yamunä; etya—crossing; ca—and; etat—this; vai—indeed; vaktavyam—should be said; märga-hetave—to make a path.

     The Supreme Lord said: O My beloveds, you must go to see him. When you come to the Yamunä, speak these words:

Text 22

yadi kåñëo bäla-yatiù
     sarva-doña-vivarjitaù
tarhi no dehi märgaà vai
     kälindi saritäà vare

     yadi—if; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; bäla-yatiù—a brahmacari; sarva-doña-vivarjitaù—completely faultless; tarhi—then; naù—to us; dehi—give; märgam—a path; vai—indeed; kälindi—O Yamuna03; saritäm—of rivers; vare—the best.

     O Yamunä, O best of rivers, if Kåñëa is a perfect and faultess brahmacäré, then please give us a path to cross you.

Text 23

ity ukte vacane kåñëä
     märgaà vo däsyati svataù
sukhena tena vrajata
     yüyaà sarvä vrajäìganäù

     iti—thus; ukte—said; vacane—words; kåñëä—the Yamunä; märgam—a path; vaù—to you; däsyati—will give; svataù—personally; sukhena—happily; tena—by that; vrajata—go; yüyam—you; sarvä—all vrajäìganäù—girls of Vraja.

     When you speak these words, the Yamunä will give you a path. O girls of Vraja, then you may easily cross.

Text 24

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvätha tad-väkyaà
     pätrair dérghair vrajäìganäù
ñaö-païcäçattamän bhogän
     nétvä sarväù påthak påthak

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; atha—then; tad-väkyam—His words; pätraiù—with post; dérghaiù—great; vrajäìganäù—the girls of Vraja; sat-païcäçattamän—fifty-six; bhogän—foods; nétvä—bringing; sarväù—all; påthak påthak—specifically.

     Hearing these words, the girls of Vraja filled fifty-six great pots with many different kinds of foods.

Text 25

yamunäm etya hary-uktaà
     jagur änata-kandharäù
sadyaù kåñëa dadau märgaà
     gopébhyo maithileçvara

     yamunäm—to the Yamunä; etya—goinbg; hary-uktam—Kåñëa's words; jaguù—said; änata-kandharäù—with bowed heads; sadyaù—at once; kåñëä—the Yamunä; dadau—gave; märgam—a path; gopébhyaù—to the gs; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, they went to the Yamunä and with bowed heads repeated Kåñëa's words. The Yamunä at once gave a path to the gopés.

Texts 26 and 27

tena gopyo gatäù sarvä
     bhäëòéraà cäti-vismitäù
tataù pradakñiëé-kåtya
     munià durväsasaà ca täù

natvä tad-darçanaà cakruù
     puro dhåtväçanaà bahu
me pürvaà cäpi me pürvaà
     annaà bhojyaà tvayä mune

     tena—by that; gopyaù—the gopés; gatäù—went; sarvä—all; bhäëòéram—to Bhandiravana; ca—and; ati-vismitäù—filled with wonder; tataù—then; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; munim—the sage; durväsasam—Durvasa; ca—and; täù—they; natvä—bowing down; tad-darçanam—the sight of him; cakruù—did; puraù—before; dhåtvä—placing; açanam—food; bahu—abundant; me—mine; pürvam—first; ca—and; api—and; me—mine; pürvam—first; annam—food; bhojyam—should be eaten; tvayä—by you; mune—O sage.

     Filled with wonder, the gopés went to Bhäëòéravana forest. where they saw Durväsä Muni, bowed down before him, circumambulated him, and, each of them saying, "O sage, the food I have brought should be tasted first," placed many foods before him.

Text 28

evaà vivadamänänäà
     gopénäà bhakti-lakñaëam
vijïäya muni-çärdülaù
     proväca vimalaà vacaù

     evam—thus; vivadamänänäm—agruing; gopénäm—of the gopés; bhakti-lakñaëam—the nature of devotional service; vijïäya—understanding; muni-çärdülaù—the tiger of sages; proväca—spoke; vimalam—sweet; vacaù—words.

     Understanding the pure devotion of the quarreling gopés, Durväsä, the tiger of sages, spoke sweetly to them.

Text 29

çré-munir uväca 
gopyaù paramahäàso 'haà
     kåta-kåtyo hi niñkriyaù
tasmän mukhe me dätavyaà
     svaà svaà cäpy açanaà karaiù

     çré-munir uväca—the sage said; gopyaù—O gopés; paramahäàsaù—a paramahamsa; aham—i am; kåta-kåtyaù—attained thre goal of life; hi—indeed; niñkriyaù—without material activities; tasmän—therefore; mukhe—in the mouth; me—of me; dätavyam—should be given; svam svam—own; ca—and; api—also; açanam—food; karaiù—by the hands.

     The sage said: O gopés, I am a paramahaàsa. I have attained the highest goal in life. I never do any material action. For this reason each of you should with her own hand place in my mouth the food she has brought.

Text 30

çré-närada uväca 
evaà vidärite tena
     mukhe gopyo 'ti-harñitäù
ñaö-païcäçattamän bhogän
     svän svän sarväù samäkñipan

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; evam—thus; vidärite—opened; tena—by him; mukhe—in the mouth; gopyaù—the gopés; ati-harñitäù—very happy; sat-païcäçattamän—the fifty-six; bhogän—foods; svän svän—their own; sarväù—all; samäkñipan—placed.

     Sré Närada said: The jubilant gopés then placed in his wide-open mouth all the fifty-six kinds of food they had brought.

Text 31

kñipanténäà ca gopénäà
     paçyanténäà munéçvaraù
jaghäsa koöiço bharän
     bhogän sarvän kñudäturaù

     kñipanténäm—placing; ca—and; gopénäm—gopés; paçyanténäm—looking; munéçvaraù—the king of sages; jaghäsa—ate; koöiçaù—thousands; bharän—of bharas; bhogän—oif food; sarvän—all; kñudäturaù—tormented with hunger.

     As the gopés fed him and watched what he did, Durväsä, the king of sages, ate thousands of bhäras of food as if he were tormented with hunger.

Text 32

vismitänäà ca gopénäà
     paçyanténäà parasparam
itthaà çünyäni päträëi
     babhüvur nåpa-sattama

     vismitänäm—astonished; ca—and; gopénäm—of the gopés; paçyanténäm—looking; parasparam—at each other; ittham—thus; çünyäni—empty; päträëi—pots; babhüvuù—became; nåpa-sattama—O best of kings.

     O best of kings, when all the pots were emptied the gopés looked at each other with astonishment.

Text 33

atha gopyo munià çäntaà
     natvä taà bhakta-vatsalam
vismitäù praëatäù prähuù
     sarväù pürëa-manorathäù

     atha—then; gopyaù—the gopés; munim—to the dage; çäntam—peaceful; natvä—bowing down; tam—to him; bhakta-vatsalam—kind to the devotees; vismitäù—astonished; praëatäù—bowing down; prähuù—said; sarväù—all; pürëa-manorathäù—their desires fulfilled.

     The astonished gopés. their desires now fulfilled, bowed down before the peaceful sage, who was always kind to the devotees, and spoke.

Text 34

çré-gopya ücuù 
mune ägamanät pürvaà
     kåñëokta-vacasä nadém
tértvägatäs tvat-samépaà
     darçanärthaà çubhecchayä

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; mune—O sage; ägamanät—from the arrival; pürvam—before; kåñëokta-vacasä—by Kåñëa's words; nadém—the river; tértvä—crossing; ägatäù—come; tvat-samépam—before you; darçanärtham—to see; çubhecchayä—by teh desire for auspiciousness.

     The gopés said: O sage, when we came here to see you, we were able to cross the river by repeating some words Kåñëa told us.

Text 35

itaù kathaà gamiñyämaù
     sandeho 'yaà mahän abhüt
tad vidhehi namas tubhyaà
     yena panthä laghur bhavet

     itaù—then; katham—how?; gamiñyämaù—we will go; sandehaù—doubt; ayam—this; mahän—great; abhüt—was; tat—that; vidhehi—please give; namaù—obeisances; tubhyam—to you; yena—by which; panthä—the path; laghuù—easy; bhavet—will be.

     How will we return? Now we are filled with doubt. We offer our respects to you. Please give us a way to cross the Yamunä.

Text 36

çré-munir uväca 
sukhenätaù pragantavyaà
     bhavatébhir yadä svataù
yamunäm etya caitad vai
     vaktavyaà märga-hetave

     çré-munir uväca—the sage said; sukhena—easily; ataù—then; pragantavyam—should be traveled; bhavatébhiù—by you; yadä—when; svataù—personally; yamunäm—to the Yamunä; etya—coming; ca—and; etat—this; vai—indeed; vaktavyam—should be said; märga-hetave—to make a pathway.

     The sage said: i will give you something to say that will give you easy passage across the Yamunä.

Texts 37 and 38

yadi durväsasaà pétvä
     durväsäù kevalaà kñitau
vraté niranno nirväré
     vartate påthivé-tale

tarhi no dehi märgaà vai
     kälindi saritäà vare
ity ukte vacane kåñëä
     märgaà vo däsyati svataù

     yadi—if; durväsasam—durva grass juice; pétvä—drinking; durväsäù—Durvasa; kevalam—only; kñitau—on the earth; vraté—follows the vow; nirannaù—without eating food; nirväré—without drinking water; vartate—is; påthivé-tale—on the earth; tarhi—then; naù—to us; dehi—give; märgam—a path; vai—indeed; kälindé—O aymunä; saritäm—of rivers; vare—the best; iti—thus; ukte—saying; vacane—in the words; kåñëä—the Yamunä; märgam—a path; vaù—to you; däsyati—will give; svataù—personally.

     O Yamunä, O best of rivers, if Durväsä Muni carefully follows his vow of living only by drinking dürvä grass juice and never eats or drinks anything else, then please give us a path to cross you.

     When you speak these words, the Yamunä will give you a path to cross her.

Text 39

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä vaco gopyo
     natvä taà muni-puìgavam
yamunäm etya muny-uktaà
     coktvä tértvä nadéà nåpa

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—the words; gopyaù—the gopés; natvä—bowing; tam—to him; muni-puìgavam—the great sage; yamunäm—to the Yamunä; etya—going; muny-uktam—the sage's words; ca—and; uktvä—saying; tirtvä—crossing; nadém—the river; nåpa—O king.

     Sré Närada said: O king, hearing these words, the gopés bowed down before the great sage, went to the Yamunä, repeated the sage's words, and easily crossed the river.

Text 40

çré-kåñëa-pärçvam äjagmur
     vismitä maìgaläyanäù

     çré-kåñëa-pärçvam—to Sré Kåñëa's side; äjagmuù—went; vismitä—astonished; maìgaläyanäù—auspiucious.

     Astonished, the saintly gopés approached Lord Kåñëa.

Text 41

atha räse gopa-vadhvaù
     sandehaà manasotthitam
papracchuù çré-harià vékñya
     rahaù pürëa-manorathäù

     atha—then; räse—in the rasa dance; gopa-vadhvaù—the gs; sandeham—doubt; manasä—in the heart; utthitam—risen; papracchuù—asked; çré-harim—Kåñëa; vékñya—seeing; rahaù—in a secluded place; pürëa-manorathäù—their desires fulfilled.

     Then a doubt rose in the gopés' hearts. During the räsa dance, in a secluded place, when their desires were all fulfilled, the gopés asked a question of Sré Kåñëa.

Text 42

çré-gopya ücuù 
durväsaso darçanaà bhoù
     kåtam asmäbhir agrataù
yuvayor väkyataç cätra
     sandeho 'yaà prajäyate

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gs said; durväsasaù—of Durvasa Muni; darçanam—the sight; bhoù—Oh; kåtam—done; asmäbhiù—by us; agrataù—in tyhe presence; yuvayoù—of You both; väkyataù—from the words; ca—and; atra—here; sandehaù—a doubt; ayam—this; prajäyate—is born.

     The gopés said: We saw Durväsä Muni, but now a doubt about what You and he told us has risen in our hearts.

Texts 43 and 44

yathä gurus tathä çiñyo
     måñä-vädé na saàçayaù
järas tvam asi gopénäà
     rasiko bälyataù prabho

kathaà bäla-yatis tvaà vai
     vada tad-våjinärdana
kathaà durväsasaà pétvä
     durväsä bahu-bhuì muniù
no jäta eña sandehaù
     paçyanténäà vrajeçvara

     yathä—as; guruù—the guru; tathä—so; çiñyaù—the disciple; måñä-vädé—speaking lies; na—not; saàçayaù—doubt; järaù—a rake; tvam—You; asi—are; gopénäm—of the gopés; rasikaù—an enjoyer of nectar pastimes; bälyataù—since childhood; prabhaù—O Lord; katham—how; bäla-yatiù—a brahmacari; tvam—You; vai—indeed; vada—tell; tad-våjinärdana—O sdavior from troubles; katham—how?; durväsasam—durvasa juice; pétvä—drinking; durväsä—Durvasa; bahu-bhuk—eating a great feast; muniù—the sage; naù—of us; jäta—born; eña—this; sandehaù—doubt; paçyanténäm—looking on; vrajeçvara—O master of Vraja.

     As the spiritual master acts, so the disciple follows. If the spiritual master speaks lies, then the disciple will also speak lies. O Lord, You are a rake. You are the gopés' lover. Since childhood you have enjoyed nectar pastimes with the gopés. How are You a brahmacäré? O savior from troubles, please tell us. How is Durväsä a sage that lives only by drinking dürvä-grass juice? We personally saw him eat an enormous feast. O master of Vraja, this is our doubt.

Text 45

çré-bhagavän uväca 
nirmamo nirahaìkäraù
     samänaù sarvagaù paraù
sadä vaiñamya-rahito
     nirguëo 'haà na saàçayaù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; nirmamaù—free of material possesiveness; nirahaìkäraù—free of material ego; samänaù—equal; sarvagaù—all-pervading; paraù—the Supreme; sadä—eternally; vaiñamya-rahitaù—faultless; nirguëaù—free of the material modes; aham—I am; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     The Supreme Lord said: I am the Supreme Personality of Godhead. i am all-pervading, faultless, and equal to all. I am free of the material defects of possessiveness and false-ego. I am free of the modes of material nature.

Text 46

tathäpi bhaktän bhajato
     bhaje 'haà vai yathä tathä
tathaiva sädhur jïäné vai
     vaiñamya-rahitaù sadä

     tathäpi—nevertheless; bhaktän—the devotees; bhajataù—worshiping; bhaje—worship; aham—I; vai—indeed; yathä—as; tathä—so; tathä—so; eva—indeed; sädhuù—a devotee; jïäné—wise; vai—indeed; vaiñamya-rahitaù—faultless; sadä—always.

     As My devotees serve Me, I also serve them in reciprocation. As I reciprocate in this way, so a wise and faultless devotee also reciprocates.

Text 47

na buddhi-bhedaà janayed
     ajïänäà karma-saìginäm
joñayet sarva-karmäëi
     vidvän yuktaù samäcaran

     na—do not; buddhi-bhedam—disrupt the intelligence; janayet—do; ajïänäm—of the foolish; karma-saìginäm—attached to fruitive work; joñayet—dovetailed; sarva—all; karmäëi—work; vidvän—learned; yuktaù—all engaged; samäcaran—practicing.

     Let not the wise disrupt the minds of the ignorant who are attached to fruitive action. They should not be encouraged to refrain from work, but to engage in work in the spirit of devotion.*

Text 48

yasya sarve samärambhäù
     käma-saìkalpa-varjitäù
jïänägni-dagdha-karmäëaà
     tam ähuù paëòitaà budhäù

     yasya—one whose; sarve—all sorts of; samärambhäù—in all attempts; käma—desire for sense gratification; saìkalpa—determination; varjitäù—are devoid of; jïäna—of perfect knowledge; agni—fire; dagdha—being burnt by; karmäëam—the performer; tam—him; ähuù—declare; paëòitam—learned; budhäù—those who know.

     One is understood to be in full knowledge whose every act is devoid of desire for sense gratification. He is said by sages to be a worker whose fruitive action is burned up by the fire of perfect knowledge.*

Text 49

niräçir yata-cittätmä
     tyakta-sarva-parigrahaù
çaréraà kevalaà karma
     kurvan näpnoti kilbiñam

     niräçiù—without desire for results; yata—controlled; citta-ätmä—mind and intelligence; tyakta—giving up; sarva—all; parigrahaù—sense of proprietorship over all possessions; çaréram—in keeping body and soul together; kevalam—only; karma—work; kurvan—doing so; na—never; äpnoti—does not acquire; kilbiñam—sinful reactions.

     Such a man of understanding acts with mind and intelligence perfectly controlled, gives up all sense of proprietorship over his possessions and acts only for the bare necessities of life. Thus working, he is not affected by sinful reactions.*

Text 50

na hi jïänena sädåçaà
     pavitram iha vidyate
tat svayaà yoga-saàsiddhaù
     kälenätmani vindati

     na—never; hi—certainly; jïänena—with knowledge; sädåçam—in comparison; pavitram—sanctified; iha—in this world; vidyate—exists; tat—that; svayam—itself; yoga—devotion; saàsiddhaù—matured; kälena—in course of time; ätmani—in himself; vindati—enjoys.

     In this world, there is nothing so sublime and pure as transcendental knowledge. Such knowledge is the mature fruit of all mysticsm. And one who has achieved this enjoys the self within himself in due course of time.*

Text 51

brahmaëy ädhäya karmäëi
     saìgaà tyaktvä karoti yaù
lipyate na sa päpena
     padma-patram ivämbhasä

     brahmaëi—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ädhäya—resigning unto; karmäëi—all works; saìgam—attachment; tyaktvä—giving up; karoti—performs; yaù—who; lipyate—is affected; na—never; sa—he; päpena—by sin; padma-patram—a lotus life; iva—like; ambhasä—in the water.

     One who performs his duty without attachment, surrendering the results unto the Supreme God, is not affected by sinful action, as the lotus leaf is untouched by water.*

Text 52

tasmän munis tu durväsäù
     bahu-bhuk tvad-dhite rataù
na tasya bhojanecchä syäd
     dürvä-rasa-mitäçanaù

     tasmät—therefore; muniù—the sage; tu—indeed; durväsäù—Durvasa; bahu-bhuk—eating a great feast; tvad-dhite—for your sake; rataù—engaged; na—not; tasya—of him; bhojana—to eat; icchä—the desire; syät—is; dürvä-rasa-mitäçanaù—who only eats a small amount of durva grass juice.

     Durväsä Muni ate that great feast for your sake. He did not desire to eat it. He lives by drinking a little dürvä-grass juice.

Text 53

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä vaco gopyaù
     sarväs täç chinna-saàçayäù
çruti-rüpä jïäna-mayyo
     babhüvur maithileçvara

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—having heard; vacaù—these words; gopyaù—the gs; sarväù—all; täù—they; chinna—broken; saàçayäù—doubt; çruti-rüpä—the personified Vedas; jïäna-mayyaù—filled with knowledge; babhüvuù—became; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä.

     Sré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, when they heard these words, the gopés that had been personified Vedas became filled with transcendental knowledge. Their doubt was broken.
.pa

Chapter Two
Åñi-rüpäkhyäna
The Story of the Gopés That Had Been Sages

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
gopénäà åñi-rüpäëäà
     äkhyänaà çåëu maithila
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     kåñëa-bhakti-vivardhanam

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; gopénäm—of the gopés; åñi-rüpäëäm—in the form of sages; äkhyänam—the story; çåëu—hear; maithila—O king of Mithilä; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; kåñëa-bhakti-vivardhanam—increasing love for Lord Kåñëa.

     Sré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, please hear the story of the gopés that had been sages, a sacred story that removes all sins and increases one's love for Lord Kåñëa.

Text 2

baìgeñu maìgalo näma
     gopa äsén mahä-manäù
lakñmivän chruta-sampanno
     nava-lakña-gaväà patiù

     baìgeñu—in east Bengal; maìgalaù—Maìgala; näma—named; gopa—gopa; äsén—was; mahä-manäù—noble-hearted; lakñmivän—wealthy; çruta-sampannaù—learned; nava-lakña-gavam—of nine-hundred thousand cows; patiù—the master.

     In east Bengal lived a noble-hearted, learned, and wealthy gopa named Maìgala. He was the master of nine-hundred-thousand cows.

Text 3

bhäryäù païca sahasräëi
     babhüvus tasya maithila
kadäcid daiva-yogena
     dhanaà sarvaà kñayaà gatam

     bhäryäù—wives; païca sahasräëi—five thousand; babhüvuù—were; tasya—of him; maithila—O king of Mithilä; kadäcit—at a certain time; daiva-yogena—by destiny; dhanam—wealth; sarvam—all; kñayam—to destruction; gatam—went.

     O king of Mithilä, he had five thousand wives. One day all his wealth was destroyed by fate.

Text 4

corair nétäs tasya gävaù
     käçcid räjïä håtä balät
evaà dainye ca sampräpte
     duùkhito maìgalo 'bhavat

     coraiù—by thieves; nétäù—taken; tasya—his; gävaù—cows; käçcit—some; räjïä—by the king; håtä—taken; balät—by force; evam—tyhus; dainye—poverty; ca—indeed; sampräpte—attained; duùkhitaù—unhappy; maìgalaù—Maìgala; abhavat—became.

     Some of his cows were stolen by thieves and the rest were forcibly taken by the king. Now a pauper, Maìgala was filled with sorrow.

Text 5

tadä çré-rämasya varäd
     daëòakäraëya-väsinaù
åñayaù strétvam äpannä
     babhüvus tasya kanyakäù

     tadä—then; çré-rämasya—of Lord räma; varät—from the benediction; daëòakäraëya-väsinaù—living in Daëäka forest; åñayaù—sages; strétvam—womanhood; äpannä—attained; babhüvuù—became; tasya—of him; kanyakäù—the daughters.

     Ths sages of Daëòakäraëya, who by Lord Rämacandra's blessing were destined to become gopés, became the daughters of Maìgala.

Text 6

dåñövä kanyä-samühaà sa
     duùkhé gopo 'tha maìgalaù
uväca dainya-duùkhäòhya
     ädhi-vyädhi-samäkuläù

     dåñövä—seeing; kanyä-samüham—many daughters; sa—he; duùkhé—unhappy; gopaù—the gopa; atha—then; maìgalaù—Maìgala; uväca—said; dainya-duùkhäòhyaù—unhappy with his poverty; ädhi-vyädhi-samäkuläù—tormented with headaches and illnesses.

     When he saw his many daughters, Maìgala-gopa became filled with sorrow. Miserable in his poverty and tormented with headaches and diseases, Maìgala spoke.

Text 7

çré-maìgala uväca 
kià karomi kva gacchämi
     ko me dukhaà vyapohati
çrér na bhütir näbhijano      na balaà me 'sti sämpratam

     çré-maìgalaù uväca—Sré Maìgala said; kim—what?; karomi—will I do; kva—where?; gacchämi—will I go; kaù—who; me—of me; dukham—the suffering; vyapohati—removes; çréù—wealth; na—not; bhütiù—opulebce; na—not; abhijanaù—family; na—not; balam—strength; me—my; asti—is; sämpratam—now.

     Sré Maìgala said: What shall I do? Where shall I go? Who will take away my sufferings? Now I have no wealth, no opulences, no dynasty, and no strength.

Text 8

dhanaà vinä kathaà cäsäà
     viväho hä bhaviñyati
bhojane yatra sandeho
     dhanäçä tatra kédåçé

     dhanam—welath; vinä—without; katham—how?; ca—and; äsäm—of the girls; vivähaù—wedding; hä—indeed; bhaviñyati—will be; bhojane—in eatiung; yatra—where; sandehaù—doubt; dhana—of wealth; äçä—hope; tatra—there; kédåçé—like what?

     How will my daughters marry if I have no wealth? If even the next meal is uncertain, where is the hope to gain wealth?

Texts 9 and 10

sati dainye kanyakäù syuù
     käka-täléyavad gåhe
tasmät kasyäpi räjïas tu
     dhanino balinas tv aham

däsyämy etäù kanyakäç ca
     kanyänäà saukhya-hetave
kadarthé-kåtya täù kanyä
     evaà buddhyä sthito 'bhavat
tadaiva mathuräd deçäd
     gopaç caikaù samägataù

     sati—being; dainye—poor; kanyakäù—the girls; syuh—are; käka-täléyavat—unexpectedly; gåhe—in the home; tasmät—from that; kasyäpi—of someone; räjïaù—a king; tu—indeed; dhaninaù—wealthy; balinaù—powerful; tu—certainly; aham—I; däsyämi—will give; etäù—these; kanyakäù—girls; ca—and; kanyänäm—of girls; saukhya-hetave—for the happiness; kadarthé-kåtya—become unhappy; täù—them; kanyä—the girls; evam—thus; buddhyä—thinking; sthitaù—situated; abhavat—became; tadä—then; eva—indeed; mathurät—from Mathura; deçät—province; gopaù—gopa; ca—and; ekaù—one; samägataù—come.

     Now that I am suddenly poor, how will I make my daughters happy by marrying them to wealthy and powerful kings?

     As Maìgala was thinking in this way, a gopa from Mathurä district came to his home.

Text 11

çré-närada uväca 
tértha-yäyé jayo näma
     våddho buddhimatäà varaù
tan-mukhän nanda-räjasya
     çrutaà vaibhavam adbhutam

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; tértha-yäyé—a pilgrim; jayaù—jaya; näma—named; våddhaù—elderly; buddhimatäm—of the wise; varaù—the best; tan-mukhän—from his mouth; nanda-räjasya—of King Nanda; çrutam—heard; vaibhavam—the opulences; adbhutam—wonderful.

     Sré Närada said: From an elderly pilgrim named Jaya, who was the wisest of the wise, Maìgala had heard of the fabulous wealth of King Nanda.

Text 12

nanda-räjasya valaye
     maìgalo dainya-péòitäù
vicintya preñayäm äsa
     kanyakäç cäru-locanäù

     nanda-räjasya—of King Nanda; valaye—in the circle; maìgalaù—mangala; dainya-péòitäù—suffering in poverty; vicintya—considering; preñayäm äsa—sent; kanyakäù—daughters; cäru-locanäù—beautiful-eyed.

     After some thought, the pauper Maìgala sent his beautiful-eyed daughters to King Nanda's circle.

Text 13

tä nanda-räjasya gåhe
     kanyakä ratna-bhüñitäù
gaväà gomaya-häriëyo
     babhüvur go-vrajeñu ca

     täù—they; nanda-räjasya—of King Nanda; gåhe—in the home; kanyakä—the daughters; ratna-bhüñitäù—decorated with jewels; gaväm—of cows; gomaya-häriëyaù—taking the milk; babhüvuù—became; go-vrajeñu—in the barns; ca—and.

     In King Nanda's home the girls, now decorated with jewels, milked the cows in the barns.

Text 14

çré-kåñëaà sundaraà dåñövä
     kanyä jäti-smaräç ca täù
kälindé-sevanaà cakrur
     nityaà çré-kåñëa-hetave

     çré-kåñëam—Sré Kåñëa; sundaram—handsome; dåñövä—seeing; kanyä—the girls; jäti-smaräù—remembering their previous birth; ca—and; täù—they; kälindé—of the Yamunä; sevanam—service; cakruù—did; nityam—regularly; çré-kåñëa-hetave—to attain Sré Kåñëa.

     Gazing at handsome Sré Kåñëa, and remembering their previous birth, the girls daily worshiped the Yamunä to attain Kåñëa.

Text 15

athaikadä çyämaläìgé
     kälindé dérgha-locanä
täbhyaù sva-darçanaà dattvä
     varaà dätuà samudyatä

     atha—then; ekadä—one day; çyämaläìgé—dark-limbed; kälindé—Yamunä; dérgha-locanä—with large eyes; täbhyaù—to them; sva-darçanam—own sight; dattvä—giving; varam—blessing; datum—to give; samudyatä—eager.

     One day the large-eyed and dark-complexioned goddess Yamunä appeared before them and offered to give them a benediction.

Text 16

tä vavrire vrajeçasya
     putro bhüyät patiç ca naù
tathästu coktvä kälindé
     tatraiväntaradhéyata

     tä—they; vavrire—chose; vrajeçasya—of the king of Vraja; putraù—the son; bhüyät—may be; patiù—the husband; ca—and; naù—of us; tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying;é tatra—there; eva—indeed; antaradhiyata—disappeared.

     They said, "May Sré Kåñëa, the son of Vraja's king, become our husband." Yamunä replied, "So be it," and suddenly disappeared.

Text 17

täù präpta våndakäraëye
     kärtikyäà räsa-maëòale
täbhiù särdhaà haré reme
     surébhiù suraräò iva

     täù—they; präpta—attained; våndakäraëye—in Våndävana forest; kärtikyäm—in the month of Kartika; räsa-maëòale—in the rasa dnace circle; täbhiù—with them; särdham—with; haré—Kåñëa; reme—enjoyed; surébhiù—with the demigoddesses; suraräò—the king of heaven; iva—as.

     Later, in the month of Kärttika, in the räsa-dance circle, Lord Kåñëa enjoyed with them as King Indra enjoys with many heavenly girls.
.pa

Chapter Three
Maithily-upäkhyäna
The Story of the Mithilä Women

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
maithilénäà goipikänäà
     äkhyänaà çåëu maithila
daçäçvamedha-térthasya
     phaladaà bhakti-vardhanam

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; maithilénäm—of the women of Mithilä; goipikänäm—of the gopés; äkhyänam—the stopry; çåëu—hear; maithila—O king of Mithilä; daçäçvamedha-térthasya—of the holy place dasasvamedha; phaladam—giving the result; bhakti-vardhanam—increasing devotion.

     Sré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, please hear the story of the Mithilä women that become gopés, a story that brings the result of visiting sacred Daçäçvamedha-tértha, a story the increases one's love for Lord Kåñëa.

Text 2

çré-rämasya varäj jätä
     nava-nanda-gåheñu yäù
kämanéyaà nanda-sünuà
     dåñövä tä moham ästhitäù

     çré-rämasya—of Lord Rämacandra; varät—from the blessing; jätä—born; nava-nanda-gåheñu—in the homes of the nine Nandas; yäù—who; kämanéyam—handsome; nanda-sünum—the son of Nanda; dåñövä—seeing; tä—they; moham—enchantment; ästhitäù—attained.

     Because of Lord Rämacandra's benediction they took birth in the homes of the nine Nandas. When they saw handsome Kåñëa, they became bewildered with love for Him.

Text 3

märgaçérñe çubhe mäsi
     cakruù kätyäyané-vratam
upacäraiù ñoòaçabhiù
     kåtvä devéà mahé-mayém

     märgaçérñe—margasirsa; çubhe—auspicous; mäsi—in the month; cakruù—did; kätyäyané-vratam—a vow to worship goddess Durga; upacäraiù—with offerings; ñoòaçabhiù—sixteen; kåtvä—doing; devém—to the goddess; mahé-mayém—a deity made of clay.

     During the auspicious month of Märgaçérña (November-December) they observed a vow to worship goddess Kätyäyané. They made a clay deity of the goddess and worshiped her with sixteen offerings.

Text 4

aruëodaya-veläyäà
     snätäù çré-yamunä-jale
nityaà sametä äjagmur
     gäyantyo bhagavad-guëän

     aruëodaya-veläyäm—at sunrise; snätäù—bathing; çré-yamunä-jale—in the Yamunä's water; nityam—regularly; sametä—met; äjagmuù—went; gäyantyaù—singing; bhagavat—of Lord Kåñëa; guëän—the virtues.

     Singing Lord Kåñëa's glories as they went, every morning they would bathe in the Yamunä's waters.

Text 5

ekadä täù sva-vasträëi
     tére nyasya vrajäìganäù
vijahrur yamunä-toye
     karäbhyäà siïcatér mithaù

     ekadä—once; täù—they; sva-vasträëi—their garments; tére—on the riverbank; nyasya—placing; vrajäìganäù—the girls of Vraja; vijahruù—played; yamunä-toye—in the Yamunä's waters; karäbhyäm—with their hands; siïcatéù—splashing; mithaù—each other.

     Once, placing their garments on the riverbank, the girls of Vraja, played in the Yamunä's waters, splashing each other with both hands.

Text 6

täsäà väsäàsi sannéya
     bhagavän prätar ägataù
tvaraà kadambam äruhya
     cauravan maunam añöhitaù

     täsäm—of them; väsäàsi—the garments; sannéya—taking; bhagavän—the Lord; prätaù—in the morning; ägataù—come; tvaram—quickly; kadambam—a kadamba tree; äruhya—climbing; cauravat—like a thief; maunam añöhitaù—silent.

     Coming there that morning, Lord Kåñëa silently stole their garments and climbed a kadamba tree.

Text 7

tä na vékñya sva-väsäàsi
     vismitä gopa-kanyakäù
népa-sthitaà vilokyätha
     sa-lajjä jahasur nåpa

     täù—they; na—not; vékñya—seeing; sva-väsäàsi—their garments; vismitä—surprised; gopa-kanyakäù—teh gopés; népa—in a kadamba tree; sthitam—staying; vilokya—seeing; atha—then; sa-lajjä—with shyness; jahasuù—smiled; nåpa—O king.

     Not seeing their clothes, the gopés were surprised. O king, when they saw Kåñëa in the tree they shyly smiled.

Text 8

pratécchantu sva-väsäàsi
     sarvä ägatya cätra vai
anyathä na hi däsyämi
     våkñät kåñëa uväca ha

     pratécchantu—may desire; sva-väsäàsi—own garments; sarvä—all; ägatya—approaching; ca—and; atra—here; vai—indeed; anyathä—otherwise; na—not; hi—indeed; däsyämi—I will give; våkñät—from the tree; kåñëa—Kåñëa; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     From the tree Kåñëa said: All who wish their garments, come here and take them. If you do not come, I will not give them.

Text 9

räjantyas täù çéta-jale
     hasantyaù prähur änatäù

     räjantyaù—splendidly beautiful; täù—they; çéta—in the cold; jale—water; hasantyaù—giggling; prähuù—said; änatäù—with bowed heads.

     Bowing their heads as they stood in the cold water, the smiling girls spoke.

Text 10

çré-gopya ücuù 
he nanda-nandana manohara gopa-ratna
     gopäla-vaàça-nava-haàsa mahärti-härin
çré-çyämasundara tavoditam adya väkyaà
     kürmaù kathaà vivasanäù kila te 'pi däsyaù

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; he—O; nanda-nandana—son of Nanda; manohara—handsome; gopa-ratna—jewel of the gopas; gopäla—of the gopas; vaàça—in the family; nava—young; haàsa—swan; mahärti-härin—remover of sufferings; çré-çyämasundara—O dark and handsome one; tava—by You; uditam—spoken; adya—now; väkyam—words; kürmaù—we do; katham—how?; vivasanäù—without garments; kila—indeed; te—of you; api—certainly; däsyaù—the maidservants.

     The gopés said: O handsome son of Nanda, O jewel of the gopas, O young swan in the gopa dynasty, O destroyer of sufferings, O handsome dark one, how can we follow Your order? We are Your maidservants, but we have no clothes.

Text 11

gopäìganä-vasana-muë navanéta-häré
     jäto vraje 'ti-rasikaù kila nirbhayo 'si
väsäàsi dehi na hi cen mathurädhipäya
     vakñyämahe 'nayam atéva kåtaà tvayätra

     gopäìganä-vasana-muk—a theif of the gopés garments; navanéta-häré—a theif of butter; jätaù—born; vraje—in Vraja; ati-rasikaù—the enjoyer of nectar; kila—indeed; nirbhayaù—fearless; asi—You are; väsäàsi—garments; dehi—please give; na—not; hi—indeed; cet—if; mathurädhipäya—to the King of Mathurä; vakñyämahe—we will tell; anayam—misdeed; atéva—great; kåtam—done; tvayä—by You; atra—here.

     You are a thief of butter and thief of gopés' garments. You are a fearless rake in the village of Vraja. Give us our garments. If You don't we will tell King Kaàsa, the ruler of Mathurä, the evil You have done here.

Text 12

çré-bhagavän uväca 
däsyo mamaiva yadi sundara-manda-häsä
     icchantu vaitya kila cätra kadamba-müle
no cet samasta-vasanäni nayämi gehäàs
     tasmät kariñyatha mamaiva vaco 'vilambät

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; däsyaù—maidservants; mama—My; eva—indeed; yadi—if; sundara-manda-häsä—O sweetly-smiling girls; icchantu—desire; vä—or; etya—approaching; kila—indeed; ca—and; atra—here; kadamba-müle—at the root of this kadamba tree; na—not; u—indeed; cet—if; samasta-vasanäni—allthe garments; nayämi—I will take; gehäàù—to your homes; tasmät—therefore; kariñyatha—you should do; mama—My; eva—indeed; vacaù—words; avilambät—without delay.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O sweetly-smiling girls, if you actually are My maidservants, and if you actually want your garments, then come to the roots of this kadamba tree. If you do not come, I will bring all these garments to your homes. Because I will do that you should follow My orders without delay.

Text 13

çré-närada uväca 
tadä tä nirgatäù sarvä
     jaläd gopyo 'ti-vepitäù
änatä yonim acchädya
     päëibhyäà çéta-karñitäù

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; tadä—then; tä—they; nirgatäù—went; sarvä—all; jalät—from the water; gopyaù—the gopés; ati-vepitäù—trembling; änatä—with bowed heads; yonim—the pubic area; acchädya—covering; päëibhyäm—with both hands; çéta-karñitäù—tormented by the cold.

     Sré Närada said: Shivering with the cold, bowing their heads, and covering their pubic areas with both hands, all the gopés emerged from the water.

Text 14

kåñëa-dattäni väsäàsi
     dadhuù sarvä vrajäìganäù
mohitäç ca sthitäs tatra
     kåñëe lajjäyitekñaëäù

     kåñëa-dattäni—given by Kåñëa; väsäàsi—the garments; dadhuù—placed; sarväù—all; vrajäìganäù—the girls of Vraja; mohitäù—bewildered; ca—and; sthitäù—stood; tatra—there; kåñëe—for Kåñëa; lajjayita—shy; ékñaëäù—glances.

     Taking their garments from Kåñëa, all the girls of Vraja dressed themselves. Bewildered with love, they shyly gazed at Lord Kåñëa.

Text 15

jïätvä täsäm abhipräyaà
     parama-prema-lakñaëam
äha manda-smitaù kåñëaù
     samantäd vékñya tä vacaù

     jïätvä—understanding; täsäm—of them; abhipräyam—the intention; parama-prema-lakñaëam—the highest love; äha—said; manda—gently; smitaù—smiling; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; samantät—at all of them; vékñya—glancing; tä—them; vacaù—words.

     Aware of the great love in their hearts, Kåñëa gently smiled. Placing His eyes on all of them, He spoke.

Text 16

çré-bhagavän uväca 
bhavatébhir märgaçérñe
     kåtaà kätyäyané-vratam
mad-arthaà tac ca sa-phalaà
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; bhavatébhiù—with you; märgaçérñe—in the month of Märgaçérña; kåtam—done; kätyäyané—to worship goddess Kätyäyané; vratam—a vow; mat—of Me; artham—for the sake; tat—that; ca—and; sa-phalam—fruitful; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: To attain Me, during the month of Märgaçérña you followed a vow to worship goddess Kätyäyané. Your vow will bear its fruit. There is no doubt of that.

Text 17

paraçvo 'hani cäöavyäà
     kåñëä-tére manohare
yuñmäbhiç ca kariñyämi
     räsaà pürëa-manoratham

     paraçvaù—after tomorrow; ahani—on the day; ca—and; aöavyäm—in the forest; kåñëä-tére—on the Yamunä's shore; manohare—beautiful; yuñmäbhiù—with you; ca—and; kariñyämi—I will do; räsam—a rasa dance; pürëa-manoratham—that will fulfill all your desires.

     The day after tomorrow, on the Yamunä's beautiful shore, I will enjoy with You a räsa dance that will fulfill all your desires. 

Text 18

ity uktvätha gate kåñëe
     paripürëatame harau
präptänandä manda-hasä
     gopyaù sarvä gåhän yayuù

     iti—thus; uktvä—speaking; atha—then; gate—gone; kåñëe—Kåñëa; paripürëatame—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; harau—Lord Hari; präpta—attained; änandäù——bliss; manda—gentle; hasäù—simles; gopyaù—the gopés; sarväù—all; gåhän—to their homes; yayuù—went.

     After speaking these words, Lord Kåñëa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, left. Then all the gopés, gently smiling and their hearts filled with bliss, went to their homes.
.pa

Chapter Four
Kauçalopäkhyäna
The Story of the Kauçalä Women

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
kauçalänäà gopikänäà
     varëanaà çåëu maithila
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     çré-kåñëa-caritämåtam

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; kauçalänäm——of the women of Kausala; gopikänäm—of thegopés; varëanam—the description; çåëu—please hear; maithila—O king of Mithilä; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; çré-kåñëa-caritämåtam—filled with the nectar of Sré Kåñëa's pastimes.

     Sré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, please hear the story of the Kauçala womwn that became gopés, a sacred story that removes all sins and is filled with the nectar of Lord Kåñëa's pastimes.

Text 2

navopananda-geheñu
     jätä räma-varäd vraje
pariëétä gopa-janaiù
     ratna-bhüñaëa-bhüñitäù

     navopananda-geheñu—in the homes of the nine Upanandas; jätä—born; räma-varät—by the blessing of Lord Räma; vraje—in Vraja; pariëétä—married; gopa-janaiù—by the gopas; ratna-bhüñaëa-bhüñitäù—decorated with jewel ornaments.

     By Lord Rämacandra's blessing they were born in the homes of the nine Upanandas. Decorated with jewel ornaments, they were married to various gopas.

Text 3

pürëa-candra-pratékäçä
     nava-yauvana-samyutäù
padminyo haàsa-gamanäù
     padma-patra-vilocanäù

     pürëa-candra-pratékäçä—splendid as the full moon; nava-yauvana-samyutäù—in full bloom of youth; padminyaù—beautiful and graceful as lotus flowers; haàsa-gamanäù—graceful as swans; padma-patra-vilocanäù—with lotus-petal eyes.

     They were young, glorious as full moons, delicate as lotus flowers, and graceful as swans. Their eyes were like lotus petals.

Text 4

jära-dharmeëa su-snehaà
     su-dåòhaà sarvato 'dhikam
cakruù kåñëe nanda-sute
     kamanéye mahätmani

     jära—of a paramour; dharmeëa—with the nature; su-sneham——passionate love; su-dåòham—very intense; sarvataù—than everything; adhikam—greater; cakruù—did; kåñëe—for Lord Kåñëa; nanda-sute—the son of Nanda; kamanéye—handsome; mahätmani—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     They had fallen passionately in love with Nanda's handsome son Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. They loved Him as a paramour.

Text 5

täbhiù särdhaà sadä häsyaà
     vraja-véthiñu mädhavaù
smitaiù péta-paöädänaiù
     karñaëaiù sa cakära ha

     täbhiù—them; särdham—with; sadä—always; häsyam—joking; vraja-véthiñu—on the pathways of Vraja; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; smitaiù—with smiles; péta-paöädänaiù—with yellow garments; karñaëaiù—with tugging; sa—He; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Smiling, and tugging at their yellow garments, Kåñëa teased them and joked with them on the pathways of Vraja.

Text 6

dadhi-vikrayärthaà yäntyas täù
     kåñëa kåñëeti cäbruvan
kåñëe hi prema-samyuktä
     bhramantyaù kuïja-maëòale

     dadhi—yogurt; vikraya—selling; artham—for the purpose; yäntyaù—going; täù—they; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; iti—thus; ca—and; abruvan—said; kåñëe—for Kåñëa; hi—indeed; prema-samyuktä—full of love; bhramantyaù—wandering; kuïja-maëòale—in the forest.

     In the market selling yogurt, they did not call out,  Yogurt! Yogurt!" Instead they called "Kåñëa! Kåñëa!" Overcome with love for Kåñëa, they wandered the forests searching for Him.

Text 7

khe väyau cägni-jalayor
     mahyäà jyotir diçäsu ca
drumeñu jana-våndeñu
     täsäà kåñëo hi lakñyate

     khe—in space; väyau—in air; ca—and; agni—in fire; jalayoù—in water; mahyäm—in the mahat-tattva; jyotiù—in light; diçäsu—in the directions; ca—and; drumeñu—in the trees; jana-våndeñu—in the people; täsäm—of them; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; hi—indeed; lakñyate—is seen.

     When they looked at the different objects of the creation made of ether, air, fire, and water, when they looked in the different directions, when they looked at the luminaries in the sky, when they looked at trees, and when they looked at people, they did not see them. They only saw Kåñëa. 

Text 8

prema-lakñaëa-samyuktäù
     çré-kåñëa-håta-mänasäù
añöabhiù sättvikair bhävaiù
     sampannäs täç ca yoñitaù

     prema-lakñaëa-samyuktäù—filled with love; çré-kåñëa-håta-mänasäù—their hearts fixed on Kåñëa; añöabhiù—situated; sättvikair bhävaiù—with ecstatic love; sampannäù—endowed; täù—they; ca—and; yoñitaù—the women.

     They were filled with love for Kåñëa. Kåñëa had stolen their hearts. They could not help but display many symptoms of love for Him.

Text 9

premëä paramahaàsänäà
     padavéà samupägatäù
kåñëänandäù pradhävantyo
     vraja-véthiñu tä nåpa

     premëä—with love; paramahaàsänäm—of the paramahamsas; padavém—the path; samupägatäù—taken; kåñëa—of Kåñëa; änandäù—bliss; pradhävantyaù—running; vraja-véthiñu—on the pathways of Vraja; tä—they; nåpa—O king.

     Filled with love, they followed the path of the paramahaàsas. Filled with bliss, they ran along Vraja's pathways.

Text 10

jaòä jaòaà na janantyo
     jaòonmatta-piçäca-vät
abruvantyo bruvantyo vä
     gata-lajjä gata-vyathäù

     jaòäù—inert; jaòam—the inert; na—not; janantyaù—undersatnding; jaòonmatta-piçäca-vät—as if haunted by a ghost; abruvantyaù—not speaking; bruvantyaù—speaking; vä—or; gata-lajjä—without embarrassment; gata-vyathäù—without care.

     Sometimes they were stunned, sometimes they could not understand that inanimate objects were actually not alive, sometimes they were silent, and sometimes they spoke on and on without care or shyness.

Text 11

evaà kåtärthatäà präptas
     tan-mayä yäç ca gopikäù
baläd äkåñya kåñëasya
     cucumbur mukha-paìkajam

     evam—in this way; kåtärthatäm—the real goal of life; präptaù—attained; tan-mayä—rapt in thought of Kåñëa; yäù—who; ca—and; gopikäù—gopés; balät—forcibly; äkåñya—attracting; kåñëasya—of Kåñëa; cucumbuù—kisssed; mukha-paìkajam—the lotus mouth.

     Rapt in thinking of Kåñëa, they attained the highest goal of life. Irresistibly attracted to Kåñëa, they could not help but kiss His lotus lips.

Text 12

täsäà tapaù kià kathayämi räjan
     pürëe pare brahmaëi väsudeve
yäç cakrire prema håd-indriyädyair
     visåjya loka-vyavahära-märgam

     täsäm—of them; tapaù—austerity; kim—what; kathayämi—I say; räjan—O king; pürëe—perfect; pare brahmaëi—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; väsudeve—Lord Väsudeva; yäù—who; cakrire—did; prema—love; håd-indriyädyaiù—with the heart and senses; visåjya—abandoning; loka-vyavahära-märgam—the path of what is ordinarily desirable.

     O king, how can I describe the austerities they must have performed? Abandoning the path of what is ordinarily thought desireable in this world, with all their heart and senses they loved Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 13

yä räsa-raìge vinidhäya bähuà
     kåñëäàsayoù prema-vibhinna-cittäù
cakrur vaçe kåñëam alaà tapas tad
     vaktuà na çakto vadanaiù phaëéndraù

     yä—who; räsa-raìge—in the arena of the rasa dance; vinidhäya—placing; bähum—an arm; kåñëäàsayoù—on Kåñëa's shoulders; prema-vibhinna—overcome with love; cittäù—their hearts; cakruù—did; vaçe—in control; kåñëam—k; alam—greatly; tapaù—austerity; tat—that; vaktum—to say; na—not; çaktaù—able; vadanaiù—with many mouths; phaëéndraù—Lord Seña, the king of serpents.

     Overcome with love, and placing an arm around His shoulders in the räsa dance, they made Kåñëa their surrendered servant. Even Lord Seña with His many mouths cannot describe the auterities they must have performed.

Text 14

yogena saìkhyena çubhena karmaëä
     nyäyädi-vaiçeñika-tattva-vittamaiù
yat präpyate tac ca padaà videha-räö
     sampräpyate kevala-bhakti-bhävataù

     yogena—with yoga; saìkhyena—with sankhya; çubhena—with auspicious; karmaëä—work; nyäya—nyaya; ädi—beginning with; vaiçeñika—vaisesika; tattva—the truth; vittamaiù—by they who know; yat—what; präpyate—is attained; tat—that; ca—and; padam—state; videha-räö—O king of Videha; sampräpyate—is attained; kevala-bhakti-bhävataù—by pure love for Lord Kåñëa.

     O king of Videha, whatever good result may be attained by yoga, saìkhya, good deeds, or the study of logic and philosophy, is at once attained simply by loving Lord Kåñëa.

Text 15

bhaktyaiva vaçyé harir ädi-devaù
     sadä pramäëaà kila cätra gopyaù
saìkhyaà ca yogaà na kåtaà kadäpi
     premëaiva yasya prakåtià gatäù syuù

     bhaktyä—by devotion and love; eva—indeed; vaçyé—brought under control; hariù—Kåñëa; ädi-devaù—th4e Supreme Personality of Godhead; sadä—always; pramäëam—evidence; kila—indeed; ca—and; atra—here; gopyaù—the gopés; saìkhyam—sankhya; ca—and; yogam—yoga; na—not; kåtam—done; kadäpi—at any time; premëä—by love; eva—indeed; yasya—of whom; prakåtim—the nature; gatäù syuù—attained.

     Love and devotion make Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, into one's surrendered servant. The gopés are the proof. They followed neither saìkhya nor yoga. Only because they loved Him did they gain His company.
.pa

Chapter Five
Ayodhyä-pura-väsiny-upäkhyäna
The Story of the Ayodhyä Women

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
ayodhyä-väsinénäà tu
     gopénäà varëanaà çåëu
catuñpadärtha-daà säkñät
     kåñëa-präpti-karaà param

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; ayodhyä-väsinénäm—of the women of Ayodhyä; tu—indeed; gopénäm—of the gopés; varëanam—description; çåëu—please hear; catuñpadärtha-dam—bringing the four goals of life; säkñät—directly; kåñëa-präpti-karam—bringing the attainment of Lord Kåñëa; param—great.

     Sré Närada said: Please hear the story of the Ayaodhyä women that became gopés, a story that grants the four goals of life and brings the company of Lord Kåñëa.

Text 2

sindhu-deçeñu nagaré
     campakä näma maithila
babhüva tasyäà vimalo
     räjä dharma-paräyaëaù

     sindhu-deçeñu—in Sindhu-deça; nägaré—a city; campakä—Campaka; näma—named; maithila—O king of Mithilä; babhüva—was; tasyäm—in that city; vimalaù—Vimala; räjä—king; dharma-paräyaëaù—saintly.

     O king of Mithilä, in Sindhu-deça there was a city named Campakä. The saintly king there was Vimala. 

Text 3

kuvera iva kosäòhyo
     mänasvé mågaräò iva
viñëu-bhaktaù praçäntätmä
     prahläda iva mürtimän

     kuvera—Kuvera; iva—like; kosäòhyaù—wealthy; manasvé—chivalorus; mågarät—a lion; iva—like; viñëu-bhaktaù— adevotee of Lord Viñëu; praçäntätmä—peaceful at heart; prahläda—Prahläda; iva—like; mürtimän—personified.

     Like Kuvera he was wealthy. Like a lion he was noble and chivalrous. Like Prahläda he was a peaceful-hearted devotee of Lord Viñëu.

Text 4

bhäryänäà ñaö-sahasräëi
     babhüvus tasya bhü-pateù
rüpavatyaù kaïja-neträ
     vandhyatvaà täù samägatäù

     bhäryänäm—of wives; ñaö-sahasräëi—six thousand; babhüvuù—were; tasya—of him; bhü-pateù—the king; rüpavatyaù—beautiful; kaïja-neträù—lotus-eyed; vandhyatvam—barrenness; täù—they; samägatäù—attained.

     However, King Vimala's six thousand beautiful, lotus-eyed wives were all barren.

Text 5

apatyaà kena puëyena
     bhüyän me 'tra çubhaà nåpa
evaà cintayatas tasya
     bahavo vatsarä gatäù

     apatyam—a child; kena—by what?; puëyena—pious deed; bhüyän—may be; me—of me; atra—here; çubham—auspiciousness; nåpa—O king; evam—thus; cintayataù—thinking; tasya—of him; bahavaù—many; vatsarä—years; gatäù—passed.

     He spent many years wondering, "What pious deed with bring me a child?" 

Text 6

ekadä yäjïavalkyas tu
     munéndras tam upägataù
taà natväbhyarcya vidhivan
     nåpas tat-sammukhe sthitaù

     ekadä—once; yäjïavalkyaù—Yäj 24avalkya; tu—indeed; munéndraù—the king of sages; tam—him; upägataù—attained; tam—to him; natvä—bowing; abhyarcya—worshiping; vidhivat—properly; nåpaù—the king; tat-sammukhe—before him; sthitaù—stood.

     One day Yäjïavalkya, the king of sages, visited. The king bowed down, worshiped him, and stood respectfully before him.

Text 7

cintäkulaà nåpaà vékñya
     yäjïavalkyo mahä-muniù
sarva-jïaù sarva-vic chäntaù
     pratyuväca nåpottamam

     cintäkulam—anxiou; nåpam—the king; vékñya—seeing; yäjïavalkyaù—Yäjïavalkya; mahä-muniù—the great sage; sarva-jïaù—all-knowing; sarva-vit—all-knowing; chäntaù—peaceful; pratyuväca—spoke; nåpottamam—to the best of kings.

     Seeing the king was very anxious, the peaceful and all-knowing sage Yäjïavalkya spoke.

Text 8

çré-yäjïavalkya uväca 
räjan kåço 'si kasmät tvaà
     kä cintä te hådi sthitä
saptasv aìgeñu kuçalaà
     dåçyate sämprataà tava

     çré-yäjïavalkya uväca—Yäjïavalkya said; räjan—O king; kåçaù—distraught; asi—you are; kasmät—why?; tvam—you; kä—what?; cintä—anxiety; te—of you; hådi—in the heart; sthitä—situated; saptasv—in seven; aìgeñu—limbs; kuçalam—auspiciousness; dåçyate—is seen. sämpratam—now; tava—of you.

     Sré Yäjïavalkya said: O king, why are you distraught? What is the worry in your heart? I can see the seven limbs of your body are marked with all auspiciousness.

Text 9

çré-vimala uväca 
brahmaàs tvaà kià na jänäsi
     tapasä divya-cakñuñä
tathäpy ahaà vadiñyämi
     bhavato väkya-gocarät

     çré-vimala uväca—Sré Vimala said; brahmaàù—O brähmaëa; tvam—of you; kim—what?; na—not; jänäsi—you know; tapasä—by austerity; divya-cakñuñä—with spiritual eyes; tathäpi—still; aham—I; vadiñyämi—will tell; bhavataù—of you; väkya-gocarät—in words.

     Sré Vimala said: O brähmaëa, what do you not know? Because you have spiritual eyes attained by great austerities, you know everything. Still I will tell you my worry.

Text 10

änapatyena duùkhena
     vyäpto 'haà muni-sattama
kià karomi tapo dänaà
     vada yena bhavet prajä

     änapatyena-with childlessness; duùkhena—with happiness; vyäptaù—pervaded; aham—i am; muni-sattama—O best of sages; kim—what?; karomi—will I do; tapaù—austerity; dänam—charity; vada—tell; yena—by which; bhavet—may be; prajä—a child.

     Because I have no child I am filled with grief. O best of sages, please describe the austerity or charity that will bring me a child.

Text 11

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä yäjïavalkyo
     dhyäna-stimita-locanaù
dérghaà dadhyau muni-çreñöho
     bhütaà bhavyaà vicintayan

     çré-näradaù uväca—Sré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; yäjïavalkyaù—Yäj 24avalkya; dhyäna—meditation; stimita—closed; locanaù—eyes; dérgham—for a long time; dadhyau—placed; muni-çreñöhaù—the best of sages; bhütam—past; bhavyam—and future; vicintayan—meditating.

     Sré Närada said: Hearing this, the great sage Yäj 24avalkya for a long time closed his eyes. Meditating in trance, he looked into the past and future.

Text 12

çré-yäjïavalkya uväca 
asmin janmani räjendra
     putro naiva ca naiva ca
putryas tava bhaviñyanti
     koöiço nåpa-sattama

     çré-yäjïavalkya uväca—Sré Yäjïavalkya said; asmin—in this; janmani—birth; räjendra—O king of kings; putraù—a son; na—not; eva—indeed; ca—and; na—not; eva—indeed; ca—and; putryaù—many daughters; tava—of you; bhaviñyanti—will be; koöiçaù—millions; nåpa-sattama—O best of kings.

     Sré Yäjïavalkya said: O best of kings, in this birth you have no son. No son at all. You will have ten million daughters.

Text 13

çré-räjoväca 
putraà vinä pürva-åëän na ko 'pi
     pramucyate bhümi-tale munéndra
sadä hy aputrasya gåhe vyathä syät
     paraà tv ihämutra sukhaà na kiïcit

     çré-räjä uväca—the king said; putram—a son; vinä—without; pürva-åëän—previous devts; na—not; ko 'pi—anyone; pramucyate—is liberated; bhümi-tale—on the earth; munéndra—O king of sages; sadä—always; hi—indeed; aputrasya—without a son; gåhe—in the home; vyathä—trouble; syät—is; param—great; tv—indeed; iha—in this world; amutra—and in the next; sukham—happiness; na—not; kiïcit—anything.

     The king said: O king of sages, without a son no one in this world can become free of his many debts (to the sages, demigods, and forefathers) and become liberated. Without a son there is always trouble at home. Without a son there can be no happiness in either this life or the next.

Text 14

çré-yäjïavalkya uväca 
mä khedaà kuru räjendra
     putryo deyäs tvayä khalu
çré-kåñëäya bhaviñyäya
     paraà däyädikaiù saha

     çré-yäjïavalkyaù uväca—Sré Yäjïavalkya said; mä—don't; khedam—unhappiness; kuru—do; räjendra—O king of kings; putryaù—daughters; deyäù—to be given; tvayä—by you; khalu—indeed; çré-kåñëäya—of Sré Kåñëa; bhaviñyäya—in the future; param—great; däyädikaiù—a great dowery; saha—with.

     Sré Yäjïavalkya said: O king, don't be unhappy. With a great dowry you will give all your daughters in marriage to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 15

tenaiva karmaëä tvaà vai
     devarñi-pitåëäà åëät
vimukto nåpa-çärdüla
     paraà mokñam aväpsyasi

     tena—by this; eva—indeed; karmaëä—action; tvam—you; vai—indeed; devarñi-pitåëäm—the demigods, sages, and ancestors; åëät—from the debt; vimuktaù—free; nåpa—of kings; çärdüla—O tiger; param—final; mokñam—liberation; aväpsyasi—you will attain.

     O tiger of kings, by doing that you will be free of your debts to the demigods, sages, and ancestors, and you will attain liberation.

Text 16

çré-närada uväca 
tadäti-harñito räjä
     çrutvä väkyaà mahä-muneù
punaù papraccha sandehaà
     yäjïavalkyaà mahä-munim

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; tadä—then; ati-harñitaù—very happy; räjä—the king; çrutvä—hearing; väkyam—the words; mahä-muneù—of the great sage; punaù—again; papraccha—asked; sandeham—a doubt; yäjïavalkyam—to Yäj 24avalkya; mahä-munim—the great sage.

     Sré Närada said: Very happy to hear these words, the king asked Yäjïavalkya Muni the following question.

Text 17

çré-räjoväca 
kasmin kule kutra deçe
     bhaviñyaù çré-hariù svayam
kédåg rüpaç ca kià varëo
     varñaiç ca katibhir gataiù

     çré-räjä uväca—the king said; kasmin—in what?; kule—family; kutra—in what?; deçe—country; bhaviñyaù—will be; çré-hariù—Lord Kåñëa; svayam—personally; kédåg—what?; rüpaù—form; ca—and; kim—what?; varëaù—varëa; varñaiù—with years; ca—and; katibhiù—how many?; gataiù—gone.

     The king said: In what country will Lord Kåñëa appear? In what family? What will be His form? What will be His caste? How many years hence will He come?

Texts 18-21

çré-yäjïavalkya uväca 
dväparasya yugasyäsya
     tava räjyän mahä-bhuja
avaçeñe varña-çate
     tathä païca-daçe nåpa

tasmin varñe yadu-kule
     mathuräyäà yadoù pure
bhädre budhe kåñëa-pakñe
     dhätrarkñe harñane våñe

vave 'ñöamyäm ardha-rätre
     nakñatreça-mahodaye
andhakärävåte käle
     devakyäà çauri-mandire

bhaviñyati hariù säkñäd
     araëyäm adhvare 'gni-vat
çrévatsäìko ghana-çyämo
     vana-mäly-ati-sundaraù

     çré-yäjïavalkya uväca—Sré Yäjïavalkya said; dväparasya—of the Dvapara; yugasya—yuga; asya—of that; tava—of you; räjyät—will be manifested; mahä-bhuja—O mighty-armed one; avaçeñe—at the end; varña-çate—of a hundred years; tathä—so; païca-daçe—fifteen; nåpa—O king; tasmin—in this; varñe—varsa; yadu-kule—in the Yadu family; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; yadoù—of the Yadus; pure—in the city; bhädre—in the month of Bhadra; budhe—on Wednesday; kåñëa-pakñe—during the dark fortnight; dhätrarkñe—in the star Rohiëé; harñane—in harsana-yoga; våñe—in Taurus; vave—directly after midnight; añöamyäm—on the eighth day; ardha-rätre—in the middle of the night; nakñatreça-mahodaye—in the rising of the moon; andhakärävåte—filled with blinding darkness; käle—at the time; devakyäm—in Devaki� çauri-mandire—in the house of Vasudeva; bhaviñyati—will be; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; araëyam—in the arani wood; adhvare—in the fire; agni—fire; vat—like; çrévatsäìkaù—marked withb Srévatsa; ghana-çyämaù—dark as a monsoon cloud; vana-mäli—wearing a forest garland; ati-sundaraù—very handsome.

     Sré Yäjïavalkya said: O mighty-armed king, in the Dväpara-yuga, when you have reigned for 115 years, in this (Bhärata) varña, in Mathurä, the city of the Yadus, in the Yadu family, during the month of Bhädra (August-September), on a Monday that is the eighth-day of the dark-moon, in the middle of a very dark night, just as the moon is rising, when Taurus and the star Rohiëé are prominent, and when the stars are in harñaëa-yoga, in Vasudeva's palace, handsome Lord Kåñëa, dark as a monsoon cloud, decorated with a forest garland, and marked with Srévatsa, will appear in Devaké's womb as fire appears in a yajïa's araëi sticks.

Text 22

pétämbaraù padma-netro
     bhaviñyati catur-bhujaù
tasmai deyä tvayä kanyä
     äyus te 'sti na saàçayaù

     pétämbaraù—wearing yellow garments; padma-netraù—with lotus eyes; bhaviñyati—will be; catur-bhujaù—four arms; tasmai—to him; deyä—should be given; tvayä—by you; kanyä—the daughters; äyuù—life; te—of you; asti—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     You will give your daughters in marriage to Lord Kåñëa, who has four arms, lotus eyes, and yellow garments. In this way you will attain the supreme goal of life. Of this there is no doubt.
.pa

Chapter Six
Ayodhyä-pura-väsiny-upäkhyäna
The Story of the Ayodhyä Women

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
evam uktvä gate säkñäd
     yäjïavalkye mahä-munau
atéva harñam äpanno
     vimalaç campakä-patiù

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; gate—gone; säkñät—directly; yäjïavalkye—Yajnavalkya; mahä-munau—the great sage; atéva—great; harñam—happiness; äpannaù—attained; vimalaù—Vimala; campakä-patiù—the king of Campaka.

     Sré Närada said: Then the great sage Yäjïavalkya left. Vimala, the king of Campakä, was very happy.

Text 2

ayodhyä-pura-väsinyaù
     çré-rämasya varäc ca yäù
babhüvus tasya bhäryäsu
     täù sarväù kanyakäù çubhäù

     ayodhyä-pura-väsinyaù—the women of Ayodhyä; çré-rämasya—of Sré Räma; varät—frokm the benediction; ca—and; yäù—who; babhüvuù—became; tasya—of him; bhäryäsu—in the wives; täù—they; sarväù—all; kanyakäù—daughters; çubhäù—beautiful.

     Then the Ayodhyä women blessed by Lord Rämacandra took birth as the very beautiful daughters of Vimala and his wives.

Text 3

viväha-yogyäs tä dåñövä
     cintayaàç campakä-patiù
yäjïavalkya-vacaù småtvä
     dütam äha nåpeçvaraù

     viväha-yogyäù—at the proper age for marriage; tä—they; dåñövä—seeing; cintayan—thinking; campakä-patiù—the king of Campakä; yäjïavalkya-vacaù—the words of Yajnavalkya; småtvä—remembering; dütam—to give; äha—said; nåpeçvaraù—the great king.

     Seeing that his daughters had come to a marriagable age, and remembering Yäjïavalkya's words, King Vimala spoke.

Text 4

çré-vimala uväca 
mathuräà gaccha düta tvaà
     gatvä çauri-gåhaà çubham
darçanéyäs tvayä putro
     vasudevasya sundaraù

     çré-vimala uväca—Sré Vimala said; mathuräm—to Mathurä; gaccha—go; düta—O messenger; tvam—you; gatvä—having gone; çauri—of Vasudeva; gåham—to tyhe home; çubham—beautiful; darçanéyaù—should be seen; tvayä—by you; putraù—the son; vasudevasya—of Vasudeva; sundaraù—handsome.

     Sré Vimala said: O messenger, go to Mathurä, enter Vasudeva's palace, and look for Vasudeva's handsome son.

Text 5

çrévatsäìko ghana-çyämo
     vana-mälé catur-bhujaù
yadi syät tarhi däsyämi
     tasmai sarväù su-kanyakäù

     çrévatsäìkaù—marked with Srévatsa; ghana-çyämaù—dark as a cloud; vana-mälé—wearing a forest garland; catur-bhujaù—with four arms; yadi—if; syät—is; tarhi—then; däsyämi—I will give; tasmai—to Him; sarväù—all; su-kanyakäù—my beautiful daughters.

     He is dark as a monsoon cloud, has four arms, is marked with Srévatsa, and wears a forest garland. If He is there, I will give Him all my beautiful daughters.

Text 6

çré-närada uväca 
iti väkyaà tataù çrutvä
     düto 'sau mathuräà gataù
papraccha sarväbhipräyaà
     mäthuräàç ca mahäjanän

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; iti—thus; väkyam—the words; tataù—then; çrutvä—hearing; dütaù—the messenger; asau—he; mathuräm—to Mathurä; gataù—went; papraccha—asked; sarväbhipräyam—all knowledge; mäthurän—the people of Mathurä; ca—and; mahäjanän—great souls.

     Sré Närada said: Hearing these words, and going to Mathurä, the messenger asked the great souls there if they had seen Vasudeva's son.

Text 7

tad-väkyaà mäthuräù çrutvä
     kaàsa-bhétäù su-buddhayaù
taà dütaà rahasi prähuù
     karëänte manda-väg yathä

     tad-väkyam—his words; mathuraù—the peole of Mathura; çrutvä—hearing; kaàsa-bhétäù—afraid of Kaàsa; su-buddhayaù—intelligent; tam—to him; dütam—the messenger; rahasi—in private; prähuù—said; karëänte—in the ear; manda-väg—whispering; yathä—as.

     Hearing these words, the intelligent people of Mathurä, who were all afraid of Kaàsa, took him to a secluded place and whispered in his ear.

Text 8

çré-mäthurä ücuù 
vasudevasya ye puträù
     kaàsena bahavo hatäù
ekävaçiñöävarajä
     kanyä säpi divaà gatä

     çré-mäthurä ücuù—the people of Mathura said; vasudevasya—of vasudeva; ye—who; puträù—the sons; kaàsena—by Kaàsa; bahavaù—many; hatäù—killed; ekävaçiñöävarajä—one remaining; kanyä—a dauighter; säpi—she; divam—to heaven; gatä—went.

     The people of Mathurä said: Vasudeva's many sons were all killed by Kaàsa. Only a daughter, who went to the heavenly planets, survived.

Text 9

vasudevo 'sti cätraiva
     hy aputro déna-mänasaù
idaà na kathanéyaà hi
     tvayä kaàsa-bhayaà pure

     vasudevaù—Vasudeva; asti—is; ca—and; atra—here; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; aputraù—sonless; déna-mänasaù—unhappy at heart; idam—thus; na—not; kathanéyam—to be spoken; hi—indeed; tvayä—by you; kaàsa-bhayam—out of fear of Kaàsa; pure—in the city.

     Now sonless, Vasudeva is unhappy at heart. Because of the danger of Kaàsa, you should not repeat these words in this city.

Text 10

çauri-santäna-värtäà yo
     väkti cen mathurä-pure
taà daëòayati kaàso 'sau
     çaury-añöama-çiço ripuù

     çauri—of Vasudeva; santäna—the family; värtäm—the story; yaù—who; väkti—speaks; cet—if; mathurä-pure—in Mathura City; tam—him; daëòayati—punishes; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; asau—he; çaury-añöama-çiçoù—of Vasudeva's eighth son; ripuù—the enemy.

     If in Mathurä-puré someone speaks this story of Vasudeva's sons, then Kaàsa, the sworn enemy of Vasudeva's eighth son, punishes him severely.

Text 11

çré-närada uväca 
jana-väkyaà tataù çrutvä
     düto vai campakä-purém
gatvätha kathayäm äsa
     räjïe käraëam adbhutam

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; jana-väkyam—the words of the people; tataù—then; çrutvä—hearing; dütaù—the messenger; vai—indeed; campakä-purém—to the4 city of Campakä; gatvä—going; atha—then; kathayäm äsa—spoke; räjïe—to the king; käraëam—the reason; adbhutam—surprising.

     Sré Närada said: After hearing the people's words, the messenger returned to the city of Campakä and told the very surprising story to the king.

Text 12

çré-düta uväca 
mathuräyäm ästi çaurir
     anapatyo 'ti-dénavat
tat-puträs tu purä jätäù
     kaàsena nihatäù çrutam

     çré-düta uväca—the messenger said; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; ästi—is; çauriù—Vasudeva; anapatyaù—childless; ati-dénavat—like a very wretched person; tat-puträù—his sons; tu—indeed; purä—previously; jätäù—born; kaàsena—by Kaàsa; nihatäù—killed; çrutam—heard.

     The messenger said: Unhappy and childless, Vasudeva stays in Mathurä. I heard that all his sons were killed by Kaàsa.

Text 13

ekävaçiñöä kanyäpi
     khaà gatä kaàsa-hastataù
evaà çrutvä yadu-purän
     nirgato 'haà çanaiù çanaiù

     ekä—one; avaçiñöä—remaining; kanyä—daughter; api—also; kham—to heaven; gatä—went; kaàsa-hastataù—by Kaàsa's hand; evam—thus; çrutvä—hearing; yadu-purät—from the city of the Yadus; nirgataù—come; aham—I; çanaiù çanaiù—very slowly.

     One a daughter who, struck by Kaàsa's hand, went to the heavenly planets, remains. Hearing this, I slowly left the Yadus' city.

Text 14

caran våndävane ramye
     kälindé-nikaöe çubhe
akasmäl latikä-vånde
     dåñöaù kaçcic chiñur mayä

     caran—walking; våndävane—in Våndävana; ramye—beautiful; kälindé-nikaöe—by the Yamunä's shore; çubhe—beautiful; akasmäl—suddenly; latikä-vånde—among many vines; dåñöaù—seen; kaçcic—someone; chiñuù—a boy; mayä—by me.

     As I walked by the Yamunä's shore in beautiful Våndävana forest I saw a boy among some vines.

Text 15

tal-lakñaëa-samo räjan
     go-gopa-gaëa-madhyataù
çrévatsäìko ghana-çyämo
     vana-mäly ati-sundaraù

     tal-lakñaëa-samaù—the same characteristsics; räjan—O king; go-gopa-gaëa-madhyataù—among many cows and gopas; çrévatsäìkaù—marked with Srévatsa; ghana-çyämaù—dark as a monsoon cloud; vana-mäli—wearing a forest garland; ati-sundaraù—very handsome.

     O king, He had all the features you described. He was handsome, dark as a monsoon cloud, marked with Srévatsa, and decorated with a forest garland. He was the midst of many cows and gopas.

Text 16

dvi-bhujo gopa-sünuç ca
     paraà tv etad vilakñaëam
tvayä catur-bhujaç cokto
     vasudevätmajo hariù

     dvi-bhujaù—two artms; gopa-sünuù—a gopa's son; ca—and; param—then; tv—indeed; etat—this; vilakñaëam—extraordinary; tvayä—by you; catur-bhujaù—four arms; ca—and; uktaù—said; vasudevätmajaù—Vasudeva's son; hariù—Kåñëa.

     There is one difference. He had two arms and Vasudeva's son had four arms.

Text 17

kià kartavyaà vada nåpa
     muni-väkyaà måñä na hi
yatra yatra yathecchä te
     tatra mäà preñaya prabho

     kim—what?; kartavyam—should be don; vada—tell; nåpa—O king; muni-väkyam—the sage's words; måñä—false; na—not; hi—indeed; yatra—where; yatra—where; yathä—as; icchä—the desire; te—of you; tatra—there; mäm—me; preñaya—please send; prabhaù—O lord.

     What should be done? Tell me, O king. It cannot be that the sage's words are untrue. O master, send me wherever you wish.

Text 18

çré-närada uväca 
iti cintayatas tasya
     vismitasya nåpaçya ca
gajähvayät sindhu-deçän
     jetuà bhéñmaù samägataù

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; iti—thus; cintayataù—thinking; tasya—of him; vismitasya—surprised; nåpasya—of the king; ca—and; gajähvayät—from Hastinapura; sindhu-deçän—to Sindhu-desa; jetum—to conquer; bhéñmaù—Bhiñma; samägataù—arrived.

     Sré Närada said: As the king was thinking about what to do, Bhéñma, on his way to conquer Sindhu-deça, came from Hastinäpura.

Text 19

taà püjya vimalo räja
     dattvä tasmai balià bahu
papraccha sarväbhipräyaà
     bhéñmaà dharma-bhåtäà varam

     tam—him; püjya—worshiping; vimalaù—Vimala; räja—King; dattvä—giving; tasmai—to him; balim—a gift; bahu—great; papraccha—asked; sarväbhipräyam—who knows everything; bhéñmam—Bhéñma; dharma-bhåtäm—of pious men; varam—the best.

     After worshiping him and giving him many gifts, King Vimala asked a question of all-knowing Bhéñma, the best of pious men.

Text 20

çré-vimala uväca 
yäjïavalkyena pürvokto
     mathuräyäà hariù svayam
vasudevasya devakyäà
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     çré-vimala uväca—Sré Vimala said; yäj 24avalkyena—by yajnavalkya; pürvoktaù—previously said; mathuräyäm—in mathurä; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally; vasudevasya—of Vasudeva; devakyäm—in Devaké; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Sré Vimala said: Yäjïavalkya Muni told me that Lord Hari, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, will become the son of Vasudeva and Devaké in Mathurä. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 21

na jäto vasudevasya
     sakäçe 'dya hariù paraù
åñi-väkyaà måñä na syät
     kasmai däsyämi kanyakäù

     na—not; jätaù—born; vasudevasya—of Vasudeva; sakäçe—in the presence; adya—now; hariù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; paraù—supreme; åñi-väkyam—the words of the sage; måñä—false; na—not; syät—are; kasmai—to whom?; däsyämi—I will give; kanyakäù—my daughters.

     Although the sage's words cannot be untrue, the Supreme Personality of Godhead has not taken birth as Vasudeva's son. To whom shall I give my daughters in marriage?

Text 22

mahä-bhägavataù säkñät
     tvaà parävara-vittamaù
jitendriyo bälya-bhäväd
     véro dhanvé vasüttamaù
etad vada mahä-buddhe
     kià kartavyaà mayätra vai

     mahä-bhägavataù—a great devotee; säkñät—directly; tvam—you; parävara-vittamaù—all-knowing; jitendriyaù—conquering the senses; bälya-bhävät—from childhood; véraù—a hero; dhanvé—a bowman; vasüttamaù—the best of the Vasus; etat—this; vada—please tell; mahä-buddhe—O intelligent one; kim—what?; kartavyam—should be done; mayä—by me; atra—here; vai—indeed.

     You are a great devotee. You know everything. Your senses are carefully controlled. From childhood you have been a heroic warrior. You are an expert archer and the best of the Vasus. O very intelligent one, please say what I should do.

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
vimalaà präha gaìgeyo
     mahä-bhägavataù kaviù
divya-dåg dharma-tattva-jïaù
     çré-kåñëasya prabhäva-vit

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; vimalam—to Vimala; präha—said; gaìgeyaù—Bhéñma; mahä-bhägavataù—great devotee; kaviù—philosopher; divya-dåg—with transcendental vision; dharma-tattva-j 24aù—understanding the truth of religion; çré-kåñëasya—of Sré Kåñëa; prabhäva—the glory; vit—knowing.

     Sré Närada said: The great devotee philosopher Bhéñma, who had spiritual vision, understood the truth of religion, and was fully aware of Lord Kåñëa's glories, spoke to King Vimala.

Text 24

çré-bhéñma uväca 
he räjan guptam äkhyänaà
     vedavyäsa-mukhäc chrutam
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     çåëu harña-vivardhanam

     çré-bhéñma uväca—Sré Bhisma said; he—O; räjan—king; guptam—hidden; äkhyänam—story; vedavyäsa—of Vedavyasa; mukhät—from the mouth; çrutam—heard; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; çåëu—pleasehear; harña-vivardhanam—delightful.

     Sré Bhéñma said: O king, please hear this secret I heard from Vyäsa's mouth, a holy and delightful secret that removes all sins.

Text 25

devänäà rakñaëärthäya
     daityänäà hi vadhäya ca
vasudeva-gåhe jätaù
     paripürëatamo hariù

     devänäm—of the demigods; rakñaëärthäya—for protection; daityänäm—of the demons; hi—indeed; vadhäya—for killing; ca—and; vasudeva-gåhe—in Vasudva's home; jätaù—born; paripürëatamo hariù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     To protect the devotees and kill the demons, the Supreme Personality of Godhead has taken birth in Vasudeva's home.

Text 26

ardha-rätre kaàsa-bhayän
     nétvä çauriç ca taà tvaram
gatvä ca gokule putraà
     nidhäya çayane nåpa

     ardha-rätre—in the middle of the night; kaàsa-bhayän—out of fear of Kaàsa; nétvä—bringing; çauriù—Vasudeva; ca—and; tam—Him; tvaram—quickly; gatvä—gone; ca—and; gokule—in Gokula; putram—son; nidhäya—placing; çayane—in bed; nåpa—O king.

     O king, out of fear of Kaàsa, Vasudeva took his son to Gokula and placed Him in Yaçodä's bed.

Text 27

yaçodä-nandayoù putréà
     mäyäà nétvä puraà yayau
vavådhe gokule kåñëo
     gupto jïäto na kair nåbhiù

     yaçodä-nandayoù—of Nadna and Yaçodä; putrém—the daughter; mäyäm—Mäyä; nétvä—taking; puram—to the city; yayau—went; vavådhe—increased; gokule—in Gokula; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; guptaù—hidden; jïätaù—known; na—not; kair nåbhiù—by anyone.

     Then to Mathurä City he took Nanda's and Yaçodä's daughter, who was the goddess Mäyä. As Kåñëa grew up on Gokula, no one understood His real identity.

Text 28

so 'dyaiva våndakäraëye
     harir gopäla-veña-dhåk
ekädaça samäs tatra
     güòho väsaà kariñyati
daityaà kaàsaà ghätayitvä
     prakaöaù sa bhaviñyati

     saù—He; adya—today; eva—even; våndakäraëye—in Våndävana forest; hariù—Kåñëa; gopäla-veña-dhåk—dressed as a gopa; ekädaça—eleven; samäù—years; tatra—there; güòhaù—hidden; väsam—residence; kariñyati—will do; daityam—the demon; kaàsam—Kaàsa; ghätayitvä—killing; prakaöaù—revealed; sa—He; bhaviñyati—will be.

     Today the Supreme Personality of Godhead is living as a gopa in Våndävana. He will stay there, carefully concealed, for eleven years and then He will kill the demon Kaàsa and His true identity will be revealed.

Text 29

ayodhyä-pura-väsinyaù
     çré-rämasya varäc ca yäù
täù sarväs tava bhäryäsu
     babhüvuù kanyakäù çubhäù

     ayodhyä-pura-väsinyaù—the women of Ayodhyä; çré-rämasya—of Lord Räma; varät—from the blessing; ca—and; yäù—who; täù—they; sarväù—all; tava—of you; bhäryäsu—in the wives; babhüvuù—were; kanyakäù—daughters; çubhäù—beautiful.

     Because they were blessed by Lord Rämacandra, many women of Ayodhyä, took birth as the beautiful daughters born from you and your wives 

Text 30

güòhäya deva-deväya
     deyäù kanyäs tvayä khalu
na vilambaù kvacit käryo
     dehaù käla-vaço hy ayam

     güòhäya—concealed; deva-deväya—to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; deyäù—should be given; kanyäù—daughters; tvayä—by you; khalu—indeed; na—not; vilambaù—delay; kvacit—at all; käryaù—should be done; dehaù—body; käla-vaçaù—subject to time; hi—indeed; ayam—this.

     Marry your daughters to the carefully concealed Supreme Personality of Godhead. Don't delay. This body is subject to the ravages of time.

Text 31

ity uktvätha gate bhéñme
     sarvajïe hastinäpuram
dütaà svaà preñayäm äsa
     vimalo nanda-sünave

     iti—thus; uktvä—speaking; atha—then; gate—gone; bhéñme—Bhéñma; sarvajïe—all-knowing; hastinäpuram—to Hasintapura; dütam—messenger; svam—own; preñayäm äsa—sent; vimalaù—Vimala; nanda-sünave—to Nanda's son, Kåñëa.

      All-knowing Bhéñma spoke these words and then left for Hastinäpura. Then King Vimala sent his messenger to Nanda's son, Lord Kåñëa.
.pa

Chapter Seven
Ayodhya-pura-vasiny-upakhyana
The Story of the Ayodhya Women

Text 1

çré-narada uvaca 
atha dütaù sindhu-deçan
     mathuran punar agataù
caran våndavane kåñëa-
     tére kåñëaà dadarça ha

     çré-narada uvaca—Sré Narada said; atha—then; dütaù—the messenger; sindhu-deçan—to Sindu-desa; mathuran—to Mathura; punaù—again; agataù—came; caran—walking; våndavane—in Våndavana; kåñëa-tére—by the Yamuna's shore; kåñëam—Kåñëa; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Sré Narada said: The messenger traveled from Sindhu-deça to the province of Mathura. Walking by the Yamuna's shore in Våndavana, he saw Kåñëa.

Text 2

kåñëaà praëamya rahasi
     kåtaïjali-puöaù çanaiù
pradakñiëé-kåtya düto
     vimaloktam uvaca saù

     kåñëam—to Kåñëa; praëamya—bowing down; rahasi—in a secluded place; kåtaïjali-puöaù—with folded hands; çanaiù—slowly; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; dütaù—the messenger; vimala—of Vimala; uktam—the words; uvaca—spoke; saù—he.

     In a secluded place, after bowing down before Lord Kåñëa and slowly circumambulating Him, the messenger repeated King Vimala's words.

Text 3

çré-düta uvaca 
svayaà paraà brahma paraù pareçaù
     parair adåçyaù paripürëa-devaù
yaù puëya-saìghaiù satataà hi düras
     tasmai namaù saj-jana-gocaraya

     çré-düta uvaca—the messenger said; svayam—personally; param—the Supreme; brahma—Brahman; paraù—the supreme; pareçaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; paraiù—by the great souls; adåçyaù—not seen; paripürëa-devaù—the perfect Lord; yaù—who; puëya-saìghaiù—by many pious deeds; satatam—again and again; hi—indeed; düraù—far away; tasmai—to Him; namaù—obeisances; saj-jana-gocaraya—seen by the saintly devotees.

     The messenger said: I offer my respectful obeisances to You, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, who are seen only by the saintly devotees, and who cannot be approcahed by performing even a great host of ordinary pious deeds. 

Text 4

go-vipra-deva-çruti-sädhu-dharma-
     rakñärtham adyaiva yadoù kule 'jaù
jäto 'si kaàsädi-vadhäya yo 'sau
     tasmai namo 'nanta-guëärëaväya

     gaù—the cows; vipra—brähmaëas; deva—demigods; çruti—Vedas; sädhu—saints; dharma—and religion; rakña—protection; artham—for the purpose; adya—now; eva—certainly; yadoù—of the Yadus; kule—in the family; ajaù—unborn; jätaù—born; asi—You are; kaàsädi-vadhäya—to kill the demons headed by Kaàsa; yaù—who; asau—the person; tasmai—to Him; namaù—obeisances; ananta—endless; guëa—virtues; arëaväya—an ocean.

     I offer my respectful obeisances unto You, who are an ocean of transcendental virtues and who, to protect the cows, brähmaëas, demigods, Vedas, saintly devotees, and principles of religion, and to kill the demons headed by Kaàsa, have taken birth in the Yadu dynasty, even though You are unborn.

Text 5

aho paraà bhägyam alaà vrajaukasäà
     dhanyaà kulaà nanda-varasya te pituù
dhanyo vrajo dhanyam araëyam etad
     yatraiva säkñät prakaöaù paro hariù

     ahaù—Oh; param—supreme; bhägyam—good fortune; alam—great; vrajaukasäm—of the people of Vraja; dhanyam—fortune; kulam—family; nanda-varasya—of King Nanda; te—of You; pituù—of the father; dhanyaù—fortunate; vrajaù—Vraja; dhanyam—fortunate; araëyam—the forest; etat—this; yatra—where; eva—indeed; säkñät—directly; prakaöaù—manifested; paraù—the Supreme; hariù—Lord Hari.

     Supremely fortunate are the people of Vraja. Fortunate is the family of Your father, King Nanda. Fortunate is the village of Vraja. Fortunate is the forest of Våndävana, where the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Hari, is now visible to our eyes. 

Text 6

yad rädhikä-sundara-kaëöha-ratnaà
     yad gopikä-jévana-müla-rüpam
tad eva man-netra-pathi prajätaà
     kià varëaye bhägyam ataù svakéyam

     yat—what; rädhikä—of Sré Rädhä; sundara—handsome; kaëöha—neck; ratnam—jewel; yat—what; gopikä—of the gopés; jévana—of the life; müla—the root; rüpam—the form; tat—that; eva—indeed; man-netra-pathi—on the pathway of my eyes; prajätam—born; kim—what?; varëaye—can I say; bhägyam—good fortune; ataù—then; svakéyam—own.

     He who is the life of the gopés and the gloriously handsome jewel at Rädhä's neck has entered the pathway of my eyes. How can I describe my own good fortune?

Text 7

gupto vraje gopa-miñeëa cäsi
     kastürikämoda iva prasiddhaù
yaçaç ca te nirmalam äçu çuklé-
     karoti sarvatra gataà tri-lokém

     guptaù—hidden; vraje—in Vraja; gopa-miñeëa—disguised as an ordinary gopa; ca—and; asi—You are; kastürikä—of musk; ämoda—the scent; iva—like; prasiddhaù—famous; yaçaù—fame; ca—and; te—of Yoiu; nirmalam—pure; äçu—at once; çuklé-karoti—purifies; sarvatra—everywhere; gatam—gone; tri-lokém—the three worlds.

     Even though You are now pretending to be an ordinary cowherd boy, Your sacred fame, going everywhere, purifies the three worlds, as the perfume musk fills the directions with a sweet fragrance.

Text 8

jänäsi sarvaà jana-caittya-bhävaà
     kñetra-jïa ätmä kåti-vånda-säkñé
tathäpi vakñye nåpa-väkyam uktaà
     paraà rahasyaà rahasi sva-dharmam

     jänäsi—You understand; sarvam—everything; jana-caittya-bhävam—that is in the hearts of the living entities; kñetra—the field of activities; jïaù—knowing; ätmä—the Supersoul; kåti-vånda—of pious actions; säkñé—the witness; tathäpi—still; vakñye—I will say; nåpa-väkyam—the king's words; uktam—spoken; param—then; rahasyam—secret; rahasi—in a secret place; sva-dharmam—own religion.

     As the Supersoul You are the witness that looks into everyone's heart. You know everything. Still, in this secluded place I will repeat King Vimala's confidential message.

Text 9

yä sindhu-deçeñu puré prasiddhä
     çré-campakä näma çubha yathaindré
tat-pälako 'sau vimalo yathendras
     tvat-päda-padme kåta-citta-våttiù

     yä—what; sindhu-deçeñu—in Sindhu-desa; puré—a city; prasiddhä—famous; çré-campakä—Sré Campakä; näma—named; çubha—beautiful; yatha—as; aindré—the city of Indra; tat-pälakaù—it's king; asau—he; vimalaù—Vimala; yathä—as; indraù—Indra; tvat-päda-padme—at Your lotus feet; kåta-citta-våttiù—places all his thoughts.

     In Sindhu-deça is a city named Sré Campakä, which is glorious as Indra's city, Amarävaté. Vimala, who is glorious as Indra, is the king of that city. his thoughts are always placed at Your lotus feet.

Text 10

sadä kåtaà yajïa-çataà tvad-arthaà
     dänaà tapo brähmaëa-sevanaà ca
térthaà japaà yena su-sädhanena
     tasmai paraà darçanam eva dehi

     sadä—always; kåtam—done; yajïa-çatam—a hundred yajnas; tvad-artham—for Your sake; dänam—charity; tapaù—austerity; brähmaëa-sevanam—service to the brähmaëas; ca—and; tértham—pilgrimage; japam—chanting mantras; yena—by which; su-sädhanena—spiritual practices; tasmai—to him; param—great; darçanam—sight; eva—indeed; dehi—please.

     For Your sake again and again He performs hundreds of yajïas, gives charity, performs austerities, serves the brähmaëas, visits holy places, and chants sacred mantras. Because he is engaged in these spiritual activities, O Lord, please appear before him.

Text 11

tat-kanyakäù padma-viçäla-neträù
     pürëaà patià tvaà mågayantya arät
sadä tvad-arthaà niyama-vrata-sthäs
     tvat-päda-sevä-vimalé-kåtäìgäù

     tat—his; kanyakäù—daughters; padma-viçäla-neträù—with large lotus eyes; pürëam—perfect; patim—husband; tvam—You; mågayantyaù—searching; arät—from afar; sadä—always; tvad-artham—for Your sake; niyama-vrata-sthäù—following austerities and vows; tvat-päda—Your feet; seva—service; vimalé-kåtäìgäù—become purified.

     Their large eyes like lotus flowers, his daughters have been long searching for You, their perfect husband. To be eligible to serve Your lotus feet, they have purified their bodies with many vows and austerities.

Text 12

gåhäëa täsäà vraja-deva päëén
     dattvä paraà darçanam adbhutaà svam
gacchäçu sindhün viçadé-kuru tvaà
     vimåçya kartavyam idaà tvayä hi

     gåhäëa—please accept; täsäm—them; vraja-deva—O Lord of Vraja; päëén—the hands; dattvä—giving; param—great; darçanam—sight; adbhutam—wonderful; svam—own; gaccha—please go; äçu—at once; sindhün—to Sindhu-desa; viçadé-kuru—please purify; tvam—You; vimåçya—considering; kartavyam—what should be done; idam—this; tvayä—by You; hi—indeed.

     O Lord of Vraja, please give them your wonderful audience and accept their hands in marriage. Pkease consider what should be done, and then please quickly go and purify Sindhu-deça with Your presence.

Text 13

çré-närada uväca 
düta-väkyaà ca tac chrutvä
     prasanno bhagavän hariù
kñaëa-mätreëa gatavän
     sa-dütaç campakäà purém

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; düta-väkyam—the words of the messenger; ca—and; tac—that; chrutvä—hearing; prasannaù—pleased; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåñëa; kñaëa-mätreëa—in a single moment; gatavän—gone; sa-dütaù—with the messenger; campakäm—CXampakä; purém—to the city.

      Sré Närada said: Pleased to hear the messenger's words, Lord Kåñëa went with him to the city of Campakä, traveling there in a single moment.

Text 14

vimalasya mahä-yajïe
     veda-dhvani-samäkule
sa-dütaù kåñëa äkäçät
     sahasävatatära ha

     vimalasya—of King Vimala; mahä-yajïe—in a great yajna; veda-dhvani-samäkule—filled with the sounds of the Vedas; sa-dütaù—with the messenger; kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; äkäçät—from the sky; sahasä—suddenly; avatatära—descended; ha—certainly.

     As King Vimala was performing a great yajïa filled with the sounds of the Vedas, Lord Kåñëa and the messenger suddenly descended from the sky.

Texts 15 and 16

çrévatsäìkaà ghana-çyämaà
     sundaraà vana-mälinam
pétämbaraà padma-netraà
     yajïa-väöägataà harim

taà dåñövä sahasotthäya
     vimalaù prema-vihvalaù
papäta caraëopänte
     romaïcé san kåtäïjaliù

     çrévatsa—with Srévatsa; aìkam—mark; ghana-syämam—dark as a monsoon cloud; sundaram—handsome; vana-mälinam—wearing a forest garland; pétämbaram—dressed in yellow garments; padma-netram—with lotus eyes; yajïa-väöa—to the place of the yajna; ägatam—come; harim—Lord Kåñëa; tam—Him; dåñövä—seeing; sahasä—at once; utthäya—rising; vimalaù—Vimala; prema-vihvalaù—overcome with love; papäta—fell down; caraëa-upante—at the Lord's feet; romaïcé—the hairs of his body erect with ecstasy; san—being so; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands.

     Seeing handsome, lotus-eyed Lord Kåñëa, dark as a monsoon cloud, dressed in yellow garments, decorated with a forest garland, and marked with Srévatsa, enter the place of the yaj 24, King Vimala suddenly stood up, his hands respectfully folded and the hairs of his body erect with joy. Then, overwhelmed with love, he fell at the Lord's feet. 

Text 17

saàsthäpya péöhake divye
     ratna-hema-khacit-pade
stutvä sampüjya vidhi-vad
     räjä tat-sammukhe sthitaù

     saàsthäpya—placing; péöhake—on a throne; divye—splendid; ratna-hema-khacit-pade—made of gold and jewels; stutvä—offering prayers; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhi-vat—properly; räjä—the king; tat-sammukhe—in the Lord's presence; sthitaù—stood.

     After offering Him a seat on a throne of gold and jewels, offering prayers, and properly worshiping Him, King Vimala stood before the Lord.

Text 18

gaväkñebhyaù prapaçyantéù
     sundarér vékñya mädhavaù
uväca vimalaà kåñëo
     megha-gambhirayä girä

     gaväkñebhyaù—from the windows; prapaçyantéù—looking; sundaréù—the beautiful girls; vékñya—seeing; mädhavaù—Lord Kåñëa; uväca—said; vimalam—to Vimala; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; megha-gambhirayä—deep as thunder; girä—with words.

     As He glanced at the beautiful girls gazing at Him from the many windows, in a voice like thunder Lord Kåñëa spoke to King Vimala.

Text 19

çré-bhagavän uväca 
mahä-mate varaà brühi
     yat te manasi vartate
yäjïavalkyasya vacasä
     jätaà mad-darçanaà tava

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one; varam—benediction; brühi—please ask; yat—what; te—of you; manasi—in the heart; vartate—is; yäjïavalkyasya—of Yajnavalkya; vacasä—by the words; jätam—born; mad-darçanam—the sight of Me; tava—by you.

     The Supreme Lord said: O noble-hearted one, please ask a boon. Ask for whatever is in your heart. the words of Yäj 241)avalkya have brought Me before you.

Text 20

çré-vimala uväca 
mano me bhramaré-bhütaà
     sadä tvat-päda-paìkaje
väsaà kuryäd deva-deva
     nänyeccha me kadäcana

     çré-vimala uväca—Sré Vimala said; manaù—the heart; me—of me; bhramaré-bhütam—has become a bumblebee; sadä—always; tvat-päda-paìkaje—at Your lotus feet; väsam—residence; kuryät—may be; deva-deva—O Lord of lords; na—not; anya—another; iccha—desire; me—of me; kadäcana—at any time.

     Sré Vimala said: O Lord of lords, please make my heart a bumblebee always staying at Your lotus feet. I shall never have any desire but this.

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvä vimalo räja
     sarvaà koça-dhanaà mahat
dvipa-väji-rathaiù särdhaà
     cakre ätma-nivedänam

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; iti—thus; uktvä—speaking; vimalaù—Vimala; räja—King; sarvam—all; koça-dhanam—wealth; mahat—great; dvipa—elephants; väji—horses; rathaiù—and chariots; särdham—with; cakre—did; ätma-nivedänam—offering himself.

     Sré Närada said: After speaking these words, King Vimala gave the Lord all the wealth in his treasury and all his elephants, horses, and chariots. He surrendered to the Lord with all his heart.

Text 22

samarpya vidhinä sarväù
     kanyakäù haraye nåpa
namaç cakära kåñëäya
     vimalo bhakti-tat-paraù

     samarpya—offering; vidhinä—properly; sarväù—all; kanyakäù—daughters; haraye—to Lord Kåñëa; nåpa—O king; namaù—obeisances; cakära—offered; kåñëäya—to Kåñëa; vimalaù—Vimala; bhakti-tat-paraù—a great devotee.

     O king, after giving his daughters to Lord Kåñëa, the great devotee Vimala bowed down to offer his respectful obeisances.

Text 23

tadä jaya-jayäravo
     babhüva jana-maëòale
vavåñuù puñpa-varñäni
     devatä gagana-sthitäù

     tadä—then; jaya-jayäravaù—sounds of Jaya! Jaya!; babhüva—were; jana-maëòale—in the circle of the people; vavåñuù—showered; puñpa—of flowers; varñäni—showers; devatä—the demigods; gagana-sthitäù—in the sky.

     Then the people shouted, "Jaya! Jaya!" and the demigods in the sky showered flowers.

Text 24

tadaiva kåñëa-särüpyaà
     präpto 'naìga-sphurad-dyutiù
çata-sürya-pratékäço
     dyotayan maëòalaà diçam

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; kåñëa-särüpyam—a spiritual form like Lord Kåñëa's; präptaù—attained; anaìga-sphurad-dyutiù—splendid as Kämadeva; çata—hundred; sürya—suns; pratékäçaù—splendid; dyotayan—illuminating; maëòalam diçam—the circle of the directions.

     Then King Vimala attained a spiritual form like Lord Kåñëa's. Glorious as Kämadeva, and splendid as a hundred suns, the king illuminated the circle of the directions.

Text 25

vainateyaà samäruhya
     natvä çré-garuòa-dhvajam
sa-bhäryaù paçyatäà nåëäà
     vaikuëöhaà vimalo yayau

     vainateyam—on Garuòa; samäruhya—climbing; natvä—bowing down; çré-garuòa-dhvajam—to He who carries a flag bearing the sign of garuòa; sa-bhäryaù—with his wives; paçyatäm—looking on; nåëäm—as the people were; vaikuëöham—to vaikuëöha; vimalaù—Vimala; yayau—went.

     As the people looked on, King Vimala and his wives offered respectful obeisances to Lord Kåñëa, climbed on the back of Garuòa, and went to the spiritual world of Vaikuëöha.

Text 26

dattvä muktià nå-pataye
     çré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
tat-sutäù sundarér nétvä
     vraja-maëòalam äyayau

     dattvä—giving; muktim—liberation; nå-pataye—to the king; çré-kåñëaù—Sré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—Himself; tat-sutäù—his daughters; sundaréù—beautiful; nétvä—taking; vraja-maëòalam—to the circle of Vraja; äyayau—went.

     After granting him liberation, Lord Kåñëa took the king's beautiful daughters to the circle of Vraja.

Text 27

tatra kämavane ramye
     divya-mandira-samyute
kréòantyaù kandukaiù sarväs
     tañöhuù kåñëa-priyäù çubhäù

     tatra—there; kämavane—in Kamavana; ramye—beautiful; divya-mandira-samyute—ina splendid palace; kréòantyaù—playing; kandukaiù—with balls; sarväù—all; tañöhuù—stayed; kåñëa-priyäù—the beloveds of Lord Kåñëa; çubhäù—beautiful.

     There, in Kämavana forest, in a splendid palace, Lord Kåñëa's beautiful wives stayed, passing the time by playing games.

Text 28

yävatéç ca priyä mukhyäs
     tävad rüpa-dharo hariù
raräja räse vraja-räò
     raïjayaàs tan-manäù prabhuù

     yävatéù—as many; ca—qand; priyä—wives; mukhyäù—important; tävat—so many; rüpa-dharaù—assuming the forms; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; raräja—was splendidly manifested; räse—in the rasa dance; vraja-räò—the king of Vraja; raïjayan—delighting; tan-manäù—the heart; prabhuù—the Lord.

     Expanding Himself into as many forms as there were wives, and delighting their hearts, Lord Kåñëa was splendidly manifest in the räsa dance.

Text 29

räse vimala-putréëäà
     änanda-jala-bindubhiù
cyutair vimala-kuëòo 'bhüt
     térthänäà tértham uttamam

     räse—in thew rasa dance; vimala-putréëäm—the daughters of King Vimala; änanda—of bliss; jala-bindubhiù—with drops of perspiration; cyutaiù—fallen; vimala-kuëòaù—Vimala-kuëòa; abhüt—became; térthänäm—of holy places; tértham—the holy place; uttamam—the best.

     As they enjoyed the happiness of the räsa dance, King Viumala's daughters perspired. Their perspiration became Vimala-kuëòa, the best of holy places.

Text 30

dåñövä pétvä ca taà snätvä
     püjayitvä nåpeçvara
chittvä meru-samaà päpaà
     golokaà yäti mänavaù

     dåñövä—seeing; pétvä—drinking; ca—and; tam—that; snätvä—bathing; püjayitvä—worshiping; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; chittvä—breaking; meru-samam—equal to Mount Meru; päpam—sin; golokam—to Goloka; yäti—goes; mänavaù—a person.

     O king of kings, by seeing, drinking, bathing in, or worshiping that sacred lake, a person breaks a host of sins as great as Mount Meru and goes to Goloka.

Text 31

ayodhyä-väsinénäà tu
     kathäà yaù çåëuyän naraù
sa vrajed dhäma paramaà
     golokaà yogi-durlabham

     ayodhyä-väsinénäm—of the women of Ayodhyä; tu—certainly; kathäm—the story; yaù—who; çåëuyän—hears; naraù—as person; sa—he; vrajet—goes; dhäma paramam—to the supreme abode; golokam—Goloka; yogi-durlabham—which even the great yogis cannot attain.

     A person who hears this story of the Ayodhyä women goes to the supreme abode of Goloka, which even the great yogés cannot attain.

.pa

Chapter Eight
Yajïä-sétopäkhyäna ekädaçé-mähätmya
In the Story of the Yajïa-sétäs, the Glories of Ekädaçé

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
gopénäà yajïa-sétänäà
     äkhyänaà çåëu maithila
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     kämadaà maìgaläyanam

     çré-näradaù uväca—Sré Närada said; gopénäm—of the gopés; yajïa-sétänäm—of the yajna-sétäs;  äkhyänam—the story; çåëu—please hear; maithila—O king of Mithilä; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; kämadam—fufilling desirews; maìgaläyanam—auspicious.

     Sré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, please hear the story of the yajïa-sétäs that beame gopés, a sacred and auspicious story that fulfills all desires and removes all sins.

Text 2

uçénaro näma deço
     dakñiëasyäà diçi sthitaù
ekadä tatra parjanyo
     na vavarña samä daça

     uçénaraù—Usinara; näma—named; deçaù—a country; dakñiëasyäm—in the sounth; diçi—direction; sthitaù—situated; ekadä—one day; tatra—there; parjanyaù—rain; na—not; vavarña—rained; samä—years; daça—ten.

     In the south is a country named Uçénara, where for ten years it did not rain.

Text 3

dhanavantas tatra gopä
     anävåñöi-bhayäturäù
sa-kuöumbä go-dhanaiç ca
     vraja-maëòalam äyayuù

     dhanavantaù—wealthy; tatra—there; gopä—gopas; anävåñöi-bhayäturäù—fearful of the lack of rain; sa-kuöumbä—with families; go-dhanaiù—with cows; ca—and; vraja-maëòalam—to the circle of Vraja; äyayuù—came.

     Fearful that it would never rain, the wealthy gopas there traveled, with their families and cows, to the circle of Vraja.

Text 4

puëye våndävane ramye
     kälindé-nikaöe çubhe
nanda-räja-sahäyena
     väsaà te cakrire nåpa

     puëye—sacred; våndävane—in Våndävana; ramye—beautiful; kälindé-nikaöe—by theYamunä; çubhe—beautiful; nanda-räja—of King Nanda; sahäyena—with the help; väsam—residence; te—they; cakrire—did; nåpa—O king.

     O king, with the help of King Nanda, they made their homes in beautiful and sacred Våndävana by the shore of the beautiful Yamunä.

Text 5

teñäà gåheñu saïjätä
     yajïa-sétäç ca gopikäù
çré-rämasya varä divyä
     divya-yauvana-bhüñitäù

     teñäm—of them; gåheñu—in the homes; sa 24jätäù—born; yajïa-sétäù—the yajna-sétäs; ca—and; gopikäù—gopés; çré-rämasya—of Lord Rämacandra; varä—blessing; divyä—splendid; divya-yauvana-bhüñitäù—decorated with splendid youth.

     The yajïa-sétäs, who had recieved a blessing from Lord Rämacandra, took birth in their homes as beautiful gopés decorated with splendid youthfulness.

Text 6

çré-kåñëaà sundaraà dåñövä
     mohitäs tä nåpeçvara
vrataà kåñëa-prasädärthaà
     prañöuà rädhäà samäyayuù

     çré-kåñëam—Lord Kåñëa; sundaram—handsome; dåñövä—seeing; mohitäù—enchanted; tä—they; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; vratam—a vow; kåñëa-prasädärtham—to attain the mercy of Lord Kåñëa; prañöum—to ask; rädhäm—Sré Rädhä; samäyayuù—approached.

     O king of kings, when they saw handsome Lord Kåñëa, they becamne bewildered with love for Him. To ask what vow they might follow to attain Kåñëa's mercy, they approached Sré Rädhä.

Text 7

çré-gopya ücuù 
våñabhänu-sute divye
     he rädhe kaïja-locane
çré-kåñëasya prasädärthaà
     vada kiïcid vrataà çubham

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; våñabhänu-sute—O daughter of King Våñabhänu; divye—splendid; he—O; rädhe—Rädhä; kaïja-locane—lotus-eyed; çré-kåñëasya—of Sré Kåñëa; prasädärtham—to attain the favor; vada—please tell; kiïcit—what; vratam—vow; çubham—auspicious.

     The gopés said: O Rädhä, O beautiful, lotus-eyed daughter of King Våñabhänu, please tell us what vow we may follow to attain Lord Kåñëa's favor.

Text 8

tava vaçyo nanda-sünur
     devair api su-durgamaù
tvaà jagan-mohiné rädhe
     sarva-çästrärtha-para-gä

     tava—of you; vaçyaù—under the control; nanda-sünuù—the son of Nanda; devaiù—by the demigods; api—even; su-durgamaù—unapproachable; tvam—you; jagan-mohini—the most beautiful girl in the worlds; rädhe—O Rädhä; sarva-çästrärtha-para-gä—who has gone to the far shore of all the scriptures.

     O Rädhä, You have made Lord Kåñëa, whom even the great demigods cannot approach, into Your submissive servant. You are the most beautiful girl in all the worlds. You have crossed to the farther shore of the deep meaning of all the scriptures. 

Text 9

çré-rädhoväca 
çré-kåñëasya prasädärthaà
     kurutaikädaçé-vratam
tena vaçyo hariù säkñäd
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     çré-rädhä uväca—Sré Rädhä said; çré-kåñëasya—of Sré Kåñëa; prasädärtham—to attain the favor; kuruta—follow; ekädaçé-vratam—the vow of ekädaçé; tena—by that; vaçyaù—brought under cotnrol; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Sré Rädhä said: To attain Lord Kåñëa's mercy you should follow the vow of fasting on ekädaçé. In that way You will make Lord Kåñëa into your submissive servant. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 10

çré-gopya ücuù 
samvatsarasyaikädaçyä
     nämäni vada rädhike
mäse mäse vrataà tasyäù
     kartavyaà kena bhävataù

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; samvatsarasya—of a year; ekädaçyä—of ekädaçé; nämäni—the names; vada—please tell; rädhike—O Rädhä; mäse mäse—month after month; vratam—the vow; tasyäù—of that; kartavyam—should be done; kena—by what?; bhävataù—according to the nature.

     The gopés said: O Rädhä, please tell us the names of the different ekädaçés throughout the year. Month after month, how should the different ekädaçés be observed?

Text 11

çré-rädhoväca 
märgaçérñe kåñëa-pakñe
     utpannä viñëu-dehataù
mura-daitya-vadhärthäya
     tithir ekädaçé varä

     çré-rädhä uväca—Sré Rädhä said; märgaçérñe—in margasirsa; kåñëa-pakñe—during the dark fortnight; utpannä—Utpanna; viñëu-dehataù—from the body of Lord Viñëu; mura-daitya-vadhärthäya—to kill the demon Mura; tithiù—the day; ekädaçé—ekädaçé; varä—varä.

     Sré Rädhä said: During the dark fortnight of the month of Märgaçérña (November-December), in order to kill the demon Mura, the holy day of ekädaçé was born from the body of Lord Viñëu.

Text 12

mäse mäse påthag-bhütä
     saiva sarva-vratottamä
tasyäù ñaò-viàçatià nämnäà
     vakñyämi hita-kamyayä

     mäse mäse—month after month; påthag-bhütä—seaprately manifested; sa—that; eva—indeed; sarva-vratottamä—the best of holy vows; tasyäù—of that; ñaò-viàçatim—26; nämnäm—names; vakñyämi—I will tell; hita-kamyayä—desiring your welfare.

     Desiring your welfare, I will tell you the names of the twenty-six most sacred ekädaçés that appear in the differnet months.

Text 13

utpattiç ca tathä mokña
     sa-phalä ca tataù param
putradä ñaö-tilä caiva
     jayä ca vijayä tathä

     utpattiù—Utpatti; ca—and; tathä—so; mokña—moksa; sa-phalä—saphala; ca—and; tataù—then; param—then; putradä—Putrada; ñaö-tilä—sat-tila; ca—and; eva—indeed; jayä—Jaya; ca—and; vijayä—Vijaya; tathä—so.

     Their names are: 1. utpatti, 2. mokñä, 3. sa-phalä, 4. putradä, 5. ñaö-tilä, 6. jayä, 7. vijayä, . . .

Text 14

ämalaké tataù paçcän
     nämnä vai päpa-mocané
kämadä ca tataù paçcät
     kathitä vai varüthiné

     ämalaké—ämalaké; tataù—then; paçcän—after; nämnä—names; vai—indeed; päpa-mocané—papa-mocani; kämadä—kamada; ca—and; tataù—then; paçcät—after; kathitä—said; vai—indeed; varüthiné—varuthini.

 . . . 8. ämalaké, 9. päpa-mocané, 10. kämadä, 11. varüthiné, . . .

Text 15

mohiné cäparä proktä
     nirjalä kathitä tataù
yoginé deva-çayané
     käminé ca tataù param

     mohiné—mohiné; ca—and; aparä—apara; proktä—said; nirjalä—nirjala; kathitä—said; tataù—then; yoginé—yogini; deva-çayané—deva-sayani; käminé—kamini; ca—and; tataù—then; param—after.

 . . . 12. mohiné, 13. aparä, 14. nirjalä, 15. yoginé, 16. deva-çayané, 17. käminé, . . .

Text 16

paviträ cäpy ajä padmä
     indirä ca tataù param
päçäìkuçä ramä caiva
     tataù paçcät prabodhiné

     paviträ—pavitra; ca—and; api—also; ajä—aja; padmä—padma; indirä—indira; ca—and; tataù—then; param—then; päçäìkuçä—pasankusa; ramä—rama; ca—and; eva—indeed; tataù—then; paçcät—after; prabodhiné—prabodhini.

 . . . 18. paviträ, 19. ajä, 20. padmä, 21. indirä, 22. päçäìkuçä, 23. ramä, 24. prabodhiné.

Text 17

sarva-sampat-pradä caiva
     dve prokte malamäsa-je
evaà sad-viàçatià nämnäà
     ekädaçyäù paöhec ca yaù
samvatsara-dvädaçénäà
     phalam äpnoti so 'pi hi

     sarva-sampat-pradä—granting all auspoiciousness; ca—and; eva—indeed; dve—two; prokte—said; malamäsa-je—born from malamasa; evam—thus; ñaò—-viàçatim—26; nämnäm—names; ekädaçyäù—of ekädaçé; paöhet—recites; ca—and; yah—whoever; samvatsara-dvädaçénäm—a year of ekädaçé; phalam—the result; äpnoti—attaiuns; saù—he; api—indeed; hi—indeed.

     There are also two more ekädaçés, both named sarva-sampat-pradä, during the extra month of leap-year. In this way there are twenty-six ekädaçés in all. A person who chants the names of these twenty-six ekädaçés attains the result of following ekädaçé for one year.

Text 18

ekädaçyäç ca niyamaà
     çåëutätha vrajäìganäù
bhümi-çäyé daçamyäà tu
     caika-bhukto jitendriyaù

     ekädaçyäù—of ekädaçé; ca—and; niyamam—restrictions; çåëutätha—please hear; vrajäìganäù—O girls of Vraja; bhümi-çäyé—resting on the ground; daçamyäm—on the dasami; tu—and; ca—also; eka—only once; bhuktaù—eating; jita—conquered; indriyaù—the senses.

     O girls of Vraja, please hear the rules for observing ekädaçé. On ekädaçé one should control the senses and sleep on the ground. On dvädaçé one should eat only once.

Text 19

eka-väraà jalaà pétvä
     dhauta-vastro 'ti-nirmalaù
brähme muhürta utthäya
     caikädaçyäà harià nataù

     eka-väram—one time; jalam—water; pétvä—drinking; dhauta-vastraù—clean garments; ati-nirmalaù—very pure; brähme muhürte—during brahma-muhurta; utthäya—rising; ca—and; ekädaçyäm—on ekädaçé; harim—to Lord Kåñëa; nataù—bow down.

     During ekädaçé one should be pure-hearted and very clean, wear clean garments, drink water only once, rise for brähma-muhürta, and bow down to Lord Kåñëa 

Text 20

adhamaà küpika-snänaà
     väpyäà snänaà tu madhyamam
taòäge cottamaà snänaà
     nadyäù snänaà tataù param

     adhamam—worst; küpika—well; snänam—bath; väpyäm—in a pond; snänam—bath; tu—indeed; madhyamam—intermediate; taòäge—in a lake; ca—and; uttamam—the best; snänam—bath; nadyäù—in a river; snänam—bath; tataù—than that; param—even better.

     Bathing with well-water is an inferior kind of bath. Bathing in a pond is better, bathing in a lake is better than that, and bathing in a river is better still.

Text 21

evaà snätvä nara-varaù
     krodha-lobha-vivarjitaù
nälapet tad-dine nécäàs
     tathä päkhaëòino narän

     evam—thus; snätvä—bathing; nara-varaù—an exalted person; krodha-lobha-vivarjitaù—free of greed and anger; na—not; älapet—should talk; tad-dine—on that day; nécän—to degraded people; tathä—so; päkhaëòinaù—to offenders; narän—people.

     In this way one should bathe. On ekädaçé day one should be free of greed and anger, and one should not talk to sinful people, atheists, and offenders.

Texts 22 and 23

mithyä-väda-ratäàç caiva
     tathä brähmaëa-nindakän
anyäàç caiva duräcärän
     ägamyägamane ratän

para-dravyäpahäräàç ca
     para-däräbhigäminaù
durvåttän bhinna-maryädän
     nälapet sa vraté naraù

     mithyä-väda-ratän—to liers; ca—and; eva—certainly; tathä—so; brähmaëa-nindakän—to they who have offended brähmaëas; anyän—to others; ca—and; eva—indeed; duräcärän—misbehaved; agamya-ägamane—to illicit sex; ratän—attached; para—of others; dravya—the property; apahärän—stealing; ca—and; para—of others; dära—the wives; abhigäminaù—approasching; durvåttän—wicked; bhinna-maryädän—who break the rules of morality; na—not; älapet—should talk; sa—he; vraté—following the vow; naraù—a person.

     A person who follows the vow of ekädaçé should not talk to liers, offenders of brähmaëas, sinners, debauchees, thieves, adulterers, and the ill-behaved and immoral.

Text 24

keçavaà püjayitvä tu
     naivedyaà tatra kärayet
dépaà dadyäd gåhe tatra
     bhakti-yuktena cetasä

     keçavam—Lord Kåñëa; püjayitvä—worshiping; tu—indeed; naivedyam—prasadam food; tatra—there; kärayet—should do; dépam—a lamp; dadyät—should offer; gåhe—in the home; tatra—there; bhakti-yuktena—with devotion; cetasä—in the heart.

     In the home one should, with devotion in the heart, worship Lord Kåñëa, and offer Him food and a lamp.

Text 25

kathäù çrutvä brähmaëebhyo
     dadyät sad-dakñiëäà punaù
rätrau jägaraëaà kuryäd
     gäyan kåñëa-padäni ca

     kathäù—stories; çrutvä—haering; brähmaëebhyaù—from the brähmaëa; dadyät—should give; sad-dakñiëäm—daksina; punaù—again; rätrau—at night; jägaraëam—staying awake; kuryät—should do; gäyan—singing; kåñëa-padäni—verses praising Lord Kåñëa; ca—and.

     From the brähmaëas one should hear the stories of Lord Kåñëa. One should offer dakñiëä to them. One should keep a vigil, singing the glories of Lord Kåñëa throughout the night.

Texts 26 and 27

käàsyaà mäàsaà masüräàs ca
     kodravaà caëakaà tathä
çäkaà madhu parännaà ca
     punar bhojana-maithunam

viñëu-vrate tu kartavye
     daçamyäà daça varjayet
dyütaà kréòäà ca nidräà ca
     tämbülaà danta-dhävanam

     käàsyam—brass utensils; mäàsam—meat; masürän—masura dal; ca—and; kodravam—kodrava; caëakam—chick-peas; tathä—so; çäkam—vegetables; madhu—honey; parännam—the food of others; ca—and; punaù—again; bhojana—eating; maithunam—sex; viñëu-vrate—when the vow of ekädaçé; tu—indeed; kartavye—have been completed; daçamyäm—on the dasami; daça—these ten; varjayet—should avoid; dyütam—gambling; kréòäm—playing; ca—and; nidräm—sleeping; ca—and; tämbülam—betelnuts; danta-dhävanam—brushing the teeth.

     When ekädaçé is ended, and the daçamé day has come, one should avoid these ten things: 1. eating from a brass dish, 2. eating flesh, 3. masüra däl, 4. kodrava grains, 5. chick-peas, 6. spinach, 7. honey, 8. and the food of others, 9. eating twice, and 10. sex. One should also avoid gambling, playing, sleeping, chewing betelnuts, and brushing the teeth.

Text 28

paräpavädaà paiçünyaà
     steyaà hiàsäà tathä ratim
krodhäòhyaà hy anåtaà väkyaà
     ekädaçyäà vivarjayet

     para—others; apavädam—rebuking; paiçünyam—slander; steyam—theft; hiàsäm—violence; tathä—so; ratim—sex; krodhäòhyam—anger; hi—indeed; anåtam—lies; väkyam—words; ekädaçyäm—on ekädaçé; vivarjayet—one should avoid.

     On ekädaçé one should avoid harsh speech, slander, theft, violence, sex, anger, and speaking lies.

Text 29

käàsyaà mäàsaà suräà kñaudraà
     tailaà vitathä-bhäñaëam
puñöi-ñañöi-masüräàç ca
     dvädaçyäà parivarjayet

     käàsyam—brass sish; mäàsam—flesh; suräm—liquor; kñaudram—honey; tailam—oil; vitathä-bhäñaëam—speaking lies; puñöi-ñañöi-masüräàù—puñöi, ñañöi, and masürä; ca—and; dvädaçyäm—on the dvadasi; parivarjayet—one should avoid.

     On the dvädaçé one should avoid brass utensils, flesh, liquor, honey, oil, speaking lies, puñöi, ñañöi, and masüra.

Text 30

anena vidhinä kuryäd
     dvädaçé-vratam uttamam

     anena—by thgese; vidhinä—rules; kuryät—one should do; dvädaçé-vratam—the vow of ekädaçé and dvädaçé; uttamam—great.

     By following these rules one should observe the great vow of ekädaçé and dvädaçé.

Text 31

çré-gopya ücuù 
ekädaçé-vratasyäsya
     kälaà vada mahä-mate
kià phalaà vada tasyäs tu

     mähätmyaà vada tattvataù

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; ekädaçé-vratasya asya—of the vow of ekädaçé; kälam—the time; vada—please tell; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one; kim—what?; phalam—the result; vada—please tell; tasyäù—of that; tu—indeed; mähätmyam—teh glories; vada—please tell; tattvataù—in truth.

     The gopés said: O noble-hearted one, please tell us when the vow of ekädaçé should be observed. What is the result of following ekädaçé? Please tell us. Please tell us in truth the glories of ekädaçé.

Text 32

çré-rädhoväca 
daçamé païca-païcäçad
     ghaöikä cet pradåçyate
tarhi caikädaçé tyäjyä
     dvädaçéà samupoñayet

     çré-rädhä uväca—Sré Rädhä said; daçamé—the daçamé; païca-païcäçat—fifty-five; ghaöikä—ghatikas; cet—if; pradåçyate—is seen; tarhi—then; ca—and; ekädaçé—ekädaçé; tyäjyä—abandoning; dvädaçém—the dvädaçé; samupoñayet—one should fast.

     If dvädaçé starts within the first twenty-two hours of ekädaçé, one should not fast on ekädaçé, but on dvädaçé instead.
     
     Note: One ghaöikä equals twenty-four minutes. Fifty-five ghaöikäs equal twenty-two hours.

Text 33

daçamé phala-mätreëa
     tyäjyä caikädaçé tithiù
madirä-bindu-pätena
     tyäjyo gaìga-ghaöo yathä

     daçamé—daçamé; phala-mätreëa—by the resutl alone; tyäjyä—should be abandoned; ca—and; ekädaçé—ekädaçé; tithiù—day; madirä—of liquor; bindu—a drop; pätena—by falling; tyäjyaù—should be rejected; gaìga-ghaöaù—a jar of Ganges water; yathä—as.

     As one avoids drinking a cup of Gaìgä water into which a drop of wine has fallen, so one should avoid fasting on such an ekädaçé.

Text 34

ekädaçé yadä våddhià
     dvädaçé ca yadä gatä
tadä parä hy upoñyä syät
     pürvä vai dvädaçé-vrate

     ekädaçé—ekädaçé; yadä—when; våddhim—complete; dvädaçé—dvädaçé; ca—and; yadä—when; gatä—gone; tadä—then; parä—great; hi—indeed; upoñyä—fasting; syät—should be; pürvä—before; vai—indeed; dvädaçé-vrate—on the vow of dvädaçé.

     When ekädaçé goes to its completion, and dvädaçi arrives at the proper time, then one should fast on ekädaçé.

Text 35

ekädaçé-vratasyäsya
     phalaà vakñye vrajäìganäù
yasya çravaëa-mätreëa
     väjapeya-phalaà labhet

     ekädaçé-vratasya asya—of the vow of ekädaçé; phalam—the result; vakñye—I will say; vrajäìganäù—O girls of Vraja; yasya—of which; çravaëa—by hearing; mätreëa—simply; väjapeya-phalam—the result of an vajapeya-yajna; labhet—one attains.

     O girls of Vraja, now I will tell you the result of following ekädaçé. Simply by hearing this description one attains the reuslt of performing a väjapeya-yajïa.

Text 36

añöäçéti-sahasräëi
     dvijän bhojayate tu yaù
tat kåtaà phalam äpnoti
     dvädaçé-vrata-kån naraù

     añöäçéti-sahasräëi—eighty-eight; dvijän—brähmaëas; bhojayate—feeds; tu—indeed; yaù—one who; tat—that; kåtam—done; phalam—result; äpnoti—attains; dvädaçé-vrata-kån—who follows the vow of ekädaçé and dvädaçé; naraù—a person.

     A person who follows the vow of ekädaçé and dvädaçé attains the same pious result one attains by feeding eighty-eight brähmaëas.

Text 37

sa-sägara-vanopetäà
     yo dadäti vasundharäm
tat-sahasra-guëaà puëyaà
     ekädaçyä mahä-vrate

     sa-sägara-vanopetäm—mixed with the ocean; yaù—one who; dadäti—does; vasundharäm—the earth; tat-sahasra—a thousand; guëam—times; puëyam—piety; ekädaçyä—of ekädaçé; mahä-vrate—on the great vow.

     A person who follows ekädaçé attains a pious result thousands of times greater than the pious result attained by performing the ritual of mixing the earth and the ocean.

Text 38

ye saàsärärëave magnäù
     päpa-paìka-samäkule
teñäm uddharaëärthäya
     dvädaçé-vratam uttamam

     ye—they who; saàsära—of birth and death; arëave—in the ocean; magnäù—drowning; päpa-paìka-samäkule—filled with the mud of sins; teñäm—of them; uddharaëärthäya—to deliver; dvädaçé-vratam—the vow of following ekädaçé and dvädaçé; uttamam—is the best.

     For they who are drowning in the ocean of repeated birth and death, an ocean muddy with many sins, the vow of fasting on ekädaçé is the best means of deliverance.

Text 39

rätrau jägaraëaà kåtvai-
     kädaçé-vrata-kån naraù
na paçyati yamaà raudraà
     yuktaù päpa-çatair api

     rätrau—at night; jägaraëam—staying awake; kåtva—doing; ekädaçé-vrata-kåt—following ekädaçé; naraù—a person; na—not; paçyati—sees; yamam—Yamaräja; raudram—angry; yuktaù—engaged; päpa-çataiù—with hundreds of sins; api—even.

     Even though contaminated with hundreds of sins, a person who keeps a nighttime vigil while following the vow of ekädaçé never sees angry Yamaräja.

Text 40

püjayed yo harià bhaktyä
     dvädaçyäà tulasé-dalaiù
lipyate na sa päpena
     padma-patram ivämbhasä

     püjayet—worships; yaù—one who; harim—Lord Kåñëa; bhaktyä—with devotion; dvädaçyäm—on dvadasi; tulasé-dalaiù—with tulasi leaves; lipyate—is touched; na—not; sa—he; päpena—with sin; padma-patram—a lotus leaf; iva—like; ambhasä—by water.

     As a lotus leaf is never touched by water, so a person who worships Lord Kåñëa with tulasé leaves on dvädaçé is never touched by sin.

Text 41

açvamedha-sahasräëi
     räjasüya-çatäni ca
ekädaçy-upaväsasya
     kalaà närhanti ñoòaçém

     açvamedha-sahasräëi—thousand asvamedha-yajnas; räjasüya-çatäni—a hundred rajasuya-yajnas; ca—and; ekädaçy-upaväsasya—of one who fasts on ekädaçé; kalam—a part; na—not; arhanti—is equal; ñoòaçém—sixteenth.

     The results of a thousand açvamedha-yajïas and a hundred räjasüya-yajïas are not equal to even a sixteenth part of the result of fasting on ekädaçé.

Text 42

daça vai mätåke pakñe
     tathä vai daça paitåke
priyayä daça pakñe tu
     puruñän uddharen naraù

     daça—ten; vai—indeed; mätåke pakñe—on the mother's side; tathä—so; vai—indeed; daça—ten; paitåke—on the father's side; priyayä—of the wife; daça—ten; pakñe—on the side; tu—indeed; puruñän—people; uddharet—delivers; naraù—a person.

     A person who follows ekädaçé delivers ten generations of his mother's family, ten generations of his father's family, and ten generations on his wife's family.

Text 43

yathä çuklä tathä kåñëä
     dvayoç ca sädåçaà phalam
dhenuù çvetä tathä kåñëä
     ubhayoù sädåçaà payaù

     yathä—as; çuklä—light; tathä—so; kåñëä—dark; dvayoù—of them both; ca—and; sädåçam—equality; phalam—result; dhenuù—a cow; çvetä—white; tathä—so; kåñëä—black; ubhayoù—of them both; sädåçam—the same; payaù—milk.

     As a white cow and a black cow both give the same kind of milk, so the ekädaçé of the bright fortnight and the ekädaçé of the dark fortnight both bring the same result.

Text 44

meru-mandara-mäträëi
     päpäni çata-janmasu
ekaà caikädaçéà gopyo
     dahate tüla-räçi-vat

     meru-mandara-mäträëi—like a Mount Meru or a Mount Mandara; päpäni—sins; çata-janmasu—in a hundred births; ekam—one; ca—and; ekädaçém—ekädaçé; gopyaù—O gopés; dahate—burns; tüla-räçi-vat—like a great pile of cotton.

     O gopés, a fire burns a great pile of cotton, so a single ekädaçé burns the great Mount Meru of sins committed in a hundred births.

Text 45

vidhivad vidhi-hénaà vä
     dvädaçyäà dänam eva ca
sv-alpaà vä su-kåtaà gopyo
     meru-tulyaà bhavec ca tat

     vidhivat—following rules; vidhi-hénam—not following rules; vä—or; dvädaçyäm—on dvadasi; dänam—charity; eva—indeed; ca—and; sv-alpam—slight; vä—or; su-kåtam—nicely done; gopyaù—O gopés; meru-tulyam—equal to Mount Meru; bhavet—may be; ca—and; tat—that.

     O gopés, when, either following the proper method or not following it, and whether it is great or small, one gives charity on dvädaçé, that charity becomes as great as a Mount Meru of charity. 

Text 46

ekädaçé-dine viñëoù
     çåëute yo hareù kathäm
sapta-dvépavaté-däne
     yat phalaà labhate ca saù

     ekädaçé-dine—on the ekädaçé day; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; çåëute—hears; yaù—one; hareù—of Lord Hari; kathäm—the story; sapta-dvépavaté-däne—giving charity to the seven continents; yat—what; phalam—result; labhate—is obtained; ca—and; saù—it.

     A person who on ekädaçé hears the stories of Lord Kåñëa attains the same pious result he would attain by giving great charity everywhere on the seven continents.

Text 47

çaìkhoddhäre naraù snätvä
     dåñövä devaà gadädharam
ekädaçy-upaväsasya
     kaläà närhanti ñoòaçém

     çaìkhoddhäre—at Sankhoddhara-tirtha; naraù—a person; snätvä—bathing; dåñövä—seeing; devam—the Lord; gadädharam—who holds a club; ekädaçy-upaväsasya—fasting on ekädaçé; kaläm—a part; na—not; arhanti—is equal; ñoòaçém—sixteenth.

     A person who bathes at Saìkhoddhara-tértha and gazes at the Deity of Lord Gadädhara there does not attain even one sixteenth of the piety one attains by fasting on ekädaçé.

Texts 48 and 49

prabhäse ca kurukñetre
     kedäre badrikäçrame
käçyäà ca çükara-kñetre
     grahaëe candra-süryayoù

saìkranténäà catur-lakñaà
     dänaà dattaà ca yan naraiù
ekädaçy-upaväsasya
     kaläà närhanti ñoòaçém

     prabhäse—at Prabhasa; ca—and; kurukñetre—at Kuruksetra; kedäre—at Kedara; badrikäçrame—at Badarikasrama; käçyäm—at Varanasi; ca—and; çükara-kñetre—at Sukara-ksetra; grahaëe—during the eclipse; candra-süryayoh—of the sun or moon; saìkranténäm—of sankrantis; catur-lakñam—four-hundred thousand; dänam—chasrity; dattam—given; ca—and; yan—what; naraiù—by people; ekädaçy-upaväsasya—of fasting on ekädaçé; kaläm—part; na—not; arhanti—is equal; ñoòaçém—sixteenth.

      A person who makes four-hundred thousand pilgrimages to Prabhäsa, Kurukñetra, Kedära, Badarikäçrama, Väräëasé, and Sükarakñetra during eclipses of the sun or moon and gives great charity there does not attain even one sixteenth of the piety one attains by fasting on ekädaçé.

Text 50

nägänäà ca yathä çeñaù
     pakñiëäà garuòo yathä
devänäà ca yathä viñëur
     varëänäà brähmaëo yathä

våkñäëäà ca yathäçvatthaù
     paträëäà tulasé yathä
vratänäà ca tathä gopyo
     varä caikädaçé tithiù

     nägänäm—of serpents; ca—and; yathä—as; çeñaù—Seña; pakñiëäm—of birds; garuòaù—Garuòa; yathä—as; devänäm—the demigods; ca—and; yathä—as; viñëuù—Lord Viñëu; varëänäm—of castes; brähmaëaù—a brähmaëa; yathä—as; våkñäëäm—of trees; ca—and; yathä—as; açvatthaù—the banyan tree; paträëäm—of leaves; tulasé—Tulasé; yathä—as; vratänäm—of vows; ca—and; tathä—so; gopyaù—O gopés; varä—the best; ca—and; ekädaçé—ekädaçé; tithiù—day.

     O gopés, as Lord Seña is the best of serpents, as Garuòa is the best of birds, as Lord Viñëu is the best of Deities, as the brähmaëas are the best of castes, as the banyan is the best of trees, and as a tulasé leaf is the best of leaves, so fasting on ekädaçé day is the best of sacred vows.

Text 52

daça-varña-sahasräëi
     tapas tapyati yo naraù
tat-tulyaà phalam äpnoti
     dvädaçé-vrata-kån naraù

     daça-varña-sahasräëi—for ten thousand years; tapaù—austerities; tapyati—perfroms; yaù—who; naraù—a person; tat-tulyam—equal to that; phalam—a result; äpnoti—attains; dvädaçé-vrata-kåt—following ekädaçé; naraù—a person.

     A person who follows ekädaçé attains the result of performing austerities for ten thousand years.

Text 53

ittham ekädaçénäà ca
     phalam uktaà vrajäìganäù
kurutäçu vrataà yüyaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchatha

     ittham—thus; ekädaçénäm—of the ekädaçés; ca—and; phalam—the result; uktam—spoken; vrajäìganäù—O girls of Vraja; kuruta—please perform; äçu—at once; vratam—this vow; yüyam—you; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchatha—do you wish.

     O girls of Vraja, now I have described to you the result of following the vow of ekädaçé. Please follow the vow of ekädaçé at once. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Nine
Sré Ekädaçé-mähätmya
The Glories of Sré Ekädaçé

Text 1

çré-gopya ücuù 
våñabhänu-sute su-bhru
     sarva-çästrärtha-pära-ge
viòambayanté tvaà väcä
     väcaà väcaspater muneù

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; våñabhänu-sute—O daughter of King Våñabhänu; su-bhru—O girl with the beautiful eyebrows; sarva-çästrärtha—the meanings of all the scriptures; pära-ge—O You who travel to the farther shore; viòambayanti—imitating; tvam—You; väcä—with words; väcam—the words; väcaspateù—of Brhaspati; muneù—the sage.

     The gopés said: O beautiful-eyebrowed daughter of King Våñabhänu, O girl who has traveled to the farther shore of the deep meanings of all the scriptures, Your words are like Båhaspati Muni's words.

Text 2

ekädaçé-vrataà rädhe
     kena kena purä kåtam
tad brühi no viçeñeëa
     tvaà säkñäj jïäna-çevadhiù

     ekädaçé-vrataàthe vow od ekädaçé; rädhe—O Rädhä; kena—by whom?; kena—by whom?; purä—before; kåtam—done; tat—that; brühi—please tell; naù—to us; viçeñeëa—specifically; tvam—You; säkñät—directly; jïäna-çevadhiù—filled with knowledge.

     O Rädhä, what great souls followed ekädaçé in ancient times? Please tell us. You know all this.

Texts 3 and 4

çré-rädhoväca 
ädau devaiù kåtaà gopyo
     varam ekädaçé-vratam
bhrañöa-räjyasya läbhärthaà
     daityänäà näçanäya ca

     çré-rädhä uväca—Sré Rädhä said; ädau—in the beginning; devaiù—with the demigods; kåtam—done; gopyaù—O gopés; varam—blessing; ekädaçé-vratam—the vow of ekädaçé; bhrañöa-räjyasya—lost kingdom; läbhärtham—to attain; daityänäm—of the demigods; näçanäya—for the destruction; ca—and.

     Sré Rädhä said: O gopés, in the beginning of creation the demigods followed ekädaçé to destroy the demons and regain their lost kingdom.

Text 4

vaiçantena purä räjïä
     kåtam ekädaçé-vratam
sva-pitus taraëärthäya
     yamaloka-gatasya ca

     vaiçantena—by Vaiçanta; purä—before; räj 24ä—King; kåtam—done; ekädaçé-vratam—the vow of ekädaçé; sva-pituù—of his father; taraëärthäya—to rescue; yamaloka-gatasya—gone to the realm of Yama; ca—and.

     In ancient times King Viçanta followed ekädaçé to rescue his father from the world of Yamaräja.

Text 5

akasmäl lumpakenäpi
     jïäti-tyaktena päpinä
ekädaçé kåtä yena
     räjyaà lebhe sa lumpakaù

     akasmät—suddenly; lumpakena—by Lumpaka; api——also; jïäti—by his relatives; tyaktena—abandoned; päpinä—sinful; ekädaçé—ekädaçé; kåtä—done; yena—by whom; räjyam—kingdom; lebhe—attaineded; sa—he; lumpakaù—Lumpaka.

     A sinner named Lumpaka, who abandoned his relatives, followed ekädaçé and attained a great kingdom. 

Text 6

bhadrävatyäà ketumatä
     kåtam ekädaçé-vratam
putra-hénena sad-väkyät
     putraà lebhe sa mänavaù

     bhadrävatyäm—in Bhadravati; ketumatä—by Ketumän; kåtam—done; ekädaçé-vratam—the vow of ekädaçé; putra-hénena—without a son; sad-väkyät—by the words of a saint; putram—a son; lebhe—attained; sa—he; mänavaù—the person.

     In the city of Bhadrävaté, King Ketumän was sonless. Following ekädaçé on a great saint's advice, he obtained a son.

Text 7

brähmaëyai deva-patnébhir
     dattam ekädaçé-vratam
tena lebhe svarga-saukhyaà
     dhana-dhanyaà ca mänuñé

     brähmaëyai—to a brähmaëé; deva-patnébhiù—by the wives of the demigods; dattam—given; ekädaçé-vratam—the vow of ekädaçé; tena—by that; lebhe—attained; svarga-saukhyam—the happiness of Svargaloka; dhana-dhanyam—great wealth; ca—and; mänuñé—the woman.

     Once the demigoddesses gave ekädaçé to a brähmaëé. By following ekädaçé that brähmaëé attained great wealth and happiness like that on Svargaloka.

Text 8

puñpadanté-mälyavantau
     çakra-çäpät piçäcatäm
präptaà kåtaà vrataà täbhyäà
     punar gandharvatäà gatau

     puñpadanté-mälyavantau—Puñpadanté and Mälyavän; çakra-çäpät—by the curse of Indra; piçäcatäm—the state of being demons; präptam—attained; kåtam—done; vratam—vow; täbhyäm—by them; punaù—again; gandharvatäm—the state of being Gandharvas; gatau—attained.

     Cursed by Indra, Puñpadanté and Mälyavän became demons, but by following ekädaçé they again became Gandharvas.

Text 9

purä çré-rämacandreëa
     kåtam ekädaçé-vratam
samudre setubandhärthaà
     rävaëasya vadhäya ca

     purä—before; çré-rämacandreëa—by Lord Sré Räma; kåtam—done; ekädaçé-vratam—ekädaçé; samudre—in the ocean; setubandhärtham—to build a bridge; rävaëasya—of Ravana; vadhäya—to kill; ca—and.

     To build a bridge on the ocean and kill Rävaëa, in ancient times even Lord Rämacandra followed ekädaçé.

Text 10

layänte ca samutpannä
     dhatå-våkña-tale suräù
ekädaçé-vrataà cakruù
     sarva-kalyäëa-hetave

     layänte—at the end of the cosmic devastation; ca—and; samutpannä—manifested; dhatå-våkña-tale—on the tree of the creator; suräù—the demigods; ekädaçé-vratam—ekädaçé; cakruù—did; sarva-kalyäëa-hetave—to attain all auspiciousness.

     When, after the period of cosmic devastation had ended, the demigods were again manifested from the tree of creation, they followed ekädaçé to attain all auspiciousness.

Text 11

vrataà cakära medhävé
     dvädaçyäù pitå-väkyataù
apsaraù-sparça-doñena
     mukto 'bhün nirmala-dyutiù

     vratam—vow; cakära—did; medhävé—Medhavi; dvädaçyäù—of dvadasi; pitå-väkyataù—by the words of his father; apsaraù—of the apsarä; sparça—of the touch; doñena—from the fault; muktaù—freed; abhüt—became; nirmala-dyutiù—pure and splendid.

     Following ekädaçé on Pitä's advice, Medhävé became free from the sin of touching an apsarä and became pure and splendid again.

Text 12

gandharvo lalitaù patnyä
     gataù çäpät sa rakñatäm
ekädaçé-vratenäpi
     punar gandharvatäà gataù

     gandharvaù—the Gandharva; lalitaù—Lalita; patnyä—with his wife; gataù—went; çäpät—from the curse; sa—he; rakñatäm—to the state of being a demon; ekädaçé-vratena—by following ekädaçé; api—also; punaù—again; gandharvatäm—the state of being a Gandharva; gataù—attained.

     Transformed into demons by a curse, Lalita and his wife followed ekädaçé and became Gandharvas again.

Text 13

ekädaçé-vratenäpi
     mandhätä svar-gatià gataù
sagaraç ca kakutsthaç ca
     mucukundo mahä-matiù

     ekädaçé-vratena—by following ekädaçé; api—also; mandhätä—mandhata; svar-gatim—to Svargaloka; gataù—went; sagaraù—Sagara; ca—and; kakutsthaù—Kakutstha; ca—and; mucukundaù—Mucukunda; mahä-matiù—noble-hearted.

     By following ekädaçé, Mandhätä, Sagara, Kakutstha, and noble-hearted Mucukunda attained Svargaloka.

Text 14

dhundhumärädayaç cänye
     räjäno bahavas tathä
brahma-kapäla-nirmukto
     babhüva bhagavän bhavaù

     dhundhumära—with Dhundhumara; ädayaù—beginning; ca—and; anye—other; räjänaù—kings; bahavaù—many; tathä—so; brahma—of brähmaëas; kapäla—of the skulls; nirmuktaù—freed; babhüva—became; bhagavän—Lord; bhavaù—Siva.

     By following ekädaçé Dhundhumära and many other kings also attained Svargaloka. By following ekädaçé Lord Siva was able to put down his necklace of brähmaëas' skulls.

Text 15

dhåñöabuddhir vaiçya-putro
     jïäti-tyakto mahä-khalaù
ekädaçé-vrataà kåtvä
     vaikuëöhaà sa jagäma ha

     dhåñöabuddhiù—Dhåñöabuddhi; vaiçya-putraù—the son of a vaisya; jïäti-tyaktaù—abandoned his relatiuves; mahä-khalaù—a sinner; ekädaçé-vratam—ekädaçé; kåtvä—did; vaikuëöham—to Vaikuëtha; sa—he; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     The sinner Dhåñöabuddhi, who was a vaiçya's son, and who abandoned his own relatives, followed ekädaçé and went to Vaikuëöha.

Text 16

räjïä rukmäìgadenäpi
     kåtam ekädaçé-vratam
tena bhu-maëòalaà bhuktvä
     vaikuëöhaà sa-puro yayau

     räjïä—by the king; rukmäìgadena—Rukmangada; api—also; kåtam—done; ekädaçé-vratam—ekädaçé; tena—by that; bhu-maëòalam—the earth; bhuktvä—enjoying; vaikuëöham—to Vaikuëöha; sa-puraù—with his city; yayau—went.

     By following ekädaçé King Rukmaìgada was able to rule the circle of the earth and go, taking with him the citizens of his kingdom, to Vaikuëöha.

Text 17

ambaréñeëa räjïäpi
     kåtam ekädaçé-vratam
näspåçad brahma-çäpo 'pi
     yo na pratihataù kvacit

     ambaréñeëa räjïä—by King Ambaréña; api—also; kåtam—done; ekädaçé-vratam—ekädaçé; na—not; aspåçat—touced; brahma—of a brähmaëa; çäpaù—the curse; api—even; yaù—who; na—not; pratihataù—repelled; kvacit—at all.

     Even though he did nothing to protect himself from it, King Ambaréña, a follower of ekädaçé, was untouched by a brähmaëa's curse.

Text 18

hemamälé näma yakñaù
     kuñöhé dhanada-çäpataù
ekädaçé-vrataà kåtvä
     candra-tulyo babhüva ha

     hemamälé—Hemamali; näma—named; yakñaù—a yaksa; kuñöhé—a leper; dhanada-çäpataù—by the curse of Kuvera; ekädaçé-vratam—ekädaçé; kåtvä—following; candra-tulyaù—like the moon; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     A yakña named Hemamälé, who became a leper by Kuvera's curse, followed ekädaçé and became cured. He became splendid as the moon.

Text 19

mahéjitä nåpenäpi
     kåtam ekädaçé-vratam
tena putraà çubhaà labdhvä
     vaikuëöhaà sa jagäma ha     
     mahéjitä—by Mahijit; nåpena—King; api—also; kåtam—done; ekädaçé-vratam—ekädaçé; tena—by that; putram—a son; çubham—good; labdhvä—attaining; vaikuëöham—to Vaikuëöha; sa—he; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.    

     By following ekädaçé, King Mahéjit attained a good son and then went to Vaikuëöha.

Text 20

hariçcandreëa räjïäpi
     kåtam ekädaçé-vratam
tena labdhvä mahé-räjyaà
     vaikuëöhaà sa-puro yayau

     hariçcandreëa räjïä—by King hariscandra; api—also; kåtam—done; ekädaçé-vratam—ekädaçé; tena—by that; labdhvä—attaining; mahé-räjyam—a great kingdom; vaikuëöham—to Vaikuëöha; sa-puraù—with his citizens; yayau—went.

     By following ekädaçé, King Hariçcandra attained a great kingdom and, taking all his subjects with him, went to Vaikuëöha.

Text 21

çré-çobhano näma purä kåte yuge
     jämätåko 'bhün mucukunda-bhübhåtaù
ekädaçéà yaù samupoñya bhärate
     präptaù sa devaiù kila mandaräcale

     çré-çobhanaù—Sré Sobhana; näma—named; purä—before; kåte—in Satya-yuga; yuge—yuag; jämätåkaù—the son-in-law; abhüt—was; mucukunda-bhübhåtaù—of King Mucukunda; ekädaçém—ekädaçé; yaù—who; samupoñya—fasting; bhärate—in Bharata; präptaù—attained; sa—her; devaiù—by the demigods; kila—indeed; mandaräcale—on Mount Mandara

     In Satya-yuga King Sobhana, who was Mucukunda's son-in-law, fasted on ekädaçé and went to Mount Mandara with the demigods.

Text 22

adyäpi räjyaà kurute kuvera-vad
     räjïä yuto 'sau kila candrabhägayä
ekädaçéà sarva-tithéçvaréà paraà
     janétha gopyo na hi tat-samänyä

     adyäpi—even now; räjyam—kingdom; kurute—does; kuvera-vat—like Kuvera; räjïä—king; yutaù—engaged; asau—he; kila—indeed; candrabhägayä—with Candrabhaga; ekädaçém—ekädaçé; sarva-tithéçvarém—the queen of holy days; param—great; janétha—know; gopyaù—O gopés; na—not; hi—indeed; tat-samänyä—equal;

     Even today one can attain a kingdom like Kuvera's simply by following ekädaçé. O gopés, please know that ekädaçé is the queen of all holy days. No other holy day is her equal.

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
iti rädhä-mukhäc chrutvä
     yajïa-sétäç ca gopikäù
ekädaçé-vrataà cakrur
     vidhivat kåñëa-lälasäù

     çré-närada uväca—Sré Närada said; iti—thus; rädhä-mukhäc—from Rädhä's mouth; chrutvä—hearing; yajïa-sétäù—the yajna-sitas; ca—and; gopikäù—gopés; ekädaçé-vratam—ekädaçé; cakruù—did; vidhivat—properly; kåñëa-lälasäù—yearing to attain Sré Kåñëa.

     Sré Närada said: After hearing from Sré Rädhä's mouth the glories of ekädaçé, the gopés that had been yajïa-sétäs, and who were now yearning to attain Sré Kåñëa, carefully followed ekädaçé.

Text 24

ekädaçé-vratenäpi
     prasannaù çré-hariù svayam
märgaçérñe pürëimäyäà
     räsaà täbhiç cakära ha

     ekädaçé-vratena—by ekädaçé; api—even; prasannaù—pleased; çré-hariù—Sré Kåñëa; svayam—personally; märgaçérñe—in Margasirsa; pürëimäyäm—on the sull moon day; räsam—in thr rasa dance; täbhiù—with them; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Pleased by their observance of ekädaçé, Kåñëa enjoyed a räsa dance with these gopés on the full-moon night of the month of Märgaçérña (November-December).
.pa

Chapter Ten
Pulindakopäkhyäna
The Story of the Pulindä Women

Text 1

çré-närada uvaca

pulindakänäà gopénäà
     kariñye varëanaà hy ataù
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     adbhutaà bhakti-vardhanam

     çré-närada uvaca—Sré Närada said; pulindakänäm—Pulindäs; gopénäm—of the gopés; kariñye—I will; varëanam—describe; hi—indeed; ataù—then; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; adbhutam—wonderful; bhakti-vardhanam—increasing love.

     Sré Närada said: Now I will tell you the story of the Pulindä women that become gopés, a wonderful and sacred story that removes all sins and increases one's love for Lord Kåñëa.

Text 2

pulindä udbhaöäù kecid
     vindhyädri-vana-väsinaù
vilumpanto räja-vasu
     dénänäà na kadäcana

     pulindäù—Pulindas; udbhaöäù—exalted; kecit—some; vindhyädri-vana-väsinaù—living in the forests of the Vindhya Hills; vilumpantaù—robbing; räja—royal; vasu—wealth; dénänäm—of the poor; na—not; kadäcana—ever.

     Living in the forests of the Vindhya Hills, many Pulinda highwaymen stole the kings wealth, although they never stole from the poor.

Text 3

kupitas teñu balavän
     vindhyä-deçädhipo balé
akñauhiëébhyäà tän sarvän
     pulindän sa rurodha ha

     kupitaù—angry; teñu—at them; balavän—powerful; vindhyä-deçädhipaù—the king of Vindhya-desa; balé—powerful; akñauhiëébhyäm—with two aksauhinis; tän—them; sarvän—all; pulindän—the Pulindas; sa—he; rurodha—stopped; ha—indeed.

     Very angry, the powerful king of Vindhyä-deça took two akñauhiëé divisions of soldiers, and confronted all the Pulindas. 

Text 4

yuyudhas te 'pi khaògaiç ca
     kuntaiù çülaiù paraçvadhaiù
çakty-åñöibhir bhüñuëòébhiù
     çaraiù kati dinäni ca

     yuyudhaù—fought; te—they; api—also; khaògaiù—with swords; ca—and; kuntaiù—with kuntas; çülaiù—spears; paraçvadhaiù—with battle-axes; çakti—with double-edged swords; åñöibhiù—with spears; bhüñuëòébhiù—with bhusundis; çaraiù—with arrows; kati—for how many?; dinäni—days; ca—and.

     For how many days did they fight with swords, kunta and çüla spears, battle-axes, çaktis, åñöis, and bhuñuëòés?

Text 5

patraà te preñayäm äsuù
     kaàsäya yadu-bhübhåte
kaàsa-praëodito daityaù
     pralambo balaväàs tadä

     patram—a letter; te—they; preñayäm äsuù—sent; kaàsäya—to Kaàsa; yadu-bhübhåte—the yadu king; kaàsa-praëoditaù—sent by Kaàsa; daityaù—a demon; pralambaù—Pralaba; balavän—powerful; tadä—then.

     To the Yadu-king Kaàsa the Pulindas sent a letter begging for aid. Kaàsa sent a powerful demon named Pralamba.

Text 6

yojana-dvayam uccäìgaà
     käla-megha-sama-dyutim
kiréöa-kuëòala-dharaà
     sarpa-hära-vibhüñitam

     yojana-dvayam—sixteen miles; uccäìgam—tall; käla-megha-sama-dyutim—the color fo a dark cloud; kiréöa—helmet; kuëòala—and earrings; dharam—wearing; sarva-hära-vibhüñitam—garlanded with a serpent.

     He was sixteen miles tall, dark as a cloud, decorated with helmet and earrings, and garlanded with a serpent.

Text 7

pädayoù çåìkhaläyuktaà
     gadä-päëià kåtäntavat
lalaj-jihvaà ghora-rüpaà
     pätayantaà girén drumän

     pädayoù—of the feet; çåìkhaläyuktam—with a chain; gadä-päëim—a club in hand; kåtäntavat—like death personified; lalaj-jihvam—a lolling tongue; ghora-rüpam—ugly and horrible; pätayantam—made fall down; girén—the hills; drumän—and trees.

     With chains around his ankles, a club in his hand, a tongue moving to and fro, and a horribly ugly form, he looked like death personified. When he walked he flattened the hills and made the trees fall.

Texts 8 and 9

kampayantaà bhuvaà vegät
     pralambaà yuddha-durmadam
dåñövä pradarçito räjä
     sa-sainyo raëa-maëòalam

tyaktvä dudräva sahasä
     siàhaà vékñya gajo yathä
pralambas tän samänéya
     mathuräm äyayau punaù

     kampayantam—making tremble; bhuvam—the earth; vegät—powerfully; pralambam—Pralamba; yuddha-durmadam—intoxicated with the idea of fighting; dåñövä—seeing; pradarçitaù—revealed; räjä—the king; sa-sainyaù—withj hisarmy; raëa-maëòalam—the battlefield; tyaktvä—leaving; dudräva—fled; sahasä—quickly; siàham—a lion; vékñya—seeing; gajaù—an elephant; yathä—as; pralambaù—Pralamba; tän—them; samänéya—bringing; mathuräm—to Mathurä; äyayau—came; punaù—again.

     Staring at Pralamba, who was drunk with the idea of a fight, and who made the earth shake, the king and his army fled the battlefield as an elephant flees when it sees a lion. Then Pralamba took the Pulindas to Mathurä.

Text 10

pulindäs te 'pi kaàsasya
     bhåtyatvaà samupägatäù
sa-kuöumbäù käma-girau
     väsaà cakrur nåpeçvara

     pulindäù—the Pulindas; te—they; api—also; kaàsasya—of Kaàsa; bhåtyatvam—servitude; samupägatäù—attained; sa-kuöumbäù—with their families; käma-girau—on Kamagiri; väsam—residence; cakruù—did; nåpeçvara—O king of kings.

     O king of kings, the Pulindas and their families all became Kaàsa's servants. They lived at Kämagiri.

Text 11

teñäà gåheñu saïjätäù
     çré-rämasya varät parät
pulindyaù kanyakä divyä
     rüpiëyaù çrér ivärcitä

     teñäm—of them; gåheñu—in the homes; sa 24jätäù—born; çré-rämasya—of Lord Rämacandra; varät—from the beneciction; parät—transcendental; pulindyaù—Pulinda; kanyakä—daughters; divyä—splendid; rüpiëyaù—beautiful; çréù—the goddess of fortune; iva—like; arcitä—worshiped.

     By Lord Rämacandra's blessing many Pulinda women took birth as their splendidly beautiful daughters. They were glorious and worshipable as the goddess of fortune herself.

Text 12

tad-darçana-smara-rujaù
     pulindyaù prema-vihvaläù
çrémat-päda-rajo dhåtvä
     dhyäyantyas tam ahar-niçam

     tad-darçana—by seeing Him; smara-rujaù—overciem with passion; pulindyaù—Pulinda girls; prema-vihvaläù—filled with love; çrémat-päda-rajaù—the dust of His feet; dhåtvä—taking; dhyäyantyaù—meditating; tam—on Him; ahar-niçam—day and night.

     Simply by seeing Lord Kåñëa, they were overcome with passionate love for Him. They embraced the dust that had touched His feet. They thought of Him day and night.

Text 13

täç cäpi räse sampräptäù
     çré-kåñëaà parameçvaram
paripürëatamaà säkñäd
     golokädhipatià prabhum

     täù—they; ca—and; api—and; räse—in the rasa dance; sampräptäù—attained; çré-kåñëam—Sré Kåñëa; parameçvaram—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; paripürëatamam—perfect; säkñät—directly; golokädhipatim—the ruler of Goloka; prabhum—the Lord.

     During the räsa dance they attained the association of Lord Kåñëa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, the ruler of Goloka.

Text 14

çré-kåñëa-caraëämbhoja-
     rajo devaiù su-durlabham
aho bhägyaà pulindénäà
     täsäà präptaà viçeñataù

     çré-kåñëa-caraëämbhoja-rajaù—the dust of Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet; devaiù—by the demigods; su-durlabham—difficult to attain; ahaù—Oh; bhägyam—good fortune; pulindénäm—of the PUlinda girls; täsäm—of them; präptam—attained; viçeñataù—specifically.

     The great good fortune of these Pulindä girls is that they attained the dust of Sré Kåñëa's lotus feet, dust that even the great demigods cannot attain.

Text 15

yaù pärameñöhyam akhilaà na mahendra-dhiñëyaà
     no särvabhaumam aniçaà na rasädhipatyam
no yoga-siddhim abhito na punar bhavaà vä
     väïchaty alaà parama-päda-rajaù sa bhaktaù

     yaù—on ewho; pärameñöhyam—the post of Brahmä; akhilam—all; na—not; mahendra-dhiñëyam—the post of Indra; na—not; u—indeed;  särvabhaumam—sivereignty over the world; aniçam—day and night; na—not; rasa—of Patalaloka; ädhipatyam—rulership; na—not; u—indeed; yoga-siddhim—uoga perfections; abhitaù—completely; na—not; punaù—again; bhavam—birth; vä—or; väïchati—desires; alam—at all; parama-päda-rajaù—the dust of the feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sa—he; bhaktaù—a devotee.

     A person who does not desire the post of Brahmä, the post of Indra, a great royal kingdom, the kingdom of Pätälaloka, mystic powers, or even freedom from the world of birth and death, but desires only the dust of the Supreme Personality of Godhead's feet, is a true devotee of the Lord.

Text 16

niñkiïcanäù sva-kåta-karma-phalair virägä
     yat tat padaà hari-janä munayo mahäntaù
bhaktä juñanti hari-päda-rajaù-prasaktäù
     anye vadanti na sukhaà kila nairapekñyam

     niñkiïcanäù—without any material possessions; sva-kåta-karma-phalaiù—with the results of their actions; virägä—renunciation; yat—what; tat—that; padam—feet; hari-janä—the devotees of the Lord; munayaù—the sages; mahäntaù—the great souls; bhaktä—the devotees; juñanti— hari-päda-rajaù-prasaktäù anye vadanti na sukhaà kila nairapekñyam

     Aloof from material possessions and free from past karma, the sages and saintly devotees who love the dust of Lord Kåñëa's feet say there is no real happiness in any other place.

Chapter Eleven
Çré Ramä-vaikuëöha-çvetadvépordhva-vaikuëöhäjita-pada-çré-lokäcala-väsiné-çré-sakhénäm upäkhyänam
The Story of the Gopés That were Residents of Ramä-vaikuëöha, Çvetadvépa, Urdhva-vaikuëöha, Ajita-pada, and Çré Lokäcala

Text 1

çré-närada uväca

anyäsäà caiva gopénäà
     varëanaà çåëu maithila
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     hari-bhakti-vivardhanam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; anyäsäm—of the other; ca—and; eva—indeed; gopénäm—gopés; varëanam—description; çåëu—please hear; maithila—O king of Mithilä; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; hari-bhakti-vivardhanam—increasing devotion for Lord Kåñëa.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, please hear the story of the other gopés, a sacred story that removes all sins, and increases one's love for Lord Kåñëa.

Text 2

néti-vin märgadaù çuklaù
     pataìgo divya-vähanaù
gopeñöäç ca vraje räjan
     jätä ñaò våñabhänavaù

     néti-vit—Nitivit; märgadaù—Margada; çuklaù—Sukla; pataìgaù—Patanga; divya-vähanaù—Divyavahana; gopeñöäç—Gopesta; ca—and; vraje—in Vraja; räjan—O king; jätä—born; ñaò—the six; våñabhänavaù—Våñabhänus.

     O king, the six Våñabhänus: Nétivit, Märgada, Çukla, Pataìga, Divyavähana, and Gopeñöa, were born in Vraja.

Texts 3 and 4

teñäà gåheñu saïjätä
     lakñmé-pati-varät prajäù
ramä-vaikuëöha-väsinyaù
     çré-sakhyo 'pi samudra-jäù

ürdhvaà vaikuëöha-väsinyas
     tathäjita-padäçritäù
çré-lokäcala-väsinyaù
     çré-sakhyo 'pi samudra-jäù

     teñäm—of them; gåheñu—in the homes; saïjätaù—born; lakñmé-pati-varät—from the blessing of Lord Näräyaëa, the husband of the goddess of fortune; prajäù—daughters; ramä-vaikuëöha-väsinyaù—the residents of Ramä-Vaikuëöha; çré-sakhyaù—the friends of the goddess of fortune; api—even; samudra-jäù—born from the ocean; ürdhvaà vaikuëöha-väsinyaù—the residents of Urdhva-Vaikuntha; tathäjita-padäçritäù—they who had taken shelter of Lord Ajita; çré-lokäcala-väsinyaù—the residents of Lokacala; çré-sakhyaù—the friends of the goddess of fortune; api—also; samudra-jäù—born from the ocean.

     In their homes, by a benediction granted by Lord Näräyaëa, were born the girls of Ramä-Vaikuëöha, Urdhva-Vaikuëöha, Lokäcala, and Ajitapada, who had all been born from the ocean of milk and who were all friends of the goddess of fortune.

Text 5

     cintayantyaù sadä çrémad-
     govinda-caraëämbujam
çré-kåñëasya prasädärthaà
     täbhir mägha-vrataà kåtam

     cintayantyaù—meditating; sadä—always; çrémad-govinda-caraëämbujam—on Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet; çré-kåñëasya—of Lord Kåñëa; prasädärtham—to gain the favor; täbhiù—by them; mägha-vratam—the vow of Magha; kåtam—was performed.

     Always thinking of Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet, to gain His favor they followed the vow of Mägha-vrata.

Text 6

mäghasya çukla-païcamyäà
     vasantädau hariù svayam
täsäà prema-parékñärthaà
     kåñëo vai tad-gåhän gataù

     mäghasya—of the month of Magha; çukla-païcamyäm—on the fifth day of the bright fortnight; vasantädau—at the beginning of spring; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally; täsäm—of them; prema—the love; parékña-artham—to test; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; vai—indeed; tad-gåhän—to their homes; gataù—went.

     On the fifth day of the bright fortnight of the month of Mägha (January-February), as springtime was about to begin, to test their love for Him, Lord Kåñëa went to these gopés' homes

Text 7

vyäghra-carmämbaraà bibhran
     jaöa-mukuöa-maëòitaù
vibhüti-dhüsaro veëuà
     vädayan mohayan jagat

     vyäghra-carmämbaram—a tiger's sking garment; bibhran—wearing; jäta-mukuöa-maëòitaù—with matted locks; vibhüti—opulences; dhüsaraù—covered; veëum—flute; vädayan—playing; mohayan—charming; jagat—the universe.

     Dressed in a tigerskin, His hair matted, and His natural opulences concealed, by playing the flute he enchanted all the worlds.     

Text 8

täsäà véthiñu sampräptià
     vékñya gopyo 'pi sarvataù
äyayur darçanaà kartuà
     mohitäù prema-vihvaläù

     täsäm—of them; véthiñu—on the opathways; sampräptim—attainment; vékñya—seeing; gopyaù—the gopés; api—also; sarvataù—in all respects; äyayuù—arrived; darçanam—seeing; kartum—to do; mohitäù—enchanted; prema-vihvaläù—overcome with love.

     Seeing Him on the path, the enchanted gopés were overcome with love. To gaze at Him, they came close.

Text 9

atéva sundaraà dåñövä
     yoginaà gopa-kanyakäù
ücuù parasparaà sarväù
     premänanda-samäkuläù

     atéva—very; sundaram—handsome; dåñövä—seeing; yoginam—the yogi; gopa-kanyakäù—the gopés; ücuù—said; parasparam—among themselves; sarväù—all; premänanda-samäkuläù—filled with bliss.

     As they gazed at this very handsome yogé, the blissful gopés spoke among themselves.

Text 10

çré-gopya ücuù 
ko 'yaà çiçur nanda-sutäkåtir vä
     kasyäpi putro dhanino nåpasya
naré-ku-väg-bäëa-vibhinna-marmä
     jäto virakto gata-kåtya-karmä

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; kaù—who?; ayam—this; çiçuù—boy; nanda-sutäkåtiù—the from of Nanda's son; vä—or; kasyäpi—of someone; putraù—the son; dhaninaù—of a wealthy man; nåpasya—of a king; naré—of a woman; ku—harsh; väg—words; bäëa—arrows; vibhinna—broken; marmä—heart; jätaù—born; viraktaù—renounced; gata-kåtya-karmä—performed pious deeds.

     Thwe gopés said: Who is this? Is this Nanda's son or the song of a wealthy king? Is He renounced because His heart was broken by a woman's harsh words or because He has performed many pious deeds?

Text 11

atéva-ramyaù sumkumära-deho
     manoja-vad-viçva-mano-haro 'yam
aho kathaà jévati cäsya mätä
     pitä ca bhäryä bhaginé vinainam

     ativa-ramyaù—very handsome; sumkumära-dehaù—delicate features; manoja—Kämadeva; vat—like; viçva—of everyone; manaù—the herarts; haraù—enchanting; ayam—He; ahaù—Oh; katham—how?; jévati—lives; ca—and; asya—of Him; mätä—the mother; pitä—father; ca—and; bhäryä—wife; bhaginé—sister; vinä—without; enam—Him.

     He is very handsome. His features are graceful and delicate. Like Kämadeva, He charms the hearts of the entire world. Ah! How can He live without mother, father, sister, and wife?

Text 12

evaà täù sarvato yüthé-
     bhütvä sarvä vrajäìganäù
papracchus taà yogi-varaà
     vismitäù prema-vihvaläù

     evam—thusd; täù—they; sarvataù—all; yüthé-bhütvä—gtahered together; sarvä—all; vrajäìganäù—the girls of Vraja; papracchuù—asked; tam—Him; yogi-varam—the best of yogis; vismitäù—struck with wonder; prema-vihvaläù—overcome with love.

     Filled with wonder and love, the assembled girls of Vraja asked many questions.

Text 13

çré-gopya ücuù 

kas tvaà yogin näma kià te
     kutra väsas tu te mune
kä våttis tava kä siddhir
     vada no vadataà vara

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; kaù—who?; tvam—You; yogin—O yogi; näma—name; kim—what?; te—of You; kutra—where; väsaù—residence; tu—indfeed; te—of You; mune—O sage; kä—what?; våttiù—activity; tava—of You; kä—what?; siddhiù—perfection; vada—tell; naù—to us; vadatäm—of speakers; vara—O best.

     The gopés said: O yogé, who are You? What is Your name? O sage, where do You live? What do You do? What mystic powers have You attained? O best of eloquent speakers, please tell us.

Text 14

çré-siddha uväca 
yogeçvaro 'haà me väsaù
     sadä mäna-sarovare
nämnä svayamprakäço 'haà
     nirannaù sva-balät sadä

     çré-siddha uväca—the perfect yogi said; yogeçvaraù—a master of yoga; aham—I; me—of Me; väsaù—the residence; sadä—always; mäna-sarovare—in Mana-sarovara; nämnä—by name; svayamprakäçaù—Svayamprakäça; aham—I; nirannaù—fasting; sva-balät—by My own power; sadä—always.

     The perfect yogé said: I am a master of yoga. I always stay at Mäna-sarovara. My name is Svayamprakäça. I never eat. My own mystic power keeps Me alive. 

Text 15

särthe paramahäàsänäà
     yämy ahaà te vrajäìganäù
bhütaà bhävyaà vartamänaà
     vedmy ahaà divya-darçanaù

     särthe—in the treasure; paramahäàsänäm—of the great swans; yämy—I go; aham—I; te—these; vrajäìganäù—O girls of Vraja; bhütam—past; bhävyam—future; vartamänam—present; vedmy—I know; aham—I; divya-darçanaù—spiritual vision.

     O girls of Vraja, I have attained the great treasure of the paramahaàsas. I have spiritual eyes. I can see the past, present, and future.

Text 16

uccäöanaà märaëaà ca
     mohanaà stambhanaà tathä
janämi mantra-vidyäbhir
     vaçé-karaëam eva ca

     uccäöanam—ruin; märaëam—death; ca—and; mohanam—bewilderment; stambhanam—being stunned; tathä—so; janämi—I know; mantra-vidyäbhiù—with the knowledge of mantras; vaçé-karaëam—to bring under control; eva—indeed; ca—also.

     I know mantras that can ruin people, kill them, bewilder them, paralyze them, or bring them under My control.

Text 17

çré-gopya ücuù 
yadi jänäsi yogiàs tvaà
     värtäà käla-trayodbhaväm
kià vartate no manasi
     vada tarhi mahä-mate

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; yadi—if; jänäsi—You know; yogiàù—O yogi; tvam—You; värtäm—news; käla—time; traya—three phases; udbhaväm—manifested; kim—what?; vartate—is; naù—of us; manasi—in the mind; vada—please tell; tarhi—then; mahä-mate—O wise one.

     Thw gopés said: O wise yogé, if You know the past, present, and future, then please tell us one thing: What are we thinking at this moment?

Text 18

çré-siddha uväca 
bhävaténäà ca karëänte
     kathanéyam idaà vacaù
yusmad-äjïayä vä vakñye
     sarveñäà çåëvatäm iha

     çré-siddha uväca—the perfect yogi said; bhävaténäm—of you; ca—and; karëänte—whispered into the ear; kathanéyam—should be spoken; idam—this; vacaù—word; yusmad-äjïayä—by your order; vä—or; vakñye—I will speak aloud; sarveñäm—of all; çåëvatäm—listening; iha—here.

     The perfect yogé said: The answer to this question I will now whisper in each girl's ear, or, if you request, I will speak it aloud so all may hear.

Texts 19 and 20

çré-gopya ücuù 
satyaà yogeçvaro 'si tvaà
     tri-käla-jïo na saàçayaù
vaçé-karaëa-mantreëa
     sadyaù paöhana-mätrataù

yadi so 'traiva cäyäti
     cintito yo 'sti vai mune
tadä manyämahe tväà vai
     mantriëäà pravaraà param

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; satyam—the truth; yogeçvaraù—the master of yoga; asi—are; tvam—You; tri-käla-jïaù—understanding the three phases of time; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; vaçé-karaëa-mantreëa—by a mantra to bring others under Your control; sadyaù—at once; paöhana-mätrataù—simply by reciting; yadi—if; saù—He; atra—here; eva—indeed; ca—and; äyäti—goes; cintitaù—considered; yaù—one who; asti—is; vai—indeed; mune—O sage; tadä—then; manyämahe—we consider; tväm—You; vai—indeed; mantriëäm—of mantra-chanters; pravaraà param—the best.

     The gopés said: O sage, if it is true that You are a master of yoga, and if without doubt that You know the past, present, and future, and if by merely chanting a mantra You can actually bring others under Your control, then we think You must be the best of all mantra-chanters.

Text 21

çré-siddha uväca 
durlabho durghaöo bhävo
     yusmäbhir gaditaù striyaù
tathäpy ahaà kariñyämi
     väkyaà na calate satäm

     çré-siddha uväca—the perfect yogi said; durlabhaù—unattainable; durghaöaù—impossible; bhävaù—nature; yusmäbhiù—by you; gaditaù—said; striyaù—O women; tathäpy—still; aham—I; kariñyämi—will do; väkyam—words; na—not; calate—wavers; satäm—of the saintly devotees.

     The perfect yogé said: Any impossible thing you ask, I can do. The words of saintly persons do not prove false.

Text 22

nimélayata neträëi
     mä çocäà kuruta striyaù
bhaviñyati na sandeho
     yuñmäkaà käryam eva ca

     nimélayata—closing; neträëi—eyes; mä—don't; çocäm—lament; kuruta—do; striyaù—O girls; bhaviñyati—will be; na—not; sandehaù—doubt; yuñmäkam—of you; käryam—to be done; eva—indeed; ca—and.

     O girls, don't lament. Close your eyes and you will attain your wish. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
tatheti mélitäkñiñu
     gopéñu bhagavän hariù
vihäya tad-yogi-rüpaà
     babhau çré-nanda-nandanaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tathä—so be it; iti—thus; mélita—closed; akñiñu—eyes; gopéñu—gopés; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Hari; vihäya—taking; tad-yogi-rüpam—that yogi's form; babhau—manifested; çré-nanda-nandanaù—the son of nanda.

     Çré Närada said: As the gopés stood with closed eyes, the Lord abandoned the form of a yogé and again became Kåñëa, the son of Nanda.

Text 24

neträëy unmélya dadåçuù
     sänandaà nanda-nandanam
vismitäs tat-prabhäva-jïä
     harñitä moham ägatäù

     neträëy—eyes; unmélya—opening; dadåçuù—saw; sänandam—with bliss; nanda-nandanam—the son of Nanda; vismitäù—filled with wonder; tat-prabhäva-jïäù—understanding His transcendental power; harñitä—delighted; moham—enchantment; ägatäù—attained.

     Opening their eyes, they happily gazed at Kåñëa, the son of Nanda. Delighted, filled with wonder, and now aware of His transcendental powers, the gopés fainted unconscious.

Text 25

mägha-mäse mahä-räse
     puëye våndävane vane
täbhiù särdhaà haré reme
     surébhiù sura-räò iva

     mägha-mäse—in the month of Magha; mahä-räse—in the great rasa dance; puëye—dascred; våndävane—in Våndävana; vane—forest; täbhiù—them; särdham—with; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; reme—enjoyed; surébhiù—with the demiugoddesses; sura-räò—the king of heaven; iva—like.

     As Indra enjoys with the girls of Suraloka, so Lord Kåñëa enjoyed with these gopés in a great räsa-dance in sacred Våndävana forest during the month of Mägha.

Chapter Twelve
Çré Holikotsave divya-tri-guëa-våtti-bhümi-gopy-upäkhyänam
The Story of the Gopés That In the Holi Festival Displayed Three Transcendental Virtues

Text 1

idaà mayä te kathitaà
     gopénäà caritaà çubham
anyäsäà caiva gopénäà
     varëanaà çåëu maithila

     idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; gopénäm—of the gopés; caritam—activities; çubham—beautiful; anyäsäm—of others; ca—and; eva—indeed; gopénäm—gopés; varëanam—description; çåëu—please hear; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, now that I have described the beautiful activities of these gopés, please hear the story of some other gopés.

Text 2

vétihotro 'gnibhuk sämbaù
     çrékaro gopatiù çrutaù
vrajeçaù pävanaù çänta
     upanandäù vrajebhaväù

     vétihotraù—Vétihotra; agnibhuk—Agnibhuk; sämbaù—Sämba; çrékaraù—Çrékara; gopatiù—Gopati; çrutaù—Sruta; vrajeçaù—Vrajesa; pävanaù—Pavana; çänta—Santa; upanandäù—the Upanandas; vrajebhaväù—born in Vraja.

     Born in Vraja, the Upanandas were: Vétihotra, Agnibhuk, Sämba, Çrékara, Gopati, Çruta, Vrajeça, Pävana, and Çänta. 

Text 3

dhanavanto rüpavantaù
     putravanto bahu-çrutäù
çélädi-guëa-sampannäù
     sarve däna-paräyaëäù

     dhanavantaù—wealthy; rüpavantaù—handsome; putravantaù—thew fathers of many children; bahu-çrutäù—learnbed; çélädi-guëa-sampannäù—endowed with noble character and many virtues; sarve—all; däna-paräyaëäù—charitable.

     They were all wealthy, handsome, learned, noble, virtuous, charitable, and the fathers of many children.

Text 4

teñu gåheñu saïjätäù
     kanyakä deva-väkyataù
käçcid divyä adivyäç ca
     tathä tri-guëa-våttayaù

     teñu—there; gåheñu—in the homes; saïjätäù—born; kanyakä—daughters; deva-väkyataù—by the word of the Lord; käçcit—some; divyä—from the heavenly planets; adivyäù—not from the heavenly p;lanets; ca—and; tathä—so; tri-guëa-våttayaù—endowed with three virtues.

     Following the orders of the demigods, these girls, endowed with three virtues, some from the celestial planets, and some not from the celestial planets, took birth in the homes of the Upanandas.

Text 5

bhümi-gopyaç ca saïjätäù
     puëyair nänä-vidhaiù kåtaiù
rädhikä-sahacaryäs täù
     sakhyo 'bhuvan videha-räö

     bhümi-gopyaù—  gopés on the earth; ca—and; saïjätäù—born; puëyaiù—with pious deeds; nänä-vidhaiù—many kinds; kåtaiù—done; rädhikä-sahacaryaù—Rädhä's friends; täù—they; sakhyaù—friends; abhuvan—became; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, having performed many pious deeds, these gopés were born on the earth and became the friends of Çré Rädhä.

Text 6

ekadä mäninéà rädhäà
     täù sarvä vraja-gopikäù
ücur vékñya harià präptaà
     holikäyä mahotsave

     ekadä—one day; mäniném—filled with jealous anger; rädhäm—Rädhä; täù—they; sarvä—all; vraja-gopikäù—the vraja-gopés; ücuù—said; vékñya—seeing; harim—Kåñëa; präptam—attained; holikäyä—of holi; mahotsave—the great festival.

     Noticing that Kåñëa was ready to celebrate the great Holi festival, these gopés approached Rädhä, who was then filled with jealous anger, and spoke to Her.

Text 7

çré-gopya ücuù 
rambhoru candra-vadane madhu-mäninéçe
     rädhe vacaù su-lalitaà lalane çåëu tvam
çré-holikotsava-vihäram alaà vidhätuà
     äyäti te pura-vane vraja-bhüñaëo 'yam

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; rambhoru—O girl whose thighs are like banana trees; candra-vadane—O moon-faced girl; madhu-manini—O girl sweet as honey; éçe—O queen; rädhe—Rädhä; vacaù—words; su-lalitam—graceful; lalane—O girl; çåëu—please hear; tvam—You; çré-holikotsava-vihäram—the pastime of the Holi festuival; alam—greatly; vidhätum—to place; äyäti—comes; te—of You; pura-vane—in the forest; vraja-bhüñaëaù—the ornament of Vraja; ayam—He.

     The gopés said: O moon-face, banana-tree thigh, sweet as honey Queen Rädhä, please hear these pleasing words. Çré Kåñëa, the ornament of Vraja, has come to Your forest to celebrate the Holi festival.

Text 8

çré-yauvanonmada-vighürëita-locano 'sau
     nélälakäli-kalitäàsa-kapola-golaù
sat-péta-kaïcuka-ghanäntam açeñm äräd
     äcälayan dhvani-matä sva-padäruëena

     çré-yauvana-by youthfulness; unmada—intoxication; vighürëita—rolling; locanaù—eyes; asau—He; nélälakäli—dark locks of hair; kalitäàsa—on His shoulders; kapola-golaù—and cheeks; sat-péta-kaïcuka-ghanäntam—the edge of the yellow garment; açeñam—all; ärät—near; acälayan—moving; dhvani-matä—sound; sva-padä—with His foot; aruëena—red.

     His eyes rolling in the intoxication of glorious youth, His black locks resting on His cheeks and shoulders covered with a yellow shawl, He walks here, the anklets tinkling on His reddish feet.

Text 9

bälärka-mauli-vimaläìgada-häram udyad-
     vidyut-kñipan-makara-kuëòalam ädadhänaù
pétämbareëa jayati dyuti-maëòalo 'sau
     bhü-maëòale sa-dhanuñeva ghano divi-sthaù

     bälärka—the rising sun; mauli—crown; vimala—glistening; aìgada—armlets; häram—necklaces; udyat—rising; vidyut—lightning; kñipat—eclipsing; makara—shark; kuëòalam—earrings; ädadhänaù—wearing; pétämbareëa—with yellow garments; jayati—is glorious; dyuti-maëòalaù—in a circle of light; asau—He; bhü-maëòale—on the circle of the earth; sa-dhanuñä—with its bow; iva—like; ghanaù—a cloud; divi-sthaù—in the sky.

     Wearing glittering armlets, yellow garments, a crown like the rising sun, and shark earrings that eclipse lightning, He is splendid and glorious as a monsoon cloud and a rainbow.

Text 10

äbéra-kuìkuma-rasaiç ca vilipta-deho
     haste gåhita-nava-secana-yantra ärät
prekñaàs taväçu sakhi väöam atéva rädhe
     tvad-räsa-raìga-rasa-keli-rataù sthitaù saù

     äbéra-kuìkuma-rasaiù—with red kunkuma; ca—and; vilipta—anointed; dehaù—body; haste—hand; gåhita—taken; nava—new; secana-yantra—sprinkling device; ärät—near; prekñaàù—seeing; tava—of You; äçu—at once; sakhé—friend; vatam—courtyard garden; atéva—great; rädhe—O Rädhä; tvad-räsa-raìga-rasa-keli—nectar rasa-dance pastimes; rataù—eager; sthitaù—situated; saù—He.

     Eager to enjoy a räsa-dance with You, His body anointed with red kunkuma, and a sprinkler in His hand, He fixes His gaze on as You stay nearby in this courtyard-garden.

Text 11

nirgaccha phälguna-miñeëa vihäya mänaà
     dätavyam adya ca yaçaù kila holikäyai
kartavyam äçu nija-mandira-raìga-väri-
     päöéra-paìka-makaranda-cayaà ca türëam

     nirgaccha—go; phälguna—the month of Phalguna (February-March) miñeëa—on the preText; vihäya—abandoning; mänam—jealous anger; dätavyam—should be given; adya—now; ca—and; yaçaù—fame; kila—indeed; holikäyai—to Holi; kartavyam—should be done; äçu—at once; nija—own; mandira—palace; raìga—red; väri—water;  päöéra—sandal; paìka—paste; makaranda-cayam—flower-nectar; ca—and; türëam—at once.

     Give up Your jealous anger, and celebrate the glorious Holi festival. Go at once and get water mixed with red dye, sandal paste, and flower-pollen.

Text 12

uttiñöha gaccha sahasä nija-maëòalébhir
     yaträsti so 'pi kila tatra mahä-mate tvam
etädåço 'pi samayo na kadäpi labhyaù
     prakñälitaà kara-talaà viditaà pravähe

     uttiñöha—rise; gaccha—go; sahasä—at once; nija-maëòalébhiù—with Your associates; yatra—where; asti—is; saù—He; api—also; kila—indeed; tatra—there; mahä-mate—O generous one; tvam—You; etädåçaù—like this; api—even; samayaù—occasion; na—not; kadäpi—ever; labhyaù—is attainable; prakñälitam—washed; kara-talam—hand; viditam—known; pravähe—in the flood.

     Stand up! Go at once! O noble-hearted one, with Your friends go to where He is! An opportunity like this will not come again. Wash Your hand in the stream of the Holi festival.

Text 13

çré-närada uväca 
atha mänavaté rädhä
     mänaà tyaktvä samutthitä
sakhé-saìghaiù parivåtä
     prakartuà holikotsavam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; mänavaté—filled with jealous anger; rädhä—Rädhä; mänam—jealous anger; tyaktvä—abandoning; samutthitä—risen; sakhé-saìghaiù—with Her friends; parivåtä—surrounded; prakartum—to do; holikotsavam—to Holi festival.

     Çré Närada said: Then angry Rädhä put aside Her jealous anger, stood up, and, accompanied by Her friends, went to celebrate the Holi festival.

Text 14

çrékhaëòäguru-kastüré-
     haridra-kuìkuma-dravaiù
püritäbhir dåtébhiç ca
     samyuktäs tä vrajäìganäù

     çrékhaëòa—sandal; aguru—aguru; kastüré—musk; haridra—turmeric; kuìkuma—kunkuma; dravaiù—liquid; püritäbhiù—filled; dåtébhiù—with sprinklers; ca—and; samyuktäù—endowed; tä—they; vrajäìganäù—the girls of Vraja.

     The girls of Vraja carried sprinklers filled with water mixed with sandal, aguru, musk, yellow turmeric, and red kuìkuma.

Text 15

rakta-hastäù péta-vasträù
     küjan-nüpura-mekhaläù
gäyantyo holikä-gétir
     galébhir häsya-sandhibhiù

     rakta-hastäù—red hands; péta-vasträù—yellow garmentç; küjan-nüpura-mekhaläù—tinkling anklets and belts; gäyantyaù—singing; holikä-gétiù—with Holi songs; galébhiù—with arrogant words; häsya—with laughter; sandhibhiù—mixed.

     With red hands and yellow garments, and with rowdy songs and laughter, they sang about the glories of Holi.

Text 16

äbéräruëa-cürëänäà
     muñöibhis tä itas tataù
kurvatyaç cäruëaà bhümià
     dig-antaà cämbaraà tathä

     äbéräruëa-cürëänäm—with red powder; muñöibhiù—with fists; tä—they; itaù tataù—here and there; kurvatyaç—doing; ca—and; aruëam—red; bhümim—earth; dig-antam—the directions; ca—and; ambaram—the sky; tathä—so.

     Throwing fistfulls of red powder, they reddened the sky, the earth, and all the directions.

Text 17

koöiçaù koöiças tatra
     sphuranty äbéra-muñöayaù
su-gandhäruëa-cürëänäà
     koöiçaù koöiças tathä

     koöiçaù koöiçaù—millions and millions; tatra—there; sphuranty—manifested; äbéra-muñöayaù—red fists; su-gandha—fragrant; aruëa-cürëänäm—red powder; koöiçaù koöiçaù—millions and millions; tathä—so.

     There were millions and millions of reddish fists. Millions and millions of times they threw fragrant red powder. 

Text 18

sarvato jagåhuù kåñëaà
     karäbhyäà vraja-gopikäù
yathä meghaà  ca däminyaù
     sandhyäyäà çrävaëasya ca

     sarvataù—from everywhere; jagåhuù—grabbed; kåñëam—Kåñëa; karäbhyäm—with both hands; vraja-gopikäù—the vraja-gopés; yathä—as; meghaà —a cloud; ca—and; däminyaù—lightning; sandhyäyäm—meeting; çrävaëasya—of the month of Sravana; ca—and.

     As lightning flashes surround a cloud in the month of Çrävaëa (July-August), so the vraja-gopés surrounded Kåñëa and held Him tightly with both hands.

Text 19

tan-mukhaà ca vilimpantyo
     'thäbéräruëa-muñöibhiù
kuìkumäkta-dåtébhis taà
     ardré-cakrur vidhänataù

     tan-mukham—His face; ca—and; vilimpantyaù—anointing; atha—then; äbéra-aruëa-muñöibhiù—with fists filled with red powder; kuìkumäkta-dåtébhiù—with sprinklers filled with kunbkuma water; tam—Him; ardré-cakruù—sprinkled; vidhänataù—accordingly.

     With fistfulls of red powder they anointed His face. With sprinklers of kuìuma-water they drenched Him.

Text 20

bhagavän api tatraiva
     yävatér vraja-yoñitaù
dhåtvä rüpäëi tävanti
     vijahära nåpeçvara

     bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; api—also; tatra—there; eva—indeed; yävatéù—as many; vraja-yoñitaù—Vraja girls; dhåtvä—manifesting; rüpäëi—forms; tävanti—that many; vijahära—enjoyed pastimes; nåpeçvara—O king of kings.

     O king of kings, then the Supreme Personality of Godhead expanded into as many forms as there were vraja-gopés.

Text 21

rädhayä suçubhe tatra
     holikäyä mahotsave
varñäsandhyäkñane kåñëaù
     saudaminyä ghano yathä

     rädhayä—with Rädhä; suçubhe—shone; tatra—there; holikäyä—of Holi; mahotsave—in the great festival; varñäsandhyäkñane—during a rainfall; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; saudaminyä—with lightning; ghanaù—a cloud; yathä—as.

     As a cloud touched by lightning in the rain, so Kåñëa was splendidly manifest with Rädhä in the Holi festival.

Text 22

kåñëo 'pi tad-dhasta-kåtäkta-netro
     dattvä svakéyaà navam uttaréyaà
täbhyo yayau nanda-gåhaà pareço
     deveñu varñatsu ca puñpa-varñam

     kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; api—even; tat—by Her; dhasta—hand; kåtäkta—anointed; netraù—eyes; dattvä—giving; svakéyam—own; navam—new; uttaréyam—upper garment; täbhyaù—from them; yayau—went; nanda-gåham—to Nanda's home; pareçaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; deveñu—as the demigods; varñatsu—showered; ca—and; puñpa-varñam—a rain of flowers.

     Taking a new upper garment, and His eyes now anointed by Rädhä's hand, Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, left the gopés and went to King Nanda's palace as the demigods showered flowers.
.pa

Chapter Thirteen
Devajana-stry-upäkhyäna
The Story of the Demigoddesses

Text 1

atha deväìganänäà ca
     gopénäà varëanaà çåëu
catuñpadärthadaà nåëäà
     bhakti-vardhanam uttamam

     atha—now; deväìganänäm—of the demigoddesses; ca—and; gopénäm—of ther gopés; varëanam—the description; çåëu—please hear; catuñpadärthadam—giving the four goals of life; nåëäm—of the people; bhakti-vardhanam—increasing devotion; uttamam—great.

     Now please hear the story of the demigoddesses that became gopés, a story that grants the four goals of life and increases one's love for Lord Kåñëa.

Text 2

babhüva mälave deçe
     gopo nando divas-patiù
bhäryä-sahasra-samyukto
     dhanavän nétimän paraù

     babhüva—was; mälave deçe—in Malava-desa; gopaù—a gopa; nandaù—Nanda; divas-patiù—king; bhäryä—of wives; sahasra—a thousand; samyuktaù—with; dhanavän—wealthy; nétimän—moral; paraù—great.

     In Mälava-deça there was a great gopa-king named Nanda-divaspati. He was righteous and wealthy, and he had a thousand wives.

Text 3

tértha-yäträ-prasaìgena
     mathuräyäà samägataù
nanda-räjaà vrajädhéçaà
     çrutvä çré-gokulaà yayau

     tértha-yäträ-prasaìgena—by going on pilgrimage; mathuräyäm—in Mathyra; samägataù—come; nanda-räjam—to King Nanda; vrajädhéçam—the king of Vraja; çrutvä—hearing; çré-gokulam—Çré Gokula; yayau—went.

     As he was going on pilgrimage, he arrived in Mathurä. When he heard of Vraja's King Nanda, he went to Gokula.

Text 4

militvä gopa-räjaà sa
     dåñövä våndävana-çriyam
nanda-räjäjïayä tatra
     väsaà cakre mahä-manäù

     militvä—meeting; gopa-räjam—the gopa king; sa—he; dåñövä—seeing; våndävana-çriyam—the beauty of Våndävana; nanda-räja—of King Nanda; äjïayä—by the request; tatra—there; väsam—residence; cakre—made; mahä-manäù—noble-hearted.

     He met King Nanda, and he saw the beauty of Våndävana. With Nanda's permission, the noble-hearted king made his residence there.

Text 5

yojana-dvayam äçritya
     ghoñaà cakre gaväà punaù
mudaà präpa vraje räjan
     jïätibhiù sa divas-patiù

     yojana-dvayam—sixteen miles; äçritya—taking shelter; ghoñam—a place for the cows; cakre—did; gaväm—of cows; punaù—again; mudam—happiness; präpa—attained; vraje—in vraja; räjan—O king; jïätibhiù—with relatives; sa—he; divas-patiù—Divaspati.

     Having made a sixteen-mile place for his cows, King Divaspati and his relatives lived happily.

Text 6

tasya devala-väkyena
     sarvä devajana-striyaù
jätäù kanyä mahä-divyä
     jvalad-agni-çikhopmäù

     tasya—of him; devala-väkyena—by the words of Devala Muni; sarvä—all; devajana-striyaù—the demigoddesses; jätäù—born; kanyä—girls; mahä-divyä—very splendid; jvalad-agni-çikhopmäù—like flames of a blazing fire.

     By Devala Muni's words, all the demigoddesses were born as his daughters, daughters splendid like flames in a blazing fire.

Text 7

çré-kåñëaà sundaraà dåñövä
     mohitäù kanyakäç ca täù
dämodarasya präpty-arthaà
     cakrur mägha-vrataà param

     çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; sundaram—handsome; dåñövä—seeing; mohitäù—enchanted; kanyakäç—the daughters; ca—and; täù—they; dämodarasya—of Kåñëa; präpty-artham—to attain; cakruù—did; mägha-vratam—the magha-vrata vow; param—great.

     When they saw handsome Kåñëa they were bewildered with love for Him. To attain Him they performed the great vow of Mägha-vrata.

Text 8

ardhodaye 'rke yamunäà
     nityaà snätvä vrajäìganäù
uccair jaguù kåñëa-léläà
     premänanda-samäkuläù

     ardhodaye—half-risen; arke—when the sun was; yamunäm—in the Yamunä; nityam—regularly; snätvä—bathing; vrajäìganäù—the girls ofVraja; uccaiù—loudly; jaguù—sang; kåñëa-léläm—of Kåñëa's pastimes; premänanda-samäkuläù—overcome with love.

     As they bathed at sunrise in the Yamunä, these girls of Vraja, who had fallen in love with Kåñëa, every day loudly sang of Lord Kåñëa's pastimes.

Text 9

täsäà prasannaù çré-kåñëo
     varaà brühéty uväca ha
tä ücus taà paraà natvä
     kåtäïjali-puöäù çanaiù

     täsäm—with them; prasannaù—pleased; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; varam—boon; brühi—please ask; iti—thus; uväca —said;ha tä—indeed; ücuù—said; tam—to Him; param—then; natvä—bowing down; kåtäïjali-puöäù—with folded hands; çanaiù—slowly.

     Pleased with them, Lord Kåñëa said to them, "Please ask for a benediction." Slowly bowing down with folded hands, these girls spoke to Kåñëa.

Text 10

çré-gopya ücuù 
yogéçvaräëäà kila durlabhas tvaà
     sarveçvaraù käraëa-käraëo 'si
tvaà netra-gämé bhävatät sadä no
     vaàsi-dharo manmatha-manmathäìgaù

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; yogéçvaräëäm—of the masters of yoga; kila—indeed; durlabhaù—difficult to attain; tvam—You; sarveçvaraù—the Lord of all; käraëa-käraëaù—the cause of causes; asi—are; tvam—You; netra-gämé—come before the eyes; bhävatät—have; sadä—always; naù—of us; vaàsi-dharaù—holding a flute; manmatha-manmathäìgaù—more handsome than Kämadeva.

     The gopés said: Even the great kings of the yogés cannot attain You. You are the master of all, the first cause of all causes. Holding a flute, and more handsome than Kämadeva, please always stay before our eyes.

Text 11

tathästu coktvä harir ädi-devas
     täsäà tu yo darçanam ätatäna
bhüyät sadä te hådi netra-märge
     tathä sa ähüta iväçu citte

     tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying; hariù—Kåñëa; ädi-devaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; täsäm—of them; tu—indeed; yaù—who; darçanam—the sight; ätatäna—gave; bhüyät—greatly; sadä—always; te—they; hådi—in the heart; netra-märge—on the poathway of the eyes; tathä—so; sa—he; ähüta—called; iva—like; äçu—at once; citte—in the heart.

     Lord Kåñëa said, "So be it." He was always before them. He appeared in their heart and He appeared before their eyes as if they had just called Him.

Text 12

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo nänya eva hi
eka-käryärtham ägatya
     koöi-käryaà cakära ha

     paripürëatamaù—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; na—not; anyaù—another; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; eka-käryärtham—for one purpose; ägatya—coming; koöi-käryam—millions of purposes; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Çré Kåñëa, and no one else, is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead. Coming to this world to do one thing, He did millions of other things as well.

Text 13

parikaré-kåta-péta-paöaà harià
     çikhi-kiréöa-naté-kåta-kandharam
lakuöa-veëu-karaà cala-kuëòalaà
     paöutaraà naöa-veña-dharaà bhaje

     parikaré-kåta-péta-paöam—wearing a yellow sash; harim—Kåñëa; çikhi-kiréöa—a peacock-feather crown; naté-kåta—graceful; kandharam—shoulders; lakuöa-veëu-karam—holding a stick and a flute; cala-kuëòalam—with swinging earrings; paöutaram—very intelligent; naöa-veña-dharam—dressed as a dancer; bhaje—I worship.

     I worship most intelligent Kåñëa who, with a peacock-feather crown, swinging earrings, a yellow sash about His waist, and a stick and flute in His hand, is dressed as a graceful-shouldered dancer. 

Text 14

bhaktyaiva vaçyo harir ädi-devaù
     sadä pramäëaà kila cätra gopyaù
saìkhyaà ca yogaà na kåtaà kadäpi
     premëaiva yasya prakåtià gatäù syuù

     bhaktyä—by devotional service; eva—indeed; vaçyaù—made submissive; hariù—Kåñëa; ädi-devaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sadä—always; pramäëam—evidence; kila—kindeed; ca—and; atra—here; gopyaù—gopés; saìkhyam—saìkhyam; ca—and; yogam—yoga; na—not; kåtam—did; kadäpi—ever; premëä—with love; eva—indeed; yasya—of whom; prakåtim—nature; gatäù—attained; syuù—did.

     Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is conquered by love and devotion. These gopés are the proof of this. Although they never followed the paths of yoga or saìkhya, they attained Lord Kåñëa's company.
.pa

Chapter Fourteen
Jälandhary-upäkhyäna
The Story of the Jälandharés

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
jälandharéëäà gopénäà
     janmäni çåëu maithila
karmäëi ca mahä-räja
     päpa-ghnäni nåëäà sadä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; jälandharéëäm—ja;andharais; gopénäm—gopé; janmäni—births; çåëu—please hear; maithila—O king of Mithilä; karmäëi—activities; ca—and; mahä-räja—O great king; päpa-ghnäni—destriying sins; nåëäm—of the people; sadä—always.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, please hear the story of the births and deeds of the Jälandharés that became gopés, a story that again and again removes the people's sins.

Text 2

räjan sapta-nadé-tére
     raìga-paööanam uttamam
sarva-sampad-yutaà dérghaà
     yojana-dvaya-vartulam

     räjan—O king; sapta-nadé-tére—on the shore of seven rivers; raìga-paööanam—Ranga-pattana; uttamam—great; sarva-sampat—all opulences; yutam—with; dérgham—large; yojana-dvaya-vartulam—sixteen miles in circumference.

     O king, on the shore of seven rivers there was a great city named Raìga-paööana. Sixteen miles around, it was filled with all opulences.

Text 3

raìgojis tatra gopälaù
     purädhéço mahä-balaù
putra-pautra-samäyukto
     dhana-dhänya-samåddhimän

     raìgojiù—Rangoji; tatra—there; gopälaù—a gopa; purädhéçaù—the king; mahä-balaù—very powerful; putra-pautra-samäyuktaù—with many children and grandchildren; dhana-dhänya-samåddhimän—very wealthy.

     A gopa named Raìgoji was the king of that city. He was very powerful and wealthy, and He had many children and grandchildren

Text 4

hastinäpura-näthäya
    dhåtaräñöräya bhübhåte
haimänäm arbuda-çataà
     varñikaà sa dadau sadä

     hastinäpura-näthäya dhåtaräñöräya bhübhåte haimänäm arbuda-çataà varñikaà sa dadau sadä

Text 5

ekadä tatra varñänte
     vyatéte kila maithila
värñikaà tu karaà räjïe
     na dadau sa madotkaöaù

     ekadä—one day; tatra—there; varñänte—at the end of the year; vyatéte—passed; kila—kindeed; maithila—O king of Mithilä; värñikam—annual; tu—indeed; karam—tax; räjïe—to the king; na—not; dadau—gave; sa—he; madotkaöaù—overrcome with pride and folly.

     O king, once, at the year's end, Raìgoji, overcome with pride and foolishness, did not pay his annual tribute to emperor Dhåtaräñöra.

Text 6

mélanärthaà na cäyäte
     raìgojau gopa-näyake
vérä daça sahasräëi
     dhåtaräñåta-praëoditäù

     mélana—meeting; artham—for the purpose; na—not; ca—and; äyäte—come; raìgojau—Rangoji; gopa-näyake—the gopa-kings; vérä—warriors; daça—ten; sahasräëi—thousand; dhåtaräñåta-praëoditäù—sent by Dhåtaräñöra.

     When the gopa-king Raìgoji would not even go to meet him, emperor Dhåtaräñöra sent an army of ten thousand soldiers.

Text 7

baddhvä taà dämabhir gopaà
     äjagmus te gajähvayam
kati varñäni raìgojiù
     kärägäre sthito 'bhavat

     baddhvä—binding; tam—him; dämabhiù—with ropes; gopam—the gopa; äjagmuù—came; te—they; gajähvayam—to hastinapura; kati—how many?; varñäni—years; raìgojiù—Rangoji; kärägäre—in prison; sthitaù—staying; abhavat—was.

     They bound Raìgoji with ropes and took him to Hastinäpura. How many years was he in prison?

Text 8

san niruddhas täòito 'pi
     lobhé bhérur na cäbhavat
na dadau sa dhanaà kiïcid
     dhåtaräñöräya bhübhåte

     san—being; niruddhaù—bound; täòitaù—beaten; api—even; lobhé—greedy; bhéruù—frightened; na—not; ca—and; abhavat—was; na—not; dadau—gave; sa—he; dhanam—wealth; kiïcit—anyhting; dhåtaräñöräya—to Dhåtaräñöra; bhübhåte—the emperor.

     Although he was beaten in prison, he was unafraid. He was so greedy he still would not give any money to emperor Dhåtaräñöra.

Text 9

kärägärän mahä-bhémät
     kadäcit sa paläyitaù
rätrau raìga-puraà prägäd
     raìgojir gopa-näyakaù

     kärägärät—from the prison; mahä-bhémät—horrible; kadäcit—once; sa—he; paläyitaù—escaped; rätrau—at night; raìga-puram—to his city; prägät—went; raìgojiù—Rangoji; gopa-näyakaù—the gopa king.

     One night the gopa-king Raìgoji escaped from the prison and returned to his own city.

Text 10

punas taà hi samähartuà
     dhåtaräñöra-praëoditam
akñauhiëé-trayaà räjan
     samartha-bala-vähanam

     punaù—again; tam—him; hi—indeed; samähartum—to caspture; dhåtaräñöra-praëoditam—sent by Dhrtrastra; akñauhiëé-trayam—three aksauhinis; räjan—O king; samartha-bala-vähanam—able to capture by force.

     Then Dhåtaräñöra sent three akñuahiëé divisions to recapture Raìgoji.

Text 11

tena särdhaà hi bäëaughais
     tékñëa-dhäraiù sphurat-prabhaiù
yuyudhe daàçito yuddhe
     dhanus taìkärayan muhuù

     tena—him; särdham—with; hi—indeed; bäëa—of arrows; aughaiù—with a flood; tékñëa-dhäraiù—sharp; sphurat-prabhaiù—splendid; yuyudhe—fought; daàçitaù—wounded; yuddhe—in the battle; dhanuù—bow; taìkärayan—twanging; muhuù—again and again.

     Although wounded by a flood of arrows, he continued to fight, again and again shooting his bow.

Text 12

çatrubhiç chinna-kavacas
     chinna-dhanvä hata-svakaù
puram etya mådhaà cakre
     raìgojiù katibhir dinaiù

     çatrubhiù—by enemies; chinna—broken; kavacaù—armor; chinna—broken; dhanvä—bow; hata—killed; svakaù—associates; puram—to the city; etya—going; mådham—fight; cakre—did; raìgojiù—Rngoji; katibhiù—for how many?; dinaiù—days.

     Even after his enemies broke his armor and bow and killed his soldiers, for how many days did Raìgoji fight?

Text 13

anäthaù çaraëaà cecchan
     kaàsäya yadu-bhübhåte
dütaà svaà preñayäm äsa
     raìgojir bhaya-péòitaù

     anäthaù—hopeless; çaraëam—shelter; ca—and; icchan—desiring; kaàsäya—to Kaàsa; yadu-bhübhåte—the king of the Yadus; dütam—a messenger; svam—own; preñayäm äsa—sent; raìgojiù—Rangoji; bhaya-péòitaù—toretured with fear.

     When all was hopeless, he sent a messenger to Kaàsa, the king of the Yadus.

Text 14

dütas tu mathuräm etya
     sabhäà gatvä natänanaù
kåtäïjaliç caugrasenià
     natvä präha girärdrayä

     dütaù—the messenger; tu—indeed; mathuräm—to Mathura; etya—going; sabhäm—assembling; gatvä—going; natänanaù—with bowed head; kåtäïjaliù—and folded hands; ca—and; augrasenim—to Kaàsa; natvä—bowing; präha—said; girä—with words; ardrayä—choked with emotion.

     The messenger went to Mathurä, entered the royal assembly, with folded hands and bowed head offered obeisances to King Kaàsa, and in a voice choked with emotion spoke the following words.

Text 15

raìgoji-näma nåpa raìga-paööane
     gopo 'sti nétijïä-varaù purädhipaù
sva-çatru-samruddha-puro mahädhi-bhåd
     alabdha-näthaù çaraëaà gatas tava

     raìgoji-näma—named Rangoji; nåpa—O king; raìga-paööane—in ranga-pattana; gopaù—a gopa; asti—is; nétijïa-varaù—the best of the righteous; purädhipaù—the ruler of the city; sva-çatru-samruddha-puraù—his army defeated; mahädhi-bhåt—distressed; alabdha-näthaù—without shelter; çaraëam—shelter; gataù—attained; tava—of you.

     O king, a righteous gopa named Raìgoji is the ruler of the city Raìga-paööana. His army defeated, he is now distressed and without a shelter. Now he takes shelter of you.

Text 16

tvaà déna-duùkhärti-haro mahé-tale
     bhaumädi-saìgéta-guëo mahä-balaù
suräsurän udbhaöa-bhümi-pälakän
     vijitya yuddhe sura-räò iva sthitaù

     tvam—you; déna-duùkhärti-haraù—removing the troubles of the troubled; mahé-tale—on the earth; bhaumädi-saìgéta-guëaù—whose virtues are sung on the earth; mahä-balaù—very powerful; suräsurän—the demigods and demons; udbhaöa-bhümi-pälakän—ruling the earth; vijitya—conquering; yuddhe—in battle; sura-räò—the king of heaven; iva—like; sthitaù—situated.

     You remove the troubles of they whgo suffer in this world. Your virtues are sung everywhere. Having defeated the demigods and demons, you rule the earth. You are like Indra, the king of the demigods.

Text 17

candraà cakoraç ca ravià kuçeçayaà
     yathä çarac-chékaram eva cätakaù
kñudhäturo 'nnaà ca jalaà tåñäturaù
     smaraty asau çatru-bhaye tathä tväm

     candram—the moon; cakoraç—a cakora bird; ca—and; ravim—the sun; kuçeçayam—the lotus flowers; yathä—as; çarac-chékaram—the autumn rains; eva—indeed; cätakaù—cataka bird; kñudhäturaù—hungry; annam—food; ca—and; jalam—water; tåñäturaù—thirsty; smaraty—remembers; asau—he; çatru-bhaye—in fear of the enemies; tathä—so; tväm—you.

     As a cakora bird thinks of the moon, as a lotus flower thinks of the sun, as a cätaka bird thinks of the autumn rains, as a hungry man thinks of food, and as a thirsty man thinks of water, so King Raìgoji, frightened in battle, thinks of you.

Text 18

çré-närada uväca 
itthaà çrutvä vacas tasya
     kaàso vai déna-vatsalaù
daitya-koöi-samäyukto
     mano gantuà samädadhe

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—words; tasya—of him; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; vai—indeed; déna—of the distressed; vatsalaù—the friend; daitya-koöi-samäyuktaù—with ten million demons; manaù—a mind; gantum—to go; samädadhe—had.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing these words, Kaàsa, the friend of the distressed, decided to go there with ten million demons.

Texts 19 and 20

go-mütra-caya-sindüra-
     kastüré-patra-bhån mukham
vindhyädri-sädåçaà çyämaà
     mada-nirjhara-samyutam

pade ca çåìkhaläjälaà
     nadantaà ghanavad bhåçäm
dvépaà kuvalayäpéòaà
     samäruhya madotkaöaù

     go-mütra—cow's urine; caya—abundant; sindüra—sindura; kastüré—musk; patra-bhåt—decorated with designs; mukham—face; vindhyädri-sädåçam—like the Vindhya mountains; çyämam—black; mada-nirjhara-samyutam—with gushing streams of passionate anger; pade—on its foot; ca—and; çåìkhaläjälam—chains; nadantam—jingling; ghanavat—like a cloud; bhåçäm—greatly; dvépam—elephant; kuvalayäpéòam—Kuvalayapida; samäruhya—mounting; madotkaöaù—burning with passion.

     Burning with passion, Kaàsa climbed on Kuvalayäpéòa elephant, who was black and enormous like the Vindhyä mountains, who gushed with streams of rut, whose face was decorated with designs drawn with gomütra, musk, and red sindüra, whose feet were covered with a network of chains, and who trumpeted like thunder.

Text 21

cäëüra-muñöikädyaiç ca
     keçi-vyoma-våñäsuraiù
sahasä daàçitaù kaàsaù
     präyayau raìga-paööanam

     cäëüra-muñöikädyaiù—headed by Canura and Mustika; ca—and; keçi-vyoma-våñäsuraiù—with Kesi, Vyomasura, and Aristasura; sahasä—at once; daàçitaù—protected; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; präyayau—went; raìga-paööanam—to Ranga-pattana.

     Accompanied by Cäëüra, Muñöika, Keçé, Vyoma, Ariñöäsura, and a host of other demons, Kaàsa quickly traveled to Raìga-paööana.

Text 22

yadünäà ca kurüëäà ca
     balayos tu parasparam
bäëaiù khaògais triçülaiç ca
     ghoraà yuddhaà babhüva ha

     yadünäm—of the Yadus; ca—and; kurüëäm—the Kurus; ca—and; balayoù—of the armies; tu—indeed; parasparam—mutual; bäëaiù—with arrows; khaògaiù—with swords; triçülaiù—with tridents; ca—and; ghoram—horrible; yuddham—battle; babhüva—was; ha—indeed.

     Armed with arrows, swords, and tridents, the armies of the Yadus and Kurus fought a gory battle.

Text 23

bäëändhakäre saïjäte
     kaàso nétvä mahä-gadam
viveça kuru-senäsu
     vane vaiçvänaro yathä

     bäëa—of arrows; andhakäre—blinding darkness; saïjäte—manifested; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; nétvä—bringing; mahä-gadam—great club; viveça—entered; kuru-senäsu—the Kuru armies; vane—in the forest; vaiçvänaraù—fire; yathä—as.

     The sky became dark with a great shower of arrows. Then, as a fire enters a forest, so Kaàsa, armed with a great club, penetrated the Kuru army.

Text 24

käàçcid vérän sa-kavacän
     gadayä vajra-kalpayä
pätayäm äsa bhü-påñöhe
     vajreëendro yathä girim

     käàçcit—some; vérän—warriors; sa-kavacän—with their armor; gadayä—with the club; vajra-kalpayä—like lightning; pätayäm äsa—made fall; bhü-påñöhe—to the ground; vajreëa—with the thunderbolt; indraù—Indra; yathä—as; girim—a mountain.

     As King Indra with his thunderbolt knocks down a great mountain, so Kaàsa with his thunderbolt club, knocked many armored warriors to the ground.

Text 25

rathän mamarda pädäbhyäà
     paåñëi-ghätena ghoëöakän
gaje gajaà täòayitvä
     gajän pronnéya cäìghriñu

     rathän—chariots; mamarda—crushed; pädäbhyäm—with both feet; paåñëi-ghätena—with his heel; ghoëöakän—horses; gaje—elephant; gajam—elephant; täòayitvä—striking; gajän—elephants; pronnéya—leading away; ca—and; aìghriñu—at the feet.

     Kicking them with his feet, Kaàsa destroyed many chariots. Kicking them with his heel, Kaàsa killed many horses. He beat many elephants and many he overturned, their feet kicking in the air.

Text 26

skandhayoù kakñayor dhåtvä
     sa-néòän ratna-kambalän
kaàçcid baläd bhrämayitvä
     cikñepa gagane balé

     skandhayoù—on the shoulders; kakñayoù—on the armpits; dhåtvä—grabbing; sa-néòän—with saddles; ratna-kambalän—decorated with jewels; kaàçcit—some; balät—forcibly; bhrämayitvä—whirling around; cikñepa—threw; gagane—inot the sky; balé—powerful.

     Grabbing them at the root of their forelegs, powerful Kaàsa picked up many jewel-saddled elephants, whirled them around, and threw them into the sky.

Text 27

gajäï chuëòäsu connéya
     lola-ghaëöä-samävåtän
cikñepa sammukhe räjan
     mådhe vyomäsuro balé

     gajän—elephants; çuëòäsu—by the thrunks; ca—and; unnéya—picking up; lola-ghaëöä-samävåtän—with jingling bells; cikñepa—threw; sammukhe—in the face; räjan—O king; mådhe—in the battle; vyomäsuraù—Vyomasura; balé—powerful.

     O king, Vyomäsura picked up many bell-decorated elephants and threw them in the faces of the enemy army.

Text 28

rathän gåhitvä säçväàç ca
     çåìgäbhyäà bhrämayan muhuù
cikñepa dikñu balavän
     daityo duñöo våñäsuraù

     rathän—chariots; gåhitvä—taking; säçväàç—with their horses; ca—and; çåìgäbhyäm—with its horns; bhrämayan—whirling around; muhuù—again and again; cikñepa—threw; dikñu—in all directions; balavän—powerful; daityaù—demon; duñöaù—wicked; våñäsuraù—Aristasura.

     In its horns the powerful demon Ariñöäsura picked up many great chariots and their horses, whirled them around, and threw them in all directions.

Text 29

balät paçcima-pädäbhyäà
     vérän açvän itas tataù
pätayäm äsa räjendra
     keçé daityädhipo balé

     balät—forcibly; paçcima-pädäbhyäm—with its hind legs; vérän—heroic; açvän—horses; itaù—here; tataù—and there; pätayäm äsa—throwing down; räjendra—O king of kings; keçé—Kesi; daityädhipaù—the king of demons; balé—powerful.

     O king of kings, kicking them with its hind legs, the great demon Keçé threw many powerful horses to the ground.

Text 30

evaà bhayaìkaraà yuddhaà
     dåñövä vai kuru-sainikäù
çeñä bhayäturä vérä
     jagmus te 'pi diço daça

     evam—thus; bhayaìkaram—fearsome; yuddham—battle; dåñövä—seeing; vai—indeed; kuru-sainikäù—the Kuru soldiers; çeñä—the remnant; bhayäturä—frightened; vérä—warriors; jagmuù—fled; te—they; api—also; diçaù—in the directions; daça—ten.

     When they saw the fearsome nature of this battle, the remaining Kuru soldiers became frightened and fled in the ten directions.

Text 31

raìgojià sa-kuöumbaà taà
     nétvä kaàso 'tha daitya-räö
mathuräà präyayau véro
     nädayan dundubhén chanaiù

     raìgojim—Rangoji; sa-kuöumbam—with his family; tam—him; nétvä—taking; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; atha—then; daitya-räö—the king of the demons; mathuräm—to Mathura; präyayau—went; véraù—hero; nädayan—sounding; dundubhén—drums; çanaiù—slowly.

     Taking Raìgoji and his family with him, the demon-king Kaàsa triumphantly entered Mathurä as the drums played a slow march.

Text 32

çrutvä paräjayaà svasya
     kauraväù krodha-murchitäù
daityänäà samayaà dåñövä
     sarve vai maunam ästhitäù

     çrutvä—hearing; paräjayam—the victory; svasya—own; kauraväù—the Kurus; krodha-murchitäù—fainting with anger; daityänäm—of the demons; samayam—the right time; dåñövä—seeing; sarve—all; vai—indeed; maunam—silent; ästhitäù—stood.

     Hearing of their own defeat, the Kurus were overcome with anger. Seeing that things were now favorable for the demons, everyone became silent.

Text 33

puraà barhiñadaà näma
     vraja-sémni manoharam
raìgojaye dadau kaàso
     daityänäm adhipo balé

     puram—a city; barhiñadam—Barhisat; näma—named; vraja-sémni—on the outskirts of Vraja; manoharam—beautiful; raìgojaye—to rangoji; dadau—gave; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; daityänäm—of the demons; adhipaù—the king; balé—powerful.

     Then the powerful demon-king Kaàsa gave to Raìgoji a beautiful city named Barhiñat, which stood on the outskirts of Vraja.

Text 34

väsaà cakära tatraiva
     raìgojir gopa-näyakaù
babhüvus tasya bhäryäsu
     jälandharyo harer varät

     väsam—residence; cakära—did; tatra—there; eva—indeed; raìgojiù—Rangoji; gopa-näyakaù—the gopa-king; babhüvuù—did; tasya—of him; bhäryäsu—in wives; jälandharyaù—Jalandharis; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; varät—from the boon.

     The gopa-king Raìgoji made his home there. There, by Lord Kåñëa's benediction, the Jälandharés were born from his many wives.

Text 35

pariëétä gopa-janai
     rüpa-yauvana-bhüñitäù
jära-dharmeëa su-snehaà
     çré-kåñëe täù pracakrire

     pariëétä—married; gopa-janai—to the gopas; rüpa-yauvana-bhüñitäù—decorated with beauty and youthfulness; jära-dharmeëa—as apoaramour; su-sneham—great love; çré-kåñëe—for Çré Kåñëa; täù—they; pracakrire—did.

     Decorated with beauty and youth, they were married to various gopas. They loved Lord Kåñëa as their paramour.

Text 36

caitra-mäse mahä-räse
     täbhiù säkaà hariù svayam
puëye våndävane ramye
     reme våndävaneçvaraù

     caitra-mäse—in the month of Caitra; mahä-räse—inj the great rasa dance; täbhiù—them; säkam—with; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally; puëye—sacred; våndävane—in Våndävana; ramye—beautiful; reme—enjoyed; våndävaneçvaraù—the king of Våndävana.

     During the month of Caitra (March-April), and in the beautiful and sacred forest of Våndävana, Lord Kåñëa enjoyed a great räsa dance with them.
.pa

Chapter Fifteen
Barhiñmaté-pur-aìghry-apsaraù-sutala-väsiné-nägendra-kanyopäkhyäna
The Story of the Women of Barhiñmaté-pura, the Apsaräs, and the Women of Sutala and Nägendra

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
vraje çoëapurädhiço
     gopo nando dhané mahän
bhäryäù païca sahasräëi
     babhüvus tasya maithila

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; vraje—in Vraja; çoëapurädhiçaù—the king of Sonapura; gopaù—a gopa; nandaù—Nanda; dhané—wealthy; mahän—exalted; bhäryäù—wives; païca sahasräëi—five thousand; babhüvuù—were; tasya—of him; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, in Vraja lived a righteous and wealthy gopa named Nanda, who had been the king of Çoëapura. He had five thousand wives.

Text 2

jätä matsya-varät täs tu
     samudre gopa-kanyakäù
tathänyäç ca viciträù
     påthivyä dohanän nåpa

     jätä—born; matsya-varät—by the blessings of Lord Matsya; täù—they; tu—indeed; samudre—in the ocean; gopa-kanyakäù—gopés; tathä—so; anyäù—others; ca—and; viciträùvarious plants; api—also; påthivyä—of the earth; dohanät—from the milking; nåpa—O king.

     He had many daughters. Some had previously been born from the milk-ocean and had been the goddess of fortune's friends, and now were born as gopés by Lord Matsya's benediction, and others had been the plants the sprouted when the earth was milked.

Text 3

barhiñmaté-pur-andhryo yä
     jätä jäti-smaräù paräù
tathänyäpsaraso 'bhüvan
     varän näräyaëasya ca

     barhiñmaté-pur-andhryaù—the girls of Bharismati-pura; yä—who; jätä—born; jäti-smaräù—remembering their previous birth; paräù—others; tathä—so; anyä—others; apsarasaù—apsaras; abhüvan—becasme; varän—by the benediction; näräyaëasya—of Lord Näräyaëa; ca—and.

     Some had been the women of Barhiñmaté-pura. They remembered their previous birth. Others had been apsaräs and became gopé by the blessings of Näräyaëa Åñi

Text 4

tathä sutala-väsinyo
     vämanasya varät striyaù
tathä nägendra-kanyäç ca
     jätäù çeña-varät parät

     tathä—so; sutala-väsinyaù—the residents of Sutala; vämanasya—of Lord Vämana; varät—by the blessing; striyaù—women; tathä—so; nägendra—of the serpent-king; kanyäù—the daughters; ca—and; jätäù—born; çeña-varät—by the blessing of Lord Çeña; parät—great.

     Some had been the women of Sutalaloka and became gopés by the blessings of Lord Vämana. Others had been the daughters of the king of the Nägas and they became gopés by the spiritual blessings of Lord Çeña.

Text 5

täbhyo durväsasä dattaà
     kåñëä-païcäìgam adbhutam
tena sampüjya yamunäà
     vavrire çrépatià varam

     täbhyaù—to them; durväsasä—by Durvasa Muni; dattam—given; kåñëa-païcäìgam—five ways to worship Lord Kåñëa; adbhutam—wonderful; tena—by that; sampüjya—worshiping; yamunäm—the Yamunä; vavrire—attained; çrépatim—Kåñëa; varam—as their husband.

     Durväsä Muni gave them the wonderful kåñëä-païcäìga method of worship. Following it, they worshiped the Yamunä and attained Lord Kåñëa as their husband.

Texts 6-8

ekadä çré-haris täbhir
     våndäraëye manohare
yamunä-nikaöe divye
     puàs-kokila-taru-vraje

madhupa-dhvani-samyukte
     küjat-kokila-särase
madhu-mäse manda-väyau
     vasanta-latikävåte

dolotsavaà samärebhe
     harir madana-mohanaù
kadamba-vrkñe rahasi
     kalpa-vrkñe manohare

     ekadä—once; çré-hariù—Çré Kåñëa; täbhiù—with them; våndäraëye—in Våndävana forest; manohare—beautiful; yamunä-nikaöe—by the Yamunä shore; divye—splendid; puàs-kokila-taru-vraje—among trees filled with cuckoos; madhupa-dhvani-samyukte—filled with the humming of bees; küjat—warbling; kokila—cuckoos; särase—and cranes; madhu-mäse—in the month of Madhu; manda-väyau—with a gentle breeze; vasanta-latikävåte—filled with madhavi vines; dola—swing; utsavaàfestival; samärebhe—did; hariù—Kåñëa; madana-mohanaù—more charming than Kämadeva; kadamba-vrkñe—in a kadamba tree; rahasi—in a secluded place; kalpa-vrkñe—in a desire tree; manohare—beautiful.

     Once, during the month of Caitra (March-April), Lord Kåñëa, who is more charming than Kämadeva, enjoyed a swing festival with these gopés in a kadamba kalpa-våkña tree in a beautiful and secluded place in beautiful Våndävana forest, a place filled with trees and mädhavé vines, buzzing bees, cooing cuckoos and cranes, and a gentle breeze from the nearby Yamunä.

Text 9

kälindé-jala-kallola-
     kolähala-samäkule
tad-dola-khelanaà cakrus
     tä gopyaù prema-vihvaläù

     kälindé—of the Yamunä; jala—water; kallola—waves; kolähala—uproar; samäkule—filled; tad-dola-khelanam—swinging pastime; cakruù—did; tä—they; gopyaù—gopés; prema-vihvaläù—filled with love.

     As the Yamunä was filled with waves, these gopés, deeply in love with Kåñëa, enjoyed pastimes on a swing.

Text 10

rädhayä kérti-sutayä
     candra-koöi-prakäçayä
reje våndävane kåñëo
     yathä ratyä ratéçvaraù

     rädhayä—with Rädhä; kérti-sutayä—the daughter of Kérti; candra-koöi-prakäçayä—splendid as millions of moons; reje—shone; våndävane—in Våndävana forest; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; yathä—as; ratyä—with Rati; ratéçvaraù—Kämadeva.

     As Kämadeva shines with Rati by His side, so in Våndävana forest Lord Kåñëa shone with Kérti's daughter Rädhä, who was more beautiful and glorious than millions of moons, by His side.

Text 11

evaà präptäç ca yäù sarväù
     çré-kåñëaà nanda-nandanam
paripürëatamaà säkñät
     täsäà kià varëyate tapaù

     evam—thus; präptäç—attained; ca—andf; yäù—who; sarväù—all; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; nanda-nandanam—Nanda's son; paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; täsäm—of them; kim—what?; varëyate—is described; tapaù—austerities.

     All these gopés attained Nanda's son, Lord Kåñëa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, as their lover. Who can describe the austerities they must have performed?

Text 12

nägendra-kanyä yäù sarväs
     caitra-mäse manohare
balabhadraà harià präptäù
     kåñëä-tére tu täù çubhäù

     nägendra-kanyä—the daughters of the Naga king; yäù—who; sarväù—all; caitra-mäse—in ther month of Caiutra; manohare—beautuful; balabhadram—Balaräma; harim—Lord Hari; präptäù—attained; kåñëä-tére—on the Yamunä's shore; tu—indeed; täù—they; çubhäù—beautiful.

     During the beautiful month of Caitra (March-April), by the Yamunä's shore, the beautiful gopés that had been the daughters of the Näga-king attained the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Balaräma, as their lover.

Text 13

idaà mayä te kathitaà
     gopénäà caritaà çubham
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà       kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; gopénäm—of the gs; caritam—activities; çubham—beautiful; sarva-päpa—all sins; haraàremoving; puëyaà  —sacred; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—do you wish.

     Now I have told you the beautiful and sacred story of the gopés, a story that removes all sins. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 14

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
yamunäyäç ca païcäìgaà
     dattaà durväsasä mune
gopébhyo yena govindaù
     präptas tad brühi mäà prabho

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; yamunäyäç—of the Yamunä; ca—and; païcäìgam—pangangam worship; dattam—given; durväsasä—by Durvasa; mune—O sage; gopébhyaù—to the gs; yena—by which; govindaù—Lord Kåñëa; präptaù—attained; tat—that; brühi—please tell; mäm—to me; prabhaù—O lord.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: O sage, please describe to me the païcäìga method of worshiping the Yamunä that Durväsä gave to the gopés and that they followed to attain Lord Kåñëa.

Text 15

çré-närada uväca 
atraivodaharantémaà
     itihäsaà purätanam
yasya çravaëa-mätreëa
     päpa-häniù parä bhavet

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atra—here; eva—indeed; udaharanti—describing; imam—this; itihäsam—story; purätanam—ancient; yasya—of whom; çravaëa-mätreëa—simply by hearing; päpa—sins; häniù—destorying; parä—great; bhavet—is.

     Çré Närada said: Simply by hearing this ancient story one becomes free of all sins.

Texts 16 and 17

ayodhyädhipatiù çrémän
     mandhätä räja-sattamaù
mågayäà vicaran präptaù
     saubharer äçramaà çubham

våndävane sthitaà säkñät
     kåñëä-tére manohare
natvä jämätaraà räjä
     saubharià präha mänadaù

     ayodhyä—of Ayodhyä; adhipatiù—trhe king; çrémän—glorious; mandhätä—Mandhätä; räja-sattamaù—the best of kings; mågayam—in hunting; vicaran—going; präptaù—attained; saubhareù—of Saubhari Muni; äçramam—the asrama; çubham—auspicious; våndävane—in Våndävana; sthitam—situated; säkñät—directlky; kåñëä-tére—by ther Yamunä's shore; manohare—beautiful; natvä—bowing down; jämätaram—to his son-in-law; räjä—the king; saubharim—to saubhari; präha—said; mänadaù—respectful.

     As glorious Mandhätä, the king of Ayodhyä, was hunting, he wandered into Saubhari Muni's auspicious äçrama, which was in beautiful Våndävana forest by the Yamunä's shore. Bowing down before his son-in-law, the respectful king spoke to Saurabhi.

Text 18

çré-mandhätoväca 
bhagavan sarva-vit säkñät
     tvaà parävara-vittamaù
lokänäà tamaso 'ndhänäà
     divya-sürya iväparaù

     çré-mandhätoväca—Çré Mandhätä said; bhagavan—O lord; sarva-vit—knowing everything; säkñät—directly; tvam—you; parävara-vittamaù—the best of the all-knowing; lokänäm—of the worlds; tamasaù—of the darkness; andhänäm—darkened; divya-sürya—a splendid sun; iva—like; aparaù—another.

     Çré Mandhätä said: O Lord, O best of the all-knowing, You are like a second sun that lights up the darkness of the worlds.

Text 19

iha loke bhäved räjyaà
     sarva-siddhi-samanvitam
amutra kåñëa-sarüpyaà
     yena syät tad vadäçu me

     iha—in this; loke—world; bhävet—may be; räjyam—a kinbgdom; sarva-siddhi-samanvitam—with all perfections; amutra—in the next world; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; sarüpyam—with a form like His; yena—by which; syät—may be; tat—that; vada—please tell; äçu—at once; me—to me.

     Please tell me how in this life I may attain a great kingdom and in the next life a spiritual form like that of Lord Kåñëa. 

Text 20

çré-saubharir uväca 
yamunäyäç ca païcäìgaà
     vadiñyämi tavägrataù
sarva-siddhi-karaà çaçvat
     kåñëa-särüpya-kärakam

     çré-saubharir uväca—Çré Saubhari said; yamunäyäç—of the Yamunä; ca—and; païcäìgam—pancangam; vadiñyämi—I will speak; tava agrataù—to you; sarva-siddhi-karam—grantiung all perfection; çaçvat—always; kåñëa-särüpya-kärakam—granting a spiritual form like Lord Kåñëa's.

     Çré Saubhari said: I will describe to you the païcäìga method of worshiping the Yamunä. This worship brings all perfection. It gives one a spiritual form like that of Lord Kåñëa.

Text 21

yävat sürya udeti sma
     yävac ca pratitiñöhati
tävad räjya-pradaà cätra
     çré-kåñëa-vaça-kärakam

     yävat—as long as; süryaù—the sun; udeti—rises; sma—indeed; yävac—as long as; ca—and; pratitiñöhati—stays; tävat—so long; räjya—kingdom; pradam—gives; ca—and; atra—here; çré-kåñëa—Çré Kåñëa; vaça—under control; kärakam—doing.

     This worship brings one a kingdom that lasts for as long as the sun rises and shines in the sky. This worship makes Lord Kåñëa into one's submissive servant.

Text 22

kavacaà ca stavaà nämnäà
     sahasraà paöalaà tathä
paddhatià sürya-vaàçendra
     païcäìgäni vidur budhäù

     kavacam—armor; ca—and; stavam—prayer; nämnäm—of names; sahasram—a thousand; paöalam—paöala; tathä—so; paddhatim—paddhati; sürya-vaàçendra—O king of the Surya dynasty; païcäìgäni—the five parts; viduù—know; budhäù—the wise.

     The wise know that the five parts of païcäìga worship are: 1. kavaca, 2. stava, 3. sahasra-näma, 4. paöala, and 5. paddhati.

Chapter Sixteen
Sré Yamunä-kavaca
The Sré Yamunä Armor

Text 1

çré-mandhätoväca 
yamunäyäù krsna-räjnyäù
     kavacaà sarvato 'malam
dehi mahyaà mahä-bhäga
     dhärayisyämy ahaà sadä

     çré-mandhätä uväca - Sré Mandhätä sdaid; yamunäyäù - of the Yamunä; krsna-räjnyäù - Lord Krsna's queen; kavacam - the armor; sarvataù - everywhere; amalam - pure; dehi - please give; mahyam - to me; mahä-bhäga - O fortunate one; dhärayisyämy - will keep; aham - I; sadä - always.

     Sré Mandhätä said: O fortunate one, please give to me the supremely splendid kavaca of Sré Yamunä, Lord Krsna's queen. I will always keep in very carefully.

Text 2

çré-caurabhir uväca 
yamunäyäc ca kavacam
     sarva-raksakaram nrnäm
catus-padärtha-dam säksäc
     chrnu räjan mahä-mate

     çré-caurabhir uväca - Sré Saurabhi said; yamunäyäc - of the Yamunä; ca - and; kavacam - kavaca; sarva-raksakaram - protecting from all; nrnäm - of people; catus-padärtha-dam - granting the four goals opf life; säksäc - directly; crnu - please hear; räjan - O king;  mahä-mate - noble-hearted.

     Sré saurabhi said: O noble-hearted king, please hear the Yamunä-kavaca, which protects one from all dangers and brings to one the four goals of life.

Text 3

krsnäm catur-bhujäm cyämäm
     punòaréka-daleksanäm
ratha-sthäm sundarém dhyätvä
     dhärayet kavacam tataù

     krsnäm - dark; catur-bhujäm - four arms; cyämäm - dark; punòaréka-daleksanäm - with lotus petal eyes;  ratha-sthäm - seated on a chariot; sundarém - beautiful;  dhyätvä - meditsting; dhärayet - should meditate; kavacam - kavaca; tataù - then.

     One should meditate on dark, four-armed, beautiful, lotus-petal-eyed Yamunä, who is seated on a chariot. Then one should meditate on the Yamunä-kavaca.

Text 4

snätaù purva-mukho mauné
     krta-sandhyaù kucäsane
kucair baddha-cikho vipraù
     pathed vai svastikäsanaù

     snätaù - bathed; purva-mukhaù - facing east; mauné - silent; krta-sandhyaù - having offered sandhya prayers; kucäsane - on a kuca seat; kucaiù - with kuca; baddha - bound; cikhaù - hair; vipraù - a brähmana; pathet - should recite; vai - indeed; svastikäsanaù - sitting in svasita-asana.

     A brähmana should bathe, face the east, refrain from conversation, offer the sandhyä prayers, sit in the svastika-äsana posture on a kuca mat, tie his hair with kuca grass, and recite the following words.

Text 5

yamunä me ciraù pätu
     krsnä netra-dvayam sadä
cyämä bhru-bhagga-decam ca
     näsikäm näka-väsiné

     yamunä - Yamunä; me - my; ciraù - head; pätu - may protect; krsnä - Krsnä; netra-dvayam - two eyes; sadä - always; cyäma - Syämä; bhru-bhagga-decam - eyebrtows; ca - and; näsikäm - nose; näka-väsiné - she who lives in heaven.

     May Yamunä always protect my head. May Krsnä always protect my eyes. May Syämä always protect my eyebrows. May Näkaväsiné always protect my nose.

Text 6

kapolau pätu me säksät
     paramänanda-rupiné
krsna-vämämsa-sambhutä
     pätu karna-dvayam mama

     kapolau - cheeks; pätu - may protect; me - my; säksät - directly; paramänanda-rupiné - she who has a form of bliss; krsna-vämämsa - from Lord Krsna's left shoulder;  sambhutä - born; pätu - may protect; karna-dvayam - ears; mama - my

     May Paramänanda-rupiné always protect my cheeks. May Krsna-vämämsa-sambhutä always protect my ears.

Text 7

adharau pätu kälindé
     cibukam surya-kanyakä
yama-svasä kandharam ca
     hrdayam me mahä-nadé

     adharau - lips; pätu - may protect; kälindé - Kalindi; cibukam - chin; surya-kanyakä - the daughter of the sun-god; yama-svasä - the sister of Yamaraja; kandharam - neck; ca - and; hrdayam - chest; me - my; mahä-nadé - the great river.

     May Kälindé always protect my lips. May Surya-kanyakä always protect my chin. May Yama-svasä always protect my neck. May Mahä-nadé always protect my chest.

Text 8

krsna-priyä pätu prsthim
     tatiné me bhuja-dvayam
croné-tatam ca su-croné
     katim me cäru-darcanä

     krsna-priyä - Lord Krsna's beloved; pätu - may protect;  prsthim - back; tatiné - sides; me - my; bhuja-dvayam - arms; croné-tatam - thighs; ca - and; su-croné - beautiful-thighed; katim - hips; me - my; cäru-darcanä - beautiful to see.

     May Krsna-priyä always protect my back. May Tatiné always protect my arms. May Sucroné always protect my loins. May Cäru-darcanä always protect my hips.

Text 9

uru-dvayam tu rambhorur
     jänuné tv agghri-bhediné     gulphau räsecvaré pätu
     pädau päpa-prahäriné

     uru-dvayam - thighs; tu - indeed; rambhoruù - banana-tree thighs; jänuné - knees; tv - indeed; agghri-bhediné - dividing the feet; gulphau - ankles; räsecvaré - queen of the rasa dance; pätu - may protect; pädau - feet; päpa-prahäriné - removing sins.

     May Rambhoru always protect my thighs. May Agghri-bhediné always protect my knees. May Räsecvaré always protect my ankles. May Päpa-prahäriné always protect my feet.

Text 10

antar bahir adhac cordhvam
     dicäsu vidicäsu ca
samantät pätu jagataù
     paripurnatama-priyä

     antaù - within; bahiù - without; adhac - below; ca - and; urdhvam - above; dicäsu - in the four directions; vidicäsu - in the four intermediate directions; ca - and; samantät - everywhere; pätumay protect; jagataù - from the universe; paripurnatama-priyä - the beloved of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     May Paripurnatama-priyä always protect me from everything that is inside, outside, above, below, in the eight directions, and in the entire universe.

Text 11

idam çré-yamunäyäc ca
     kavacam paramädbhutam
daca-väram pathed bhaktyä
     nirdhano dhanavän bhavet

     idam - this; çré-yamunäyäc - of Sré Yamunä; ca - and; kavacam - the armor; paramädbhutam - supremely wonderful; daca-väram - ten times; pathet - may recite; bhaktyä - with devotion; nirdhanaù - pauper;  dhanavän - wealthy; bhavet - becomes.

     A pauper who ten times recites with devotion this very wonderful Yamunä-kavaca becomes wealthy.

Text 12

tribhir mäsaiù pathed dhémän
     brahmacäré mitäcanaù
sarva-räjyädhipatyam ca
     präpyate nätra samcayaù

     tribhiù - for three; mäsaiù - months; pathet - recites; dhémän - wise; brahmacäré - celibzate;  mitäcanaù - eating frugally; sarva-räjyädhipatyam - a great kingdom; ca - and; präpyate - attains; na - not;  atra - here; samcayaù - doubt.

     A wise brahmacäré who eats little and for three months recites this kavaca attains a great kingdom. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 13

dacottara-catam nityam
     tri-mäsävadhi bhaktitaù
yaù pathet prayato bhutvä
     tasya kim kim na jäyate

     dacottara-catam - 110; nityam - regularly; tri-mäsävadhi - for three months; bhaktitaù - with devotion; yaù - one who; pathet - recites; prayataù - mostly; bhutvä - b3ecoming; tasya - of him; kim - what?; kim - what?; na - not; jäyate - is born.

     What is not attained by a person who within three months chants this kavaca 110 times with devotion?

Text 14

yaù pathet prätar utthäya
     sarva-tértha-phalam labhet
ante vrajet param dhäma
     golokam yogi-durlabham

     yaù - who; pathet - recites; prätaù - early in the morning; utthäya - rising; sarva-tértha-phalam - the result of all pilgrimages; labhet - attains; ante - at the end; vrajet - goes; param - to the supreme; dhäma - abode; golokam - Goloka; yogi-durlabham - which even the great yogis cannot attain.

     A person who rises early and recites this kavaca attains the result of all pilgrimages. At the end of his life he goes to Sré Goloka, the supreme abode, which even the great yogés cannot attain.
.pa

Chapter Seventeen
Sré Yamunä-stava
Prayers to Sré Yamunä

Text 1

çré-mandhätoväca 
yamunäyäù stavam divyam
     sarva-siddhi-karam param
saubhare muni-cärdula
     vada mä krpayä tvaram

     çré-mandhätä uäca - Sré Mandhätä said; yamunäyäù - of the Yamunä; stavam - prayer; divyam - splendid; sarva-siddhi-karam - granting all perfections; param - great; saubhare - O Saubhari; muni-cärdula - tigerof the sages; vada - please tell; mä - to me; krpayä - kindly; tvaram - at once.

     Sré Mandhätä said: O Saubhari, O tiger among sages, please kindly tell me the transcendental Yamunä-stava, which brings all perfection.

Text 2

çré-saubharir uväca 

märtanòa-kanyakäyäs tu
     stavam crnu mahä-mate
sarva-siddhi-karam bhumau
     catur-vargya-phala-pradam

     çré-saubharir uväca - Sré saubhari said; märtanòa-kanyakäyäù - of the Yamuna; tu - indeed; stavam - the prayer; crnu - please hear; mahä-mate - O noble-hearted one; sarva-siddhi-karam - granting all perfections; bhumau - on the earth; catur-vargya-phala-pradam - granting the four goals of life.

     Sré Saubhari said: O noble-hearted one, please hear the Yamunä-stava, which grants all perfection and brings the four goals of life.

Text 3

krsna-vämämsa-bhutäyai
     krsnäyai satatam namaù
namaù çré-krsna-rupinyai
     krsne tubhyam namo namaù

     krsna-vämämsa-bhutäyai - born from Lord Krsna's left shoulder; krsnäyai - to the Yamunä; satatam - always;  namaù - obeisances; namaù - obeisances; çré-krsna-rupinyai - who has a form like Sré Krsna; krsne - O Yamunä;  tubhyam - to you; namaù - obeisances; namaù - obeisances.

     Obeisances to Sré Yamunä, who was bron from Sré Krsna's left shoulder! Obeisances to Sré Yamunä, who has a spiritual form like that of Lord Krsna! O Sré Yamunä, obeisances to you! Obeisances to you!

Text 4

yaù päpa-pagkämbu-kalagka-kutsitaù
     kämé kudhéù satsu kalim karoti hi
vrndävanam dhäma dadäti tasmai
     nadan-milindädi-kalinda-nandiné

     yaù - one who; päpa - of sin; pagkämbu - with the mud; kalagka-kutsitaù - defiled; kämé - lusty; kudhéù - foolish; satsu - with the devotees; kalim - quarrel; karoti - does; hi - indeed; vrndävanam - Vrndävana; dhäma - abode; dadäti - does; tasmai - to him; nadat - humming; milinda - bees; ädi - beginning with; kalinda-nandiné - the Yamunä.

     To a person that is lusty, foolish, polluted with many sins, and fond of quarreling with the devotees, Sré Yamunä, who is filled with many buzzing bees, gives residence in the transcendental abode of Goloka.

Text 5

 krsne säksät krsna-rupä tvam eva
     vegävarte vartase matsya-rupé
urmäv urmau kurma-rupé sadä te
     bindau bindau bhäti govinda-devaù

     krsne - O Yamunä; säksät - directky; krsna-rupä - the form of Lord Krsna; tvam - you; eva - indeed; vegävarte - swift currents; vartase - you are; matsya-rupé - in the form of Lord Matsya; urmau - in the waves; urmau - in the waves; kurma-rupé - in the form of Lord Kurma; sadä - always; te - of you; bindau - in drop; bindau - after drop; bhäti - shines; govinda-devaù - Lord Krsna.

     O Yamunä, you have a spiritual form like that of Sré Krsna. In your whirlpools Lord Matsya appears. In your waves Lord Kurma appears. In each drop of your water, Lord Krsna is splendidly manifest.

Text 6

vande lélävatém tväm sa-ghana-ghana-nibhäm krsna-vämämsa-bhutäm
     vegam vai vairajäkhyam sakala-jala-cayam khanòayantém balät svät
chittvä brahmänòa-bhärät sura-nagara-nägän ganòa-cailädi-durgän
     bhittvä bhu-khanòa-madhye tata-nidhrtavatér bhumi-mäläm prayantém

     vande - I offer obeisances; lélävatém - playful; tväm - to you; sa-ghana-ghana-nibhäm - splendid as monsoon clouds; krsna-vämämsa-bhutäm - born from Lord Krsna's left shoulder; vegam - swift; vai - indeed; vairajäkhyam - named Virajä; sakala-jala-cayam - filled with all waters; khanòayantém - breaking; balät - forcibly; svät - own; chittvä - breaking; brahmänòa-bhärät - the universes; sura-nagara - of the cities of the demigods;  nägän - the Nagas; ganòa-caila - of mountains; ädi - beginning with; durgän - fortresses; bhittvä - breaking; bhu-khanòa-madhye - in the midts of the earth; tata-nidhrtavatéù - with graceful sides; bhumi-mäläm - the garland of the earth; prayantém - going.

     I offer my respectful obeisances unto you, who are playful, who are dark as a monsoon cloud, who were born from Lord Krsna's left shoulder, who move swiftly, who are also named Virajä, who carry all waters, who break the coverings of the universe, who break great mountains and fortresses, who flow through the earth, who have beautiful shores, and who are a garland decorating the earth.

Text 7

divyam kau nämadheyam crutam atha yämune danòayaty adri-tulyam
     päpa-vyuham tv akhanòam vasatu mama giräm manòale tu ksanam tat
danòyämc cäkärya-danòyän sakrd api vacasä khanòitam yad grhétam
     bhrätur märtanòa-sunor atati puri dròhas te pracanòeti danòaù

     divyam - divine; kau - on the earth; nämadheyam - name; crutam - heard; atha - then; yämune - O Yamunä; danòayaty - punishes; adri - mountain; tulyam - equal; päpa-vyuham - sins; tv - indeed; akhanòam - unbroken; vasatu - may reside;  mama - of me; giräm - of the words; manòale - in the circle; tu - that; ksanam - momwent; tat - that;  danòyämc - to be punished; ca - and; äkärya-danòyän - to be punished; sakrt - friend; api - even; vacasä - with words; khanòitam - broken; yat - what; grhétam - taken; bhrätuù - of the brother; märtanòa-sunoù - of the son of the sun; atati - goes; puri - in the city; dròhaù - firm; te - of you; pracanòa - powerful; iti - -thus; danòaù - fearsome.

     O Yamunä, when it is heard on this earth, your holy name desrtoys a great mountain of sin. When your name is spoken it again destroys a great host of sins. May your holy name stay in the circle of my words. In the city of your brother, Yamaräja, who is the son of the sun-god, you are known by the name Pracanòä.

Text 8

rajjur vä visayändha-kupa-tarane päpäkhu-darvé-karé
     veny-usnik ca viräja-murti-ciraso mälästi vä sundaré
dhanyam bhägyam ataù param bhuvi nrnäm yaträdi-krd vallabhä
     goloke 'py ati-durlabhäti-cubhagä bhäty advitéyä nadé

     rajjuù - a rope; vä - or; visaya - of the senses;  andha - blind; kupa - well; tarane - delivering; päpa - of sin; äkhu - the mouse; darvékaré - snake; veni - braids; usnikthe meter usnik; ca - and; viräja - of the universe; murti - of the form; cirasaù - of the head; mälä - grland; asti - is; vä - or; sundaré - beautiful; dhanyam - wealth; bhägyam - good fortune; ataù - then; param - after; bhuvi - in the earth; nrnäm - of the people; yatra - where; ädi - first; krt - doing; vallabhä - dear; goloke - in Goloka; api - even; ati-durlabha - very rare; ati-cubhagä - very glorious; bhäty - shines; advitéyä - without a rival; nadé - river.

     Sré Yamunä is a rope to pull one out of the blind well of sense gratification. Sré Yamunä is a snake to eat the rat of sin. Sré Yamunä is a beautiful crown of flowers on the usnik poems that are the hair on the head of the Lord's universal form. Sré Yamunä gives wealth and good fortune to the people of this world. Even is Goloka, Sré Yamunä is dear, rare, glorious, and without any rival.

Text 9

gopé-go-kula-gopa-keli-kalite kälindi krsna-prabhe
     tvat-kule jala-lola-gola-vicalat-kallola-kolähalaù
tvat-käntära-kutuhaläli-kula-krj-jhagkära-kekäkulaù
     kujat-kokila-sagkulo vraja-latälagkära-bhrt pätu mäm

     gopé - of the gopés; go-kula - cows; gopa - and gopas; keli-kalite - pastimes; kälindi - Yamunä; krsna-prabhe - in the glory of Sré Krsna; tvat - of you; kule - on the shore; jala - waters; lola-gola - restless; vicalat - moving; kallola - waves; kolähalaù - turbulence; tvat-käntära - in the forest by your shores; kutuhala - tumult; äli-kula - bees; krt - done; jhagkära - buzzing; kekä - peacocks' cries;  äkulaù - filled; kujat - cooing; kokila - cuckoos; sagkulaù - filled; vraja - of Vraja; latä - the vines;  alagkära-bhrt - decorated; pätu - may protect; mäm - me.

     O Yamunä, O place where the gopés, gopas, and cows enjoy pastimes, O glory of Lord Krsna, by your shores is a great tumult of swiftly moving waves, by your shores is a great forest filled with the buzzing of bees and the calls of the peacocks, by your shores is a host of cooing cuckoos. May Sré Yamunä, who is decorated with the flowering vines of Vraja, protect me.

Text 10

bhavanti jihväs tanu-roma-tulyä
     giro yadä bhu-sikatä iväcu
tad apy alam yänti na te gunäntam
     santo mahäntaù kila cesa-tulyä

     bhavanti - are; jihväù - tongues; tanu-roma-tulyä - like the hairs on the body; giraù - words; yadä - when; bhu-sikatä - sandy shores; iva - like; äcu - at once; tat - that; apy - also; alam - greatly; yänti - goes; na - not; te - of you;  gunäntam - the virtues; santaù - saintly devotees; mahäntaù - great souls; kila - indeed; cesa-tulyä - equal to Lord Sesa.

     Even if they have as many tongues as there are hairs on their bodies or grains of sand on the beach, or even if they are as powerful as Lord Sesa, the most exalted devotees still cannot properly descibe all your virtues.

Text 11

kalinda-giri-nandiné-stava usasy ayam väparaù
     crutac ca yadi päthito bhuvi tanoti san-maggalam
jano 'pi yadi dhärayet kila pathec ca yo nityacaù
     sa yäti paramam padam nija-nikunja-lélävrtam

     kalinda-giri-nandiné - the daughter of Mount Kalinda; stava - prayers; usasi - at sunrise; ayam - one who; vä - or; aparaù - another; crutac - heard; ca - and;  yadi - if; päthitaù - recited; bhuvi - on the earth;  tanoti - gives; san-maggalam - auspiciousness; janaù - a person; api - even; yadi - if; dhärayet - meditates; kila - indeed; pathec - recites;  ca - and; yaù - who; nityacaù - regularly; sa - he; yäti - goes; paramam - to the supreme; padam - abode; nija-nikunja - your own forest; lélä - with pastimes; ävrtam - filled.

     A person who at sunrise hears or recites these prayers glorifying Sré Yamunä attains transcendental auspiciousness. A person who regularly hears and remembers these prayers attains the supreme transcendental abode, where the Supreme Personality of Godhead enjoys pastimes in the forests by the Yamunä's shore.
.pa

Chapter Eighteen
Patala-paddhati-varnana
The Names and Worship of Sré Yamunä

Text 1

çré-mandhätoväca 
krsnäyäù patalam punyam
     kämadam paddhatim tathä
vada mäm muni-cärdula
     tvam säksäj jnäna-cevadhiù

     çré-mandhätä uväca - Sré Mandhätä said; krsnäyäù - of the Yamunä; patalam - the patala; punyam - sacred; kämadam - fulfilling desires; paddhatim - the paddhati; tathä - so; vada - please tell; mäm - to me; muni-cärdula - O tiger among sages; tvam - you; säksät - directly; jnäna-cevadhiù - filled with knowledge.

     Sré Mandhätä said: O tiger among sages, you are filled with transcendental knowledge. Please describe to me the Yamunä-patala and the Yamunä-paddhati, which fulfill all desires.

Text 2

çré-saubharir uväca 
patalam paddhatim vaksye
     yamunäyä mahä-mate
krtvä crutvätha japtvä vä
     jévan-mukto bhaven naraù

     çré-saubharir uväca - Sré Saubhari said; patalam - patala; paddhatim - paddhati; vaksye - I will speak; yamunäyä - of the Yamunä; mahä-mate - O noble-hearted one; krtvä - having done; crutvä - having heard;, atha - then; japtvä - having chanted; vä - or; jévat - while alive in this world; muktaù - liberated; bhaven - may be; naraù - a person.

     Sré Saubhari said: I will now describe to you the Yamunä-patala and the Yamunä-paddhati. One who performs them, hears them, or chants them becomes liberated even in this life.

Text 3

pranavam purvam uddhrtya
     mäyä-béjam tataù param
ramä-béjam tataù krtvä
     käma-bijam vidhänataù

     pranavam - Om; purvam - first; uddhrtya - reciting;  mäyä-béjam - the maya-bija; tataù - then; param - then; ramä-béjam - the Rama-béja syllable; tataù - then; krtvä - doing; käma-bijam - the Käma-béja syllable; vidhänataù - accordingly.

     First one says Om, then the Mäyä-béja, then the Ramä-béja, and then the Käma-béja.

Text 4

kälindéti caturthy ante
     devé-padam ataù param
namaù paccät samvidhärya
     japen mantram imam naraù

     kälindi - Kalindi; iti - thus; caturthy - in the dative case; ante - at the end; devé-padam - the word devi;  ataù param - then; namaù - namaù; paccät - then; samvidhärya - placing; japen - chanting; mantram - mantram; imam - this; naraù - a person.

     Then one takes the word Kälindé, places the word devé after it, places these words in the dative case, and then adds the word namaù. This is the mantra that one chants.

     Note: The mantra then becomes, "Om hrém çrém klém kälindyai devyai namaù".

Text 5

japtvaikädaca laksäni
     mantra-siddhir bhaved bhuvi
janaiù prärthyäc ca ye kämäù
     sarve präpyäù svatac ca te

     japtva - chanting; ekädaca laksäni - eleven syllables;  mantra-siddhiù - perfect mantra; bhavet - is; bhuvi - on the earth; janaiù - by people; prärthyäù - requested;  ca - and; ye - which; kämäù - desires; sarve - all; präpyäù - to be attained; svataù - spontaneously; ca - and; te - they.

     They who chant this eleven-syllable mantra attain perfection. They attain all their desires.

Text 6

vidhäya soòaca-dalam
     padmam simhäsane cubhe
karnikäyäm ca kälindém
     nyasec chré-krsna-samyutäm

     vidhäya - placing; soòaca-dalam - sixteen petal; padmam - lotus; simhäsane - on a throne; cubhe - beautiful; karnikäyäm - in the whorl of a lotus; ca - and; kälindém - Yamunä; nyasec - places; chré-krsna-samyutäm - with Sré Krsna.

     In a sacred circle one should draw a sixteen-petal lotus flower. In the whorl of the lotus one should write the words Sré Krsna and Kälindé.

Texts 7 and 8

jähnavém virajäm krsnäm
     candrabhägäm sarasvatém
gomatém kaucikém veném
     sindhum godävarém tathä

veda-smrtim vetravatém
     catadrum sarayum tathä
pujayen mänava-crestha
     rsi-kulyäm kakudminém
prthak prthak tad-dalesu
     nämoccarya vidhänataù

     jähnavém-Jähnavé; virajäm - Virajä; krsnäm - Krsna; candrabhägäm - Candrabhägä; sarasvatém - Sarasvaté; gomatém - Gomaté; kaucikém - Kauciké; veném - Vené; sindhum - Sindhu; godävarém - Godävaré; tathä - then; veda-smrtim - Veda-smrti; vetravatém - Vetravaté; catadrum - Satadrum;  sarayum - Sarayu; tathä - then; pujayen - should worship; mänava-crestha - best of men; rsi-kulyämRsi-kulyä; kakudminém - Kakudminé; prthak prthak - specifically; tad-dalesu - on the leaves; näma - names; uccarya - writing; vidhänataù - in order.

     On the petals one should write the names Jähnavé, Virajä, Krsna, Candrabhägä, Sarasvaté, Gomaté, Kauciké, Vené, Sindhu, Godävaré, Vedasmrti, Vetravaté, Satadru, Sarayu, Rsi-kulyä, and Kakudminé. Then an exalted person should worship the lotus flower.

Text 9

vrndävanam govardhanam
     vrndäm ca tulasém tathä
catur-déksu vidhäyäcu
     pujayen nämabhiù prthak

     vrndävanam - Vrndävana; govardhanam - Govardhana; vrndäm - Vrndä; ca - and; tulasém - Tulasé; tathä - then; catur-déksu - in the four directions vidhäya - placing; äcu - at once; pujayen - should worship; nämabhiù - with names; prthak - specific.

     Then one should write the names Vrndävana, Govardhana, Vrndä, and Tulasé in the four directions. Then one should worship the lotus with these names.

Text 10

     om namo bhagavatyai kalinda-nandinyai surya-kanyakäyai yama-bhaginyai çré-krsna-priyäyai yuthé-bhutäyai svähä, anena mantrenävähanädi-soòacopacärän samähita upäharet.

     om - Om; namaù - obeisances; bhagavatyai - to the goddess; kalinda-nandinyai - the daughter of Mount Kalinda; surya-kanyakäyai - the daughter of the sun; yama-bhaginyai - the sister of Yamaraja; çré-krsna-priyäyai - the beloved of Krsna; yuthé-bhutäyai - who has become a gopé; svähä, - Svaha; anena - by this; mantrena - mantra; avahanadi - taking; coòacopacärän - sixteen objects of worship; samähita - careful; upäharet - should worship. 

     Then one should chant the mantra, "om namo bhagavatyai kalinda-nandinyai surya-kanyakäyai yama-bhaginyai çré-krsna-priyäyai yuthé-bhutäyai svähä (Obeisances to goddess Yamunä, the daughter of Mount Kalinda, the daughter of the sun-god, the sister of Yamaräja, the gopé-beloved of Sré Krsna)." Then, offering sixteen articles one should carefully offer worship.

Texts 11 and 12

ity evam patalam viddhi
     tubhyam vaksyämi paddhatim
yävat sampurnatäm yäti
     puraccaranam eva hi

tävad bhaved brahmacäré
     japen mauna-vraté dvijaù
yava-bhojé bhumi-cäyé
     patra-bhug jita-mänasaù

     ity - thus; evam - thus; patalam - patala; viddhi - know; tubhyam - to you; vaksyämi - I will speak; paddhatim - the paddahti; yävat - as; sampurnatäm - completion; yäti - attains; puraccaranam - preparatory ritual; eva - indeed; hi - indeed; tävat - so; bhavet - is; brahmacäré - brahmacari; japen - should chant; mauna-vraté - silent; dvijaù - brähmana; yava-bhoji - eating barley; bhumi-cäyé - taking rest on the ground; patra-bhug - eating leaves; jita-mänasaù - controlling the mind.

     Please know that what I have just spoken is the patala. Now I will speak to you the paddhati. After the puraccarana is completed one should live as a brahmacäré brähmana, keeping a vow of silence, eating leaves and barley, sleeping on the ground, controlling one's mind, and chanting mantras.

Text 13

kämam krodham tathä lobham
     moham dvesam visrjya saù
bhaktyä paramayä räjan
     vartamänas tu decakaù

     kämam - lust; krodham - anger; tathä - so; lobham - greed; moham - ilussion; dvesam - hatred; visrjya - abandoning; saù - he; bhaktyä - with devotion;  paramayä - great; räjan - O king; vartamänaù - staying; tu - indeed; decakaù - devotee.

     O king, one should free oneself from lust, anger, bewilderment, and hatred, and with great devotion one should chant mantras.

Text 14

brähme muhurta utthäya
     dhyätvä devém kalindajäm
ärunodaya-veläyäm
     nadyäm snänam samäcaret

     brähme muhurta - at brahma-muhurta; utthäya - rising;  dhyätvä - meditating; devém - on the goddess; kalindajäm - Yamunä; ärunodaya-veläyäm - at sunrise; nadyäm - in the river; snänam - bathing; samäcaret - should perform.

     During brähma-muhurta one should meditate on goddess Yamunä and at sunrise one should bathe in the Yamunä.

Text 15

madhyähne cäpi sandhyäyäm
     sandhyä-vandana-tat-paraù
samäpte niyame räjan
     kälindé-téram ästhitaù

     madhyähne - at midday; cäpi - and; sandhyäyäm - at sunset; sandhyä-vandana-tat-paraù - offering obeisances;  samäpte - completed; niyame - restriction; räjan - O king; kälindé-téram - on the Yamunä's shore; ästhitaù - situated.

     At midday and sunset one should again offer obeisances to the Yamunä. O king, when this vow of worshiping the Yamunä is completed, one should stand at the Yamunä's shore.

Text 16

daca-laksam brähmanänäm
     sa-putränäm mahätmanäm
pujayitvä gandha-puspair
     dattvä tebhyo su-bhojanam

     daca-laksam - a million; brähmanänäm - brähmanas; sa-putränäm - with their sons; mahätmanäm - great souls; pujayitvä - worshiping; gandha - fragrant; puspaiù - with flowers; dattvä - giving; tebhyaù - to them; su-bhojanam - delicious food.

     Then one should worship one million exalted brähmana along with their sons. One should offer them fragrant flowers and delicious foods.

Text 17

vastra-bhusana-sauvarna-
     päträni prasphuranti ca
daksinäc ca cubhä dadyät
     tataù siddhir bhavet khalu

     vastra - garments; bhusana - ornaments; sauvarna - golden; päträni - dishes; prasphuranti - manifest; ca - and; daksinäc - daksina;  ca - and; cubhä - auspicious; dadyät - should offer;  tataù - then; siddhiù - perfect; bhavet - is; khalu - indeed.

     Then one should offer them garments, ornaments, and golden cups. In this way one should offer them daksinä. Then one's observance of this vow is properly completed.

Text 18

iti te paddhatiù proktä
     mayä räjan mahä-mate
kuru tvam niyamam sarvam
     kim bhuyaù crotum icchasi

     iti - thus; te - to you; paddhatiù - paddhati; proktä - spoken; mayä - by me; räjan - O king; mahä-mate - noble-hearted; kuru - please do; tvam - you; niyamam - vow; sarvam - all; kim - what?; bhuyaù - more; crotum - to hear; icchasido you wish.

     O noble-hearted king, in this way I have described to you the Yamunä-paddhati. Please follow this vow in all respects. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Nineteen
Sré Yamunä-sahasra-näma-kathana
A Thousand Names of Sré Yamunä

Text 1

çré-mandhätoväca 
nämnäm sahasram krsnayäù
     sarva-siddhi-karam param
vada mäm muni-cärdula
     tvam sarvajno nirämayaù

     çré-mandhätä uväca - Sré Mandhätä said; nämnäm - of names; sahasram - thousand; krsnayäù - of the Yamunä;  sarva-siddhi-karam - granting all perfection; param - great; vada - please tell; mäm - to me; muni-cärdula - O tiger among the sages; tvam - you; sarvaj 24aù - all-knowing; nirämayaù - free from illusion.

     Sré Mandhätä said: O tiger among the sages, you know everything. You are never bewildered. Please tell me the thousand names of Sré Yamunä, names that bring all perfection. 

Text 2

çré-saubharir uväca 
nämnäm sahasram kälindyä
     mandhätäs te vadämy aham
sarva-siddhi-karam divyam
     çré-krsna-vaca-kärakam

     çré-saubharir uväca - Sré Saubhari said; nämnäm - of names; sahasram - thousand; kälindyä - of Sri Yamunä;  mandhätäù - O Mandhätä; te - to you; vadämy - speak;  aham - I; sarva-siddhi-karam - granting all perfection;  divyam - transcendental; cri-krsna-vaca-kärakam - making Lord Krsna into one's submissive servant.

     Sri Saubhari said: O King Mandhätä, now I will tell you the thousand transcendental names of Sri Yamunä, names that bring all perfection, names that make Lord Krsna into one's submissive servant.

Text 3 a

     om asya cri-kälindi-sahasra-näma-stotra-mantrasya saubhari-
rsiù cri-yamunä devatäù anusthup-chandaù mäyä-bijam iti kilakam ramä-bijam iti caktiù cri-kalinda-nandini-prasäda-siddhy-arthe jape viniyogaù.

     om - Om; asya - of this; cri-kälindi-sahasra-näma-stotra-mantrasya - Sri Yamunä-sahastra-näma mantra; saubhari-rsiù - the sage is Saubhari; cri-yamunä - Sri Yamunä; devatäù - is the deity; anusthup-chandaù - anustup is the meter; mäyä-bijam - the maya-bija; iti - thus; kilakam - kilaka; ramä-bijam - rama-bija; iti - thus; sakhiù - sakti; cri-kalinda-nandini-prasäda-siddhy-arthe - to attain the mercy of Sri Yamunä; viniyogaù - engaged.

     Om. Here follows the Sri Yamunä-sahasra-näma-mantra. The seer is Sri Saubhari Muni. The deity is Sri Yamunä. The meter is anustup. The kilaka is mäyä-bija. The cakti is ramä-bija. The purpose is to attain Sri Yamunä's mercy.

Text 3 b

atha dhyänam 
cyämäm ambhoja-neträm sa-ghana-ghana-rucim ratna-manjira-kujat-
     känci-keyura-yuktäm kanaka-mani-maye bibhratim kunòale dve
bhräjac-chri-nila-vastra-sphurad-amala-calad-dhära-bhäram manojnäm
     dhyäyen märtanòa-putrim tanu-kirana-cayoddipta-dipäbhirämäm 
iti dhyänam.

     atha - now; dhyänam - meditation; cyämäm - dark; ambhoja-neträm - lotus eyed; sa-ghana-ghana-rucim - splendid as a hose of dark clouds; ratna-manjira - with tinkling anklets; kujat - tinkling; känci - belt; keyura - armlets; yuktäm - with; kanaka - gold; mani - and jewels; maye - made of; bibhratim - wearing;  kunòale - earrings; dve - two; bhräjat - wearing; cri - beautiful; nila - blue; vastra - garemnts; sphurat - splendid; amala - pure; calat - moving; hära - bhäram - necklaces; manojnäm - beautiful; dhyäyet - should meditate; märtanòa - of the sun-god; putrim - the daughter; tanu-kirana-caya - filled with light;  uddipta - blazing; dipa - lamp; abhirämäm - beautiful; iti - thus; dhyänam - the meditation.

The meditation:

     One should meditate on the sun-god's beautiful lotus-eyed daughter, Sri Yamunä, who is splendid as a host of dark clouds and glorious as a blazing lamp, and who wears jewel anklets, tinkling bracelets and belt, earrings of gold and jewels, splendidly beautiful blue garments, and splendid necklaces that move to and fro.

Thus ends the meditation.

Text 4

om. kälindi… yamunä krsnä
     krsnarupä sanätani
krsna-vämämsa-sambhutä
     paramänanda-rupini

     Om. Sri Yamunä (Yamunä) is the daughter of Mount Kalinda (kälindi). She is dark (krsnä), has a dark form (krsnarupä), is eternal (sanätani), was born from Lord Krsna's left shoulder (krsna-vämämsa-sambhutä), has a form of transcendental bliss (paramänanda-rupini), . . .

Text 5

goloka-väsini cyämä
     vrndävana-vinodini
rädhä-sakhi räsa-lilä
     räsa-manòala-manòani

 . . . resides in Goloka (goloka-väsini), is dark (cyämä), enjoys pastimes in Vrndävana (vrndävana-vinodini), is Rädhä's friend (rädhä-sakhi), dances in the räsa-lilä (räsa-lilä), is an ornament in the räsa-dance circle (räsa-manòala-manòani), . . .

Text 6

nikunja-väsini valli
     ragga-valli manoharä
cri-räsa-manòali-bhutä
     yuthi-bhutä hari-priyä

 . . . stays in the forest groves (nikunja-väsini), is graceful as a flowering vine (valli and ragga-valli), is beautiful (manoharä), stays in the räsa-dance circle (cri-räsa-manòali-bhutä), is a gopi (yuthi-bhutä), is Lord Krsna's beloved (hari-priyä), . . .

Text 7

goloka-tatini divyä
     nikunja-tala-väsini
dirghormi-vega-gambhirä
     puspa-pallava-vähini

 . . . stays in Goloka (goloka-tatini), is glorious (divyä), stays in the forest (nikunja-tala-väsini), is long (dirghä), filled with great waves and currents (urmi-vega-gambhirä), and decorated with flowers and leaves (puspa-pallava-vähini), . . .

Text 8

ghana-cyämä megha-mälä
     baläkä padma-mälini
paripurnatamä purnä
     purna-brahma-priyä parä

 . . . is dark as a cloud (ghana-cyämä), is dark as a garland of clouds (megha-mälä), is the home of many cranes (baläkä), is garlanded with many lotus flowers (padma-mälini), is the most perfect (paripurnatamä), is perfect (purnä), is the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead's beloved (purna-brahma-priyä), is transcendental (parä), . . .

Text 9

mahä-vegavati säksän-
     nikunja-dvära-nirgatä
mahä-nadi manda-gatir
     virajä-vega-bhedini

 . . . is very powerful (mahä-vegavati), stands at the entrance to Vrndävana forest (säksän-nikunja-dvära-nirgatä), is a great river (mahä-nadi), is gentle (manda-gatir), eclipses the Virajä river (virajä-vega-bhedini), . . .

Text 10

aneka-brahmänòa-gatä
     brahma-drava-samäkulä
gaggä-micrä nirmaläbhä
     nirmalä saritäm varä

 . . . is present in many universes (aneka-brahmänòa-gatä), is filled with spiritual water (brahma-drava-samäkulä), joins with the Gaggä (gaggä-micrä), is pure (nirmaläbhä and nirmalä), is the best of rivers (saritäm varä), . . .

Text 11

ratna-baddhobhaya-tati
     hamsa-padmädi-sagkulä
nadi nirmala-päniyä
     sarva-brahmänòa-pävani

 . . . has jewel shores (ratna-baddhobhaya-tati), is filled with swans, lotuses, and many other beautiful birds and flowers (hamsa-padmädi-sagkulä), is a flowing river (nadi), has pure and sacred water (nirmala-päniyä), purifies all the universes (sarva-brahmänòa-pävani), . . .

Text 12

vaikuntha-parikhi-bhutä
     parikhä päpa-härini
brahmaloka-gatä brähmi
     svargä svarga-niväsini

 . . . is a moat surrounding the spiritual world (vaikuntha-parikhi-bhutä and parikhä), removes sins (päpa-härini), stays in the spiritual world (brahmaloka-gatä, brähmi, svargä, and svarga-niväsini), . . .

Text 13

ullasanti protpatanti
     meru-mälä mahojjvalä
cri-gaggämbhaù-sikharini
     ganòa-caila-vibhedini

 . . . is splendid and playful (ullasanti), is filled with great waves (protpatanti), is glorious as a garland of Mount Merus (meru-mälä), is very glorious (mahojjvalä), is more sacred than the Gaggä (cri-gaggämbhaù-sikharini), flows with such force that she breaks great boulders (ganòa-caila-vibhedini), . . .

Text 14

decän punanti gacchanti
     vahanti bhumi-madhya-gä
märtanòa-tanujä punyä
     kalinda-giri-nandini

 . . . purifies the lands where she flows (decän punanti), flows swiftly (gacchanti and vahanti), flows on the earth (bhumi-madhya-gä), is the sun-god's daughter (märtanòa-tanujä), is sacred (punyä), is Mount Kalinda's daughter (kalinda-giri-nandini), . . .

Text 15

yama-sväsä manda-häsä
     su-dvijä racitämbarä
nilämbarä padma-mukhi
     caranti cäru-darcanä

 . . . is Yamaräja's sister (yama-sväsä), smiles gently (manda-häsä), has beautiful teeth (su-dvijä), wears beautiful garments (racitämbarä), wears blue garments (nilämbarä), has a lotus face (padma-mukhi), walks gracefully (caranti), is beautiful to see (cäru-darcanä), . . .

Text 16

rambhoruù padma-nayanä
     mädhavi pramadottamä
tapac-caranti su-croni
     kujan-nupura-mekhalä

 . . . has thighs graceful as banana trees (rambhoru), has lotus eyes (padma-nayanä), is Lord Krsna's beloved (mädhavi), is the best of beautiful women (pramadottamä), is austere (tapac-caranti), has beautiful hips (su-croni), wears tinkling anklets and belt (kujan-nupura-mekhalä), . . .

Text 17

jala-sthitä cyämaläggi
    khänòaväbhä vihärini
gänòi-vibhäsini vanyä
     cri-krsnam varam icchati

 . . . stays in the water (jala-sthitä), has dark limbs (cyämaläggi), is sweet as khänòava-candy (khänòaväbhä), is playful (vihärini), spoke to Arjuna (gänòivi-bhäsini), is filled with sacred water (vanyä), desires Lord Krsna as her husband (cri-krsnam varam icchati), . . .

Text 18

dvärakägamanä räjni
     pattaräjni paraggatä
mahä-räjni ratna-bhusä
     gomati tira-cärini

 . . . stays in Dvärakä (dvärakägamanä), is Lord Krsna's queen (räjni, pattaräjni, and mahä-räjni), attained the Supreme Personality of Godhead as her husband (paraggatä), wears jewel ornaments (ratna-bhusä), is glorious (gomati), is a great river (tira-cärini), . . .

Text 19

svakiyä ca sukhä svärthä
     sva-bhakta-kärya-sädhini
navaläggäbalä mugdhä
     varäggä väma-locanä

 . . . is Lord Krsna's wife (svakiyä), is happy (sukhä), has attained her desires (svärthä), fulfills the desires of they who worship her (sva-bhakta-kärya-sädhini), has a youthful form (navaläggä), is a beautiful girl (abalä, mugdhä, and varäggä), has beautiful eyes (väma-locanä), . . .

Text 20

ajäta-yauvanä dinä
     prabhä-käntir dyutic cchaviù
su-cobhä paramä kirtiù
     kucaläjnäta-yauvanä

 . . . is eternally young (ajäta-yauvanä), is humble (dinä), is glorious (prabhä-känti, dyuti, cchavi, and su-cobhä), is transcendental (paramä), is famous (kirti), is beautiful and auspicious (kucalä), is a girl whose eternal youth cannot be understood by conditioned souls (ajnäta-yauvanä), . . .

Text 21

navoòhä madhyagä madhyä
     prauòhiù prauòhä pragalbhakä
dhirädhirä dhairya-dharä
     jyesthä cresthä kulägganä

 . . . is a new bride (navoòhä), is sometimes proud and sometimes gentle (madhyagä and madhyä), is sometimes proud (prauòhiù, prauòhä, and pragalbhakä),  is sometimes peaceful and thoughtful (dhirä and dhairya-dharä), is sometimes wildly passionate (adhirä), is the most exalted (jyesthä and cresthä), is saintly (kulägganä), . . .

Text 22

ksana-prabhä cancalärcä
     vidyut saudämini taòit
svädhina-patikä laksmiù
     pustä svädhina-bhartrkä

 . . . is splendid as a lightning flash (ksana-prabhä, ca 24calärcä, vidyut, saudämini, and taòit), dominates her husband (svädhina-patikä and svädhina-bhartrkä), is beautiful (laksmiù), is glorious (pustä), . . . 

Text 23

kalahäntaritä bhirur
     icchä-protkanthitäkulä
kasipu-sthä divya-cayyä
     govinda-hrta-mänasä

 . . . sometimes quarrels with Krsna and refuses to see Him (kalahäntaritä), is shy (bhiru), yearns to see Krsna (icchä, protkanthitä, and äkulä), reclines on a splendid pillow (kasipu-sthä and divya-cayyä), is a girl whose heart has been captured by Lord Govinda (govinda-hrta-mänasä), . . .

Text 24

khanòitäkhanòa-cobhäòhyä
     vipralabdhäbhisärikä
virahärtä virahini
     näri prosita-bhartrkä

 . . . is sometimes separated from Krsna (khanòitä, vipralabdhä, virahärtä, virahini, and prosita-bhartrkä), is very beautiful (akhanòa-cobhäòhyä), meets Krsna again (abhisärikä), is Krsna's beloved (näri), . . . 

Text 25

mänini mänadä prajnä
     mandära-vana-väsini
jhagkärini jhanat-käri
     ranan-manjira-nupurä

 . . . is glorious (mänini), gives all honor to others (mänadä), is intelligent (prajnä), lives in a mandära forest (mandära-vana-väsini), wears tinkling ornaments (jhagkärini and jhanat-käri), wears tinkling anklets (ranan-manjira-nupurä), . . .

Text 26

mekhalämekhalä känci
     kancäni kancanamayi
kancuki kancuka-maniù
     crikanthäòhyä mahä-maniù

 . . . wears a sash (mekhalä and känci), sometimes does not wear a sash (amekhalä), has a golden complexion (ka 24cäni and kancanamayi), wears a beautiful bodice (kancuki), wears a jewel bodice (kancuka-mani), has a beautiful neck (crikanthäòhyä), is splendid as a great jewel (mahä-mani), . . .

Text 27

cri-härini padma-härä
     muktä muktä-phalärcitä
ratna-kagkana-keyurä
     sphurad-agguli-bhusanä

 . . . wears a beautiful necklace (cri-härini), wears a lotus garland (padma-härä), is splendid as a pearl (muktä), wears a pearl necklace (muktä-phalärcitä), wears jewel bracelets and armlets (ratna-kagkana-keyurä), wears beautiful rings on her fingers (sphurad-agguli-bhusanä), . . . 

Text 28

darpanä darpäni-bhutä
     dusta-darpa-vinäcini
kambu-grivä kambu-dharä
     graiveyaka-viräjitä

 . . . is proud (darpanä and darpäni-bhutä), destroys the demons' pride (dusta-darpa-vinäcini), has a neck graceful as a conchshell (kambu-grivä), wears conchshell ornaments (kambu-dharä), wears a splendid locket (graiveyaka-viräjitä), . . .

Text 29

tätagkini danta-dharä
     hema-kunòala-manòitä
cikhä-bhusä bhälapuspä
     näsa-mauktika-cobhitä

 . . . wears beautiful earrings (tätagkini), has beautiful teeth (danta-dharä), wears golden earrings (hema-kunòala-manòitä), wears an ornament in her hair (cikhä-bhusä), is decorated with a bhälapuspä (bhälapuspä), is beautiful with a nose-pearl (näsa-mauktika-cobhitä), . . .

Text 30

mani-bhumi-gatä devi
     raivatädri-vihärini
vrndävana-gatä vrndä
     vrndäranya-niväsini

 . . . resides in a realm made of jewels (mani-bhumi-gatä), is a goddess (devi), enjoys pastimes on Mount Raivata (raivatädri-vihärini), stays in Vrndävana forest (vrndävana-gatä and vrndäranya-niväsini), is the leader of many gopis (vrndä), . . 

Text 31

vrndävana-latä mädhvi
     vrndäranya-vibhusanä
saundarya-lahari laksmir
     mathurä-tirtha-väsini

 . . . stays among the flowering vines in Vrndävana forest (vrndävana-latä), is sweet and charming (mädhvi), is decorated with the forest ornaments of Vrndävana (vrndäranya-vibhusanä), is splashed by waves of beauty (saundarya-lahari), is glorious (laksmi), stays in the holy place of Mathurä (mathurä-tirtha-väsini), . . .

Text 32

vicränta-väsini kämyä
     ramyä gokula-väsini
ramana-sthala-cobhäòhyä
     mahävana-mahä-nadi

 . . . stays at Vicränta-tirtha (vicränta-väsini), is beautiful (kämyä and ramyä), stays in Gokula (gokula-väsini), is very beautiful as she stays in Ramana-sthala (ramana-sthala-cobhäòhyä), is a great river flowing through Mahävana (mahävana-mahä-nadi), . . . 

Text 33

pranatä pronnatä pustä
     bhärati bharatärcitä
tirtha-räja-gatir goträ
     gaggä-sägara-saggamä

 . . . is meek and humble (pranatä), is exalted (pronnatä and pustä), is eloquent (bhärati and bharatärcitä), stays at the king of holy places (tirtha-räja-gatir), was born in the most exalted family (goträ), flows to the place where the Gaggä meets the ocean (gaggä-sägara-saggamä), . . .

Text 34

saptäbdhi-bhedini lolä
     sapta-dvipa-gatä balät
luthanti cailän bhidyanti
     sphuranti vegavattarä

 . . . flows into the seven seas (saptäbdhi-bhedini), is restless and fickle (lolä), forcibly touches the seven continents (sapta-dvipa-gatä balät), rolls about in the ground in ecstasy (luthanti), breaks the greatest mountains (cailän bhidyanti), is glorious (sphuranti), is the most powerful and swift (vegavattarä), . . .

Text 35

käncani käncani-bhumiù
     käncani-bhumi-bhävitä
loka-drstir loka-lilä
     lokälokäcalärcitä

 . . . has a golden complexion (käncani), resides in a realm of gold (käncani-bhumiù and käncani-bhumi-bhävitä), is now visible in this world (loka-drstir), enjoys pastimes in this world (loka-lilä), is worshiped on Mount Lokäloka (lokälokäcalärcitä), . . .

Text 36

cailodgatä svarga-gatä
     svargärcä svarga-pujitä
vrndävani vanädhyaksä
     raksä kaksä tati-pati

 . . . resides on a mountaintop (cailodgatä), resides in the spiritual world (svarga-gatä), is worshiped in the spiritual world (svargärcä and svarga-pujitä), resides in Vrndävana (vrndävani), is the goddess of Vrndävana (vanädhyaksä), is the great protector (raksä), wears a beautiful sash (kaksä), wears beautiful garments (tati-pati), . . .

Text 37

asi-kunòa-gatä kacchä
     svcacchandocchalitädi-jä
kuhara-sthä ratha-prasthä
     prasthä cäntataräturä

 . . . stays at Asi-kunòa (asi-kunòa-gatä), wears a beautiful sash (kacchä), is independent (svcacchandä), is exalted (ucchalitä), was present at the beginning of creation (ädi-jä), flows even in the lower realms (kuhara-sthä), travels on an chariot (ratha-prasthä), travels widely (prasthä), is most peaceful (cäntatarä), yearns to attain Krsna (äturä), . . .

Text 38

ambu-cchatä cikaräbhä
     dardurä därduri-dharä
päpägkucä päpa-simhi
     päpa-druma-kuthärini

 . . . is filled with water (ambu-cchatä and cikaräbhä), nourishes a host of towns and villages (dardurä and därduri-dharä), is a hook to chase sins away (päpägkucä), is a lion to chase sins away (päpa-simhi), is an ax to cut down the tree of sins (päpa-druma-kuthärini), . . .

Text 39

punya-sagghä punya-kirtiù
     punya-dä punya-vardhini
madhor-vana-nadi mukhyä-
     tulä tälavana-sthitä

 . . . is pure and sacred (punya-sagghä and punya-kirtiù), brings sanctity and purification (punya-dä and punya-vardhini), flows through Madhuvana (madhor-vana-nadi), is great (mukhyä), is peerless (atulä), flows through Tälavana (tälavana-sthitä), . . .

Text 40

kumudvana-nadi kubjä
     kumudämbhoja-vardhini
plava-rupä vegavati
     simha-sarpädi-vähini

 . . . flows through Kumudvana (kumudvana-nadi), flows in a winding course (kubjä), nourishes many lotuses and water lilies (kumudämbhoja-vardhini), is filled with water (plava-rupä), flows swiftly (vegavati), nourishes lions, snakes, and many other wild animals (simha-sarpädi-vähini), . . .

Text 41

bahulä bahudä bahvi
     bahulä vana-vanditä
rädhä-kunòa-kaläräòhyä
     krsna-kunòa-jaläcritä

 . . . appears in many forms (bahuli and bahulä), is generous (bahudä), is great (bahvi), is worshiped by all forests (vana-vanditä), worships Rädhä-kunòa (rädhä-kunòa-kalärädhyä), takes shelter of Syäma-kunòa (krsna-kunòa-jaläcritä), . . .

Text 42

lalitä-kunòa-gä ghantä
     vicäkhä-kunòa-manòitä
govinda-kunòa-nilayä
     gopa-kunòa-taraggini

 . . . stays at Lalitä-kunòa (lalitä-kunòa-gä), flows with a sound like the tinkling of bells (ghantä), is decorated with Vicäkhä-kunòa (vicäkhä-kunòa-manòitä), is the home of Govinda-kunòa (govinda-kunòa-nilayä), is the home of Gopa-kunòa (gopa-kunòa-taraggini), . . .

Text 43

cri-gaggä mänasi gaggä
     kusumämbara-bhävini
govardhini go-dhanäòhyä
     mayuri vara-varnini

 . . . is also known as Sri Gaggä (cri-gaggä), is known as mänasa-gaggä (mänasi gaggä), is decorated with flower-garments (kusumämbara-bhävini), flows by Govardhana Hill (govardhini), nourishes the cows (go-dhanäòhyä), nourishes many peacocks (mayuri), is glorious (vara-varnini), . . .

Text 44

särasi nila-kanthäbhä
     kujat-kokila-potaki
giriräja-prasur bhurir
     ätapaträtapatrini

 . . . has many lakes (särasi), has a complexion like Lord Siva's (nila-kanthäbhä), is filled with warbling baby cuckoos (kujat-kokila-potaki), is the daughter of the king of mountains (giriräja-prasu), is great (bhuri), is a great parasol (ätapaträ), holds a parasol (ätapatrini), . . .

Text 45

govardhanägkä go-danti
     divyausadhi-nidhiù srtiù
päradi päradamayi
     näradi cäradi bhrtiù

 . . . carries the mark of Govardhana Hill (govardhanägkä), nourishes the cows (go-danti), has a great treasury of spendid transcendental plants (divyausadhi-nidhi), flows gracefully (srti), brings one to the farther shore of the ocean of repeated birth and death (päradi and päradamayi), delivers the living entities (näradi), is splendid in the autumn (cäradi), is decorated with splendid ornaments (bhrti), . . .

Text 46

cri-krsna-caranägka-sthä
     kämä kämavanäncitä
kämätavi nandini ca
     nanda-gräma-mahi-dharä

 . . . bears the footprints of Lord Krsna (cri-krsna-caranägka-sthä), is beautiful (kämä), flows by Kämavana (kämavanä 24citä and kämätavi), is blissful (nandini), flows by Nandicvara Hill (nanda-gräma-mahi-dharä), . . .

Text 47

brhat-sänu-dyutiù protä
     nandicvara-samanvitä
käkali kokilamayi
     bhänòira-kuca-kaucalä

 . . . is a great mountain-peak of glory (brhat-sänu-dyutiù-protä), flows by Nandicvara Hill (nandicvara-samanvitä), is filled with the warbling of birds (käkali), is filled with cuckoos (kokilamayi), brings happiness to the grass of Bhänòiravana (bhänòira-kuca-kaucalä), . . .

Text 48

lohärgala-pradä kärä
     käcmira-väsanävrtä
barhisadi conapuri
     curaksetra-purädhikä

 . . . is filled with dark waves (lohärgala-pradä), is active (kärä), is filled with the fragrance of kunkuma (käcmira-väsanävrtä), flows by Barhisadi-pura (barhisadi), flows by Sonapura (conapuri), flows by Suraksetra (curaksetra-purä), is exalted (adhikä), . . .

Text 49

nänäbharana-cobhäòhyä
     nänä-varna-samanvitä
nänä-näri-kadambäòhyä
     nänä-ragga-mahiruhä

 . . . is splendid with many ornaments (nänäbharana-cobhäòhyä), assumes many different features (nänä-varna-samanvitä), is glorified by the women of Vraja (nänä-näri-kadambäòhyä), has shores decorated with many trees (nänä-ragga-mahiruhä), . . .

Text 50

nänä-loka-gatäbhyarcir
     nänä-jala-samanvitä
stri-ratnam ranta-nilayä
     lalanä-ratna-räjini

 . . . gives shelter to the people (nänä-loka-gatä), is glorious (abhyarci), is filled with water (nänä-jala-samanvitä), is the jewel of women (stri-ratna), is the home of many jewels (ranta-nilayä), is splendid with many jewellike women (lalanä-ratna-räjini), . . .

Text 51

raggini ragga-bhumäòhyä
     raggä ragga-mahiruhä
raja-vidyä räja-guhyä
     jagat-kirtir ghanäghanä

 . . . provides a place for Lord Krsna's räsa-dance (raggini, ragga-bhumäòhyä, raggä, and ragga-mahiruhä), knows the king of knowledge (raja-vidyä), knows the great secret of all knowledge (räja-guhyä), is glorified throughout the universes (jagat-kirti), is dark as a monsoon cloud (ghanä), is filled with water (aghanä), . . .

Text 52

vilola-ghantä krsnäggä
     krsna-deha-samudbhavä
nila-pagkaja-varnäbhä
     nila-pagkaja-härini

 . . . is decorated with tinkling bells (vilola-ghantä), stays by Lord Krsna's side (krsnäggä), was born from Lord Krsna's body (krsna-deha-samudbhavä), ia dark as a blue lotus (nila-pagkaja-varnäbhä), is decorated with blue lotuses (nila-pagkaja-härini), . . .

Text 53

niläbhä nila-padmäòhyä
     nilämbhoruha-väsini
nägavalli nägapuri
     nägavalli-dalärcitä

 . . . has a dark complexion (niläbhä), is splendid with blue lotuses (nila-padmäòhyä), is the home of many blue lotuses (nilämbhoruha-väsini), nourishes many betelnut plants (nägavalli), became the home of the Käliya serpent (nägapuri), is worshiped with betelnut leaves (nägavalli-dalärcitä), . . .

Text 54

tämbula-carcitä carcä
     makaranda-manoharä
sa-kesarä kesarini
     keca-päcäbhicobhitä

 . . . chews betelnuts (tämbula-carcitä), is anointed with fragrances (carcä), is sweet as honey (makaranda-manoharä), has beautiful hair (sa-kesarä, kesarini, and keca-päcäbhicobhitä), . . .

Text 55

kajjaläbhä kajjaläktä
     kajjali kalitänjanä
alakta-caranä tämrä
     lälä tämri-krtämbarä

 . . . wears black mascara (kajjaläbhä, kajjaläktä, kajjali, and kalitänjanä), decorates her feet with red lac (alakta-caranä), has a dark complexion (tämrä), is affectionate (lälä), wears dark garments (tämri-krtämbarä), . . .

Text 56

sinduritälipta-väni
     sucriù crikhanòa-manòitä
pätira-pagka-vasanä
     jatä-mämsi srag-ambarä

 . . . marks her hair with red sindura (sinduritälipta-väni), is beautiful (sucri), is anointed with sandal paste (crikhanòa-manòitä and pätira-pagka-vasanä), has beautiful hair (jatä-mämsi), wears splendid garlands and garments (srag-ambarä), . . .

Text 57

ägary aguru-gandhäktä
     tagaräcrita-märutä
sugandhi-taila-rucirä
     kuntaläliù su-kuntalä

 . . . is glorious as the moon (ägari), is fragrant with aguru (aguru-gandhäktä), is the home of breezes bearing the scent of tagara (tagaräcrita-märutä), is fragrant with scented oil (sugandhi-taila-rucirä), has beautiful hair (kuntaläli and su-kuntalä), . . .

Text 58

cakuntaläpämsulä ca
     pätivratya-paräyanä
surya-prabhä surya-kanyä
     surya-deha-samudbhavä

 . . . is the home of many birds (cakuntalä), is devoted and faithful to Lord Krsna (apämsulä and pätivratya-paräyanä), is glorious like the son (surya-prabhä), is the sun-god's daughter (surya-kanyä), was born from the sun-god (surya-deha-samudbhavä), . . .

Text 59

koti-surya-pratikäcä
     suryajä surya-nandini
samjnä samjnä-sutä svecchä
     samjnä moda-pradäyini

 . . . is glorious as millions of suns (koti-surya-pratikäcä), is the sun-god's daughter (suryajä and surya-nandini), is transcendental knowledge personified (samjnä), is Samjnä's daughter (samjnä-sutä), is independent (svecchä), is above the realm of mere knowledge (asamj 24ä), brings happiness to others (moda-pradäyini), . . .

Text 60

samjnä-putri sphurac-cchayä
     tapati täpa-kärini
sävarnyänubhavä devi
     vaòavä saukhya-däyini

 . . . is Samjna's daughter (samjnä-putri), is glorious (sphurac-cchayä), is austere (tapati and täpa-kärini), is like Sri Krsna (sävarnyänubhavä), is a goddess (devi), is a brähmani (vaòavä), gives happiness (saukhya-däyini), . . .

Text 61

canaiccaränujä kilä
     candra-vamca-vivardhini
candra-vamca-vadhuc candrä
     candrävali-sahäyini

 . . . is the younger sister of Sanaiccara (canaiccaränujä), is glorious (kilä), increases the glory of the moon-god's dynasty (candra-vamca-vivardhini), married into the moon-god's dynasty (candra-vamca-vadhu), is glorious like the moon (candrä), is Candrävali's friend (candrävali-sahäyini), . . .

Text 62

candrävati candra-lekhä
     candrakäntänugämcukä
bhairavi piggaläcagki
     lilävaty ägarimayi

 . . . is glorious like the moon (candrävati, candra-lekhä, and candrakäntä), is a faithful follower of Lord Krsna (anugä), is dressed in splendid garments (amcukä), can become ferocious (bhairavi), has a dark complexion (piggalä), is fearless (acagki), is playful (lilävati), is fragrant with agara (ägarimayi), . . .

Text 63

dhana-crir deva-gändhäri
     svar-manir guna-vardhini
vraja-mallä bandha-käri
     viciträ jaya-kärini

 . . . is wealthy and glorious (dhana-cri), is splendid and fragrant (deva-gändhäri), is a celestial jewel (svar-mani), is virtuous (guna-vardhini), enjoys wrestling pastimes in Vraja (vraja-mallä), binds Lord Krsna with ropes of love (bandha-käri), is wonderful (viciträ), is victorious (jaya-kärini), . . .

Text 64

gändhäri manjari toòi
     gurjary äsävari jayä
karnäti rägini gauri
     vairäti gaura-vätikä

 . . . sings in the räga gandhära (gändhäri), sings in the räga mannjari (manjari), sings in the räga toòi (toòi), sings in the räga gurjari (gurjari), sings in the räga äsävari (äsävari), sings in the räga jayä (jayä), sings in the räga karnäti (karnäti), sings in the räga rägini (rägini), sings in the räga gauri (gauri), sings in the räga vairäti (vairäti), sings in the räga gaura-vätikä (gaura-vätikä), . . .

Text 65

catuc-candrä kalä heri
     tailäggi vijayävati
täli tala-svarä gänä
     kriyä-mätra-prakäsini

 . . . sings in the räga catuc-candrä (catuc-candrä), sings in the räga kalä (kalä) sings in the räga heri (heri), sings in the räga tailäggi (tailäggi), sings in the räga vijayävati (vijayävati), sings with graceful rhythms (täli and tala-svarä), sings beautifully (gänä), sings expertly (kriyä-mätra-prakäsini), . . .

Text 66

vaicäkhi cancalä cärur
     mäcäri ghughati ghatä
vaihägari sorathicä
     kaidäri jala-dhärikä

 . . . sings in the rägas vaicäkhi (vaicäkhi), cancalä (cancalä), cäru (cäru), mäcäri (mäcäri), ghughati (ghughati), ghatä (ghatä), vaihägari (vaihägari), sorathi (sorathi), icä (icä), kaidäri (kaidäri), jala-dhärikä (jala-dhärikä), . . . 

Text 67

kämäkara-criù kalyäni
     gauòa-kalyäna-micritä
räja-sanjivini helä
     mandäri käma-rupini

 . . . sings in the rägas kämäkara-cri (kämäkara-cri), kalyäni (kalyäni), gauòa-kalyäna-micritä (gauòa-kalyäna-micritä), räja-sanjivini (räja-sanjivini), helä (helä), mandäri (mandäri), and käma-rupini (käma-rupini), . . .

Text 68

säraggi märuti hoòhä
     sägari käma-vädini
vaibhäsi maggalä cändri
     räsa-manòala-manòanä

 . . . sings in the rägas säraggi (säraggi), märuti (märuti), hoòhä (hoòhä), sägari (sägari), käma-vädini (käma-vädini), vaibhäsi (vaibhäsi), and maggalä (maggalä), is glorious like the moon (cändri), is an ornament for the räsa-dance circle (räsa-manòala-manòanä), . . .

Text 69

käma-dhenuù käma-latä
     kämadä kamaniyakä
kalpa-vrksa-sthali sthulä
     sudhä-saudha-niväsini

 . . . is like a Kämadhenu cow (käma-dhenu), is like a desire-vine (käma-latä), fulfills all desires (kämadä), is beautiful (kamaniyakä), is the home of many desire trees (kalpa-vrksa-sthali), is great (sthulä), is the home of many nectar palaces (sudhä-saudha-niväsini), . . .

Text 70

goloka-väsini cubhrur
     yasti-bhrd dvära-pälikä
crggära-prakarä crggä
     svacchä cayyopakärikä

 . . . resides in Goloka (goloka-väsini), has beautiful eyebrows (cubhru), carries a staff (yasti-bhrd), protects the gateway (dvära-pälikä), decorates Lord Krsna (crggära-prakarä), is exalted (crggä), is pure (svacchä), decorates the Lord's bed (cayyopakärikä), . . .

Text 71

pärsadä su-sakhi-sevyä
     cri-vrndävana-pälikä
nikunja-bhrt kunja-punjä
     gunjäbharana-bhusitä

 . . . is the Lord's companion (pärsadä), is served by many gopi friends (su-sakhi-sevyä), protects Sri Vrndävana (cri-vrndävana-pälikä), protects the forest of Vrndävana (nikunja-bhrt), flows through many forests (kunja-punjä), is decorated with gunjä (gunjäbharana-bhusitä), . . .

Text 72

nikunja-väsini prosyä
     govardhana-tati-bhavä
vicäkhä lalitä rämä
     nirujä madhu-mädhavi

 . . . resides in the forest (nikunja-väsini), is sometimes separated from Lord Krsna because He has gone to a foreign country (prosyä), flows near Govardhana Hill (govardhana-tati-bhavä), is dear to Vicäkhä (vicäkhä), is dear to Lalitä (lalitä), is a goddess (rämä), never becomes ill (nirujä), enjoys pastimes with Lord Krsna in the springtime (madhu-mädhavi), . . .

Text 73

ekä naika-sakhi… cuklä
     sakhi-madhyä mahä-manäù
cruti-rupä rsi-rupä
     maithiläù kaucaläù striyaù

 . . . is without equal (ekä), has many friends (naika-sakhi), is splendid (cuklä), is surrounded by many friends (sakhi-madhyä), has a noble heart (mahä-manäù), is like the personified Vedas (cruti-rupä), is like a sage (rsi-rupä), is like the girls of Mithilä (maithiläù), is like the girls of Kaucala (kaucaläù striyaù), . . .

Text 74

ayodhyä-pura-väsinyo
     yajna-sitäù pulindakäù
ramä-vaikuntha-väsinyaù
     cvetadvipa-sakhi-janäù

 . . . is like the girls of Ayodhyä (ayodhyä-pura-väsinyaù), is like the Yajna-sitäs (yajna-sitäù), is like the Pulindäs (pulindakäù), is like the girls of Ramä-vaikuntha (ramä-vaikuntha-väsinyaù), is like the girls of Svetadvipa (cvetadvipa-sakhi-janäù), . . .

Text 75

urdhva-vaikuntha-väsinyo
     divyäjita-padäcritäù
cri-lokäcala-väsinyaù
     cri-sakhyaù sägarodbhaväù

 . . . is like the girls of Urdhva-vaikuntha (urdhva-vaikuntha-väsinyaù), is like the girls of Divyäjita (divyäjita-padäcritäù), is like the girls of Lokäloka (cri-lokäcala-väsinyaù), is like the friends of the goddess of fortune (cri-sakhyaù), is like the girls born from the ocean of milk (sägarodbhaväù), . . .

Text 76

divyä adivyä divyäggä
     vyäptäs tri-guna-vrttayaù
bhumi-gopyo deva-naryo
     latä ausadhi-virudhaù

 . . . is like the divya-gopis (divyä), is like the adivya-gopis (adivyä), is like the girls of Svargaloka (divyäggä), is like the girls that stay in many places at once (vyäptä), is like the tri-guna-vrtti-gopis (tri-guna-vrttayaù), is like the bhumi-gopis (bhumi-gopyaù), is like the demigoddesses (deva-naryaù), is like the flowering vines that became gopis (latäù), is like the plants that became gopis (ausadhi-virudhaù), . . .

Text 77

jälandharyaù sindhu-sutäù
     prthu-barhismati-bhaväù
divyämbarä apsarasaù
     sautalä näga-kanyakäù

 . . . is like the Jälandharis (jälandharyaù), is like the daughters of the ocean (sindhu-sutäù), is like the prthu-barhismati girls that became gopis (prthu-barhismati-bhaväù), is like the divyämbarä gopis (divyämbarä), is like the apsaräs that became gopis (apsarasaù), is like the girls of Sutalaloka that became gopis sautaläù), is like the snake-girls that became gopis (näga-kanyakäù), . . .

Text 78

param dhämä param brahmä
     paurusä prakrtiù parä
tata-sthä guna-bhur gitä
     gunägunamayi gunä

 . . . is the beloved of He who is the Supreme Abode (param dhämä), is the beloved of He who is the Supreme Brahman (param brahma), is the beloved of the Supreme Person (paurusä), is the transcendental potency of the Supreme Personality of Godhead (prakrtiù parä and tata-sthä), is virtuous (guna-bhu), is glorified in song (gitä), has virtues that are beyond the touch of the three modes of material nature (gunägunamayi), is virtuous (gunä), . . .

Text 79

cid-ghanä sad-asan-mälä
     drstir drcyä gunäkari
mahat-tattvam ahagkäro
     mano buddhiù pracetanä

 . . . is spiritual (cid-ghanä), is the beloved of He who stands at the beginning of the string of causes and effects (sad-asan-mälä), has transcendental vision (drsti), is beautiful (drcyä), is virtuous (gunäkari), is the beloved of He who is the origin of the mahat-tattva (mahat-tattvam), is the beloved of He who is the origin of the false-ego (ahagkäro), is the beloved of He who is the origin of the mind (manaù), is the beloved of He who is the origin of the intelligence (buddhi and pracetanä), . . .

Text 80

ceto vrttiù sväntarätmä
     caturthi catur-aksarä
catur-vyuhä catur-murtir
     vyoma-väyur ado jalam

 . . . is the beloved of He who is the origin of the mind (cetaù), is the beloved of He who is the origin of action (vrtti), is the beloved of He who is the Supersoul in everyone's heart (sväntarätmä), is the beloved of He who stands beyond wakefulness, dream, and dreamless sleep (caturthi), is the beloved of He who is designated by the sacred syllable Om (catur-aksarä), is the beloved of He who expands as Väsudeva, Sagkarsana, Pradyumna, and Aniruddha (catur-vyuhä and catur-murti), is the beloved of he who stays in the spiritual sky (vyoma-väyu), is the beloved of He who stays is the ocean at the bottom of the material universe (ado jalam), . . .

Text 81

mahi cabdo raso gandhaù
     sparco rupam anekadhä
karmendriyam karmamayi
     jnänam jnänendriyam dvidhä

 . . . is the beloved of He who is the origin of the earth (mahi), is the beloved of He who is the origin of sound (cabda), is the beloved of He who is the origin of taste (rasa), is the beloved of He who is the origin of smell (gandha), is the beloved of He who is the origin of touch (sparca), is the beloved of He who is the origin of form (rupam), is the beloved of He who  appears in many forms (anekadhä), is the beloved of He who is the origin of the working senses (karmendriyam), is the beloved of He who is the origin of action (karmamayi), is the beloved of He who is the origin of knowledge (jnänam), is the beloved of He who is the origin of the knowledge-acquiring senses (j 24änendriyam), is the beloved of He who appears in two features (dvidhä), . . .

Text 82

tridhädhibhuta-madhyätmam
     adhidaivam adhisthitam
jnäna-caktiù kriyä-caktiù
     sarva-devädhidevatä

 . . .is the beloved of He who appears in three features (tridhä), is the beloved of He who appears as the adhibhautika-purusa (ahibhutam), is the beloved of He who appears as the adhyätma-purusa (adhyätmam), is the beloved of He who appears as the adhidaiva-purusa (adhidaivam), is the beloved of He who is the original creator (adhisthitam), is the beloved of He who is the master of knowledge (jnäna-cakti), is the beloved of He who is the master of pious deeds (kriyä-cakti), is the beloved of He who is the master of all the demigods (sarva-devädhidevatä), . . .

Text 83

tattva-sagghä virag-murtir
     dhäranä dhäranämayi
crutiù smrtir veda-murtiù
     samhitä garga-samhitä

 . . . is the beloved of He who is the supreme truth (tattva-sagghä), is the beloved of He who is the universal form (virag-murti), is the beloved of He who is the supreme object of meditation (dhäranä and dhäranämayi), is the beloved of He who is the object of the Sruti-cästra (cruti), is the beloved of He who is the object of the Smrti-cästra (smrti), is the beloved of He who is the Vedas personified (veda-murti), is the beloved of He who who is glorified by the samhitäs (samhitä), is the beloved of He who is glorified by the Garga-samhitä (garga-samhitä), . . .

Text 84

päräcari saivä srstiù
     pärahamsi vidhätrkä
yäjnavalki bhägavati
     crimad-bhägavatärcitä

 . . . is the beloved of He who appeared as Paräcara's son (päräcari), is the beloved of He who is the original creator (srsti and vidhätrkä), is the beloved of He who is the original paramahamsa (pärahamsi), is the beloved of He who is worshiped by Yäjnavalkya (yäjnavalki), is the beloved of the Supreme Personality of Godhead (bhägavati), is the beloved of He who is worshiped in Srimad-Bhägavatam (crimad-bhägavatärcitä), . . .

Text 85

rämäyanamayi ramyä
     puräna-purusa-priyä
puräna-murtiù punyäggä
     cästra-murtir mahonnatä

 . . . is the beloved of He who is glorified in the Rämäyana (rämäyanamayi0, is the beloved of He who is the most handsome (ramyä), is the beloved of He who the ancient Supreme Person (puräna-purusa-priyä and puräna-murti), is pure and sacred (punyäggä), is the Vedas personified (cästra-murti), is exalted (mahonnatä), . . .

Text 86

manisä dhisanä buddhir
     väni dhiù cemusi matiù
gäyatri veda-sävitri
     brähmani brahma-laksanä

 . . . is wise and thoughtful (manisä), is eloquent (dhisanä and väni), is intelligent (buddhi, dhiù, cemusi, and mati), chants the gäyatri mantra (gäyatri and veda-sävitri), is transcendental (brähmani and brahma-laksanä), . . .

Text 87

durgärpanä sati satyä
     pärvati canòikämbikä
äryä daksäyani däksi
     daksa-yajna-vighätini

 . . . is difficutl to approach (durgä), is a great devotee of Lord Krsna (arpanä), is saintly (sati and satyä), is born from a mountain (pärvati), is sometimes ferocious (canòikä), is sometimes filled with maternal love (ambikä), is noble-hearted (äryä), is expert (daksäyani and däksi), is dear to she who destroyed the Daksa-yajna (daksa-yajna-vighätini), . . .

Text 88

pulomajä cacindräni
     devi deva-varärpitä
väyunä dhärini dhanyä
     väyavi väyu-vega-gä

 . . . is dear to Puloma Muni's daughter (pulomajä), is dear to Saci (caci and indräni), is a goddess (devi), was offered in marriage to Lord Krsna, the master of the demigods (deva-varärpitä), is the object of Väyu's meditation (väyunä dhärini), is glorious (dhanyä), flows as swiftly as the wind (väyavi and väyu-vega-gä), . . .

Text 89

yamänujä samyamani
     samnjä chäyä sphurad-dyutiù
ratna-devi ratna-vrndä
     tärä tarani-manòalä

 . . . is Yamaräja's younger sister (yamänujä), sometimes visits Samyamani-pura (samyamani), is dear to Samjnä (sam 24jä), is dear to Chäyä (chäyä), is glorious (sphurad-dyuti), is splendid with many jewels (ratna-devi and ratna-vrndä), is splendid as a star (tärä), is the daughtrer of the sun-god (tarani-manòalä), . . .

Text 90

ruciù cäntiù ksamä cobhä
     dayä daksä dyutis trapä
tala-tustir vibhä pustiù
     santustiù pusta-bhävanä

 . . . is glorious (ruci), peaceful (cänti), patient (ksamä), beautiful (cobhä), merciful (dayä), expert (daksä), splendid (dyuti), shy (trapä), satisfied with a handful (tala-tusti), glorious (vibhä), exalted (pusti), satisfied (santusti), glorious (pusta-bhävanä), . . .

Text 91

catur-bhujä cäru-neträ
     dvi-bhujästa-bhujäbalä
cagkha-hastä padma-hastä
     cakra-hastä gadä-dharä

 . . . sometimes has four arms (catur-bhujä), has beautiful eyes (cäru-neträ), sometimes has two arms (dvi-bhujä), sometimes has eight arms (asta-bhujä), is delicate (abalä), holds a conchshell in her hand (cagkha-hastä), holds a lotus in her hand (padma-hastä), holds a cakra in her hand (cakra-hastä), holds a club (gadä-dharä), . . .

Text 92

nisagga-dhärini carma-
     khaòga-pänir dhanur-dharä
dhanus-tagkarani yodhi
     daityodbhata-vinäcini

 . . . carries a quiver of arrows (nisagga-dhärini), holds a sword and chield in her hands (carma- khaòga-päni), holds a bow (dhanur-dharä), shoots many arrows with a loud sound (dhanus-tagkarani), is a great warrior (yodhi), destroys the demonic armies (daityodbhata-vinäcini), . . .

Text 93

ratha-sthä garuòäruòhä
     cri-krsna-hrdaya-sthitä
vamci-dharä krsna-vesä
     sragvini vana-mälini

 . . . rides on a chariot (ratha-sthä), rides on Garuòa (garuòäruòhä), stays in Lord Krsna's heart (cri-krsna-hrdaya-sthitä), is the beloved of Lord Krsna, who plays the flute (vamci-dharä), stays by Lord Krsna (krsna-vesä), is decorated with a garland of flowers (sragvini), is decorated with a garland of forest flowers (vana-mälini), . . .

Text 94

kirita-dhärini yänä
     manda-manda-gatir gatiù
candra-koti-pratikäcä
     tanvi komala-vigrahä

 . . . wears a crown (kirita-dhärini), travels to many places (yänä), walks gracefully (manda-manda-gati and gati), is splendid as millions of moons (candra-koti-pratikäcä), is slender (tanvi), is delicate (komala-vigrahä), . . .

Text 95

bhaismi bhisma-sutä bhimä
     rukmini rukma-rupini
satyabhämä jämbavati
     satyä bhadrä sudaksinä

 . . . is dear to Rukmini (bhaismi, bhisma-sutä, bhimä, rukmini, and rukma-rupini), is dear to Satyabhämä (satyabhämä), is dear to Jämbavati (jämbavati), is dear to Satyä (satyä), is dear to Bhadrä (bhadrä), is dear to Sudaksinä (sudaksinä), . . .

Text 96

mitravindä sakhi-vrndä
     vrndäranya-dhvajordhvagä
crggära-kärini crggä
     crgga-bhuù crgga-dä khagä

 . . . is dear to Mitravindä (mitravindä), is dear to the gopis (sakhi-vrndä), is a flag decorating Vrndävana (vrndäranya-dhvajä), is exalted (urdhvagä), is expert at decorating Rädhä and Krsna (crggära-kärini), is exalted (crggä, crgga-bhuù, and crgga-dä), is a goddess (khagä), . . .

Text 97

titikseksä smrtiù spardhä
     sprhä craddhä sva-nirvrtiù
icä trsnä bhidä pritir
     himsä yäcnä klamä krsiù

 . . . is tolerant (titiksä), had beautiful eyes (iksä), is thoughtful (smrti), competes to attain Lord Krsna (spardhä), yearns to attain Lord Krsna (sprhä), trusts Lord Krsna (craddhä), is happy (sva-nirvrti), is a goddess (icä), thirsts to attain Lord Krsna (trsnä), is sometimes separated from Lord Krsna (bhidä), loves Lord Krsna (priti), is sometimes ferocious (himsä), begs to attain Lord Krsna (yäcnä), is sometimes fatigued (klamä), is attracted to Lord Krsna (krsi), . . .

Text 98

äcä nidrä yoga-nidrä
     yogini yogadänugä
nisthä pratisthä samitiù
     sattva-prakrtir uttamä

 . . . hopes to attain Lord Krsna (äcä), sometimes sleeps (nidrä), sleeps in a mystic trance (yoga-nidrä) is a yogini (yogini and yogadänugä), has faith in Lord Krsna (nisthä), takes shelter of Lord Krsna (pratisthä), is peaceful (samiti), is situated in transcendental goodness (sattva-prakrti), is exalted (uttamä), . . .

Text 99

tamaù-prakrtir durmarsi
     rajaù-prakrtir änatiù
kriyäkriyä krtir gläniù
     sättviky äòhyätmiki vrsä

 . . . sometimes appears to they who are in the mode of darkness (tamaù-prakrti), sometimes is ferocious (durmarsi), sometimes appears to they who are in the mode of passion (rajaù-prakrti), is humble (änati), sometimes is active (kriyä), sometimes is nactive (akriyä), is saintly (krti), destroys the impious (gläni), sometimes appears to they who are in the mode of goodness (sättviki), is spiritual (äòhyätmiki), is religion personified (vrsä), . . .

Text 100

sevä-cikhä-manir vrddhir
     ähutiù piggalodbhavä
näga-bhäsä näga-bhusä
     nägari nagari nagä

 . . . is the crest-jewel of devotees (sevä-cikhä-mani), is exalted (vrddhi), calls out to Lord Krsna in her prayers (ähuti), has a dark complexion (piggalodbhavä), is a river that speaks the language of snakes (näga-bhäsä), is a river decorated with snakes (näga-bhusä), is a graceful and beautiful gopi (nägari and nagari), is a river with many trees on its shore (nagä), . . .

Text 101

naur naukä bhava-naur bhävyä
     bhäva-sägara-setukä
manomayi därumayi
     saikati sikatämayi

 . . . is a boat to cross the ocean of repeated birth and death (nau, naukä, and bhava-nau), is the proper object of meditation (bhävyä), is a bridge to cross the ocean of repeated birth and death (bhäva-sägara-setukä), is thoughtful (manomayi), is a river with many trees on its shore (därumayi), is a river with many beaches (saikati and sikatämayi), . . .

Text 102

lekhyä lepyä manimayi
     pratihema-vinirmitä
cailä caila-bhavä cilä
     cikaräbhä caläcalä

 . . . is a gopi decorated with colorful designs and pictures (lekhyä), is anointed with fragrances (lepyä), is decorated with jewel ornaments (manimayi), is decorated with gold ornaments (pratihema-vinirmitä), is the daughter of Mount Kalinda (cailä and caila-bhavä), is virtuous (cilä), is filled with spray from its turbulent waves (cikaräbhä), sometimes flows swiftly (calä), sometimes is almost motionless (acalä), . . .

Text 103

ästhitä su-sthitä tuli
     vaidiki tantriki vidhiù
sandhyä sandhyäbhra-vasanä
     veda-sandhiù sudhämayi

 . . . sometimes is restless (asthitä), sometimes is peaceful (su-sthitä), is an expert painter (tuli), is learned in the Vedas (vaidiki), is learned in the Tantras (tantriki), is learned in the rules of religion (vidhi), meets Lord Krsna at a rendezvous (sandhyä), dresses for a rendezvous with Lord Krsna (sandhyäbhra-vasanä), is learned in the Vedas (veda-sandhi), is sweet as nectar (sudhämayi), . . .

Text 104

säyantani cikhävedhyä
     suksmä jiva-kaläkrtiù
ätma-bhutä bhävitänvi
     prahvi kamala-karnikä

 . . . meets Lord Krsna in the evening (säyantani), is splendid as a burning flame (cikhä), is eternal and can never be harmed (avedhyä), is transcendental (suksmä), is a jiva-kalä expansion of Lord Krsna (jiva-kaläkrti), is born from Lord Krsna (ätma-bhutä), is the proper object of meditation (bhävitä), is transcendental (anvi), is humble (prahvi), is beautiful as the whorl of a lotus (kamala-karnikä), . . .

Text 105

niräjani mahä-vidyä
     kandali kärya-sädhani
pujä pratisthä vipulä
     punanti pära-laukiki

 . . . offers ärati to Lord Krsna (niräjani), is very learned (mahä-vidyä), has many newly blossoming flowers by her shores (kandali), fulfills the devotees' desires (kärya-sädhani), is the proper object of worship (pujä), is a goddess (pratisthä), is great (vipulä), is sacred and purifying (punanti), brings one to the spiritual world (pära-laukiki), . . .

Text 106

cukla-caktir mauktiki ca
     pratitiù paramecvari
virajosnig viräò-v/eni
     venukä venu-nädini

 . . . is the Lord's spiritual potency (cukla-cakti), gives liberation (mauktiki), has faith in Lord Krsna (pratiti), is the beloved of the Supreme Personality of Godhead (paramecvari), is supremely pure (virajä), is glorified with prayers written in the meter usnik (usnik), is the hair of the Lord's universal form (viräò-v/eni), expertly plays the flute (venukä and venu-nädini), . . .

Text 107

ävartini värtikadä
     värtä vrttir vimänagä
räsäòhyä räsini räsä
     räsa-manòala-vartini

 . . . is a river that has many whirlpools (ävartini), is a messenger (värtikadä and värtä), is active in Lord Krsna's service (vrtti), travels in airplanes (vimänagä), is expert in the räsa-dance (räsäòhyä, räsini, räsä, and räsa-manòala-vartini), . . .

Text 108

gopa-gopicvari gopi
     gopi-gopäla-vanditä
go-cärini gopa-nadi
     gopänanda-pradäyini

 . . . is a leader of the gopas and gopis (gopa-gopicvari), is a gopi (gopi), is worshiped by the gopas and gopis (gopi-gopäla-vanditä), herds the cows (go-cärini), is a river that helps the gopas (gopa-nadi) and gives happiness to the gopas (gopänanda-pradäyini), . . .

Text 109

pacavyadä gopa-sevyä
     kotico go-ganavrtä
gopänugä gopavati
     govinda-päda-pädukä

 . . . nourishes the cows (pacavyadä), is served by the gopas (gopa-sevyä), is a place where millions of cows meet (kotico go-ganavrtä), is a place where many gopas meet (gopänugä and gopavati), is a place where Lord Krsna places His feet (govinda-päda-pädukä), . . .

Text 110

vrsabhänu-sutä rädhä
     cri-krsna-vaca-kärini
krsna-pränädhikä cacvad-
     rasikä rasikecvari

 . . . is a friend of Vrsabhänu's daughter (vrsabhänu-sutä and rädhä), has brought Lord Krsna under her dominion (cri-krsna-vaca-kärini), is a girl for whom Lord Krsna is more dear than life (krsna-pränädhikä), eternally enjoys nectar pastimes with Lord Krsna (cacvad-rasikä), is a queen of they who enjoy nectar pastimes with Lord Krsna (rasikecvari), . . .

Text 111

avatodä tämraparni
     krtamälä vihäyasi
krsnä veni bhimarathi
     täpi revä mahäpagä

 . . . is a friend of the Avatodä river (avatodä), is a friend of the Tämraparni river (tämraparni), is a friend of the Krtamälä river (krtamälä), is a friend of the Vihäyasi river (vihäyasi), is a friend of the Krsnä river (krsnä), is a friend of the Veni river (veni), is a friend of the  Bhimarathi river (bhimarathi), is a friend of the Täpi river (täpi), is a friend of the Revä river (revä), is a friend of the Mahäpagä river (mahäpagä), . . .

Text 112

vaiyäsaki ca käveri
     tuggabhadrä sarasvati
candrabhägä vetravati
     rsikulyä kakudmini

 . . . is a friend of the Vaiyäsaki river (vaiyäsaki), is a friend of the Käveri river (käveri), is a friend of the Tuggabhadrä river (tuggabhadrä), is a friend of the Sarasvati river (sarasvati), is a friend of the Candrabhägä river (candrabhägä), is a friend of the Vetravati river (vetravati), is a friend of the Rsikulyä river (rsikulyä), is a friend of the Kakudmini river (kakudmini), . . .

Text 113

gautami kauciki sindhur
     bäna-gaggätisiddhidä
godävari ratnamälä
     gaggä mandäkini balä

 . . . is a friend of the Gautami river (gautami), is a friend of the Kauciki river (kauciki), is a friend of the Sindhu river (sindhu), is a friend of the Bäna-gaggä river (bäna-gaggä), is a friend of the Atisiddhidä river (atisiddhidä), is a friend of the Godävari river (godävari), is a friend of the Ratnamälä river (ratnamälä), is a friend of the Gaggä river (gaggä), is a friend of the Mandäkini river (mandäkini), is a friend of the Balä river (balä), . . .

Text 114

svarnadi jähnavi velä
     vaisnavi maggalälayä
bälä visnu-padi proktä
     sindhu-sägara-saggatä

 . . . is a friend of the Svarnadi river (svarnadi), is a friend of the Jähnavi river (jähnavi), is a friend of the Velä river (velä), is a friend of the Vaisnavi river (vaisnavi), is auspicious (maggalälayä), is youthful (bälä), is a place where Lord Krsna places His feet (visnu-padi), is described in the scriptures (proktä), is a friend of the holy place Sindhu-sägara (sindhu-sägara-saggatä), . . .

Text 115

gaggä-sägara-cobhäòhyä
     samudri ratnadä dhuni
bhägirathi svar-dhuni bhuù
     cri-vämana-pada-cyutä

 . . . is glorious like Gaggä-sägara (gaggä-sägara-cobhäòhyä), flows into the ocean (samudri), is full of jewels (ratnadä), is a beautiful river (dhuni), is a friend of the Gaggä (bhägirathi, svar-dhuni, bhuù, and cri-vämana-pada-cyutä), . . .

Text 116

laksmi ramä ramaniyä
     bhärgavi visnu-vallabhä
sitärcir jänaki mätä
     kalagka-rahitä kalä

 . . . is glorious (laksmi), delightful (ramä), beautiful (ramaniyä), is a friend of Bhrgu Muni's daughter (bhärgavi), is dear to Lord Visnu (visnu-vallabhä), is a friend of Sitä (sitä and jänaki), is glorious as a flame (arci), is like the mother of the world (mätä), is sublimely pure (kalagka-rahitä), is a kalä expansion of Lord Krsna (kalä), . . .

Text 117

krsna-pädäbja-sambhutä
     sarvä tri-patha-gämini
dharä vicva-bharänantä
     bhumir dhätri ksamämayi

 . . . was born from Lord Krsna's lotus feet (krsna-pädäbja-sambhutä), has all glories (sarvä), travels through the three worlds (tri-patha-gämini), nourishes the worlds (dharä and vicva-bharä), is limitless (anantä), flows on the earth (bhumi), maintains the earth (dhätri), is very tolerant (ksamämayi), . . .

Text 118

sthirä dharitri dharani
     urvi cesa-phana-sthitä
ayodhyä räghava-puri
     kauciki raghu-vamsa-jä

 . . . is steady and peaceful (sthirä), maintains the earth (dharitri, dharani, and urvi), stays under Sesa's hoods (cesa-phana-sthitä), stays in Ayodhyä (ayodhyä and räghava-puri), is worshiped by Vicvamitra (kauciki), worships Lord Rämacandra (raghuvamsajä), . . . 

Text 119

mathurä mäthuri panthä
     yädavi dhruva-pujitä
mayäyur bilva-nilodä
     gaggä-dvära-vinirgatä

 . . . flows by Mathurä (mathurä and mäthuri), flows in a beautiful course (panthä), flows by the city of the Yädavas (yädavi), is worshiped by Dhruva (dhruva-pujitä), gave a long life to Mayäsura (mayäyuù), has waters dark as bilva leaves (bilva-nilodä), flows from Haridvära (gaggä-dvära-vinirgatä), . . .

Text 120

kucävarta-mayi dhrauvyä
     dhruva-manòala-madhya-gä
käci civa-puri cesä
     vindhyä väränasi civä

 . . . flows by Kucävarta (kucävarta-mayi), is worshiped by Dhruva (dhrauvyä), flows through Dhruvaloka (dhruva-manòala-madhya-gä), flows by Väränasi (käci, civa-puri, and väränasi), is perfect (cesä), flows by the Vindhyä Hills (vindhyä), is auspicious (civä), . . .

Text 121

avantikä devapuri
     projjvalojjayini jitä
dvärävati dvära-kämä
     kuca-bhutä kucasthali

 . . . flows by Avantikä-puyra (avantikä), flows by Devapuri (devapuri), is splendid (projjvalä), flows by Ujjayini (ujjayini), is victorious (jitä), flows by Dvärakä (dvärävati, kuca-bhutä, and kucasthali), fulfills all desires (dvära-kämä), . . . 

Text 122

mahä-puri sapta-puri
     nandi-gräma-sthala-sthitä
cälagräma-cilädityä
     cambhala-gräma-madhyagä

 . . . flows by many great cities (mahä-puri), flows by seven cities (sapta-puri), flows by Nanda-gräma (nandi-gräma-sthala-sthitä), is a friend of the Ganòaki river, where the Sälagräma-ciläs are manifest (cälagräma-cilädityä), flows by Sambhala-gräma (cambhala-gräma-madhyagä), . . .

Text 123

vamca-gopälini ksiptä
     hari-mandira-vartini
barhismati hastipuri
     cakra-prastha-niväsini

 . . . worships the flutist Krsna (vamca-gopälini), has renounced the material world (ksiptä), is a palace for Lord Krsna's pastimes (hari-mandira-vartini), flows by Barhismati-pura (barhismati), flows by Hastinäpura (hastipuri), flows by King Indra's residence (cakra-prastha-niväsini), . . .

Text 124

däòimi saindhavi jambuù
     pauskari puskara-prasuù
utkalävarta-gamanä
     naimisi naimisävrtä

 . . . nourishes many pomegranate trees (däòimi), flows to the ocean (saindhavi), is a friend of the Jambu river (jambu), is a friend of Puskara-tirtha (pauskari and puskara-prasu), flows through Orissa (utkalävarta-gamanä), flows by Naimisäranya (naimisi and naimisävrtä), . . .

Text 125

kurujäggala-bhuù käli
     haimavaty-arbudi budhä
cukara-ksetra-viditä
     cveta-väräha-dhäritä

 . . . flows through Kurujäggala (kurujäggala-bhu), has a dark complexion (käli), is born from the Himälayas (haimavati), is dark as a cloud (arbudi), is wise (budhä), flows by Sukara-ksetra (cukara-ksetra-viditä), is maintained by Lord Sveta-varäha (cveta-väräha-dhäritä), . . .

Text 126

sarva-tirthamayi tirthä
     tirthänäm tirtha-kärini
härini sarva-dosänäm
     däyini sarva-sampadäm

 . . . contains all holy places within her waters (sarva-tirthamayi and tirthä), makes the holy places sacred (tirthänäm tirtha-kärini), removes all sins (härini sarva-dosänäm), gives all good fortune (däyini sarva-sampadäm), . . .

Text 127

vardhini tejasäm säksäd
     garbha-väsa-nikrntani
goloka-dhäma-dhanini
     nikunja-nija-manjari

 . . . brings glory and power (vardhini tejasäm), has directly appeared in this world (säksät), ends the need to again be born in a mother's womb (garbha-väsa-nikrntani), is the opulence of Goloka (goloka-dhäma-dhanini), is a graceful flower to decorate her own transcendental forest (nikunja-nija-ma 24jari), . . .

Text 128

sarvottamä sarva-punyä
     sarva-saundarya-crgkhalä
sarva-tirthopari-gatä
     sarva-tirthädhidevatä

 . . . is the greatest (sarvottamä), is supremely sacred (sarva-punyä), has all beauty (sarva-saundarya-crgkhalä), is the best of all holy places (sarva-tirthopari-gatä), is the deity worshiped by all holy places (sarva-tirthädhidevatä), . . .

Text 129

cridä crisä cri-niväsä
     cri-nidhiù cri-vibhävanä
svaksä svaggä catänandä
     nandä jyotir ganecvari

 . . . gives beauty, glory, and wealth (cridä), is the queen of beauty, glory, and wealth (crisä), is the abode of beauty, glory, and wealth (cri-niväsä), is a treasury of beauty, glory, and wealth (cri-nidhiù and cri-vibhävanä), has beautiful eyes (svaksä), has beautiful limbs (svaggä), has a hundred blisses (catänandä), is filled with happiness (nandä), is splendid (jyoti), and is a leader of the gopis (ganecvari).

Text 130

nämnäm sahasram kälindyäù
     kirtidam kämadam param
mahä-päpa-haram punyam
     äyur-vardhanam uttamam

     nämnäm - of names; sahasram - thousand; kälindyäù - of the Yamunä; kirtidam - giving fame; kämadam - fulfilling desires; param - great; mahä-päpa - great sins; haram - removing; punyam - sacred; äyur-vardhanam - increasing life; uttamam - transcendental.

     These thousand sacred names of Sri Yamunä bring fame and fulfill all desires. They remove the greatest sins. They increase the span of life.

Text 131

eka-väram pathed rätrau
     caurebhyo na bhayam bhavet
dvi-väram prapathen märge
     däsyubhyo na bhayam kvacit

     eka - one; väram - time; pathet - recites; rätrau - at night; caurebhyaù - from thieves; na - not;  bhayam - fear; bhavet - will be; dvi-väram - two times; prapathet - recites; märge - on the path; däsyubhyaù - from highwaymen; na - not; bhayam - fear;  kvacit - in any way.

     A person who once recites these names need not fear thieves at night. A person who twice recites these names need not fear highwaymen.

Texts 132 and 133

dvitiyam tu samärabhya
     pathet purnävadhim dvijaù
daca-väram idam bhaktyä
     dhyätvä devim kälindajäm

rogi rogät pramucyeta
     baddho mucyetä bandhanät
gurvini janayet putram
     vidyärthi panòito bhavet

     dvitiyam - second; tu - indeed; samärabhya - beginning; pathet - recites; purnävadhim - full; dvijaù - brähmana; daca-väram - ten times; idam - this; bhaktyä - with devotion; dhyätvä - meditating; devim - on goddess Yamunä; kälindajäm - the daughter of Mount Kalinda; rogi - dioseased; rogät - from disease; pramucyeta - freed; baddhaù - imprisoned; mucyetä - is freed; bandhanät - from prison; gurvini - desiring children; janayet - will beget; putram - a son; vidyärthi - desiring knowledge; panòitaù - a scholar; bhavet - will become.

     A brähmana who chants these names ten times as he devotedly meditates on Sri Yamunä, if he is diseased becomes free of his disease, if he is imprisoned becomes released from prison, if he wishes a son begets a son, if he wishes knowledges, becomes a learned scholar, . . . 

Text 134

mohanam stambhanam cacvad
     vaci-käranam evä ca
uccätanam ghätanam ca
     cosanam dipanam tathä

     mohanam - bewilderment; stambhanam - paralysis; cacvat - always; vaci-käranam - being under the conmtrol of others; evä - indeed; ca - and; uccätanam - exile; ghätanam - viloent attacks; ca - and;  cosanam - withering; dipanam - panic; tathä - so.

 . . . and becomes free from bewilderment, paralysis, being under others' control, forced exile, being attacked by others, withering away, panic, . . .

Text 135

unmädanam täpanam ca
     nidhi-darcanam evä ca
yad yad vänchati cittena
     tat tat präpnoti mänavaù

     unmädanam - madness; täpanam - suffering; ca - and;  nidhi-darcanam - seeing wealth; evä - indeed; ca - and; yad yat - whatever; vä 24chati - desires; cittena - in his heart; tat tat - thAT; präpnoti - attains; mänavaù - a person.

 . . . madness, and suffering. He attains great wealth. He attains whatever he desires in his heart.

Text 136

brähmano brahma-varcasvi
     räjanyo jagati-patiù
vaicyo nidhi-patir bhuyäc
     chudraù crutvä tu nirmalaù

     brähmanaù - a brähmana; brahma-varcasvi - brahminical power; räjanyaù - kings; jagati-patiù - the master of the world; vaicyaù - a vaisya; nidhi-patiù - the master of great welath; bhuyät - may be; cudraù - a sudra; crutvä - hearing; tu - indeed; nirmalaù - pure.

     By hearing these thousand names a brähmana attains great brahminical power, a ksatriya becomes king of the world, a vaicya becomes the master of great wealth, and a cudra becomes pure in heart.

Text 137

puja-käle tu yo nityam
     pathate bhakti-bhävataù
lipyate nä sa päpena
     padma-patram ivämbhasä

     puja-käle - at the time of worship; tu - indeed; yaù - one who; nityam - regularly; pathate - recites; bhakti-bhävataù - with devotion; lipyate - is touched; nä - not; sa - he; päpena - by sin; padma-patram - a lotus leaf; iva - like; ambhasä - by water.

     A person who when he worships the Lord recites these thousand names of Sri Yamunä is never touched by sin as a lotus leaf is never touched by water.

Texts 138 and 139

cata-väram pathen nityam
     varsävadhim ataù param
patalam paddhatim krtvä
     stavam cä kavacam tathä
sapta-dvipa-mahi-räjyam
     präpnuyän nätra samcayaù

     cata-väram - a hundred times; pathen - recites; nityam - regularly; varsävadhim - for a year; ataù - then; param - from; patalam - patalam; paddhatim - paddhati; krtvä - doing; stavam - stava; cä - and; kavacam - kavaca; tathä - so; sapta-dvipa-mahi-räjyam - the kingdom of the seven continents; präpnuyät - attains; na - not; atra - here; samcayaù - doubt.

     A person who for one year every day recites these names one hundred times and every day performs the Yamunä-patala, Yamunä-paddhati, Yamunä-stava, and Yamunä-kavaca, becomes king of the seven dvipas. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 140

niskäranam pathed yas tu
     yamunä-bhakti-samyutaù
traivargyam etya sukrti
     jivan-mukto bhaved iha

     niskäranam - without motive; pathet - recites; yaù - one who; tu - indeed; yamunä-bhakti-samyutaù - with devotion fro Sri Yamunä; traivargyam - the three goals of life; etya - attaining; sukrti - pious; jivan-muktaù - liberated in this life; bhavet - becomes; iha - in this world.

     A person who, devoted to Sri Yamunä and free of material motives, recites these prayers, attains the three goals of life, becomes saintly, and becomes liberated even in this world.

Text 141

nikunja-lilä-lalitam manoharam
     kalindajä-kula-latä-kadambakam
vrndävanonmatta-milinda-cabditam
     vrajet sa golokam idam pathec ca yaù

     nikunja - in the forest groves; lilä - pastimes; lalitam - charming; manoharam - beautiful; kalindajä-kula - by the Yamunä's shore; latä-kadambakam - vines; vrndävana - og Vrndävana; unmatta - intoxicated; milinda - of bumblebees; cabditam - filled with the sounds; vrajet - goes; sa - he; golokam - to Goloka; idam - this; pathet - reads; ca - and; yaù - one who.

     A person who recites these hundred names goes to Goloka, the beautiful realm filled with flowering vines by the Yamunä's shore, the sound of intoxicated bees, and the charming pastimes of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. .pa

Chapter Twenty
Pralamba-vadha
The Killing of Pralamba

Text 1

cri-närada uväca 
iti krsnä-stavam crutvä
     mandhätä nrpa-sattamaù
ayodhyäm präyayau viro
     natvä cri-saubharim munim

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; iti - thus; krsna-stavam - Sri Yamunä-stava; crutvä - hearing; mandhätä - King Mandhata; nrpa - of kings; sattamaù - the best; ayodhyäm - to Ayodhyä; präyayau - went; viraù - hero; natvä - bowing down; cri-saubharim - to Sri Saubhari; munim - the sage.

     Sri Närada said: After hearing these prayers glorifying Sri Yamunä, and after offering his respectful obeisances to Sri Saubhari Muni, the great king Mandhätä went to Aytodhyä.

Text 2

idam mayä te kathitam
     gopinäm caritam cubham
mahä-päpa-haram punyam
     kim bhuyaù crotum icchasi

     idam - this; mayä - by me; te - to you; kathitam - spoken; gopinäm - of the gopis; caritam - the pastimes; cubham - beautiful; mahä-päpa-haram - removing the greatest sins; punyam - sacred; kim - what?; bhuyaù - more; crotum - to hear; icchasi - you wish.

     I have now told you the beautiful story of the gopis, a sacred story that removes the greatest sins. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 3

cri-bahuläcva uväca 
crutam tava mukhäd brahman
     gopinäm varnanam param
yamunäyäc ca pancäggam
     mahä-pätaka-näcanam

     cri-bahuläcva uväca - Sri Bahuläcva said; crutam - heard; tava - from you; mukhät - mouth; brahman - O brähmana; gopinäm - of the gopis; varnanam - description; param - great; yamunäyäc - of Sri Yamunä; ca - and; pancäggam - pancanga; mahä-pätaka - great sins; näcanam - destroying.

     Sri Bahuläcva said: O brähmana, now I have heard from your mouth the story of the gopis and the description of the pa 24ägga worship of Sri Yamunä, worship that destroys the greatest sins.

Text 4

cri-krsnaù sa-balaù säksäd
     golokädhipatiù prabhuù
agre cakära kam liläm
     lalitäm vraja-manòale

     cri-krsnaù - Sri Krsna; sa-balaù - accompanied by Balaräma; säksät - directly; golokädhipatiù - the king of Goloka; prabhuù - the Lord; agre - in the presence;  cakära - did; käm - what?; liläm - pastimes; lalitäm - charming; vraja-manòale - in the circle of Vraja.

     What charming pastimes did Lord Krsna, the king of Goloka, then enjoy with Balaräma in the circle of Vraja?

Text 5

cri-närada uväca 
ekadä cärayan gäù sväù
     sa-balo gopa-bälakaiù
bhänòire yamunä-tire
     bäla-liläm cakära ha

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; ekadä - one day; cärayan - herding; gäù - the cows; sväù - own; sa-balaù - with Balaräma; gopa-bälakaiù - with the gopa boys;  bhänòire - in Bhandiravana; yamunä-tire - by the Yamunä's shore; bäla-liläm - childhood pastimes; cakära - did;  ha - indeed.

     Sri Närada said: One day, as He was herding His cows in Bhänòiravana forest by the Yamunä's shore, Krsna played many childhood games with Balaräma and the gopa boys. 

Text 6

vihäram kärayan bälair
     vähya-vähaka-laksanam
vijahära vane krsno
     darcayan gä manoharäù

     vihäram - playing; kärayan - doing; bälaiù - with the boys; vähya-vähaka-laksanam - the carried and the carriers; vijahära - played; vane - in the forest; krsnaù - Krsna; darcayan - showing; gäù - the cows; manoharäù - beautiful.

     Keeping an eye on the beautiful cows, Krsna played a game of carried and carriers with the boys.

Text 7

taträgato gopa-rupi
     pralambaù kamsa-noditaù
na jnäto bälakaiù so 'pi
     harinä vidito 'bhavat

     tatra - there; ägataù - come; gopa-rupi - in the form of a gopa; pralambaù - Pralamba; kamsa-noditaù - sent by Kamsa; na - not; jnätaù - known; bälakaiù - by the boys; saù - he; api - although; harinä - by Krsna; viditaù - known; abhavat - was.

     Sent by Kamsa, and now assuming the form of a gopa, the demon Pralamba came there. Although the gopas did not know who he really was, Krsna did.

Text 8

vihäre vijayam rämam
     netum ko 'pi na manyate
uväha tam pralambo 'sau
     bhänòiräd yamunä-tatam

     vihäre - in the game; vijayam - victorious; rämam - Balaräma; netum - to carry; ko 'pi - someone; na - not; manyate - is considered; uväha - carried; tam - Him; pralambaù - Pralamba; asau - he; bhänòirät - from Bhänòiravana; yamunä-tatam - to the Yamunä's shore.

     When Balaräma won in the game there was no one to carry Him. Pralamba offered to carry Him. Pralamba carried Him out of Bhänòiravana forest, far away to the Yamunä's shore. 

Text 9

avarohanato daityo
     mathuräm gantum udyataù
dadhära ghanavad rupam
     girindra iva durgamaù

     avarohanataù - descending; daityaù - the demon; mathuräm - to Mathurä; gantum - to go; udyataù - beginning; dadhära - held; ghanavat - like a cloud; rupam - a form; girindra - the king of mountains; iva - like; durgamaù - imposing.

     Suddenly assuming a monstrous form like a great cloud or an impassible king of mountains, the demon went in the direction of Mathurä.

Text 10

babhau balo daitya-prsthe
     sundaro lola-kunòalaù
äkäca-stha purna-candraù
     sa-taòij-jalato yathä

     babhau - was splendidly manifest; balaù - Balaräma; daitya-prsthe - on the demon's back; sundaraù - handsome; lola-kunòalaù - swinging earring; äkäca - in the sky; stha - situated; purna-candraù - a full moon; sa-taòij-jalataù - a cloud with lightning; yathä - as.

     Riding on the demon's back, handsome Balaräma was splendid as a moving earring, a full moon in the sky, or a glittering lightning flash.

Text 11

daityam bhayagkaram viksya
     baladevo mahä-balaù
rusähanan mustinä tam
     cirasy adrim yathädri-bhit

     daityamthe demon; bhayagkaram - a monstrous form; viksya - seeing; baladevaù - Balaräma; mahä-balaù - very powerful; rusä-angrily; ahanat - hit; mustinä - with a fist; tam - him; cirasy - on the head;  adrim - a mountain; yathä - like; adri-bhit - Indra.

     As King Indra hits a mountain with his thundersbolt, so powerful Balaräma, noticing that His carrier had become a monster, punched Pralamba's head with His fist.

Text 12

vicirna-mustako daityo
     yathä vajra-hato giriù
papäta bhumau sahasä
     cälayan vasudhä-talam

     vicirna - broken; mustakaù - head; daityaù - the demon; yathä - as; vajra-hataù - hit by a thunderbolt; giriù - a mountain; papäta - fell; bhumau - to the ground; sahasä - at once; cälayan - shaking; vasudhä-talam - the earth.

     Falling the ground as a mountain hit by Indra's thunderbolt falls, the demon, his head broken, made the earth tremble.

Text 13

taj-jyotir nirgatam dirgham
     bale linam babhuva ha
tadaiva vavrsur deväù
     puspair nandana-sambhavaiù

     taj-jyotiù - his light; nirgatam - left; dirgham - long; bale - in Balaräma; linam - entered; babhuva - was; ha - indeed; tadä - then; eva - indeed; vavrsuù - showered; deväù - the demigods;  puspaiù - with flowers; nandana-sambhavaiù - grown in the Nandana gardens.

     A great effulgence left the demon and merged into Lord Balaräma. Then the demigods showered flowers from the Nandana gardens.

Text 14

abhuj jaya-jayärävo
     divi bhumau nrpecvara
evam cri-baladevasya
     caritam paramädbhutam
mayä te kathitam räjan
     kim bhutaù crotum icchasi

     abhut - was; jaya-jayärävaù - the sound of Victory! Vicotry!; divi - in the sky; bhumau - on the earth;  nrpecvara - O king of kjings; evam - thus; cri-baladevasya - of zBalaräma; caritam - the pastime; paramädbhutam - very wonderful; mayä - by me; te - to you; kathitam - spoken; rajan - O king; kim - what?; bhuyaù - more; crotum - to hear; icchasi - you wish.

     O king of kings, then sounds of "Victory! Victory!" filled the heaven and earth. O king, now that I have recounted for you this wonderful pastime of Lord Balaräma, what more do you wish to hear?

Text 15

cri-bahuläcva uväca 
ko 'yam daityaù purva-käle
     pralambo rana-durmadaù
baladevasya hastena
     muktim präpa katham mune

     cri-bahuläcva uväca - Sri Bahuläcva said; kaù - who?;  ayam - this; daityaù - demon; purva-käle - in previous time; pralambaù - Pralamba; rana-durmadaù - ferocious; baladevasya - pf Lord Balaräma; hastena - by the fist; muktim - liberation; präpa - qattained; katham - how?; mune - O sage.

     Sri Bahuläcva said: O sage, who was the ferocious demon Pralamba in his previous birth that he was able to attain liberation by Lord Balaräma's hand?

Text 16

cri-närada uväca 
civasya pujanärtham hi
     yaksa-rät sva-vane cubhe
kärayäm äsa puspänäm
     raksäm yaksair itas tataù

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; civasya - of Lord Suva; pujanärtham - for the worship; hi - indeed; yaksa-rät - the king of the Yaksas; sva-vane - in his own forest; cubhe - beautiful; kärayäm äsa - made; puspänäm - of flowers; raksäm - raksa; yaksaiù - by yaksas; itas tataù - here and there.

     Sri Närada said: To worship Lord Siva, one day the yaksa-king Kuvera had the yaksas place here and there in his berautiful forest many raksä-amulets made of flowers.

Text 17

tad apy asyäpi jagrhuù
     puspäni prasphuranti ca
tataù kruddho dadau cäpam
     yaksa-räò dhanado bali

     tat - that; apy - also; asya - of that; api - also; jagrhuù - took; puspäni - flowers; prasphuranti - maniufest; ca - and; tataù - then; kruddhaù - angered; dadau - gave; cäpam - a curse; yaksa-räò - the yaksa-king; dhanadaù - Kuvera; bali - powerful.

     When the some of the flowers were stolen, the powerful yaksa-king Kuvera spoke a curse.

Text 18

ye grhnanty asya puspäni
     sve cänye sura-mänaväù
bhavitäro 'suräù sarve
     mac-chäpät sahasä bhuvi

     ye - whoever; grhnanty - takes; asya - of this; puspäni - the flowers; sve - own; ca - and; anye - in another; sura - demigod; mänaväù - or human; bhavitäraù - will become; asuräù - demons; sarve - all;  mac-chäpät - by my curse; sahasä - at once; bhuvi - on the earth.

     He said: Any demigod or human that takes any of these flowers will become a demon. That is my curse.

Text 19

huhu-suto 'atha vijayo
     vicarams tirtha-bhumisu
vanam caitraratham präpto
     gäyan visnu-gunän pathi

     huhu-sutaù - the son of Huhu; atha - then; vijayaù - Vijaya; vicaran - walking; tirtha-bhumisu - to holy places; vanam - to the forest; caitraratham - Caitraratha; präptaù - attained; gäyan - singing; visnu-gunän - the glories of Lord Visnu; pathi - on the path.

     Then the gandharva Vijaya, who was the son of Huhu, walking on a pilgrimage to many holy places, and singing Lord Visnu's glories as he went, came to Caitraratha forest.

Text 20

vinä-pänir ajänan vai
     gandharvaù sumanämsi ca
grhitvä so 'suro jäto
     gandharvatvam vihäya tat

     vinä - a vina; päniù - in his hand; ajänan - unaware; vai - indeed; gandharvaù - the gandharva; sumanämsi - sumanah flowers; ca - and; grhitvä - taking; saù - he; asuraù - a demon; jätaù - born; gandharvatvam - his gandharvahood; vihäya - leaving behind; tat - that.

     Unaware of the curse, the gandharva, vinä in hand, took some of the sumanaù flowers there. At once he left his gandharva body and became a demon.

Text 21

tadaiva caranam präptaù
     kuverasya mahätmanaù
natvä tat-prärthanam cakre
     krtänjali-putaù canaiù

     tadä - then; eva - indeed; caranam - shelter; präptaù - attained; kuverasya - of Kuvera; mahätmanaù - the great soul; natvä - bowing down; tat-prärthanam - a prayer to him; cakre - did; krtänjali-putaù - with folded hands; canaiù - slowly.

     At once he took shelter of the great soul Kuvera. With folded hands he bowed down and presented his appeal.

Text 22

tasmai prasanno räjendra
     kuvero 'pi varam dadau
tvam visnu-bhaktaù cäntätmä
     mä cokam kuru mänada

     tasmai - with him; prasannaù - pleased; räjendra - O king of kings; kuveraù - Kuvera; api - also; varam - a boon; dadau - gave; tvam - you; visnu-bhaktaù - a devotee of Lord Visnu; cäntätmä - peaceful at heart; mä - don't; cokam - lament; kuru - do; mänada - O respectful one.

     Pleased with him, Kuvera blessed him: You are a peaceful-hearted devotee of Lord Visnu. O respectful one, please don't lament.

Text 23

dvaparänte ca te muktir
     baladevasya hastataù
bhavisyati na sandeho
     bhänòire yamunä-tate

     dvaparänte - at the end of Dvapara-yuga; ca - and; te - of you; muktiù - liberation; baladevasya - of Lord Balaräma; hastataù - by the hand; bhavisyati - will be; na - not; sandehaù - doubt; bhänòire - in Bhanmdiravana; yamunä-tate - by the Yamunä's shore.

     At the end of Dväpara-yuga, in Bhänòiravaana forest by the Yamunä's shore, you will attain liberation by Lord Balaräma's hand. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 24

cri-närada uväca 
huhu-sutaù sa gandharvaù
     pralambo 'bhun mahäsuraù
kuverasya varäd räjan
     param moksam jagäma ha

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; huhu-sutaù - the son of Huhu; sa - he; gandharvaù - gandharva; pralambaù - Pralamba; abhut - became; mahäsuraù - a great demon; kuverasya - of Kuvera; varät - by the nl; essing; räjan - O kingl; param moksam - liberation;  jagäma - attained; ha - indeed.

     Sri Närada said: In this way Huhu's gandharva son became a great demon and, by Kuvera's grace, attained liberation.
.pa

Chapter Twenty-one
Dävägni-moksa-vipra-patni-darcana
Lord Krsna Extinguishes the Forest Fire and Reveals Himself to the  Brähmana's Wives

Text 1

cri-närada uväca 
atha kriòä-prasaktesu
     gopesu sa-balesu ca
trna-lobhena vivicur
     gävaù sarväù mahad vanam

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; atha - then; kriòä-prasaktesu - intent on playing; gopesu - when the gopas; sa-balesu - with Balaräma; ca - amd; trna-lobhena - eager for grass; vivicuù - entered; gävaù - the cows; sarväù - all; mahat - the great; vanam - forest.

     Sri Närada said: As Balaräma and the gopas intently played, all the cows, hungry for more grass, went far into the forest.

Text 2

tä änetum gopa-bäläù
     präpta munjätavim paräm
sambhutas tatra dävägniù
     pralayägni-samo mahän

     täù - them; änetum - to bring back; gopa-bäläù - the gopa boyas; präpta - attained; mu 24jätavim - Munjatavi forest; paräm - great; sambhutaù - manifested; tatra - there; dävägniù - a forest fire; pralayägni-samaù - like the fire at the time of cosmic anihilation; mahän - great.

     When to bring them back the gopa boys went to Mu 24jätavi forest, a great forest fire, like the fire at the end of the universe, suddenly flared up.

Text 3

gobhir gopäù sametäs te
     cri-krsnam sa-balam harim
vadantaù pähi pähiti
     bhayärtäù caranam gatäù

     gobhiù - the cows; gopäù - the gopas; sametäù - with; te - they; cri-krsnam - to Sri Krsna; sa-balam - and Balaräma; harim - Lord Krsna; vadantaù - saying; pähi - save!; pähiti - save!; bhayärtäù - frightened; caranam - shelter; gatäh - went.

     Followed by the cows, and calling out "Save us! Save us!", the frightened gopas took shelter of Krsna and Balaräma. 

Text 4

viksya vahni-bhayam svänäm
     krsno yogecvarecvaraù
nyamilayata mä bhaista
     locananänity abhäsata

     viksya - seeing; vahni - of the fire; bhayam - the fear; svänäm - of His devotees; krsnaù - Krsna; yogecvarecvaraù - the master of yoga; nyamilayata - close;  mä - don't; bhaista - fear; locananäni - eyes; iti - thus; abhäsata - said.

     Seeing that His friends were afraid of the fire, Krsna, the master of all yoga powers, said to them, "Close your eyes. Don't be afraid."

Text 5

tathä-bhutesu gopesu
     tam agnim bhaya-kärakam
apibad bhagavän devo
     devänäm pacyatäm nrpa

     tathä-bhutesu - doing that; gopesu - the gopas; tam - that; agnim - fire; bhaya-kärakam - terrifying; apibat - drank; bhagavän - the Lord; devaù - the master;  devänäm - of the dmeigods; pacyatäm - looking on; nrpa - O king.

     As the gopas closed their eyes and the demigods looked on, Lord Krsna drank up that terrifying fire.

Text 6

evam pitvä mahä-vahnim
     nitvä gopäla-go-ganam
präpto 'bhud yamunä-päre
     cubhäcoka-vane hariù

     evam - thus; pitvä - having drunk; mahä-vahnim - the great fire; nitvä - bringing; gopäla-go-ganam - the gopsas and cows; präptaù - attained; abhut - was; yamunä-päre - on the other shore of thr Yamunä; cubha - beautiful; acoka - of asoka trees; vane - in the forest; hariù - Lord Krsna.

     After drinking up the great fire, Lord Krsna took the cows and gopas to a beautiful acoka forest on the Yamunä's farther shore.

Text 7

tatra ksut-piòitä gopäù
     cri-krsnam sa-balam harim
krtänjali-putä ucuù
     ksudhärtäù sma vayam prabho

     tatra - there; ksut-piòitä - tormented with hunger; gopäù - the gopas; cri-krsnam - to Sri Krsna; sa-balam - and Balaräma; harim - Krsna; krtänjali-putä - with folded hands; ucuù - said; ksudhärtäù - tormented with hunder; sma - indeed; vayam - we are; prabhaù - O master.

     Tormented with hunger, the gopas, respectfully folding their hands said to Krsna and Balaräma, "O Lord, we are tormented with hunger." 

Text 8

tadä tän presayäm äsa
     yajna äggirase hariù
te gatvä tam yajna-väram
     natvocur vimalam vacaù

     tadä - then; tän - them; presayäm äsa - sent; yajne äggirase - to an angirasa-yajna; hariù - Krsna; te - they; gatvä - going; tam - this;  yajna-väram - to the brähmana assembled for the yajna; natvä - bowing down; ucuù - spoke; vimalam - sweet; vacaù - words.

     Lord Krsna sent them to a place where an äggirasa-yaj 24a was being performed. The boys went to the yajna, bowed down before the performers of the yajna, and spoke many sweet words.

Text 9

cri-gopä ucuù 
gopäla-bälaiù sa-balaù samägato
     gäc cärayan chri-vraja-räja-nandanaù
ksut-samyuto 'smai sa-ganäya bhusuräù
     prayacchatäcv annam anagga-mohine

     cri-gopä ucuù - the gopas said; gopäla-bälaiù - with gopa boys; sa-balaù - with Balaräma; samägataù - come; gäc - cows; cärayan - herding; cri-vraja-räja-nandanaù - the prince of Vraja; ksut-samyutaù - hungry; asmai - to Him; sa-ganäya - and His company; bhusuräù - O brähmanas; prayacchata - please give; äcu - now; annam - food; anagga-mohinemore charming than Kämadeva.

     The gopas said: Herding the cows in the company of Balaräma and many gopa boys, Sri Krsna, the prince of Vraja, who is more handsome than Kämadeva, is now hungry. O brähmanas, please give some food to Him and His companions.

Text 10

cri-närada uväca 
na kincid ucus te sarve
     vacaù crutvä dvijä nrpa
gopä niräcä ägatya
     ity ucuù sa-balam harim

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; na - not; ki 24cit - anything; ucuù - said; te - they; sarve - all; vacaù - words; crutvä - hearing; dvijä - the brähmanas; nrpa - O king; gopä - the gopas;  niräcä - giving up hope;  ägatya - returning; ity - thus; ucuù - said; sa-balam - with Balaräma; harim - to Lord Krsna.

     Sri Närada said: Although they heard these words, the brähmanas did not say anything in reply. Giving up hope, the gopas returned and told all this to Krsna and Balaräma.

Text 11

cri-gopä ucuù 
tvam asy adhico vraja-manòale bali
     cri-gokule nanda-puro 'gra-danòa-dhrk
na vartate danòam alam madhoù puri
     pracanòa-canòämsu-mahas tava sphurat

     cri-gopä ucuù - the gopas said; tvam - You; asy - are; adhicaù - the Lord; vraja-manòale - in the circle of Vraja; bali - powerful; cri-gokule - in Sri Gokula; nanda-puraù - in Nanda-pura; agra-danòa-dhrk - the right punish others; na - not; vartate - is;  danòam - punishment; alam - enough; madhoù puri - in Mathurä; pracanòa-canòämsu-mahaù - glorious and powerful as the blazing sun; tava - by You; sphurat - manifested.

     The gopas said: You are the powerful ruler in the circle of Vraja. In Sri Gokula and in Nandapura You have the right to punish others. In this land of Mathurä You are glorious and powerful and the blazing son. There is not punishment enough that You can give to these people.

Text 12

cri-närada uväca 

punas tän presayäm äsa
     tat-patnibhyo hariù svayam
yajna-vätam punar gatvä
     natvä vipra-priyäs tadä
krtänjali-putä ucur
     gopäù krsna-pranoditäù

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; punaù - again; tän - them; presayäm äsa - sent; tat-patnibhyaù - to their wives; hariù - Krsna; svayam - personally; yaj 24a-vätam - tp the place of the yajna; punaù - again; gatvä - going; natvä - bowing down; vipra-priyäù - to the brähmanas' wives; tadä - then; krtänjali-putä - with folded hands; ucuù - said; gopäù - the gopas; krsna - by Lord Krsna; pranoditäù - sent.

     Lord Krsna sent them again, this time to the brähmanas' wives. Arriving at the place of the yajna, the gopas sent by Krsna bowed down before the brähmanas' wives and, respectfully folding their hands, spoke.

Text 13

cri-gopä ucuù 
gopäla-bälaiù sa-balaù samägato
     gäc cärayan chri-vraja-räja-nandanaù
ksut-samyuto 'smai sa-ganäya cägganäù
     prayacchatäcv annam anagga-mohine

     cri-gopä ucuù - the gopas said; gopäla-bälaiù - with gopa boys; sa-balaù - with Balaräma; samägataù - come; gäc - cows; cärayan - herding; cri-vraja-räja-nandanaù - the prince of Vraja; ksut-samyutaù - hungry; asmai - to Him; sa-ganäya - and His company; ca - and; agganäù - O ladies; prayacchata - please give; äcu - now; annam - food; anagga-mohinemore charming than Kämadeva.

     The gopas said: Herding the cows in the company of Balaräma and many gopa boys, Sri Krsna, the prince of Vraja, who is more handsome than Kämadeva, is now hungry. O ladies, please give some food to Him and His companions.

Texts 14 and 15

cri-närada uväca 
krsnam samägatam crutvä
     krsna-darcana-lälasäù
cakrus tathännam pätresu
     nitvä sarvä dvijägganäù

tyaktvä sadyo loka-lajjäm
     krsna-pärcvam samäyayuù
acokänäm vane ramye
     krsnä-tire manohare

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; krsnam - Lord Krsna; samägatam - come; crutvä - hearing; krsna-darcana - to see Lord Krsna; lälasäù - eager; cakruù - became; tathä - then; annam - food; pätresu - in vessals; nitvä - taking; sarvä - all; dvijägganäù - the brahmanis; tyaktvä - abandoning; sadyaù - at once; loka-lajjäm - shyness of what people may think; krsna-pärcvam - to Lord Krsna's side; samäyayuù - went; acokänäm - of asoka trees; vane - in the forest; ramye - beautiful; krsnä-tire - on the Yamunä's shore; manohare - beautiful.

     Sri Närada said: When they heard that Krsna had come, the brähmana women became very eager to see Him. Taking different kinds of food in many containers, and not thinking of how they might be criticized for their actions, they all went to Krsna in the beautiful acoka forest by the Yamunä's beautiful shore.

Text 16

yathä crutam tathä drstam
     cri-hareù rupam adbhutam
präpyänandam gatäù sarväs
     turiyam yogino yathä

     yathä - as; crutam - heard; tathä - so; drstam - seen; cri-hareù - of Sri Krsna; rupam - teh form; adbhutam - wonderful; präpya - attaining; änandam - blissed; gatäù - attained; sarväù - all; turiyam - the transcendental position; yoginaù - yogis; yathä - as.

     When they saw Lord Krsna's wonderful form, which was just as they had heard it described, they became filled with bliss. They all attained the transcendental platform attained by the greatest yogis.

Text 17

cri-bhagavän uväca 
dhanyä yuyam darcanärtham
     ägatä he dvijägganäù
pratiyäta grhän chighram
     niùcagkä bhumi-devatäù

     cri-bhagavän uväca - the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; dhanya - fortunate; yuyam - you all; darcanärtham - to see; ägatä - come; he - O; dvijägganäù - brähmana women; pratiyäta - please return; grhän - to your homes; cighram - at once; niùcagkä - without fear; bhumi-devatäh -  - O brähmanas.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O brähmanis, you are all very fortunate to have come here to see Me. Now, without any fear, please return to your homes.

Texts 18 and 19

yusmäkam tu prabhävena
     patayo vo dvijätayaù
sadyo yajna-phalam präpya
     yusmäbhiù saha nirmaläù

gamisyanti param dhäma
     golokam prakrteù param
atha natvä harim sarvä
     äjagmur yajna-manòale

     yusmäkam - of you; tu - indeed; prabhävena - by the power; patayaù - husbands; vaù - of you; dvijätayaù - brähmanas; sadyaù - at once; yajna-phalam - the result of the yajna; präpya - attaining; yusmäbhiù - with you all; saha - with; nirmaläù - pure;  gamisyanti - will go; param - to the supreme; dhäma - abode; golokam - Goloka; prakrteù - the material energy; param - above; atha - then; natvä - bowing; harim - to Lord Hari; sarvä - all; äjagmuù - returned; yajna-manòale - to the circle of the yajna.

     After attaining the result of this yajn, your pure-hearted brähmana husbands will go, by Your spiritual power, to the supreme abode of Goloka, which is beyond the world of matter.

     Then all the women offered their respectful obeisances to Lord Krsna and returned to the circle of the yajna.

Text 20

cri-närada uväca 
tä drstvä brähmanäù sarve
     svätmänam dhik pracakrire
didrksavas te cri-krsnam
     kamsäd bhitä na cägatäù

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; tä - they; drstvä - seeing; brähmanäù - the brähmanas; sarve - all;  svätmänam - to themselves; dhik - rebuke; pracakrire - did; didrksavaù - yearning to see; te - they; cri-krsnam - Sri Krsna; kamsät - of Kamsa; bhitä - afraid; na - not; ca - and; ägatäù - went.

     Sri Närada said: When they saw their wives, the brähmanas rebuked themselves. Although they also yearned to see Lord Krsna, out of fear of Kamsa they did not go to see Him.

Text 21

bhuktvännam sa-balaù krsno
     gopälaiù saha maithila
gäù pälayan äjagäma
     vrndäranyam manoharam

     bhuktvä - eating; annam - the food; sa-balaù - with Balaräma; krsnaù - Krsna; gopälaiù - with ther gopas;  saha - with; maithila - O king of Mithilä; gäù - the cows; pälayan - protecting; äjagäma - came; vrndäranyam - to Vrndävana forest; manoharam - beautiful.

     O king of Mithilä, when they had finished eating, Krsna, Balaräma, and the gopas took the cows to beautiful Vrndävana forest.
.pa

Chapter Twenty-two
Nandädi-vaikuntha-darcanam
Nanda and the Gopas See the Realm of Vaikuntha

Text 1

ekadä nanda-räjo 'sau
     krtvä caikädaci-vratam
dvädacyäm yamunäm snätum
     gopälair jalam ävicat

     ekadä - one day; nanda-räjaù - King Nanda; asau - he; krtvä - making; ca - and; ekädaci-vratam - the vow of ekadasi; dvädacyäm - on dvadasi; yamunäm - the Yamunä; snätum - to bathe; gopälaiù - with the gopas; jalam - the water; ävica - t - entered.

     Once, after following the vow of ekädaci, on dvädaci King Nanda and the gopas entered the Yamunä to to bathe.

Text 2

tam grhitvä päci-bhrtyäù
     päcilokam jagäma ha
tadä kolähale jäte
     gopänäm maithilecvara

     tam - him; grhitvä - taking; päci-bhrtyäù - the servants of varuna; päcilokam - to Varunaloka; jagäma - went; ha - indeed; tadä - then; kolähale - an uproar; jäte - was manifested; gopänäm - among thre gopas; maithilecvara - O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, at that moment the servants of Varuna grabbed King Nanda and, amind the gopas' loud protests, dragged him away to Varunaloka.

Text 3

äcväsya sarvän bhagavän
     gatavän värunim purim
bhasmi-cakära sahasä
     puri-durgam hariù svayam

     äcväsya - comforting; sarvän - everyone; bhagavän - the Lord; gatavän - went; värunim purim - to the city of Varuna; bhasmi-cakära - turning to ashes; sahasä - at once; puri-durgam - the fortress; hariù - Krsna; svayam - Himself.

     After reassuring everyone, Lord Krsna traveled to Varuna's city. There He quickly burned to ashes the city's outer walls.

Text 4

koti-märtanòa-sagkäcam
     drstvä prakupitam harim
natvä krtänjaliù päci
     parikramyäha dharsitaù

     koti-märtanòa-sagkäcam - brilliant as millions of suns; drstvä - seeing; prakupitam - angry; harim - Krsna; natvä - bowing down; krtänjaliù - with folded hands;  päci - Varuna; parikramya - circumambulating; äha - said; dharsitaù - defeated.

     Seeing angry Krsna blazing with the splendor of millions of suns, and realizing that he was now defeated, Varuna bowed before the Lord with folded hands and then respectfully circumambulated Him.

Text 5

cri-varuna uväca 
namaù cri-krsnacandräya
     paripurnatamäya ca
asagkhya-brahmänòa-bhrte
     goloka-pataye namaù

     cri-varuna uväca - Sri Varu.na said; namaù - obeisances; cri-krsnacandräya - to Sri Krsnacanbdra;  paripurnatamäya - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca - and; asagkhya-brahmänòa-bhrte - the maintainer of countless universes; goloka-pataye - to the master of Goloka; namaù - obeisances.

     Sri Varuna said: Obeisances to Sri Krsnacandra, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead! Obeisances to the Lord of Goloka, the maintainer of numberless universes!

Text 6

catur-vyuhäya mahase
     namas te sarva-tejase
namas te sarva-bhäväya
     parasmai brahmane namaù

     catur-vyuhäya - who expands in four features; mahase - glorious; namaù - obeisances; te - to You; sarva-tejase - supremely splendid; namaù - obeisances; te - to You; sarva-bhäväya - the creator of all; parasmai - to the Supreme; brahmane - Brahman; namaù - obeisances.

     Obeisances to You, the splendid Lord who expands as the four vyuha incarnations! Obeisances to You, the glorious Supreme Lord, the original cause of all causes!

Text 7

kenäpi muòhena mamänugena
     krtam param helanam atra eva
tat ksamyatäm bhoù caranam gatam mäm
     pareca bhuman paripähi pähi

     kenäpi - by a certain; muòhena - fool; mama - of me; anugena - a follower; krtam - done; param - great; helanam - offense; atra - here; eva - indeed; tat - that; ksamyatäm - may be forgiven;  bhoù - O; caranam - shelkter; gatam - attained; mäm - to me; pareca - O Supreme Lord; bhuman - O Lord;  paripähi - please protect; pähi - please protect.

     A foolish servant of mine greatly offended You. O Lord please forgive us. O Supreme Lord, I take shelter of You. Please protect me! Please protect me!

Text 8

cri-närada uväca 
iti prasanno bhagavän
     nandam nitvä su-jivitam
saukhyam prakäcayan bandhun
     vraja-manòalam äyayau

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; iti - thus; prasannaù - pleased; bhagavän - the Lord; nandam - Nanda; nitvä - taking; su-jivitam - alive; saukhyam - happiness; prakäcayan - showing; bandhun - to friends; vraja-manòalam - to the circle of Vraja; äyayau - went.

     Sri Närada said: Pleased, and clearly showing His happiness, Lord Krsna took Nanda back to the circle of Vraja.

Text 9

nanda-räja-mukhäc chrutvä
     prabhävam cri-hares tu tam
gopi-gopa-ganä ucuù
     cri-krsnam nanda-nandanam

     nanda-räja - of King Nanda; mukhät - from the mouth; crutvä - hearing; prabhävam - the prowess; cri-hareù - of Lord Krsna; tu - indeed; tam - to Him; gopi-gopa-ganä - the gopas and gopis; ucuù - said; cri-krsnam - to zKrsna; nanda - of Nanda; nandanam - the son.

     When from Nanda's mouth they heard of Lord Krsna's great power, the gopas and gopis approached Sri Krsna, the son of Nanda, snd said to Him:

Text 10

yadi tvam bhagavän säksäl
     loka-palaiù su-pujitaù
darcayäcu param lokam
     vaikuntham tarhi naù prabho

     yadi - if; tvam - You; bhagavän - are the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säksäl - directly; loka-palaiù - by the demigods; su-pujitaù - worshiped; darcaya - please show; äcu - at once; param lokam - supreme abode; vaikuntham - Vaikuntha; tarhi - then; naù - to us; prabhaù - O Lord.

     O Lord, if You are in truth the Supreme Personality of Godhead worshiped by all the demigods, then please show us Your supreme abode, the world of Vaikuntha.

Text 11

nitvä sarväms tataù krsna
     etya vaikuntha-mandiram
darcayäm äsa rupam svam
     jyotir-manòala-madhyagam

     nitvä - taking; sarvän - all; tataù - then; krsna - Krsna; etya - going; vaikuntha-mandiram - to the abode of Vaikuntha; darcayäm äsa - showed; rupam - form; svam - own; jyotir-manòala-madhyagam - ina circle of light.

     Then Lord Krsna took them all to the realm of Vaikuntha, where He showed them a form surrounded by a great circle of light, . . .

Text 12

sahasra-bhuja-samyuktam
     kirita-katakojjvalam
cagkha-cakra-gadä-padma-
     vana-mälä-viräjitam

     sahasra-bhuja-samyuktam - with a thousand arms; kirita - with crown; kataka - golden bracelets; ujjvalam - splendid; cagkha - conch; cakra - disc; gadä - club; padma - lotus; vana - forest; mälä - garland; viräjitam - splendid.

 . . . a form that had thousands of arms, that was splendid with a crown, golden bracelets, forest garland, cocnh, disc, club, and lotus, . . .

Text 13

asagkhya-koti-märtanòa-
     sagkäcam cesa-samsthitam
cämarändola-divyäbham
     brahmädyaiù parisevitam

     asagkhya - countless; koti - millions; märtanòa - of suns; sagkäcam - splendor; cesa-samsthitam - resting on Sesa; cämarändola-divyäbham - fanned with camaras; brahmädyaiù - by the demigods headed by Brahmä; parisevitam - served.

 . . . that was splendid as numberless millions of suns, that reclined on Lord Sesa, that was served by Brahmä and the demigods, fanning it with cämaras, . . . 

Text 14

tadaiva tän gopa-ganän
     pärsadäs te gadä-dharäù
rjum krtvä natim krtvä
     dure sthäpya prayatnataù

     tadä - then; eva - indeed; tän - them; gopa-ganän - the gopas; pärsadäù - the associates; te - they;  gadä-dharäù - holding clubs; rjum - straight; krtvä - doing; natim - obeisances; krtva - doing; dure - far away; sthapya - staying; prayatnatah - carefully.

     From a distance the associates of the Lord of Vaikuntha, who were all carrying great clubs, respectfully offered danòavat obeisances to the gopas.

Text 15

cakitän iva tän viksya
     procus te pärsadä girä
re re tusnim prabhavata
     mä vaktavyam vanecaräù

     cakitän - frightened; iva - as if; tän - them; viksya - seeing; procuù - said; te - they; pärsadä - the associates; girä - with words; re re - Oh! Oh!; tusnim - silence; prabhavata - do; mä - not; vaktavyam - should be spoken; vanecaräù - O you who dwell in the forest.

     Seeing that the gopas felt intimidated, the associates of the Lord of Vaikuntha said, "O people of the forest, please be silent. Please do not speak."

Text 16

bhäsanam mä prakuruta
     na drstä kim sabhä hareù
vedä vadanti cätraiva
     säksäd deve sthite prabhau

     bhäsanam - speech; mä - don't; prakuruta - do; na - not; drstä - seen; kim - whether?; sabhä - the assembly; hareù - of Lord Krsna; vedä - the Vedas; vadanti - say; ca - and; atra - here' eva - indeed; säksät - directly; deve - the Lord; sthite - standing;  prabhau - the Lord.

     "Please don't speak. Don't you already have the Lord's company? The Supreme Personality of Godhead, whom the Vedas glorify, stands in your midst."

Text 17

iti ciksäm gatä gopä
     harsitä maunam ästhitäù
manasy ucur ayam krsna
     ucca-simhäsane sthitaù

     iti - thus; ciksäm - instruction; gatä - attained;  gopä - the gopas; harsitä - pleased; maunam - silence; ästhitäù - did; manasy - in the heart;  ucuù - said; ayam - this; krsna - Krsna; ucca-simhäsane - on a great throne; sthitaù - is situated.

     Hearing these words of instruction, the gopas were happy and silent. In their hearts they said to themselves, "Our Krsna is seated on a great throne!"

Text 18

asmän duräd adhaù krtvä-
     smäbhir vakti na karhicit
tasmäd vrajäd varam nästi
     ko 'pi loko na saukhya-daù

     asmän - from us; durät - far; adhaù - below; krtvä - placing; asmäbhiù - with us; vakti - speaks; na - not; karhicit - ever; tasmät - therefore; vrajät - from Vraja; varam - better; na - not; asti - is; ko 'pi - any; lokaù - world; na - not; saukhya-daù - giving happiness.

     "He is up above, and we are way below. He does not speak to us a single word. From this we can understand that no place is better than Vraja. No place is happier than Vraja."

Text 19

yatränena sva-bhräträpi
     värtä syäd dhi parasparam
iti pravadatas tän vai
     nitvä cri-bhagavän hariù vrajam ägatavän räjan      paripurnatamaù prabhuù

     yatra - where; anena - by Him; sva-bhräträ - His brother; api - also; värtä - news; syät - is; hi - indeed; parasparam - mutual; iti - thus; pravadataù - speaking; tän - to them; vai - indeed; nitvä - taking; cri-bhagavän - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hariù - Lord Krsna; vrajam - personally; ägatavän - come; räjan - O king; paripurnatamaù prabhuù - the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     O king, then they said among themselves, "The Supreme Personality of Godhead and His brother have come to Vraja!"
.pa

Chapter Twenty-three
Sudarcanopäkhyäna
The Story of Sudarcana

Text 1

cri-närada uväca 
ekadä nrpa gopäläù
     cakatai ratna-puritaiù
vrsabhänupanandädyä
     äjagmuc cämbikävanam

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; ekadä - one day; nrpa - O king; gopäläù - the gopas; cakatai - with their carts; ratna - with jewels; puritaiù - filled;  vrsabhänu - by King Vrsabhänu; upananda - and Upananda; ädyäù - headed; äjagmuc - came; ca - and; ambikävanam - to Ambikavana.

     One day the gopas, headed by Upananda and King Vrsabhänu, took many carts filled with jewels to Ambikävana forest.

Text 2

bhadrakälim pacupatim
     pujayitvä vidhänataù
dadur dänam dvijätibhyaù
     suptäs tatra sarit-tate

     bhadrakälim - goddess Durgä; pacupatim - and Lord Siva;  pujayitvä - worshiping; vidhänataù - according to the rules; daduù - gave; dänam - gift; dvijätibhyaù - to the brähmanas; suptäù - slept; tatra - there; sarit-tate - by the riverbank.

     After worshiping Lord Siva and goddess Durgä, and after giving charity to the brähmanas, they slept on by the riverbank there.

Text 3

tatraiko nirgato rätrau
     sarpo nandam pade 'grahit
krsna krsneti cukroca
     nando 'ti-bhaya-vihvalaù

     tatra - there; ekaù - one; nirgataù - came; rätrau - at night; sarpaù - snake; nandam - to Nanda; pade - the feet; agrahit - grabbed; krsna - O Krsna; krsna - O Krsna; iti - thus; cukroca - cried; nandaù - Nanda; ati-bhaya-vihvalaù - terrified.

     In the middle of the night a snake came and grabbed Nanda's feet. Terrified, Nanda cried out, "Krsna! Krsna!"

Text 4

tadolmukair gopa-bäläs
     toòur äjagaram nrpa
padam so 'pi na tatyäja
     sarpo 'tha sva-manim yathä

     tadä - then; ulmukaiù - with torches; gopa-bäläù - the gopa boys; toòuù - struck; äjagaram - the snake; nrpa - O king; padam - the foor; saù - it; api - also; na - not; tatyäja - abandoned; sarpaù - tyhe snake; atha - then; sva-manim - its own jewel; yathä - as.

     The gopa boys beat the snake with torches, but it would not leave Nanda any more than it would leave the jewel growing from its head.

Text 5

tatäòa sva-padä sarpam
     bhagaväl loka-pävanaù
tyaktvä tadaiva sarpatvam
     bhutvä vidyädharaù krti natvä krsnam parikramya      krtänjali-puto 'vadat

     tatäòa - kicked; sva-padä - with His foot; sarpam - the snake; bhagavän - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; loka-pävanaù - the purifier of the worlds; tyaktvä - leaving; tadä - then; eva - indeed; sarpatvam - the state of being a snake; bhutvä - becoming;  vidyädharaù - a vidyadhara; krti - pious; natvä - bowing down; krsnam - to Krsna; parikramya - circumabulating; krtänjali-putaù - with folded hands; avadat - spoke.

     Then the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the purifier of the worlds, kicked the snake. That soul at once left his snake body and became a pious vidyädhara. With folded hands the vidyädhara bowed before Lord Krsna, circumambulated Him, and then spoke.

Text 6

cri-sudarcana uväca 
aham sudarcano näma
     vidyädhara-varaù prabho
astävakram munim drstvä
     hasito 'smi mahä-balaù

     cri-sudarcana uväca - Sri Sudarcana said; aham - I; sudarcanaù - Sudarcana; näma - named; vidyädhara-varaù - a great vidyädhara; prabhaù - O Lord; astävakram - Astävakra; munim - the sage; drstvä - seeing; hasitaù - laughed; asmi - I; mahä-balaù - very powerful.

     Sri Sudarcana said: My name is Sudarcana. I am a great vidyädhara. When I saw the sage Astävakra, I laughed at him.

Text 7

mahyam cäpam dadau so 'pi
     tvam sarpo bhava durmate
tac-chäpäd adya mukto 'ham
     krpayä tava mädhava

     mahyam - to me; cäpam -  acurse; dadau - gave; saù - he; api - also; tvam - you; sarpaù - a snake;  bhava - become; durmate - O fool; tat-cäpät - from his curse; adya - today; muktaù - free; aham - I am;  krpayä - by the mercy; tava - of You; mädhava - O Krsna.

     He cursed me, "Fool! Now become a snake!" O Krsna, by Your mercy I am today freed from that curse.

Text 8

tvat-päda-padma-makaranda-rajaù-kanänäm
     sparcena divya-padavim sahasägato 'smi
tasmai namo bhagavate bhuvanecvaräya
     yo bhuri-bhära-haranäya bhuvo 'vatäraù

     tvat - Your; päda - feet; padma - lotus; makaranda - nectar; rajaù-kanänäm-of the pollen; sparcena - by the touch; divya - the transcendental; padavim - abode; sahasä - at once; ägataù - attained; asmi - I have; tasmai - to Him; namaù - obeisances; bhagavate - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhuvanecvaräya - the master of the worlds; yaù - one who; bhuri - great; bhära - burden; haranäya - for the removal; bhuvaù - on the earth; avatäraù - incarnation.

     The touch of the the nectar pollen of Your lotus feet has made me a demigod again. I offer my respectful obeisances to You, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the worlds, who has desceneded to this world to relieve the earth of its burden.

Text 9

cri-närada uväca 
iti natvä harim krsnam
     räjan vidyädharas tu saù
jagäma vaisnavam lokam
     sarvopadrava-varjitam

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; iti - thus; natvä - speaking; harim - to Lord Krsna; krsnam - Krsna;  räjan - O king; vidyädharaù - the vidyahdara; tu - indeed; saù - he; jagäma - went; vaisnavam lokam - to Visnuloka; sarva - all; upadrava - obstacles;  varjitam - without.

     Sri Närada said: O king, after bowing down before Lord Krsna, the vidyädhara departed for the spiritual world of Visnuloka.

Text 10

nandädyäù vismitäù sarve
     jnätvä krsnam parecvaram
ambikävanataù cighram
     äyayur vraja-manòalam

     nanda-ädyäù - headed by Nanda; vismitäù - astonished;  sarve - everyone; jnätvä - understanding; krsnam - Krsna; parecvaram - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ambikävanataù - from Ambikavana; cighram - quickly; äyayuù - came; vraja-manòalam - to the circle of Vraja.

     Astonished, and now acutely aware of Krsna's divinity, Nanda and the gopas left Ambikävana and quickly returned to the circle of Vraja.

Text 11

idam mayä te kathitam
     cri-krsna-caritam cubham
sarva-päpa-haram punyam
     kim bhuyaù crotum icchasi

     idam - thus; mayä - by me; te - to you; kathitam - spoken; cri-krsna-caritam - Sri Krsna's pastimes;  cubham - beautiful; sarva-päpa - all sins; haram - removing; punyam - sacred; kim - what?; bhuyaù - more; crotum - to hear; icchasi - you wish.

     Now I have described to you Sri Krsna's beautiful and sacred pastimes, which remove all sins. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 12

cri-bahuläcva uväca 
aho cri-krsnacandrasya
     caritam paramädbhutam
crutvä mano me tac chrotum
     atrptam punar icchati

     cri-bahuläcva uväca - Sri Bahuläcva said; ahaù -  - Oh; cri-krsnacandrasya - of Lorr Krsnacandra; caritam - the pastimes; paramädbhutam - very wonderful; crutvä - heasring; manaù - the heart; me - of me; tat - that; chrotum - to hear; atrptam - unsatiated; punaù - again; icchati - desires.

     Sri Bahuläcva said: My heart never tires of hearing Lord Krsnacandra's very wonderful pastimes. It yearns to hear them again and again.

Text 13

agre cakära käm liläm
     lilayä vraja-manòale
harir vrajecaù paramo
     vada devarsi-sattama

     agre - before; cakära - did; käm - what?; liläm - pastime; lilayä - playfully; vraja-manòale - in the circle of Vraja; hariù - Lord Krsna; vrajecaù - the king of Vraja; paramaù - supreme; vada - please tell; devarsi-sattama - O best of the divine sages.

     Before that what pastime did Lord Krsna, the king of Vraja, enjoy in the circle of Vraja? O best of the divine sages, please tell me that pastime.
.pa

Chapter Twenty-four
Vyomäsuräristäsura-vadha
The Killing of Vyomäsura and Aristäsura

Text 1

cri-närada uväca 
ekadä caila-decesu
     sa-balo bhagavän hariù
krtvä viläpana-kriòäm
     caura-pälaka-laksanäm

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; ekadä - one day; caila-decesu - on the hill; sa-balaù - with Balaräma; bhagavän - Lord; hariù - Krsna; krtvä - doing; viläpana-kriòäm - the pastime of disappearing; caura - thieves; pälaka - police; laksanäm - characterized by.

     Sri Närada said: One day on Govardhana Hill Krsna, Balaräma, and the boys played a game of theives and police.

Text 2

tatra vyomäsuro daityo
     bälän mesayitän bahun
nitvä nitvädri-daryäm ca
     viniksipya punaù punaù

     tatra - there; vyomäsuraù - Vyomasura; daityaù - demon; bälän - the boys; mesayitän - pretending to be lambs; bahun - many; nitvä - stealing; nitvä - raking; adri-daryäm - to a mountain cave; ca - and; viniksipya - placing; punaù - again; punaù - and again.

     The demon Vyomäsura came there and, one by one, took away the boys pretending to be lambs and imprisoned them in a mountain cave.

Text 3

cilayä pidadhe dväram
     maya-putro mahä-balaù
satya-cauram ca tam jnätvä
     bhagavän madhusudanaù

     cilayä - with a rock; pidadhe - covered; dväram - the entrance; maya-putraù - teh son of Maya; mahä-balaù - very powerful; satya-cauram - a real thief; ca - and; tam - him; jnätvä - understanding; bhagavän madhusudanaù - Lord Krsna.

     Then Vyoma, the son of Mayäsura, blocked the cave's entrance with a giant boulder. The Lord Krsna could understand that Vyomäsura was not pretending, but he had actually stolen the boys.

Text 4

grhitvä pätayäm äsa
     bhujäbhyäm bhumi-manòale

     grhitvä - grabbing; pätayäm äsa - threw; bhujäbhyäm - with both arms; bhumi-manòale - to the ground.

     Krsna grabbed him in both arms and threw him to the gorund.

Text 5

tadä mrtyum gato daityas
     taj-jyotir nirgatam sphurat
daca-diksu bhramad räjan
     cri-krsne linatäm gatam

     tadä - then; mrtyum - death; gataù - attained; daityaù - the demon; taj-jyotiù - his light; nirgatam - left; sphurat - glistening; daca-diksu - in the ten directions; bhramat - wandered; räjan - O king;  cri-krsne - into Sri Krsna; linatäm - merged; gatam - attained.

     When the demon died an effulgence left his body and wandered in the ten directions until it finally merged into Lord Krsna.

Text 6

tadä jaya-jayäravo
     divi bhumau babhuva ha
puspäni vavrsur deväù
     paramänanda-samvrtäù

     tadä - then; jaya-jayäravaù - sounds of Victory! Victory!; divi - in the sky; bhumau - on the earth;  babhuva - were; ha - indeed; puspäni - flowers; vavrsuù - showered; deväù - the demigods; paramänanda-samvrtäh - filled with bliss.

     Sounds of "Victory! Victory!" filled the sky and the earth. The happy demigods showered flowers.

Text 7

cri-bahuläcva uväca 
ko 'yam purvam kucala-krd
     vyomo nämätha tad vada
yena krsne ghana-cyäme
     lino 'bhud dämini yathä

     cri-bahuläcva uväca - Sri Bahuläcva said; kaù - who?;  ayam - he; purvam - previously; kucala-krt - performed pious deeds; vyomaù - Vyoma; näma - named; atha - then; tat - that; vada - please tell; yena - by which; krsne - into Lord Krsna; ghana-cyäme - dark as a monsoon cloud; linaù - merged; abhut - was; dämini - lightning flash; yathä - like.

     Sri Bahuläcva said: What pious deeds had Vyomäsura done in his previous birth that he was able to merge into Lord Krsna as a lightning flash merges into a dark raincloud? 

Text 8

cri-närada uväca 
äsit käcyäm bhimaratho
     räjä däna-paräyanaù
yajna-krn mäna-do dhanvi
     visnu-bhakti-paräyanaù

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; äsit - was; käcyäm - in Varanasi; bhimarathaù - Bhimaratha; räjä - King; däna - to charity; paräyanaù - devoted; yajna-krt - a performer of yajnas; mäna-daù - respectful top others; dhanvi - an expert archer; visnu-bhakti-paräyanaù - a great devotee of Lord Visnu.

     Sri Närada said: He was a great king named Bhimaratha, who lived in the city of Väränasi. He was charitable, a performer of many yajnas, respectful, an expert archer, and a great devotee of Lord Visnu.

Text 9

räjye putram sannivecya
     jagäma malayäcalam
tapas tatra samärebhe
     varsänäm laksam eva hi

     räjye - in the kingdom; putram - his son; sannivecya - placing; jagäma - went; malayäcalam - to the Malaya hills; tapaù - austerities; tatra - there; samärebhe - performed; varsänäm - of years; laksam - a hundred thousand; eva - indeed; hi - indeed.

     After some time he gave his kingdom to his son and went to the Malaya Hills, where he performed austerities for a hundred thousand years.

Text 10

tasyäcrame pulastyo 'sau
     cisya-vrndaiù samägataù
tam drstvä notthito mäni
     räjarsir na nato 'bhavat

     tasya - of him; äcrame - in the asrama; pulastyaù - Pulastya Muni; asau - he; cisya-vrndaiù - with many disciples; samägataù - came; tam - him; drstvä - seeing; na - not; utthitaù - stood up; mäni - proud; räjarsiù - the royal sage; na - not; nataù - bowed down; abhavat - did.

     One day the great sage Pulastya Muni, accompanied by many disciples, came to the king-sage's äcrama. The king-sage, filled with pride, neither stood up nor bowed down to greet his guest. 

Text 11

cäpam dadau pulastyo 'pi
     daityo bhava mahä-khala
tatas tam caranopänte
     patitam caranägatam

     cäpam - a curse; dadau - gave; pulastyaù - Pulastya; api - also; daityaù - a demon; bhava - become; mahä-khala - rascal; tataù - then; tam - to him; caranopänte - at the feet; patitam - fallen; caranägatam - taking shelter.

     Pulastya cursed him, "Wretch! Now become a demon!" The king then fell at the sage's feet and surrendered to him.

Text 12

uväca muni-cärdulaù
     pulastyo dina-vatsalaù
dväparänte mäthure ca
     punye cri-vraja-manòale

yadu-vamca-pateù säksäc
     chri-krsnasya bhujaujasä
ipsitä yogibhir muktir
     bhavisyati na samcayaù

     uväca - spoke; muni-cärdulaù - the tiger of sages; pulastyaù - Pulastya; dina-vatsalaù - compassionate on the suffering; dväparänte - at the end of Dvapara-yuga; mäthure - in Mathura; ca - and; punye - sacred; cri-vraja-manòale - in the circle of Vraja; yadu-vamca-pateù - from the king of the Yadu dynasty; säksäc - directly; cri-krsnasya - of zKrsna; bhuja - of the arms; ojasä - by the strength; ipsitä - desired; yogibhiù - by the yogis;  muktiù - lberation; bhavisyati - will be; na - no; samcayaù - doubt.

     Then Pulastya, the tiger among the sages, who is kind to the suffering, said: At the end of Dväpara-yuga, in the district of Mäthura, in the circle of Vraja, the strength of the arms of Sri Krsna, the king of the Yadu dynasty, will give you the liberation desired by the yogis. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 14

cri-närada uväca 
so 'yam bhimaratho räjä
     maya-daitya-suto 'bhavat
cri-krsna-bhuja-vegena
     muktim präpa videha-rät

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; saù - he; ayam - he; bhimarathaù - Bhimaratha; räjä - King; maya-daitya-sutaù - the son of Mayasura; abhavat - became;  cri-krsna-bhuja-vegena - by the power of Lord Krsna's arm; muktim - liberation; präpa - attained; videha-rät - O king of Videha.

     Sri Närada said: O king of Videha, then King Bhimaratha became the son of the demon Mayäsura, and the power of Lord Krsna's arms gave him liberation.

Text 15

ekadä gopa-bälesu
     daityo 'risto mahä-balaù
ägato nädayan kham gam
     tatäc chrggair vidärayan

     ekadä - one day; gopa-bälesu - among the gopa boys; daityaù - a demon; aristaù - Arista; mahä-balaù - very powerful; ägataù - came; nädayan - filling with sound; kham - the sky; gam - the earth; tatät - from the sides; crggaiù - with horns; vidärayan - tearing up.

     One day a demon bull named Arista, his bellowing filling the earth and sky with sound and his horns tearing up great mountains, charged the gopa boys.

Text 16

gopyo gopa go-ganäc ca
     viksya tam dudruvur bhayät
bhagavän daitya-hä devo
     mä bhaistety abhayam dadau

     gopyaù - the gopis; gopa - gopas; go-ganäc - cows;  ca - and; viksya - seeing; tam - him; dudruvuù - fled; bhayät - out of fear; bhagavän - the Lord; daitya - of demons; hä - the slayer; devaù - the Lord; mä - don't; bhaista - fear' iti - thus;  abhayam - fearlessness; dadau - gave.

     Seeing the demon-bull, the gopas, gopis, and cows all fled in fear. Then Lord Krsna, the slayer of demons, reassured them, saying, "Don't be afraid."

Text 17

grhitvä tam tu crggesu
     nodayäm äsa mädhavaù
so pi tam nodayäm äsa
     cri-krsnam yojana-dvayam

     grhitvä - taking; tam - it; tu - indeed; crggesu - by the horns; nodayäm äsa - threw; mädhavaù - Lord Krsna; saù - he; api - also; tam - Him; nodayäm äsa - threw; cri-krsnam - Sri Krsna; yojana-dvayam - sixteen miles.

     Grabbing its horns, Lord Krsna threw the demon sixteen miles. Then the demon also threw Sri Krsna sixteen miles.

Text 18

pucche grhitvä tam krsno
     bhrämayitvä bhujaujasä
bhu-prsthe pothayäm äsa
     kamanòalum ivärbhakaù

     pucche - the tail; grhitvä - grabbing; tam - him;  krsnaù - Sri Krsna; bhrämayitvä - whirling around; bhujaujasä - by the power of His arms; bhu-prsthe - to the ground; pothayäm äsa - threw; kamanòalum - a kamandalu; iva - like; arbhakaù - a child.

     Grabbing its tail, and whirling it around and around, with the power of His arms Lord Krsna threw the demon to the ground as a child throws a kamanòalu.

Text 19

aristaù punar utthäya
     krodha-samrakta-locanaù
crggaic ca rohitam cailam
     samutpätya mahä-khalaù

     aristaù - Arista; punaù - again; utthäya - rising;  krodha-samrakta-locanaù - its eyes red with anger; crggaic - with horns; ca - and; rohitam - tall; cailam - mountain; samutpätya - uprooting; mahä-khalaù - great demon.

     Its eyes red with anger, Arista stood up again. Then with its horns it uprooted a great mountain.

Text 20

garjayan ghanavad viraù
     krsnopari samaksipat
krsnaù cailam saggrhitvä
     tasyopari samaksipat

     garjayan - roaring; ghanavat - like thunder; viraù - the warrior; krsnopari - on Lord Krsna; samaksipat - threw; krsnaù - Krsna; cailam - the mountain; saggrhitvä - catching; tasyopari - on the demon; samaksipat - threw.

     Roaring like thunder, the demon threw the mountain at Lord Krsna. Krsna caught it and threw it back at the demon. 

Text 21

cailasyäpi prahärena
     kincid vyäkula-mänasaù
bhumau tatäda crggägrän
     nirgatam tair jalam bhuvaù

     cailasya - of the mountain; api - also; prahärena - by the blow; kincit - somewhat; vyäkula-mänasaù - disturbed at heart; bhumau - on the ground; tatäda - struck; crggägrän - horns; nirgatam - gone; taiù - by them; jalam - water; bhuvaù - on the gorund.

     Hit by the mountain, the demon became a little agitated. It struck the ground. With its horns it tore the earth and splashed the water.

Text 22

cri-krsnas tam ca crggesu
     grhitvä bhrämayan muhuù
bhu-prsthe pothayäm äsa
     vätaù padmam ivoddhrtam

     cri-krsnaù - Sri Krsna; tam - it; ca - and; crggesu - horns; grhitvä - grabbing; bhrämayan - whirling around; muhuù - again and again; bhu-prsthe - to the ground; pothayäm äsa - threw; vätaù - a great wind;  padmam - a lotus; iva - like; uddhrtam - uproots.

     Grabbing its horns, and whirling it around and around, Sri Krsna threw the demon to the ground as a great wind picks up and throws a lotus flower.

Text 23

tadaiva vrsa-rupatvam
     tyaktvä vipra-vapur-dharaù
natvä cri-krsna-pädäbjam
     präha gadgadayä girä

     tada - then; eva - indeed; vrsa-rupatvam - the form of a bull; tyaktvä - banadoning; vipra-vapur-dharaù - manifesting the form of a brähmana; natvä - bowing down; cri-krsna-pädäbjam - to Lord Krsna's lotus feet; präha - spoke; gadgadayä - choked with emotion; girä - with words.

     Leaving the form of a demon-bull, that soul assumed the form of a brähmana. Bowing before Lord Krsna's lotus feet, he spoke words choked with emotion.

Text 24

cri-dvija uväca 
brhaspatec ca cisyo 'ham
     varatantur dvijottamaù
brhaspati-samipe ca
     pathitum gatavän aham

     cri-dvija uväca - the brähmana said; brhaspatec - of Brhaspati; ca - and; cisyaù - the dsiciple; aham - I am; varatantuù - Varatantu; dvijottamaù - a great brähmana; brhaspati-samipe - near Brhaspati; ca - and; pathitum - to study; gatavän - went; aham - I.

     The brähmana said: I am a brähmana. I am a student of Brhaspati. My name is Varatantu. I approached Brhaspati to study under him.

Text 25

pädau krtvä sthito 'bhuvam
     pacyatas tasya sammukhe
tadä rusäha sa munir
     vrsavat tvam sthitaù puraù

     pädau - feet; krtvä - doing; sthitaù - situated; abhuvam - I was; pacyataù - seeing; tasya - of him; sammukhe - in the presence; tadä - then; rusä - angrily;  äha - said; sa - he; muniù - the sage; vrsavat - like a bull; tvam - you; sthitaù - stand; puraù - in my presence.

     One day I sat with my feet facing him. Angry, the sage said, "You sit as a bull sits.

Text 26

guru-helena-krt tasmät
     tvam vrso bhava durmate
tasya cäpäd vrso 'bhuvam
     bagga-decesu mädhava

     guru - your guru; helena-krt - an offender; tasmät - therefore; tvam - you; vrsaù - a bull; bhava - become; durmate - fool; tasya - of you; cäpät - from the curse; vrsaù - a bull; abhuvam - I became; bagga-decesu - in East Bengal; mädhava - O Krsna.

     "You have offended your guru. Fool, now become a bull!" O Krsna, by his curse I became a bull in East Bengal.

Text 27

asuränäm prasaggenä-
     suratvam gatavän aham
tvat-prasädäd vimukto 'ham
     capato 'sura-bhävataù

     asuränäm - of the demons; prasaggena - by the association; asuratvam - the state of being a demon; gatavän - attained; aham - I; tvat-prasädät - by Your mercy; vimuktaù - freed; aham - I am; capataù - from the curse; asura-bhävataù - of being a demon.

     By associating with demons, I became a demon also. By Your mercy I am now freed from that curse of being a demon.

Text 28

cri-krsnäya namas tubhyam
     väsudeväya te namaù
pranata-kleca-näcäya
     govindäya namo namaù

     cri-krsnäya - to Sri Krsna; namaù - obeisances; tubhyam - to You; väsudeväya - to the son fo Vasudeva; te - to Youi; namaù - obeisances; pranata - of the surrndered souls; kleca - the sufferings; näcäya - to the destroyer; govindäya - to Lord Krsna; namaù - obeisances; namaù - obeisances.

     Obeisances to You, Sri Krsna! Obeisances to You, the son of Vasudeva! Obeisances to You, Lord Govinda, who destroys the sufferings of the surrendered devotees!

Text 29

cri-närada uväca 
ity uktvä cri-harim natvä
     säksäc chisyo brhaspateù
dyotayan bhuvanam räjan
     vimänena divam yayau

     cri-närada uväca - Sri Närada said; ity - thus; uktvä - saying; cri-harim - to Lord Krsna; natvä - bowing; säksäc - directly; chisyaù - the student; brhaspateù - of Brhaspati; dyotayan - spreading light; bhuvanam - on the worlds; räjan - O king; vimänena - by airplane; divam - to heaven; yayau - went.

     Sri Närada said: O king, after speaking these words, the student of Brhaspati bowed before Lord Krsna. His effulgence filling the worlds with light, he went by heavenly airplane to the higher worlds.

Text 30

idam mayä te kathitam
     khanòam mädhuryam adbhutam
sarva-päpa-haram punyam
     krsna-präpti-karam param

     idam - this; mayä - by me; te - to you; kathitam - spoken; khanòam - canto; mädhuryam - sweet;  adbhutam - wonderful; sarva-päpa-haram - removing all sins; punyam - sacred; krsna-präpti-karam - granting the attainment of Lord Krsna; param - transcendental.

     Thus I have spoken to you the wonderful Mädhura-khanòa, which removes all sins and gives one the association of Lord Krsna.

Text 31

kämadam pathatäm cacvat
     kim bhuyaù crotum icchasi

     kämadam - granting desires; pathatäm - toi they who read; cacvat - always; kim - what?; bhuyaù - more; crotum - to hear; icchasi - you wish.

     This khanòa fulfills the desires of they who read it. What more do you wish to hear?

Canto Five

Chapter One
Kaàsa-mantra
Advice to Kaàsa

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
vasudeva-sutaà devaà
     kaàsa-cäëüra-mardanam
devaké-paramänandaà
     kåñëaà vande jagad-gurum

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; vasudeva-sutam—the son of Vasudeva; devam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kaàsa-cäëüra-mardanam—who defeated Kaàsa and Canura; devaké-paramänandam—who gave bliss to Devaké; kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; vande—I offer my respectful obeisances; jagad-gurum—tbe master of the universes.

     Çré Närada said: I offer my respectful obiesances to Çré Kåñëa, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the universes, the crusher of Kaàsa and Cäëüra, the son of Vasudeva, and the bliss of Devaké.

Text 2

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
mathuräyäà kià caritraà
     kåtavän bhagavän mune
kathaà jaghäna kaàsäkhyaà
     etan me brühi tattvataù

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; kim—what?; caritram—pastimes; kåtavän—did; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mune—O sage; katham—how?; jaghäna—killed; kaàsäkhyam—Kaàsa; etan—this; me—to me; brühi—please tell; tattvataù—in truth.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: O sage, what pastimes did the Supreme Personality of Godhead enjoy in Mathurä? How did He kill Kaàsa? Please tell me this in truth. 

Text 3

çré-närada uväca 
athaikadähaà mathuräà puréà paräà
     vilokituà cägatavän nåpeçvara
kartuà paraà daitya-vadhodyamaà hareù
     parasya säkñän manasä praëoditaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; ekadä—one day; aham—I; mathuräm purém—to Mathurä City; paräm—great; vilokitum—to see; ca—and; ägatavän—went; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; kartum—to do; param—great; daitya-vadhodyamam—killing of demons; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; parasya—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñän—directly; manasä—with a mind; praëoditaù—sent.

     Çré Närada said: O king of kings, one day, inspired by Lord Kåñëa in my heart, I went to Mathurä City both to see it and to arrange for Lord Kåñëa's pastime of killing many demons.

Text 4

siàhäsane ca prahåte purandarät
     sitätapatre cala-cäru-cämare
sthitaà nåpaà kaàsam uraìga-duùsahaà
     prävocam evaà çåëu tat-prapüjitaù

     siàhäsane—on a throne; ca—and; prahåte—taken; purandarät—from Indra; sitätapatre—with a white parasol; cala—moving; cäru—beautiful; cämare—camaras; sthitam—situated; nåpam—the king; kaàsam—Kaàsa; uraìga—as a serpent; duùsaham—venemous; prävocam—I spoke; evam—thus; çåëu—please hear; tat-prapüjitaù—worshiped by him.

     After he had worshiped me, and as, fanned with beautiful cämaras, he sat on a white-parasol throne stolen from Indra, I spoke to Kaàsa, who was poisonous like a snake. Please hear what I said.

Text 5

yasodäyäù sutä jätä
     yä tvad-dhastäd divaà gatä
devakyäà kåñëa utpanno
     rohiëé-nandano balaù

     yasodäyäù—of Yaçodä; sutä—the daughter; jätä—born; yä—who; tvad-dhastät—by your hand; divam—to heaven; gatä—gone; devakyäm—in Devaké; kåñëa—Kåñëa; utpannaù—born; rohiëé-nandanaù—Rohiëé's son; balaù—Balaräma.

     The girl who fled to heaven from your hand was actually the daughter of Yaçodä. Devaké actually had a son: Kåñëa, and Rohiëé also had a son: Balaräma.

Text 6

sva-mitre nanda-räje ca
     nyastau putrau bhavad-bhayät
taväré räma-kåñëau dvau
     vasudevena daitya-räö

     sva-mitre—with his friend; nanda-räje—King Nanda; ca—and; nyastau—placing; putrau—the two sons; bhavat—of you; bhayät—from fear; tava—of you; aré—the two enemies; räma—Balaräma; kåñëau—and Kåñëa; dvau—both; vasudevena—by King Vasudeva; daitya-räö—O king of the demons.

     O king of the demons, afraid of what you might do to them, Vasudeva placed his sons, Kåñëa and Balaräma, who are your enemies, under the care of his friend Nanda Mahäräja.

Text 7

pütanädyä hy ariñöäntä
     daityä ye tvad-balotkaöäù
yäbhyäà hatä vanoddeçe
     te måtyü tau småtau kila

     pütanädyä—beginning weith Putana; hy—indeed; ariñöäntä—ending with Arista; daityä—demons; ye—who; tvat—of you; balotkaöäù—having great strength;  yäbhyäm—by whom; hatä—killed; vanoddeçe—in the forest; te—they; måtyü—deaths; tau—They; småtau—considered; kila—indeed.

     In the forest these two boys killed the host of very powerful demons, beginning with Pütanä and ending with Ariñta, that you sent there. Those two boys are like death personified.

Text 8

evam ukto bhoja-patiù
     krodhäc calita-vigrahaù
jagräha niçitäà khaògaà
     çaurià hantuà sabhä-tale

     evam—thus; uktaù—addressed; bhoja-patiù—the king of the Bhojas; krodhäc—angrily; calita-vigrahaù—his body trembling; jagräha—grabbed; niçitäm—a sharp; khaògam—sword; çaurim—Vasudweva; hantum—to kill; sabhä-tale—in the assembly.

     When he heard these words, Kaàsa trembled with anger. He grabbed a sharp sword to kill Vasudeva in the royal assembly.

Text 9

mayä niväritaù so 'pi
    viståtair nigaòair dåòhaiù
baddhvä taà bhäryayä särdhaà
     kärägäre rurodha ha

     mayä—by me; niväritaù—forbidden; saù—he; api—also; viståtaiù—with great; nigaòaiù—chains; dåòhaiù—firm; baddhvä—binding; tam—him; bhäryayä—with his wife; särdham—with; kärägäre—into a prison cell; rurodha—locked up; ha—indeed.

     When I forbade him to do that, with great chains he tightly bound Vasudeva and his wife, and locked them in a prison cell. 

Text 10

ity uktvä taà mayi gate
     keçinaà daitya-puìgavam
räma-kåñëa-vadhärthäya
     preñayäm äsa daitya-räö

     ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; tam—to him; mayi—in me; gate—gone; keçinam—toKesi; daitya-puìgavam—the best of demons; räma-kåñëa—Kåñëa and Balaräma; vadhärthäya—to kill; preñayäm äsa—sent; daitya-räö—the king of demons.

     I spoke to Kaàsa and then I left. When I was gone Kaàsa sent the great demon Kesé to kill Kåñëa and Balaräma.

Text 11

cäëürädén samähüya
     mahä-mätraà dvipasya ca
kärya-bhära-karäl lokän
     prähedaà bhoja-räò balé

     cäëürädén—headed by Canmura; samähüya—calling; mahä-mätram—the elephant trainer; dvipasya—of the elephant; ca—and; kärya-bhära-karän—servants; lokän—people; präha—said; idam—this; bhoja-räò—Kaàsa; balé—powerful Kaàsa.

     Calling together his many servants, headed by Cäëüra and his elephant-trainer, Kaàsa spoke to them the following words.

Text 12

kaàsa uväca 
he küöa he toçalaka
     he cäëüra mahä-bala
räma-kåñëau ca me måtyü
     darçitau näradena tu

     kaàsa—Kaàsa; uväca—said; he—O; küöa—Kuta; he—O; toçalaka—Tosala; he—O; cäëüra—Canura; mahä-bala—very powerful; räma—Balaräma; kåñëau—and Kåñëa; ca—and; me—my; måtyü—death; darçitau—revealed; näradena—by Närada; tu—indeed.

     Kaàsa said: O Küöa, O Toçala, O powerful Cäëüra, Närada Muni has reveled to me that Kåñëa and Balaräma are destined to kill me.

Text 13

bhavadbhir iha sampräptau
     hanyetäà malla-lélayä
malla-bhümià ca samyuktaà
     kurutäçu çubhävahäm

     bhavadbhiù—by you; iha—here; sampräptau—attained; hanyetäm—should be killed; malla-lélayä—in wrestling games; malla-bhümim—the wrestling arena; ca—and; samyuktam—with; kuruta—should do; äçu—at once; çubhävahäm—auspicious.

     When They come here you should kill Them in the wrestling games. In this way you will bring auspiciousness to our wrestling arena.

Text 14

dvipaà kuvalayäpéòaà
     raìga-dväri madotkaöam
prasthäpya tena hantavyau
     mahä-mätra mahähitau

     dvipam—the elephant; kuvalayäpéòam—Kuvalayapida; raìga-dväri—at the gate; madotkaöam—maddened; prasthäpya—placing; tena—by it; hantavyau—will be killed; mahä-mätra—O elephant trainer; mahähitau—my two enemies.

     O elephant-trainer, placed the enraged elephant Kuvalayäpéòa at the gateway and it will kill my two enemies.

Text 15

caturdaçyäà tu kartavyo
     dhanur-yägaù praçäntaye
amäväsya-dine lokä
     malla-yuddhaà bhaved iha

     caturdaçyäm—on Caturdasi; tu—indeed; kartavyaù—will be; dhanur-yägaù—the Dhanur-yajna; praçäntaye—to pacify; amäväsya-dine—on the new-moon day; lokä—O people; malla-yuddham—wrestling match; bhavet—will be; iha—here.

     O people, to ensure that there is peace in our land, on the fourteenth day of the moon we will celebrate a Dhanur-yajïa ritual. Then, on the new-moon day we will celebrate a festival of wrestling matches.

Text 16

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvä sva-janän kaàso
     'krüram ähüya sa-tvaram
rahasi präha räjendra
     mantraà mantri-jana-priyam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; sva-janän—to his people; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; akrüram—Akrüra; ähüya—calling; sa-tvaram—at once; rahasi—in private; präha—said; räjendra—O king of kings; mantram—advice; mantri-jana-priyam—dear to the counselors.

     Çré Närada said: O king of kings, after speaking these words to his people, Kaàsa called for Akrüra and in private gave the following counsel, a counsel that  168pleased Akrüra, the wisest of counselors.

Text 17

kaàsa uväca 
bho bho däna-pate mantrin
     chånu me paramaà vacaù
gaccha nanda-vrajaà prätaù
     kuru käryaà mahä-mate

     kaàsa uväca—Kaàsa said; bhaù—O; bhaù—O; däna-pate—best of the generous persons; mantrin—O counselor; chånu—please hear; me—of me; paramam—great; vacaù—words; gaccha—go; nanda-vrajam—to Nanda's Vraja; prätaù—in the morning; kuru—do; käryam—duty; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     Kaàsa said: O counselor, O best of the generous, please hear my noble words. In the morning you should go to Nanda's Vraja. O noble-hearted one, then you should execute the mission I give to you.

Text 18

äsäte tatra me çatrü
     vasudeva-sutau kila
darçitau näradenäpi
     deva-devarñiëa bhåçäm

     äsäte—arrived; tatra—there; me—my; çatrü—two enemies; vasudeva-sutau—the two sons of Vasudeva; kila—indeed; darçitau—revealed; näradena—By Närada; api—also; deva-devarñiëa—the sage of the demigods; bhåçäm—greatly.

     My two enemies, the sons of Vasudeva, have gone there. Devarñi Närada revealed that to me.

Text 19

sopäyanair gopa-gaëair
     nanda-räjädibhiù saha
mathurä-darçana-miñäd
     rathenänaya mäà ciram

     sa-upäyanaiù—with giftsd; gopa-gaëaiù—with the gopas; nanda-räjädibhiù—hgeaded by King Nanda; saha—with; mathurä-darçana-miñät—on the pretext of seeing Mathurä; rathena—by chariot; änaya—vring; mäm—to me; ciram—at once.

     One pretext of bringing Them to see Mathurä City bring, accompanied by King Nanda and the gopas bearing gifts, the two of Them to me at once.

Text 20

dvipena vä mahä-mallair
     ghätayiñyämi tau çiçü
tat-paçcän nanda-räjaà ca
     vasudeva-sahäyakam

     dvipena—with the elephant; vä—or; mahä-mallaiù—by the great wretslers; ghätayiñyämi—I will kill; tau—Them; çiçü—the boys; tat-paçcän—after that; nanda-räjam—King Nanda; ca—and; vasudeva-sahäyakam—Vasudeva's friend.

     I will have the two boys killed, either by the elephant Kuvalayäpéòa, or by the great wrestlers, and then I will kill Vasudeva's friend Nanda Mahäräja.

Text 21

våñabhänu-varaà paçcän
     nava-nandopanandakän
paçcac chaurià haniñyämi
     devakaà tat-sahäyakam

     våñabhänu-varam—Våñabhänu; paçcän—then; nava-nandopanandakän—the nine Nandas and Upanandas; paçcac—then; chaurim—Vasudeva; haniñyämi—I will kill; devakam—Devaka; tat-sahäyakam—his friend.

     Then I will kill King Våñabhänu, and then the nine Nandas and Upanandas, and then Vasudeva, and then Vasudeva's friend Devaka.

Text 22

ugrasenaà ca pitaraà
     våddhaà räjya-samutsukam
tat-paçcäd yädavän sarvän
     haniñyämi na saàçayaù

     ugrasenam—Ugrasenba; ca—and; pitaram—father; våddham—old; räjya-samutsukam—still eager to rule his kingdom; tat-paçcät—after that; yädavän—the Yadavas; sarvän—all; haniñyämi—I will jkill; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Then I will kill my old father, who still yearns to rule his kingdom, and then I will kill all the Yädavas. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 23

ete deva-gaëäù sarve
     jätä mantrin mahé-tale
çakunir me mahä-mitro
     balé candravaté-patiù

     ete—the; deva-gaëäù—demigods; sarve—all; jätä—born; mantrin—O counselor; mahé-tale—on the earth; çakuniù— me mahä-mitro balé candravaté-patiù

     O counselor, all the demigods are now born on the earth. Still, Çakuni, the powerful king of Canrävaté, is my great friend.

Text 24

bhüta-santäpano håñöo
     våkaù çambara eva ca
kälanäbho mahänäbho
     hariçmaçrus tathaiva ca

     bhütasantäpanaù—Bhütasantäpana; håñöaù—Håñöa; våkaù—Våka; çambara—Çambara; eva—indeed; ca—and; kälanäbhaù——Kälanäbha; mahänäbhaù—Mahänäbho; hariçmaçruù—Hariçmaçru; tathä—so; eva—indeed; ca—and.

     Bhütasantäpana, Håñöa, Våka, Çambara, Kälanäbha, Mahänäbha, and Hariçmaçru are also my friends.

Text 25

ete miträëi me santi
     mad-arthaà präëadä balät
çvaçuro 'pi jaräsandho
     dviviòo me sakhä småtaù

     ete—they; miträëi—friends; me—my; santi—are; mad-artham—for my sake; präëadä—giving their lives; balät—forcibly; çvaçuraù—father-in-law; api—even; jaräsandhaù—Jaräsandha; dviviòaù—Dviviòo; me—my; sakhä—friend; småtaù—is considered.

     They are all my friends. They would give up their lives for my sake. Jaräsandha is my father-in-law. Dviviòa is also my friend.

Text 26

bäëäsuraç ca narako
     mayy eva kåta-sauhådaù
ete sarväà mahéà jitvä
     baddhvä devän sa-väsavän

     bäëäsuraù—Bäëäsura; ca—and; narakaù—Naraka; mayy—in me; eva—indeed; kåta-sauhådaù—become friends; ete—theye; sarväm—all; mahém—the earth; jitvä—conquering; baddhvä—binding; devän—the demigods; sa-väsavän—with Indra.

     Bäëäsura and Narakäsura are also my friends. My friends will counquer all the worlds. They will put Indra and the demigods in chains.

Text 27

kñiptvä meru-guha-durge
     kuveraà dravya-näyakam
trailokya-räjyaà tu sadä
     kariñyanti na saàçayaù

     kñiptvä—throwing; meru-guha-durge—in a fortress-cave in Mount Meru; kuveram—Kuvera; dravya-näyakam—the treasurer; trailokya—of the three worlds; räjyam—the kingdom; tu—indeed; sadä—always; kariñyanti—will do; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     They will imprison the heavenly treasurer Kuvera in a cave on Mount Meru. They will rule the three worlds. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 28

kavénäà tvaà kavir iva
     giräà giñpati-vad bhuvi
etat käryaà ca kartavyaà
     tvayä däna-pate tvaram

     kavénäm—of wise men; tvam—you; kaviù—the wisest; iva—as if; giräm—of words; giñpati-vat—like Båhaspati; bhuvi—on the earth; etat—this; käryam—mission; ca—and; kartavyam—should be done; tvayä—by you; däna-pate—O generous one; tvaram—at once.

     You are the wisest of wise men. In this world you are eloquent like Båhaspati. O generous one, please execute this mission at once.

Text 29

çré-akrüra uväca 
tvayä kåto yadu-pate
     manoratha-mahärëavaù
daivecchayäyaà bhavati
     goñpadaà tad vinärëavaù

     çré-akrüra uväca—Çré Akrüra said; tvayä—by you; kåtaù—done; yadu-pate—O king of the Yadavas; manoratha-mahärëavaù—a great ocean of desires; daiva—of destiny; icchayä—by the desire; ayam—this; bhavati—is; goñpadam—a cow's hoofprint; tat—that; vinä—without; arëavaù—an ocean.

     Çré Akrüra said: O king of the Yädavas, you have a great ocean of desires. If destiny wishes, you will cross that ocean as one crosses a the puddle in a cow's hoofprint. If destiny does not wish, your desires will remain an impassable ocean.

Text 30

kaàsa uväca 
visåjya daivaà kurute baliñöho
     daivaà samäçritya hi nirbalaç ca
kälätmanor nitya-gayo prabhävän
     niräkulas tiñöhatu karma-yogé

     kaàsa uväca—Kaàsa said; visåjya—rejecting; daivam—destiny; kurute—does; baliñöhaù—a strong man; daivam—destiny; samäçritya—takign shelter; hi—indeed; nirbalaç—the weak; ca—and; käla—of time; ätmanoù—and the Supersoul; nitya-gayaù—always going; prabhävän—by the power; niräkulaù—free from troubles; tiñöhatu—stands; karma-yogé—a karma-yogi.

     Kaàsa said: A strong man rejects destiny. He makes his own destiny. Only the weak lean on destiny. Protected by the power of his own work, a strong man is never troubled by eternal time and the eternal Supersoul.

Text 31

çré-närada uväca 
evam uktvä mantri-varaà
     samutthäya sabhä-sthalät
kiïcit prakupitaù kaàsaù
     çanair antaù-puraà yayau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; uktvä—saying; mantri-varam—to the great counselor; samutthäya—rising; sabhä-sthalät—from the assembly; kiïcit—somewhat; prakupitaù—angry; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; çanaiù—slowly; antaù-puram—to the inner part of the palace; yayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these words to his counselor, agitated Kaàsa stood up, left the room, and slowly walked to the inner rooms of the palace.
.pa

Chapter Two
Keçi-vadha
The Killing of Keçé

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
ataù keçé mahä-daityo
     haya-rüpi madotkaöaù
etya våndävanaà ramyaà
     jagarja ghanavad balé

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ataù—then; keçé—Kesi; mahä-daityaù—the great demon; haya-rüpi—in the form of a horse; madotkaöaù—wild; etya—going; våndävanam—to Våndävana; ramyam—beautiful; jagarja—neighed; ghanavat—like a cloud; balé—powerful.

     Çré Närada said: Then the powerful and ferocious demon Keçé assumed the form of a wild horse. Neighing like thunder, he entered beautiful Våndävana. 

Text 2

yasya päda-pratäòena
     nipetuù çäkhino dåòhäù
pucchä-ghätena gagane
     khaëòaà khaëòaà yayur ghanäù

     yasya—of whom; päda-pratäòena—by the steps; nipetuù—fell; çäkhinaù—the trees; dåòhäù—solid; pucchä—of the tial; ghätena—by the swishing; gagane—in the sky; khaëòam khaëòam—broken apart; yayuù—went; ghanäù—the clouds.

     His footsteps made the great trees fall. The swishing of his tail broke apart the clouds in the sky.

Text 3

taà vékñya duùsaha-javaà
     gopa-gopé-gaëä bhåçäm
bhayäturä maithilendra
     çré-kåñëaà saraëaà yayuù

     tam—him; vékñya—seeing; duùsaha-javam—running with unstoppable speed; gopa-gopé-gaëä—the gopas and gopés; bhåçäm—greatly; bhayäturä—afraid; maithilendra—O king of Mithilä; çré-kåñëam—to Çré Kåñëa; saraëam—for shelter; yayuù—went.

     When they saw him fiercely charge at them, the terrified gopas and gopés ran to Çré Kåñëa for shelter.

Text 4

mä bhaiñöety abhayaà dattvä
     bhagavän våjinärdanaù
kaöau pétämbaraà baddhvä
     hantuà daityaà pracakrame

     mä—don't; bhaiñöa—be afraid; iti—thus; abhayam—fearlessness; dattvä—giving; bhagavän—the Lord; våjinärdanaù—the deliverer from miseries; kaöau—at His waist; pétämbaram—the yellow garment; baddhvä—tying; hantum—to kill; daityam—the demon; pracakrame—went.

     Saying, "Don't be afraid", the Lord removed their fears. Then, tightening the yellow sash at His waist, the Supreme Lord, the deliverer from troubles, went to kill the demon.

Text 5

harià paçcima-pädäbhyäà
     santatäòa mahäsuraù
cälayan påthivéà räjan
     nädayan vyoma-maëòalam

     harim—Kåñëa; paçcima-pädäbhyäm—with his hind legs; santatäòa—hit; mahäsuraù—the great demon; cälayan—shaking; påthivém—the ground; räjan—O king; nädayan—neighing; vyoma-maëòalam—the circle of the sky.

     O king, then, shaking the ground, and making the sky echo with his neighing, with his hind legs the great demon kicked Lord Kåñëa.

Text 6

gåhétvä pädayor daityaà
     bhrämayitvä bhujena khe
cikñepa yojanaà kåñëo
     vätaù padmam ivoddhåtam

     gåhétvä—grabbing; pädayoù—of the legs; daityam—the demon; bhrämayitvä—whrling around; bhujena—with an arm; khe—into the sky; cikñepa—threw; yojanam—eight miles; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; vätaù—wind; padmam—a lotus flower; iva—like; uddhåtam—uprooted.

     Grabbing the demon's legs and whirling him around and around, with one arm Lord Kåñëa threw the demon eight miles into the sky as a great wind uproots and throws a lotus flower.

Text 7

punar ägatavän so 'pi
     krodha-pürita-vigrahaù
pucchena çré-harià devaà
     santatäòa vrajäìgane

     punaù—again; ägatavän—come; saù—he; api—also; krodha-pürita-vigrahaù—filled with angfer; pucchena—with his tail; çré-harim—Lord Kåñëa; devam—the Lord; santatäòa—hit; vrajäìgane—in the courtyard of Vraja.

     Filled with anger, the demon returned to the courtyards of Vraja and with his tail violently struck Lord Kåñëa. 

Text 8

pucche gåhétvä taà kåñëo
     bhrämayitvä bhujaujasä
yojanänäà çataà räjan
     cikñepa gagane balät

     pucche—the tail; gåhétvä—grabbing; tam—him; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; bhrämayitvä—whirling; bhujaujasä—with the power ofHis arms; yojanänäm—eight miles; çatam—a hundred; räjan—O king; cikñepa—threw; gagane—into the sky; balät—forcibly.

     Grabbing that tail, and whirling the demon around and around, with the strength of His arms Lord Kåñëa threw him eighty miles into the sky.

Text 9

äkäçät patitaù so 'pi
     kiïcid vyäkula-mänasaù
samutthäya punar daityo
     jagarja ghanavad balé

     äkäçät—from the sky; patitaù—fallen; so 'pi—he; kiïcit—somewhat; vyäkula-mänasaù—agitated at heart; samutthäya—standing up; punaù—again; daityaù—the demon; jagarja—neighed; ghanavat—like a cloud; balé—powerful;

     When he fell from the sky, the powerful demon was somewhat disturbed at heart. Standing up again, he neighed like thunder.

Text 10

saöä vidhunvan romäëi
     bälaà khe cälayan muhuù
mahéà vidärayan pädair
     utpapäta hareù puraù

     saöä—mane; vidhunvan—shaking; romäëi—the hairs; bälam—tail; khe—in the sky; cälayan—moving; muhuù—again and again; mahém—the earth; vidärayan—breaking; pädaiù—with hooves; utpapäta—jumped; hareù—Lord Kåñëa; puraù—in front of.

     Shaking his mane, swishing his tail in the sky, and breaking the ground with his hooves, the demon-horse jumped before Lord Kåñëa.

Text 11

tatäòa muñöinä taà vai
     bhagavän madhusüdanaù
tasya muñöi-prahäreëa
     mürcchito ghaöikä-dvayam

     tatäòa—hit; muñöinä—with a fist; tam—him; vai—indeed; bhagavän—the Lord; madhusüdanaù—Kåñëa; tasya—of Him; muñöi-prahäreëa—by the puch; mürcchitaù—unconscious; ghaöikä-dvayam—for an hour.

     Then Lord Kåñëa punched him, and the demon was unconscious for an hour.

Text 12

mastakena galoddeçe
     samudhåtya harià hayaù
bhü-maëòaläd utpapäta
     gagane lakña-yojanam

     mastakena—by the head; galoddeçe—on the neck; samudhåtya—grabbing; harim—Lord Kåñëa; hayaù—the horse; bhü-maëòalät—from the earth; utpapäta—threw; gagane—into the sky; lakña-yojanam—800,000 miles.

     Then, grabbing His neck, the demon-horse pulled Lord Kåñëa eight hundred thousand miles into the sky.

Text 13

tayor yuddham abhüd ghoraà
     gagane prahara-dvayam
pädair dadbhiù saöäbhiç ca
     puccha-tékñna-khurair nåpa

     tayoù—of them; yuddham— battle; abhüt—was; ghoram—horrible; gagane—in the sky; prahara-dvayam—for six hours; pädaiù—with feet; dadbhiù—with teeth; saöäbhiç—with mane; ca—and; puccha—tail; tékñna-sharp; khuraiù—razor; nåpa—O king.

     For six hours they fought fiercely. With his hooves, teeth, mane, and the sharp razor of his tail, the demon-horse attacked the Lord.

Text 14

gåhétvä taà harir dorbhyäà
     bhrämayitvä tv itas tataù
äkäçät pätayäm äsa
     kamaëòalum ivärbhakaù

     gåhétvä—grabbing; tam—him; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; dorbhyäm—with both arms; bhrämayitvä—whirling around; tv—indeed; itas tataù—herew and there; äkäçät—from the sky; pätayäm äsa—threw; kamaëòalum—a kamandalu; iva—like; arbhakaù—a child.

     Suddenly grabbing him, and whirling him around and around, with both arms Lord Kåñëa threw the demon to the earth as a child throws a kamaëòalu.

Text 15

bhujaà praveñayäm äsa
     tan-mukhe bhagavän hariù
tasyodare gato bähur
     vavådhe rogavad bhåçäm

     bhujam—His arm; praveñayäm äsa—inserting; tan-mukhe—in the demon's mouth; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåñëa; tasyodare—in his belly; gataù—wnet; bähuù—the arm; vavådhe—expanded; rogavat—like a disease; bhåçäm—greatly.

     Then Lord Kåñëa thrust His arm in the demon's mouth. Pushed into the demon's belly, the arm expanded like an incurable disease.

Text 16

tadä tu leëòaà kåtavän
     ruddha-väyur mahäsuraù
khaëòé-bhütodaraù sadyo
     mamära haya-rüpa-dhåk

     tadä—then; tu—indeed; leëòam—stool; kåtavän—passing; ruddha-väyuù—his life-breath stopped; mahäsuraù—the great demon; khaëòé-bhütodaraù—his stomach broken; sadyaù—at once; mamära—died; haya-rüpa-dhåk—having the form of a horse.

     Then, passing stool and urine, his life breath stopped, and his stomach broken by Lord Kåñëa's arm, the horse-demon suddenly died.

Text 17

dehäd vinirgataù sadyo
     mukuöé kuëòalänvitaù
divya-rüpa-dharaà kåñëaà
     präïjaliù praëanäma ha

     dehät—from the body; vinirgataù—come; sadyaù—suddenly; mukuöé—crowned; kuëòalänvitaù—decorated with earrings; divya-rüpa—a splendid form; dharam—manifesting; kåñëam—to Lord Kåñëa; präïjaliù—with folded hands; praëanäma—bowed down; ha—certainly.

     From the demon's body suddenly emerged a being wearing a crown and earrings. With folded hands he bowed down before glorious Lord Kåñëa.

Text 18

çré-kumuda uväca 
çakrasyänucaro 'haà vai
     kumudo näma mädhava
tejasvé rüpavän véro
     jiñëuç chatra-bhramià dadhan

     çré-kumuda uväca—Çré Kumuda said; çakrasya—of Indra; anucaraù—a follower; aham—I am; vai—indeed; kumudaù—Kumuda; näma—named; mädhava—O Kåñëa; tejasvé—powerful and splendid; rüpavän—handsome; véraù—heroic; jiñëuù—glorious; chatra-bhramim—the parasol; dadhan—holding.

     Çré Kumuda said: O Lord Kåñëa, my name is Kumuda and I am a servant of King Indra. I am powerful, handsome, heroic, and glorious. I carry Indra's parasol.

Text 19

våträsura-vadhe pürvaà
     brahma-hatyä-praçäntaye
yajïaà cakära näkeço
     väjimedhaà kratüttamam

     våträsura—of Våträsura; vadhe—in the killing; pürvam—previously; brahma-hatyä-praçäntaye—to become free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa; yajïam—a yajna; cakära—did; näkeçaù—Indra; väjimedham—vajimedha; kratüttamam—the best of yajnas.

     When Våträsura was killed, to become free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa, Indra performed an añvamedha-yajïa, the best of sacrifices.

Text 20

açvamedha-hayaà çubhraà
     çyäma-karëaà mano-javam
tam ärurukñur duñöo 'haà
     corayitvä talaà gataù

     açvamedha-hayam—the açvamedha horse; çubhram—handsome; çyäma-karëam—with black ears; mano-javam—running as fast as the mind; tam—that; ärurukñuù—wishing to ride; duñöaù—wicked; aham—I; corayitvä—stealing; talam—to Talaloka; gataù—went.

     Yearning to ride it, I stole the splendid sacrificial horse, which had one black ear and ran as fast as the mind, and went to Talaloka.

Text 21

tato marud-gaëair nétaà
     päça-baddhaà mahä-khalam
saçäpa mäà balärätis
     tvaà rakño bhava durmate

     tataù—from there; marud-gaëaiù—by the Maruts; nétam—brought; päça-baddham—bound with ropes; mahä-khalam—a great iffender; saçäpa—cursed; mäm—me; balärätiù—Indra, the enemy of Bala; tvam—you; rakñaù—a raksasa; bhava—become; durmate—O wicked one.

     The Maruts bound me with ropes and brought me back. Indra cursed me, "Wretch! Become a demon!

Text 22

hayäkåtis te sambhüyäd
     bhümau manvantara-dvayam
tac-chäpäd adya mukto 'haà
     sadyas tvat-sparçanät prabho

     hayäkåtiù—the form of a horse; te—of you; sambhüyät—will be; bhümau—on the earthj; manvantara-dvayam—for two manvantaras; tac-chäpät—from that curse; adya—today; muktaù—freed; aham—I am; sadyaù—at once; tvat-sparçanät—by Your touch; prabhaù—O Lord.

     "For two manvantaras you will have a horse's form on the earth." O Lord, today Your touch has freed me from that curse.

Text 23

kiìkaraà kuru mäà deva
     tvad-aìghrau lagna-mänasam
namas tubhyaà bhagavate
     sarva-lokaika-säkñiëe

     kiìkaram—a servant; kuru—please make; mäm—me; deva—O Lord; tvad-aìghrau—at Your feet; lagna-mänasam—the mind is placed; namaù—obeisances; tubhyam—to You; bhagavate—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sarva-lokaika-säkñiëe—the sole witness of all.

     O Lord please make me Your servant. My heart is fixed on Your feet. I offer my respectful obeisances to You, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Supersoul who is the witness of all.

Text 24

çré-närada uväca 
pradakñiëé-kåtya harià pareçvaraà
     vimänam äruhya mahojjvalaà param
vaikuëöhalokaà kumudo yayau tvaraà
     viräjayan maithila maëòalaà diçäm

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; harim—Lord Kåñëa; pareçvaram—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vimänam—an airplane; äruhya—climbing; mahojjvalam—very glorious; param—transcendental; vaikuëöhalokam—Vaikuëöhaloka; kumudaù—Kumuda; yayau—went; tvaram—at once; viräjayan—filling with light; maithila—O king of Mithilä; maëòalam—the circle; diçäm—of the directions.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, after circumambulating Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kumuda entered a celestial airplane and at once flew to Vaikuëöhaloka, filling the circle of the directions with light as he went.
.pa

Chapter Three
Akrürägamana
Akrüra's Arrival

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
akrüro ratham äruhya
     kartuà käryaà nåpasya vai
praharñito maithilendra
     prayayau nanda-gokulam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; akrüraù—Akrüra; ratham—a chariot; äruhya—climbing; kartum—to do; käryam—the mission; nåpasya—of the king; vai—indeed; praharñitaù—joyful; maithilendra—O king of Mithilä; prayayau—went; nanda-gokulam—to Nanda's Gokula.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, happy to execute King Kaàsa's mission, Akrüra climbed on a chariot and went to Nanda's Gokula.

Text 2

paräà bhaktià hy upagataù
     çré-kåñëe puruñottame
evaà vicärayan buddhyä
     pathi gacchan mahä-matiù

     paräm—supreme; bhaktim—devotion; hy—indeed; upagataù—attained; çré-kåñëe—for Çré Kåñëa; puruñottame—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; evam—thus; vicärayan—thinking; buddhyä—with intelligence; pathi—on the road; gacchan—going; mahä-matiù—the noble-hearted one.

     As he traveled on the road, noble-hearted Akrüra meditated on Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He was filled with devotion for the Lord.

Text 3

çré-akrüra uväca 
kià bhärate vä sukåtaà kåtaà mayä
     niñkäraëaà dänam alaà kratüttamam
térthäöanaà vä dvija-sevanaà çubhaà
     yenädya drakñyämi harià pareçvaram

     çré-akrüra uväca—Çré Akrüra said; kim—what; bhärate—in Bharata-varsa; vä—or; sukåtam—pious deed; kåtam—done; mayä—by me; niñkäraëam—causeless; dänam—gift; alam—great; kratüttamam—the best of yajnas; térthäöanam—pilgrimage; vä—or; dvija-sevanam—serving the brähmaëas; çubham—beautiful; yena—by which; adya—today; drakñyämi—I will see; harim—Lord Kåñëa; pareçvaram—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     Çré Akrüra said: How many pious deeds did I perform in the sacred land of Bhärata-varña?  What unselfish charity did I give? How many great yajïas did I perform? How many pilgrimages did I make? How many brähmaëas did I diligently serve? What did I do that today I will be able to see Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead?

Text 4

tapaù su-taptaà kim alaà purä kåtaà
     sat-sevanaà bhakti-yutaà mayä kåtam
yenaiva me darçanam adya durlabhaà
     çré-kåñëadevasya puro bhaviñyati

     tapaù su-taptam—performed great austerities; kim—what?; alam—great; purä—before; kåtam—done; sat-sevanam—serving the great souls; bhakti-yutam—with devotion; mayä—by me; kåtam—done; yena—by which; eva—indeed; me—of me; darçanam—the sight; adya—today; durlabham—difficult to attain; çré-kåñëadevasya—of Lord Kåñëadeva; puraù—in the presence; bhaviñyati—will be.

     What great austerities did I perform in my previous births? What saintly devotees did I earnestly serve? What did I do that today I will become able to see Lord Kåñëadeva, who is so difficult to see?

Text 5

teñäà bhavo me sa-phalo mahé-tale
     yan-netra-gämé bhagavän sureçvaraù
kåtvätha tad-darçanam adya durlabhaà
     sadyaù kåtärtho bhavitäsmi sarvataù

     teñäm—of them; bhavaù—the birth; me—of me; sa-phalaù—fruitful; mahé-tale—on this earth; yan-netra-gämé—coming before my eyes; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sureçvaraù—the master of the demigods; kåtvä—doing; atha—now; tad-darçanam—the sight of Him; adya—today; durlabham—rare; sadyaù—at once; kåtärthaù—successful; bhavitä—will become; asmi—I; sarvataù—in all respects.

     My birth on this earth has now borne its perfect fruit, for the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the demigods, will come before my eyes. When I see Him, the Lord who is so difficult to see, my life will attain the greatest success.

Text 6

çré-närada uväca 
iti saïcintayan kåñëaà
     paçyaï chakunam uttamam
sandhyäyäà gokulaà präpto
     ratha-stho gandiné-sutaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; saïcintayan—thinking; kåñëam—Kåñëa; paçyan—seeing; çakunam uttamam—a good omen; sandhyäyäm—at sunset; gokulam—Gokula; präptaù—attained; ratha-sthaù—riding on a chariot; gandiné-sutaù—Akrüra.

     Çré Närada said: Thinking of Kåñëa in this way, and seeing a very auspicious omen, at sunset Akrüra entered Gokula.

Text 7

kåñëa-pädäbja-cihnäni
     yaväìkuça-yutäni ca
tad-räga-yuk-parägäëi
     rajäàsi sa dadarça kau

     kåñëa-pädäbja-cihnäni—Lord Kåñëa's lotus footprints; yaväìkuça-yutäni—marked with a barleycorn adn elephant-goad; ca—and; tad-räga-yuk-parägäëi—mixed with kunkuma; rajäàsi—the dust; sa—he; dadarça—saw; kau—on the ground.

     Then in the dust He saw Lord Kåñëa's lotus footprints marked with the signs of a barleycorn and elephant-goad and sprinkled with kuìkuma powder.

Text 8

tad-darçanautsukya-bhakti-
     bhävänanda-samäkulaù
rathät samutpatya teñu      luöhaàç cäçru mumoca ca

     tat—Him; darçana—to see; autsukya—eagerness; bhakti—devotion; bhäva—love; änanda—and bliss; samäkulaù—agitated; rathät—from the chariot; samutpatya—descending; teñu—in them; luöhaàç—rolling about; ca—and; açru—tears; mumoca—shed; ca—and.

     Shedding tears, and overcome with bliss, love, and great yearning to see the Lord, Akrüra jumped from the chariot and rooled about in those footprints.

Text 9

yeñäà çré-kåñëadevasya
     bhaktiù syäd dhådi maithila
teñäm ä-brahmaëaù sarvaà
     tåëavaj jagataù sukham

     yeñäm—of whom; çré-kåñëadevasya—of Çré Kåñëadeva; bhaktiù—devotion; syät—is; hådi—in the heart; maithila—O king of Mithilä; teñäm—of them; ä-brahmaëaù—up to Lord Brahmnä; sarvam—all; tåëavat—like a piece of straw; jagataù—of the world; sukham—the happiness.

     O king of Mithilä, they who in their hearts love Kåñëa think all this material world's happiness, even up Brahmä's happiness, is like a a handful of dry straw.

Text 10

rathärüòhas tato 'krüraù
     kñaëän nanda-puraà gataù
ghoseñu sa-balaà kåñëaà
     ägacchantaà dadarça ha

     rathärüòhaù—riding on a chariot; tataù—then; akrüraù—Akrüra; kñaëät—in a moment; nanda-puram—nanda's village; gataù—attained; ghoseñu—among the cows; sa-balam—with Balaräma; kåñëam—Kåñëa; ägacchantam—coming; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Riding on his chariot, in a moment Akrüra entered Nanda's village and saw Kåñëa and Balaräma approaching him.

Texts 11 and 12

devau puräëau puruñau pareçau
     padmekñaëau çyämala-gaura-varëau
yathendranéla-dhvaja-vajra-çailau
     samäçritau tau pathi räma-kåñëau

bälärka-maulé vasanaà taòid-dyuté
     varñäçaran-megha-rucaà dadhänau
dåñövä sa türëaà sva-rathäd gato 'dhao
     tayor nato bhakti-yutaù papäta

     devau—the Lord; puräëau—ancient; puruñau—persons; pareçau—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; padmekñaëau—lotus eyed; çyämala-gaura—fair and dark; varëau—colors; yathä—as; indranéla—of sapphires; dhvaja—a flag; vajra—of diamonds; çailau—a mountain; samäçritau—taken shelter; tau—They; pathi—on the path; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; bälärka—rising sun; maulé—crowns; vasanam—garments; taòit—lightning; dyuté—splendor; varñäçaran-megha-rucam—the color of an autumn cloud; dadhänau—wearing; dåñövä—seeing; sa—he; türëam—at once; sva-rathät—from hus chariot; gataù—come; adhaù—below; tayoù—both; nataù—bowed down; bhakti-yutaù—with devotion; papäta—fell.

     Seeing on the pathway the two ancient Supreme Persons, Their eyes lotus flowers, Their complexions fair and dark like a sapphire flag and a diamond mountain, wearing crowns like the rising sun and garments splendid as lightning and autumn clouds, Akrüra, overcome with love, jumped from his chariot and fell down before Them to offer his respects.

Text 13

tad-änanaà bäñpa-kuläkulekñaëaà
     romaïcitaà vékñya hariù pareçvaraù
dorbhyäà samutthäpya ghåëäturo 'çru
     mumoca bhaktaà parirabhya mädhavaù

     tad-änanam—his face; bäñpa-kula—with tears; äkula—filled; ékñaëam—eyes; romaïcitam—hairs standing erect; vékñya—seeing; hariù—Kåñëa; pareçvaraù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dorbhyäm—with both arms; samutthäpya—rising; ghåëäturaù—overcome with mercy; açru—tears; mumoca—shed; bhaktam—the devotee; parirabhya—embraced; mädhavaù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Gazing at Akrüra's face and seeing his eyes filled with tears and the hairs of his body erect with joy, Lord Kåñëa, overcome with feelings of compassion, and shedding tears Himself, picked Akrüra up and with both arms embraced His devotee.

Text 14

evaà militvä sa-balaç ca taà hariù
     sadyaù samänéya varäsanaà dadau
nivedya gäà cätithaye su-bhojanaà
     rasävåtaà prema-yuto hy upäharat

     evam—in this way; militvä—meeting; sa-balaç—with Balaräma; ca—and; tam—Him; hariù—Kåñëa; sadyaù—at once; samänéya—taking; varäsanam—a nice seat; dadau—gave; nivedya—offering; gäm—eloqurnt words; ca—and; atithaye—for a guest; su-bhojanam—food; rasävåtam—delicious; prema-yutaù—filled with love; hy—indeed; upäharat—offered.

     Kåñëa and Balaräma offered him a comfortable seat, welcomed him with eloquent words, and offered Their guest a delicious meal.

Text 15

tam äha nandaù parirabhya dorbhyäà
     aho kathaà jévasi kaàsa-räjye
gata-trapo yo nijaghäna balän
     svasuù kathaà so 'nya-janeñu mohé

     tam—to him; äha—said; nandaù—Nanda; parirabhya—embracing; dorbhyäm—with both arms; ahaù—Oh; katham—how?; jévasi—you live; kaàsa—of Kaàsa; räjye—in the kingdom; gata-trapaù—shameless; yaù—who; nijaghäna—killed; balän—chuldren; svasuù—of his sister; katham—how?; saù—he; anya-janeñu—other people; mohé—kind.

     Nanda embraced Akrüra with both arms and said, "You are kind to others. How can you live in the kingdom of Kaàsa, who killed the sons of his own sister?  

Text 16

gåhaà gate nanda-vare haris taà
     papraccha sarvaà kuçalaà sva-pitroù
tathä yadünäà kila bändhavänäà
     kaàsasya sarvaà viparéta-buddhim

     gåham—to the home; gate—gone; nanda-vare—when King Nanda; hariù—Kåñëa; tam—him; papraccha—asked; sarvam—all; kuçalam—welfare; sva-pitroù—of His father; tathä—then; yadünäm—of the Yadavas; kila—indeed; bändhavänäm—kinsmen; kaàsasya—of Kaàsa; sarvam—all; viparéta-buddhim—wickedness.

     When Nanda had gone, Kåñëa asked about the welfare of His father and His kinsmen, the Yädavas, and about the wicked deeds of Kaàsa.

Text 17

çré-akrüra uväca 
paraçvo 'hani he deva
     hantuà çaurià samudyataù
khaòga-päëir bhoja-räjo
     näradena niväritaù

     çré-akrüra uväca—Çré Akrüra said; paraçvo 'häni—the day after tommorrow; he—O; deva—Lord; hantum—to kill; çaurim—Vasudeva; samudyataù—eager; khaòga-päëiù—with a sword in hand; bhoja-räjaù—Kaàsa; näradena—by Närada; niväritaù—forbidden.

     Çré Akrüra said: The day before yesterday Kaàsa, sword in hand, was about to kill Vasudeva until Närada Muni stopped him.

Text 18

duùkhitäù bändhaväù sarve
     yädavä bhaya-vihvaläù
sa-kuöumbäù kaàsa-bhayäd
     bhüman deçäntaraà gatäù

     duùkhitäù—unhappy; bändhaväù—kinsmen; sarve—all; yädavä—Yadavas; bhaya-vihvaläù—frightened; sa-kuöumbäù—with their familites; kaàsa-bhayät—out of fear of Kaàsa; bhüman—O Lord; deçäntaram—to other countries; gatäù—gone.

     O Lord, unhappy and terrified of Kåñëa, your kinsmen, the Yädavas, have fled with their families to other countries.

Text 19

adyaiva yädavän hantuà
     devän jetuà samudyataù
anyat kim api kau kartuà
     icchate daitya-räò balé

     adya—now; eva—indeed; yädavän—the Yadavas; hantum—to kill; devän—the demigods; jetum—to defeat; samudyataù—eager; anyat—another; kim api—something; kau—on the earth; kartum—to do; icchate—desires; daitya-räò—the demon-king; balé—powerful.

     Now the powerful demon-king Kaàsa wants to kill the Yädavas, conquer the demigods, and perform more atrocities on this earth.

Text 20

tasmäd bhavadbhyäà gantavyaà
     kuçalaà kartum avyayam
bhavantau hi vinä käryaà
     kiïcin na syät satäà prabhu

     tasmät—therefore; bhavadbhyäm—by You both; gantavyam—should be gone; kuçalam—auspiciousness; kartum—to do; avyayam—eternal; bhavantau—You; hi—indeed; vinä—except for; käryam—the duty; kiïcit—something; na—not; syät—is; satäm—of the devotees; prabhu—O Lord.

     Therefore You two Lords should go there and bring eternal auspiciousness to Your devotees. O my Lords, no one but You can bring auspiciousness to Your devotees.

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
atha tasya vacaù çrutvä
     sa-balo bhagavän hariù
nanda-räja-matenäha
     gopän kärya-karän idam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; tasya—of him; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hariù—Kåñëa; nanda-räja-matena—after conferring with King Nanda; äha—said; gopän—to the gopas; kärya-karän—eager to do what He says; idam—this.

     After hearing Akrüra's words, and after conferring with Balaräma and King Nanda, Lord Kåñëa addressed the gopas, who were eager to follow His command.

Texts 22 and 23

çré-bhagavän uväca 
nanda-räjo 'pi sa-balo
     våddhair gopa-gaëair aham
nandä navopanandäç ca
     tathä ñaò våñabhänavaù

mathuräà tu gamiñyanti
     sarve prätaù samutthitäù
sarve tu gorasaà tasmäd
     dadhi-dugdha-ghåtädikam

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; api—also; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; våddhaiù—with the adult; gopa-gaëaiù—gopas; aham—I; nandä—the Nandas; nava—nine; upanandäù—Upanandas; ca—and; tathä—so; ñaò—the six; våñabhänavaù—Våñabhänus; mathuräm—to Mathurä; tu—indeed; gamiñyanti—will go; sarve—all; prätaù—in the morning; samutthitäù—risen; sarve—all; tu—indeed; gorasam—milk products; tasmät—from that; dadhi-dugdha-ghåtädikam—beginning with yogurt, milk, and ghee.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: King Nanda, Balaräma, the nine Nandas and Upanandas, the six Våñabhänus, and all the adult gopas will rise early tommorrow morning and, taking gifts of milk, yogurt, ghee, and other milk products, will go to Mathurä City.

Text 24

gåhétvaikätra kartavyaà
     sopäyanam ataù param
rathäàç ca çakaöaiù särdhaà
     samarthän kurutäçu vai

     gåhétvä—taking; ekätra—in one place; kartavyam—to be done; sopäyanam—with gifts; ataù—then; param—thern; rathän—chariots; ca—and; çakaöaiù—carts; särdham—with; samarthän—able; kuruta—should do; äçu—at once; vai—indeed.

     These gifts should now be placed on all the chariots and wagons.

Text 25

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä kärya-kärä
     gopäù sarve gåhe gåhe
çåëvanténäà gopikänäà
     ücuù sarvaà yathoditam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; kärya-kärä—the servants; gopäù—gopas; sarve—all; gåhe—at home; gåhe—after home; çåëvanténäm—hearing; gopikänäm—of the gopés; ücuù—said; sarvam—all; yathä—as; uditam—said.

     Çré Närada said: When they heard these words, all the gopas repeated them to the gopés in home after home.

Text 26

tac chrutvodvigna-hådayä
     gopyo viraha-vihvaläù
parasparaà väkyam ücuù
     sarväs tä hi gåhe gåhe

     tat—that; çrutvä—hearing; udvigna—agitated; hådayäù—hearts; gopyaù—the gopés; viraha-vihvaläù—overwhelmed by the thought of separation; parasparam—among themselves; väkyam—words; ücuù—spoke; sarväù—all; tä—they; hi—indeed; gåhe—in home; gåhe—after home.

     Agitated at heart to hear these words, and fearing a separation from Lord Kåñëa, in home after home all the gopés talked among themselves.

Text 27

prasthänasya ca varteyaà
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù
våñabhänu-varasyäpi
     gåhe präptä nåpeçvara

     prasthänasya—gone away; ca—and; värtä—the news; iyam—thius; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; våñabhänu-varasya—of King Våñabhänu; api—also; gåhe—in the home; präptä—attained; nåpeçvara—O king of kings.

     O king of kings, the news that Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, would go on a journey, also entered the home of King Våñabhänu.

Text 28

gamiñyato bhärtur atéva-duùkhitäù
     çrutvätha värtäà sadasi hy äkäçmät
sampräpa mürchaà våñabhänu-nandiné
     rambheva bhümau patitä marud-dhatä

     gamiñyataù—about to depart; bhärtuù—the husband; atéva-duùkhitäù—very unhappy; çrutvä—hearing; atha—then; värtäm—the news; sadasi—in the assembly; hy—indeed; äkäçmät—suddenly; sampräpa—attained; mürcham—fainting; våñabhänu-nandiné—the daughter of King Våñabhänu; rambhä—a banana tree; iva—like; bhümau—to tyhe ground; patitä—fallen; marud-dhatä—stuck by the wind.

     When in the royal assembly She heard that Her master would go on a journey, King Våñabhänu's daughter, Çré Rädhä, at once fainted. She was like a banana tree struck by a great wind.

Text 29

käçcit parimläna-mukha-çriyo 'bhavan
     prakaìkané-bhüta-karäìguléyakäù
sadyaù çlathad-bhüñaëa-keça-bändhanäs
     citrärpitärambhä ivävatasthire

     käçcit—some; parimläna—withered; mukha—of the face; çriyaù—the beauty; abhavan—became; prakaìkané-bhüta—become brcaelets; karäìguléyakäù—finger-rings; sadyaù—at once; çlathat—loosened; bhüñaëa—ornaments; keça—of the hair; bändhanäù—tying; citrärpitärambhäù—painted pictures; iva—like; ävatasthire—stood.

     Some gopés, the beauty of their faces suddenly withered away, the rings slipping like bracelets from their suddenly emaciated fingers, their ornaments falling, and their hair dishevelled, were stunned and motionless as if they were painted pictures.

Text 30

çré-kåñëa govinda hare muräre
     käçcid vadantyaù sva-gåhe 'ti-vihvaläù
visåjya karmäëi gåhasya sarvato
     yogéva cänanda-gatä nåpeçvara

     çré-kåñëa—Çré Kåñëa; govinda—Govinda; hare—Hari; muräre—Mauräri; käçcit—some; vadantyaù—saying; sva-gåhe—in their own home; ati-vihvaläù—very upset; visåjya—abandoning; karmäëi—their duties; gåhasya—of the home; sarvataù—everywhere; yogé—a yogi; iva—like; ca—and; änanda—bliss; gatäù—attained; nåpeçvara—O king of kings.

     O king of kings, some gopés became very upset. In their homes they called out, "O Çré Kåñëa! O Govinda! O Hari! O Muräri!" Neglecting their household duties they sat down like yogés fixed in a trance of bliss.

Text 31

käçcit samarthas tu parasparaà vacaù
     sametya räjan yugapat sakhé-janam
ücuù skhalad-gadgada-kaëöha-väcaù
     svataù sravad-bäñpa-kalä-vahad-dåçaù

     käçcit—some; samarthaù—able; tu —indeed; parasparam—among themselves; vacaù—words; sametya—meeting; räjan—O king; yugapat—at the same moment; sakhé-janam—to their friends; ücuù—said; skhalad-gadgada-kaëöha-väcaù—their throats filled with broken words; svataù—personally; sravat—flowing; bäñpa—tears; kalä—drops; vahat—flowing; dåçaù—eyes.

     O king, some met and talked among themselves, their throats choked with stuttering words and their eyes with streams of tears.

Text 32

çré-gopya ücuù 
aho 'ti-nirmohi-janasya citraà
     paraà caritraà gadituà na yogyam
mukhena cänyaà hådi bhavyam anyad
     devo na jänäti kuto manuñyaù

     çré-gopya ücuù—the gopés said; ahaù—Oh; ati-nirmohi-janasya—of the unbewildered philosophgers; citram—wonderful; param—transcendental; caritram—pastimes; gaditum—to describe; na—not; yogyam—proper; mukhena—for the mouth; ca—and; anyam—another; hådi—in the heart; bhavyam—may be; anyat—another; devaù—demigod; na—not; jänäti—knows; kutaù—where?; manuñyaù—human.

     The gopés said: Even the philosophers free of all illusion cannot with their mouths describe the wonderful transcendental pastimes of Lord Kåñëa or meditate on them in their hearts. Even the great demigods cannot understand Lord Kåñëa's pastimes. How can ordinary human beings understand them?

Text 33

räse 'pi yad yad gaditaà tu tat tad      vihäya gantuà samavasthito 'yam
gate puréà präëa-patäv aho 'smin
     kià kià na kañöaà bata no 'bhaviñyat

     räse—during the räsa dance; api—also; yad yat—whatever; gaditam—spoken; tu—indeed; tat tat—that; vihäya—abandoning; gantum—to go; samavasthitaù—is prepared; ayam—He; gate—when He is gone; purém—to the city; präëa—of our lives; patau—the master; ahaù—Oh; asmin—He; kim—what?; kim—what?; na—not; kañöam—calamity; bata—alas; naù—of us; abhaviñyat—could be.

     Turning His back on the words of love He spoke to us during the räsa dance, He is now about to leave us. Alas! If He, the Lord of our lives, goes to Mathurä City, what calamity will not fall on us?
.pa

Chapter Four
Çré Mathurä-prayäna
The Journey to Çré Mathurä

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
räjann evaà vadanténäà
     gopénäà virahaà param
vijïäya bhagavän devaù
     çéghraà täsäà gåhän yayau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; räjan—O king; evam—thus; vadanténäm—speaking; gopénäm—of the gopés; viraham—the separation; param—great; vijïäya—understanding; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devaù—the Lord; çéghram—at once; täsäm—of them; gåhän—to the homes; yayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: Aware of the anguish felt by the gopés that spoke these words, the Supreme Personality of Godhead quickly went to their homes.

Text 2

yävantyo yoñito räjaàs
     tävad rüpa-dharo hariù
svayaà sambodhayäm äsa
     vägbhiù sarväù påthak påthak

     yävantyaù—as many; yoñitaù—women; räjan—O king; tävat—so many; rüpa-dharaù—manifesting the forms; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally; sambodhayäm äsa—enlightened; vägbhiù—with words; sarväù—all; påthak påthak—individually.

     Expanding into as many forms as there were gopés, Lord Kåñëa spoke words of instruction to each gopé individually. 
Text 3

çré-rädhä-mandiraà gatvä
     dåñövä rädhäà ca mürchitam
rahaù-sthitaà sakhé-saìge
     nanäda muraléà kaläm

     çré-rädhä—of Çré Rädhä; mandiram—to the palace; gatvä—going; dåñövä—seeing; rädhäm—Rädhä; ca—and; mürchitam—faibnted; rahaù—in secluded place; sthitam—situated; sakhé-saìge—in the company of Her friends; nanäda—played; muralém—the flute; kaläm—sweetly.

     Going to Çré Rädhä's palace and seeing Rädhä fallen unconscious, in a secluded place, and in the company of Her friends, Lord Kåñëa played sweet and soft notes on His flute.

Text 4

çrutvä vaàçé-dhvanià rädhä
     sahasotthäya cäturä
netra unmélya dadåçe
     çré-govindaà samägatam

     çrutvä—hearing; vaàçé-dhvanim—the sound of the flute; rädhä—Rädhä; sahasä—at once; utthäya—rising; ca—and; aturä—agitated; netre—eyes; unmélya—opening; dadåçe—saw; çré-govindam—Çré Kåñëa; samägatam—come.

     When She heard the flute-music, Rädhä became conscious again. Agitated, She opened Her eyes and saw that Lord Kåñëa had come.

Text 5

padminéva gatänandaà
     padminé padminé-patim
vékñyotthäyägatä tasmai
     sädareëäsanaà dadau

     padminé—lotus flowers; iva—like; gatä—attained; änandam—bliss; padminé—lotus flowers; padminé-patim—the sun; vékñya—seeing; utthäya—rising; ägata—come; tasmai—to Him; sa—with; ädareëa—respect; äsanam—a seat; dadau—gave.

     She gazed at Him as a lotus flower gazes at the sun. Approaching Him, She respectfully offered Him a seat.

Text 6

açru-pürëa-mukhéà dénäà
     rädhäà kamala-locanäm
çocantéà bhagavän äha
     megha-gambhérayä girä

     açru—with tears; pürëa—filled; mukhém—face; dénäm—poor; rädhäm—Rädhä; kamala-locanäm—lotus-eyed; çocantém—weeping; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; äha—said; megha-gambhérayä—deep as thunder; girä—with words.

     Gazing at poor, weeping, lotus-eyed Rädhä, Her face filled with tears, the Supreme Personality of Godhead spoke with words deep as thunder.

Text 7

çré-bhagavän uväca 
vimanäs tvaà kathaà bhadre
     mä çocaà kuru rädhike
athavä gantu-kämaà mäà
     çrutväsi virahäturä

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vimanäù—unhappy; tvam—You; katham—why?; bhadre—O beautiful one; mä—don't; çocam—lament; kuru—do; rädhike—O Rädhä; athavä—or; gantu-kämam—wishing to go; mäm—Me; çrutvä—heard; asi—You are; viraha—by the separation; aturä—distressed.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Why are You unhappy, beautiful one? O Rädhä, please don't cry. Are You unhappy because You heard that I want to go away?

Text 8

bhuvo bhärävatäräya
     kaàsädénäà vadhäya ca
brahmaëä prärthitaù säkñäj
     jäto 'haà vai tvayä saha

     bhuvaù—of the earth; bhära—the burden; avatäräya—to remove; kaàsädénäm—of the demons headed by Kaàsa; vadhäya—for the killing; ca—and; brahmaëä—by Brahmä; prärthitaù—requested; säkñät—directly; jätaù—born; aham—I am; vai—indeed; tvayä—You; saha—along with.

     To remove the earth's burden and to kill the demons headed by Kaàsa, on Brahmä's request I have taken birth here with You as My companion.

Text 9

mathuräà hi gamiñyämi
     hariñyämi bhuvo bharam
çéghram aträgamiñyämi
     kariñyämi çubhaà tava

     mathuräm—to Mathurä; hi—indeed; gamiñyämi—I will go; hariñyämi—I will remove; bhuvaù—of the earth; bharam—the burden; çéghram—quickly; atra—here; ägamiñyämi—I will return; kariñyämi—I will do; çubham—the happiness; tava—of You.

     I will go to Mathurä and remove the earth's burden. Then I will quickly return here and make You happy.

Text 10

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktavantaà jagad-éçvaraà harià
     rädhä patià präha viyoga-vihvalä
dävägninä däva-lateva mürchitä
     su-kampa-romaïcita-bhäva-samvåtä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; éty—thus; uktavantam—speaking; jagad-éçvaram—Supreme Personality of Godhead; harim—Kåñëa; rädhä—Rädhä; patim—Lord; präha—said; viyoga-vihvalä—anxious about Their separation; dävägninä—with a forest fire; däva—on fire; latä—a flowering vine; iva—like; mürchitä—fainted; su-kampa—trembling; romaïcita—and hairs erect; bhäva—symptoms of love; samvåtä—filled with.

     Çré Närada said: Then, filled with love, trembling, and Her bodily hairs erect, Rädhä, who was like a flowering vine caught fire in a conflagration of anxiety about Their separation, spoke to Her master, Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 11

çré-rädhoväca 
bhuvo bharaà hartum alaà puréà vraja
     kåtaà paraà me çapathaà çåëu tvataù
gate tvayi präëa-pate ca vigrahaà
     kadäcid atraiva na dhärayämy aham

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; bhuvaù—of the earth; bharam—the burden; hartum—to remove; alam—greatly; purém—to the city; vraja—go; kåtam—done; param—then; me—to Me; çapatham—vow; çåëu—please hear; tvataù—from You; gate—gone; tvayi—when You; präëa-pate—O Lord of My life; ca—and; vigraham—form; kadäcit—sometime; atra—here; eva—indeed; na—not; dhärayämy—maintain; aham—I.

     Çré Rädhä said: Go to the city to remove the earth's burden. But please hear the vow I make. O master of My life, while You are gone I will not keep this body alive.

Text 12

yadättha me tvaà çapathaà na manyase
     dvitéya-väraà pradadämi väk-pathaà
präëo 'dhare gantum atéva-vihvalaù
     karpüra-dhüleù kaëavad gamiñyati

     yadä—when; attha—You said; me—to Me; tvam—You; çapatham—vow; na—not; manyase—think; dvitéya-väram—a second time; pradadämi—I give; väk—of words; patham—the path; präëaù—life-breath; adhare—on the lips; gantum—to go; atéva-vihvalaù—very agitated; karpüra-dhüleù—of a speck of camphor; kaëavat—like a single grain; gamiñyati—will go.

     If You no not believe I will keep this vow, I say it for a second time: The anxious breath that appears on these lips will be extinguished like a speck of camphor devoured by a flame.

Text 13

çré-bhagavän uväca 
vacanaà me sva-nigamaà
     düré-kartuà kñamo 'smy aham
bhaktänäà vacanaà rädhe
     düré-kartuà na ca kñamaù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; vacanam—words; me—of Me; sva-nigamam—assertion; düré-kartum—far away; kñamaù—am able; asmy—am; aham—I; bhaktänäm—of the devotees; vacanam—the words; rädhe—O Rädhä; düré-kartum—to throw far away; na—not; ca—and; kñamaù—able.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: I can break My own vow, but I have no power to break the vow of My devotees.

Text 14

çrédäma-çäpät pürvasmäd
     goloke kalahän mama
çata-varñaà te viyogo
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     çrédäma—of Çrédämä; çäpät—because of the curse; pürvasmät—previous; goloke—in Goloka; kalahän—froma quarrel; mama—of Me; çata-varñam—a hundred years; te—of You; viyogaù—separation; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Because of a quarrel in Goloka, Çrédämä cursed You to be separated fgrom Me. You must be separated from Me for a hundred years. Of this there is no doubt. 

Text 15

mä çokaà kuru kalyäëi
     varaà me smara rädhike
mäsaà mäsaà viyoge te
     darçanaà me bhaviñyati

     mä—don't; çokam—lament; kuru—do; kalyäëi—O beautiful one; varam—lover; me—Me; smara—remember; rädhike—O Rädhä; mäsam—month; mäsam—after month; viyoge—in separation; te—of You; darçanam—the sight; me—of Me; bhaviñyati—will be.

     Beautiful one, don't cry. O Rädhä, remember Me always as Your lover. Month after month You will still see Me, even though We are separated.

Text 16

çré-rädhoväca 
mäsaà prati viyoge me
     dätuà svaà darçanaà hare
cen nägamiñyasi tadä-
     sün duùkhät santyajämy aham

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; mäsaà prati—every month; viyoge—in separation; me—to Me; dätum—to give; svam—own; darçanam—sight; hare—O $; cen—if; na—not; ägamiñyasi—You will return; tadä—then; asün—life; duùkhät—out of unhappiness; santyajämy—renounce; aham—I.

     Çré Rädhä said: If every month You do not return to let Me see You I will grieve and give up My life.

Text 17

lokäbhiräma jana-bhüñaëa viçva-dépa
     kandarpa-mohana jagad-våjinärti-härin
änanda-kanda yadu-nandana nanda-süno
     adyägamasya çapathaà kuru me puras tvam

     loka—of the worlds; abhiräma—O happiness; jana—of the people; bhüñaëa—O ornament; viçva—of the universe; dépa—O lamp; kandarpa—as kämadeva; mohana—charming; jagat—of the universes; våjina—of the sins; arti—the sufferings; härin—O remover; änanda-kanda—O source of bliss; yadu-nandana—O descendent of Yadu; nanda-sünaù—O son of Nanda; adya—today; ägamasya—of the return; çapatham—vow; kuru—do; me—of Me; puraù—in the presence; tvam—You.

     O happiness of the worlds, O ornament of the people, O lamp lighting the universe, O youth more handsome than Kämadeva, O Lord who removes the world's sufferings, O root from which all bliss has blossomed, O descendent of King Yadu, O son of Nanda, promise Me that You will return.

Text 18

çré-bhagavän uväca 
rambhoru mäsaà prati te viyoge
     cen nägamiñye çapathaà gaväà me
niùsaàçayaà niñkapaöaà vacas tvaà
     avehi rädhe kathitaà mayä yat

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; rambha—banana tree; üru—thighs; mäsam—month; prati—every; te—of You; viyoge—in separation; cen—if; na—not; ägamiñye—return; çapatham—promise; gaväm—of the cows; me—of Me; niùsaàçayam—wihtout doubt; niñkapaöam—without duplicity; vacaù—words; tvam—You; avehi—please understand; rädhe—O Rädhä; kathitam—spoken; mayä—by Me; yat—which.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O girl with thighs graceful as banana trees, every month I will return. I vow this on all My cows. O Rädhä, please believe that My words are not a lie.

Text 19

yo mitratäà niñkapaöaà karoti
     niñkäraëo dhanyatamaù sa eva
vidhäya maitréà kapaöaà vidadhyät
     taà lampaöaà hetu-paöaà naöaà dhik

     yaù—who; mitratäm—to friendship; niñkapaöam—sincere; karoti—does; niñkäraëaù—unselfish; dhanyatamaù—most fortunate; sa—he; eva—indeed; vidhäya—placing; maitrém—friendship; kapaöam—insincere; vidadhyät—should place; tam—that; lampaöam—a debauchee; hetu—reason; paöam—dressed; naöam—an actor; dhik—fie!

     An unselfish and sincere friend is the most fortunate of persons. Fie on one who is only an actor pretending to be a friend!

Text 20

karmendriyäëéha yathä rasädiàs
     tathä sa-kämä munayaù sukhaà yat
manäì na jänanti hi nairapekñaà
     güòhaà paraà nirguëa-lakñaëaà tat

     karma—working; indriyäëi—senses; iha—here; yathä—as; rasädiàù—beginning with the tongue; tathä—so; sa-kämä—with desire; munayaù—the sages; sukham—happiness; yat—which; manäk—slightly; na—not; jänanti—know; hi—indeed; nairapekñam—aloofness; güòham—hidden; param—great; nirguëa-lakñaëam—beyond the modes of nature; tat—that.

     Philosophers that still desire the objects of the material senses cannot at all understand the great secret of renunciation, a secret untouched by the three modes of nature.

Text 21

jänanti santaù sama-darçino ye
     däntä mahäntaù kila nairapekñäù
te nairapekñyaà paramaà sukhaà me
     jïänendriyädéni yathä rasädén

     jänanti—know; santaù—the saintly devotees; sama-darçinaù—seeing equally; ye—who; däntä—self-controlled; mahäntaù—great souls; kila—indeed; nairapekñäù—renounced; te—they; nairapekñyam—renunciation; paramam—supreme; sukham—happiness; me—of Me; jïänendriyädéni—beginning with the knowledge-acquiring senses; yathä—as; rasädén—beginning with taste.

     Saintly devotees, who control their senses and see everyone equally, know the great happiness of renunciation. They taste Me with their tongues and the directly experience Me with their other senses.

Text 22

sarvaà hi bhävaà manasaù parasparaà
     na hy ekato bhämini jäyate tataù
premaiva kartavyam ato mayi svataù
     premëä samänaà bhuvi nästi kiïcit

     sarvam—all; hi—indeed; bhävam—love; manasaù—of the heart; parasparam—mutual; na—not; hy—indeed; ekataù—alone; bhämini—O beautiful one; jäyate—is born; tataù—then; prema—love; eva—indeed; kartavyam—should be done; ataù—then; mayi—for Me; svataù—spontaneously; premëä—with love; samänam—equal; bhuvi—in the world; na—not; asti—is; kiïcit—anything.

     O beautiful one, they love Me with all their hearts. The living entities should love Me. In this world nothing is equal to love for Me.

Text 23

yathä hi bhäëòéra-vaöe manoratho
     babhüva rädhe hi tathä bhaviñyati
ahaitukaà prema ca sadbhir äçritaà
     tac cäpi santaù kila nirguëaà viduù

     yathä—as; hi—indeed; bhäëòéra-vaöe—in Bhandiravana; manorathaù—desire; babhüva—was; rädhe—O Rädhä; hi—indeed; tathä—so; bhaviñyati—will be; ahaitukam—causless; prema—love; ca—and; sadbhiù—by the devotees; äçritam—taken shelter; tac—that; ca—and; api—even; santaù—the devotees; kila—indeed; nirguëam—beyond the modes; viduù—know.

     O Rädhä, as in the past I fulfilled Your desires in Bhäëòéravana forest, so in the future I will fulfill them again. The saintly devotees love Me selflessly. They stand on the spiritual platform, above the three modes of material nature.

Text 24

ye rädhikäyäà tvayi keçave mayi
     bhedaà na kurvanti hi dugdha-sauklyavat
ta eva me brahma-padaà prayänti tad
     ahaituka-sphurjita-bhakti-lakñaëäù

     ye—who; rädhikäyäm—in Rädhä; tvayi—in You; keçave—in Kåñëa; mayi—in Me; bhedam—difference; na—not; kurvanti—do; hi—indeed; dugdha—milk; sauklya—and whiteness; vat—like; ta—they; eva—indeed; me—of Me; brahma-padam—the spiritual abode; prayänti—attain; tat—that; ahaituka—selfless; sphurjita—manifest; bhakti—devotional service; lakñaëäù—characterized.

     They who know that as milk and its quality of whiteness cannot be separated, so there is no difference between You, Rädhä, and Me, Kåñëa, are My selfless devotees. They go to My transcendental abode.

Text 25

ye rädhikäyäà tvayi keçave mayi
     paçyanti bhedaà ku-dhiyo narä bhuvi
te käla-sütraà prapatanti duùkhitä
     rambhoru yävat kila candra-bhäskarau

     ye—who; rädhikäyäm—in Rädhä; tvayi—in You; keçave—in Kåñëa; mayi—in Me; paçyanti—see; bhedam—difference; ku-dhiyaù—fools; naräù—people; bhuvi—in this world; te—they; käla-sütram—the rope of time; prapatanti—fall; duùkhitä—unhappy; rambha—banana trees; üru—thighs; yävat—as; kila—indeed; candra—the moon; bhäskarau—and the sun.

     They who see a difference etween You, Rädhä, and Me, Kåñëa, are fools. O girl with thighs graceful as banana trees, they fall into the line of time and suffer there for as long as the sun and the moon shine in the sky.

Text 26

çré-närada uväca 
evam äçväsya täà rädhäà
     sarvaà gopé-gaëaà tathä
äyayau nanda-bhavanaà
     bhagavän naya-kovidaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; äçväsya—comforting; täm—Her; rädhäm—Rädhä; sarvam—all; gopé-gaëam—the gopés; tathä—so; äyayau—went; nanda-bhavanam—to Nanda's palace; bhagavän—the Lord; naya-kovidaù—the greatest philosopher.

     Çré Närada said: After thus comforting Rädhä and the gopés, the Lord, who is the wisest of philosophers, returned to Nanda's palace.

Text 27

atha süryodaye jäte
     nandädyäù çakaöair balim
nétvä rathän samäruhya
     sarve çré-mathuräà yayuù

     atha—then; süryodaye—at sunrise; jäte—manifested; nandädyäù—headed by nanda; çakaöaiù—with wagons; balim—offerings; nétvä—taking; rathän—chariots; samäruhya—climbing; sarve—all; çré-mathuräm—to Mathurä; yayuù—went.

     The next morning at sunrise Nanda and all the gopas put their offerings in many wagons, themselves climbed onto many chariots, and went to Mathurä.

Text 28

äruhya räma-kåñëäbhyäà
     svaà rathaà gandiné-sutaù
prayäëam akarod räjan
     mathuräà drañöum udyataù

     äruhya—climbing; räma-kåñëäbhyäm—with Kåñëa and Balaräma; svam—own; ratham—chariot; gandiné-sutaù—Akrüra; prayäëam—the journey; akarot—did; räjan—O king; mathuräm—to Mathurä; drañöum—to see; udyataù—prepared.

     O king, Akrüra climbed on his chariot and with Kåñëa and Balaräma went to see Mathurä.

Text 29

koöisaù koöiço gopyo
     märge märge samästhitäù
paçyantyas tan-nirgamanaà
     krodhäòhyä moha-vihvaläù

     koöisaù koöiçaù—millions and millions; gopyaù—of gopés; märge—on path; märge—after path; samästhitäù—stood; paçyantyaù—gazing; tan-nirgamanam—at the departure; krodhäòhyä—filled with anger; moha-vihvaläù—overcome with bewilderment.

     Angry and bewildered, millions and millions of gopéss stood on every path, staring at the Lord's departure.

Text 30

krüra krüreti cäkrüraà
     vadantyaù päruñaà vacaù
rurudhuù sarvato yänaà
     yathärkaà sa-rathaà ghanaù

     krüra—cruel; krüra—cruel; iti—thus; ca—and; akrüram—to Akrüra; vadantyaù—saying; päruñam—harsh; vacaù—words; rurudhuù—blocked; sarvataù—everywhere; yänam—the journey; yathä—as; arkam—the sun; sa-ratham—with chariot; ghanaù—a cloud.

     Calling out, "Cruel! Cruel!" they jeered Akrüra. As clouds block the sun-god's chariot, they blocked every path 

Text 31

akrürasya rathaà räjan
     nijaghnur yañöibhir bhåçäm
açväàs tathä särathià ca
     bhagavad-virahäturäù

     akrürasya—of Akrüra; ratham—the chariot; räjan—O king; nijaghnuù—hit; yañöibhiù—with sticks; bhåçäm—greatly; açvän—the horses; tathä—so; särathim—the charioteer; ca—and; bhagavad-virahäturäù—distraught with separation from the Lord.

     O king, anguished by their imminent separation from the Lord, with sticks the gopés whipped Akrüra's chariot, horses, and chariot driver.

Text 32

açväs tatra samutpetus
     täòitäs ta itas tataù
gopé-dvy-aìguli-ghätena
     särathiù patito rathät

     açväù—the horses; tatra—there; samutpetuù—bolted; täòitäù—beated; ta—they; itaù—here; tataù—and there; gopé—of the gopés; dvi—two; aìguli—fingers; ghätena—by the blow; särathiù—the charioteer; patitaù—fell; rathät—from the chariot.

     The whipped horses suddenly bolted, running here and there. Pushed by two gopé fingers, the charioteer fell from the chariot.

Text 33

vihäya lajjäà lokasya
     samäkåñya rathäd balät
kaìkaëais teòur akrüraà
     paçyatoù kåñëa-rämayoù

     vihäya—giving up; lajjäm—the shame; lokasya—of the world; samäkåñya—pulling; rathät—from the chariot; balät—by force; kaìkaëaiù—with bracelets; teòuù—beat; akrüram—Akrüra; paçyatoù—looking on; kåñëa-rämayoù—Kåñëa and Balaräma.

     Throwing their shyness far away, they dragged Akrüra from the chariot and beat him with their bracelets as Kåñëa and Balaräma passively looked on.

Text 34

gopé-yütha-balaà dåñövä
     sa-balo bhagavän hariù
gopéù sambodhayäm äsa
     rakñitvä gandiné-sutam

     gopé-yütha—of the gopés; balam—the power; dåñövä—seeing; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hariù—Kåñëa; gopéù—to the gopés; sambodhayäm äsa—addressed; rakñitvä—protecting; gandiné-sutam—Akrüra.

     Seeing how strong the gopés were, Lord Kåñëa and Balaräma interceded on Akrüra's behalf and protected him. Lord Kåñëa said to the gopés:

Text 35

sandhyäyäm ägamiñyämi
     mä çokaà kurutäìganäù
paçyataç cäsya mad-dhäsyaà
     mä kurvantu vrajaukasaù

     sandhyäyäm—at sunset; ägamiñyämi—I will return; mä—don't; çokam—lament; kuruta—do; aìganäù—O girls; paçyataù—looking; ca-—and; asya—of him; mad-dhäsyam—troubling; mä—not; kurvantu—should do; vrajaukasaù—the people of Vraja.

     Girls, don't cry. At sunset I will return. The people of Vraja should not trouble Akrüra.

Text 36

ity evam uktvä sarathaù samägato
     'krüreëa kåñëo baladeva-samyutaù
turaìgamair vegamayair manoharair
     yayau puréà yädava-vånda-maëòitam

     ity—thus; evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; sarathaù—riding in a chariot; samägataù—come; akrüreëa—with Akrüra; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; baladeva-samyutaù—with Balaräma; turaìgamaiù—with the horses; vegamayaiù—fast; manoharaiù—handsome; yayau—went; purém—to the city; yädava-vånda-maëòitam—decorated with the Yädavas.

     After speaking these words, Lord Kåñëa, accompanied by Balaräma and Akrüra, journeyed in the chariot pulled by many fast and handsome horses to the great city Mathurä, which had the Yädavas as its splendid decoration.

Text 37

yävad rathaù ketur utäçva-reëur
     alakñyate tävad atéva-mohät
sthitä hy abhüvan pathi citravat täù      småtvä harer väkyam utägatäçäù

     yävat—as; rathaù—the chariot; ketuù—the flag; uta—indeed; açva—of the horses; reëuù—the dust; alakñyate—was seen; tävat—so; atéva—great; mohät—from illusion; sthitä—situated; hy—indeed; abhüvan—was; pathi—on the path; citravat—like a picture; täù —they; småtvä—remembering; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; väkyam—the words; uta—indeed; ägata—returned; äçäù—hope.

     As long as the chariot, it's flag, or the cloud of dust the running horses made could be seen, the stunned gopés stood like painted pictures on the path. Then, remembering Lord Kåñëa's words, they became hopeful.
.pa

Chapter Five
Mathuräyäà Çré Kåñëa-praveçaù
Çré Kåñëa's Entrance Into Mathurä

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
harir akrüra-rämäbhyäà
     mathuropavanaà gataù
yamunä-nikaöaà sthitvä
     vari pétvä rathaà yayau

     çré-närada uväca; hariù—Çré Närada said; akrüra-rämäbhyäm—with Akrüra and Balaräma; mathuropavanam—to the graden of Mathurä; gataù—wnet; yamunä-nikaöam—near the Yamunä; sthitvä—staying; vari—the water; pétvä—drinking; ratham—to the chariot; yayau—went;

     Çré Närada said: Accompanied by Balaräma and Akrüra, Kåñëa went to Mathurä's gardens by the Yamunä's shore, drank some water, and returned to the chariot.

Text 2

akrüras täv anujïäpya
     snätuà çré-yamunäà gataù
nitya-naimittikaà kartuà
     viveça vimale jale

     akrüraù—Akrüra; täv—Them; anujïäpya—obtaining permission; snätum—to bath; çré-yamunäm—to Çré Yamunä; gataù—went; nitya-naimittikam—his regular bath; kartum—to do; viveça—wntereed; vimale—the pure; jale—water.

     Atter taking permission from Kåñëa and Balaräma, Akrüra went to the Yamunä and entered the water to take his regular bath.

Text 3

jale cägadha-gambhére
     mahä-varta-samäkule
dadarça räma-kåñëau tau
     vadantau gandiné-sutaù

     jale—in the water; ca—and; agädha-gambhére——very deep; mahä-varta-samäkule—very turbulent; dadarça—saw; räma—Balaräma; kåñëau—and Kåñëa; tau—Them; vadantau—speaking; gandiné-sutaù—Akrüra.

     In the deep and turbulent water Akrüra saw Kåñëa and Balaräma conversing.

Text 4

vismitas tau rathe 'paçyat
     punar väri sthitau nåpa
dadarça tatra sarpendraà
     kuëòalé-bhütam ästhitam

     vismitaù—astonished; tau—Them; rathe—on the chariot; apaçyat—saw; punaù—again; väri—in the water; sthitau—standing; nåpa—O king; dadarça—saw; tatra—there; sarpendram—the king of snakes; kuëòalé-bhütam—coiled-up; ästhitam—situated.

     O king, when he looked and saw Them both sitting on the chariot, Akrüra was very surprised. He looked again into the water and saw Ananta Çeña coiled again and again, . . .

Text 5

tasyotsaìge mahä-lokaà
     golokaà loka-vanditam
govardhanädrià yamunäà
     våndäraëyaà manoharam

     tasya—of Him; utsaìge—on the lap; mahä-lokam—the great planet; golokam—Goloka; loka-vanditam—worshiped by the worlds; govardhanädrim—Govardhana Hill; yamunäm—tye y; våndäraëyam—Våndävana; manoharam—beautiful.

     On Çeña's lap he saw Våndävana forest, the Yamunä, Govardhana Hill, and the transcendental realm of Goloka, which is worshiped by all the worlds.

Text 6

asaìkhya-koöi-märtaëòa-
     jyotiñaà maëòalaà prabhum
paripürëatamaà säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaà puruñottamam

     asaìkhya—countless; koöi—millions; märtaëòa—of suns; jyotiñam—effulgence; maëòalam—circle; prabhum—the Lord; paripürëatamam—the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñäc—directly; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; puruñottamam—the Supreme Person.

     On Çeña's lap Akrüra also saw Lord Kåñëa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, glorious as countless millions of suns, . . .

Text 7

koöi-manmatha-lävaëyaà
     räsa-maëòala-madhya-gam
rädhayä sahitaà devaà
     taträkrüro dadarça ha

     koöi—millions; manmatha—of Kämadevas; lävaëyam—handsomeness; räsa-maëòala-madhya-gam—in the middle of theb räsa-dance circle; rädhayä—with Rädhä; sahitam—with; devam—the Lord; tatra—there; akrüraù—Akrüra; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

 . . . and more handsome than millions of Kämadevas, standing with Rädhä in the räsa-dance circle.

Text 8

jïätvä kåñëaà paraà brahma
     natvä natvä punaù punaù
kåtäïjali-puöo 'krüraù
     stutià cakre 'ti-harñitaù

     jïätvä—understanding; kåñëam—Lord Kåñëa; param—the Supreme; brahma—Brahman; natvä—bowing; natvä—and bowing; punaù—again; punaù—and again; kåtäïjali-puöaù—with folded hands; akrüraù—Akrüra; stutim—prayers; cakre—did; ati-harñitaù—jubilant.

     Aware that Çré Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Akrüra bowed down again and again and again. Filled with joy, he folded his hands and spoke many prayers.

Text 9

çré-akrüra uväca 
namaù çré-kåñëacandräya
     paripürëatamäya ca
asaìkhyäëòädhipataye
     goloka-pataye namaù

     çré-akrüra uväca—Çré Akrüra said; namaù—obeisances; çré-kåñëacandräya—to Çré Kåñëacandra; paripürëatamäya—the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca—and; asaìkhya—numberless; aëòa—of universes; adhipataye—the master; goloka-pataye—the master of Goloka; namaù—obeisances.

     Çré Akrüra said: Obeisances to Çré Kåñëacandra, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead! Obeisances to Çré Kåñëa, the master of numberless universes, the master of Goloka!

Text 10

çré-rädhä-pataye tubhyaà
     vrajädhéçäya te namaù
namaù çré-nanda-puträya
     yaçodä-nandanäya ca

     çré-rädhä-pataye—the master of Rädhä; tubhyam—to You; vrajädhéçäya—the king of Vraja; te—to You; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances; çré-nanda-puträya—the son of Nanda; yaçodä-nandanäya—the son of Yaçodä; ca—and.

     Obeisances to You, the master of Rädhä and the king of Vraja! Obeisances to You, the son of Nanda and Yaçodä!

Text 11

devaké-suta govinda
     väsudeva jägat-pate
yadüttama jagan-nätha
     pähi mäà puruñottama

     devaké-suta—O son of Devaké; govinda—O Govinda; väsudeva—O son of Vasudeva; jägat-pate—O master of the universes; yadüttama—O best of the Yädavas; jagan-nätha—O master of the universes; pähi—please protect; mäm—me; puruñottama—O Supreme Person.

     O son of Devaké and Vasudeva, O Govinda, O best of the Yädavas, O master of the universes, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, please protect me!

Text 12

väëé sadä te guëa-varëane syät
     karëau kathäyäà mama doç ca karmaëi
manaù sadä tvac-caraëäravindayor
     dåçau sphurad-dhäma-viveça-darçane

     väëé—words; sadä—always; te—of You; guëa-varëane—describing the virtues; syät—is; karëau—the ears; kathäyäm—in the narrations; mama—my; doç—arms; ca—and; karmaëi—in the works; manaù—mind; sadä—always; tvac-caraëäravindayoù—in Your lotusa feet; dåçau—eyes; sphurad-dhäma-viveça-darçane—in seeing Your glory.

     May my words always describe Your transcendental qualities, my ears always hear descriptions of You, my arms always work for You, my mind always think of Your lotus feet, and my eyes always see the splendid glory of Your transcendental form.

Text 13

çré-närada uväca 
evaà saàstuvatas tasya
     paçyato vismitasya ca
tatraiväntardadhe kåñëaù
     sa-loko bhagavän prabhuù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; saàstuvataù—pryaing; tasya—of him; paçyataù—gazing; vismitasya—astonished; ca—and; tatra—there; eva—indeed; antardadhe—disappeared; kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; sa-lokaù—with His realm; bhagavän prabhuù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     Çré Närada said: As astonished Akrüra was speaking these prayers, the Supreme Lord Kåñëa in His transcendental realm suddenly disappeared.

Text 14

natvä taà ca tadäkrüraù
     kåtvä naimittikaà vidhim
jïätvä kåñëaà paraà brahma
     vismito ratham äyayau

     natvä—bowing down; tam—to Him; ca—and; tadä—then; akrüraù—Akrüra; kåtvä—doing; naimittikam—regular; vidhim—duties; jïätvä—knowing; kåñëam—Kåñëa; param—the Supreme; brahma—Brahman; vismitaù—astonished; ratham—to the chariot; äyayau—went.

     Bowing down, finishing his regular duties, and now acutely aware of Lord Kåñëa's divinity, astonished Akrüra returned to the chariot.

Text 15

dinätyaye räma-kåñëäv
     anayad gandiné-sutaù
rathena väyu-vegena
     snigdha-gambhéra-nädinä

     dina—of the day; atyaye—at the end; räma-kåñëäv—Kåñëa and Balaräma; anayat—led; gandiné-sutaù—Akrüra; rathena—by chariot; väyu—wind; vegena—with the speed; snigdha—gambhéra-nädinä—with a sound like thunder.

     Driving a chariot that rumbled like thunder and went as fast as the wind, at the day's end Akrüra took Kåñëa and Balaräma to the gardens outside Mathurä.

Text 16

purasyopavane tatra
     vékñya nandaà yadüttamaù
akrüraà präha vihasan
     megha-gambhérayä girä

     purasya—of ther city; upavane—in the gardens; tatra—there; vékñya—seeing; nandam—Nanda; yadüttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; akrüram—to Akrüra; präha—said; vihasan—smiling; megha-gambhérayä—like thunder; girä—with words.

     When He saw Nanda there in Mathurä's gardens, Lord Kåñëa smiled and spoke to Akrüra with words like thunder.

Text 17

çré-bhagavän uväca 
mathuräyäà hi gantavyaà
     bhavatä sva-rathena vai
gopälaiù sahitaù paçcäd
     ägamiñyämi mänada

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; hi—indeed; gantavyam—should be gone; bhavatä—by you; sva-rathena—by your chariot; vai—indeed; gopälaiù—with the gopas; sahitaù—with; paçcät—after; ägamiñyämi—I will come; mänada—O respectful one.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Humble Akrüra, please take your chariot inside Mathurä City. Accompanied by the gopas, I will enter the city later.

Text 18

çré-akrüra uväca 
deva-deva jagan-nätha
     govinda puruñottama
sahägrajaù sa-gopälo
     gaccha me mandiraà prabho

     çré-akrüra uväca—Çré Akrüra said; deva-deva—O master of the dfemigods; jagan-nätha—O master of the universes; govinda—O Govinda; puruñottama—O Supreme Person; sahägrajaù—with Your elder brother; sa-gopälaù—with the gopas; gaccha—please; me—my; mandiram—home; prabhaù—O Lord.

     Çré Akrüra said: O master of the demigods, O master of the universes, O Govinda, O Supreme Person, taking with You Your elder brother and Your gopa friends, please agree to visit my home.

Text 19

padäravinda-rajasä
     pavitré-kuru mad-gåham
tvaà vinä na gamiñyämi
     mandiraà svaà jägat-pate

     pada—feet; aravinda—lotus; rajasä—with the dust; pavitré-kuru—please purify; mad-gåham—my home; tvam—You; vinä—except for; na—not; gamiñyämi—I will go; mandiram—home; svam—own; jägat-pate—O master of the worlds.

     Please purify my home with the pollen of Your lotus feet. O master of the worlds, I will not return to my home unless I can take You with me.

Text 20

çré-bhagavän uväca 
gåhaà tavägamiñyämi
     hatvä vai yädavähitam
sa-balo bandhavaiù särdhaà
     kariñyämi tava priyam

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; gåham—home; tava—your; ägamiñyämi—I will come; hatvä—having killed; vai—indeed; yädavähitam—the person that harms the Yädavas; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; bandhavaiù—with My kinsmen; särdham—with; kariñyämi—I will do; tava—of You; priyam—the favor.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: After I have killed the king that harms the Yädavas, I will visit your home. Accompanied by Balaräma and My kindsmen, I will satisfy your desire.

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
atha tatra sthite kåñëe
     so 'krüro mathuräà gataù
nivedya cedaà kaàçäya
     tataù sva-bhavanaà yayau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; tatra—there; sthite—situated; kåñëe—Kåñëa; saù—He; akrüraù—Akrüra; mathuräm—to Mathurä; gataù—gone; nivedya—informing; ca—and; idam—this; kaàçäya—to Kaàsa; tataù—then; sva-bhavanam—to his home; yayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: Leaving Lord Kåñëa there, Akrüra entered Mathurä, informed King Kaàsa of what had happened, and then returned to his home.

Text 22

athäparähne sa-balaà
     govindaà bälakaiù purém
drañöum abhyuditaà vékñya
     nando väkyam athäbravét

     atha—then; aparähne—in the afternoon; sa-balam—with Balaräma; govindam—Kåñëa; bälakaiù—with the boys; purém—the city; drañöum—to see; abhyuditam—eager; vékñya—seeing; nandaù—Nanda; väkyam—words; atha—then; abravét—spoke.

     Noticing that afternoon that Kåñëa, Balaräma, and the boys were eager to see Mathurä City, Nanda spoke the following words.

Text 23

ärjavena puréà vékñyä-
     gantavyaà bhavatä kila
na gokulaà viddhi cainaà
     kaàsa-räjye mahä-bhaye

     ärjavena—in a strauightforward way; purém—the city; vékñya—seeing; ägantavyam—should be returned; bhavatä—by You; kila—indeed; na—not; gokulam—Gokula; viddhi—know; ca—and; enam—this; kaàsa-räjye—the kingdom of Kaàsa; mahä-bhaye—very fearful.

     Look at the city and then quickly return. Know that this is not Gokula. This is the fearful kingdom of Kaàsa.

Text 24

tathästu coktvä bhagavän
     våddhair nanda-praëoditaiù
gopälair bälakaiù särdhaà
     sa-balo gatavän purém

     tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying; bhagavän—the Lord; våddhaiù—with the elder; nanda-praëoditaiù—sent by nanda; gopälaiù—gopas; bälakaiù—boys; särdham—with; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; gatavän—went; purém—to the city.

     Saying, "So be it", and accompanied by Balaräma, the boys, and some adult gopas sent by Nanda, Lord Kåñëa entered Mathurä City, . . .

Text 25

präsädair gagana-sparçair
     hema-ratna-khacid-gåhaiù
çobhitäà durga-samyuktäà
     devadhäném iva sthitäm

     präsädaiù—with palaces; gagana—the sky; sparçaiù—touching; hema-ratna-khacid-gåhaiù—with mansions of gold and jewels; çobhitäm—splendid; durga-samyuktäm—with walls; devadhäném—the capitol of the demigods; iva—like; sthitäm-situated.

 . . . which was surrounded by high walls, and filled with mansions of gold and jewels and great palaces that touched the sky, which was like a great city in the celestial planets, . . .

Text 26

kälindéà ratna-sopänaiç
     calad-ürmi-kutühalaiù
alakäm iva çobhäòhyäà
     divya-näré-narair yutam

     kälindém—the Yamunä; ratna—with jewel; sopänaiç—stairs; calad-ürmi-kutühalaiù—with turbulent waves; alakäm—locks of hair; iva—like; çobhäòhyäm—beautiful; divya-näré-naraiù—beauitful men and women; yutam—with.

 . . . which was filled with handsome men and beautiful women, and decorated with jewel staircases leading down to the Yamunä's turbulent waves splendid as black locks of hair.

Text 27

prekñan chré-mathuräà kåñëo
     dhaninäà mandiräëi ca
paçyan gopälakaiù särdhaà
     räja-märgaà viveça ha

     prekñan—looking; çré-mathuräm—at Çré Mathurä; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; dhaninäm—of the wealthy; mandiräëi—the mansions; ca—and; paçyan—seeing; gopälakaiù—the gopas; särdham—with; räja-märgam—the royal road; viveça—entered; ha—indeed.

     As they gazed at the palaces of the wealthy and the other opulences of Mathurä, Kåñëa and the gopas started to walk on the king's road.

Text 28

çrutvägataà taà vasudeva-nandanaà
     bahuçrutä vai mathurä-puräìganäù
tyaktvätha karmäëi visåjya täù çiçün
     drañöuà vyadhävann udadhià yathäpagäù

     çrutvä—hearing; ägatam—arrived; tam—Him; vasudeva-nandanam—Vasudeva's son; bahuçrutä—learned; vai—indeed; mathurä-puräìganäù—the women of Mathurä; tyaktvä—leaving; atha—then; karmäëi—duties; visåjya—leaving; täù—they; çiçün—children; drañöum—to see; vyadhävan—running; udadhim—to the ocean; yathä—like; apagäù—rivers.

     Hearing that Vasudeva's son had come, the learned women of Mathurä at once left their children and all their household duties and ran to see Kåñëa as rivers run into the ocean.

Text 29

käçcit tu harmyät kila jäla-deçät
     kuòyät tu kaçcit paöato gaväkñät
vinirgatä dvära-kapäöa-deçät
     tac cätvarät taà dadåçuù purandhryaù

     käçcit—some; tu—indeed; harmyät—from the plaace; kila—indeed; jäla-deçät—from the lattice; kuòyät—from the wall; tu—indeed; kaçcit—some; paöataù—from the curtains; gaväkñät—from the window; vinirgatä—gone; dvära-kapäöa-deçät—from the doors; tat—that; cätvarät—from the courtyard; tam—Him; dadåçuù—saw; purandhryaù—the women of the city.

     Some from palaces, some from behind latticeworks, some from the tops of walls, some from behind curtains, some from windows, some from doorways, and some from courtyards, the women of Mathurä gazed at Lord Kåñëa. 

Texts 30-32

ekaà calat-kuntalam änane sve
     kim agra-gänäà tu manäàsi hartum
paçcät kåtaà mauli-tale dadhänaà
     kià påñöha-gänäà haraëaà dvitéyam

pétämbarärdhaà balinaà sphurat kaöäv
     ardhaà tad-aàse jalade yathä taòit
padmaà kare sve hådi vaijayantéà
     srajaà dadhänaà vasudeva-nandanam

vilokya sarvä mumuhuù pura-striyo
     vilola-päöhéna-navéna-kuëòalam
bälärka-hemäìgada-bähu-maëòalaà
     räjann asaìkhyäëòa-patià parät param

     ekam—one; calat-kuntalam—moving locks of hair; änane—on the face; sve—own; kim—what?; agra-gänäm—going ahead; tu—indeed; manäàsi—the hearts; hartum—to steal; paçcät—behind; kåtam—done; mauli-tale—on the crown; dadhänam—placing; kim—whjat?; påñöha-gänäm—going behind; haraëam—taking; dvitéyam—second; pétämbarärdham—half of His yellow garment; balinam—powerful; sphurat—manifest; kaöäv—on the waist; ardham—half; tad-aàse—on His shoulder; jalade—a cloud; yathä—as; taòit—lightning; padmam—a lotus flower; kare—on His hand; sve—own; hådi—on the chest; vaijayantém—a vaijayanti; srajam—garland; dadhänam—wearing; vasudeva-nandanam—Vasudeva's son; vilokya—seeing; sarvä—aqll; mumuhuù—became enchanted; pura-striyaù—the women of the city; vilolamoving; päöhéna—shark; navéna—new; kuëòalam—earrings; bälärka—the rising sun; hema—gold; aìgada—srmlets; bähu-maëòalam—the arms; räjann—O king; asaìkhyäëòa-patim—the master of numberless universes; parät param—greater than the greatest.

     O king, as they gazed at Lord Kåñëa, the master of numberless universes, His face decorated in the front with moving locks of hair and in the back with a glittering crown, wearing a yellow cloth wrapped around His waist and over His shoulder, splendid as a dark cloud with a lightning flash, a vaijayanté galrand on His chest and a lotus in His hand, wearing swinging shark-shaped earrings and golden armlets splendid as the rising sun, and stealing their hearts as He walked before Him, all the women of Mathurä City fell hopelessly in love with Him.

Text 33

çré-purandhrya ücuù 
aho våndävanaà ramyaà
     yatra sannihito hy ayam
dhanyä gopa-gaëäù sarve
     paçyanty enaà manoharam

     çré-purandhrya ücuù—the women of Mathurä said; ahaù—Oh; våndävanam—Våndävana; ramyam—beautiful; yatra—where; sannihitaù—stays; hy—indeed; ayam—He; dhanyä—fortunate; gopa-gaëäù—the gopas; sarve—all; paçyanty—see; enam—Him; manoharam—handsome.

     The women of Mathurä City said: Ah, all the gopas in beautiful Våndävana are very fortunate again and again to see such a handsome person.

Text 34

dhanyä gopa-ramaëyas täs
     täbhiù kià sukåtaà kåtam
pibanti yä räsa-raìge
     muhuç cäsyädharämåtam

     dhanyäù—fortunate; gopa-ramaëyaù—the gs; täù—they; täbhiù—with them; kim—what?; sukåtam—pious deeds; kåtam—done; pibanti—drink; yäù—who; räsa-raìge—in the räsa dance; muhuç—again and again; ca—and; asya—of Him; adhara—of the lips; amåtam—the nectar.

     The gopés are very fortunate. What pious deeds must they have performed that in the räsa-dance they could again and again drink the nectar of Kåñëa's lips?

Text 35

çré-närada uväca 
räja-märge raìga-käraà
     rajakaà yäntam unmadam
gopälänumatenaiva
     präha taà madhusüdanaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; räja-märge—on the royal road; raìga-käram—a dyer of cloth; rajakam—a washerman; yäntam—going; unmadam—frantic; gopälänumatenaiva—with the permission of the gopas; präha—said; tam—to him; madhusüdanaù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Çré Närada said: To please the gopas, Lord Kåñëa spoke the following words to a washerman and cloth-dyer that was frantically going on the king's road.

Text 36

dehi no mitra väsäàsi
     ruciräëi mahä-mate
dätus te hi paraà sreyo
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     dehi—give; naù—to us; mitra—O friend; väsäàsi—garments; ruciräëi—beautiful; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one; dätuù—of the giver; te—of you; hi—indeed; param—great; sreyaù—benefit; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     O noble hearted friend, give these beautiful graments to us. If you give them, you will get a great gift in return. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 37

prajvalan kåñëa-väkyena
     ghåtenägnir yathä bhåçäm
kaàsa-bhåtyo mahä-duñöaù
     prähedaà pathi mädhavam

     prajvalan—inflamed; kåñëa-väkyena—by Lord Kåñëa's words; ghåtena—by ghee; agniù—fire; yathä—as; bhåçäm—greatly; kaàsa—of Kaàsa; bhåtyaù—a servant; mahä-duñöaù—a great demon; präha—spoke; idam—this; pathi—on the road; mädhavam—to Lord Kåñëa.

     Inflamed by Lord Kåñëa's words as fire is inflamed by ghee, the washerman, who was a great demon and servant of Kaàsa, spoke to Lord Kåñëa in the middle of the road.

Text 38

rajaka uväca 
idåçäny eva vasträëi
     pitåbhir vaù pitämahaiù
dhäritäni kim udvåttäs
     te tu kaupéna-dhärakäù

     rajaka uväca—the washerman said; idåçäny—like this; eva—indeed; vasträëi—garments; pitåbhiù—by the fathers; vaù—of You; pitämahaiù—by the grandfathers; dhäritäni—worn; kim—what?; udvåttäù—proud; te—they; tu—indeed; kaupéna-dhärakäù—the wearers of kaupinas.

     The washerman said: O proud wearers of kaupénas, did Your fathers or grandfathers ever wear clothes like these?

Text 39

yätäçu vanyä nagarät
     sarve vai jévitecchayä
kärägäre kärayämi
     yuñmän vastra-harän aham

     yäta—go; äçu—at once; vanyä—O frest-dwellers; nagarät—from the city; sarve—all; vai—indeed; jévita—for life; icchayä—with a desire; kärägäre—in prison; kärayämi—I will put; yuñmän—you; vastra-harän—for stealing garments; aham—I.

     O uncivilized people who live in the forest, if you value your lives, then flee from this city! If you do not, then I will have you put in jail for stealing my garments.

Text 40

çré-närada uväca 
evaà pravadatas tasya
     rajakasya yadüttamaù
jahära mastakaà sadyaù
     karägreëaiva lélayä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; pravadataù—speaking; tasya—of him; rajakasya—the washerman; yadüttamaù—Lord Kåñëa; jahära—removed; mastakam—the head; sadyaù—at once; karägreëa—with the edge of His hand; eva—indeed; lélayä—playfully.

     Çré Närada said: As soon as these words were spoken, with the edge of His hand Lord Kåñëa playfully beheaded the washerman.

Texts 41 and 42

taj-jyotiù çré-ghana-çyäme
     lénaà jätaà videha-räö
sadyas tad-anugäù sarve
     väsaù-koçän visåjya vai

dudruvuù sarvato räjan
     çarat-käle yathä ghanäù
gåhétvätma-priye vastre
     sthitayo räma-kåñëayaoù

     taj-jyotiù—his light; çré-ghana-çyäme—in the dark cloud of Çré Kåñëa; lénam—merged; jätam—was; videha-räö—O king of Videha; sadyaù—at once; tad-anugäù—the washerman's followers; sarve—all; väsaù-koçän—the wealth of garments; visåjya—abandoning; vai—indeed; dudruvuù—ran; sarvataù—in all directions; räjan—O king; çarat-käle—in the autumn season; yathä—as; ghanaù—clouds; gåhétvä—taking; ätma-priye—that they like; vastre—garments; sthitayaù—standing; räma-kåñëayaoù—of Kåñëa and Balaräma.

     O king of Videha, then an effulgence left the washerman's dead body and entered the dark cloud of Lord Kåñëa. At once the washerman's assistants dropped the great treasury of opulent gamrnets and fled in all directions as monsoon clouds flee with the coming of autumn. Calmly standing there, Kåñëa and Balaräma took what they liked from the pile of garments.

Text 43

jagåhur gopa-bäläs te
     räja-märga-janä api
tad-dhäraëävido bälä
     väsäàsi ruciräëi ca asta-vyastaà paridadhuù
     çré-kåñëasya prapaçyataù

     jagåhuù—took; gopa-bäläù—the gopa boys; te—they; räja-märga-janä—the people on the king's road; api—also; tad-dhäraëa-vidaù—aware; bälä—the boys; väsäàsi—garments; ruciräëi—beautiful; ca—and; asta-vyastam—left; paridadhuù—took; çré-kåñëasya—as Çré Kåñëa; prapaçyataù—watched.

     The gopa boys took what they wanted, and other boys walking on the king's road, unaware of what had happened, also took from the pile of beautiful clothes as Kåñëa and Balaräma placidly looked on.

Text 44

vékñya tau väyakaù kaçcic
     chré-kåñëa-baladevayoù
vicitra-varëair väsobhir
     divyaà veñaà cakära ha

     vékñya—seeing; tau—Them; väyakaù—weaver; kaçcic—a certain; çré-kåñëa-baladevayoù—of Çré Kåñëa and Balaräma; vicitra—wonderful; varëaiù—with colors; väsobhiù—with garments; divyam—splendid; veñam—dress; cakära—made; ha—indeed.

     Then a weaver noticed Kåñëa and Balaräma and at once dressed Them in beautiful and colorful garments.

Text 45

tathänyeñäà çiçünäà ca
     yathä-yogyaà vidhäya saù
räjan paramayä bhaktyä
     punaù kåñëaà dadarça ha

     tathä—then; anyeñäm—of other; çiçünäm—boys; ca—and; yathä-yogyam—as; vidhäya—placing; saù—he; räjan—O king; paramayä—with great; bhaktyä—devotion; punaù—again; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     He also dressed the other gopa boys. Then with great devotion he again gazed at Lord Kåñëa.

Text 46

prasanno bhagaväàs tasmai
     pradät särüpyam ätmanaù
balaà çriyaà tathaiçvaryaà
     baladevo dadau punaù

     prasannaù—pleased; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tasmai—to him; pradät—gave; särüpyam—a transcendental form like His own; ätmanaù—like His own; balam—strength; çriyam—handsomeness; tathä—so; aiçvaryam—opulence; baladevaù—Balaräma; dadau—gave; punaù—again.

     Pleased with Him, Lord Kåñëa gave the weaver a transcendental form like His own. Then Lord Balaräma gave him transcendental strength, handsomeness, and opulence like His own.
.pa

Chapter Six
Çré Mathurä-darçana
Seeing Çré Mathurä

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
atha gopälakaiù särdhaà
     çré-kåñëo nanda-nandanaù
gåhaà jägama sa-balaù
     sudämno däma-mälinaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; gopälakaiù—with the gopas; särdham—with; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; nanda-nandanaù—the son of Nanda; gåham—to the home; jägama—went; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; sudämnaù—of Sudämä; däma-mälinaù—a garland-maker.

     Then, accompanied by Balaräma and the gopas, Çré Kåñëa, the son of Nanda, went to the florist Sudämä's home.

Text 2

dåñövä tau sa samutthäya
     namaskåtya kåtäïjaliù
puñpa-siàhäsane sthäpya
     präha gadgadayä girä

     dåñövä—seeing; tau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; sa—he; samutthäya—rising; namaskåtya—bowing down; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; puñpa-siàhäsane—on a throne of flowers; sthäpya—placing; präha—said; gadgadayä—choked with emotion; girä—with words.

     When he saw Kåñëa and Balaräma, Sudämä at once stood up and then bowed down with folded hands. Placing Them on a flower throne, he stuttered words choked with emotion. 

Text 3

çré-sudämoväca 
dhanyaà kulaà me bhavanaà ca janma
     tvayy ägate deva kuläni sapta
mätuù pituù sapta tathä priyayä
     vaikuëöhalokaà gatavanti manye

     çré-sudämä uväca—Çré Sudämä siad; dhanyam—fortunate; kulam—family; me—my; bhavanam—home; ca—and; janma—birth; tvayy—in You; ägate—come; deva—O Lord; kuläni—the relatives; sapta—seven; mätuù—of the mother; pituù—of the father; sapta—seven; tathä—so; priyayä—of the wife; vaikuëöhalokam—to Vaikuëöhaloka; gatavanti—gone; manye—I think.

     Çré Sudämä said: O Lord, now that you have come my family, my home, and my birth in this world have all become blessed. I think seven generations of ancestors in the families of my father, mother, and wife have now gone to Vaikuëöhaloka.

Text 4

bhü-bhäram ähartum alaà yadoù kule
     jätau yuväà pürëatamau pareçvarau
namo yuväbhyäà mama déna-dénaà
     gåhaà gatäbhyäà jagad-éçvarau parau

     bhü—of the earth; bhäram—the burden; ähartum—to remove; alam—greatly; yadoù—of King Yadu; kule—in the dynasty; jätau—born; yuväm—You both; pürëatamau—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; pareçvarau—the Supreme Lords; namaù—obeisances; yuväbhyäm—to You both; mama—of me; déna-dénam—the poorest of the poor; gåham—the hone; gatäbhyäm—come; jagad-éçvarau—the controllers of the universes; parau—supreme.

     You are both the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, who have taken birth in King Yadu's dynasty to remove the earth's burden. I offer my respectful obeisances to You, the two controllers of all the worlds, who have now come to my very poor home.

Text 5

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvä puñpa-racanä-
     laìkärän madhupa-dhvanén
nivedya makarandäàç ca
     mälä-käro nanäma ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; uktvä—saying; puñpa-racanä-—made of flowers; laìkärän—ornaments; madhupa—of bees; dhvanén—with the sounds; nivedya—offering; makarandän—with nectar; ca—and; mälä-käraù—the florist; nanäma—bowed down; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these words, the florist offered Kåñëa and Balaräma many nectar flower ornaments filled with the humming of bees. Then he bowed down to offer his respects.

Text 6

dhåtvä tat puñpa-nicayaà
     sa-balo bhagavän hariù
dattvä gopebhya ärät taà
     präha prahasitänanaù

     dhåtvä—seeing; tat—that; puñpa-nicayam—abundance of flowers; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hariù—Kåñëa; dattvä—giving; gopebhyaù—to the gopas; ärät—near; tam—to him; präha—said; prahasita—smiling; änanaù—His face.

     Seeing that great abundance of flowers, Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, gave them to the gopas. Smiling, He spoke the following words:

Text 7

garéyasé mat-pädäbje
     bhaktir bhüyät sadä tava
mad-bhaktänäà tu saìgaù syän
     mat-svarüpam ihaiva hi

     garéyasé—great; mat-pädäbje—for My lotus feet; bhaktiù—devotion; bhüyät—may be; sadä—always; tava—of you; mad-bhaktänäm—of My devotees; tu—indeed; saìgaù—the association; syän—may be; mat-svarüpam—My form; iha—here; eva—indeed; hi—indeed.

     You will have great devotion for My lotus feet. You will have the company of My devotees. Even in this world you will have a transcendental form like My own.

Text 8

baladevo dadau tasmai
     çriyaà cänvaya-vardhiném
utthäya tau tato räjann
     anyaà vithià prajagmatuù

     baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; dadau—gave; tasmai—to him; çriyam—handsomeness and opulence; cänvaya-vardhiném—eternally increasing; utthäya—rising; tau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; tataù—then; räjann—O king; anyam—another; vithim—road; prajagmatuù—went.

     Then Lord Balaräma gave him the gift of eternally increasing handsomeness and opulence. O king, then Kåñëa and Balaräma stood up and left. Now They traveled on a different road.

Text 9

yäntéà çriyaà padma-netraà
     päöérälepa-bhäjanam
bibhratéà yuvatéà kubjäà
     pathi papraccha mädhavaù

     yäntém—going; çriyam—beautiful; padma-netram—lotus-eyed; päöérälepa-bhäjanam—carrying a cup of sandal paste; bibhratém—carrying; yuvatém—young; kubjäm—hunchback girl; pathi—on the path; papraccha—asked; mädhavaù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Then Lord Kåñëa posed a question to a young, beautiful, and lotus-eyed hunchback girl carrying a cup of sandal-paste as she walked on the road.

Text 10

çré-bhagavän uväca 
kä tvaà kasya priyä su-bhru
     kasyärthaà candanaà tv idam
dehy ävayor yena tava
     ciraà çreyo bhaviñyati

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kä—who?; tvam—are you; kasya—of whom; priyä—the beloved; su-bhru—O girl with beautiful eyebrows; kasya—of whom; artham—for the sake; candanam—sandal paste; tv—indeed; idam—this; dehy—please give; ävayoù—to Us; yena—by which; tava—of you; ciram—eternal; çreyaù—good fortune; bhaviñyati—will be.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Who are you? Who is the man that loves you? For whom do you carry this sandal paste? Give it to Us. If you do, you will attain eternal good fortune.

Text 11

çré-sairandhry uväca 
däsy asmi sundara-vara
     kubjä näma mahä-mate
mad-dhastotthaà ca päöéraà
     jätaà bhoja-pateù priyam

     çré-sairandhry uväca—the serving-girl said; däsy—a maidsevant; asmi—I am; sundara-vara—O most handsome of men; kubjä—Kubjä; näma—named; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one; mad-dhastottham—made by my own hand; ca—and; päöéram—sandal paste; jätam—born; bhoja-pateù—of the Bhoja king Kaàsa; priyam—favorite.

     The maidservant said: O most handsome of men, I am a maidservant. O noble-hearted one, My name is Kubjä. I made this sandal paste with my own hand. Kaàsa, the king of the Bhojas, likes it very much. 

Text 12

adyäpi kaàsa-däsy asmi
     sampräptaà tava cägrataù
hasti-ñuëòa-daëòa-same
     bhuja-daëòe 'sti me manaù

     adya—now; api—also; kaàsa-däsy—Kaàsa's maidservant; asmi—I am; sampräptam—attained; tava—of You; ca—and; agrataù—the presence; hasti—an elephant's; ñuëòa-daëòa—trunk; same—like; bhuja-daëòe—two arms; asti—is; me—of me; manaù—the mind.

     I am Kaàsa's maidservant, but now that I have met You I can think only of Your two broad arms like two great elephant's trunks.

Text 13

yuväà vinä ko 'nyatamo
     'nulepaà kartum arhati
yuvayos tu samaà rüpaà
     trailokye na hi vidyate

     yuväm—You two; vinä—without; kaù—who; anyatamoelse; anulepam—sandal paste; kartum—to do; arhati—deserves; yuvayoù—of You both; tu—indeed; samam—equal; rüpam—form; trailokye—in the three worlds; na—not; hi—indeed; vidyate—is.

     Who deserves this sandal paste more than You two? In the three worlds no one is as handsome as You two.

Text 14

çré-närada uväca 
ubhäbhyäà sa dadau sändraà
     harñitä hy anulepanam
atha täv aìgarägena
     räma-kåñëau virejatuù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ubhäbhyäm—to Them both; sa—she; dadau—gave; sändram—great; harñitä—joyful; hy—indeed; anulepanam—sandal paste; atha—then; täv—Them both; aìgarägena—with the ointment; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; virejatuù—were splendid.

     Çré Närada said: Very happy, she gave the thick sandal paste to Them. Anointed with it, Kåñëa and Balaräma shone with great splendor.

Text 15

jagåhuç candanaà divyaà
     kiïcit kiïcid vrajärbhakäù
tri-vakräm atha täà kåñëo
     åjvéà kartuà mano dadhe

     jagåhuù—took; candanam—the sandal paste; divyam—splendid; kiïcit kiïcit—some; vrajärbhakäù—the boys of Vraja; tri-vakräm—the hunchback girl bewnt in three places; atha—then; täm—to her; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; åjvém—a straight girl; kartum—to make; manaù—the mind; dadhe—placed.

     Then the boys of Vraja also took some of the splendid sandal paste. At that moment Lord Kåñëa decided to transform the hunchback girl bent in three places into a beautiful straight girl.

Text 16

äkramya padbhyäà prapade 'ìguli-dvayaà
     prottäna-hastena vibhuù pareçvaraù
pragåhya nåëäà cibuke prapaçyatäà
     vakräà tanuà täm udanénamad dhariù

     äkramya—stepping; padbhyäm—with both feet; prapade—on the toes; aìguli-dvayam—with two fingers; prottäna-hastena—with an extended hand; vibhuù—the Lord; pareçvaraù—the supreme controller; pragåhya—grasping; nåëäm—as the people; cibuke—the chin; prapaçyatäm—watched; vakräm—the crooked; tanum—body; täm—here; udanénamat—pulled; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     With both feet stepping on her toes, and with two fingers of an outretched hand grasping her chin, Lord Kåñëa, the almighty Supreme Personality of Godhead, as everyone watched, suddenly jerked her crooked body.

Text 17

tadaiva sä yañöi-samäna-vigrahä
     déptyä ca rambhaà kñipatéva rüpiëé
bhütvä gåhétväha harià tu väsasi
     çuci-smitä jäta-manoja-vihvalä

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; sä—she; yañöi-samäna-vigrahä—with a body as straight as a stick; déptyä—with splendor; ca—and; rambham—a banana tree; kñipati—trhows; iva—as if; rüpiëé—beautiful; bhütvä—becoming; gåhétvä—taking; äha—said; harim—top Lord Kåñëa; tu—indeed; väsasi—garments; çuci-smitä—with a sweet smile; jäta-manoja-vihvalä—overcome with lust.

     She suddenly became a beautiful girl straight as a stick, her straightness eclipsing the graceful straightness of the banana tree. Sweetly smiling, and now tormented with amorous desires, she clutched Lord Kåñëa's garment.

Text 18

çré-sairandhry uväca 
gacchäçu he sundara-varya mad-gåhaà
     tyaktuà bhavantaà kila notsahe 'ham
praséda sarvajïa rasajïa mänada
     tvayä bhåçaà pronmathitaà mano mama 
     çré-sairandhré uväca—the maidservant said; gaccha—go; äçu—at once; he—O; sundara-varya—most handsome of men; mad-gåham—to my home; tyaktum—to leave; bhavantam—You; kila—indeed; na—not; utsahe—am eager; aham—I; praséda—please be kind; sarvajïa—O all-knowing one; rasajïa—O taster of nectar; mänada—O respectful one; tvayä—with You; bhåçam—greatly; pronmathitam—agitated; manaù—heart; mama—my. 

     The maidservant said: O most handsome of men, please come to my house. I cannot leave You. O all-knowing one, O You who know the sweet taste of nectar, O You who humbly give all honor to others, please be kind to me. My heart is tormented with love for You.

Text 19

çré-närada uväca 
tadaiva gopä jahasuù parasparaà
     aho kim etat kara-täla-niùsvanaiù
prahasya rämasya hariù prapaçyatas
     tad yäcyamäno hy avadat paraà vacaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; eva—indeed; gopä—the gopas; jahasuù—laughed; parasparam—among themselves; ahaù—Oh; kim—what?; etat—this; kara-täla-niùsvanaiù—with clapping of hands; prahasya—laughing; rämasya—of Balaräma; hariù—Kåñëa; prapaçyataù—looking on; tat—that; yäcyamänaù—being requested; hy—indeed; avadat—said; param—then; vacaù—words.

     Çré Närada said: Then the gopas burst into laughter and clapped their hands. Lord Kåñëa smiled and, as Balaräma looked on, spoke the following words. 

Text 20

çré-bhagavän uväca 
aho 'ti-dhanyä mathurä puréyaà
     vasanti yatraiva janäs tu saumyäù
ye 'jïäta-panthän sva-gåhaà nayanti
     dåñövä puréà dhäma tavägamiñye

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; ahaù—Oh; ati—very; dhanya—opulent; mathurä—Mathurä; puré—City; iyam—this; vasanti—reside; yatra—where; eva—indeed; janäù—people; tu—indeed; saumyäù—beautiful; ye—who; ajïäta-panthän—whose path is not known; sva-gåham—to their own home; nayanti—take; dåñövä—seeing; purém—the city; dhäma—the abode; tava—of you; ägamiñye—I will come.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Very beautiful and kind people, who take even strangers to be guests at their homes, live here. That is why Mathurä City is blessed with such opulences. After I have finished sightseeing in the city I will surely visit your home.

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
evam uktvottaréyäntaà
     samäkåñya girärdrayä
räja-märgaà vrajan kåñëo
     vaiçyän äòhyän dadarça ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; uttaréyäntam—the edge of His chadar; samäkåñya—tugging; girä—with words; ardrayä—melting with emotion; räja-märgam—the king's road; vrajan—going; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; vaiçyän—vaiçyas; äòhyän—wealthy; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these affectionate words, Lord Kåñëa pulled at His upper garment and continued on the king's road. Then He saw a group of wealthy vaiçyas.

Text 22

puñpa-tämbüla-gandhäòhyaiù
     phalair dugdha-phalair harim
sampüjya sväsane sthäpya
     nemur ägrya-dhiyo viçaù

     puñpa—with flowers; tämbüla—betelnuts; gandha—and scents; äòhyaiù—opulent; phalaiù—with fruits; dugdha-phalaiù—with milk; harim—Kåñëa; sampüjya—worsiping; sväsane—on a throne; sthäpya—placing; nemuù—bowed down; ägrya-dhiyaù—attentive; viçaù—vaiçyas.

     Worshiping Him with flowers, betenuts, scents, fruits, and milk, and placing Him on a throne, the vaiçyas bowed down before Lord Kåñëa.

Text 23

çré-vaiçyä ücuù 
bhavec ced atra te räjyaà
     tävakän smaratät tadä
vayaà tava prajä deva
     räjye präpte na kaù smaret

     çré-vaiçya ücuù—the vaiçyas said; bhavec—may be; cet—if; atra—here; te—of You; räjyam—the kingdom; tävakän—Yours; smaratät—should remember; tadä—then; vayam—we; tava—of You; prajä—the citizens; deva—O Lord; räjye—in the kingdom; präpte—attained; na—not; kaù—who?; smaret—will remember.

     The vaiçyas said: If You become the king here, then please remember Your own people. We are Your subjects. O Lord, who, on attaining a kingdom, will forget his own people?

Text 24

çré-närada uväca 
papraccha su-smito vaiçyän
     ko-daëòa-sthänam acyutaù
na te tam ücuù su-dhiyaù
     ko-daëòe bhaìga-çaìkayä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; papraccha—asked; su-smitaù—smiling; vaiçyän—the vaiçyas; ko-daëòa—of the bow; sthänam—the place; acyutaù—Kåñëa; na—not; te—they; tam—to Him; ücuù—said; su-dhiyaù—intelligent; ko-daëòe—of the bow; bhaìga—breaking; çaìkayä—with the fear.

     Çré Närada said: Sweetly smiling, the Lord asked where the great bow was kept. Fearing the Lord would break it, the intelligent vaiçyas did not tell Him.

Text 25

tad-rüpa-guëa-mädhurya-
     mohitä ye ca mäthuräù
kumära paçyaihi dhanur
     ity ücus tad-didåkñavaù

     tat—His; rüpa—handsomeness; guëa—virtues; mädhurya—and sweetness; mohitä—charmed; ye—who; ca—and; mathuräù—people of Mathurä; kumära—O boy; paçya—look; ehi—come; dhanuù—the bow; ity—thus; ücuù—said; tad-didåkñavaù—eager to see Him.

     Charmed by the Lord's handsomeness, virtue and sweetness, and hoping to see the Lord break the bow, some boys of Mathurä said, "Child, come. Look. Here is the bow."

Text 26

tair dåñöetena pathä kåñëaù
     praviñöo dhanuñaù sthalam
maitréà kurvan vayasyaiç ca
     mäthuraiù pura-bälakaiù

     taiù—by them; dåñöetena—showed; pathä—the path; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; praviñöaù—entered; dhanuñaù—of the bow; sthalam—the place; maitrém—frindship; kurvan—doing; vayasyaiç—with the boys His age; ca—and; mäthuraiù—residing in Mathurä; pura-bälakaiù—the boys of the city.

     At once becoming friends with these boys, the Lord followed their directions and came to the place of the bow.     

Text 27

yathaindraà hema-citrädhyaà
     ko-daëòaà sapta-tälakam
puruñaiù païca-sähasrair
     netuà yogyaà båhad-bharam

     yathä—as; aindram—of Indra; hema-citrädhyam—wonderfully opulkent with gold; ko-daëòam—the bow; sapta-tälakam—seven palm trees; puruñaiù—with men; païca-sähasraiù—five thousand; netum—to bring; yogyam—proper; båhad-bharam—very heavy.

     Seven tälas long and wonderful with gold, the bow was like the bow of Indra himself. It was so heavy five thousand men were needed to carry it.

Text 28

añöa-dhätu-mayaà kliñöaà
     lakña-bhära-samaà param
caturdaçyäà paura-janair
     arcitaà yajïa-maëòape

     añöa-dhätu-mayam—made of eigth metals; kliñöam—heavy; lakña-bhära-samam—heavy as a hundred thousand bharas; param—great; caturdaçyäm—on caturdasi; paura-janaiù—by the poeople of the city; arcitam—worshiped; yajïa-maëòape—in the sacrificial arena.

     It was made of eight metals and weighed a hundred thousand bhäras. On caturdaçé the people of the city worshiped it is the yajïa-maëòapa.

Text 29

bhärgavena purä dattaà
     yadu-räjäya mädhavaù
dadarça kuëòalé-bhütaà
     säkñäc cheñam iva sthitam

     bhärgavena-by Paraçuräma; purä—previously; dattam—given; yadu-räjäya—to the king of the Yädavas; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; dadarça—saw; kuëòalé-bhütam—coiled around; säkñäc—directky; çeñam——Lord Çeña; iva—like; sthitam—situated.

     Long ago Lord Paraçuräma gave this bow to King Kaàsa. Lord Kåñëa looked at the bow and thought it was like Lord Çeña, His coils wound around and around.

Text 30

varyamäno nåbhiù kåñëaù
     prasahya dhanur ädade
paçyatäà tatra pauräëäà
     sajjaà kåtvätha lélayä

     varyamänaù—stopped; nåbhiù—by the people; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; prasahya—overcoming; dhanuù—the bow; ädade—took; paçyatäm—watching; tatra—there; pauräëäm—by the people of the city; sajjam—stringing; kåtvä—doing; atha—then; lélayä—playfully.

     Overcoming the people's attempt to stop Him, Lord Kåñëa picked up the bow. As the people of the city watched, He easily strung it.

Text 31

äkåñya karëa-paryantaà
     dor-daëòäbhyäà harir dhanuù
babhaïja madhyato räjann
     ikñu-daëòaà gajo yathä

     äkåñya—drawing bakc; karëa-paryantam—to His ear; dor-daëòäbhyäm—with both hands; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; dhanuù—the bow; babhaïja—broke; madhyataù—in the middle; räjann—O king; ikñu-daëòam—sugar-cane; gajaù—an elephant; yathä—as.

     Grasbing the bow with both hands, and drawing the string to His ears, Lord Kåñëa broke the bow in the middle, as an elephant breaks a sugarcane stalk.

Text 32

bhajyamänasya dhanuñas
     öäìkäro 'bhüt taòit-svanaù
nanäda tena brahmäëòaà
     sapta-lokair bilaiù saha

     bhajyamänasya—broken; dhanuñaù—of the bow; öäìkäraù—the sound; abhüt—was; taòit-svanaù—thunder; nanäda—resounded; tena—by that; brahmäëòam—the universes; sapta-lokaiù—with seven lokas; bilaiù—with outer space; saha—with.

     The sound of the bow breaking was like thunder. It echoed in the universe of seven lokas.

Text 33

vicelur dig-gajäs tärä
     räjad-bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam
tadaiva badhiré-bhüta
     påthivyäà jana-maëòalé

     viceluù—trembled; dig-gajäù—the elphants of the directions; tara—the stars; räjad-bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam—the circle of the earth; tadä—then; eva—indeed; badhiré-bhüta—deafened; påthivyäm—on the earth; jana-maëòalé—the people.

     The earth, the stars, and the elephants holding up the directions all shook. The people on the earth were deafened by the sound.

Text 34

kaàsasya hådayaà çabdo
     vidadära ghaöé-dvayam
tad-rakñiëaù prakupitä
     utthitä ätatäyinaù

     kaàsasya—of Kaàsa; hådayam—the heart; çabdaù—the sound; vidadära—broke; ghaöé-dvayam—for an hour; tad-rakñiëaù—the guards; prakupitäù—angry; utthitä—rose up; ätatäyinaù—trying to kill.

     That sound shattered Kaàsa's heart. For two hours the guards at that place attacked Kåñëa.

Texts 35 and 36

gåhétu-kämäù çré-kåñëaà
     pratyücur badhyatäm iti
atha tän ägatän vékñya
     sa-çasträn bala-keçavau

ko-daëòa-sakale nétvä
     jaghnatur durmadän bhåçam
sakaläti-prahäreëa
     kecid véras tu mürchitäù

     gåhétu-kämäù—wishing to grab; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; pratyücuù—said; badhyatäm—bind Him; iti—thus; atha—then; tän—them; ägatän—come; vékñya—seeing; sa-çasträn—with weapons; bala-keçavau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; ko-daëòa-sakale—the bow; nétvä—taking; jaghnatuù—struck; durmadän—the wicked; bhåçam—greatly; sakaläti-prahäreëa—by that blow; kecit—some; véraù—soldiers; tu—indeed; mürchitäù—fell unconscious.

     Eager to grab Kåñëa, the demon soldiers called out,  Tie Him up!" Seeing them coming with weapons, Kåñëa and Balaräma took up the bow and struck them so ferociously than many fell unconscious.

Text 37

bhinna-pädä bhinna-nakhäù
     kecic chinnäàsa-bähavaù
véräù païca-sahasräëi
     nipetur bhümi-maëòale

     bhinna-pädä—broken feet; bhinna-nakhäù—broken nails; kecic—some; chinnäàsa-bähavaù—broken arms and shoulders; véräù—soldiers; païca-sahasräëi—five thousand; nipetuù—fell; bhümi-maëòale—to the gound.

     Their feet, nails, arms, or shoulders broken, five thousand soldiers fell to the ground.

Text 38

vicelur mäthuräù sarve
     dudruvus tad-didåkñavaù
puryäà kolähale jäte
     nåëäà jätaà mahad bhayam

     viceluù—shook; mathuräù—the people of Mathurä; sarve—all; dudruvuù—ran; tad-didåkñavaù—wishingt to see; puryäm—in the city; kolähale—a tumult; jäte—was manifested; nåëäm—ofthe people; jätam—manifested; mahat—great; bhayam—fear.

     Trembling, the people ran to see it. There was a great uproar in the city. The people were very afraid.

Text 39

bhoja-räja-sabhä-cchatraà
     akasmän nipapäta ha
gopälaiù sa-balaù kåñëo
     dhävan cäpa-sthalän nåpa äyayau nanda-nikaöe      sandhyä-käle 'ti-bhéta-vat

     bhoja-räja—of Kaàsa; sabhä—of the assembly; cchatram—the parasol; akasmän—suddenly; nipapäta—fell; ha—indeed; gopälaiù—with the gopas; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; dhävan—running; cäpa-sthalän—from the place of the bow; nåpa—O king; äyayau—came; nanda-nikaöe—to Nanda; sandhyä-käle—at sunset; ati-bhéta-vat—as if He were very afraid.

     At that moment the royal parasol over Kaàsa's throne suddenly fell to the ground. O king, Kåñëa and the gopas fled from the place of the bow. Finding Nanda at sunset, Lord Kåñëa seemed to be very afraid.

Text 40

nirékñya govinda-su-rüpam adbhutaà
     vimohitä vai mathurä-puräìgaëaù
visrañöa-väsaù-kabaräù smarädhayaù
     parasparaà prähur idaà sakhé-janam

     nirékñya—seeing; govinda—Lord Kåñëa's su-rüpam—handsome form; adbhutam—wonderful; vimohitä—enchanted; vai—indeed; mathurä—of Mathurä; puräìgaëaù—the women; visrañöa—dishevelled; väsaù—garments; kabaräù—and hair; smarädhayaù—tormented with amorous desires; parasparam—among themselves; prähuù—said; idam—this; sakhé-janam—to their friends.

     Gazing at Lord Kåñëa's wonderfully handsome form, the women of Mathurä were bewildered with feelings of love. Tormented with amorous desires, and their hair and garments in disarray, they spoke among themselves.

Text 41

çré-purandhrya ücuù 
kandarpa-koöi-dyutim äharaàs tvaraà
     svairaà caran vai mathurä-pure hariù
nirékñyate yäbhir atéva säkñäd
     aìgeñu sarveñv api naù samäviçat

     çré-purandhrya ücuù—the women of the city said; kandarpa-koöi-dyutim—the splendor of millions of Kämadevas; äharan—eclipsing; tvaram—at once; svairam—independent; caran—walking; vai—indeed; mathurä-pure—in Mathurä City; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; nirékñyate—is seen; yäbhiù—by whom; atéva—greatly; säkñät—directly; aìgeñu—on the limbs; sarveñv—all; api—also; naù—of us; samäviçat—entered.

     The women of Mathurä City said: As we gaze on Lord Kåñëa, eclipsing the glory of millions of Kämadevas and wandering as He likes in Mathurä City, amorous desires esuddenly enter all limbs of our bodies. 

Text 42

çré-kuçalä ücuù 
krüräù striyaù kià na hi santi paööane
     nirékñyate yäbhir anaìga-mohitäù
aìgeñu sarveñv api sarva-sundaro
     näsmäbhir änandamayo nirékñyate

     çré-kuçalä ücuù— krüräù striyaù kià na hi santi paööane nirékñyate yäbhir anaìga-mohitäù aìgeñu sarveñv api sarva-sundaro näsmäbhir änandamayo nirékñyate

     Thw wise women of Mathurä said: Are women hard-hearted? Not in this city. Gazing at Lord Kåñëa, we have become bewildered with love for Him. We have never seen limbs as handsome and delightful as His.

Text 43

kasyaika-deçe madhuratvam ékñyate
     taträsti netraà prapatat-pataìgavat
yas tv eva sarväìga-mänoharaù sakhi
     sa eva netreëa kathaà samékñyate

     kasya—of whom?; eka—in one; deçe—place; madhuratvam—sweetness; ékñyate—is seen; tatra—there; asti—is; netram—the eye; prapatat—flying; pataìga—a moth; vat—like; yaù—who; tv—indeed; eva—indeed; sarväìga-mänoharaù—the charm of all limbs; sakhi—O friend; sa—He; eva—indeed; netreëa—by the eye; katham—how?; samékñyate—is seen.

     How can there be so much sweetness in a single place? Gazing at Him, our eyes have become like moths flying into a fire. O friend, how do my eyes have the power to see someone so handsome?

Text 44

aìge hy aìge sundare nanda-sünoù
     präptaà präptaà yatra yaträpi netram
tasmät tasmän nämaval labdha-saukhyaà
     lävaëyäbdhau magnaval lagna-cittam

     aìge—on limb; hy—indeed; aìge—after limb; sundare—handsome; nanda-sünoù—of Nanda's son; präptam—attained; präptam—attained; yatra—where; yatra—where; api—also; netram—eye; tasmät—from that; tasmän—from that; nämaval—like the name; labdha-saukhyam—attained happiness; lävaëyäbdhau—in an ocean of handsomeness; magnaval—as if plunged; lagna—placed; cittam—mind.

     As our eyes gaze on each of Çré Kåñëa's limbs we become filled with bliss and our thoughts become plunged in the ocean of His handsomess.

Text 45

çré-närada uväca 
dåñövä dine yaà vraja-räja-nandanaà
     svapne 'pi tadvad dadåçuù pura-striyaù
gopyaù kathaà taà madhuraà na sasmarur
     yäbhiù kåtaà maithila räsa-maëòalam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; dåñövä—seeing; dine—in the day; yam—Him; vraja-räja-nandanam—to the prince of Vraja; svapne—in dream; api—also; tadvat—in that way; dadåçuù—saw; pura-striyaù—the women of the city; gopyaù—the gopés; katham—how?; tam—Him; madhuram—sweet; na—not; sasmaruù—thought; yäbhiù—by whom; kåtam—done; maithila—O king of Mithilä; räsa-maëòalam—the circle of the räsa-dance.

     Çré Närada said: As they saw Him in the day, the women of Mathurä City also so Lord Kåñëa in their dreams. O king of Mithilä, they thought, "What did the gopés do to attain the company of such an enhcanting boy in the räsa-dance circle?"
.pa

Chapter Seven
Kuvalayäpéòa-vadha
The Killing of Kuvalayäpéòa

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
rajakasya çiraç-chedaà
     kaàso vai rakñiëäà vadham
dhanur-bhaìgaà tataù çrutvä
     paraà träsam upägamat

     çré-närada uväca—-Çré Närada said; rajakasya—of the washerman; çiraç-chedam—the beheading; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; vai—indeed; rakñiëäm—of the guards; vadham—the killing; dhanur-bhaìgam—the breaking of the bow; tataù—then; çrutvä—hearing; param—then; träsam—fear; upägamat—attained.

     Çré Närada said: When he heard how the washerman was beheaded, the guards killed, and the bow broken, Kaàsa became filled with fear.

Text 2

tat-kñaëäd dur-nimittäni
     vämäìga-sphuraëäni ca
prapaçyann aìga-bhaìgäni
     na nidräà präpa daitya-räö

     tat-kñaëät—from that moment; dur-nimittäni—evil omens; vämäìga-sphuraëäni—trembling on the left side of his body; ca—and; prapaçyann—seeing; aìga-bhaìgäni—the breaking of the body; na—not; nidräm—sleep; präpa—attained; daitya-räö—the demon king.

     From that moment Kaàsa saw many evil omens. The left side of his body trembled. In dreams he saw his limbs broken. Then he could not sleep.

Text 3

svapne pretaiù samäyuktas
     tailäbhyakto dig-ambaraù
japä-sräì mahisärüòho
     dakñiëäçäà jagäma saù

     svapne—in dreams; pretaiù—by ghosts; samäyuktaù—possessed; tailäbhyaktaù—anointed with oil; dig-ambaraù—naked; japä—of roses; sräk—wearing a garland; mahisärüòhaù—rising on a huffalo; dakñiëäçäm—to the south; jagäma—went; saù—he.

     Then he dreamed of being attacked by ghosts, of being anointed with oil, of walking about naked, of being garlanded with roses, and of rising south on a buffalo.

Text 4

prätaù-käle samutthäya
     kärya-bhära-karän janän
ähüya kärayäm äsa
     malla-kréòä-mahotsavam

     prätaù-käle—in the morning; samutthäya—rising; kärya-bhära-karän—to his servants; janän—people; ähüya—calling; kärayäm äsa—arranged; malla-kréòä-mahotsavam—a great festival of wrestling matches.

     Rising in the morning, he called for his servants and had them make arrangements for the day's wrestling festival.

Text 5

viçäläjira-samyukte
     hema-stambha-samanvite
sabhä-maëòapa-deçägre
     raìga-bhümir babhüva ha

     viçäläjira-samyukte—with a great arena; hema-stambha-samanvite—with golden pillars; sabhä-maëòapa-deçägre—before the royal assmebly; raìga-bhümiù—the arena; babhüva—was; ha—ineed.

     Before the royal assembly building was a sports arena with a huge field and many golden pillars.

Text 6

vitänair hema-saìkäçair
     muktä-däma-vilambibhiù
sopänair hema-maïcaiç ca
     raìga-bhümir babhau nåpa

     vitänaiù—with awnings; hema-saìkäçaiù—of gold; muktä-däma-vilambibhiù—decorated with pearls; sopänaiù—with stairs; hema-maïcaiù—golden grandstands; ca—and; raìga-bhümiù—a field; babhau—was manifested; nåpa—O king.

     Om king, there were golden awnings decorated with pearls, great stairways, golden viewer's boxes, and a great field.

Text 7

räja-maïce ratna-maye
     makarandärcite çubhe
çakra-siàhäsanaà tatra
     sopabarhaëa-maëòalam

     räja-maïce—in the oryal box; ratna-maye—golden; makarandärcite—decorated with jasmine flowers; çubhe—beautiful; çakra—of Indra; siàhäsanam—the throne; tatra—there; sopabarhaëa-maëòalam—in a circle of cushions.

     In the splendid, golden, jamine-decorated royal box was Indra's throne holding a great circle of cushions.

Text 8

ätapatreëa divyena
     candra-maëòala-cäruëä
haàsäbhair vyajanair yuktais
     cämarair vajra-muñöibhiù

     ätapatreëa—with a parasol; divyena—splendid; candra-maëòala-cäruëä—beautiful as the circle of the moon; haàsäbhaiù—with swan; vyajanaiù—fans; yuktaiù—endowed; cämaraiù—with camaras; vajra-muñöibhiù—with diamond handles.

     Over the throne was a splendid parasol graceful as the circle of the moon, and by it were swan fans and cämaras with diamond handles.

Text 9

daça-hastocchritaà saçvad
     viçvakarma-vinirmitam
tadäruhya babhau kaàso
     'dri-çåìge mågaräò iva

     daça-hasta—ten hastal ucchritaàexpanded; saçvat—always; viçvakarma-vinirmitam—made by Viçvakarmä; tadä—then; äruhya—ascending; babhau—was manifested; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; adri-çåìge—on a mountaintop; mågaräò—a lion; iva—like.

     It was ten hastas high and was made by Viçvakarmä. At that moment Kaàsa ascended the throne. He was like a lion on a mountaintop.

     Note: One hasta is the distance between the elbow and the middle finger.

Text 10

gäyakaù prajagus tatra
     nanåtur vära-yoñitaù
nedur mådaìga-paöaha-
     täla-bherya-nakädayaù

     gäyakaù—singers; prajaguù—sang; tatra—there; nanåtuù—danced; vära-yoñitaù—prostitutes; neduù—sounded; mådaìga-paöaha-täla-bherya-nakädayaù—mådaìgas, paöahas, tälas, bheryas, nakas, and other instruments.

     Suddenly the singers sang, the dancing-girls danced, and the mådaìgas, paöahas, tälas, bheryas, nakas, and other musical instruments were sounded.

Text 11

räjäno maëòaleçäç ca
     paurä janapadä nåpa
dadåçur malla-yuddhaà te
     maïce maïce samästhitäù

     räjänaù—the kings; maëòaleçäç—governors of provinces; ca—and; paurä—the people of the city; janapadä—the people; nåpa—O king; dadåçuù—saw; malla-yuddham—the wrestling; te—they; maïce maïce—in viewers box after viewers box; samästhitäù—situated.

     In the many grandstands and viwers' boxes many kings, provincial governors, and the people of the city, observed the wrestling games.

Text 12

cäëüro muñöikaù küöaù
     çalas toçala eva ca
vyäyäma-mudgarair yuktä
     yuyudhus te paraspaaram

     cäëüraù—Canura; muñöikaù—Mustika; küöaù—Kuta; çalaù—Sala; toçala—Tosala; eva—indeed; ca—and; vyäyäma-mudgaraiù—with clubs; yuktä—endowed; yuyudhuù—fought; te—they; paraspaaram—among themselves.

     Then Cäëüra, Muñöika, Küöa, Çala, and Toçala entered and began to fight each other with clubs.

Text 13

nanda-räjädayo gopäù
     kaàsähütä natänanäù
dattvä balià paraà tasmä
     ekasmin maïca äçritäù

     nanda-räjädayaù—headed by King Nanda; gopäù—the gopas; kaàsähütä—called by Kaàsa; natänanäù—with bowed heads; dattvä—offered; balim—gift; param—great; tasmai—to him; ekasmin—in one; maïca—stand; äçritäù—situated.

     Called forward by Kaàsa, King Nanda and the other gopas bowed their heads and placed their gifts before him. Then they went to their own box.

Texts 14 and 15

bäëäsura-jaräsandha-
     narakänäà purän nåpa
anyeñäà çambarädénäà
     sakäçäd bhübhujäà tathä
balayaç cäyayü räjan
     yadu-räjäya tatra vai

atha tau räma-kåñëau dvau
     mäyä-bälaka-vigrahau
malla-lélä-darçanärthaà      yayatü raìga-maëòapam

     bäëäsura-jaräsandha-narakänäm—of Bäëäsura, Jaräsandha, and Naraka; purän—from the city; nåpa—O king; anyeñäm—of others; çambarädénäm—headed by Sambara; sakäçät—in the presence; bhübhujäm—of the kings; tathä—so; balayaù—offerings; ca—and; äyayuù—came; räjan—O king; yadu-räjäya—to Kaàsa; tatra—there; vai—indeed; atha—then; tau—They; räma—Balaräma; kåñëau—and Kåñëa; dvau—both; mäyä-bälaka-vigrahau—appearing like ordinary boys; malla-lélä-darçanärthaà yayatü raìga-maëòapam

     Many offerings also came to Kaàsa from Bäëäsura, Jaräsandha, Naraka, Çambara, and many other kings. Kåñëa and Balaräma, who seemed to be ordinary human boys, also approached the arena to see the wrestling games.

Texts 16 and 17

gomütra-caya-sindüra-
     kastüré-patra-bhån-mukhaà sravan-mada-mahä-mattaà      ratna-kuëòala-maëòitam

gajaà kuvalayäpéòaà
     raìga-dväram avasthitam
vékñya kåñëo mahä-mätraà
     präha gambhérayä girä

     gomütra-caya—with abundant gomutra; sindüra—sindura; kastüré—musk; patra—cups; bhåt—holding; mukham—face; sravat—flowing; mada-mahä-mattam—maddened; ratna-kuëòala-maëòitam—decorated with jewel earrings; gajam—elephant; kuvalayäpéòam—Kuvalayäpéòa; raìga-dväram—the entrance to the arena; avasthitam—standing; vékñya—seeing; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; mahä-mätram—to the elphant trainer; präha—said; gambhérayä—in a deep; girä—voice.

     Seeing the maddened elephant Kuvalayäpéòa anointed with gomütra, sindüra, and musk, decorated with jewel earrings, and its ichor flowing, blocking the entrance to the arena, in a deep voice Lord Kåñëa said to the elephant trainer:

Text 18

äkarñayäìga nägendraà
     märgaà kuru mamecchayä
no cet tväà pätayiñyämi
     sa-nägaà bhümi-maëòale

     äkarñaya—pull back; aìga—sir; nägendram—this great elephant; märgam—a path; kuru—make; mama—of Me; icchayä—by the desire; naù—not; cet—if; tväm—you; pätayiñyämi—I will make fall; sa-nägam—the elephant; bhümi-maëòale—to the ground.

     Sir, please pull back this great elephant, and give Me a path as I wish. If you do not, I will throw you and your elephant to the ground.

Text 19

mahä-mätras tadä kruddho
     nodayäm äsa taà gajam
cétkäram utkaöaà dikñu
     kurvantaà nanda-sünave

     mahä-mätraù—the elerphant trainer; tadä—then; kruddhaù—angry; nodayäm äsa—made to charge; tam—him; gajam—the elaphant; cétkäram—trumpeting; utkaöam—great; dikñu—in the directions; kurvantam—doing; nanda-sünave—at Kåñëa.

     Angered, the elephant-trainer made the elephant, trumpeting in all directions, charge Lord Kåñëa, the son of Nanda.

Text 20

gåhétvä taà harià sadyaù
     çuëòä-daëòena näga-räö
ujjahära tatas tasmän
     nirgato bhära-bhåd dhariù

     gåhétvä—taking; tam—Him; harim—Lord Kåñëa; sadyaù—at once; çuëòä-daëòena—with its trunk; näga-räö—the king of elephants; ujjahära—lifted; tataù—then; tasmän—from there; nirgataù—gone; bhära-bhåt—holding the burden; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     The regal elephant grabbed Kåñëa in its trunk and lifted Him high, but in a moment Kåñëa slipped from the elephant's grasp.

Text 21

tat-pädeñu viléno 'bhüt
     prabhraman sann itas tataù
våndävana-nikuïjeñu
     våkñeñu ca yathä hariù

     tat-pädeñu—among its feet; vilénaù—hiding; abhüt—was; prabhraman—wandering; sann—was; itaù—here; tataù—and there; våndävana-nikuïjeñu—in the forests of Våndävana; våkñeñu—among the trees; ca—and; yathä—as; hariù—Kåñëa.

     As He used to do among the trees in Våndävana's forests, Kåñëa, quickly going here and there, played hide-and-seek behind the elephant's legs.

Text 22

kare jagräha taà nägaù
     çuëòä-daëòena cäìghriñu
niñpéòya çuëòäà hañöäbhyäà
     hariù paçcäd vinirgataù

     kare—in the trunk; jagräha—grabbed; tam—Him; nägaù—the elephant; çuëòä-daëòena—with its trunk; ca—and; aìghriñu—among its feet; niñpéòya—pressing; çuëòäm—the trunk; hañöäbhyäm—with both hands; hariù—Kåñëa; paçcät—behind; vinirgataù—went.

     Pushing its trunk between its legs, the elephant grabbed Kåñëa. Pressing the trunk hard with both hands, Kåñëa ran behind the elephant.

Text 23

tiryag-bhütaç ca taà nägo
     gåhétum upacakrame
muñöinä taà ghätayitvä
     puro dudräva mädhavaù

     tiryag-bhütaù—disoriented; ca—and; tam—Him; nägaù—the elephant; gåhétum—to grab; upacakrame—approached; muñöinä—with a fish; tam—it; ghätayitvä—punching; puraù—in front; dudräva—ran; mädhavaù—Kåñëa.

     Its trunk and body twisted into an awkward position, the disoriented elephant tried to grab Kåñëa, but Kåñëa punched it with His fist and ran to the front.

Text 24

tam anvadhävan nägendro
     mathuräyäà videha-räö
kolähale tadä jäte
     haris tasmäd ito yayau

     tam—Him; anvadhävan—chasing; nägendraù—the royal elephant; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; videha-räö—O king of Videha; kolähale—a tumult; tadä—then; jäte—was manifested; hariù—Kåñëa; tasmät—from it; itaù—here; yayau—went.

     O king of Videha, when Kåñëa fled and the elephant chased Him through Mathurä City, there was great uproar.

Text 25

pucche gåhétvä taà nägaà
     baladevo mahä-balaù
cakarña bhuja-daëòäbhyäà
     phaëinäà garuòo yathä

     pucche—the tail; gåhétvä—grabbing; tam—that; nägam—elephant; baladevaù—Balaräma; mahä-balaù—very strong; cakarña—dragged; bhuja-daëòäbhyäm—with both arms; phaëinam—a snake; garuòaù—Garuòa; yathä—as.

     Then very powerful Lord Balaräma grabbed the elephant's tail and with both arms dragged it here and there as Garuòa drags a snake.

Text 26

prahasan bhagavän kåñëo
     gåhétvä taà kare balät
cakarña bhuja-daëòäbhyäà
     küpa-rajjuà yathä naraù

     prahasan—laughing; bhagavän—Lord; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; gåhétvä—grabbing; tam—it; kare—on the trunk; balät—forcibly; cakarña—dragged; bhuja-daëòäbhyäm—with both arms; küpa-rajjum—the rope in a well; yathä—as; naraù—a person.

     Laughing, Lord Kåñëa grabbed the elephant's trunk and pulled it with both hands as one pulls the rope in a well.

Text 27

dvayor äkarñanän nägo
     vihvalo 'bhün nåpeçvara
mahä-mäträs tadä sapta
     ruruhus taà gajaà balät

     dvayoù—of the Two of Them; äkarñanän—by the pulling; nägaù—the elephant; vihvalaù—agitated; abhüt—became; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; mahä-mätraù—the elephant-trainer; tadä—then; sapta—seven; ruruhuù—grew; tam—that; gajam—elephant; balät—forcibly.

     O king of kings, pulled in both directions by Kåñëa and Balaräma, the elephant was in great distress. Seven elephant trainers quickly came to its rescue.

Texts 28 and 29

nétä gajäs tathä cänyaiù
     kåñëaà hantuà çata-trayam
aìkuçäsphälanät kruddhaà
     mattebhaà punar ägatam çré-kåñëo bhagavän säkñäd      baladevasya paçyataù

çuëòä-daëòe saìgåhétvä
     bhrämayitvä tv itas tataù
pätayäm äsa bhü-påñöhe
     kamaëòalum ivärbhakaù

     nétä—brought; gajäù—elephants; tathä—then; ca—and; anyaiù—byu others; kåñëam—Kåñëa; hantum—to kill; çata-trayam—three hundred; aìkuçäsphälanät—hit with goads; kruddham—angry; mattebham—maddened; punaù—again; ägatam—come; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; baladevasya—as Balaräma; paçyataù—watched; çuëòä-daëòe—the trunk; saìgåhétvä—grabbing; bhrämayitvä—whirling around; tv—indeed; itaù—here; tataù—and there; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-påñöhe—to the ground; kamaëòalum—a kamandalu; iva—as; arbhakaù—a child.

     Then other trainers brought three hundred elephants to kill Lord Kåñëa. As Lord Balaräma watched, Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, approached the elephant maddened by the pinching goad, grabbed it by the trunk, whirled around and around, and finally threw it to the ground as a small child throws a kamaëòalu.

Text 31

düre prapatitäs tasya
     mahä-mätra itas tataù
satäà prapaçyatäà nägaù
     sadyo vai nidhanaà gataù

     düre—far away; prapatitäù—thrown; tasya—of it; mahä-mätra—the trainer; itaù—here; tataù—and there; satäm—as the saintly people; prapaçyatäm—watched; nägaù—the elephgant; sadyaù—at once; vai—indeed; nidhanam—death; gataù—attained.

     As the saintly people of Mathurä watched and the trainer fled, the elephant suddenly died.

Text 32

taj-jyotiù çré-ghana-çyäme
     lénaà jätaà videha-räö
dantäv utpatya tasyäpi
     räma-kåñëau mahä-balau nijaghnatur mahä-mäträn      mågän keçariëau yathä

     taj-jyotiù—its effulgence; çré-ghana-çyäme—dark as a cloud; lénam—entered; jätam—manifested; videha-räö—O king of Videha; dantau—the two tusks; utpatya—uprooting; tasya—of it; api——also; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; mahä-balau—very powerful; nijaghnatuù—attacked; mahä-mäträn—the elephnat-trainers; mågän—deer; keçariëau—two lions; yathä—as.

     O king of Videha, an effulgence left the elephant's dead body and suddenly entered Lord Kåñëa, who is dark as a monsoon cloud. Then very powerful Kåñëa and Balaräma uprooted the elaphant's tusks and with them as weapons attacked the elephant-trainers as two lions attack a flock of deer.

Text 33

dvipe hate 'pi ye cänye
     mahä-mätra itas tataù
vidudruvur yathä meghä
     varña-käle gate sati

     dvipe—when the elephant; hate—was killed; api—even; ye—who; ca—and; anye—other; mahä-mätra—elephant-trainers; itaù—here; tataù—and there; vidudruvuù—ran; yathä—as; meghä—clouds; varña-käle—during the monsoon; gate—come; sati—is.

     When the elephant was killed, the trainers fled in all directions as rainclouds flee at the end of the monsoon.

Texts 34 and 35

evaà hatvä dvipaà gopaiù
     çeñais taiù prekñanotsukaiù
jayärävai räma-kåñëau
     çrama-väri-madäìkitau

pariçramäruëa-mukhau
     raìgaà viviçatur tvaram
danta-päëé mahä-vegau
     yathäçäm anilänalau

     evam—thus; hatvä—having killed; dvipam—the elepbant; gopaiù—with the gopas; çeñaiù—remaining; taiù—with them; prekñanotsukaiù—eager to see; jayärävaiù—with sounds of  Victory!; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; çrama-väri-madäìkitau—anopinted with drops of perspiration and elephant's rut; pariçramäruëa-mukhau—Their faces red with exhaustion; raìgam—the arena; viviçatuù—entered; tvaram—quickly; danta-päëé—with the tusks in Their hands; mahä-vegau—very powerful; yathä—as; äçäm—in the dirtection; anila—fanned by the wind; analau—two fires.

     After killing the elephant, very powerful Kåñëa and Balaräma, covered with perspiration and elephant's rut, clutching the two elephant's tusks, and Their faces red with stress, quickly entered the arena like two forest-fires fanned by great winds. Following Them were the remaining gopas, who loudly called out "Victory!" and were eager to see what would happen next.

Texts 36 and 37

malläç ca mallaà ca narä narendraà
     striyaù smaraà gopa-gaëä vrajeçam
pitä sutaà daëòa-dharaà hy asanto
     måtyuà ca kaàso vibudhä viräjam

tattvaà paraà yogi-varäç ca bhojä
     devaà tadä raìga-gataà balena
påthak påthag bhävanayä hy apaçyan
     sarve janäs taà paripürëa-devam

     malläù—the wrestlers; ca—and; mallam—a wrestler; ca—and; narä—the people; narendram—a king; striyaù—the women; smaram—Kämadeva; gopa-gaëäù—the gopas; vrajeçam—the master of Vraja; pitä—His father; sutam—a son; daëòa-dharam—Yamaräja; hy—indeed; asantaù—the impious; måtyum—death; ca—and; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; vibudhä—the wise; viräjam—a renounced sage; tattvam—the truth; param—supreme; yogi-varäç—the great yogis; ca—and; bhojä—the Bhojas; devam—the Lord; tadä—then; raìga-gatam—come to the arena; balena—with Balaräma; påthak påthak—each in their own way; bhävanayä—with the ideaq; hy—indeed; apaçyan—saw; sarve—all; janäù—the people; tam—Him; paripürëa-devam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     When, accompanied by Balaräma, Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, entered the arena, the people saw Him in different ways. The wrestlers saw Him as a wrestler, the people in general saw Him as a great king, the women saw Him as Kämadeva, the gopas saw Him as the master of Vraja, King Nanda saw Him as his son, the impious saw Him as Yamaräja, Kaàsa saw Him as death personified, the wise saw Him as a great renounced sage, the yogés saw Him as the Supreme Truth, and the members of the Bhoja dynasty saw Him as their Lord.

Text 38

hataà dvipaà vékñya ca tau mahä-balau
     kaàso manasvé bhayam äpa cetasi
maïca-sthitä harñita-mänasaç ca
     candraà cakora iva te sukhaà yayuù

     hatam—killed; dvipam—the elephant; vékñya—seeing; ca—and; tau—They; mahä-balau—very powerful; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; manasvé—thoughtful; bhayam—fear; äpa—attained; cetasi—in the heart; maïca-sthitä—the people in the grandstands; harñita-mänasaç—their hearts filled with joy; ca—and; candram—the moon; cakoräù—cakora birds; iva—like; te—they; sukhaàhappiness; yayuù—attained.

     When Kaàsa saw that the elephant had been killed, he became pensive and frightened at heart. When the people in the grandstands saw it, they became happy at heart like cakora birds gazing at the moon.

Text 39

karëe ca karëaà vinidhäya nägarä
     mahotsukäs te hy avadan parasparam
etau ki säkñät parameçvarau parau
     babhüvatur vai vasudeva-nandanau

     karëe—ear; ca—and; karëam—to ear; vinidhäya—placing; nägarä—the people; mahotsukäù—eager; te—they; hy—indeed; avadan—said; parasparam—among themselves; etau—They; ki—indeed; säkñät—directly; parameçvarau—the two Supreme Personality of Godheads; parau—the Supremes; babhüvatuù—have become; vai—indeed; vasudeva-nandanau—the two sons of Vasudeva.

     The eager people whispered in each other's ears,  The Supreme Personality of Godhead has become the two sons of Vasudeva."

Text 40

aho 'ti-ramyaà vraja-maëòalaà paraà
     yatraiña säkñäd vicacära mädhavaù
kåtvä hi yad-darçanam adya durlabhaà
     vayaà kåtärthäs tu bhavema sarvataù

     ahaù—Oh; ati-ramyam—very beautiful; vraja-maëòalam—the circle of Vraja; param—great; yatra—where; eña—He; säkñät—directly; vicacära—walked; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; kåtvä—doing; hi—indeed; yad-darçanam—the sight of whom; adya—now; durlabham—rare; vayam—we; kåtärthäù—sucessful; tu—indeed; bhavema—have become; sarvataù—in all respects.

     We are now gazing on Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who wandered in the beautiful circle of Vraja, and who is so difficult to see. Now our lives have become a perfect success.

Text 41

çré-närada uväca 
vadatsu paura-lokeñu
     nadat-türyeñu maithila
cäëüras täv upavrajya
     räma-kåñëäv uväca ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; vadatsu—speaking; paura-lokeñu—the people of the city; nadat-türyeñu—as the turyas sounded; maithila—O mking of Mithilä; cäëüraù—Canura; täv—Them; upavrajya—approaching; räma-kåñëäv—Kåñëa and Balaräma; uväca—said; ha—certainly.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, as the people of Mathurä spoke in this way, and as the turyas sounded, Cäëüra approached Kåñëa and Balaräma and addressed Them with these words.

Text 42

cäëüra uväca 
he räma he kåñëa yuväà mahä-balau
     räjïaù puro vai kurutaà mådhaà balät
praharñite räjani ced yadüttame
     kià kià na bhadraà bhavatéha vaç ca naù

     cäëüra uväca—Canura said; he—O; räma—Balaräma; he—O; kåñëa—Kåñëa; yuväm—You both; mahä-balau—very powerful; räjïaù—of the king; puraù—in the presence; vai—indeed; kurutam—please do; mådham—a fight; balät—powerfully; praharñite—pleased; räjani—when the king; cet—if; yadüttame—the best of the Yädavas; kim—what?; kim—what?; na—not; bhadram—good thing; bhavati—will be; iha—here; vaç—of You; ca—and; naù—of us.

     Cäëüra said: O Balaräma, O Kåñëa, You are both very strong. Please fight with us before the king. If King Kaàsa is pleased what good thing will not come both to You and to us.

Text 43

çré-bhagavän uväca 
puraiva bhadraà nåpateù prasädato
     bälä vayaà tulya-balaiç ca bälakaiù
bhüyän mådho no balavän yathocitaà
     adharma-yuddhaà kila mä bhaved iha

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; purä—before; eva—indeed; bhadram—good; nåpateù—of the king; prasädataù—by the mefcy; bälä—boys; vayam—we; tulya-balaiç—with boys that Our equal; ca—amd; bälakaiù—with boys; bhüyän—may be; mådhaù—fight; naù—not; balavän—powerful; yathä—as; ucitam—proper; adharma—irreligious; yuddham—fight; kila—indeed; mä—not; bhavet—should be; iha—here.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: By the king's grace we will happily fight with other boys that are our equals in strength. It is not right for Us to fight with those who are much stronger than We. There should not be such an impious fight.

Text 44

cäëüra uväca 
bhavän na bälo na ca vä kiçoro
     balaç ca säkñäd balinäà baléyän
sahasra-mattebha-balaà dadhäno
     dvipo bhavadbhyäà nihataù sa-lélam

     cäëüra uväca-Canura said; bhavän—You; na—not; bälaù—a boy; na—not; ca—and; vä—or; kiçoraù—a youth; balaç—the strength; ca—and; säkñät—directly; balinäm—than the strngest; baléyän—stroinger; sahasra-mattebha-balam—the strength of a thousand maddened elephants; dadhänaù—placing; dvipaù—the elephant; bhavadbhyäm—by You two; nihataù—killed; sa-lélam—easily.

     Cäëüra said: You are not a boy. Nor are You a youth. You are stronger than the strongest. The two of You easily killed an elephant stronger than thousands of furious elephants.

Text 45

çré-närada uväca 
evaà tasya vacaù çrutvä
     bhagavän våjinärdanaù
cäëüreëäpi yuyudhe
     muñöikena balo balé

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; tasya—of him; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; våjinärdanaù—who removes all distress; cäëüreëa—with Canura; api—also; yuyudhe—fought; muñöikena—with Mustika; balaù—Balaräma; balé—strong.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these words, Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who removes all troubles, proceeded to fight with Cäëüra. Then Balaräma proceeded to fight with Muñöika.

Text 46

äkarñaëaà nodanaà ca
     bhujäbhyäà bhuja-daëòayoù
cakratuù paçyatäà nåëäà
     gajäv iva jigéñayä

     äkarñaëam—pulling; nodanam—pushing; ca—and; bhujäbhyäm—with both arms; bhuja-daëòayoù—of the arms; cakratuù—did; paçyatäm—watching; nåëäm—of the people; gajäv—two elephants; iva—like; jigéñayä—wishing victory.

     As the people watched, Kåñëa and Cäëura wrestled, pulling and pushing each other with both arms. They were like two elephants trying to defeat each other.

Text 47

hastäbhyäà vapur utthäpya
     cäëürasya hariù svayam
atolayad deha-bhäraà
     puëya-bhäraà yathä vidhiù

     hastäbhyäm—with both hands; vapuù—form; utthäpya—lifting; cäëürasya—of Canura; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally; atolayat—weighed; deha-bhäram—the heaviness of the body; puëya-bhäram—the weight of pious deeds; yathä—as; vidhiù—Brahmä.

     Picking him up with both arms, Kåñëa weighed Cäëüra, as the demigod Brahma weighs the heaviness of someone's pious deeds.

Text 48

cäëüras taà harià devaà
     kareëaikena lélayä
ujjahära mahä-véro
     bhü-khaëòaà näga-räò iva

     cäëüraù—Canura; tam—Him; harim—Kåñëa; devam—teh Supreme Personality of Godhead; kareëaikena—with one hand; lélayä—playfully; ujjahära—lifted; mahä-véraù—vrey heroic; bhü-khaëòam—the earth; näga-räò—the kinbg of serpents; iva—as.

     As Lord Çeña, the king of serpents, picks up the earth, with one hand Cäëüra playfully picked up Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. 

Text 49

gréväyäà kila cäëüraà
     bhuja-vegena mädhavaù
kaöyäà coddhåtya sahasä
     pätayäm äsa bhü-tale

     gréväyäm—on the neck; kila—indeed; cäëüram—Canura; bhuja-vegena—with the power of His arms; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; kaöyäm—on the waist; ca—and; uddhåtya—lifting; sahasä—suddenly; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—to the ground.

     With one hand on his neck and the other on his waist, Kåñëa suddenly picked up Cäëüra and threw him to the gound.

Text 50

hastaiç ca jänubhiù pädair
     bhujair aìguli-muñöibhiù
jaghnatuù kåñëa-cäëürau
     tathaiva bala-muñöikau

     hastaiù—with hands; ca—and; jänubhiù—with knees; pädaiù—with feet; bhujaiù—with arms; aìguli-muñöibhiù—with fingers and fists; jaghnatuù—hit; kåñëa-cäëürau—Kåñëa and Canura; tathä—so; eva—indeed; bala-muñöikau—Balaräma and Mustika.

     Hitting each other with Their hands, knees, feet, arms, fingers, and fists, Kåñëa and Cäëüra fought. Balaräma and Muñöika also fought in the same way.

Text 51

çrama-väri-yute dåñövä
     çré-mukhe räma-kåñëayoù
sänukampäs tadä prähur
     gaväkña-sthäù nåpa-striyaù

     çrama-väri-yute—with drops of perspiration; dåñövä—seeing; çré-mukhe—on the handsome face; räma-kåñëayoù—of Kåñëa and Balaräma; sänukampäù—filled with compassion; tadä—then; prähuù—said; gaväkña-sthäù—staying in the windows; nåpa-striyaù—the king's women.

     Gazing at the handsome perspiring faces of Kåñëa and Balaräma, the women of the palace became filled with compassion for Them. Standing in the palace windows, they spoke.

Text 52

çré-striya ücuù 
aho adharmaù su-mahat-sabhäyäà
     jätaù puro räjani vartamäne
kva vajra-tulyäìga-våtau hi mallau
     kva puñpa-tulyau bata räma-kåñëau

     çré-striya ücuù—the women said; ahaù—Oh; adharmaù—impiois; su-mahat-sabhäyäm—in the great assembly; jätaù—manifested; puraù—before; räjani—the king; vartamäne—being so; kva—where?; vajra-tulyäìga-våtau—thweir bodies like thunderbolts; hi—indeed; mallau—two wrestlers; kva—where?; puñpa-tulyau—like two flowers; bata—indeed; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma.

     The women said: An impious fight is now happening in the royal assembly in the king's presence. How can Kåñëa and Balaräma, who are like two flowers, be an equal match with these two wrestlers, who have bodies like thunderbolts?

Text 53

aho hy abhägyaà hi puraukasäà no
     yuddhe tayor darçanam adya jätam
aho 'ti-dhanyaà bata bhüri-bhägyaà
     vanaukasäà räsa-rasena jätam

     ahaù—Oh; hy—indeed; abhägyam—ill fortune; hi—indeed; puraukasäm—of the people in the city; naù—not; yuddhe—in the fight; tayoù—of Them; darçanam—in the sight; adya—now; jätam—born; ahaù—Oh; ati-dhanyam—great good fortune; bata—indeed; bhüri-bhägyam—great good fortune; vanaukasäm—of the people of the forest; räsa-rasena—by the nectar pastimes of the rasa-dance; jätam—born.

     The people of Mathurä City are very unfortunate that they must see such a fight. The girls in the forest were fortunate. They could taste the nectar of the räsa-dance with Lord Kåñëa.

Text 54

aho sthite räjani duñöa-citte
     na ko 'pi vaktuà kñama eva sakhyaù
tasmäd dhi naù puëya-balena cet tau
     tvaraà mådhe vai jayatäm arén svän

     ahaù—Oh; sthite—situated; räjani—the king; duñöa-citte—wicked at heart; na—not; ko 'pi—someone; vaktum—to say; kñama—able; eva—indeed; sakhyaù—friends; tasmät—from this; dhi—indeed; naù—of us; puëya-balena—by the power of piety; cet—if; tau—They; tvaram—quickly; mådhe—in the fight; vai—indeed; jayatäm—may be victory; arén—enemies; svän—own.

     Friends, while this wicked king is present no one dare say anything. We simply pray that by the power of Their pious deeds these two boys will defeat Their enemies.
.pa

Chapter Eight
Kaàsa-vadha
The Killing of Kaàsa

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
ardra-cittaà nanda-räjaà
     vanitänäà manoratham
småtvä çatrün hantu-kämas
     cakre yuddhaà baläd dhariù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ardra-cittam—melting hearts; nanda-räjam—King Nanda; vanitänäm—of the women; manoratham—the desire; småtvä—remembering; çatrün—the enemies; hantu-kämaù—wishing to kill; cakre—did; yuddham—the fight; balät—powerfully; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Çré Närada said: Thinking of how King Nanda's heart was melting and how the women were praying in this way, Lord Kåñëa, yearning to kill them, ferociously attacked His opponents.

Text 2

gåhétvä bhuja-daëòäbhyäà
     cäëüraà gagane balät
cikñepa sahasä kåñëo
     vätaù padmam ivoddhåtam

     gåhétvä—grabbing; bhuja-daëòäbhyäm—with both arms; cäëüram—Canura; gagane—into the sky; balät—forcibly; cikñepa—threw; sahasä—suddenly; kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; vätaù—wind; padmam—a lotus; iva—like; uddhåtam—lifted.

     Suddenly grabbing him with both hands, Lord Kåñëa threw Cäëura into the sky, as a great wind uproots and throws a lotus flower. 

Text 3

äkäçät patitaù so 'pi
     tärakena hy adho-mukhaù
utthäya muñöinä kåñëaà
     täòayäm äsa vegataù

     äkäçät—from the sky; patitaù—fallen; saù—he; api—also; tärakä—a star; iva—like; hy—indeed; adho-mukhaù—face downward; utthäya—rising; muñöinä—with afist; kåñëam—Kåñëa; täòayäm äsa—punched; vegataù—forcefully.

     Like a comet Caëüra fell headfirst from the sky. Standing up, he violently punched Kåñëa.

Text 4

tasya muñöi-prahäreëa
     na cacäla parät paraù
sadyo gåhétvä cäëüraà
     pätayäm äsa bhü-tale

     tasya—of him; muñöi-prahäreëa—by the punch; na—not; cacäla—wavered; parät—than the greatest; paraù—greater; sadyaù—at once; gåhétvä—grabbing; cäëüraà-Cäëüra; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-tale—to the ground.

     Unmoved by the punch, Lord Kåñëa, who is greater than the greatest, suddenly grabbed Cäëüra and threw him to the ground.

Text 5

bhinna-dantas tu cäëüraù
     krodha-yukto madotkaöaù
muñöi-dvayena çré-kåñëaà
     tatäòa hådi maithila

     bhinna—broken; dantaù—teeth; tu—indeed; cäëüraù—Cäëüra; krodha-yuktaù—angry; madotkaöaù—ferocious; muñöi-dvayena—with both fists; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; tatäòa—hit; hådi—on the chest; maithila—O kin gof Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, mad with anger, and his teeth now broken, with both fists Cäëüra pounded Lord Kåñëa's chest.

Text 6

gåhétvä karayos taà vai
     karäbhyäà bhagavän svayaà
kaàsasyägre bhrämayitvä
     sarveñäà paçyatäà nåpa

     gåhétvä—grabbing; karayoù—of hands; tam—indeed; vai—indeed; karäbhyäm—with both ahnds; bhagavän—the Lord; svayam—Himself; kaàsasya—of Kaàsa; agre—in the presence; bhrämayitvä—whirling around; sarveñäm—of all; paçyatäm—watching; nåpa—O king.

     O king, grabbing both his hands, Lord Kåñëa whirled Cänüra around and around as Kaàsa and everyone else looked on.

Text 7

pätayäm äsa bhü-påñöhe
     kamaëòalum ivärbhakaù
çré-kåñëasya prahäreëa
     cäëüro bhinna-mastakaù
udvaman rudhiraà räjan
     sadyo vai nidhanaà gataù

     pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-påñöhe—to the gound; kamaëòalum—a kamandalu; iva—like; arbhakaù—a child; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; prahäreëa—by the blow; cäëüraù—Cäëüra; bhinna-mastakaù—his head broken; udvaman—vomiting; rudhiram—blodd; räjan—O king; sadyaù—suddenly; vai—indeed; nidhanam—death; gataù—attained.

     As a child throws a kamaëòalu, Lord Kåñëa threw Cäëüra to the ground. O king, vomiting blood, and his head broken, Cäëüra suddenly died.

Texts 8 and 9

tathaiva muñöikaà mallaà
     muñöibhir yudhi durgamam
dhåtväìghrau bhrämayitvä khe
     baladevo mahä-balaù

pätayäm äsa bhü-påñöhe
     phaëinaà garuòo yathä muñöiko nidhanaà präpa      prodvaman rudhiraà mukhät

     tathä—so; eva—certainly; muñöikam—Mustika; mallam—wrestler; muñöibhiù—with fists; yudhi—in the fight; durgamam—invincible; dhåtvä—grabbing; aìghrau—both feet; bhrämayitvä—whirling; khe—in the sky; baladevaù—Balaräma; mahä-balaù—very strong; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-påñöhe—to the ground; phaëinam—a snake; garuòaù—garuòa; yathä—as; muñöikaù—Mustika; nidhanam—death; präpa—attained; prodvaman—vomiting; rudhiram—blood; mukhät—from his mouth.

     In the same way powerful Lord Balaräma grabbed the feet of invincible Muñöika, whirled him around, and threw him to the ground as Garuòa throws a snake. O king, vomiting blood from his mouth, Muñöika suddenly died.

Text 10

küöaà samägataà vékñya
     baladevo mahä-balaù
muñöinä pätayäm äsa
     vajreëendro yathä girim

     küöam—Kuta; samägatam—come; vékñya—seeing; baladevaù—Balaräma; mahä-balaù—strong; muñöinä—with afist; pätayäm äsa—hit; vajreëa—with a thunderbolt; indraù—Indra; yathä—as; girim—a mountain.

     Seeing Küöa coming, with a single punch Lord Balaräma knocked him to the ground as with his thunderbolt Indra knocks down a mountain.

Text 11

präptaà çälaà nanda-sünur
     lattayä taà tatäòa ha
tékñnayä tuëòayä räjan
     kadrujaà garuòo yathä

     präptam—attained; çälam—Sala; nanda-sünuù—Kåñëa; lattayä—with a latta; tam—him; tatäòa—hit; ha—indeed; tékñnayä—sharp; tuëòayä—with a beak; räjan—O king; kadrujam—a snake; garuòaù—Garuòa; yathä—as.

     When Çala approached, Lord Kåñëa attacked him as with his beak Garuòa attacks a snake.

Text 12

gåhétvä toçalaà kåñëo
     madhyataù samvidärya ca
präkñipat kaàsa-maïcägre
     viöapaà sindhuro yathä

     gåhétvä—grabbing; toçalam—Tosala; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; madhyataù—in the middle; samvidärya—ripping; ca—and; präkñipat—threw; kaàsa-maïcägre—into Kaàsa's box; viöapam—a tree; sindhuraù—an elephant; yathä—as.

     Then Kåñëa grabbed Toçala, ripped him in two at the waist, and threw the two pieces into Kaàsa's box as an elephant breaks and throws a tree.

Text 13

ete nipatitä raìge
     sadyo vai nidhanaà gatäù
teñäà jyotiàsi vaikuëöhe
     viviçuù paçyatäà satäm

     ete—they; nipatitä—fallen; raìge—in the arena; sadyaù—at once; vai—indeed; nidhanam—death; gatäù—attained; teñäm—of them; jyotiàsi—the lights; vaikuëöhe—in Vaikuëöha; viviçuù—entered; paçyatäm—looking on; satäm—of the saintly devotees.

     As the saintly people of Mathurä looked on, the effulgent souls of the wrestlers killed in the arena entered the spiritual world of Vaikuëöha.

Text 14

evaà çré-räma-kåñëäbhyäà
     malleñu nihateñu ca
çeñäù pradudruvur mallä
     bhayärtä jévanecchayä

     evam—thus; çré-räma-kåñëäbhyäm—of Kåñëa and Balaräma; malleñu—among the wrestlers; nihateñu—killed; ca—and; çeñäù—the remainder; pradudruvuù—fled; mallä—wrestlers; bhayärtä—frightened; jévanecchayä—wishing to stay alive.

     After many wrestlers were thus killed by Kåñëa and Balaräma, the others, terrified and intent on staying alive, fled.

Text 15

çrédämädén vayasyäàç ca
     gopän äkåñya mädhavaù
taiù särdhaà yuddham ärebhe
     sarveñäà paçyatäà satäm

     çrédämädén—headed by Çrédama; vayasyän—friends; ca—and; gopän—gopas; äkåñya—pulling; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; taiù—them; särdham—with; yuddham—fight; ärebhe—began; sarveñäm—of all; paçyatäm—watching; satäm—the saintly devotees.

     Then, calling Çrédämä and His other gopa friends, Kåñëa began to fight with them as the saintly people of Mathurä looked on.

Text 16

kiréöa-kuëòala-dharau
     räma-kåñëau sahärbhakaiù
viharantau vékñya raìge
     visismuù pura-väsinaù

     kiréöa-kuëòala-dharau—wearing crowmns and earrings; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; sahärbhakaiù—with the boys; viharantau—playing; vékñya—seeing; raìge—in the arena; visismuù—became astonished; pura-väsinaù—the people of Mathurä.

     As Kåñëa and Balaräma, wearing crowns and earrings, played with the gopa boys in the arena, the people of Mathurä gazed at Them and became filled with wonder.

Text 17

kaàsaà vinä sarva-mukhäj
     jaya-çabdo vinirgataù
sädhu sädhv iti vädo 'bhün
     nedur dundubhayas tataù

     kaàsam—Kaàsa; vinä—except for; sarva-mukhät—from every mouth; jaya-çabdaù—the sound of  Victory!"; vinirgataù—left; sädhu—well done; sädhv—well done; iti—thus; vädaù—the word; abhüt—was; neduù—sounded; dundubhaya—the dundubhis; tataù—then.

     From every mouth, except Kaàsa's, came the words  Victory!" and "Bravo! Bravo!" Then all the dundubhi drums sounded.

Text 18

svasyäjayaà vékñya kaàso
     mahä-krodha-samäkulaù
varjayitvä türya-ghoñaà
     präha prasphuritädharaù

     svasya—of his own men; ajayam—the defeat; vékñya—seeing; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; mahä-krodha-samäkulaù—overcome with anger; varjayitvä—stopping; turya-ghoñam—the sound of the turyas; präha—said; prasphurita—trembling; adharaù—lips.

     Seeing his own men defeated, Kaàsa will filled with anger. Stopping the türya drums, he spoke, his lips trembling.

Text 19

kaàsa uväca 
durbuddhi-yuktau vasudeva-nandanau
     prasahya niùsärayatäçu mat-purät
harantu sarvaà vraja-väsinäà dhanaà
     badhnéta nandaà sahasäti-durmatim

     kaàsa uväca—Kaàsa said; durbuddhi-yuktau—unintelligent; vasudeva-nandanau—the two sons of Vasudeva; prasahya—forcibly; niùsärayata—throw out; äçu—at once; mat-purät—from my city; harantu—should take; sarvam—all; vraja-väsinäm—of the people of Vraja; dhanam—the wealth; badhnéta—bind; nandam—Nanda; sahasä-at once; ati-durmatim—wicked-hearted

     Kaàsa said: I order that the two fools that are Vasudeva's sons should at once be thrown out of my city. The wealth of Vraja's people should be plundered. Wicked-hearted Nanda should be bound and imprisoned.

Text 20

adyograsenasya pituù ku-buddheù
     çaureù siraç cäçu hi chindhi chindhi
kau yatra taträpi tathätra våñëi-
     jätän suraàçän kila südayadhvam

     adya—today; ugrasenasya—of Ugrasena; pituù—father; ku-buddheù—foolish; çaureù—of Vasudeva; siraç—the head; ca—and; äçu——at once; hi—indeed; chindhi—cut; chindhi—cut; kau—on the earth; yatra—where; tatra—there; api—also; tathä—so; atra—here; våñëi-jätän—born in the Våñëi dynasty; suraàçän—incarnations of the demigods; kila—indeed; südayadhvam—should kill.

     Ugrasena, my foolish father, and foolish Vasudeva should both be beheaded. Wherever they are on this earth, the Våñëis, who are incarnations of the demigods, should be killed.

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
evaà vikathamänasya
     kaàsasya yadu-nandanaù
sahasotpatya taà maïcaà
     äruhat krodha-püritaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; vikathamänasya—speaking wildly; kaàsasya—of Kaàsa; yadu-nandanaù—Kåñëa; sahasä—suddenly; utpatya—leaping; tam—that; maïcam—box; äruhat—entered; krodha-püritaù—filled with anger.

     Çré Närada said: As Kaàsa was speaking in this wild way, Lord Kåñëa, filled with anger, suddenly jumped into his box.

Text 22

måtyuà samägataà vékñya
     maïcäd utthäya sa-tvaram
madoddhato bhartsayaàs taà
     jagåhe khaòga-carmaëé

     måtyum—death; samägatam—come; vékñya—seeing; maïcät—from the box; utthäya—going; sa-tvaram—quickly; madoddhataù—wildly; bhartsayan—rebuking; tam—Him; jagåhe—grabbed; khaòga—a sword; carmaëé—and shield.

     Seeing that his death had come, Kaàsa jumped from the box and, wildly rebuking Kåñëa, grabbed a sword and shield.

Text 23

agrahét sahasä kaàsaà
     dorbhyäà carmäsi-samyutam
yathä tuëòa-vibhägäbhyäà
     sa-viñaà phaëinäà viräö

     agrahét—grabbed; sahasä—suddenly; kaàsam—Kaàsa; dorbhyäm—with both arms; carmäsi-samyutam—with sword and shield; yathä—as; tuëòa-vibhägäbhyäm—with his beak; sa-viñam—poisonous; phaëinam—snake; viräö—Garuòa.

     As Kaàsa tried to defend himself with sword and shield, Lord Kåñëa suddenly grabbed him with both arms as Garuòa grabs a poisonous snake in his beak.

Text 24

patat-khaògaç calac-carmä
     bhuja-bandhäd baläd balé
viniryayau tärkñya-tuëòät
     puëòaréko yathä phaëé

     patat—falling; khaògaù—sword; calat—moving; carmä—shiled; bhuja-bandhät—from the bondage of His arms; balät—forcibly; balé—strong; viniryayau—e4scaped; tärkñya-tuëòät—from Garuòa's beak; puëòarékaù—Pundarika; yathä—as; phaëé—the snake.

     Fighting with his sword and shield, Kaàsa escaped Lord Kåñëa's arms as the snake Puëòaréka escaped Garuòa's beak.

Text 25

maïce tau balinau vegän
     mardayantau parasparam
çaila-çåìge yathä siàhau
     suçubhäte yathä-tatham

     maïce—in the box; tau—both; balinau—strong; vegän—strongly; mardayantau—hitting; parasparam—each other; çaila-çåìge—on a mountaintop; yathä—as; siàhau—two lions; suçubhäte—splendid; yathä-tatham—so.

     In the box again, the two strong opponents hit each other very hard. They were like two splendid lions fighting on a mountaintop.

Text 26

utpatantaà balät kaàsaà
     çata-hastaà mahämbare
agrahéc cotpatan kåñëo
     syenaà syeno yathämbare

     utpatantam—jumping; balät—strongly; kaàsam—Kaàsa; çata-hastam—a hundred hastas; mahämbare—in the sky; agrahét—grabbed; ca—and; utpatan—jumping; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; syenam—to an eagle; syenaù—an eagle; yathä—as; ambare—in the sky.

     When Kaàsa jumped a hundred hastas into the sky, Lord Kåñëa jumped after him and grabbed him. They both fought like two eagles in the sky. 

Text 27

gåhétvä bhuja-daëòäbhyäà
     pracaëòaà daitya-puìgavam
trailokya-bala-dhåg devo
     bhrämayitvä tv itas tataù

     gåhétvä—grabbing; bhuja-daëòäbhyäm—with both arms; pracaëòam—powerfulk; daitya-puìgavam—the great demon; trailokya-bala-dhåk—the strongest in the three worlds; devaù—the Lord; bhrämayitvä—whirling about; tv—indeed; itaù—here; tataù—and there.

     Then Lord Kåñëa, who is the strongest person in the three worlds, with both hands grabbed the ferocious demon Kaàsa and whirled him around and around.

Text 28

äkäçät pätayäm äsa
     maïcopari ruñänvitaù
bhagna-daëòo 'bhavan maïcas
     taòit-päte yathä drumaù

     äkäçät—from the sky; pätayäm äsa—threw; maïcopari—into the box; ruñänvitaù—angry; bhagna-daëòaù—broken; abhavat—became; maïcaù—the box; taòit-päte—in a thunderbolt; yathä—as; drumaù—a tree.

     Angry Kåñëa then threw him into the box at the arena. The box shattered like a tree struck by lightning.

Text 29

patito 'pi sa vajräìgaù
     kiïcid vyäkula-mänasaù
sahasotthäya yuyudhe
     çré-kåñëena mahätmanä

     patitaù—fallen; api—even though; sa—he; vajräìgaù—with a body as hard ans lightning; kiïcit—a little; vyäkula-mänasaù—agitated at heart; sahasä—suddenly; utthäya—rising; yuyudhe—fought; çré-kåñëena—with Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     The Kaàsa, his body hard as thunderbolts and his mind a little agitated by all this, jumped from the box and continued to fight with Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 30

nétvä taà bhuja-daëòäbhyäà
     maïce kñiptvä punaù prabhuù
äruhya hådayaà tasya
     maulià jagräha mädhavaù

     nétvä—bringing; tam—him; bhuja-daëòäbhyäm—with both arms; maïce—in the box; kñiptvä—throwing; punaù—again; prabhuù—the Lord; äruhya—climbing; hådayam—the chest; tasya—of him; maulim—the crown; jagräha—grabbed; mädhavaù—Kåñëa.

     Grabbing him with both hands, throwing him again into the box, and knocking away his crown, Lord Kåñëa straddled Kaàsa's chest.

Text 31

sadyaù pragåhya keçeñu
     raìgopari hariù svayam
maïcät taà pätayäm äsa
     çailäd gaëòa-çiläm iva

     sadyaù—at once; pragåhya—grabbing; keçeñu—his hair; raìgopari—in the arena; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; svayam—Himself; maïcät—from the box; tam—him; pätayäm äsa—threw; çailät—from a mountain; gaëòa-çiläm—a great boulder thrown down by a thunderstorm; iva—like.

     Then, grabbing his hair, Lord Kåñëa threw Kaàsa from the box into the arena as a thunderstorm throws a great boulder from a mountaintop.

Text 32

tasyopariñöhäc chré-kåñëaù
     sarvädharaù sanätanaù
nipapäta svayaà vegäd
     ananto 'nanta-vikramaù

     tasya—of him; upariñöhät—on top; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; sarvädharaù—the maintainer of everything; sanätanaù—eternal; nipapäta—fell; svayam—personally; vegät—with great force; anantaù—limitless; ananta-vikramaù—whose power is limitless.

     The Lord Kåñëa, the eternal, limitless, and unlimitedly powerful Supreme Personality of Godhead, who maintains everyone, jumped on the demon Kaàsa.

Text 33

itthaà dvayor nipätena
     nimnaà bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam
sthaléva sahasä räjan
     cakampe ghaöikä-dvayam

     ittham—thus; dvayoù—of the two; nipätena—by the falling; nimnam—cracked; bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam—the circle of the earth; sthalé—the earth; iva—as if; sahasä—suddenly; räjan—O king; cakampe—shook; ghaöikä-dvayam—for an hour.

     As the two of them fought the earth cracked. O king, for two hours the earth shook.

Text 34

samparetaà bhoja-räjaà
     bhümau taà vicakarña ha
yathä mågendro nägendraà
     sarveñäà paçyatäà nåpa

     samparetam—dead; bhoja-räjam—Kaàsa; bhümau—on the ground; tam—him; vicakarña—dragged; ha—indeed; yathä—as; mågendraù—a lion; nägendram—an elephant; sarveñäm—of all; paçyatäm—looking; nåpa—O king.

     O king, as everyone looked on, Lord Kåñëa dragged the dead Kaàsa across the ground as a lion drags a great elephant.

Text 35

hä-hä-käras tadaiväséd
     dhävatäà bhubhujäà nåpa
vaira-bhävena deveçaà
     bhajan kaàso mahä-balaù
jagäma tasya särüpyaà
     bhåìginaù kéöako yathä

     hä-hä-käraù—the sound ofAlas! Alas!; tadä—then; eva—indeed; äsét—was; dhävatäm—running; bhubhujäm—of the kings; nåpa—O king; vaira-bhävena—with enmity; deveçam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhajan—worshiping; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; mahä-balaù—very strong; jagäma—went; tasya—of Him; särüpyam—the same form; bhåìginaù—of a bee; kéöakaù—a kitaka insect; yathä—as.

     O king, the many kings ran here and there, exclaiming,  Alas! Alas!" Then because in the rasa of hatred he had worshiped Lord Kåñëa, the master of the demigods, Kaàsa attained a spiritual form resembling the Lord's, as a kiöaka insect attains the form of it's enemy, the bee.

Texts 36 and 37

kaàsaà prapatitaà dåñövä
     bhrätaro 'ñöau mahä-baläù sunäma-såñöi-nyagrodha-      tuñöimad-räñöra-pälakäù

suhunä kaìka-çaìkubhyäà
     krodha-prasphuritädharäù
khaòga-carma-dharä yoddhuà
     kåñëopari samäyayuù

     kaàsam—Kaàsa; prapatitam—fallen; dåñövä—seeing; bhrätaraù—brothers; añöau—eight; mahä-baläù—very strong; sunäma-såñöi-nyagrodha-tuñöimad-räñörapälakäù—Sunäma, Såñöi, Nyagrodha, Tuñöiman, Räñöra-pälaka; suhunä—with Suhu; kaìka-çaìkubhyäm—with Kaìka and Çaìku; krodha-prasphuritädharäù—their lips trembling with rage; khaòga-carma-dharä—holding swords and shields; yoddhum—to fight; kåñëopari—Kåñëa; samäyayuù—approached.

     Seeing that Kaàsa had fallen, Kaàsa's eight brothers, Såñöi, Nyagrodha, Tuñöimän, Räñörapälaka, Suhu, Kaìka, and Çaìku, clutching swords and shields, and their lips trembling with rage, rushed Çré Kåñëa to fight with Him.

Text 38

vékñya tän mudgaraà nétvä
     rohiné-nandano balaù
äräc cakära huìkäraà
     yathä siàho mågän prati

     vékñya—seeing; tän—them; mudgaram— aclub; nétvä—taking; rohiné-nandanaù—Balaräma; balaù—powerful; äräc—near; cakära—did; huìkäram— a scream; yathä—as; siàhaù—a lion; mågän—deer; prati—to.

     Seeing them coming, Lord Balaräma took up a club and roared like a lion to herd of deer.

Text 39

huìkäreëaiva çasträëi
     teñäà hastebhya äbhayät
petur amra-phalänéva
     daëòa-ghätaiç ca maithila

     huìkäreëa—by the roar; eva—indeed; çasträëi—the eapons; teñäm—of them; hastebhya—from the hands; äbhayät—out of fear; petuù—fell; amra-phaläni—mangoes; iva—like; daëòa-ghätaiù—with a stick; ca—and; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     The brothers were terrified by that roar. Their weapons suddenly fell, as mangoes fall when hit by a stick.

Text 40

niùçasträs te mahä-vérä
     muñöibhiù sarvato balam
teòuù çailaà yathä nägäù
     çuëòä-daëòair itas tataù

     niùçasträù—unarmed; te—they; mahä-vérä—heroes; muñöibhiù—with fists; sarvataù—in all respects; balam—strength; teòuù—hit; çailam—a mountain; yathä—as; nägäù—elephants; çuëòä-daëòaiù—with their trunks; itaù—here; tataù—and there.

     Now weaponless, the ferocious fighters attacked Lord Balaräma with their fists. They were like many elephants whipping a great mountain with their trunks.

Text 41

såñöià tathä sunämänaà
     mudgareëa balo 'hanat
nyagrodhaà bhuja-vegena
     kaìkaà väma-kareëa vai

     såñöim—Såñöi; tathä—then; sunämänam—Sunama; mudgareëa—with a club; balaù—Balaräma; ahanat—killed; nyagrodham—Nyagrodha; bhuja-vegena—with His arms; kaìkam—Kanka; väma-kareëa—with His left hand; vai—indeed.

     With the club Lord Balaräma killed Såñöi and Sunäma, with His arms He killed Nygrodha, and with His left hand He killed Kaìka.

Text 42

çaìkuà suhuà tuñöimantaà
     väma-pädena mädhavaù
räñörapälaà dakñiëena
     pädenäbhijaghäna ha

     çaìkum—Sanku; suhum—Suhu; tuñöimantam—Tustiman; väma-pädena—with His left foot; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; räñörapälam—Rastrapalaka; dakñiëena—with His right; pädena—foot; abhijaghäna——killed; ha—indeed.

     With His left foot Lord Kåñëa killed Çaìku, Suhu, and Tuñöimän, and with His right foot He killed Räñörapälaka.

Text 43

añöau nipetuù sahasä
     våkñä väta-hatä iva
teñäà jyotir bhagavati
     lénaà jätaà videha-räö

     añöau—the eight; nipetuù—fell; sahasä—suddenly; våkñä—trees; väta-hatä—struck by the wind; iva—like; teñäm—of them; jyotiù—light; bhagavati—in the Supreme Personality of Godhead; lénam—entered; jätam—manifested; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     The eight brothers quickly fell like tress struck by a great wind. O king of Videha, sparks of light left their corpses and merged in the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 44

deva-dundubhayo nedur
     jaya-dhvanir abhüt tadä
sadyo vai vavåñur deväù
     puñpair nandana-sambhavaiù

     deva-dundubhayaù—the dundubhis of the demigods; neduù—sounded; jaya-dhvaniù—with sounds of jaya; abhüt—was; tadä—then; sadyaù—at once; vai—indeed; vavåñuù—showered; deväù—the demigods; puñpaiù—with flowers; nandana-sambhavaiù—grown in the Nandana gardens.

     Suddenly the dundubhi drums of the demigods sounded and the demigods showered flowers from the Nandana gardens.

Text 45

vidyädharyaç ca gandharvyo
     nanåtur harña-vihvaläù
vidyädharäç ca gandharväù
     kinnaräs tad-yaço jaguù

     vidyädharya—the Vidyadharis; ca—and; gandharvyaù—the gandharvis; nanåtuù—danced; harña-vihvaläù—filled with happiness; vidyädharäù—the Vidyadharas; ca—and; gandharväù—the Gandharvas; kinnaräù—the Kinnaras; tad-yaçaù—His glories; jaguù—sang.

     The Vidyädhara and Gandharva women danced as the Vidyädhara, Gandharva, and Kinnara men sang the glories of Kåñëa and Balaräma.

Text 46

brahmädyä munayaù siddhä
     vimänair drañöum ägatäù
tuñöuvü räma-kåñëau tau
     vägbhiù çruti-paräyaëäù

     brahmädyäù—headed by Brahmä; munayaù—the sages; siddhä—the siddhas; vimänaiù—with airplanes; drañöum—to see; ägatäù—came; tuñöuvü—offered prayers; räma-kåñëau—to Kåñëa and Balaräma; tau—Them; vägbhiù—with words; çruti-paräyaëäù—devoted to the Vedas.

     The sages and perfect beings, headed by Brahmä and all learned in the Vedas, came to see. With eloquent words they offered prayers to Kåñëa and Balaräma.

Text 47

täòayantya uro hastair
     asti-präpty-ädayaù striyaù
vinirgatas ta rurudur
     jäta-vaidhavya-duùkhitäù

     täòayantyaù—beating; uraù—their chests; hastaiù—with their hands; asti-präpty-ädayaù—headed by Asti and Prapti; striyaù—the women; vinirgataù—came out; ta—they; ruruduù—cried; jäta-vaidhavya-duùkhitäù—filled with grief.

     Kaàsa's wives, headed by Asti and Präpti, beat their chests and wailed with grief.

Text 48

striya ücuù ha nätha he yuddha-pate      kva gato 'si mahä-bala
trailokya-vijayé säkñäd
     devänäm api durjayaù

     striya ücuù—the wives said; ha—O; nätha—lord; he—O; yuddha-pate —master of battle; kva—where?; gataù—gone; asi—you have; mahä-bala—O powerful one; trailokya-vijayé—the conqueror of the three worlds; säkñät—directly; devänäm—of the demigods; api—even; durjayaù—unconquerable.

     Thw wives said: O lord, O master of battle, O powerful one, where have you gone? You conquered the three worlds. Even the demigods could not defeat you.

Text 49

jäta-mätraù svasuù puträ
     nirghåëena tvayä hatäù
anirdaçä nirdaçaç cä-
     pare 'pi nihatä balät

     jäta-mätraù—as soon as they were born; svasuù—of your sister; puträ—the sons; nirghåëena—without mercy; tvayä—by you; hatäù—killed; anirdaçä—not more than ten days old; nirdaçaù—ten days old; ca—and; apare—others; api—also; nihatä—killed; balät—forcibly.

     You mercilessly killed your sisters sons when they were ten days old. Some were not even ten days old. Some you killed the moment they were born.

Text 50

tena päpena ghoreëa
     daçäm etädåçéà gataù

     tena—by this; päpena—sin; ghoreëa—horrible; daçäm—state; etädåçém—like this; gataù—attained. 

     That horrible sin has brought you to this.

Text 51

çré-närada uväca 
evam açru-mukhér dénä
     äçväsya nåpa-yoñitaù
vidhäya yamunä-tére
     citäù çrékhaëòa-samyutäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; açru-mukhéù—faces filled with tears; dénä—pathetic; äçväsya—comforting; nåpa-yoñitaù—the queens; vidhäya—placing; yamunä-tére—on the Yamuna shore; citäù—a funeral pyre; çrékhaëòa-samyutäù—made of sandal wood.

     Çré Närada said: After consoling the poor tear-faced queens, the Lord built a sandalwood funeral pyre on the Yamunä's shore.

Text 52

hatänäà kärayitväsau
     kriyäà vai para-laukikém
sarvän sambodhayäm äsa
     bhagaväl loka-bhavanaù

     hatänäm—of the dead; kärayitvä—performing; asau—He; kriyäm—the rites; vai—indeed; para-laukikém—for the next world; sarvän—all; sambodhayäm äsa—spoke; bhagavän—the Lord; loka-bhavanaù—the master of the worlds.

     Then Lord Kåñëa, the master of the all the worlds, performed the funeral ceremony and recited the funeral mantras.

Chapter Nine
Yadu-saukhyam
The Happiness of the Yadus

Text 1

çré-närada uväca

atha devau räma-kåñëau
     devaké-vasudevayoù
samépaà jagmatuù säkñäd
     våñénbhiù pariväritau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; devau—the two Lords; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; devaké-vasudevayoù—of Devaké and Vasudeva; samépam—near; jagmatuù—went; säkñät—directly; våñénbhiù—with the Våndävanarsnis; pariväritau—accompanied.

     Çré Närada said: Then, accompanied by the Våñëis, Kåñëa and Balaräma, the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead, approached Devaké and Vasudeva.

Text 2

svatas tayor bandhanäni
     yayuù çithilitäà nåpa
tau vékñya garuòaà präptaà
     näga-päça-guëä yathä

     svataù—personally; tayoù—of Them; bandhanäni—the bonds; yayuù—went; çithilitäm—to looseness; nåpa—O king; tau—Them; vékñya—seeing; garuòam—Garuòa; präptam—attained; näga-päça-guëä—the snake ropes; yathä—as.

     O king, seeing their condition, Lord Kåñëa at once untied their bonds, as Garuòa unties a knotted rope of snakes.

Text 3

sva-prabhäva-vidau vékñya
     pitarau sa-balo hariù
sadyas tatäna sväà mäyäà
     jagan-moha-karià balät

     sva-prabhäva-vidau—aware of His own power; vékñya—seeing; pitarau—the parents; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; hariù—Kåñëa; sadyaù—at once; tatäna—expanded; sväm—own; mäyäm—illusion; jagan-moha-karim—which bewilders the universes; balät—by His power.

     Seeing that Their parents had become aware of Their transcendental power, Kåñëa and Balaräma at once bewildered them with His illusory potency, which bewilders all the worlds.

Text 4

räma-kåñëau sutau jïätvä
     çaurir moha-samäkulaù
devakyä sahasotthäya
     sasvaje cäçru-püritaù

     räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; sutau—the two sons; jïätvä—understanding; çauriù—Vasudeva; moha-samäkulaù—bewildered; devakyä—with Devaké; sahasä—at once; utthäya—rising; sasvaje—embraced; ca—and; açru—with tears; püritaù—filled.

     Now thinking Kåñëa and Balaräma his own sons, bewildered Vasudeva suddenly stood up. His eyes filled with tears, he and Devaké embraced their two sons.

Text 5

täv äçväsya hariù sadyo
     våñëibhiù pariväritaù
mätämahaà tügrasenaà
     cakära mathurädhipam

     tau—them; äçväsya—consoling; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; sadyaù—at once; våñëibhiù—the Vrsnis; pariväritaù—with; mätämaham—His maternal grandfather; tu—indeed; ugrasenam—Ugrasena; cakära—made; mathurädhipam—the king of Mathurä.

     Accompanied by the Våñëis, Lord Kåñëa consoled His parents. Then He crowned king of Mathurä His maternal grandfather, Ugrasena.

Text 6

ähüya yädavän kaàsa-
     bhayäd deçäntaraà gatän
premëä niväsayäm äsa
     sa-kuöumbän yadoù puré

     ähüya—calling; yädavän—the Yadavas; kaàsa—of Kaàsa; bhayät—out of fear; deçäntaram—to other countries; gatän—gone; premëä—with love; niväsayäm äsa—gave homes; sa-kuöumbän—with their families; yadoù—of the Yadavas; puré—in the city.

     Calling together the Yädavas that had fled to other countries out of fear of Kaàsa, Lord Kåñëa affectionaltely gave homes in Mathurä to them and their families.

Text 7

nanda-räjaà gopa-gaëaiù
     sva-gåhän gantum udyatam
natvä taà sa-balaù präha
     mohayann iva mäyayä

     nanda-räjam—King Nanda; gopa-gaëaiù—with the gopas; sva-gåhän—own homes; gantum—to go; udyatam—prepared; natvä—bowing; tam—to him; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; präha—said; mohayann—bewildering; iva—as if; mäyayä—with His illusory potency.

     Then, bewildering them with Their illusory potency, Kåñëa and Balaräma bowed down before King Nanda and ther gopas, who were now eager to return to theor homes. Kåñëa said to them:

Text 8

atraiva väsaà kuru täta puryäà
     gantuà yadécchä manasotthitä syät
paçcäd ahaà vai sa-balo yadün vä
     vidhäya pärçvaà tava cägamiñye

     atra—here; eva—indeed; väsam—residence; kuru—do; tata—O father; puryäm—in the city; gantum—to go; yadi—if; icchä—the desire; manasä—by the mind; utthitä—risen; syät—may be; paçcät—then; aham—I; vai—indeed; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; yadün—to the Yadavas; vä—indeed; vidhäya—placing; pärçvam—at the side; tava—of you; ca—and; ägamiñye—I will come.

     Father, please stay here in Mathurä for a while. If the desire to leave has risen in your heart, then please return to Vraja. Balaräma and I, with the Yädavas at Our side, will return there after a little while.

Text 9

çré-närada uväca 
evaà çré-räma-kåñëäbhyäà
     nanda-räjaù prapüjitaù
äliìgya çaurià gopälair
     yayau premäturo vrajam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; çré-räma-kåñëäbhyäm—with Kåñëa and Balaräma; nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; prapüjitaù—worshiped; äliìgya—embraced; çaurim—Vasudeva; gopälaiù—with the gopas; yayau—went; premäturaù—overcome with love; vrajam—to Vraja.

     Çré Närada said: After being worshiped by Kåñëa and Balaräma, affectionate King Nanda embraced Vasudeva and then returned with the gopas to Vraja.

Text 10

dattaà çré-kåñëa-janmarkñe
     dhenünäà niyutaà purä
brähmaëebhyo dadau çaurir
     vastra-mälä-sv-alaìkåtam

     dattam—given; çré-kåñëa-janmarkñe—on Lord Kåñëa's birthday; dhenünäm—ifcows; niyutam—a million; purä—previously; brähmaëebhyaù—to the Balarämas; dadau—gave; çauriù—Vasudeva; vastra-mälä-sv-alaìkåtam—garments and ornaments.

     Then Vasudeva gave a million cows, along with many valuable garments and ornaments, in charity to the brähmaëas. This was the charity that previously he gave in meditation on the day of Lord Kåñëa's birth.

Text 11

çaurir gargaà samähüya
     çré-kåñëa-baladevayoù
yajïopavétaà vidhi-vat
     kärayäm äsa dharma-vit

     çauriù—Vasudwva; gargam—Garga Muni; samähüya—calling; çré-kåñëa-baladevayoù—of Çré Kåñëa and Balaräma; yajïopavétam—giving the sacred thread; vidhi-vat—according to the rules; kärayäm äsa—did; dharma-vit—knowing the truth of religion.

     Then pious Vasudeva called Garga Muni and had him perform the sacred-thread ceremony for Kåñëa and Balaräma.

Text 12

räma-kåñëau sarva-vidyä-
     dhyayanaà kartum udyatau
guroù sändépaneù pärçvaà
     jagmatur janavat parau

     räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; sarva-vidyä—of all knowledge; adhyayanam—the study; kartum—to do; udyatau—eager; guroù—of the guru; sändépaneù—Sändépani Muni; pärçvam—at the side; jagmatuù—went; janavat—as ordinary persons; parau—the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead.

     Then, as if They were ordinary boys eager to learn all things, the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead, Kåñëa and Balaräma, went to the home of Their guru, Sändépani Muni.

Text 13

kåtvä paraà guroù sevaà
     laghu-kälena mädhavau
sarva-vidyäà jagåhatuù
     sarva-vidyä-vidäà varau

     kåtvä—doing; param—great; guroù—of the guru; sevam—service; laghu-kälena—in a short time; mädhavau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; sarva-vidyäm—all knowledge; jagåhatuù—grasped; sarva-vidyä-vidäm—of the knowers of all knowledge; varau—the best.

     After rendering excellent service to Their guru, in a very short time Kåñëa and Balaräma, who were already the best of all-knowing philosophers, became learned in everything.

Text 14

gurave dakñiëäà dätuà
     udyatau tau kåtäïjalé
måtaà putraà dakñiëäyäà
     täbhyäà vavre gurur dvijaù

     gurave—to Their guru; dakñiëäm—daksina; dätum—to give; udyatau—eager; tau—They; kåtäïjalé—with folded hands; måtam—dead; putram—son; dakñiëäyäm—in daksina; täbhyäm—to Them; vavre—chose; guruù—of the guru; dvijaù—the brähmaëa.

     When Kåñëa and Balaräma approached with folded hands to offer daksiëä, Their brähmaëa guru chose the return of his dead son as his dakñiëä.

Text 15

ratham äruhya tau dantau
     çätakumbha-paricchadam
prabhäse cäbdhi-nikaöaà
     jagmatur bhéma-vikramau

     ratham—chariot; äruhya—climbing; tau—They; dantau—austere; çätakumbha-paricchadam—made of gold; prabhäse—at Prabhasa-ksetra; ca—and; abdhi—the ocean; nikaöam—near; jagmatuù—went; bhéma-vikramau—very powerful.

     Riding in a golden chariot, powerful Kåñëa and Balaräma came to Prabhäsa-kñetra by the shore of the ocean.

Text 16

sadyaù prakampitaù sindhü
     ratnopäyanam uttamam
nétvä tac-caraëopänte
     nipapäta kåtäïjaliù

     sadyaù—at once; prakampitaù—trembling; sindhü—the ocean; ratna—of jewels; upäyanam—gift; uttamam—great; nétvä—bringing; tat-caraëopänte—at Their feet; nipapäta—fell; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands.

     At once the deity of the ocean appeared. Trembling, he offered a gift of jewels to Kåñëa and Balaräma and with folded hands fell at Their feet. 

Text 17

tam äha bhagavän çéghraà
     putraà dehi guror mama
pracaëòormi-ghaöäöopais
     tvayä tad-grahaëaà kåtam

     tam—to him; äha—said; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çéghram—at once; putram—the son; dehi—give; guroù—of the guru; mama—of Me; pracaëòormi-ghaöäöopaiù—with powerful waves; tvayä—by you; tad-grahaëam—tha taking of him; kåtam—done.

     To him Lord Kåñëa said, "Return at once My guru's son, whom you took with your powerful waves."

Text 18

çré-samudra uväca 
bhagavan deva-deveça
     na mayä bälako håtaù
håtaù païcajanenäsau
     çaìkha-rüpäsureëa vai

     çré-samudra uväca—the ocean said; bhagavan—O Lord; deva-deveça—O master of the demigods; na—not; mayä—by me; bälakaù—the boy; håtaù—taken; håtaù—taken; païcajanena—by Pancajana; asau—he; çaìkha-rüpäsureëa—a demon in the form of a conch; vai—certainly.

     The ocean deity said: O Lord, O master of the demigods, I did not take the boy. The conch-demon Païcajana took him.

Text 19

vasan sadä mad-udare
     baliñöho daitya-puìgavaù
jetuà yogyas tvayä deva
     devänäà bhaya-kärakaù

     vasan—residing; sadä—always; mad-udare—in my belly; baliñöhaù—powerful; daitya-puìgavaù—great demon; jetum—to defeat; yogyaù—proper; tvayä—by You; deva—O Lord; devänäm—of the demigods; bhaya-kärakaù—the bringer of fear.

     O Lord, You are so powerful that You frighten even the demigods. Therefore it is proper that You defeat this very strong demon that always stays in my abdomen.

Text 20

çré-närada uväca 
tenokto bhagavän kåñëo
     väso baddhvä kaöau dåòham
nipapäta mahä-vegät
     samudre bhéma-nädini

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tena—by him; uktaù—addressed; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; väsaù—garment; baddhvä—tying; kaöau—at His waist; dåòham—firm; nipapäta—dived; mahä-vegät—quickly; samudre—in the ocean; bhéma-nädini—with terrible waves.

     Çré Närada said: When He heard these words, Lord Kåñëa tightened the sash at His waist and dove into the ocean of terrible waves.

Text 21

çré-kåñëasya nipätena
     tri-loké-bhära-dhäriëaù
cakampe 'bdhir bhåçaà vajrä-
     kuöeneva videha-räö

     çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; nipätena—by the dive; tri-loké-bhära-dhäriëaù—holding the three worlds; cakampe—trembled; abdhiù—the ocean; bhåçam—greatly; vajrä-kuöena—with a thunderbolt; iva—like; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, when Lord Kåñëa dove into it, the ocean, which holds up the three worlds, trembled as if it had been struck by a thunderbolt.

Text 22

tataù païcajano daityo
     yoddhuà çré-kåñëa-sammukhe
ägataù sahasä véraù
     çülaà cikñepa mädhave

     tataù—then; païcajanaù—Pancajana; daityaù—the demon; yoddhum—to fight; çré-kåñëa-sammukhe—facing Çré Kåñëa; ägataù—came; sahasä—at once; véraù—ferocious; çülam—a spear; cikñepa—threw; mädhave—at Lord Kåñëa.

     Eager to fight, the ferocious demon Païcajana at once came before Lord Kåñëa and threw a spear at Him.

Text 23

haste gåhétvä tac-chülaà
     tenaiväbhijaghäna tam
tad-ghätena prapatito
     mürchito väri-maëòale

     haste—in one hand; gåhétvä—taking; tac-chülam—that spear; tena—with it; eva—indeed; abhijaghäna—struck; tam—him; tad-ghätena—by that blow; prapatitaù—fell; mürchitaù—unconscious; väri-maëòale—in the waters.

     Catching the spear in one hand, Lord Kåñëa threw it back at the demon. Wounded by the spear, the demon fell unconscious into the waters.

Text 24

sahasotthäya deveçaà
     kiïcid vyäkula-mänasaù
mürdhnä tatäòa pakñéndraà
     sva-phaëena phäné yathä

     sahasä—at once; utthäya—rising; deveçam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kiïcit—a little; vyäkula-mänasaù—agitated at heart; mürdhnä—with his head; tatäòa—struck; pakñéndram—Garuòa; sva-phaëena—with his cvoils; phäné—a snake; yathä—as.

     Suddenly getting up, and now a little agitated at heart, with his head the demon struck Lord Kåñëa as with its hood a snake strikes Garuòa.

Text 25

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän hariù
kruddho murdhani vegena
     muñöinä taà tatäòa ha

     paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Lord; hariù—Hari; kruddhaù—angry; murdhani—on the head; vegena—powerful; muñöinä—with a punch; tam—him; tatäòa—struck; ha—indeed.

     Now angry, Lord Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, ferociously punched the demon on his head.

Text 26

kåñëa-muñöi-prahäreëa
     sadyo vai nidhanaà gataù
taj-jyotiù çré-ghanaçyäme
     lénaà jätaà vidheha-räö

     kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; muñöi-prahäreëa—by the punch; sadyaù—at once; vai—indeed; nidhanam—death; gataù—attained; taj-jyotiù—his light; çré-ghanaçyäme—in the dark cloud of Lord Kåñëa; lénam—merged; jätam—attained; vidheha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, with that punch the demon died. The light from his body then merged into the dark monsoon cloud of Lord Kåñëa.

Text 27

evaà hatvä païcajanaà
     çaìkhaà nétvä tad-aìgajam
mahärëavän nirgato 'sau
     sahasä ratham ägamat

     evam—thus; hatvä—having killed; païcajanam—Pancajana; çaìkham—the conch; nétvä—taking; tad-aìgajam—born from his body; mahärëavät—from the ocean; nirgataù—came; asau—He; sahasä—at once; ratham—to the chariot; ägamat—came.

     After killing the demon, Lord Kåñëa took the demon's shell, left the great ocean, and returned to His chariot.

Text 28

väyu-vegena yänena
     räma-kåñëau manoharau
jagmatuù çamanasyäpi
     dérghaà samyamanéà purém

     väyu-vegena—as fast as the wond; yänena—with traveling; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; manoharau—handsome; jagmatuù—went; çamanasya—of Yama; api—also; dérgham—long; samyamanéà purém—Samyamani Puri.

     Traveling as fast as the wind for a long time, glorious Kåñëa and Balaräma came to Samyamané Puré, the city of Yamaräja.

Text 29

päïcajanya-dhvanir lokaà
     pracaëòo megha-ghoña-vat
pürayäm äsa taà çrutvä
     cakampe sa-sabho yamaù

     päïcajanya-dhvaniù—with the sound of the Pancajana conchshell; lokam—the world; pracaëòaù—ferocious; megha-ghoña-vat—like thunder; pürayäm äsa—filled; tam—that; çrutvä—hearing; cakampe—trembled; sa-sabhaù—with his assembly; yamaù—Yamaräja.

     Blowing the conchshell that had been Pa 241)cajana's outer body, powerful Lord Kåñëa filled the world with a sound like thunder. When they heard it, Yamaräja and his assembly trembled.

Text 30

catur-açéti-lakñeñu
     narakeñu nipätitäù
yair yaiù çrutä dhvanis te te
     jagmur mokñaà tu päpinaù

     catur-açéti-lakñeñu—eight million four hundred thousand; narakeñu—into the hellish worlds; nipätitäù—fallen; yaiù yaiù—by whomever; çrutä—heard; dhvaniù—the sound; te te—they; jagmuù—attained; mokñam—liberation; tu—indeed; päpinaù—sinners.

     Any of the sinners fallen in the eight million four hundred thousand hells there that heard that sound at once attained liberation.

Text 31

yamaù sadyo balià nétvä
     çré-kåñëa-baladevayoù
papäta caraëopänte
     dharñitaù san kåtäïjaliù

     yamaù—Yama; sadyaù—at oince; balim—an offering; nétvä—bringing; çré-kåñëa-baladevayoù—to Kåñëa and Balaräma; papäta—fell; caraëopänte—at the feet; dharñitaù—humbled; san—being; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands.

     Bringing an offering in his folded hands, humble Yamaräja fell down at the feet of Kåñëa and Balaräma.

Text 32

çré-yama uväca 
he hare he kåpä-sindho
     räma räma mahä-bala
asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-paté
     paripürëatamau yuväm

     çré-yama uväca—Çré yamaräja said; he—O; hare—Kåñëa; he—O; kåpä-sindhaù—ocean of mercy; räma—O Balaräma; räma—Balaräma; mahä-bala—very powerful; asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-paté—the two master of numberless universes; paripürëatamau—the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead; yuväm—You.

     Çré Yamaräja said: O Kåñëa, O ocean of mercy! O Balaräma! O powerful Balaräma! You are the two masters of numberless universes. You are the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead.

Text 33

devau puräëau puruñau mahäntau
     sarveçvarau sarva-jagaj-janeçau
adyaiva sarvopari vartamänau
     girä nijäjïäà vadataà pareçau

     devau—Supreme Lords; puräëau—ancient; puruñau—Supreme Persons; mahäntau—great; sarveçvarau—the masters of all; sarva-jagat—of all universes; jana—of the peoples; éçau—the masters; adya—today; eva—indeed; sarvopari—above all; vartamänau—being; girä—with words; nija—own; äjïäm—command; vadatam—please speak; pareçau—two Lords.

     You are the two ancient Supreme Persons, the masters of everything, the rulers of all beings in all the worlds, the two Supreme Lords who stand above all others. Please order me as You wish.

Text 34

çré-bhagavän uväca 
guru-putraà loka-päla
     änayasva mahä-mate
räjyaà kuru yathänyäyäà
     mad-uktaà mänayan kvacit

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; guru-putram—the son of My guru; loka-päla—O portector of the worlds; änayasva—bring; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one; räjyam—a kingdom; kuru—please do; yathä—as; anyäyäm——in another; mat—by Me; uktam—spoken; mänayan—honoring; kvacit—somewhere.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O protector of the worlds, O noble-hearted one, bring to Me my guru's son. You should rule your kingdom by obeying My words.

Text 35

çré-närada uväca 
tadaiva tenopänétaà
     guru-putraà hariù svayam
gåhétvävantikam etya
     dadau çré-gurave çiçum

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; eva—indeed; tena—by him; upänétam—brought; guru-putram—the guru's son; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally; gåhétvä—bringing; avantikam—near; etya—coming; dadau—gave; çré-gurave—to His guru; çiçum—the boy.

     Çré Närada said: Lord Kåñëa then returned the boy to His guru.

Text 36

gurv-äçiñä samyutau tau
     natvä taà hi kåtäïjalé
ratham äruhya mathuräà
     ägatau yadu-püjitau

     guru—of His guru; äçiñä—with the blessings; samyutau—endowed; tau—They; natvä—bowing down; tam—to him; hi—indeed; kåtäïjalé—with folded hands; ratham—chariot; äruhya—mounting; mathuräm—to Mathurä; ägatau—came; yadu-püjitau—worshiped by the Yädavas.

     After receiving Their guru's blessings, Kåñëa and Balaräma bowed before him with folded hands. When, riding a chariot, They returned to Mathurä, the Yädavass greeted Them with honor and worship.

Text 37

ekadä sa-balaù kåñëaù
     sarva-käraëa-kärakaù
päëòavän saàsmaran bhaktän
     akrüra-bhavanaà yayau

     ekadä—one day; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; sarva-käraëa-kärakaù—the cause of all causes; päëòavän—to the Päëòavas; saàsmaran—remembering; bhaktän—His devotees; akrüra-bhavanam—to Akrüra's home; yayau—went.

     Then, one day, remembering His devotees the Päëòavas, Lord Kåñëa, the cause of all causes, went with Balaräma to Akrüra's home.

Text 38

akrüraù sahasotthäya
     parirabhya mudänvitaù
upacäraiù ñoòaçabhiù
     püjayitvätha tau nåpa

     akrüraù—Akrüra; sahasä—at once; utthäya—rising; parirabhya—embracing; mudänvitaù—with joy; upacäraiù—with offerings; ñoòaçabhiù—sixteen; püjayitvä—worshiping; atha—then; tau—Them; nåpa—O king.

     Akrüra at once stood up and embraced Them. O king, he worshiped Them with sixteen offerings.

Text 39

kåtäïjaliù puraù sthitvä
     jäta-pürëa-manorathaù
uväcänanda-janitaà
     muïcan bäñpa-kaläà nåpa

     kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; puraù—before; sthitvä—standing; jäta-pürëa-manorathaù—all his desires fulfilled; uväca—said; änanda-janitam—blissful; muïcan—shedding; bäñpa-kaläm—tears; nåpa—O king.

     O king, standing before Them with folded hands, shedding tears of joy, and all his desires now fulfilled, Akrüra spoke the following words.

Text 40

çré-akrüra uväca 
yuväbhyäà räma-kåñëäbhyäà
     täbhyäà nityaà namo namaù
yäbhyäà märge yad-uktaà me
     pürëaà tac ca kåtaà prabhü

     çré-akrüra uväca—Çré Akrüra said; yuväbhyäm—to You two; räma-kåñëäbhyäm—Kåñëa and Balaräma; täbhyäm—to Them; nityam—always; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances; yäbhyäm—whom; märge—on the path; yad-uktam—spoken; me—to me; pürëam—perfect; tat—that; ca—and; kåtam—done; prabhü—the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead.

     Çré Akrüra said: O Kåñëa and Balaräma, again and again I offer my respectful obeisances to You. O my two Lords, what You told me on the path has now all become true.

Text 41

lokäbhirämau jana-bhüñaëottamau
     cäntar bahiù sarva-jagat-pradépakau
go-vipra-sädhu-çruti-dharma-devatä-
     rakñärtham adyaiva yadoù kule gatau

     loka—of the worlds; abhirämau—the happinesses; jana-bhüñaëottamau—the best of ronaments ofr the people; ca—and; antaù—inside; bahiù—outside; sarva-jagat—all the worlds; pradépakau—the two lamps; gaù—the cows; vipra—brähmaëas; sädhu—devotees; çruti—Vedas; dharma—religion; devatä—and the demigods; rakñä—of protection; artham—for the purpose; adya—now; eva—indeed; yadoù—of the Yädavass; kule—in the dynasty; gatau—gone.

     You are the two joys of the worlds, the two ornaments of the people, the two lamps that light up all the universes and the realms beyond the universes. To protect the cows, brähmaëas, devotees, demigods, Vedas, and the principles of religion, You have both taken birth in the Yädava dynasty.

Text 42

kaàsädi-daityendra-vinäça-hetave
     goloka-lokät paripürëa-tejasau
samägatau bhärata-bhümi-maëòale
     yuväà pareçau satataà nato 'smy aham

     kaàsa—by Kaàsa; ädi—headed; daityendra—the great demons; vinäça-hetave—to destroy; goloka-lokät—from the realm of Goloka; paripürëa—perfect; tejasau—power and glory; samägatau—come; bhärata-bhümi-maëòale—to the earth; yuväm—You; pareçau—the Supreme Lords; satatam—always; nataù—bowed down; asmy—am; aham—I.

     To kill the demons headed by Kaàsa, You have now come to this earth. You are the two Lords filled with power and glory. O two Supreme Personalities of Godhead, I bow down before You again and again.

Text 43

çré-bhagavän uväca 
tvam arya-våddho dhåtimän
     ahaà tava puraù çiçuù
santo naù svätmanaù çläghyaà
     kurvanti hi mahä-mate

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; tvam—you; arya-våddhaù—O the elder leader of the saintly; dhåtimän—thoughtful; aham—I; tava—of you; puraù—in the presence; çiçuù—a child; santaù—the devotees; na—not; svätmanaù—of the self; çläghyam—praised; kurvanti—do; hi—indeed; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: You are a thoughtful and respected elder, and I am only a boy standing before you. O noble-hearted one, even the great saints cannot praise you enough.

Text 44

päëòavänäà hi kuçalaà
     drañöuà gaccha gajähvayam
çéghram ägaccha tän dåñövä
     sarvän däna-pate bhavän

     päëòavänäm—of the Päëòavas; hi—indeed; kuçalam—the welfare; drañöum—to see; gaccha—go; gajähvayam—to hastinäpura; çéghram—at once; ägaccha—return; tän—them; dåñövä—seeing; sarvän—all; däna-pate—O leader of they who are generous; bhavän—you.

     Go at once to Hastinäpura and see whether the Päëòavas are happy and prosperous. O leader of the kind and generous, when you have seen everything, then quickly return here.

Text 45

çré-närada uväca 
evam uktvä tadäkrüraà
     bhagavän bhakta-vatsalaù
sa-balaù çauri-bhavanaà
     äyayau sarva-kärya-kåt

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; tadä—then; akrüram—to Akrüra; bhagavän—the Lord; bhakta—to the devotees; vatsalaù—affectionate; sa-balaù—with Balaräma; çauri-bhavänäm—to vasudeva's home; äyayau—went; sarva-kärya-kåt—doing everything.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these words to Akrüra, Lord Kåñëa, the supreme controller, who is kind to His devotees, went with Balaräma to Vasudeva's palace.

Text 46

kauravendra-puraà gatvä-
     krüro dåñövätha päëòavän
punar ägatya kåñëäya
     värtäà sarväm avarëayat

     kauravendra-puram—to the palace of the king of the Kauravas; gatvä—having gone; akrüraù—Akrüra; dåñövä—having seen; atha—then; päëòavän—the Päëòavas; punaù—again; ägatya—returning; kåñëäya—to Kåñëa; värtam—the news; sarvam—all; avarëayat—described.

     Akrüra went to Hastinäpura, saw the Päëòavas, returned, and related to Lord Kåñëa all he had seen.

Text 47

çré-akrüra uväca 
vinä yuväà ko 'pi na päëòavänäà
     sahäya-kåt kaurava-duùkha-bhoginäm
måte ca päëòau bhavatoù padämbuje
     vilagna-cittä hi påthätmajä ye

     çré-akrüra uväca—Çré Akrüra said; vinä—without; yuväm—You both; ko 'pi—someone; na—not; päëòavänäm—of the päëòavas; sahäya—help; kåt—doing; kaurava—from the Kauravas; duùkha-bhoginäm—suffering; måte—dead; ca—and; päëòau—Päëòu; bhavatoù—of You both; padämbuje—at the lotus feet; vilagna—ppaced; cittä—hearts; hi—indeed; påthätmajä—the sons of Draupadé; ye—who.

     Çré Akrüra said: Harassed by the Kauravas, the Päëòavas have placed all their thoughts at Your lotus feet. Now that King Päëòu is dead, no one but You can help them.

Text 48

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutväkrüra-mukhät
     çré-kåñëo bhagavän hariù
ardhaà räjyaà päëòavebhyaù
     kauraväëäà baläd dadau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; akrüra-mukhät—from Akrüra's mouth; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Hari; ardham—half; räjyam—the kingdom; päëòavebhyaù—to the Päëòavas; kauraväëäm—of the Kauravas; balät—forcibly; dadau—gave.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing this from Akrüra's mouth, Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, forced the Kauravas to give half their kingdom to the Päëòavas.

Text 49

athoktaà vacanaà småtvä
     tadoddhava-samanvitaù
mahä-maìgala-samyuktaà
     kubjäyä bhavanaà yayau

     atha—then; uktam—spoken; vacanam—words; småtvä—remembering; tadä—then; uddhava-samanvitaù—withj Uddhava; mahä-maìgala-samyuktam—very auspicious; kubjäyä—of Kubjä; bhavanam—to the home; yayau—went.

     Then, remembering His promise, the Lord went with Uddhava to Kubjä's home. 

Text 50

dåñöväräc chré-harià präptaà
     kubjä rüpavaté tvaram
bhaktyä samarhayäm äsa
     padyädyaiù präëa-vallabham

     dåñövä—seeing; ärät—near; çré-harim—Çré Kåñëa; präptam—attained; kubjä—Kubjä; rüpavaté—beautiful; tvaram—at once; bhaktyä—with devotion; samarhayäm äsa—worshiped; padyädyaiù—with padya and other offerings; präëa-vallabham—more dear than life.

     Seeing that Lord Kåñëa, who was more dear than life to her, had come, beautiful Kubjä worshiped Him with padya and other offerings.

Text 51

hema-ratna-khacit-kuòye
     kubjäyä bhavanottame
babhau hariù rüpavatyä
     vaikuëöhe ramayä yathä

     hema—with gold; ratna—and jewels; khacit—tudded; kuòye—with walls; kubjäyä—of Kubjä; bhavanottame—in the palace; babhau—was splendidly manifested; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; rüpavatyä—beautiful; vaikuëöhe—in Vaikuëöha; ramayä—with the goddess of fortune; yathä—as.

     As in Vaikuëöha He is glorious with the goddess of fortune, so in her palace of gold and jewels, Lord Kåñëa was handsome and glorious, beautiful Kubjä by His side, 

Text 52

paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
yasyäù patir abhüd räjann
     aho tasyäs tapo mahat

     paripürëatamaù säkñäc chré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam—Lord Kåñëa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead; yasyäù—of whom; patiù—the lover; abhüt—became; räjann—O king; ahaù—Oh; tasyäù—of her; tapaù—austerity; mahat—great.

     O king, Kubjä must have performed many great austerities to obtain Çré Kåñëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, as her lover.

Text 53

tatra sthitvä harir devo
     dinäny añöau videha-räö
äyayau çauri-bhavanaà
     lélä-mänusa-vigrahaù

     tatra—there; sthitvä—staying; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; devaù—the Lord; dinäny—days; añöau—eight; videha-räö—O kin gof Videha; äyayau—came; çauri-bhavanam—to Vasudweva's palace; lélä-mänusa-vigrahaù—the Lord who enjoys pastimes as a human being.

     O king of Videha, after staying there for eight days, Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead who enjoys pastimes like those of a human being, returned to Vasudeva's palace.

Texts 54 and 55

iti çré-kåñëa-caritaà
     mathuräyäà videha-räö
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     äyur-vardhanam uttamam

catuñ-padärtha-daà nåëäà
     çré-kåñëa-väsa-kärakam
mayä te kathitaà påñöaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     iti—thus; çré-kåñëa-caritam—the pastimes of Çré Kåñëa; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; videha-räö—O king of Videha; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; äyur-vardhanam—prolonging life; uttamam—transcendental; catus-padärtha-dam—bringing the four goals of life; nåëäm—to human beings; çré-kåñëa-väsa-kärakam—bringing Lord Kåñëa under one's control; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; påñöam—asked; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     In answer to your questions I have described Lord Kåñëa's pastimes in Mathurä City. This sacred description removes all sins, prolongs life, grants the four goals of life, and makes Lord Kåñëa into one's submissive servant. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Ten
Rajaka-vayaka-sudämopakhyäna
The Stories of the Washerman, Weaver, and Florist

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca

çré-kåñëa-caritaà puëyaà
     mayä tava mukhäc chrutam
punaù çrotuà manaç cädya
     tåñito vä jalaà gataù

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; çré-kåñëa-caritam—Çré Kåñëa's pastimes; puëyam—sacred; mayä—by me; tava—of you; mukhät—from the mouth; çrutam——heard; punaù—again; çrotum—to hear; manaù—heart; ca—and; adya—npow; tåñitaù—thirsty; vä—or; jalam—to water; gataù—gone.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Although my heart has already heard Lord Kåñëa's sacred pastimes from your mouth, it thirsts to hear them again. Although it has already drunk this nectar, it thirsts to drink it again.

Text 2

kaàsasya janma-karmäëi
     tvayoktäni çrutäni me
keçy-ädi-daitya-varyäëäà
     pürva-janma-kåtaà çrutam

     kaàsasya—of Kaàsa; janma-karmäëi—the birth and deeds; tvayä—by you; uktäni—spoken; çrutäni—heard; me—by me; keçy-ädi-daitya-varyäëäm—of the demons headed by Kesi; pürva-janma-kåtam—done in the previous birth; çrutam—heard.

     I have already heard from you the description of the deeds of Kaàsa in his previous birth and the deeds of Keçé and other demons in their previous births.

Text 3

ko 'yaà tu rajakaù pürvaà
     avadhéd yaà hariù katham
aho yasya mahaj-jyotiù
     kåñëe lénaà babhüva ha

     kaù—who?; ayam—he; tu—indeed; rajakaù—the washerman; pürvam—before; avadhét—killed; yam—whom; hariù—Kåñëa; katham—why?; ahaù—Oh; yasya—of whom; mahaj-jyotiù—the greqat light; kåñëe—in Lord Kåñëa; lénam—merged; babhüva—was; ha—certainly.

     Who was the washerman in his previous birth? Why did Lord Kåñëa kill him? Why did his spiritual effulgence merge in Lord Kåñëa's body?

Text 4

çré-närada uväca 
tretä-yuge tv ayodhyäyäà
     räma-räjye videha-räö
caraëaà çåëvatäà kaçcid
     rajako hy avadat priyäm

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tretä-yuge—in Tretä-yuga; tv—indeed; ayodhyäyäm—in Ayodhyä; räma-räjye—in Lord Räma's kingdom; videha-räö—O king of Videha; cäräëäm—of ther king's spies; çåëvatäm—hearing; kaçcit—someone; rajakaù—washerman; hi—indeed; avadat—said; priyäm—to his wife.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Videha, in Tretä-yuga, in Lord Räma's kingdom, in Ayodhyä, as Lord Räma's spies overheard, this same washerman said to his wife:

Text 5

nähaà bibharmi tväà duñöäà
     uñatéà para-veñma-gäm
stré-lobhé bibhryät sétäà
     rämo nähaà bhaje punaù

     na—not; aham—I; bibharmi—maintain; tvam—you; duñöam—wicked; uñatém—at sunrise; para-veñma-gäm—returning from another's house; stré—after His wife; lobhé—greedy; bibhryät—may maintain; sétäm—Sétä; rämaù—Räma; na—not; aham—I; bhaje—do; punaù—again.

     I will not maintain you, a sinner that returns at dawn from another's house. Rämacandra, who is greedy to enjoy with His wife, may continue to maintain His Sétä, but I am not like Him.

Text 6

iti lokäd bahu-mukhäd
     väkyaà çrutvätha räghavaù
sétäà tatyäja sahasä
     vane lokäpavädataù

     iti—thus; lokät—from the people; bahu-mukhät—many mouths; väkyam—the words; çrutvä—hearing; atha—then; räghavaù—Lord Räma; sétäm—Sétä; tatyäja—rejected; sahasä—at once; vane—in the forest; loka—of the people; apavädataù—because of the criticsm.

     Hearing from many mouths that the people were criticizing Him, Lord Rämacandra at once exiled Sétä to the forest.

Text 7

tasmai daëòaà dätum icchäà
     na cakre räghavottamaù
mathuräyäà dväparänte
     rajakaù sa babhüva ha

     tasmai—to him; daëòam—punishment; dätum—to give; icchäm—desire; na—not; cakre—did; räghavottamaù—Lord Räma; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; dväparänte—at the end of Dvapara-yuga; rajakaù—washerman; sa—he; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     Lord Rämacandra had no wish to punish him, and in due course this person became a washerman in Mathurä at the end of Dvaspara-yuga.

Text 8

ku-väkya-dosa-çänty-arthaà
     taà jaghäna hariù svayam
tad api pradadau mokñaà
     tasmai çré-karuëä-nidhiù

     ku-väkya—of bad words; doña—the fault; çänti—peace; artham—for the purpose; tam—him; jaghäna—killed; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—Himself; tat—that; api—also; pradadau—gave; mokñam—liberation; tasmai—to him; çré-karuëä-nidhiù—an ocean of mercy.

     To stop his blasphemy, however, Lord Kåñëa killed him. Then the Lord, who is an ocean of mercy, gave him liberation.

Text 9

dayäloù kåñëacandrasya
     caritraà paramädbhutam
etat te kathitaà räjan
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     dayäloù—merciful; kåñëacandrasya—of Lord Kåñëa; caritram—the pastimes; paramädbhutam—very wonderful; etat—this; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; räjan—O king; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     O king, now I have spoke to you Lord Kåñëacandra's very wonderful pastimes. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 10

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
purä vai väyakaù ko 'pi
     nitaräà muni-sattama
yasmai dadau ca särüpyaà
     çré-kåñëo bhagavän hariù

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; purä—before; vai—indeed; väyakaù—the weaver; kaù—who?; api—also; nitaräm—greatly; muni-sattama—O best of sages; yasmai—to whom; dadau—gave; ca—and; särüpyam—a form like His; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hariù—Kåñëa.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: O best of sages, in his previous life who was the weaver that received from Lord Kåñëa a transcendental form like His own?

Texts 11 and 12

çré-närada uväca 
mithilä-nagare pürvaà
     väyako hari-bhakti-kåt
çré-rämodväha-samaye
     çiradhvaja-nåpäjïayä

räma-lakñmaëa-veñärthaà
     väsäàsi racayan kila
laghu-sütraiù parivayan
     kuçalo vastra-karmasu

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; mithilä-nagare—in Mithila City; pürvam—before; väyakaù—a weaver; hari-bhakti-kåt—a devotee of Lord Kåñëa; çré-rämodväha-samaye—at the time of Lord Räma's wedding; çiradhvaja-nåpäjïayä—by the order of King Siradhvaja; räma-lakñmaëa—for Räma and Lakñmaëa; veñärtham—for garments; väsäàsi—garments; racayan—making; kila—indeed; laghu-sütraiù—with fine threads; parivayan—weaving; kuçalaù—expert; vastra-karmasu—in making garments.

     Çré Närada said: In his previous life he was a weaver in Mithilä City. A great devotee of the Lord and an expert weaver, on King Çiradhvaja's order he made very fine garments for Räma and Lakñmaëa to wear on Lord Räma's wedding day.

Text 13

koöi-kandarpa-lävaëyau
     sundarau räma-lakñmaëau
tau vékñya väyako räjan
     mohito 'bhün mahä-manäù

     koöi—millions; kandarpa—of Kämadevas; lävaëyau—handsome; sundarau—handsome; räma-lakñmaëau—Räma and Lakñmaëa; tau—Them; vékñya—seeing; väyakaù—the weaver; räjan—O king; mohitaù—charmed; abhüt; mahä-manäù—noble-hearted.

     O king, when he saw Räma and Lakñmaëa, who are more handsome than millions of Kämadevas, the noble-hearted weaver became enchanted.

Text 14

ahaà sva-hastair vasträëi
     tayor aìgeñu sarvataù
paridhänaà kärayämi
     cakre cetthaà manoratham

     aham—I; sva-hastaiù—with my own hand; vasträëi—garments; tayoù—of Them; aìgeñu—on the limbs; sarvataù—in all respects; paridhänam—placing; kärayämi—I will cause; cakre—did; ca—and; ittham—thus; manoratham—the desire.

     In his heart he desired, "I wish with my own hands I could make garments to place on Their limbs."

Text 15

manasäpi varaà rämo
     dadau tasmä açeña-vit
dväparänte bhärate ca
     bhaviñyati manorathaù

     manasä—with a thought; api—also; varam—benediction; rämaù—Lord Räma; dadau—gave; tasmä—to him; açeña-vit—omniscient; dväparänte—at the ende of Dvapara-yuga; bhärate—ion Bharata-varsa; ca—and; bhaviñyati—will be; manorathaù—the desire.

     In His heart all-knowing Lord Räma blessed him that his desire would be fulfilled in Bharata-varña at the end of Dväpara-yuga.

Text 16

çré-rämasya varät so 'yaà
     mathuräyäà babhüva ha
tayor veñaà kärayitvä
     tat-särüpyaà jagäma ha

     çré-rämasya—of Lord Räma; varät—from the blessing; saù—he; ayam—he; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; babhüva—became; ha—indeed; tayoù—of Them; veñam—the garment; kärayitvä—making; tat-särüpyam—a transcendental form like Theirs; jagäma—attained; ha—indeed.

     By the blessings of Lord Räma he took birth in Mathurä City. He personally made garments for Kåñëa and Balaräma, and he attained a transcendental form like Theirs.

Text 17

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
sudämnä malinä brahman
     kià kåtaà sukåtaà vada
yad-gåhaà jagmatuù säkñäd
     räma-kåñëau manoharau

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; sudämnä—Sudama; malinä—the florist; brahman—O brähmaëa; kim—what?; kåtam—done; sukåtam—pious deed; vada—please tell; yad-gåham—in whose home; jagmatuù—went; säkñät—directly; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; manoharau—hansome.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: O brähmaëa, what pious deeds did the florist Sudämä perform that handsome Kåñëa and Balaräma personally came to his home? Please describe that to me.

Text 18

çré-närada uväca 
räja-räja-vanaà ramyaà
     nämnä caitrarathaà çubham
tasya vai puñpa-baöuko
     hemamäléti-näma-bhäk

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; räja-räja-vanam—the forest of Kuvera; ramyam—beautriful; nämnä——by name; caitraratham—Caitraratha; çubham—glorious; tasya—of that; vai—indeed; puñpa-baöukaù—a puspa-batuka; hemamälé—Hemamali; iti—thus; näma-bhäk—named.

     In Kuvera's beautiful Caitraratha gardens there was a florist named Hemamälé.

Text 19

viñëu-bhakti-rataù çänto
     däné sat-saìga-kån mahän
çré-viñëudeva-präpty-arthaà
     deva-püjäà cakära ha

     viñëu-bhakti-rataù—devoted to Lord Viñëu; çäntaù—peaceful; däné—generous; sat-saìga-kån—asscoiating with devotees; mahän—noble; çré-viñëudeva-präpty-arthaàto attain Lord Viñëu; deva-püjäm—the worship of the demigods; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     He was peaceful, generous, and devoted to Lord Viñëu. He associated with saintly persons. He worshiped Lord Çiva to attain the company of Lord Viñëu.

Text 20

samäù païca-sahasräëi
     padmänäà ca çata-trayaà
nityaà nétvä dhürjaöaye
     puro dhåtvä nanäma ha

     samäù—years; païca-sahasräëi—five thousdand; padmänäm—of lotus flowers; ca—and; çata-trayam—three hundred; nityam—always; nétvä—taking; dhürjaöaye—to Lord Çiva; puraù—before; dhåtvä—taking; nanäma—bowed; ha—certainly.

     For five thousand years he daily took three hundred lotus flowers, placed them before Lord Çiva, and bowed down.

Text 21

ekadäti-prasanno 'bhüt
     try-abjakaù karuëä-nidhiù
mäläkära mahä-buddhe
     varaà brühéty uväca ha

     ekadä—one day; ati-prasannaù—very pleased; abhüt—became; try-abjakaù—Lord çiva; karuëä-nidhiù—an ocean of mercy; mäläkära—O garland-maker; mahä-buddhe—intelligent; varam—a blessing; brühi—ask; iti—thus; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     Lord Çiva, who is an ocean of mercy, was very pleased. One day he said, "Intelligent florist, ask for a boon."

Text 22

hemamälé tadä devaà
     namaskåtya kåtäïjaliù
pradakñiëé-kåtya puraù
     sthitvä präha natänanaù

     hemamälé—Hemamali; tadä—then; devam—to the Lord; namaskåtya—bowing; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; puraù—before; sthitvä—standing; präha—said; natänanaù—his head bowed.

     With folded hands bowing before Lord Çiva, circumambulating him, and standing before him with bowed head, Hemamälé spoke.

Text 23

çré-hemamäly uväca 
paripürëatamaà kåñëaà
     kvacin no gåham ägatam
paçyämi dågbhyäà taà säkñät
     tvad-vareëa bhaved idam

     çré-hemamäly uväca—Çré Hemamali said; paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kåñëam—Kåñëa; kvacin—somewhere; naù—of us; gåham—home; ägatam—come; paçyämi—I see; dågbhyäm—with both eyes; tam—Him; säkñät—directly; tvad-vareëa—by Your blessing; bhavet—may be; idam—this.

     Çré Hemamälé said: By your blessings may I be able to see with my own eyes the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa, enter my home.

Text 24

çré-mahädeva uväca 
dväparänte bhärate ca
     mathuräyäà mahä-mate
manorathas te sa-phalo
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     çré-mahädeva uväca—Lord Çuva said; dväparänte—at the end of Dvbapara-yuga; bhärate—in Bharata-varsa; ca—and; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one; manorathaù—the desire; te—of you; sa-phalaù—fruitful; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Lord Çiva said: O noble-hearted one, at the end of Dväpara-yuga, in Bharata-varña, in Mathurä City, your desire will bear fruit. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 25

çré-närada uväca 
maheçvara-vareëäsau
     hemamälé mahä-manäù
mäläkäro dväparänte
     sudämä sambabhüva ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; maheçvara—of Lord çuva; vareëa—by the blessings; asau—he; hemamälé—Hemamali; mahä-manäù—noble-hearted; mäläkäraù—florist; dväparänte—at the end of Dvapara-yuga; sudämä—Sudama; sambabhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: By Lord Çiva's blessings, at the end of Dväpara-yuga noble-hearted Hemamälé was born as the florist Sudämä.

Text 26

tasmäd asya gåhaà säkñäj
     jagmatü räma-keçavau
çiva-väkyam åtaà kartuà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     tasmät—because of that; asya—of him; gåham—to the home; säkñäj—directlky; jagmatü—came; räma-keçavau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; çiva-väkyam—the words of Lord Çiva; åtam—true; kartum—to do; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     To keep Lord Çiva's promise, Kåñëa and Balaräma entered Sudämä's home. What more do you wish to hear?     .pa

Chapter Eleven
Kubjä-kuvalayäpéòa-varëaëa
The Stories of Kubjä and Kuvalayäpéòa

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
sairandhryä kià kåtaà pürvam
     tapaù parama-durghaöam
yena prasannaù çré-kåñëo
     devair api su-durlabhaù

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; sairandhryä—by the maidservant Kubjä; kim—what?; kåtam—done; pürvam—before; tapaù—austerities; parama-durghaöam—very difficult; yena—by which; prasannaù—pleased; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; devaiù—bythe demigods; api—even; su-durlabhaù-difficult to attain.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: What severe austerities did the maidservant Kubjä perform in her previous birth that she so pleased Lord Kåñëa, whom even the demigods cannot attain?

Text 2

païcavatyäà sthitaà rämaà
     koöi-kandarpa-sannibham
vékñya çürpanakhä nämné
     rakñasé mohitä bhåçam

     païcavatyäm—in Pancavati; sthitam—situated; rämam—Lord Räma; koöi-kandarpa-sannibham—splendid as millions of Kämadevas; vékñya—seeing; çürpanakhä—Çürpanakhä; nämné—named; rakñasé—demoness; mohitä—bewildered; bhåçam—greatly.

     Gazing at Lord Räma in Païcavaté forest, a demonness name Çürpanakhä fell passionately in love with Him.

Text 3

nirmohaà räghavaà dåñövä-
     thaika-patné-vrata-sthitaà
krodhät sétäà bhakñayituà
     dhävaté rävaëa-svasä

     nirmoham—not falling in love with her; räghavam—Lord Räma; dåñövä—seeing; atha—then; eka-patné-vrata-sthitam—taking a vow of accepting only one wife; krodhät—out of anger; sétäm—Sétä; bhakñayitum—to devour; dhävaté—running; rävaëa-svasä-Ravana's sister.

     Seeing that Lord Räma had vowed to accept only one wife, and had not fallen in love with her, Rävaëa's sister Çürpanakhä angrily ran to devour Sétä-devé.

Text 4

khaògena çita-dhäreëa
     lakñmaëo räghavänujaù
jahära tasyäù karëau ca
     näsaà sadyo ruñänvitaù

     khaògena—with a sword; çita-dhäreëa—with a sharp edge; lakñmaëaù—Lakñmaëa; räghavänujaù—Lord Räma's younger brother; jahära—took; tasyäù—of her; karëau—the ears; ca—and; näsam—nose; sadyaù—at once; ruñänvitaù—angry.

     At this Lord Räma's younger brother Lakñmaëa became angry and with a sharp-edged sword quickly cut away her ears and nose.

Text 5

chinna-näsä gatä laìkäà
     ravanäya nyavedayat
bhüyaù puñkara-térthe sä
     jagäma vimanä bhåçam

     chinna-näsä—cut away nose; gatä—attained; laìkäm—to Lanka; ravanäya—for Ravana; nyavedayat—informed; bhüyaù—greatly; puñkara-térthe—at Puskara-tirtha; sa—she; jagäma—went; vimanä—disconsolate; bhåçam—very.

     Her nose cut away, she went to Laìkä and told Rävaëa what had happened. Then, unhappy at heart, she went to Puñkara-tértha.

Text 6

tapaç cakre çürpanakhä
     varñäëäm ayutaà jale
dhyäyanté try-ambakaà devaà
     çré-rämaà varam icchaté

     tapaù—austerities; cakre—did; çürpanakhä—Çürpanakhä; varñäëäm—of years; ayutam—ten thousand; jale—in the water; dhyäyanté—meditating; try-ambakaà devam—on Lord Çiva; çré-rämam—Lord Räma; varam—husband; icchaté—wishing.

     Wishing to get Lord Räma as her husband, for ten thousand years Çürpanakhä stayed underwater and meditated on Lord Çiva. 

Text 7

tataù prasanno bhagavän
     deva-deva uma-patiù
etya tat puñkaraà térthaà
     varaà brühéty uväca ha

     tataùthen; prasannaù—pleased; bhagavän—the Lord; deva-deva—the master of the demigods; uma-patiù—the husband of Umä; etya—coming; tat—that; puñkaraà tértham—to Puñkara-tértha; varam—blessing; brühi—speak; iti—thus; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     Pleased by this, Lord Çiva, who is the master of the demigods and the husband of Umä, came to Puñkara-tértha and said, "Ask for a boon." 

Text 8

çürpanakhoväca çré-rämo me varo bhüyäd
     varaà dehi satäà priyaù
tvaà deva-deva paramaù
     sarväsäm äçiñäà prabhuù

     çürpanakhä uväca—Çürpanakhä said; çré-rämaù—Çré räma; me—of me; varaù—the husbvand; bhüyät—may be; varam—boon; dehi—please give; satäm—of the saintly persons; priyaù—dear; tvam—you; deva-deva—the master ofthe demigods; paramaù—great; sarväsäm—of all; äçiñäm—blessings; prabhuù—the master.

     Çürpanakhä said: You are the great master of the demigods. You are dear to the great saints. You have the power to give all benedictions. Please grant me that Çré Räma will become my husband.

Text 9

çré-çiva uväca 
adyaiva sa-phalo na syäd
     varas te çåëu räkñasi
dväparänte mäthure ca
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     çré-çiva uväca—Lord çuva said; adya—today; eva—indeed; sa-phalaù—fruitful; na—not; syät—may be; varaù—boon; te—of you; çåëu—please hear; räkñasi—O demonness; dväparänte—at the end of Dvapara-yuga; mäthure—in Mathurä; ca—and; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Lord Çiva said: O demonness, please listen. At the present time your boon cannot be granted. In the future, at the end of Dväpara-yuga, in Mathurä City, it will be granted to you. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 10

çré-närada uväca 
saiva çürpanakhä näma      räkñasé käma-rüpiëé
abhüc chré-mathuräyäà tu
     kubjä-näma mahä-mate

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; sä—she; eva—indeed; çürpanakhä—Çürpanakhä; näma —named; räkñasé—demonness; käma-rüpiëé—taking any form she wished; abhüt—became; çré-mathuräyäm—in Çré Mathurä; tu—indeed; kubjä-näma—named Kubjä; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     Çré Närada said: O noble-hearted one, in Mathurä City the demonness Çürpanakhä, who could assume any form at will, became the girl named Kubjä.

Text 11

mahädeva-vareëäpi
     çré-kåñëasya priyäbhavat
idaà mayä te kathitaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     mahädeva-vareëa—by Lord Çiva's boon; api—also; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; priyä—the beloved; abhavat—became; idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     By Lord Çiva's blessing she became Lord Kåñëa's beloved. Now I have explained this to you. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 12

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
ko 'yaà kuvalayäpéòaù
     pürva-janmani närada
kathaà gajatvam äpannaù
     çré-kåñëe lénatäà gataù

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; kaù—who?; ayam—he; kuvalayäpéòaù—Kuvaslayapida; pürva-janmani—in his previous birth; närada—O Närada; katham—why?; gajatvam—the status of an elephant; äpannaù—attained; çré-kåñëe—in Çré Kåñëa; lénatäm—merged; gatah—attained.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: O Närada, who was Kuvalayäpéòa in his previous birth? Why did he become an elephant? Why did he merge into Çré Kåñëa?

Text 13

çré-närada uväca 
bali-putro mahä-käyo
     nämnä mandagatir balé
sarva-çastra-bhåtäà çreñöho
     lakña-näga-samo balé

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; bali-putraù—the son of Bali; mahä-käyaù—with a great body; nämnä—by name; mandagatiù—Mandagati; balé—powerful; sarva-çastra-bhåtäm—of they who wield weapons; çreñöhaù—the best; lakña-näga-samaù—equal to a hundred thousand elephants; balé—strong.

     Çré Närada said: Bali Mahäräja's son was a giant named Mandagati. Strong as a hundred thousand elephants, he was the best of warriors bearing weapons.

Text 14

ekadä nirgataù so 'pi
     raìga-yäträà janeñu ca
mattebha-vaj janän vegäd
     bhujäbhyäà parimardayan

     ekadä—one day; nirgataù—gone; saù—he; api—also; raìga-yäträm—on a pilgrimage to Ranga-ksetra; janeñu—among the people; ca—and; mattebha-vaj—like a maddened elephant; janän—the people; vegät—forcibly; bhujäbhyäm—with both arms; parimardayan—crushing.

     One day, when he was on a pilgrimage to Raìga-kñetra, he pushed his way through a crowd, pressing people with both arms as if he were a maddened wild elephant. 

Text 15

tad-bahu-vegät patitaù
     pathi våddhas trito muniù
kruddhaù saçäpa taà mattaà
     baliñöhaà bali-nandanam

     tad-bahu-vegät—by the power of his arms; patitaù—fallen; pathi—on the path; våddhaù—elderly; tritaù—Trita; muniù—Muni; kruddhaù—angry; saçäpa—cursed; tam—him; mattam—maddened; baliñöham—powerful; bali-nandanam—the son of Bali.

     Pushed to the ground in this way, the elderly sage Trita Muni became angry and cursed Bali's wild and powerful son.

Text 16

çré-trita uväca 
gajavat tvaà madonmatto
     'bhür janän parimardayan
vicaran raìga-yaträyäà
     tvaà gajo bhava durmate

     çré-trita uväca—Çré Trita said; gajavat—like an elephant; tvam—you; madonmattaù—wild; abhüù—have become; janän—the people; parimardayan—pushing; vicaran—going; raìga-yaträyäm—an a pilgrimage ot Raìga-kñeyra; tvam—you; gajaù—an elephant; bhava—become; durmate—fool.

     Çré Trita said: Pushing the people on the way to Raìga-kñetra, you have become like a wild elephant. Fool, then I curse you to become an elephant.

Text 17

evaà çaptas tadä daityo
     nämnä mandagatir balé
patat kaïcuka-vad deho
     bhrañöa-teja babhüva ha

     evam—thus; çaptaù—cursed; tadä—then; daityaù—the Daitya; nämnä—by name; mandagatiù—Mandagati; balé—powerful; patat—falling; kaïcuka-vat—like a garment; dehaù—the body; bhrañöa-teja—lost its splendor; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     Cursed in this way, the powerful Daitya named Mandagati at once shed his body as one sheds a garment. Now his power and splendor were all gone.

Text 18

muneù prabhäva-vit sadyo
     daityo bhütvä kåtäïjaliù
natvä pradakñiëé-kåtya
     tritaà munim uväca ha

     muneù—of the sage; prabhäva-vit—knowing the power; sadyaù—at once; daityaù—the Daitya; bhütvä—becoming; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; natvä—bowing; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; tritam—Trita; munim—Muni; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     Now aware of the sage's great power, Mandagati bowed with folded hands before him, circumambulated him, and then spoke.

Text 19

mandagatir uväca 
he mune he kåpä-sindho
     tvaà yogéndro dvijottamaù
gajatvän me kadä muktir
     bhaviñyati vadäçu mäm

     mandagatiù—Mandagati; uväca—said; he—O; mune—sage; he—O; kåpä-sindhaù—ocean of mercy; tvam—you; yogéndraù—the king of yogis; dvijottamaù—the best of brähmaëas; gajatvät—from being an elephant; me—of me; kadä—when?; muktiù—freedom; bhaviñyati—will be; vada—please tell; äçu—now; mäm—to me.

     Mandagati said: O sage, O ocean of mercy, You are the king of yogés. You are the the best of brähmaëas. When will I become free from being an elephant. Please tell me.

Text 20

tvädåçänäà satäà mäbhüd
     dhelanaà me kvacin mune
tvädåçä munayo brahman
     samarthä vara-çapayoù

     tvädåçänäm—like you; satäm—of saints; mä—should not; abhüt—have been; helanam—offense; me—of me; kvacin—at any time; mune—O sage; tvädåçä—like you; munayaù—sages; brahman—O brähmaëa; samarthä—able; vara-çapayoù—to bless or to curse.

     O sage, I should never have offended a great saint like yourself. O brähmaëa, sages like yourself have the power to bless or to curse.

Text 21

çré-närada uväca 
evaà prasäditas tena
     trito näma mahä-muniù
gata-krodho 'bravéd daityaà
     kåpälur brähmaëottamaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; prasäditaù—pacified; tena—by that; tritaù—Trita; näma—named; mahä-muniù—the great sage; gata-krodhaù—his anger gone; abravét—spoke; daityam—to the Daitya; kåpäluù—merciful; brähmaëottamaù—the best of brähmaëas.

     Çré Närada said: Pacified by this, and his anger now gone, the kind and exalted brähmaëa sage Trita Muni spoke to the Daitya.

Text 22

çré-trita uväca 
vacanaà me måñä na syät
     tvad-bhaktyä harñito 'smy aham
te däsyämi varaà divyaà
     devänäm api durlabham

     çré-trita uväca—Çré Trita said; vacanam—words; me—of me; måñä—false; na—not; syät—may be; tvad-bhaktyä—by your devotion; harñitaù—pleased; asmi—am; aham—I; te—to youi; däsyämi—I will give; varam—blessing; divyam—transcendental; devänäm—by the demigods; api—even; durlabham—unattainable.

     Çré Trita said: I am pleased by your devotion. Still, my words cannot become false. I will give you a transcendental blessing even the demigods cannot attain.

Text 23

mä çokaà kuru daityendra
     mathuräyäà hareù puri
çré-kåñëa-hastät te muktir
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     mä—don't; çokam—lamentation; kuru—do; daityendra—O king of the Daityas; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; puri—the city; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; hastät—by the hand; te—of you; muktiù—liberation; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     O king of the Daityas, don't lament. In Lord Kåñëa's city of Mathurä you will attain liberation from Lord Kåñëa's own hand.

Text 24

çré-närada uväca 
so 'yaà mandagatir daityo
     gajo 'bhüd vindhyä-parvate
nämnä kuvalayäpéòo
     nägäyuta-samo bale

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; saù—he; ayam—he; mandagatiù—mandagati; daityaù—the Daitya; gajaù—an elephant; abhüt—became; vindhyä-parvate—in the Vindya mountains; nämnä—by the name; kuvalayäpéòaù—Kuvalayapida; nägäyuta-samaù—equao to tne thousand elephants; bale—in strength.

     Çré Närada said: In this way the Daitya Mandagati became an elephant in the Vindhyä Hills. He was as strong as ten thousand other elephants.

Text 25

gåhéto mägadhendreëa
     baläl lakña-gajair vane
so 'yaà dattas tu kaàçäya
     päribarhe videha-räö

     gåhétaù—taken; mägadhendreëa—by the king of Magadha; baläl—forcibly; lakña-gajaiù—with a hundred thousand elephants; vane—in the forest; so 'yam—he; dattaù—given; tu—indeed; kaàçäya—to Kaàsa; päribarhe—as a wedding present; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, with the aid of a hundred thousand elephants King Jaräsandha captured him and eventually gave him to Kaàsa as a wedding present.

Text 26

trita-väkyät tasya dhäma
     çré-kåñëe lénatäà gatam
idaà mayä te kathitaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     trita—of Trita; väkyät—from the statement; tasya—of him; dhäma—the abode; çré-kåñëe—in Çré Kåñëa; lénatäm—merging; gatam—attained; idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     Because of the blessing spoken by Trita Muni, he merged into Çré Kåñëa. Now I have told you this pastime. What more do you wish to hear?

Chapter Twelve
Pancajana-purvakhyana
Pancajana's Previous Birth

Text 1

sri-bahulacva uvaca 
canuradyac ca ye mallas
     te ke purvam ihagatah
aho sri-krsnacandrena
     yesam yuddham babhuva ha

     sri-bahulacva uvaca - Sri Bahulacva said; canuradyah - headed by Canura; ca - and; ye - which; mallah - wrestlers; te - they; ke - who?; purvam - previously; iha - here; agatah - come; ahah - Oh; sri-krsnacandrena - by Sri Krsna; yesam - of whom; yuddham - the fight; babhuva - was; ha - indeed.

     Sri Bahulacva said: In their previous births who were Canura and the other wrestlers that fought with Lord Krsna?

Text 2

sri-narada uvaca 
rajan puramaravatyam
     utathyo 'sti maha-munih
tasyabhavan panca putrah
     kamadeva-sama-prabhah

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; rajan - O king; pura - previously; amaravatyam -  - in Amaravati; utathyah - Utathya; asti - is; maha-munih - a great sage; tasya - of him; abhavan - were; pa 24ca - five; putrah - sons; kamadeva-sama-prabhah - handsome as Kamadeva.

     Sri Narada said: O king, in ancient times there was a great sage named Utathya, who lived in Amaravati. He had five sons handsome as Kamadeva.

Text 3

hitva vidyam cadhyayanam
     japam tena sahaiva te
gatva baler malla-yuddham
     sadaciksan madoddhatah

     hitva - abandoning; vidyam - knowledge; ca - and;  adhyayanam - study; japam - chanting; tena - by him;  saha - with; eva - indeed; te - they; gatva - going; baleh - of Bali; malla-yuddham - wrestling; sada - always; aciksan -  - studied;  madoddhatah - wild.

     Abandoning their studies and mantra-chanting, these wild sons went to King Bali's wrestling camp and studied wrestling daily.

Text 4

brahma-karma-paribhrastan
     vedadhyayana-varjitan
rusa praha sa tan mattan
     utathyo muni-sattamah

     brahma-karma-paribhrastan - abandoning their brahminical duties; vedadhyayana-varjitan - not studying the Vedas;  rusa - angrily; praha - said; sa - he; tan - to them; mattan - wild; utathyah - Utathya; muni-sattamah - the best of sages.

     Utathya, the best of sages, angrily spoke to his sons, who had neglected their Vedic studies and brahminical duties.

Text 5

sri-utathya uvaca 
camo damas tapah caucam
     ksantir arjavam eva ca
jnanam vijnanam astikyam
     brahma-karma sva-bhava-jam

     sri-utathya uvaca - Sri Uatathya said; camah - peacefulness; damah - self-control; tapah - austerity; caucam - purity; ksantih - tolerance;  arjavam - honesty; eva - certainly; ca - and; jnanam - wisdom; vijnanam - knowledge; astikyam - religiousness; brahma - of a brahmana; karma - duty; sva-bhava-jam - born of his own nature.

     Sri Utathya said: Peacefulness, self-control, austerity, purity, tolerance, honesty, wisdom, knowledge, and religiousness-these are the qualities by which the brahmanas work.*

Text 6

cauryam tejo dhrtir daksyam
     yuddhe capy apalayanam
danam icvara-bhavac ca
     ksatram karma sva-bhava-jam

     cauryam - heroisom; tejah - power; dhrtih - determination; daksyam - resourcefulness; yuddhe - in battle; ca - also; api - and; apalayanam - not fleeing; danam - generosity; icvara - leadership; bhavah - nature; ca - and; ksatram - ksatriya; karma - duty; sva-bhava-jam - born of his own nature.

     Heroism, power, determination, resourcefulness, courage in battle, generosity, and leadership are the qualities of work for the ksatriyas.*

Text 7

krsi-go-raksya-vanijyam
     vaicya-karma sva-bhava-jam
paricaryatmakam karma
     cudrasyapi sva-bhava-jam

     krsi - plowing; gah - cows; raksya - protection; vanijyam - trade; vaicya - vaicya; karma-duty; sva-bhava-jam - born of his own nature; paricarya - service;  atmakam - nature; karma - duty; cudrasya - of the cudra; api - also; sva-bhava-jam - born of his own nature.

     Farming, cow-protection, and business are the qualities of work for the vaicyas, and for the cudras there is labor and service to others.*

Text 8

brahma-karma-parityakta
     bhavanto brahmanah sutah
malla-yuddham ksatra-yuddham
     katham kuruta durjanah

     brahma-karma-parityakta - abandoned brahminical duties; bhavantah - you; brahmanah - of a brahmana; sutah - the sons; malla-yuddham - wrestling; ksatra-yuddham - ksatriya fighting; katham - why?; kuruta - do;  durjanah - rogues.

     Rogues, why do you, a brahmana's sons, reject your brahminical duties and engage in wrestling, a ksatriya's work.

Text 9

tasmad bhavanto bhuyasur
     malla vai bharatajire
asuranam prasaggena
     durjana bhavatacu hi

     tasmat - therefore; bhavantah - you; bhuya asuh - become; malla - wrestlers; vai - indeed; bharatajire - in Bharata; asuranam - of demons; prasaggena - with the association; durjana - wicked; bhavata - become; acu - at once; hi - indeed.

     I curse you to become wrestlers in Bharata-varsa. By associating with demons you will become demons yourselves.

Text 10

sri-narada uvaca 
utathyasya sutas te vai
     jata malla mahi-tale
sri-krsnagga-sparca-matrat
     param moksam yayur nrpa

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; utathyasya - Utathya; sutah - the sons; te - they; vai - indeed; jata - born; malla - wrestlers; mahi-tale - on the earth; sri-krsnagga-sparca-matrat - by the touch of Sri Krsna; param - great; moksam - liberation; yayuh - attained; nrpa - O king.

     Sri Narada said: In this way Utathya's sons were born as wrestlers on the earth. O king, simply by the touch of Lord Krsna's body they attained liberation.

Text 11

canuro mustikah kutah
     calas tocala eva ca
esam caritram kathitam
     kim bhuyah crotum icchasi

     canurah - Canura; mustikah - mustika;kutah - Kuta;  calah - Sala; tocala - Tocala; eva - indeed; ca - and; esam - of them; caritram - activities; kathitam - described; kim - what?; bhuyah - more; crotum - to hear; icchasi - you wish.

     In this way I have described the activities of Canura, Mustika, Kuta, Sala, and Tocala. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 12

sri-bahulacva uvaca 
kamsanuja bhrataro 'stau
     kagka-nyagrodhakadayah
te ke purvam vada mune
     ye 'pi moksam param gatah

     sri-bahulacva uvaca - Sri Bahulacva said; kamsanuja bhratarah - the younger brothers of Kamsa; astau - eight; kagka-nyagrodhaka-adayah - headed by Kanka and Nyagrodha; te - they; ke - who?; purvam - before; vada - please tell; mune - O sage; ye - who; api - also; moksam - liberation; param - great; gatah - attained.

     Sri Bahulacva said: Kamsa's had eight younger brothers, headed by Kagka and Nyagrodha, who attained liberation. Who were they in their previous births. O sage, please tell me this.

Text 13

sri-narada uvaca 
alakayam pura yakso
     devayaksa iti smrtah
jnani jnana-paro manyah
     civa-bhaktya maha-dyutih

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; alakayam - in Alaka-puri; pura - previously; yaksah - Yaksa; devayaksa - Devayaksa; iti - thus; smrtah - considered;  jnani - wise; jnana-parah - devoted to knowledge; manyah - honorable; civa-bhaktya - with devotion to Lord Siva; maha-dyutih - very splendid.

     Sri Narada said: In ancient times there was a Yaksa named Devayaksa, who lived in Alaka-puri. He was wise, learned, glorious, and sincerely devoted to Lord Siva.

Text 14

tasya castau suta jata
     devakuto mahagirih
gando dandah pracandac ca
     khando 'khandah prthus tatha

     tasya - of him; ca - and; astau - eight; suta - sons; jata - born; devakutah - Devakuta; mahagirih - Mahagiri; gandah - Ganda; dandah - Danda; pracandah - Pracanda; ca - and; khanda - Khanda; akhandah - Akhanda; prthuh - Prthu; tatha - so.

     He had eight sons, who were named Devakuta, Mahagiri, Ganda, Danda, Pracanda, Khanda, Akhanda, and Prthu.

Text 15

ekada civa-pujayam
     devayaksena noditah
sahasram pundarikani
     cahartum arunodaye

     ekada - one day; civa-pujayam - in the worship of Lord Siva; devayaksena - by Devayaksa; noditah - sent; sahasram - a thousand; pundarikani - lotuses; ca - and;  ahartum - to take; arunodaye - at sunrise.

     One time Devayaksa sent them to pick, for the worship of Lord Siva, a thousand lotus flowers at sunrise.

Text 16

puspani manasan nitva
     cabditani madhu-vrataih
aghraya gandha-lobhena
     dadus te janakaya vai

     puspani - the flowers; manasat - from Manasa-sarovara;  nitva - taking; cabditani - with the sounds; madhu-vrataih - of bees; aghraya - smelling; gandha - for the fragrance; lobhena - with greed; daduh - gave; te - they; janakaya - to their father; vai - indeed.

     From Manasa-sarovara, they took many flowers filled with the humming of bees. After greedily smelling them, they gave them to their father.

Text 17

ucchisti-krta-dosena
     civa-puja tiras-krta
asurim yonim apanna
     mudhas te janmabhis tribhih

     ucchisti-krta - of being remnants; dosena - with the fault; civa-puja - the worship of Lord Siva; tiras-krta - upset; asurim - demonic; yonim - birth; apannah - attained; mudhah - bewildered; te - they; janmabhih - with births; tribhih - three.

     The worship of Lord Siva became ruined by offering these already-smelled flowers. The foolish sons became demons for three births.

Text 18

hastabhyam sagkarabhyam ca
     baladevasya maithila
param moksam gatas te vai
     dosan mukta videha-rat

     hastabhyam - with both hands; sagkarabhyam - auspicious; ca - and; baladevasya - of Balarama; maithila - O king of Mithila; param - great; moksam - liberation; gatah - attained; te - they; vai - indeed; dosat - from the sin; mukta - freed; videha-rat - O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, by the touch of Lord Balarama's auspicious hands the sons became free of their sin and attained liberation.

Text 19

kamsanujanam vyakhyanam
     purva-janma-bhavam nrpa
idam maya te kathitam
     kim bhuyah crotum icchasi

     kamsanujanam - of the younger brothers of Kamsa; vyakhyanam - the account; purva-janma-bhavam - of the previous births; nrpa - O king; idam - this; maya - by me;  te - to you; kathitam - spoken; kim - what?; bhuyah - more; crotum - to hear; icchasi - you wish.

     O king, in this way I have described to you the previous births of Kamsa's eight younger brothers. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 20

sri-bahulacva uvaca 
ko 'yam pura pancajano
     daityah cagkha-vapur-dharah
tasya cagkho babhau brahman
     sri-krsna-kara-pagkaje

     sri-bahulacva uvaca - Sri Bahulacva said; kah - who?;  ayam - he; pura - before; pa 24cajanah - Pancajana; daityah - the demon; cagkha-vapur-dharah - having the form of a conch; tasya - of him;  cagkhah - the conch; babhau - became; brahman - O brahmana; sri-krsna-kara-pagkaje - in Lord Krsna's lotus hand.

     Sri Bahulacva said: The demon Pancajana, who had the body of a conch, became the conchshell in Lord Krsna's lotus hand. Who was he in his previous birth?

Text 21

sri-narada uvaca 
puraivaitany upaggani
     cakradini videha-rat
trailokya-nathasya harer
     babhuvus tejasa hrtah

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; pura - before; eva - indeed; etani - these; upaggani - addittions; cakradini - beginning with the disc; videha-rat - O king of Videha; trailokya - of the three worlds; nathasya - of the master; hareh - Lord Krsna; babhuvuh - became; tejasa - by the power; hrtah - taken.

     Sri Narada said: O king of Videha, Lord Krsna, the master of the three worlds, obtained His conch and other paraphernalia long ago by His own prowess. 

Text 22

tesam cagkhah pancajanyah
     prapto rajan mahat-padam
papau tan-mukha-lagno 'sau
     sri-krsnasyadharamrtam

     tesam - of them; cagkhah - the conch; pa 24cajanyah - Pancajanya; praptah - attained; rajan - O king; mahat-padam - exalted; papau - drank; tan-mukha-lagnah - touching His lips; asau - he; sri-krsnasyadharamrtam - the nectar of Sri Krsna's lips.

     O king, among them the conchshell Pancajanya was especially exalted. Touching His mouth, again and again he would drink the nectar of Lord Krsna's lips.

Text 23

akaroc caikada manam
     manasi praha cagkha-rat
grhito 'ham hi harina
     rajahamsa-sama-dyutih

     akarot - did; ca - and; ekada - one day; manam - pride; manasi - in his heart; praha - said; cagkha-rat - the king of conchshells; grhitah - taken; aham - I am; hi - indeed; harina - by Lord Krsna; rajahamsa-sama-dyutih - as glorious as the king of swans.

     Then one day he became proud and in his heart he said to himself: "I am the king of conchshells. I am effulgent as the king of swans. Lord Krsna personally holds me.

Text 24

sri-krsno daksinavartam
     dadhmau mam vijaye sati
yad durlabham cabdhi-putryah
     sri-krsnasyadharamrtam

     sri-krsnah - Sri Krsna; daksinavartam - in tyhe south;
 dadhmau - blows; mam - me; vijaye - in victory; sati - being so; yat - what; durlabham - difficult to attain; ca - and; abdhi-putryah - for the goddess of fortune; sri-krsnasyadharamrtam - the nectar of Lord Krsna's lips.

     "When He is victorious, Sri Krsna points me to the south and makes a great sound through me. At that moment I drink the nectar of Lord Krsna's lips, which is diificult even for the goddess of fortune to obtain.

Texts 25 and 26

 tat tasmat sarva-mukhyo 'smi
     pibamy aham ahar-nicam
iti mana-yutam cagkham
     pancajanyam videha-rat

cacapa laksmis tam krodhat
     tvam daityo bhava durmate
so 'pi pancajano nama
     daityo 'bhut saritam patau

     tat - that; tasmat - therefore; sarva-mukhyah - the most important of all; asmi - I am; pibami - drink;  aham - I; ahar-nicam - day and night; iti - thus; mana-yutamproud; cagkham - the conchshell; pa{ - .sy 24cajanyam - Pancajanya; videha-rat - O king of Videha; cacapa - cursed; laksmih - the goddess of fortune; tam - him; krodhat - angrily; tvam - you; daityah - a demon; bhava - become; durmate - fool; sah - he;  api - even; pancajanah - Pancajana; nama - namewd; daityah - a demon; abhut - became; saritam - of rivers; patau - in the king.

     "Therefore I am the most important of all. Day and night I drink the nectar of Lord Krsna's lips."

     The goddess of fortune then angrily cursed him,  Fool! Become a demon! You will become a demon named Pa 24cajana and you will live in the ocean."

Text 27

vaira-bhavena devecam
     punah prapto darecvarah
jyotir linam tu devece
     vapur yasya kare babhau aho bhagyam viddhi tasya      kim bhuyah crotum icchasi

     vaira-bhavena - with enmity; devecam - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; punah - again; praptah - attained; darecvarah - the king of conches; jyotih - line; linam - merged; tu - indeed; devece - in the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vapuh - form; yasya - of whom; kare - in the hand; babhau - is manifested; ahah - Oh; bhagyam - the good fortune; viddhi - know; tasya - of him; kim - what?; bhuyah - more; crotum - to hear; icchasi - you wish.

     As the king of conches, he approached the Lord as an enemy. Although at first he merged into the Lord, he again became the conchshell in the Lord's hand. You should know that he is very fortunate. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Thirteen
Sri Uddhavagamana
The Arrival of Sri Uddhava

Text 1

sri-bahulacva uvaca 
agre cakara kim karyam
     mathurayam yaduttamah
nivasayitva sva-jnatin
     vadaitan muni-sattama

     sri-bahulacva uvaca - Sri Bahulacva said; agre - before; cakara - did; kim - what?; karyam - duty; mathurayam - in Mathura; yaduttamah - the best of the Yadavas; nivasayitva - giving homes; sva-jnatin - to His relatives; vada - please tell; etat - that; muni-sattama - O best of sages.

     Sri Bahulacva said: After He gave homes in Mathura to His relatives, what did Lord Krsna do then? O best of sages, please tell me that.

Text 2

sri-narada uvaca 
paripurnatamah saksad
     bhagavan bhakta-vatsalah
sasmara gokulam dinam
     gosa-gopala-sagkulam

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; paripurnatamah - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; saksat - directly; bhagavan - the Lord; bhakta - to the devotees; vatsalah - affectionate; sasmara - remembered; gokulam - Gokula; dinam - poor; gosa-gopala-sagkulam - filled with cows and cowherd people.

     Sri Narada said: Then the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, who loves His devotees, remembered unhappy Gokula, filled with cows and cowherd people.

Text 3

ekadahuya rahasi
     sakhayam bhaktam uddhavam
uvaca bhagavan devah
     prema-gadgadaya gira

     ekada - one day; ahuya - calling; rahasi - in private; sakhayam - His friend; bhaktam - and devotee; uddhavam - Uddhava; uvaca - said; bhagavan - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devah - the Lord; prema-gadgadaya - choked up; gira - with words.

     One day, calling His devotee and friend Uddhava to a private room, the Supreme Personality of Godhead spoke with words choked with emotion.

Text 4

sri-bhagavan uvaca 
gaccha cighram vrajam he sakhe sundaram
     sri-lata-kunja-punjadibhir manditam
caila-krsna-prabha-caru-vrndavanam
     gopa-gopi-ganair gokulam sagkulam

     sri-bhagavan uvaca - the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; gaccha - go; cighram - at once; vrajam - to Vraja; he - O; sakhe - friend; sundaram - beautiful; sri-lata-kunja-pu 24jadibhih - with many beautiful forests and flowering vines;  manditam - decorated; caila - Govardhana Hill; krsna - the Yamuna; prabha - glory; caru - beautiful; vrndavanam - Vrndavana; gopa-gopi-ganaih - with many gopas and gopis; gokulam - Gokula; sagkulam - filled.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Friend, please go at once to beautiful Vraja, which is decorated with many beautiful forest groves and flowering vines, which has beautiful Vrndavana forest glorious with Govardhana Hill and the Yamuna, and which is filled with gopas and gopis.

Text 5

eka-patram tu nandaya vai diyatam
     va dvitiyam yacoda-kare caiva bhoh
va trtiyam tv idam radhikayai sakhe
     tatra gatva hi tan-mandiram sundaram

     eka-patram - one letter; tu - indeed; nandaya - to Nanda; vai - indeed; diyatam - should be given; va - or; dvitiyam - a second; yacoda-kare - in Yacoda's hand; ca - and; eva - inded; bhoh - Oh; va - or; trtiyam - a third; tv - indeed; idam - this; radhikayai - to Radha; sakhe - O friend; tatra - there; gatva - having gone; hi - inded; tan-mandiram - to the palace; sundaram - beautiful.

     There please give a letter to King Nanda. Place a second letter in Yacoda's hand. Then, O friend, go to Radha's beautiful palace and give a letter to Radha.

Text 6

va caturtham sakhibhyah cicubhyah cubham
     kaucalam diyatam patram evam prthak
gopikanam catebhyac ca yuthebhya
     unmohitanam ca deyani patrani ca

     va - or; caturtham - a fourth; sakhibhyah - to the friends; cicubhyah - boys; cubham - beautiful; kaucalam - auspicious; diyatam - should be given; patram - letter; evam - thus; prthak - one; gopikanam - of the gopis; catebhyah - to hundreds; ca - and; yuthebhya - groups; unmohitanam - bewildered with love; ca - and; deyani - should be given; patrani - many letters; ca - and.

     Give a fourth splendid and auspicious letter to My childhood gopa friends. Give letters to each of the hundreds of groups of gopis bewildered with love for Me.

Text 7

me pita nanda-rajo ghrni man-mana
     me ca mata yacoda smaraty acu mam
vakya-vrndaih cubhair niti-vit tvam tayor
     me param pritim arad dvayor avaha

     me - My; pita - father; nanda-rajah - King Nanda;  ghrni - kind; man-mana - his mind fixed on Me; me - My; ca - and; mata - mother; yacoda - Yacoda;  smarati - remembers; acu - at once; mam - Me; vakya-vrndaih - with many words; cubhaih - beautiful; niti-vit - wise; tvam - you; tayoh - of them; me - and; param - great; pritim - love; arat - near;  dvayoh - both; avaha - bring.

     My kind father, King Nanda, places all his thoughts on Me. My mother, Yacoda, always thinks of Me. You are expert in speaking many graceful words. Please carry My love to them.

Text 8

mat-priya radhika mad-viyogatura
     manyate mam vina kham jagan mohatah
mad-viyogadhim asya mad-uktaih padair
     mocaya tvam bhavan daksino vak-pathe

     mat - My; priya - beloved; radhika - Radha; mad-viyogatura - overcome with separation fropm Me; manyate - thinks; mam - of Me; vina - without; kham - sky; jagat - the universe; mohatah - from bewilderment; mad-viyogadhim - tormented in My absence;  asya - of Her; mad-uktaih - with My words; padaih - with words; mocaya - please release; tvam - you; bhavan - you; daksinah - expert; vak-pathe - in the path of words.

     Radha, My beloved, is tortured by My absence. In My absence She thinks the entire world is a great expanse of empty sky. Speak My words to Her and free Her from Her suffering in My absence. You are expert in walking on the path of eloquent words.

Text 9

gopa-balah sudamadayo mat-priya
     mam sakhayam vina te 'pi mohaturah
dehi tesam sukham mitra-vac chri-vraje
     sv-alpa-kalena tatragamisyamy aham

     gopa-balah - the gopa boys; sudamadayah - headed by Sudama; mat-priya - dear to Me; mam - to Me; sakhayam - friend; vina - without; te - they; api - also; mohaturah - bewildered; dehi - give; tesam - of the them; sukham - happiness; mitra-vat - like a friend; sri-vraje - in beautiful Vraja; sv-alpa-kalena - in a little time; tatra - there; agamisyami aham - I will come.

     The gopa boys are also very dear to Me. Without Me, their friend, they are bewildered and unhappy. As a friend does, make them happy. Very soon I will return to beautiful Vraja.

Text 10

gopika mad-viyogadhi-vegatura
     man-manaskac ca mat-prapta-dehasavah
ya mad-arthe ca santyakta-lokabalas
     tah katham natra mantrin bibharmi svatah

     gopikah - the gopis; mad-viyogadhi-vegatura - tortured by My absence; man-manaskah - their thoughts fixed on Me; ca - and; mat-prapta - placed in Me; deha - their bodies; asavah - and life; ya - who; mad-arthe - for My sake; ca - and; santyakta - renounced; loka - the world; abalah - women; tah - they; katham - how?;  na - not; atra - here; mantrin - O counselor; bibharmi - I maintain; svatah - personally.

     The gopis are tortured by My absence. Their thoyghts are fixed on Me. Their bodies and lives are dedicated to Me. For My sake they have renounced the entire world. Counselor, how can I not protect and maintain them?

Text 11

ta asun tyaktum atrodyata uddhava
     yabhir adyapi krcchrair ghrtac casavah
mad-viyogadhim asam mad-uktaih padair
     mocaya tvam bhavan daksino vak-pathe

     tah - they; asun - life; tyaktum - to abandon; atra - here; udyata - about; uddhava - O Uddhava; yabhih - by whom; adya - now; api - even; krcchraih - with difficulty; ghrtah - held; ca - and; asavah - life; mad-viyogadhim - the torment of being separated from Me; asam - of them; mad-uktaih - with My words;  padaih - with words; mocaya - release; tvam - you; bhavan - you; daksinah - expert; vak-pathe - on the path of words.

     O Uddhava, they are on the verge of giving up their lives. It is very difficult for them to remain alive. Speak My words to them and free them from their suffering in My absence. You are expert in walking on the path of eloquent words.

Texts 12-14

yena purvam vrajad agato 'ham sakhe
     tam ratham sacva-sutam ranad-ghantikam
me ca sarupyam adyaiva pitambaram
     vaijayantim sahasra-cchadam pagkajam

kundale divya-ratna-prabha-mandite
     koti-balarka-diptam manim kaustubham
me maha-nadini caru-vamcim cubham
     puspa-yuktam ca yastim jagan-mohinim

candanam sundaram divya-gandhavrtam
     barha-malladi-vesam kvanan-nupuram
maulim evam grhanaggade uddhava
     gaccha gacchacu cadyaiva mad-vakyatah

     yena - by which; purvam - before; vrajat - from Vraja; agatah - come; aham - I; sakhe - O friend;  tam - you; ratham - chariot; sa - with; acva - horses; sutam - and charioteer; ranad-ghantikam - with tinkling bells; me - of Me; ca - and;  sarupyam - the same form; adya - now; eva - indeed;  pitambaram - yellow garments; vaijayantim - a vaijayanti garland; sahasra-cchadam pagkajam - a thousand-petal lotus. kundale divya-ratna-prabha-mandite koti-balarka-diptam manim kaustubham me maha-nadini caru-vamcim cubham puspa-yuktam ca yastim jagan-mohinim candanam sundaram divya-gandhavrtam barha-malladi-vesam kvanan-nupuram maulim evam grhanaggade uddhava gaccha gacchacu cadyaiva mad-vakyatah

     Take the chariot on which I left Vraja, decorate it with tinkling bells, take a charioteer and horses, take a form like My own, take My yellow garments, vaijayanti garland, thousand-petal lotus, splendid jewel earrings, Kaustubha jewel more glorious than millions of rising suns, beautiful flute filled with sweet music, flower-decorated stick that charms all the worlds, beautiful, splendidly fragrant sandal paste, ornaments of jasmine flowers and peacock feathers, tinkling anklets, crown, and armlets, and then go at once, go now, on My word, to Vraja.

Text 15

sri-narada uvaca 
ity ukta uddhava cighram
     namaskrtya krtanjalih
krsnam pradaksini-krtya
     ratharudho vrajam yayau

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; iti - thus; ukta - addressed; uddhava - Uddhava; cighram - at once;  namaskrtya - offering obeisances; krtanjalih - with folded hands; krsnam - Lord Krsna; pradaksini-krtya - circumambulating; ratharudhah - riding on a chariot;  vrajam - to Vraja; yayau - went.

     Hearing these words, with folded hands Uddhava bowed before Lord Krsna, circumambulated Him, and at once rode on a chariot to Vraja.

Text 16

koticah kotico gavah
     yatra yatra manoharah
cveta-parvata-sagkaca
     divya-bhusana-bhusitah

     koticah - millions; koticah - and miullions; gavah - cows; yatra - where; yatra - where; manoharah - beautiful; cveta-parvata - white mountains; sagkaca - splendid; divya-bhusana-bhusitah - decorated with splendid ornaments.

     Wherever he went in Vraja there were millions and millions of beautiful cows glorious as great white mountains and decorated with splendid ornaments.

Text 17

payasvinyas tarunyac ca
     cila-rupa-gunair yutah
sa-vatsah pita-pucchac ca
     vrajantyo bhavya-murtikah

     payasvinyah - full of milk; tarunyah - young; ca - and; cila-rupa-gunaih - virtuous; yutah - endowed;  sa-vatsah - with calves; pita-pucchah - yellow tails; ca - and; vrajantyah - going; bhavya-murtikah - beautiful forms.

     They were young, virtuous, full of milk, and accompanied by their calves. They were beautiful and their tails were yellow.

Text 18

ghanta-manjita-jhagkarah
     kigkini-jala-manditah
hema-tulya hema-crggyo
     hara-malah sphurat-prabhah

     ghanta-manjita-jhagkarah - with tinkjling bells and ornamnets; kigkini-jala-manditah - decorated with a network of tinkling ornaments; hema-tulya - like gold; hema-crggyah - with gold horns; hara-malah - with necklaces and garlands; sphurat-prabhah - splendid.

     They were deocrated with networks of tinkling bells and ornaments and with garlands and necklaces. Their bodies and horns were like gold.

Text 19

patalah haritas tamra
     pitah cyama vicitritah
dhumrah kokila-varnac ca
     yatra gavas tv anekadha

     patalah - pink; haritah - green; tamra - brown; pitah - yellow; cyama - black; vicitritah - different colors; dhumrah - smokey; kokila-varnah - the color of cuckoos; ca - and; yatra - where; gavah - cows;  tv - indeed; anekadha - many.

     Some cows were pink, some green, some brown, some multi-colored, some yellow, some smoke-colored, and some the color of cuckoos.

Text 20

samudra-vad dugdha-dac ca
     taruni-kara-citritah
kuragga-vad vilagghadbhir
     go-vatsair manditah cubhah

     samudra-vat - like an ocean; dugdha-dah - giving milk;  ca - and; taruni-kara-citritah - decorated with girls' handprints; kuragga-vat - like deer; vilagghadbhih - leaping; go-vatsaih - with calves; manditah - decorated; cubhah - beautiful and auspicious.

     They were decorated with pictures of girls' handprints. They gave milk that was like an ocean. They were decorated with calves leaping like deer.

Text 21

itas tatac calantac ca
     go-ganesu maha-vrsah
dirgha-kandhara-crggadhya
     yatra dharma-dhurandharah

     itas tatah - here and there; calantah - going; ca - and; go-ganesu - among the cows; maha-vrsah - great bulls; dirgha - long; kandhara - shoulders; crgga - horns; adhyah - opulent; yatra - where; dharma-dhurandharah - carrying the principles of religion.

     Wandering here and there among the cows were great bulls with broad shoulders and long horns, bulls bearing the principles of religion.

Text 22

gopala vetra-hastac ca
     cyama-vamci-dharah parah
krsna-lilah pragayanto
     ragair madana-mohanaih

     gopala - gopas; vetra-hastah - with stick in hand; ca - and; cyama-vamci-dharah - holding black flutes; parah - great; krsna - of Lord Krsna; lilah - pastimes;  pragayantah - singing; ragaih - with ragas; madana-mohanaih - charming Kamadeva.

     There were many gopas playing black flutes and, with melodies that could charm Kamadeva himself, singing of Lord Krsna's pastimes 

Text 23

durat tam agatam viksya
     jnatva krsnam vrajarbhakah
ucuh parasparam te vai
     krsna-darcana-lalasah

     durat - from far away; tam - him; agatam - coming;  viksya - seeing; jnatva - understanding; krsnam - Krsna; vrajarbhakah - the boys of Vraja; ucuh - said; parasparam - among themselves; te - they;  vai - indeed; krsna-darcana-lalasah - yearning to see Krsna.

     Seeing Uddhava coming, and thinking he was Krsna Himself, the gopa boys, eager to see Krsna, spoke among among themselves.

Text 24

sri-gopa ucuh 
nanda-sunuh kilayati
     sakha yo 'yam na samcayah
megha-cyamah pita-vasah
     sragvi kundala-manditah

     sri-gopa ucuh - the gopas said; nanda-sunuh - Nanda's son; kila - indeed; ayati - comes; sakha - friend; yah - who; ayam - He; na - not; samcayah - doubt; megha-cyamah - dark as a cloud; pita-vasah - with yellow garments; sragvi - garlanded; kundala-manditah - decorated with earrings.

     The gopas said: Nanda's son is coming. It is our friend Krsna. There is no doubt of it. He is dark as a monsoon cloud. He wears yellow garments. He is decorated with earrings and a garland.

Text 25

kaustubhi kundali bibhrat
     sahasra-dala-pagkajam
tad eva mukutam bibhrat
     koti-martanda-sannibham

     kaustubhi - kaustubha; kundali - earrings; bibhrat - carrying; sahasra-dala-pagkajam - a thousand petal lotus; tat - that; eva - indeed; mukutam - crown;  bibhrat - wearing; koti-martanda-sannibham - splendid as a million suns.

     He wears earrings and a Kastubha jewel. He holds a thousand-petal lotus. He wears a crown splendid as millions of suns.

Text 26

ta evacva rathah so 'yam
     kigkini-jala-manditah
balo nasti rathe casminn
     ekaki nanda-nandanah

     te - they; eva - indeed; acvah - horses; rathah - chariot; sah - He; ayam - He; kigkini-jala-manditah - decorated with a network of tinkling ornaments; balah - Balarama; na - not; asti - is; rathe - on the chariot; ca - and; asmin - in this; ekaki - alone; nanda-nandanah - Krsna.

     These are the same horses. It is the same chariot decorated with a network of tinkling ornaments. Balarama is not on it. Nanda's son has come alone.

Text 27

sri-narada uvaca 
evam vadanto gopalah
     cridamadya videha-rat
krsnakrtim krsna-sakham
     ayayuh sarvato ratham

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; evam - thus; vadantah - saying; gopalah - the gopas; cridamadya - headed by Sridama; videha-rat - O king of Videha; krsna - of Lord Krsna; akrtim - the form; krsna-sakham - Lord Krsna's friend; ayayuh - came; sarvatah - from everywhere; ratham - the chariot.

     Sri Narada said: O king of Videha, speaking in this way, the gopas headed by Sridama surrounded the chariot Krsna's friend, whose form was like Krsna's.

Text 28

krsno nastiti vadatah
     ko 'yam saksat tad-akrtih
tan namaskrtyaupagavih
     parirabhyavadat pathi

     krsnah - Krsna; na - not; asti - is; iti - thus; vadatah - saying; kah - who?; ayam - he;  saksat - directly; tad-akrtih - His form; tan - to them; namaskrtya - bowing; aupagavih - Uddhava; parirabhya - embracing; avadat - spoke; pathi - on the path.

     The gopas said, "He is not Krsna. Who is he? His form is like Krsna's." Then, in the middle of the road, Uddhava bowed before the gopas and embraced them all.

Text 29

sri-uddhava uvaca 
grhana patram cridaman
     krsna-dattam na samcayah
cokam ma kuru gopalaih
     kucaly aste harih svayam

     sri-uddhava uvaca - Sri Uddhava said; grhana - take; patram - this letter; cridaman - O Sridama; krsna-dattam - given by Krsna; na - not; samcayah - doubt; cokam - lament; ma - don't; kuru - do; gopalaih - with gopas; kucali - welfare; aste - is; harih - Krsna; svayam - Himself.

     Sri Uddhava said: O Sridama, please take this letter. Krsna gave it. Of this there is no doubt. Don't lament. Krsna takes a personal interest in the welfare of the gopas.

Text 30

yadavanam mahat karyam
     krtvatha sa-balah prabhuh
hrasva-kalena catrapi
     bhagavan agamisyati

     yadavanam - of the Yadavass; mahat - great; karyam - deed; krtva - doing; atha - then; sa-balah - with Balarama; prabhuh - the Lord; hrasva - short; kalena - time; ca - and; atra - here; api - also; bhagavan - the Lord; agamisyati - will return.

     After He has fulfilled His responsibilities to the Yadavas, Lord Krsna and Balarama will quickly erturn to Vraja.

Text 31

sri-narada uvaca 
pathitva tad-dhasta-patram
     cridamadya vrajarbhakah
bhrcam acruni muncantah
     prahur gadgadaya gira

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; pathitva - after reading; tad-dhasta-patram - the letter in his hand; cridamadya - headed by Sridama; vrajarbhakah - the boys of Vraja; bhrcam - greatly; acruni - tears; mu 24cantah - shedding; prahuh - said; gadgadaya - choked with emotion; gira - with words.

     Sri Narada said: After reading the letter in their hands, the boys of Vraja burst into tears. Then, their voices choked with emotion, they spoke.

Text 32

sri-gopa ucuh 
pantheti nirmohini nanda-sunau
     tanur vibhutic ca dhanam balam ca
sarva dhiyah krsnam rte vraje nah      cunyam prajatam hi jagat samastam

     sri-gopah ucuh - the gopas said; pantha - O traveller;  iti - thus; nirmohini - free from illusion; nanda-sunau - Nanda's son; tanuh - the body; vibhutih - opulence; ca - and; dhanam - wealth; balam - strength; ca - and; sarva - all; dhiyah - intelligence; krsnam - Krsna; rte - without; vraje - in Vraja; nah  - of us; cunyam - void; prajatam - born; hi - indeed; jagat - the universe; samastam - all.

     The gopas said: O traveler, Krsna's body, opulence, wealth, strength, intelligence are never thwarted or bewildered. For us people of Vraja, to be without Krsna is to live in a world that is a desert.

Text 33

ksano yugatvam va ghati maha-mate
     prayati manvantaratam vrajaukasam
yamac ca kalpam ca dinam vina harim
     viyoga-duhkhair dvi-parardhatam gatam

     ksanah - a second; yugatvam - the status of a yuga; va - or; ghati - a half-hour; maha-mate - O noble-hearted one; prayati - attains; manvantaratam - the status of a manvantara; vrajaukasam - of the people of Vraja; yamah - three hours; ca - and; kalpam - a kalpa; ca - and; dinam - day; vina - without; harim - Krsna; viyoga-duhkhaih - with the suffering of separation; dvi-parardhatam - a lifetime of Brahma; gatam - attains.

     O noble-hearted one, for the people of Vraja suffering in Krsna's absence, a moment has become a yuga, a half-hour has become a manvantara, three hours has become a kalpa, and a day has become a lifetime of Brahma.

Text 34

ahar-nicam tam na hi vismaramahe
     dusta ghati sa prayayau yaya hi sah
mano harann uddhava no vanaukasam
     vayasya-bhavena sada krtagasam

     ahar-nicam - day and night; tam - that; na - not;  hi - indeed; vismaramahe - we forget; dusta - wicked;  ghati - half-hour; sa - that; prayayau - goes; yaya - by which; hi - inbdeed; sah - He; manah - the mind; harann - stealing; uddhava - O Uddhava; nah - of us; vanaukasam - the people of Vraja; vayasya-bhavena - with friendship; sada - always; krtagasam - sinners.

     Day and night we cannot forget Him. The treacherous half-hours pass, but He does not return. O Uddhava, He has stolen all the thoughts of the people of Vraja. Thinking He was just our friend, we must have offended Him again and again.
.pa

Chapter Fourteen
Sri Nanda-rajoddhava-melana
The Meeting of King Nanda and Uddhava

Text 1

sri-narada uvaca 
evam prema-bharan gopan
     chri-krsna-virahaturan
uvaca prema-samyukta
     uddhavo gata-vismayah

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; evam - thus; prema-bharan - great love; gopan - the gopas; sri-krsna - of Sri Krsna; virahaturan - tormented with separation; uvaca - said; prema-samyukta - filled with love; uddhavah - Uddhava; gata-vismayah - not astonished.

     Sri Narada said: Uddhava, who dearly loved Lord Krsna, was not surprised to hear all this. Then he spoke to the gopas, who were overcome with love for Krsna and were tornmented by His absence.

Text 2

sri-uddhava uvaca 
aham sri-krsna-daso 'smi
     tat-priyas tad-rahaskarah
bhavatam kucalam drastum
     presito harina tvaram

     sri-uddhava uvaca - Sri Uddhava said; aham - I; sri-krsna-dasah - Sri Krsna's servant; asmi - am; tat-priyah - dear to Him; tad-rahaskarah - His confiant; bhavatam - of you; kucalam - auspiciousness; drastum - to sxee; presitah - sent; harina - by Krsna; tvaram - quickly.

     Sri Uddhava said: I am Sri Krsna's servant. i am His close friend. He sent me here to see if you were happy.

Text 3

purim gatvatha haraye
     nivedya viraham tu vah
tam prasannam karisyami
     tad-agghrau netra-varibhih

     purim - to the city; gatva - having gone; atha - then; haraye - to Krsna; nivedya - speaking; viraham - separation; tu - indeed; vah - of you; tam - Him; prasannam - pleased; karisyami - I will do;  tad-agghrau - His feet; netra-varibhih - with tears.

     I will return to Mathura City, tell Lord Krsna how you suffer in His absence, and soften His heart by placing my tears at His feet.

Text 4

natva harim hi bhavatam
     samipam he vrajaukasah
agamisyamy aham cighram
     capatho na mrsa mama

     natva - boweing; harim - to Krsna; hi - indeed; bhavatam - of you; samipam - near; he - O; vrajaukasah - people of Vraja; agamisyami - will return; aham - I; cighram - quickly; capathah - of the promise;  na - not; mrsa - false; mama - of me.

     O people of Vraja, I will bow down before Lord Krsna and then I will quickly bring Him to you. My promise will not become false.

Text 5

yuyam prasanna bhavata
     ma cokam kurutatha vai
asmin vraje 'pi gopala
     draksyatha sri-patim harim

     yuyam - you; prasanna - pleased; bhavata - be; ma - don't; cokam - lament; kuruta - do; atha - then; vai - indeed; asmin - in this; vraje - Vraja; api - even; gopala - Gopas; draksyatha - will see; sri-patim - the husband of the goddess of fortune; harim - Lord Krsna.

     Be happy. Don't lament. O gopas, in this land of Vraja you will again see Sri Krsna, the husband of the goddess of fortune.

Text 6

sri-narada uvaca 
evam acvasya gopalan
     ratha-stho yadu-nandanah
cridamadyaic ca gopalaih
     sahito harsa-puritah
viveca nanda-nagaram
     surye sindhu-gate sati

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; evam - thus; acvasya - comforting; gopalan - the gopas; ratha-sthah - on the chariot; yadu-nandanah - the descendent of Yadu; cridamadyaih - headed by Sridama; ca - and; gopalaih - the gopas; sahitah - with; harsa-puritah - filled with joy; viveca - entered; nanda-nagaram - Nanda's village; surye - as the sun; sindhu-gate sati - was setting in the west.

     Sri Narada said: In this way Uddhava comforted the gopas. Then, as the sun was setting in the west, cheerful Uddhava, accompanied by Sridama and the gopas, entered Nanda's village.

Text 7

agatam hy uddhavam crutva
     nanda-rajo maha-matih parirabhya muda cighram      pujayam asa harsitah

     agatam - come; hi - indeed; uddhavam - Uddhava; crutva - hearing; nanda-rajah - King Nanda; maha-matih - noble-hearted; parirabhya - embracing; muda - joyfully; cighram - at once; pujayam asa - worshiped; harsitah - happy.

     Hearing that he had come, King Nanda happily embraced and worshiped Uddhava.

Text 8

kacipu-stham sthitam cantam
     uddhavam krta-bhojanam
kacipu-stho nanda-rajah
     praha gadgadaya gira

     kacipu-stham - on a cushion; sthitam - seated; cantam - peaceful; uddhavam - Uddhava; krta-bhojanam - havign eaten; kacipu-sthah - on the cushion; nanda-rajah - King Nanda; praha - said; gadgadaya - choked; gira - with words.

     When Uddhava was comfortably seated on a soft cushion and fed a nice meal, King Nanda, also seated on a cushion, spoke many words choked with emotion.

Text 9

sri-nanda uvaca 
kaccit sakha me puri curasena
     aste sva-putaih kucali maha-mate
kamse mrte yadava-puggavanam
     jatam sakhe saukhyam atah param bhuvi

     sri-nanda uvaca - Sri Narada said; kaccit - something;  sakha - friend; me - ofg me; puri - in the towen; curasena - SuraSENA; aste - IS; sva-putraih - with his own sons; kucali - happy; maha-mate - O noble-hearted one; kamse - now that Kamsa; mrte - is dead; yadava-puggavanam - of the best of the Yadavas; jatam - born; sakhe - O friend; saukhyam - happiness; atah param - then; bhuvi - on the earth.

     Sri Nanda said: O noble-hearted one, are my friend Surasena and his sons happy in Mathura City? Now that Kamsa is dead the Yadavas must be very happy.

Text 10

kaccit kadacit sa-balo hi madhavah
     smaraty asau va jananim yacomatim
gopala-govardhana-go-ganan vrajam
     vrndavanam va pulinam taragginim

     kaccit - whether?; kadacit - sometimes; sa-balah - with Balarama; hi - indeed; madhavah - Krsna; smarati - remembers; asau - He; va - or; jananim - mother; yacomatim - Yascoda; gopala-govardhana-go-ganan - the cows, gopas, and Govardhana Hill; vrajam - Vraja; vrndavanam - Vrndavana; va - or; pulinam - the shore; taragginim - of the Yamuna.

     Do Krsna and Balarama sometimes remember Their mother, Yacoda? Do They remember the gopas, the cows, Vraja, Govardhana Hill, Vrndavana forest, and the shore of the Yamuna?

Text 11

ha daiva kasmin samaye sva-nandanam
     bimbadharam sundaram ambujeksanam
draksyamy aham mandira-catvarajire
     'rbhakair luthantam sa-balam muhur muhuh

     ha - O; daiva - destiny; kasmin - at what?; samaye - time; sva-nandanam - own son; bimbadharam - bimba fruit lips; sundaram - handsome; ambujeksanam - lotus eyes; draksyami - will see; aham - I; mandira-catvarajire - in the courtyard; arbhakaih - with the boys;  luthantam - rolling about; sa-balam - with Balarama; muhuh - again; muhuh - and again.

     O destiny, when will I see my handsome, lotus-eyed, bimba-lip son playing again and again in the courtyard with Balarama and the boys?

Text 12

kunjo nikunjo yamuna maha-nadi
     govardhano 'ranyam idam vanani
grhair lata-vrksa-gavam ganaih saha
     vina mukundam visavat tv idam jagat

     kunjo nikunjah - the forest groves; yamuna - the Yamuna; maha-nadi - the great river; govardhanah - Govardhana; aranyam - forest; idam - the;  vanani - the forests; grhaih - with homes; lata-vrksa-gavam - of trees, vines, and cvows; ganaih - multitudes; saha - with; vina - without; mukundam - Krsna; visavat - like poison; tv - indeed; idam - this; jagat - world.

     Without Krsna the groves and gardens, the great Yamuna river, Govardhana Hill, this forest, the other forests, our homes, the cows, trees, and flowering vines, and this entire universe are flooded with poison.

Text 13

dhig jivanam me cayanam ca bhojanam
     krsnam vina padma-dalayateksanam
candram vina bhumi-tale cakoravaj
     jivami tasyagamanacaya bhrcam     
     dhik - fie; jivanam - life; me - my; cayanam - sleeping; ca - and; bhojanam - eating; krsnam - Krsna; vina - without; padma - lotus; dala - petal; ayata - large; iksanam - eyes; candram - moon; vina - without; bhumi-tale - on the earth; cakoravat - like a cakora bird; jivami - I live; tasya - of Him; agamana - the return; acaya - with the hope; bhrcam - great.    

     This life of eating and sleeping without Krsna, whose eyes are like great lotus petals. is wretched and miserable. I am like a cakora bird that cannot see the moon. I stay alive only by hoping that Krsna will return.

Text 14

hartum bhuvo bharam ativa daivataih
     samprarthitam purnatamam maha-mate
jatam satam raksana-tat-param svayam
     manye hi krsnam sa-balam parat param

     hartum - to do; bhuvah - of the earth; bharam - the burden; ativa - great; daivataih - by Brahma; samprarthitam - requested; purnatamam - most perfect; maha-mate - O noble-hearted one; jatam - born; satam - of the devotees; raksana-tat-param - for the protection; svayam - own; manye - I think; hi - certainly; krsnam - Krsna; sa-balam - with Balarama; parat - than the greatest; param - greater.

     I think that Lord Krsna is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, greater than the greatest, and that, requested by the demigod Brahma, He has come here with Balarama to protect the devotees and remove the earth's burden.

Text 15

sri-narada uvaca 
samsmrtya samsmrtya harim parecam
     babhuva tusnim nava-nanda-rajah
ciro nidhayapy upabarhane sve
     hy utkantha-romancita-vihvalaggah

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; samsmrtya - remembering; samsmrtya - and remembering; harim - Krsna; parecam - the Supreme Personality of Godhead;  babhuva - became; tusnim - silence; nava-nanda-rajah - King Nanda; cirah - head; nidhaya - placing; api - also; upabarhane - on the cushion; sve - own; hi - indeed; utkantha-romancita-vihvalaggah - the hairs of his body erect with longing.

     Sri Narada said: Thinking again and again of Lord Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, King Nanda became silent. The hairs of his body erect with his longing to see Krsna, he rested his head on a pillow.

Text 16

sri-nanda-netrambuja-vari-santati
     rajams tada krsna-sakhasya pacyatah
cayyam sa-vastram upabarhanantam
     krtvardratam praggana acacala

     sri-nanda - of Nanda; netrambuja-vari-santati - th etears; rajamh - O king; tada - then; krsna - of Sri Krsna; sakhasya - of the friend; pacyatah - looking;  cayyam - on the couch; sa-vastram - with his cloth; upabarhanantam - at the edge of the pillow; krtva - making;  ardratam - wet; praggane -  - in the courtyard; acacala - walked.

     As Krsna's friend Uddhava looked on, King Nanda drenched the pillow, his garments, and the chair with tears from his eyes. Then Nanda went into the courtyard.

Text 17

crutvoddhavam sri-mathura-puragatam
     kapatam etyacu yacomati sati
crnvanty alam svasya sutasya varnanam
     sneha-sravat-su-stana-netra-pagkaja

     crutva - hearing; uddhavam - Uddhava; sri-mathura-puragatam - had come from Mathura; kapatam - at the door; etya - coming; acu - at once; yacomati - Yacoda; sati - chaste; crnvanti - hearing; alam - greatly; svasya - own; sutasya - of the son; varnanam - the sdescription; sneha - love; sravat - flowing; su-stana - from her breasts; netra-pagkaja - and lotus eyes.

     Hearing that Uddhava had come from Mathura City, saintly Yacoda rushed to the door. Milk flowing from her breasts and tears flowing from her lotus eyes, she overheard the description of her son.

Text 18

vihaya lajjam ghrnaya sutasya sa
     papraccha sarvam kucalam tadoddhavam
aproksya vastrena drg-acru-santatim
     sthite ca nande hari-bhava-vihvale

     vihaya - abandoning; lajjam - shame; ghrnaya - with tenderness; sutasya - of her son; sa - she; papraccha - asked; sarvam - all; kucalam - welfare; tada - then; uddhavam - Uddhava; aproksya - sprinkling;  vastrena - with garments; drg-acru-santatim - many tears;  sthite - situated; ca - and; nande - Nanda; hari-bhava-vihvale - overcome with love for Krsna.

     Rejecting all shyness, and overcome with love for her son, she asked Uddhava everything about Krsna's well-being. Meanwhile Nanda was overcome with love. He wept, drenching his garments with tears from his eyes.

Text 19

sri-yacodovaca 
kvacit smarati mam krsno
     nanda-rajam athapi va
bhrataram nanda-rajasya
     sannandam darcanotsukam

     sri-yacoda uvaca - Sri Yacoda said; kvacit - whether?;  smarati - remembers; mam - me; krsnah - Krsna; nanda-rajam - King Nanda; atha - then; api - also; va - or; bhrataram - brother; nanda-rajasya - of King Nanda; sannandam - Sannanda; darcanotsukam - eager to see Him.

     Sri Yacoda said: Does Krsna remember me? Does He remember King Nanda? Does He remember Nanda's brother, Sannanda, who yearns to see Him?

Text 20

nandan navopanandamc ca
     vrsabhanun vrajesu sat
yesam aroham asthaya
     bala-kelir vane vane

     nandan - the Nandas; nava - the nine; upanandan - Upanandas; ca - and; vrsabhanun - the Vrsabhanus; vrajesu - in Vraja; sat - six; yesam - of whom; aroham - climbing; asthaya - staying; bala-kelih - childhood pastimes; vane - in forest; vane - after forest.

     Does He remember the Nandas, the nine Upanandas, and the six Vrsabhanus of Vraja? Doe He remember the boys He played with in forest after forest?

Text 21

kanduka-kridaya reme
     sanandam nanda-nandanah
tan gopan sneha-samyuktan
     kadacit smarati svatah

     kanduka-kridaya - withball-games; reme - enjoyed; sanandam - with bliss; nanda-nandanah - Krsna; tan - them; gopan - gopas; sneha-samyuktan - affectionate; kadacit - sometimes; smarati - remembers; svatah - personally.

     Does He sometimes remember the affectionate gopa boys with whom He enjoyed playing ball-games?

Text 22

eko 'yam me sutah prapto
     na suta bahavac ca me
so 'pi mam jananim dinam
     yayau tyaktva dig-antaram

     ekah - one; ayam - H; me - my; sutah - son; praptah - attained; na - not; suta - many sons; bahavah - many; ca - and; me - of me; sah - He; api - also; mam - me; jananim - mother; dinam - poor; yayau - goes; tyaktva - leaving; dig-antaram - far away.

     I have only one son. I do not have many sons. Abandoning His poor mother, my son has gone away.

Text 23

aho kastam snehavatam
     durnivaram maha-mate
kim karomi vina putram
     katham jivami manada

     ahah - O; kastam - a calamity; snehavatam - of they who love; durnivaram - cannot be stopped; maha-mate - O noble-hearted one; kim - what?; karomi - I do; vina - without; putram - son; katham - how?; jivami - I live; manada - O respectful one.

     O noble-hearted one, for they who love Him, this is a great calamity. O gentle one, what will I do without my son? How can I live?

Text 24

matar mahyam dehi dadhi
     matar haiyaggavam navam
evam vadan sa madhuram
     hatham cakre sada grhe 
     matah - O mother; mahyam - to Me; dehi - give; dadhi - yogurt; matah - mother; haiyaggavam - butter; navam - fresh; evam - thus; vadan - saying; sah - He; madhuram - sweet; hatham - mischief; cakre - did; sada - always; grhe - in the house. 

     "Mother, give Me yogurt. Mother, give Me fresh butter." He would always speak these sweet words, and He would always do mischief in the house.

Text 25

madhyahne sa katham krsno
     bhojanam kartum arhati
mamatmajo 'yam sri-krsno
     jivanam vraja-vasinam vraje dhanam kule dipo      mohano bala-lilaya

     madhyahne - at midday; sa - He; katham - how?; krsnah - Krsna; bhojanam - eating; kartum - to do; arhati - able; mama - my; atmajah - son; ayam - he;  sri-krsnah - Sri Krsna; jivanam - the life; vraja-vasinam - of the people of Vraja; vraje - in Vraja; dhanam - the wealth; kule - in the family; dipah - the lamp; mohanah - charming; bala-lilaya - with childhood pastimes.

     How He could eat at lunchtime! My son, Sri Krsna, is the wealth of Vraja, the life of Vraja's people, and a brilliant lamp shining in His family. He is so sweet and so playful.

Text 26

lalanaih palanais tasya
     dinam me ksanavad gatam
tad dinam kalpavaj jatam
     vinaho nanda-nandanam

     lalanaih - with caresses; palanaih - with protection;  tasya - of Him; dinam - the day; me - my; ksanavat - like a moment; gatam - gone; tat - that; dinam - day; kalpavat - like a kalpa; jatam - become; vina - without; ahah - O; nanda-nandanam - Nanda's son.

     Protecting and caressing Him, I thought each day was a single moment. Without Krsna my day is like a kalpa.

Text 27

vatsan varayitum krsno
     grama-simni nadi-tate
na karito 'rbhakaih sardham
     sa caho mathuram gatah

     vatsan - the calves; varayitum - to keep; krsnah - Sri Krsna; grama-simni - within the village; nadi-tate - at the shore of the river; na - not; karitah - made; arbhakaih - the boys; sardham - with; sa - He; ca - and; ahah - O; mathuram - Mathura; gatah - went.

     No longer do Krsna and the boys keep the calves on this side of the river, still close to the village. Now Krsna has gone to Mathura. 

Text 28

he mohaneti durat tam
     agkam nitvatha lalanam
cakara nanda-rajo 'yam
     tam vina khinnatam gatah

     he - O; mohana - charming boy; iti - thus; durat - from afar; tam - Him; agkam - on the lap; nitva - placing; atha - then; lalanam - caress; cakara - did; nanda-rajah - King Nanda; ayam - he; tam - Him; vina - without; khinnatam - sadness; gatah - attained.

     From far away King Nanda would call "Sweet boy!", place Him on his lap, and caress Him. Without Him, Nanda is filled with sadness.

Text 29

aho damna maya baddho
     nirmohinyaikada cicuh
bhande bhagni-krte dadhnah
     cocami caritam ca tat

     ahah - O; damna - with a rope; maya - by me; baddhah - bound; nirmohinya - careful; ekada - once; cicuh - the boy; bhande - when a pot; bhagni-krte - broken; dadhnah - of yogurt; cocami - I lament;  caritam - the action; ca - and; tat - that.

     One day the boy broke a yogurt pot and I carefully tied Him with a rope. Oh, how I regret that.

Text 30

tat-pragganam sarva-sabha ca mandiram
     dvarac ca vithir vraja-harmya-prsthayah
cunyam samas tam mama jivanam dhig
     vina mukundam visavat tv idam jagat

     tat-pragganam - the courtyard; sarva-sabha - the assembly; ca - and; mandiram - the palace; dvarah - the door; ca - and; vithih - the path; vraja-harmya-prsthayah - the palaces of Vraja; cunyam - empty; samah - equal; tam - Him; mama - my;  jivanam - life; dhig - alas!; vina - without; mukundam - Krsna; visavat - like poison; tv - indeed; idam - this; jagat - world.

     Without Krsna the courtyard, the assembly-house, my palace, the gateway, the pathway, and all the other palaces of Vraja have become an empty desert. Krsna is my whole life. Without Him this world is like a flood of poison.

Text 31

sri-narada uvaca 
yacoda-nandayor viksya
     paramam prema-laksanam
uddhavo nitaram rajan
     vismito 'bhud gata-smayah

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; yacoda-nandayoh - of Nanda and Yacoda; viksya - seeing; paramam - the great; prema - of love; laksanam - symptoms; uddhavah - Uddhava; nitaram - greatkly; rajan - O king;  vismitah - astonished; abhut - became; gata-smayah - astonished.

     Sri Narada said: O king, when he saw Nanda's and Yacoda's great love, Uddhava became filled with wonder.

Text 32

sri-uddhava uvaca 
roma-matram mama tanau
     jihva cej jayate tv aho
yuvayos tad api clagham
     kartum nalam maha-prabhu

     sri-uddhava uvaca - Sri Uddhava said; roma-matram - hairsd erect; mama - my; tanau - on the body; jihva - the tongue; cet - if; jayate - is born; tv - indeed;  ahah - Oh; yuvayoh - of you two; tat - that; api - also; clagham - praise; kartum - to do; na - not; alam - enough; maha-prabhu - O great masters.

     Sri Uddhava said: You two are my masters. Even if the hairs on my body stood erect in ecstasy, my tongue would still not have the power to praise you properly.

Texts 33 and 34

paripurnatame saksac
     chri-krsne purusottame
idrci ca krta bhaktir
     yuvabhyam prema-laksana

tirthatana-tapo-dana-
     sagkhya-yogaic ca durlabha
cacvati yuvayoh prapta
     ya bhaktih prema-laksana

     paripurnatame - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; saksac - directly; chri-krsne - Sri Krsna;purusottame - the Supreme Person; idrci - like this; ca - and; krta - did; bhaktih - devotion; yuvabhyam - you both; prema-laksana - the signs of love; tirthatana - pilgrimage;  tapah - austerity; dana - chrity; sagkhya - sankhya;  yogaih - goga; ca - and; durlabha - dificult to attain; cacvati - eternal; yuvayoh - of you both; prapta - attained; ya - which; bhaktih - devotion; prema-laksana - characterized by love.

     The eternal love and devotion you both feel for Lord Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, cannot be attained by pilgrimages, austerity, charity, sagkhya, or yoga.

Text 35

ma cokam kuru re nanda
     he yacode vrajecvari
patra-dvayam grhanacu
     krsna-dattam na samcayah

     ma - don't; cokam - lament; kuru - do; re - O;  nanda - Nanda; he - O; yacode - yacoda; vrajecvari - queen of Vraja; patra-dvayam - two letters; grhana - please take; acu - at once; krsna-dattam - guiven by Krsna; na - no; samcayah - doubt.

     O Nanda, don't lament. O Yacoda, O queen of Vraja, take these two letters. They are letters from Krsna. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 36

sahagrajo nanda-sunuh
     kucaly aste yadoh puri
yadavanam mahat karyam
     krtvatha sa-balah prabhuh
hrasva-kalena catrapi
     bhagavan agamisyati

     saha - with; agrajah - His elder brother; nanda-sunuh - Krsna; kucali - happy; aste - is; yadoh - of the Yadavas; puri - in the city; yadavanam - of the Yadavas; mahat - great; karyam - duty; krtva - doing; atha - then; sa-balah - with Balarama; prabhuh - the Lord; hrasva-kalena - soon; ca - and; atra - here; api - also; bhagavan - the Lord; agamisyati - will come.

     Krsna and Balarama are happy in the city of the Yadavas. When Their mission is successfully completed, Krsna and Balarama will return here at once.

Texts 37 and 38

paripurnatamam viddhi
     sri-krsnam nanda-nandanam kamsadinam vadharthaya      bhaktanam raksanaya ca

brahmana prarthitah krsno
     'vatatara grhe tava
jata-matro 'dbhutam lilam
     cakara sa-balo harih

     paripurnatamam - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; viddhi - know; sri-krsnam - Sri Krsna; nanda-nandanam - Nanda's son; kamsadinam - beginning with Kamsa;  vadharthaya - to kill; bhaktanam - of the devotees; raksanaya - for protection; ca - and; brahmana - by Brahma; prarthitah - requested; krsnah - Krsna; avatatara - descended; grhe - in the home; tava - of you; jata-matrah - born; adbhutam - wonderful; lilam - pastimes; cakara - did; sa-balah - with Balarama; harih - Krsna.

     Know that Nanda's son, Krsna, is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead. Requested by the demigod Brahma, and in order to protect the devotees and kill the demons led by Kamsa, He descended to your home. Since the moment of His birth, He and Balarama enjoyed many wonderful pastimes.

Text 39

putana-prana-haranam
     cakatasya nipatanam
trnavarta-nipatac ca
     yamalarjuna-bhanjanam

     putana - of Putana; prana-haranam - removing the life;  cakatasya - of the cart; nipatanam - overturning; trnavarta - of Trnavarta; nipatah - the fall; ca - and;  yamalarjuna - of the yamalarjuna trees; bha 24janam - the breaking.

     He drew out Putana's life, overturned the cart, made Trnavarta fall, and broke the yamalarjuna trees.

Text 40

sva-mukhe ca yacodayai
     vicva-rupasya darcanam
vrndavane ca bhagavan
     go-vatsamc carayan prabhuh

     sva-mukhe - in His mouth; ca - and; yacodayai - to yacoda; vicva-rupasya - of the universal form; darcanam - the sight; vrndavane - in Vrndavana; ca - and; bhagavan - the Lord; go-vatsan - the cakves;  carayan - herding; prabhuh - the Lord.

     The Lord showed to Yacoda the universal form in His mouth. The Lord herded the calves in Vrndavana forest.

Text 41

vadham cakara gopanam
     pacyatam baka-vatsayoh
aghasurasya ca vadho
     dhenukasya vimardanam

     vadham - the death; cakara - did; gopanam - as the gopas; pacyatam - were watching; baka-vatsayoh - of Vakasura and Vatsasura; aghasurasya - of Aghasura; ca - and; vadhah - the death; dhenukasya - of Dhenukasura; vimardanam - crushing.

     As the gopas watched, He killed Bakasura, Vatsasura, Aghasura, and Dhenukasura.

Text 42

mardanam kaliyasyapi
     vahni-panam cakara ha
pralambasya vadham paccad
     baladevac cakara ha

     mardanam - the defeat; kaliyasya - of Kaliya; api - also; vahni - the fire; panam - drinking; cakara - did; ha - indeed; pralambasya - of Pralamba; vadham - the killing; paccat - then; baladevah - Balarama; cakara - did; ha - indeed.

     He defeated Kaliya and then he drank up the forest fire. Then Balarama killed Pralambasura.

Text 43

govardhanam samutpatya
     hastenaikena lilaya
yusmakam pacyatam bibhrat
     puskaram gaja-rad iva

     govardhanam - Govardhana Hill; samutpatya - lifting; hastena ekena - with one hand; lilaya - playfully; yusmakam - of you; pacyatam - looking; bibhrat - holding; puskaram - a lotus; gaja-rad - the king of elephants; iva - like

     As you all watched, He playfully lifted Govardhana Hill as the king of elephants lifts a lotus flower.

Text 44

cuda-manim sagkhacudaj
     jahara jagatam patih
aristasya vadham krtva
     kecinam nijaghana ha

     cuda-manim - the crest jewel; sagkhacudat - from Sankhacuda; jahara - took; jagatam - of the universes; patih - the master; aristasya - of Arista;  vadham - the death; krtva - doing; kecinam - Kesi; nijaghana - killed; ha - indeed.

     Lord Krsna, the master of the universes, frocibly took Sagkhacuda's crown jewel. Then He killed Keci and Aristasura.

Text 45

vyomasuram maha-daityam
     mustina tam mamarda ha
tatha vai mathurayam tu
     cakre citram maha-mate

     vyomasuram - Vyomasura; maha-daityam - the great demon;  mustina - with fist; tam - him; mamarda - killed; ha - indeed; tatha - then; vai - indeed; mathurayam - in Mathura; tu - indeed; cakre - did; citram - wonder; maha-mate - O noble-hearted one.

     With His fist He killed the great demon Vyomasura. O noble-hearted one, in Mathura City He did many wonderful deeds.

Text 46

vikathyamanam rajakam
     karenabhijaghana tam
pracandam kamsa-kodandam
     madhyatas tad babhanja ha iksu-dandam yatha nagah      sarvesam pacyatam nrnam

     vikathyamanam - speaking badly; rajakam - a washerman;  karena - with a hand; abhijaghana - killed; tam - him; pracandam - great; kamsa - of Kamsa; kodandam - the bow; madhyatah - in the middle; tat - that; babhanja - broke; ha - indeed; iksu-dandam - like sugarcane; yatha - as; nagah - an elephant; sarvesam - of all; pacyatam - watching; nrnam - the people.

     With one hand He killed an insulting washerman. As everyone watched, He broke Kamsa's great bow in the middle as an elephant breaks a stalk of sugarcane.

Text 47

dvipam kuvalayapidam
     nagayuta-samam bale
cunda-dande saggrhitva
     patayam asa bhu-tale

     dvipam - the elephant; kuvalayapidam - Kuvalayapida; nagayuta-samam - equal to ten thousand other elephants; bale - in strength; cunda-dande - the trunk; saggrhitva - grabbing; patayam asa - threw; bhu-tale - to the ground.

     Grabbing the trunk of Kuvalayapida elephant, who was a strong as ten thousand other elephants, Krsna threw it to the ground.

Text 48

canuram mustikam kutam
     calam tocalam eva ca
patayam asa bhu-prsthe
     malla-yudhena madhavah

     canuram - Canura; mustikam - Mustika; kutam - Kuta;  calam - Sala; tocalam - Tosala; eva - indeed; ca - and; patayam asa - threw; bhu-prsthe - to the ground; malla-yudhena - in wrestling; madhavah - Lord Krsna.

     As He wrestled with them, Lord Krsna threw Canura, Mustika, Kuta, Sala, and Tocala to the ground.

Texts 49 and 50

kamsam madotkatam daityam
     naga-laksa-samam bale
mancad grhitva tam krsno
     bhramayitva bhujaujasa

patayam asa bhu-prsthe
     kamandalum ivarbhakah
ibhopari yatha simhas
     tasyopari papata sah

     kamsam - Kamsa; madotkatam - wild with pride; daityam - demon; naga-laksa-samam - equal to a hundred thousand elephants; bale - in strength; mancat - from the viwewer's box; grhitva - grabbing; tam - Him; krsnah - Krsna; bhramayitva - whirling; bhujaujasa - with the power of His arms; patayam asa - threw; bhu-prsthe - to the ground; kamandalum - a kamandalu; ivarbhakah - like; ibha - an elephant; upari - on; yatha - as; simhah - a lion; tasya - him; upari - on; papata - fell; sah - He.

     From the viewer's box Lord Krsna dragged Kamsa, who was as strong as a hundred thousand elephants, whirled around with the power of His arms, and thew him to the ground as a child throws a kamandalu. Then Krsna jumped on him as a lion jumps on an elephant.

Text 51

kamsanujamc ca kagkadin
     baladevo maha-balah
mamarda mudgarenacu
     mrgan vai mrga-rad iva

     kamsanujan - Kamsa's younger brothers; ca - and; kagkadin - headed by Kanka; baladevah - Balarama; maha-balah - very strong; mamarda - killed; mudgarena - with a club; acu - at once; mrgan - deer; vai - indeed;  mrga-rad - a lion; iva - like.

     Then with a club Lord Balarama killed Kamsa's younger brothers, headed by Kagka, as a lion kills a herd of deer.

Text 52

gurave daksinam datum
     samutpatya maharnave
cagkha-rupam pancajanam
     nijaghana harih svayam

     gurave - to His guru; daksinam - kasina; datum - to giv; samutpatya - jumping; maharnave - in the ocean;  cagkha-rupam - teh form of a conch; pa 24cajanam - Pancajana; nijaghana - killed; harih - Krsna; svayam - Himself.

     Then, so He could offer daksina to His guru, Lord Krsna dove into the ocean and killed Pancajana, who had the form of a conch.

Text 53

adbhutani caritrani
     caitani sri-harim vina
kah karoti maha-nanda
     tasmai sri-haraye namah

     adbhutani - wonderful; caritrani - pastimes; ca - and; etani - these; sri-harim - Sri Krsna; vina - without; kah - who?; karoti - does; maha-nanda - O great Nanda; tasmai - to Him; sri-haraye - Sri Krsna; namah - obeisances.

     Who but Krsna could perform these wonderful pastimes? O great King Nanda, I offer my respectful obesiances to Sri Krsna.
.pa

Chapter Fifteen
Sri Radha-darcana
Seeing Sri Radha

Text 1

sri-narada uvaca 
evam hi nandoddhavayor
     hareh kathayatoh katham
vyatita ksanavad rajan
     ksanada harsa-vardhini

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; evam - thus; hi - indeed; nanda - of Nanda; uddhavayoh - and Uddhava;  hareh - of Krsna; kathayatoh - talking; katham - topics; vyatita - passed; ksanavat - like a moment; rajan - O king; ksanada - giving a festival;  harsa-vardhini - increasing happiness.

     Sri Narada said: O king, as they talked about Lord Krsna, Nanda and Uddhava enjoyed a great festival of happiness, and the time seemed to pass like a single moment.

Text 2

brahme muhurte cotthaya
     gopyah sarva grhe grhe
dehaly-agganam alipya
     dipams tatra nirupya ca

     brahme muhurte - at brahma-muhutra; ca - and; utthaya - rising; gopyah - the gopis; sarva - all; grhe - in home; grhe - after home; dehali - doorway; agganam - cortyard; alipya - anointing; dipan - lamps;  tatra - there; nirupya - seeing; ca - and.

     In each home the gopis rose at brahma-muhurta, anointed the doorways and courtyards, arranged the lamps, . . .

Text 3

praksalya hasta-padau ca
     methyam netram nidhaya ca
mamanthuh sarvato yuktah
     picchilani dadhini tah

     praksalya - washing; hasta-padau - hands and feet; ca - and; mathnyam - on the churning stick; netram - eye; nidhaya - placing; ca - and; mamanthuh - churned; sarvatah - completely; yuktah - engaged; picchilani - cream; dadhini - yogurt;  tah - they.

 . . . washed their hands and feet, looked for their churning-sticks, and began churning cream and yogurt.

Text 4

netrakarsa-calad-bhara-
     bhuja-kagkana-kigkinih
venibhyo vigata-puspah
     sphurat-kundala-manditah

     netra - the churning rope; akarsa - pulling; calat - moving; bhara - weight; bhuja - arms; kagkana - bracelets; kigkinih - tinkling ornaments; venibhyah - braids; vigata - fallen; puspah - flowers;  sphurat-kundala-manditah - decorated with glistening earrings.

     As with their arms they pulled the churning-rope, their bracelets and other ornaments tinkled, their earrings glistened, and flowers fell from their braids.

Texts 5 and 6

candra-mukhyah kanja-netras
     citra-varnair manoharah
maggalani caritrani
     sri-krsna-baladevayoh

gayantyah prema-samyukta
     yatra tatra grhe grhe
ghose ghose cubha gavo
     rambhamana itas tatah

     candra - moon; mukhyah - faces; kanja-netrah - lotus eyes; citra-varnaih - with various colors; manoharah - beautiful; maggalani - auspicious; caritrani - pastimes; sri-krsna-baladevayoh - of Sri Krsna and Balarama; gayantyah - singing; prema-samyukta - with love; yatra - where; tatra - there; grhe - in home; grhe - after home; ghose - in barn; ghose - after barn; cubha - beautiful; gavah - cows; rambhamana - mooin; itah - here; tatah - and there.

     As in every home they churned, the lotus-eyed, moon-faced, colorfully-dressed, beautiful, affectionate gopis sang with love about the auspicious pastimes of Krsna and Balarama. Then in every barn the beautiful cows began to moo.

Text 7

sarvatra gopika-gitam
     dadhi-cabdena micritam
vithyam vithyam tatah crnvan
     vismitac coddhavo 'bravit

     sarvatra - everywhere; gopika-gitam - the gopis' song;  dadhi-cabdena - with the sound of yougrt; micritam - mixed; vithyam - on path; vithyam - after path; tatah - then; crnvan - hearing; vismitah - astonished; ca - and; uddhavah - Uddhava; abravit - said.

     Hearing on every path the gopis' songs and the sounds of yogurt being churned, Uddhava, filled with wonder, said:

Text 8

aho vai nanda-nagare
     bhaktir nrtyati yatra ca
evam vadan bahir gramad
     yayau snatum nadi-jale

     ahah - Oh; vai - indeed; nanda-nagare - in nanda's village; bhaktih - devotion; nrtyati - dances; yatra - where; ca - and; evam - thus; vadan - saying; bahih - out; gramat - from the village;  yayau - went; snatum - to bathe; nadi-jale - in the river water.

     "Love for Krsna dances in Nanda's village." After speaking these words, Uddhava left the village to bathe in the river.

Text 9

sri-gopya ucuh 
kasyayam adyatra rathah samagato
     'kruro 'thava krura utagatah punah
yenaiva nito mathuram maha-purim
     sri-nanda-sunur nava-kanja-locanah

     sri-gopya ucuh - the gopis said; kasya - of whom?; ayam - this; adya - now; atra - here; rathah - chariot; samagatah - come; akrurah - Akrura; athava - or; krura - cruel; uta - indeed; agatah - come; punah - again; yena - by whom' eva - indeed;  nitah - taken; mathuram - to Mathura; maha-purim - the great city; sri-nanda-sunuh - Sri Krsna; nava-ka 24ja-locanah - His eyes new lotus flowers.

     The gopis said: Whose chariot is this? Has cruel Akrura, who took lotus-eyed Krsna to Mathura City returned?

Text 10

kasmin ku-kale janani sasarja yam
     datum satam snehavatam pratapanam
kadrur yatha naga-cayam visavrtam
     hantum vrtha loka-janan itas tatah

     kasmin - in what?; ku-kale - bad time; janani - mother; sasarja - created; yam - whom; datum - to give; satam - of the devotees; snehavatam - loving; pratapanam - pain; kadruh - Kadru;  yatha - as; naga-cayam - snakes; visavrtam - poisonous; hantum - to kill; vrtha - useless; loka-janan - the people; itah - here;  tatah - and there.

     At what inauspicious moment did his mother, in order to give pain to the loving devotees, give birth to Akrura? She did it as Kadru, in order randomly to kill people here and there, gave birth to the species of snakes.

Text 11

kamsartha-krt kamsa-sakho 'ti-nirghrno
     so 'yam punah kim vraja-mandalam gatah
bhartur mrtasyapi hi para-laukikim
     asmabhir adyaiva karisyati kriyam

     kamsartha - for Kamsa's sake; krt - doing; kamsa-sakhah - friend of Kamsa; ati-nirghrnah - merciless; so ayam - he; punah - again; kim - what?; vraja-mandalam - to the circle of Vraja; gatah - gone; bhartuh - his master; mrtasya - dead; api - also; hi - indeed; para-laukikim - the next world; asmabhih - by us; adya - now; eva - indeed; karisyati - will do; kriyam - act.

     Has Kamsa' cruel friend and servant, Akrura, come again to the circle of Vraja? Will he now perform his dead master Kamsa's funeral rites for us?

Text 12

sri-narada uvaca 
evam vadantyo vraja-gopa-vadhvah
     santadya sutam ca mukhe 'ggulibhyam
papracchur arad gata-buddhim artam
     tvaram vadaitat kila kasya yanam

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; evam - thus; vadantyah - speaking; vraja-gopa-vadhvah - the vraja-gopis;  santadya - hitting; sutam - the charioteer; ca - and;  mukhe - on the fice; aggulibhyam - with fingers; papracchuh - asked; arat - near; gata-buddhim - fool; artam - pained; tvaram - at once; vada - tell; etat - that; kila - indeed; kasya - of whom?; yanam - chariot.

     Sri Narada said: Speaking these words, and slapping his face, the gopis asked the pained and bewildered charioteer,  Whose chariot is this? Tell us at once!"

Texts 13-15

ghana-prabham padma-dalayateksanam
     krsnakrtim koti-manoja-mohanam
pitambaram satpada-saggha-sagkulam
     malam dadhanam nava-vaijayantim

sphurat-sahasra-cchada-padma-panim
     vamci-dharam vetra-karam manoharam
balarka-koti-dyuti-mauli-mandanam
     maha-manim kundala-manditanam

gaty-akrti-sri-tanu-hasa-su-svaraih
     sri-krsna-sarupya-dharam tam uddhavam
vilokya sarva nrpa vismitas tato
     vijnaya govinda-sakham yayuh purah

     ghana-prabham - splendid as a monsson cloud; padma-dalayateksanam - lotus-petal eyes; krsnakrtim - a form like Sri Krsna's; koti-manoja - than millions of Kamadevas; mohanam - more charming; pitambaram - yellow garments; satpada-saggha-sagkulam - filled with bees; malam - garland;  dadhanam - wearing; nava - new; vaijayantim - vaijayanti; sphurat-sahasra-cchada-padma - a splendid thousand-petal lotus; panim - in his hand; vamci-dharam - holding a flute; vetra-karam - a stick in his hand; manoharam - handsome; balarka-koti-dyuti - the splendor of millions of rising suns; mauli-mandanam - with crown and ornaments; maha-manim - great jewel; kundala-manditanam - decorated with earrings; gaty-akrti-sri-tanu-hasa-su-svaraih - with gentle laughter; sri-krsna-sarupya-dharam - having a form like Sri Krsna's; tam - him;  uddhavam - Uddhava; vilokya - seeing; sarva - all; nrpa - O king; vismitah - astonished; tatah - then; vijnaya - knowing; govinda-sakham - Krsna's friend;  yayuh - went; purah - in the presence.

     At that moment seeing Uddhava, splendid as a monsoon cloud, His eyes lotus petals, His form like Sri Krsna's, more handsome than millions of Kamadevas, dressed in yellow garments, wearing a new vaijayanti garland filled with bumblebees, holding in his hands a stick, flute, and thousand-petal lotus, wearing a crown and ornaments glorious as the rising sun, decorated with earrings and a great jewel, and gently laughing, the gopis became filled with wonder. O king, aware that this must be Sri Krsna's friend, they approached him.

Text 16

jnatvatha sandeca-haram hareh prabhoh
     su-vakya-nitya paramadarena tam
guptam hi prastum kucalam satam pateh
     nitvoddhavam tah kadali-vanam gatah

     jnatva - knowing; atha - then; sandeca-haram - carrying a letter; hareh - of Krsna; prabhoh - Lord; su-vakya-nitya - with a sweet voice; paramadarena - with great respect; tam - that; guptam - confidential; hi - indeed; prastum - to ask; kucalam - the welfare; satam - of the devotees; pateh - of the master; nitva - bringing; uddhavam - to Uddhava;  tah - to them; kadali-vanam - in a forest of banana trees; gatah - went.

     Aware that he was carrying a letter from Lord Krsna, the gopis brought Uddhava to a secluded banana tree forest to ask him with sweet and respectful words about the welfare of Lord Krsna, the master of the devotees.

Text 17

yatraiva radha vrsabhanu-nandini
     krsna-tate caru-nikunja-mandire
samasthita tad-virahatura bhrcam
     kham manyate sa tu jagad dharim vina

     yatra - where; eva - indeed; radha - Radha; vrsabhanu-nandini - Vrsabhanu's daughter; krsna-tate - on the shore of the Yamuna; caru-nikunja-mandire - in a beautful forest cottage; samasthita - situated; tad-virahatura - afllicted with separation; bhrcam - greatly; kham - the void; manyate - considered; sa - and; tu - indeed; jagat - the universe; harim - Lord Krsna;  vina - without.

     King Vrsabhanu's daughter Radha, who thought the entire universe an empty void in Lord Krsna's absence, was there, in a beautiful forest-cottage by the Yamuna's shore.

Texts 18 and 19

rambha-dalaic candana-pagka-sancayam
     spharasphurac-chitala-megha-mandiram
krsna-calac-caru-taragga-sikaram
     svatah sudha-racmi-galat-sudha-cayam

etadrcam yat kadali-vanam ca tad
     radha-viyoganala-varcasa bhrcam
babhuva sarvam satatam hi bhasmasat
     krsnagam acatma-tanum hi raksati

     rambha-dalaih - with banana leaves; candana-pagka-sa 24cayam - with sandal paste; spharasphurac-citala-megha-mandiram - with cooling clouds; krsna - of the Yamuna; calat - moving; caru - beautiful; taragga - waves; sikaram - mist; svatah - own; sudha-racmi-galat-sudha-cayam - nectar moonlight; etadrcam - like this; yat - that; kadali-vanam - banana forest; ca - and; tat - indeed; radha-viyoganala-varcasa - with the flames of Radha's feelings of separation; bhrcam - greatly; babhuva - became; sarvam - all; satatam - always; hi - indeed; bhasmasat - into ashes; krsnagam - Krsna's return; aca - hope; atma - own; tanum - body; hi - indeed; raksati - protects.

     There, in the banana-tree forest, in a cooling monsoon-cloud banana-leaf cottage anointed with sandal paste and cooled by nectar moonlight and mist from the Yamuna's graceful and restless waves, Sri Radha was burned by flames of separation from Sri Krsna. Only the hope that Sri Krsna would return kept Her alive.

Text 20

crutvoddhavam krsna-sakham samagatam
     cakara radha sva-sakhibhir adaram
jalacanadyair madhuparka-maggalaih
     sri-krsna krsneti muhur vadanty alam

     crutva - hearing; uddhavam - Uddhava; krsna-sakham - Krsna's friend; samagatam - come; cakara - did;  radha -  Radha; sva-sakhibhih - with Her friends; adaram - respect; jalacanadyaih - with water, a seat, and other things; madhuparka-maggalaih - with madhuparka; sri-krsna - Sri Krsna; krsna - Krsna; iti - thus; muhuh - again and again; vadanti - saying; alam - greatly.

     Hearing that Krsna's friend Uddhava had come, Radha and Her friends greeted him with great respect. She offered him a seat, water, madhuparka, and many other things. Again and again She said, "Sri Krsna! O Sri Krsna!"

Text 21

radham hi govinda-viyoga-khinnam
     kuhvam yatha candra-kalam tadoddhavah
natam krcaggim krta-hasta-samputah
     pradaksini-krtya jagada harsitah

     radham - to Radha; hi - indeed; govinda-viyoga-khinnam - sufdfering in Krsna's separation; kuhvam - on the new moon; yatha - as; candra-kalam - the crescent moon;  tada - then; uddhavah - Uddhava; natam - bowing down;  krcaggim - slender; krta-hasta-samputah - with folded hands; pradaksini-krtya - circumambulating; jagada - spoke; harsitah - joyful.

     Radha, tormented in separation from Lord Krsna, and now slender as the new moon, bowed before Uddhava. With folded hands Uddhava circumambulated Her and cheerfully spoke.

Text 22

sri-uddhava uvaca 
sadasti krsnah paripurna-devo
     radhe sada tvam paripurna-devi
sri-krsnacandrah krta-nitya-lilo
     lilavati tvam krta-nitya-lila

     sri-uddhava uvaca - Sri Uddhava said; sada - always; asti - is; krsnah - Krsna; paripurna-devah - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; radhe - O Radha; sada - always; tvam - You; paripurna-devi - His perfect goddess; sri-krsnacandrah - Sri Krsna; krta-nitya-lilah - enjoys eternal pastimes; lilavati - playful; tvam - You; krta-nitya-lila - enjoy transcendental pastimes.

     Sri Uddhava said: Eternally Sri Krsna is the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead. Eternally You are His supreme goddess. Eternally Sri Krsna enjoys transcendental pastimes. Eternally You enjoy transcendental pastimes with Him.

Text 23

krsno 'sti bhuma tvam asindira sada
     brahmasti krsnas tvam asi svara sada
krsnah civas tvam ca civa civartha
     visnuh prabhus tvam kila vaisnavi para

     krsnah - Krsna; asti - is; bhuma - Lord Narayana;  tvam - You; asi - are; indira - Goiddess Laksmi; sada - eternally; brahma - Brahma; asti - is; krsnah - Krsna; tvam - You; asi - are; svara - Sarasvati; sada - eternally; krsnah - Krsna; civah - Siva; tvam - You; ca - and; civa - Parvati;  civartha - auspicious; visnuh - Lord Visnu; prabhuh - the Lord; tvam - You; kila - indeed; vaisnavi - the devotee; para - the best.

     Eternally Krsna is Lord Narayana. Eternally You are Goddess Laksmi. Eternally Krsna is Lord Brahma. Eternally You are Goddess Sarasvati. Eternally Krsna is Lord Siva. Eternally You are Goddess Parvati. Eternally Krsna is the auspicious Supreme Personality of Godhead. Eternally You are His greatest devotee.

Text 24

kaumara-sargi harir adi-devata
     tvam eva hi jnanamayi smrtih cubha
layambhasa kridana-tat-paro harir
     yajno varaho vasudha tvam eva hi

     kaumara-sargi - the father of the four Kumaras; harih - Krsna; adi-devata - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tvam - You; eva - indeed; hi - indeed;  jnanamayi - filled with knowledge; smrtih - trhe Vedas; cubha - auspicious; layambhasa - with the water of devastation; kridana-tat-parah - fond of playing; harih - Krsna; yajnah varahah - Yajna varaha; vasudha - the earth; tvam - You; eva - indeed; hi - indeed.

     Krsna is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the father of the four Kumaras. You are the auspicious Sruti-castra. Krsna is Yajna Varaha, who plays on the ocean of devastation. You are the earth goddess.

Text 25

devarsi-varyo manasa harih svayam
     tvam tatra saksan nija-hasta-vallaki
narayano dharma-suto narena hi
     cantis tada tvam jana-canti-karini

     devarsi-varyah - the best of the demigod sages; manasa - by the mind; harih - Krsna; svayam - Himself; tvam - You; tatra - there; saksat - directly; nija-hasta-vallaki - the vina in His hand; narayanah - Narayana;  dharma-sutah - the son of Dharma; narena - with Nara; hi - indeed; cantih - canti; tada - then; tvam - You; jana-canti-karini - who brings peace to the living entities.

     Krsna is Narada, the best of divine sages. You are the vina in His hand. Krsna is Narayana Rsi, the son of Dharma and the companion of Nara. You are Santi, who bring peace to the living entities.

Text 26

krsnas tu saksat kapilo mahaprabhuh
     siddhis tvam evasi ca siddha-sevita
dattas tu krsno 'sti maha-municvaro
     radhe sada jnanamayi tvam eva hi

     krsnah - Krsna; tu - indeed; saksat - directly; kapilah - Kapila; mahaprabhuh - the Lord; siddhih - Siddhi; tvam - You; eva - indeed; asi - are; ca - and; siddha-sevita - served by the perfect beings; dattah - Datta; tu - indeed; krsnah - Krsna; asti - is; maha-municvarah - the king of the
great sages; radhe - O Radha; sada - always; j 24anamayi - filled with knowledge; tvam - You; eva - indeed; hi - indeed.

     Krsna is Lord Kapila. You are the mystic perfections served by the Siddhas. Krsna is Dattatreya, the king of the great sages. You are the perfection of transcendental knowledge eternally.

Text 27

yajno haris tvam kila daksina harir
     urukramas tvam hi sada jayanty atah
prthur yada sarva-nrpecvaro harir
     arcis tada tvam nrpa-patta-kamini

     yajnah - Yajna; harih - Krsna; tvam - You; kila - indeed; daksina - Daksina; harih - Krsna; urukramah - Urukrama; tvam - You; hi - indeed; sada - eternally; jayanti - Jayanti;atah - then; prthuh - Prthu; yada - when; sarva-nrpecvarah - the master of all kings; harih - Krsna; arcih - Arci; tada - then; tvam - You; nrpa-patta-kamini - the beautiful queen.

     Krsna is Yajna. You are Daksina. Krsna is Urukrama. You are Jayanti eternally. Krsna is Prthu, the master of all kings. You are beautiful Queen Arci. 

Text 28

cagkhasuram hantum abhud harir yada
     matsyavataras tvam asi crutis tada
kurmo harir madara-sindhu-manthane
     netri-krta tvam cubhada hi vasuki

     cagkhasuram - Sagkhasura; hantum - to kill; abhut - was; harih - Krsna; yada - when; matsyavatarah - the Matsya incarnation; tvam - You; asi - are; crutih - the Vedas; tada - then; kurmah - Kurma; harih - Krsna; madara-sindhu-manthane - in churning the ocean of milk; netri-krta - the churning-rope; tvam - You; cubhada - auspicious; hi - indeed; vasuki - Vasuki.

     When Krsna appeared as Matsyavatara to kill Sagkhasura, You became the Four Vedas. When, during the churning of the milk-ocean, Krsna appeared as Kurma, You became Vasuki, the auspicious churning-rope.

Text 29

dhanvantaric carti-haro harih paras
     tvam ausadhi divya-sudhamayi cubhe
sri-krsnacandras tu babhuva mohini
     tvam mohini tatra jagad-vimohini

     dhanvantarih - Dhanvantari; ca - and; arti-harah - removing troubles; harih - Krsna; parah - Supreme; tvam - You; ausadhi - medicine; divya-sudhamayi - full of transcendental nectar; cubhe - O beautiful one; sri-krsnacandrah - Sri Krsna; tu - indeed; babhuva - became; mohini - Mohini; tvam - You; mohini - Mohini; tatra - there; jagad-vimohini - bewildering the worlds.

     O beautiful one, when Krsna became Dhanvantari, the physician who cures all sufferings, You became His medicine of transcendental nectar. When Krsna became Mohini, You also became Mohini, the beautiful girl that bewilders all the worlds.

Text 30

harir nrsimhas tu nrsimha-lilaya
     lila tada tvam nija-bhakta-vatsala
babhuva krsnas tu yada hi vamanah
     kirtis tada tvam nija-loka-kirtita

     harih - Krsna; nrsimhah - Nrsimha; tu - indeed; nrsimha-lilaya - with the pastime of Nrsimha; lila - the pastime; tada - then; tvam - You; nija-bhakta - His own devotee; vatsala - affectionate; babhuva - became; krsnah - Krsna; tu - indeed; yada - when; hi - indeed; vamanah - vamana; kirtih - fame; tada - then; tvam - You; nija-loka-kirtita - glorified by all the worlds.

     When Krsna became Nrsimha You became His man-lion pastimes, which were so kind to His devotee. When Krsna became Vamana, You became His fame, which is chanted by the devotees.

Text 31

harir yada bhargava-rupa-dhrk puman
     dhara kutharasya tada tvam eva hi
sri-krsnacandro raghu-vamca-candrama
     yada tada tvam janakasya nandini

     harih - Krsna; yada - when; bhargava-rupa-dhrk - the form of Paracurama; puman - man; dhara - the sharpness; kutharasya - of His ax; tada - then; tvam - You; eva - indeed; hi - indeed; sri-krsnacandrah - Sri Krsna; raghu-vamca-candrama - the moon of the
Raghu dynasty; yada - when; tada - then; tvam - You; janakasya - of Janaka; nandini - the daughter.

     When Krsna became Paracurama You became the sharpness of His ax. When Krsna became Rama, the moon of the Raghavas, You became Sita, the daughter of King Janaka.

Text 32

sri-cargga-dhanva muni-badarayano
     vedanta-krt tvam kila veda-laksana
sagkarsano madhava eva vrsnisu
     tvam revati brahma-bhava samasthita

     sri-cargga-dhanva - holding the cargga bow; muni-badarayanah - Vyasa; vedanta-krt - the author of Vedanta; tvam - You; kila - indeed; veda-laksana - the explanations of the Vedas; sagkarsanah - Sagkarsana; madhava - Krsna; eva - indeed; vrsnisu - among the Vrsnis; tvam - You; revati - Revati; brahma-bhava - Brahma-bhava; samasthita - situated.

     When Krsna, who holds the Sargga bow, becomes the sage Vyasa and writes the Vedanta-sutra, You become His commentary on the Vedas. When Krsna becomes Balarama among the Vrsnis, You become Brahma-bhava Revati.

Text 33

buddho yada kaunapa-moha-karako
     buddhis tada tvam jana-moha-karini
kalki yada dharma-patir bhavisyati
     haris tada tvam sukrtir bhavisyati

     buddhah - Buddha; yada - when; kaunapa-moha-karakah - bewildering the atheists; buddhih - intelligence;  tada - then; tvam - You; jana-moha-karini - bwildering the people; kalki - Kalki; yada - when; dharma-patih - the master of religion; bhavisyati - will be; harih - Krsna; tada - then; tvam - You; sukrtih - piety; bhavisyati - will be.

     When Krsna becomes Buddha and bewilders the atheists, You will become the intelligence by which He bewilders them. When Krsna becomes Kalki, the master of religion, You will become His pious deeds.

Text 34

sri-krsnacandro 'sti hi candra-mandale
     radhe sada candra-mukhiti candrika
sri-krsna-suryo divi surya-mandale
     surya-prabha tvam paridhi-pratisthita

     sri-krsnacandrah - Sri Krsna; asti - is; hi - indeed; candra-mandale - in the circle of the moon; radhe - O Radha; sada - always; candra-mukhi - moon-faced; iti - thus; candrika - moonlight; sri-krsna-suryah - the sun of Krsna; divi - in the sky; surya-mandale - in the circle of the sun; surya-prabha - the sunlight; tvam - You; paridhi-pratisthita - the effulgence.

     O moon-faced Radha, Sri Krsna is a moon, and You are His moonlight eternally. Sri Krsna is a sun, and You are His sunlight eternally. 

Text 35

indrah sadaste kila yadavendras
     tatraiva radhe tu caci cacicvari
hiranya-reta hi harih parecvaro
     hetih sada tvam hi hiranmayi para

     indrah - Indra; sada - always; aste - is; kila - indeed; yadavendrah - the king of the Yadavas; tatra - there; eva - indeed; radhe - O Radha; tu - indeed; caci - Saci; cacicvari - saintly queen; hiranya-reta - fire; hi - indeed; harih - Krsna; parecvarah - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hetih - light; sada - always; tvam - You; hi - indeed; hiranmayi - golden; para - transcendental.

     Krsna, the king of the Yadavas, is Indra, and You are His saintly queen Saci eternally. Krsna is a fire, and You are eternally His splendid light.

Text 36

sri-raja-rajo hi virajate harir
     virajase tvam tu nidhau nidhicvari
ksirabdhi-rupi tu haris tvam eva hi
     taraggita-ksauma-sita taraggini

     sri-raja-rajah - the king pf kings; hi - indeed; virajate - shines; harih - Krsna; virajase - You shine;  tvam - You; tu - indeed; nidhau - in the treasury; nidhicvari - the queen of Kuvera; ksirabdhi-rupi - the form of themilk ocean; tu - indeed; harih - Krsna; tvam - You; eva - indeed; hi - indeed; taraggita-ksauma-sitawhite as silk; taraggini - filled with waves.

     Krsna is Kuvera, and You are the queen of His treasury. Krsna is the ocean of milk, and You are the silk-white waves on the ocean of milk. 

Text 37

bibhrad vapuh sarva-patir yada yada
     tada tada tvam viditanurupini
jagan-mayo brahma-mayo harih svayam
     jagan-mayi brahma-mayi tvam eva hi

     bibhrat - manifesting; vapuh - a form; sarva-patih - the master of all; yada - when; yada - when; tada - then; tada - then; tvam - You; viditanurupini - a corresponding form; jagan-mayah - who is the universe; brahma-mayah - who is Brahman; harih - Krsna; svayam - personally; jagan-mayi - become the universe; brahma-mayi - becomes Brahman; tvam - You; eva - indeed;  hi - indeed.

     Whenever Lord Krsna, the master of all, assumes another form, You follow Him and assume the form of His companion. When He is the universal form or the impersonal Brahman, You also become the universal form or the impersonal Brahman.

Text 38

athaiva so 'yam vraja-raja-nandano
     jatasi radhe vrsabhanu-nandini
yabhyam krta sattva-mayi pracantaye
     lila-caritrair lalitadi-lilaya

     atha - then; eva - indeed; sah ayam - He; vraja-raja-nandanah - the prince of Vraja; jata - born; asi - You are; radhe - O Radha; vrsabhanu-nandini - the dauighter of King Vrsabhanu; yabhyam - by both; krta - done; sattva-mayi - transcendental goodness; pracantaye - to pacify; lila-caritraih - with transcendental pastimes; lalitadi-lilaya - with playful and charming pastimes.

     Now He is the son of Vraja's king, so now You are born as Vrsabhanu's daughter. With Your charming pastimes You bring peace and happiness to Your devotees.

Text 39

krsnah svayam brahma param purano
     lila tad-iccha-prakrtis tvam eva
parasparam sandhita-vigrahabhyam
     namo yuvabhyam hari-radhikabhyam

     krsnah - Krsna; svayam - personally; brahma - Brahman; param - Supreme; puranah - ancient; lila - pastimes; tad-iccha-prakrtih - the potency that fulfills His desires; tvam - You; eva - indeed; parasparam - together; sandhita-vigrahabhyam - wioth forms;  namah - obeisances; yuvabhyam - to You; hari-radhikabhyam - Radha and Krsna.

     Krsna is the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, and You are His pastimes and the potency that fulfills His desires. I offer my respectful obeisances to You, Sri Sri Radha and Krsna, the Supreme, whose forms are eternal.

Text 40

grhana patram nija-natha-dattam
     cokam param ma kuru radhike tvam
hrasvena kalena vidhaya karyam
     tatragamisyami tad-ukta-vakyam

     grhana - please take; patram - letter; nija-natha-dattam - given by Your Lord; cokam - lament; param - great; ma - don't; kuru - do; radhike - O Radha; tvam - You; hrasvena - soon; kalena - time; vidhaya - placing; karyam - duty; tatra - there; agamisyami - I will return; tad-ukta-vakyam - His words.

     O Radha, please take this letter. Don't lament. Krsna said, "Soon I will finish My duties here. Then I will return."

Text 41

grhnidhvam adyaiva catani krsna-
     dattani patrani su-maggalani
praty-arpitam yutha-catam ca gopyah
     krsna-priyanam vraja-sundarinam

     grhnidhvam - please take; adya - today; eva - indeed; catani - hundreds; krsna - by Krsna; dattani - given; patrani - letters; su-maggalani - very auspoicious; praty-arpitam - given to each; yutha-catam - hundred groups; ca - and; gopyah - gs; krsna-priyanam - dear to Krsna; vraja-sundarinam - of the beautiful girls of Vraja.

     Please also take these hundred very auspicious letters, one for each of the hundred groups of beautiful girls in Vraja.
.pa

Chapter Sixteen
Sri Radha-gopy-acvasana
Comforting Sri Radha and the Gopis

Text 1

radha patram saggrhitva
     ciro netre tatha ca hrt
nidhaya vacayitva tat
     smrtva tat-pada-pagkajam

     radhaRadha; patram - the letter; saggrhitva - taking; cirah - head; netre - eyes; tatha - so; ca - and; hrt - heart; nidhaya - placing; vacayitva - reading; tat - taht; smrtva - remembering; tat-pada-pagkajam - His lotus feet.

     Taking the letter, placing it over Her head, eyes, and heart, and remembering Krsna's lotus feet, Radha read the letter aloud.

Text 2

ati-prematura rajan
     mocayitvacru-santatim
murcham apa param radha
     yadavasya prapacyatah

     ati-prematura - overcome with love; rajan - O king; mocayitva - shedding; acru-santatim - many tears; murcham - faintying; apa - attained; param - great; radha - Radha; yadavasya - as Uddhava; prapacyatah - watched.

     O king, as Uddhava watched, Radha, overcome with love, shed many tears, and then fainted unconscious.

Text 3

kugkumaguru-patira-
     dvaraih puspa-rasaic ca sa
arcita camarandolaih
     punac caitanyatam gatah

     kugkumaguru-patira-dvaraih - with kunkuma, aguru, and sandal; puspa-rasaih - with the nectar of flowers; ca - and; sa - She; arcita - worshiped; camara - camaras; andolaih - swinging; punah - again; caitanyatam - consciousness; gatah - attained.

     Anointed with kugkuma, aguru, sandal, and flower-nectar, and fanned with camaras, Radha regained consciousness.

Text 4

viyoga-sindhu-sammagnam
     radham kamala-locanam
viksyoddhavas tatah gopyo
     mumucuc cacru-santatim

     viyoga - of separataion; sindhu - into an ocean; sammagnam - plunged; radham - Radha; kamala-locanam - lotus-eyed; viksya - seeing; uddhavah - Uddhava; tatah - then; gopyah - the gopis; mumucuh - shed; ca - and; acru-santatim - many tears.

     Seeing lotus-eyed Radha drowning in an ocean of despair by Lord Krsna's absence, Uddhava and the gopis shed many tears.

Text 5

tasam acru-pravahena
     rajan vrndavane vane
sadyah kahlara-samyukto
     jato lila-sarovarah

     tasam - of them; acru-pravahena - by the stream of tears; rajan - O king; vrndavane - in Vrndavana; vane - forest; sadyah - at once; kahlara-samyuktah - with flowers; jatah - born; lila-sarovarah - Lila-sarovara.

     O king, from the stream of their tears Lake Lila-sarovara, filled with many lotus flowers, was created at that moment.

Text 6

drstva pitva ca su-snatva
     crutva cemam katham narah
karma-bandha-vinirmuktah
     sri-krsnam prapnuyan nrpa

     drstva - seeing; pitva - drinking; ca - and; su-snatva - bathing; crutva - hearing; ca - and; imam - this; katham - narration; narah - a person; karma - of karma; bandha - from the bondage; vinirmuktah - freed; sri-krsnam - Sri Krsna; prapnuyat - attains; nrpa - O king.

     O king, a person who sees, drinks from, or bathes in that lake, or who listens to this story, becoms free from the bonds of karma and attains Lord Krsna.

Text 7

athoddhava-mukhac chrutva
     sri-krsnagamanam punah
papracchuh kucalam sarvam
     sri-krsnasya mahatmanah

     atha - then; uddhava - of Uddhava; mukhat - from the mouth; chrutva - jhearing; sri-krsna - of Lord Krsna;  agamanam - of the return; punah - again; papracchuh - asked; kucalam - welfare; sarvam - all; sri-krsnasya - of Sri Krsna; mahatmanah - the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     After hearing from Uddhava's mouth that Lord Krsna would return, the gopis asked about Lord Krsna's welfare.

Text 8

sri-radhovaca 
ananda-dam sri-vraja-raja-nandanam
     draksyami kasmin samaye ghana-prabham
ghanam mayuriva samutsuka bhrcam
     candram cakoriva tad-iksanotsuka

     sri-radha uvaca - Sri Radha said; ananda-dam - giving bliss; sri-vraja-raja-nandanam - the prince of Vraja; draksyami - I will see; kasmin - at what; samaye - time;  ghana-prabham - splendid as a monsoon cloud; ghanam - a cloud; mayuri - a peacock; iva - like; samutsuka - eager; bhrcam - greatly; candram - the moon;  cakori - a cakori bird; iva - like; tad-iksanotsuka - eager to see.

     Sri Radha said: When will I see Vraja's delightful prince splendid as a monsoon cloud? I yearn to see Him as a peacock yearns to see a monsoon cloud or a cakori bird yearns to see the moon.

Text 9

kasmin ku-kale viraho babhuva me
     yenaiva kau kalpa-samah ksanah ksanah
nicithiniyam dvi-parardha-helanam
     karoti govinda-pada-dvayam vina

     kasmin - at what?; ku-kale - wretched time; virahah - separation; babhuva - was; me - of Me; yena - by which; eva - indeed; kau - on the earth; kalpa-samah - like a kalpa; ksanah - moment; ksanah - moment; nicithini - night; iyam - the; dvi-parardha - Brahma's lifetime; helanam - mocking; karoti - does; govinda-pada-dvayam - Lord Krsna's feet; vina - without.

     Since that painful time when I was separated from Him, every moment has become a kalpa. Without Krsna's feet, every night mocks the span of Brahma's life.

Text 10

kaccit kadacid vrajam agamisyati
     karoti kim tatra harir vadacu me
adyaiva yatnena dhrtah kilasavah
     prasahya niryanti mrsa-giraturah     
     kaccit - whether?; kadacit - sometime; vrajam - to Vraja; agamisyati - will return; karoti - does; kim - what?; tatra - there; harih - Krsna; vada - tell; acu - at once; me - to Me; adya - now;  eva - indeed; yatnena - with care; dhrtah - held; kila - indeed; asavah - life-breath; prasahya - forcibly; niryanti - leaves; mrsa-gira - by lies; aturah - troubled.    

     Will Krsna return? What does He do there. Please tell Me. With a great struggle I have held onto My life-breath. If you torture it with many lies, it will quickly escape.

Text 11

drstva ksanam tvam mama hrc ca citalam
     jatam prasannasmi samagate tvayi
yatha prasanna janakatmaja pura
     lagka-puram vayu-sute samagate

     drstva - seeing; ksanam - for a moment; tvam - you;  mama - My; hrt - heart; ca - and; citalam - coolness; jatam - manifested; prasanna - satisfied; asmi - I am; samagate - attained;  tvayi - you; yatha - as; prasanna - satisfied; janakatmaja - Sita-devi; pura - in ancient times; lagka-puram - to the city of Lanka; vayu-sute - when Hanuman; samagate - came.

     When I first saw you My feverish heart became cool. Now that you have come, I am happy. I am happy as Sita was happy when Hanuman came to Lagka City.

Text 12

acam vidhaya nija-moha-dhanam visrjya
     visrjya vakya-gaditam mathuram gato yah
tasyapi patra-likhitam hy amrtam na manye
     tam canayasva kila mantra-vidam varistha

     acam - hope; vidhaya - placing; nija-moha-dhanam - a wealth of illusions; visrjya - abanonding; visrjya - abandoning; vakya-gaditam - words; mathuram - to Mathura; gatah - went; yah - who; tasya - of Him;  api - also; patra-likhitam - letter; hi - indeed; amrtam - nectar; na - not; manye - think; tam - Him;  ca - and; anayasva - bring; kila - indeed; mantra-vidam - of couselors; varistha - O best.

     I have given up all hope. I have thrown away a host of illusions. Now that He has gone to Mathura, I do not believe His words. I do not think His letter has words of nectar. O Uddhava, O best of counselors, please bring Him here.

Text 13

sri-uddhava uvaca 
gatva purim tava param viraham nivedya-
     thargham vidhaya nija-netra-jalena radhe
nitva harim tava purah punar agato 'smi
     ma cokam adya kuru me capathas tvad-agghreh

     sri-uddhava uvaca - Sri Uddhava said; gatva - having gone; purim - to the city; tava - of You; param - then; viraham - separation; nivedya - appealing;  atha - then; argham - argha; vidhaya - offering; nija-netra-jalena - with tears from the eyes; radhe - O Radha; nitva - bringing; harim - Krsna; tava - of You; purah - in the presence; punah - again; agatah - come; asmi - I am; ma - don't; cokam - lament; adya - now; kuru - do; me - of me;  capathah - the promise; tvad-agghreh - of Your feet.

     Sri Uddhava said: I will go to Mathura City, describe to Him how You feel in His absence, offer Him arghya with the tears from my eyes, and then, O Radha, I will bring Krsna to You. Please don't lament. I place this promise at Your feet. 

Text 14

sri-narada uvaca 
atha prasanna sri-radha
     candrakantau mani cubhau
rasa-ragge candra-dattau
     uddhavaya dadau nrpa

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; atha - then; prasanna - satisfied; sri-radha - Sri Radha; candrakantau - a candrakanti jewel; mani - jewel; cubhau - splendid; rasa-ragge - in the rasa-dance circle; candra-dattau - placed by the moon; uddhavaya - to Uddhava;  dadau - gave; nrpa - O king.

     Sri Narada said: O king, happy to hear this, Sri Radha gave to Uddhava two candrakanta jewels that moonlight had placed in the rasa-dance arena.

Text 15

sahasra-dala-padme dve
     datte candramasa pura
uddhavaya dadau radha
     prasanna bhakta-vatsala

     sahasra-dala-padme - thousand petal lotuses; dve - two;  datte - placed; candramasa - by moonlight; pura - before; uddhavaya - to uddhava; dadau - gave; radha - Radha; prasanna - satisfied; bhakta-vatsala - affectionate to the devotees.

     Then Radha, who is kind to the devotees, happily gave Uddhava two thousand-petal lotuses that had also been created by moonlight.

Text 16

chatram simhasanam divyam
     camare dve manohare
sri-krsna-manasodbhute
     dadau tasmai hari-priya

     chatram - parasol; simhasanam - throne; divyam - splendid; camare - camara; dve - two; manohare - beautiful; sri-krsna - of Sri Krsna; manasa - from the mind; udbhute - born; dadau - gave; tasmai - to him; hari-priya - Lord Krsna's beloved.

     Then Krsna's beloved Radha gave to Uddhava a parasol, a a splendid throne, and two beautiful camaras that had been created by Lord Krsna's thoughts.

Text 17

aicvaryam jnana-sampannam
     sarva-decika-decikam
krsna-samyoga-kartrtvam
     sada tava bhavisyati

     aicvaryam - opulence; jnana-sampannam - with knowledge; sarva-decika-decikam - showing all places; krsna-samyoga-kartrtvam - bringing the company of Lord Krsna; sada - always; tava - of you; bhavisyati - will be.

     Then She said to Uddhava, "You will always have a great wealth of transcendental knowledge, knowledge that enables you to meet Lord Krsna."

Text 18

bhaktim nirguna-bhavadhyam
     prema-laksana-samyutam
jnanam vijnana-sahitam
     vairagyam sa dadau punah

     bhaktim - devotion; nirguna-bhavadhyam - opulent with love that is beyond the modes of material nature; prema-laksana-samyutam - wityh love; jnanam - knowledge;  vijnana-sahitam - with wisdom; vairagyam - renunciation; sa - She; dadau - gave; punah - again.

       The She gave him devotion beyond the modes of nature, pure love for Krsna, knowledge, wisdom, and renunciation.

Text 19

cagkhacuda ca harina-
     nitam cuda-manim cubham
candranana dadau tasmai
     uddhavaya videha-rat

     cagkhacuda - the crest-jewel; ca - and; harina - by Krsna; anitam - brought; cuda-manim - the crest jewel; cubham - beautiful; candranana - moon-faced;  dadau - gave; tasmai - to him; uddhavaya - Uddhava;  videha-rat - O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, then moon-faced Radha gave to Uddhava the beautiful crest-jewel Lord Krsna took from Sagkhacuda.

Text 20

tatha gopi-ganah sarve
     bhusananam cayam cubham
daduh prasanna he rajann
     uddhavaya mahatmane

     tatha - then; gopi-ganah - the gopis; sarve - all;  bhusananam - of ornaments; ca - and; ayam - this; cubham - beautiful; daduh - gave; prasanna - happy; he - O; rajann - king; uddhavaya - to Uddhava; mahatmane - noble-hearted.

     Then all the gopis happily gave many ornaments to noble-hearted Uddhava.

Text 21

sri-narada uvaca 
crutva vacac copagaveh cubhartham
     sukham gatayam kila radhikayam
ucus tam arad vraja-gopa-vadhvah
     sadah-sthitam krsna-sakham prthak tah

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; crutva - hearing;  vacah - words; ca - and; upagaveh - pf Uddhava; cubhartham - to make happy; sukham - happiness; gatayam - attained; kila - indeed; radhikayam - Radha;  ucuh - said; tam - to him; arat - near; vraja-gopa-vadhvah - teh vraja-gopis; sadah - in the assembly; sthitam - situated; krsna-sakham - to Krsna's friend; prthak - specific; tah - they.

     Sri Narada said: When She heard Uddhava's comforting words, Sri Radha became happy. Then the Vraja-gopis surrounded Krsna's friend Uddhava and spoke.

Text 22

sri-gopya ucuh 
yac ca patra-likhitam vadacu nah
     kintu tac ca harinoktam adbhutam
tvam paravara-vidam hareh sakha
     mantra-vittama tadakrtir mahan

     sri-gopya ucuh - the gopis said; yat - what; ca - and; patra-likhitam - letter; vada - please speak;  acu - at once; nah - to us; kintu - however; tat - that; ca - and; harina - by Lord Krsna' uktam - said;  adbhutam - wonderful; tvam - you; paravara-vidam - all-knowing; hareh - of Krsna; sakha - the friend; mantra-vittama - O best of counselors; tadakrtih - His form;  mahan - exalted.

     The gopis said: O best of counselors, You are a very important person. You know everything. Your form is like Krsna's and You are Krsna's personal friend. Please read Krsna's wonderful letter to us.

Text 23

sri-uddhava uvaca 
yatha smaratha devecam
     tatha yusman smaraty asau
anuvelam gopa-vadhvah
     pacyato me na samcayah

     sri-uddhava uvaca - Sri Uddhava said; yatha - as; smaratha - you remember; devecam - the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tatha - so; yusman - you; smarati - remembers; asau - He; anuvelam - always; gopa-vadhvah - the gopis; pacyatah - seeing; me - of me;  na - not; samcayah - doubt.

     Sri Uddhava said: As you remember Lord Krsna, so He always remembers you. O gopis, I have seen this myself. There is no doubt of this.

Text 24

ekada mam samahuya
     smrtva yusman rahas-karah
kathayam asa sandecam
     citta-stham nanda-nandanah

     ekada - once; mam - me; samahuya - calling; smrtva - remembering; yusman - you; rahas-karah - in a private room; kathayam asa - told; sandecam - instruction; citta-stham - in His heart; nanda-nandanah - Krsna.

     One day Lord Krsna called me to His private room and from His heart dicatated the following letter:.

Text 25

sri-bhagavan uvaca 
ganesu saktam kila bandhanaya
     raktam manah pumsi ca muktaye syat
mano dvayoh karanam ahur araj
     jitvatha tat kau vicared asaggah

     sri-bhagavan uvaca - the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; ganesu - for the groups; saktam - attachment;  kila - indeed; bandhanaya - for bodange; raktam - affectionate; manah - the heart; pumsi - in a person; ca - and; muktaye - for liberation; syat - is; manah - the heart; dvayoh - of both; karanam - the cause; ahuh - said; arat - near; jitva - conquering; atha - then; tat - that; kau - on the earth; vicaret - considers; asaggah - without attachment.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Attraction to the modes of material nature lead to bondage, but attraction to the Supreme Personality of Godhead leads to liberation. Thus the mind may be the cause of bondage or the cause of liberation. The wise therefore control the mind and remain unattached to the world of matter.

Text 26

yada svayam brahma parat param mam
     adhyatma-yogena vicaradena
janati sarvatra gatam viveki
     tada vijahyan manasah kasayam yavad ghano madhya-gatas tad-utthitah      sva-karma-rupam na hi drk prapacyati

     yada - when; svayam - Himself; brahma - Brahman; parat - than the greatest; param - greater; mam - Me; adhyatma-yogena - by spiritual yoga; vicaradena - expert; janati - knows; sarvatra - everywhere; gatam - gone; viveki - wise; tada - then; vijahyan - should renounce;  manasah - of the mind; kasayam - attachment to material things; yavat - as; ghanah - a cloud; madhya-gatah - in the middle; tad-utthitah - risen; sva-karma-rupam - the form of one's own karma; na - not; hi - indeed; drk - seeing; prapacyati - sees.

     By expertly practicing yoga, a wise person sees Me, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, everywhere, and when he sees Me, his mind is no longer attracted to material things. As one cannot see clouds chased away by the rising sun, so he cannot see the results of his past fruitive acts.

Text 27

sthulac ca dure 'smi na tattvato 'gganas
     tasmad dhi yogam kurutatra sadhanam
yat sagkhya-bhavaih kila gamyate padam
     tad yoga-bhavair api gamyate svatah

     sthulat - from the gross; ca - and; dure - far; asmi - I am; na - not; tattvatah - in truth; agganah - O gopis; tasmat - therefore; hi - indeed; yogam - yoga; kuruta - do; atra - here; sadhanam - method; yat - what; sagkhya-bhavaih - by sankhya-yoga; kila - indeed; gamyate - is attained; padam - state; tat - that; yoga-bhavaih - by yoga; api - also; gamyate - is attained; svatah - spontaneously.

     O gopis, I am not far from this world. You should prasctice yoga. By following the paths of sagkhya or yoga, you will attain Me.
.pa

Chapter Seventeen
Sri Krsna-smarane gopi-vakya
The Gopis Describe Their Remembrance of Sri Krsna

Text 1

sri-narada uvaca 
crutva sri-krsna-sandecam
     prasanna gopa-vallabhah
acru-mukhyo baspa-kanthyam
     ucur aupagavim nrpa

     sri-narada uvaca - Sri Narada said; crutva - hearing;  sri-krsna-sandecam - Sri Krsna's lketter; prasanna - happy; gopa-vallabhah - the gopis; acru-mukhyah - tears in their faces; baspa-kanthyam - tears on their necks; ucuh - said; aupagavim - to Uddhava; nrpa - O king.

     Sri Narada said: O king, happy to hear Sri Krsna's letter, and tears streaming down their faces and necks, the gopis spoke.

Text 2

sri-goloka-vasinya ucuh 
videcam gatavan krsnas
     tykatva purva-priyan janan
tad upary alikhad yogam
     aho nirmohata-balam

     sri-goloka-vasinya ucuh - the residents of Sri Goloka said;  videcam - to a foreign land; gatavan - gone; krsnah - Krsna; tykatva - abandoning; purva-priyan - those who were formerly dear ot Him; janan - people; tat - that; upari - above; alikhat - wrote; yogam - yoga; ahah - Oh; nirmohata-balam - the power of freedom from illusion.

     The gopis from Sri Goloka said: Krsna left the people He used to love and went far away. Now He writes us a letter saying yoga makes one free from illusions.

Text 3

sri-dvara-palika ucuh 
cakore glauh pagkaje 'rko
     bhramare pagkajam yatha
catake ca ghanah pritim
     na karoti kadacana

     sri-dvara-palika ucuh - the doorkeepers said; cakore - a cakor bird; glauh - the moon; pagkaje - a lotus; arkah - the sun; bhramare - a bee; pagkajam - a lotus;  yatha - as; catake - a cataka bird; ca - and; ghanah - a cloud; pritim - love; na - not; karoti - does; kadacana - ever.

     The gopi doorkeepers said: As the moon never loves the cakora birds, as the sun never loves the lotuses, as the lotus never loves the bumblebees, and as the cloud never loves the cataka birds, so Lord Krsna never loved us.

Text 4

sri-crggara-prakara ucuh 
candra-mitram cakoro 'sti
     sakhyo vahni-kanah sada
vidhatra yad vilikhitam
     tan nyunam na bhaved iha

     sri-crggara-prakara ucuh - the gopi decorators said; candra-mitram - the friend of the moon; cakorah - a cakora bird; asti - is; sakhyah - friends; vahni-kanah - sparks; sada - always; vidhatra - by the creator; yat - what; vilikhitam - scratched; tan - that; nyunam - insignificant; na - not; bhavet - is; iha - here.

     The gopi decorators said: O friends, cakora birds and sparks are always friendly to the moon. That is their destiny, written by fate, and it cannot be cast away.

Text 5

sri-cayyopakarika ucuh 
vyadho 'pi hatva  hi mrgan
     smarati tvaram aturah
kataksaih sva-priyan hatva
     nirmohi na smared aho

     sri-cayyopakarika ucuh - the decorators of the couch said;  vyadhah - a hunter; api - also; hatva  - having killed; hi - indeed; mrgan - deer; smarati - remembers; tvaram - quickly; aturah - agitated; kataksaih - with sidelong glances; sva-priyan - dear to him; hatva - having killed; nirmohi - unagitated; na - not; smaret - remembers; ahah - Oh.

     The gopi couch-decorators said: Killing a deer, a hunter is excited and remembers his prey. Krsna is different. He killed us with sidelong glances, but now He is peaceful and does not remember us at all.

Text 6

sri-parsadakhya ucuh 
jatam viraha-jam duhkham
     nanyo vetti kadacana
yatha kantaka-viddhaggo
     vidvan va viddha-kantakah

     sri-parsadakhya ucuh - the  g associates said; jatam - manifested; viraha-jam - born from separation; duhkham - suffering; na - not; anyah - another; vetti - knows; kadacana - ever; yatha - as; kantaka-viddhaggah - limbs wounded by throns; vidvan - a wise man;  va - or; viddha-kantakah - wounded by thorns.

     The gopi associates said: No one else can understand how we suffer in Krsna's absence. Only a person who has been pricked by thorns can understand the pain of being pricked.

Text 7

sri-vrndavana-palika ucuh 
animittam prema-saukhyam
     animitto hi vetti tat
sa-nimitto na janati
     rasam karmendriyam yatha

     sri-vrndavana-palika ucuh - the protectors of Sri Vrndavana said; animittam - causeless; prema-saukhyam - the happiness of love; animittah - causeless; hi - indeed; vetti - knows; tat - that; sa-nimittah - with a cause; na - not; janati - knows; rasam - the taste; karmendriyam - the working senses; yatha - as.

     The gopi protectors of Sri Vrndavana said: One who loves selflessly can understand selfless love. A selfish person cannot understand it, as arms and legs cannot understand the sweetness of nectar. 

Text 8

sri-govardhana-vasinya ucuh 
purandhri-prema-krd yo vai
     sairandhri-nayako 'bhavat
cailaukobhis tu kim tasya
     bahuna kathitena kim

     sri-govardhana-vasinya ucuh -  - the residents of Sri Govardhana said; purandhri - for the city girls; prema - love;  krt - doing; yah - who; vai - indeed; sairandhri-nayakah - the lover of the maidservant; abhavat - became; cailaukobhih - by they who live on the hill; tu - indeed; kim - what?; tasya - of Him; bahuna - more; kathitena - said; kim - what?

     The gopis of Govardhana Hill said: Now He loves the girls in Mathura City. Now He loves the maidservant Kubja. Why should He love the girls of Govardhana Hill? What more need we say? 

Text 9

sri-kunja-vidhayika ucuh 
ha madhavi-kunja-punje
     gunjan-matta-madhuvrate
sva-drg-laksmi-krto yo vai
     tasyeyam cruyate katha

     sri-kunja-vidhayika ucuh - the gopis that decorated the forest groves; ha - O; madhavi-kunja-pu 24je - in the groves of madhavi vines; gu 24jat - buzzing; matta - maddened; madhuvrate - bees;  sva-drk - own eyes; laksmi - by the marks; krtah - done; yah - who; vai - indeed; tasya - of Him; iyam - thus; cruyate - is heard; katha - the topics.

     The gopis that decorate the forest groves said: We still see the marks Krsna left in the forest groves of madhavi vines and maddened buzzing bees. We still hear the stories of His pastimes.

Text 10

sri-nikunja-vasinya ucuh 
vrndavane matta-milinda-punje
     kalindaja-tira-kadamba-kunje
canaic calantam sa-balam sa-gopam
     sa-godhanam nanda-sutam bhajamah

     sri-nikunja-vasinya ucuh - the gopis living in the forest said; vrndavane - in Vrndavana; matta-milinda-punje - filled with maddened bees; kalindaja-tira - on the Yamuna's shore; kadamba-kunje - in the kadamba forewst; canaih - slowly; calantam - walking; sa-balam - with Balarama; sa-gopam - with the gopas; sa-godhanam - with the cows; nanda-sutam - Krsna; bhajamah - we worship.

     The gopis that stayed in the forest said: We worship Krsna who, accompanied by Balarama, the gopas, and the cows, slowly walked by the Yamuna's shore in Vrndavana's kadamba forest filled with intoxicated bees.

Text 11

sri-jahnavi-yutha uvaca 
kada tathasmat-samayo bhavisyati
     yatha purandhri-samayah pradrcyate
cokam param ma kuruta vrajagganah
     sada na kasyapi jayah parajayah

     sri-jahnavi-yutha uvaca - the group,of gopis headed by Jahnavi said; kada - when?; tatha - then; asmat - of us;  samayah - the time; bhavisyati - will be; yatha - as;  purandhri-samayah - the time of the city girls; pradrcyate - is seen; cokam - lament; param - great; ma - don't; kuruta - do; vrajagganah - O girls of Vraja;  sada - always; na - not; kasyapi - of someone; jayah - the victor; parajayah - the defeated.

     The group of gopis headed by Sri Jahnavi said: O girls of Vraja, don't lament, saying, "Now is the time for the girls of Mathura City. When will our time come?" The winner and the loser there will always be.

Text 12

sri-yamuna-yutha uvaca 
vidhatur na daya kincid
     yunakti viyunakti yah
bhutani sakalany eva
     kridanani yatharbhakah

     sri-yamuna-yutha uvaca - the group ,of gopis headed by Sri  Yamuna said; vidhatuh - of the creator; na - not; daya - mercy; kincit - at all; yunakti - brings together; viyunakti - separates; yah - who; bhutani - living entities; sakalani - all; eva - indeed;  kridanani - toys; yatha - as; arbhakah - a child.

     The group of gopis headed by Sri Yamuna said: The creator Brahma is not kind. He joins and separates the living entities like a child playing with toys.    

Text 13

sri-rama-yutha uvaca 
kubja-puradyarju-samana-vigraha
     dasi tv idanim tu kulinatam gata
ku-rupini rupavati babhav aho
     catur-dinair dundubhi-nada-karini

     sri-rama-yutha uvaca - te group of gopis headed by Sri Rama said; kubja-pura - crooked before; adya - now; rju-samana-vigraha - straight; dasi - maidservant; tv - indeed; idanim - now; tu - indeed; kulinatamthe state of being a poious and respectable girl; gata - attained; ku-rupini - ugly; rupavati - beautiful;  babhau - manifested; ahah - Oh; catur-dinaih - with four days; dundubhi-nada-karini - sounding dundubhi drums.

     The group of gopis headed by Sri Rama said: The girl Kubja was crooked and now she is straight. She was a lowly maidservant and now she is exalted and worthy of honor. She was ugly and now she is beautiful. For her the victory drums sounded for four days. 
Text 14

sri-vijaya-yutha ucuh 
sada na kasyapi bhuja priyamse
     sada vasanto na sada yuva syat
indro na rajyam kurute sadayam
     catur-dinair manam alagkarotu

     sri-vijaya-yutha ucuh - the groups headed by Vijaya said;  sada - always; na - not; kasyapi - of someone; bhuja - the arms; priyamse - on the beloved's shoulder; sada - always; vasantah - springtime; na - not; sada - always; yuva - youth; syat - is; indrah - Indra; na - not; rajyam - kingdom; kurute - does; sada - always; ayam - He; catur-dinaih - with four days; manam - honor; alagkarotu - may decorate.

     The groups of gopis headed by Sri Vijaya said: The arm is not on the beloved's shoulder eternally. Springtime is not eternal. Youth is not eternal. Indra does not rule his kingdom eternally. For four days Kubja was glorified. 
Text 15

sri-lalita-yutha uvaca 
rasabhisekam vinivarya manthara
     cakara vighnam kila kosale pure
kubjaiva seyam mathura-pure gata
     kubjaiva kim kim na karoti gopikah

     sri-lalita-yutha uvaca - the groups of gopis headed by Sri Lalita said; rama - of Rama; abhisekam - the coronation-bathing; vinivarya - stopping; manthara - Manthara;  cakara - did; vighnam - obstacle; kila - indeed; kosale pure - in Ayodhya; kubja - Kubja; eva - indeed;  sa iyam - she; mathura-pure - in Mathura City; gata - gone; kubja - Kubja; eva - indeed; kim - what?; kim - what?; na - not; karoti - does;  gopikah - the gopis.

     The groups of gopis headed by Sri Lalita said: The girl Kubja in Mathura City had been Manthara in Ayodhya, where she stopped the coronation of Lord Ramacandra. O gopis, what offense had Kubja not committed?

Text 16

sri-vicakha-yutha uvaca 
go-caranayanucarair vrajantam
     prabodhayantam sva-puram viravaih
mattebha-yanam hi vidambayantam
     sri-nanda-sunum na hi vismaramah

     sri-vicakha-yutha uvaca - the groups of gopis headed by Sri Vicakha said; go-caranaya - for herding the cows; anucaraih -  - with associates; vrajantam - walking; prabodhayantam - waking; sva-puram - His town; viravaih - with sounds; mattebha-yanam - the walking of an intocxicated elephant; hi - indeed; vidambayantam - mocking; sri-nanda-sunum - Sri Krsna; na - not; hi - indeed; vismaramah - we forget.

     The groups of gopis headed by Sri Vicakha said: We have not forgotten Nanda's son, Krsna, who wakened the entire village with the great clamor He made as He went with His friends to herd the cows, His walking mocking the graceful steps of intoxicated elephants.

Text 17

sri-maya-yutha uvaca 
sagkoca-vithisu pate pragrhya
     prasahya dorbhyam hrdaye nidhaya
anyonyam akarsana-harsa-bhitir
     grhan harim tam hi kada nayamah 
     sri-maya-yutha uvaca - the groups of gopis headed by Sri Maya said; sagkoca-vithisu - on the narrow path; pate - gone; pragrhya - taking; prasahya - forcibly; dorbhyam - with both arms; hrdaye - on the heart; nidhaya - placing; anyonyam - together; akarsana - pulling; harsa-happiness; bhitih - fear;  grhan - to the homes; harim - Krsna; tam - Him; hi - indeed; kada - when?; nayamah - we lead. 

     The groups of gopis headed by Sri Maya said: When will we ambush Krsna on the narrow path and with both arms forcibly hold Him to our hearts? When, happy and frightened, will we take Him to our homes?

Text 18

sri-asta-sakhya ucuh 
viksya nanda-sutam agga sundaram
     netram adya na jagad vipacyati
nanda-raja-tanaye purim sthite
     kim bhavisyati vadacu nas tvaram

     sri-asta-sakhyah ucuh - the eight gopi friends said; viksya - seeing; nanda-sutam - Krsna; agga - O noble one; sundaram - handsome; netram - the eye; adya - now; na - not; jagat - the universe; vipacyati - sees; nanda-raja-tanaye - on Krsna; purim - the city; sthite - situated; kim - what?; bhavisyati - will be; vada - please tell; acu - at once;  nah - to us; tvaram - quickly.

     The eight gopi friends said: Today our eyes see only the handsome son of King Nanda and they cannot see anything of the material world. Now that Krsna is in Mathura City, what will happen next? O gentle Uddhava, please tell us at once.

Text 19

sri-sodaca-sakhya ucuh 
venu-nada-madhura-dhvanim vane
     sannicamya kusumesu-vardhanam
crotra-yugmam iha nah crnoti no
     vicva-gitam uta va yacah param

     sri-sodaca-sakhya ucuh - the sixteen gopi friends said; venu-nada-madhura-dhvanim - the sweet sound of the flute; vane - in the forest; sannicamya - hearing; kusumesu-vardhanam - increasing amorous desires; crotra-yugmam - ears; iha - here; nah - of us; crnoti - hear; nah - not; vicva-gitam - the son of the world; uta - indeed; va - or; yacah - fame; param - great.

     The sixteen gopi friends said: When they hear the sweet musaic of Krsna's flute in the forest, our ears cannot hear any other music in the entire world. Our ears do not think any other music is sweet and glorious.

Text 20

sri-dvatrimcat-sakhya ucuh 
pritya sva-mitram hi ripum nayena
     lubdham dhanaic ca dvijam adarena
gurum pranamai rasikam rasena
     nirmohinam kena vaci-karoti

     sri-dvatrimcat-sakhya ucuh - the thirty-two gopi freinds said; pritya -  - with love; sva-mitram - own friend; hi - indeed; ripum - enemy; nayena - by leading; lubdham - greedy; dhanaih - with wealth; ca - also; dvijam - a brahmana; adarena - with respect; gurum - a guru; pranamai - bow; rasikam - nectarean; rasena - with nectar; nirmohinam - not bewildered; kena - by what?; vaci-karoti - bring under control.

     The thirty-two gopi friends said: With love one makes a friend into a submissive servant. With superior logic one makes a friend into a submissive servant. With money one makes a greedy miser into a submissive servant. With worship and honor one makes a brahmana into a submissive servant. With bowing down again and again one makes a guru into a submissive servant. With beautiful things sweet as nectar one makes a person searching after nectar into a submissive servant. With what does one make a person who can never be bewildered into a submissive servant?

Text 21

sri-cruti-rupa ucuh 
yaj-jagaradisu bhavesu param hy ahetur
     hetusvid asya vicaranti gunac ca yena
naitad vicanti mahad-indriya-deva-sagghas
     tasmai namo 'gnim iva vistrta-visphuliggah

     sri-cruti-rupa ucuh - the gopis that had been Personified Vedas said; yaj-jagaradisu - beginning with wakefulness; bhavesu - in the states of being; param - supreme; hi - indeed; ahetuh - causeless; hetusvit - cause; asya - of Him; vicaranti - consider; gunah - the modes;  ca - and; yena - by whom; na - not; etat - this;  vicanti - enter; mahat - mahat-tattva; indriya - senses; deva - demigods; sagghah - groups; tasmai - to Him; namah - obeisances; agnim - fire; iva - like; vistrta-visphuliggah - sparks.

     The gopis that had been Personified Vedas said: We offer our respectful obeisances to Lord Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is the cause of wakefulness, dream, and sleep, but nothing outside of Himself is the cause of Him. Pushed by Him, the modes of material nature act. The mahat-tattva, senses, and demigods have no power over Him. He is a blazing fire and all things that exist are sparks from Him.

Text 22

sri-rsi-rupa ucuh 
naivecitum prabhur ayam balinam baliyan
     maya na cabda uta no visayi-karoti
tad brahma purnam amrtam paramam pracantam
     cuddham parat parataram caranam gatah smah

     sri-rsi-rupa ucuh - the gopis that had been sages said; na - not; eva - indeed; icitum - to dominate; prabhuh - the Lord; ayam - He; balinam - of the strong;  baliyan - the strongest; maya - illusion; na - not;  cabda - sound; uta - indeed; nah - not; visayi-karoti - brings into the range pf perception; tat - that; brahma - Brahman; purnam - perfect; amrtam - eternal; paramam - supreme; pracantam - peaceful; cuddham - pure;  parat - than the greatest; parataram - greater; caranam - shelter; gatah - attain; smah - we.

     The gopis that had been sages said; The strongest of the strongcannot defeat Him. Material illusion cannot bewilder Him. The Vedas cannot bring Him within their grasp. He is the perfect, complete, eternal, sweet, peaceful, and pure Supreme Personality of Godhead, greater than the greatest. We take shelter of Him. 
Text 23

sri-devaggana ucuh 
amcamcakamcaka-kalady-avatara-vrndair
     aveca-purna-sahitac ca parasya yasya
sargadayah kila bhavanti tam eva krsnam
     purnat param tu paripurnatamam natah smah

     sri-devaggana ucuh - the gopis that had been demigoddesses said; amca - amsa; amcakamcaka - amsamsa; kala - kala; adi - beginning; avatara - incarnations; vrndaih - with multitudes; aveca - avesa; purna - purna;  sahitah - with; ca - and; parasya - of the Supreme;  yasya - of whom; sargadayah - beginning with creation; kila - indeed; bhavanti - are; tam - to Him; eva - indeed; krsnam - Krsna; purnat - than the most perfect; param - more perfect; tu - indeed; paripurnatamam - the most perfect; natah - bowing down; smah - we are.

     The gopis that had been demigoddesses said: The amca, amcamca, kala, aveca, purna, and other incarnations of Godhead come from Him. The creation, maintenance, and destruction of the material universes come from Him. We bow down before Him, Sri Krsna, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, more perfect than the perfect.

Text 24

sri-yajna-sita ucuh

criman-nikunja-latika-kusumakaro 'yam
     sri-radhika-hrdaya-kantha-vibhusano 'yam
sri-rasa-mandala-patir vraja-mandaleco
     brahmanda-mandala-mahi-paripalako 'yam

     sri-yajna-sita ucuh - the Yajna-sitas said;  criman-nikunja-latika-kusumakarah - a forest garden of flowering vines; ayam - He; sri-radhika - of Sri Radha; hrdaya - on the heart; kantha - and neck; vibhusanah - the ornament; ayam - He; sri-rasa-mandala-patih - the master of the rasa-dance circle; vraja-mandalecah - the master of the circle of Vraja; brahmanda-mandala-mahi-paripalakah - the maintainer of the circle of all the universes; ayam - He.

     The Yajna-sitas said; He stays in a beautiful forest garden of flowering vines. He is an ornament on Sri Radha's neck and heart. He is the master of the circle of Vraja. He is the master of the rasa-dance circle. He is the protector of the circle of the universes.

Text 25

sri-rama-vaikuntha-vasinya ucuh 
yo gopika-sakala-yutham alancakara
     vrndavanam ca nija-pada-rajobhir adrim
yah sarva-loka-vibhavaya babhuva bhumau
     tam bhuri-lilam uragendra-bhujam bhajamah

     sri-rama-vaikuntha-vasinya ucuh - the gopis that had been residents of Rama-Vaikuntha said; yah - who; gopika-sakala-yutham - all the groups of gopis; ala 24cakara - decorates; vrndavanam - Vrndavana; ca - and; nija-pada-rajobhih - with the dust of His feet; adrim - the hill; yah - who; sarva-loka-vibhavaya - for the gl;ory of all the worlds; babhuva - was; bhumau - on the earth; tam - Him; bhuri-lilam - enjoying transcendental pastimes; uragendra-the kings of snakes; bhujam - His arms; bhajamah - we worship.

     The gopis that had been residents of Rama-Vaikuntha said: We worship Lord Krsna, whose arms are like two snake-kings, who decorated Vrndavana, Govardhana Hill, and all the gopis with the dust of His feet, and who to show His glories to all the worlds enjoyed many transcendental pastimes on the earth.

Text 26

sri-cvetadvipa-sakhi-jana ucuh 
yatha cilindhram cicur acramo gajah
     sva-puskarenaiva ca puskaram girim
dhrtva babhau sri-vraja-raja-nandanah
     krpakaro 'sau na hi vismrtah kvacit

     sri-cvetadvipa-sakhi-jana ucuh - the gopis that had been friends of the goddess of fortune on Svetadvipa said; yatha - as; cilindhram - a mushroom; cicuh - boy; acramah - shelter; gajah - elephant; sva-puskarena - with a lotus; eva - indeed; ca - and; puskaram - a lotus; girim - hill; dhrtva - holding; babhau - manifested; sri-vraja-raja-nandanah - the prince of Vraja; krpakarah - kind; asau - He; na - not; hi - indeed; vismrtah - forgotten; kvacit - ever.

     The gopis that had been friends of the goddess of fortune on Svetadvipa said: We have not forgotten compassionate Sri Krsna, the prince of Vraja, who, as a child lifts a mushroom or an elephant lifts a lotus in its tongue, lifted Govardhana Hill.

Text 27

sri-urdhva-vaikuntha-vasinya ucuh 
cyama-varnamaye netre
     jagac chyamam vipacyatah
na dvaitam drcyate yasam
     tabhih kim yoga-sevanam

     sri-urdhva-vaikuntha-vasinya ucuh - the gopis that had been residents of Urdhva-Vaikuntha said; cyama-varnamaye - black; netre - eyes; jagac-chyamam - black;  vipacyatah - seeing; na - not; dvaitam - different;  drcyate - is seen; yasam - of whom; tabhih - by them;  kim - what?; yoga-sevanam - practice of yoga.

     The gopis that had been residents of Urdhva-Vaikuntha said: When the eyes are covered with darkness they see the entire universe is dark. In that darkness, the eyes can clearly see that everything is all one and there is no duality. What use do we have for this darkness of impersonalist yoga? 

Text 28

sri-lokacala-vasinya ucuh 
sneha-paco drdho chinno
     na cchinno harina vina
chittva tam mathuram pragan
     naga-pasam yatha khagah

     sri-lokacala-vasinya ucuh - the gopis that had been residents of Lokacala said; sneha - of love; pacah - the rope;  drdhah - firm; chinnah - broken; na - not; cchinnah - broken; harina - by Krsna; vina - without; chittva - breaking; tam - that; mathuram - to Mathura;  pragan - went; naga-pasam - snake-noose; yatha - as;  khagah - Garuda.

     The gopis that had been residents of Lokacala said: Only Krsna can cut the noose of love. No one but Him can cut it. As Garuda cuts a noose of snakes, Krsna should have cut the noose of our love before He went to Mathura City.

Text 29

sri-ajita-padacrita ucuh 
krsne lagnam netra-yugmam
     dhavad daca-dicantaram
aho na lagnam kutrapi
     padma-lagno yatha hy alih

     sri-ajita-padacrita ucuh - the gopis that had taken shelter of Lord Ajita's feet said; krsne - on Lord Krsna; lagnam - resting; netra-yugmam - eyes; dhavat - running;  daca-dicantaram - in the ten directions; ahah - Oh; na - not; lagnam - resting; kutrapi - anywhere; padma-lagnah - resting on a lotus; yatha - as; hi - indeed; alih - a bee.

     The gopis that had taken shelter of Lord Ajita's feet said: Not going anywhere else in the ten directions, our eyes rest on Krsna as a bumblebee rests on a lotus.

Text 30

sri-sakhya ucuh 
karpanyena yaco hanti
     krudha guna-ganodayam
dhanani vyasanair lokah
     kapatenaiva mitratam

     sri-sakhya ucuh - the gopis that had been friends of ther goddess of fortune said; karpanyena - by being in a pitiable condition; yacah - fame; hanti - kills; krudha - by anger; guna-ganodayam - virtues; dhanani - wealth; vyasanaih - by calamities; lokah - the world; kapatena - by treachery; eva - indeed; mitratam - friendship.

     The gopis that had been friends of the goddess of fortune said: Being in a wretched condition destroys one's fame. Anger destroys virtues. Misfortune destroys wealth. Treachery destroys friendship.

Text 31

sri-maithila ucuh 
dhanam dattva tanum rakset
     tanum dattva trapam vyadhat
dhanam tanum trapam dadyan
     mitra-karyartham eva hi

     sri-maithila ucuh - the gopis that had been the women of Mithila said; dhanam - wealth; dattva - giving; tanum - body; rakset - should protect; tanum - body; dattva - giving; trapammodesty; vyadhat - gives; dhanam - wealth; tanum - body; trapam - modesty; dadyat - may guve; mitra-karyartham - for friendship; eva - indeed; hi - indeed.

     The gopis that had been the women of Mithila said: By paying money one may protect his body, and by renouncing this body one may preserve his good reputation. For the sake of a friend one may give away his money, body, and good reputation.

Text 32

sri-kaucala ucuh 
na ko 'pi janati viyoga-jam dasam
     jivam vina vaktum alam na sapi hi
bhuyad uro-bana-bhinnam aran
     mabhut kadapi priya-viprayojanam

     sri-kaucala ucuh - the gopis that had been women of Kocala said; na - not; ko 'pi - anyone; janati - knows;  viyoga-jam - born of separation; dasam - condition; jivam - life; vina - without; vaktum - to speak; alam - greatly; na - no; sapi - any woman; hi - indeed; bhuyat - may be; uro-bana-bhinnam - her chest pierced by an arrow; aran - near; ma - not; abhut - may be; kadapi - ever; priya-viprayojanam - separation from the beloved.

     The gopis that had been women of Kocala said: Only a person whose heart has been broken by the arrow of separation can understand or describe the sufferings of a lover separated from the beloved. 

Text 33

sri-ayodhya-pura-vasinya ucuh 
krtva niracam vinidhaya cacam
     jagama cacam mathura-purasya
yogam ca tasyopari calikhan no
     nirmohinam cittam aho vicitram

     sri-ayodhya-pura-vasinya ucuh - the gopis that had been the women of Ayodhya said; krtva - having done; niracam - hopelessness; vinidhaya - placing; ca - and;  acam - hope; jagama - went; ca - and; acam - in the direction; mathura-purasya - of Mathura City; yogam - meeting; ca - and; tasya - of Him; upari - over; ca - and; alikhant - wrote; nah - not;  nirmohinam - of the peaceful; cittam - the heart; ahah - Oh; vicitram - wonderful.

     The gopis that had been the women of Ayodhya said: First He gave us no hope, then He gave us hope, then he went to Mathura City. Now He writes that we will meet again. Are not the hearts of they who do not love wonderful to see?

Text 34

sri-pulindika ucuh 
enam varam kartum ativa vihvalam
     samagatam curpanakham pura vane
yah karayam asa virupinim balat
     saumitrina tena tu vah krpa katham

     sri-pulindika ucuh - the gopis that had been Pulindas said;  enam - Him; varam - beloved; kartum - to make; ativa - very; vihvalam - agitated; samagatam - attained;  curpanakham - Surpanakha; pura - before; vane - in the forest; yah - who; karayam asa - made; virupinim - disfigured; balat - forcibly; saumitrina - by Laksmana; tena - by Him; tu - indeed; vah - of you; krpa - the mercy; katham - how?

     The gopis that had been Pulindas said: When Surpanakha fell in love with Him and yearned to marry Him, He made Laksmana disfigure her. He was not kind then. Why should He be kind now?

Text 35

sri-sutala-vasinya ucuh 
bhaktam balim satya-param ca bhur idam
     nitva balim yah kupito babandha ha
aho katham tasya karoti sevanam
     maya-bator vamana-rupa-dharinah

     sri-sutala-vasinya ucuh - the gopis that had been the women of Sutalaloka said; bhaktam - devotee; balim - Bali; satya-param - truthful; ca - and; bhuh - earth; idam - this; nitva - bringing; balim - offering; yah - who; kupitah - angry; babandha - bound; ha - indeed; ahah - Oh; katham - how?; tasya - of Him; karoti - does; sevanam - service; maya-batoh - pretending to be a small brahmana boy; vamana-rupa-dharinah - manifesting the form of Lord Vamana.

     The gopis that had been the women of Sutalaloka said: When the sincere devotee Bali Maharaja offered Him the entire world, Krsna became angry and tightly bound Bali with many ropes. That is the result of worshiping Him. Why would anyone worship this person, who deviously pretended to be a brahmacari?

Text 36

sri-jalandharya ucuh 
purati-kastam pragate 'surottame
     kayadhave bhakta-vare tato hy ayam
bhutva nrsimhah krtavan sahayam
     aho para nisthurata pradrcyate

     sri-jalandharya ucuh - the gopis that had been Jalandharis said; pura - previously; ati-kastam - great calamity;  pragate - attained; asurottame - the great demon; kayadhave - to Prahlada; bhakta-vare - the great devotee; tatah - then; hi - indeed; ayam - He; bhutva - becoming; nrsimhah - Nrsimha; krtavan - did; sahayam - help; ahah - Oh; para - great; nisthurata - cruelty; pradrcyate - is seen.

     The gopis that had been Jalandharis said: When the great demon Hiranyakacipu tortured the great devotee Prahlada, Krsna appeared as Nrsimha, saved Prahlada, and was very cruel to Hiranyakacipu. 

Text 37

sri-bhumi-gopya ucuh 
aho 'ti-nirmohi-janasya citram
     param caritram gaditum na yogyam
mukhena canyad dhrdi bhavyam anyad
     devo na janati kuto manusyah

     sri-bhumi-gopya ucuh - the Bhumi-gopis said; ahah - Oh;  ati-nirmohi-janasya - of one who is peaceful; citram - wonderful; param - great; caritram - activities; gaditum - to speak; na - not; yogyam - proper; mukhena - with the mouth; ca - and; anyat - another; hrdi - in the heart; bhavyam - will be;  anyat - another; devah - the demigod; na - not; janati - understands; kutah - where?; manusyah - humans.

     The Bhumi-gopis said: No one can describe with his mouth or understand with his heart the surprising activities of Krsna, who is never bewildered by feelings of love. If even the great demigods cannot understand His activities, how can mere human beings understandthem?

Chapter Eighteen
Çré Gopé-väkye Uddhavägamana
Uddhava Hears the Gopés' Words and Returns to Mathurä

Text 1

çré-barhiñmaté-bhavä ücuù 
aho layäbdhau kåpayä harir yaà
     uddhåtya väräha-tanur mahätmä
tam anvadhävad dhåta-siïjiné-çaro
     bhütvä dayäluù påthur ädi-räjaù

     çré-barhiñmaté-bhavä ücuù—the gopés that had been the women of Barhiñmaté-pura said: ahaù—Oh; layäbdhau—on the ocean of devastation; kåpayä—with mercy; hariù—Kåñëa; yam—whom; uddhåtya—lifting; väräha-tanuù—the form of Varäha; mahätmä—great soul; tam—her; anvadhävat—following; dhåta-siïjiné-çaraù—placing the arrow to the bowstring; bhütvä—doing; dayäluù—merciful; påthuù—Påthu; ädi-räjaù—the great king.

     The gopés that had been the women of Barhiñmaté-pura said: Kåñëa was Varäha, who rescued the earth from the waters of devastation. Kåñëa was the great and merciful king Påthu who, placing an arrow on His bowtsring, protected the earth. 

Text 2

çré-latä-gopya ücuù

svayaà sudhäà vä na vibhajya pürvaà
     dhanvantarir viçva-bhiñäì mahätmä
tad-baddha-vaireñu suräsureñu
     bhütvätha yoñit pradadau kali-priyaù

     çré-latä-gopya ücuù—the gopés that had been flowering vines said; svayam—personally; sudhäm—nectar; vä—or; na—not; vibhajya—distributing; pürvam—before; dhanvantariù—Dhanvantari; viçva-bhiñäk—the doctor of the universe; mahätmä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tad-baddha-vaireñu—inimical; suräsureñu—demigods and demons; bhütvä—becoming; atha—then; yoñit—a woman; pradadau—gave; kali-priyaù—fond of quarreling.

     The gopés that had been flowering vines said: In ancient times Kåñëa became Dhanvantari, the universal physician who brought, but did not distribute, nectar. When the demigods and demons quarreled, Kåñëa, who sometimes likes a quarrel, became the girl Mohiné and gave the nectar to the demigods.

Text 3

çré-nägendra-kanyä ücuù 
athecchatém enam aho varaà hariù
     samägatäà çürpaëakhäà mahävane
cakära saumitra-sakhaù kurüpiëéà
     aho kåtaà tasya tayä kim apriyam

     çré-nägendra-kanyä ücuù—the snakes princesses said; atha—then; icchatém—desiring; enam—Him; ahaù—indeed; varam—husband; hariù—Kåñëa; samägatäm—approached; çürpaëakhäm—Surpanakha; mahävane—in Mahävana; cakära—did; saumitra-sakhaù—trhe friend of Lakñmaëa; kurüpiëéà-disfigured; ahaù—Oh; kåtam—did; tasya—of Him; tayä—by her; kim—what?; apriyam—not dear.

     The gopés that had been snake-princesses said: When Kåñëa was Rämacandra, and Çürpaëakhä wished to marry Him, Rämacandra, the friend of Lakñmaëa, disfigured her. What bad thing did she do to deserve that punishment?

Text 4

çré-samudra-kanyä ücuù 
nityaà gåha-çataà yänti
     dätré duùkhaà sukhaà janän
svéyä kathaà suçélä ca
     caïcaläsmin kathaà sthitä

     çré-samudra-kanyä ücuù—the daughters of the ocean said; nityam—always; gåha-çatam—a hundred homes; yänti—goes; dätré—the giver; duùkham—sufferinbgs; sukham—happiness; janän—to the people; svéya—own; katham—how?; suçélä—good; ca—and; caïcalä—restless; asmin—in this; katham—how?; sthitä—situated.

     The gopés that had been daughters of the ocean said: Why does Kåñëa's saintly beloved, the goddess of fortune, bring happiness or suffering to hundreds of homes every day? Why, even though she is rstless and fickle, does she always stay by His side?

Text 5

çré-apsara ücuù 
asya prétyä karëa-näse
     gate vai rävaëa-svasuù
tyajantu värtäà tenäpi
     bhavaténäà kåpä kåtä

     çré-apsara ücuù—te gopés that had been apsaräs said; asya—of Him; pritya—with love; karëa-näse—ears and nose; gate—gone; vai—indeed; rävaëa-svasuù—Surpanakha; tyajantu—may abanond; värtäm—news; tena—by Him; api—also; bhavaténäm—of you all; kåpä—mercy; kåtä—done.

     The gopés that had been apsaräs said: Çürpaëakhä lovingly approached Him and He responded by cutting off her ears and nose. Kåñëa is not kind.

Text 6

çré-divyä ücuù 
sarveçvaro balià nétvä
     balià baddhvä dayä-paraù
adhaù kñipan mukti-näthas
     citraà tat kathayäbhavat

     çré-divyä ücuù—the divya-gopés said; sarveçvaraù—the master of all; balim—offering; nétvä—bringing; balim—Bali; baddhvä—binding; dayä-paraù—kind; adhaù—below; kñipan—throwing; mukti-näthaù—the master of liberation; citram—wonderful; tat—that; kathayä—with the story; abhavat—was.

     The divya-gopés said: Even though Kåñëa is the merciful Supreme Personality of Godhead, He tied up Bali Mahäräja, who was making an offering to Him. Even though Kåñëa is the master that gives liberation, He threw Bali down to the lower worlds. This is all very surprising. 

Text 7

çré-ädivyä ücuù 
çatarüpä-yutaà çäntaà
     tapasy antaà manuà purä
daityair badhaà gataà paçcäd
     rarakñäsau dayä-nidhiù

     çré-ädivyä ücuù—the ädivya-gopés said; çatarüpäyutam—wuth Çatarüpä; çäntam—peaceful; tapasi—ausperity; antam—end; manum—Manu; purä—before; daityaiù—by the demons; badham—stopped; gatam—gone; paçcät—after; rarakña—protected; asau—He; dayä-nidhiù—an ocean of mercy.

     The ädivya-gopés said: Kåñëa protected Manu and Çatarüpä when, as they were peacefully performing austerities, the demons attacked them.

Text 8

çré-sattva-våttaya ücuù 
pürvaà kañöa-gataà bhaktaà
     dhruvaà käyädhavaà ca vai
paçcäd rarakña kåpayä
     na pürvaà déna-vatsalaù

     çré-sattva-våttaya ücuù—the sattva-våtti-gopés said; pürvam—before; kañöa-gatam—suffering; bhaktam—devotee; dhruvam—Dhruva; käyädhavam—Prahläda; ca—and; vai—indeed; paçcät—then; rarakña—protected; kåpayä—with mercy; na—not; pürvam—before; déna-vatsalaù—kind to the distressed.

     The sattva-våtti-gopés said: Although Kåñëa, who is kind to the distressed, protected Dhruva and Prahläda from many calamities, now He will not protect us..

Text 9

çré-rajo-våttaya ücuù 
rukmäìgada-hariçcandräm-
     baréñäëäà satäà hariù
satyaà parékñan pradadau
     punar bhägavatéà çriyam

     çré-rajo-våttaya ücuù—the rajo-våtti-gopés said; rukmäìgada—Rukmangada; hariçcandra—Hariscandra; ambaréñäëäm—and Ambarisa; satäm—devotees; hariù—Kåñëa; satyam—true; parékñan—seeing; pradadau—gave; punaù—again; bhägavatém—of the Lord; çriyam—opulence.

     The rajo-våtti-gopés said: When He saw that they were His sincere devotees, Lord Kåñëa gave His own transcendental opulences to Rukmäìgada, Hariçcandra, and Ambaréña.

Text 10

çré-tamo-våttaya ücuù 
våndä yena chalaà präptä
     chalinä balinä purä
chalamayyä balinyädyä
     kubjayä chalito hy ayam

     çré-tamo-våttaya ücuù—the tamo-våtti gopés said; våndä—Vrnda; yena—by whom; chalam—trick; präptä—attained; chalinä—by a trick; balinä—by Bali; purä—before; chalamayyä—treacerous; balinyädyä—headed by Balini; kubjayä—by Kubjä; chalitaù—cheated; hi—indeed; ayam—He.

     The tamo-våtti gopés said: Kåñëa cheated many others in the past. He cheated Bali Mahäräja and He also cheated Kubjä.

Text 11

kåpäëé hy ekato vakrä
     ghätayanté janän bahün
kim u kubjä tri-vakrä ca
     çré-kåñëena tri-bhaìginä

     kåpäëé—a dagger; hi—indeed; ekataù—by one; vakrä—crooked; ghätayanti—struck; janän—people; bahün—many; kim—what?; u—indeed; kubjä—Kubjä; tri-vakrä—crooked in three places; ca—and; çré-kåñëena—by Çré Kåñëa; tri-bhaìginä—bent in three places.

     A single crooked sword can kill many straight people. Why, then, would Kåñëa, who is Himself bent in three places, not cheat Kubjä, who was also crooked in three places?

Text 12

paçyanténäà kåñëa-märgaà
     netre duùkhaà gate bhåçam
avadhéù päda-vékñepaà
     vämanasya karoti hi

     paçyanténäm—looking; kåñëa-märgam—on the poath of Kåñëa; netre—eyes; duùkham—sufcferings; gate—attained; bhåçam—greatly; avadhéù—up to; päda-vékñepam—the kicking; vämanasya—of Vämana; karoti—does; hi—indeed.

     Hoping for Kåñëa to come, we stared at the path, trying to look as far as possible into the distance, even up to the place where Lord Vämana kicked a hole in the covering of the universe.

Text 13

pétatvaà tvag-gatä pädau
     çaithilyaà pragatau ca naù
mano vibhramatäm ugraà
     mädhave mädhavaà vinä

     pétatvam—yellowness; tvak—-skin; gatä—attained; pädau—feet; çaithilyam—slackness; pragatau—attauined; ca—and; naù—of us; manaù—the mind; vibhramatäm—bewilderment; ugram—terrible; mädhave—in the springtime; mädhavam—Kåñëa; vinä—without.

     In Kåñëa's absence our skin has turned yellow, our steps are unsteady, and our thoughts disoriented.

Text 14

sapatné-hära-cihnäòhyaà
     ägataà tam uñaù-kñaëe
ha daiva kasmin samaye
     drakñyämo nanda-nandanam

     sapatné—rival; hära—necklace; cihna—mark; äòhyam—enriched; ägatam—come; tam—Him; uñaù-kñaëe—at dawn; ha—indeed; daiva—O destiny; kasmin—at what?; samaye—time; drakñyämaù—we will see; nanda-nandanam—Nanda's son.

     O destiny, when will we again see Nanda's son, bearing the marks and necklace of our rival as he comes to us at dawn?

Text 15

çré-närada uväca 
iti kåñëaà cintayantyo
     gopébhiù prema-vihvaläù
utkaëöhitäs tä rurudur
     mürchitä dhäraëéà gatäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; itit—thus; kåñëam—about transcendental; cintayantyaù—thinking; gopébhiù—by the gopés; prema—with love; vihvaläù—overcome; utkaëöhitäù—yearning; tä—they; ruruduù—wept; mürchitä—fainting; dhäraëém—to the ground; gatäù—fell.

     Çré Närada said: Thinking of Kåñëa in this way, the gopés became overwhelmed with love for Kåñëa. Yearning to meet Him again, they wept, and then they fell unconscious to the ground.

Text 16

påthak påthak samäçväsya
     vacobhir naya-naipuëaiù
sambodhya gopikä sarväù
     präha rädhäà tadoddhavaù

     påthak påthak—each one; samäçväsya—comnforting; vacobhiù—with words; naya-naipuëaiù—expert; sambodhya—awakening; gopikä—the gopés; sarväù—all; präha—said; rädhäm—to Rädhä; tadä—then; uddhavaù—Uddhava.

     After reviving all the gopés and comforting each one with eloquent words, Uddhava spoke to Rädhä.

Text 17

çré-uddhava uväca 
paripürëatame kåñëe
     våñabhänu-varätmaje
gantum äjïäà dehi mahyaà
     namas tubhyaà vrajeçvari

     çré-uddhava uväca—Çré Uddhava said; paripürëatame—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kåñëe—Kåñëa; våñabhänu-varätmaje—King Våñabhänu's daughter; gantum—to go; äjïäm—the order; dehi—please give; mahyam—to me; namaù—obeisances; tubhyam—to You; vrajeçvari—O queen of Vraja.

     Çré Uddhava said: O supreme goddess, O most exalted one, O daughter of King Våñabhänu, please give me permission to depart. O queen of Vraja, I offer my respectful obeisances to You.

Text 18

pratipatraà dehi çubhe
     çré-kåñëäya mahätmane
tena taà ca praëamyäçu
     samäneñye taväntikam

     pratipatram—a letter in reply; dehi—please give; çubhe—O beautiful one; çré-kåñëäya—for Çré Kåñëa; mahätmane—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tena—by that; tam—Him; ca—and; praëamya—bowing; äçu—at once; samäneñye—I will bring; tava—of you; antikam—nearness.

     O beautiful one, please give me a letter for Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. I will bow down before Him and then I will bring Him to You at once.

Text 19

çré-närada uväca 
atha rädhä lekhanéà ca
     nétvä patraà mañes tvaraà
samäcäraà cintayanti
     tävad açrüni suçruvuù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; rädhä—Rädhä; lekhaném—a pen; ca—and; nétvä—bringing; patram—a cup; mañeù—of ink; tvaram—at once; samäcäram—activity; cintayanti—thinking; tävat—then; açrüni—tears; suçruvuù—flowed.

     Çré Närada said: Then Rädhä took a pen and a jar of ink. As She thought of what to write, tears flowed from Her eyes.

Text 20

yad yat patraà samänétaà
     rädhayä lekhané-yutam
tat tad ardré-kåtaà jätaà
     nayanämbuja-väribhiù

     yad yat—whatever; patram—letter; samänétam—done; rädhayä—by Rädhä; lekhané-yutam—with the pen; tat tat—that; ardré-kåtam—melted; jätam—manifested; nayanämbuja-väribhiù—with the tears from Her eyes.

     Whatever Rädhä wrote with Her pen was at once washed away by the tears from Her eyes.

Text 21

açru-pravähaà muïcantéà
     kåñëa-darçana-lälasäm
uddhavo vismayan präha
     rädhäà kamala-locanäm

     açru-praväham—a stream of tears; muïcantém—shedding; kåñëa-darçana-lälasäm—yearning to see Kåñëa; uddhavaù—Uddhava; vismayan—astonished; präha—said; rädhäm—to Rädhä; kamala-locanäm—lotus-eyed.

     Filled with wonder, Uddhava spoke to lotus-eyed Rädhä who, yearning to see Kåñëa, shed streams of tears. 

Text 22

çré-uddhava uväca 
kathaà likhasi rädhe tvaà
     kathaà duùkhaà karoñi hi
sarvaà tasmai vadiñyämi
     vyathäà tval-lekhanaà vinä

     çré-uddhava uväca—Çré Uddhava said; katham—who?; likhasi—write; rädhe—O Rädhä; tvam—You; katham—how?; duùkham—suffering; karoñi—You do; hi—indeed; sarvam—all; tasmai—to Him; vadiñyämi—I will tell; vyathäm—the suffering; tval-lekhanam—Your writing; vinä—without.

     Çré Uddhava said: O Rädhä, why must You write? Why must You be unhappy in this way? Even without You writing a letter, I will tell Kåñëa everything of Your distress.

Text 23

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä vacas tasya
     rädhayä gata-bädhayä
sarväbhir gopikäbhiç ca
     püjito 'bhüt tadoddhavaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—words; tasya—of him; rädhayä—by Rädhä; gata—gone; bädhayä—distress; sarväbhiù—by all; gopikäbhiù—the gopés; ca—and; püjitaù—worshiped; abhüt—became; tadä—then; uddhavaù—Uddhava.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these words, Rädhä became relieved. Then all the gopés worshiped Uddhava.

Text 24

natvä pradakñiëé-kåtya
     rädhäà räseçvaréà param
gopé-gaëam anujïäpya
     natvä natvä punaù punaù

     natvä—bowing; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; rädhäm—Rädhä; räseçvarém—the queen of the rasa-dance; param—great; gopé-gaëam—the gopés; anujïäpya—taking permission; natvä—bowing; natvä—and bowing; punaù—again; punaù—and again.

     Then He bowed down before Çré Rädhä, the queen of the räsa-dance, and then He circumambulated Her. Then He bowed down again and again and again and again before all the gopés and asked them for permission to depart.

Text 25

ratham äruhya divyäbhaà
     ratna-bhüñaëa-bhüñitam
gata-bhåtyäbhimäno 'sau
     sandhyäyäà nandam äyayau

     ratham—the chariot; äruhya—mounting; divyäbham—splendid; ratna-bhüñaëa-bhüñitam—decorated with jewels; gata—gone; bhåtya—of being a servant; abhimänaù—pride; asau—he; sandhyäyäm—at sunrise; nandam—to Nanda; äyayau—went.

     Mounting his splendid jewel chariot, and his pride in being a great servant of Lord Kåñëa now gone, Uddhava came at sunrise to Nanda's home.

Text 26

märtaëòa udayaà präpte
     natvä gopéà yaçomatém
nanda-räjam anujïäpya
     nava-nandäàs tadoddhavaù

     märtaëòa—the sun; udayam—rising; präpte—attained; natvä—bowing; gopém—to the gopé; yaçomatém—Yaçodä; nanda-räjam—to King Nanda; anujïäpya—taking permission; nava-nandän—the nine Nandas; tadä—then; uddhavaù—Uddhava.

     As the sun rose, uddhava bowed down before the gopé Yaçoda, King Nanda, and the nine Nandas. Then Uddhava asked for permission to depart.

Text 27

våñabhänüpanandäàç ca
     samanujïäpya lokataù
tathä kåñëa-sakhén sarvän
     ratham äruhya nirgataù

     våñabhänu—the Våñabhänus; upandän—the Upanandas; ca—and; samanujïäpya—taking permission; lokataù—completely; tathä—then; kåñëa-sakhén—Kåñëa's friends; sarvän—all; ratham—chariot; äruhya—climbing; nirgataù—left.

     Taking permission from the Våñabhänus, the Upanandas, and all of Lord Kåñëa's friends, Uddhava mounted his chariot and left.

Text 28

düraà tam anugäù sarve
     gopä gopé-gaëäs tathä
sa nivåttyätha tän snehäd
     uddhavo mathuräà yayau

     düram—far; tam—him; anugäù—following; sarve—all; gopä—the gopas; gopé-gaëäù—the gopés; tathä—then; sa—he; nivåttya—turning away; atha—then; tän—from them; snehät—out of love; uddhavaù—Uddhava; mathuräm—to Mathurä; yayau—went.

     The gopas and gopé followed him for a long time. Then, out of love for them leaving them behind, Uddhava went to Mathurä.

Text 29

ekänte cäkñaya-vaöe
     kåñëä-tére manohare
natvä kåñëaà parikramya
     prema-gadgadayä girä präha sravan-netra-padma 
     uddhavo buddhi-sattamaù

     ekänte—solitary; ca—and; akñaya-vaöe—an immortal banyan tree; kåñëä-tére—on the Yamunä's shore; manohare—beautiful; natvä—bowing; kåñëam—to Lord Kåñëa; parikramya—circumambulating; prema-gadgadayä—choked with love; girä—with words; präha—said; sravan-netra-padmaù—tears flowing from his lotus eyes; uddhavaù—Uddhava; buddhi-sattamaù—the best of the wise.

     Under an immortal banyan tree by the Yamunä's beautiful shore, Uddhava bowed down and before Lord Kåñëa and then circumambulated Him. Tears flowing from his lotus eyes, Uddhava, the best of the wise, spoke in a voice choked with love.

Text 30

çré-uddhava uväca 
kià deva kathanéyaà me
     bhavato 'çeña-säkñiëaù
vidhatsva çaà rädhikäyä
     gopénäà dehi darçanam

     çré-uddhava uväca—Çré Uddhava said; kim—what?; deva—O Lord; kathanéyam—may be said; me—by me; bhavataù—of You; açeña—of all; säkñiëaù—the witness; vidhatsva—please give; çam—happiness; rädhikäyä—of Rädhä; gopénäm—of the gopés; dehi—give; darçanam—the sight.

     Çré Uddhava said: O Lord, what can I say to You, the witness that sees everything? Please give happiness to Rädhä and the gopés. Please allow them to see You.

Text 31

çré-kåñëaà deva-deveçaà
     samäneñye taväntikam
itthaà väkyaà ca me bhütaà
     rakña rakña kåpä-nidhe

     çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; deva-deveçam—the master of the masters of the demigods; samäneñye—I will bring; taväntikam—to You; ittham—thus; väkyam—the words; ca—and; me—of me; bhütam—were; rakña—please protect; rakña—please protect; kåpä-nidhe—O ocean of mercy.

     I said to Rädhä, "I will bring Lord Kåñëa, the master of the masters of the demigods, to You." O ocean of mercy, please protect, protect my words.

Text 32

prahläda-rukmäìgadayoù pratijïäà
     baleç ca khatvaìga-nåpasya säkñät
yathämbaréña-dhruvayos tathä me
     kåtä ca bhakteçvara rakña rakña 
     prahläda—of Prahläda; rukmäìgadayoù—of Rakumäìgada; pratijïäm—the promise; baleù—of Bali; ca—and;  khatvaìga-nåpasya—of King Khatvanga; säkñät—directly; yathä—as; ambaréña—of Ambarisa; dhruvayoù—pf Dhruva; tathä—so; me—of me; kåtä—done; ca—and; bhakteçvara—O king of the devotees; rakña—protect; rakña—protect. 

     O master of the devotees, as You protected the promises of Prahläda, Rukmäìgada, Bali, King Khaövaìga, Ambaréña, and Dhruva, please protect, please protect the promise I made.
.pa

Chapter Nineteen
Çré Kåñëägamanotsava
The Festival on Çré Kåñëa Return

Text 1

itthaà niçamya bhaktasya
     vacanaà bhakta-vatsalaù
småtvä väkyaà sva-kathitaà
     gantuà cakre 'cyuto matim

     ittham—thus; niçamya—hearing; bhaktasya—of His devotee; vacanam—the words; bhakta-vatsalaù—kind to the devotees; småtvä—remembering; väkyam—words; sva-kathitam—spoken by Himself; gantum—to go; cakre—did; acyutaù—the infallible Lord; matim—His mind.

     Listening to the words of His devotee, and remembering His own promise, Lord Kåñëa, the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead, who loves His devotees, made up His mind to go to Vraja.

Texts 2 and 3

baladevaà sthäpyitvä
     kärya-bhäreñu sarvataù
hemäòhyaà kiìkiëé-jälaà
     caïcaläçva-niyojitam

ratham äruhya süryäbhaà
     uddhavena samanvitaù
bhaktänäà darçanaà dätuà
     präyayau nanda-gokulam

     baladevam—Balaräma; sthäpyitvä—placing; kärya-bhäreñu—in the duties; sarvataù—in all respects; hemäòhyam—opulent with gold; kiìkiëé-jälam—a network of tinkling ornaments; caïcala—eager to go; açva—horses; niyojitam—yoked; ratham—chariot; äruhya—mounting; süryäbham—splendid as the sun; uddhavena—with Uddhava; samanvitaù—with; bhaktänäm—of the devotees; darçanam—the sight; dätum—to give; präyayau—went; nanda-gokulam—to Nanda's Gokula.

     Entrusting all His duties to Balaräma, and mounting a chariot rich with tinkling golden ornaments and yoked to eager horses, Kåñëa went with Uddhava to Nanda's Gokula to meet His devotees.

Text 4

govardhanaà gokulaà ca
     paçyan våndävanaà vanam
präpto 'bhüt puline kåñëo
     kåñëä-tére manohare

     govardhanam—Govardhana; gokulam—Gokula; ca—and; paçyan—seeing; våndävanam—Våndävana; vanam—forest; präptaù—attained; abhüt—did; puline—on the shore; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; kåñëä-tére—on the Yamunä's shore; manohare—beautiful.

     Seeing Govardhana and Gokula as He went, Kåñëa came to the Yamunä's beautiful shore by Våndävana forest.

Text 5

koöiçaù koöiço gävo
     dåñövä kåñëaà vrajädhipam
ädhävantyaù sarvatas taà
     sneha-snuta-payodharäù

     koöiçaù—millions; koöiçaù—and millions; gävaù—of cows; dåñövä—seeing; kåñëam—Kåñëa; vrajädhipam—the king of Vraja; ädhävantyaù—running; sarvataù—everywhere; tam—Him; sneha—out of love; snuta—flowing; payodharäh——udders.

     As soon as they saw Him, from all directions millions and millions of cows, milk dripping from their udders out of love, ran to Kåñëa, the king of Vraja.

Texts 6 and 7

udäsya-karëa-väläàç ca
     rambhamänäù sa-vatsakäù
mukhe kavala-samyuktä
     açru-mukhyo gata-vyathäù

sa-rathaà säruëaà säçvaà
     çarad-arkaà yathä ghanäù
rurudhus taà rathaà räjann
     uddhavasya prapaçyataù

     ut—raised; äsya—faces; karëa—ears; väläù—tails; ca—and; rambhamänäù—mooing; sa-vatsakäù—with calves; mukhe—in the mouth; kavala-samyuktä—with a mouthful; açru-mukhyaù—tears in their eyes; gata-vyathäù—their unhappinesses gone; sa-ratham—with his chariot; säruëam—with the aruëas; säçvam—with his horses; çarad-arkam—the autumn sun; yathä—as; ghanaù—clouds; rurudhuù—stopped; tam—that; ratham—chariot; räjann—O king; uddhavasya—as Uddhava; prapaçyataù—looked.

     As Uddhava watched, the mooing cows and calves, their faces, ears, and tails erect, the cud still in their mouths, and their sufferings now gone, blocked the chariot, as autumn clouds block the sun-god, riding in his chariot pulled by many horses and accompanied by the aruëas.

Text 8

çré-gopälo haris täsäà
     vadan näma påthak påthak
çré-hastena tad-aìgäni
     spåçan harñaà jagäma ha

     çré-gopälaù—the protector of the cows; hariù—Kåñëa; täsäm—of them; vadan—saying; näma—the name; påthak—one; påthak—by one; çré-hastena—with His hand; tad-aìgäni—their bodies; spåçan—touching; harñam—happiness; jagäma—attained; ha—indeed.

     Then Lord Kåñëa, the protector of the cows, called each cow by name. Touching them with His glorious hand, He became happy.

Text 9

tat-samépe gaväà våndaà
     gataà vékñya vrajärbhakäù
çrédämädyä vismitäç ca
     düräd ücuù parasparam

     tat-samépe—near Him; gaväm—of cows; våndam—the multitude; gatam—gone; vékñya—seeing; vrajärbhakäù—the boys of Vraja; çrédämädyä—headed by Çrédämä; vismitäù—surprised; ca—and; dürät—from afar; ücuù—said; parasparam—among themselves.

     Seeing the cows clustered around the chariot, the gopas headed by Çrédämä became filled with wonder and spoke among themselves.

Text 10

çré-gopä ücuù 
rathaà sa-kumbha-dhvaja-väyu-vegaà
     su-käàsya-patra-dhvani-niùsvanaà tam
çatäçva-yuktaà çata-sürya-çobhaà
     gävaù kathaà vä rurudhuù sakhäyaù

     çré-gopä ücuù—the gopas said; ratham—chariot; sa-kumbha—with a canopy; dhvaja—flag; väyu—wind; vegam—fast; su-kaàsya-patra-dhvani-niùsvanam—making a rumbling sound; tam—that; çatäçva-yuktam—with a hundred horses; çata-sürya-çobham—splendid as a hundred suns; gävaù—cows; katham—how?; vä—or; rurudhuù—stopped; sakhäyaù—O friends.

     The gopas said: O friends, how is it possible that these cows have stopped such a chariot decorated with with canopy and flag, splendid as a hundred suns, and making a great rumbling sound as, pulled by a hundred horses, it goes as fast as the wind?

Text 11

anyo na cäsmin hi gaväà praharñaëair
     äyäti kintu vraja-räja-nandanaù
sphuranti cäìgäni hi dakñiëäni naù
     çré-nélakaëöhaù pratanoti toraëam

     anyaù—another; na—not; ca—and; asmin—in this; hi—indeed; gaväm—of cows; praharñaëaiù—with the joys; äyäti—goes; kintu—however; vraja-räja-nandanaù—the prince of Vraja; sphuranti—trembles; ca—and; aìgäni—the limbs; hi—indeed; dakñiëäni—right; naù—of us; çré-nélakaëöhaù—the peacock; pratanoti—extends; toraëam—arched gateway.

     This is none other than Çré Kåñëa, the prince of Vraja, that has come. The cows are filled with happiness. Our bodies tremble on the left side, an auspicious sign. The peacock has made an arch for Kåñëa to pass under.

Text 12

çré-närada uväca 
itthaà vicärya manasä
     gopäù sarve samägatäù
dadåçur mädhavaà mitraà
     gataà vastu yathä janäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; vicärya—considering; manasä—with the mind; gopäù—teh gopas; sarve—all; samägatäù—cane; dadåçuù—saw; mädhavam—Kåñëa; mitram—friend; gatam—come; vastu—in truth; yathä—as; janäù—the people.

     Çré Närada said: Thinking in this way, all the gopas went and saw their friend Kåñëa. They gazed on Him as people who have suddenly realized the truth.

Text 13

avaplutya rathät kåñëaù
     paripürëatamaù svayam
puro nidhäya tän sarvän
     dorbhyäà tat-prema-vihvalaù

     avaplutya—jumping; rathät—from the chariot; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—Himself; puraù—before; nidhäya—placing; tän—them; sarvän—all; dorbhyäm—with both arms; tat-prema-vihvalah—overcome with love.

     The Lord Kåñëa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, jumped from the chariot and, overcome with love, embraced them all.

Text 14

muïcan neträbja-väréëi
     parirebhe påthak påthak
aho bhakteç ca mähätmyaà
     vaktuà ko 'sti mahé-tale

     muïcan—shedding; neträbja-väréëi—tears from His lotus eyes; parirebhe—rembaced; påthak—one; påthak—by one; ahaù—Oh; bhakteù—of devotion; ca—and; mähätmyam—the glory; vaktum—to say; kaù—who?; asti—is; mahé-tale—on the earth.

     Shedding tears from His lotus eyes, He embraced them all, one by one. Who in this world can describe the love they all felt?

Text 15

te sarve rurudur gopä
     muïcanto 'çrüni maithila
pravaktuà na samärthäù çré-
     kåñëa-vikñepa-vihvaläù

     te—they; sarve—all; ruruduù—wept; gopä—gopas; muïcantaù—shedding; açrüni—tears; maithila—O king of Mithilä; pravaktum—to speak; na—not; samärthäù—able; çré-kåñëa-vikñepa-vihvaläù—overcome with love for Çré Kåñëa.

     O king of Mithilä, all the gopas wept, shedding tears. Trembling with love for Kåñëa, they could not speak.

Text 16

paripürëatamaù säkñäd
     devo madhurayä girä
äçväsayäm äsa natän
     premänanda-samakulän

     paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; devaù—the Lord; madhurayä—with sweet; girä—words; äçväsayäm äsa—comforted; natän—bowed down; prema—of love; änanda—with the bliss; samakulän—overcome.

     With sweet words the Supreme Personality of Godhead comforted the gopas, who were all overwhelmed with the bliss of love.

Text 17

uddhavo preñito vaktuà
     çré-kåñëenärbhakaiù saha
ägataà kathayäm äsa
     çré-kåñëaà nanda-paööane

     uddhavaù—Uddhava; preñitaù—sent; vaktum—to speak; çré-kåñëena—with Kåñëa; arbhakaiù—the boys; saha—with; ägatam—come; kathayäm äsa—told; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; nanda-paööane—in Nanda's village.

     Then Kåñëa and the boys sent Uddhava into Nanda's village to say that Çré Kåñëa had returned.

Text 18

çrutvägataà nanda-sünuà
     çré-kåñëaà gopa-vallabham
änetuà nirgatäù sarve
     paripürëa-manorathäù

     çrutvä—hearing; ägatam—returned; nanda-sünum—Nanda's son; çré-kåñëam—Kåñëa; gopa-vallabham—the dear friend of the gopas; änetum—to bring; nirgatäù—left; sarve—a; paripürëa-manorathäù—their desires fulfilled.

     Hearing that Kåñëa, the son of Nanda and the dear friend of the gopas, had returned, everyone, now their desires all fuflilled, left the village to escort Him back.

Text 19

bheré-mådaìgaiù paöahaiù kala-svanair
     äpürëa-kumbhair dvija-veda-ghoñaëaiù     gandhäkñatair maìgala-läja-miçritaiù
     çré-nanda-räjo 'bhiyayau yaçodayä

     bheré-mådaìgaiù—with bheris and mrdangas; paöahaiù—with patahas; kala-svanaiù—with the sweet sounds; äpürëa-kumbhaiù—with full pots; dvija—brähmaëas; veda—of the Vedas; ghoñaëaiù—with sounds; gandha—fragrances; akñataiù—unhusked grains of rice; maìgala—auspicious; läja—with fried grains; miçritaiù—mixed; çré-nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; abhiyayau—went; yaçodayä—with Yaçodä.

     Accompanied by the sweet sounds of bherés, mådaìgas, paöahas, and brähmaëas chanting Vedic mantras, and bringing full waterpots and auspicious fried rice mixed with raw and unhusked rice, King Nanda and Yaçodä-devé came to meet Kåñëa.

Text 20

tataù puraskåtya madonnataà gajaà
     sindüra-çuëòä-dhåta-hema-çåìkhalam
samäyayau çré-våñabhänu-mukhyo
     bhävän kåtis tatra kalävaté-yutaù

     tataù—then; puraskåtya—coming before; mada—intoxicated; unnatam—great; gajam—elephant; sindüra-çuëòä-dhåta—its trunk anointed with red sindura; hema-çåìkhalam—with gold ornaments; samäyayau—came; çré-våñabhänu-mukhyaù—King Våñabhänu; bhävän—bring; kåtiù—piety;; tatra—there; kalävaté-yutäù—with Kalävati.

     With a great intoxicated elephant shackled with golden links and its trunk decorated with red sindüra preceding them, King Våñabhänu and his queen Kalävati also came to meet Kåñëa.

Text 21

nandopänandä våñabhänavaç ca
     gopäç ca våddhäs taruëärbhakäç ca
srag-veëu-guïjä-paripiccha-yuktä
     vinirgatäù pürëa-manorathäs te

     nandopänandä—the Nandas and Upanandas; våñabhänavaù—the Våñabhänus; ca—and; gopäù—the gopas; ca—and; våddhäù—adult; taruëa—youths; arbhakäù—boys; ca—and; srak—gfarlands; veëu—flutes; guïjä—gunjas; paripiccha—peacock feathers; yuktä—with; vinirgatäù—came; pürëa-manorathäù—their desires fulfilled; te—they.

     Carrying garlands, flutes, guïjä, and peacock feathers, and their desires now fulfilled, the young, adolescent, and adult gopas also came to meet Kåñëa.

Text 22

gäyanta ärän nåpa-nanda-nandanaà
     nåtyanta äcälita-péta-väsasaù
vaàçé-dharä vetra-viñäëa-päëayaù
     praharñitä darçana-lälasä bhåçam

     gäyantaù—singing; ärän—near; nåpa-nanda-nandanam—the son of King Nanda; nåtyantaù—dancing; äcälita—moving; péta—yellow; väsasaù—garments; vaàçé-dharä—holding a flute; vetra—a stick; viñäëa—a buffalo horn bugle; päëayaù—in hand; praharñitä—delighted; darçana-lälasä—yearning to see Him; bhåçam—greatly.

     Flutes, sticks, and bugles in their hands, very happy, and eager to see Kåñëa, the gopas sang and danced, shaking their yellow garments.

Text 23

sakhé-mukhebhyo harim ägataà paraà
     niçamya rädhä-çayanät samutthitä
täbhyaù sva-bhüñäù pradadau praharñitä
     prétä sva-gandhià nava-padminé yathä

     sakhé-mukhebhyaù—from the mouths of Her gopé friends; harim—to Kåñëa; ägatam—come; param—great; niçamya—hearing; rädhä—Rädhä; çayanät—from bed; samutthitä—risen; täbhyaù—to them; sva-bhüñäù—own ornaments; pradadau—gave; praharñitä—happy; prétä—pleased; sva-gandhim—own scent; nava-padminé—a new lotus; yathä—as.

     Hearing from Her friends' mouths that Kåñëa had returned, Rädhä at once rose from bed and, pleased with them as a new lotus is pleased with its own sweet fragrance, at once gave them Her own ornaments.

Text 24

dva-triàçad añöau kila ñoòaça dve
     yüthair yutä maithila gopikänäm
äruhya rädhä çibikäà manojïäà
     samäyayau çrédhara-darçanärtham

     dva-triàçat—thirty-two; añöau—eight; kila—indeed; ñoòaça—sixteen; dve—two; yüthaiù—groups; yutä—endowed; maithila—O king of Mithilä; gopikänäm—of gopés; äruhya—climbing; rädhä—Rädhä; çibikäm—a palanquin; manojïäm—beautiful; samäyayau—went; çrédhara-darçanärtham—to see Lord Kåñëa, the husband of the godess of fortune.

     O king of Mithilä, accompanied by thirty-two, eight, and sixteen groups of gopés, Rädhä rode on a beautiful palanquin to see Lord Kåñëa, the husband of the goddess of fortune.

Text 25

tathä hi gopyaù kila koöiçaç ca
     tyaktvätha sarvaà sva-gåhasya kåtyam
vyatyasta-vasträbharaëä nåpeça
     samäyayuù prema-calan-mano-'ìgäù

     tathä—then; hi—indeed; gopyaù—gopés; kila—indeed; koöisaù—millions; ca—and; tyaktvä—abandoning; atha—then; sarvam—everything; sva-gåhasya—of their own homes; kåtyam—the duties; vyatyasta—in disarray; vastra—garments; äbharaëäù—and ornaments; nåpeça—O king; samäyayuù—came; prema—with love; calat—trembling; manaù—hearts; aìgäù—and limbs.

     O king of kings, leaving their household duties undone, their garments and ornaments in disarray, and their hearts and limbs trembling with love, millions of gopés came to meet Kåñëa.

Text 26

sarvaà vrajaà pädapa-go-måga-dvijaà
     premäturaà vékñya samägataà kim u
çré-nanda-räjaà pitaraà ca mätaraà
     nanäma kåñëaù kåta-mastakäïjaliù

     sarvam—all; vrajam—Vraja; pädapa—trees; gaù—cows; måga—deer; dvijam—and birds; premäturam—overcome with love; vékñya—seeing; samägatam—come; kim u—how much more?; çré-nanda-räjam—King Nanda; pitaram—father; ca—and; mätaram—mother; nanäma—bowed down; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; kåta-mastakäïjaliù—placing folded hands to His forehead.

     Kåñëa glanced at the trees, cows, deer, birds, and all the living entities in Vraja. Filled with love, they had come to meet Him. Seeing His father King Nanda and His mother Yaçodä, Lord Kåñëa placed His folded palms to His forehead and bowed down before them.

Text 27

çré-nanda-räjas tanayaà cirägataà
     pragåhya dorbhyäà hådaye nidhäya tam
saàsnäpayäm äsa su-netrajair jalair
     yaçodayä präpta-manorathaç cirät

     çré-nanda-räjaù—King Nanda; tanayam—his son; cira—after a long time; ägatam—come; pragåhya—embracing; dorbhyäm—with both arms; hådaye—to his heart; nidhäya—placing; tam—Him; saàsnäpayäm äsa—bathed; su-netrajaiù—with tears from his eyes; jalaiù—with water; yaçodayä—with Yaçodä; präpta—attained; manorathaù—desires; cirät—long cherished.

     Their long-cherished desire now fulfilled, King Nanda and Queen Yaçodä embraced their long-absent son, with both arms holding Him to their hearts. They bathed Him with tears from their eyes.

Text 28

nandopänandän våñabhänu-våddhän
     sarvaà namaskåtya ca tat-kåtäçéù
tathä vayasyaiç ca parasparaà vä
     laghüàç ca hasta-grahaëaiù sthito 'bhüt

     nandopänandän—the Nandas and Upanandas; våñabhänu-våddhän—the great Våñabhänus; sarvam—all; namaskåtya—bvowing down; ca—and; tat-kåtäçéù—their blessings; tathä—then; vayasyaiù—with His friends; ca—and; parasparam—together; vä—or; laghün—younger; ca—and; hasta—hands; grahaëaiù—holding; sthitaù—stood; abhüt—was.

     Lord Kåñëa bowed down before the Nandas, Upanandas, and Våñabhänus and respectfully received their blessings. Then He grasped the hands of the boys His age and younger.

Text 29

tataù samäruhya rathaà hariù svayaà
     nidhäya nandaà ca gaje yaçodayä
nandopanandaiù sahito gaväà gaëaiù
     çré-nanda-räjasya puraà viveça saù

     tataù—thern; samäruhya—mounting; ratham—the chariot; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—Himself; nidhäya—placing; nandam—Nanda; ca—and; gaje—on the elephant; yaçodayä—with Yaçodä; nandopanandaiù—with the Nandas and Upanandas; sahitaù—with; gaväm—of tyhe cows; gaëaiù—with the multitudes; çré-nanda-räjasya—of King Nanda; puram—to village; viveça—entered; saù—He.

     Placing King Nanda and Queen Yaçodä on the elephant, and Himself mounting the chariot, in the company of the Nandas, Upanandas, and the great multitude of cows, Lord Kåñëa entered King Nanda's village.

Text 30

tadaiva deväù kila puñpa-varñaà
     äcära-läjän pura-gopikäç ca
pracakrire tatra jayeti maìgalaà
     çabdaà ca gopä gåham ägate harau

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; deväù—the demigods; kila—indeed; puñpa-varñam—a shower of flowers; äcära-läjän—rice; pura-gopikäù—the gopés; ca—and; pracakrire—did; tatra—there; jaya—victory; iti—thus; maìgalam—auspiciousness; çabdam—sound; ca—and; gopä—the gopas; gåham—home; ägate—came; harau—Lord Kåñëa.

     As Kåñëa returned to His home the demigods showered flowers, the gopés showered grains of rice, and the gopas made a great auspicious sound of "Victory!"

Text 31

dhanyaù sakhä te param uddhavo 'yaà
     anena säkñät kila darçito 'tra
tvaà jévanaà gopa-janasya gopä
     ücur girä gadgadayedam ärtäù

     dhanyaù—fortunate; sakhä—friend; te—they; param—then; uddhavaù—Uddhava; ayam—he; anena—by him; säkñät—directly; kila—indeed; darçitaù—shown; atra—here; tvam—You; jévanam—the life; gopa-janasya—of the gopas; gopä—the gopas; ücuù—said; girä—with words; gadgadayä—choked with emotion; idam—this; ärtäù—overcome.

     With voices choked with emotion, the gopas said to Kåñëa, "Your friend Uddhava is a great saint. He has shown to us You, the life of all the gopas."

Text 32

idaà mayä te kathitaà nåpeça
     punar vraje hy ägamanaà hareç ca
kim icchasi çrotum atho suräsuraiù
     paraà caritraà çubhadaà vicitram

     idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; nåpeça—O kin gof kings; punaù—again; vraje—in Vraja; hi—indeed; ägamanam—coming; hareù—of Kåñëa; ca—and; kim—what?; icchasi—you wish; çrotum—to hear; athaù—then; suräsuraiù—by the demigods and demons; param—transcendental; caritram—pastimes; çubhadam—auspicious; vicitram—wonderful.

     O king of kings, now I have described to you Lord Kåñëa's return to Vraja. Lord Kåñëa's wonderful and transcendental pastimes brings auspiciousness to both the demigods and demons. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Twenty
Çré Räsotsave Åbhu-mokña
The Liberation of Åbhu Muni During the Räsa-dance Festival

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca

agre cakära kià säkñäd
     bhagavän vraja-maëòale
rädhäyai gopikäbhyäç ca
     kathaàsvid darçanaà dadau

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; agre—before; cakära—did; kim—what?; säkñät—directly; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vraja-maëòale—in the circle of Vraja; rädhäyai—to Rädhä; gopikäbhyäù—to the gopés; ca—and; kathaàsvit—somehow; darçanam—sight; dadau—gave.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: What did the Supreme Lord do in the circle of Vraja? How did He meet with Rädhä and the gopés?

Text 2

gopé-manorathaà kåtvä
     mathuräm äjagäma ha
etan me brühi viprendra
     tvaà parävara-vittamaù

     gopé—of the gopés; manoratham—the desire; kåtvä—fulfilling; mathuräm—to Mathurä; äjagäma—retyurned; ha—indeed; etan—that; me—to me; brühi—please tell; viprendra—O king of the brähmaëas; tvam—you; parävara-vittamaù—the best of the all-knowing.

     The Lord fulfilled the gopés' desires and then returned to Mathurä. You are the best of the wise. O king of the brähmaëas, please tell me this.

Text 3

çré-närada uväca 
sandhyäyäà rädhayähütaù
     çré-kåñëo bhagavän svayam
ekänte çétalaà çaçvaj
     jagäma kadalé-vanam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; sandhyäyäm—at sunset; rädhayä—by Rädhä; ähütaù—ca;;ed; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—personally; ekänte—in s private place; çétalam—cool; çaçvat—always; jagäma—went; kadalé-vanam—the forest of banana trees.

     Çré Närada said: Called there by Rädhä, Çré Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, went at sunset to a secluded and always pleasantly cool banana-tree forest.

Text 4

sphära-sphuran-megha-gåhaà
     rambhä-candana-carcitam
kåñëä-marut-sékaraà ca
     sudhäraçmi-galat-sudhäm

     sphära-sphuran-megha-gåham—the home of a great and splendid cloud; rambhä—banana trees; candana—sandal; carcitam—anointed; kåñëä—of the Yamunä; marut—breeze; sékaram—mist; ca—and; sudhä-raçmi-galat-sudhäm—bringing the sweetest nectar of the moon.

     That forest was like a palace that had great splendid clouds for a roof and banana trees for sandal-anointed walls. A breeze filled that place with mist from the Yamunä and the moonlight filled it with the sweetest nectar.

Text 5

etädåçaà vanaà rädhä
     viyogänala-varcasä
bhasmé-bhütaà hi satataà
     kåñëäçä täà hi rakñati

     etadåçam—like this; vanam—the forest; rädhä—Rädhä; viyogänala-varcasä—with the flames of separation; bhasmé-bhütam—burned to ashes; hi—indeed; satatam—always; kåñëäçä—the hop to attain Kåñëa; täm—Her; hi—indeed; rakñati—protects.

     Rädhä would many times have burned that forest to ashes with the flames of Her distress in Lord Kåñëa's absence. It was only the hope that She would again meet Kåñëa that prevented Her.

Text 6

tatraiva sarve gopénäà
     çata-yüthäù samägatäù
tasyai nivedanaà cakrur
     mädhavägamanasya hi

     tatra—there; eva—indeed; sarve—all; gopénäm—of the gs; çata-yüthäù—a hundred groups; samägatäù—came; tasyai—to Her; nivedanam—information; cakruù—did; mädhavägamanasya—of Kåñëa's arrival; hi—indeed.

     Then a hundred groups of gopés came there and informed Her that Kåñëa had come.

Text 7

utthäya sahasä säkñäd
     våñabhänu-varätmajä
änetum äyayau kåñëaà
     sakhébhiù pariväritä

     utthäya—rising; sahasä—at once; säkñät—directly; våñabhänu-varätmajä—Rädhä, the daughter of King Våñabhänu; änetum—to bring; äyayau—came; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; sakhébhiù—with friends; pariväritä—accompanied.

     Çré Rädhä, the daughter of King Våñabhänu, stood up at once. Accompanied by Her friends, She went to meet Kåñëa.

Text 8

dadäv äsana-padyärghän
     upacärän manoharän
vadanté sädaraà väkyaà
     kuçalaà kuçalädhikä

     dadau—gave; äsana—a seat; padya—padya; arghän—argha; upacärän—offerings; manoharän—beautiful; vadanté—saying; sädaram—with respect; väkyam—words; kuçalam—beautiful; kuçalädhikä—beautiful.

     Speaking sweet and reverential words, sublimely beautiful Rädhä gave Him a seat and offered Him padya, arghya, and many kinds of beautiful offerings.

Text 9

yuva-kandarpa-koöénäà
     mädhurya-häriëaà harim
dåñövä rädhä jahau duùkhaà
     brahma jïätvä guëaà yathä

     yuva—youthful; kandarpa—Kämadevas; koöénäm—of millions; mädhurya-häriëam—eclipsing the charm; harim—Kåñëa; dåñövä—seeing; rädhä—Rädhä; jahau—abandoned; duùkham—unhappiness; brahma—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; jïätvä—understanding; guëam—the modes of nature; yathä—as.

     Gazing at Lord Kåñëa, who eclipses the charms of many millions of youthful Kämadevas, Rädhä became free of all distress. She was like a yogé who, at last understanding the nature of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, becomes free from the influence of the the material modes of nature.

Text 10

prasannä tatra çåìgäraà
     akarot kérti-nandiné
tayä no 'käri çåìgäraù
     panthe kåñëe gate sati

     prasannä—pleased; tatra—there; çåìgäram—decoration; akarot—did; kérti-nandiné—Rädhä; tayä—by Her; naù—not; akäri—did; çåìgäraù—decoration; panthe—on the path; kåñëe—when Kåñëa; gate sati—went.

     Çré Rädhä, the daughter of Kérti-devé, was very happy. She had nicely decorated Herself. She had not decorated Herself since Kåñëa left, traveling on the road to Mathurä.

Text 11

na candanaà ca tämbülaà
     bhojanaà ca sudhä-samam
na kåtaà divya-çayanaà
     hasyaà vä na kåtaà kvacit

     na—not; candanam—sandal paste; ca—and; tämbülam—betelnuts; bhojanam—nice food; ca—and; sudhä-samam—like nectar; na—not; kåtam—done; divya-çayanam—a nice bed; hasyam—joking; vä—or; na—not; kåtam—done; kvacit—ever.

     In Lord Kåñëa's absence She never anointed Herself with sandal paste, chewed betelnuts, ate food sweet as nectar, slept on a comfortable bed, or joked and laughed.

Text 12

paripürëatamaà kåñëaà
     paripürëatama-priyä
änandäçrüni muïcanté
     präha gadgadayä girä

     paripürëatamam—the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead; kåñëam—Lord Kåñëa; paripürëatama-priyä—the beloved of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; änandäçrüni—tears of happiness; muïcanté—shedding; präha—spoke; gadgadayä—choked up; girä—with words.

     Shedding tears of bliss, Çré Rädhä, the beloved of the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, spoke words choked with emotion to Lord Kåñëa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 13

çré-rädhoväca 
kiyad düre yadu-puré
     nägataà kià karoñi hi
kià vande 'haà raho duùkhaà
     bhavato 'çeña-säkñiëaù

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; kiyat—how?; düre—far; yadu-puré—the city of the Yädavas; na—not; ägatam—come; kim—whether?; karoñi—You do; hi—indeed; kim—whether; vande—I offer obeisances; aham—I; rahaù—in a secluded place; duùkham—suffering; bhavataù—of You; açeña—of all; säkñiëaù—the witness.

     Çré Rädhä said: Why did You stay so long in the city of the Yädavas? Why did You not come sooner? Why again and again in a secluded place did I have to bow down before You and pray to You, who are the witness that sees everything?

Text 14

saudäsa-räja-mahiñé
     damayanté ca maithilé
nästy atra käà puraskåtya
     vade 'haà virahaà ripum

     saudäsa-räja-mahiñé—the queen of King Saudasa; damayanté—Damayanti; ca—and; maithilé—Sétä-devé; na—not; asti—is; atra—here; käm—what?; puraskåtya—before; vade—speak; aham—I; viraham—separation; ripum—enemy.

     Neither Sétä-devé, Damayanté, nor Saudäsa-räjïé suffered as I suffered. What words can I speak to describe the implacable enemy that was My separation from You?

Text 15

mat-samänäçrayä gopyo
     gadituà na kñamäù kvacit
sarac-candra-cakoréva
     mayüréva ghanaà navam

     mat-samäna—like me; äçrayä—taken shelter; gopyaù—gopés; gaditum—to speak; na—not; kñamäù—able; kvacit—at all; sarat—autumn; candra—moon; cakoré—cakori bird; iva—like; mayüré—peahen; iva—like; ghanam—a cloud; navam—new.

     The other gopés, like Me, also could not describe that enemy of separation. I was like a cakoré bird yearning for the moon, or a peahen yearning for the new monsoon cloud.

Text 16

çré-våndävana-candraà tväà
     ghana-çyämaà samutsahe
tava säkhyoddhavenäçu
     dhanyena tvaà pradarçitaù anyaù ko 'pi vraje nästi      yasya premëä tvam ägataù

     çré-våndävana—of Çré Våndävana; candram—the moon; tväm—You; ghana-çyämam—dark as a cloud; samutsahe—eager; tava—of You; sakhya—with the friend; uddhavena—Uddhava; äçu—at once; dhanyena—saintly; tvam—You; pradarçitaù—showed; anyaù—another; ko 'pi—someone; vraje—in Vraja; na—not; asti—is; yasya—of whom; premëä—the love; tvam—You; ägataù—returned.

     I yearned to see You, splendid as a dark cloud, the moon of beautiful Våndävana forest, and Your saintly friend Uddhava showed You to Me. No one in Vraja is his equal. His love brought You back.

Text 17

çré-närada uväca 
evaà vadantéà satataà rudantéà
     paräà priyäà vékñya ghåëäturäìgaù
äçväsayäm äsa nayena sadyaù
     pragåhya dorbhyäà sravad-ambu-netraù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; vadantém—speaking; satatam—again and again; rudantém—weeping; paräm—greatly; priyäm—beloved; vékñya—seeing; ghåëäturäìgaù—all the limbs of His body filled with compassion; äçväsayäm äsa—comforted; nayena—with logic; sadyaù—at once; pragåhya—embracing; dorbhyäm—with both arms; sravad-ambu-netraù—tears flowing from His eyes.

     Çré Närada said: As Rädhä spoke in this way and wept, Lord Kåñëa gazed at Her, His dearest beloved. Every limb of His body filled with compassion for Her, He comforted Her with eloquent words. Tears streaming from His eyes, He embraced Her with both arms.

Text 18

çré-bhagavän uväca 

mä çokaà kuru rädhe tvaà
     tvat-prétyähaà samägataù
ävayor bheda-rahitaà
     tejaç caikaà dvidhä janaiù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; mä—don't; çokam—lament; kuru—do; rädhe—O Rädhä; tvam—You; tvat-prétyä—with love for You; aham—I; samägataù—come; ävayoù—of Us; bheda-rahitam—without difference; tejaù—fiure; ca—and; ekam—one; dvidhä—in two; janaiù—by the people.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O Rädhä, don't lament. Out of love for You, I have come. You and I are not different. We are a single fire the people mistake for two different flames.

Text 19

yathä hi dugdha-dhävalye
     tathäväà sarvadä çubhe
yaträhaà tvaà sadä tatra
     viçleño na hi cävayoù

     yathä—as; hi—indeed; dugdha—milk; dhävalye—and whiteness; tathä—so; aväm—We; sarvadä—always; çubhe—O beautiful one; yatra—where; aham—I; tvam—You; sadä—always; tatra—there; viçleñaù—separation; na—not; hi—indeed; ca—and; ävayoù—of Us.

     O beautiful one, as milk and its whiteness are always together, so are We always together. Wherever I am, You are also there. We can never be separated.

Text 20

pürëaà brahma paraà cähaà
     taöa-sthä tvaà jagat-prasüù
viçleña ävayor madhye
     måñä jïänena paçya sat

     pürëaà brahma param—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca—and; aham—I; taöa-sthä—My potency; tvam—You; jagat-prasüù—the mother of the universes; viçleñaù—separation; ävayoù—of Us; madhye—in the middle; måñä—false; jïänena—by knowledge; paçya—please see; sat—the truth.

     I am the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead and You are My potency. What seems to be Our separation is a lie. Please see the truth.

Texts 21-23

yathäkäça-sthito nityaà
     väyuù sarvatra-go mahän
tathä jalaà sükñma-rüpaà
     tejo vyaptaà yathaidhañé

antar bahir yathä påthvé
     påthag-bhüta varänane
tathä vikära-rahito
     malavat tri-guëair aham

tathä tvaà paçya mad-bhävaà
     sadänando bhavet tataù
ahaà mameti bhävena
     dvitéyo 'sti varänane

     yathä—as much as; äkäça-sthitaù—situated in space; nityam—always; väyuù—wind; sarvatra-gaù—blowing everywhere; mahän—great; tathä—similarly; jalam—water; sükñma-rüpam—in the subtle form of mist; tejaù—fire; vyaptam—all-pervading; yathä—as; edhañé—in firewood; antaù—within; bahiù—and without; yathä—as; påthvé—the earth; påthag-bhüta—in the form of atoms; varänane—O girl with the beautiful face; tathä—so; vikära-rahitaù—without change; malavat—like the material world; tri-guëaiù—with the three modes; aham—I am; tathä—so; tvam—You; paçya—see; mad-bhävam—My nature; sadänandaù—eternal bliss; bhavet—will be; tataù—then; aham—I; mama—mine; iti—thus; bhävena—with the nature; dvitéyaù—second; asti—is; varänane—O girl with the beautiful face.

     O girl with the beautiful face, as the mighty wind is present everywhere in ethereal space, as water is present everywhere in mist, as fire is present everywhere in firewood, as atoms are present everywhere in earth, and as the modes of nature are present everywhere in the material world, so I, the unchanging Supreme Personality of Godhead, am present everywhere. Look at My real nature and You will be blissful always. O girl with the beautiful face, if You think of "I" and  Mine", then We will be separated.

Text 24

yävad ghano madhya-gatas tad utthitaù
     svaà rüpam arkaà na hi dåk prapaçyati
tävat parätmänam asau prädhäna-jair
     guëais tathä teñu gateñu paçyati

     yävat—as; ghanaù—a cloud; madhya-gataù—in the midst; tat—that; utthitaù—risen; svam—own; rüpam—form; arkam—sun; na—not; hi—indeed; dåk—eyes; prapaçyati—see; tävat—so; parätmänam—the Supersoul; asau—He; prädhäna-jaiù—manifested from pradhana; guëaiù—with the modes; tathä—so; teñu—among them; gateñu—gone; paçyati—sees.

     As one cannot see the sun when there are clouds in the sky, so one cannot see the all-pervading Supreme Personality of Godhead when one stands among the three modes of material nature.

Text 25

guëeñu saktaà kila bandhanäya
     raktaà manaù puàsi ca muktaye syät
mano dvayoù käraëam ähur äräj
     jitvätha tat kau vicared asaìgaù

     guëeñu—for the modes; saktam—attachment; kila—kindeed; bandhanäya—for bondage; raktam—attachment; manaù—of the heart; puàsi—fro the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca—and; muktaye—for liberation; syät—is; manaù—the heart; dvayoù—of both; käraëam—the cause; ähuù—said; äräj—near; jitvä—conquering; atha—then; tat—that; kau—on the earth; vicaret—should consider; asaìgaù—without contact.

     The mind's attraction to the modes of material nature leads to bondage. The mind's attraction to the Supreme Personality of Godhead leads to liberation. In this way the mind is the source of both bondage and liberation. Therefore one should defeat the attraction to matter and live aloof from material things.

Text 26

sarvaà hi bhävaà manasaù parasparaà
     na hy ekato bhämini jäyate tataù
premaiva kartavyam aho mayi svataù
     premëä samänaà bhuvi nästi kiïcit

     sarvam—all; hi—indeed; bhävam—nature; manasaù—of the mind; parasparam—mutual; na—not; hi—indeed; ekataù—alone; bhämini—O beautiful one; jäyate—is born; tataù—then; prema—love; eva—certainly; kartavyam—should be done; ahaù—Oh; mayi—for Me; svataù—personally; premëä—with love; samänam—equal; bhuvi—in the world; na—not; asti—is; kiïcit—anything.

     O beautiful one, love does not exist by itself. It must have an object. One should love Me. In this world nothing is equal to love for Me.

Text 27

çré-närada uväca 

iti väkyaà hareù çrutvä
     prasannä kérti-nandiné
gopikäbhiù samaà kåñëaà
     püjayäm äsa mädhavam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; väkyam—the words; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; çrutvä—hearing; prasannä—happy; kérti-nandiné—Kérti's daughter Rädhä; gopikäbhiù—gopés; samam—with; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; mädhavam—the husband of the goddess of fortune.

     Çré Närada said: Happy to hear these words, Çré Rädhä and the gopés worshiped Lord Kåñëa, the husband of the goddess of fortune.

Text 28

atha rätryäà hariù säkñät
     kärttikyäà räsa-maëòale
gatvä nanäda muraléà
     gopébhé rädhayä saha

     atha—then; rätryäm—at night; hariù—Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; kärttikyäm—in the moth of Karttika; räsa-maëòale—in the rasa dance circle; gatvä—going; nanäda—sounded; muralém—His flute; gopébhé—the gopés; rädhayä—and Rädhä; saha—with.

     During the month of Kärttika entering the räsa-dance circle with Rädhä and the gopés, Lord Kåñëa played His flute.

Text 29

yamunä-nikaöe räjan
     rädhayä rädhikä-patiù
ramäbhiù sundarébhiç ca
     räsa-raìge raräja ha

     yamunä-nikaöe—near the Yamunä; räjan—O king; rädhayä—with Rädhä; rädhikä-patiù—Kåñëa; ramäbhiù—with the gopés; sundarébhiù—beautiful; ca—and; räsa-raìge—in the rasa-dance arena; raräja—shone; ha—indeed.

     O king, in the räsa-dance circle by the Yamunä's shore, Lord Kåñëa, the master of Çré Rädhä, appeared very splendid and glorious in the company of Çré Rädhä and the beautiful gopés.

Text 30

yävatér gopikä räse
     tävad rüpa-dharo hariù
reme våndävane divye
     harir våndävaneçvaraù

     yävatéù—as many; gopikä—gopés; räse—in the rasa danbce; tävat—so many; rüpa-dharaù—forms; hariù—Kåñëa; reme—enjioyed; våndävane—in Våndävana; divye—transcendental; hariù—Kåñëa; våndävaneçvaraù—the master if Våndävana.

     Expanding Himself into as many forms as there were gopés, Lord Kåñëa, the master of Våndävana, enjoyed pastimes in the splendid and transcendental forest of Våndävana.

Text 31

kvaëan-nüpura-maïjéro
     vana-mälä-viräjitaù
pétämbaraù padma-dhäré
     prabhätärka-kiréöa-dhåk

     kvaëan-nüpura-maïjéraù—tinkling anklets and ornaments; vana-mälä-viräjitaù—splendid with forest garland; pétämbaraù—yellow garments; padma-dhäré—holding a lotus; prabhätärka-kiréöa-dhåk—with a crown splendid as the rising sun.

     Wearing tinkling anklets and ornaments, yellow garments, a splendid forest garland, and a crown glorious as the rising sun, Lord Kåñëa held a lotus in His hand.

Text 32

vidyul-latä-sphurat-prodyad-
     dhema-kuëòala-maëòitaù
vetra-bhåd vädayan vaàçéà
     naöa-veño ghana-dyutiù

     vidyut—lighting; latä—vine; sphurat-prodyat—splendid; hema-kuëòala-maëòitaù—decorated with gold earrings; vetra-bhåt—holding a stick; vädayan—playing; vaàçém—flute; naöa-veñaù—dressed as a dancer; ghana-dyutiù—splendid as a cloud.

     Dark as a monsoon cloud, decorated with golden earrings splendid as vines of lightning, dressed as a dancer, and holding a stick, Lord Kåñëa played His flute.

Text 33

sphurat-kaustubha-ratnäòhyaù
     pracalat-snigdha-kuëòalaù
raräja rädhayä räse
     yathä ratyä ratéçvaraù

     sphurat-kaustubha-ratnäòhyaù—glorious with a glistening Kaustubha jewel; pracalat-snigdha-kuëòalaù—with moving locks of glistenign hair; raräja—shone; rädhayä—with Rädhä; räse—in the rasa dance;; yathä—as; ratyä—with rati; ratéçvaraù—Kämadeva.

     Glorious with a glistening Kaustubha jewel and moving glistening locks of hair, Lord Kåñëa was splendidly manifest in the räsa dance, as Kämadeva is splendidly manifest with Rati.

Text 34

çacyä çakro yathä svarge
     ghanaç caïcalayä yathä
våndayä våndakäraëye
     tathä våndävaneçvaraù

     çacyä—with çaci; çakraù—Indra; yathä—as; svarge—in Svargaloka; ghanaù—a cloud; caïcalayä—with lightning; yathä—as; våndayä—woth Våndä; våndakäraëye—in Våndävana; tathä—so; våndävaneçvaraù—the king of Våndävana.

     As in Svargaloka Indra is manifest with Çacé, and as a cloud is manifest with a lightning flash, so in Våndävana forest Lord Kåñëa was splendidly manifest with Çré Rädhä.

Text 35

våndävanaà ca pulinaà
     vanäny upavanäni ca
paçyan gopé-gaëaiù särdhaà
     girià govardhanaà yayau

     våndävanam—Våndävana; ca—and; pulinam—the shore; vanäni—forests; upavanäni—gardens; ca—and; paçyan—seeing; gopé-gaëaiù—with the gopés; särdham—with; girim—hill; govardhanam—Govardhana; yayau—went.

     Gazing at Våndävana forest, the Yamunä's shore, and many forests and gardens as They went, Çré Kåñëa and the gopés came to Govardhana Hill.

Text 36

gopénäà çata-yüthänäà
     mänaà vékñya vrajeçvaraù
bhagavän rädhayä säkaà
     tatraiväntaradhéyata

     gopénäm—of the gopés; çata-yüthänäm—of a hundred groups; mänam—the pride; vékñya—seeing; vrajeçvaraù—Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Lord; rädhayä—Rädhä; säkam—with; tatra—there; eva—indeed; antaradhéyata—disappeared.

     When He saw that the hundred groups of gopés had become proud, taking Çré Rädhä with Him, Lord Kåñëa suddenly disappeared.

Text 37

atha govardhanäd düre
     sundaraà yojana-trayam
çrékhaëòa-gandha-samyuktaà
     sa yayau rohitäcalam

     atha—then; govardhanät—from Govardhana; düre—far; sundaram—handsome; yojana-trayam—34 miles; çrékhaëòa—of sandal; gandha-samyuktam—with the scent; sa—He; yayau—went; rohitäcalam—to Mount Rohita.

     Then Lord Kåñëa went to beautiful Mount Rohita, which was fragrant with sandal trees and was thirty-four miles away from Govardhana Hill.

Text 38

latä-kuïja-nikuïjäç ca
     paçyan jalpaàs tayä saha
vicacära girau ramye
     käïcané-latikälaye

     latä-kuïja-nikuïjäù—forests filled with flowering vines; ca—and; paçyan—seeing; jalpan—conbversing; tayä—with Her; saha—with; vicacära—went; girau—on the mountain; ramye—beautiful; käïcané-latikä—pf golden vines; alaye—in a place.

     Gazing at forest gardens of flowering vines, and conversing as they went, Rädhä and Kåñëa came to a place of golden vines on that beautiful mountain.

Text 39

tatra deva-saro ramyaà
     badré-näthena nirmitam
päöhéna-kürma-nakrädi-
     haàsa-särasa-saìkulam

     tatra—there; deva-saraù—deva-sarovara; ramyam—beautiful; badré-näthena—by Näräyaëa åñi; nirmitam—built; päöhéna—pathinas; kürma—turtles; nakra—corcodiles; ädi—beginning with; haàsa—swans; särasa—cranes; saìkulam—filled.

     At that place was Deva-sarovara, a lake created by näräyaëa Åñi, which was filled with päöhénas, turtles, crocodiles, swans, cranes, and many other creatures.

Text 40

sahasra-dala-padmaiç ca
     maëòitaà tad itas tataù
bhramara-dhvani-samyuktaà
     puàs-kokila-ruta-vratam

     sahasra-dala-padmaiù—with thousand-petal lotuses; ca—and; maëòitam—decorated; tat—that; itaù—here; tataù—and there; bhramara—bees; dhvani—sound; samyuktam—with; puàs-kokila-ruta-vratam—the cooing of cuckoos.

     It was decorated with many thousand-petal lotuses. Here and there were the sounds of humming bees and cooing cuckoos.

Text 41

vikasat-padma-gandhäòhyaà
     tat-téraà manda-märutam
ramayä rädhayä särdhaà
     mädhavo niñasäda ha

     vikasat-padma-gandhäòhyam—opulent with the scent of blossoming lotus flowers; tat-téram—on that shore; manda-märutam—a gentle breeze; ramayä—the goddess of fortune; rädhayä—with Rädhä; särdham—with; mädhavaù—Kåñëa; niñasäda—sat down; ha—indeed.

     On the lakeshore filled with the scent of blossoming lotuses and cooled by a gentle breeze, Lord Kåñëa sat down with the goddess of fortune, Çré Rädhä.

Text 42

tat-téraà pratapasyantaà
     åbhüà näma mahä-munim
pädaikena sthitaà çaçvac
     chré-kåñëa-dhyäna-tat-param

     tat-téram—on that shore; pratapasyantam—performing austeritiesd; åbhüm—Åbhu; näma—named; mahä-munim—a great sage; päda—foot; ekena—with one; sthitam—standing; çaçvac—always; chré-kåñëa-dhyäna-tat-param—rapt in meditation on Lord Kåñëa.

     On that lakeshore was a great sage named Åbhu, who for a long time had been performing austerities, standing there on one foot, his thoughts rapt in meditation on Lord Kåñëa.

Text 43

ñañöi-varña-sahasräëi
     ñañöi-varña-çatäni ca
nirannaà nirjalaà çäntaà      çré-kåñëas taà dadarça ha

     ñañöi-varña-sahasräëi—sixty thousand years; ñañöi-varña-çatäni—six thousand years; ca—and; nirannam—without food; nirjalam—without water; çäntaà —peaceful; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; tam—him; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Then Lord Kåñëa glanced at that sage, who had peacefully stood there without food or water for sixty-six thousand years.

Text 44

papraccha vékñya taà rädhä
     hasanté präha mädhavam
mähätmyaà kuru bhakto 'yaà
     paçya bhaktià mahä-muneù

     papraccha—asked; vékñya—seeing; tam—him; rädhä—Rädhä; hasanté—laughing; präha—said; mädhavam—to Kåñëa; mähätmyam—the glory; kuru—please do; bhaktaù—the devotee; ayam—him; paçya—look; bhaktim—devotion; mahä-muneù—of the great sage.

     Looking at the sage, Çré Rädhä smiled and said to Lord Kåñëa, "Please describe the glories of this sage. He is Your devotee. Look at the devotion of this great sage."

Text 45

he åbho iti kåñëena
     proktam uccair vacaù çubham
na çrutaà tena kiïcid vä
     caramaà präpitena vai

     he åbhaù—O Åbhu; iti—thus; kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; proktam—addressed; uccaiù—loudly; vacaù—words; çubham—beautiful; na—not; çrutam—heard; tena—by him; kiïcit—something; vä—or; caramam—the verge of death; präpitena—attained; vai—indeed.

     When in a loud a sonorous voice, Lord Kåñëa called,  O Åbhu!" the sage could not hear anything, for he was on the verge of death.

Text 46

haris tadä tad-dhådayäd
     babhüväçu tirohitaù
dhyänäd gataà harià vékñya
     munéndraç cäti-vismitaù

     hariù—Lord Kåñëa; tadä—then; tad-dhådayät—from his heart; babhüva—was; äçu—suddenly; tirohitaù—disappeared; dhyänät—from the meditation; gatam—gone; harim—Kåñëa; vékñya—seeing; munéndraù—the king of sages; ca—and; ati-vismitaù—astonished.

     Then Lord Kåñëa suddenly left the sage's heart. When he saw that Lord Kåñëa had suddenly left his meditation, the sage was astonished.

Text 47

netre unmilya dadåçe
     çré-kåñëaà rädhayägataà
ghanaà caïcalayeväòhyaà
     raïjayantaà diço daça

     netre—eyes; unmilya—opening; dadåçe—saw; çré-kåñëam— Çré Kåñëa; rädhayä—witn Rädhä; ägatam—come; ghanam—a cloud; caïcalayä—with a lightning flash; iva—like; äòhyam—opulent; raïjayantam—filling with light; diçaù—the directions; daça—ten.

     Opening his eyes, the sage saw that, glorious as a monsoon cloud and a lightning flash, and filling the ten directions with light, Çré Çré Rädhä and Kåñëa had come before him.

Text 48

utthäya sadyo hari-bhakti-tat-paraù
     pradakñiëé-kåtya harià sa-rädhikam
praëamya mürdhnä nipapäta pädayor
     uväca kåñëaà bahu-gadgadäkñaraù

     utthäya—rising; sadyaù—at once; hari-bhakti-tat-paraù—filled with devotion; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; harim—Kåñëa; sa-rädhikam—with Rädhä; praëamya—bowing down; mürdhnä—with his head; nipapäta—fell; pädayoù—at the feet; uväca—said; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; bahu-gadgadäkñaraù—his words choked with emotion.

     At once standing up, the devotee-sage circumambulated Çré Çré Rädhä and Kåñëa, bowed his head before them, and fell at Their feet. Then, with faltering words he spoke to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 49

çré-åbhur uväca 
namaù kåñëäya kåñëayai
     rädhäyai mädhaväya ca
paripürëatamayai ca
     paripürëatamäya ca

     çré-åbhur uväca—Çré Åbhu said; namaù—obeisances; kåñëäya—to Kåñëa; kåñëayai—to Kåñëa's beloved; rädhäyai—Rädhä; mädhaväya—to the husband of the goddess of fortune; ca—and; paripürëatamayai—to the supreme goddess; ca—and; paripürëatamäya—to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca—and.

     Çré Åbhu said: I offer my respectful obeisances to Çré Kåñëa and to Çré Kåñëa's beloved. I offer my respectful obeisances to Çré Rädhä and Çré Rädhä's lover. I offer my respectful obeisances to the Supreme Goddess and the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 50

ghana-çyämäya deväya
     çyämayai satataà namaù
räseçvaräya satataà
     räseçvaryai namo namaù

     ghana-çyämäya—dark as a monsoon cloud; deväya—to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çyämayai—beautiful Rädhä; satatam—always; namaù—obeiaances; räseçvaräya—to the king of the rasa dance; satatam—always; räseçvaryai—to the queen of the rasa dance; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     Eternally I offer my respectful obeisances to beautiful Çré Rädhä and to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa dark as a monsoon cloud. Eternally I offer my respectful obeisances to the queen of the räsa-dance. Eternally I offer my respectful obeisances to the king of the räsa-dance.

Text 51

golokätéta-léläya
     lélävatyai namo namaù
asaìkhyäëòädhidevyai cä-
     saìkhyäëòa-nidhaye namaù

     goloka—Goloka; atéta—transcendental; léläya—pastimes; lélävatyai—playful; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances; asaìkhyäëòädhidevyai—the goddess who rules over countless universes; ca—and; asaìkhyäëòa-nidhaye—the Lord who rulkes over countless universes; namaù—obeisances.

     Obeisances to Lord Kåñëa, who enjoys transcendental pastimes in the realm of Goloka! Obeisances to playful Rädhä! Obeisances to the goddess that rules countless universes! Obeisances to the master that rules countless universes!

Text 52

bhü-bhära-häräya bhuvaà gatäbhyäà
     mac-chäntaye cätra samägatäbhyäm
parasparaà sandhita-vigrahäbhyäà
     namo yuväbhyäà hari-rädhikäbhyäm

     bhü-bhära-häräya—to remove the burden of the earth; bhuvam—to the earth; gatäbhyäm—come; mac-chäntaye—to pacify me; ca—and; atra—here; samägatäbhyäm—come; parasparam—together; sandhita-vigrahäbhyäm—transcendental forms; namaù—obeisances; yuväbhyäm—youthful; hari-rädhikäbhyäm—Çré Çré Rädhä and Kåñëa.

     Obeisances to youthful Çré Çré Rädhä and Kåñëa, whose forms are transcendental, who came to the earth to remove it's burden, and who came to this place to make me peaceful.

Text 53

çré-närada uväca 
ity uktvä kåñëa-pädäbje
     prakñarad-bäñpa-locanaù
premänanda-samäyukto
     jahau präëän mahä-muniù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; uktvä—saying; kåñëa-pädäbje—at Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet; prakñarad-bäñpa—shedding tears; locanaù—eyes; premänanda-samäyuktaù—filled with the bliss of love; jahau—gave up; präëän—his life; mahä-muniù—the great sage.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these words the sage, filled with the bliss of love, and tears streaming from His eyes, fell at Lord Kåñëa's feet and at once gave up his life.

Text 54

tadaiva nirgata-jyotir
     daça-sürya-sama-prabham
paribhramad daça-diçaù
     çré-kåñëe lénatäà gataù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; nirgata—left; jyotiù—light; daça-sürya-sama-prabham—splendid as ten suns; paribhramat—wandering; daça-diçaù—the ten directions; çré-kåñëe—into Lord Kåñëa; lénatäm—merged; gataù—went.

     Then a spark of light splendid as ten suns left the sage's body and, after wandering the ten directions, finally merged into Lord Kåñëa.

Text 55

bhaktasya bhaktià çré-kåñëo
     vékñya vai prema-lakñaëam
änandäçru-kulaà muïcan
     premëä taà cäjuhäva ha

     bhaktasya—of the devotee; bhaktim—the devotion; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; vékñya—seeing; vai—indeed; prema-lakñaëam—with love; änandäçru-kulam—tears of bliss; muïcan—shedding; premëä—with love; tam—him; ca—and; äjuhäva—called out; ha—indeed.

     Seeing the sage's great love and devotion for Him, Lord Kåñëa, shedding tears of bliss, loving called to him.

Text 56

punaù çré-kåñëa-pädäbjät
     kåñëa-särüpyavän muniù
nirgataù koöi-kandarpa-
     sannibho 'ti-natänanaù

     punaù—again; çré-kåñëa-pädäbjät—from Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet; kåñëa-särüpyavän—having a transcendental form like Lord Kåñëa's; muniù—the sage; nirgataù—emerged; koöi-kandarpa-sannibhaù—like millions of Kämadevas; ati-natänanaù—bowing his head.

     Then the sage suddenly emerged from Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet. Now having a transcendental form like Lord Kåñëa's, a form handsome as millions of Kämadevas, the sage bowed his head.

Text 57

dorbhyäà pragåhya hådaye
     taà nidhäya kåpäkaraù
äçväsya kalyäëa-karaà
     karaà divyaà dadhära ha

     dorbhyäm—with both arms; pragåhya—embracing; hådaye—to His chest; tam—him; nidhäya—placing; kåpäkaraù—merciful; äçväsya—comforting; kalyäëa-karam—auspicious; karam—hand; divyam—transcendental; dadhära—held; ha—certainly.

     With both arms merciful Lord Kåñëa embraced him, holding him to His chest. Lord Kåñëa comforted him and touched him with His auspicious hand.

Text 58

pradakñiëé-kåtya harià ca rädhikäà
     praëamya cäruhya rathaà manoharam
goloka-lokaà prayayäv åbhur munir
     viraïjayan maithila maëòalaà diçäm

     pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; harim—Lord Kåñëa; ca—and; rädhikäm—Rädhä; praëamya—bowing; ca—and; äruhya—mounting; ratham—a chariot; manoharam—beautiful; goloka-lokam—to Goloka; prayayäv—went; åbhuù—Åbhu; muniù—Muni; viraïjayan—filling with light; maithila—O king of Mithilä; maëòalam—the circle; diçam—of the directions.

     After circumambulating Çré Çré Rädhä and Kåñëa, Åbhu Muni entered a beautiful chariot and went to the realm of Goloka, filling the circle of the directions with light as he went.

Text 59

çré-rädhikä vismayam ägatä bhåçaà
     dåñövä paraà muktià åbhor mahä-muneù
änanda-väréëi vimuïcati ciraà
     jagäda kåñëaà våñabhänu-nandiné

     çré-rädhikä—Çré Rädhä; vismayam—wonder; ägatä—attained; bhåçam—greatly; dåñövä—seeing; param—great; muktim—liberation; åbhoù—of Åbhu; mahä-muneù—the great sage; änanda-väréëi—tears of bliss; vimuïcati—shed; ciram—again and again; jagäda—spoke; kåñëam—to Kåñëa; våñabhänu-nandiné—King Våñabhänu's daughter.

     Çré Rädhä was filled with wonder when She saw the liberation of the great sage Åbhu Muni. Again and again shedding tears of joy, Çré Rädhä, the daughter of King Våñabhänu, spoke to Lord Kåñëa.
.pa

Chapter Twenty-one
Çré Näradopäkhyäna
The Story of Çré Närada

Text 1

çré-rädhoväca

dhanyo 'yaà muni-çärdülas
     tvad-bhaktaù premavän mahän
tvat-sarüpyaà jagämäsau
     tvam apy açru-mukho yataù

     çré-rädhoväca—Çré Rädhä said; dhanyaù—saintly; ayaàhe; muni-çärdülaù—the tiger of sages; tvad-bhaktaù—with devotion for You; premavän—filled with love; mahän—great; tvat-sarüpyam—a form like Yours; jagäma—attained; asau—he; tvam—You; api—also; açru-mukhaù—face filled with tears; yataù—because.

     Çré Rädhä said: That tiger of sages was a great devotee, filled with love for You. He was very fortunate. He attained a transcendental form like Yours. Your face was wet with tears of love for him.

Text 2

asya deha-kriyäà kartuà
     yogyo 'si våjinärdana
tapasä cäsya deho 'yaà
     prasphuraty amaläkåtiù

     asya—of him; deha-kriyäm—the duty; kartum—to do; yogyaù—proper; asi—is; våjinärdana—O deliverer from evils; tapasä—by austerity; ca—and; asya—of him; dehaù—body; ayam—this; prasphurati—manifest; amaläkåtiù—a pure transcendental form.

     O deliverer from evils, that sage must have performed great austerities to have attained a transcendental form like Yours.

Text 3

çré-närada uväca 
vadantyäà tatra rädhäyäà
     tad-deho 'py abhavat sarit
vahanté päpa-hantré ca
     dåçyate rohite giräu

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; vadantyäm—speaking; tatra—there; rädhäyäm—Rädhä; tad-dehaù—that body; api—also; abhavat—was; sarit— stream; vahanté—flowing; päpa-hantré—killing sins; ca—and; dåçyate—is seen; rohite giräu—on Mount Rohita.

     Çré Närada said: As Rädhä was speaking these words, the sage's body became transformed into a stream that killed all sins as it flowed on Mount Rohita.

Text 4

tad-dehasyäpi saritaà
     vékñya rädhäti-vismitä
nanda-räjätmajaà präha
     våñabhänu-varätmajä

     tad-dehasya—of his body; api—also; saritam—stream; vékñya—seeing; rädhä—Rädhä; ati-vismitä—filled with wonder; nanda-räjätmajam—the son of King Nanda; präha—said; våñabhänu-varätmajä—the daughter of King Våñabhänu.

     Filled with wonder to see the sage's body transformed into a stream, King Våñabhänu's daughter Rädhä spoke to King Nanda's son, Kåñëa.

Text 5

çré-rädhoväca 
kathaà jalatvam apanno
     deho 'yaà vai mahä-muneù
etan me saàçayaà deva
     chettum arhasy açeñataù

     çré-rädhä uväca— Çré Rädhä said; katham—why; jalatvam—water; apannaù—attained; dehaù—body; ayaàthis; vai—indeed; mahä-muneù—of the great sage; etan—this; me—of Me; saàçayam—doubt; deva—O Lord; chettum—to cut; arhasi—You are able; açeñataù—completely.

     Çré Rädhä said: Why did this great sage's body become a stream? O Lord, only You can cut apart the bewilderment I feel about this.

Text 6

çré-bhagavän uväca 
prema-lakñaëayä bhaktyä
     samyuto 'yaà munéçvaraù
tasmäd asya tu deho 'yaà
     rambhoru dravatäà gataù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; prema-lakñaëayä bhaktyä samyutaù—filled with love and devotion; ayam—he; munéçvaraù—the king of sages; tasmät—therefore; asya—of him; tu—indeed; dehaù—body; ayam—this; rambhoru—O girl whose thighs are like banana trees; dravatäm—liquidity; gataù—attained.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: That king of sages was filled with love and devotion for Me. O girl whose thighs are like banana trees, that is why his body became liquefied.

Text 7

dåñövä tvayä mäà varadaà
     harñito 'bhün mahä-muniù
jalatvaà präpa tad-deho
     yathähaà dravatäà purä

     dåñövä—having seen; tvayä—by him; mäm—Me; varadam—the giver of benedictions; harñitaù—happy; abhüt—became; mahä-muniù—the great sage; jalatvam—liguidity; präpa—attained; tad-dehaù—his body; yathä—as; aham—I; dravatäm—liquid; purä—before.

     When that great sage saw Me, he became so happy that his body at once melted and became a liquid, as My own body also became a liquid in the past. 

Text 8

çré-rädhoväca 
dravatäà tvaà kathaà präpto
     deva-deva dayä-nidhe
etac citraà hi me jätaà
     sarvaà tvaà vada vistarät

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; dravatäm—liquid; tvam—You; katham—how?; präptaù—attained; deva-deva—O master of the demigods; dayä—of mercy; nidhe—O ocean; etat—this; citram—wonderful; hi—indeed; me—of Me; jätam—manifested; sarvam—all; tvam—You; vada—please tell; vistarät—in detail.

     Çré Rädhä said: O master of the demigods, O ocean of mercy, how did Your body become a liquid? This fills Me with wonder. Please tell Me this story in great detail.

Text 9

çré-bhagavän uväca 
atraivodäharantémaà
     itihäsaà purätanam
yasya çravaëa-mätreëa
     päpa-häniù paraà bhavet

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; atra—here; eva—indeed; udäharanti—say; imam—this; itihäsam—history; purätanam—ancient; yasya—of which; çravaëa-mätreëa—simply by hearing; päpa-häniù—the destruction of sins; param—then; bhavet—becomes.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: The sages tell the ancient story of this pastime. When one hears it his sins become destroyed.

Text 10

yan-näbhi-paìkajäj jätaù
     purä brahmä praja-patiù
asåjat prakåtià çaçvat
     tapasä mad-varojitaù

     yan-näbhi-paìkajät—from the lotus navel; jätaù—born; purä—before; brahmä—Brahmä; praja-patiù—the progenitor of the living entities; asåjat—created; prakåtim—material nature; çaçvat—eternal; tapasä—by austerity; mad-varojitaù—by My blessings.

     In ancient times Lord Brahmä, the progenitor of the living entities, was born from My lotus navel. He performed austerities, and with My blessings he created the material universe.

Text 11

utsaìgän närado jajïe
     brahmaëaù såjataù çubhaù
bhakty-unmatto mat-padäni
     nijagau paryaöan mahém

     utsaìgät—from within; näradaù—Närada; jajïe—was born; brahmaëaù—of Brahmä; såjataù—creating; çubhaù—auspicious; bhakty-unmattaù—mad with love fro Kåñëa; mat-padäni—songs about Me; nijagau—sang; paryaöan—wandering; mahém—the worlds.

     From the creator Brahmä was born a saintly son named Närada who, mad with love for Me, wandered the worlds singing songs about Me.

Text 12

ekadä näradaà präha
     devo brahmä praja-patiù
prajäù såja mahä-buddhe
     våthä caìkramaëaà tyaja

     ekadä—one day; näradam—to närada; präha—said; devaù—the demigod; brahmä—Brahmä; praja-patiù—the progenitor of the living entities; prajäù—children; såja—create; mahä-buddhe—O very intelligent one; våthä—useless; caìkramaëam—wandering; tyaja—abandon.

     One day Lord Brahmä, the pregenitor of the living entities, said to Närada, "O very intelligent one, please father many children. Give up this useless wandering."

Text 13

näradas tad-vacaù çrutvä
     prähedaà jïäna-tat-paraù
na såjämi pitaù såñöià
     çoka-mohädi-käriëém

     näradaù—Nasrada; tad-vacaù—his words; çrutvä—hearing; präha—said; idam—this; jïäna-tat-paraù—intent on transcendental knowledge; na—not; såjämi—I create; pitaù—O father; såñöim—creation; çoka-mohädi-käriëém—the cause of bewilderment and grief.

     Hearing these words, Närada said, "Father, I am eager for transcendental knowledge. I will not create children. Creating children is the cause of bewilderment and grief."

Text 14

kariñyämi harer bhaktià
     tat-kértana-samanvitam
tvam api såñöi-racanaà
     tyaja duùkhäturo bhåçam

     kariñyämi—I will create; hareù—for Lord Kåñëa; bhaktim—devotion; tat-kértana-samanvitam—chanting His glories; tvam—You; api—even; såñöi-racanam—the creation of children; tyaja—abandon; duùkhäturaù—filled with sufferings; bhåçam—greatly.

     I will create devotion for Lord Kåñëa and songs about His glories. You should give up the creation of children, which brings only sufferings.

Text 15

kruddhä çaçäpa taà brahmä
     präha prasphuritädharaù
sadä gäna-paraù kalpaà
     gandharvo bhava durmate

     kruddhä—angry; çaçäpa—cursed; tam—him; brahmä—Brahmä; präha—said; prasphuritädharaù—his lips trembling; sadä—always; gäna-paraù—intent on singing; kalpam—for a kalpa; gandharvaù—a Gamndharva; bhava—become; durmate—O fool.

     His lips trembling with anger, Brahmä cursed him,  Fool, you like to sing. Become a gandharva for a kalpa."

Text 16

evaà tac-chapato rädhe
     gandharva upabarhaëaù
babhüva gandharva-patiù
     kalpa-mätraà surälaye

     evam—thus; tac-chapataù—fvrom that curse; rädhe—O Rädhä; gandharva—a gandharva; upabarhaëaù—Upabarhaëa; babhüva—became; gandharva-patiù—the leader of the gandharvas; kalpa-mätram—for a kalpa; surälaye—in the realm of the demigods.

     O Rädhä, because of this curse Närada became the gandharva Upabarhaëa. For one kalpa he was the leader of the gandharvas in the world of the demigods.

Text 17

ekadä brahmaëo loke
     strébhiù parivåto gataù
sundaréñu manaù kåtvä
     jagau täla-vivarjitam

     ekadä—one day; brahmaëaù—of Brahmä; loke—on the planet; strébhiù—with women; parivåtaù—surrounded; gataù—went; sundaréñu—beautiful; manaù—mind; kåtvä—doing; jagau—sang; täla-vivarjitam—without a tala rhythm.

     One day, accompanied by many women, he came to Brahmä's planet. His mind thinking of the beautiful women, he sang without a proper täla rhythm.

Text 18

punar brahmä taà çaçäpa
     tvaà çüdro bhava durmate
athäsau brahma-çäpena
     däsé-putro babhüva ha

     punaù—again; brahmä—Brahmä; tam—him; çaçäpa—cursed; tvam—you; çüdraù—a sudra; bhava—become; durmate—O fool; atha—then; asau—he; brahma-çäpena—by Brahmä's curse; däsé-putraù—a maidservant's son; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     Again Brahmä cursed him, "Fool, become a çüdra!" By Brahmä's curse he then became a maidservant's son.

Text 19

sat-saìgena purä rädhe
    präpto 'bhüd brahma-putratäà
bhakty-unmatto mat-padäni
     nijagau paryaöan mahém

     sat—with saintly devotees; saìgena—by association; purä—before; rädhe—O Rädhä; präptaù—attained; abhüt—did; brahma-putratäm—the son of Brahmä; bhakti—with devotion; unmattaù—mad; mat-padäni—songs about Me; nijagau—sang; paryaöan—wandering; mahém—the worlds.

     O Rädhä, again he was born as Brahmä's son, and again, mad with love for Me, he wandered the worlds singing songs about Me.

Text 20

munéndro vaiñëava-çreñöho
     mat-priyo jïäna-bhaskaraù
paraà bhägavataù säkñän
     närado man-manäù sadä

     munéndraù—the king of sages; vaiñëava-çreñöhaù—the best of devotees; mat-priyaù—dear to Me; jïäna-bhaskaraù—a blazing sun of transcendental knowledge; param—then; bhägavataù—a great devotee; säkñän—directly; näradaù—Närada; man-manäù—his thoughts fixed on Me; sadä—always.

     Närada became the king of sages and the best of devotees. A blazing sun of transcendental knowledge and a pure devotee very dear to Me, Närada always meditated on Me.

Text 21

ekadä närado lokän
     paçyan vai gäna-tat-paraù
ilävåtaà näma khaëòaà
     gatavän sarvato gatiù

     ekadä—one day; näradaù—Närada; lokän—the worlds; paçyan—seeing; vai—indeed; gäna-tat-paraù—intent on singing; ilävåtam—Ilavrta; näma—named; khaëòam—the planet; gatavän—gone; sarvataù—everywhere; gatiù—going.

     One day, as he was traveling where he wished, seeing many different worlds, and singing many songs, Närada came to the place named Ilävåta-varña.

Text 22

yatra jambü-nadé çyämä
     jambü-phala-rasodbhavä
tathä jambünadaà näma
     suvarëaà bhavati priye

     yatra—where; jambü-nadé—the river Jambu; çyämä—dark; jambü-phala-rasodbhavä—created from the nectar of jambu fruits; tathä—so; jambünadam—Jambunada; näma—named; suvarëam—gold; bhavati—is; priye—O beloved.

     O beloved, in that place is a dark jambü-juice river that becomes the golden river named Jambünada.

Text 23

tad-deçe veda-nagaraà
     ratna-präsäda-nirmitam
dadarça närado yogé
     divya-näré-narair våtam

     tad-deçe—in that place; veda-nagaram—the city of the Vedas; ratna-präsäda-nirmitam—made of jewel palaces; dadarça—saw; näradaù—Närada; yogé—yogi; divya-näré-naraiù—with divine men and women; våtam—filled.

     In that place the yogé Närada saw the city Veda-nagara, which was filled with jewel palaces and divine men and women.

Texts 24 and 25

käàçcid vai päda-rahitän
     vigulphän jänu-varjitän
vijaìghän jaghanavyaìgän
     kåçorün kubja-madhyakän

çlathad-dantonnata-skandhän
     natänana-vikandharän
stré-janän puruñäàç cäsäv
     aìga-bhaìgän dadarça ha

     käàçcit—some; vai—indeed; päda-rahitän—without feet; vigulphän—without ankles; jänu-varjitän—without knees; vijaìghän—without legs; jaghana—hips; vyaìgän—disfingured limbs; kåça—withered; ürün—thighs; kubja—disfigured; madhyakän—torsos; çlathat—loose; danta—teeth; unnata-skandhän—hunched backs; nata—bowed; änana—heads; vikandharän—deformed necks; stré-janän—women; puruñän—men; ca—and; asau—he; aìga-bhaìgän—broken limbs; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     There he saw the men and women were all deformed. Some had no feet, some no ankles, some no knees, some no legs, some twisted hips, some emaciated thighs, some disfigured torsos, some loosened teeth, some hunched shoulders, some bowed heads, and some no necks.

Text 26

aho kim etac citraà hi
     sarvän dåñövävadan muniù
sarve yüyaà padma-mukhä
     divya-dehäù çubhämbaräù

     ahaù—Oh; kim—what?; etat—this; citram—wonder; hi—indeed; sarvän—all; dåñövä—seeing; avadat—said; muniù—the sage; sarve—all; yüyam—you; padma—lotus; mukhäù—faces; divya—splendid and divine; dehäù—bodies; çubha—splendid; ambaräù—garments.

     Seeing them all, the sage Närada said: "What is this wonder? You all have lotus faces, splendid forms, and beautiful garments.

Text 27

kià devä upadevä vä
     yüyaà kià åñi-sattamäù
vaditra-sahitäù sarve
     ramya-gäna-paräyaëäù

     kim—whether?; devä—demigods; upadevä—lesser demigods; vä—or; yüyam—you all; kim—whether?; åñi-sattamäù—great sages; vaditra-sahitäù—with musical instruments; sarve—all; ramya-gäna-paräyaëäù—making beautiful music.

     "Are you devas? Are You upadevas? Are you great åñis? You sing and play on your instruments very beautifully.

Text 28

aìga-bhaìgäù kathaà yüyaà
     vadatäçu mamaiva hi
ity uktäs tena te sarve
     pratyücur déna-mänasäù

     aìga-bhaìgäù—deformed; katham—how?; yüyam—you all; vadata—please tell; äçu—at once; mama—to me; eva-indeed; hi——indeed; iti—thus; uktäù—addressed; tena—by him; te—they; sarve—all; pratyücuù—replied; déna-mänasäù—dejected.

     "Why are you deformed? Please tell me." Addressed in this way, all the people, unhappy at heart, replied.

Text 29

çré-rägä ücuù 
mahä-duùkhaà mune jätaà
     asmäkaà tanuñu svataù
tasyägre kathanéyaà vai
     düré-kartuà ca yaù kñamaù

     çré-rägäù ücuù—rthe rägas said; mahä-duùkham—great suffering; mune—O sage; jätam—born; asmäkam—of us; tanuñu—on the bodies; svataù—personally; tasya—of that; agre—in the presence; kathanéyam—may be sdaid; vai—indeed; düré-kartum—to throw far away; ca—and; yaù—who; kñamaù—is able.

     The rägas said: O sage, our bodies have suffered terribly. We will tell you how these sufferings may be thrown far away.

Text 30

rägä vayaà veda-pure
     vasämaù sarvadä mune
aìga-bhaìgä vayaà jätäù
     käraëaà çåëu mänada

     rägäs-rägas; vayam—we are; veda-pure—in the city of the Vedas; vasämaù—we reside; sarvadä—always; mune—O sage; aìga-bhaìgä—deformed; vayam—we; jätäù—born; käraëam—the reason; çåëu—please hear; mänada—O gentle and humble one.

     O sage, we are rägas and we live in the city of Veda-nagara. O gentle and humble one, please hear how we became deformed in this way.

Text 31

jäto hiraëyagarbhasya
     putro närada-näma-bhäk
premonmatto vikälena
     gäyan dhruva-padäni ca

     jätaù—born; hiraëyagarbhasya—of Lord Brahmä; putraù—a son; närada-näma-bhäk—named Närada; premonmattaù—mad with love; vikälena—at the wrong times; gäyan—singing; dhruva-padäni—songs; ca—and.

     Lord Brahmä has a son named Närada who, mad with love, sings the wrong melodies at the wrong times. 

Text 32

vicacära mahém etäà
     svecchayä sa mahä-muniù
vikäle tasya gänaiç ca
     visvarais täla-varjitaiù vigänaiç ca vayaà sarve      aìga-bhaìgä babhüvima

     vicacära—wandered; mahém—the world; etäm—this; svecchayä—by his own wish; sa—he; mahä-muniù—a great sage; vikäle—at the wrong time; tasya—of him; gänaiù—with songs; ca—and; visvaraiù—with the worng notes; täla-varjitaiù—without proper rhythm; vigänaiù—with the wrong songs; ca—and; vayam—we; sarve—all; aìga-bhaìgä—deformed; babhüvima—became.

     He is a great sage that wanders the words as he wishes. But his singing the wrong songs at the wrong times, with the wrong notes and without a proper rhythm, has broken the limbs of our bodies.

Text 33

iti çrutvätha tad-väkyaà
     närado vismito 'bhavat
uväca gata-mäno 'sau
     rägän parihasann iva

     iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; atha—then; tad-väkyam—their words; näradaù—Närada; vismitaù—astonished; abhavat—became; uväca—said; gata—gone; mänaù—pride; asau—he; rägän—to the rägas; parihasann—smiling; iva—as if.

     Hearing these words, Närada became astonished. Humbled, and trying to smile, he spoke.

Text 34

çré-munir uväca 
tasya kena prakäreëa
     jïänaà vai käla-tälayoù
bhaved iha svarair yuktaà
     vadatäçu mamaiva hi

     çré-munir uväca—Çré Närada said; tasya—of that; kena—by what?; prakäreëa—means; jïänam—knowledge; vai—indeed; käla—of time; tälayoù—and rhythm; bhavet—may be; iha—here; svaraiù—with notes; yuktam—endowed; vadata—please tell; äçu—at once; mama—to me; eva—indeed; hi—indeed;

     Çré Närada said: How can one obtain knowledge of the proper times and proper rhythms of music? Please tell me.

Text 35

çré-rägä ücuù 
vaikuëöhasya pateù säkñät
     priyä mukhyä sarasvaté
kuryäc chikñäà yadä tasmai
     tadä syät käla-vin muniù

     çré-rägäù ücuù—the rägas said; vaikuëöhasya—of Vaikuëöha; pateù—of the Lord; säkñät—directly; priyä—the beloved; mukhyä— the best; sarasvaté—Sarasvaté; kuryät—is; çikñäm—teaching; yadä—when; tasmai—to him; tadä—then; syät—may be; käla-vit—knowing the proper time; muniù—sage.

     The rägas said: Goddess Sarasvaté is the dearest beloved of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of Vaikuëöhaloka. One who learns from her will know the proper times of music.

Text 36

teñäà väkyaà tataù çrutvä
     närado déna-vatsalaù
sarasvatyäù prasädärthaà
     tvaraà çubhraà girià yayau

     teñäm—of them; väkyam—words; tataù—then; çrutvä—hearing; näradaù—Närada; déna-vatsalaù—kind to the distressed; sarasvatyäù—of sarasvaté; prasäda—the mercy; artham—for the purpose; tvaram—at once; çubhram—Çubhra; girim—Mount; yayau—went.

     After hearing their words, Närada, who is very kind to the distressed, went to Mount Çubhra to obtrain the mercy of Goddess Sarasvaté.

Text 37

divya-varña-çataà çaçvat
     tapas tepe su-duñkaraà
nirannaà nirjalaà väëé-
     dhyäna-yuktaà vrajeçvari

     divya—celestial; varña—years; çatam—a hundred; çaçvat—continually; tapaù—austerities; tepe—performed; su-duñkaram—difficult; nirannam—withotu food; nirjalam—without water; väëé—on Goddess sarasvaté; dhyäna-yuktam—meditating; vrajeçvari—O queen of Vraja.

     O queen of Vraja, for one hundred celestial years Närada performed austeries. Fasting from food and water, he meditated on Goddess Sarasvaté.

Text 38

çubhraà näma visåjyätha
     pavitré-kåta-bhü-dharam
närado näma çailo 'bhüt
     tapasä näradasya ca

     çubhram—Mount Subha; näma—named; visåjya—leaving; atha—then; pavitré-kåta—purified; bhü-dharam—mountain; näradaù—Närada; näma—named; çailaù—mountain; abhüt—became; tapasä—by the austerities; näradasya—of Närada; ca—and.

     Purified by Närada's austerities, that mountain ceased to be called Mount Çubhra. Now it is called Mount Närada. 

Text 39

tapo-'nte ägatäà säkñäd
     väg-devéà çré-sarasvatém
viñëoù priyäà divya-varëäà
     apaçyan närado muniù

     tapo-'nte—at the end of the austerities; ägatäm—arruved; säkñät—directly; väg-devém—the goddess of speech; çré-sarasvatém—Sarasvaté; viñëoù—of Lords Viñëu; priyäm—the beloved; divya-varëäm—splendid; apaçyat—saw; näradaù—Närada; muniù—the sage.

     When his austerities had come to their end, the sage Närada personally saw splendid Sarasvaté, the goddess of speech and the beloved of Lord Viñëu.

Text 40

sahasotthäya täà natvä
     parikramya natänanaù
tad-rüpa-guëa-mädhurya-
     stutià cakre munéçvaraù

     sahasä—at once; utthäya—rising; täm—to her; natvä—bowing; parikramya—circumambulating; natänanaù—with bowed head; tad-rüpa—her beauty; guëa—virtues; mädhurya—sweetness; stutim—prayers; cakre—did; munéçvaraù—the king of sages.

     At once standing up, bowing down, and circumambulating Her with bowed head, Närada, the king of sages, spoke many prayers gloirifying her beauty, virtues, and sweetness.

Text 41

çré-närada uväca 
navärka-bimba-dyutim udgalaj-jvalat-
     täöaìka-keyüra-kiréöa-kaìkanäm
sphurat-kvaëan-nüpura-räva-raïjitäà
     namämi koöéndu-mukhéà sarasvatém

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; navärka—rising sun; bimba—bimba fruit; dyutim—splendor; udgalat—eclipsing; jvalat—shining; täöaìka—earrings; keyüra—armlets; kiréöa—crown; kaìkanäm—bracelets; sphurat—glistening; kvaëa—tinkling; nüpura—anklets; räva—sound; ranjitam—charming; namämi—I bow down; koöi—millions; indu—of moons; mukhém—whose face; sarasvatém—Sarasvaté.

     Çré Närada said: I offer my respectful obeisances to Goddess Sarasvaté, whose face is more beautiful than millions of moons, whose glistening anklets tinkle melodiously, and whose glistening crown, earrings, bracelets, and armlets eclipse the glory of the bimba fruit and the rising sun.

Text 42

vande sadähaà kalahaàsa udgate
     calat-pade caïcala-caïcu-sampuöe
nirdhauta-muktä-phala-hära-saïcayäà
     sandhärayantéà çubhagäà sarasvatém

     vande—I bow down; sadä—always; aham—I; kalahaàsa—swan; udgate—risen; calat-pade—moving feet; caïcala—moving; caïcu-sampuöe—in the beak; nirdhauta-muktä-phala—of splendid pearls; hära—necklaces; sa{—.sy 24cayäm—host; sandhärayantém—wearing; çubhagäm—beautiful; sarasvatém—Sarasvaté.

     Again and again I offer my respectful obeisances to beautiful Goddess Sarasvaté, who wears a necklace of pearls splendid as a host of flying swans with restless feet and beaks.

Text 43

varäbhayaà pustaka-vallaké-yutaà
     paraà dadhänaà vimale kara-dvaye
namämy ahaà tväà çubhadäà sarasvatéà
     jaganmayéà brahmamayéà manoharäm

     vara—blessing; abhayam—fearlessness; pustaka—book; vallaké—lute; yutam—with; param—great; dadhänam—hodling; vimale—pure; kara-dvaye—two hands; namämi—bow down; aham—I; tväm—to you; çubhadäm—the giver of blessings; sarasvatém—Sarasvaté; jaganmayém—who has come to the material world; brahmamayém—spiritual; manoharäm—beautiful.

     I offer my respectful obeisances to you, beautiful Goddess Sarasvaté, who hold in your pure and splendid hands a véëä and a book, who grant the blessing of fearlessness, and who have come to this material world in your spiritual form.

Text 44

taraìgita-kñauma-sitämbare pare
     dehi svara-jïänam atéva maìgale
yenädvitéyo hi bhaveyam akñare
     sarvopari syäà para-räga-maëòale

     taraìgita—tossed by waves; kñauma—silk; sita—white; ambare—garments; pare——great; dehi—please give; svara—of music; jïänam—knowledge; atéva—great; maìgale—auspicious; yena—by which; advitéyaù—without a second; hi—indeed; bhaveyam—I may be; akñare—in words; sarvopari—above all; syäm—I may be; para-räga-maëòale—in the circle of melodies.

     O goddess dressed in white silk tossed by graceful waves as you walk, O auspicious one, please give me knowledge of music. Make me the best of musicians. Make me unrivaled among musicians.

Text 45

çré-bhagavän uväca 
stotraà jäòyäpahaà divyaà
     prätar utthäya yaù paöhet
näradoktaà sarasvatyäù
     sa vidyävän bhaved iha

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; stotram—prayer; jäòya—ignorance; apaham—removing; divyam—splendid; prätaù—at sunrise; utthäya—rising; yaù—who; paöhet—recites; närada—by Närada; uktam—spoken; sarasvatyäù—to Sarasvaté; sa—he; vidyävän—a great scholar; bhavet—becomes; iha—in this world.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: A person who rises at sunrise and recites this splendid prayer Närada spoke to Goddess Sarasvaté, a prayer that removes the numbness of ignorance, becomes a great scholar in this world. 

Text 46

tataù prasannä väg-devé
     näradäya mahätmane
devadattäà dadau véëäà
     svara-brahma-vibhüñitäm

     tataù—then; prasannä—pleased; väg-devé—Goddess Sarasvaté; näradäya—to Närada; mahätmane—the great soul; devadattäm—Devadattä; dadau—gave; véëäm—the véëä; svara-brahma-vibhüñitäm—decorated with spiritual sounds.

     Pleased, Goddess Sarasvaté gave to the great saint Närada the véëä named Devadattä, which was decorated with spiritual sound.

Texts 47-49

rägaiç ca rägiëébhiç ca
     tat-putraiç ca tathaiva ca
deça-kälädi-bhedaiç ca
     täla-mäna-svaraiù saha

ñaö-païcäçat-koöi-bhedair
     antar-bhedair asaìkhyakaiù
grämair nåtyaiù sa-väditrair
     mürchana-sahitaiù çubhaiù

vaikuëöhasya pateù säkñät
     priyä mukhyä sarasvaté
svara-gamyaiù padaiù siddhaiù
     päöhayäm äsa näradam

     rägaiù—with the rägas; ca—and; rägiëébhiù—with the ragiëés; ca—and; tat-putraiù—with their children; ca—and; tathä—so; eva—indeed; ca—and; deça—place; käla—time; ädi—beginning with; bhedaiù—distinctions; ca—and; täla-mäna-svaraiù—rhythms; saha—with; ñaö-païcäçat-koöi-bhedaiù—with five-hundred and sixty million divisions; antar-bhedaiù—with sub-divisions; asaìkhyakaiù—countless; grämaiù—with scales; nåtyaiù—with dances; sa-väditraiù—with musical instruments; mürchana-sahitaiù—with modulation; çubhaiù—beautiful; vaikuëöhasya pateù—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Lord of Vaikuëöha; säkñät—directly; priyä—the beloved; mukhyä—first; sarasvaté—Sarasvaté; svara-gamyaiù padaiù—with notes; siddhaiù—perfect; päöhayäm äsa—taught; näradam—Närada.

     Goddess Sarasvaté, the dearest beloved of the Lord of Vaikuëöha, then taught Närada the different rägas and rägiëés, their derivitives, the proper times and places for the different kinds of music, the different rhythms, the five-hundred-and-sixty-million divisions and numberless sub-divisions of scales, the various dances, the different musical instruments, and the different kinds of modulation.

Text 50

advitéyaà räga-karaà
     kåtvä taà räsa-maëòale
vaikuëöhaà präyayau rädhe
     väg-devé viñëu-vallabhä

     advitéyam—without rival; räga-karam—musician; kåtvä—making; tam—him; räsa-maëòale—in the circle of the musicians; vaikuëöham—to Vaikuëöha; präyayau—went; rädhe—O Rädhä; väg-devé—Goddess Sarasvaté; viñëu-vallabhä—dear to Lord Viñëu.

     In this way Sarasvaté, the goddess of speech and the beloved of Lord Viñëu, made Närada unrivalled in the circle of musicians. Then she returned to the spiritual world of Vaikuëöha.
.pa

Chapter Twenty-two
Çré Näradopäkhyäna
The Story of Çré Närada

Text 1

çré-bhagavän uväca 
kasmai deyam idaà guhyaà
     räga-rüpaà manoharam
buddhyä vicärayann itthaà
     gandharva-nagaraà yayau

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; kasmai—to whom?; deyam—should be guiven; idam—this; guhyam—secret; räga-rüpam—of the rägas; manoharam—beautiful; buddhyä—with intelligence; vicärayan—considering; ittham—thus; gandharva-nagaram—to the city of the gandharvas; yayau—went.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Thinking,  to whom should I give this beautiful and secret knowledge of music?", Närada went to the city of the gandharvas.

Text 2

tumburuà näma gandharvaà
     kåtvä çiñyaà sa näradaù
kalaà jagau mad-guëäàç ca
     véëä-vädya-paräyaëaù

     tumburum—Tumburu; näma—named; gandharvam—the gandharva; kåtvä—making; çiñyam—disciple; sa—he; näradaù—Närada; kalam—sweetly; jagau—sang; mad-guëän—My virtues; ca—

Chapter Twenty-four
Kola-daitya-vadha
The Killing of the Kola Demon

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
gopénäà caiva gopänäà
     dattvä sandarçanaà param
mathuräyäà kià cakära
     çré-kåñëo räma eva ca

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; gopénäm—of the gopés; ca—and; eva—indeed; gopänäm—of gopas; dattvä—giving; sandarçanam—sight; param—then; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; kim—what?; cakära—did; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; räma—Balaräma; eva—indeed; ca—and.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: After Kåñëa met the gopas and gopés, what did Kåñëa and Balaräma do in Mathurä City?

Text 2

caritraà paramaà miñöaà
     çré-kåñëa-baladevayoù
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     catur-varga-phala-pradam

     caritram—pastime; paramam—transcendental; miñöam—sweet; çré-kåñëa-baladevayoù—of Çré Kåñëa and Balaräma; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; catur-varga-phala-pradam—giving the four goals of life.

     Kåñëa and Balaräma's sacred, sweet, and transcendental pastimes remove all sins and grant the four goals of life.

Text 3

çré-närada uväca 
anyac caritraà çåëutäc
     chré-kåñëa-baladevayoù
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     catur-varga-phala-pradam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said:; anyac—another; caritram—pastrime; çåëutät—hear; çré-kåñëa-baladevayoù—of Çré Kåñëa and Balaräma; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; catur-varga-phala-pradam—granting thje four goals of life.

     Çré Närada said: Please hear another of Kåñëa and Balaräma's sacred transcendental pastimes, which remove all sins and grant the four goals of life.

Text 4

     kolena péòitä lokäù
     kauçäravi-purän nåpa
mathuräm äyayuù sarve
     sa-dvijä déna-mänasäù

     kolena—By Kola; péòitä—tormented; lokäù—the people; kauçäravi-purät—from Kausaravi-pura; nåpa—O king; mathuräm—to Mathurä; äyayuù—came; sarve—all; sa-dvijä—with brähmaëas; déna-mänasäù—troubled at heart.

     Harassed by a demon named Kola, all the people of Kauçäravi-pura fled to Mathurä City.

Text 5

açvam äçu samäruhya
     rohiëé-nandano balaù
sv-alpaiù puraù-saraiù särdhaà
     mågayärthé vinirgataù

     açvam—a horse; äçu—at once; samäruhya—mounting; rohiëé-nandanaù—Balaräma; balaù—Balaräma; sv-alpaiù—a few; puraù-saraiùfollowers; särdham—with; mågayärthé—to hunt; vinirgataù—left.

     At that moment Lord Balaräma, riding on horseback and ccompanied by a few attendants, was about to leave on a hunting expedition.

Text 6

taà natväbhyarcya vidhivat
     tad-aìghryoù patitäù pathi
kåtäïjali-puöä ücur
     harña-gadgadayä girä

     tam—to Him; natvä—bowing down; abhyarcya—worshiping; vidhivat—properly; tad-aìghryoù—at His feet; patitäù—fallen; pathi—on the road; kåtäïjali-puöä—with folded hands; ücuù—said; harña-gadgadayä—choked with happiness; girä—with words.

     Bowing down, worshiping Him, and falling at His feet, with folded hands and voices faltering with happines, the people spoke to Lord Balaräma.

Text 7

çré-prajä ücuù 
räma räma mahä-bäho
     deva-deva mahä-bala
kolena péòitäù sarve
     ägatäù çaraëaà vayam

     çré-prajä ücuù—the people said; räma—O Balaräma; räma—OBalaräma; mahä-bähaù—O mighty-armed; deva-deva—O Lord of lords; mahä-bala—O powerful one; kolena—by Kola; péòitäù—distressed; sarve—all; ägatäù—come; çaraëam—to the shelter; vayam—we.

     The people said: Balaräma! Balaräma! Mighty-armed one! Master of the demigods! Powerful one! We are all harassed by a demon named Kola. We take shalter of You. 

Text 8

daityaù kaàsa-sakhaù kolo
     jitvä kauçäravià nåpam
kauçäraveù pure räjyaà
     karoti sa mahä-balaù

     daityaù—demon; kaàsa-sakhaù—a friend of Kaàsa; kolaù—Kola; jitvä—defeating; kauçäravim—kausaravi; nåpam—King; kauçäraveù—pf Kausaravi; pure—in the city; räjyam—kingdom; karoti—does; sa—he; mahä-balaù—powerful.

     Kola, a powerful demon-friend of Kaàsa, defeated the king of Kauçäravi. Now he rules Kauçäravi City.

Text 9

kauçäravis tad-bhayäd dhi
     gaìgä-tére gato nåpaù
räjyärthaà tvat-padämbhojaà
     bhajate su-jitendriyaù

     kauçäraviù—Kausaravi; tad-bhayät—out of fear of him; hi—indeed; gaìgä-tére—to the Gaìgä's shore; gataù—went; nåpaù—king; räjyärtham—for his kingdom; tvat-padämbhojam—Your lotus feet; bhajate—worships; su-jitendriyaù—controlling his senses.

     Out of fear of him, the king of Kauçäravi fled to the Gaìgä's shore where, controlling his senses, he worships Your lotus feet to regain his kingdom.

Text 10

tat-sahäyaà kuru vibho
     vayaà yasya prajäù çubhäù
putravat pälitäs tena
     mahä-saukhya-samanvitäù

     tat-sahäyam—help; kuru—please givve; vibhaù—O powerful one; vayam—we; yasya—of him; prajäù—the subjects; çubhäù—good; putravat—like sons; pälitäù—protected; tena—by him; mahä-saukhya-samanvitäù—very happy.

     O almighty one, please help him. We are his good subjects. He always protected us as if we were his own children. We were always happy under his rule.

Text 11

kolenädyaiva duñöena
     péòitäù satataà prabho
tralokya-vijayé véraù
     kaàso 'pi nihatas tvayä

     kolena—by Kola; adya—now; eva—indeed; duñöena—the demon; péòitäù—harassed; satatam—always; prabhaù—O Lord; tralokya—the three worlds; vijayé—conquering; véraù—warrior; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; api—even; nihataù—killed; tvayä—by You.

     Now we are continually harassed by by the demon Kola. O Lord, You killed even the ferocious Kaàsa, who had conquered the three worlds.

Text 12

kole jévati devendra
     kaàso 'pi na måtaù småtaù
rakñärthaà sa-guëo 'si tvaà
     bhaktänäà prakåteù paraù

     kole—as Kola; jévati—lives; devendra—O master of the demigods; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; api—also; na—not; måtaù—dead; småtaù—considered; rakñärtham—for protection; sa-guëaù—appearing as an ordinary person subject to the modes of nature; asi—are; tvam—You; bhaktänäm—of the devotees; prakåteù—matter; paraù—beyond.

     O master of the demigods, we think that Kaàsa is not dead as long as Kola remains alive. O master of the demigods, although You are transcendental, beyond the world of matter, in order to protect Your devotees You have come here, pretending to be a conditioned soul bound by the modes of nature. 
Text 13

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä vacas teñäà
     çré-rämo bhakta-vatsalaù
gaìgä-yamunayor madhye
     kauçämbéà nagaréà yayau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—words; teñäm—of them; çré-rämaù—Çré Balaräma; bhakta—devotees; vatsalaù—loves; gaìgä-yamunayoù—of the Gaìgä and Yamunä; madhye—between; kauçämbém—Kausambi; nagarém—City; yayau—went.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing these words, Lord Balaräma, who loves His devotees, went to Kauçäravi City in the land between the Gaìgä and the Yamunä.

Text 14

yoddhuà samägataà rämaà
     çrutvä kolo 'pi nirgataù
akñauhiëébhir daçäbhir
     maëòitaç caëòa-vikramaù

     yoddhum—to fight; samägatam—come; rämam—Balaräma; çrutvä—hearing; kolaù—Kola; api—also; nirgataù—went; akñauhiëébhiù—with aksauhinis; daçäbhiù—ten; maëòitaù—decorated; caëòa-vikramaù—ferocious.

     Hearing that Lord Balaräma had come to fight, ferocious Kola, decorated with ten akñauhiëé divisions, went to meet Him.

Texts 15 and 16

caïcaläçva-taraìgäòhyaà
     rathebhäçva-timiìgilam
nadém ivägatäà senäà
     pralayärëava-nädiném

vérävartäà ca täà vékñya
     baddhvä setuà halaà balaù
äkåñya taà tad-agreëa
     musalenähanad dåòham

     caïcala—restless; açva—horses; taraìga—waves; äòhyam—opulent; ratha—chariots; ibha—elephants; açva—horses; timiìgilam—timingila fish; nadém—river; iva—like; ägatäm—arrived; senäm—army; pralaya—of devastation; arëava—the ocean; nädiném—roaring; véra—of warriors; ävartäàwhirlpools; ca—and; täm—that; vékñya—seeing; baddhvä—binding; setum—a bridge; halam—strong; balaù—Balaräma; äkåñya—pulling; tam—that; tad-agreëa—by the tip; musalena—by His club; ahanat—struck; dåòham—hard.

     Lord Balaräma gazed at Kola's army, which was like a great river filled with waves of restless horses, timiìgila fish of chariots, elephants, and horses, whirlpools of ferocious soldiers, and tumultuous roaring like a great ocean of destruction. Then the Lord, in order to make a bridge to cross this river of soldiers, began striking it with His club.

Text 17

yugapat tat-prahäreëa
     vérä açvä rathä gajäù
sarvataù koöiçaù petuù
     peñitäù phalavad raëe

     yugapat—at that moment; tat-prahäreëa—by His blows; vérä—the warriors; açvä—horses; rathä—chariots; gajäù—elephants; sarvataù—all; koöiçaù—by the millions; petuù—fell; peñitäù—crushed; phalavat—like fruit; raëe—in the battle.

     By the force of Lord Balaräma's blows millions of warriors, horses, chariots, and elephants fell, crushed as if they were pieces of fruit thrown on the battlefield.

Text 18

çeñäù pradudruvur vérä
     bhayärtä raëa-maëòalät
ekäké yuyudhe daityaù
     kolo rämeëa çastra-bhåt

     çeñäù—remaining; pradudruvuù—fled; vérä—warriors; bhayärtä—terrified; raëa-maëòalät—from the battlefield; ekäké—alone; yuyudhe—fought; daityaù—the demon; kolaù—Kola; rämeëa—with Balaräma; çastra-bhåt—armed with weapons.

     Terrified, the surviving warriors fled from the battlefield. Then Kola, armed with many weapons, fought a duel with Lord Balaräma.

Texts 19-21

gomutra-caya-sindüra-
     kastüré-patra-bhån mukham
suvarëa-çåìkhaläyuktaà
     prakhacit-kaöi-bandhanam

sravan-madaà catur-dantaà
     ghaëöä-öaìkära-bhéñaëampronnataà dig-gajam iva
     nadat-käla-ghana-prabham

çitam aìkuçam ädäya
     kola äruhya karëataù
sva-gajaà nodayäm äsa
     baladeväya daitya-räö

     go-mutra—urine; caya—abundance; sindüra—sindura; kastüré-patra-bhån—muslk; mukham—face; suvarëa—gold; çåìkhala—chains; äyuktam—with; prakhacit-kaöi-bandhanam—belt; sravat—flowing; madam—ichor; catur-dantam—four tusks; ghaëöä-öaìkära—tinkling of bells; bhéñaëam—fearful; pronnatam—great; dig-gajam—an elephant holding up the directions; iva—like; nadat-käla-ghana-prabham—roaring like thunder; çitam—sharp; aìkuçam—goad; ädäya—taking; kola—Kola; äruhya—mounting; karëataù—by the ear; sva-gajam—his own elephant; nodayäm äsa—made it charge; baladeväya—to Lord Balaräma; daitya-räö—the king of demons.

     Mounting by its ear his four-tusked elephant bound with golden chains, its face decorated with pictures and designs drawn in gomütra, sindüra, and musk, its ichor flowing, its bells tinkling ominously, and its body enormous as one of the elephants holding up the directions, and making his elephant trumpet like thunder, the demon-king Kola took a sharp goad in his hand and made his elephant charge Lord Balaräma.

Text 22

ägataà vékñya taà nägaà
     mattaà kolena noditam
tatäòa musalenäsau
     vajreëendro yathä girim

     ägatam—coming; vékñya—seeing; tam—that; nägam—elephant; mattam—maddened; kolena—bo Kola; noditam—sent; tatäòa—struck; musalena—with His club; asau—He; vajreëa—with the thunderbolt; indraù—Indra; yathä—as; girim—a mountain.

     Seeing the maddened elephant, pressed on by Kola, charging Him, Lord Balaräma struck it with His club as Indra strikes a mountain with his thunderbolt.

Text 23

musalasya prahäreëa
     viçérëo 'bhün mahä-gajaù
måd-ghäto naikadhaiväçu
     daëòa-ghätena maithila

     musalasya—of the club; prahäreëa—by the blow; viçérëaù—shattered; abhüt—became; mahä-gajaù—the great elephant; måd-ghätaù—a clay pot; na—not; ekadhä—one; eva—indeed; äçu—at once; daëòa-ghätena—by the blow of a stick; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, the elephant was shattered by the blow from Lord Balaräma's club as a small clay pot is shattered by a stick.

Text 24

kolaù kroòa-mukho daityo
     raktäkñaù patito gajät
çülaà cikñepa niçitaà
     mädhaväya mahätmane

     kolaù—Kola; kroòa-mukhaù—a great mouth; daityaù—the demon; raktäkñaù—red eyes; patitaù—fallen; gajät—from the elephant; çülam—spear; cikñepa—threw; niçitam—sharp; mädhaväya—at Balaräma; mahätmane—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     Kola, his eyes red and his mouth wide-open, jumped from the elephant and threw a spear at Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 25

musalena tadä rämas
     tac-chülaà çatadhäcchinat
käca-pätraà yathä balo
     daëòena ca videha-räö

     musalena—with His club; tadä—then; rämaù—Balaräma; tac-chülam—the spear; çatadhä—in a hundred pieces; acchinat—shattered; käca-pätram—a crystal goblet; yathä—as; balaù—Balaräma; daëòena—with a stick; ca—and; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, with His club Lord Balaräma shattered that spear into a hundred pieces as one shatters a crystal goblet with an iron rod.

Text 26

sahasra-bhära-samyuktäà
     gadäà gurvéà pragåhya ca
balaà tatäòa hådaye
     jagarja ghanavat khalaù

     sahasra-bhära-samyuktäm—weighing a thousand bharas; gadäm—club; gurvém—heavy; pragåhya—taking; ca—and; balam—Lord Balaräma; tatäòa—struck; hådaye—on the chest; jagarja—roared; ghanavat—like a cloud; khalaù—the demon.

     Taking a club heavy as a thousand bhäras, the demon struck Lord Balaräma on the chest and roared like thunder.

Text 27

tad-gadäyäù prahäreëa
     na cacäla yadüdvahaù
paçyatäà sarva-lokänäà
     srajä hata iva dvipaù

     tad-gadäyäù—of the club; prahäreëa—by the blow; na—not; cacäla—wavered; yadüdvahaù—Balaräma; paçyatäm—looking; sarva-lokänäm—all the people; srajä—by a garland; hata—hit; iva—like; dvipaù—an elephant.

     As everyone could see the blow of the club had no effect on Lord Balaräma. He stood like an elephant struck by a flower garland.

Text 28

tam äkåñya halägreëa
     kolaà kajjalavat-tanum
musalenähanan mürdhni
     baladevo mahä-balaù

     tam—him; äkåñya—dragging; halägreëa—by the tip of His plow; kolam—Kol; kajjalavat-tanum—his body like black kajjala; musalena—by the club; ahanat—hit; mürdhni—on the head; baladevaù—Balaräma; mahä-balaù—very powerful.

     Catching Kola, who was black as mascara, and dragging him about with His plow, powerful Lord Balaräma finally hit him on the head with His club.

Text 29

musalähata-mürdhäpi
     patito raëa-maëòale
muñöi-ghätaà ghätayitvä
     tatraiväntaradhéyata

     musala—by the club; ähata—hit; mürdhä—on the head; api—also; patitaù—fallen; raëa-maëòale—in the battlefield; muñöi-ghätam—a punch; ghätayitvä—throwing; tatra—there; eva—indeed; antaradhéyata—disappeared.

     His head struck by the Lord's club, Kola fell on the battleground. Then he clapped his hands and suddenly disappeared.

Text 30

cakära mäyäà mäyävé
     daiteyém ati-bhéñaëäm
pralaya-prabhavair meghair
     mahä-väta-praëoditaiù andhakäraà prakurvadbhir      abhüd äcchäditaà nabhaù

     cakära—did; mäyäm—magic; mäyävé—a magician; daiteyém—demonic; ati-bhéñaëäm—very fearful; pralaya-prabhavaiù—with the power of destruction; meghaiù—with clouds; mahä-väta-praëoditaiù—send by great winds; andhakäram—blinding darkness; prakurvadbhiù—making; abhüt—did; äcchäditam—covered; nabhaù—the sky.

     Kola, a great magician, made very terrifying and demonic illusions. Bringing devastating clouds pushed by hurricane winds, he covered the sky with a blinding darkness. 

Text 31

japä-puñpa-samän bindün
     ajasraà rudhirasya ca
mocayitvätha bébhatsa-
     varñäç cakrur ghanäghanäù

     japä-puñpa-samän—like roses; bindün—drops; ajasram—at once; rudhirasya—of blood; ca—and; mocayitvä—releasing; atha—then; bébhatsa—terrifying; varñäù—rains; cakruù—did; ghanäghanäù—great clouds.

     The great clouds made a terrifying monsoon rain of blood drops big as roses.

Text 32

püya-medo-'ti-vië-mütra-
     surä-mäàsa-samanvitäù
dåñövä täbhiç ca varñäbhir
     hä-hä-käro babhüva ha

     püya—pus; medaù—fat; ati-viö—great stool; mütra—urine; surä—wine; mäàsa—flesh; samanvitäù—with; dåñövä—seeing; täbhiù—with them; ca—and; varñäbhiù—rains; hä-hä-käraù—alas! alas!; babhüva—was; ha—indeed.

     Then it rained pus, fat, stool, urine, wine, and flesh. There was a great cry of {Alas! Alas!"

Texts 33 and 34

jïätvätha tat-kåtäà mäyäà
     baladevo mahä-prabhuù
cikñepa musalaà dérghaà
     para-sainya-vidäraëam

sarvästra-ghätakaà svacchaà
     añöa-dhätu-mayaà dåòham
çata-yojana-vistérëaà
     pralayägni-sama-prabham

     jïätvä—knowing; atha—then; tat-kåtäm—done by him; mäyäm—magic; baladevaù—Balaräma; mahä-prabhuù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; cikñepa—thre; musalam—His club; dérgham—great; para-sainya-vidäraëam—breaking the enemy's army; sarva—all; astra—weapons; ghätakam—blow; svaccham—clear; añöa-dhätu-mayam—made of eight metals; dåòham—firm; çata-yojana-vistérëam—800 miles long; pralayägni-sama-prabham—splendid as the fire of cosmic devastation.

     Aware that this was all a magical illusion, Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, threw His great eight-hundred-mile club, the best of weapons, which was made of eight metals, splendid as the fires at the time of cosmic devastation, and able to cut to pieces any enemy's army.

Text 35

balästraà musalaà reje
     bhramad daça-dig-antare
vidärayad ghanän vyomni
     néhäraà ca yathä raviù

     bala—Lord Balaräma's; astram—weapon; musalam—club; reje—shone; bhramat—wandering; daça-dig-antare—the ten directions; vidärayat—cutting apart; ghanän—the clouds; vyomni—in the sky; néhäram—fog; ca—and; yathä—as; raviù—the sun.

     Lord Balaräma's club circled the ten directions, cutting away the clouds as the the sun cuts away the morning fog.

Text 36

tad-vyomni pragataà dåñövä
     halästraà ca svataù prabhuù
samutpatyäkåñya balän
     madhye tän vidadära ha

     tad-vyomni—in the sky; pragatam—gone; dåñövä—seeing; halästram—Lord Balaräma's plow; ca—and; svataù—own; prabhuù—the Lord; samutpatya—lifting; äkåñya—dragging; balän—by force; madhye—in the middle; tän—them; vidadära—cut; ha—indeed.

     Seeing that His club was still in the sky, the Lord took up His plow weapon and continued to break apart the clouds.

Text 37

näçaà gatäyäà mäyäyäà
     baladevo mahä-balaù
gåhétvä bhuja-daëòäbhyäà
     bhuja-daëòe madotkaöe

     näçam—to destruction; gatäyäm—gone; mäyäyäm—the magic; baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; mahä-balaù—very powerful; gåhétvä—taking; bhuja-daëòäbhyäm—with both arms; bhuja-daëòe—the arms; madotkaöe—ferocious.

     When the magical illusion was completely dispelled, with both hands powerful Lord Balaräma grabbed the ferocious demon's arm.

Text 38

bhrämayan bäla iva taà
     pratülaà sa itas tataù
pätayäm äsa bhü-påñöhe
     kamaëòalum ivärbhakaù

     bhrämayan—whirling about; bäla—a child; iva—like; tam—him; pratülam—cotton; sa—he; itaù—here; tataù—and there; pätayäm äsa—threw; bhü-påñöhe—to the ground; kamaëòalum—a kamandalu; iva—like; arbhakaù—a child.

     Whirling him around and around as a child whirls a cotton swab, Lord Balaräma threw the demon to the ground as a child throws a kamaëòalu.

Text 39

tasya daityasya pätena
     säbdhi-çaila-vanaiù saha
cakampe näòikä-mätraà
     sarvaà bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam

     tasya—of him; daityasya—the demon; pätena—by the fall; säbdhi-çaila-vanaiù—with oceans, mountains, and forests; saha—with; cakampe—trembled; näòikä-mätram—tube; sarvam—all; bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam—the circle of the earth.

     When the demon fell the entire earth, with its oceans, mountains, and forests, shook.

Text 40

bhagna-dantaç calan-netro
     mürchito nidhanaà yayau
kolo näma mahä-daityo
     våtro vajra-hato yathä

     bhagna-dantaù—broken teeth; calan-netraù—moving eyes; mürchitaù—fainted; nidhanam—death; yayau—attained; kolaù—Kola; näma—named; mahä-daityaù—the great demon; våtraù—Våtra; vajra—by the thunderbolt; hataù—struck; yathä—as.

     His teeth broken and his eyes moving, the great demon named Kola fainted and died, as Våtra did when he was hit by Indra's thunderbolt.

Text 41

tadä jaya-jayärävo
     divi bhümau babhüva ha
deva-dundubhayo neduù
     puñpa-varñäù suraiù kåtäù

     tadä—then; jaya-jayärävaù—sounds of "Victory! Victory!"; divi—in the sky; bhümau—on the earth; babhüva—was; ha—indeed; deva-dundubhayaù—the dundubhis of the demigods; neduù—sounded; puñpa-varñäù—showers of flowers; suraiù—by the demigods; kåtäù—done.

     At that moment there was a great tumult of "Victory! Victory!" in both the heaven and earth, the celestial dundubhi drums sounded, and the demigods showered flowers.

Text 42

itthaà kolaà ghätayitvä
     baladevo 'cyutägrajaù
dattvätha kauçäravaye
     kauçämbéà ca puréà tataù

     ittham—thus; kolam—Kola; ghätayitvä—killing; baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; acyutägrajaù—the elder brother of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead; dattvä—giving; atha—then; kauçäravaye—to King Kauçäravi; kauçämbém—Kauçäravi City; ca—and; purém—the city; tataù—then.

     Having killed the demon Kola, Lord Balaräma, the elder brother of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead, returned Kauçäravi City to King Kauçäravi.

Text 43

snätuà bhägirathéà prägäd
     gargäcäryädibhir våtaù
lokänäà saìgrahaà kartuà
     sarva-doña-kñayäya ca

     snätum—to bathe; bhägirathém—in the Gaìgä; prägät—went; gargäcäryädibhiù—headed by Garga MUni; våtaù—surrounded; lokänäm—of the people; saìgraham—protection; kartum—to do; sarva-doña-kñayäya—to remove all sins; ca—and.

     Then, to remove all sins and to protect all the worlds, Lord Balaräma, accompanied by Garga Muni and a host of great sages, went to bathe in the Gaìgä.

Text 44

snäpayäà cakrur äryäs te
     gaìgäyäà mädhavaà balam
veda-mantrair maìgalaiç ca
     gargäcäryädayo dvijäù

     snäpayäà cakruù—bathes; äryäù—the saints; te—they; gaìgäyäm—in the Gaìgä; mädhavam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; balam—Balaräma; veda—of the Vedas; mantraiù—with mantras; maìgalaiù—auspicious; ca—and; gargäcäryädayaù—headed by garga Muni; dvijäù—the brähmaëas.

     Chanting auspicious Vedic mantras, the saintly brähmaëas headed by Garga Muni performed a ritual bathing of Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, in the waters of the Gaìgä.

Texts 45 and 46

lakñaà gajänäà vaideha
     syandanänäà dvi-lakñakam
hayänäà ca tathä koöià
     dhenünäm arbudaà daça 
çatärbhudaà ca ratnänäà
     bhäraà jambünadävåtam
rämo dattvä brähmaëebhyaù
     prayayau mathuräà purém

     lakñam—a hundred thousand; gajänäm—elkephants; vaideha—O king of Videha; syandanänäm—of chariots; dvi-lakñakam—two hundred thousand; hayänäm—of horses; ca—and; tathä—so; koöim—ten million; dhenünäm—of cows; arbudam—a hundred million; daça—ten; çatärbhudam—ten billion; ca—and; ratnänäm—of jewels; bhäram—abundance; jambünadävåtam—covered with gold; rämaù—Lord Balaräma; dattvä—giving; brähmaëebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; prayayau—went; mathuräm—to Mathurä; purém—City.

     O king of Videha, after giving a hundred thousand elephants, two hundred thousand chariots, ten million horses, one billion cows, and ten billion ornaments of gold and jewels in charity to the brähmaëas, Lord Balaräma returned to Mathurä City.

Text 47

yatra rämeëa gaìgäyäà
     kåtaà snänaà videha-räò
tatra térthaà mahä-puëyaà
     räma-térthaà vidur budhäù

     yatra—where; rämeëa—with Balaräma; gaìgäyäm—in the Ganges; kåtam—done; snänam—bath; videha-räò—O king of Videha; tatra—there; tértham—holy place; mahä-puëyam—very sacred; räma-tértham—Räma-tértha; viduù—know; budhäù—the wise;

     O king of Videha, this very sacred place, where Räma bathed in the Ganges, the wise know as Räma-tértha. 

     Note: Texts 47-60 are quoted by Çréla Bhaktivinoda Öhäkura in His Çré Navadvépa-dhäma-mähätmya, Pramäëa-khaëòa.

Text 48

kärttikyäà kärttike snatvä
     ramatérthe tu jähnavém
haridväräc chata-guëaà
     puëyaà vai labhate janaù

     kärttikyäm—on the full-moon day; kärttike—in the month of Kärttika; snatvä—having bathed; ramatérthe—at Räma-tértha; tu—indeed; jähnavém—in the Ganges; haridvärät—from Hardwar; çata—a hundred times; guëam—multiplied; puëyam—piety; vai—indeed; labhate—attains; janaù—a person.

     A person who on the full-moon day of the month of Kärttika bathes in the Ganges at Räma-tértha attains piety a hundred times greater than at Hardwar.

Text 49

çré-bahuläçva uväca

kausambäc ca kiyad düraà
     sthale kasmin mahä-mune
ramatérthaà mahä-puëyaà     mahyaà vaktuà tvam arhasi

     çré-bahuläçvaù—Çré Bahuläçva; uväca—said; kausambät—from Kusanagara; ca—and; kiyat—how much?; düram—far; sthale—place; kasmin—in what?; mahä-mune—O great sage; ramatértham—Räma-tértha; mahä-puëyam—great piety; mahyam—to me; vaktum—to speak; tvam—you; arhasi—desrve.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: How far, and in what direction from Kauçäravi City, is very sacred Räma-tértha? Please tell me.

Text 50

çré-närada uväca

kausambäc ca tad éçänyäà
     catur-yojanam eva hi
vayasyaà sükara-kñeträc
     catur-yojanaà eva ca

     çré-näradaù—Çré Närada; uväca—said; kausambät—from Kusanagara; ca—and; tat—that; éçänyäm—north; catur-yojanam—four yojanas (32 miles); eva—indeed; hi—indeed; vayasyam—northwest; sükara-kñetrat—from Koladvépa; ca—and; catur-yojanam—four yojanas; eva—indeed; ca—and.

     Çré Närada said: It is 32 miles north of Kauçäravi City and 32 miles northwest of Koladvépa.

Text 51

karëakñeträc ca ñaö-kroçair
     nalakñeträc ca païcabhiù
ägneyyäà diçi räjendra
     räma-térthaà vadanti hi

     karëakñeträt—from Kurukñetra; ca—and; ñaö—six; kroçaiù—kroças; nalakñeträt—from Nalakñetra; ca—and; païcabhiù—with five; agneyyäm—in the southeast; diçi—direction; räjendra—O great king; rämatértham—Räma-tértha; vadanti—say; hi—indeed.

     O great king, they say that Räma-tértha 12 miles southeast of Kurukñetra and 10 miles southeast of Nalakñetra.

Text 52

våddha-keçé-siddha-péöhad
     bilvakeçavanät punaù
pürvasyäà ca tribhiù kroçai
     rämatérthaà vidur budhäù

     våddha-keçé-siddha-péöhat—from Våddha-keçé-siddha-péöha; bilvakeçavanät—from Bilvakeçavana; punaù—again; pürvasyäm—in the east; ca—and; tribhiù kroçaiù—with three kroças; rämatértham—Räma-tértha; viduù—know; budhäù—the wise;

     The wise know that Räma-tértha is 6 miles east of Våddha-keçé-siddha-péöha and Bilvakeçavana. 

Text 53

dåòhäçvo vaìga-räjo 'bhüt
     kurüpaà lomaça-munià
dåñövä jahäsa satataà
     taà çaçäpa mahä-muniù

     dåòhäçvaù—Dåòhäçva; vaìga-räjaù—the king of Bengal; abhüt—was; kurüpam—deformed; lomasa-munim—Lomaça Muni; dåñövä—seeing; jahäsa—laughed; satatam—always; tam—him; çaçäpa—cursed; mahä-muniù—the great sage.

     There was a king of Bengal named Dåòhäçva who always laughed at deformed Lomaça Muni. The great sage Lomaça cursed him:

Text 54

vikarälaù kroòa-mukho
     'suro 'bhavan mahä-khalaù
itthaà sa muni-çäpena
     kolaù kroda-mukho 'bhavat          

     vikarälaù—horrible; kroòa-mukhaù—with the face of a pig; asuraù—demon; bhava—become; mahä-khalaù—a great demon; ittham—in this way; saù—he; muni-çäpena—by the sage's curse; kolaù—Kola; kroòa-mukhaù—with the face of a pig; abhavat—became.        

     "Now become a horrible demon with the face of a pig!" By the sage's curse the king became a pig-faced demon named Kola.

Text 55

baladeva-prahäreëa
     tyaktvä svam äsuréà tanum
kolo näma mahä-daityaù     paraà kñetraà jagäma ha

     baladeva—of Lord Balaräma; prahäreëa—by the blows; tyaktvä—abandoning; svam—his; äsurém—demon; tanum—body; kolaù—Kola; näma—name; mahä-daityaù—the great demon; paraà kñetram—to the supreme abode; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     Killed by Lord Baladeva, the great demon Kola gave up his demon body and went to the spiritual world. 

Text 56

tato rämo mantribhiç ca
     uddhavädibhir anvitaù
jahnu-térthaà jagämäçu
     yatra dakñaù çruter abhüt

     tataù—then; rämaù—Balaräma; mantribhiù—with advisors; ca—and; uddhava-ädibhiù—headed by Uddhava; anvitaù—with; jahnu-tértham—to Jahnu-tértha; jagäma—went; äçu—at once; yatra—where; dakñaù—expert; çruteù—in the Vedas; abhüt—was.

     Then Lord Balaräma, accompanied by Uddhava and other advisers, at once went to Jahnu-tértha, where He became learned in the Vedas.

Text 57

gaìgä brähmaëa-mukhyasya
     jähnavé yena kathyate
datvä dänaà dvijätibhya
     uñu rätrau janaiù saha

     gaìgä—Ganges; brähmaëa-mukhyasya—of the best of brähmaëas; jähnavé—Jähnavé; yena—by whom; kathyate—is called; datvä—giving; dänam—charity; dvijätibhyaù—to the brähmaëas; uñuù—resided; rätrau—at night; janaiù—people; saha—with.

     Jahnu is the great Brähmaëa after whom the Ganges is called Jähnavé. There Lord Balaräma gave chairty ot the brähmaëas and then stayed the night with His associates.

Text 58

tatas taà päçcime bhäge
     päëòavänäm ati-priyam
ähära-sthänakaà präpya     rätrau väsaà cakära ha

     tataù—then; tam—that; päçcime bhäge—in the west; päëòavänäm—to the Päëòavas; ati-priyam—very dear; ähära-sthänakam—Ähära-sthäna; präpya—attained; rätrau—at night; väsam—residence; cakära—made; ha—indeed.

     Going west, He reached Ähära-sthäna, which is very dear to the Päëòavas, where He stayed the night.

Text 59

tatra dänaà dvijätibhyo
     datvä sad-guëa-bhojanam
tato yojanaà ekaà ca
     devaà mäëòüka-samjïakam

     tatra—there; dänam—charity; dvijätibhyaù—to the brähmaëas; datvä—giving; sad-guëa-bhojanam—delicious food; tataù—then; yojanaà ekam—one yojana; ca—and; devam—the Deity; maëòuka-samjïakam—named Maëòuka.

     There He gave delicious foods in charity to the brähmaëas. Then He went eight miles away to the devotee named Mäëòükadeva.

Text 60

tapas taptaà mahat tena
     cänte deva-kåpäptaye
tad-arthaà sva-samäjena
     baladevo jagäma ha

     tapas taptam—performed austerities;; mahat—great; tena—by Him; ca—and; ante—in the end; deva—of the Diety; kåpä—mercy; äptaye—to attain; tad-artham—for that purpose; sva-samäjena—with His group; baladevaù—Balaräma; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     Mäëòükadeva had performed great austerities to attain the mercy of the Lord. That is the reason Lord Balaräma went there with His associates.

Texts 61 and 62

ürdhväsyam eka-päda-sthaà
     dhyäna-stimita-locanam
sva-bhaktaà hådaya-sthaà svaà
     mürti-darçana-lolupam
taà jahära tadänantas
     tato bähye dadarça ha
sa dåñövänanta-devasya
     rüpaà parama-sundaram

     ürdhväsyam—his head raised; eka-päda-stham—standing on one foot; dhyäna-stimita-locanam—his eyes closed in meditation; sva-bhaktam—His devotee; hådaya-stham—situated in the heart; svam—own; mürti-darçana-lolupam—eager to see the form; tam—him; jahära—embracing; tadä—then; anantaù—the limitless Lord; tataù—then; bähye—outside; dadarça—saw; ha—Oh; sa—he; dåñövä—seeing; ananta-devasya—of Lord Ananta; rüpam—the form; parama-sundaram—very handsome.

     Standing on one foot, his head up, and his eyes closed, Mäëòükadeva meditated on the Lord, whom he could see in his heart. Still, Mäëòükadeva yearned to see the Lord's form with his eyes open. When Lord Balaräma, now in His form of Lord Ananta, embraced him, Mäëòükadeva opened his eyes and saw before him the sublimely handsome form of Lord Ananta.

Text 63

sragvy-eka-kuëòalaà gauraà
     täläìka-ratha-samyutam
stutvä paramayä bhaktyä
     papäta caraëau punaù

     sragvé—wearing a garland; eka-kuëòalam—one earring; gauram—fair; täläìka-ratha-samyutam—His chariot marked with the insignia of a palm tree; stutvä—offering prayers; paramayä—with great; bhaktyä—devotion; papäta—fell; caraëau—at the feet; punaù—again and again.

     Lord Ananta had a fair complexion. He wore a flower garland and a single earring, and His chariot bore the insignia of a palm tree. Offering prayers with great devotion, Mäëòükadeva fell again and again at His feet. 

Texts 64 and 65

tasya çiåñëä karaà datvä
     varaà brühéty uväca ha
yadi prasanno bhagavän
     anugrahyo 'smi vä yadi

sarvottamäà bhägavatéà
     saàhitäà çuka-vaktrataù
nirgatäà dehi mäà svämin
     kali-doña-haräà paräm
      tasya—of Him; çiåñëä—head; karam—hands; datvä—placing; varam—benediction; brühé—please give; iti—thus; uväca—said; ha—indeed; yadi—if; prasannaù—pleased; bhagavän—the Lord; anugrahyaù—the object of mercy; asmi—I am; vä—or; yadi—if; sarva—of all; uttamäm—the best; bhägavatéà saàhitäm—Çré Bhägavaté-saàhitä; çuka-vaktrataù—from the mouth of Çukadeva Gosvämé; nirgatäm—come; dehi—please give; mäm—me;– svamin—O LOrd; kali—of Kali-yuga; doña—the faults; haräm—removing; paräm—transcendental.

     Placing a hand on His devotee's head, Lord Balaräma,  Ask for a benedcition." Mäëòükadeva said, "If the Lord is pleased wth Me, or if the Lord feels compassion on Me, then, O Lord, please give me the Bhägavaté-saàhitä, which has come from the mouth of Çukadeva Gosvämé, and which removes the evils of the age of Kali."

     Note: Çréla Bhaktivinoda Öhäkura quotes these two verses in His Çré Navadvépa-dhäma-mähätmya, Pramäëa-khaëòa.

Text 66

çré-baladeva uväca 
uddhava-dvärataù präptir
     bhaviñyati tavänagha
çrémad-bhagavaté kértir
     adhikä ya kalau yuge

     çré-baladeva uväca—Çré Balaräma said; uddhava-dvärataù—by Uddhava; präptiù—attained; bhaviñyati—will be; tava—of you; anagha—O sinless one; çrémad-bhagavaté—Çrémad-bhagavaté; kértiù—the glory; adhikä—great; ya—which; kalau yuge—in Kali-yuga.

     Çré Balaräma said: O sinless one, from Uddhava you will learn the Çrémad Bhägavaté-samhitä, which is gloriously manifest in the age of Kali. 

Text 67

çré-mäëòüka uväca 
kathaà bhagavatä dattä
     mukhyä tasyädhikäritä
kadä yogaà mama svasmin
     kuru sandeha-bhaïjanam

     çré-mäëòüka uväca—Çré Mäëòükadeva said; katham—how?; bhagavatä—by the Lord; dattä—given; mukhyä—first; tasya—of that; adhikäritä—superiority; kadä—when?; yogam—meeting; mama—of me; svasmin—own; kuru—please do; sandeha-bhaïjanam—removing doubts.

     Çré Mäëòükadeva said: Why is this scripture given by the Lord so great? When will I learn it? O Lord, please break apart my doubts.

Text 68

çré-baladeva uväca 
kathayämi paraà gopyaà
     rahasyaà paramädbhutam
adyäpi mama sämépye
     uddhavo 'yaà viräjate

     çré-baladeva uväca—Çré Balaräma said; kathayämi—I will tell; param—agreat; gopyam—secret; rahasyam—confidential; paramädbhutam—very wonderful; adya—today; api—also; mama—of Me; sämépye—near; uddhavaù—Uddhava; ayam—he; viräjate—is manifested.

     Çré Balaräma said: I will tell you a great secret. Even now, Uddhava is nearby.

Text 69

tad-darçanaà kuru paraà
     äcärya-sampradäyikam
adya térthasya yaträyäà
     upadeço na te bhavet

     tad-darçanam—the sight of him; kuru—do; param—great; äcärya-sampradäyikam—the community of gurus; adya—now; térthasya—of the holy place; yaträyäm—in pilgrimage; upadeçaù—teaching; na—not; te—of you; bhavet—may be.

     Go and see him, a great äcärya in the disciplic succession. I will not teach you further, for now I am going on pilgrimage. 

Text 70

yathopadeñöa bhavati
     tena te kathayämy aham
uddhavaù sthäpitaù çrémad-
     äcäryaù saàhitämayaù

     yathopadeñöa—as taught; bhavati—is; tena—by him; te—to you; kathayämi—I tell; aham—I; uddhavaù—Uddhava; sthäpitaù—placed; çrémad-äcäryaù—the teacher; saàhitämayaù—learning in that saàhitä.

     I tell you Uddhava is a great teacher of Çrémad Bhägavaté-samhitä.

Texts 71-73

nandädi-vraja-väsénäà
     gopénäà prétaye kåtaù
sva-svarüpaà parikaraà
     yat kiïcit bhagavattamam

sarva-svabhäva-guëakaà
     kåñëena paramätmanä
uddhavaà caiva svätmänaà
     eka eväciräd vibhuù

säkñät-käraà cakärädau
     na svéyam antaraà kvacit
çré-kåñëam eva te jïätvä
     püjayäm äsur ädarät

     nandädi-vraja-väsénäm—the people of Vraja, headed by nanda; gopénäm—of the gopés; prétaye—to please; kåtaù—done; sva-svarüpam—own form; parikaraàassociates; yat—what; kiïcit—something; bhagavattamam—very exalted; sarva-svabhäva-guëakam—with all virtues; kåñëena——by Lord Kåñëa; paramätmanä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; uddhavam—Uddhava; ca—and; eva—certainly; svätmänam—self; eka—one; eva—indeed; acirät—quickly; vibhuù—the Lord; säkñät-käram—directky manifest; cakära—did; ädau—at the first; na—not; svéyam—own; antaram—then; kvacit—sometime; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; eva—indeed; te—they; jïätvä—understanding; püjayäm äsuù—worshiped; ädarät—with reverence.

     To please Nanda, the gopés, and the other people of Vraja, Lord Kåñëa sent to them His personal associate Uddhava, who is very virtuous and exalted, and who has a transcendental form like that of the Lord Himself. Lord Kåñëa did not directly appear to them at first. First he sent Uddhava. Then, when they understood the true nature of Kåñëa, the people of Vraja worshiped Him with great reverence.

Text 74

vasantartuç ca gréñmo 'pi
     sa cakära vrajätmakau
çamayäm äsa rädhäyaù
     çokaà tat-kuëòa-pärçvajaù

     vasantartuù—spring; ca—and; gréñme—in summer; api—even; sa—not; cakära—did; vrajätmakau—the two Lords of Vraja; çamayäm äsa—pacified; rädhäyaù—of Rädhä; çokam—the grief; tat-kuëòa-pärçvajaù—by the side of Her lake.

     Staying at Rädhä-kuëòa during the spring and summer seasons, Uddhava pacified Çré Rädhä's grief.

Text 75

sarvaà bhü-maëòalaà tatra
     vicacära vrajänugaiù
viyogärti-haraù prokto
     gaväà nandädi-gopinäm

     sarvam—all; bhü-maëòalam—the earth; tatra—there; vicacära—considered; vrajänugaiù—with the followers of Vraja; viyogärti—the sufferings of separation; haraù—removing; proktaù—said; gaväm—of the cows; nandädi-gopinäm—the gopas headed by Nanda.

     Uddhava wandered the earth with devotees that were followers of the people of Vraja. He removed the sufferings Nanda, the gopas, and the cows felt in Lord Kåñëa's absence.

Text 76

manträdhikära-kuçalaù
     sarvaù parikarägraëéù
athäntardhäna-veläyäà
     bhagavän dharma-gup-tanuù

     manträdhikära-kuçaläù—an excpert counselor; sarvaù—all; parikarägraëéù—the best of the Lord's assocuates; atha—then; antardhäna-veläyäm—when He had disdappeared; bhagavän—the Lord; dharma-gup-tanuù—the protector of religion.

     He is the best of counselors and the first of the Lord's personal associates. When Lord Kåñëa is absent, he becomes the protector of the true religion.

Text 77

tasmai sva-tejasam api
     däsyate paramädbhutam
mudrädhikäraà sarvatra
     sarvadaiva viräjate

     tasmai—to him; sva-tejasam—His own power; api—also; däsyate—will give; paramädbhutam—very wonderful; mudrädhikäram—able to teach; sarvatra—everywhere; sarvadä—always; eva—indeed; viräjate—shines.

     The Supreme Lord will give His own very wonderful transcendental potency to him. In this way he will be glorious in all times and all places.

Text 78

antardhäne tu sva-sthäne
     dattä tasyädhikäritä
badaré-sthaà sa-parikaram
     dharmajaà bodhayiñyati

     antardhäne—disappeared; tu—indeed; sva-sthäne—to His own abode; dattä—given; tasya—of him; adhikäritä—uathority; badaré-stham—in Badarikasrama; sa-parikaram—with associates; dharmajam—näräyaë Åñni; bodhayiñyati—will teach.

     When in the future the Lord leaves this world and returns to His own transcendental abode, Uddhava, empowered by Him, will go to Badarikäçrama. There he will teach Näräyaëa Åñi and His followers.

Text 79

arjunädi-viyogärti-
     häré saiva bhaviñyati
vajranäbho yädavänäà
     mäthure sambhaviñyati

     arjunädi—headed by Arjuna; viyogärti—the sufferings of separation; häré—removing; sa—that; eva—indeed; bhaviñyati—will be; vajranäbhaù—Vajrabnäbha; yädavänäm—of the Yädavas; mäthure—in Mathurä; sambhaviñyati—will be.

     Uddhava will remove the sufferings Arjuna and the other devotees feel in Lord Kåñëa's absence. After him, a devotee named Vajranäbha will take birth in the Yädava dynasty in Mathurä.

Text 80

çré-kåñëasyaiva pautreñu
     mahä-räjïé-gaëeñu ca
viyogärti-haraç caiva
     sthäpyate çré-hariù svayam

     çré-kåñëasya—of Lord Kåñëa; eva—indeed; pautreñu—among the grandchildren; mahä-räjïé-gaëeñu—among the queens; ca—and; viyogärti-haraù—removing the sufferings of separation; ca—and; eva—indeed; sthäpyate—is establ;ished; çré-hariù—Lord Kåñëa; svayam—Himself.

     He will be like Lord Kåñëa Himself, come to relieve the sufferings the Lord's grandsons and their wives feel in Lord Kåñëa's absence.

Text 81

kauraväëäà kule räjä
     parékñid it viçrutaù
tasya putro 'ti-tejasvé
     vikhyäto janamejayaù

     kauraväëäm—of the Kauravas; kule—in the dynasty; räjä—the king; pasrékñit—Rapékñit; it—thus; viçrutaù—famous; tasya—of him; putraù—the son; ati—very; tejasvé—powerfgul; vikhyätaù—famous; janamejayaù—Janamejaya.

     In the Kaurava dynasty King Parékñit will be famous. His very powerful son Janamejaya will also be famous.

Text 82

pituù çatru-hanaà yajïaà
     kariñyati na saàçayaù
tasyäpi sarva-sämagré
     hy uddhava-dvärato bhavet

     pituùof his father; çatru-hanam—killing the enemies; yajïam—a yajna; kariñyati—will do; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; tasya—of him; api—also; sarva-sämagré—all things; hi—indeed; uddhava-dvärataù—by Uddhava; bhavet—may be.

     He will perform a yajïa to kill his father's enemies. Uddhava will bring the ingredients for that yajïa.

Text 83

çrémad-bhägavataà divyaà
     puräëaà vacanaà tadä
gauränvayasya sampräptir
     bhaviñyati na saàçayaù

     çrémad-bhägavatam—Çrémad-Bhägavatam; divyam—transcendental; puräëam—Puräëa; vacanam—words; tadä—then; gaura-anvayasya—of Lord Gaura; sampräptiù—attainment; bhaviñyati—will be; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt;

     Then he wil hear the splendid Çrémad-Bhägavatam Puräëa, which predicts that the Supreme Personality of Godhead will appear here in a fair-complexioned form. Of this there is no doubt.

     Note: Çréla Bhaktivinoda Öhäkura quotes this verse in His Çré Navadvépa-dhäma-mähätmya, Pramäëa-khaëòa.

Text 84

çrémat-prasädäd viprarñer
     mahä-bhägavatottamät
tad-dvärä sarva-yajïasya
     nivåttiù sambhaviñyati

     çrémat-prasädät—by the mercy; viprarñeù—of the brähmaëa sage; mahä-bhägavatottamät—the best of devotees; tad-dvärä—by that; sarva-yajïasya—of the yajna; nivåttiù—the cessation; sambhaviñyati—will be.

     By the mercy of a great brähmaëa-sage that yajïa will be stopped.

Text 85

yajïa-saàskära-kartåëäà
     brähmaëänäà ca püjanam
sa däsyati mahä-räja
     grämäëäà çatakaà tadä

     yajïa-saàskära-kartåëäm—of the performers of the yajna; brähmaëänäm—the brähmaëas; ca—and; püjanam—worship; saù—he; däsyati—willgive; mahä-räja—O great king; grämäëäm—of villages; çatakam— a hundred; tadä—then.

     O great king, then he will worship the brähmaëas that performed the yajïa and he will give them a hundred villages in charity.

Text 86

tatas tv äcärya-varyasya
     çré-prasädasya cäjïayä
sa gantä sükara-kñetraà
     mäsäm ekaà sthito 'bhavat

     tataù—then; tv—indeed; äcärya-varyasya—o fthe great acarya; çré-prasädasya—of the mercy; ca—and; äjïayä—by the order; sa—he; gantä—will go; sükara-kñetram—to Sukara-ksetra; mäsam—month; ekam—one; sthitaù—staying; abhavat—was.

     Then, by the order of the merciful äcärya, he will go to Sükara-kñetra and stay there for one month.

Text 87

dattvä danäny anekäni
     go-mahé-gaja-vähinaù
ratnaà väso brähmaëebhyo
     bhojanaà ca yad-icchayä
     dattvä—giving; danäni—charities; anekäni—many; go-mahé-gaja-vähinaù—cows, land, elephants, and chariots; ratnam—jewels; väsaù—homes; brähmaëebhyaù—to the brähmaëa; bhojanam—food; ca—and; yad-icchayä—as they wished.

     Then he will give to the brähmaëas many gifts. He will give them cows, land, elephants, chariots, jewels, houses, and food, as much as they desired.

Text 88

tatas tasmät sthalät so 'pi
     nivartya guruëä saha
gaìgä-téra-sthalän paçyann
     ägamiñyati sad-våtaù

     tataù—then; tasmät—from that; sthalät—place; saù—he; api—also; nivartya—turning; guruëä—guru; saha—with; gaìgä—of the Gaìgä; téra-sthalän—the shore; paçyann—seeing; ägamiñyati—will come; sad-våtaù—witb the saintly sages.

     Then he will leave that place. Accompanied by his guru and the great sages, he will see the Gaìgä's shore and then return.

Text 89

çayana-nagare saàsthäà
     kariñyati sahänugaù
çré-guror äjïayä tatra
     sämagréà sädhanaiù saha

     çayana-nagare—in Sayana-nagara; saàsthäm—situation; kariñyati—will do; sahänugaù—with followers; çré-guroù—of his guru; äjïayä—by the order; tatra—there; sämagrém—things; sädhanaiù—spiritual practices; saha—with.

     He and his followers will stay in Çayana-nagara. By his guru's order he will accumulate the ingredients for a yajïa.

Text 90

açvamedhaà karoti sma
     sarva-jetä bhaviñyati
eka-cchatra-dharo bhütvä
     çré-guroù çaraëaà gataù

     açvamedham—an asvamedha-yajna; karoti—does; sma—indeed; sarva-jetä—all-victorious; bhaviñyati—will be; eka-cchatra-dharaù—the sole emperor; bhütvä—becoming; çré-guroù—of the guru; çaraëam—shelter; gataù—gone.

     He will perform an açvamedha-yajïa and then he will conquer all directions. By following his guru's orders he will become the sole ruler of the earth.

Text 91

tato gaìgä-taöe ramye
     pürvasyäà kroça-païcake
paramaikänta-rüpeëa
     sevanaà tat kariñyati

     tataù—then; gaìgä-taöe—on the Gaìgä's shore; ramye—beautiful; pürvasyäm—in the east; kroça-païcake—40 miles; paramaikänta-rüpeëa—woith single-pointed ocncentration; sevanam—worship; tat—that; kariñyati—will do.

     Forty miles to the east, with single-pointed concentration he will worship a sacred place on the beautiful shore of the Gaìgä.

Text 92

tatra bhägavaté värtä
     bhava-rogi-vinäçiné
bhaviñyati mudä yuktä
     samäjeñu sudhärmiëäm

     tatra—there; bhägavaté—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; värtä—the description; bhava-rogi-vinäçiné—which cures the disease of repeated birth and death; bhaviñyati—will be; mudä—happily; yuktä—engaged; samäjeñu—in the assembly; sudhärmiëäm—of the pious.

     In that place, in an assembly of the pious, there will be a blissful telling of the Supreme Personality of Godhead's pastimes, a telling that cures the disease of repeated birth and death.

Text 93

tatra pürëa-samäjeñu
     teñäà madhye bhavän api
çåëoñi bhagavad-dharmaà
     gantä çré-nirmalaà padam

     tatra—there; pürëa-samäjeñu—ijn the assembly; teñäm—of them; madhye—in the midst; bhavän—you; api—also; çåëoñi—will hear; bhagavad-dharmam—the science of devotional service; gantä—will go; çré-nirmalam padam—to the Lord's transcendental abode.

     You will also hear about the Lord in that assembly. In the end you will go to the Lord's transcendental abode.

Text 94

tapas taptaà mad-arthaà te
     tasmäd etat prakäçitam
evaà devaà varaà dattvä
     gato rämaù sahänugaù

     tapaù—austerity; taptam—performed; mad-artham—for My sake; te—of you; tasmät—therefore; etat—this; prakäçitam—manifested; evam—thus; devam—the Lord; varam—blessing; dattvä—given; gataù—gone; rämaù—Balaräma; sahänugaù—with His followers.

     This will happen because you have performed austerities to please Me.

     After giving this blessing to Mäëòükadeva, Lord Balaräma, accompanied by His followers, departed.

Text 95

çayana-nagaräc chuddhäd
     éçänyäà diçi saàsthitam
sthänaà gaìgä-taöe ramyaà
     kaëöakäd uttare 'bhavat

     çayana-nagarät—from Çayana-nagara; çuddhät—pure; éçänyäm—to the north; diçi—direction; saàsthitam—situated; sthänam—place; gaìgä-taöe—on the Gaìgä's shore; ramyam—beautiful; kaëöakät—from Kaëöaka; uttare—north; abhavat—was.

     To the north of Çayana-nagara and Kaëöhaka-tértha is a beautiful place on the Gaìgä shore.

Text 96

puñpavatyä dakñiëe tu
     kroçaikaà vistareëa ca
tatra saìkarñaëo devaù
     sthitvä däna-paro 'bhavat

     puñpavatyä—of Puñpavaté; dakñiëe—to the south; tu—indeed; kroçaikam—two miles; vistareëa—across; ca—and; tatra—there; saìkarñaëo devaù—Lord Saìkarñaëa; sthitvä—staying; däna-paraù—giving charity; abhavat—did;

     In a place two miles south of Pañpavaté, Lord Balaräma gave charity.

Text 97

ghoöakaà daça-sähasraà
     rathänäà çatakaà tathä
dvipaà sahasraà gäç caiva
     dik-sahasraà dadau mudä

     ghoöakam—horses; daça-sähasram—tne thousand; rathänäm—chariots; çatakam—a hundred; tathä—then; dvipam—elephants; sahasram—a thousand; gäù—cows; ca—and; eva—indeed; dik-sahasram—ten thousand; dadau—gave; mudä—happily.

     He happily gave ten thousand horses, one thousand chariots, one thousand elephants, and ten thousand cows.

Text 98

tatra saìkarñaëaà devaà
     püjayäm äsur ädarät
deväù samäyayuù sarve
     åñayaç ca tapo-dhanäù

     tatra—there; saìkarñaëam—Lord Balaräma; devam—the Lord; püjayäm äsuù—worshiped; ädarät—with respect; deväù—the demigods; samäyayuù—came; sarve—all; åñayaù—the sages; ca—and; tapo-dhanäù—wealthy in austerity.

     Then all the demigods and the austere sages came there and respectfully worshiped Lord Balaräma. They said:

Text 99

namaù koleça-ghätäya
     suräsura-vighätine
haläyudha namas te 'stu
     musalästräya te namaù namaù saundarya-rüpäya      täläìkäya namo namaù

     namaù—obeisances; koleça-ghätäya—to the killer of Kola; suräsura-vighätine—victorious over the demigods and the demons; haläyudha—O Lord who carry a plow-weapon; namaù—obeisances; te—to You; astu—is; musalästräya—who carry a club-weapon; te—to You; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances; saundarya-rüpäya—handsome; täläìkäya—who holds the insignia of a tala tree; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     Obeisances to the killer of Kola! Obesiances to He who defeats the demigods and demons! Obeisances to You, O Lord carrying a plow-weapon! Obeisances to You, the Lord carrying a club-weapon! Obeisances, obeisances, obeisances to You, the handsome Lord carrying a palm-tree flag!

Text 100

iti çrutvä stutià teñäà
     saìkarñaëa uväca ha
varaà bruvantuvaù sarve
     bhavatäà yad-abhépsitam

     iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; stutim—the prayer; teñäm—of them; saìkarñaëa—Balaräma; uväca—said; ha—Oh; varam—blessing; bruvantuvaù—say; sarve—all; bhavatäm—of You; yad-abhépsitam—what is desired.

     Hearing their prayers, Lord Balaräma said, "You may ask for the benedictions you desire."

Text 101

çré-dvija-devä ücuù 
yadä yadä vayaà yuktäù
     smarämo bhavataù padam
sarva-bädha-vinirmuktä
     bhavämaç ca taväjïayä

     çré-dvija-devä ücuù—the demigods and brähmaëas said; yadä yadä—whenever; vayam—we; yuktäù—engaged; smarämaù—remember; bhavataù—of You; padam—the feet; sarva-bädha-vinirmuktä—free of all impediemtns; bhavämaù—we become; ca—and; tava—of You; äjïayä—by the order.

     The demigods and brähmaëas said: Please free us from all troubles when we remember Your feet.

Text 102

çré-räma uväca 
yadä yadä mäà smaratha
     tadähaà çaraëägatän
rakñitä syäà kalau nünaà
     iti satyaà vaco mama

     çré-räma—Çré Balaräma; uväca—said; yadä yadä—whenevr; mäm—Me; smaratha—remember; tadä—then; aham—I; çaraëägatän—to they who take shelter; rakñitä—the protector; syäm—will be; kalau—in Kali-yuga; nünam—indeed; iti—thus; satyam—truth; vacaù—words; mama—of Mine.

     Çré Balaräma said: In Kali-yuga, whenever you remember Me and take shelter of Me, I will protect you. This is My promise.

Text 103

atra sthale varaà präptaà
     püjitaà muni-puìgavaiù
ataù saìkarñaëa-sthänaà
     bhaviñyati kalau yuge

     atra—here; sthale—in the place; varam—blessing; präptam—attained; püjitam—worshiped; muni-puìgavaiù—by the great sages; ataù—then; saìkarñaëa-sthänam—the place of Lord Balaräma; bhaviñyati—will be; kalau—in Kali; yuge—yuga.

     This place, where the great sages worshiped Lord Balaräma and obtained a boon from Him, in Kali-yuga will be known as Saìkarñaëa-sthäna.

Texts 104 and 105

yasmin snäsyanti gaìgäyäà
     devän sampüjayanti ye
däsyanti dänaà viprebhyo
     bhojanaà kärayanti ye

viñëuà sampüjayanti sma
     sa-phalaà jévitaà kñitau
te yänti daivata-sthänaà
     kämé präpnoti kämanam

     yasmin—where; snäsyanti—will bathe; gaìgäyäm—in the Gaìgä; devän—demigods; sampüjayanti—will worship; ye—who; däsyanti—will give; dänam—charity; viprebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; bhojanam—food; kärayanti—will do; ye—who; viñëum—Lord Viñëu; sampüjayanti—worship; sma—indeed; sa-phalam—with the result; jévitam—living; kñitau—on the earth; te—they; yänti—go; daivata—of the Lord; sthänam—to the place; kämi—desiring; präpnoti—attain; kämanam—desire.

     They who bathe in the Gaìgä at this place, worship the demigods, feed the brähmaëas, give them charity, and worship Lord Viñëu, attain the real goal of life. They go to the divine abode. They attain their desires.

Text 106

tataù parivåto rämaù
     sväà puréà saïjagäma ha
kola-rakño-vadhaà kåtvä
     snätvä viñëu-padé-jale

     tataù—then; parivåtaù—accompoanied; rämaù—Lord Balaräma; sväm—to His won; purém—city; sa 24jagäma—went; ha—indeed; kola-rakño-vadham—the killing of the demon Kola; kåtvä—having done; snätvä—bathing; viñëu-padé-jale—in the water that had washed Lord Viñëu's feet.

     In this way, after killing the Kola demon, and after bathing in the Gaìgä, which is a stream that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet, Lord Balaräma, accompanied by His associates, returned to His city.

Text 107

rämasya baladevasya
     kathäà yaù çåëuyän naraù
sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù
     sa yäti paramäà gatim

     rämasya baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; kathäm—narration; yaù—one who; çåëuyät—hears; naraù—a pearson; sarva-päpa—from all sins; vinirmuktaù—freed; sa—he; yäti—goes; paramäm—to the supreme; gatim—abode.

     A person who hears these pastimes of Lord Balaräma becomes free from all sins and goes to the Lord's supreme abode.
.pa

Chapter Twenty-five
Çré Mathurä-mähätmya
The Glories of Çré Mathurä

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
akasmäd ägate räme
     tatra tértham idaà çrutam
aho madhu-puré dhanyä
     yatra sannihitaç ca saù

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; akasmät—suddenly; ägate—arrived; räme—Lord Balaräma; tatra—there; tértham—holy place; idam—this; çrutam—heard; ahaù—Oh; madhu-puré—Mathurä; dhanyä—glorious; yatra—where; sannihitaù—staying; ca—and; saù—He.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: I have heard that Lord Balaräma quickly returned to glorious Mathurä City, where He stays eternally. 

Text 2

mathuräyäs tu ko devaù
     kaù kñattä kaç ca rakñati
kaç cäraù ko mantri-varaù
     kair bhümis tatra sevitä

     mathuräyäù—of Mathurä; tu—indeed; kaù—who?; devaù—the Deity; ka—who?; kñatta—the gatekeeper; kaù—who?; ca—and; rakñati—protects; kaù—who?; cäraù—the spy; kaù—who?; mantri-varaù—the counselor; kaiù—by whom?; bhümiù—the ground; tatra—there; sevitä—is served.

     Who is the Deity of Mathurä? Who is Mathurä's gatekeeper? Who protects Mathurä? Who brings news to Mathurä? Who is the counselor in Mathurä? Who worships the ground of Mathurä?

Text 3

çré-närada uväca 
paripürëatamaù säkñäc
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän hariù
svayaà hi mathurä-näthaù
     keçavaù kleça-näsanaù
     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñäc—directly; chré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Lord; hariù—Hari; svayam—personally; hi—indeed; mathurä-näthaù—the Lord of Mathurä; keçavaù—Kåñëa; kleça-näsanaù—the destroyer of sufferings.

     Çré Närada said: Çré Kåñëa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, who destroys all sufferings, is the Deity of Mathurä.

Text 4

säkñäd bhagavatä präptaù
     kapiläya dvijäya ca
kapilaù pradadau yaà vai
     prasannaù çata-manyave

     säkñät—directly; bhagavatä—by ther Supreme Personality of Godhead; präptaù—attained; kapiläya—to Kapila; dvijäya—the brähmaëa; ca—and; kapilaù—Kapila; pradadau—gave; yam—the Deity; vai—indeed; prasannaù—happy; çata-manyave—to Çatamanyu.

     The Lord Himself gave this Deity to the brähmaëa Kapila, and kind Kapila gave the Deity to Çatamanyu.

Text 5

jitvä devän räkñasendro
     rävaëo loka-rävaëaù
yaà stutvä puñpake sthäpya
     laìkäyäà tam apüjayat

     jitvä—conquering; devän—the demigods; räkñasendraù—the king of the demons; rävaëaù—Rävaëa; loka-rävaëaù—who made the entire world cry; yam—Whom; stutvä—offering prayers; puñpake—on a flower chariot; sthäpya—placing; laìkäyäm—in Lankä; tam—Him; apüjayat—worshiped.

     After he had conquered the demiogds, the demon-king Rävaëa, who made the world cry, offered prayers to this Deity, placed Him on a flower-airplane, and worshiped Him in Laìkä.

Text 6

jitvä laìkäà räghavendras
     tam änéya prayatnataù
ayodhyäyäà ca värähaà
     arcayäm äsa maithila

     jitvä—conquering; laìkäm—Laìkä; räghavendraù—Lord Rämacandra; tam—Him; änéya—taking; prayatnataù—carefully; ayodhyäyäm—in Ayodhyä; ca—and; väräham—in Varäha-kalpa; arcayäm äsa—worshiped; maithila—O king of Mithilä.

     O king of Mithilä, when He conquered Laìkä, Lord Rämacandra carefully took this Deity of Lord Varäha and worshiped Him in Ayodhyä.

Text 7

stutvä rämaà ca çatrughno
     yam änéya prayatnataù
mathuräyäà mahä-puryäà
     sthäpayitvä nanäma ha

     stutvä—offering prayers; rämam—to Lord Rämacandra; ca—and; çatrughnaù—Çatrughna; yam—whom; änéya—taking; prayatnataù—carefully; mathuräyäm—to Mathurä; mahä-puryäm—the great city; sthäpayitvä—establishing; nanäma—bowed down; ha—indeed.

     After offering prayers to Lord Rämacandra, Çatrughna carefully took this Deity, placed Him in the great city of Mathurä, and bowed down to offer His respects.

Text 8

sevito mäthuraiù sarvaiù
     sarveñäà ca vara-pradaù
säkñät kapila-värähaù
     so 'yaà mantri-varaù småtaù

     sevitaù—served; mäthuraiù—by the people of Mathurä; sarvaiù—all; sarveñäm—to all; ca—and; vara-pradaù—granting benedictions; säkñät—directly; kapila-värähaùKapila-Varäha; saù—he; ayam—he; mantri-varaù—the best counselor; småtaù—is considered.

     All the people of Mathurä worship this Deity. This Deity gives blessings to all. Kapila-Varäha is the counselor of Mathurä.

Text 9

kñattä çré-mathuräyäç ca
     nämnä bhüteçvaraù çivaù
dattvä daëòaà pätakine
     bhakty-arthän mantratäà vrajat

     kñattä—the gatekeeper; çré-mathuräyäù—of Çré Mathurä; ca—and; nämnä—by name; bhüteçvaraù—Bhüteçvara; çivaù—Çiva; dattvä—giving; daëòam—a stick; pätakine—to a sinner; bhakty-arthän—for the devotees; mantratäm—advice; vrajat—going.

     The gatekeeper of Çré Mathurä is an incarnation of Lord Çiva named Bhüteçvara. He punishes the sinful and instructs the devotees.

Text 10

caëòikä tu mahä-vidyä
     devé durgärti-näçiné
siàhärüòha sadä rakñäà
     mathuräyäù karoti hi

     caëòikä—ferocious; tu—indeed; mahä-vidyä—the great philosopher; devé—the goddess; durgä—Durgä; arti—sufferings; näçiné—destroying; siàhärüòha—riding on a lion; sadä—always; rakñäm—protection; mathuräyäù—of Mathurä; karoti—does; hi—indeed.

     Ferocious Goddess Durgä, who is the personification of transcendental knowledge and who destroys all sufferings, rides a lion and eternally protects Mathurä.

Text 11

cäro 'haà mathuräyäç ca
     paçyal lokän itas tataù
vadämi värtäà sarveñäà
     çré-kåñëäya mahätmane

     cäraù—messenger; aham—I am; mathuräyäù—of Mathurä; ca—and; paçyan—seeing; lokän—the worlds; itaù—here; tataù—and there; vadämi—I tell; värtäm—the news; sarveñäm—of all; çré-kåñëäya—to Lord Kåñëa; mahätmane—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     I bring news to Mathurä. I observe what happens in the different planets, and I tell Lord Kåñëa all the news.

Text 12

madhye vai mathurä devé
     çubhadä karuëämayé
bubhukñitebhyaù sarvebhyo
     dadäty annaà videha-räö

     madhye—in the middle; vai—indeed; mathurä—Mathurä; devé—Goddess; çubhadä—auspciious; karuëämayé—merciful; bubhukñitebhyaù—to the hungry; sarvebhyaù—all; dadäti—gives; annam—food; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, in the middle of the city is auspicious and kind Goddess Mathurä, who feeds all that are hungry.

Text 13

catur-bhujä çyämaläìgä
     vrajanti pravrajanti ca
mathuräyäà måtaà netuà
     vimänaiù kåñëa-parñadäù

     catur-bhujä—with four arms; çyämaläìgä—dark forms; vrajanti—go; pravrajanti—comes; ca—and; mathuräyäm—in Mathurä; måtam—dead; netum—to bring; vimänaiù—with airplanes; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; parñadäù—the associates.

     Dark-complexioned four-armed associates of Lord Kåñëa go here and there in Mathurä to bring anyone who dies there to the spiritual world.

Text 14

çré-kåñëasyäìga-sambhütä
     mathurä vai mahä-puré
yasya darçana-mätreëa
     naro yäti kåtärthatäm

     çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; aìga—from the body; sambhütä—manifested; mathurä—Mathurä; vai—indeed; mahä-puré—the great city; yasya—of which; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; naraù—a person; yäti—attains; kåtärthatäm—the goal of life.

     Simply by seeing Mathurä City, which was manifested from Lord Kåñëa's transcendental form, one attains the goal of life.

Text 15

purä vidhiù çré-mathuräm upetya
     taptvä tapo varña-çataà nirannaù
japan harià brahma paraà svayambhüù
     sväyambhuvaà präpa sutaà pravénam

     purä—previously; vidhiù—Brahmä; çré-mathuräm—to Çré Mathurä; upetya—going; taptvä—performed; tapaù—austerities; varña-çatam—for a hundred years; nirannaù—without food; japan—chanting; harim—Lord Kåñëa; brahma—Brahmä; param—then; svayambhüù—the self-born; sväyambhuvam—to Svayambhuva Manu; präpa—attained; sutam—sun; pravénam—intelligent.

     In the past the demigod Brahmä went to Çré Mathurä, where for a hundred years he performed austerities, constantly chanting the holy names of Lord Kåñëa, and not eating anything. The result of these austerities was that he fathered a very intelligent son: Sväyambhuva Manu.

Text 16

bhüteçvaro deva-varaù saté-patis
     taptvä tapo divya-çaran-madhor vane
kåñëa-prasädän nåpa-räja sa-tvaraà
     tasyäù pure mathurä-maëòalasya

     bhüteçvaraù—Lord Çiva; deva-varaù—the best of the demigods; saté-patiù—the husband of Saté; taptvä—perfoming; tapaù—austerities; divya-çarat—for an autumn of the demigods; madhor vane—in Mathurä; kåñëa-prasädän—Lord Kåñëa's mercy; nåpa-räja—O king of kings; sa-tvaram—quickly; tasyäù—of that; pure—in the city; mathurä-maëòalasya—of Mathurä.

     O king of kings, Lord Çiva, who is the husband of Saté and the best of the demigods, performed austerities in Mathurä for an autumn of the demigods. In this way He attained Lord Kåñëa's mercy and became the gatekeeper of Mathurä.

Text 17

kåñëa-prasädäd aham eva cäro
     bhraman sadä mäthura-maëòalasya
tathä hi durgä mathuräà prayäti
     çré-kåñëa-däsyaà prakaroti nünam

     kåñëa-prasädät—by Lord Kåñëa's mercy; aham—I; eva—indeed; cäraù—the messenger; bhraman—wandering; sadä—always; mäthura-maëòalasya—of Mathurä; tathä—so; hi—indeed; durgä—Durgä; mathuräm—to Mathurä; prayäti—goes; çré-kåñëa-däsyam—service to Lord Kåñëa; prakaroti—does; nünam—indeed.

     By Lord Kåñëa's mercy I wander everywhere as the person that carries news to Mathurä. By Lord Kåñëa's mercy Goddess Durgä comes to Mathurä and serves Lord Kåñëa.

Text 18

taptvä tapaù çakra-padaà ca çakraù
     süryo manuà nitya-nidhià kuveraù
päçé ca päçaà samaväpya samyaì
     madhor vane viñëu-padaà dhruvaç ca

     taptvä tapaù—performing austerities; çakra-padam—the post of Indra; ca—and; çakraù—Indra; süryaù—Surya; manum—Manu; nitya-nidhim—eternal wealth; kuveraù—Kuvera; päçé—varuëa; ca—and; päçam—ropes; samaväpya—attaining; samyak—completely; madhor vane—in Mathurä; viñëu-padam—the abode of Lord Viñëu; dhruvaù—Dhruva; ca—and.

     By performing austerities in Mathurä, Indra attained his heavenly post, Sürya attained Vaivasvata Manu as his son, Kuvera attained eternal wealth, Varuëa attained his ropes, and Dhruva attained the realm of Lord Viñëu.

Text 19

tathämbaréñaù samaväpa muktià
     somo 'kñayaà vä lavänäj jayaà ca
raghuç ca siddhià kila citraketus
     taptvä tapo 'traiva madhor vane ca

     tathä—so; ambaréñaù—Ambaréça; samaväpa—attained; muktim—liberation; somaù—Soma; akñayam—inviciblitiy; vä—or; lavänät—from Lavana; jayam—victory; ca—and; raghuù—Raghu; ca—and; siddhim—perfection; kila—indeed; citraketuù—Citraketu; taptvä tapaù—perfomring austerities; atra—here; eva—indeed; madhor vane—in Mathurä; ca—and.

     By performing austerities in Mathurä, Ambaréña attained liberation, Rämacandra became invincible and defated the demon Lavaëa, Raghu attained perfection, and Citraketu also attained perfection. 
Text 20

taptvä tapo 'traiva madhor vane çubhe
     bhütvä baliñöhaç ca madhur mahäsuraù
çré-mädhave mäsi ca mädhavena
     yuyodha yuddhe madhusüdanena saù

     taptvä tapaù—performing austerities; atra—here; eva—indeed; madhor vane—in Mathurä; çubhe—beautiful; bhütvä—becoming; baliñöhaù—powerful; ca—and; madhuù—Madhu; mahäsuraù—the great demon; çré-mädhave mäsi—in the month of mädhava; ca—and; mädhavena—with Kåñëa; yuyodha—fought; yuddhe—in battle; madhusüdanena—the killer of Madhu; saù—he.

     By performing austerities in beautiful Mathurä, the great demon Madhu became very powerful. In the month of Mädhava (April-May), he fought with Lord Kåñëa, who later became known as Madhusüdana (the killer of Madhu). 
Text 21

saptarñayaù çré-mathuräà sametya
     taptvä tapo 'traiva ca yoga-siddhim
präpuù pare vai munayaù samantäd
     gokarëa-vaiçyo 'pi mahä-nidhià ca

     saptarñayaù—the seven sages; çré-mathuräm—to Çré Mathurä; sametya—going; taptvä tapaù—performed austerities; atra—here; eva—indeed; ca—and; yoga-siddhim—yogic perfections; präpuù—attained; pare—other; vai—indeed; munayaù—sages; samantät—completely; gokarëa-vaiçyaù—the vaiçya Gokarëa; api—also; mahä-nidhim—great wealth; ca—and.

     By performing austerities in Mathurä, the seven sages and other sages also attained the perfection of yoga, the vaiçya named Gokarëa attained great wealth.

Text 22

taptvä tapo 'traiva madhor vane çubhe
     vijitya devän divi loka-rävaëaù
nidhäya rakñäàsi vidhäya mandiraà
     ästhäya laìkäà viraräja rävaëaù

     taptvä tapaù—performed austerities; atra—here; eva—indeed; madhor vane—in Mathurä; çubhe—beautiful; vijitya—conquering; devän—the demigods; divi—in heaven; loka-rävaëaù—making the worlds scream; nidhäya—placing; rakñäàsi—demons; vidhäya—placing; mandiram—a palace; ästhäya—placing; laìkäm—Laìkä; viraräja—shone; rävaëaù—Ravana.

     By performing austerities in beautiful Mathurä, the demon Rävaëa conquered the demigods, made the wrolds scream in pain, conquered the demons, and built a great city in Laìkä. 
Text 23

taptvä tapo 'traiva madhor vane çubhe
     gajähvayeço mithileçaù çantanuù
lebhe sutaà bhéñmam atéva sattamaà
     tattvärtha-värän nidhi-karëadhärakam

     taptvä tapaù—performed austerities; atra—here; eva—indeed; madhor vane—in Mathurä; çubhe—beautiful; gajähvayeçaù—the king of Hastinäpura; mithileçaù—the king of Mithilä; çantanuù—Çantanu; lebhe—attained; sutam—a son; bhéñmam—Bhéñma; atéva—very; sattamam—exalted; tattvä—of truth; artha—the meaning; värän—the waters; nidhi-karëadhärakam—the captain.

     By performing austerities in beautiful Mathurä, Çantanu, the king of Mithilä and Hastinäpura, attained as his son the great saint Bhéñma, who was the captain of the ship to cross the ocean of truth.    

Text 24

çré-bahuläçva uväca 
mathuräyäç ca mähätmyaà
     vada devarñi-sattama
niväse kià phalaà proktaà     mathuräyäù satäà nåëäm

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; mathuräyäù—of Mathurä; ca—and; mähätmyam—the glory; vada—tell; devarñi-sattama—O best of the demigod-sages; niväse—in the home; kim—what?; phalam—reult; proktam—said; mathuräyäù—of Mathurä; satäm—of the devotees; nåëäm—people.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: O best of the demigod-sages, please tell me the glories of Mathurä. What result do the devotees obtain by living in Mathurä?

Text 25

çré-närada uväca 
ädau varäho dhäraëéà nimagnäà
     mahä-jale projjhita-véci-çaìke
sva-daàstryoddhåtya karéva padmaà
     kareëa mähätmyam idaà jagäda

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ädau—in the beginning; varähaù—Lord Varäha; dhäraëém—the earth; nimagnäm—plunged; mahä-jale—in the great ocean; projjhita-véci-çaìke—filled with waves; sva-daàstryä—by His tusk; uddhåtya—lifting; karé—an elephant; iva—like; padmam— a lotus; kareëa—with its trunk; mähätmyam—the glory; idam—thus; jagäda—said.

     Çré Närada said: As an elephant holds a lotus flower in its trunk, so in the beginning of creation Lord Varäha lifted with His tusks the earth plunged in the great ocean filled with waves. Lord Varäha then spoke the glories of Mathurä.

Text 26

bruvan jano näma phalaà harer labhec
     chåëval labhet kåñëa-kathä-phalaà naraù
spåçan satäà sparçana-jaà madhoù puri
     jighraàs tulasyä dala-gandha-jaà phalam

     bruvan—speaking; janaù—Jana; näma—name; phalam—the result; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; labhet—may attain; çåëvan—hearing; labhet—may attain; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; kathä—of the topics; phalam—the result; naraù—a person; spåçan—touching; satäm—of the devotees; sparçana-jam—manifested from touching; madhoù puré—Mathurä; jighran—smelling; tulasyä—of Tulasé; dala-gandha-jam—the fragrance of the leaves; phalam—the result.

     By speaking the name "Mathurä" one attains the same result as chanting the holy name of Lord Kåñëa. By hearing the glories of Mathurä one attains the same result as hearing the glories of Lord Kåñëa. By touching Mathurä one attains the same result as touching the great devotees. By smelling the fragrance of Mathurä one attains the same result as smelling the fragrance of Çrématé Tulasé-devé's leaves.

Text 27

paçyan harer darçana-jaà phalaà svato
     bhakñäàç ca naivedya-bhävaà ramä-pateù
kurvan bhujäbhyäà hari-sevayä phalaà
     gacchal labhet tértha-phalaà pade pade

     paçyan—seeing; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; darçana-jam—manifested from seeing; phalam—the result; svataù—voulntarily; bhakñäneating; ca—and; naivedya-bhävam—"rasadam; ramä-pateù—of the husband of the goddess of fortune; kurvan—doing; bhujäbhyäm—with both arms; hari-sevayä—by service to Lord Kåñëa; phalam—the result; gacchal—going; labhet—attains; tértha-phalam—the result of pilgrimage; pade—step; pade—after step.

     By seeing Mathurä one attains the same result as seeing Lord Kåñëa. By eating prasädam in Mathurä one attains the same result as eating prasädam offered to Lord Kåñëa, the husband of the goddess of fortune. By serving Mathurä with one's arms one attains the same result as serving Lord Kåñëa. By walking in Mathurä one attains at every step the same result as visiting many holy places of pilgrimage.
     
Text 28

räjendra-hantä nija-gotra-ghätaké
     trailokya-hantäpi ca koöi-janmasu
räjan chåëu tvaà mathurä-niväsato
     yogéçvaräëäà gatim äpnuyän naraù

     räjendra-hantä—killer of the greatest opf kings; nija-gotra-ghätaké—killer of his own relatives; trailokya-hantä—a killer of the three worlds; api—even; ca—and; koöi-janmasu—in millions of births; räjan—O king; çåëu—please hear; tvam—you; mathurä-niväsataù—by living in Mathurä; yogéçvaräëäm—of the kings of the yogis; gatim—the destination; äpnuyät—attains; naraù—a person.

     O king please listen. A sinner who in millions of lives again and again kills many saintly kings, his own relatives, and numberless other victims in the three worlds, by residing in Mathurä attains the destination of the kings of the yogés.

Text 29

pädau ca dhig yau na gatu madhor vande
     dåçau ca dhig ye na kadäpi paçyataù
karëau ca dhig yau çåëuto na maithila
     väcaà ca dhig yä na karoty alaà manäk

     pädau—feet; ca—and; dhig—fie; yau—which; na—not; gatu—gone; madhor vande—in Mathurä; dåçau—eyes; ca—and; dhig—fie; ye—which; na—not; kadäpi—ever; paçyataù—see; karëau—the ears; ca—and; dhig—fie; yau—ehich; çåëutaù—hear; na—not; maithila—O king of Mithilä; väcam—words; ca—and; dhik—fie; yä—which; na—not; karoti—does; alam—greatly; manä—slightly.

     Pitiable are the feet that have never walked in Mathurä! Pitiable are the eyes that have never seen Mathurä! Pitiable are the ears that have never heard of Mathurä! Pitiable is the voice that will not glorify Mathurä! 

Text 30

dvi-sapta-koöéni vanäni yatra
     térthäni vaideha samästhitäni
ekaikam eteñu vimukti-däni
     vadämi säkñän mathuräà namämi

     dvi-sapta-koöéni—fourteen; vanäni—forests; yatra—where; térthäni—holy places; vaideha—O king of Videha; samästhitäni—established; ekaikam—one by one; eteñu—in them; vimukti-däni—giving liberation; vadämi—I tell; säkñän—directly; mathuräm—to Mathurä; namämi—I offer obeisances.

     I tell you that in Mathurä are fourteen forests that contain many holy places. Each of these holy places grants liberation. I bow down to offer my respectful obeisances to Çré Mathurä.

Text 31

goloka-näthaù paripürëa-devaù
     säkñäd asaìkhyäëòa-patiù svayaà hi
çré-kåñëa-candro 'vatatära yasyäà
     tasyai namo 'nyäçu purésu kià vä

     goloka—of Goloka; näthaù—the master; paripürëa-devaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; asaìkhyäëòa-patiù—the master of numerless universes; svayam—personally; hi—indeed; çré-kåñëa-candraù—Çré Kåñëacandra; avatatära—descrneded; yasyam—in which; tasyai—to it; namaù—obeisances; anyäsu—other; purésu—cities; kim—whether?; vä—or.

     Çré Kåñëacandra, who is the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of Goloka-dhäma, and the master of numberless universes, personally descended to this world in the city of Mathurä. I offer my repsectful obeisances to Çré Mathurä. What other city can compare with Mathurä?

Text 32

yan-näma päpaà vinihanti tat-kñaëaà
     bhavaty alaà yaà gåëuto 'pi muktayaù
véthiñu véthiñu ca muktir asyäs
     tasmäd imaà çreñöhatamaà vidur budhäù

     yan-näma—the name of which; päpam—sin; vinihanti—kills; tat-kñaëam—that moment; bhavati—becomes; alam—greatky; yam—what; gåëutaù—chanting; api—even; muktayaù—the liberations; véthiñu—on the path; véthiñu—after path; ca—and; muktiù—liberation; asyäù—others; tasmät—therefore; imam—this; çreñöhatamam—the best; viduù—know; budhäù—the wise.

     The holy name of Mathurä kills all sins in an instant. One who chants the name of Mathurä finds liberation waiting for him on every path. For this reason the wise say Mathurä is the best of holy places.

Text 33

käçy-ädi-puryo yadi santi loke
     täsäà tu madhye mathuraiva dhanyä
yä janma-mauïjé-vrata-måtyu-dähair
     nåëäà caturdhä vidadhäti muktim

     käçy-ädi-puryaù—the holy cities headed by Varanasi; yadi—if; santi—are; loke—in the world; täsäm—of them; tu—indeed; madhye—in the middle; mathurä—Mathurä; eva—indeed; dhanyä—glorious; yä—which; janma—birth; mauïjé-vrata—the sacred-thread ceremony; måtyu—death; dähaiù—cremation; nåëäm—of people; caturdhä—four kinds; vidadhäti—gives; muktim—liberation.

     If Väräëasé and the other holy cities of the world were to meet, Mathurä would be the most glorious of them. Mathurä gives liberation to they who are born, accept spiritual initiation, die, or are cremated within her borders.

Text 34

puréçvaréà kåñëa-puréà vrajeçvaréà
     tértheçvaréà yajïa-tapo-nidhéçvarém
mokña-pradäà dharma-dhurandharäà paräà
     madhor vane çré-mathuräà namämy aham

     puréçvarém—the queen of cities; kåñëa-purém—the city of Lord Kåñëa; vrajeçvarém—the queen of Vraja; tértheçvarém—the queen of holy places; yajïä-tapo-nidhéçvarém—the queen of yajnas, austerities, and opulences; mokña-pradäm—teh giver of liberation; dharma-dhurandharäm—the upholder of the principles of religion; paräm—great; madhor vane—in the forest of Madhuvana; çré-mathuräm—Çré Mathurä; namämi—bow down; aham—I.

     I offer my respectful obeisances to exalted Çré Mathurä, the queen of cities, the city of Lord Kåñëa, the queen of Vraja, the queen of holy places, the queen of yajïas, austerities, and opulences, the giver of liberation, the protector of religion.

Text 35

çåëvanti mähätmyam idaà madhoù pure
     kåñëaika-cittä niyataç ca yatra ye
vrajanti te tatra parikramät phalaà
     vaideha räjendra na cätra saàçayaù

     çåëvanti—hear; mähätmyam—the glory; idam—this; madhoù pure—in Mathurä; kåñëaika-cittä—their thoughts placed on Lord Kåñëa; niyataù—self-controlled; ca—and; yatra—where; ye—who; vrajanti—go; te—they; tatra—there; parikramät—by circumambulating; phalam—the result; vaideha—O king of Videha; räjendra—O king of kings; na—not; ca—and; atra—here; saàçayaù—doubt.

     O master of Videha, O king of kings, they who, controlling their senses and fixing their thoughts on Lord Kåñëa, hear this description of Mathurä's glories, attain the same result attained by circumambulating Çré Mathurä. Of this there is no doubt. 

Text 36

khaëòaà tv idaà çré-mathurä-purasya ye
     çåëvanti gäyanti paöhanti sarvataù
ihaiva teñäà hi samåddhi-siddhayo
     bhavanti vaideha nisargataù sadä

     khaëòam—canto; tv—indeed; idam—this; çré-mathurä-purasya—of Çré Mathurä City; ye—who; çåëvanti—hear; gäyanti—sing; paöhanti—read; sarvataù—in all respects; iha—here; eva—indeed; teñäm—of them; hi—indeed; samåddhi-siddhayaù—perfections; bhavanti—are; vaideha—O king of Videha; nisargataù—naturally; sadä—always.

     They who hear, chant, or read this Çré Mathurä-khaëòa become eternally perfect.

Text 37

triù-sapta-kåtvo bahu-vaibhavärthinaù     çåëvanti cainaà niyataç ca ye bhåçam
teñäà gåha-dväram alaìkaroti hi
     bhåìgävalé kuïjara-karëa-täòitä

     triù-sapta—twenty-one times; kåtvaù—doing; bahu-vaibhavärthinaù—desiring great wealth; çåëvanti—hear; ca—and; enam—this; niyataù—controlling the senses; ca—and; ye—who; bhåçam—greatly; teñäm—of them; gåha-dväram—the doorway; alaìkaroti—decorates; hi—indeed; bhåìgävalé—a swarm of bees; kuïjara-karëa-täòitä—striking an elephant's ear.

     They who, desiring great wealth, control their senses and twenty-one times hear this Çré Mathurä-khaëòa, find an elephant's ear of of the bees of transcendental wealth and opulences decorating their doorways.

Text 38

vipro 'tha vidvän vijayé nåpätmajo
     vaiçyo nidhiço våñalo 'pi nirmalaù
çrutvedam äräc ca manoratho bhavet
     stréëäà janänäm ati-durlabho 'pi hi

     vipraù—a brähmaëa; atha—then; vidvän—learned; vijayé—victorious; nåpätmajaù—a kñatriya; vaiçyaù—a vaiçya; nidhiçaù—the master of great wealth; våñalaù—a çüdra; api—also; nirmalaù—pure; çrutvä—hearing; idam—this; ärät—nearby; ca—and; manorathaù—desire; bhavet—may be; stréëäm—of women; janänäm—of men; ati-durlabhaù—difficult to attain; api—also; hi—indeed.

     By hearing this Çré Mathurä-khaëòa a brähmaëa becames wise and learned, a kñatriya becomes victorious in battle, a vaiçya becomes the master of great wealth, and a çüdra becomes pure-hearted. Whatever difficult-to-attain thing any man or woman desires, they will attain.

Text 39

niñkäraëo bhakti-yuto mahé-tale
     çåëoti cedaà hari-lagna-mänasaù
vijitya vighnän pravijitya näkapän
     goloka-dhäma-pravaraà prayäti saù

     niñkäraëaù—causeless; bhakti-yutaù—devotee; mahé-tale—on the earth; çåëoti—hears; ca—and; idam—this; hari—on Lord Kåñëa; lagna—placed; mänasaù—thoughts; vijitya—overcoming; vighnän—obstacles; pravijitya—surpassing; näkapän—the demigods; goloka-dhäma-pravaram—the transcendental abode of Goloka; prayäti—goes; saù—he.

     A person on this earth who is engaged in unmotivated devotional service, whose thoughts rest on Lord Kåñëa, and who hears this Çré Mathurä-khaëòa, travels past the homes of the demigods and enters the transcendental abode of Çré Goloka.

Canto Six

Chapter One
Jaräsandha-paräjaya
Jaräsandha's Defeat

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

kåñëäya väsudeväya
    devaké-nandanäya ca
nanda-gopa-kumaräya
     govindäya namo namaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; kåñëäya—to Lord Kåñëa; väsudeväya—the son of Vasudeva; devaké-nandanäya—the son of Devcaké; ca—and; nanda-gopa-kumaräya—the son of Nanda-gopa; govindäya—to the happiness of the cows, land and senses; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     Çré Närada said: I offer my respectful obeisances to Lord Kåñëa, the son of Vasudeva, Devaké, and the gopa Nanda, and the happiness of the cows, land, and senses.

Text 2

çrutaà tava mukhäd brahman
     mathurä-khaëòam adbhutam
vada mäà dvärakä-khaëòaà
     çré-kåñëa-caritämåtam

     çrutam—heard; tava—of you; mukhät—from the mouth; brahman—Obrähmaëa; mathurä-khaëòam—the Mathura-kahnda; adbhutam—wonderful; vada—tell; mäm—me; dvärakä-khaëòam—the Dvärakä-khaëòa; çré-kåñëa-caritämåtam—filled with the nectar of Lord Kåñëa's pastimes.

     O brähmaëa, now that I have heard from your mouth the wonderful Mathurä-khaëòa, please tell me the Dvärakä-khaëòa, which is filled with the nectar of Lord Kåñëa's transcendental pastimes.

Text 3

vivähäù kati puträç ca
     kati pauträ ramä-pateù
sarvaà vada mahä-buddhe
     dvärakä-väsa-käraëam

     vivähäù-wives; kati—how many?; puträù—children; ca—; kati—how many?; pauträ—grandchildren; ramä-pateù—of the husabnd of the goddess of fortune; sarvam—all; vada—tell; mahä-buddhe—O intelligent one; dvärakä-väsa-käraëam—the reason for residing in Dvaraka.

     How many wives did He have? How many children? How many grandchildren? Tell me the reason He chose to live in Dvärakä. O wise one, please tell me everything.

Text 4

çré-närada uväca 

asti-präpté mahiñyau dve
     måte kaàse mahä-bale
jaräsandha-gåhaà duùkhäj
     jagmatur maithileçvara

     çré-närada uväca-Çré Närada said; asti-präpté—Asati and Prapti; mahiñyau—queens; dve—two; måte—dead; kaàse—Kaàsa; mahä-bale—very powerful; jaräsandha-gåham—to Jarasandha's house; duùkhät—unhappily; jagmatuù—went; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, after the death of powerful Kaàsa, his two queens, Asti and Präpti unhappily went to Jaräsandha's home.

Text 5

tan-mukhät kaàsa-maraëaà
     çrutvä kruddho jara-sütaù
ayädavéà mahéà kartuà
     udyato 'bhün mahä-balaù

     tan-mukhät—from their mouths; kaàsa-maraëam—the death of Kaàsa; çrutvä—hearing; kruddhaù—angry; jara-sütaù—Jarasandha; ayädavém—without Yädavas; mahém—the earth; kartum—to make; udyataù—determined; abhüt—became; mahä-balaù—powerful.

     When from their mouths he heard of Kaàsa's death, Jaräsandha becxame angry and decided to make the earth a place where no Yädavas lived.

Text 6

akñauhiëébhir viàçatyä
     tisrbhiç cäpi samvåtaù
ramyäà mahä-puréà räjann
     äyayau balavän nåpaù

     akñauhiëébhiù—akñauhiëés; viàçatyä—with twenty; tisrbhiù—three; cäpi—and; samvåtaù—accompanined; ramyäm—beautiful; mahä-purém—great city; räjann—O king; äyayau—went; balavän—poweful; nåpaù—king.

     Accompanied by 23 akñauhiëé divisions, powerful King Jaräsandha went to beautiful Mathurä City.

Text 7

bhayäturäà puréà vékñya
     tat-senäà sindhu-nädiném
sabhäyäà bhagavän säkñäd
     baladevam uväca ha

     bhayäturäm—terrified; purém—the city; vékñya—seeing; tat-senäm—that army; sindhu-nädiném—roaring like the ocean; sabhäyäm—in the assembly; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—personally; baladevam—to Lord Balaräma; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     Seeing that the entire city was terrified of that great army roaring like the ocean, in the royal assembly Lord Kåñëa said to Balaräma:

Text 8

sarvaà cäsya balaà räma
     hantavyaà vai na saàçayaù
mägadhas tu na hantavyo
     bhüyaù kartä balodyamam

     sarvam—all; ca—and; asya—of him; balam—the army; räma—O Balaräma; hantavyam—should be killed; vai—indeed; na—not; saàçayaù—doubt; mägadhaù—the kin gof Magadha; tu—indeed; na—not; hantavyaù—to be killed; bhüyaù—more; kartä—by the doer; balodyamam—power.

     O Balaräma, this army should be destroyed, but Jaräsandha should not be killed. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 9

jaräsandha-nimittena
     bharaà vai bhubhujäà bhuvaù
sarvaà cätra hariñyämi
     kariñyämi priyaà satäm

     jaräsandha-nimittena—by Jarasandha; bharam—burden; vai—indeed; bhubhujäm—of kings; bhuvaù—of the earth; sarvam—all; ca—and; atra—here; hariñyämi—I will remove; kariñyämi—I will do; priyam—pleasure; satäm—of the devotees.

     I will remove the great burden of demonic kings Jaräsandha has placed on this earth. In this way I will please the devotees.

Text 10

evaà vadati kåñëe vai
     vaikuëöhäc ca rathau çubhau
abhütäm ägatau räjan
     sarveñäà paçyatäà ca tau

     evam—thus; vadati—speasking; kåñëe—Kåñëa; vai—indeed; vaikuëöhät—from Vaikuëöha; ca—and; rathau—two chariots; çubhau—beautiful; abhütäm—were; ägatau—come; räjan—O king; sarveñäm—as all; paçyatäm—watched; ca—and; tau—they.

     O king, as Lord Kåñëa spoke these words two beautiful chariots arrived from Vaikuëöhaloka as everyone watched.

Text 11

samäruhya rathau sädyo
     räma-kåñëau mahä-balau
yädavänäà balaiù sükñmais
     tvaraà nirjagmatuù purät

     samäruhya—climbing; rathau—the chariots; sädyaù—at once; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; mahä-balau—powerful; yädavänäm—of the Yädavas; balaiù—with the armies; sükñmaiù—small; tvaram—at once; nirjagmatuù—left; purät—the city.

     Mounting these chariots, and accompanied by a small Yädava army, Kåñëa and Balaräma at once left the city.

Text 12

yädavänäà mägadhänäà
     paçyadbhir divijair divi
babhüva tumulaà yuddhaà
     adbhutaà roma-harñaëam

     yädavänäm—of the Yädavas; mägadhänäm—and the Magadhas; paçyadbhiù—looking; divijaiù—by the demiugods; divi—in heaven; babhüva—was; tumulam—uproar; yuddham—fight; adbhutam—astonishing; roma-harñaëam—making th body's hairs stand erect.

     As the demigods in heaven watched, the Yädavas and Mägadhas fought a tumultuous battle that made the hairs of the body stand erect with wonder.

Text 13

akñauhiëébhir daçabhé
     rathärüòho mahä-balaù
çré-kåñëasya puraù pürvaà
     yuyudhe mägadheçvaraù

     akñauhiëébhiù—with aksauhinis; daçabhé—ten; rathärüòhaù—mounted ona  chariot; mahä-balaù—powerful; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; puraù—in the presence; pürvam—before; yuyudhe—fought; mägadheçvaraù—Jarasandha.

     Riding on a chariot, and accompanied by ten akñauhiëé divisons, Jaräsandha fought with Lord Kåñëa.

Text 14

païcabhiç cäkñauhiëébhir
     dhäåöaräñöraù suyodhanaù
yuyodha yädavaiù särdhaà
     jaräsandha-sahäya-kåt

     païcabhiù—with five; ca—and; akñauhiëébhiù—aksauhinis; dhäåöaräñöraù—Dhrtarastra's son; suyodhanaù—Duryodhana; yuyodha—fought; yädavaiù—the Yädavas; särdham—with; jaräsandha-sahäya-kåt—helping Jarasandha.

     Accompanied by five akñauhiëé divisons, Dhåtaräñöra's son Duryodhana also fought on jaräsandha's side against the Yädavas.

Text 15

païcabhiç ca tathä räjan
     vindhyä-deçädhipo balé
tisrbhiç ca mahä-yuddhe
     baìga-nätho mahä-balaù

     païcabhiù—with five; ca—and; tathä—so; räjan—O king; vindhyä-deçädhipaù—the king of Vindhya-desa; balé—powerful; tisrbhiù—with three; ca—and; mahä-yuddhe—in the great battle; baìga-näthaù—the king of Bengal; mahä-balaù—powerful.

     O king, accompanied by five akñauhiëés, the powerful king of Vindhyä-deça fought on Jaräsandha's side. Accompanied by three akñauhiëés, the powerful king of Bengal also fought on Jaräsandha's side.

Text 16

evam anye 'pi räjäno
     jaräsandha-vaçänugäù
präëaiù sahäyaà kurvantau
     jaräsandhasya maithila

     evam—thus; anye—other; api—also; räjänaù—kings; jaräsandha-vaçänugäù—vassals of Jarasnadha; präëaiù—with their lives; sahäyam—help; kurvantau—doing; jaräsandhasya—of Jarasnadha; maithila—O king of Mithila.

     O king of Mithilä, many other kings, Jaräsandha's vassals, gave their lives to help him in the battle.

Text 17

bäëändhakäre saïjäte
     çatru-senä-samäkule
öäìkaraà çärìga-dhanuñaù
     çärìga-dhanvä cakära ha

     bäëändhakäre—in a darkness of arrows; saïjäte—manifested; çatru-senä-samäkule—the enemy armies; öäìkaram—twanging; çärìga-dhanuñaù—of the Çärìga bow; çärìga-dhanvä—the holder of the Çärìga bow; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     When the enemy armies darkened the sky with a shower of arrows, Lord Kåñëa filled the sky with the twanging sounds of His Çärìga bow.

Text 18

nanäda tena brahmäëòaà
     sapta-lokair bilaiù saha
vicelur dig-gajäs tärä
     ejad-bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam

     nanäda—echoed; tena—by that; brahmäëòam—the universe; sapta-lokaiù—with seven planets; bilaiù—with outer space; saha—with; viceluù—shook; dig—of the directions; gajäù—the elephants; tara—the stars; ejad-bhü-khaëòa-maëòalamthe earth.

     The entire universe, with the seven planetary systems and the vast regions of outer space, echoed with that sound. The earth, the stars, and the elephants that hold up the directions all trembled.

Text 19

tadaiva badhiré-bhütaà
     çatrüëäà sainya-maëòalam
utpatanto häya yuddhäd
     gajäs tu vimukhäs tataù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; badhiré-bhütam—deafened; çatrüëäm—of enemies; sainya-maëòalam—the circle of the armies; utpatantaù—jumping; häya—horses; yuddhät—from the battle; gajäù—elephants; tu—indeed; vimukhäù—turned away; tataù—then.

     Then there was a deafening noise in the circle of the enemy armies, and the horses and elephants fled the battlefield. 

Text 20

dudräva tad-balaà sarvaà
     öäìkaräd bhaya-vihvalam
pratépam etya gavyütiù
     punas taträjagäma ha

     dudräva—fled; tad-balam—that army; sarvam—all; öäìkarät—from the twanging sound; bhaya-vihvalam—terrified; pratépam—in the other direction; etya—going; gavyütiù—two miles; punaù—again; tatra—there; äjagäma—came; ha—indeed.

     When it heard the twanging of Lord Kåñëa's bow, Jaräsandha's army became terrified and ran two miles from the battlefield.

Text 21

evaà çärìgaà samuccärya
     taòit-piìga-sphurat-prabham
bäëaughaç chädayäm äsa
     jaräsandha-balaà hariù

     evam—thus; çärìgam—the Çärìga  bow; samuccärya—lifting; taòit-piìga-sphurat-prabham—glistening like lightning; bäëaughaù—a flood of arrows; chädayäm äsa—made a shadow; jaräsandha-balam—on Jarasandha's army; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Then, lifting His Çärìga bow glistening like lightning, Lord Kåñëa unleased a flood of arrows that made a great shadow over Jaräsandha's army. 

Text 22

cürëé-bhütä rathä räjan
     bäëaughaiù çärìga-dhanvanaù
cürëa-cakrä nipetuù kau
     hata-sütäç ca näyakäù

     cürëé-bhütäù—broken to pieces; rathä—the chariots; räjan—O king; bäëaughaiù—with the flood of arrows; çärìga-dhanvanaù—from the Çärìga bow; cürëa-cakräù—broken to pieces; nipetuù—fell; kau—to the ground; hata—killed; sütäù—charioteers; ca—and; näyakäù—warriors.

     O king, the flood of arrows from the Çärìga bow broke the chariots into pieces. Their wheels broken, the chariots crashed to the ground and the warriors and charioteers on them all died. 

Text 23

dvidha-bhütä gajä bäëais
     calitä gajibhiù saha
säçva-vähäs tathäsväç ca
     bäëaiù saïchinna-kandharäù

     dvidha-bhütä—cut in half; gajä—the elephants; bäëaiù—by arrows; calitä—moving; gajibhiù—with elephant riders; saha—with; säçva—with horses; vähäù—riding; tathä—so; asväù—horses; ca—and; bäëaiù—with arrows; saïchinna—severed; kandharäù—necks.

     The many arrows cut the elephants and their riders into two pieces and severed the heads of the horses and horsemen. 

Text 24

tathä vérä mahä-yuddhe
     bhinnoräç chinna-mastakäù
viçérëa-kavacäù petur
     bäëaughaiç chinna-saàçayäù

     tathä—then; vérä—the warriors; mahä-yuddhe—in that great battle; bhinna—wounded; uräù—chests; chinna-mastakäù—severed heads; viçérëa—broken; kavacäù—armor; petuù—fell; bäëaughaiç—with the flood of arrows; chinna-saàçayäù—their hopes broken.

     Their armor broken, chests wounded, and heads severed by the flood of arrows, the warriors in that great batlle fell, their hopes shattered.

Text 25

adho-mukhä ürdhva-mukhäs
     chinna-dehä nåpätmajäù
rejü raëäìgane räjan
     bhäëòa-vyühä ivähatäù

     adho-mukhäù—faces down; ürdhva-mukhäù—faces up; chinna-dehä—broken bodies; nåpätmajäù—princes; rejü—shone; raëäìgane—in the batllefield; räjan—O king; bhäëòa-vyühä—pots; iva—like; ähatäù—broken.

     O king, their faces up or down and their bodies broken, the princes littered the battlefield like so many broken earthen pots.

Text 26

kñaëa-mätreëa tad-yuddhe
     çata-kroça-vilambitä
äpagäbhün mahä-durgä
     rudhira-srava-sambhaväù

     kñaëa-mätreëa—for a moment; tad-yuddhe—in that battle; çata-kroça-vilambitä—for two hundred miles; äpagä—a river; abhüt—was; mahä-durgä—impassable; rudhira-srava-sambhaväù—created from flowing blood.

     In that battle there was for two-hundred miles a flowing river of blood, . . .

Text 27

dvipa-grähä coñöra-khara-
     kabandhäçvädi-kacchapä
çiçumära-rathä keça-
     çaivalä bhuja-sarpiëé

     dvipa—the elephants; grähä—crocodiles; ca—and; uñöra—camels; khara—mules; kabandha—headless corpses; açva—horses; ädi—beginning with; kacchapä—turtles; çiçumära—porpoises; rathä—chariots; keça—hair; çaivalä—moss; bhuja—arms; sarpiëé—snakes.

 . . . where the elephants were crocodiles, the camels, mules, horses, and headless corpses giant turtles, the chariots porpoises, the severed arms snakes, . . .

Text 28

kara-ménä mauli-ratna-
     hära-kuëòala-çarkarä
çastra-çuktiç chinna-çaìkhä
     cämara-dhvaja-saikatä

     kara—hands; ménä—fish; mauli—crown; ratna—jewels; hära—necklaces; kuëòala—earrings; çarkarä—pebbles; çastra—weapons; çuktiù—oysters; chinna-çaìkhä—severed heads; cämara—camaras; dhvaja—flags; saikatä—on the sandy beach.

 . . . the severed hands fish, the helmets, earrings, and jewel necklaces pebbles, the weapons oysters, the severed heads cämaras and flags on the sandy shore, . . .

Text 29

rathäìgävarta-samyuktä
     senä-dvaya-taöävåtä
çata-yojana-vistérëä
     babhau vaitäraëé yathä

     rathäìga—chariot wheels; ävarta-samyuktä—with whirlpools; senä—armies; dvaya—two; taöa—shores; ävåtä—filled; çata-yojana-vistérëä—eight hundred miles; babhau—shone; vaitäraëé—the vaitarani river in the hellihs worlds; yathä—as.

 . . . and the chariot wheels whirlpools. The two armies its shores, that river flowed for eight hundred miles like the river Vaitaraëé in the hellish worlds.

Text 30

pramathä bhairavä bhütä
     veöalä yoginé-gaëäù
aööa-häsaà prakurvanto
     nåtyanto raëa-maëòale

     pramathä—goblins; bhairavä—bhairavas; bhütä—ghosts; veöalä—vetalas; yoginé-gaëäù—yoginis; aööa—loud; häsam—laughter; prakurvantaù—doing; nåtyantaù—dancing; raëa-maëòale—in the battlefield.

     Laughing uproariously, many goblins, ghosts, bhairavas, veöaläs and yoginés danced in the battlefield.

Text 31

pibanto rudhiraà çaçvat
     kapälena nåpeçvara
harasya muëòa-mälärthaà
     jagåhus te siräàsi ca

     pibantaù—drinking; rudhiram—blood; çaçvat—again and again; kapälena—with a skull; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; harasya—of Lord Çiva; muëòa-mälärtham—for the garland of skulls; jagåhuù—took; te—they; siräàsi—heads; ca—and.

     O king of kings, again and again they drank the blood of the dead. They gathered many skulls for Lord Çiva's garland of skulls.

Text 32

siàhärüòhä bhadrakälé
     òäkiné-çata-samvåtä
pibanté rudhiraà coñëaà
     säööa-häsaà cakära ha

     siàha—on a lion; ärüòhä—riding; bhadrakälé—Bhadrakälé; òäkiné—with witches; çata—a hundred; samvåtä—accompanied; pibanté—drinking; rudhiram—blood; ca—and; uñëam—warm; säööa-häsam—with loud laughter; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Riding on a lion, and accompanied a hundred female goblins, goddess Bhadrakälé drank the warm blood of the dead and laughed uproariously.

Text 33

vidyädharyaç ca svarga-sthä
     gandharvyo 'psarasas tathä
kñatra-dharma-sthitän vérän
     vavrire deva-rüpiëaù

     vidyädharyaù—Vidyadharis; ca—and; svarga-sthä—in Svargaloka; gandharvyaù—Gandharvis; apsarasaù—Apsaras; tathä—so; kñatra-dharma-sthitän—folloing ksatriya-dharma; vérän—warriors; vavrire—chose; deva-rüpiëaù—the forms of demigods.

     The warriors that died nobly upholding the principles of kñatriya-dharma became demigods and the Vidyädharé, Gandharvés, and Apsarä demigoddesses of Svargaloka selected them to be their husbands.

Text 34

gåhitvä tän kalir abhüt
     täsäà paty-artham ambare
mamänurüpä tenaiva
     iti tad-gata-cetasäm

     gåhitvä—taking; tän—them; kaliù—a quarrel; abhüt—was; täsäm—of them; paty-artham—for the sake of the husband; ambare—in the sky; mama—me; anurüpä—like; tena—by that; eva—indeed; iti—thus; tad-gata-cetasam—their hearts gone to them.

     Many demigoddess desiring him as her husband, they quarreled over each hero. They each thought, "He is perfect for me."

Text 35

kecid vérä dharma-parä
     raëa-raìgän na calitäù
yayur viñëu-padaà divyaà
     bhittvä märtaëòa-maëòalam

     kecit—some; vérä—warriors; dharma-parä—devoted to duty; raëa-raìgän—from the battlefield; na—not; calitäù—fled; yayuù—went; viñëu—of Lord Viñëu; padam—to the abode; divyam—transcendental; bhittvä—breaking; märtaëòa-maëòalam—the circle of the sun.

     Some heroes, staunchly devoted to duty and not fleeing the battlefield, passed through the circle of the sun and went to the transcendental abode of Lord Viñëu.

Text 36

çeñaà balaà samäkåñya
     baladevo halena vai
muçalenähanat kruddhas
     trailokya-bala-dhärakaù

     çeñam—the remainder; balam—army; samäkåñya—dragging; baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; halena—by firce; vai—indeed; muçalena—with His club; ahanat—killed; kruddhaù—angry; trailokya-bala-dhärakaù—having the strength of the three worlds.

     Possessing all the strength in the three worlds, angry Lord Balaräma killed all the remaining soldiers with His club.

Texts 37-39

evaà sainye kñayaà yäte
     jaräsandhasya sarvataù
suyodhano vindhyä-nätho
     baìga-näthas tathaiva ca

sarve vidudruvur yuddhäd
     bhaya-bhétä itas tataù
jaräsandho mahä-véryo
     nägäyuta-samo bale

rathenägatavän räjan
     baladevasya sammukhe
samäkåñya halägreëa
     jaräsandha-rathaà çubham

     evam—this; sainye—in the army; kñayam—destruction; yäte—attained; jaräsandhasya—of Jarasandha; sarvataù—in all respects; suyodhanaù—Duryodhana; vindhyä-näthaù—the king of Vindhyä-deça; baìga-näthaù—the king of Bengal; tathä—so; eva—indeed; ca—and; sarve—all; vidudruvuù—fled; yuddhät—from the battle; bhaya-bhétä—frightened; itaù—here; tataù—and there; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; mahä-véryaù—very strong; nägäyuta-samaù—equal to ten thousand elephants; bale—in strength; rathena—by chation; ägatavän—come; räjan—O king; baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; sammukhe—in the presence; samäkåñya—dragging; halägreëa—by the tip of His plow; jaräsandha-ratham—Jarasandha's chariot; çubham—beautiful.

     When Jaräsandha's army was completely destroyed, the king of Vindhyä-deça, the king of Bengal, and Duryodhana became terrified and fled here and there. Then Jaräsandha, who was as strong as ten thousand elephants, drove his chariot to meet Lord Balaräma. With the tip of His plow Lord Balaräma caught the beautiful chariot and dragged it here and there.

Text 40

cürëayäm äsa sahasä
     musalena yadüttamaù
jaräsandho 'pi viratho
     hatäçvo hata-särathiù

     cürëayäm äsa—broke to pieces; sahasä—at once; musalena—ith His club; yadüttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; jaräsandhaù—Jaräsandha; api—also; virathaù—without a chariot; hata—dead; açvaù—horses; hata—dead; särathiù—charioteer.

     Then Lord Balaräma, the best of the Yädavas, broke the chariot to pieces. Now Jaräsandha had no chariot and his horses and charioteer had been killed.

Text 41

jagräha balinaà dorbhyäà
     santyaktvä çastra-saàhitam
tayor yuddham abhüd ghoraà
     bähübhyäà raëa-maëòale

     jagräha—grabbed; balinam—strong; dorbhyäm—with both arms; santyaktvä—abandoning; çastra-saàhitam—weapons; tayoù—of them; yuddham—fight; abhüt—was; ghoram—horrible; bähübhyäm—with both arms; raëa-maëòale—in the battlefield.

     Then Lord Balaräma threw away His weapons and with both hands grabbed powerful Jaräsandha. Hand-to-hand they fought a terrible duel in the battlefield.

Texts 42 and 43

paçyatäà divi devänäà
     naräëäà bhuvi maithila
urasä çirasä caiva
     bähübhyäà pädayoù påthak

yuyudhäte malla-yuddhe
     siàhäv iva mahä-bale
tayoç ca yuddhyatoù sarvaà
     kñuëëaà bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam

     paçyatäm—looking; divi—in heaven; devänäm—of the demigods; naräëäm—of the humans; bhuvi—on the earth; maithila—O king of Mithila; urasä—with the chest; çirasä—with the head; ca—and; eva—indeed; bähübhyäm—with arms; pädayoù—with feet; påthak—specific; yuyudhäte—fought; malla-yuddhe—in wrestling; siàhäv—two lions; iva—like; mahä-bale—in great strength; tayoç—of them; ca—and; yuddhyatoù—fighting; sarvam—all; kñuëëam—pounded; bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam—the circle of the earth.

     O king of Mithilä, as the demigods in heaven and the humans on earth watched, Lord Balaräma and Jaräsandha wrestled arm-to-arm, foot-to-foot, chest-to-chest, and head-to-head, like two very powerful lions. As they fought the circle of the earth became crushed and broken.

Texts 44-47

sthaléva sahasä räjaàs
     cakampe ghaöikä-dvayam
gåhétvä bhuja-daëòäbhyäà
     jaräsandhaà yadüttamaù

bhü-påñöhe pothayäm äsa
     kamäëòalum ivärbhakaù
rämas tad-upari sthitvä
     hantuà çatruà jarä-sutam

jagräha musalaà ghoraà
     krodha-pürita-vigrahaù
paripürëatamenätha
     çré-kåñëena mahätmanä

niväritas tadaiväçu
     taà mumoca yadüttamaù
tapase kåta-saìkalpo
     vréòito 'pi jarä-sutaù

     sthalé—the place; iva—like; sahasä—at once; räjan—O king; cakampe—trembled; ghaöikä-dvayam—for an hour; gåhétvä—grabbing; bhuja-daëòäbhyäm—with both arms; jaräsandham—Jaräsandha; yadüttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; bhü-påñöhe—on the ground; pothayäm äsa—threw; kamäëòalum—a kamandalu; iva—like; arbhakaù—a child; rämaù—Lord Balaräma; tat—him; upari—on; sthitvä—staying; hantum—to kill; çatrum—the enemy; jarä-sutam—Jaräsandha; jagräha—grabbed; musalam—a club; ghoram—terrible; krodha-pürita-vigrahaù—His body filled with anger; paripürëatamena—by the Supreme Personality of Godhead; atha—then; çré-kåñëena—by Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanä—the Supreme Lord; niväritaù—stopped; tadä—then; eva—indeed; äçu——at once; tam—him; mumoca—released; yadüttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; tapase—for suffering; kåta-saìkalpaù—decided; vréòitaù—embarrassed; api—also; jarä-sutaù—Jaräsandha.

     O king, for an hour the earth shook. Then Lord Balaräma, the best of the Yädavas, His transcendental body filled with anger, grabbed Jaräsandha with both hands, threw him to the ground as a child throws a kamaëòalu, jumped on him, grabbed a terrible club, and was about to kill him, when Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, stopped Him. Lord Balaräma at once released him. Now Jaräsandha was humiliated and his heart was filled with pain. 

Texts 48-51

nivärito mantri-mukhyair
     mägadhän mägadho yayau
itthaà jitvä jaräsandhaà
     mädhavo madhusüdanaù

äyodhana-gataà vittaà
     sarvaà nétvä sukhävaham
yädavän agrataù kåtvä
     baladeva-samanvitaù

upagéyamäna-vijayaù
     suta-mägadha-vandibhiù
çaìkha-dundubhi-nädena
     brahma-ghoñeëa bhüyasä

viveça mathuräà säkñät
     paripürëatamaù svayam

     niväritaù—stopped; mantri-mukhyaiù—by the important counselors; mägadhän—to magadha-desa; mägadhaù—Jaräsandha; yayau—went; ittham—thus; jitvä—defeating; jaräsandham—Jaräsandha; mädhavaù—the husband of the goddess of fortune; madhusüdanaù—the killer of Madhu; äyodhana-gatam—attained by fighting; vittam—wealth; sarvam—all; nétvä—taking; sukhävaham—pleasing; yädavän—to the Yädavas; agrataù—in the presence; kåtvä—making; baladeva-samanvitaù—with Lord Balaräma; upagéyamäna-vijayaù—His glories being sung; suta-mägadha-vandibhiù—by the Sutas, Magadhas, and Vandis; çaìkha-dundubhi-nädena—with the sound of conchshells and drums; brahma-ghoñeëa—with the sound of the Vedas; bhüyasä—abundant; viveça—entered; mathuräm—Mathurä; säkñät—directly; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svaya—Himself.

     Advised by his counselors, Jaräsandha returned to Magadha-deça. In this way Lord Kåñëa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, the husband of the goddess of fortune and the killer of the Madhu demon, defeated Jaräsandha, took all the wealth plundered in the fight, placed it before the Yädavas, and, His glories proclaimed by the Sütas, Mägadhas, and Vandés, and by the chanting of the Vedas and the sounds of the conchshells and drums, in Lord Balaräma's company entered Mathurä City.

Texts 52 and 53

samarcito maìgala-läja-puñpaiù
     paçyan puréà maìgala-kumbha-yuktäm
pétämbaraù syäma-tanuù çubhäìgaù
     sphurat-kiréöäìgada-kuëòala-prabhaù

çärìgädi-çasträstra-dharo hasan-mukhas
     täläìka-yukto garuòa-dhvajaù svayam
udyad-viloläçva-rathaù surärcitaù
     sametya räjänam asau balià dadau

     samarcitä—worshiped; maìgala-läja-puñpaiù—with auspicious flowers and grains; paçyan—seeing; purém—the city; maìgala-kumbha—auspicious pots; yuktäm—with; pétämbaraù—in yellow garments; syäma-tanuù—His body dark; çubhäìgaù—His limbs handsome; sphurat—glistening; kiréöa—crown; aìgada—armlets; kuëòala—earrings; prabhaù—splendor; çärìgädi—beginning eith the Çärìga bow; çastra-astra-dharaù—holding many weapons; hasan-mukhaù—smiling; täläìka-yuktaù—with the mark of  palm tree; garuòa-dhvajaù—with the flag of Garuòa; svayam—personally; udyad-viloläçva-rathaù—on a chariot pulled by restless horses; sura—by the demigods; arcitaù—worshiped; sametya—going; räjänäm—to the king; asau—He; balim—offering; dadau—gave.

     Worshiped by showers of grains and flowers and gazing at the city filled with beautiful spires, His garments yellow, His complexion dark, His limbs handsome and graceful, His crown, armlets, and earrings glittering with great splendor, and His face smiling, carrying the Çärìga bow and many other weapons, caarrying the palm-tree insignia and the Garuòa flag, riding on a chariot pulled by restless horses, and worshiped by the demigods, Lord Kåñëa approached King Ugrasena and gave a vassal's offering to him.
.pa

Chapter Two
Çré Dvärakä-väsa-kathana
Residence in Çré Dvärakä

Text 1

punas tatra jaräsandhas
     täv utyäkñauhiëé-balaù
yuyudhe yadubhiù çéghraà
     punaù kåñëa-paräjitaù

     punaù—again; tatra—there; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; täv—Them; utya—approaching; akñauhiëé-balaù—with an army of many aksauhinis; yuyudhe—fought; yadubhiù—with the Yädavas; çéghram—quickly; punaù—again; kåñëa—by Lord Kåñëa; paräjitaù—defeated.

     Again Jaräsandha approached Kåñëa and Balaräma with an army of many akñauhiëés, again he fought with the Yädavas, and again Lord Kåñëa quickly defeated him.

Text 2

çré-kåñëa-tejasä sarve
     yädavä våddhim ägatäù
dhanur-gajädibhiù çaçvat
     präpta-luëöhana-sähasaù

     çré-kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; tejasäby the power; sarve—all; yädavä—the Yädavas; våddhim—increase; ägatäù—attained; dhanuù—of bows; gaja—and elephants; ädibhiù—beginning with; çaçvat—always; präpta—attained; luëöhana-sähasaù—plunder.

     The Yädavas again and again plundered great wealth and many bows, elephants, and other things from the armies defeated by Lord Kåñëa transcendental power.

Text 3

präpte ca sahasä räjan
     vinä yuddhaà puraiva hi
arbhakä jala-häriëyas
     cakruù çatrv-apahäraëam

     präpte—attained; ca—and; sahasä—at once; räjan—O king; vinä—without; yuddham—a fight; purä—before; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; arbhakä—children; jala-häriëyaù—carrying water; cakruù—did; çatru—from the enemies; apahäraëam—plunder.

     O king, without having to fight, the little girls carrying water to the Yädava soldiers could easily take what they wanted from the slain soldiers of the enemy.

Text 4

çatru-dravyaà ca saàhartuà
     vékñantaù kréta-väsasaù
nägarä mäthuräù sarve
     paraà harñam upägatäù

     çatru—of the enemy; dravyam—the property; ca—and; saàhartum—to take; vékñantaù—seeing; kréta—bought; väsasaù—garments; nägarä—people; mäthuräù—of Mathurä; sarve—all; param—great; harñam—happiness; upägatäù—attained.

     Seeing the valuable garments and property of the enemy soldiers, the people of Mathurä became very happy.

Text 5

evaà sapta-daça kåtvä
     kñéëa-sainyo jarä-sutaù
añöa-daçama-saìgräme
     ägantuà ca mano 'karot

     evam—thus; sapta-daça—17; kåtvä—making; kñéëa-sainyaù—destroyed army; jarä-sutaù—Jarasandha; añöa-daçama-saìgräme—in the eighteenth battle; ägantum—to go; ca—and; manaù—mind; akarot—did.

     Even though his army had been destroyed seventeen times in this way, Jaräsandha still fixed his mind on an eighteenth war.

Text 6

mayä praëoditaù käla-
     yavano vai mahä-balaù
rurodha mathuräà kruddho
     mleccha-koöi-samävåtaù

     mayä—by me; praëoditaù—sent; kälayavanaù—Kalayavana; vai—indeed; mahä-balaù—very powerful; rurodha—besieged; mathuräm—Mathurä; kruddhaù—qngry; mleccha-koöi-samävåtaù—with ten million mlecchas.

     Then, encouraged by me, powerful King Kälayavana beseiged Mathurä with an army of ten million mlecchas.

Text 7

mlecchänäà ca balaà vékñya
     sva-puraà bhaya-vihvalam
bhayaà cobhayataù präptaà
     rämeëäcintayad dhariù

     mlecchänäm—of mlecchas; ca—and; balam—the amry; vékñya—seeing; sva-puram—at His city; bhaya-vihvalam—ovcercome with fear; bhayam—fear; ca—and; ubhayataù—of both; präptam—attained; rämeëa—with Balaräma; acintayat—thought; dhariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Seeing that their city was terrified of the mleccha army, Kåñëa and Balaräma considered what to do. 

Text 8

sva-jïäti-bandhu-rakñärthaà
     samudre bhéma-nädini
cakära dvärakä-durgaà
     eka-ratreëa mädhavaù

     sva-jïäti-bandhu-rakñärtham—to protecte His friends and relatives; samudre—in the ocean; bhéma-nädini—with terrible roaring sounds; cakära—did; dvärakä-durgam—the fort of Dvärakä; eka-ratreëa—in one night; mädhavaù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Then, in one night Lord Kåñëa built the Dvärakä fort in the middle of the ocean filled with fearful roaring sounds.

Text 9

yaträñöa-dik-päla-siddhir
     viçvakarma-vinirmitä
sarvä vaikuëöha-sampattir
     dåçyate mokña-kaìkñibhiù

     yatra—where; añöa—8; dik—directions; päla—protecting; siddhiù—perfection; viçvakarma-vinirmitä—built by Viçvakarmä; sarva—all; vaikuëöha-sampattiù—the opulences of Vaikuëöha; dåçyate—is seen; mokña-kaìkñibhiù—by they who yearn fro liberation.

     Viçvakarmä arranged that all eight directions were perfectly protected. They who yearn for liberatuion could see that city had all the opulences of Vaikuëöha.

Text 10

hariù sarva-janaà tatra
     nétvä yogena maithila
puräd rämam anujïäpya
     nirgato 'bhün niräyudhaù

     hariù—Kåñëa; sarva-janam—everyone; tatra—there; nétvä—taking; yogena—by His mystic power; maithila—O king of Mithila; purät—from Mathurä; rämam—Balaräma; anujïäpya—taking permission; nirgataù—departed; abhüt—became; niräyudhaù—without weapons.

     By His mystic power Lord Kåñëa then took all the people of Mathurä to Dvärakä. O king of Mithilä, after taking His leave of Lord Balaräma, Lord Kåñëa, now unarmed, went outside the Mathurä City walls. 

Text 11

niräyudhaà harià jïätvä
     mayoktair lakñaëaiù khalaù
nirayudhaù sa taà yoddhuà
     padätiù svayam ägataù

     niräyudham—unarmed; harim—Kåñëa; jïätvä—understanding; mayä—by me; uktaiù—described; lakñaëaiù—by the characteristics; khalaù—the demon; nirayudhaù—unarmed; sa—he; tam—to Him; yoddhum—to fight; padätiù—on foot; svayam—personally; ägataù—approached.

     Aware, by the description I had given him, that this unarmed person was Kåñëa, the demon put down his arms and walked to Kåñëa to start a fight.

Text 12

paräì-mukhaà pradravantaà
     duräpaà yoginäm api
jighåkñus taà cänvadhävat
     sainikänäà prapaçyatäm

     paräì-mukham—turning His face; pradravantam—fleeing; duräpam—not approachable; yoginäm—by the yogis; api—even; jighåkñuù—wishing to catch; tam—Him; ca—and; anvadhävat—ran behind; sainikänäm—as the soldiers; prapaçyatäm—watched.

     Then Kåñëa turned and fled. As the host of soldiers watched, Kälayavana ran in pursuit of Lord Kåñëa, whom even the great yogés cannot catch.

Text 13

hasta-präptaà vapus tasmai
     darçayann iva mädhavaù
düraà gataù çyämalädreù
     präviçat kandaraà tvaram

     hasta—in the hand; präptam—attained; vapuù—the form; tasmai—to him; darçayann—showing; iva—as if; mädhavaù—Lord Kåñëa; düram—far away; gataù—went; çyämalädreù—a black mountain; präviçat—entered; kandaram—a cave; tvaram—quickly.

     Seeming only a hand's legnth away, Lord Kåñëa ran a great distance and finally entered the cave of a black mountain.

Text 14

mucukundo yatra cäste
     mandhätå-tanayo mahän
asurebhyaù purä rakñäà
     devänäà yaç cakära ha

     mucukundaù—Mucukunda; yatra—where; ca—and; äste—is; mandhätå-tanayaù—the son of King Mandhata; mahän—great; asurebhyaù—from the demons; purä—previously; rakñäm—protection; devänäm—of the demigods; yaç—who; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     In that cave stayed King Mandhätä noble son Mucukunda, who in ancient times protected the demigods from the demons.

Text 15

ahar-niçaà na suñväpa
     deva-senä-paro nåpa
tam ücur devatäù sarve
     prasannä räja-sattamam

     ahaù—day; niçam—and night; na—not; suñväpa—slept; deva-senä-paraù—the commander-in-chief of the demigods' armies; nåpa—O king; tam—to him; ücuù—said; devatäù—the demigods; sarve—all; prasannä—pleased; räja-sattamam—the best of kings.

     O king, as the commander-in-chief of the demigods' armies, he had not slept for many days and nights. Pleased with him, all the demigods finally approached that great king and said:

Text 16

varaà varäya bho räjan
     yat te manasi vartate
natvä tän präha räjendraù
     karomi çayanaà param

     varam—a boon; varäya—please choose; bhaù—O; räjan—king; yat—what; te—of you; manasi—in the heart; vartate—is; natvä—bowing down; tän—to them; präha—said; räjendraù—that king of kings; karomi—I do; çayanam—sleep; param—great.

     "O king, please ask for a boon. Ask for whatever is in your heart." Bowing down to them, that king of kings said: "I wish to sleep a great sleep.

Texts 17 and 18

çayanänte hareù säkñäd-
     darçanaà me bhavatv alam
yo madhye bodhayen mäà vai
     çayanaà tv apy acetanam

sa mayä dåñöa-matras tu
     bhäsmé-bhavatu tat-kñaëät
tathä ca coktaù suñväpa
     räjä kåta-yuge purä

     çayanänte—at the end of the sleep; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; säkñäd-—direwct; darçanam—the sight; me—of me; bhavatv—masy be; alam—greatly; yaù—one who; madhye—in the middle; bodhayet—awakens; mäm—me; vai—indeed; çayanam—sleeping; tv—indeed; apy—indeed; acetanam—unconscious; sa—he; mayä—by me; dåñöa-matraù—simply by a glance; tu—indeed; bhäsmé-bhavatu—may be burned to ashes; tat-kñaëät—from that moment; tathä—so; ca—and; ca—and; uktaù—said; suñväpa—slept; räja—the king; kåta—in Satya-yuga; yuge—in the yuga; purä—in ancient times.

     "When my sleep is over I will see Lord Kåñëa directly. Anyone who wakens me before that, while I am still sleeping, I will burn to ashes with a glance." After speaking these words in ancient times, in the Satya-yuga, King Mucukunda went to sleep.

Text 19

tatra praviñöo yavano
     matvä pétämbaraà ca tam
tatäòa yavanaù kruddhaù
     padenäçu mahä-khalaù

     tatra—there; praviñöaù—entered; yavanaù—kalayavana; matvä—thinking; pétämbaram—Lord Kåñëa; ca—and; tam—him; tatäòa—hit; yavanaù—the yavana; kruddhaù—angry; padena—with his foot; äçu—at once; mahä-khalaù—the great demon.

     Entering that cave, the great demon Kälayavana at once kicked King Mucukunda, thinking him to be Lord Kåñëa, 

Text 20

mucukundaù samutthäya
     çanair unmilya so 'kñiné
äçäù prapaçyaàs taà pärçve
     sthitaà kälaà dadarça ha

     mucukundaù—Mucukunda; samutthäya—waking up; çanaiù—slowly; unmilya—opening; saù—he; akñiné—eyes; äçäù—in all directions; prapaçyan—looking; tam—him; pärçve—at the side; sthitam—standing; kälam—Kalayavana; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Slowly opening his eyes, Mucukunda became awake. Looking in all directions, he finally saw Kälayavana standing at his side.

Text 21

sa tävat tasya ruñöasya
     dåñöi-pätena maithila
dehajenägninä dagdho
     bhäsmasäd abhavat kñaëät

     sa—he; tävat—then; tasya—of him; ruñöasya—angry; dåñöi-pätena—by a glance; maithila—O king of Mithila; dehajena—born from his own body; agninä—by a fire; dagdhaù—burned; bhäsmasät—to ashes; abhavat—became; kñaëät—in a moment.

     O king of Mithilä, then King Mucukunda became angry and with a single glance burned to demon to ashes in a moment.

Text 22

bhäsmé-bhüte ca yavane
     paripürëatamaù svayam
svarüpaà darçayäm äsa
     mucukundäya dhémate

     bhäsmé-bhüte—burned to ashes; ca—and; yavane—when Kalayavana; paripürëatamaù—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—personally; svarüpam—His own form; darçayäm äsa—showed; mucukundäya—to Mucukunda; dhémate—wise.

     When Kälayavana was thus burned to ashes, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa, showed His own form to wise Mucukunda, a form that . . .

Text 23

koöi-sürya-pratékäçe
     jyotiñäà maëòale prabhum
sthitaà sphuöat-kiréöärkaà
     kuëòaläìgada-nüpuram

     koöi-sürya-pratékäçe—splendid as ten million suns; jyotiñäm—of light; maëòale—in a circle; prabhum—the Lord; sthitam—standing; sphuöat-kiréöa—a splendid crown; arkam—a sun; kuëòala—with earrings; aìgada—armlets; nüpuram—and anklets.

 . . . was splendid as ten million suns, circled with light, all-powerful, decorated with a crown splendid as the sun, decorated with earrings, armlets, and anklets, . . . 

Text 24

çrévatsäìkaà catur-bähuà
     padmäkñaà vana-mälinam
koöi-kandarpa-lavaëaà
     käla-megha-sama-prabham

     çrévatsäìkam—marked with Çrévatsa; catur-bähum—with four arms; padmäkñam—lotus eyes; vana-mälinam—a forest garland; koöi—ten million; kandarpa—Kamadevas; lavaëam—handsome; käla-megha-sama-prabham—splendid as a black cloud.

 . . . had lotus eyes and four arms, was marked with Çrévatsa and decorated with a forest garland, was splendid like a black cloud, and was more handsome than ten million Kämadevas.

Text 25

dåñövä räjä harñito 'pi
     samutthäya kåtäïjaliù
paripürëatamaà jïätvä
     bhaktyä taà praëanäma ha

     dåñövä—seeing; räjä—the king; harñitaù—filled with happiness; api—also; samutthäya—rising; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; paripürëatamam—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; jïätvä—understanding; bhaktyä—with devotion; tam—to Him; praëanäma—bowed down; ha—certainly.

     Gazing at this form and aware that this was the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, King Mucukunda became filled with happiness. First he stood with folded hands and then He bowed before the Lord with great devotion.

Text 26

çré-mucukunda uväca 

kåñëäya vasudeväya
     devaké-nandanäya ca
nanda-gopa-kumaräya
     govindäya namo namaù

     çré-mucukunda uväca—Çré Mucukunda said; kåñëäya—the Supreme Lord; vasudeväya—unto the son of Vasudeva; devaké-nandanäya—unto the son of Devaké; ca—and; nanda-gopa—Nanda and the cowherd men; kumaräya—unto their son; govindäya—unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who enlivens the cows and the senses; namaù—respectful obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     Çré Mucukunda said: Let me offer my respectful obeisances unto the Lord, who has become the son of Vasudeva, the pleasure of Devaké, the boy of Nanda and the other cowherd men of Våndävana, and the enlivener of the cows and the senses.*

Text 27

namaù paìkaja-näbhäya
     namaù paìkaja-mäline
namaù paìkaja-neträya
     namas te paìkajäìghraye

     namaù—all respectful obeisances; paìkaja-näbhäya—unto the Lord who has a specific depression resembling a lotus flower in the center ofHis abdomen; namaù—obeisances; paìkaja-mäline—one who is always decorated with a garland of lotus flowers; namaù—obeisances; paìkaja-neträya—one whose galnce is as cooling as a lotus flower; namaù te—respectful obeisances unto You; paìkajäìghraye—unto You, the soles of whose feet are engraved with lotus flowers (and who are therefore said to possess lotus feet).

     My respectful obeisances are unto you, O Lord, whose abdomen is marked with a dpression like a lotus flower, who are always decorated with garlands of lotus flowers, whose glance is as cool as the lotus, and whose feet are engraved with lotuses.* 

Text 28

namaù kåñëäya suddhäya
     brahmaëe paramätmane
praëata-kleça-näçäya
     govindäya namo namaù

     namaù—obeisances; kåñëäya—to Kåñëa; suddhäya—pure; brahmaëe—the Supreme; paramätmane—the Supersoul; praëata—of the surrendered souls; kleça—the sufferings; näçäya—the destruction; govindäya—to the pleasure of the cows and senses; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     My respectful obeisances are unto supremely pure Lord Kåñëa, who is both the impersonal Brahman and the all-pervading Supersoul, who is the enlivener of the cows and the senses, and who destroys the sufferings of the surrendered devotees.

Text 29

namo 'stv anantäya sahasra-mürtaye
     sahasra-pädäkñi-çiroru-bähave
sahasra-nämne puruñäya çäçvate
     sahasra-koöé-yuga-dhäriëe namaù

     namaù—obeisances; astu—may be; anantäya—limitless; sahasra-mürtaye—a thousand forms; sahasra—a thousand; päda—feet; akñi—eyes; çira—heads; uru—thighs; bähave—and arms; sahasra-nämne—a thousand names; puruñäya—the Supreme Person; çäçvate—eternal; sahasra—thousand; koöi—ten million; yuga—yugas; dhäriëe—holding; namaù—obeisances.

     My respectful obeisances are unto limitless Lord Kåñëa, who appears in millions of forms, who has millions of feet, eyes, heads, thighs, and arms, who has millions of names, who is the eternal Supreme Person, and who maintains the worlds for billions of yugas. 

Text 30

hare mat-samaù patäké nästi bhümau
     tathä tvat-samo nästi päpäpahäré
iti tvaà ca matvä jagannätha deva
     yathecchä bhavet te tathä mäà kuru tvam

     hare—O Lord Kåñëa; mat-samaù—equal to me; patäké—a sinner; na—not; asti—is; bhümau—on the earth; tathä—so; tvat-samaù—equal to You; na—not; asti—is; päpa—sins; apahäré—removing; iti—thus; tvam—to You; ca—and; matvä—bowing; jagannätha—O master of the worlds; deva—O Lord; yathä—as; icchä—desire; bhavet—may be; te—of You; tathä—so; mäm—to Me; kuru—do; tvam—You.

     O Lord Kåñëa, in this world no one is as sinful as I and no one is as purifying as You. Therefore, O master of the worlds, O effulgent Lord, please consider my case and do what You wish.

Text 31

çré-närada uväca 

evaà stuto hariù säkñät
     paramänanda-vigrahaù
jïätvä taà nirguëäà bhaktaà
     präha gambhirayä girä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; stutaù—praised; hariù—Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; paramänanda—transcendental bliss; vigrahaù—form; jïätvä—understanding; tam—him; nirguëam—beyond ther modes of narture; bhaktam—a devotee; präha—spoke; gambhirayä—deep; girä—with a voice.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these prayers, and aware that Mucukunda's devotion was beyond the touch of the mades of nature, Lord Kåñëa, whose form is filled with transcendental bliss, spoke with a deep voice.

Text 32

çré-bhagavän uväca 

dhanyas tvaà räja-çardüla
     dhanyä te vimalä matiù
nairapekñyena divyena
     bhakti-bhävena püritä

     çré-bhagavän uväca—thre Supreme Personality of Godhead said; dhanyaù—fortunate; tvam—you; räja-çardüla—O tiger of kings; dhanyä—fortunate; te—of you; vimalä—the pure; matiù—thoughts; nairapekñyena—with perfect renunciation; divyena—with transcendental; bhakti-bhävena—love; püritä—filled.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O tiger of kings, you are fortunate. Your pure thoughts are glorious. They are filled with perfect renunciation and splendid transcendental love.

Text 33

adyaiva gaccha mad-dhäma
     badary-äkhyaà mad-äçrayaù
tatraiva tu tapas taptvä
     bhütvä brähmaëa-puìgavaù

     adya—now; eva—indeed; gaccha—go; mad-dhäma—to My abode; badary-äkhyam—named Badari; mad-äçrayaù—My shelter; tatra—there; eva—indeed; tu—indeed; {}; tapaù—austerities; taptvä—perform; bhütvä—having done; brähmaëa-puìgavaù—the best of brähmaëas.

     Go at once to My abode named Badarikäçrama. By performing austerities there you will become the best of brähmaëas.

Text 34

prema-lakñaëayä bhaktyä
     mad-dhäma prakåteù param
präpsyasi tvaà mahä-räja
     yato nävartate gataù

     prema-lakñaëayä—characterized by love; bhaktyä—by devotional service; mad-dhäma—to My abode; prakåteù—the world of matter; param—above; präpsyasi—you will attain; tvam—you; mahä-räja—O great king; yataù—from which; na—not; ävartate—returns; gataù—having gone.

     O great king, by serving Me with loving devotion You will attain My own abode, which is above the world of matter. They who go there never return to the world of birth and death.

Text 35

çré-närada uväca 

itthaà stutvä harià natvä
     parikramya natänanaù
niçcakräma guhä-durgäc
     chré-kåñëa-prema-vihvalaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; stutvä—praying; harim—to Lord Kåñëa; natvä—bowing down; parikramya—cicumambulating; natänanaù—with bowed head; niçcakräma—left; guhä-durgät—the mountain cave; çré-kåñëa-prema-vihvalaù—filled with love for Lord Kåñëa.

     Çré Närada said: After offering prayers, bowing down, and with bowed head circumambulating the Lord, King Mucukunda, now overwhelmed with love for Lord Kåñëa, left the mountain cave.

Text 36

dväpare kñullakä martyä
     täla-vrkña-çatocchritam
dåñövä taà dudruvur märge
     bhaya-bhétä itas tataù

     dväpare—in Dvapara-yuga; kñullakä—short; martyä—living beings; täla-vrkña-çatocchritam—as tall as a hundered palm trees; dåñövä—seeing; tam—him; dudruvuù—fled; märge—on the road; bhaya-bhétä—terrified; itaù—here; tataù—and there.

     The Dväpara-yuga people, who were all very short, became terrified and fled when on the road they saw King Mucukunda, who was tall as a hundred palm trees.

Texts 37 and 38

mä bhaiñöety abhayaà yacchan
     jagäma diçam uttaram
evaà dattvä varaà tasmai
     mucukundäya dhémate

bhagavän punar ävrajya
     mathuräà mleccha-veñöitäm
hatvä mleccha-balaà sarvaà
     tad-dhanäny acchinad balät

     mä—don't; bhaiñöa—be afraid; iti—thus; abhayam—fearlessness; yacchan—giving; jagäma—went; diçam—to the direction; uttaram—north; evam—thus; dattvä—giving; varam—a benediction; tasmai—to him; mucukundäya—Mucukunda; dhémate—wise; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; punaù—again; ävrajya—returning; mathuräm—to Mathurä; mleccha-veñöitäm—surrounded by mlecchas; hatvä—killing; mleccha-balam—the mleccha army; sarvam—entire; tad-dhanäny—their wealth; acchinat—broke; balät—forcibly.

     Saying, "Don't be afraid", Mucukunda removed their fears and continued north. Then Lord Kåñëa, after giving His blessings to wise Mucukunda, returned to Mathurä City, which was surrounded by the mlecchas. The Lord killed the entire mleccha army and forcibly broke the mlecchas' power.

Text 39

atha räjä jaräsandho
     yoddhum abhyuditaù punaù
ähüya mägadhän viprän
     muhürtädeça-käriëaù

     atha—then; räjä—King; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; yoddhum—to fight; abhyuditaù—eager; punaù—again; ähüya—calling; mägadhän—of Magadha; viprän—the brähmaëas; muhürtädeça-käriëaù—giving instruction fro the proper time.

     Then King Jaräsandha, eager to fight again with Lord Kåñëa, called together the great astrologer-brähmaëas of the Mägadha country.

Text 40

prähedaà väsudeväkhyaà
     jitvä yady ägato hy aham
sarvän sampüjayiñyämi
     sadä yuñmat-padäçraye

     präha—said; idam—this; väsudeväkhyam—named Väsudeva; jitvä—defeating; yady—if; ägataù—returned; hy—indeed; aham—I; sarvän—all; sampüjayiñyämi—I will worship; sadä—forever; yuñmat-padäçraye—the shelter of your feet.

     Jaräsandha said to them: If I defeat Kåñëa, when I return I will take shelter of your feet and worship you all forever.

Text 41

kärägäreñu yävad vai
     sthitä bhavata bho dvijäù
paräjito 'haà va yuñmän
     haniñyämi na saàçayaù

     kärägäreñu—in prison; yävat—when; vai—indeed; sthitä—situated; bhavata—you; bhaù—O; dvijaù—brähmaëas; paräjitaù—defeated; aham—I; va—or; yuñmän—you all; haniñyämi—I will kill; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     But if I am defeated and imprisoned, I will kill you all. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 42

evam uktvä dvijän räjä
     jaräsandho mahä-balaù
äjagämäçu mathuräà
     trayo-viàçaty-anéka-paù

     evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; dvijän—to the brähmaëas; räjä—King; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; mahä-balaù—very powerful; äjagäma—went; äçu—at once; mathuräm—to Mathurä; trayo-viàçaty-anéka-paù—at the head of 23 armies.

     After speaking these words, powerful King Jaräsandha, taking with him 23 army divisions, quickly went to Mathurä City.

Texts 43-45

brahma-väkyam åtaà kartuà
     sva-pratijïäà vihäya ca
manuñya-ceñöäm äpannau
     sva-puräd bhéta-bhétavat

räma-kåñëau parau devau
     padbhyäà dudruvatur drutam
paläyamänau tau vékñya
     mägadhaù prahasan bhåçam

anvadhävad rathänékair
     brahma-väkyam anusmaran
dakñinäçaà gatäv itthaà
     pravarñaëa-girau haré

     brahma—of the brähmaëas; väkyam—the statement; åtam—proper; kartum—to do; sva-pratijïäm—his own promise; vihäya—abandoning; ca—and; manuñya-ceñöäm—the actions of human beings; äpannau—attained; sva-purät—from his city; bhéta-bhétavat—as if terrified; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; parau devau—ther two Supreme Lord; padbhyäm—on foot; dudruvatuù—ran; drutam—quickly; paläyamänau—fleeing; tau—Them; vékñya—seeing; mägadhaù—the king of Magadha; prahasan—laughing; bhåçam—greatly; anvadhävat—followed; rathänékaiù—with chariot soldiewrs; brahma-väkyam—the brähmaëas' words; anusmaran—remembering; dakñinäçam—to the south; gatäv—direction; ittham—thus; pravarñaëa-girau—on Mount Pravarsana; haré—the two Supreme Lords.

     Seeing Kåñëa and Balaräma fleeing on foot as if They were ordinary terrified human beings, Jaräsandha laughed aloud. At first he was determined not to keep the promise he made to the brähmaëas. Then, with many chariot warriors pursuing Kåñëa and Balaräma as They ran south to Mount Pravarñaëa, he remembered his words to the brähmaëas.

Text 46

yasmin nilénau jïätvä täv
     edhobhis taà dadäha ha
bhäsmé-bhüte vane jäte
     dahyamäna-tata-gireù

     yasmin—in which; nilénau—entered; jïätvä—knowing; täv—Them; edhobhiù—with fire; tam—that; dadäha—set afire; ha—indeed; bhäsmé-bhüte—burned to ashes; vane—the forest; jäte—manifested; dahyamäna-tata-gireù—of the burning mountain.

     Aware that Kåñëa and Balaräma were hiding in the mountain, Jaräsandha set the mountain on fire and burned all its forests to ashes.

Text 47

daçaika-yojanottuìgät
     samutpatya sureçvarau
alakñyamanäv aribhir
     dvärakäyaà nipetatuù

     daçaika-yojana—eleven yojanas; uttuìgät—from the height; samutpatya—jumping; sureçvarau—the two Supreme Personality of Godheads; alakñyamanäv—unseen; aribhiù—by the enemies; dvärakäyam—in Dvärakä; nipetatuù—fell.

     Jumping from a height of eighty-eight miles, Kåñëa and Balaräma, the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead, unseen by Their enemies, landed in Dvärakä.

Text 48

so 'pi dagdhau ca tau matvä
     mägadhendro mahä-balaù
mägadhän prayayau véro
     vädayan jaya-dundubhén

     saù—he; api—also; dagdhau—burned; ca—and; tau—Them; matvä—thinking; mägadhendraù—the king of Magadha; mahä-balaù—very powerful; mägadhän—to the couinrty of Magadha; prayayau—returned; véraù—a hero; vädayan—making sound; jaya-dundubhén—the drums of victory.

     Thinking that Kåñëa and Balaräma had been burned to death, powerful Jaräsandha returned to the country of Mägadha, where he was a hero and the drums of victory sounded.

Text 49

brähmaëän püjayäm äsa
     bhaktyä paramayä nåpa
yasya vipraù sahäyo 'sti
     kutas tasya paräjayaù

     brähmaëän—the brähmaëas; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; bhaktyä—with devotion; paramayä—great; nåpa—O king; yasya—of whom; vipraù—a brähmaëa; sahäyaù—the helper; asti—is; kutaù—how?; tasya—of him; paräjayaù—defeat.

     With great devotion Jaräsandha worshiped the brähmaëas. How can there be defeat for one helped by a brähmaëa?
.pa

Chapter Three
Çré Baladeva-vivähotsava
Lord Balaräma's Wedding

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

itthaà mayä te kathitaà
     dvärakä-väsa-käraëam
vivähädi-kathäù sarvä
     vadiñyämi pareçayoù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; dvärakä-väsa—residence in Dvaraka; käraëam—the cause; viväha—wedding; ädi—beginning with; kathäù—topic; sarva—all; vadiñyämi—I will tell; pareçayoù—of the two Supreme Personality of Godheads.

     In this way I have described to you the reason the Lord lives in Dvärakä. Now I will tell you everything of the marriages of Kåñëa and Balaräma, the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead.

Text 2 

pürvaà çré-baladevasya
     vivähaà çåëu maithila
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     äyur-vardhanam uttamam

     pürvam—before; çré-baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; viväham—the wedding; çåëu—please hear; maithila—O king of Mithila; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; äyur-vardhanam—increasing the duration of life; uttamam—transcendental.

     O king of Mithilä, please hear the story of Lord Balaräma's wedding, a sacred and transcendental story that removes all sins and increases the span of one's life.

Text 3 

änarto näma räjäbhüt
     sürya-vaàse mahä-manäù
yan-nämnänarta-deçaù syät
     samudre bhéma-nädini

     änartaù—Anarta; näma—name; räjä—a king; abhüt—was; sürya-vaàse—in the sun-god's dynasty; mahä-manäù—nible-hearted; yan-nämnä—by whose name; änarta-deçaù—the country of Anarta; syät—is; samudre—in the ocean; bhéma-nädini—filled with terrible sounds.

     A noble-hearted king named Änarta was born in the sürya dynasty. The country of Änarta-deça, which was created where there once was only the ocean filled with terrible sounds, was named after him.

Text 4 

raivato näma tat-putras
     cakravarté guëäkaraù
räjyaà cakära sa puréà
     vinirmäya kuçasthalém

     raivataù—Raivata; näma—named; tat-putraù—his son; cakravarté—emperor; guëäkaraù—virtuous; räjyam—the empire; cakära—did; sa—he; purém—to the capitol; vinirmäya—created; kuçasthalém—Kuçasthalé.

     His son was the virtuous king Raivata, who ruled the kingdom from his capitol Kuçasthalé.

Text 5 

tasya putra-çataà cäséd
     revaté näma kanyakä
sarvottamaà ciraïjévaà
     sundaraà varam icchaté

     tasya—of him; putra-çatam—a hundred sons; ca—and; äsét—was; revaté—Revaté; näma—named; kanyakä—a daughter; sarvottamam—the best of all; ciraïjévam—who would live a long time; sundaram—handsom; varam—husband; icchati—desires.

     He had a hundred sons and one daughter. His daughter, who was named Revaté, yearned to have a husband that was handsome, lived eternally, and was better than all other men.

Text 6 

ekadä ratham ästhäya
     hema-ratna-vibhüñitam
äropya svaà duhitaraà
     raivataù paryaöan bhuvam

     ekadä—one day; ratham—a chariot; ästhäya—mounting; hema-ratna-vibhüñitam—decorated with gold and jewels; äropya—placing; svam—own; duhitaram—daughter; raivataù—King Raivata; paryaöan—wandered; bhuvam—the earth.

     One day he placed his daughter on a chariot decorated with gold and jewels, and wandered the earth to find a proper husband.

Text 7 

präpto yoga-balenäpi
     brahmalokaà çubhävaham
kanyä-varaà pariprañöuà
     brahmäëaà praëanäma ha

     präptaù—attained; yoga-balena—by mystic power; api—also; brahmalokam—Brahmaloka; çubhävaham—auspicious; kanyä-varam—husband for her daughter; paariprañöum—to ask; brahmäëam—Brahma; praëanäma—bowed down; ha—indeed.

     By his mystic power he traveled to Brahmaloka. His intention to ask for a proper husband for his daughter, he bowed before the demigod Brahmä

Text 8 

gäyantyäà pürva-cittyäà ca
     sthito labdha-kñaëaù kñaëam
eka-cittaà vidhià jïätvä
     sväbhipräyaà nyavedayat

     gäyantyam—singing; pürva-cittyäm—Purvacitti; ca—and; sthitaù—situated; labdha-kñaëaù—finding a proper moment; kñaëam—a moment; eka-cittam—one thought; vidhim—to Brahma; jïätvä—understanding; sväbhipräyam—his intention; nyavedayat—spoke.

     As the apsarä Pürvacitti was singing, he found his opportunity. Aware that now he had Brahmä's attention, he spoke what was in his heart.

Text 9 

çré-raivata uväca 

paraù puräëo jagad-aìkuro 'bhüù
     pürëaù parätmä parameçvaro 'si
sthitaù sadä dhämani pärameñöhya
     såjasy alaà päsi ca hiàsasédam

     çré-raivataù—Çré Raivata; uväca—said; paraù—great; puräëaù—ancient; jagad-aìkuraù—from whom the universe has sprouted; abhüù—you are; pürëaù—perfect; parätmä—the great soul; parameçvaraù—the supreme controller; asi—you are; sthitaù—situated; sadä—always; dhämani—in your abode; pärameñöhya—O Brahmä; såjasy—you create; alam—greatly; pasi—protect; ca—and; hiàsasi—destroy; idam—this universe.

     Çré Raivata said: You are the greatest, the oldest, the seed from which this universe has sprouted, the great soul and the great controller. O Brahmä, you stay always in your own abode. You create, maintain, and destroy this universe.

Text 10 

vedä mukhaà dharma uras tathaiva
     påñöhaà hy adharmaç ca manur manéñä
aìgäni devä asuräç ca pädäù
     sarvä såtir deva tanus tava syät

     vedäù—the Vedas; mukham—mouth; dharma—religion; uraù—chest; {}; tatha—so; eva—indeed; påñöham—back; hy—indeed; adharmaç—irreligion; ca—and; manuù—Manu; manéñä—intelligence; aìgäni—limbs; devä—the demigods; asuräç—the demons; ca—and; pädäù—feet; sarvä—all; såtiù—creation; deva—O lord; tanuù—the body; tava—of you; syät—is.

     O lord, the Vedas are Your mouth, religion is your chest, irreligion is your back, Manu is your intelligence, the demigods are your limbs, the demons are your feet, and this entire creation is your body.

Text 11 

karoñi hastämalakaà ca viçvaà
     netuà prabhuù särathivad guëeñu
ekas tvam ekaà ca vidhäya jälaà
     grasiñyase sarvam ivorëanäbhiù

     karoñi—you do; hasta—in the hand; ämalakam—an amalaka fruit; ca—and; viçvam—the universe; netum—to bring; prabhuù—able; särathivat—like a charioteer; guëeñu—among the modes; ekaù—one; tvam—you; ekam—one; ca—and; vidhäya—placing; jälam—network; grasiñyase—you will swallow; sarvam—all; iva—like; urëanäbhiù—a spider.

     This universe is like a small ämalaka fruit in your hand. You are like a charioteer driving this universe through the modes of nature. You are like a spider and this universe is your web. In the future you will swallow up this entire universe.

Text 12 

mahendra-dhiñëyaà tava vaçyam asti
     kià särvabhaumaà kim u yoga-siddhiù
yaù pärameñöhyaà ca sadä sthito 'si
     tasmai namo 'nanta-guëäya bhümne

     mahendra-dhiñëyam—the abode of Lord Indra; tava—of you; vaçyam—under the control; asti—is; kim—what?; särvabhaumam—supremacy; kim—what?; u—indeed; yoga-siddhiù—the perfection of yoga; yaù—what; pärameñöhyam—supremacy; ca—and; sadä—always; sthitaù—situated; asi—you are; tasmai—to him; namaù—obeisances; ananta-guëäya—limitless virtues; bhümne—to the lord.

     The realm of King Indra is under your control, what to speak of the realms of ordinary kings or the perfections of yoga. You always stay in the highest realm. To you, O lord of limitless virtue, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 13 

bhavän svayambhür jagatäà pitämaho
     vidhe sura-jyeñöha iti prabhävataù
asya varaà sarva-guëaà ciräyuñaà
     vadäçu mäà divyam açeña-darçanaù

     bhavän—you; svayambhüù—self-born; jagatäm—of the universes; pitämahaù—the granfather; vidhe—O Brahmä; sura-jyeñöha—the best of the demigods; iti—thus; prabhävataù—by the power; asya—of him; varam—husband; sarva-guëam—having all virtues; ciräyuñam—living eternally; vada—please tell; äçu—at once; mäm—to me; divyam—divine; açeña-darçanaù—seeing everything.

     You are self-born. You are the grandfather of all in the universe. You are the best of the demigods. You see everything. O lord, please tell me who should become my daughter's husband, a divine husband that lives forever and has all virtues.

Text 14 

çré-närada uväca 

etac chrutvä tato brahmä
     svayambhüù sarva-darçanaù
raivataà präha räjänaà
     prahasann iva maithila

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; etac—this; chrutvä—hearing; tataù—then; brahmä—Brahmä; svayambhüù—self-born; sarva-darçanaù—seeing everything; raivatam—to Raivata; präha—said; räjänam—King; prahasann—smiling; iva—like; maithila—O king of Mithila.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, when he heard these words, self-born Brahmä, who sees everything, smiled and spoke to King Raivata.

Text 15 

çré-brahmoväca 

atra kñaëena he räjan
     bhuvi kälo mahä-balé
tvaraà vyatitas tri-nava-
     catur-yuga-vikalpitaù

     çré-brahmä uväca—Çré Brahmä said; atra—here; kñaëena—in a moment; he—O; räjan—king; bhuvi—on the earth; kälaù—time; mahä-balé—very powerful; tvaram—quickly; vyatitaù—surpassing; tri-nava-catur-yuga-vikalpitaù—counted as four yugas.

     Çré Brahmä said: O king, a moment in this realm of Brahmaloka is equal to four yugas on the earth.

Text 16 

na santi martya-loke tat-
     puträù pauträù sa-bändhaväù
tat-putra-pautra-naptåëäà
     goträëi ca na çåëmahe

     na—not; santi—are; martya-loke—on the earth; tat-puträù—your children; pauträù—grandchildren; sa-bändhaväù—relatives; tat-putra-pautra-naptåëäm—their children, gandchildren, great-grandchilren; goträëi—descnedents; ca—and; na—not; çåëmahe—we hear.

     Your children, grandchildren, and other relatives are no longer on the earth. We do not hear anything of the descendents of your children, grandchildren, or great grandchildren. The dynasty no longer exists.

Text 17 

tad gaccha sarva-mukhyäya
     nara-ratnäya çäçvate
kanyä-ratnam idaà räjan
     baladeväya dehi bhoù

     tat—therefore; gaccha—go; sarva-mukhyäya—to the best of all; nara-ratnäya—the jewel of men; çäçvate—eternal; kanyä-ratnam—jewel of girls; idam—this; räjan—O king; baladeväya—to Lord Balaräma; dehi—give; bhoù—Oh.

     Therefore you should approach Lord Balaräma, who is the best of all, the jewel of men, and the person that lives eternally, and offer your jewel-daughter to Him.

Text 18 

paripürëatamau säkñäd
     golokädhipaté prabhü
bhuvo bhärävatäräyä-
     vatérëau bala-keçavau

     paripürëatamau—the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead; säkñät—directly; golokädhipaté—the two masters of Goloka; prabhü—the two Lords; bhuvaù—of the earth; bhära—the burden; avatäräya—to remove; avatérëau—descended; bala—Balaräma; keçavau—and Kåñëa.

     Kåñëa and Balaräma are the two original Supreme Personalities of Godhead. They are Goloka's two masters, who have descended to remove the earth's burden.

Text 19 

asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-paté
     vasudevätmajau haré
dvärakäyaà viräjete
     yadubhir bhakta-vatsalau

     asaìkhya—numberless; brahmäëòa—of universes; paté—the masters; vasudevätmajau—the sons of Vasudeva; haré—the two Lords; dvärakäyam—in Dvärakä; viräjete—are splendidly manifest; yadubhiù—with the Yädavas; bhakta-vatsalau—kind to Their devotees.

     Kåñëa and Balaräma, who are the two Supreme Lords, who are the two masters of numberless universes, who are Vasudeva's two sons, and who are kind to Their devotees, are now spleniddly manifest in Dvärakä, with the Yädavas as Their companions.

Text 20 

çré-närada uväca 

atha çrutvä vidhià natvä
     raivato nåpa-sattamaù
äyayau dvärakäà bhüyaù
     samåddhaà taà samåddhibhiù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; çrutvä—hearing; vidhim—to Brahmä; natvä—bowing; revataù—Raivata; nåpa—of kings; sattamaù—the best; äyayau—went; dvärakäm—to Dvärtakä; bhüyaù—greatly; samåddham—opulent; tam—that; samåddhibhiù—with opulences.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these words, the great king Raivata bowed down before Lord Brahmä and then quickly went to the supremely opulent city of Dvärakä.

Text 21 

päribarhe rathaà dattvä
     viçvakarma-vinirmitam
sahasra-haya-samyuktaà
     divya-yojana-viståtam

     päribarhe—as a wedding present; ratham—a chariot; dattvä—giving; viçvakarma-vinirmitam—made by Viçvakarmä; sahasra—a thousand; haya—horses; samyuktam—with; divya-yojana-viståtam—eight celestial miles long.

     As a wedding present he gave a chariot built by Viçvakarmä that was eight celestial miles long and yoked with a thousand horses, . . . 

Text 22 

divyämbaräni ratnäni
     brahma-dattäni maithila
datväyayau tapas taptuà
     badary-äkhyaà çubhävaham

     divya—splendid; ämbaräni—garments; ratnäni—jewels; brahma-dattäni—given by Brahma; maithila—O king of Mithila; datvä—giving; äyayau—went; tapaù—austerities; taptum—to perform; badary-äkhyam—named Badarikasrama; çubhävaham—the auspicious place.

 . . . and he also gave many splendid garments and jewels he had received from Brahmä. After giving these gifts he left to perform austerities at sacred Badarikäçrama.

Text 23 

tadä mahotsavaç cäséd
     yadu-puryäà gåhe gåhe
saìkarñaëo 'tha bhagavän
     revatyä viraräja ha

     tadä—then; mahotsavaç—a great festival; ca—and; äsét—was; yadu-puryäm—in the capitol of the Yädavass; gåhe—in home; gåhe—after home; saìkarñaëaù—Lord Balaräma; atha—then; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; revatyä—with Revaté; viraräja—was splendidly manifested; ha—indeed.

     Then there was a great festival in the capitol of the Yädavas. In home after home the Supreme Lord Balaräma appeared with Çrématé Revaté.

Text 24 

baladeva-vivähasya
     kathäà yaù çåëuyän naraù
sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù
     paräà siddhim aväpnuyät

     baladeva—of Lord Balaräma; vivähasya—of the wedding; kathäm—the topic; yaù—one who; çåëuyän—hears; naraù—a person; sarva-päpa—all sins; vinirmuktaù—pree; paräm—the supreme; siddhim—perfection; aväpnuyät—attains.

     One who hears this story of Lord Balaräma's wedding becomes free of all sins and attains the supreme perfection.
.pa

Chapter Four
Kuëòina-pura-yäna
Journey to the City of Kuëòina

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

atha çré-kåñëadevasya
     vivähaà çåëu maithila
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     catur-varga-phala-pradam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; çré-kåñëadevasya—of Çré Kåñëa; viväham—the wedding; çåëu—pleasehear; maithila—Oking of Mithila; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; catur-varga-phala-pradam—giving the four goals of life. 

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, please hear the story of Lord Kåñëa's wedding, a sacred story that removes all sins and grants the four goals of life.

Text 2 

bhéñmako näma räjäbhüd
     vidarbheñu pratäpavän
kuëòinädhipatiù çrémän
     sarva-dharma-vidäà varaù

     bhéñmakaù—Bhiñmaka; näma—named; räjä—a king; abhüt—was; vidarbheñu—in the country of Vidarbha; pratäpavän—powerful; kuëòinädhipatiù—the ruler of Kundina; çrémän—handsome; sarva-dharma-vidäm—of the knowers of religion; varaù—the best.

     In the country of Vidarbha there was a powerful king named Bhéñmaka, who ruled from his capitol Kuëòina. He was handsome and glorious and he was the best of the knowers of true religion.

Text 3 

rukmiëé tat-sutä jätä
     çriyo mäträti-sundaré
koöi-candra-pratékäça
     guëa-bhüñaëa-bhüñitä

     rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; tat-sutä—his daughter; jätä—born; çriyaù—than the goddess of fortune; mäträ—measure; ati-sundaré—more beautiful; koöi—ten million; candra—moons; pratékäçä—splendor; guëa-bhüñaëa-bhüñitä—decorated with transcendental virtues.

     He had a daughter named Rukmiëé, who was more beautiful than the goddess of fortune. She was decorated with all virtues and was more glorious than ten million moons.

Text 4 

çrutvaikadä purä sä vai
     man-mukhäc chré-harer guëän
paripürëatamaà taà vai
     sa mene sädåçaà patim

     çrutvä—hearing; ekadä—once; purä—before; sä—she; vai—inded; man-mukhät—from my mouth; chré-hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; guëän—the virtues; paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tam—Him; vai—indeed; sa—she; mene—considered; sädåçam—like Him; patim—husband.

     From my mouth she once heard the transcendental virtues of Lord Kåñëa. From that day she thought of attaining a husband like Him, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 5 

tad-rüpaà sa-guëaà çrutvä
     man-mukhät préti-vardhanät
sädåçéà çré-haris täà vai
     samudvoòhuà mano dadhe

     tad-rüpam—hear beauty; sa-guëam—and virtues; çrutvä—hearing; man-mukhät—from my mouth; priti-vardhanät—because of the increase of love; sädåçém—like her; çré-hariù—Lord Kåñëa; tam—her; vai—indeed; samudvoòhum—to marry; manaù—the mind; dadhe—fixed.

     From my mouth Lord Kåñëa heard of her beauty and virtues. He fell in love with her and fixed his heart on marrying a girl like her.

Text 6 

kåñëa-bhäva-vidä räjïä
     sarva-dharma-vidä bhåçam
bhéñmakenaiva kåñëäya
     dätuà täà niçcayaù kåtaù

     kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; bhäva—of the love; vidä—knowing; räjïä—by the king; sarva-dharma-vidä—aware of all religios principles; bhåçam—greatly; bhéñmakena—by Bhiñmaka; eva—indeed; kåñëäya—to Lord Kåñëa; dätum—to give; täm—her; niçcayaù—determination; kåtaù—did.

     Aware that Lord Kåñëa had fallen in love with his daughter, King Bhéñmaka, who knew all about true religion, decided to give his daughter to Him.

Text 7 

yuva-räjas tato rukmé
     taà nivärya prayatnataù
kåñëa-çatruà mahä-véraà
     çiçupälam amanyata

     yuva-räjaù—the prince; tataù—then; rukmé—Rukmé; tam—him; nivärya—stopping; prayatnataù—with great effort; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; çatrum—the enemy; mahä-véram—the great warrior; çiçupälam—Çiçupäla; amanyata—thought.

     With a great effort prince Rukmé stopped him. Rukmé thought his sister should be given to Çiçupäla, a great warrior who was Kåñëa's enemy.

Text 8 

tataù khinna-manäù bhaiñmé
     çré-kåñëäya mahätmane
dütaà svaà preñayäm äsa
     brähmaëaà mithileçvara

     tataù—then; khinna-manäù—depressed; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; çré-kåñëäya—to Çré Kåñëa; mahätmane—noble-hearted; dütam—a messenger; svam—own; preñayäm äsa—sent; brähmaëam—a brähmaëa; mithileçvara—O king of Mithila.

     Dejected, Rukmiëé sent a brähmaëa messenger to noble-hearted Lord Kåñëa.

Text 9 

sa dvärakäà gato divyaà
     çré-kåñëena prapüjitaù
bhuktaväàs tatra cäséno
     viçränto mandire hareù

     sa—he; dvärakäm—to Dvaraka; gataù—went; divyam—transcendental; çré-kåñëena—by Çré Kåñëa; prapüjitaù—worshiped; bhuktavän—ate; tatra—there; ca—and; äsénaù—sat; viçräntaù—rested; mandire—in the palace; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa.

     Arriving at glorious Dvärakä, the brähmaëa was worshiped by Lord Kåñëa. The brähmaëa sat, ate, and rested in Lord Kåñëa's palace.

Text 10 

påcchate kuçalaà sarvaà
     çré-kåñëäya mahätmane
brähmaëas tad-anujïätas
     tasmai sarvam avarëayat

     påcchate—asks; kuçalam—welfare; sarvam—all; çré-kåñëäya—to Çré Kåñëa; mahätmane—noble-hearted; brähmaëaù—the brähmaëa; tad-anujïätaù—with His pwermission; tasmai—to Him; sarvam—all; avarëayat—relates.

     First the brähmaëa inquired about noble-hearted Lord Kåñëa's welfare. Then, with the Lord's permission, the brähmaëa recited Rukmiëé's letter to Him:

Text 11 

svasti çrékära-païcäòhye
     nityänanda-mahodadhau
çrémad-divya-guëaiù pürëe
     koöiço natayo mama

     svasti—greetings; çrékära-païcäòhye—rich with five opulences; nityänanda-mahodadhau—a great oceanof eternal bliss; çrémad-divya-guëaiù—with splendid transcendental virtues; pürëe—filled; koöiçaù—millions; natayaù—obeisances; mama—of me.

     "Greetings to You, the master of five opulences, a great ocean of eternal bliss, filled with splendid divine virtues. I bow down before You millions and millions of times.

Text 12 

çam aträstu ca taträstu
     tatas tvat-patram ägatam
näradoktena vacasä
     jïäto 'si prakåteù paraù

     çam—happiness; atra—here; astu—may be; ca—and; tatra—there; astu—may be; tataù—then; tvat-patram—Your letter; ägatam—arrived; närada—of Närada; uktena—spoken; vacasä—by the words; jïätaù—understood; asi—You are; prakåteù—the material world; paraù—beyond.

     "Your letter brought happiness everywhere. From Närada Muni's words I can understand that You are beyond the world of matter.

Text 13 

sarvaà jänäsi sarvajïas
     tathä vakñye vaco rahaù
véra-bhägaà tu mäà viddhi
     tvaà gåhäëa mahä-mate

     sarvam—everything; jänäsi—You know; sarvajïaù—all-knowing; tathä—then; vakñye—I will say; vacaù—words; rahaù—in private; véra—of a hero; bhägam—the prize; tu—indeed; mäm—me; viddhi—please know; tvam—You; gåhäëa—please take; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     "Although You know everything, I shall tell know something in private: Please know that I am a prize to be grasped by a hero like You. O noble-hearted one, please take me by force.

Text 14 

mä caidyaù pratigåhëéyäd
     yathä siàha-balià mågaù
kathaà tvam udvahe durge
     sthitam iti ca tac chåëu

     mä—not; caidyaù—Sisupala; pratigåhëéyät—should take; yathä—as; siàha-balim—the prize of a lion; mågaù—a deer; katham—how?; tvam—You; udvahe—in taking away; durge—in the fortress; sthitam—staying; iti—thus; ca—and; tat—this; çåëu—please hear.

     As a deer should not take the lion's prize, so Çiçupäla should not take me. How can You kidnap me while I am in the fortress of this palace? Please listen.

Text 15 

pürve dyuù kula-devyäs tu
     yaträsti mahaté hare
ägamiñyämy ahaà tatra
     tatra mäà tvaà gåhäëa bhoù

     pürve—before; dyuù—the day; kula-devyäù—of the family deity of goddess Durgä; tu—indeed; yäträ—festival; asti—is; mahaté—great; hare—O Kåñëa; ägamiñyämy—I will come; aham—I; tatra—there; tatra—there; mäm—me; tvam—you; gåhäëa—please kidnap; bhoù—O.

     One day before the wedding there will be a great festival for goddess Durgä, our family's deity. O Kåñëa, I will go to that festival and You can kidnap me then. 

Text 16 

çré-närada uväca 

rukmiëyäs tam abhipräyaà
     çrutvä brähmaëa-bhäñitam
rathaù samyujyatäm äçu
     därukaà präha mänadaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rukmiëyäù—of Rukmiëé; tam—that; abhipräyam—intention; çrutvä—hearing; brähmaëa—by the brähmaëa; bhäñitam—spoken; rathaù—a chariot; samyujyatäm—should be prepared; äçu—at once; därukam—to Däruka; präha—said; mänadaù—honorable Kåñëa.

     Çré Närada said: When he heard the brähmaëa recite Rukmiëé's letter, noble Kåñëa said to Däruka, "Prepare a chariot at once."

Texts 17-20 

paçcimäyäà tadä rätrau
     vaikuëöha-prabhavaà param
kiìkiné-jäla-samyuktaà
     hema-ratna-khacit-prabham

sad-açvaiù çaibya-sugréva-
     meghapuñpa-balähakaiù
niyojitair därukeëa
     caïcalaiç cäru-cämaraiù

yuktaà mahä-rathaà divyaà
     sahasräditya-varcasam
äruhya säratheù påñöhe
     dhåtvä çré-päda-paìkajam

sva-hastena dvijaà tasmin
     samäropya ramä-patiù
vidarbhän prayayau räjan
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän hariù

     paçcimayam—in the west; tadä—there; rätrau—at night; vaikuëöha-prabhavam—the power of Vaikuëöha; param—great; kiìkiné-jäla-samyuktam—with tinkling ornaments; hema-ratna-khacit-prabham—splendid with gold and jewels; sad-açvaiù—with horses; çaibya-sugréva-meghapuñpa-balähakaiù—Saibya, Sugréva, Meghapuñpa, and Balähaka; niyojitaiù—yoked; därukeëa—by Daruka; caïcalaiù—restless; cäru-cämaraiù—with beautifulcamaras; yuktam—endowed; mahä-ratham—greeat chariot; divyam—splendid; sahasräditya-varcasam—splendid as a thousand suns; äruhya—mounting; säratheù—of the charioteer; påñöhe—at the beck; dhåtvä—holding; çré-päda-paìkajam—His glorious lotus feet; sva-hastena—with His own hand; dvijam—the brähmaëa; tasmin—in that; samäropya—placing; ramä-patiù—the goddess of fortune's husband; vidarbhän—to the country of Vidarbha; prayayau—went; räjan—O king; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hariù—Lord Hari.

     That night a chariot from Vaikuëöha appeared in the west. It was decorated with gold, jewels, and a network of tinkling ornaments and was splendid like a thousand suns. Däruka yoked to it the restless cämara-decorated horses Çaibya, Sugréva, Meghapuñpa, and Balähaka, and then mounted the chariot behind them. Then Lord Kåñëa, the goddess of fortune's husband, placed His own lotus feet on the chariot, and with His own hand pulled the brähmaëa onto the chariot. O king, then the Lord went to the country of Vidarbha. 

Text 21 

kåñëaà caikaà gataà hartuà
     kanyäà tu nåpa-maëòalät
kali-praçaìkito rämaù
     çrutvä bhrätå-sahäya-kåt

     kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; ca—and; ekam—alone; gatam—gone; hartum—to kidnap; kanyäm—the girl; tu—indeed; nåpa-maëòalät—from the circle of kings; kali—of a quarrel; praçaìkitaù—afraid; rämaù—Balaräma; çrutvä—hearing; bhrätå-sahäya-kåt—helping His brother.

     Hearing that Lord Kåñëa had gone alone to kidnap Rukmiëé from the circle of kings, and fearing a quarrel would follow, Lord Balaräma prepared to help His brother.

Text 22 

nétvä yadu-balaà sarvaà
     samartha-bala-vähanam
vipakñéyän nåpän jetuà
     balaù paçcäd yayau tvaram

     nétvä—bringing; yadu-balam—the Yädavas army; sarvam—all; samartha-bala-vähanam—powerful; vipakñéyän—to the enemies; nåpän—kings; jetum—to defeat; balaù—Balaräma; paçcät—then; yayau—went; tvaram—quickly.

     Taking with Him all the Yädavas' powerful armies, Lord Balaräma went to defeat the enemy kings.

Text 23 

kuëòinopavanaà präptaù
     sa-dvijaù sa-ratho hariù
santasthau tintiëé-vrkñe
     ästéryäçva-paricchadam

     kuëòina—of Kundina; upavanam—the gardens; präptaù—attained; sa-dvijaù—with the brähmaëa; sa-rathaù—by chariot; hariù—Kåñëa; santasthau—stayed; tintiëé-vrkñe—under a tintini tree; ästérya—placing; äçva-paricchadam—the horses.

     Arriving at the gardens outside Kuëòina, Kåñëa and the brähmaëa stayed under a tintiëé tree as Däruka untied the horses.

Text 24 

durät sandåçyate tasmät
     kuëòinaà tu puraà param
dérgha-durga-samäyuktaà
     sapta-yojana-vartulam

     durät—from afar; sandåçyate—is seen; tasmät—from that; kuëòinam—Kundina; tu—indeed; puram—the city; param—great; dérgha—great; durga—fortress; samäyuktam—with; sapta-yojana-vartulam—seven yojanas around.

     In the distance they could see the great city of Kuëòina, which stood within a great fortress 56 miles around.

Text 25 

durlaìghyä durgamä yatra
     parikhä jala-püritä
dhanuù-çataà viñörtästi
     cäturmasya-nadéva sä

     durlaìghyä—unscalable; durgamä—unapproachable; yatra—where; parikhä—a moat; jala-püritä—filled with watger; dhanuù-çatam—a hundred dhanuhs; viñörtä—extended; asti—is; cäturmasya—during the monsoon; nadé—a river; iva—like; sa—it.

     That fort was encircled by an impassable moat a hundred bows wide and overflowing with water like a river swollen by the monsoon.

Text 26 

païcäçad-dhasta-mänena
     durga-bhittis tathordhva-gä
yatra ramyäëi harmyäëi
     sphurad-dhema-çikhäni ca

     païcäçad-dhasta-mänena—fifty hands in measurement; durga-bhittiù—a great wall; tathä—so; ürdhva—above; gä—gone; yatra—where; ramyäëi—beuatiful; harmyäëi—palaces; sphurad-dhema-çikhäni—with glitening golden roofs; ca—also.

     The city was surrounded by a wall fifty hands high. In the city were many beautiful palaces with glistening golden roofs.

Text 27 

hema-kmbha-dhvaja-sphurjat-
     tolakäni virejire
pärävatä mauyüräç ca
     yatra tatra patanti ca

     hema—golden; kumbha—spires; dhvaja—flags; sphurjat—glistening; tolakäni—ornaments; virejire—shone; pärävatä—paravata birds; mauyüräù—peacocks; ca—and; yatra—here; tatra—and there; patanti—fly; ca—and.

     There were many flags, glittering ornaments, and splendid golden spires. Many peacocks and pärävatas flew here and there.

Text 28 

çiçpuäläya sväà kanyäà
     däsyan räjä tu bhéñmakaù
cakre viväha-sambhära-
     saïcayaà ratna-maëòape

     çiçpuäläya—to Sisupala; svam—his own; kanyäm—daughter; däsyan—about to give; räja—King; tu—indeed; bhéñmakaù—Bhismaka; cakre—did; viväha-sambhära-saïcayam—preparation for the wedding; ratna-maëòape—in a jeweled pavilion.

     About to offer his daughter to Siçupäla, King Bhéñmaka made elaborate wedding preparations in a jewel pavilion.

Text 29 

géta-maìgala-samyukte
     narébhir bhavanottame
raräja rukmiëé räjan
     siddhibhir bhür yathä bhuvi

     géta—music; maìgala—auspiciousness; samyukte—with; narébhiù—by women; bhavanottame—in a palace; raräja—shone; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; räjan—O king; siddhibhiù—with perfections; bhüù—the earth; yathä—as; bhuvi—on the earth.

     As goddess Earth is splendidly manifested among many mystic powers in the earthly realm, so Rukmiëé was splendidly manifested among many women in a palace filled with beautiful music.

Text 30 

atharva-vid-dvijä bhaiñméà
     su-snatäà ratna-väsasäm
cakrur mantrais tathä rakñäà
     baddhvä çäntià vidhäya ca

     atharva—the Atharva Veda; vit—knowing; dvijäù—brähmaëas; bhaiñmém—to Rukmiëé; su-snatam—carefully bathed; ratna-väsasam—with precious jewels and valuable garments; cakruù—did; mantraiù—with mantras; tathä—then; rakñäm—protection; baddhvä—binding; çäntim—peace; vidhäya—placing; ca—and.

     Then brähmaëas learned in the Atharva Veda approached the carefuully bathed and decorated with exquisite garments and precious jewels Rukmiëé, chanted mantras for her protection and tied on her an amulet. 

Texts 31-33 

haimänäà bhara-lakñaà ca
     muktänäà dvi-guëaà tathä
sahasra-bhäraà vasträëäà
     dhenünäm arbudäni ñaö

gajäyutaà rathänäà ca
     daça-lakñaà manoharam
daça-koöi-hayänäà ca
     gudädi-tila-parvatän

sahasraà svarëa-paträëäà
     bhüñaëänäà tathäyutam
viprebhyaù pradadau räjä
     bhéñmako 'ti-mahä-manäù

     haimänäm—of gold; bhara-lakñam—a hundred thousand bharas; ca—and; muktänäm—of pearls; dvi-guëam—double; tathä—so; sahasra—a thousand; bhäram—bharas; vasträëäm—of garments; dhenünäm—of cows; arbudäni—a hundred million; ñaö—six; gaja—of elephants; ayutam—tne thousand; rathänäm—of chariots; ca—and; daça-lakñam—a million; manoharam—beautiful; daça-koöi-hayänäm—a hundred million horses; ca—and; gudädi-tila-parvatän—mountains of grains and molasses; sahasram—a thousand; svarëa-paträëäm—golden cups; bhüñaëänäm—of ornaments; tathä—so; ayutam—ten thousand; viprebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; pradadau—gave; räjan—O king; bhéñmakaù—Bhismaka; ati-mahä-manäù—very noble-hearted.

     The  noble-hearted King Bhéñmaka gave in charity to the brähmaëas a hundred thousand bharas of gold, twice that much in pearls, a thousand bharas of valuable garments, six hundred million cows, a hundred million horses, many mountains of grains and molasses, a thousand golden cups, and ten thousand ornaments.

Text 34 

tathä vai damaghoñasya
     çiçupäläya vai dvijäù
cakruù çäntià paraà pürvaà
     rakñä-bandhana-rüpiëém

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; dämaghoñasya—Of Damaghosa; çiçupäläya—to Sisupala; vai—indeed; dvijäù—brähmaëas; cakruù—did; çäntim—peace; param—grat; pürvam—before; rakñä-bandhana-rüpiëém—for protection.

     Then, on Damaghoña's order, the brähmaëas gave a protective amulet to Çiçupäla.

Texts 35-37 

brähmaëair maìgala-snänaà
     pati-kaïcuka-çobhitam
mukuöopari vibhräjat-
     puñpa-mauli-dharaà çubham

hara-kaìkana-keyüra-
     çikhämaëi-vibhüñitam
maìgalair géta-väditrair
     gandhäkñata-vicarcitam

äcära-läjaiù suvaraà
     çiçupälaà vidhäya ca
äropya kariëaà proccaà
     dämaghoño viniryayau

     brähmaëaiù—by the brähmaëas; maìgala-snänam—an auspicious bath; pati—of the king; kaïcuka—in garments; çobhitam—splendid; mukuöa—crown; upari—above; vibhräjat—shining; puñpa—of flowers; mauli—a crown; dharam—wearing; çubham—handsome; hära—necklaces; kaìkana—bracelets; keyüra—armlets; çikhä—crown; maëi—jewels; vibhüñitam—decorated; maìgalaiù—with auspicious; géta—singing; väditraiù—and instrumental music; gandhäkñata-vicarcitam—asnointed with sweet fragrances; äcära-läjaiù—with showers of grain; suvaram—bridegroom; çiçupälam—Sisupala; vidhäya—placing; ca—and; äropya—mounting; kariëam—an elephant; proccam—great; dämaghoñaù—Damaghosa; viniryayau—left.

     Placing his son, Çiçupäla, who had been ritually bathed by the brähmaëas, who was elegantly dressed as the bridegroom, who wore a crown decorated with splendid flowers, who wore necklaces, bracelets, armlets, and crest jewels, who was anointed with sweet fragrances, and who was greated with auspicious singing, instrumental music, and a shower of grains, on a great elephant, and then himself climbing on that elephant, King Damaghoña left his own city.

Text 38 

jaräsandhena çälvena
     dantavakreëa dhématä
virürathena pauëòreëa
     päåñëi-grähena maithila

vikarñan mahatéà senäà
     damaghoño mahä-balaù
dundubhén nädayän dérghän
     äyayau kuëòinaà puram

     jaräsandhena—with Jarasandha; çälvena—withe Salva; dantavakreëa—with Dantavakra; dhématä—intelligent; virürathena—with Viduratha; pauëòreëa—with Punrdaka; päåñëi-grähena—protecting the rear of the army; maithila—O king of Mithila; vikarñan—pulling; mahatém—great; senäm—army; damaghoñaù—Damaghosa; mahä-balaù—very powerful; {}; dundubhén—drums; nädayän—sounding; dérghän—long; äyayau—came; kuëòinam—to Kundina; puram—city.

     Accompanied by Jaräsandha, Çalva, intelligent Dantavakra, and Vidüratha, and with Pauëòraka at the rear, powerful King Damaghoña, bringing with him a great army sounding kettledrums, went to Kuëòina City.

Text 40

sammukhäd yadu-devasya
     çrutvodyogaà nåpäù pare
sahasraçaù samäjagmuù
     çiçupäla-sahäyinaù

     sammukhät—from the presence; yadu-devasya—of Lord Kåñëa, the Yädavas' king; çrutvä—hearing; udyogam—eagerness; nåpaù—kings; pare—other; sahasraçaù—thousands; samäjagmuù—came çiçupäla-sahäyinaù—Sisupala's allies.

     Hearing that Lord Kåñëa had come, many thousands of other kings, all Çiçupäla's allies, eagerly came.

Texts 41-43 

bhéñmako hy agrato gatvä
     sampüjya vidhivan nåpam
käçméra-kambalair divyä-
     ruëaiù samudra-sambhavaiù

maëòiteñu ca sarveñu
     muktä-däma-vilambiñu
saugandhikaiù puñpa-rasai
     räñöreñu çibireñu ca

varäìganä-nåtya-läsan-
     mådaìgeñu dhvanatsu ca
niveçayäm äsa nåpair
     vidarbhädhipatir mahän

     bhéñmakaù—Bhismaka; hy—indeed; agrataù—before; gatvä—going; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhivän—according to the rules; nåpam—the king; käçméra—from Kasmira; kambalaiù—with wollen cadars; divyä—splendid; aruëaiù—red coral; samudra-sambhavaiù—born from the sea; maëòiteñu—decorated; ca—and; sarveñu—all; muktä-däma-vilambiñu—with necklaces of pearls; saugandhikaiù—fragrant; puñpa-rasai—with the nectar of flowers; räñöreñu—in the kingdoms; çibireñu—in the camps; ca—and; varäìganä—of prostitutes; nåtya—dancing; läsat—splendid; mådaìgeñu—drums; dhvanatsu—sounding; ca—and; niveçayäm äsa—made to enter; nåpaiù—with the kings; vidarbhädhipatiù—the king od Vidarbha; mahän—great.

     King Bhéñmaka went to greet the kings. As drums sounded and dancing-girls danced in the military encampment, Bhéñmaka worshiped the kings and decorated them with woolen shawls from Kashmir, ornaments of red coral gathered from the ocean, pearl necklaces, and flower fragrances.
.pa

Chapter Five
Çré Rukmiëé-nirgamana
The Kidnapping of Çré Rukmiëé

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

dhyäyanté kåñëa-pädäbjaà
     bhaiñmé kamala-locanä
moghaà vä manute värtäà
     megha-çyämam acintayat

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; dhyäyanté—meditating; kåñëa-pädäbjam—on Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; kamala-locanä—lotus-eyed; mogham—in vain; vä—or; manute—thought; värtäm—the news; megha-çyämam—dark as a monsoon cloud; acintayat—thought.

     Çré Närada said: Although she thought her letter must have been fruitless, lotus-eyed Rukmiëé continued to meditate on Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet. Again and again she thought of Lord Kåñëa, who is splendid as a dark monsoon cloud.

Text 2 

çré-rukmiëy uväca 

aho tri-yämäntarito viväho
     mamaiva nägacchati kåñëacandraù
na vedmi kià käraëam atra dhätar
     nävartate 'dyäpi ca bhümi-devaù

     çré-rukmiëy uväca—Çré Rukmiëé said; ahaù—Oh; tri-yämäntaritaù—in nine hours; vivähaù—wedding; mama—my; eva—indeed; na—not; ägacchati—has come; kåñëacandraù—Kåñëa; na—not; vedmi—I know; kim—what?; käraëam—the cause; atra—here; dhätaù—O creator Brahmä; na—not; ävartate—returns; adya—today; api—even; ca—and; bhümi-devaù—the brähmaëa.

     Çré Rukmiëé said: My wedding will be in nine hours, and still Çré Kåñëacandra has not come. I don't understand. O destiny, what is the reason for this delay? The brähmaëa-messenger I sent has not returned either.

Text 3 

yadüttamo deva-varo mamaiña
     dåñövä hi kiïcit kaluñaà vidhätaù
kåtodyamo nünam atéva hasta-
     grähe na cägacchati kià karomi

     yadüttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; deva-varaù—the master of the demigods; mama—of me; eña—He; dåñövä—having seen; hi—indeed; kiïcit—something; kaluñam—impurity; vidhätaù—placed; kåta—done; udyamaù—effort; nünam—indeed; atéva—greatly; hasta—by the hand; grähe—grasped; na—not; ca—and; ägacchati—comes; kim—what?; karomi—shall I do.

     Perhaps Lord Kåñëa, the master of the demigods and the best of the Yädavas, looks at me and sees that I am sinful and impure. Perhaps that is why He has not come to take my hand.

Text 4 

hä durbhagäyäç ca na me vidhätä
     na sänukülaù kila candra-mauliù
na caika-danto vimukhä ca gauré
     gavo hi vipräç ca na sänükuläù

     hä—O; durbhagäyäç—of misfortune; ca—and; na—not; me—of me; vidhätä—Brahmä; na—not; sänukülaù—kind; kila—indeed; candra-mauliù—Lord çiva; na—not; ca—and; eka-dantaù—Gaëeça; vimukhä—averse; ca—and; gauré—Gauré; gavaù—cows; hi—indeed; vipräç—brähmaëas; ca—and; na—not; sänükuläù—kind.

     Brahmä is not kind to unfortunate me. Çiva is not kind. Gaëeça is not kind. Pärvaté is not kind. The cows and the brähmaëas are not kind to me. 

Text 5 

çré-närada uväca 

evaà vicintayanté sä
     bhaiñmé gehhäööa-bhümiñu
paribhramanté çré-kåñëaà
     paçyanti gåha-çekharät

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; vicintayanté—thinking; sä—sh; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; gehhäööa-bhümiñu—in the top of th palace; paribhramanté—walking; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; paçyanti—sees; gåha-çekharät—from the top of the room.

     Çré Närada said: As she was thinking these thoughts and pacing back and forth in a room high in the palace, Rukmiëé suddenly saw Çré Kåñëa below.

Text 6 

tadaiva tasyä vämäìgaà
     asphurat pratibhäñaëam
tena prasannä çré-bhaiñmé
     käla-jïä sarva-maìgalä

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; tasyäù—of her; vämäìgam—the left side of the body; asphurat—trembled; pratibhäñaëam—an answer; tena—by that; prasannä—pleased; çré-bhaiñmé—Çré Rukmiëé; käla-jïä—aware of auspicious times; sarva-maìgalä—all auspicious.

     At that moment the left side of her body trembled. That trembling was the reply to her questions. Aware of the nature of this good omen, all-beautiful and auspicious Çré Rukmiëé was very pleased.

Text 7 

kåñëa-praëodito vipraù
     sadyaç cägatavaàs tadä
çré-kåñëägamanaà tasyai
     çanaiù sarvaà çaçaàsa ha

     kåñëa-praëoditaù—sent by Lord Kåñëa; vipraù—the brähmaëa; sadyaç—at once; ca—and; ägatavan—arrived; tadä—then; çré-kåñëägamanam—the arrival of Çré Kåñëa; tasyai—to her; çanaiù—gradually; sarvam—all; çaçaàsa—related; ha—indeed.

     Sent by Lord Kåñëa, the brähmaëa presented himself before her and told her that Lord Kåñëa had come.

Text 8 

tataù prasannä çré-bhaiñmé
     tad-aìghryoù praëipatya sa
präha tvad-vaàçato vipra
     na yäsyämi vaco mama

     tataù—then; prasannä—happy; çré-bhaiñmé—Çré Rukmiëé; tad-aìghryoù—at his feet; pranipatya—falling; sa—she; präha—said; tvad-vaàçataù—from your family; vipra—O brähmaëa; na—not; yäsyämi—I will go; vacaù—words; mama—of me.

     Very pleased, Çré Rukmiëé fell at the brähmaëa's feet and said, "O brähmaëa, I will never leave your family. That is my promise."

     Note: Çré Rukmiëé is Çrématé Lakñmé-devé, the goddess of fortune. Here she promises that the brähmaëa's family will never be in poverty.

Text 9 

çrutvägatau räma-kåñëau
     viväha-prekñaëotsukau
bhéñmako nirgato netuà
     brähmaëais tat-prabhäva-vit

     çrutvä—hearing; ägatau—arrived; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; viväha-prekñaëotsukau—eager to see the wedding; bhéñmakaù—Bhismaka; nirgataù—left; netum—to bring; brähmaëaiù—with brähmaëas; tat-prabhäva-vit—aware of His power.

     Hearing that Kåñëa and Balaräma, eager to see the wedding, had come, King Bhéñmaka, aware of Their great power, went with many brähmaëas to greet Them.

Texts 10 and 11 

bhåçaà maìgala-pätreñu
     gandhäkñata-yuteñu ca
vaso-ratna-cayaà dhåtvä
     géta-väditra-maìgalaiù

koöiço madhu-parkänäà
     kumbha-vyuhän vidhäya ca
püjayitvätha vidhi-vad
     räma-kåñëau pareçvarau

     bhåçam—greatly; maìgala-pätreñu—with auspicious pots; gandhäkñata-yuteñu—with sweet fragrances; ca—and; vasaù—garments; ratna—jewels; cayam—multitude; dhåtvä—taking; géta-väditra-maìgalaiù—with auspicious singing and instrumental music; koöiçaù—millions; madhu-parkänäm—madhu-parka; kumbha-vyuhän—pots; vidhäya—placing; ca—and; püjayitvä—worshiping; atha—then; vidhi-vat—properly; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; pareçvarau—the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead.

     Offering many millions of maìgala-pätras, sweet fragrances, garments, jewels, and pots of madhu-parka, and accompanied by sweet singing and instrumental music, King Bhéñmaka properly worshiped Çré Kåñëa and Balaräma, the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead.

Text 12 

aho cäsmai na datteyaà
     iti khinna-manäù param
änandena vane sthäpya
     natvä sva-gåham äyayau

     ahaù—Oh; ca—and; asmai—to Him; na—not; dattä—given; iyam—her; iti—thus; khinna-manäù—unhappy at heart; param—greatly; änandena—with bliss; vane—in the forest; sthäpya—placing; natvä—bowing; sva-gåham—to his home; äyayau—returned.

     Unhappy at heart, he thought, "Alas, I did not offer her to Him!" Cheerfully giving Kåñëa and Balaräma a place to stay in the garden, He bowed down before Them and then returned to his home.

Text 13 

çrutvägataà çré-vasudeva-nandanaà
     trailokya-lävaëya-nidhià pareçvaram
ägatya neträïjalibhiù puraukasaù
     päpuù paraà tan-mukha-paìkajämåtam

     çrutvä—hearing; ägatam—come; çré-vasudeva-nandanam—Vasudeva's son; trailokya-lävaëya-nidhim—the most handsome in the three worlds; pareçvaram—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ägatya—arriving; netra—of their eyes; aïjalibhiù—with folded hands; puraukasaù—the people of the city; päpuù—drank; param—greatly; tan-mukha-paìkajämåtam—the nectar of His lotus face.

     Hearing that Vasudeva's son Çré Kåñëa, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the most handsome person in the three worlds, had arrived, with the cupped hands of their eyes the people of Kuëòina City again and again drank the nectar of His lotus face.

Text 14 

asyaiva bhäryä bhavituà hi rukmiëé
     yogyästi nänye 'tyavadan puraukasaù
dattvä sva-puëyäni viväha-hetave
     çré-kåñëa-lävaëya-kalä-nibandhakäù

     asya—of Him; evaindeed; bhäryä—the wife; bhavitum—to be; hi—indeed; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; yogyä—suitable; asti—is; na—not; anye—others; atyavadan—said; puraukasaù—the people of the city; dattvä—giving; sva-puëyäni—own pious credits; viväha-hetave—for the purpose of the wedding; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; lävaëya-kalä-nibandhakäù—entralled by Çré Kåñëa's handsomeness.

     Enthralled by Çré Kåñëa's handsomeness, the people of Kuëòina City said, "Rukmiëé should marry Kåñëa. No one be He should marry her." The people of Kuëòika City donated the pious karmas of their previous births so that Kåñëa could marry Rukmiëé.

Text 15 

kadäpi säkñäc chvaçurasya mandiraà
     samägataà caivam aho vayaà janäù
drakñyäma ärät kåta-kåtyatäà tadä
     vrajema loke bahu-jévitena kim

     kadäpi—sometime; säkñäc—directly; çvaçurasya—of the bride's father; mandiram—the palace; samägatam—come; ca—and; evam—thus; ahaù—Oh; vayam—we; janaù—people; drakñyäma—will see; ärät—from afar; kåta-kåtyatäm—the perfection fo life; tadä—then; vrajema—we will attain; loke—in this world; bahu-jévitena—with many lives; kim—what is the use?

     "We will see Lord Kåñëa when He goes to the palace of the bride's father. Then our lives will become perfect. Why should we bother to spend many lives accumulating pious deeds?"

Text 16 

vadatsu lokeñu ca bhéñma-kanyakä-
     dri-kanyakä-püjana-hetave nåpa
antaù-purät sarva-sakhé-samanvitä
     viniryayau kåñëa-gåhéta-mänasä

     vadatsu—were speaking; lokeñu—as the people; ca—and; bhéñma-kanyakä—King Bhismaka's daughter; adri-kanyakä—goddess Pärvaté; püjana—of worship; hetave—for the purpose; nåpa+O king; antaù-purät—from the inner rooms of the palace; sarva-sakhé-samanvitä—surrounded by all her friends; viniryayau—went; kåñëa—by Lorde Kåñëa; gåhéta—taken; mänasä—her heart.

     O king, as the people were speaking these words, princess Rukmiëé, her heart now captured by Lord Kåñëa, left the palace with her friends to attend the worship of goddess Pärvaté.

Text 17 

bheré-mådaìgair bahu-dundubhi-svanaiù
     su-gäyakair vandi-janaiç ca mägadhaiù
väräìganä-nåtya-manojïa-bhävair
     jayety abhün maìgala-çabda uccakaiù

     bheré-mådaìgaiù—with bheris and mrdangas; bahu-dundubhi-svanaiù—with the sounds of many dundubhis; su-gäyakaiù—with expert singers; vandi-janaiù—with rciting poets; ca—and; mägadhaiù—with magadhas; väräìganä—of dancing girls; nåtya—dancing; manojïa-bhävairwith beauty; jaya—Victory!; iti—thus; abhütwas; maìgala-çabda—auspicious sounds; uccakaiù—loud.

     As the bheré, mådaìga, and dundubhi drums sounded, the singers sang, the vandés and mägadhas recited poetry, and the dancing girls gracefully danced, there were auspicious loud calls of "Victory!"

Text 18 

koöéndu-bimba-dyutim ädadhänäà
     bälärka-täöäìka-dharäà çriyaà täm
sitätapatra-vyajanaiù sphuradbhiù
     su-cämaraiù pärçva-gaëaù siñeve

     koöéndu-bimba-dyutim—the splendor of ten million moons; ädadhänäm—taking; bälärka—the rising sun; täöäìka—earings; dharäm—wearing; çriyam—the goddess of fortune; täm—Her; sitätapatra-vyajanaiù—with fans and white parasols; sphuradbhiù—splendid; su-cämaraiù—with camaras; pärçva-gaëaù—the associates; siñeve—served.

     Holding a white parasol and waving fans and cämaras, many girls served Çré Rukmiëé, the goddess of fortune, who was splendid as ten million moons and who wore earrings splendid as the rising sun.

Text 19 

koçäd viniñkåñya çitäsi-lakñaà
     padätayo véra-janä itas tataù
tathäçva-gä vä rathino gajä-sthitäù
     samudyatästrä jugupur vidürataù

     koçät—from the armory; viniñkåñya—yaking; çitäsi-lakñam—a hundred thousand sharp swords; padätayaù—footsoldiers; véra-janä—warriors; itas tataù—here and there; tathä—so; açva—with horses; gäù—going; vä—or; rathinaù—riding chariots; gajä-sthitäù—riding elephants; samudyata—raised; asträù—weapons; jugupuù—protected; vidürataù—from afar.

     Taking a hundred thousand sharpened swords from the armory, footsoldiers stood here and there. Riding on horses, chariots, and elephants, other soldiers stood as guards with upraised weapons.

Text 20 

devi-maöhaà präpya su-catvare sthitä
     çäntä çucir dhauta-karäìghri-paìkajaù
gatvä samépaà yata-väk kåtäïjalir
     bheje bhavänéà bhava-bhéti-häriëém

     devi—of goddess Pärvaté; maöham—the temple; präpya—attaining; su-catvare—in the courtyard; sthitä—staying; çäntä—peaceful; çuciù—pure; dhauta-karäìghri-paìkajaù—her lotus hands and feet carefully washed; gatvä—going; samépam—near; yata-väk—silent; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; bheje—worshiped; bhaväném—the goddess; bhava-bhéti-häriëém—who removes fear of repeated birth and death.

     Coming to goddess Pärvaté's temple, peaceful and pure-hearted Rukmiëé washed her lotus hands and feet and, observing a vow of silence, entered the courtyard. Approaching the deity of the goddess, who removes the fear of repeated birth and death, Rukmiëé worshiped her with folded hands.

Text 21 

durge sva-saàsthäna-yute çive çubhe
     nämämi tubhyaà satataà bhaväni te
bhüyät patir me bhagavän pareçvaraù
     çré-kåñëacandraù prakåteù paraù svayam

     durge—O Durgä; sva-saàsthäna-yute—beuaitful; çive—O wife of Lord Çiva; çubhe—O auspicious one; nämämi—I offer obeisances; tubhyam—to you; satatam—always; bhaväni—O wife of Lord Çiva; te—to you; bhüyät—may be; patiù—the husband; me—of me; bhagavän—Lord; pareçvaraù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëacandraù—Çré Kåñëa; prakåteù—the material world; paraù—beyond; svayam—personally.

     She said: O Durgä, O wife of Lord Çiva, O beautiful and glorious one, I offer my respectful obeissances to you again and again. I pray that Çré Kåñëacandra, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is above the world of matter, will become my husband.

Text 22 

evaà çubhe mä vada kåñëa-näma
     caidyaà samuddiçya varaà gåhäëa
itthaà vadantéñu sakhéñu bhaiñmé
     bhüyo bhaväné-bhavane jagäda

     evam—thus; çubhe—O beautiful one; mä—don't; vada—say; kåñëa-näma—the name Kåñëa; caidyam—Sisupala; samuddiçya—in relation to; varam—husband; gåhäëa—please take; ittham—thus; vadantéñu—speaking; sakhéñu—among her friends; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; bhüyaù—greatly; bhaväné-bhavane—in the temple of Pärvaté; jagäda—spoke.

     When her friends said, "O beautiful one, don't say the word Kåñëa. You should pray that Çiçupäla will become your husband," Rukmiëé spoke in the following words in the temple of goddess Pärvaté:

Texts 23 and 24 

ajänatéyaà tava cämba bälä
     tathä vadantéñu sakhéñu bhaiñmé
gandhäkñatair dhüpa-vibhüñaëädyaiù
     sraì-mälya-dépävalé-bhoga-vastraiù

apüpa-tämbüla-phalekñubhiç ca
     bheje bhavänéà parayä ca bhaktyä
natvätha täà vä bahu-bhüñaëädyaiù
     sampüjya saubhägyavatér nanäma

     ajänaté—ignorant; iyam—thus; tava—of you; ca—and; amba—O mother Durgä; bälä—a little girl; tathä—so; vadantéñu—speaking; sakhéñu—friends; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; gandha—sweet fragrances; akñataiù—with grains; dhüpa-vibhüñaëädyaiù—with incense, ornaments, and other things; sraì-mälya—with garlands; dépävalé—lamps; bhoga-vastraiù—and delicious foods; apüpa—cakes; tämbüla—betelnuts; phala—fruits; ikñubhiù—with sugarcane; ca—and; bheje—worshiped; bhaväném—goddess Durgä; parayä—with great; ca—and; bhaktyä—devotion; natvä—bowing down; atha—then; täm—to her; vä—or; bahu-bhüñaëädyaiù—with many ornaments and other gifts; sampüjya—worshiping; saubhägyavatéù—fortunate; nanäma—bowed down.

     "O Mother Pärvaté, my friends that say this are only little girls. They do not understand the truth about you." Then with great devotion Rukmiëé worshiped goddess Pärvaté by offering her sweet fragrances, unbroken grains, incense, ornaments, garlands, necklaces, lamps, delicious foods, garments, cakes, betelnuts, fruits, sugarcane, and many other gifts. Then Rukmiëé bowed down before the fortunate brähmaëa women and worshiped them with many ornaments and other gifts.

Text 25 

sarväù striyas täù pradadur varäëi
     su-maìgaläçir-vacanäni tasyai
rüpaà sadä te çatarüpayä samaà
     çélaà sadä çailasutä-samaà prabhau

     sarväù—to all; striyaù—the women; taù—to them; pradaduù—gave; varäëi—gifts; su-maìgala—very auspicious; äçiù—blessings; vacanäni—words; tasyai—to her; rüpam—beauty; sadä—always; te—of you; çatarüpayä—to Satarupa; samam—equal; çélam—character; sadä—always; çailasutä-samam—equal to Pärvaté; prabhau—manifested.

     All the brähmaëa women reciprocated by giving gifts to Rukmiëé. They also blessed her by saying, "May you be beautiful like Çatarüpä. May you be virtuous like goddess Pärvaté.

Text 26 

suçruñäëäà bhartur arundhaté-samaà
     kñamä hi bhüyäj janakätmajä-samä
saubhägyam evaà tava dakñiëä-samaà     su-vaibhävaà bhéñma-sut/e çaci-samam 
sarasvaté te ca sarasvaté-samä 
     bhaktiù patau syäc ca satäà harau yathä

     suçruñäëäm—of the faithful; bhartuù—of the husband; arundhaté-samam—like Atundhati; kñamä—tolerant; hi—indeed; bhüyäj—may be; janakätmajä-samä—like Sétä; saubhägyam—good fortune; evam—thus; tava—of you; dakñiëä-samam—like Daksina; su-vaibhävam—glory; bhéñma-sut/e—O Rukmiëé; çaci-samam—like Saci; sarasvaté—learning; te—of you; ca—and; sarasvaté-samä—like Sarasvaté; bhaktiù—devotion; patau—to husband; syäc—may be; ca—and; satäm—of the saintly devotees; harau—for Lord Hari; yathä—as.

     "May you have a faithful husband as Arudhnati has. May you be forgiving like Sétä. May you be fortunate like Dakñiëä. May you be glorious like Çacé. May you be learned like Sarasvaté. May you be devoted to your husband as the saintly devotees are devoted to Lord Hari."
.pa

Chapter Six
Çré Rukmiëé-haraëe Yadu-vijaya
The Yädavas' Victory When Çré Rukmiëé is Kidnapped

Text 1

itthaà vipra-vadhünäà sad-
     äçérbhir abhinanditä
devéà punar vipra-vadhüù
     praëanäma muhur muhuù

     ittham—thus; vipra-vadhünäm—of the brähmaëa women; sad-äçérbhiù—wil blessings; abhinanditä—blessed; devém—to the goddess; punaù—again; vipra-vadhüù—the brähmaëa women; praëanäma—bowed down; muhuù—again; muhuù—and again.

     Blessed in this way by the brähmaëa women, Rukmiëé again and again bowed down before them and before goddess Pärvaté.

Text 2 

tyaktvä muni-vrataà bhaiñmé
     girijä-gåhatas tataù
sahalébhiù sakhébhiç ca
     niçcakräma çanaiù çanaiù

     tyaktvä—abandoning; muni-vratam—the vow of silence; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; girijä-gåhataù—from the temple of Pärvaté; tataù—then; sahalébhiù—with her friends; sakhébhiç—friends; ca—and; niçcakräma—went; çanaiù çanaiù—gradually.

     Now abandoning her vow of silence, in the company of her friends Rukmiëé left Pärvaté's temple, walking with exaggerated slowness.

Text 3 

koöi-candra-pratékäçäà
     bhaiñméà kamala-locanäm
akasmäd dadåçur véräù
     su-nidhià nirdhanä yathä

     koöi—millions; candra—of moons; pratékäçäm—splendor; bhaiñmém—Rukmiëé; kamala-locanäm—lotus-eyed; akasmät—suddenly; dadåçuù—saw; véräù—soldiers; su-nidhim—a great treasure; nirdhanä—overty-stricken beggars; yathä—as.

     As poverty-stricken beggars stare at a priceless treasure, so the host of soldiers stared at lotus-eyed Rukmiëé, who was glorious as millions of moons.

Text 4 

äçvärühaç ca rathino
     gajinaç ca padätayaù
samägatä rakñiëas te
     mumuhur vékñya rukmiëém

     äçvärühaù—riding on horses; ca—and; rathinaù—riding on chariots; gajinaù—riding on elephants; ca—and; padätayaù—footsoldiers; samägatä—arrived; rakñiëaù—guards; te—they; mumuhuù—became bewildered; vékñya—staring; rukmiëém—at Rukmiëé.

     Riding on horses, chariots, and elephants, and some walking on foot, many guards came, stared at Rukmiëé, and became bewildered with desire.

Text 5 

tad-apaìga-smitais tékñëair
     bäëaiù käma-dhanuç-cyutaiù
ujjhitästrä nipetuù käv
     arditäù sainikäs tadä

     tad-apaìga-smitaiù—with smiling glances; tékñëaiù—sharp; bäëaiù—with arrows; käma-dhanuç-cyutaiù—shot from Käma's bow; ujjhita—dropped; asträù—weapons; nipetuù—fell; kau—to the ground; arditäù—overcome; sainikäù—soldiers; tadä—then.

     Wounded by the sharp Käma's arrows of her smiling eyes, the soldiers dropped their weapons and fell to the gound.

Texts 6-8 

rathena väyu-vegena
     ghaëöä-maïjéra-nädinä
naiùçreya-sambhavair açvair
     yutenäti-patäkinä

çéghraà sva-sainya-saìghaööät
     tat-sainyaà samvidärayät
väyur yathä padma-vanaà
     harir däruka-särathiù

stré-kadambakam etyäçu
     paçyatäà dviñatäà prabhuù
samäropya rathaà bhaiñméà
     tärkñya-putraù sudhäm iva

     rathena—by a chariot; väyu-vegena—fast as the wind; ghaëöä-maïjéra-nädinä—with the tinkling of bells and ornaments; naiùçreya-sambhavaiù—with the best; açvaiù—horses; yutena—with; ati-patäkinä—with a glorious flag; çéghram—quickly; sva-sainya-saìghaööät—from His own army; tat-sainyam—that army; samvidärayät—cut; väyuù—the wind; yathä—like; padma-vanam—a forestb of lotuses; hariù—Kåñëa; däruka—Däruka; särathiù—His charioteer; stré-kadambakam—the women; etya—approaching; äçu—quickly; paçyatäm—looking; dviñatäm—the enemies; prabhuù—the Lord; samäropya—placing; ratham—on the chariot; bhaiñmém—Rukmiëé; tärkñya-putraù—Garuòa; sudhäm—nectar; iva—like.

     Riding on a chariot fast as the wind, a chariot decorated with a glorious flag and tinkling bells and ornaments, pulled by the best of horses, and driven by Däruka, Lord Kåñëa left His army, cut apart the opposing army, and raced to the cluster of women as a wind enters a lotus forest. As His enemies looked on, He placed Rukmiëé on His chariot as Garuòa would gather up a flood of nectar.

Text 9 

devänäà paçyatäà räjan
     räja-kanyäà jahära ha
divyaà çastrottamaà çärìgaà
     dhanuñ öaìkärayan muhuù

     devänäm—as the demigods; paçyatäm—looked on; räjan—O king; räja-kanyäm—the princess; jahära—kidnapped; ha—indeed; divyam—splendid; çastrottamam—the best of weapons; çärìgam—the Särìga; dhanuù—bow; öaìkärayan—twanging; muhuù—again and again.

     O king, again and again Lord Kåñëa twanged His Çärìga bow, the best of weapons, and, as the demigods looked on, kidnapped beautiful Princess Rukmiëé.

Text 10 

tato vegena mahatä
     sva-sainyaà cägate harau
deva-dundubhayo nedur
     yadu-dundubhayas tadä

     tataù—then; vegena—with speed; mahatä—great; sva-sainyam—to His own army; ca—and; ägate—arrived; harau—Kåñëa; deva-dundubhayaù—the drums of the demigods; neduù—sounded; yadu-dundubhayaù—the drums of the Yädavas; tadä—then.

     When Kåñëa quickly returned to His own army, the demigods and the Yädavas sounded drums of victory.

Text 11 

siddhäç ca siddha-kanyäç ca
     çré-kåñëasya rathopari
harñitä vavåñur deväù
     puñpair nandana-sambhavaiù

     siddhäù—the siddhas; ca—and; siddha-kanyäç—the siddhas' daughters; ca—and; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; rathopari—on the chariot; harñitä—happy; vavåñuù—showered; deväù—the demigods; puñpaiù—flowers; nandana-sambhavaiù—from the Nandana gardens.

     Filled with happiness, the demigods, siddhas, and the siddhas' young daughters showered on Lord Kåñëa's chariot flowers from the Nandana gardens.

Text 12 

tato yayau jayärävaiù
     çanai räma-yuto hariù
çågäla-saìgha-madhyäc ca
     kesaré bhäga-håd yathä

     tataù—then; yayau—went; jayärävaiù—with calls pf "Victory!"; çanai—slowly; räma-yutaù—with Balaräma; hariù—Kåñëa; çågäla—of jackals; saìgha—of a pack; madhyät—from the middle; ca—and; kesaré—a lion; bhäga-håt—taking the prize; yathä—as.

     As a lion takes a prize from a pack of jackals, so Lord Kåñëa took Rukmiëé. As Kåñëa, Balaräma by His side, slowly proceeded, a great cry of "Victory!" arose.

Text 13 

tadä kolähale jäte
     rukmiëé-haraëe sati
babhüva rakñakänäà ca
     çasträçastri parasparam

     tadä—then; kolähale—a great uproar; jäte—manifested; rukmiëé-haraëe—in the kidnappin gof Rukmiëé; sati—being so; babhüva—was; rakñakänäm—of the guards; ca-—and; çasträçastri—weapon against weapon; parasparam—each other.

     When Rukmiëé was kidnapped there was a great uproar, many soldiers fighting each other, weapon pitted against weapon.

Text 14 

jaräsandha-vaçäù sarve
     mänino nåpa-sattamäù
na sehire sväbhibhavaà
     paraà jätaà yaçaù-kñayam

     jaräsandha-vaçäù—the vassals of Jarasandha; sarve—all; mäninaù—proud; nåpa-sattamäù—great kings; na—not; sehire—tolerated; sväbhibhavam—their own defeat; param—great; jätam—manifested; yaçaù-kñayam—the loss of their fame.

     The arrogant kings, all of them vassals of Jaräsandha, could not tolerate their ignominious defeat in this way.

Text 15 

aho dhig asmän sva-yaço
     håtaà gopaiç ca dhanvinäm
çågälair iva siàhänäà
     ataù kià syät paräjayaù

     ahaù—ah; dhig—fie; asmän—on them; sva-yaçaù—their honor; håtam—removed; gopaiç—by gopas; ca—and; dhanvinäm—bowmen; çågälaiù—by jackals; iva—like; siàhänäm—of lions; ataù—then; kim—what?; syät—is; paräjayaù—defeat.

     "As jackals defeating a host of lions, these cowherd men have robbed the honor of us noble bowmen!"

Text 16 

evam uktvä krodha-parä
     jagåhuù çastra-saàhatim
visåjya kréòaëäkñädén
     daàçitäù sainya-samyutäù

     evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; krodha-parä—angry; jagåhuù—took; çastra-saàhatim—a host of wepaons; visåjya—abandoning; kréòaëäkñädén—games of dice and other diversions; daàçitäù—bitten; sainya-samyutäù—with their armies.

     Speaking these words as they threw down their dice games and other diversions, the angry kings, their pride bitten, assembled their armies and took up a host of weapons.

Texts 17-19 

akñauhiëé-dvayenäpi
     pauëòrakaù krodha-püritaù
akñauhiëé-trayeëäpi
     mahä-véro vidürathaù

akñauhiëé-païca-yuto
     dantavakro 'ti-däruëaù
akñauhiëé-trayeëäçu
     çälvo räja-pureçvaraù

akñauhiëébhir daçabhir
     jaräsandho mahä-balaù
äyayau sammukhe yoddhuà
     yädavänäà mahätmanäm

     akñauhiëé-dvayena—with two Akñauhiëés; api—also; pauëòrakaù—Paundraka; krodha-püritaù—filled with anger; akñauhiëé-trayeëa—with three Akñauhiëés; api—also; mahä-véraù—heroic; vidürathaù—Viduratha; akñauhiëé-païca-yutaù—with fiveAkñauhiëés; dantavakraù—Dantavakjra; ati-däruëaù—ferocious; akñauhiëé-trayeëa—with three Akñauhiëés; äçu—quickly; çälvaù—Salva; räja-pureçvaraù—the king of the kings of the kings; akñauhiëébhiù—with Akñauhiëés; daçabhiù—ten; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; mahä-balaù—very powerful; äyayau—came; sammukhe—in the presence; yoddhum—to fight; yädavänäm—of the Yädavas; mahätmanäm—noble-hearted.

     Then Pauëòraka, filled with anger and leading two Akñauhiëés, heroic Vidüratha with three Akñauhiëés, ferocious Dantavakra with five Akñauhiëés, the great king Çälva with three Akñauhiëés, and very powerful Jaräsandha with ten Akñauhiëés, all yearning for a fight, came before the noble-hearted Yädavas. 

Text 20 

anye 'pi caidya-pakñéyä
     yoddhuà çré-kåñëa-sammukhe
dhanuñ öaìkärayantas te
     samäjagmuù sahasraçaù

     anye—others; api—also; caidya-pakñéyä—the allies of Sisupala; yoddhum—to fight; çré-kåñëa-sammukhe—in the presence of Çré Kåñëa; dhanuù—bows; öaìkärayantaù—twanging; te—they; samäjagmuù—came; sahasraçaù—by the thousands.

     Thousands of others, the allies of Çisupäla, also came, twanging their bows, to fight with Kåñëa.

Text 21 

pralayäbdhi-samaà sainyaà
     samälokya yaduttamäù
tartum äjagmur ärät te
     kåñëa-kaivarta-potakäù

     pralaya—of devastation; abdhi—the ocean; samam—like; sainyam—army; samälokya—seeing; yaduttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; tartum—to cross; äjagmuù—came; ärät—near; te—they; kåñëa-kaivarta-potakäù—they who have Kåñëa as their captain.

     Seeing this army like a great ocean of devastation, the Yädavas, led by Kåñëa, approached it in order to cross beyond it.

Text 22 

babhüva tumulaà yuddhaà
     adbhutaà roma-harñaëam
sainyayoç ca sva-purayor
     deva-dänavayor yathä

     babhüva—was; tumulam—tumult; yuddham—battle; adbhutam—wonderful; roma-harñaëam—making the hairs stand erect; sainyayoù—of the two armies; ca—and; sva-purayoù—of their cities; deva-dänavayoù—of the demigods and the demons; yathä—as.

     As the demigods and the demons fight, so the two armies fought an amazing battle that made one's hairs stand erect.

Text 23 

rathino rathibhis tatra
     pattibhiù saha pattayaù
gajä gajair yuyudhire
     turagäç ca turaìgamaiù

     rathinaù—chariot warriors; rathibhiù—with chariot warriors; tatra—there; pattibhiù—footsoldiers; saha—with; pattayaù—footsoldiers; gajä—elephants; gajaiù—with elephants; yuyudhire—fought; turagäç—cavalry; ca—and; turaìgamaiù—with cavalry.

     Chariot warriors fought with chariot warriors, footsoldiers with footsoldiers, elephants with elephants, and cavalry with cavalry.

Text 24 

asträndhakäre saïjäte
     rukmiëéà bhaya-vihvalam
vilokya bhagavän devo
     mä bhaiñöety abhayaà dadau

     astra—of weapons; andhakäre—in the blinding darkness; saïjäte—manifested; rukmiëém—to Rukmiëé; bhaya-vihvalam—filled with fear; vilokya—seeing; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devaù—the Lord; mä—don't; bhaiñöa—fear; iti—-thus; abhayam—fearlessness; dadau—gave.

     Seeing that Rukmiëé was frightened by the blinding darkness created by the many weapons, Lord Kåñëa said, "Don't be afraid", and took away all her fears.

Text 25 

baladevänujo véro
     gado dhunvan mahad-dhanuù
viveça çatru-saìghaööaà
     vanaà vahnir iva prabhuù

     baladevänujaù—the younger brother of  Balaräma; véraù—hero; gadaù—Gada; dhunvan—shaking; mahad-dhanuù—a great bow; viveça—entered; çatru—of the enemies; saìghaööam—the host; vanam—a forest; vahniù—a fire; iva—like; prabhuù—powerful.

     Shaking his bow, Balaräma's heroic younger brother Gada entered among the enemies as a fire enters a forest.

Text 26 

gada-bäëa-vibhinnäìgä
     rathi-niçchinna-kaïcukäù
hatäçvä hata-sütäç ca
     nipetur bhümi-maëòale

     gada—of Gada; bäëa—by the arrows; vibhinna—broken; aìgäù—limbs; rathi—of the cariot warriors; niçchinna—broken; kaïcukäù—armor; hata—killed; açväù—horses; hata—killed; sütäù—charioteer; ca—and; nipetuù—fell; bhümi-maëòale—to the circle of the earth.

     Their armor and limbs pierced by Gada's arrows, and their charioteers and horses killed, many chariot warriors fell to the ground.

Text 27 

padätayaç chinna-padä
     gadä-bäëägata-vyathäù
nipetur bhü-tale räjan
     våkñä väta-hatä iva

     padätayaù—footsoldiers; chinna-padä—their feet broken; gadä-bäëägata-vyathäù—wounded by Gada's arrows; nipetuù—fell; bhü-tale—to the ground; räjan—O king; våkñä—trees; väta-hatä—pushed down by a wind; iva—like.

     Struck by Gada's arrows, many footsoldiers fell to the ground like trees struck by a great wind.

Text 28 

açvärüòhäù ke 'pi véräù
     gada-bäëair vidäritäù
petü raëäìgane säçvä
     båhaté-phalavän nåpa

     açvärüòhäù—cavalry; ke 'pi—some; véräù—heroic; gada-bäëaiù—by Gada's arrows; vidäritäù—struck; petü—fell; raëäìgane—on the battlefield; säçvä—with their horses; båhaté-phalavan—like brhati fruits; nåpa—O king.

     Struck by Gada's arrows, many cavalrymen fell to the battleground like båhaté fruits.

Text 29 

gada-bäëair bhinna-kumbhä
     madhye madhye vidäritäù
virejuù patitä bhümau
     küñmäëòa-sakalä iva

     gada-bäëaiù—by Gada's arrows; bhinna—broken; kumbhäù—elephants' heads; madhye—in the midst; madhye—in the midst; vidäritäù—severed; virejuù—were manifested; patitä—fallen; bhümau—to the ground; küñmäëòa-sakalä—great gourds; iva—like.

     Severed by Gada's arrows, many elephant heads fell to the ground like great gourds.

Text 30 

tataù paläyitaà sainyaà
     dåñövä çälvo mahä-balaù
gadaà tatäòa gadayä
     gadä-yuddha-viçäradaù

     tataù-then; paläyitam—fleeing; sainyam—the army; dåñövä—seeing; çälvaù—Salva; mahä-balaù—powerful; gadam—Gada; tatäòa—hit; gadayä—with a club; gadä-yuddha-viçäradaù—expert at club fighting.

     Noticing that his army had fled, powerful Çälva, who was expert at fighting with clubs, with a club attacked Gada. 

Text 31 

gadä-viddho gato dhanvé
     gadä-yuddha-prabhäva-vit
dhanur-yuddhaà tu santyajya
     tat-kälän manasä tvaram

     gadä—by the club; viddhaù—struck; gataù—gone; dhanvé—bowman; gadä—of club; yuddha—fighting; prabhäva—power; vit——knowing; dhanuù—with bow; yuddham—fighting; tu—indeed; santyajya—abandoning; tat-kälät—from that time; manasä—with thinking; tvaram—at once.

     Struck by the club, and aware of Çälva skill in club-fighting, Gada quickly put down His bow.

Text 32 

paräà vyathäà gato yuddhe
     patito 'pi samutthitaù
tadägrajena yä dattä
     täà gadäà tu gado 'grahét

     paräàgreat; vyathäm—agitation; gataù—attained; yuddhe—in the fight; patitaù—fallen; api—although; samutthitaù—risen; tadä—then; agrajena—by his elder brother; yä—which; dattä—was given; täm—that; gadäm—club; tu—indeed; gadaù—Gada; agrahét—grasped.

     Fallen to the ground, agitated Gada stood up and took a club that was a gift from his elder brother Balaräma.

Text 33 

lakña-bhära-mayé gurvé
     dåòhä kaumodaké yathä
tayä gado 'hanac chälvaà
     vajreëendro yathä girim

     lakña-bhära-mayé—a hundred thousand bharas; gurvé—heavy; dåòhä—firm; kaumodaké—Kaumodaki; yathä—as; tayä—by that; gadaù—Gada; ahanat—struck; çälvam—Salva; vajreëa—with a thunderbolt; indraù—Indra; yathä—as; girim—a mountain.

     With that club, heavy as a hundred thousand bhäras and strong as Kåñëa's club Kaumodaké, Gada struck Çälva as with his thunderbolt Indra strikes a mountain.

Texts 34-36 

gadä-prahära-mathito
     çälve nipatite bhuvi
pauëòrako 'tha jaräsandho
     dantavakro vidürathaù

catvara äyayus tatra
     gadopari ruñänvitäù
pauëòrako 'pi mahä-véro
     gadasya ratha-gaà dhvajam

viccheda daçabhir bäëaiù
     ku-väkyair mitratäm iva
dantavakras tu gadayä
     gadasyäpi rathaà çubham 
cürëayäm äsa räjendra 
     daëòeneva sa-måd-ghaöam

     gadä—of the club; prahära—by the blow; mathitaù—agitated; çälve—Salva; nipatite—fallen; bhuvi—to the ground; pauëòrakaù—Paundraka; atha—then; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; dantavakraù—Dantavakra; vidürathaù—Viduratha; catvara—four; äyayuù—came; tatra—there; gadopari—arouind Gada; ruñänvitäù—angry; pauëòrakaù—Paundraka; api—even; mahä-véraù—the great warrior; gadasya—of Gada; ratha-gam—on the chariot; dhvajam—the flag; viccheda—cut; daçabhiù—with ten; bäëaiù—arrows; ku-väkyaiù—with harsh words; mitratäm—friendship; iva—like; dantavakraù—Dantavakra; tu—indeed; gadayä—with a club; gadasya—of Gada; api—also; ratham—the chariot; çubham—beautiful; cürëayäm äsa—broke to pieces; räjendra—O king of kings; daëòena—with a stick; iva—like; sa-måd-ghaöam—a clay pot.

     Struck by the club, Çälva fell to the ground. Then Pauëòraka, Jaräsandha, Dantavakra, and Vidüratha angrily surrounded Gada. With ten arrows the great warrior Pauëòraka cut down Gada's flag, as with harsh words one cuts down a friendship. Then, with his club Dantavakra broke Gada's chariot into pieces as with a great stick one breaks a clay pot.

Text 37 

tathäsväàç ca jaräsandhaù
     särathià ca vidürathaù
pätayäm äsa bhü-påñöhe
     çitair bäëair videha-räö

     tathä—so; asvän—the horses; ca—and; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; särathim—the charioteer; ca—and; vidürathaù—Viduratha; pätayäm äsa—threw down; bhü-påñöhe—to the ground; çitaiù—with sharp; bäëaiù—arrows; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, with sharp arrows Jaräsandha made the horses fall to the ground and Vidüratha made the charioteer fall.

Text 38 

tato musalam ädäya
     baladevas tvaran balé
vikaräle mukhe bhéme
     dantavakram atäòayat

     tataù—then; musalam—a club; ädäya—taking; baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; tvaran—hurrying; bali—powerful; vikaräle—terrible; mukhe—mouth; bhéme—ferocious; dantavakram—Dantavakra; atäòayat—struck.

     Then, picking up His own club, Lord Balaräma hurried there and struck Dantavakra in his gruesome mouth.

Text 39 

tato musala-ghäöena
     dantavakrasya yudhyataù
mukhe cakre 'pi yo dantaù
     sa tu bhümau papäta ha

     tataù—then; musala—of the club; ghäöena—by the blow; dantavakrasya—of Dantavakra; yudhyataù—fighting; mukhe—in the mouth; cakre—did; api—also; yaù—who; dantaù—teeth; sa—that; tu—indeed; bhümau—to the ground; papäta—fell; ha—indeed.

     With that blow from Lord Balaräma's club, a tooth suddenly fell from the warrior Dantavakra's mouth.

Texts 40 and 41

tadä hasati daityärau
     rukmiëé-sahite harau
pauëòrakaà ca jaräsandhaà
     tathä duñöaà vidüratham

jaghäna musalenäçu
     baladevo ruñänvitaù
trayo 'pi patitä yuddhe
     murchitäù kñatajäplutäù

     tadä—then; hasati—as He laughed; daityärau—the enemy of the demons; rukmiëé-sahite—with Rukmiëé; harau—Kåñëa; pauëòrakam—Paundraka; ca—and; jaräsandham—Jarasandha; tathä—then; duñöam—wicked; vidüratham—Viduratha; jaghäna—struck; musalena—with His club; äçu—at once; baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; ruñänvitaù—angry; trayaù—the three; api—also; patitä—fallen; yuddhe—in the fight; murchitäù—fainted; kñataja—with blood; äplutäù—drowned.

     Then, as Rukmiëé and the demons' enemy Kåñëa laughed, with His club angry Balaräma struck Pauëòraka, Jaräsandha, and Vidüratha, making them fall unconscious, bathed in their own blood.

Text 42 

senäà samägatäà sarväà
     samäkåñya halena vai
musalenähanat kruddho
     baladevo mahä-balaù

     senäm—the army; samägatäm—come; sarväm—all; samäkåñya—dragging; halena—with His plow; vai—indeed; musalena—with His club; ahanat—struck; kruddhaù—angry; baladevaù—Balaräma; mahä-balaù—very powerful.

     When the demons' army came, angry Lord Balaräma dragged it with His plow and pounded it with His club.

Text 43 

daça-yojana-paryantaà
     rathebhäçva-padätayaù
peñitäç cürëitä bhümau
     çayänä dharaëéà gatäù

     daça-yojana-paryantam—for eighty miles; rathebhäçva-padätayaù—footsoldier, cavalry, and chariot warriors; peñitäù—broken to pieces; cürëitä—crushed; bhümau—on the ground; çayänä—lying; dharaëém—to the ground; gatäù—gone.

     For eighty miles the ground was littered with the broken and crushed remains of footsoldiers, cavalry, and chariot warriors.

Text 44 

jaräsandhädayaù sarve
     måtyu-çeñä nåpäù pare
paläyitäç caidyam etya
     procur nañöotsavaà bhåçam

     jaräsandhädayaù—beginning with Jarasandha; sarve—all; måtyu-çeñä—still alive; nåpäù—kings; pare—others; paläyitäç—fleeing; caidyam—to Sisupala; etya—going; procuù—said; nañöa—destroyed; utsavam—the festival; bhåçam—greatly.

     Jaräsandha and the other kings that had somehow escaped death fled the battle, ran to Çiçupäla, whose wedding festival was now completely in ruins, and said to him:

Text 45 

bho bhoù puruña-çärdüla
     daurmanasyam idaà tyaja
kim ekena vivähena
     bhavitä te çataà bhuvi

     bhaù—O; bhoù—O; puruña-çärdüla—tiger among men; daurmanasyam—despondentcy; idam—this; tyaja—abandon; kim—what is the need?; ekena—with one; vivähena—marriage; bhavitä—will be; te—of you; çatam—a hundred; bhuvi—on this earth.

     O tiger among men, don't be unhappy. How important is this one marriage? You will marry a hundred times in this world.

Text 46 

adyaiva dvärakäà gatvä
     baddhvä rämaà sa-mädhavam
ayädavéà kariñyämaù
     påthvéà sägara-mekhaläm

     adya—now; eva—certainly; dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; gatvä—having gone; baddhvä—having bound; rämam—Balaräma; sa-mädhavam—with Kåñëa; ayädavém—without any Yädavas; kariñyämaù—I will make; påthvém—the earth; sägara—the ocean; mekhaläm—a belt.

     We will go to Dvärakä, imprison Kåñëa and Balaräma, and make this earth, which wears its oceans like a belt, into a place where not a single Yädava lives upon it.

Text 47 

evaà sambodhito mitrais
     caidyo 'gäc candrikä-puram
yayuù svaà svaà puraà sarve
     hata-çeñä nåpäs tataù

     evam—thus; sambodhitaù—informed; mitraiù—by friends; caidyaù—Sisupala; agät—went; candrikä-puram—to Candrika-pura; yayuù—went; svaà svam—to their own; puram—cities; sarve—all; hata-çeñä—who had not been killed; nåpäù—the kings; tataù—then.

     After hearing these words, Çiçupäla returned to Candrikä-pura, and each of the kings that escaped death returned to his own city.
.pa

Chapter Seven
Çré Rukmiëé-viväha
The Marriage of Çré Rukmiëé

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

rukmiëyä haraëaà çrutvä
     miträëäà ca paräbhavam
pratijïäm akarod rukmé
     çåëvataà sarva-bhubhujäm

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rukmiëyä—of Rukmiëé; haraëam—the kidnapping; çrutvä—hearing; miträëäm—of friends; ca—and; paräbhavam—the defeat; pratijïäm—a vow; akarot—did; rukmé—Rukmi; çåëvatäm—hearing; sarva-bhubhujäm—of all the kings.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing that Rukmiëé was kidnapped and his friends were all defeated, Rukmé, as all the kings listened, spoke the following vow:

Text 2 

ahatvä samare kåñëaà
     apratyüha ca rukmiëém
kuëòinaà na pravekñyämi
     satyam etad bravémi vaù

     ahatvä—not having killed; samare—in battle; kåñëam—Kåñëa; apratyüha—not bringing; ca—and; rukmiëém—Rukmiëé; kuëòinam—to Kundina; na—not; pravekñyämi—I will enter; satyam—the truth; etat—this; bravémi—I speak; vaù—to you.

     If I do not kill Kåñëa and return with Rukmiëé, then I will never again enter the city of Kuëòina. I speak to you the truth.

Text 3 

ity uktvä kavacaà divyaà
     ghanam arbuda-nirmitam
çiras-träëaà sindhujaà ca
     sa dadhära mahodbhaöaù

     ity—thusd; uktvä—speaking; kavacam—armor; divyam—splendid; ghanam—thick; arbuda-nirmitam—made on Mount Arbuda; çiras-träëam—helmet; sindhujam—made by the ocean's shore; ca—and; sa—he; dadhära—took; mahodbhaöaù—the great warrior.

     After speaking these words, the great warrior Rukmé dressed himself in thick armor made on Mount Arbuda and a great helmet made by the ocean's shore.

Text 4 

sauvérasya dhanuù çäli-
     läöajaà ceñudhi-dvayam
ädäya mleccha-deçasya
     khaògaà carma ca kauöajam

     sauvérasya—of Sauvira-deça; dhanuù—a bow; çäliläöajam—made in Salilata-desa; ceñudhi-dvayam—two quivers; ädäya—taking; mleccha-deçasya—of Mleccha-desa; khaògam—a sword; carma—shield; ca—and; kauöajam—made in Kauta.

     Then he took a bow made in the country of Sauvéra, two quivers made in the country of Çäliläöa, a bow made in the country of the mlecchas, a shield made in the country of Kauöa, . . .

Text 5 

peöharasya mahä-çaktià
     gurjaräöa-bhaväà gadäm
parighaà baìga-jaà dhåtvä
     hasta-träëaà ca kauìkanam

     peöharasya—of Pethara; mahä-çaktim—a great sakti; gurjaräöa-bhaväm—made in Gujarat; gadäm—a club; parigham—a parigha; baìga-jam—made in Bengal; dhåtvä—taking; hasta-träëam—gloves; ca—and; kauìkanam—made in Konkana.

 . . . a great çakti weapon made in the country of Peöhara, a club made in the country of Gujarat, a parigha weapon made in the country of Bengal, and gloves made in the country of Koìkana.

Text 6 

baddha-godhäìguli-träëaù
     kiréöé ratna-kuëòalaù
rukmäìgadas tadä rukmé
     yuddhaà kartuà mano dadhe

     baddha-godhäìguli-träëaù—wearing finger-protectors; kiréöé—wearing a helmet; ratna-kuëòalaù—wearing jewel earings; rukmäìgadaù—wearing gold armlets; tadä—then; rukmé—Ruikmi; yuddham—a fight; kartum—to do; manaù—his mind; dadhe—fixed.

     Wearing finger protectors, a helmet, jewel earrings, and golden armlets, Rukmé fixed his heart on a fight.

Text 7 

jaitraà rathaà samäruhya
     caïcaläçva-niyojitam
påñöhato 'nvagamat kåñëaà
     karñann akñauhiëé-dvayam

     jaitram—victory; ratham—chariot; samäruhya—mounting; caïcala—restless; açva—with horses; niyojitam—yoked; påñöhataù—from behind; anvagamat—followed; kåñëam—Kåñëa; karñann—taking; akñauhiëé-dvayam—two aksauhinis.

     Mounting his victory chariot yoked with restless horses, and taking with him two akñaukiëé armies, Rukmé pursued Kåñëa.

Text 8 

punaù samägataà dåñövä
     senäà rämo mahä-balaù
tayä yuyodha samare
     yadu-senä-samanvitaù

     punaù—again; samägatam—come; dåñövä—seeing; senäm—the army; rämaù—Balaräma; mahä-balaù—very powerful; tayä—with it; yuyodha—fought; samare—in thebattle; yadu-senä-samanvitaù—with the Yädavas' army.

     Seeing that another army had come, powerful Lord Balaräma led the Yädavas' army in the fight.

Text 9 

tiñöha tiñöheti deveçaà
     visåjan paruñaà vacaù
sampräpnoti rathaà rukmé
     dhanuñ öaìkärayan muhuù

     tiñöha—stop; tiñöha—stop; iti—thus; deveçam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; visåjan—creating; paruñam—harsh; vacaù—words; sampräpnoti—attains; ratham—the chariot; rukmé—Rukmi; dhanuñ—his bow; öaìkärayan—twanging; muhuù—again and again.

     Harshly calling out, "Stop! Stop!", and repeatedly twanging his bow, Rukmé caught up with Lord Kåñëa's chariot.

Text 10 

tvaraà muïca svasäraà me
     yadi jévitum icchasi
na cet tväà sa-balaà sadyo
     nayämi yama-sädanam

     tvaram—at once; muïca—release; svasäram—sister; me—my; yadi—if; jévitum—to live; icchasi—You wish; na—not; cet—if; tväm—You; sa-balam—with Balaräma; sadyaù—at once; nayämi—I will take; yama—of Yamaräja; sädanam—to the house.

     Rukmé said: If You wish to live, then release my sister at once. If You don't release her, I will carry You and Balaräma into the house of death.

Text 11 

yayäti-çäpa-sambhrañöo
     gopälocchiñöa-bhug bhavän
jaräsandha-bhayäd bhéto
     yavanägrät paläyitaù

     yayäti—of King Yayati; çäpa—by the curse; sambhrañöaù—ruined; gopäla—of cowherd people; ucchiñöa—the remnants; bhuk—eating; bhavän—You; jaräsandha-bhayät—out of fear of Jarasandha; bhétaù—frightened; yavana—of a yavana; agrät—from the presence; paläyitaù—fled.

     Cursed by King Yayäti, You were forced to eat the remnants of food left by cowherd people. You were terrified of Jaräsandha. You fled from the king of the Yavanas.

Text 12 

ity uktveñudhitaù kåñya
     bäëaà cäpe nidhäya ca
niyamya karëa-paryantaà
     nijaghäna harer hådi

     ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; iñudhitaù—from His quiver; kåñya—drawing; bäëam—an arrow; cäpe—on His bow; nidhäya—placing; ca—and; niyamya—drawing; karëa-paryantam—to His ear; nijaghäna—hit; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; hådi—in the chest.

     After speaking thse words, Rukmé pulled an arrow from his quiver, placed it in his bow, drew it to his ear, and shot Lord Kåñëa in the chest.

Text 13 

santoòito 'pi bhagavän
     dhanur-jyäà tasya nädiném
ciccheda säyakenäçu
     garuòaù pannagéà yathä

     santoòitaù—hit; api—even though; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dhanur-jyäm—the bowstring; tasya—of him; nädiném—sounding; ciccheda—cut; säyakena—with an arrow; äçu—at once; garuòaù—Garuòa; pannagém—a snake; yathä—as.

     Although wounded by the arrow, Lord Kåñëa at once shot an arrow that cut Rukmé's twanging bowstring as Garuòa cuts a great snake.

Text 14 

nidhäya çéghraà kodaëòaà
     çiïjinéà svarëa-bhüñitäm
rukmé tu daçabhir bäëaiù
     saïjaghäna harià raëe

     nidhäya—placing; çéghram—quickly; kodaëòam—a bow; çiïjiném—bowstring; svarëa—with gold; bhüñitäm—decorated; rukmé—Rukmi; tu—indeed; daçabhiù—with ten; bäëaiù—arrows; saïjaghäna—hit; harim—Lord Kåñëa; raëe—in the battle.

     Quickly taking up a bow with a golden bowstring, Rukmé shot ten arrows at Lord Kåñëa. 

Text 15 

harir ekena bäneëa
     çiïjiné-sahitaà dhanuù
ciccheda rukmiëaù sadyo
     jïäneneväguëämayam

     hariù—Lord Kåñëa; ekena—with a single; bäneëa—arrow; çiïjiné-sahitam—with the bowstring; dhanuù—the bow; ciccheda—cut; rukmiëaù—of Rukmi; sadyaù—at once; jïänena—with knowledge; iva—like; aguëämayam—what has no virtue.

     Then with a single arrow Lord Kåñëa cut Rukmé's bow and bowstring in two as with knowledge one cuts the darkness of repeated birth and death.

Text 16 

kåñëo 'moghena bäëena
     madhyatas taà dvidhäkarot
rukméà punaù çatair bäëaiù
     santatäòa mådhe hariù

     kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; amoghena—infallible; bäëena—with an arrow; madhyataù—in the middle; tam—that; dvidhä—in two; akarot—made; rukmém—to Rukmé; punaù—again; çataiù—with a hundred; bäëaiù—arrows; santatäòa—hit; mådhe—in the fight; hariù—Kåñëa.

     With a single arrow Lord Kåñëa cut the middle of Rukmé's bow in two parts, and then shot at him a hundred arrows. 

Text 17 

chinna-dhanvätha vaidarbho
     mahä-çaktià sphurat-prabham
praharad dharaye çaktià
     vijïänäya yathä muniù

     chinna—broken; dhanvä—bow; atha—then; vaidarbhaù—Rukmi; mahä-çaktim—a great sakti weapon; sphurat-prabham—glittering; praharat—threw; dharaye—at Lord Kåñëa; çaktim—power; vijïänäya—for knowledge; yathä—as; muniù—a sage.

     His bow broken, Rukmé hurled a glittering çakti weapon at Lord Kåñëa as a sage uses the power of his austerities to attain transcendental knowledge.

Text 18 

tatäòa gadayä taà vai
     gadädhäré gadägrajaù
dvidhäbhütä mahä-çakté
     rukmeù sütaà jaghäna ha

     tatäòa—struck; gadayä—with His club; tam—that; vai—indeed; gadädhäré—holding a club; gadägrajaù—the elder brother of Gada; dvidhäbhütä—cut in two; mahä-çaktéthe two sakti weapons; rukmeù—of Rukmi; sütam—the charioteer; jaghäna—hit; ha—indeed.

     Lord Kåñëa, the elder brother of Gada, hit the çakti weapon with His club and broke it in two. The two splinters of that weapon ricocheted and hit Rukmé's charioteer.

Text 19 

kaumodaké gadä gurvé
     patanté vega-dhäriëé
tad-rathaà cürëayäm äsa
     säçvaà çailaà yathä paviù

     kaumodaké—the Kaumodaki; gadä—club; gurvé—heavy; patanté—falling; vega-dhäriëé—quickly; tad-ratham—on his chariot; cürëayäm äsa—broke into pieces; säçvam—ith the horses; çailam—a mountain; yathä—as; paviù—a thunderbolt.

     Then Lord Kåñëa hurled His great and heavy Kaumodaké club, which broke Rukmé's chariot into pieces as a thunderbolt breaks a mountain.

Text 20 

praharad dharaye so 'pi
     gadäà sväà bhéñmakätmajaù
cakreëa cürëayäm äsa
     bhagavän api täà punaù

     praharat—threw; haraye—at Lord Kåñëa; so 'pi—he; gadäm—a club; svam—own; bhéñmakätmajaù—Bhismaka's son; cakreëa—with His cakra; cürëayäm äsa—broke into pieces; bhagavän—the Lord; api—also; tam—that; punaù—again.

     When Rukmé threw a club at Him, Lord Kåñëa used His cakra to break into pieces. 

Text 21 

parighaà baìga-jaà nétvä
     rukmé rukmäìgado balé
jaghäna çré-harià skandhe
     jagarja ghanavan mådhe

     parigham—a parigha weapon; baìga-jam—made in Bengal; nétvä—taking; rukmé—Rukmi; rukmäìgadaù—wearing golden armlets; balé—powerful; jaghäna—hit; çré-harim—Lord Kåñëa; skandhe—on the shoulder; jagarja—roared; ghanavan—like thunder; mådhe—in the battle.

     Taking up his parigha weapon made in Bengal, powerful Rukmé, decorated with golden armlets, struck Lord Kåñëa on the shoulder and roared like a thundercloud.

Text 22 

santäòito 'pi bhagavän
     mälähata iva dvipaù
tenaiva parighenäpi
     taà jaghäna raëäìgane

     santäòitaù—hit; api—although; bhagavän—the Lord; mälä—by a flower garland; hata—hit; iva—like; dvipaù—an elephant; tena—by that; eva—indeed; parighena—arogha; api—also; tam—him; jaghäna—hit; raëäìgane—in the battlefield.

     Lord Kåñëa felt that blow as an elephant feels being hit with a flower garland. Then Lord Kåñëa picked up that parigha and hit Rukmé with it.

Text 23 

parighäbhihato rukmé
     kiïcid-vyäkula-mänasaù
bhartsayan mädhavaà hy äjau
     jagräha khaòga-carmaëé

     parigha—by the parigha; abhihataù—hit; rukmé—Rukmi; kiïcid-vyäkula-mänasaù—agitated at heart; bhartsayan—rebuking; mädhavam—Kåñëa; hy—indeed; äjau—in the fight; jagräha—grasped; khaòga—his sword; carmaëé—and shield.

     Hit by the parigha, Rukmé became agitated at heart. Hurling insults at Lord Kåñëa, he took up his sword and shield.

Text 24 

tat-khaògaà carmaëä chittvä
     sva-khaògaà praharad dhariù
khaògägreëa çiras-träëaà
     kaïcukaà cicchide mahat

     tat-khaògam—his sword; carmaëä—with the shield; chittvä—cutting; sva-khaògam—His own sword; praharat—hit; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; khaògägreëa—with the edge of His sword; çiras-träëam—the helmet; kaïcukam—and armor; cicchide—cut; mahat—great.

     Weilding His own sword, Lord Kåñëa separated Rukmé from his sword and shield. With His sword's sharp point He separated Rukmé from his helmet and armor.

Texts 25 and 26 

hasta-träëo 'pi yugapad
     ete chinné-kåte mådhe
khaòga-muñöi-karaà dåñövä
     rukmiëaà samupasthitam

gåhétvä bhuja-daëòäbhyäà
     pätayitvä mahé-tale
tasyopari hariù sthitvä
     yathä siàho mågopari 
çita-dhäraà nandakäkhyaà 
     khaògaà jagräha roñataù

     hasta-träëaù—the gloves; api—also; yugapat—in a single moment; ete—they; chinné-kåte—cut; mådhe—in the battle; khaòga—sword; muñöi-karam—in his fist; dåñövä—seeing; rukmiëam—Rukmé; samupasthitam—standing; gåhétvä—takling; bhuja-daëòäbhyäm—with both arms; pätayitvä—throwing; mahé-tale—to the ground; tasyopari—on top of him; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; sthitvä—situated; yathä—as; siàhaù—a lion; måga—a dear; upari—on; çita-dhäram—sharp; nandakäkhyam—named Nandaka; khaògam—sword; jagräha—grabbed; roñataù—angrily.

     Seeing Rukmé standing, without sword or gloves, before Him, Lord Kåñëa grabbed him with both arms, threw him to the ground, and pounced on him as a lion pounces on a deer. Then the Lord angrily drew His sharp sword named Nandaka.

Text 27 

dåñövä bhrätå-vadhodyuktaà
     rukmiëé bhaya-vihvalä
patitvä pädayor bhärtur
     uväca karuëaà saté

     dåñövä—seeing; bhrätå—of her brother; vadha—the death; udyuktam—engaged; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; bhaya-vihvalä—trembling with fear; patitvä—falling; pädayoù—at the feet; bhärtuù—of her husband; uväca—spoke; karuëam—piteously; saté—chaste.

     Seeing that her brother was on the verge of death, saintly terrified saintly Rukmiëé fell at her husband's feet and spoke very piteous words.

Text 28 

çré-rukmiëy uväca 

ananta deveça jagan-niväsa
     yogeçvaräcintya jagat-pate tvam
hantuà na yogyaù karuëä-samudra
     mad-bhrätaraà çäla-bhujaà mahä-bhuja

     çré-rukmiëé uväca—Çré Rukmiëé said; ananta—limitless; deveça—O master of the demigpds; jagan-niväsa—O abode of the4 universes; yogeçvara—O master of yoga; acintya—O inconcievable one; jagat-pate—O master of the universes; tvam—You; hantum—to kill; na—not; yogyaù—is right; karuëä—of mercy; samudra—O ocean; mad-bhrätaram—my brother; çäla-bhujam—who has arms like sala trees; mahä-bhuja—O mighty-armed one.

     Çré Rukmiëé said: O limitless one, O master of the demigods, O abode of the universes, O master of yoga, O inconcievable one, O master of the worlds, O mighty-armed one, O ocean of mercy, it is not right for You to kill my brother, whose arms are like great çäla trees.

Text 29 

çré-närada uväca 

pariträsair vilapatéà
     duùkha-çuñyan-mukhéà priyäm
ruddha-kaëöhéà satéà vékñya
     nyavartata hariù svayaà

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; pariträsaiù—with fears; vilapatém—lamenting; duùkha—with sufferings; çuñyat—dried up; mukhém—mouth; priyäm—beloved; ruddha-kaëöhém—whose throat was stopped;   satém—chaste; vékñya—seeing; nyavartata—stopped; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—Himself.

     Çré Närada said: Seeing that saintly Rukmiëé was frightened and weeping, her mouth dry with suffering, Lord Kåñëa stopped Himself.

Text 30 

baddhvä taà kaöi-bandhena
     khaògena çita-dhäriëä
vapanaà smaçru-keçänäà
     cakärärdha-mukhe hariù

     baddhvä—tying; tam—him; kaöi-bandhena—with abelt; khaògena—with His sword; çita-dhäriëä—sharp; vapanam—shaving; smaçru—beard; keçänäm—and hair; cakära—did; ardha—half; mukhe—his face; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     With a sash tying him up, with His sharp sword Lord Kåñëa shaved the hair and beard of half of Rukmé's face.

Text 31 

akñauhiëé-dvayaà jitvä
     rämaù präptaù sa-sainikaù
baddhaà virüpiëaà dénaà
     rukmiëaà tu dadarça ha

     akñauhiëé-dvayam—the two aksauhinis; jitvä—defeating; rämaù—Balaräma; präptaù—attained; sa-sainikaù—with His army; baddham—bound; virüpiëam—made ugly; dénam—wretched; rukmiëam—Rukmé; tu—indeed; dadarça—saw; ha—certainly.

     After defeating the two akñauhiëés, Lord Balaräma and His army returned. Then Balaräma saw poor Rukmé tied up and made very funny-looking.

Text 32 

vimucya baddhaà sa-dayaù
     präha nirbhartsayan harim
asädhv idaà tvayä kåñëa
     kåtaà loka-jugupsitam

     vimucya—freeing; baddham—the bonds; sa-dayaù—compassionate; präha—said; nirbhartsayan—rebuking; harim—Kåñëa; asädhu—not right; idam—this; tvayä—by You; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; kåtam—done; loka—in the world; jugupsitam—horrible.

     Untying him, compassionate Balaräma rebuked Kåñëa, saying, "Kåñëa, how horrible is this thing You did! It is not right.

Text 33 

häsyaà vaiçäli-bhadräëäà
     na hi caitädåçaà bhavet
yasyäù sahodare mukhye
     virüpe ca tvayä kåte

     häsyam—the object of laughter; vaiçäli-bhadräëäm——of the people; na—not; hi—indeed; ca—and; etädåçam—like this; bhavet—should be; yasyäù—of whom; sahodare—the brother; mukhye—in the face; virüpe—funny-looking; ca—and; tvayä—by You; kåte—done.

     "You should not have made Rukmiëé's brother's face so funny-looking that everyone will laugh at him."

Text 34 

kià vadiñyati säpi tväà
     bhrätur vairüpya-cintayä
mä çokaà kuru kalyäëi
     svasthä bhava çuci-smite

     kim—what?; vadiñyati—will say; sä api—she; tväm—to You; bhrätuù—of the brother; vairüpya-cintayä—with anxiety over being made so ugly; mä—don't; çokam—lament; kuru—do; kalyäëi—O beautiful one; svasthä—happy; bhava—be; çuci-smite—O girl with the beautiful smile.

     "What will Rukmiëé say to You?" Then Lord Balaräma said to Rukmiëé, "O beautiful one, don't be unhappy that your brother has been made so ugly-looking. O girl with the beautiful smile, please be happy.

Text 35 

ärya-putri mahä-buddhe
     mä çokaà kuru durmanäù
sarvaà käla-kåtaà manye
     priyam apriyam eva vä

     ärya-putri—O noble girl; mahä-buddhe—O intelligent one; mä—don't; çokam—lament; kuru—do; durmanäù—unhappy; sarvam—all; käla-kåtam—done by time; manye—I think; priyam—pleasant; apriyam—and unpleasant; eva—indeed; vä—or.

     "O noble girl, O intelligent one, don't be unhappy. I think it is time that brings everything, whether pleasant or unpleasant.

Text 36 

väyor ghanävalir iva
     vaçe yasyäkhilaà jagat
taà kälam éçvaraà viddhi
     viñëuà kalayatäà prabhum

     väyoù—of the wind; ghanävaliù—the clouds; iva—like; vaçe—under the control; yasya—of which; akhilam—all; jagat—the universe; tam—that; kälam—time; éçvaram—the controller; viddhi—please know; viñëum—Lord Viñëu; kalayatäm—of controller; prabhum—the master.

     "As clouds are under the control of the wind, so this entire universe is under the control of time. Please know that time is really Lord Viñëu, the supreme controller, the master of all masters.

Text 37 

ahaà mameti bhävo 'yaà
     jagato bandha-käraëam
täbhyäà virahito bhävo
     mokña eva na saàçayaù

     aham—I; mama—mine; iti—thus; bhävaù—the concept; ayam—this; jagataù—of the world; bandha-käraëam—the source of bondage; täbhyäm—by them; virahitaù—devoid; bhävaù—the state; mokña—liberation; eva—indeed; na—not; saàçayaù—doubt.

     "The thoughts, `It is I' and `It is mine' bind one to the material world. When one becomes free from these material thoughts of pride and possessiveness he attains liberation. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 38 

sukha-duùkha-prado nänyaù
     puruñasyätma-vibhramaù
mitrodäséna-ripavaù
     saàsära-tamasä kåtäù

     sukha—happiness; duùkha—and unhappiness; pradaù—giving; na—not; anyaù—another; puruñasya—of a person; ätma-vibhramaù—bewilderment; mitra—freind; udäséna—neutral; ripavaù—and enemy; saàsära-tamasä—by the darkness of material existence; kåtäù—done.

     "Lord Viñëu alone is the giver of happiness and distress. No one else gives them. The thought that someone is a friend, someone else is a neutral party, and someone else is an enemy is an illusion created by the material nature."

Text 39 

evaà rämeëa devena
     bodhito bhéñmakätmajaù
vaimanasyaà parityajya
     rukmiëé ca yayau mudam

     evam—thus; rämeëa—by Lord Balaräma; devena—by the Lord; bodhitaù—informed; bhéñmakätmajaù—Rukmi, the son of Buismaka; vaimanasyam—unhappiness; parityajya—abandoning; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; ca—and; yayau—attained; mudam—happiness.

     Educated by Lord Balaräma's words, Rukmé and Rukmiëé discarded their unhappiness and became happy.

Text 40 

rukmé tu täbhyäm utsåñöo
     vitathätma-manorathaù
smaran virüpa-käraëaà
     tapase sa mano dadhät

     rukmé—Rukmi; tu—indeed; täbhyäm—by Them; utsåñöaù—placed; vitatha—frustrated; ätma-manorathaù—desires; smaran—remembering; virüpa-käraëam—the cause of his becoming ugly; tapase—for austerities; sa—he; manaù—his mind; dadhät—fixed.

     In this way Rukmé's desires were thwarted by Kåñëa and Balaräma. Remembering how he had been made so ugly, Rukmé fixed his mind on performing austerities.

Text 41 

värito mantri-mukhyaiç ca
     kuëòinaà na gataù punaù
cakre bhojakaöaà näma
     niväsäya puraà param

     väritaù—stopped; mantri-mukhyaiù—by his advisors; ca—; kuëòinam—to Kundina; na—not; gataù—went; punaù—again; cakre—did; bhojakaöam—Bhojakata; näma—named; niväsäya—for residence; puram—city; param—great.

     Forbidden by his advisors, he did not return to Kuëòina. Instead he went to the city of Bhojakaöa, and there he lived.

Text 42 

rukmiëyä saha govindaù
     sa-rämo yadubhir våtaù
dvärakäà prayayau räjan
     nädayan jaya-dundubhén

     rukmiëyä—Rukmiëé; saha—with; govindaù—Kåñëa; sa-rämaù—with Balaräma; yadubhiù—by the Yädavas; våtaù—accompanied; dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; prayayau—went; räjan—O king; nädayan—sounding; jaya-dundubhén—the drums of victory.

     O king, accompanied by Rukmiëé, Balaräma, and the Yädavas, Lord Kåñëa returned to Dvärakä, where the drums of victory sounded.

Text 43 

jäte mahotsave puryäà
     rukmiëéà ruciränanäm
upayeme vidhänena
     märgaçérñe hariù svayam

     jäte—born; mahotsave—a great festival; puryäm—in the city; rukmiëém—Rukmiëé; ruciränanäm—beautiful-faced; upayeme—married; vidhänena—properly; märgaçérñe—in the month of Margasirsa; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally.

     In the month of Märgasérña (November-December) there was a great festival in Dvärakä City as Lord Kåñëa married beautiful-faced Rukmiëé.

Text 44 

harer vivähe sati rukmié-pateù
     çré-rukmiëé bhüñita-rukma-mandirä
purandarasyäpi yathämaravaté
     dvärävaté puëyavaté tathä babhau

     hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; vivähe—the marriage; sati—being so; rukmié-pateù—of the husband of Rukmiëé; çré-rukmiëé—Çré Rukmiëé; bhüñita—decorated; rukma—of gold; mandirä—palace; purandarasya—of King Indra; api—even; yathä—as; amarävaté—Amaravati; dvärävaté—Dvärakä; puëyavaté—sacred; tathä—so; babhau—was splendidly manifested.

     On the day of Lord Kåñëa's marriage to Rukmiëé, the sacred city of Dvärakä, which is decoraqted with many golden palaces, was glorious like King Indra's city of Amarävaté.

Text 45 

bhaiñmé-vivähasya kathäà viciträà
     çåëoti yaù çrävayate ca bhaktyä
ihaiva bhakto vibhavena yuktaù
     sa eva muktià pratiyäti muktaù

     bhaiñmé-vivähasya—of the marriage of Rukmiëé; katham—the story; vicitram—wonderful; çåëoti—hears; yaù—one who; çrävayate—tells; ca—and; bhaktyä—with devotion; iha—here; eva—indeed; bhaktaù—a devotee; vibhavena—with glory; yuktaù—endowed; sa—he; eva—indeed; muktim—liberation; pratiyäti—attains; muktaù—liberated.

     A person who with devotion hears or tells this story of Çrématé Rukmiëé's marriage becomes a great devotee in this world. He becomes wealthy and glorious and in the end he attains liberation.

Chapter Eight
Sarva-mahiñy-udvahaù
The Marriages of All the Queens

Text 1

anyäsäà kåñëa-patnénäà
     maìgalaà çåëu maithila
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     äyur-vardhanam uttamam

     anyäsäm—of the other; kåñëa-patnénäm—wives of Lord Kåñëa; maìgalam—auspicious; çåëu—please hear; maithila—O king of Mithila; sarva—all; päpa—sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; äyur-vardhanam—increasing the span of life; uttamam—transcendental.

     O king of Mithilä, please hear the auspicious story of Lord Kåñëa's other queens, a sacred story that removes all sins and increases the span of one's life.

Text 2 

saträjitäya süryeëa
     dattaù säkñät syamantakaù
ugrasenäya sa maëiù
     çré-kåñëenäbhiyäcitaù

     saträjitäya—to Satrajit; süryeëa—by the sun-god; dattaù—given; säkñät—directly; syamantakaù—the Syamantaka jewel; ugrasenäya—for Ugrasena; sa—that; maëiù—jewel; çré-kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; abhiyäcitaù—requested.

     When the sun-god gave the Syamantaka jewel to Saträjit, Lord Kåñëa asked that the jewel be given to King Ugrasena.

Text 3 

saträjitas taà na dadau
     dravya-lobhena maithila
dine dine svarëa-bhärän
     añöau yaù såjati svataù

     saträjitaù—Satrajit; tam—that; na—not; dadau—gave; dravya-lobhena—greedy to attain possessions; maithila—O king of Mithilä; dine—day; dine—after day; svarëa-bhärän—bharas of gold; añöau—eight; yaù—which; såjati—creates; svataù—of its own accord.

     O king of Mithilä, out of greed King Saträjit did not give away the jewel, which daily created eight bhäras of gold.

Text 4 

atha prasenas tad-bhrätä
     maëià kaëöhe nidhäya saù
saindhavaà hayam äruhya
     mågayäà vyacarad vane

     atha—then; prasenaù—Prasena; tad-bhrätä—his brother; maëim—the jewel; kaëöhe—on his neck; nidhäya—placing; saù—he; saindhavam—a sindhu; hayam—hore; äruhya—mounting; mågayäm—hunting; vyacarat—did; vane—in the forest.

     Then, placing the jewel on his neck, Saträjit's brother Prasena mounted a sindhu horse and went hunting in the forest.

Text 5 

siàhena märitaù so 'pi
     siàho jämbavatä hataù
gåhétvä taà maëià sadyo
     jämbavän sva-guhäà gataù

     siàhena—by a lion; märitaù—killed; saù—he; api—also; siàhaù—the lion; jämbavatä—by Jämbavän; hataù—killed; gåhétvä—taking; tam—it; maëim—the jewel; sadyaù—at once; jämbavän—Jämbavän; sva-guhäm—to his cave; gataù—went.

     A lion killed Prasena. Then Jämbavän killed the lion and took the jewel to his cave.

Text 6 

kåñëena nihato bhrätä
     maëigrévo vanaà gataù
näyätaù sva-sabhä-madhye
     iti saträjito 'bravét

     kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; nihataù—killed; bhrätä—the brother; maëigrévaù—wearing the jewel on his neck; vanam—to the forest; gataù—gone; na—not; äyätaù—returned; sva-sabhä-madhye—in the assembly; iti—thus; saträjitaù—Satrajit; abravét—said.

     Saträjit said: When my brother, wearing the jewel around his neck, went to the forest, Kåñëa killed him. That is why my brother has not returned to his people.

Text 7 

bhagavän duryaço-lipto
     nägarais tu vanaà gataù
prasenam açvaà siàhaà ca
     hataà prekñya mahä-mate

     bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; duryaçaù—with infamy; liptaù—anointed; nägaraiù—with people of the city; tu—indeed; vanam—to the forest; gataù—went; prasenam—Prasena; açvam—the horse; siàham—the lion; ca—and; hatam—killed; prekñya—seeing; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     O noble-hearted one, Lord Kåñëa, His good reputation tainted by the rumor, went with some people of the city to the forest. There He saw Prasena, the horse, and the lion, all of them dead.

Text 8 

rkña-räja-bilaà gatvä
     maëià hartuà svayaà hariù
yuddhaà kåtväñöa-viàçähaà
     ajayad rkña-näyakam

     rkña—of the rksas; räja—of the king; bilam—to the cave; gatvä—going; maëim—the jewel; hartum—to take; svayam—personally; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; yuddham—fight; kåtvä—doing; añöa-viàça—twenty-eight; aham—days; ajayat—defeated; rkña-näyakam—the king of the rksas.

     Entering Jämbavän's cave to recover the jewel, for 28 days Lord Kåñëa fought with Jämbavän, the king of the åkñas.

Text 9 

tena dattä jämbavaté
     haraye kanyakä çubhä
maëinä saha räjendra
     dvärakäm äyayau hariù

     tena—by him; dattä—givebn; jämbavaté—Jämbavaté; haraye—to Lord Kåñëa; kanyakä—daughter; çubhä—beautiful; maëinä—the jewel; saha—with; räjendra—O king of kings; dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; äyayau—went; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     O king of kings, Jämbavän gave the jewel and his beautiful daughter, Jämbavaté, to Lord Kåñëa. Then the Lord returned to Dvärakä.

Texts 10 and 11 

saträjitäya pradadau
     maëià nirläïchanaù prabhuù
vréòito 'väì-mukho bhéto
     räjä saträjito maëim

gåhétväpi punas tasmai
     çré-kåñëäya mahätmane
satyabhämäà sutäà prädäc
     chänty-arthaà maithileçvara

     saträjitäya—to satrajit; pradadau—gave; maëim—the jewel; nirläïchanaù—free from infamy; prabhuù—the Lord; vréòitaù—embarrassed; aväk—without words; mukhaù—in his mouth; bhétaù—frightened; räjä—King; saträjitaù—Satrajit; maëim—the jewel; gåhétvä—taking; api—also; punaù—again; tasmai—to Him; çré-kåñëäya—Çré Kåñëa; mahätmane—noble-hearted; satyabhämäm—Satyabhämä; sutäm—his daughter; prädät—gave; chänty-artham—to appease the Lord; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä.

     His good reputation restored, Lord Kåñëa gave the Jewel to Saträjit. Embarrassed, frightened, and speechless, Saträjit gave his daughter, Satyabhämä, in marriage to Lord Kåñëa to pacify Him.

Text 12 

päëòavänäà sahäyärthaà
     indraprasthaà gato hariù
tatraiva varñikän mäsän
     nyavätséd bandhu-vatsalaù

     päëòavänäm—pf the Pandavas; sahäyärtham—forhelp; indraprastham—to hastinapura; gataù—went; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; tatra—there; eva—indeed; varñikän—of the monsoon; mäsän—the months; nyavätsét—resided; bandhu-vatsalaù—who loves His relatives.

     Then Lord Kåñëa, who dearly loves His relatives, went to Hastinäpura and stayed there for the months of the monsoon to help the Päëòavas.

Text 13 

ekadä ratham äruhya
     harir gäëòévinä saha
su-nire yamunä-tére
     mågayärthé viniryayau

     ekadä—one day; ratham—a chariot; äruhya—mounting; hariù—Kåñëa; gäëòévinä—with Arjuna; saha—with; su-nire—beautiful waters; yamunä-tére—on the Yamunä's shore; mågayärthé—wishing to hunt; viniryayau—went.

     One day Kåñëa and Arjuna went hunting on the shore of the beautiful Yamunä.

Text 14 

tapaç caranté kälindé
     çré-kåñëaà varam icchati
darçitä päëòavenäpi
     täà gåhétvä jagäma ha

     tapaù—austerities; caranté—performing; kälindé—Kälindé; çré-kåñëam—to Çré Kåñëa; varam—as her husband; icchati—desring; darçitä—showed; päëòavena—by Arjuna; api—even; täm—her; gåhétvä—taking; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     There Arjuna found Kälindé, who had been performing austerities to attain Lord Kåñëa as her husband. Arjuna showed her to Lord Kåñëa, and He accepted her and took her with Him.

Text 15 

dvärakäm etya kälindéà
     sürya-kanyäà manoharäm
upayeme vidhänena
     vitanvan maìgalaà param

     dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; etya—going; kälindém—Kälindé; sürya-kanyäm—the daughter of the sun-god; manoharäm—beautiful; upayeme—married; vidhänena—according to the proper rituals; vitanvan—giving; maìgalam—auspiciousness; param—great.

     Returning to Dvärakä, Lord Kåñëa married beautiful Kälindé, the sun-god's daughter, in a proper and auspicious ritual.

Text 16 

ävantya-räja-tanujäà
     mitravindäà manoharäm
svayamvare täà jahära
     bhagavän rukmiëéà yathä

     ävantya-räja-tanujäm—the daughter of the king of Avanti-pura; mitravindäm—Mitravindä; manoharäm—beautiful; svayamvare—in the svayamvara; täm—her; jahära—took; bhagavän—the Lord; rukmiëém—Rukmiëé; yathä—as.

     Then, as He had kidnapped Rukmiëé, Lord Kåñëa kidnapped beautiful Mitravindä, the princess of Avantya-deça, at the time of her svayamvara.

Text 17 

nagnajit-kanyakäà satyäà
     damitvä sapta go-våñän
paçyatäà sarva-lokänäà
     upayeme hariù svayam

     nagnajit-kanyakäm—the daughter of King Nagnajit; satyäm—Stayä; damitvä—subduing; sapta—seven; go-våñän—bulls; paçyatäm—looking on; sarva-lokänäm—as all the people; upayeme—married; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; svayam—personally.

     Then, after subduing seven bulls as all the people watched, Lord Kåñëa married Satyä, the daughter of KIng Nagnajit.

Text 18 

kaikeya-räja-tanujäà
     bhadräà tu bhagavän hariù
kälindém iva täà çaçvad
     upayeme vidhänataù

     kaikeya-räja-tanujäm—the daughter of the kin g of Kaikeya; bhadräm—Bhadrä; tu—indeed; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåñëa; kälindém—Kälindé; iva—like; täm—her; çaçvat—eternally; upayeme—married; vidhänataù—according to the proper rituals.

     Then, as He had married Kälindé, Lord Kåñëa married Bhadrä, the princess of Kaikeya, in a proper ritual.

Text 19 

båhatsena-sutäà räjal
     lakñmaëäà lakñaëair yutäm
chittvä matsyam arén jitvä
     jagräha bhagavän hariù

     båhatsena—of Båhatsena; sutäm—the daughter; räjan—O king; lakñmaëäm—Lakñmaëä; lakñaëaiù—with virtues; yutäm—endowed; chittvä—cutting; matsyam—a fish; arén—enemies; jitvä—defeating; jagräha—took; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåñëa.

     O king, after piercing a fish and defeating many rivals, Lord Kåñëa took virtuous Lakñmaëä, the daughter of King Båhatsena.

Text 20 

tathä ñoòaça-sähasraà
     çataà ca nåpa-kanyakäù
bhaumaà hatvä tan-nirodhäd
     ähåtäç cäru-darçanäù

     tathä—then; ñoòaça-sähasraà çatam—16,100; ca—and; nåpa-kanyakäù—princesses; bhaumam—Bhaumäsura; hatvä—killing; tan-nirodhät—from his prison; ähåtäç—taken; cäru-darçanäù—very beautiful.

     Then Lord Kåñëa killed the demon Bhaumäsura and released from his prison 16,100 beautiful princesses.

Text 21 

täsäà muhürta ekasmin
     nänägäreñu yoñitäm
sa-vidhià jagåhe päëén
     nänä-rüpaù sva-mäyayä

     täsäm—of them; muhürte—in a moment; ekasmin—single; nänägäreñu—in many differed rooms; yoñitäm—of the women; sa-vidhim—according to the proper rituals; jagåhe—accepted; päëén—the hand; nänä-rüpaù—in many forms; sva-mäyayä—by His mystic potency.

     By the arrangement of His yogamäyä potency expanding into many forms, Lord Kåñëa accepted the hands of all these girls in many different rooms in a single moment.

Text 22 

ekaikaças täù kåñëasya
     puträn daça daçäbaläù
ajénanann anavamän
      pituù sarvätma-sampadä

     ekaikaçaù—one by one; täù—them; kåñëasya—of Lord Kåñëa; puträn—sons; daça—ten; daça—and ten; abaläù—women; ajénanan—gave birth; anavamän—exalted; pituù—of their father; sarvätma-sampadä—with all the virtues.

     Each wife gave birth to ten exalted sons, each son having all his father's virtues.

Text 23 

rukmiëyäà bhéñma-kanyäyäà
     pradyumnaù prathamo 'bhavat
kämadevävatäro 'yaà
     pitåvat-sarva-lakñaëaù

     rukmiëyäm—in Rukmiëé; bhéñma-kanyäyäm—the daughter of Bhjismaka; pradyumnaù—Pradyumna; prathamaù—the first; abhavat—was; kämadeva-avatäraù—an incarnation of Kämadeva; ayam—who; pitå—his father; vat—like; sarva—all; lakñaëaù—the qualities.

     From Rukmiëé was born the first son, Pradyumna, who had all the transcendental qualities of His father, and who was an incarnation of Kämadeva.

Text 24 

çambaro nirdayas tokaà
     håtväbdhau taà samäkñipat
matsyodare gato so 'pi
     na mamära hareù sutaù

     çambaraù—Sambara; nirdayaù—merciless; tokam—the child; håtvä—kidnapping; abdhau—in the ocean; tam—him; samäkñipat—threw; matsya—of a fish; udare—in the belly; gataù—entered; saù—he; api—even; na—not; mamära—died; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; sutaù—the son.

     Then merciless Çambara kidnapped the infant Pradyumna and threw him in the ocean. Lord Kåñëa's son Pradyumna entered the belly of a great fish and did not die.

Text 25 

matsyodarän nirgato 'sau
     bhäryayä paripälitaù
jïätvä çatru-kåtäà värtäà
     sa kaåñëé rüòha-yauvanaù

     matsya—of the fish; udarät—from the belly; nirgataù—gone; asau—he; bhäryayä—by his wife; paripälitaù—protected; jïätvä—understanding; çatru—by his enemy; kåtäm—done; värtäm—information; sa—he; kaåñëé—the son of Lord Kåñëa; rüòha-yauvanaù—in full youth.

     Taken from the fish's belly, and carefully protected by his wife, Pradyumna suddenly grew to become a young man. Then he understood what his enemy had done.

Text 26 

hatvä taà çambaraà çatruà
     bhäryayä varayä yutaù
dvärakäm äyayau räjaàs
     citraà karma ca tasya tat

     hatvä—killing; tam—him; çambaram—Sambara; çatrum—his enemy; bhäryayä—with his wife; varayä—beautiful; yutaù—with; dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; äyayau—went; räjan—O king; citram—wonder; karma—deed; ca—and; tasya—of him; tat—that.

     O king, after killing his enemy Çambara, Pradyumna went with his beautiful wife to Dvärakä. His deeds are certainly very wonderful.

Text 27 

sa rukmiëo duhitaraà
     håtvä bhojakaöät purät
svayamvara-sthaläd räjann
     upayeme mahä-rathaù

     sa—he; rukmiëaù—of Rukmé; duhitaram—the daughter; håtvä—kidnapping; bhojakaöät—from Bhojakata; purät—city; svayamvara-sthalät—from the place of the svayamvara; räjann—O king; upayeme—married; mahä-rathaù—the great chariot-fighter.

     The great chariot-fighter Pradyumna also kidnapped Rukmé's daughter from the place of her svayamvara in Bhojakaöa City and married her.

Text 28 

tasmät suto 'niruddho 'bhün
     nägäyuta-balänvitaù
sura-jyeñöhävatäro 'yaà
     çäradendévara-prabhaù

     tasmät—from him; sutaù—the son; aniruddhaù—Aniruddha; abhüt—was; nägäyuta-balänvitaù—as strong as ten thousand elephants; sura—of the demigods; jyeñöha—the best; avatäraù—the incarnation; ayam—he; çäradendévara-prabhaù—glorious as a blue lotus growing in the autumn.

     From Pradyumna was born a son, Aniruddha, who was strong as ten thousand elephants and glorious as a blue autumn lotus. He was an incarnation of the first of the demigods.

Text 29 

catur-vyühävatärasya
     paripürëatamasya hi
evaà vicitraà caritaà
     vivähänäà su-maìgalam

     catur-vyühävatärasya—of the incarnation of the four expansions of the catur-vyüha; paripürëatamasya—perfect; hi—indeed; evam—thus; vicitram—wonder; caritam—stroy; vivähänäm—of the marriages; su-maìgalam—very auspicious.

     This is the wonderful and auspicious story of the marriages of Lord Kåñëa, the origin of the catur-vyüha expansions of the Lord.

Text 30 

sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     äyur-vardhanam uttamam
mayä te kathitaà räjan
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; äyur-vardhanam—increasing the span of life; uttamam—transcendental; mayä—by me; te—indeed; kathitam—spoken; räjan—O king; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—do you wish.

     O king, now I have spoken to you this sacred story, which removes all sins and increases one's span of life. What more do you wish to hear?

Chapter Nine
Çré Dvärakägamana-käraëa
The Arrival of Çré Dvärakä 

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 

triçu lokeçu vikhyätä
     dhanyä vai dvärakä-puré
paripürëatamaù säkçäc
     chré-kåçëo yatra väsa-kåt

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; triçu—in the three; lokeçu—worlds; vikhyatä—famous; dhanyä—glorious; vai—indeed; dvärakä-puré—the city of Dvärakä; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkçäc—directly; çré-kåçëaù—Çré Kåçëa; yatra—where; väsa-kåt—resides.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Glorious Dvärakä City is famous in the three worlds. Çré Kåçëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, resides there.

Text 2 

çré-kåçëasyäëga-sambhütä
     puré dväravaté çrutä
kasmäd ihägatä brahman
     kasmin käle vada prabho

     çré-kåçëasya—of Lord Kåçëa; aëga—from the body; sambhütä—born; puré—the city; dväravaté—Dvärakä; çrutä—heard; kasmät—how?; iha—here; ägatä—come; brahman—O brähmaëa; kasmin—in what?; käle—time; vada—please tell; prabhaù—O master.

     I have heard that Dvärakä City was manifested from Lord Kåçëa's transcendental body. How and when did it come to this earth? O master, please tell.

Text 3 

çré-närada uväca 

sädhu sädhu tvayä påçöaà
     dvärakägama-käraëam
yac chrutvä çuddhatäà yäti
     loka-ghäty api pätaké

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; sädhu—well done; sädhu—well don; tvayä—by you; påçöam—asked; dvärakä—of Dvärakä; ägama—arrival; käraëam—the reason; yat—which; çhrutvä—hearing; çuddhatäm—purity; yäti—attains; loka-ghäty—a murderer; api—even; pätaké—a sinner.

     Çré Närada said: Excellent. You have asked an excellent question. By hearing the reason for Dvärakä's arrival on this earth, even a great sinner, or even a murderer becomes pure at heart.

Text 4 

çaryätir näma räjäbhüc
     cakravarté manoù sutaù
cakära räjyaà dharmeëa
     varçänäm ayutaà bhuvi

     çaryätiù—Saryati; näma—named; räjä—a king; abhüt—was; cakravarté—the ruler; manoù—of Manu; sutaù—the son; cakära—did; räjyam—kingdom; dharmeëa—according to religious principles; varçänäm—of years; ayutam—ten thousand; bhuvi—on the earth.

     There was a king named Çaryäti who for ten thousand years ruled the earth according to religious principles.

Text 5 

uttänabarhir änarto
     bhüriçeëa iti trayaù
çaryäter abhavan puträù
     sarva-dharma-bhåtäà varäù

     uttänabarhiù—Uttanabarhi; änartaù—Anarta; bhüriçeëa—Bhurisena; iti—thus; trayaù—three; çaryäteù—of Saryati; abhavan—were; puträù—sons; sarva-dharma-bhåtäm—of the followers of religion; varäù—the best.

     Çaryäti had three very pious sons sons: Uttänabarhi, Anarta, and Bhüriçeëa.

Text 6 

uttänabarhiçe purväà
     bhüriçeëäya dakçiëäm
paçcimäà ca diçaà sarväà
     änartäya dadau nåpaù

     uttänabarhiçe—to Uttanabarhi; purväm—the east; bhüriçeëäya—to Bhurisena; dakçiëäm—the south; paçcimäm—the west; ca—and; diçam—direction; sarväm—all; änartäya—to Anarta; dadau—gave; nåpaù—the king.

     To Uttänabarhi King Çaryäti gave the eastern part of his kingdom, to Bhüriçeëa he gave the southern part, and to Anarta he gave the western part.

Text 7 

mameyaà hi mahé kåtsnä
     mayä dharmeëa pälitä
balärjitä baliçöhena
     yüyaà taà pälayiçyatha

     mama—of me; iyam—this; hi—indeed; mahé—earth; kåtsnä—entire; mayä—by me; dharmeëa—according to religious principles; pälitä—protected; bala—by my strength; arjitä—earned;  baliçöhena—most powerful; yüyam—you; tam—this; pälayiçyatha—will protect.

     King Çaryäti said to them: This entire earth is mine. I rule and protect it according to religious principles. I am most powerful. I have conquered this earth by my own power. In the future you three will also rule and protect this earth.

Text 8 

pitur vacaù samäkarëya
     änarto madhyamaù sutaù
jïäné jïänamayaà väkyaà
     uväca prahasann iva

     pituù—of the father; vacaù—the words; samäkarëya—hearing; änartaù—Anarta; madhyamaù—the middle; sutaù—son; jïäné—wise; jïänamayam—wise; väkyam—words; uväca—spoke; prahasann—laughing; iva—as if.

     Hearing his father's words, the middle son, Anarta, who was very wise, laughed and spoke words of great wisdom.

Text 9 

çré-änarta uväca 

taveyaà na mahé kåtsnä
     na tvayä pälitä kvacit
na tvad-balärjitä räjan
     baliçöho bhagavän vibhuù

     çré-änarta uväca—Çré Anarta said; tava—of you; iyam—this; na—not; mahé—earth; kåtsnä—entire; na—not; tvayä—by you; pälitä—protected; kvacit—in any way; na—not; tvad-balärjitä—won by your strength; räjan—O king; baliçöhaù—most powerful; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vibhuù—all-powerful.

     Çré Anarta said: You do not own this earth. Nor do you rule and protect it. Nor did you conquer it with your own power. Only the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the all-powerful ruler of this earth.

Text 10 

mahé çré-kåçëadevasya
     tenaiva paripälitä
tat-tejasä jitä kåtsnä
     baliçöho na hareù samaù

     mahé—the earth; çré-kåçëadevasya—of Lord Kåçëa; tena—by Him; eva—indeed; paripälitä—protected; tat-tejasä—by His power; jitä—conquered; kåtsnä—entire; baliçöhaù—most powerful; na—not; hareù—to Lord Kåçëa; samaù—equal.

     The earth is Lord Kåçëa's property. He rules and protects it. He conquered it with His great power. No one is powerful like Lord Kåçëa.

Text 11 

sa eva viçvaà sva-kåtaà
     såjaty atti ca päti ca
sa eva brahma paramaà
     kälaù kalayatäà prabhuù

     sa—He; eva—indeed; viçvam—the universe; sva-kåtam—made by Him; såjaty—creates; atti—destroys; ca—and; päti—maintains; ca—and; sa—He; eva—indeed; brahma—Brahman; paramam—Supreme; kälaù—time; kalayatäm—of controllers; prabhuù—the master.

     He creates, maintains, and destroys this universe. He is the Supreme Brahman. He is time, the master of all that subdue.

Text 12 

yo 'ntaù praviçya bhütäni
     bhütair apy akhiläçrayaù
sa viçväkhyo 'dhiyajïo 'sau
     paripürëatamaù svayam

     yaù—who; antaù—within; praviçya—entering; bhütäni—elements and living entities; bhütaiù—by teh elements and living entities; apy—also; akhila—of all; äçrayaù—the shelter; sa—He; viçva—the universe; äkhyaù—named; adhiyajïaù—tne object of sacrifices; asau—He; paripürëatamaù—the most perfect; svayam—Himself.

     He has entered within all living entities and all elements. He is the shelter and resting place of all living entities and all elements. He is the entire universe. He is the object of all sacrifices. He is the most perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead. 

Text 13 

yad-bhayäd vati väto 'yaà
     süryas tapati yad-bhayät
yad-bhayäd varçate devo
     måtyuç carati yad-bhayät

     yad-bhayät—out of fear of whom; vati—blows; vätaù—the wind; ayam—he; süryaù—the sun; tapati—shines; yad-bhayät—out of fear of whom; yad-bhayät—out of fear of him; varçate—rains; devaù—Indra; måtyuù—death; carati—moves; yad-bhayät—out of fear of whom.

     Out of fear of Him the wind blows. Out of fear of Him the sun shines. Out of fear of Him Indra gives rain. Out of fear of Him death moves on the earth.

Text 14 

paripürëatamaà säkçäc
     chré-kåçëaà parameçvaram
bhaja sarvätmanä räjann
     ahaëkära-vivarjitaù

     paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkçät—Himself; çré-kåçëam—Çré Kåçëa; parameçvaram—the Supreme controller; bhaja—please worship; sarvätmanä—with all your heart; räjann—O king; ahaëkära-vivarjitaù—free from false ego.

     O king, please become free from pride and false ego and with all your heart worship Çré Kåçëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 15 

çré-närada uväca 

jïänaà präpto 'pi çaryätir
     äkçiptaù putra-väk-çaraiù
änartaà sva-sutaà präha
     ruçä prasphuritädharaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; jïänam—knowledge; präptaù—attained; api—although; çaryätiù—Saryati; äkçiptaù—wounded; putra-väk-çaraiù—by the arrows of his son's words; änartam—to Anarta; sva-sutam—his own son; präha—said; ruçä—angrily; prasphurita—trembling; adharaù—his lips.

     Wounded by the arrows of his son's words, and his lips trembling in anger even though what he was confronted with was the truth, Çaryäti spoke to his son Anarta.

Text 16 

çaryätir uväca 

düraà gaccha asad-buddhe
     guruvad bhäçase katham
yävad bhütaà tu me räjyaà
     tävat tvaà me mahéà vasa

     çaryätiù uväca—Saryati said; düram—far away; gaccha—go; asad-buddhe—O fool; guruvat—like a guru; bhäçase—you speak; katham—why?; yävat—as; bhütam—manifested; tu—indeed; me—of me; räjyam—the kingdom; tävat—that; tvam—you; me—not; mahém—earth; vasa—should reside.

     Çaryäti said: Fool, get out! Why do you talk as if you were my teacher? You may not live any place in my kingdom.

Text 17 

yas tvayärädhitaù kåçëaù
     so 'pi sarva-sahäya-kåt
na navénäà kià mahéà te
     bhagavän eva däsyati

     yaù—who; tvayä—by you; ärädhitaù—worshiped; kåçëaù—Kåçëa; saù—He; api—even; sarva-sahäya-kåt—giving you all assistance; na—not; navénäm—new; kim—whether; mahém—earth; te—to you; bhagavän—the Lord; eva—indeed; däsyati—will give.

     Take help from this Kåçëa you worship. Will He not give you some new land not now a part of the earth? 

Text 18 

çré-närada uväca 

ity uktas tu tadänärto
     räjänaà präha mänadaù
yatra te ca mahé-räjyaà
     tatra väso na me bhavet

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; uktaù—spoken; tu—undeed; tadä—then; änartaù—Anarta; räjänam—to the king; präha—said; mänadaù—respectful; yatra—where; te—of you; ca—and; mahé-räjyam—the kingdom of the earth; tatra—there; väsaù—residence; na—not; me—of me; bhavet—will be.

     Çré Närada said: Addressed in this way, respectful Anarta said to the king, “I will not live anywhere in your kingdom, which extends to all the countries of the earth."

Text 19 

piträ niùsärito räjïäpy
     änarto 'bdhi-taöaà gataù
veläm etya tapas tepe
     varçänäm ayutaà jale

     piträ—by teh father; niùsäritaù—expelled; räjïä—by the king; api—also; änartaù—Anarta; abdhi—of the ocean; taöam—to the shore; gataù—went; veläm—on the coast; etya—going; tapaù—austerities; tepe—performed; varçänäm—of years; ayutam—ten thousand; jale—in the water.

     Banished by his father, Anarta went to the seacoast and entered the ocean, where he performed austerities for ten thousand years.

Text 20 

prema-lakçaëayä bhaktyä
     santuçöo bhagavän hariù
tasmai svaà darçanaà dattvä
     varaà brühéty uväca ha

     prema-lakçaëayä—characterized by love; bhaktyä—with devotion; santuçöaù—pleased; bhagavän—the Lord; hariù—Kåçëa; tasmai—to him; svam—His own; darçanam—sight; dattvä—giving; varam—boon; brühi—speak; iti—thus; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     Pleased by his loving devotion, Lord Kåçëa appeared before him and said, “Ask for a boon."

Text 21 

kåtäïjali-puöo bhütvä-
     narta utthäya çéghrataù
nanäma kåçëa-pädäbjaà
     romäïcé prema-vihvalaù

     kåtäïjali-puöaù—with folded hands; bhütvä—becoming; anarta—Anarta; utthäya—rising; çéghrataù—at once; nanäma—bowed; kåçëa-pädäbjam—to Lord Kåçëa's lotus feet; romäïcé—his hairs erect; prema-vihvalaù—overcome with love. 

     Overcome with love, and the hairs of his body erect with joy, Anarta quickly stood up and with folded hands bowed before Lord Kåçëa's lotus feet.

Text 22 

çré-änarta uväca 

namas te väsudeväya
     namaù saëkarçaëäya ca
pradyumnäyäniruddhäya
     sätvatäà pataye namaù

     çré-änarta uväca—Çré Anarta said; namaù—obeisances; te—to You; väsudeväya—Lord Väsudeva; namaù—obeisances; saëkarçaëäya—to Lord ;Saëkarçaë ca—and; pradyumnäya—to Lord Pradyumna; aniruddhäya—to Lord Aniruddha; sätvatäm—of the devotees; pataye—to the master; namaù—obeisances.

     Çré Anarta said; I offer my respectful obeisances to You, who are Lord Väsudeva. I offer my respectful obeisances to You, who are Lord Saëkarçaëa, Lord Pradyumna, and Lord Aniruddha. I offer my respectful obeisances to You, who are the master of the devotees.

Text 23 

piträ niçkäsito deva
     tväm ahaà çaraëaà gataù
dehi mahyaà bhümim anyäà
     yatra väso hi me bhavet

     piträ—by my father; niçkäsitaù—banished; deva—O Lord; tväm—to You; aham—I; çaraëam—take shelter; gataù—gone; dehi—please give; mahyam—to me; bhümim—a place; anyäm—another; yatra—where; väsaù—residence; hi—indeed; me—of me; bhavet—may be.

     I, who was banished by my father, now take shelter of You. O Lord, please give me a country where I may reside, a country outside my father's kingdom of the earth.

Text 24 

dhruvo 'pi yat-prasädena
     yayau sarvottamaà padam
tasmai namo bhagavate
     praëata-kleça-häriëe

     dhruvaù—Dhruva; api—also; yat-prasädena—by whose mercy; yayau—attained; sarvottamam—the best of all; padam—abode; tasmai—to Him; namaù—obeisances; bhagavate—to the Supreme Lord; praëata—of the surrendered souls; kleça—sthe sufferings; häriëe—the remover.

     I offer my respectful obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who removes the sufferings of the surrendered souls and who mercifully gave to Dhruva Mahäräja the best of all abodes.

Text 25 

çré-närada uväca 

änartam änataà dénaà
     bhagavän déna-vatsalaù
prasannaù çré-mukhenäha
     megha-gambhérayä girä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; änartam—to Anarta; änatam—bowing down; dénam—poor; bhagavän—the Lord; déna-vatsalaù—kind to the downtrodden; prasannaù—please; çré-mukhena—with His glorious mouth; äha—spoke; megha-gambhérayä—deep as thunder; girä—with words.

     Çré Närada said: Then the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is kind to the downtrodden and who was pleased at heart, with His glorious mouth spoke words deep like thunder to poor Anarta, who was bowing down before Him.

Text 26 

çré-bhagavän uväca 

anyä na mediné loke
     kià kartavyaà mayä nåpa
sva-vacas tad åtaà kartuà
     tvad-bhaktyä paritoçitaù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; anyä—another; na—not; mediné—earth; loke—in the world; kim—what?; kartavyam—should be done; mayä—by Me; nåpa—O king; sva-vacaù—own words; tat—that; åtam—truthful; kartum—to make; tvad-bhaktyä—by your devotion; paritoçitaù—satisfied.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: I am pleased by Your devotion, but I I do not have another earth in this universe to give you. O king, what should I do to grant the boon you ask? 

Text 27 

tasmäd vai svasya lokasya
     vaikuëöhasya parantapa
bhü-khaëòaà yojana-çataà
     dadämi vimalaà çubham

     tasmät—therefore; vai—indeed; svasya—own; lokasya—planet; vaikuëöhasya—Vaikuëöha; parantapa—O mighty one; bhü-khaëòam—on the earth; yojana-çatam—eight hundred miles; dadämi—I give; vimalam—pure; çubham—glorious.

     Therefore, O mighty one, I will place on this earth an eight-hundred mile portion of my pure and glorious Vaikuëöha world.

Texts 28 and 29 

çré-närada uväca 

ity uktvänärta-nåpatià
     bhagavän bhakta-vatsalaù
vaikuëöhäc ca samutpatya
     bhü-khaëòaà çata-yojanam

cakraà sudarçanaà dhåtvä
     samudre bhéma-nädini
dadhära bhagavän devas
     tasyopari videha-räö

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; uktvänärta-nåpatim—speaking; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhakta—to the devotees; vatsalaù—affectionate; vaikuëöhät—from Vaikuëöha; ca—and; samutpatya—picking up; bhü-khaëòam—place; çata-yojanam—eight hundred miles; cakram—cakra; sudarçanam—Sudarçana; dhåtvä—taking; samudre—in the ocean; bhéma-nädini—filled with terrible sounds; dadhära—held; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devaù—the Lord; tasya—it; upari—above; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Videha, after speaking these words, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who loves His devotees, took His Sudarçana-cakra, lifted up an eight-hundred mile portion of Vaikuëöha, and placed it in the ocean filled with fearful sounds. 

Text 30 

änarto lakça-varçäntaà
     tatra räjyaà cakära ha
putra-pautra-samäyukto
     räjan vaikuëöha-sampadam

     änartaù—Anarta; lakça-varçäntam—after ten thousand years; tatra—there; räjyam—kingdom; cakära—did; ha—indeed; putra—sons; pautra—and grandsons; samäyuktaù—endowed; räjan—O king; vaikuëöha-sampadam—the opulence of Vaikuëöha.

     O king, in this way, after ten thousand years Anarta attained a kingdom with all the opulences of Vaikuëöha and a dynasty with many noble sons and grandsons.

Text 31 

idaà çrutvätha çaryätiù
     pitä vai vismito 'bhavat
änarto näma deço 'bhüd
     änartasya prasädataù

     idam—this; çrutvä—hearing; atha—then; çaryätiù—Saryati; pitä—the father; vai—indeed; vismitaù—astonished; abhavat—became; änartaù—Anarta; näma—named; deçaù—the country; abhüt—became; änartasya—of Anarta; prasädataù—by the mercy.

     By the Lord's mercy that country was named Anarta after him. When he heard all this, Anarta's father, Çaryäti, became astonished. 

Text 32 

revatas tasya putro 'bhüc
     chré-çailasya gireù sutam
samutpatya sva-hastäbhyäà
     änarteçu nyapätayat

     revataù—Revata; tasya—of him; putraù—the son; abhüt—was; çré-çailasya gireù—of Mount Çaila; sutam—the son; samutpatya—lifting; sva-hastäbhyäm—with his own hands; änarteçu—in the country of Anarta; nyapätayat—placed.

     Anarta's son was named Revata. Revata lifted the mountain that was Mount Çaila's son and placed it in the country of Anarta.

Text 33 

so 'bhüd revata-nämnäpi
     raivato näma parvataù
kuçasthaléà vinirmäya
     räjyaà kåtvätha revataù

     saù—it; abhüt—became; revata-nämnä—by the name Revata; api—also; raivataù—Raivata; näma—named; parvataù—mountain; kuçasthalém—Kuçasthalé; vinirmäya—creating; räjyam—kingdom; kåtvä—making; atha—then; revataù—Revata.

     That mountain was named Raivata after him. Building a great capitol city named Kuçasthalé, Revata ruled the kingdom of Anarta.

Text 34 

samädäya svakäà kanyäà
     brahmalokaà jagäma ha
baladeva-vivähe 'pi
     tat-kathä kathitä mayä 
tasmäd dväravatéà puëyäà 
     mokça-dväraà viduù suräù

     samädäya—taking; svakäm—his own; kanyäm—daughter; brahmalokam—to Brahmaloka; jagäma—went; ha—indeed; baladeva—to Lord Balaräma; vivähe—in the marriage; api—also; tat-kathä—that story; kathitä—spoken; mayä—by me; tasmät—from that; dväravatém—to Dvärakä; puëyäm—sacred; mokça-dväram—the gateway to liberation; viduù—know; suräù—the demigods.

     Revata took his daughter to Brahmaloka. That I have alredy described in the story of her marriage to Lord Balaräma. The demigods know that the sacred city of Dvärakä is the gateway to liberation.
.pa

Chapter Ten
Gomaty-upäkhyäne cakra-tértha-mähätmya
In the Description of the Gomaté River, the Glories of Cakra-tértha

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

itthaà mayä te kathitaà
     dvärakägama-käraëam
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—said; dvärakägama-käraëam—the cause of the arrival of Dvärakä; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     Çré Närada said: Thus I have told to you the story of how Dvärakä came to the earth, a sacred story that remnoves all sins. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 2 

çré-bahuläçva uväca 

sarva-tértha-mayé bhümir
     dvärakä nagaré çubhä
tatra mukhyäni térthäni
     vada mäà muni-sattama

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; sarva-tértha-mayé—consisting of all holy places; bhümiù—the land; dvärakä—Dvärakä; nagaré—city; çubhä—beautiful; tatra—there; mukhyäni—most important; térthäni—holy places; vada—please tell; mäm—to me; muni-sattama—O best of sages.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: All holy places are manifested in beautiful Dvärakä City. O best of sages, please describe to me the most important of the holy places there.

Text 3 

çré-närada uväca 

ä-prabhäsät térthamayé
     maryädé-kåtya yajïiyä
bhümir mokça-pradä räjan
     dvärakä yojanaiù çatam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ä-prabhäsät—from Prabhäsa; térthamayé—consisting of the holy places; maryädé-kåtya—up to the boundary; yajïiyä—for performing yajna; bhümiù—place; mokça-pradä—giving liberation; räjan—O king; dvärakä—Dvärakä; yojanaiù—yojanas; çatam—a hundred.

     Çré Närada said: Extending all the way to Prabhäsa-tértha, the sacred land of Dvärakä is eight hundred miles in size.

Text 4 

dvärakäà nagaréà dåçövä
     naro naåäyaëo bhavet
dvärakäyäà måtaù ko 'pi
     gardabho 'pi catur-bhujaù

     dvärakäà nagarém—Dvärakä City; dåçövä—seeing; naraù—Nara; naåäyaëaù—and Näräyaëa; bhavet—may be; dvärakäyäm—in Dvärakä; måtaù—dead; ko api—someone; gardabhaù—donkey; api—even; catur-bhujaù—a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha.

     Anyone who sees Dvärakä City attains opulences like Lord Näräyaëa. Even a donkey that dies in Dvärakä becomes a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha. 

Text 5 

paçyan çåëvan kathäà tasyä
     dväraketi vadan kvacit
dåçövä dadyät tåëaà måtyuà
     gato yäti paräà gatim

     paçyan—seeing; çåëvan—hearing; kathäm—talk; tasya—of it; dvärakä—Dvärakä; iti—thus; vadan—saying; kvacit—somehow; dåçövä—seeing; dadyät—placing; tåëam—a blade of grass; måtyum—death; gataù—gone; yäti—attains; paräm—the supreme; gatim—destination.

     A person who sees Dvärakä, hears about it, or speaks the word “Dvärakä", thinks everything else to be like a piece of straw. When he dies he attains the supreme destination.

Text 6 

ekadä revataà bhaktaà
     premänanda-samäkulam
prekçya svaà darçanaà dattvä
     harir açru-mukho 'bhavat

     ekadä—one day; revatam—to Revata; bhaktam—the devotee; prema—of love; änanda-samäkulam—filled with transcendental bliss; prekçya—seeing; svam—own; darçanam—sight; dattvä—giving; hariù—Kåçëa; açru-mukhaù—His face filled with tears; abhavat—was.

     One day Lord Kåçëa appeared before King Revata. Seeing that His devotee Revata was filled with the bliss of spiritual love, Lord Kåçëa shed tears that glided down His face.

Text 7 

tan-netra-bindu-sambhütä
     gomaté sa mahä-nadé
yasya darçana-mätreëa
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate

     tan-netra-bindu-sambhütä—manifested from a teardrop; gomaté—Gomaté; sa—it; mahä-nadé—the great river; yasya—of which; darçana—seeing; mätreëa—simply by; brahma-hatyä—the sin of killing a brähmaëa;  pramucyate—is freed.

     From one of the Lord's teardrops the great Gomaté river was created. Simply by seeing this river one becomes freed from the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

Text 8 

gomaté-térajaà puëyaà
     rajo yo dhärayen naraù
çata-janma-kåtät päpän
     mucyate nätra saàçayaù

     gomaté-térajam—manifested on the shore of the Gomaté; puëyam—sacred; rajaù—dust; yaù—who; dhärayen—holds; naraù—a person; çata-janma—a hundred births; kåtät—done; päpän—from sins; mucyate—is freed; na—not; atra—here; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who touches the sacred dust on the Gomaté's shore becomes free from the sins committed in a hundred births. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 9 

snäna-käle gomatéti
     vadaty api naraù kvacit
gomatyäà snäna-jaà puëyam
     labhate vai na saàçayaù

     snäna-käle—at the time of bathing; gomaté—Gomaté; iti—thus; vadaty—says; api—even; naraù—a person; kvacit—somehow; gomatyäm—in the Gomaté; snäna-jam—from bathing; puëyam—the piety; labhate—attains; vai—indeed; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who, as he bathes, says the word “Gomaté" attains the pious result of bathing in the Gomaté. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 10 

makara-sthe ravau mäghe
     prayäge snänam äcaret
çatäçvamedhajaà puëyaà
     sampräpnoti videha-räö

     makara-sthe—in Capricorn; ravau—when the sun; mäghe—in the month of Magha (January-February); prayäge—at Prayäga; snänam—bath; äcaret—does; çatäçvamedhajam—a hundred asvamedha-yajnas; puëyam—the piety; sampräpnoti—attains; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, a person who bathes at Prayäga in the month of Mägha (January-February) when the sun is in Capricorn attains the pious result of performing a hundred açvamedha-yajïas.

Text 11 

tat-sahasra-guëaà puëyaà
     gomatyäà makare ravau
gomatyäç caiva mähätmyaà
     vaktuà nälaà catur-mukhaù

     tat-sahasra-guëam—multiplied a thousand times; puëyam—piety; gomatyäm—in the Gomaté; makare—in Capricorn; ravau—when the sun; gomatyäù—of the Gomaté; ca—and; eva—indeed; mähätmyam—the glory; vaktum—to speak; na—not; alam—is able; catur-mukhaù—Brahmä with his four mouths.

     A person who bathes in the Gomaté at that time, when the sun is in Capricorn, attains a pious result a thousand times greater than that attained at Prayäga. Even the demigod Brahmä is not able to properly describe all the glories of the sacred Gomaté river.

Text 12 

gomatyäà cakra-tértheçu
     päçäëa-nicayaç ca ye
te sarve cakratäà yänti
     püjanéyäù prayatnataù

     gomatyäm—in the Gomaté; cakra-tértheçu—at Cakra-tértha; päçäëa-nicayaù—many stones; ca—and; ye—which; te—they; sarve—all; cakratäm—the state of being the Lord's cakra; yänti—attain; püjanéyäù—worshipable; prayatnataù—with earnestness.

     By the Gomaté is a sacred place named Cakra-tértha. All the stones there are incarnations of thr Lord's Sudarçana-cakra. They should be worshiped with great care.

Text 13 

cakra-cihne cakra-térthe
     dvädaçyäà snänam äcaret
cakrapäëi-padaà yäti
     päpänäà bhäjano 'pi hi

     cakra-cihne—the marek of the cakra; cakra-térthe—at Cakra-tértha; dvädaçyäm—on Dvädaçé; snänam—bath; äcaret—does; cakrapäëi-padam—the able of Lord Kåçëa, who holds thw cakra in His hand; yäti—attains; päpänäm—of sins; bhäjanaù—a reservoir; api—even; hi—indeed.

     A person, even though he is a great reservoir of sins, who on the dvädaçé day bathes at Cakra-tértha, which bears the mark of the Lord's cakra, attains the abode of Lord Kåçëa, who holds the cakra in His hand.

Text 14 

koöi-janma-kåtaiù päpaiù
     patito yo 'pi pätaké
cakra-térthasya sopänaà
     etya muktià samäruhet

     koöi-janma-kåtaiù—performed in millions of births; päpaiù—by sins; patitaù—fallen; yaù—who; api—even; pätaké—a sinner; cakra-térthasya—of cakra-térth; sopänam—the steps; etya—attaining; muktim—liberation; samäruhet—attains.

      Degraded person who has sinned in many millions of births attains liberation if he comes to the steps of Cakra-tértha.

Text 15 

çré-bahuläçva uväca 

gomatyäà hi mahä-nadyäà
     cakra-térthaà çubhärthadam
kathaà jätaà bahu-mataà
     tan me brühi mahä-mate

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; gomatyäm—at Gomaté; hi—indeed; mahä-nadyäm—the great river; cakra-tértham—Cakra-tértha; çubhärthadam—giving a great benefit; katham—how?; jätam—born; bahu-matam—considered great; tan—that; me—to me; brühi—please tell; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: O noble-hearted one, please tell me how Cakra-tértha by the great Gomaté river became so glorious and beneficial.

Text 16 

çré-närada uväca 

atraivodäharantémaà
     itihäsaà purätanaà
yasya darçana-mätreëa
     päpa-häniù parä bhavet

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atra—here; eva—indeed; udäharanti—say; imam—this; itihäsam—story; purätanam—ancient; yasya—of which; darçana-mätreëa—simnply by seeing; päpa-häniù—by release from sins; parä—great; bhavet—is.

     Çré Närada said: The sages tell an ancient story of how by simply seeing Cakra-tértha one becomes free of all sins.

Text 17 

alakeço räja-räjo
     nidhéço dharma-bhåt prabhuù
vaiçëavaà yajïam ärebhe
     kailäsottara-bhümiçu

     alakeçaù—Alakeça; räja-räjaù—king of kings; nidhéçaù—rich; dharma-bhåt—pious; prabhuù—master; vaiçëavam—for Lord Viçëu; yajïam—a yajna; ärebhe—began; kailäsottara-bhümiçu—on top of Mount Kailäsa.

     There once was a great, pious, and wealthy king named Alakeça, who performed a Viçëu-yajïa on the summit of Mount Kailäsa.

Texts 18 and 19 

tasya yajïe svayaà viçëur
     ägato vai sva-dhämataù
brahmä çivo jambhabhedé
     varuëo yadasäà patiù

väyur yamo raviù somaù
     kçitiù sarva-janeçvaré
gandharväpsarasaù siddhäù
     sarve tatra samäyayuù

     tasya—of him; yajïe—at the yajna; svayam—personally; viçëuù—Lord Viçëu; ägataù—came; vai—indeed; sva-dhämataù—from His own abode; brahmä—Brahmä; çivaù—Çiva; jambhabhedé—Indra; varuëaù—Varuëa; yadasäm—of the waters; patiù—thbe master; väyuù—Vayu; yamaù—Yama; raviù—Surya; somaù—Candra; kçitiù—Ksiti; sarva-janeçvaré—the queen of all people; gandharväpsarasaù—the Gandharvas and Apsaras; siddhäù—the Siddhas; sarve—all; tatra—there; samäyayuù—came.

     Traveling from His own abode, Lord Viçëu personally came to his yajïa, and Brahmä, Çiva, Indra, Varuëa king of the waters, Väyu, Yama, Sürya, Candra, Kçiti the earth goddess who rules all people, and all the Gandharvas, Apsaräs, and Siddhas also came.

Text 20 

devarçayaù samäjagmus
     tathä brahmarçayo nåpa
dhanädhyakço 'bhavat tasya
     putras te nalaküvaraù

     devarçayaù—the divine sages; samäjagmuù—came; tathä—so; brahmarçayaù—the Brahmana safes; nåpa—O king; dhanädhyakçaù—Kuvera; abhavat—was; tasya—of him; putraù—the son; tu—indeed; nalaküvaraù—Nalakuvara.

     O king, the devarçis and Brahmarçis also came. Kuvera and his son Nalaküvara were also there.

Text 21 

rakçäyäà vérabhadro 'bhüt
     seväyäà ca gajänanaù
tathä marud-gaëäù sarve
     pariveçaëa-käriëaù

     rakçäyäm—in protection; vérabhadraù—Vérabhadra; abhüt—was there; seväyäm—in service; ca—and; gajänanaù—Gaëeça; tathä—so; marud-gaëäù—the Maruts; sarve—all; pariveçaëa-käriëaù—serving meals.

     Vérabhadra was there as a guard. Gaëeça was there to render service. All the Maruts were there to serve meals.

Texts 22 and 23 

bähuleyaù sabhä-püjäà
     akarod dharma-tat-paraù
ghaëöänädaù pärçvamauliù
     kuverasya tu mantriëau

sarva-çastra-vidäà çreçöhau
     dänädhyakçau babhüvatuù
evaà hi vidhi-vad yajïo
     babhüva paramotsavaù

     bähuleyaù—kärttikeya; sabhä—of the assembly; püjäm—worship; akarot—did; dharma-tat-paraù—pious; ghaëöänädaù—Ghantanada; pärçvamauliù—Parsvamauli; kuverasya—of Kuvera; tu—indeed; mantriëau—the two ministers; sarva-çastra-vidäm—of they who know all the scriptures; çreçöhau—the best; dänädhyakçau—generous; babhüvatuù—were; evam—thus; hi—indeed; vidhi-vat—properly; yajïaù—the yajna; babhüva—was; paramotsavaù—a great festival.

     Kärttikeya worshiped the assembly. Kuvera's two ministers, Ghaëöänäda and Pärçvamauli, who were very generous and most learned in the scriptures, were also there. In this way the yajïa, carefully performed according to the rules and regulations, was a great and festive success.

Text 24 

adhvarävabhåta-snäto
     räja-räjo mahä-manäù
paraà bhägaà ca devebhyo
     viprebhyo dakçiëäm adät

     adhvarävabhåta-snätaù—having taken the sacrifical bath; räja-räjaù—the great king; mahä-manäù—noble-hearted; param—great; bhägam—portion; ca—and; devebhyaù—to the demigods; viprebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; dakçiëäm—daksina; adät—gave.

     Having performed the avabhåta bath, the noble-hearted king gave sacrifical offerings to the demigods and dakçiëä to the brähmaëas.

Text 25 

evaà pürëe 'dhvare mukhye
     tuçöe devarçi-sattame
äjagämätha durväsä
     daëòé chatré jaöädharaù

     evam—thus; pürëe—completed; adhvare—the yajna; mukhye—primary; tuçöe—pleased; devarçi-sattame—the best of sages and demigods; äjagäma—came; atha—then; durväsä—Durväsä; daëòé—holding a stick; chatré—holding a parasol; jaöädharaù—his hair matted.

     When the yajïa was thus completed and the sages and demigods were all pleased, Durväsä Muni, holding a stick and a parasol, suddenly arrived.

Text 26 

krodhé kåçaù pädukäëghrir
     dérgha-smaçruù kåçodaraù
darbhäsana-samit-pätra-
     måga-carma-dharaù paraù

     krodhé—angry; kåçaù—emaciated; pädukäëghriù—wearing sandals on his feet; dérgha-smaçruù—with a long beard; kåçodaraù—a slender waist; darbhäsana—a seat of kuça grass; samit-pätra—with a kamandalu; måga-carma-dharaù—wearing a deerskin; paraù—great.

     His beard was long. He carried a kamaëòalu and a kuça-grass seat. He wore sandals and a deerskin garment. He was very thin and emaciated, and he was very angry.

Text 27 

tam ägataà samägamya
     püjayitvä vidhänataù
bhaya-bhétaù parikramya
     kuveraù praëanäma ha

     tam—to him; ägatam—come; samägamya—approaching; püjayitvä—worshiping; vidhänataù—properly; bhaya-bhétaù—frightened; parikramya—circumambulating; kuveraù—Kuvera; praëanäma—bowed down; ha—indeed.

     Frightened, Kuvera approached him, worshiped him, circumambulated him, and bowed down before him.

Text 28 

adya me sa-phalaà janma
     sa-phalaà mandiraà ca me
adya me sa-phalo yajïo
     brahmaàs tvayy ägate sati

     adya—today; me—me; sa-phalam—fruitful; janma—birth; sa-phalam—fruitful; mandiram—home; ca—and; me—my; adya—today; me—my; sa-phalaù—fruitful; yajïaù—the yajna; brahmaàù—O brähmaëa; tvayi—now that you; ägate—have come; sati—being so.

     Kuvera said: O brähmaëa, now that you have come here, my life is a success, my home is a success, and this yajïa is a success.

Text 29 

itthaà santoçitas tena
     durväsä bhagavän muniù
devaà manuçya-dharmäëäà
     präha prahasitänanaù

     ittham—thus; santoçitaù—pleased; tena—by that; durväsä—Durväsä; bhagavän—Lord; muniù—the sage; devam—to the Lord; manuçya-dharmäëam—of human religious principles; präha—said; prahasitänanaù—smiling.

     Pleased by all this, the great sage Durväsä spoke about the religious duties of human beings.

Text 30 

tvaà räja-räjo dharmätmä
     däné vipra-paräyaëaù
kåtas te vaiçëavo yajïo
     viçëu-santoça-käraëaù

     tvam—you; räja-räjaù—a great king; dharmätmä—pious; däné—generous; vipra-paräyaëaù—devotedf to the brähmaëas; kåtaù—done; te—of you; vaiçëavaù—to Lord Viçëu; yajïaù—a yajna; viçëu-santoça-käraëaù—pleasing to Lord Viçëu.

     He said: You are a great king. You are pious, generous, and devoted to the brähmaëas. Your yajïa has pleased Lord Viçëu.

Text 31 

na yäcito mayä tvaà vai
     kväpi vaiçravaëa prabho
adyaiva yacanaà kurve
     jïätvä tvaà däni-sattamam

     na—not; yäcitaù—asked; mayä—by me; tvam—you; vai—indeed; kväpi—somewhere; vaiçravaëa—O Kuvera; prabhaù—O lord; adya—today; eva—indeed; yacanam—request; kurve—I do; jïätvä—knowing; tvam—you; däni-sattamam—the most generous.

     O Lord Kuvera, in the past I have never asked any favors of you, but today, aware that you are very generous by nature, I have a request to ask of you.

Text 32 

mad-yäcïäà sa-phalé-kuryäs
     tubhyaà däsyämi sad-varam
na cet tvaà bhasmasät kurve
     çäpenäti-bhayena vai

     mat—my; yäcnäm—request; sa-phalé-kuryäù—please make fruitful; tubhyam—to you; däsyämi—I will give; sad-varam—a boon; na—not; cet—if; tvam—you; bhasmasät—burned to ashes; kurve—I will make; çäpena—with a curse; ati-bhayena—fightening; vai—indeed.

     Please grant my request. If you do, I will give you a boon. If you do not, I will burn you to ashes with a frightening curse. 

Text 33 

vartante tvad-gåhe sarve
     trailokya-nidhayo navä
tan me prayaccha bhadraà te
     tad-arthaà gatavän aham

     vartante—are; tvad-gåhe—in your home; sarve—all; trailokya-nidhayaù—the wealth of the three worlds; navä—nine; tan—that; me—to me; prayaccha—please give; bhadram—auspiciousness; te—to you; tad-artham—for that purpose; gatavän—come; aham—I.

     In your home you keep the nine treasures that are the most precious in the three worlds. Please give them to me. May your life be auspicious. For that purpose I have come.

Text 34 

çré-närada uväca 

etac chrutvä räja-räjo
     däna-çéla udära-dhéù
om iti pratigåhëéçva
     präha taà guhyakeçvaraù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; etat—this; çrutvä—hearing; räja-räjaù—that great king; däna-çéla—devoted to giving charity; udära—-dhéù—generous at heart; om—yes; iti—thus; pratigåhëéçva—please take; präha—said; tam—to him; guhyakeçvaraù—Kuvera.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these words, generous and charitable Kuvera said, “Yes. I agree. Please take them.

Text 35 

evaà nidhén pradäsyantaà
     dänädhyakçau nidhéçvaram
ghaëöänädaù pärçvamaulir
     ücatur lobha-mohitau

     evam—thus; nidhén—the treasures; pradäsyantam—about to give; dänädhyakçau—generous; nidhéçvaram—to Kuvera; ghaëöänäda—Ghantanada; pärçvamauliù—and Parsvamauli; ücatuù—said; lobha-mohitau—bewildered by greed.

     As Kuvera was about to give the nine treasures, his two ministers, Ghaëöänäda and Pärçvamauli, who were bewildered with greed, spoke.

Text 36 

dväv ücatuù 

eko 'yaà brähmaëo lobhé
     nidhibhiù kià kariçyati
lakçaà divyaà dehi cäsmai
     våttià rakça tathottaräm

     dvau—the two; ücatuù—said; ekaù—one; ayam—this; brähmaëaù—brähmaëa; lobhé—greedy; nidhibhiù—with treasures; kim—what is the need?; kariçyati—will do; lakçam—a hundred thousand; divyam—splendid; dehi—give; ca—and; asmai—to him; våttim—wealth; rakça—protect; tathä—then; uttaram—great.

     The two ministers said: What will this greedy brähmaëa do with those great treasures? Give him a hundred thousand other things and keep the nine great treasures for yourself. 

Text 37 

çré-närada uväca 

paruçaà tad-vacaù çrutvä
     durväsäù krodha-vigrahaù
bhrü-bhaëga-kuöilé-bhüte
     rakta-netre cakära ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; paruçam—harsh; tad-vacaù—their words; çrutvä—hearing; durväsäù—Durväsä; krodha-vigrahaù—filled with anger; bhrü-bhaëga-kuöilé-bhüte—knitting his eyebrows; rakta-netre—his eyes red; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: When he heard these harsh words Durväsä became filled with anger. His eyes were red and his eyebrows knitted with anger.

Text 38 

sthaléva sarva-brahmäëòaà
     cacäla nimiça-dvayam
praëataà dhanadaà vékçya
     täbhyäà çäpaà dadau muniù

     sthalé—a place; iva—as if; sarva-brahmäëòam—the entire universe; cacäla—went; nimiça-dvayam—for two brief moments; praëatam—bowing down; dhanadam—Kuvera; vékçya—seeing; täbhyäm—to them; çäpam—a curse; dadau—gave; muniù—the sage.

     For the time of two eyeblinks the entire universe shook. Seeing Kuvera humbly bowing down before him, Durväsä Muni proceeded to curse the two ministers.

Text 39 

çré-munir uväca 

ghaëöänäda mahä-duçöa
     päpa-buddhe 'ti-lubdhaka
grähavat tvaà dhana-grähé
     gräho bhava mahä-khala

     çré-munir uväca-the sage said; ghaëöänäda—O Ghantanada; mahä-duçöa—wicked; päpa-buddhe—sinful; ati-lubdhaka—very greedy; grähavat—like a crocodile; tvam—you; dhana-grähé—grasping for wealth; grähaù—a crocodile; bhava—become; mahä-khala—O wretch.

     Çré Durväsä said: Sinful, wicked, greedy Ghaëöänäda, you clutch at wealth as crocodile would clutch. I curse you: Become a crocodile! 

Text 40 

pärçvamaule päpa-buddhe
     dhana-lobha-madänvitaù
gajavat preraëaà kurvaàs
     tvaà gajo bhava durmate

     pärçvamaule—Pärçvamauli; päpa-buddhe—sinful; dhana-lobha-madänvitaù—greedy; gajavat—like an elephant; preraëam—pushing; kurvaàù—doing; tvam—you; gajaù—an elephant; bhava—become; durmate—O wretch.

     Sinful, wicked, greedy Pärçvamauli, you are pushy like an elephant. I curse you: Become an elephant!

Text 41 

çré-närada uväca 

täbhyäà çäpaà munir dattvä
     nidhià nitvä kuverataù
varaà dadau punas tasmai
     durväsä durlabhaà param

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; täbhyäm—to them; çäpam—curse; muniù—the sage; dattvä—giving; nidhim—wealth; nitvä—taking; kuverataù—from Kuvera; varam—boon; dadau—gave; punaù—again; tasmai—to him; durväsä—Durväsä; durlabham—rare; param—great.

     Çré Närada said: After thus cursing the two ministers, Durväsä Muni took the nine treasures from Kuvera and then offered him a great and rare boon.

Text 42 

asmäd dänäc ca dvi-guëä
     bhavantu nidhayo nava
ity uktvä sa-nidhiù prägäd
     aho tejéyasäà balam

     asmät—from bim; dänät—from the wealth; ca—and; dvi-guëä—doubled; bhavantu—may be; nidhayaù—treasures; nava—nine; ity—thus; uktvä—saying; sa-nidhiù—the treasure; pragät—went; ahaù—Oh; tejéyasäm—power; balam—power.

     Durväsä Muni said, “Because you have offered them to me, I give you the boon that your nine treasures will now become twice as valuable as they were." As soon as these words were spoken the nine treasures became twice as valuable.

Chäpter Eleven
Çré Cakra-térthotpattau gaja-gräha-mokça
In the Creation of Cakra-tértha, the Liberation of the Elephant and the Crocodile

Text 1

kuvera-mantriëau dénau
     vipra-çäpa-vimohitau
tatra säkçät svayaà viçëuù
     präha tau çaraëaà gatau

     kuvera-mantriëau—the two ministers of Kuvera; dénau—poor; vipra-çäpa-vimohitau—bewildered by the brähmaëa's curse; tatra—there; säkçät—directly; svayam—personally; viçëuù—to Lord Viò\ëu; präha—said; tau—they; çaraëam—shelter; gatau—gone.

     Bewildered by the brähmaëa's curse, Kuvera's two unhappy ministers took shelter of Lord Viçëu.

Text 2 

çré-bhagavän uväca 

mad-arcä-samyute yajïe
     bhavantau duùkha-samyutau
brähmaëänäà vaco 'haà vai
     düré-kartuà na ca kçamaù

      çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; mad-arcä-samyute—engaged in My worship; yajïe—in the yajna; bhavantau—you both; duùkha-samyutau—unhappy; brähmaëänäm—of the brähmaëas; vacaù—the words; aham—I; vai—indeed; düré-kartum—to throw far away; na—not; ca—and; kçamaù—am able.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: You two worshiped Me in the yajïa, but now you are unhappy. I have no power to negate the words of the brähmaëas.

Text 3 

bhavetaà gräha-mätaëgau
     yuddhaà hi yuvayor yadä
tadä vai mat-prasädena
     prakåtià sväà gamiçyathaù

     bhavetam—you will become; gräha—a crocodile; mätaëgau—and an elephant; yuddham—a fight; hi—indeed; yuvayoù—between you both; yadä—when; tadä—then; vai—indeed; mat-prasädena—by My mercy; prakåtim—nature; sväm—own; gamiçyathaù—you will attain.

     You will indeed become a crocodile and an elephant. You will fight, and by My mercy you will regain your original natures.

Text 4 

çré-närada uväca 

ity uktau hariëä tau dvau
     räja-räjasya mantriëau
babhüvatur gräha-gajau
     jäti-smaraëa-samyutau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; uktau—addressed; hariëä—by Lord Kåçëa; tau—they; dvau—both; räja-räjasya—of King Kuvera; mantriëau—the ministers; babhüvatuù—became; gräha—a crocodile; gajau—and an elephant; jäti-smaraëa-samyutau—remembering their previous birth.

     Çré Närada said: After Lord Viçëu had spoken these words, Kuvera's two ministers became a crocodile and an elephant. Nevertheless, in their new station they could remember who they had been before.

Text 5 

ghaëöänädo 'bhavad gräho
     gomatyäà ca çataà samäù
vikarälo mahä-bhémaù
     çaçvad-raudra-vapur-dharaù

     ghaëöänädaù—Ghantanada; abhavat—became; grähaù—a crocodile; gomatyäm—in the Gomaté; ca—and; çatam—for a hundred; samäù—years; vikarälaù—fearsome; mahä-bhémaù—ferocious; çaçvad-raudra—always angry; vapuù—form; dharaù—manifesting.

     For one hundred years Ghaëöänäda was a fearsome, feroicous, always angry crocodile in the Gomaté river.

Text 6 

pärçvamaulir gajendro 'bhüd
     raivatasya girer vane
catur-dantaù kajjaläbhaù
     påçöha-procco dhanuù-çatam

     pärçvamauliù—Pärçvamauli; gajendraù—the king of elephants; abhüt——was; raivatasya—Rauivata; gireù—Mount; vane—in the forest; catur-dantaù—with four tusks; kajjaläbhaù—splendid as black kajjala; påçöha-proccaù— dhanuù-çatam—a hundred dhanus tall.

     Pärçvamauli became a regal elephant in the forest by Mount Raivata. He was a hundred dhanus tall.

Texts 7-9 

vaïjulaiù kuravaiù kundair
     badarair vetra-veëubhiù
rambhä-bhür javaöair yukte
     kovidäräsanärjunaiù

mandära-päöaläçoka-
     cuta-campaka-candanaiù
panasodambaräçvattha-
     kharjurair béja-pürakair

priyälämrätakämraiç ca
     kramukaiù parimaëòite
raivatasya vane dérghe
     vicacära mahä-gajaù

     vaïjulaiù—with vanjulas; kuravaiù—kuravas; kundaiù—kundas; badaraiù—badaras; vetra-veëubhiù—vetra-venus; rambhä-bhüù—rambhas; javaöaiù—javatas; yukte—endowed; kovidäräsanärjunaiù—kovidaras, asanas, and arjunas; mandära—mandaras; päöala—patalas; açoka—asokas; cuta—cutas; campaka—campakas; candanaiù—candanas; panasa—panasas; udambara—udambaras; açvattha—asvatthas;  kharjuraiù—kharjuras; béja-pürakaiù—bija-purakas; priyälämrätakämraiù—priyalas, amratakas, and amras; ca—and; kramukaiù—kramukas; parimaëòite—decorated; raivatasya—of Raivata; vane—in the forest; dérghe—great; vicacära—walked; mahä-gajaù—the great elephant.

     That great elephant wandered in Mount Raivata's forest, which was decorated with many vaïjulas, kuravas, kundas, badaras, vetra-veëus, rambhäs, javaöas, kovidäras, äsanas, arjunas, mandäras, päöalas, açokas, cutas, campakas, candanas, panasas, udambaras, açvatthas, kharjuras, béja-pürakas, priyälas, amrätakas, amras kramukas, and other trees and plants.

Text 10 

ekadä mädhave mäsi
     gajendro giri-gahvarät
snätuà taà gomatéà gaëgäà
     äyayau sa-gaëo nadan

     ekadä—one day; mädhave—of Madhava; mäsi—in the month; gajendraù—that regal elephant; giri-gahvarät—from the mountain; snätum—to bathe; tam—that; gomatéà gaëgäm—Gomaté river; äyayau—went; sa-gaëaù—with its followers; nadan—trumpeting.

     One day in the month of Mädhava (April-May), that regal elephant left Mount Raivata and went, trumpeting and followed by its associates, to the Gomaté river to bathe.

Text 11 

ciraà samavagähyäpsu
     çuëòä-daëòair itas tataù
kareëa kalabhän sarvän
     snäpayäm äsa näga-räö

     ciram—for along time; samavagähya—immersed; äpsu—in the water; çuëòä-daëòaiù—with many trunks; itaù—here; tataù—and there; kareëa—with a trunk; kalabhän—children; sarvän—all; snäpayäm äsa—bathed; näga-räö—the regal elephant.

     O king of Videha, bathing his children with water from his trunk, the regal elephant stayed in the water for a long time.

Text 12 

mahän gräho 'pi tatra-stho
     baléyän daiva-noditaù
agrahéc caraëe nägaà
     krodha-pürita-vigrahaù

     mahän—a great; grähaù—crocodile; api—also; tatra-sthaù—staying there; baléyän—powerful; daiva-noditaù—sent by fate; agrahét—grabbed; caraëe—on the foot; nägam—the elephant; krodha-pürita-vigrahaù—filled with anger.

     Sent by fate, a powerful and angry crocodile grabbed the elephant's foot.

Text 13 

tenaiva tad-gåhe néto
     gajendro bala-darpitaù
tam äkåçya bahiù präptaà
     punas tena vikarçitaù

     tena—by him; eva—indeed; tad-gåhe—to his home; nétaù—taken; gajendraù—the elephant king; bala-darpitaù—proud of his strength; tam—him; äkåçya—dragging; bahiù—out; präptam—attained; punaù—again; tena—by him; vikarçitaù—dragged.

     The crocodile dragged the elephant to its crocodile home in the water. Proud of his strength, the elephant then dragged the crocodile onto the land. Then the crocodile dragged the elphant again into the water.

Text 14 

kareëavaç ca kalabhäs
     taà tärayitum akçamäù
evaà tayor yudhyatoç ca
     karçator hi bahir mithaù

     kareëavaù—the female elephants; ca—and; kalabhäù—the children; tam—him; tärayitum—to rescue; akçamäù—unable; evam—thus; tayoù—of them both; yudhyatoù—fighting; ca—and; karçatoù—dragging; hi—indeed; bahiù—out; mithaù—each other.

     The female elephants and their children had no power to rescue the regal elephant. Dragging each other in and out of the water, the elephant and the crocodile fought.

Text 15 

païcäçat-païca-varçäëi
     vyatéyuù paçyatäà satäm
evaà kaçmalam äpanno
     gajo jäti-smaro mahän

     païcäçat-païca-varçäëi—55 years; vyatéyuù—passed; paçyatäm—looking on; satäm—the devotees; evam—thus; kaçmalam—weakness; äpannaù—attained; gajaù—the elephant; jäti-smaraù—remembering his past birth; mahän—great.

     As many saintly persons watched, the crocodile and the elephant fought for fifty-five years. Finally the elephant, now exhausted, remembered his previous birth.

Text 16 

prema-lakçaëayä bhaktyä
     hari-päda-kåtäçrayaù
sasmära çré-harià devaà
     måtyu-päça-vaçaà gataù

     prema-lakçaëayä—characterized by love; bhaktyä—with devotion; hari-päda-kåtäçrayaù—takign shelter of Lord Hari's lotus feet; sasmära—remembered; çré-harim—Lord Hari; devam—the Lord; måtyu-päça-vaçam—subdued by the ropes of death; gataù—attained.

     Finding himself almost caught in the noose of death, the elephant remembered his previous birth and took shelter of the feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 17 

çré-gajendra uväca 

çré-kåçëa kåçëa-sakha kåçëa-vapur-dadhäna
     kåçëäya te praëatir astu sureça viçëo
pürëa prabho parama-pävana puëya-kérte
     mäà pähi pähi parameçvara päpa-päçät

     çré-gajendra uväca—the regal elephant said; çré-kåçëa—O Çré Kåçëa; kåçëa-sakha—O friend of Arjuna; kåçëa-vapur-dadhäna—who has a dark form; kåçëäya—to Kåçëa; te—to You; praëatiù—obeisances; astu—are; sureça—O master of the demigods; viçëaù—O Viçëu; pürëa—O perfect; prabhaù—Lord; parama-pävana—O great purifier; puëya-kérte—O glorious one; mäm—me; pähi—save; pähi—save; parameçvara—O Supreme Personality of Godhead; päpa—of sin; päçät—from the noose.

     The regal elephant said: O Çré Kåçëa, O friend of Arjuna, O dark Lord, I offer my respectful obeisances to You. O master of the demigods, O Viçëu, O perfect Lord, O supreme purifier, O glorious one, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, please, please save Me! Save me from the noose of my past sins!

Text 18 

çré-närada uväca 

evaà präha gåhétäëgaà
     smarantaà ca harià hariù
jïätväruhya khagaà vegäd
     adhavad déna-vatsalaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; präha—said; gåhéta—grabbed; aëgam—limb; smarantam—remembering; ca—and; harim—Lord Hari; hariù—Lord Hari; jïätvä—understanding; äruhya—raising; khagam—His sword; vegät—quickly; adhavat—ran; déna—to the poor; vatsalaù—affectionate.

     Çré Närada said: Aware that the elephant caught in the crocodile's grip was remembering Him, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is kind to the distressed, picked up His sword and flew to that place.

Text 19 

svayaà khagät samuttérya
     dhävaàç cakraà samäkçipat
cakre präpte pürvam eva
     grähasyäpi çiro 'dbhutam

     svayam—personally; khagät—from garuòa; samuttérya—descending; dhävan—running; cakram—cakra; samäkçipat—threw; cakre—the cakre; präpte—attained; pürvam—before; eva—indeed; grähasya—of the crocodile; api—also; çiraù—the head; adbhutam—wonderful.

     Descending from Garuòa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead threw His cakra and wonderfully severed the crocodile's head.

Text 20 

dainyaà präpte dhanam iva
     dehäd bhinnaà babhüva ha
paçcät prapatitaà cakraà
     gomatyäà ca hrade nadat 
päçäëa-nicayän sarväàs 
     cakräkäräàç cakära ha

     dainyam—humbleness; präpte—attained; dhanam—wealth; iva—like; dehät—from the body; bhinnam—broken; babhüva—was; ha—indeed; paçcät—from behind; prapatitam—fallen; cakram—the cakra; gomatyäm—into the Gomaté river; ca—and; hrade—in a lake; nadät—from the sound; päçäëa-nicayän—many stones; sarvän—all; cakräkärän—the forms of the cakra; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     As a person may suddenly lose all his wealth, that spirit soul was suddenly pushed out of a crocodile's body. After killing the crocodile, the Lord's cakra continued until in finally landed in a lake, turning all the stones there into incarnations of the cakra.

Text 21 

tan-nemi-saëgharça-bhavaà
     cakra-térthaà çubhävaham
tac-cakra-darçanäd räjan
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate

     tan-nemi-saëgharça-bhavam—by the contact of the cakra; cakra-tértham—Cakra-tértha; çubhävaham—auspicous; tat-cakra-darçanät—by the sight of the Sudarçana-cakra; räjan—O king; brahma-hatyä—the sin of killing a brähmaëa; pramucyate—is freed.

     In this way, by the touch of the Lord's Sudarçana-cakra, the auspicious holy place Cakra-tértha was created. Simply be seeing Cakra-tértha, a person becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

Text 22 

grähaç chinna-çirä bhütvä
     pürva-rüpaà dadhära ha
çré-kåçëänugrahäd dhasté
     divya-rüpo babhüva saù

     grähaù—the crocodile; chinna—severed; çirä—head; bhütvä—becoming; pürva-rüpam—his previous form; dadhära—manifested; ha—indeed; çré-kåçëa—of Çré Kåçëa; anugrahät—by the mercy; hasté—the elephant; divya-rüpaù—a demigod form; babhüva—became; saù—he.

     His head severed, the crocodile attained his original form of a demigod. By the mercy of Lord Kåçëa, the elephant also attained the form of a demigod.

Text 23 

parikramya harià natvä
     stutvä devaà kåtäïjaliù
kuvera-mantriëau tau dvau
     jagmatuù sva-padaà punaù

     parikramya—circumambulating; harim—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; natvä—bowing; stutvä—offering prayers; devam—to the Lord; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; kuvera-mantriëau—tne ministers of Kuvera; tau—the; dvau—both; jagmatuù—went; sva-padam—to their own abode; punaù—again.

     After circumambulating the Lord, bowing down before Him, and offering prayers with folded hands, Kuvera's two ministers returned to their own abode.

Text 24 

deveçu puçpaà varçatsu
     jaya-dhvani-nadatsu ca
jagäma bhagavän säkçät
     svaà dhäma prakåteù param

     deveçu—as the demigods; puçpam—flowers; varçatsu—showered; jaya-dhvani-nadatsu—calling out “Victory!"; ca—and; jagäma—went; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkçät—Himself; svam—to His own; dhäma—abode; prakåteù—the world of matter; param—beyond.

     As the demigods showered flowers and called out “Victory!", the Supreme Personality of Godhead returned to His own abode beyond the world of matter.

Text 25 

cakra-tértha-kathäm enäà
     yaù çåëoti narottamaù
cakra-tértha-snäna-phalaà
     sampräpnoti na saàçayaù

     cakra-tértha—of Cakra-tértha; kathäm—story; enäm—this; yaù—one who; çåëoti—hears; narottamaù—the best of men; cakra-tértha—of Cakra-tértha; snäna—bathing; phalam—the result; sampräpnoti—attains; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     One who hears this story of Cakra-tértha becomes the best of men. He attains the same result attained by bathing at Cakra-tértha. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 26 

gaja-gräha-kathäà puëyäà
     yaù çåëoti samähitaù
duù-svapnaà naçyate tasya
     su-svapnaà bhavati dhruvam
çré-kåçëasya prasädena 
     yäti viçëoù paraà padam  

     gaja—of the elephant; gräha—and the crocodile; kathäm—story; puëyäm—sacred; yaù—one who; çåëoti—hears; samähitaù—attentive; duù-svapnam—nightmares; naçyate—destroyed; tasya—of him; su-svapnam—pleasant dreams; bhavati—are; dhruvam—indeed; çré-kåçëasya—of Çré Kåçëa; prasädena—by the mercy; yäti—attains; viçëoù—of Lord Viçëu; param—the supreme; padam—abode.

     A person who attentively hears this story of the elephant and the crocodile becomes free of bad dreams. All his dreams will be pleasant. By Lord Kåçëa's mercy he will attain the transcendental abode of Lord Viçëu.

Chäpter Twelve
Çaëkhoddhära-mähätmya
The Glories of Çaëkhoddhära-tértha

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

çaëkhoddhäre tértha-mukhye
     svarëa-dänaà dadäti yaù
sa gacched vaiçëavaà lokaà
     sarvopadrava-varjitam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çaëkhoddhäre—Çaëkhoddhära; tértha-mukhye—the sacred place; svarëa-dänam—gift of gold; dadäti—goves; yaù—who; sa—he; gacchet—attains; vaiçëavam—of Lord Viçëu; lokam—the world; sarvopadrava-varjitam—without any trouble.

     Çré Närada said: A person who at sacred Çaëkhoddhära-tértha gives charity of gold attains the realm of Lord Viçëu without encountering any obstacles on his path. 
Text 2 

çré-kåçëa-bhaktaù çäntätmä
     trito näma mahä-muniù
tértha-yätåa-prasaëgena
     präpta änarta-bhümiçu

     çré-kåçëa-bhaktaù—a devotee of Lord Kåçëa; çäntätmä—peaceful at heart; tritaù—Trita; näma—named; mahä-muniù—a great sage; tértha-yätåa-prasaëgena—by going on pilgrimage; präpta—attained; änarta-bhümiçu—the land of Anarta.

     A great sage named Trita, who was peaceful at heart and a devotee of Lord Kåçëa, went on a pilgrimage to the land of Anarta.

Text 3 

dåçövä çubhaà saraù snätvä
     hareù püjäà cakära ha
tat-püjäyäà mahä-çaëkhaà\
     sundarair lakçaëair våtaà        

     dåçövä—seeing; çubham—the beautiful; saraù—lake; snätvä—bathing; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; püjäm—the worship; cakära—did; ha—indeed; tat-püjäyäm—in that worship; mahä-çaëkhaà—a great conchshell; sundaraiù—with beautiful; lakçaëaiù—qualities; våtam—endowed.       

     Seeing a beautiful lake there, Trita bathed and then worshiped Lord Kåçëa. In his worship he used a great and very beautiful conchshell.

Text 4 

corayäm äsa kakçiväàs
     tasya çiçyo 'ti-lobhataù
püjä-çaëkhaà gataà vékçya
     kruddhaù präha trito muniù

     corayäm äsa—stole; kakçivän—Kakçivän; tasya—his; çiçyaù—disciple; ati-lobhataù—out of greed; püjä-çaëkham—the conchshell used in the worship; gatam—gone; vékçya—seeing; kruddhaù—angry; präha—said; tritaù—Trita; muniù—the sage.

     Impelled by greed, the sage's disciple Kakçivän stole the conchshell. Seeing that the conchshell was missing, Trita Muni became angry and said:

Text 5 

yena nétas tu me çaëkhaù
     sa çaëkho bhavatu dhruvam
tadaiva çaëkha-rüpo 'bhüt
     kakçivän chäpa-péòitaù

     yena—by whom; nétaù—taken; tu—indeed; me—my; çaëkhaù—conchshell; sa—he; çaëkhaù—a conch; bhavatu—may become; dhruvam—indeed; tadä—then; eva—indeed; çaëkha-rüpaù—the form of a conch; abhüt—became; kakçivän—Kaksivan; çäpa-péòitaù—troubled by the curse.

     “Whoever has stolen my conchshell will become a conch." Cursed in this way, Kakçivän at once became a conch.

Text 6 

tat-pädayor nipatitaù
     pähi mäm ity uväca ha
çéghraà çäntas tritaù präha
     durmate kià kåtaà tvayä 
steya-doçäd bhuëkçva päpaà 
     mad-vaco no måçä bhavet

     tat—of him; pädayoù—at the feet; nipatitaù—fallen; pähi—save; mäm—me; ity—thsu; uväca—said; ha—indeed; çéghram—quickly; çäntaù—pacified; tritaù—Trita; präha—said; durmate—fool; kim—what?; kåtam—done; tvayä—by you; steya-doçät—by the sin of theft; bhuëkçva—experience; päpam—the sin; mad-vacaù—my word; naù—not; måçä—false; bhavet—will be.

     Kakçivän fell at Trita's feet and begged, “Save me!" Trita was at once pacified. Still, he said, “Fool, what have you done? Because you have stolen, now you must suffer the sinful reaction. My words will not go in vain."

Text 7 

bhaja çré-kåçëa-pädäbjaà
     sa te mokçaà kariçyati
ity uktvätha gate räjaàs
     trite deve mahä-munau

     bhaja—worship; çré-kåçëa-pädäbjam—Çré Kåçëa's lotus feet; sa—He; te—to you; mokçam—liberation; kariçyati—will do; ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; atha—then; gate—gone; räjan—O king; trite—Trita; deve—divine; mahä-munau—great sage.

     O king, saying, “Worship Çré Kåçëa's lotus feet, and He will release you from this and give you liberation," the great sage Trita left.

Text 8 

sarovare nipatitaù
     kakçivän chaëkha-rüpa-dhåk
pravadan kåçëa kåçëeti
     çata-varçaà sthito 'bhavat

     sarovare—into the lake; nipatitaù—fell; kakçivän—Kaksivan; chaëkha-rüpa-dhåk—in the form of a conch; pravadan—saying; kåçëa—Kåçëa; kåçëa—Kåçëa; iti—thus; çata-varçam—for a hundred years; sthitaù—situated; abhavat—was.

     Kakçivän, now in the form of a conch, fell into the lake. For a hundred years he stayed there, all the time chanting “Kåçëa! Kåçëa!"

Text 9 

paripürëatamaù säkçäd
     bhagavän bhakta-vatsalaù
ägatya sarasas-téraà
     ma bhaiçöety abhayaà dadau

     paripürëatamaù—the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkçät—directly; bhagavän—the Lord; bhakta-vatsalaù—who loves His devotees; ägatya—coming; sarasas-téram—to the shore of the lake; ma—don't; bhaiçöa—be afraid; iti—thus; abhayam—fearlessness; dadau—gave.

     The perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, who dearly loves His devotees, came to that lake and, saying, “Don't be afraid, reassured Kakçivän.

Text 10 

taà megha-näda-gambhéraà
     giraà çrutvä jalecaraù
cukroça pähi pähéti
     deva-deva jagat-pate

     tam—this; megha-näda-gambhéram—deep as thunder; giram—statement; çrutvä—hearing; jalecaraù—the conch; cukroça—called out; pähi—save; pähi—save; iti—thus; deva-deva—O Lord of lords; jagat-pate—O master of the universes.

     Hearing the Lord's words deep as thunder, the conch Kakçivän called out, “Lord of lords! Master of the universes! Save me! Save me!"

Text 11 

bhujagendra-bhoga-rucä
     bhujena bhagavän prabhuù
çaëkhaà bhaktaà gajam iva
     projjahära dayä-paraù

     bhujagendra-bhoga-rucä—splendid as a serpent's coil; bhujena—with an arm; bhagavän—the Lord; prabhuù—the Lord; çaëkham—to the conch; bhaktam—devotee; gajam—elephant; iva—like; projjahära—lifted; dayä-paraù—merciful.

     Extending an arm splendid like a great serpent's coil, the merciful Supreme Personality of Godhead lifted the devotee conch, who was as large as a great elephant.

Text 12 

tadaiva divya-rüpo 'bhüc
     chaëkha-rüpaà vihäya saù
kåtäïjalir harià natvä
     stutià cakre tadä ca saù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; divya-rüpaù—the form of a demigod; abhüt——became; chaëkha-rüpam—the form of the conch; vihäya—abandoning; saù—he; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; harim—to Lord Kåçëa; natvä—bowing; stutim—prayers; cakre—did; tadä—then; ca—and; saù—he.

     His conch form gone, Kakçivän, now in the splendid form of a demigod, bowed down before the Lord and with folded hands spoke many prayers.

Text 13 

çré-kakçivän uväca 

väsudeva namas te 'stu
     govinda puruçottama
déna-vatsala déneça
     dvärakeça pareçvara

     çré-kakçivän uväca—Çré Kakçivän said; väsudeva—O son of Vasudeva; namaù—obeisances; te—to You; astu—may be; govinda—O Govinda; puruçottama—O Supreme Person; déna-vatsala—O Lord affectionate to the downtrodden; déneça—O master of the distressed; dvärakeça—O master of Dvärakä; pareçvara—O Supreme Lord.

     Çré Kakçivän said: O Väsudeva, O Govinda, O Supreme Person, O Supreme Controller, O king of Dvärakä, O master of the poor and downtrodden, O Lord who loves the poor and downtrodden, I offer my respectful obeisances to You.

Text 14 

dhruve dhruva-padaà dätre
     prahlädasyärti-häriëe
gajasyoddhäriëe tubhyaà
     baler bali-vide namaù

     dhruve—to Dhruva; dhruva-padam—the eternal realm; dätre—giving; prahlädasyärti-häriëe—removing Prahläda's sufferings; gajasyoddhäriëe—delivering the elephant; tubhyäm—ro You; baleù—of Bali; bali-vide—accepting the offering; namaù—obeisances.

     To You, who gave an eternal kingdom to Dhruva, removed Prahläda's sufferings, delivered a regal elephant, and accepted Bali's offering, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 15 

draupadé-cira-santäna-
     käriëe haraye namaù
garägni-vana-väsebhyaù
     päëòavänäà sahäyine

     draupadé—to Draupadé; céra-santäna—limitless cloth; käriëe—making; haraye—to Lord Kåçëa; namaù—obeisances; gara—from poison; agni—fire; vana—in the forest; väsebhyaù—and residence; päëòavänäm—the Päëòavas; sahäyine—helping.

     To You, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who made Draupadé's garment endless and rescued the Päëòavas from poison, fire, and exile in the forest, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 16 

yädava-träëa-kärtre ca
     çakräd abhéra-rakçiëe
guru-mätå-dvijänäà ca
     putra-dätre namo namaù

     yädava-träëa-kärtre—protecting the Yädavas; ca—and; çakrät—from Indra; abhéra-rakçiëe—protecting the gopas; guru—to His guru; mätå—mother; dvijänäm—and the brähmaëa; ca—and; putra—sons; dätre—giving; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     To You, who protected the Yädavas, protected the gopas from King Indra, and returned to Your mother, guru, and a brähmaëa the sons they had lost, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 17 

jaräsandha-nirodhärta-
     nåpänäà mokça-käriëe
någasyoddhäriëe säkçät-
     sudämne dainya-häriëe

     jaräsandha—of Jarasandha; nirodha—in the prison; ärta—suffering; nåpänäm—of the kings; mokça-käriëe—giving liberation; någasya—of King Någa; uddhäriëe—the deliverer; säkçät—directly; sudämne—to Sudämä; dainya—the poverty; häriëe—removing.

     To You, who rescued the kings suffering in Jaräsandha's prison, delivered King Någa, and ended Sudämä's poverty, I offer my respectful obeisances. 

Text 18 

väsudeväya kåçëäya
     namaù saëkarçaëäya ca
pradyumnäyäniruddhäya
     catur-vyühäya te namaù

     väsudeväya—to Lord Väsudeva; kåçëäya—to Lord Kåçëa; namaù—obeisances; saëkarçaëäya—to Lord Saëkarçaëa; ca—and; pradyumnäya—to Lord Pradyumna; aniruddhäya—to Lord Aniruddha; catur-vyühäya—to the catur-vyüha; te—to You; namaù—obeisances.

     To You, who are the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåçëa, I offer my respectful obeisances. To You, who are the Catur-vyüha: Lord Väsudeva, Lord Saëkarçaëa, Lord Pradyumna, and Lord Aniruddha, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 19 

tvam eva mätä ca pitä tvam eva
     tvam eva bandhuç ca sakhä tvam eva
tvam eva vidyä draviëaà tvam eva
     tvam eva sarvaà mama deva-deva

     tvam—You; eva—indeed; mätä—mother; ca—and; pitä—father; tvam—You; eva—indeed; tvam—You; eva—indeed; bandhuù—relative; ca—and; sakhä—friend; tvam—You; eva—indeed; tvam—You; eva—indeed; vidyä—knowledge; draviëam—wealth; tvam—You; eva—indeed; tvam—You; eva—indeed; sarvam—everything; mama—for me; deva-deva—O Lord of lords.

     You are my mother. You are my father, You are my relative. You are my friend. You are my wisdom. You are my wealth. O Lord of Lord, You are my all.

Texts 20 and 21 

çré-närada uväca 

evaà stutvä harià räjan
     kakçivän prema-püritaù
vimäna-varam ästhäya
     yädavänäà ca paçyatäm

vibhräjayan daça diçaù
     çata-sürya-sama-prabhaù
jagäma vaiçëavaà lokaà
     sarvopadrava-varjitam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; stutvä—praying; harim—to Lord Kåçëa; räjan—O king; kakçivän—Kakçivän; prema—with love; püritaù—filled; vimäna-varam—a transcendental airplane; ästhäya—boarding; yädavänäm—as the Yädavas; ca—and; paçyatäm—looked on; vibhräjayan—illuminating; daça—the ten; diçaù—directions; çata-sürya-sama-prabhaù—splendid like a hundred suns; jagäma—went; vaiçëavam—of Lord Viçëu; lokam—to the planet; sarvopadrava-varjitam—without any impediments.

     Çré Närada said: O king, after offering these prayers, Kakçivän, now filled with love, entered a spiritual airplane and, as the Yädavas looked on, without any trouble flew to the world of Lord Viçëu, filling the ten directions with light as he went.

Text 22 

çaëkhoddhäraù kåto yasmin
     hariëä maithileçvara
tasmät térthaà mahä-puëyaà
     çaëkhoddhära-prathaà gatam

     çaëkha—the conch; uddhäraù—deliverance; kåtaù—done; yasmin—where; hariëä—by Lord Kåçëa; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä; tasmät—from that; tértham—holy plave; mahä-puëyam—very sacred; çaëkhoddhära-pratham—named Çaëkhoddhära; gatam—gone.

     O king of Mithilä, this very sacred place, where Lord Kåçëa delivered a conch, is known as Çaëkhoddhära-tértha.

Text 23 

çaëkhoddhära-kathäm etäà
     yaù çåëoti narottamaù
çaëkhoddhära-snäna-phalaà
     labhate vai na saàçayaù

     çaëkhoddhära—of Çaëkhoddhära-tértha; kathäm—story; etäm—this; yaù—one who; çåëoti—hears; narottamaù—the best of men; çaëkhoddhära-snäna-phalam—the result of bathing in çaëkhoddhära-tértha; labhate—attains; vai—indeed; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who hears this story of Çaëkhoddhära-tértha becomes the best of human beings. He attains the result of bathing in Çaëkhoddhära-tértha. Of this there is no doubt.

Chapter Thirteen
Çré Prabhäsa-sarasvaté-bodha-pippala-gomaté-sindhu-saëga-mähätmya
The Glories of Prabhäsa-tértha, the Sarasvaté River, Bodha-pippala, and the Place Where the Gomaté River Meets the Ocean

Text 1

çré-närada uväca

prabhäsasyäpi mähätmyaà
     çåëu räjan mahä-mate
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     tejasäà vardhanaà param

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; prabhäsasya—of Prabhäsa; api—also; mähätmyam—the glory; çåëu—please hear; räjan—O king; mahä-mate—noble-hearted; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; tejasäm—power; vardhanam—increase; param—great.

     Çré Närada said: O noble-hearted king, please hear the story of Prabhäsa-tértha, a story that removes all sins and grants gret power.

Texts 2 and 3 

godävaryäà gurau siàhe
     hara-kçetre ca kumbhage
ravigrahe kurukçetre
     käçyäà candragrahe tathä

yat puëyaà labhate räjan
     snänato dänato naraù
tasmäc chata-guëaà puëyaà
     prabhäse ca dine dine

     godävaryäm—in the Godävaré; gurau—when Jupiter; siàhe—in Leo; hara-kçetre—at Haridwar; ca—and; kumbhage—in Aquarius; ravigrahe—eclipse of the sun; kurukçetre—at Kurukçetra; käçyäm—in Väräëasé; candragrahe—eclipse of the moon; tathä—so; yat—which; puëyam—piety; labhate—attains; räjan—O king; snänataù—by bathing; dänataù—by giving charity; naraù—a person; tasmät—than that; çata—a hundred times; guëam—multiplied; puëyam—piety; prabhäse—at Prabhäsa; ca—and; dine—day; dine—after day.

     By bathing and giving charity at Prabhäsa-tértha one attains a pious result a hundred times greater than the result attained by bathing and giving charity at the Godävaré river when Jupiter is in Leo, at Haridwar when Jupiter is in Aquarius, at Kurukçetra during a solar eclipse, or at Väräëasé during a lunar eclipse.

Text 4 

yatra snätvä dakça-çäpäd
     gåhéto yakçmaëoòuräö
vimuktaù kilbiçät sadyo
     bheje bhüyaù kalodayam

     yatra—where; snätvä—bathing; dakça-çäpät—from Daksa's curse; gåhétaù—taken; yakçmaëa—stricken with consumption; uòuräö—the moon; vimuktaù—free; kilbiçät—from sin; sadyaù—at once; bheje—attained; bhüyaù—again; kalä—of the phases; udayam—the rising.

     By bathing at Prabhäsa-tértha, the moon-god became free of the disease he obtained by Dakça's curse, although he did show his phases again afterward.

Text 5 

mahä-puëyatamä räjan
     yatra pratyak sarasvaté
tasyäà snätvä naraù päpé
     säkçäd brahmamayo bhavet

     mahä-puëyatamä—most sacred; räjan—O king; yatra—where; pratyak—west; sarasvaté—Sarasvaté; tasyäm—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; päpé—sinful; säkçät—directly; brahmamayaù—spiritual; bhavet—becomes.

     O king, in that place the Sarasvaté river flows in a western course. A sinner who bathes in the Sarasvaté there attains a spiritual body.

Text 6 

tat-tére vartate räjan
     nämnä vai bodha-pippalam
kåçëena yatroddhaväya
     dattaà bhägavataà çubham

     tat-tére—on that shore; vartate—is; räjan—O king; nämnä—by name; vai—indeed; bodha-pippalam—Bodha-pippala; kåçëena—by Lord Kåçëa; yatra—where; uddhaväya—to Uddhava; dattam—given; bhägavatam—the Çrémad-Bhägavatam; çubham—beautiful;

     On the shore of the Sarasvaté is a place named Bodha-pippala, where Lord Kåçëa gave the beautiful Çrémad-Bhägavatam to Uddhava.

Texts 7 and 8 

taà natväbhyarcya vidhivat
     spåçövä çré-bodha-pippalam
çåëoti yo bhägavataà
     puräëaà brahma-saàhitam

çlokärdhaà çloka-pädaà vä
     mauné niyata-mänasaù
tasya päëau bhaved räjan
     vaiçëavaà paramaà padam

     tam—to that; natvä—bowing; abhyarcya—worshiping; vidhivat—properly; spåçövä—touching; çré-bodha-pippalam—Bodha-pippala; çåëoti—hears; yaù—one who; bhägavatam—Çrémad-Bhägavatam; puräëam—Puräëa; brahma-saàhitam—scripture; çlokärdham—half a stanza; çloka-pädam—a single line of a stanza; vä—or; mauné—silent; niyata-mänasaù—controlling his mind; tasya—of him; päëau—in the hand; bhavet—is; räjan—O king; vaiçëavam—of Lord Viçëu; paramam—supreme; padam—abode.

     A person who is silent, controls his mind, visits, properly worships, and touches sacred Bodha-pippala, and hears the sacred Çrémad-Bhägavatam Puräëa, or even only half a stanza of it, or even only a single line of a stanza, in Bodha-pippala, finds the supreme abode of Lord Viçëu is placed in his hand.

Text 9 

prauçöha-padyäà pürëimäyäà
     hema-siàha-samanvitam
dadäti yo bhägavataà
     sa yäti paramäà gatim

     prauçöha-padyäm—in the month of Bhädra (August-September); pürëimäyäm—on the full moon day; hema-siàha-samanvitam—with a golden throne; dadäti—gives; yaù—who; bhägavatam—Çrémad-Bhägavatam; sa—he; yäti—attains; paramäm—the supreme; gatim—abode.

     A person who on the full-moon day of the month of Bhädra (August-September) gives a gift of Çrémad-Bhägavatam resting on a golden throne attains the supreme destination.

Text 10 

puräëaà na çrutaà yais tu
     çrémad-bhägavataà kvacit
teçäà våthä janma gataà
     naräëäà bhümi-väsinäm

     puräëam—Puräëa; na—not; çrutam—heard; yaiù—by whom; tu—indeed; çrémad-bhägavatam—Çrémad-Bhägavatam; kvacit—somewhere; teçäm—of them; våthä—useless; janma—birth; gatam—gone; naräëäm—of people; bhümi-väsinäm—living on the earth.

     In this world they who have never heard Çrémad-Bhägavatam have wasted their lives.

Text 11 

yair na çrutaà bhägavataà puräëaà
     närädhito yaiù puruçaù puräëaù
hütaà mukhe naiva dharämaräëäà
     teçäà våthä janma gataà naräëäm

     yaiù—by whom; na—not; çrutam—heard; bhägavatam—Çrémad-Bhägavatam; puräëam—Puräëa; na—not; ärädhitaù—worshiped; yaiù—by whom; puruçaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; puräëaù—ancient; hütam—offered; mukhe—in the mouth; na—not; eva—indeed; dharämaräëäm—of the brähmaëas; teçäm—of them; våtha—wasted; janma—birth; gatam—gone; naräëäm—of people.

     They who have not heard Çrémad-Bhägavatam, worshiped the ancient Supreme Personality of Godhead, or fed the brähmaëas, have wasted their lives.

Text 12 

dväravatyäà tértha-räjaà
     gomaté-sindhu-maëgalam
yatra snätvä naro yäti
     vaikuëöhaà vimalaà padam

     dväravatyäm—at Dvärakä; tértha-räjam—the king of holy places; gomaté-sindhu-maëgalam—the auspicious meeting of the Gomaté river and the ocean; yatra—where; snätvä—having bathed; naraù—a person; yäti—goes; vaikuëöham—to Vaikuëöha; vimalam—pure; padam—abode.

     A person who bathes in Dvärakä at the auspicious place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean, a place that is the king of holy places, attains the sacred supreme abode of Vaikuëöha.

Text 13 

çatäçvamedhajaà puëyaà
     gaëgä-sägara-saëgame
tat-sahasra-guëaà proktaà
     gomaté-sindhu-saëgame

     çata—a hundred; açvamedha—asvamedha-yajnas; jam—born; puëyam—piety; gaëgä-sägara-saëgame—at the pklace where the Gaëgä flows into the ocean; tat-sahasra—a thousand times; guëam—multiplied; proktam—said; gomaté-sindhu-saëgame—thbe place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean.

     The pious result obtained by bathing at the place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean is a thousand times greater than the pious result obtained at the place where the Gaëgä flows into the ocean.

Text 14 

atraivodäharantémaà
     itihäsaà purätanam
yasya çravaëa-mätreëa
     päpa-täpät pramucyate

     atra—here; eva—indeed; udäharanti—they say; imam—this; itihäsam—history; purätanam—ancient; yasya—of which; çravaëa—by hearing; mätreëa—simply; päpa-täpät—from the sufferings of sins; pramucyate—released.

     The wise tell an ancient story about this holy place. Simply by hearing it one becomes free from the sufferings brought by many sins.

Text 15 

äséd gajähvaye vaiçyo
     räja-märga-patiù paraù
mahä-gaurava-samyukto
     nidhéço dhanado yathä

     äsét—there was; gajähvaye—at Hastinäpura; vaiçyaù—a vaiçya; räja-märga-patiù—a chief merchant; paraù—great; mahä-gaurava-samyuktaù—very respectful; nidhéçaù—the controller of great wealth; dhanadaù—generous; yathä—as.

     In Hastinäpura there was a great, generous, respectful, and very wealthy merchant.

Text 16 

veçyä-prasaëga-nirato
     véta-goçöhé-viçäradaù
dyüta-kréòaëakäsakto
     lobha-moha-madänvitaù

     veçyä-prasaëga-nirataù—attached to prostitutes; véta-goçöhé-viçäradaù—expert at speaking words of love; dyüta-kréòaëakäsaktaù—attached to gambling; lobha—greed; moha—bewilderment; mada—passion; anvitaù—with.

     He greedy, passionate, bewildered, fond of visiting prostitutes, expert at speaking amorous flattery, and addicted to gambling.

Text 17 

måçä-vädé mahä-duçöaù
     ku-karma-nirataù sadä
brähmaëebhyo na pitåbhyo
     na devebhyo dhanaà dadau

     måçä-vädé—a lier; mahä-duçöaù—very wicked; ku-karma-nirataù—acting badly; sadä—always; brähmaëebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; na—not; pitåbhyaù—to the pitäs; na—not; devebhyaù—to the demigods; dhanam—wealth; dadau—gave.

     He was a lier and a rogue. He always acted badly. He never gave charity to the brähmaëas, pitäs, or demigods.

Text 18 

hareù kathäà prekçya düräd
     düraà vai niryayau tvaram
pitroù seväpi na kåtä
     na putrebhyo dhanaà dadau

     hareù-of Lord Hari; kathäm—the topics; prekçya—seeing; dürät—from afar; düram—far away; vai—indeed; niryayau—went; tvaram—at once; pitroù—of his parents; sevä—service; api—and; na—not; kåtä—done; na—not; putrebhyaù—to his sons; dhanam—wealth; dadau—gave.

     When from afar he was aware of discussions about the Supreme Personality of Godhead, he quickly ran far away. He did not serve his parents. He gave no money to his children.

Text 19 

tyaktvä bhäryäà sa bhinno 'bhüd
     dhanäòhyo durmatiù khalaù
veçyä-prasaëgät tasyäpi
     dhanärdhaà prakçayaà gatam

     tyaktvä—rejecting; bhäryäm—his wife; sa—he; bhinnaù—broken; abhüt—became; dhanäòhyaù—wealthy; durmatiù—evil-minded; khalaù—rogue; veçyä-prasaëgät—from attachment to prostitutes; tasya—of him; api——also; dhana—of his wealth; ardham—half; prakçayam—destroyed; gatam—gone.

     This wicked, evil-hearted, and very wealthy person left his wife. By again and again visiting prostitutes he lost half his wealth.

Text 20 

ardhaà tu taskarair nétaà
     kiïcit påthvyäà gataà svataù
puëyena vardhate lakçméù
     päpena kçiyate dhruvam

     ardham—half; tu—indeed; taskaraiù—by thieves; nétam—taken; kiïcit—something; påthvyäm—on the earth; gatam—gone; svataù—oen; puëyena—by piety; vardhate—increases; lakçméù—opulence; päpena—by sin; kçiyate—is destroyed; dhruvam—certainly.

     The half that remained was stolen by thieves. By performing pious deeds one becomes wealthy, and by performing sins one loses all his wealth.

Text 21 

evaà hi nirdhano jäto
     veçyä-sakto mahä-khalaù
tasmin gajähvaye ramye
     caurya-karma cakära ha

     evam—thus; hi—indeed; nirdhanaù—without wealth; jätaù—born; veçyä-saktaù—attachment to prostitutes; mahä-khalaù—great rogue; tasmin—in that; gajähvaye—in Hastinäpura; ramye—beautiful; caurya-karma—theft; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     In this way he became penniless. Because he was addicted to visiting prostitutes, that rogue became a thief in the beautiful city of Hastinäpura.

Text 22 

caurya-karma prakurvantaà
     baddhvä taà dämibhir nåpaù
deçän niùsärayäm äsa
     çantanur nåpatéçvaraù

     caurya-karma—theft; prakurvantam—doing; baddhvä—becoming bound; tam—that; dämibhiù—with ropes; nåpaù—the king; deçät—from the country; niùsärayäm äsa—exiled; çantanuù—Çantanu; nåpatéçvaraù—the great king.

     When he was caught stealing, the great king Çantanu had him bound with ropes and exiled from the country.

Text 23 

vane 'pi nivasan so 'pi
     jéva-hiàsäà cakära ha
samä dvädaça-sähasraà
     na vavarça yadä ghanaù

     vane—in the forest; api—even; nivasan—residing; saù—he; api—also; jéva-hiàsäm—violence to others; cakära—did; ha—indeed; samä—years; dvädaça-sähasram—twelve thousand; na—not; vavarça——rained; yadä—when; ghanaù—the cloud.

     Living in the forest, he became a hunter. Then there was a great drought and for twelve thousand years there was no rain.

Text 24 

paçcimäà tu diçaà prägäd
     vaiçyo durbhikça-péòitaù
vane vai märitaù so 'pi
     siàhena tala-ghätataù

     paçcimäm—the west; tu—indeed; diçam—direction; prägät—went; vaiçyaù—the vaisya; durbhikça-péòitaù—oppressed by the lack of food; vane—in the forest; vai—indeed; märitaù—killed; saù—indeed; api—also; siàhena—by a lion; tala-ghätataù—by the claws.

     Oppressed by the lack of food, he went to the west. In a forest there a lion clawed him to death.

Text 25 

tadaiva yamadütäs taà
     baddhvä päçair adho-mukham
kaçäghätais täòayanto
     ninyur märgaà yamasya ca

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; yamadütäù—the Yamadutas; tam—him; baddhvä—bound; päçaiù—with ropes; adho-mukham—his face down; kaçäghätaiù—with wipping; täòayantaù—stricking; ninyuù—led; märgam—on the path; yamasya—to Yamaräja; ca—and.

     Then the Yamaütas came, bound him with ropes, and, whipping him as they went, marched him, his face bowed, on the path to Yamaräja. 

Text 26 

atha kaçcin mahän gådhro
     mäàsaà tasya bhujasya ca
gåhétvä khaà gataù sadyaù
     khadaàç caïcu-puöena tam

     atha—-then; kaçcin—a certain; mahän—great; gådhraù—vulture; mäàsam—the flesh; tasya—of his; bhujasya—arm; ca—and; gåhétvä—grabbing; kham—to the sky; gataù—went; sadyaù—at once; khadan—eating; caïcu-puöena—with its beak; tam—that.

     With its beak a great vulture suddenly bit off a part of his arm and flew into the sky, devouring it as it went.

Text 27 

nirämiçäù khagäç cänye
     sämiçaà jagmur äturäù
evaà kolähale jäte
     çaëkha-cihnädibhiù kåte

     nirämiçäù—without any meat; khagäù—birds; ca—and; anye——other; sämiçam—with meat; jagmuù—went; äturäù—distressed; evam—thus; kolähale—a tumult; jäte—was manifested; çaëkha-cihnädibhiù—beginning with scratching; kåte—done.

     The hungry vultures that had no meat pursued the vulture that had some. They attacked, scratching with their claws, and there was a great commotion.

Text 28 

na jahau mukhato mäàsaà
     paçcimäçäà jagäma ha
tat-samenäpi gådhreëa
     tékçna-tuëòena täòität

     na—not; jahau—abandoned; mukhataù—from its mouth; mäàsam—the meat; paçcimäçäm—to the west; jagäma—went; ha—indeed; tat-samena—its equal; api—even; gådhreëa—by a vulture; tékçna-tuëòena—with its sharp beak; täòität—from the attack.

     Not letting the meat drop from its beak, the vulture flew to the west. Then another vulture, its equal in strength, attacked with its sharp beak.

Texts 29-31 

tan-mukhät prapatan mäàsaà
     gomaté-sindhu-saëgame
tértha-plute tasya mäàse
     vaiçyo 'yaà pätaké\ mahän

teçäà päçän svayaà chittvä
     bhütvä devaç catur-bhujaù
paçyatäà yamadütänäà
     vimänam adhiruhya saù

viräjayan diçaù sarväù
     paraà dhäma harer yayau

     tan-mukhät—from its mouth; prapatan—fell; mäàsam—meat; gomaté-sindhu-saëgame—into the place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean; tértha—of the holy place; plute—into the water; tasya—of him; mäàse—the flesh; vaiçyaù—the vaisya; ayam—he; pätaké\—sinner; mahän—great; teçäm—of them; päçän—the ropes; svayam—himself; chittvä—cutting; bhütvä—becoming; devaù—a divine person; catur-bhujaù—with four arms; paçyatäm—looking on; yamadütänäm—as the yamadütas; vimänam—an airplane; adhiruhya—climbing; saù—he; viräjayan—illuminating; diçaù—the directions; sarväù—all; param—the suprem; dhäma—abode; hareù—of Lord Hari; yayau—went. 

     Then the meat dropped from the first vulture's mouth and fell into the water at the place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean. Because of this, the sinful merchant became at once purified. He himself cut the ropes binding him and, as the Yamadütas looked on, he became an effulgent four-armed resident of the spirituasl world. Entering a spiritual airplane, and illuminating all the directions as he went, he traveled to the spiritual abode of the Personality of Godhead.

Text 32 

gomaté-sindhu-saëgasya
     mähätmyaà çåëute naraù
sarva-päpa-vinirmukto
     viçëulokaà prayäti saù

     gomaté—of the Gomaté; sindhu—and the ocean; saëgasya—of the meeting; mähätmyam—the glory; çåëute—hears; naraù—a pewrson; sarva-päpa—all sins; vinirmuktaù—freed; viçëulokam—to the world of Lord Viçëu; prayäti—goes; saù—he.

     A person who hears this story describing the glories of the holy place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean becomes free of all sins and goes to the realm of Lord Viçëu.

Chapter Fourteen
Çré Ratnäkara-raivata-käcala-mähätmya
The Glories of Ratnäkara, Raivata, and Käcala

Text 1

çré-närada uväca

dväravatyäù samudrasya
     mähätmyaà çåëu mänada
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     tat-snäna-phala-daà småtam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; dväravatyäù—of d; samudrasya—of the ocean; mähätmyam—the glory; çåëu—please hear; mänada—O respectful one; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; tat-snäna-phala-dam—the result of bathing there; småtam—considered.

     Çré Närada said: O respectful one, please hear the glories of the ocean by Dvärakä City. Hearing the narration of these glories removes all sins and brings one the same result one obtains by bathing at that sacred place.

Texts 2 and 3 

mädhavyäà pürëimäsyäà yo
     vraté snätvä nadé-patim
natvä sampüjya vidhivad
     ratna-dänaà karoti yaù

tasya dehe trayo devä
     nivasanti mahé-pate
yasya darçana-mätreëa
     naro yäti kåtärthatäm

     mädhavyäm—in the month og Mädhava; pürëimäsyäm—on the full-moon day; yaù—who; vraté—following vows; snätvä—bathing; nadé-patim—the king of rivers; natvä—bowing down; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhivat—properly; ratna-dänam—gift of jewels; karoti—does; yaù—who; tasya—of him; dehe—in the body; trayaù—three; deva—demigods; nivasanti—reside; mahé-pate—O master of the earth; yasya—of whom; darçana—seeing; mätreëa—simply by; naraù—a person; yäti—attains; kåtärthatäm—the goal of life.

     A religious person who in the month of Mädhava (April-May) bathes in the ocean by Dvärakä, bows down before it, properly worships it, and then gives jewels in charity to the brähmaëas, finds that the three great demigods reside in his body. Simply by seeing him one attains the goal of life.

Text 4 

tad-deha-sparçanät sadyo
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate
yatra yatra gataù so 'pi
     tatra tatra sa bhüù çubhä

     tad-deha—of his body; sparçanät—by the touch; sadyaù—at once; brahma-hatyä—the sin of killing a brähmaëa; pramucyate—is freed; yatra yatra—wherever; gataù—gone; so 'pi—he; tatra tatra—there; sa—he; bhüù—the earth; çubhä—auspicious.

     Simply by tyouching his body one becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa. Any place he visits becomes sacred and auspicious.

Text 5 

dåçövä taà ca måtaù päpé
     jagad-vadha-karo 'pi hi
chinatti päpa-paöalaà
     paraà mokçaà prayäti hi

     dåçövä—seeing; tam—him; ca—and; måtaù—dead; päpé—sinner; jagad-vadha-karaù—who has murdered the entire world; api—even; hi—indeed; chinatti—breaks; päpa-paöalam—a host of sins; param—supreme; mokçam—liberation; prayäti—attains; hi—indeed.

     By seeing him even a sinner who by killing everyone in the world has become like a walking corpse becomes free of sin and attains liberation.

Text 6 

raivatasyätha çailasya
     mähätmyaà çåëu mänada
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     mukti-bhukti-pradäyakam

     raivatasya—of Raivata; atha—then; çailasya—the mountain; mähätmyam—the glory; çåëu—please hear; mänada—O respectful one; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; mukti-bhukti-pradäyakam—giving happiness and liberation.

     O respectful one, please hear the story of Mount Raivata's glories, a sacred story that removes all sins, brings happiness in this life, and awards liberation at the end. 

Text 7 

gautamasya suto dhémän
     medhävé näma vaiçëavaù
vindhyäcale tapas tepe
     varçänäm ayutaà çatam

     gautamasya—of Gautama Muni; sutaù—son; dhémän—intelligent; medhävé—Madhävé; näma—named; vaiçëavaù— adevotee of Lord Viçëu; vindhyäcale—in the Vindyä mountains; tapaù—austerities; tepe—performed; varçänäm—years; ayutam—ten thousand; çatam—a hundred.

     There was a Vaiçëava named Medhävé, who was very intelligent and was the son of Gautama Muni. For one million years he performed austerities in the Vindyä mountains.

Text 8 

taà draçöum ägataù säkçäd
     apäntaratamo muniù
noccacäläsanät so 'pi
     medhävé tapasotkaöaù

     tam—him; draçöum—to see; ägataù—came; säkçät—directly; apäntaratamo muniù—Apäntaratama Muni; na—not; uccacäla—rose; äsanät—from the seat; so 'pi—he; medhävé—Medhävé; tapasä—on austerities; utkaöaù—intent.

     One day Apäntaratama Muni came to see him. Rapt in performing austerities, Medhävé did not rise from his seat to greet him.

Text 9 

apäntaratamas taà vai
     çaçäpa krodha-püritaù
satäm abhakta päpätman
     sva-tapo-bala-garvitaù

     apäntaratamaù—Apäntaratama; tam—him; vai—indeed; çaçäpa—cursed; krodha-püritaù—filled with anger; satäm—to the saintly devotees; abhakta—not devoted; päpätman—O sinner; sva-tapo-bala-garvitaù—proud of the power of your austerities.

     Filled with anger, Apäntaratama Muni cursed him, “Sinner, you have no devotion and respect for saintly persons. You are very proud of the power of your austerities.

Text 10 

çailavat te sthitiç cätra
     tvaà çailo bhava durmate
ity uktvätha gate säkçäd
     apäntaratame munau

     çailavat—like a mountain; te—of you; sthitiù—stationary standing; ca—and; atra—here; tvam—you; çailaù—a mountain; bhava—become; durmate—O fool; ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; atha—then; gate—gone; säkçät—directly; apäntaratame—Apäntaratama; munau—Muni.

     “You simply sit motionless like a mountain. Fool, become a mountain, then!" After speaking these words, Apäntaratama Muni left.

Text 11 

medhävé çailatäà präptaù
     çré-çailasya suto 'bhavat
jäti-smaro mahä-buddhir
     viçëu-bhakteù prabhävataù

     medhävé—Medhävé; çailatäm—the state of being a mountain; präptaù—attained; çré-çailasya—of Çré Çaila; sutaù—the son; abhavat—became; jäti-smaraù—remembering his previous birth; mahä-buddhiù—very intelligent; viçëu-bhakteù—of devotion to Lord Viçëu; prabhävataù—by the power.

     Because of this Medhävé became a mountain. Born as the son of Mount Çré Çaila, he could, because of the power of his devotion to Lord Viçëu, remember his previous birth. 

Text 12 

ekadä man-mukhäc chrutvä
     mähätmyaà dvärakä-puraù
proväca so 'pi räjänaà
     raivataà gaccha sa-tvaram

     ekadä—one day; man-mukhät—from my mouth; çrutvä—hearing; mähätmyam—the glory; dvärakä-puraù—of DvärakäCity; proväca—said; saù—he; api—also; räjänaà raivatam—to King Raivata; gaccha—go; sa-tvaram—quickly.

     One day he heard from my mouth the glories of Dvärakä City. Then he said to me, “Please go to King Raivata at once.

Texts 13-16

vada mat-prarthanäm uktäà
     tvaà mahä-déna-vatsalaù
so 'yaà mahä-balo räjä
     prasanno yadi vä bhavet

tena nétasya me väso
     bhaviçyati hareù puri
iti çrutvä mayä viçëu-
     bhaktänäà çänti-käriëä

raivatäyäçu kathitaà
     tathoktaà paramaà vacaù
sa prasannaù präha räjann
     atra ko 'pi na parvataù

tat-sthäpanaà kariçyämi
     samutpatya bhujäbalät
samunnéya dvärakäyäà
     pratijïäm akarod imäm

     vada—please tell; mat-prarthanäm—my request; uktäm—said; tvam—you; mahä-déna-vatsalaù—kind to the wretched; saù—he; ayam—he; mahä-balaù—very powerful; räjä—king; prasannaù—pleased; yadi—if; vä—or; bhavet—may be; tena—by him; nétasya—brought; me—of me; väsaù—the residence; bhaviçyati—will be; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; puri—in the city; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; mayä—by me; viçëu-bhaktänäm—of the Vaiçëavas; çänti-käriëä—pacifying; raivatäya—to King Raivata; äçu—at once; kathitam—spoken; tathoktam—as said; paramam—great; vacaù—words; sa—he; prasannaù—pleased; präha—said; räjann—O king; atra—here; ko 'pi—any; na—not; parvataù—mountain; tat-sthäpanam—placing it; kariçyämi—I will do; samutpatya—lifting; bhujäbalät—by the power of my arms; samunnéya—bringing; dvärakäyäm—to Dvärakä; pratijïäm—promise; akarot—did; imäm—that.

     “Please tell him my request. You are very kind to the fallen. Tell him, `If the powerful king is pleased with me, then he will give me a home in Lord Kåçëa's city.' "
     Hearing this, I, who always wish to please the Vaiçëavas, went to King Raivata and repeated these words. Pleased, the king promised, “There is not a single mountain in this place. With the strength of my arms I will personally pick up that mountain and bring it here to Dvärakä."

Text 17 

etasmiàs tac corayituà
     prayäte nåpa-sattame
tat-pürväsmäd ahaà präptaù
     çré-çailasya pure nåpa

     etasmin—in this; tat—that; corayitum—to kidnap; prayäte—come; nåpa-sattame—the great king; tat-pürväsmät—before him; aham—I; präptaù—came; çré-çailasya—of Çré Çaila; pure—in th city; nåpa—O king.

     As King Raivata set out to kidnap that mountain, I raced ahead and quickly entered the city of Mount Çaila.

Text 18 

kali-priyeëäpi mayä
     çré-çailäya mahätmane
kathitaù sarva-våttanto
     nåpa-caurya-samanvitaù

     kali-priyeëa—fond of a quarrel; api—even; mayä—by me; çré-çailäya—to Mount Saila; mahätmane—the noble-hearted; kathitaù—said; sarva-våttantaù—all that had happened; nåpa-caurya-samanvitaù—the king about to kidnap his son.

     Fond of a quarrel, I approached noble-hearted Mount Çaila and told him how King Raivata was about to kidnap his son.

Texts 19 and 20 

çré-çailaù putra-mohena
     nirbhartsyeti kva yäsi hi
sumeruà giri-räjaà ca
     himavantaà nageçvaram

çré-çailaù präha dharmätmä
     putra-sneha-samäkulaù
eko daivena datto 'yaà
     na puträ bahavaç ca me

     çré-çailaù—Mount Çaila; putra-mohena—bewildered with love for his son; nirbhartsya—rebuking; iti—thus; kva—where; yäsi—will you go; hi—indeed; sumerum—to Mount Sumeru; giri-räjam—the king of mountains; ca—and; himavantam—to the Himalayas; nageçvaram—the king of mountains; çré-çailaù—Mount Çaila; präha—said; dharmätmä—pious; putra-sneha-samäkulaù—overcome with love; ekaù—one; daivena—by fate; dattaù—given; ayam—he; na—not; puträù—sons; bahavaù—many; ca—and; me—of me.

     Overcome with love for his son, Mount Çaila rebuked him, “Where will you go?" Then Mount Çaila went to regal Mount Sumeru and regal Mount Himälaya and, overcome with love for his son, said to them, “Destiny has given me only one son. I do not have many sons.

Text 21 

taà hartum ägate räjïi
     raivate vai mahä-bale
videçaà yäti putro me
     tena räjïä mahätmanä

     tam—him; hartum—to kidnap; ägate—come; räjïi—when the king has; raivate—Raivata; vai—indeed; mahä-bale—very powerful; videçam—to another country; yäti—goes; putraù—son; me—my; tena—by that; räjïä—by the king; mahätmanä—noble-hearted.

     “When powerful and noble-hearted King Raivata comes he will take my son to a another country far away.

Text 22 

putra-snehäbhibhüto 'haà
     yuvayoù çaraëaà gataù
jitvä taà raivataà çéghraà
     putraà mäà dätum arhatha

     putra—for the son; sneha—by love; abhibhütaù—overcome; aham—I; yuvayoù—of you both; çaraëam—shelter; gataù—gone; jitvä—having defeated; tam—him; raivatam—Raivata; çéghram—at once; putram—son; mäm—me; dätum—to give; arhatha—are worthy.

     “I am overcome with love for my son. I take shelter of you both. Please defeat King Raivata and give me my son."

Text 23 

jäteç ca käraëät tau dvau
     sumeruç ca himäcalaù
çaila-lakçaiù parivåtau
     yoddhum äjagmatur drutam

     jäteù—birth; ca—and; käraëät—by the cause; tau—they; dvau—both; sumeruù—Sumeru; ca—and; himäcalaù—Himalaya; çaila—of mountains; lakçaiù—with a hundred thousand; parivåtau—accompanied; yoddhum—to fight; äjagmatuù—came; drutam—at once.

     Because they were his kinsmen, Mount Sumeru and Mount Himälaya, bringing with them a hundred thousand mountains, came at once to engage in the fight.

Text 24 

tato bhujäbhyäm utpatya
     hanumän iva taà girim
ürdhvaà kåtvä baläd räjä
     yadä gantuà mano dadhe

     tataù—then; bhujäbhyäm—arm against arm; utpatya—lifting; hanumän—Hanumän; iva—like; tam—that; girim—mountain; ürdhvam—up; kåtvä—making; balät—by power; räjä—the king; yadä—when; gantum—to go; manaù—mind; dadhe—placed.

     As Hanumän lifted a great mountain before, King Raivata lifted that mountain with his own arms. Then the king decided to leave.

Text 25 

tadaiva cägatän vékçya
     girén chasträstra-dhäriëaù
aööa-häsaà cakäroccais
     taòit-pätam ivätmanaù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; ca—and; ägatän—come; vékçya—seeing; girén—the many mountains; chasträstra-dhäriëaù—with weapikns in their hands; aööa-häsam—loud laughter; cakara—did; taòit-pätam—a thunderbolt; iva—like; ätmanah—of the self.

     When the king saw that many weapon-bearing mountains had suddenly come before him, He laughed with a laugh like thunder. 

Text 26 

nanäda tena brahmäëòaà
     sapta-lokair bilaiù saha
tadaiva teçäà çasträëi
     hastebhyo nyapatan svataù

     nanäda—echoed; tena—by that; brahmäëòam—the universe; sapta-lokaiù—with seven planetary systems; bilaiù—with outer-space; saha—eith; tadä—then; eva—indeed; teçäm—of them; çasträëi—the weapons; hastebhyaù—from the hands; nyapatan—fell; svataù—spontaneously.

     That laugh echoed through the entire universe, filling the seven planetary systems and the emptinesses of outer space. At once the weapons fell from the mountains' hands.

Text 27 

niùçasträs te yadä çailäù
     kurvantaù pradhvanià muhuù
gacchantaà sa-girià jaghnur
     muçöibhir jänubhiù pathi

     niùçasträù—weaponless; te—they; yadä—when; çailäù—the mountains; kurvantaù—doing; pradhvanim—sound; muhuù—again and again; gacchantam—going; sa-girim—with the mountain; jaghnuù—hit; muçöibhiù—with fists; jänubhiù—with knees; pathi—on the path.

     Now weaponless, the mountains screamed and wailed again and again. As King Raivata was taking the young mountain, the mountains hit them again and again with their fists and knees.

Text 28 

yathä purä hanumantaà
     anuyätä mahä-balam
tais täòito 'pi na jahau
     girià räja karägrataù

     yathä—as; purä—before; hanumantam—to Hanumän; anuyätä—following; mahä-balam—very powerful; taiù—by them; täòitaù—hit; api—even; na—not; jahau—abandoned; girim—the mountain; räja—the king; karägrataù—from his hand.

     As before they had followed powerful Hanumän, the mountains followed King Raivata and attacked him again and again. Still, the king never let the young mountain fall from his hand.

Texts 29 and 30 

man-mukhäc chré-hariù çrutvä
     çailodyogaà nåpopari
sadyo bhakta-sahäyärthaà
     bhagavän bhakta-vatsalaù

ägatyäkäça-märge 'pi
     dättvä tejaù svakaà param
mä bhaiçöety abhayaà dättvä
     tvaram äntaradhéyata

     mat—my; mukhät—from the mouth; çré-hariù—Çré Kåçëa; çrutvä—hearing; çaila—of the mountain; udyogam—effort; nåpopari—on the king; sadyaù—at once; bhakta-sahäyärtham—to help a devotee; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhakta-vatsalaù—who loves His devotees; ägatya—coming; äkäça-märge—in the sky; api—also; dättvä—placing; tejaù—power; svakam—own; param—great; ma—don't; bhaiçöa—fear; iti—thus; abhayam—fearlessness; dättvä—giving; tvaram—at once; äntaradhéyata—disappeared.

     From my mouth hearing how King Raivata was struggling on the young mountain's behalf, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who loves His devotees, came at once to help. Appearing in the sky, He gave His own transcendental power to King Raivata, reassured him by saying, “Don't be afraid." and then suddenly disappeared.

Text 31 

gate harau bhagavati
     bhagavat-tejasänvitaù
eka-haste girià dhåtvä
     muçöinä vajra-ghätinä

sumeruà santatäòäçu
     vajréva balavattaraù
tasya muçöi-prahäreëa
     merur vihvalatäà gataù

     gate harau bhagavati—when Lord Hari had gone; bhagavat-tejasänvitaù—now possessing the Lord's potency; eka-haste—with one hand; girim—the mountain; dhåtvä—holding; muçöinä—with a fist; vajra-ghätinä—like a thunderbolt; sumerum—Sumeru; santatäòa—struck; äçu—at once; vajré—a thunderbolt; iva—like; balavattaraù—very powerful; tasya—of him; muçöi-prahäreëa—with a punch; meruù—Meru; vihvalatäm—agitation; gataù—attained.

     After the Supreme Lord had disappeared, King Raivata, now strong as a thunderbolt for he possessed the Lord's own strength, shifted the young mountain to a single hand and with the other punched Mount Sumeru with a punch like a thunderbolt, a punch that overwhelmed Mount Sumeru.

Text 33 

himavantaà bahu-vegät
     pätayitvä mahé-tale
mamarda padbhyäà cänyäàç ca
     vindhyädén raëa-durmadaù

     himavantam—Mount Himälaya; bahu-vegät—with great force; pätayitvä—throwing; mahé-tale—to the ground; mamarda—crushed; padbhyäm—with both feet; ca—and; anyän—the others; ca—and; vindhyädén—headed by the Vindhyä mountains; raëa—in the battle; durmadaù—wild with passion.

     Wildly passionate in the fight, King Raivata violently threw Mount Himälaya to the ground. With his feet he crushed Mount Vindhyä and the other mountains.

Text 34 

vindhyädayaç ca te sarve
     päda-ghätena märditäù
bhaya-bhétä raëaà tyaktvä
     dudruvus te diço daça

     vindhyädayaù—headed by Mount Vindhyä; ca—andc; te—they; sarve—all; päda-ghätena—by the kicks; märditäù—crushed; bhaya-bhétä—terrified; raëam—the battlefield; tyaktvä—fled; dudruvuù—ran; te—they; diçaù—the directions; daça—ten.

     Wounded by King Raivata's ferocious kicking, Mount Vindhyä and all the other terrified mountains fled in the ten directions.

Text 35 

evaà jitvä çaila-saëghaà
     taà çailaà çaila-sannibhaù
raivato 'pi jayäravair
     änarteçu nyapätayat

     evam—thus; jitvä—defeating; çaila-saëgham—the many mountains; tam—that; çailam—mountain; çaila-sannibhaù—like a mountain himself; raivataù—King Raivata; api—aslo; jaya—victory; äravaiù—with sounds; änarteçu—in the land of Anarta; nyapätayat—placed.

     Defeating the host of mountains in this way, King Raivata, who was like a mountain himself, amid many shouts of “Victory!", placed the young mountain in the land of Anarta.

Text 36 

so 'bhüd raivata-nämäpi
     räjan raivatako 'calaù
hari-bhaktaù çaila-mukhyo
     dväravatyäà viräjate

     saù—he; abhüt—became; raivata-nämä—named Raivata; api—also; räjan—O king; raivatakaù—Raivata; acalaù—mountain; hari-bhaktaù—a devotee of Lord Hari; çaila-mukhyaù—the best of mountains; dväravatyäm—in Dvärakä; viräjate—is splendidly manifested.

     The mountain was named Mount Raivata after King Raivata. A great devotee and the best of mountains, Mount Raivata was splendidly manifested in Dvärakä.

Text 37 

tasya darçana-mätreëa
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate
sparçanäc chata-yajïänäà
     phalam äpnoti mänavaù

     tasya—of it; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; brahma-hatyä—the sin of killing a brähmaëa; pramucyate—is freed; sparçanät—by the touch; çata-yajïänäm—of a hundred yajnas; phalam—the result; äpnoti—attains; mänavaù—a human being.

     Simply by seeing Mount Raivata one becomes free from the sin of killing a brähmaëa. Simply by touching Mount Raivata one attains the result of having performed a hundred yajïas.

Text 38 

yäträà kåtvä ca yasyäpi
     parikramya natänanaù
bhojanaà brähmaëe dättvä
     yäti viçëoù paraà padam

     yäträm—a pilgrimage; kåtvä—doing; ca—and; yasya—of which; api—also; parikramya—circumambulating; natänanaù—with bowed head; bhojanam—food; brähmaëe—to a brähmaëa; dättvä—giving; yäti—attains; viçëoù—of Lord Viçëu; param—the transcendental; padam—abode.

     A person who goes on a pilgrimage to Mount Raivata, with bowed head circumambulates Mount Raivata, and then feeds a brähmaëa, goes to Lord Viçëu's transcendental abode.

Chapter Fifteen
Kapiöaìka-någa-küpa-gopé-bhümi-mähätmya
The Glories of Någa-küpa and Gopé-bhümi

Text 1 

tasmin girau yajïa-térthaà
     raivatena kåtaà purä
yatra kåtvä yajïam ekaà
     koöi-yajïa-phalaà labhet

     tasmin—in this; girau—mountain; yajïa-
tértham—Yajna-tértha; raivatena—by King Raivata; kåtam—made; purä—before; yatra—where; kåtvä—having made; yajïam—yajna; ekam—one; koöi-yajïa-phalam—the result of ten million yajnas; labhet—attains.

     On this mountain King Raivata built a yajïa-tértha. By performing a yajïa at this place one attains the result of performing ten million yajïas.

Text 2 

kapiöaìkaà näma térthaà
     kapi-päta-samudbhavam
girau raivatake räjan
     sarva-päpa-praëäçanam

     kapiöaìkam—Kapiöaìka; näma—named; tértham—tirtha; kapi—of a monkey; päta—from the jumping; samudbhavam—manifested; girau—on the mountain; raivatake—Raivata; räjan—O king; sarva-päpa-praëäçanam—destroying all sins.

     O king, this holy place, which destroys all sins, was named Kapiöaìka because it was created by the jumping of a gorilla (kapi). 

Text 3 

bhaumäsura-sakho duñöo
     dviviòo näma vänaraù
märito yatra rämeëa
     muñöinä vajra-pätinä

     bhaumäsura-sakhaù—a freind of Bhaumasura; duñöaù—a demon; dviviòaù—Dvivida; näma—named; vänaraù—a gorilla; märitaù—killed; yatra—where; rämeëa—by Balaräma; muñöinä—with a fist; vajra-pätinä—a thunderbolt.

     With His thunderbolt fist, Lord Balaräma killed Bhaumäsura's friend, the demon gorilla Dviviòa, in this place.

Text 4 

sadyo muktià gataù so 'pi
     satäà helanavän api
tatra snätuà sadä devä
     ägacchanti nareçvara

     sadyaù—at once; muktim—liberation; gataù—attained; so 'pi—he; satäm—to the devotees; helanavän—an offender; api—even; tatra—there; snätum—to bathe; sadä—again and again; deväù—the demigods; ägacchanti—come; nareçvara—O great king.

     Even though he had offended many siantly persons, that gorilla attained liberation at that place. O great king, the demigods regularly come to bathe there.

Text 5 

kalaviìkasya yäträyäà
     koöi-go-däna-jaà phalam
etasya dvi-guëaà puëyaà
     daëòakäkhye vane çubhe

     kalaviìkasya—of Kalaviìka-tértha; yäträyäm—in apilgrimage; koöi-go-däna-jam—born from giving ten million cows in charity; phalam—the result; etasya—of that; dvi-guëam—double; puëyam—piety; daëòakäkhye—in Daëòaka Forest; vane—in the forest; çubhe—sacred.

     By going on pilgrimage to Kalaviìka-tértha and giving ten million cows in charity one attains a great pious result. This pious result is doubled when the pilgrimage and charity are performed in sacred Daëòakäraëya.

Text 6 

tasmäc catur-guëaà puëyaà
     saindhaväkhye mahä-vane
jambu-märge païca-guëaà
     puëyaà präpnoti mänavaù

     tasmät—from that; catur-guëam—four times as great; puëyam—pious result; saindhaväkhye—named Saindhava; mahä-vane—in the great forest; jambu-märge—at jambu-märga; païca-guëam—five times as great; puëyam—piety; präpnoti—attains; mänavaù—a human.

     A person attains a pious result is four times as great at Saindhaväraëya and five times greater than that at Jambu-märga.

Text 7 

tasmäd daça-guëaà puëyaà
     puñkaräkhye vane småtaà
tasmäd daça-guëaà puëyaà
     utpalävärta-yätrayä

     tasmät—from that; daça-guëam—ten times; puëyam—piety; puñkaräkhye—named Puñkara; vane—in the forest; småtam—considered; tasmät—from that; daça-guëam—ten times; puëyam—piety; utpalävärta-yätrayä—by a pilgrimage to Utpalävarta.

     That pious result is ten times greater than that at Puñkaräraëya and ten times greater again at Utpalävärta.

Text 8 

tasmäc ca naimiñäraëye
     puëyaà daça-guëaà småtam
tasmäc chata-guëaà puëyaà
     kapiöaìke videha-räö

     tasmät—than that; ca—and; naimiñäraëye—at Naimiñäraëya; puëyam—piety; daça-guëam—ten times; småtam—considered; tasmät—than that; çata-guëam—a hundred times; puëyam—piety; kapiöaìke—at Kapiöaìka; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     That pious result is ten times greater again at Naimiñäraëya and hundred times greater than that at Utpalävärta.

Text 9 

någa-küpaà dvärakäyäà
     térthänäà tértham uttamam
yasya darçana-mätreëa
     vipra-vadhyät pramucyate

     någa-küpam—Någa-küpa; dvärakäyäm—at Dvärakä; térthänäm—of holy placed; tértham—holy place; uttamam—best; yasya—of which; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; vipra-vadhyät—from the sin of killing a brähmaëa; pramucyate—is freed.

     Någa-küpa at Dvärakä is the best of holy places. Simply by seeing it one becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa. 

Text 10 

ajïänäd brähmaëasyäpi
     gäà dadau brähmaëäya saù
tena päpena küpe vai
     kåkaläsa-vapur-dharaù
     ajïänät—from ignorance; brähmaëasya—of a brähmaëa; api—also; gäm—a cow; dadau—gave; brähmaëäya—to a brähmaëa; saù—he; tena—by that; päpena—sin; küpe—in a well; vai—indeed; kåkaläsa—of a lizard; vapuù—the form; dharaù—manifesting.

     Unaware of what he was doing, King Någa gave in charity to a brähmaëa a cow that belonged to another brähmaëa. For this sin he became a lizard in a well.

Text 11 

någo 'pi däninäà çreñöhaù
     patito 'tha catur-yugam
çré-kåñëena tad-uddhäraù
     kåto vai paçyatäà satäm

     någaù—Någa; api—also; däninäm—of philanthropists; çreñöhaù—the best; patitaù—fallen; atha—then; catur-yugam—for four yugas; çré-kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; tad-uddhäraù—deliverance; kåtaù—done; vai—indeed; paçyatäm—looking on; satäm—the saintly devotees.

     In this way King Någa, who had been the best of charitable men, fell into a wretched condition for four yugas. Finally, as the saintly devotees looked on, he was delivered by Lord Kåñëa.

Texts 12-14 

tad-dinän någa-küpaà tu
     térthé-bhütaà mahé-pate
kärtike pürëimäyäà tu
     tasmin snänaà samäcaret

koöi-janma-kåtät päpän
     mucyate nätra saàçayaù
ekaà yaträpi go-dänaà
     karoti vidhivan naraù

koöi-go-däna-jaà puëyaà
     labhate vai na saàçayaù
gopé-bhümeç ca mähätmyaà
     çåëu päpa-haraà param

     tad-dinät—from that day; någa-küpam—Någa's well; tu—indeed; térthé-bhütam—become a holy place; mahé-pate—on the earth; kärtike—in the month of Kärtika; pürëimäyäm—on the full moon day; tu—indeed; tasmin—there; snänam—bath; samäcaret—does; koöi-janma-kåtät—performed in ten million births; päpän—from the sins; mucyate—released; na—not; atra—here; saàçayaù—doubt; ekam—one; yatra—where; api—also; go-dänam—giving a cow in charity; karoti—does; vidhivan—properly; naraù—a person; koöi-gaù—ten million cows; däna—from the charity; jam—produced; puëyam—piety; labhate—attains; vai—indeed; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; gopé-bhümeù—of Gopé-bhümi; ca—and; mähätmyam—the glories; çåëu—please hear; päpa-haram—removing sins; param—great.

     From that day Någa-küpa (Någa's Well) has been one of the great pilgrimage places on this earth. A person who on the full moon day of the month of Kärttika (October-November) bathes at Någa-küpa becomes free of the sins performed in ten million births. Of this there is no doubt. A person who at Någa-küpa gives in charity a single cow attains the pious result of giving ten million cows. Of that there is no doubt. Now please hear the glories of Gopé-bhümi. Hearing its glories removes all sins.

Text 15 

yasya çravaëa-mätreëa
     karma-bandhät pramucyate
gopénäà yatra väso 'bhüt
     tena gopé-bhuvaù småtaù

     yasya—of which; çravaëa-mätreëa—simply by hearing; karma-bandhät—from the bonds of karma; pramucyate—is released; gopénäm—of the gopés; yatra—where; väsaù—residence; abhütdid; tena—by that; gopé-bhuvaù—the land of the gopés; småtaù—is considered.

     Simply by hearing about Gopé-bhümi, which is so named because the gopés resided there, one become free from the bondage of karma. 

Text 16 

gopy-aìgaräga-sambhütaà
     gopé-candänäm uttamam
gopé-candana-liptäìgo
     gaìgä-snäna-phalaà labhet

     gopy—of the gopés; aìgaräga—from the cosmetics; sambhütam—manifested; gopé-candänäm—gopé-candana; uttamam—supreme; gopé-candana—of gopé-candana; lipta—anointed; aìgaù—limbs; gaìgä-snäna-phalam—the result of bathing in the Gaìgä; labhet—one attains.

     In Gopé-bhümi gopé-candana was manifested from the gopés' cosmetics. A person who marks his limbs with gopé-candana tilaka attains the result of bathing in the Gaìgä.   

Text 17 

mahä-nadénäà snänasya
     puëyaà tasya dine dinegopé-candana-müdräbhir
     müdrito yaù sadä bhavet

     mahä-nadénäm—of great sacred rivers; snänasya—of bathing; puëyam—the pious result; tasya—of that; dine—day; dine—after day; gopé-candana—of gopé-candana; müdräbhiù—by marking; müdritaù—marked; yaù—who; sadä—always; bhavet—is.

     A person who daily wears gopé-candana tilaka attains the pious result of daily bathing in all sacred rivers.

Text 18 

açvamedha-sahasräëi
     räjasüya-çatäni ca
sarväëi tértha-dänäni
     vratäni ca tathaiva ca kåtäni tena nityaà vai      sa kåtärtho na saàçayaù

     açvamedha-sahasräëi—a thousand asvamedha-yajnas; räjasüya-çatäni—a hundred rajasuya-yajnas; ca—and; sarväëi—all; tértha—holy places; dänäni—giving charity; vratäni—following vows; ca—and; tathä—so; eva—indeed; ca—and; kåtäni—done; tena—by him; nityam—daily; vai—indeed; sa—he; kåtärthaù—attains the goal of life; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who daily wears gopé-candana tilaka attains the result of performing a thousand açvamedha-yajïas and a hundred räjasüya-yajïas. He attains the reusult of giving charity and following vows at all holy places. He attains the goal of life. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 19 

gaìgä-måd-dvi-guëaà puëyaà
     citraküöa-rajaù småtam
tasmäd daça-guëaà puëyaà
     rajaù païcavaté-bhavam

     gaìgä—of the Gaìgä; måt—the mud; dvi-guëam—twice; puëyam—piety; citraküöa-rajaù—the dust of Citraküöa; småtam—considered; tasmät—than that; daça-guëam—ten times; puëyam—piety; rajaù—the dust; païcavaté-bhavam—of Païcavaté.

     Twice as sacred as the mud of the Gaìgä is the dust of Citraküöa. Ten times more sacred than that is the dust of Païcavaté-tértha.

Text 20 
tasmäc chata-guëaà puëyaà
     gopé-candanakaà rajaù
gopé-candanakaà viddhi
     våndävana-rajaù-samam

     tasmät—than that; çata-guëam—a hundred times; puëyam—sacred; gopé-candanakam—gopé-candana; rajaù—dust; gopé-candanakam—gopé-candana; viddhi—please know; våndävana-rajaù-samam—equal to the dust of Våndävana.

     A hundred times more sacred is the dust of gopé-candana. Please know that gopé-candana is equal to the dust of Våndävana.

Text 21 

gopé-candana-liptäìgaà
     yadi päpa-çatair yutam
taà netuà na yamaù çakto
     yama-dütäù kutaù punaù

     gopé-candana-liptäìgam—limbs marked with gopé-candana; yadi—if; päpa-çataiù—with a hundred sins; yutam—endowed; tam—him; netum—ot lead; na—not; yamaù—Yamaräja; çaktaù—is able; yama-dütäù—the messengers of Yamaräja; kutaù—how?; punaù—again.

     Even if in the past he has committed hundreds of sins, if a person wears gopé-candana tilaka, then Yamaräja cannot take him away. How, then, can Yamaräja's messengers touch him?

Text 22 

nityaà karoti yaù päpé
     gopé-candana-dhäraëam
sa prayäti harer dhäma
     golokaà prakåteù param

     nityam—regularly; karoti—does; yaù—who; päpé—a sinner; gopé-candana-dhäraëam—wearing gopé-candana; sa—he; prayäti—goes; hareù—of Lord Hari; dhäma—to the abod3; golokam—Goloka; prakåteù—the material world; param—above.

     A sinner who daily wears gopé-candana tilaka goes to Lord Kåñëa supreme abode, Goloka, which is beyond the world of matter.

Text 23 

sindhu-deçasya räjäbhüd
     dérghabähur iti çrutaù
anyäya-varté duñöätmä
     veçyä-saìga-rataù sadä
     sindhu-deçasya—of Sindhu-deça; räjä—a king; abhüt—was; dérghabähuù—Dérghabähur; iti—thus; çrutaù—heard; anyäya—evil; varté—doing; duñöätmä—wicked; veçyä-saìga-rataù—attached to prostitutes; sadä—always.

     In Sindhu-deça there was a king named Dérghabähu. He was cruel and sinful and he was addicted to visiting prostitutes. 

Text 24 

tena vai bhärate varñe
     brahma-hatyä-çataà kåtam
daça garbhavaté-hatyäù
     kåtäs tena durätmanä

     tena—by him; vai—indeed; bhärate varñe—in Bharat-varña; brahma-hatyä-çatam—killing a hundred brähmaëas; kåtam—done; daça—ten; garbhavaté-hatyäù—killing pregnant women; kåtäù—done; tena—by him; durätmanä—wicked.

     While he was on the earth this cruel sinner murdered a hundred brähmaëas and ten pregnant women.

Text 25 

mågayäyäà tu bäëaughaiù
     kapilä-go-vadhaù kåtaù
saindhavaà hayam äruhya
     mågayärthé gato 'bhavat

     mågayäyäm—in hunting; tu—indeed; bäëaughaiù—with many arrows; kapilä-go-vadhaù—killing a brown cow; kåtaù—done; saindhavam—a sindhu; hayam—horse; äruhya—mounting; mågayärthé—wishing to hunt; gataù—went; abhavat—did.

     One day he mounted a sindhu horse and went hunting. With a flood of arrows he accidentally killed with a brown cow in that hunt.

Text 26 

ekadä räjya-lobhena
     mantré kruddho mahä-khalam
jaghänäraëya-deçe taà
     tékñna-dhäreëa cäsinä

     ekadä—one day; räjya—for a kingdom; lobhena—with greed; mantré—minister; kruddhaù—angry; mahä-khalam—wicked; jaghäna—killed; äraëya-deçe—in the forest; tam—him; tékñna-dhäreëa—with a sharp; ca—and; asinä—sword.

     One day, greedy to get his kingdom, with a sharp sword his angry minister killed him in the forest.

Text 27 

bhü-tale patitaà måtyu-
     gataà vékñya yamänugäù
baddhvä yama-puréà ninyur
     harñayantaù parasparam

     bhü-tale—to the ground; patitam—fallen; måtyu-gatam—dead; vékñya—seeing; yamänugäù—the yamadütas; baddhvä—binding; yama-purém—to the city of yama; ninyuù—led; harñayantaù—joking; parasparam—among themselves.

     Seeing him fallen to the ground and dead, the Yamadütas came, bound him, and, joking as they went, took him to the city of Yamaräja.

Text 28 

sammukhe 'vasthitaà vékñya
     päpinaà yama-räò balé
citraguptaà präha türëaà
     kä yogyä yänatäsya vai

     sammukhe—in the presence; avasthitam—situated; vékñya—seeing; päpinam—sinner; yama-räò—yamaräja; balé—powerful; citraguptam—to Citragupta; präha—said; türëam—quickly; kä—what?; yogyä—is proper; yänatä—punishment; asya—of him; vai—certainly.

     Seeing this sinner brought before him, powerful Yamaräja said to his scribe Citragupta, "What is the proper punishment for him?"

Text 29 

çré-citragupta uväca 
catur-açéti-lakñeñu
     narakeñu nipatyatäm
niùsandehaà mahä-räja
     yävac candra-diväkarau

     çré-citragupta uväca—Çré Citragupta said; catur-açéti-lakñeñu—eight million four hundred thousand; narakeñu—into hells; nipatyatäm—should fall; niùsandeham—without doubt; mahä-räja—O great king; yävat—as longas; candra—the moon; diväkarau—and the sun.

     Çré Citragupta said: O great king, he should be thrown into eight million four hundred thousand hells for as long as the sun and the moon shine in the sky.

Text 30 

anena bhärate varñe
     kñaëaà na su-kåtaà kåtam
daça-garbhavaté-ghätaù
     kapilä-go-vadhaù kåtaù

     anena—by him; bhärate varñe—on the earth; kñaëam—for a moment; na—not; su-kåtam—pious deed; kåtam—done; daça—ten; garbhavaté—pregnant women; ghätaù—killed; kapilä-go-vadhaù—the killing of a brown cow; kåtaù—done.

     On the earth he did not perform a single pious deed. He killed ten pregnant women. He killed a brown cow.

Text 31 

tathä vana-mågänäà ca
     kåtvä hatyäù sahasraçaù
tasmäd ayaà mahä-päpé
     devatä-dvija-nindakaù

     tathä—so; vana-mågänäm—of animals in the forest; ca—and; kåtvä—doing; hatyäù—killing; sahasraçaù—thousands; tasmät—from that; ayam—he; mahä-päpé—a great sinner; devatä—the demigods; dvija—andf the brähmaëas; nindakaù—offending.

     He killed thousands of deer in the forest. He offended the demigods and the brähmaëas. He is a great sinner.

Texts 32 and 33 

çré-närada uväca 
tadä yamäjïayä dütä
     nitvä taà päpa-rüpiëam
sahasra-yojanäyäme
     tapta-taile mahä-khale

sphurad aty-ucchalat-phene
     kumbhépäke nyapätayan
pralayägni-samo vahniù
     sadyaù çétalatäà gataù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; yama—of Yamaräja; äjïayä—by the order; dütä—his messengers; nitvä—taking; tam—him; päpa-rüpiëam—sinner; sahasra-yojanäyäme—eight thousand miles across; tapta—boiling; taile—oil; mahä-khale—very terrible; sphurat—manifested; aty-ucchalat-phene—bubbling; kumbhépäke—in Kumbhipaka; nyapätayan—thrown; pralaya—of cosmic devastation; agni—the fire; samaù—equal; vahniù—fire; sadyaù—at once; çétalatäm—coldness; gataù—attained.

     Çré Närada said: Then, by Yamaräja's order, the Yamadütas took that sinner and threw him into a terrible, eight-thousand mile wide cauldron of bubbling boiling oil in the hell of Kumbhépäka. The moment that sinner came to it, the boiling oil, which was as hot as the great fires at the time of cosmic devastation, suddenly became cool.

Text 34 

vaideha tan-nipatanät
     prahläda-kñepaëäd yathä
tadaiva citram äcakhyur
     yama-dütä mahätmane

     vaideha—O king of Videha; tan-nipatanät—by his falling; prahläda-kñepaëät—the throwing of Prahläda; yathä—as; tadä—then; eva—indeed; citram—a wonder; äcakhyuù—told; yama-dütä—the Yamadütas; mahätmane—to Yamaräja.

     O king of Videha, as Prahläda was unhurt in the same situation, that sinner was not hurt by the boiling oil. Then the Yamadütas described that great wonder to noble-hearted Yamaräja.

Text 35 

anena su-kåtaà bhümau
     kñaëavan na kåtaà kvacit
citraguptena satataà
     dharma-räjo vyacintayat

     anena—by him; su-kåtam—a pious deed; bhümau—on the earth; kñaëavan—for a moment; na—not; kåtam—done; kvacit—ever; citraguptena—by Citragupta; satatam—again and again; dharma-räjaù—Yamaräja; vyacintayat—considered.

     Yamaräja and Citragupta carefully reviewed the sinner's case and concluded that while he was on the earth the sinner had not for a moment performed even a single pious deed.

Text 36 

sabhäyäm ägataà vyäsaà
     sampüjya vidhivan nåpa
natvä papraccha dharmätmä
     dharma-räjo mahä-matiù

     sabhäyäm—to the assembly; ägatam—come; vyäsam—Vyäsa; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhivan—properly; nåpa—O king; natvä—bowing; papraccha—asked; dharmätmä—saintly; dharma-räjaù—Yamaräja; mahä-matiù—noble-hearted.

     Then Vyäsadeva arrived in that assembly. Bowing down before Him, and carefully worshiping Him, saintly and noble-hearted Yamaräja asked Vyäsadeva the following question.

Text 37 

çré-yama uväca 
anena päpinä pürvaà
     na kåtaà su-kåtaà kvacit
sphurad-agny-ucchalat-phene
     kumbhépäke mahä-khale

asya kñepanato vahniù
     sadyaù çétalatäà gataù
iti sandehataç cetaù
     khidyate me na saàçayaù

     çré-yama uväca—Çré Yamaräja said; anena—by this; päpinä—sinner; pürvam—before; na—not; kåtam—done; su-kåtam—pious deed; kvacit—ever; sphurad-agny-ucchalat-phene—bubbling with fire; kumbhépäke—in the burning Kumbhépäka; mahä-khale—terrible; asya—of him; kñepanataù—by the throwing; vahniù—the fire; sadyaù—at once; çétalatäm—coolness; gataù—attained; iti—thus; sandehataù—by doubt; cetaù—mind; khidyate—is tormented; me—of me; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Çré Yamaräja said: When a certain sinner, who had never performed even a single pious deed, was thrown into the terrible boiling oil of Kumbhépäka, the oil suddenly became cool. Because of this my mind is now tortured with doubts.

Text 39 

çré-vyäsa uväca 
sükñmä gatir mahä-räja
     viditä päpa-puëyayoù
tathä brahma-gatiù präjïaiù
     sarva-çästra-vidäà varaiù

     çré-vyäsa uväca—Çré Vyäsadeva said; sükñmä—suble; gatiù—movement; mahä-räja—O great king; viditä—understood; päpa—of sin; puëyayoù—and piety; tathä—so; brahma-gatiù—spiritual activities; präjïaiù—by the wise; sarva-çästra—all scriptures; vidäm—of they who know; varaiù—by the best.

     Çré Vyäsadeva said: O great king, the intelligent sages, who have studied all the scriptures, know that the ways of piety, sin, and spiritual progress are very subtle and difficult to understand.

Text 40 

daiva-yogäd asya puëyaà
     präptaà vai svayam arthavat
yena puëyena çuddho 'sau
     tac chånu tvaà mahä-mate

     daiva-yogät—by fate; asya—of him; puëyam—piety; präptam—attained; vai—indeed; svayam—personally; arthavat—as money; yena—by whom; puëyena—by piety; çuddhaù—pure; asau—he; tat—that; çånu—please hear; tvam—you; mahä-mate—O noble one.

     Somehow or other, by destiny, this sinner did perform a pious deed, and by that deed he became purified. O noble-hearted one, please hear the story of this.

Text 41 

kasyäpi hastato yatra
     patitä dvärakä-mådaù
tatraiväyaà måtaù päpé
     çuddho 'bhüt tat-prabhävataù

     kasyäpi—of someone; hastataù—from the hand; yatra—where; patitä—fallen; dvärakä-mådaù—the mud of Dvärakä; tatra—there; eva—indeed; ayam-he; måtaù—died; päpé—sinner; çuddhaù—purified; abhüt—became; tat-prabhävataù—by its power.

     That sinner died in a place where from someone's hand some gopé-candana from Dvärakä had accidentally fallen. Dying in gopé-candana, that sinner became purified.

Text 42 

gopé-candana-liptäìgo
     naro näräyaëo bhavet
etasya darçanät sadyo
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate

     gopé-candana-liptäìgaù—his body marked with gopé-vandrana; naraù—a person; näräyaëaù—like Lord Näräyaëa; bhavet—becames; etasya—of him; darçanät—by the sight; sadyaù—at once; brahma-hatyä—the sin of killing a brähmaëa; pramucyate—is released.

     A person who wears gopé-candana tilaka attains a spiritual form like that of Lord Näräyaëa. Simply by seeing him one becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

Texts 43 and 44 

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä dharma-räjas
     tam änéya viçeñataù
vimäne käma-ge sthäpya
     vaikuëöhaà prakåteù param

preñayäm äsa sahasä
     gopé-candana-kérti-vit
evaà te kathitaà räjan
     gopé-candanakaà yaçaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearong; dharma-räjaù—Yamaräja; tam—him; änéya—bringing; viçeñataù—specifically; vimäne—on an airplane; käma-ge—moving by desire; sthäpya—placing; vaikuëöham—in Vaikuëöha; prakåteù—the world of matter; param—above; preñayäm äsa—sent; sahasä—at once; gopé-candana-kérti-vit—aware of the glories of gopé-candana; evam—thus; te—to you; kathitam—told; räjan—O king; gopé-candanakam—gopé-candana; yaçaù—the glories.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing this, Yamaräja, who understands the glories of gopé-candana, took the sinner, placed him a an airplane that goes anywhere one wishes, and sent him to Vaikuëöha, which is above the worlds of matter. O king, thus I have described to you the glories of gopé-candana.

Text 45 

gopé-candana-mähätmyaà
     yaù çåëoti narottamaù
sa yäti paramaà dhäma
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù

     gopé-candana-mähätmyam—the glories of gopé-candana; yaù—one who; çåëoti—hears; narottamaù—the best of men; sa—he; yäti—attains; paramam—the supreme; dhäma—abode; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     One who hears this account of gopé-candana's glories becomes exalted. He goes to the supreme abode of Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Chapter Sixteen
Çré Rädhä-rüpa-darçana
Seeing Çré Rädhä's Form

Text 1

siddhäçramasya mähätmyaà
     çåëu räjan mahä-mate
yasya smaraëa-mätreëa
     sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

     siddhäçramasya—of Siddhäçrama mähätmyam—glories; çåëu—please hear; räjan—O king; mahä-mate—noble-hearted; yasya—of which; smaraëa—hearing; mätreëa—simply by; sarva-päpaiù—all sins; pramucyate—freed.

     O noble-hearted king, please hear the glories of Siddhäçrama. Simply by hearing its glories one becomes free of all sins. 

Text 2 

yat-sparçanäd dhareù säkñän
     na viyogo bhavet kvacit
taà ca siddhäçramaà näma
     vadantéha purä-vidaù

     yat-sparçanät—by touching it; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; säkñän—directly; na—not; viyogaù—separated; bhavet—becomes; kvacit—sometime; tam—it; ca—and; siddhäçramam—Siddhäçrama; näma—named; vadanti—say; iha——here; purä-vidaù—they who know the truth of ancient times.

     One who touches the land of Siddhäçrama will never be separated from Lord Kåñëa. They who know the truth of ancient times say this place is named Siddhäçrama.

Text 3 

darçanäd yasya sälokyaà
     sämépyaà sparçanät tathä
särüpyaà snänato yäti
     säyujyaà tan-niväsataù

     darçanät—by the sight; yasya—of which; sälokyam—salokya; sämépyam—samipya; sparçanät—by the touch; tathä—so; särüpyam—sarupya; snänataù—by bathing; yäti—attains; säyujyam—sayujya; tan-niväsataù—by residing.

     By seeing Siddhäçrama one attains sälokya liberation. By touching it one attains sämépya liberation. By bathing there one attains särüpya liberation. By residing there one attains säyujya liberation.

Text 4 

tat-térthasyäpi mähätmyaà
     çrutvä candränanä-mukhät
rädhä snätuà manaç cakre
     kåñëa-vékñepa-vihvalä

     tat-térthasya—of this pilgrimage place; api—also; mähätmyam—the glory; çrutvä—hearing; candränanä-mukhät—from Candränanä's mouth; rädhä—Rädhä; snätum—to bathe; manaù—mind; cakre—placed; kåñëa-vékñepa—with separation from Lord Kåñëa; vihvalä—overwhelmed.

     When Çré Rädhä, who was broken-hearted in separation from Lord Kåñëa, heard from Candränanä's mouth the glories of Siddhäçrama, She decided bathe in that holy place.

Text 5 

çré-siddhäçrama-yäträyäà
     sürya-parvaëi mädhave
rädhä gantuà manaç cakre
     utthäya kadalé-vanät

     çré-siddhäçrama-yäträyäm—onm a pilgrimage to Siddhäçrama; sürya-parvaëi—on the sürya-parva day; mädhave—in the moth of Mädhava; rädhä—Rädhä; gantum—to go; manaù—mind; cakre—placing; utthäya—rising; kadalé-vanät—from Kadalévana.

     Leaving the forest of Kadalévana on the sürya-parva day in the month of Mädhava (April-May), Çré Rädhä decided to go on a pilgrimage to Siddhäçrama.

Texts 6 and 7 

gopénäà çata-yüthena
     sarva-gopa-gaëaiù saha
çata-varñe vyatéte tu
     çrédämnaù çäpa-käraëät

çré-rädhä sibikärüòhä
     chatra-cämara-véjitä
änarteñu mahä-térthaà
     yayau siddhäçramaà saté

     gopénäm—of gopés; çata-yüthena—with a hundred groups; sarva-gopa-gaëaiù—with all the gopas; saha—with; çata-varñe—a hundred years; vyatéte—passed; tu—indeed; çrédämnaù—of Çrédämä; çäpa-käraëät—from the curse; çré-rädhä—Çré Rädhä; sibikärüòhä—on a palanquin; chatra—parasol; cämara—camaras; véjitä—fanned; änarteñu—in Anarta-deça; mahä-tértham—top the great holy place; yayau—went; siddhäçramam—to Siddhäçrama; saté—saintly.

     Now that the hundred years of Çrédämä's curse had passed, saintly Çré Rädhä, riding on a palanquin, a parasol held over Her, fanned by many cämaras, and accompanied by a hundred groups of gopés and all the gopas, went to holy Siddhäçrama in the country of Anarta.

Text 8 

tatraiva bhagavän säkñäd
     yädavaiù parimaëòitaù
stréëäà ñoòaça-sähasrair
     yäträrthaà cäyayau nåpa

     tatra—there; eva—indeed; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; yädavaiù—with the Yädavas; parimaëòitaù—decorated; stréëäm—of the wives; ñoòaça-sähasraiù—with sixteen thousand; yäträrtham—to go on pilgrimage; ca—and; äyayau—went; nåpa—O king.

     O king, accompanied by His sixteen-thousand queens and all His relatives in the Yädava dynasty, Lord Kåñëa also went on a pilgrimage to Siddhäçrama.

Text 9 

baliñöhä ye ca gopäläù
     koöiçaù çastra-päëayaù
siddhäçramaà tu jugupuù
     sarvato rädhikäjïayä

     baliñöhä—strong; ye—who; ca—and; gopäläù—gopas; koöiçaù—millions; çastra-päëayaù—weapons in hand; siddhäçramam—Siddhäçrama; tu—indeed; jugupuù—protected; sarvataù—everywhere; rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; äjïayä—by the order.

     By Çré Rädhä 's order many millions of strong gopas, weapons in  hand, protected the pilgrimage-party in Siddhäçrama. 

Text 10 

çata-yüthäs tathä gopyo
     vetra-hastä mahä-baläù
siddhäçrame tu vidhivat
     snäntéà rädhäà siñevire

     çata-yüthäù—a hundred groups; tathä—so; gopyaù—gopés; vetra-hastä—sticks in hand; mahä-baläù—very strong; siddhäçrame—in Siddhäçrama; tu—indeed; vidhivat—properly; snäntém—bathing; rädhäm—Rädhä; siñevire—served.

     Sticks in hand, a hundred groups of very strong gopés protected and served Çré Rädhä as She bathed at Siddhäçrama. 

Text 11 

dvärakä-väsinäà teñäà
     sthitänäà snänam icchatäm
çastra-vetrais täòitänäà
     viviçur bhagavat-striyaù

     dvärakä-väsinäm—as the men of Dvärakä; teñäm—they; sthitänäm—situated; snänam—bathing; icchatäm—desiring; çastra—weapons; vetraiù—sticks; täòitänäm—beaten; viviçuù—entered; bhagavat-striyaù—the wives of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     As the men of Dvärakä, wishing to bathe there, were being beaten with sticks, Lord Kåñëa's queens entered that place.

Text 12 

keyaà snätéti papracchur
     yasyä vaibhavam adbhutam
yad-gauravät trasantéha
     sarve yädava-puìgaväù

     kä—who?; iyam—She; snäté—bathing; iti—thus; papracchuù—asked; yasyä—pf whom; vaibhavam—the power; adbhutam—wonderful; yad-gauravät—out of respect for whom; trasanti—fear; iha—here; sarve—all; yädava-puìgaväù—the best of the Yädavas.

     The queens asked: Who is the girl bathing here? Her power is wonderful. The best of the Yädava warriors are terrified of Her.

Text 13 

aho kasya priyäà ceyaà
     kä näma kutra väsiné
tvaà sarva-jïo hi bhagavän
     vada no devaké-suta

     ahaù—Oh; kasya—of whom?; priyäm—the beloved; ca—and; iyam—She; kä—Who?; näma—name; kutra—where?; väsiné—resides; tvam—You; sarva-jïaù—all-knowing; hi—indeed; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vada—please tell; naù—us; devaké—of Devaké; suta—O son.

     Who is Her beloved? What is Her name? Where does She live? O Lord, You know everything. O son of Devaké, please tell us.

Text 14 

çré-bhagavän uväca 
våñabhänu-sutä säkñäd
     rädheyaà kérti-nandiné
vrajeçvaré mad-dayitä
     gopikädhéçvaré varä

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; våñabhänu—of King Våñabhänu; sutä—the daughter; säkñät—directly; rädhä—Rädhä; iyam—She; kérti—of Kérti; nandiné—the daughter; vrajeçvaré—the queen of Vraja; mad-dayitä—My beloved; gopikädhéçvaré—the queen of the gopés; varä—exalted.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: She is named Rädhä. She is the daughter of Kérti and Våñabhänu. She is the queen of Vraja and the queen of the gopés. She is very exalted. I am Her beloved.

Text 15 

snätuà siddhäçramaà präptä
     vrajäd gopé-gaëaiù saha
yad-gauravät trasanty ete
     tasyä vaibhavam adbhutam

     snätum—to bathe; siddhäçramam—Siddhäçrama; präptä—attained; vrajät—from Vraja; gopé-gaëaiù—with many gopés; saha—with; yad-gauravät—in awe of whom; trasanti—are frightened; ete—they; tasyä—of Her; vaibhavam—the power; adbhutam—wonderful.

     Accompanied by many gopés, from Vraja She has come to bathe at Siddhäçrama. The great Yädava warriors are terrified of Her. That is Her wonderful power.

Text 16 

çré-kåñëasya vacaù çrutvä
     satyabhämätha bhäminé
çanaiù präha sapatnénäà
     rüpa-yauvana-garvitä

     çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; Satyabhämä-Satyabhämä; atha—then; bhäminé—beautiful; çanaiù—slowly; präha—said; sapatnénäm—of her co-wives; rüpa-yauvana-garvitä—proud of her youthful beauty.

     After hearing Lord Kåñëa's words, beautiful Satyabhämä, who proudly thought herself the queen whose youthful beauty was the greatest, slowly said:

Text 17 

kià nu rädhä rüpavaté
     nähaà rüpavaté kim u
bahubhir yäcitä pürvaà
     rüpaudärya-guëärcitä

     kim—why?; nu—indeed; rädhä—Rädhä; rüpavaté—beautiful; na—not; aham—I; rüpavaté—beautiful; kim—whether?; u—indeed; bahubhiù—by many; yäcitä—begged; pürvam—before; rüpa—beauty; audärya—and greatness; guëa—virtues; arcitä—worshiped.

     Why is Rädhä so beautiful? Am I not beautiful? Beauty and virtue worship me. Many begged for my hand.

Text 18 

mad-rüpa-käraëät sakhyaù
     çatadhanvä måto 'bhavat
akrüraù kåtavarmä ca
     purä tau dvau paläyitau

     mad-rüpa-käraëät—because of my beauty; sakhyaù—O freinds; çatadhanvä—Satadhanva; måtaù—died; abhavat—became; akrüraù—Akrüra; kåtavarmä—Kåtavarmä; ca—and; purä—before; tau—they; dvau—both; paläyitau—fled.

     Because of my beauty Akrüra and Kåtavarmä fled and Çatadhanvä died.

Texts 19 and 20 

dine dine svarëa-bhärän
     añöäu sa såjati svataù
durbhikña-märy-ariñöäni
     sarvädhi-vyädhayo 'çubhäù

na santi mäyinas tatra
     yaträste 'bhyarcito maëiù
mat-piträ paribarhe 'pi
     dattaù säkñät syamantakaù

     dine dine—day after day; svarëa-bhärän—bharas of gold; añöäu—eight; sa—it; såjati—creates; svataù—itselkf; durbhikña—famines; märy—plague; ariñöäni—calamities; sarva—all; ädhi—sufferings; vyädhayaù—diseases; açubhäù—inauspicious; na—not; santi—are; mäyinaù—theives; tatra—there; yatra—where; äste—is; abhyarcitaù—worshiped; maëiù—jewel; mat-piträ—by my father; paribarhe—as a wedding present; api—even; dattaù—given; säkñät—directly; syamantakaù—Syamantaka.

     On the day of my marriage as a wedding present my father gave the Syamantaka jewel. That jewel produces eight bhäras of gold every day. In the country where that jewel is worshiped there are no famines, plagues, calamities, diseases, thieves, or anything inauspicious.

Text 21 

tena jätaà mad-gåhe 'pi
     sarvaà vaibhavam adbhutam
premëä pareëa çré-kåñëa-
     garuòopari-gäminé

     tena—by that; jätam—born; mad-gåhe—in my home; api—also; sarvam—all; vaibhavam—power; adbhutam—wonderful; premëä—with love; pareëa—great; çré-kåñëa—Çré Kåñëa; garuòa—Garuòa; upari—one; gäminé—going.

     Because of that jewel there is great power in my home. Because of that jewel Lord Kåñëa loves me and took me riding on Garuòa.

Text 22 

bhaumäsura-mahä-yuddhaà
     duñöaà prägjyotiñaà puram
mamäpi kåpayä yüyaà
     tat-puräc ca samägatäù

     bhaumäsura-mahä-yuddham—a great battle with Bhaumäsura; duñöam—horrible; prägjyotiñam—Pragjyosia; puram—city; mama—of me; api—also; kåpayä—with mercy; yüyam—you; tat-purät—from that city; ca—and; samägatäù—come.

     Because of me Lord Kåñëa attacked Prägjyotiña City and fought with Bhaumäsura. It is by my mercy that you all came from Bhaumäsura's City.

Text 23 

präptäù çré-kåñëa-patnétvaà
     sarvä eva na saàçayaù
mad-gauraväc ca çakrasya
     chatraà dattam anena vai

     präptäù—attained; çré-kåñëa-patnétvam—teh status of Lord's Kåñëa's eife; sarvä—all; eva—indeed; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; mad-gauravät—by respectf for me; ca—and; çakrasya—of Indra; chatram—the parasol; dattam—given; anena—by Him; vai—indeed.

     It is by my mercy that all of you became Lord Kåñëa's wives. Of that there is no doubt. It is because of me that Lord Kåñëa returned Indra's parasol.

Texts 24 and 25 

kuëòale deva-mätre ca
     datte vai mat-priyecchayä
airävata-bhavä nägä
     bhaumäsura-samåddhayaù

mad-icchayä samänétäù
     çré-kåñëena mahätmanä
mat-käraëän mahä-vairaà
     çakre 'pi kåtavän hariù

     kuëòale—two earrings; deva-mätre—to the mother of the demigods; ca—and; datte—given; vai—indeed; mat-priya—of my beloved; icchayä—by the wish; airävata—of Airävata; bhaväù—the nature; nägä—elephants; bhaumäsura-samåddhayaù—the opulences of Bhaumasura; mat—of me; icchayä—by the desire; samänétäù—brought; çré-kåñëena—by Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mat-käraëän—because of me; mahä-vairam—great enmity; çakre—with Indra; api—even; kåtavän—did; hariù—Kåñëa.

     Because of my wish Lord Kåñëa returned Aditi's earrings and Indra's parasol. Because of my wish Lord Kåñëa took Bhaumäsura's riches and his elephants powerful as Airävata. Becasue of me Lord Kåñëa fought with Indra.

Text 26 

mad-dväre vartate nityaà
     våkñendraù parijätakaù
pätivratyenaiva mayä
     çré-kåñëo 'yaà vaçé-kåtaù

     mad-dväre—at my doorway; vartate—is; nityam—always; våkñendraù—the king of trees; parijätakaù—Parijata; pätivratyena—by devotion ot my husband; eva—indeed; mayä—by me; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; ayam—He; vaçé-kåtaù—is conquered.

     By the doorway of my house a pärijäta, the king of trees, eternally grows. With devotion to Him I have brought Lord Kåñëa under my control.

Text 27 

sarvopaskara-samyukto
     näradäya samarpitaù
mat-samänaà na kasyästu
     gauravaà vaibhavaà tathä

     sarva—all; upaskara—paraphernalia; samyuktaù—possessing; näradäya—to Närada Muni; samarpitaù—offered; mat-samänam—equal to me; na—not; kasya—of whom?; astu—may be; gauravam—glory; vaibhavam—power; tathä—as.

     It is becasue of me that Lord gave many gifts to Närada Muni. No one is my equal. Who is glorious and powerful like me?

Texts 28 and 29 

rüpaudaryaà na kasyästu
     rädhäyäù kim u varëaëam
yad-rüpopari caidyädyä
     anena yuyudhur yudhi

he çubhru rukmiëé sä tvaà
     kathaà rüpavaté na hi
sa gopa-kanyakä sakhyo
     yüyaà vai räja-kanyakäù dhanyä manyäç ca sarvä vai      yüyaà mänavaté-varäù

     rüpa—beauty; audaryam—virtues; na—not; kasya—of whom?; astu—is; rädhäyäù—of Rädhä; kim u—whether?; varëaëam—description; yad-rüpopari—on the beauty; caidya-ädyä—headed by Çisupala; anena—with Him; yuyudhuù—fought; yudhi—in battle; he—O; çubhru—girl with the beautiful eyeborws; rukmiëé——Rukmiëé; sä—she; tvam—you; katham—why?; rüpavaté—beautiful; na—not; hi—indeed; sa—she; gopa-kanyakä—a gopé; sakhyaù—O friends; yüyam—you all; vai—indeed; räja-kanyakäù—princesses; dhanyä—fortunate; manyäù—worshipable and glorious; ca—and; sarvä—all; vai—indeed; yüyam—you; mänavaté-varäù—worthy of worship.

     No one is beautiful and virtuous like me. Who can be? Can it be said that this girl Rädhä is beautiful and virtuous like me? O Rukmiëi with the beautiful eyebrows, Çiçupäla and a host of kings fought over your beauty. Are you not beautiful? Friends, this Rädhä is only a cowherd girl. You are all princesses. You are fortunate and glorious. You are all worthy to be worshiped.

Text 30 

evaà tu satyabhämäyäà
     vadantyäà maithileçvara
bhütvä mänavaté sarvä
     rukmiëy-ädyäù striyo varäù

     evam—thus; tu—indeed; satyabhämäyäm—as Satyabhämä; vadantyäm—was speaking; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä; bhütvä—becoming; mänavaté—proud; sarvä—all; rukmiëy-ädyäù—headed by Rukmiëé; striyaù—the wives; varäù—beautiful.

     O king of Mithilä, as Satyabhämä spoke these words, Çré Rukmiëé and the other beautiful queens became filled with pride.

Text 31 

kuça-kauçala-çélärtha-
     rüpa-yauvana-garvitäù
çré-kåñëaà mänadaà prähur
     añöä paööa-mahä-striyaù

     kuça—wild; kauçala—good fortune; çéla—virtue; artha—opulence; rüpa—beauty; yauvana—and youth; garvitäù—proud; çré-kåñëam—to Lord Kåñëa; mänadam—humble; prähuù—spoke; añöä—eight; paööa-mahä-striyaù—principal queens.

     Proud of their good fortune, virtues, wealth, and youthful beauty, the eight principal queens spoke to humble Lord Kåñëa.

Text 32 

çré-räjïya ücuù 
çrutaà tava mukhät pürvaà
     rädhä-rüpaà paraà småtam
yasyäà raktaù sadä tvaà vai
     tvayi raktä ca yä sadä

     çré-räjïya ücuù—the queens siad; çrutam—heard; tava—of You; mukhät—from the mouth; pürvam—before; rädhä—of Rädhä's; rüpam—beauty; param—great; småtam—remembered; yasyäm—for Her; raktaù—in love; sadä—always; tvam—You; vai—indeed; tvayi—with You; raktä—in love; ca—and; yä—who; sadä—always.

     The queens said: From Your own mouth we have heard of Çré Rädhä. We remember You said that You love Her eternally and She loves You eternally.

Text 33 

taà rädhäà drañöum icchämas
     tvat-priyäà vraja-väsiném
tvad-viyogena saìkhinnäà
     snätuà cätra samägatäm

     tam—Her; rädhäm—Rädhä; drañöum—to see; icchämaù—we wish; tvat-priyäm—Your beloved; vraja-väsiném—who lives in Vraja; tvat—from You; viyogena—by separation; saìkhinnäm—unhappy; snätum—to bathe; ca—and; atra—here; samägatäm—come.

     We wish to see Her, Rädhä, Your beloved, who lives in Vraja, and who, unhappy because She is separated from You, has come here to bathe.

Text 34 

çré-närada uväca 
tathästu coktvä çré-kåñëaù
     paööa-stré-pariveñöitaù
ñoòaça-stré-sahasräòhyo
     drañöuà rädhäà jagäma ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; paööa-stré—of the queens; pariveñöitaù—surrounded; ñoòaça-stré-sahasräòhyaù—with sixteen thousand queens; drañöum—to see; rädhäm—Rädhä; jagäma—went; ha—certainly.

     Çré Närada said: Saying, "So be it.", and taking the sixteen thousand queens with Him, Lord Kåñëa went to see Çré Rädhä.

Text 35 

çré-hema-çibire ramye
     patäkä-dhvaja-maëòite
candra-maëòala-çobhäòhye
     vitäna-tanite çubhe

     çré-hema-çibire—on a golden palanquin; ramye—beautiful; patäkä-dhvaja-maëòite—decorated with flags and designs; candra—the moon; maëòala—circle; çobha—with the beauty; äòhye—opulent; vitäna-tanite—with a parasol; çubhe—beautiful.

     Çré Rädhä's beautiful golden palanquin was decorated with flags, ornaments, a graceful awning glorious like the moon, . . . 

Text 36 

muktä-javanikä yatra
     vastrair ästaraëaà çubham
mälaté-makarandäòhyaà
     sarvato gandha-saìkulam

     muktä—of pearls; javanikä—a curtain; yatra—where; vastraiù—with colths; ästaraëam—spreading; çubham—beautiful; mälaté—-makarandäòhyam—rich with the nectar of malati flowers; sarvataù—everywhere; gandha-saìkulam—fragrant.

 . . . a curtain of pearls, many opulent cloths, and the all-pervading fragrance of mälaté flowers.

Text 37 

tena bhåìgävalé cakre
     kalaà kolähalaà param
tatra rädhä paööa-räjïé
     çré-kåñëa-håta-mänasä

     tena—by him; bhåìgävalé—many bees; cakre—did; kalam—melodious; kolähalam—tumultuous sound; param—great; tatra—there; rädhä—Rädhä; paööa-räjïé—the most important queen; çré-kåñëa-håta-mänasä—Her heart captivated by Lord Kåñëa.

     Attracted to that fragrance, many bees made a sweet-sounding commotion. Then the first queen, Çré Rädhä, Her heart captivated by Lord Kåñëa, came there.

Text 38 

haàsäbhair vyajanair divyair
     véjyamänä sakhé-janaiù
chatra-dola-dharais tatra
     vrajadbhis tam itas tataù

     haàsäbhaiù—splendid as swans; vyajanaiù—with fans; divyaiù—splendid; véjyamänä—fanning; sakhé-janaiù—by friends; chatra—parasol; dola—and palanquin;dharais tatra—carrying; vrajadbhiù—walking; tam—Her; itaù—here; tataù—and there.

     Bearing Her palanquin, holding Her parasol, and fanning Her with fans splendid and graceful as a flock of swans, the gopés carried Rädhä here and there.

Texts 39 and 40 

bälärka-kuëòala-dharä
     vidyud-däma-manoharä
koöi-candra-pratékäçä
     tanvé komala-vigrahä

aìguly-agraiù çobhanaiù svaiù
     puñpa-bhümià manoharaà
çanaiù çanaiù päda-padmaà
     dhärayanty ati-komalam

     bälärka-kuëòala-dharä—wearing earrings splendid as the rising sun; vidyud-däma-manoharä—beautiful as a garland of lightning flashes; koöi-candra-pratékäçä—glorious as millions of moons; tanvé—slender; komala-vigrahä—Her form delicate; aìguly-agraiù—with Her toes; çobhanaiù—beautiful; svaiù—own; puñpa-bhümim—on the ground of flowers; manoharam—beautiful; çanaiù çanaiù—slowly; päda-padmam—lotus feet; dhärayanti—placing; ati-komalam—very delicate.

     Then slender and delicate Rädhä, splendid as a necklace of lightning flashes, beautiful as millions of moons, and decorated with earrings glorious as the rising sun, gingerly placed first Her graceful toes, and then Her very delicate lotus feet on the ground filled with flowers.

Text 41 

durät täà rädhikäà prekñya
     kåñëa-patnyaù sahasraçaù
jagmur mürchäà mahä-räja
     tad-rüpeëäti-mohitäù

     durät—form afar; täm—Her; rädhikäm—Çré Rädhä; prekñya—seeing; kåñëa-patnyaù—Lord Kåñëa's queens; sahasraçaù—thousands; jagmuù—went; mürchäm—to fainting; mahä-räja—O great king; tad-rüpeëa—by Her beauty; ati-mohitäù—stunned.

     O great king, when they saw Çré Rädhä from far away, Lord Kåñëa's thousands of queens, overcome by the sight of Her beauty, suddenly fainted. 

Text 42 

tat-tejasä hata-rucaù
     süryät tärä-gaëä yathä
gata-rüpäbhimänäs tä
     ücuù sarväù parasparam

     tat-tejasä—by Her glory; hata-rucaù—their glory was eclipsed; süryät—from the sun; tärä-gaëä—the stars; yathä—as; gata—gone; rüpa—of the beauty; abhimänäù—pride; täù—they; ücuù—said; sarväù—all; parasparam—among themselves.

     As the sun makes the many stars seem insignificant so Çré Rädhä's beauty made the queens' beauty seem insignifant. Their pride in their own beauty now crushed, the queens said among themselves:

Text 43 

aho etädåçaà rüpaà
     tri-lokyäà na hi cädbhutam
çrutaà yathä tathä dåñöaà
     advitéyaà manoharam

     ahaù—Oh; etädåçam—like this; rüpam—beauty; tri-lokyäm—in the three worlds; na—not; hi—indeed; ca—and; adbhutam—wonderful; çrutam—heard; yathä—as; tathä—so; dåñöam—seen; advitéyam—without peer; manoharam—charming.

     Such wonderful beauty has no equal. In the three worlds the like of it has never been seen or heard of before. 

Text 44 

evaà vadantyas täà präptäù
     çré-kåñëasya puraù-saräù
gopénäà räja-putréëäà
     neträëi parirebhire

     evam—thus; vadantyaù—saying; täm—Her; präptäù—approached; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; puraù-saräù—going before; gopénäm—of the gopés; räja-putréëäm—of the princesses; neträëi—the eyes; parirebhire—embraced.

     As they were speaking these words, Lord Kåñëa's servants approached Çré Rädhä. It was then that the gopés and the queens met and their eyes embraced.
.pa

Chapter Seventeen
Siddhäçrame Çré-Rädhä-Kåñëägamane Rädhä-prema-prakäçaù
Çré Çré Rädhä and Kåñëa Meet at Siddhäçrama and the Nature of Çré Rädhä's Love Is Revealed

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
çré-kåñëam ägataà vékñya
     paööa-räjïé-samanvitam
tadä jaya-jayäravaà
     cakrur gopyo 'ti-harñitäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çré-kåñëam—Çré Rädhä; ägatam—come; vékñya—seeing; paööa-räjïé-samanvitam—with His most important queens; tadä—then; jaya-jayäravam—sounds of "Victory!"; cakruù—did; gopyaù—the gopés; ati-harñitäù—very happy.

     Seeing that Lord Kåñëa has come with His queens, the happy gopés called out "All glories! All glories!"

Text 2 

sahasä çré-harià rädhä
     parikramya kåtäïjaliù
padmäbhäbhyäà tu neträbhyäà
     änandäçrüëi muïcaté

     sahasä—at once; çré-harim—Lord Kåñëa; rädhä—Çré Rädhä; parikramya—circumambulating; kåtä 24jaliù—with folded hands; padma—lotuses; äbhäbhyäm—like; tu—indeed; neträbhyäm—with eyes; änandäçrüëi—tears of bliss; muïcaté—shedding.

     With folded hands Çré Rädhä circumambulated Çré Kåñëa. Then tears of bliss fell from Her lotus eyes.

Texts 3-5 

syamantaka-khacit-pädaà
     cintämaëi-khacit-taöam
padmaräga-lasan-madhyaà
     candra-maëòala-vartulam

kaustubhaiù prakhacit påñöhaà
     kumbha-maëòala-maëòitam
pärijätaka-puñpäòhyaà
     péyüña-sravi-chatra-mat

dattvä siàhäsanaà tasmai
     präha prahasitänanä
adya me saphalaà janma
     cädya me saphalaà tapaù

     syamantaka-khacit-pädam—its feet studded with syamantaka jewels; cintämaëi-khacit-taöam—its sides studded with cintämaëi jewels; padmaräga-lasan-madhyam—its middle glistening with rubies; candra-maëòala-vartulam—round as the moon; kaustubhaiù—with kaustubha jewels; prakhacit—studded; påñöham—its back; kumbha-maëòala-maëòitam—decorated with a dome; pärijätaka-puñpäòhyam—opulent with parijata flowers; péyüña-sravi—dripping nectar; chatra-mat—with a parasol; dattvä—offering; siàhäsanam—a throne; tasmai—to Him; präha—said; prahasita—smiling; änanä—face; adya—today; me—my; saphalam—success; janma—birth; ca—and; adya—today; me—of me; saphalam—success; tapaù—austerities.

     Then, offering Him a throne with feet of syamantaka jewels, sides of cintämaëi jewels, a middle glistening with rubies, a back of kaustubha jewels, opulent with many pärijäta flowers, round as the moon, and with a glorious dome and a parasol showering nectar, smiling Çré Rädhä said to Lord Kåñëa,  Now my life is a success. Now my austerities are a success.

Text 6 

adya me saphalo dharmo
     hare tvayy ägate sati
dhanyaà siddhäçrama-snänaà
     saphalé-bhütam adbhutam mayäpi na kåtä bhaktis      tava bhakta-sahäyinaù

     adya—now; me—my; saphalaù—success; dharmaù—religion; hare—O Kåñëa; tvayi—You; ägate—come; sati—being so; dhanyam—good fortune; siddhäçrama-snänam—bathing at Siddhäçrama; saphalé-bhütam—success; adbhutam—wonderful; mayä—by Me; api—also; na—not; kåtä—done; bhaktiù—devotion; tava—of You; bhakta-sahäyinaù—helped by the devotees.

     "O Kåñëa, now that You have come My practice of religion is a success and My bathing at Siddhäçrama is a wonderful success. Actually I have no devotion to You, who are served by Your real devotees.

Text 7 

bahavaç ca sahäyä me
     tvayä deva kåtä bhuvi
kaàso 'pi loka-vijayé
     yena bhéto babhüva ha

     bahavaù—many; ca—and; sahäyä—helpers; me—of me; tvayä—by You; deva—O Lord; kåtä—done; bhuvi—on the earth; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; api—even; loka-vijayé—who conquered the worlds; yena—by whom; bhétaù—afraid; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     "O Lord, You gave Me many friends in this world. You brought fear ot Kaàsa, who had conquered all the worlds.

Text 8 

sa märito mad-vacanäc
     chaìkhacüòas tayä hare
mat-premëäpi tvayä deva
     vaibhavaà darçitaà vraje

     sa—he; märitaù—killed; mad-vacanät—by My words; çaìkhacüòaù—Çaìkhacüòa; tvayä—by You; hare—O Kåñëa; mat—for Me; premëä—with love; api—also; tvayä——by You; deva—O Lord; vaibhavam—power; darçitam—shown; vraje—in Vraja.

     "O Kåñëa, on My request You killed Çaìkhacüòa. O Lord, out of love for Me You revealed Your power and glory in Vraja.

Text 9 

çakrasya mäna-bhaìgo 'pi
     kåto deva tvayä balät
mat-käraëäd vrajaà rakñan
     dhåtvä govardhanäcalam

     çakrasya—of Indra; mäna-bhaìgaù—breaking the pride; api—even; kåtaù—done; deva—O Lord; tvayä—by You; balät—forcibly; mat-käraëät—on My account; vrajam—Vraja; rakñan—protecting; dhåtvä—holding; govardhanäcalam—Govardhana Hill.

     "O Lord, for My sake You broke Indra's pride and lifted Govardhana Hill.

Text 10 

yathecchäliìgito räse
     gopébhis tvaà vaçé-kåtaù
idaà te caritaà deva
     nara-loka-viòambanam

     yathä—according; icchä—to desire; äliìgitaù—embraced; räse—in the rasa dance; gopébhiù—by the gopés; tvam—You; vaçé-kåtaù—conquered; idam—this; te—of You; caritam—actions; deva—O Lord; nara-loka—of human beings; viòambanam—an imitation.

     "In the räsa dance You embraced the gopés to Your heart's content. Your were conquered by the gopés. O Lord, these pastimes of Yours imitate the actions of human beings.

Text 11 

evaà vadanté sa rädhä
     tvaraà candränanäjïayä
sädareëa hareù patnér
     vékñya tä gauravaà dadau

     evam—thus; vadanté—speaking; sa—She; rädhä—r; tvaram—at once; candränanä—of Canränanä; äjïayä—by the order; sädareëa—with respect; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; patnéù—the wives; vékñya—seeing; tä—to them; gauravam—respect; dadau—gave.

     As Çré Rädhä was speaking these words, Candränanä informed Her of the queens' presence. Respectfully glancing at the queens, Çré Rädhä offered them all respect.

Texts 12 and 13 

bhaiñméà jämbavatéà bhämäà
     satyäà bhadräà ca lakñmänäm
kalindéà mitravindäà ca
     militvä ta parasparam

ñoòaça-stré-sahasraà ca
     rohiëé-mukham eva ca
premänandamayé dorbhyäà
     parirebhe mudänvitä
         bhaiñmém—Rukmiëé; jämbavatém—Jämbavaté; bhämäm—Satyabhämä; satyäm—Satyä; bhadräm—Bhadrä; ca—and; lakñmänäm—Lakñmaëä; kalindém—Kälindé; mitravindäm—Mitravindä; ca—and; militvä—meeting; ta—them; parasparam—each other; ñoòaça-stré-sahasram—sixteen thousand queens; ca—and; rohiëé-mukham—headed by Rohiëé; eva—indeed; ca—and; premänandamayé—filled with the bliss of love; dorbhyäm—witharms; parirebhe—embraced; mudänvitä—joyful.

     Meeting Rukmiëé, Jämbavaté, Satyabhämä, Satyä, Bhadrä, Lakñmaëä, Kälindé, Mitravindä, sixteen thousand other queens, headed by Rohiëé, Çré Rädhä, filled with love and joy, embraced them in Her arms.

Text 14 

çré-rädhoväca 
candro yathaiko bahavaç cakoräù
     süryo yathaiko bahavo dåçaù syuù
çré-kåñëacandro bhagaväàs tathaiko
     bhaktä bhaginyo bahavo vayaà ca

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; candraù—moon; yathä—as; ekaù—one; bahavaù—many; cakoräù—cakora birds; süryaù—sun; yathä—as; ekaù—one; bahavaù—many; dåçaù—eyes; syuù—are; çré-kåñëacandraù—Çré Kåñëacandra; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tathä—se; ekaù—one; bhaktäù—devotees; bhaginyaù—O sisters; bahavaù—many; vayam—we; ca—and.

     Çré Rädhä said: As there is but one moon but the cakora birds are many, and as there is but one sun but the eyes are many, so there is but one Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëacandra, but we devotees, O My sisters, are many.

Texts 15 and 16 

padma-prabhävaà madhupo yathä hi
     ratna-prabhävaà kila tat-parékñit
vidyä-prabhävaà ca yathä hi vidvän
     kavya-prabhävaà ca yathä kavéndraù

yathä sahasreñu janeñu satsu
     rasa-prabhävaà rasikas tathä hi
jänäti tattvena narendra-putryaù
     kåñëa-prabhävaà bhuvi kåñëa-bhaktaù

     padma-prabhävam—the glory of the lotus; madhupaù—a bee; yathä—as; hi—indeed; ratna-prabhävam—the glory of jewels; kila—indeed; tat-parékñit—someone searching for jewels; vidyä-prabhävam—the glory of knowledge; ca—and; yathä—as; hi—indeed; vidvän—a scholar; kavya-prabhävam—the glory of poetry; ca—and; yathä—as; kavéndraù—the king of poets; yathä—as; sahasreñu—among tousands; janeñu—of people; satsu—saintly; rasa-prabhävam—the glory of nectar mellows; rasikaù—they who are expert at relishing nectar; tathä—so; hi—indeed; jänäti—knows; tattvena—in truth; narendra-putryaù—O queens; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; prabhävam—the glory; bhuvi—in this world; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; bhaktaù—a devotee.

     O queens, as a bumblebee understands the glory of lotus flowers, as a jeweler understands the glory of jewels, as a scholar understands the glory of knowledge, as a poet understands the glory of poetry, and as a person expert at tasting nectar understands the glory of the nectar held by thousands of saintly devotees, so only a devotee of Kåñëa can understand the glory of Kåñëa in truth.

Text 17 

çré-närada uväca 
rädhä-väkyaà tadä çrutvä
     rukmiëé bhéñma-nandiné
sapatné-sahitä präha
     rädhäà kamala-locanäm

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rädhä-väkyam—Çré Rädhä's words; tadä—then; çrutvä—hearing; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; bhéñma-nandiné—the daughter of Bhéñmaka; sapatné-sahitä—with her co-wives; präha—said; rädhäm—to Rädhä; kamala-locanäm—lotus-eyed.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing Çré Rädhä's words, Bhéñmaka's daughter Rukmiëé, who stood in the company of her co-wives, spoke to lotus-eyed Çré Rädhä.

Text 18 

çré-rukmiëy uväca 
dhanyäsi rädhe våñabhänu-putri
     tvad-bhakti-bhävena vaçé-kåto 'yam
vadaty alaà yasya kathäà tri-loké
     sa eva värtäà vadati tvadéyäm

     çré-rukmiëé uväca—Çré Rukmiëé said; dhanyä—fortunate; asi—You are; rädhe—O Rädhä; våñabhänu-putri—O daughter of King Våñabhänu; tvat—of You; bhakti-bhävena—by the love and devotion; vaçé-kåtaù—conquered; ayam—He; vadati—indeed; alam—greatly; yasya—of whom; kathäm—the talk; tri-loké—the three worlds; sa—that; eva—indeed; värtäm—talk; vadati—says; tvadéyäm—about You.

     Çré Rukmiëé said: O Rädhä, O daughter of King Våñabhänu, You are fortunate. Kåñëa is conquered by Your love. He is under Your control. The three worlds glorify Kåñëa, but Kåñëa glorifies You.

Text 19 

çrutaà yathä te hari-bhäva-lakñaëaà
     tathä hi dåñöaà na hi citram eva hi
gacchäçu cäsmac-chibiräëi yatra hi
     tvaà netum aträgatavatya ädåtäù

     çrutam—heard; yathä—as; te—of You; hari-bhäva-lakñaëam—characterized by love for Lord Kåñëa; tathä—so; hi—indeed; dåñöam—seen; na—not; hi—indeed; citram—wonder; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; gaccha—please go; äçu—at once; ca—and; asmat—our; çibiräëi—palanquins; yatra—where; hi—indeed; tvam—You; netum—to take; atra—here; ägatavatyä—come; ädåtäù—honored.

     We have already heard of Your great love for Lord Kåñëa, so we are not surprised now that we may see it directly. Please come to our palanquins. We have come here to honor You and take You with us.

Text 20 

çré-närada uväca 
evam uktvä bhéñma-sutä
     rädhäà kérti-sutäà tadä
samänéya sva-çibire
     sädareëa mahätmanä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; bhéñma-sutä—the daughter of King Bhéñmaka; rädhäm—to Rädhä; kérti—of Kérti; sutäm—the daughter of Kérti; tadä—then; samänéya—taking; sva-çibire—on Her own palanquin; sädareëa—respectfully; mahätmanä—noble-hearted.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these words, to her own palanquin noble-hearted Queen Rukmiëé respectfully brought Çré Rädhä.

Texts 21 and 22 

çibire sarvato-bhadre
     padma-kiïjalka-väsite
haime çiréña-mådule
     paryaìke sopabarhaëe

sukhaà niväsayäm äsa
     väsaù sräì-maëòanädibhiù
sampüjya vidhivad rätrau
     sapatné-sahitä saté

     çibire—on the palanquin; sarvato-bhadre—named sarvato-bhadra; padma—lotus; kiïjalka—whorls; väsite—scented; haime—golden; çiréña—with sirisa flowers; mådule—soft; paryaìke—on the seat; sa-upabarhaëe—with cushions; sukham—comfortably; niväsayäm äsa—seated; väsaù—fragrance; sräì-maëòanädibhiù—with flower decorations and other ornaments; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhivat—properly; rätrau—at night; sapatné-sahitä—with her co-wives; saté—saintly.

     Then Rukmiëé made Çré Rädhä comfortable on the golden palanquin named Sarvatobhadra, which was fragrant with lotus whorls, flower garlands, and flower-decorations, and which had very soft cushions decorated with soft çiréña flowers. That night Rukmiëé, accompanied by her co-wives, worshiped Çré Rädhä.

Text 23 

gopénäà çata-yüthaà ca
     sampüjya ca påthak påthak
värtäläpän bahu-vidhän
     kåtvä kåñëa-priyäs tataù sväpayitvätha täà jagmuù      svaà svaà vai çibiraà mudä

     gopénäm—of the gopés; çata-yütham—the hundred groups; ca—and; sampüjya—worshiping; ca—and; påthak—one; påthak—by one; värtäläpän—conversations; bahu-vidhän—many kinds; kåtvä—doing; kåñëa-priyäù—Lord Kåñëa's dear queens; tataù—then; sväpayitvä—putting to sleep; atha-then; täm—to her; jagmuù—went; svam—own; svam—own; vai—indeed; çibiram—palanquin; mudä—happily.

     Then Rukmiëé and her co-wives worshiped the hundred groups of gopés one by one. After talking of many things, Lord Kåñëa's queens saw that each gopé comfortably went to sleep. Then the queens happily returned to their own palanquins.

Text 24 

kåñëa-pärçvaà gatä bhaiñmé
     dåñövä jägrad upasthitam
kathäà na çeñe bho svaminn
     iti kåñëam uväca ha

     kåñëa-pärçvam—to Lord Kåñëa';s side; gatä—went; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; dåñövä—seeing; jägrat—awake; upasthitam—situated; katham—why?; na—not; çeñe—You rest; bhaù—O; svaminn—master; iti—thus; kåñëam—to Lord Kåñëa; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     Seeing that Lord Kåñëa was still awake, Rukmiëi went to His side and said, "Master, who do You not sleep?"

Text 25 

çré-bhagavän uväca 
pratyudgama-prasravaëair
     äçväsena vrajeçvaré
arcitä hi tvayä çubhruù
     prasannä säbhavat param

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; pratyudgama-prasravaëair äçväsena—by greeting; vrajeçvaré—Çré Rädhä; arcitä—worshiped; hi—indeed; tvayä—by you; çubhru—O girl with the beautiful eyebrows; prasannä—pleased; sä—She; abhavat—was; param—very.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O girl with the beautiful eyebrows, Rädhä was very pleased by the respectful welcome you gave Her.

Text 26 

sä ca nityaà hi pibati
     çayanädau payaù çubham
payaù-pänaà tu na kåtaà
     adya subhru tayä kila

     sä—She; ca—and; nityam—always; hi—indeed; pibati—drinks; çayanädau—before She takes rest; payaù—milk; çubham—pleasant; payaù-pänam—drinking milk; tu—but; na—not; kåtam—done; adya—now; subhru—O girl with the beautiful eyebrows; tayä—by you; kila—indeed.

     She always drinks milk before She takes rest. Still, O girl with the beautiful eyebrows, you did not arrange that She have milk to drink.

Text 27 

tena nidrä nayanayor
     na jätasya mahä-mate
tasmän mamäpi prasväpo
     na jäto bhéñma-kanyake

     tena—because of that; nidrä—sleep; nayanayoù—of the eyes; na—not; jätasya—come; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one; tasmän—therefore; mama—of me; api—also; prasväpaù—sleep; na—not; jätaù—come; bhéñma-kanyake—O daughter of King Bhéñmaka.

     For that reason, O noble-hearted girl, sleep has not come to Her eyes. O daughter of King Bhéñmaka, because She cannot sleep, I cannot sleep. 

Text 28 

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä paraà bhaiñmé
     sapatnébhiù samanvitä
nitvä dugdhaà tat-samépaà
     prayayau paramädarät

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; param—then; bhaiñmé—Rukminé; sapatnébhiù—with her co-wives; samanvitä—with; nitvä—taking; dugdham—milk; tat-samépam—to Her; prayayau—went; paramädarät—with great respect.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing these words, Rukmiëé, accompanied by her co-wives, brought a cup of milk to Çré Rädhä. 

Text 29 

uñëaà dugdhaà sitä-yuktaà
     kacole haimane kåtam
apäyayat paraà prétyä
     rädhäà bhéñmaka-nandiné

     uñëam—hot; dugdham—milk; sitä-yuktam—with sugar; kacole—in a cup; haimane—golden; kåtam—done; apäyayat—gave to drink; param—greatly; prétyä—with love; rädhäm—to Rädhä; bhéñmaka-nandiné—Rukmiëé.

     Then Rukmiëé affectionately gave to Çré Rädhä a golden cup filled with hot milk sweetened with sugar.

Text 30 

evam abhyarcya vidhivad
     dattvä tämbüla-véöikäm
satyabhämädibhiù çaçvat
     sapatnébhiù samanvitä

     evam—thus; abhyarcya—worshiping; vidhivat—properly; dattvä—giving; tämbüla-véöikäm—betelnuts; satyabhämädibhiù—headed by Satyabhämä; çaçvat—always; sapatnébhiù—with co-wives; samanvitä—with.

     Then, accompanied by Satyabhämä and the other queens, Rukmiëé respectfully offered Rädhä some betelnuts.

Text 31 

ägatya kåñëa-sämépyaà
     vadanté sva-kåtaà çubhä
bheje çré-rukmiëé säkñäc
     chré-kåñëa-pada-paìkajam

     ägatya—approaching; kåñëa-sämépyam—Çré Kåñëa; vadanté—speaking; sva-kåtam—what she had done; çubhä—beautiful gilr; bheje—worshiped; çré-rukmiëé—Çré Rukmiëé; säkñäc—again and again; çré-kåñëa-pada-paìkajam—Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet.

     Approaching Lord Kåñëa, beautiful Çré Rukmiëé told what she had done. Then she worshiped the Lord's lotus feet.

Text 32 

samlälayanti satataà
     komalaiù kara-pallavaiù
kåñëa-päda-tale chälän
     vékñya sä vismitäbhavat

     samlälayanti—massaging; satatam—again and again; komalaiù—with soft; kara-pallavaiù—flower-bud hands; kåñëa-päda-tale—Lord Kåñëa's feet; chälän—blisters; vékñya—seeing; sä—she; vismitä—astonished; abhavat—became.

     As she massaged them with her soft flower-bud hands, Rukmiëé suddenly noticed many blisters on the soles of Lord Kåñëa's feet. She was very surprised.

Text 33 

ucchälakäù kathaà jätäs
     tava päda-tale prabho
adyaiva bhütä bhagavän
     na vedmy atra hi käraëam

     ucchälakäù—blisters; katham—how; jätäù—created; tava—of You; päda-tale—on the soles of the feet; prabhaù—O Lord; adya—now; eva—indeed; bhütä—manifested; bhagavan—O Lord; na—not; vedmi—I know; atra—here; hi—indeed; käraëam—the cause.

     Çré Rukmiëé said: Master, how have these blisters come on the soles of Your feet? I cannot understand the reason.

Text 34 

ñoòaça-stré-sahasräëäà
     çåëvanténäà hariù svayam
rädhä-bhakti-prakäçärthaà
     prasannaù präha rukmiëém

     ñoòaça-stré-sahasräëäm—as the sixteen thousand queens; çåëvanténäm—listened; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; svayam—personally; rädhä—of Çré Rädhä; bhakti—of the love; prakäça—revelation; artham—for the purpose; prasannaù—pleased; präha—said; rukmiëém—to Rukmiëé.

     As the sixteen thousand queens listened, cheerful Lord Kåñëa, wishing to show them the depth of Çré Rädhä's love, spoke to Rukmiëé.

Text 35 

çré-bhagavän uväca 
çré-rädhikäyä hådayäravinde
     pädäravindaà hi viräjate me
ahar-niçaà praçraya-päça-baddhaà
     lavaà lavärdhaà na calaty atéva

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; çré-rädhikäyä—of Çré Rädhä; hådayäravinde—in the lotus flower of the heart; pädäravindam—the lotus feet; hi—indeed; viräjate—are splendidly manifested; me—of Me; ahar-niçam—day and night; praçraya-päça-baddham—bound by the ropes of love and devotion; lavam—for a moment; lavärdham—or half a moment; na—not; calati—leaves; atéva—at all.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Day and night My lotus feet stay in Çré Rädhä's lotus heart. Bound by ropes of love and devotion, they cannot leave for a moment or even half a moment.

Text 36 

adyoñëa-dugdha-pratipänato 'ìghräv
     ucchälakäs te mama procchalanti
mandoñëäm evaà hi na dattam asyai
     yuñmäbhir uñëaà tu payaù pradattam

     adya—now; uñëa—hot; dugdha—milk; pratipänataù—because of drinking; aìghrau—My feet; ucchälakäù—boils; te—they; mama—of Me; procchalanti—manifest; mandoñëäm—warm; evam—thus; hi—not; na—indeed; dattam—given; asyai—to Her; yuñmäbhiù—by you all; uñëam—too hot; tu—but; payaù—milk; pradattam—given.

     When Çré Rädhä drank that very hot milk, My lotus feet in Her heart became burned and that is why they are now covered with blisters. You did not offer Her warm milk. You offered Her milk that was far too hot. 

Text 37 

çré-närada uväca 
çré-kåñëasya vacaù çrutvä
     rukmiëyädyä striyo varäù
premëä padaà vimåjyätha
     visismuù sarvato nåpa

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; rukmiëyädyä—headed by Rukmiëé; striyaù—women; varaù—beautiful; premëä—with love; padam—feet; vimåjya—massaging; atha—then; visismuù—astonished; sarvataù—completely; nåpa—O king.

     Çré Närada said: When they heard His words, Çré Rukmiëé and the other beautiful queens that had been massaging Lord Kåñëa's feet became filled with wonder.

Text 38 

çré-rädhäyäù parä pröir
     mädhave madhusüdane
tat-samänä na caikaiñä
     advitéyä mahé-tale

     çré-rädhäyäù—of Çré Rädhä; parä—suprem; pröiù—love; mädhave—fopr Lord Kåñëa; madhusüdane—the killer of the Madhu demon; tat-samänä—equal to Her; na—not; ca—and; ekä—anyone; eñä—She; advitéyä—without equal; mahé-tale—in the world.

     Çré Rädhä's love for Lord Kåñëa has no rival and no equal in this world. It is the greatest love.
.pa

Chapter Eighteen
Siddhäçrama-mähätmye Räsotsavaù
In the Course of Describing the Glories of Siddhäçrama, a Description of the Räsa-dance Festival

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
çré-rädhäyäù paräà prétià
     jïatvä gopé-gaëasya ca
ücur harià räja-putryas
     tad-räsa-prekñaëotsukäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çré-rädhäyäù—of Çré Rädhä; paräm—the great; prétim—love; j 24atvä—understanding; gopé-gaëasya—of the gopés; ca—and; ücuù—said; harim—to Lord Kåñëa; räja-putryaù—the queens; tad-räsa—the räsa dance; prekñaëa—to see; utsukäù—eager.

     Çré Närada said: Now understanding the great love Rädhä and the gopés bear for Lord Kåñëa, the queens, eager to see the räsa dance, spoke to Lord Kåñëa. 

Text 2 

paööa-räjïya ücuù 
dhanyä gopyas tu te bhaktäù
     prema-lakñaëa-samyutäù
yaù präptä räsa-raìge vai
     täsäà kià varëyate tapaù

     paööa-räjïyaù—the most important queens; ücuù—said; dhanyä—fortunate; gopyaù—the gopés; tu—indeed; te—of You; bhaktäù—the devotees; prema-lakñaëa-samyutäù—filled with love; yaù—who; präptä—attained; räsa-raìge—in the rasa dance arena; vai—indeed; täsäm—of them; kim—what?; varëyate—can be described; tapaù—austerities.

     The queens said: The gopés are most fortunate. They love You dearly. They enjoyed with You the räsa dance. How can words describe the great austerities they must have performed?

Text 3 

våndävane kåto räso
     vidhinä yena mädhava
tad-vidhià drañöum icchämo
     yadi tvaà manyase prabho

     våndävane—in Våndävana; kåtaù—done; räsaù—the rasa dance; vidhinä—by the method; yena—by which; mädhava—O Kåñëa; tad-vidhim—that method; drañöum—to see; icchämaù—we desire; yadi—if; tvam—You; manyase—think; prabhaù—O Lord.

     O Kåñëa, O master, if You think it is right, we wish to see the räsa dance You performed in Våndävana.

Text 4 

tvaà cätraiva tathä rädhä
     gopyaù sarvä vrajäìganäù
vayaà cätraiva deveça
     räso yogyo bhaved iha

     tvam—You; ca—and; atra—here; eva—indeed; tathä—so; rädhä—Rädhä; gopyaù—th4 gopés; sarvä—all; vrajäìganäù—the girls of Vraja; vayam—we; ca—and; atra—here; eva—indeed; deveça—O Lord of lords; räsaù—the rasa dance; yogyaù—proper; bhavet—is; iha—here.

     You are here. So is Rädhä. So are the gopés of Vraja. So are we. O Lord of lords, it is right that there be a räsa dance.

Text 5 

pürëaà kuru jagannätha
     asmäkaà tu manoratham
kåto manoratho 'nyo na
     räsa-kréòäà vinä hare

     pürëam—fulfilled; kuru—please make; jagannätha—O master of the universes; asmäkam—our; tu—indeed; manoratham—desire; kåtaù—done; manorathaù—desire; anyaù—another; na—not; räsa-kréòäm—the rasa dance pastimes; vinä—except for; hare—O Kåñëa.

     O master of the universes, pleaae fulfill our desire. O Kåñëa, we have no desire other than this.

Text 6 

iti täsäà vacaù çrutvä
     bhagavän prahasann iva
präha täù prema-samyukto
     gérbhiù sammohayann iva

     iti—thus; täsäm—of them; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; prahasann—smiling; iva—as if; präha—said; täù—to them; prema-samyuktaù—affectionate; gérbhiù—with words; sammohayann—charming; iva—as if.

     When He heard these words, Lord Kåñëa smiled. Filled with love for them, He charmed them with the following words.

Text 7 

çré-bhagavän uväca 
räçeçvaryäs tu rädhäyä
     manaç ced rantum aìganäù
tadä räso bhaved atra
     bhavatébhis påcchyatäm

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; räçeçvaryäù—of the queen of the rasac dance; tu—indeed; rädhäyä—of Rädhä; manaù—the heart; cet—if; rantum—to enjoy; aìganäù—O beautiful girls; tadä—then; räsaù—the rasa dance; bhavet—may be; atra—here; bhavatébhiù—with you; påcchyatäm—may be asked.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O beautiful girls, if Çré Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance, wishes, only then may there be a räsa dance. Please ask Her.

Text 8 

iti çrutvä vacas tasya
     rukmiëy-ädyä nåpätmajäù
rädhäm etya paraà premëä
     prähuù prahasitänanäù

     iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—the words; tasya—of Him; rukmiëy-ädyä—headed by Rukmiëé; nåpätmajäù—the queens; rädhäm—Rädhä; etya—approaching; param—then; premëä—with love; prähuù—spoke; prahasitänanäù—smiling.

     After hearing these words, Çré Rukmiëé and the queens approached Çré Rädhä and, smiling with love, spoke.

Text 9 

çré-räjïya ücuù 
rambhoru candra-vadane vraja-sundaréçe
     räçeçvari priyatame sakhi çéla-rüpe
rädhe su-kérti-kula-kérti-kare çubhäìge
     tväà prañöum ägatavatéù sakalä vayaà smaù

     çré-räjïya ücuù—the queens said; rambhoru—O girl with the beautiful thighs; candra-vadane—O girl whose face is glorious as the moon; vraja—of Vraja; sundaré—of the beautiful girls; éçe—O queen; räçeçvari—O queen of the rasa dance; priyatame—O most dear one; sakhi—O friend; çéla-rüpe—O virtuous and beautiful one; rädhe—O Rädhä; su-kérti—fame; kula—family; kérti—fame; kare—doing; çubhäìge—O girl with beautiful limbs; tväm—You; prañöum—to ask; ägatavatéù—have come; sakalä—all; vayam—we; smaù—have.

     The queens said: O moon-faced Rädhä, O girl with the beautiful thighs, O queen of the beautiful girls of Vraja, O queen of the räsa dance, O virtuous and beautiful one, O friend, O girl with expands the glorious fame of Your family, O girl with graceful limbs, we have all come here to ask something of You.

Text 10 

räçeçvaro 'pi kila cätra rasa-pradäyé
     räçeçvaré tvam api gopa-varäìganäç ca
evaà vayaà sma iti sarva-vidhau rasärthe
     räsaà kuru priyatame ca tathä priyaà naù

     räçeçvaraù—the king of the rasa dance; api—even; kila—indeed; ca—and; atra—here; rasa-pradäyé—giving nectar; räçeçvaré—ther queen of the rasa dance; tvam—You; api—also; gopa-varäìganäù—the beautiful gopés; ca—and; evam—thus; vayam—we; sma—are; iti—tthus; sarva-vidhau—in all respects; rasärthe—for the sweetness; räsam—the rasa dance; kuru—please do; priyatame—O most dear one; ca—and; tathä—so; priyam—dear; naù—to us.

     Charming Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance, is here. So are You, the queen of the räsa dance. So are the beautiful gopés. So are we. O most dear one, please arrange that there be a räsa dance here. That will please us.

Text 11 

çré-rädhoväca 
räçeçvarasya paramasya satäà kåpälo
     rantuà mano yadi bhavet tu tadätra räsaù
suçrüñayä paramayä parayä ca bhaktyä
     sampüjya taà kila vaçé-kuruta priyeñöäù

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; räçeçvarasya—of the king of the rasa dance; paramasya—great; satäm—to the devotees; kåpälaù—kind; rantum—to enjoy; manaù—the heart; yadi—if; bhavet—is; tu—indeed; tadä—then; atra—here; räsaù—a rasa dance; suçrüñayä—devotion; paramayä—with great; parayä—with great; ca—and; bhaktyä—love; sampüjya—worshiping; tam—Him; kila—indeed; vaçé-kuruta—conquer; priyeñöäù—most dear.

     Çré Rädhä said: If Lord Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance, who is kind to His devotees, wishes, then there will be a räsa dance here. Go to Him. Worship and serve Him with love and devotion. That will bring Him under Your control.

Text 12 

çré-närada uväca 
rädhäyä vacanaà çrutvä
     çré-kåñëoktaà tathävadan
tathästu coktvä sä rädhä
     prasannäbhün mahä-manäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rädhäyä—of Çré Rädhä; vacanam—the words; çrutvä—hearing; çré-kåñëoktam—the words of Kåñëa; tathä—then; avadan—said; tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying; sä—She; rädhä—Rädhä; prasannä—pleased; abhüt—became; mahä-manäù—noble-hearted.

     Çré Närada said: When they heard Çré Rädhä's words, the queens repeated to Her what Lord Kåñëa had told them. Hearing that, Noble-hearted Rädhä became pleased and said, "So be it."

Text 13 

mädhave pürëimäyäà tu
     puëye siddhäçrame çubhe
pradoña-käle candräbhe
     räsärambho babhüva ha

     mädhave—in the mont of Mädhava; pürëimäyäm—on the full moon; tu—indeed; puëye—in sacred; siddhäçrame—Siddhäçrama; çubhe—beautiful; pradoña-käle—in the evening; candräbhe—splendid with moonlight; räsärambhaù—the rasa dnace; babhüva—was; ha—indeed.

     In this way, in the splendid full-moon night of the month of Mädhava (April-May) there was a räsa dance in beautiful and sacred Siddhäçrama.

Text 14 

räçeçvarasya räsärthe
     räçeçvaryä samänvitaù
raräja räse rasiko
     yathä ratyä ratéçvaraù

     räçeçvarasya—of the king of the rasa dance; räsärthe—for the sake of the rasa dance; räçeçvaryä—the queen of the rasa dance; samänvitaù—with; raräja—was splendidly mnaifest; räse—in the rasa dance; rasikaù—expert at tasting nectar; yathä—as; ratyä—with Rati; ratéçvaraù—Kämadeva.

     To begin the räsa dance, Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance, who is expert at enjoying nectar pastimes, stood with Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance by His side. They were very glorious. they were like Kämadeva and Rati.

Text 15 

yävatér gopikäù sarvä
     yävaté räja-kanyakäù
tävad rüpa-dharo reje
     ekaù kåñëo dvayor dvayoù

     yävatéù—as many; gopikäù—gs; sarvä—all; yävaté—as many; räja-kanyakäù—queens; tävat—so many; rüpa—forms; dharaù—manifesting; reje—was splendidly manifested; ekaù—one; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; dvayoù dvayoù—between each two.

     Then Lord Kåñëa expanded Himself into as many forms as there were gopés and queens. A single Kåñëa stood between each two of them.

Text 16 

täla-veëu-mådaìgänäà
     kala-kaëöhaiù sakhé-janaiù
valgu-nüpura-käïcénäà
     miçra-çabdo mahän abhüt

     täla—karatalas; veëu—flute; mådaìgänäm—and mrdangas; kala-kaëöhaiù—with sweet voices; sakhé-janaiù—by the friends; valgu—graceful; nüpura—anklets; käïcénäm—and belts; miçra—mixing; çabdaù—the sound; mahän—great; abhüt—was.

     The karatälas, flute, and måaìgas joined with the sweet voices of the girls and the tinkling sounds of their belts and anklets, to create a tumultuous sound.

Texts 17 and 18 

koöi-kandarpa-lävaëyaù
     sragvé kuëòala-maëòitaù
pétämbara-dharo räjan
     kiréöa-kaöakäìgadaù

räçeçvaryä samaà gäyan
     räse räçeçvaraù svayam
çré-gaëaiù sahito räjaàs
     candras tärä-gaëair yathä

     koöi—millions; kandarpa—of Kämadevas; lävaëyaù—mor ehandsome; sragvé—wearing a flower garland; kuëòala-maëòitaù—decorated with earrings; pétämbara-dharaù—wearing yellow garments; räjan—O king; kiréöa—a crown; kaöaka—golden bracelets; aìgadaù—and armlets; räçeçvaryä—the wueen of the rasa dance; samam—with; gäyan—singing; räse—in the rasa dance; räçeçvaraù—the king of the rasa dance; svayam—Hismelf; çré-gaëaiù—with the goddess of fortune; sahitaù—with; räjan—O king; candraù—the moon; tärä-gaëaiù—with the many stars; yathä—as.

     Wearing yellow garments, decorated with crown, earrings, armlets, and golden bracelets, and more handsome than many millions of Kämadevas, Lord Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance sang songs with Çré Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance, and with the gopés and queens, who were all goddesses of fortune. O king, He was like the moon surrounded by many stars.

Text 19 

evaà sarvä niçä räjan
     kñaëavad räsa-maëòale
vyatétäbhün mahä-räja
     mahänandamayé çubhä

     evam—thus; sarvä—the entire; niçä—night; räjan—O king; kñaëavat—like a moment; räsa-maëòale—in the rasa dance circle; vyatétä abhüt—passed; mahä-räja—O great king; mahänandamayé—blissful; çubhä—beautiful.

     O king, in this way the very blissful and beautiful night passed like a single moment in the circle of the räsa dance.

Text 20 

çré-räsa-maëòalaà dåñövä
     rukmiëy-ädyäù striyo varäù
jagmus täù paramänandaà
     sarväù pürëa-manorathäù

     çré-räsa-maëòalam—the circle of the rasa dance; dåñövä—seeing; rukmiëy-ädyäù—headed by Rukmiëé; striyaù—the queens; varäù—beautiful; jagmuù—went; täù—they; paramänandam—transcendental bliss; sarväù—all; pürëa-manorathäù—their desires fulfilled.

     Gazing at the circle of the räsa dance, Çré Rukmiëé and all the beautiful queens became filled with bliss. All their desires were fulfilled.

Text 21 

paripürëatamaà säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaà puruñottamam
räsänte rukmiëé-mukhyaù
     prähuù prema-paräyaëäù

     paripürëatamam—the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; puruñottamam—the Supreme Person; räsänte—at the end of the rasa dance; rukmiëé-mukhyaù—the queens headed by Rukmiëé; prähuù—said; prema-paräyaëäù—filled with love.

     When the räsa dance ended Çré Rukmiëé and the queens, filled with feelings of love, spoke to Çré Rädhä, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 22 

çré-räjïya ücuù 
dåñövä tvad-rüpa-mädhuryaà
     räsa-raìge manohare
gataà mano naù svänandaà
     brahmänandaà yathä muniù

     çré-räjïya ücuù—the queens said; dåñövä—seeing; tvad-rüpa-mädhuryam—the sweetness of Your handsomeness; räsa-raìge—in the arena of thw rasa dance; manohare—beautiful; gatam—gone; manaù—heart; naù—of us; svänandam—to bliss; brahmänandam—spiritual bliss; yathä—as; muniù—a great sage.

     The queens said: As we gaze at Your handsome sweetness in this beautiful räsa dance, our hearts have become filled with bliss. We have become lake sages filled with the happiness of spiritual life.

Text 23 

etädrço 'pi räso 'nyo
     na bhüto na bhaviñyati
çata-yüthas tu gopénäà
     atra mädhava vartate

     etädrçaù—like this; api—even; räsaù—rasa dance; anyaù—another; na—not; bhütaù—was; na—not; bhaviñyati—will be; çata-yüthaù—a hundred groups; tu—indeed; gopénäm—of gopés; atra—here; mädhava—O Kåñëa; vartate—are.

     There never was, nor will there ever be, another räsa dance like this. O Kåñëa, a hundred groups of gopés are here!

Text 24 

patnyaù ñoòaça-sähasraà
     sakhébhiù sahitä vayam
sakhé-koöi-yutäç cätra
     håñöa-paööa-mahä-striyaù våndävane 'pi naitädåg      bhüto vä mädhaveçvara

     patnyaù—the queens; ñoòaça-sähasram—sixteen thousand; sakhébhiù—the gopés; sahitä—with; vayam—we; sakhé-koöi-yutäù—many millions of gopés; ca—and; atra—here; håñöa—jubilant; paööa-mahä-striyaù—the noble queens; våndävane—in Våndävana; api—even; na—not; etädåk—like this; bhütaù—was; vä—or; mädhava—O Kåñëa; éçvara—O Lord.

     We sixteen thousand queens are here with many millions of gopés. O Kåñëa, O master, even in Våndävana there was never a räsa dance like this.

Text 25 

çré-närada uväca 
evaà kåtäbhimänänäà
     räjïénäà prahasan hariù
prähedaà påcchatäà rädhäà
     bhavatébhiù parasparam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; kåta—become; abhimänänäm—proud; räjïénäm—the queens; prahasan—smiling; hariù—Kåñëa; präha—said; idam—this; påcchatäm—ask; rädhäm—Rädhä; bhavatébhiù—by you' parasparam—among yourselves.

     Çré Närada said: In this way the queens became proud. Smiling, Lord Kåñëa said to them, "Ask Rädhä what She thinks."

Text 26 

satyabhämädikäù sarväù
     påcchanti täà manoharäm
kiïcid dhasanté manasi
     präha rädhä paraà vacaù

     satyabhämädikäù—headed by Satyabhämä; sarväù—all; påcchanti—asked; täm—Her; manoharäm—beautiful; kiïcit—a little; hasanté—laughing; manasi—in Her heart; präha—said; rädhä—Rädhä; param—then; vacaù—words.

     Satyabhämä and the other queens asked beautiful Rädhä. Gently laughing in Her heart, Çré Rädhä spoke.

Text 27 

çré-rädhoväca 
nanu räsaù paraà cätra
     bahu-stré-gaëa-saìkulaù
pürva-räsa-samo na syäd
     yas tu våndävane 'bhavat

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; nanu—indeed; räsaù—rasa dance; param—then; ca—and; atra—here; bahu-stré-gaëa-saìkulaù—with very many girls; pürva-räsa-samaù—equal to the previous rasa dance; na—not; syät—is; yaù—which; tu—indeed; våndävane—in Våndävana; abhavat—was.

     Çré Rädhä said: Many girls came to this räsa dance. Still, it is not the equal of the räsa dance in Våndävana.

Text 28 

kva cätra våndäraëyaà hi
     divya-druma-latäkulam
prema-bhäränata-lataà
     madhu-matta-madhuvratam

     kva—where?; ca—and; atra—here; våndäraëyam—Våndävana forest; hi—indeed; divya-druma-latäkulam—filled with splendid trees and vines; prema—of love; bhära—with great; änata—bowing down; latam—the vines; madhu—with honey; matta—intoxicated; madhuvratam—bees.

     In this place where is Våndävana forest, filled with splendid trees, flowering vines bowing down in ecstatic love, and bees intoxicated by drinking honey?

Text 29 

puñpa-vyuhän vahanté yä
     yathoñëiì-mudritä çubhä
haàsa-padma-samäkérëä
     kva cätra yamunä nadé

     puñpa-vyuhän—many flowers; vahanté—carrying; yä—which; yathä—as; uñëik—a line in the uñëik meter; mudritä—marked; çubhä—beautiful; haàsa—swans; padma—and lotus flowers; samäkérëä—filled; kva—where?; ca—and; atra—here; yamunä—the Yamunä; nadé—river.

     In this place where is the beautiful Yamunä river, carrying many flowers as it flows like a line of poetry, and filled with swans and lotus flowers?

Text 30 

mädhavyas tu latäù kvätra
     puñpa-bhära-natäù paräù
kva pakñiëaù prema-parä
     gäyanti madhura-svanam

     mädhavyaù—Mädhavé; tu—indeed; latäù—vines; kva—where?; atra—here; puñpa-bhära-natäù—bowed down with many flowers; paräù—great; kva—where?; pakñiëaù—birds; prema-parä—filled with love; gäyanti—sing; madhura-svana—with sweet voices.

     In this place where are the mädhavé vines bowing with many flowers? Where are the birds lovingly singing with sweet voices?

Text 31 

loläli-puïjäù kuïjäù kva
     nikuïjä divya-mandiräù
kva väyuù çétalo mando
     väti padma-rajo haran

     lola—restless; äli-puïjäù—bees; ku 24jäù—forest groves; kva—where?; niku 24jä—forest groves; divya-mandiräù—splendid palaces; kva—where?; väyuù—breze; çétalaù—cooling; mandaù—gentle; väti—blows; padma-rajaù—lotus pollen; haran—carrying;

     In this place where are the forest groves filled with splendid palaces and restless bumblebees? Where is the cooling gentle breeze carrying pollen from the lotus flowers?

Text 32 

çåìgair manoharair uccair
     girir govardhano 'calaù
sarvatra phala-puñpäòhyo
     darébhiù kva karéva saù

     çåìgaiù—with peaks; manoharaiù—beautiful; uccaiù—tall; giriù—mountain; govardhanaù—Govardhana; acalaù—mountain; sarvatra—everywhere; phala-puñpäòhyaù—rich with many fruits and flowers; darébhiù—with caves; kva—where?; karé—a great elephant; iva—like; saù—it.

     In this place where is Mount Govardhana, rich with fruits, flowers, and caves everywhere, and standing with its beautiful tall peaks like a great elephant?

Texts 33 and 34 

kälindé-puline ramye
     väyunänvita-saikate
vaàsé-vetra-dharo malla-
     paribarha-viräjitaù

kva cätra kåñëa-çåìgäro
     vana-mälä-vibhüñitaù
çyämänäm alakänäà ca
     vakräëäà gandha-dhariëäm

     kälindé-puline—on the shore of the Yamunä; ramye—beautiful; väyunä—a breeze; anvita—with; saikate—on the beach; vaàsé—flute; vetra—and stick; dharaù—holding; malla-paribarha-viräjitaù—splendid with a peacock feather; kva—where?; ca—and; atra—here; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; çåìgäraù—the decoration; vana-mälä-vibhüñitaù—decorated with a forest garland; çyämänäm—black; alakänäm—of locks of hair; ca—and; vakräëäm—curly; gandha-dhariëäm—fragrant.

     Where are Kåñëa's decorations: His flute, stick, peacock feather, forest-flower garland, and His fragrant, curly black hair, as He sits in the gentle breeze by the Yamunä's beautiful sandy shore? 

Text 35 

calitaà halitaà kvätra
     kuëòaläbhyäà parasparam
çré-mukhe kåñëacandrasya
     gaëòa-sthala-manohare

     calitam halitam—swinging; kva—where?; atra—here; kuëòaläbhyäm—with earrings; parasparam—each other; çré-mukhe—on His splendid face; kåñëacandrasya—of Lord Kåñëacandra; gaëòa-sthala-manohare—on the handsome cheeks.

     Where are the swinging earrings on Lord Kåñëacandra's handsome cheeks?

Text 36 

paträvalé-gandha-lobhäd
     bhramad-bhåìgävalé-yute
kva premëä darçanaà caiva
     sparçanaà harñaëaà tathä

     paträvalé—of the flower petals; gandha—fragrance; lobhät—out of greed; bhramat—wandering; bhåìgävalé—bees; yute—with; kva—where?; premëä—with love; darçanam—sight; ca—and; eva—indeed; sparçanam—touch; harñaëam—happiness; tathä—as.

     Where are the wandering bees greedy after the sweet fragrance of His flower-petal ornaments? Where are His loving glances when He appears in this way? Where is the happiness of His touch when He appears in this way?

Text 37 

kämeñu-tigma-koëaiç ca
     netraiù kväpaìga-jo rasaù
äkarñaëaà kva hastäbhyäà
     hastäd dhasta-visarjanam

     käma—of Kämadeva; iñu—arrows; tigma-koëaiù—with the sharp points; ca—and; netraiù—with eyes; kva—where; apaìga-jaù—born from the glance; rasaù—sweetness; äkarñaëam—pulling; kva—where>; hastäbhyäm—with both hands; hastät—from the hand; hasta—of the hand; visarjanam—going.

     Where are the sharp-pointed arrows of Kämadeva that fly from His eyes? Where is the sweetness of His sidelong glance? Where is His tugging with both hands? Where is His placing in the hand a gift?

Text 38 

vilénatäà nikuïjeñu
     sammukhena tu darçanam
grahaëaà kvätra céräëäà
     haraëaà veëu-vetrayoù

     vilénatäm—hiding; nikuïjeñu—in the forest groves; sammukhena—face-to-face; tu—indeed; darçanam—the sight; grahaëam—grabbing; kva—where?; atra—here; céräëäm—of the garments; haraëam—stealing; veëu-vetrayoù—of the flute and stick.

     Where is the pastime of hiding in the forest groves? Where is the pastime of suddenly meeting Him face-to-face? Where is the pastime of tugging at our saris? Where is the pastime of stealing His flute and stick?

Text 39 

kva premëä cätra bähubhyäà
     karñaëaà ca parasparam
punaù punas tad-grahaëaà
     bhuje candana-carcitam

     kva—where?; premëä—with love; ca—and; atra—here; bähubhyäm—with both arms; karñaëam—pulling; ca—and; parasparam—each other; punaù—again; punaù—and again; tad-grahaëam—grabbing; bhuje—the arms; candana-carcitam—anointed with sandal.

     Where is His affectionate tugging with both arms? Where is His again and again holding the arm anointed with sandal paste?

Text 40 

yatra yatra ca yä lélä
     tatra tatraiva çobhate
yatra våndävanaà nästi
     tatra me na manaù-sukham

     yatra yatra—wherever; ca—and; yä—which; lélä—pastimes; tatra tatra—there; eva—indeed; çobhate—is beautiful; yatra—where; våndävanam—Våndävana; na—not; asti—is; tatra—there; me—of Me; na—not; manaù-sukham—tha happiness of the heart.

     My heart cannot be happy where there is no Våndävana forest and where these pastimes are not present.

Text 41 

çré-närada uväca 
rädhä-väkyaà tataù çrutvä
     sarväù paööa-mahä-striyaù
jahur mänaà sva-räsasya
     vismitä harñitäç ca täù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rädhä-väkyam—Çré Rädhä's words; tataù—then; çrutvä—hearing; sarväù—all; paööa-mahä-striyaù—the queens; jahuù—abandoned; mänam—their pride; sva-räsasya—of their own rasa dance; vismitä—astonished; harñitäù—overjoyed; ca—and; täù—they.

     Çré Närada said: When they heard Çré Rädhä's words, the great queens became filled with wonder and joy. They gave up all the pride they felt in their own räsa dance.

Texts 42 and 43 

evaà siddhäçrame räsaà
     kåtvä çré-rädhikeçvaraù
nétvä gopé-gaëän sarvän
     rädhayä sahito hariù

sa-bhäryo bhagavän säkñäd
     dvärakäà praviveça ha
kärayäm äsa rädhäyai
     mandiräëi paräëi ca

     evam—thus; siddhäçrame—at Siddhäçrama; räsam—the rasa dance; kåtvä—having done; çré-rädhikeçvaraù—the Lord of Rädhä; nétvä—taking; gopé-gaëän—the gopés; sarvän—all; rädhayä—Rädhä; sahitaù—with; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; sa-bhäryaù—with His wives; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; dvärakäm—Dvärakä; praviveça—entered; ha—indeed; kärayäm äsa—made; rädhäyai—for Rädhä; mandiräëi—palaces; paräëi—great; ca—and.

     After thus performing a räsa dance at Siddhäçrama, Lord Kåñëa took the gopés and queens to Dvärakä. There He built many great palaces for Çré Rädhä.

Texts 44 and 45 

niväsayitvä su-sukhaà
     sarväs taç ca vrajaukasaù
itthaà siddhäçrama-kathä
     mayä te kathitä nåpa

sarva-päpa-harä puëyä
     sarveñäà caiva mokña-dä

     niväsayitvä—giving a home; su-sukham—happily; sarväù—all; taù—they; ca—and; vrajaukasaù—the people of Vraja; ittham—thus; siddhäçrama-kathä—the story of Siddhäçrama; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitä—told; nåpa—O king; sarva-päpa-harä—removing all sins; puëyä—sacred; sarveñäm—to all; ca—and; eva—certainly; mokña-dä—giving liberation. 

     Then Lord Kåñëa gave comfortable homes in Dvärakä to all the people of Vraja. Thus I have told you the story of Siddhäçrama, a sacred story that removes all sins and give liberation to all.

Chapter Nineteen
Dvärakäyäù prathama-durge Lélä-sarovara-hari-mandira-jïäna-tértha-kåçëa-kuëòa-balabhadra-saro-gaëeça-tértha-däna-sthala-mäyä-tértha-mähätmyam
In the First Fortress of Dvärakä, the Glories of Lélä-sarovara, Hari-mandira, Jïäna-tértha, Kåçëa-kuëòa, Balabhadra-saraù, Gaëeça-tértha, Däna-sthala, and Mäyä-tértha

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

dvärävaté-maëòalaà tu
     çata-yojana-viståtam
tasya pradakçiëä sarvä
     yojanänäà catuù-çatam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; dvärävaté-maëòalam—the circle of Dvärakä; tu—indeed; çata-yojana-viståtam—eight hundred miles in size; tasya—of it; pradakçiëä—the circumferance; sarvä—all; yojanänäà catuù-çatam—3,200 miles.

     Çré Närada said: The size of Dvärakä is 800 miles. The path around it is 3,200 miles.

Text 2 

tan-madhye kåçëa-racitaà
     durgaà dvädaça-yojanam
dvitéyaà ca bahir durgaà
     navatià ca tad-uttaraih 
kroçaiù saëghaööitaà räjan 
     chré-kåçëena mahätmanä

     tan-madhye—in the middle of it; kåçëa-racitam—made by Lord Kåçëa; durgam—a fort; dvädaça-yojanam—96 miles; dvitéyam—second; ca—and; bahiù—outside; durgam—fort; navatim—90; ca—and; tad-uttaraih—more than that; kroçaiù—with krosas; saëghaööitam—created; räjan—O king; çré-kåçëena—by Çré Kåçëa; mahätmanä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     In the center of Dvärakä is a fortress 96 miles in size. Around that Lord Kåçëa had built a second fortress of 180 miles.

Text 3 

tåtéyaà ca tathä durgaà
     dyünaiç ca dvi-çatair nåpa
kroçaiù saëghaööitaà räjan
     ratna-präsäda-samyutam

     tåtéyam—third; ca—and; tathä—so; durgam—fort; dyünaiù—splendid; ca—and; dvi-çataiù—with 200; nåpa—O king; kroçaiù—krosas; saëghaööitam—created; räjan—O king; ratna-präsäda-samyutam—with jewel palaces.

     O king, around that is a third fortress 400 miles in size and the place of with many jewel palaces.

Text 4 

teçäm antara-durgo 'pi
     çré-kåçëasya mahätmanaù
mandiräëi viciträëi
     nava lakçäëi santi hi

     teçäm—of them; antara-durgaù—inside the fort; api—also; çré-kåçëasya—of Çré Kåçëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mandiräëi—palaces; viciträëi—wonderful; nava lakçäëi—900,000; santi—are; hi—indeed.

     In the first fort Lord Kåçëa has 900,000 wonderful palaces.

Text 5 

tatra rädhä-mandirasya
     dväre lélä-sarovaram
sarva-térthottamaà räjan
     golokäc ca samägatam

     tatra—there; rädhä-mandirasya—of Çré Rädhä's palace; dväre—at the entrance; lélä-sarovaram—Lélä-sarovara; sarva-tértha-uttamam—the best of all holy places; räjan—O king; golokät—from Goloka; ca—and; samägatam—come.

     O king, at the entrance to Çré Rädhä's palace, is Lélä-sarovara lake, which was brought from Goloka, and which is the best of all holy places.

Texts 6-10

yasmin snätvä naraù päpé
     vraté bhütvä samähitaù
açöäbhyäà hema-dänaà ca
     dattvä natvä vidhänataù

koöi-janma-kåtaiù päpair
     mucyate nätra saàçayaù
präëänte taà naraà netuà
     golokäc ca mahä-rathaù

sahasräditya-saëkäça
     ägacchati na saàçayaù
daça-kandarpa-lävaëyo
     ratna-kuëòala-maëòitaù

sragvé pétämbaraù çyämaù
     sahasrärka-sphurad-dyutiù
sahasra-pärçadair yuktas
     cämarändola-räjitaù

jaya-dhvani-samäyukto
     veëu-dundubhi-näditaù
bhütvaivaà ratham ästhäya
     golokaà yäty asaàçayam

     yasmin—where; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; päpé—sinful; vraté—following vows; bhütvä—becoming; samähitaù—careful; açöä\bhyäm—with eight; hema-dänam—gift of gold; ca—and; dattvä—giving; natvä—bowing; vidhänataù—properly; koöi—in millions; janma—of births; kåtaiù—done; päpaiù—sins; mucyate—freed; na—not; atra—here; saàçayaù—doubt; präëänte—at the end of life; tam—that; naram—person; netum—to bring; golokät—from Goloka; ca—and; mahä-rathaù—a great chariot; sahasräditya-saëkäça—splendid as thousands pf suns; ägacchati—comes; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; daça-kandarpa—ten Kämadevas; lävaëyaù—handsome; ratna-kuëòala-maëòitaù—decorated with jewel earrings; sragvé—wearing a garland; pétämbaraù—wearing yellow garments; çyämaù—dfark; sahasrärka-sphurad-dyutiù—splendid as thousands of suns; sahasra-pärçadaiù—with thousands of associates; yuktaù—endowed; cämara—with camaras; ändola-räjitaù—fanned; jaya-dhvani-samäyuktaù—with sounds of “Victory!"; veëu-dundubhi—of flutes and drums; näditaù—with sounds; bhütvä—becoming; evam—thus; ratham—chariot; ästhäya—mounting; golokam—to Goloka; yäty—goes; asaàçayam—without doubt.

     A sinner who, properly following pious vows, bathes in that lake, gives eight gifts of gold to qualified braçhmaëas, and then bows down before the brähmaëas, becomes free of the sins performed in many millions of births. Of this there is no doubt. At the time of his death a great chariot effulgent as thousands of suns comes from Goloka for his sake. Of that there is no doubt. Then he becomes a liberated soul handsome like ten Kämadevas, dark-complexioned, splendid like thousands of suns, dressed in yellow garments, flower garlands, and jewel earrings, fanned with cämaras, honored with calls of “Victory" and the music of flutes and drums, and surrounded by thousands of friends, and then he mounts the chariot and goes to Goloka. Of this there is no doubt.

Texts 11-13 

atha térthäni cänyäni
     çåëu räjan mahä-mate
çatottaräëi tatraiva
     sahasräëi ca çoòaça

açöäbhiù sahitäny eva
     patnénäà bhavanäni ca
täni pradakçiëé-kåtya
     natvä natvä påthak påthak

jïäna-térthaà samäplutya
     spåçed yaù pärijätakam
tasya jïänaà ca vairägyaà
     bhaktir bhavati tat-kçaëam

     atha—then; térthäni—holy places; ca—and; anyäni—other; çåëu—please hear; räjan—O king; mahä-mate—noble-hearted; çatottaräëi—plus one hundred; tatra—there; eva—indeed; sahasräëi—thousand; ca—and; çoòaça—sixteen; açöäbhiù—eight; sahitäny—with; eva—indeed; patnénäm—of the queens; bhavanäni—palaces; ca—and; täni—them; pradakçiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; natvä natvä—bowing down; påthak påthak—before each one; jïäna-tértham—in Jïäna-tértha; samäplutya—bathing; spåçet—touched; yaù—one who; pärijätakam—the pärijäta tree; tasya—of him; jïänam—knowledge; ca—and; vairägyam—renunciation; bhaktiù—devotional service; bhavati—is; tat-kçaëam—from that moment.

     O noble-hearted king, please hear of the other holy places. A person who circumambulates the 16,108 palaces of Lord Kåçëa's queens, bows down before each palace, bathes in Jïäna-tértha, and then touches the pärijäta tree, at once attains transcendental knowledge, renunciation, and devotional service.

Text 14 

çré-kåçëo hådaye tasya
     vased dhåçöa-manäù sadä
samåddhi-siddhayaù sarväs
     taà bhajanti nisargatäù

     çré-kåçëaù—Lord Kåçëa; hådaye—in the heart; tasya—of him; vaset—resides; håçöa-manäù—happy at heart; sadä—always; samåddhi—wealth; siddhayaù—perfections; sarväù—all; tam—him; bhajanti—worship; nisargatäù—of their own accord.

     Lord Kåçëa is very happy to stay in his heart always. All opulences and perfections worship him of their own accord.

Text 15 

sa muktaù sa kåtärthaù syäd
     yaù paçyed dhari-mandiram
tat-samo vaiçëavo nästi
     térthaà ca tat-samaà na hi

     sa—he; muktaù—liberated; sa—he; kåtärthaù—successful; syät—is; yaù—who; paçyet—sees; hari-mandiram—Lord Kåçëa's palace; tat-samaù—equal to him; vaiçëavaù— a devotee; na—not; asti—is; tértham—a holy place; ca—and; tat-samam—equal to him; na—not; hi—is.

     A person who sees Lord Kåçëa's palace becomes liberated. His life is a success. No devotee is his equal. No holy place is his equal.

Text 16 

païca-yojana-vistérëäd
     bhagavan-mandirät tataù
dhanuù-sate kåçëa-kuëòaù
     kåçëa-tejaù-samudbhavaù

     païca-yojana-vistérëät—forty miles in size; bhagavan-mandirät—from the Lord's palace; tataù—then; dhanuù-çate—a hundred dhanus; kåçëa-kuëòaù—Kåçëa-kuëòa; kåçëa-tejaù-samudbhavaù—created by Lord Kåçëa's power.

     Lord Kåçëa's palace is forty miles in size. A hundred dhanus from it is Kåçëa-kuëòa, a lake created by Lord Kåçëa's power.

Text 17 

yaà snätvä kuçöhato muktaù
     sämbo jämbavaté-sutaù
tasya darçana-mätreëa
     sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

     yam—in which; snätvä—bathing; kuçöhataù—from leprosy; muktaù—freed; sämbaù—Sämba; jämbavaté-sutaù—the son of Jämbavaté; tasya—of him; darçana—by seeing; mätreëa—simply; sarva-päpaiù—all sins; pramucyate—freed.

     By bathing in that lake, Jämbavaté's son Sämba was cured of leprosy. Simply by seeing that lake one is freed from all sins.

Text 18 

tasmäd açöädaça-pade
     pürvasyäà diçi maithila
sarva-térthottamaà puëyaà
     balabhadra-saro mahat

     tasmät—from that; açöädaça-pade—18 steps; pürvasyäm diçi—to the east; maithila—O king of Mithilä; sarva-térthottamam—the best of all holy places; puëyam—sacred; balabhadra-saraù—Balabhadra-saraù; mahat—great.

     O king of Mithilä, eighteens steps to the east is the great lake Balabhadra-saraù, the best of all holy places.

Text 19 

påthvé-pradakçiëäà kåtvä
     baladevo mahä-balaù
yajïaà yatra vinirmäya
     revatyä viraräja ha

     påthvé—the earth; pradakçiëäm—circumambulation; kåtvä—having done; baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; mahä-balaù—very powerful; yajïam—a yajna; yatra—where; vinirmäya—performing; revatyä—with Revaté; viraräja—was splendidly manifested; ha—indeed.

     After circumambulating the entire earth, Lord Balaräma performed a yajïa at that lake. There he was very glorious with Revaté by His side.

Text 20 

tatra snätvä naraù sadyo
     mucyate sarva-pätakät
påthvé-pradakçiëäyäç ca
     phalaà tasya na durlabham

     tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; sadyaù—at once; mucyate—is liberated; sarva-pätakät—from all sins; påthvé—the earth; pradakçiëäyäù—of circumambulating; ca—and; phalam—the result; tasya—of him; na—not; durlabham—difficult to attain.

     A person who bathes in that lake becomes free of all sins. The pious result of circumambulating the earth is not difficult for him to attain.

Text 21 

bhagavan-mandiräd räjan
     sahasra-dhanur-agrataù
dakçiëasyäà mahä-térthaà
     gaëa-näthasya vartate

     bhagavan-mandirät—from Lord Kåçëa's palace; räjan—O king; sahasra-dhanur-agrataù—a thousand dhanus in front; dakçiëasyäm—in the south; mahä-tértham—a great holy places; gaëa-näthasya—of Gaëeça; vartate—is.

     O king, a thousand dhanus south of Lord Kåçëa's palace is a great holy place sacred to Gaëeça.

Text 22

anirdaçe gate räjan
     pradyumne sva-sute tadä
gaëeça-püjanaà yatra
     püjayäm äsa rukmiëé

     anirdaçe—at infant not ten days old; gate—attained; räjan—O king; pradyumne—Pradyumna; sva-sute—her son; tadä—then; ganeça—of Gaëeça; püjanam—worship; yatra—where; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé

     When her son Pradyumna was an infant not ten days old Rukmiëé worshiped Gaëeça at that place.

Text 23

tatra snätvä hema-dänaà
     yo dadäti nåpeçvara
putra-präptir bhavet tasya
     vaàças tasya vivardhate

     tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; hema-dänam—a gift of gold; yaù—one who; dadäti—gives; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; putra-präptiù—attainment of a son; bhavet—is; tasya—of him; vaàçaù—dynasty; tasya—of him; vivardhate—increases.

     O great king, a person who bathes there and gives gold in charity to the brähmaëas attains a good son and his dynasty expands.

Text 24

bhagavan-mandiräd räjan
     dig-vibhäge ca paçcime
dhanuçi dvi-çate cäste
     däna-térthaà paraà çubham

     bhagavan-mandirät—from Lord Kåçëa's palace; räjan—O king; dig-vibhäge—in the direction; ca—and; paçcime—west; dhanuçi—dhanus; dvi-çate—two hundred; ca—and; äste—is; däna-tértham—dana-tértha; param—great; çubham—auspicious and beautiful.

     O king, two hundred dhanus west of Lord Kåçëa's palace is auspicious and beautiful Däna-tértha.

Texts 25-27

tatra çré-kåçëacandrasya
     nityaà dänaà karoti yaù
tatra snätvä naro räjan
     dvi-phalaà käïcanaà tathä

catur-guëaà tu rajataà
     paööämbara-çataà tathä
tathä sahasra-maulyäni
     nava-ratnäni yäni ca

yo dadäti nara-çreçöhas
     tasya puëya-phalaà çåëu
açvamedha-sahasräëi
     räjasüya-çatäni ca

     tatra—there; çré-kåçëacandrasya—of Lord Kåçëacandra; nityam—regularly; dänam—chrity; karoti—gives; yaù—one who; tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; räjan—O king; dvi-phalam—double; käïcanam—gold; tathä—so; catur-guëam—four times; tu—and; rajatam—silver; paööämbara—costly garments; çatam—a hunbdred times; tathä tathä—in that way; sahasra-maulyäni—a thousand times the value; nava-ratnäni—nine jewels; yäni—which; ca—and; yaù—who; dadäti—gives; nara-çreçöhaù—the best of men; tasya—ofhim; puëya-phalam—the pious result; çåëu—please hear; açvamedha-sahasräëi—a thousand asvamedha-yajnas; räjasüya-çatäni—a hundred rajasuya-yajnas; ca—and.

     Please hear the pious result attained by giving charity there. A person who in this place regularly bathes and gives in charity to Lord Kåçëa gold, four times as much silver, a hundred costly garments, and the nine kinds of jewels valuable thousands of times over, attains the pious result of performing a thousand açvamedha-yajïas and a hundred räjasüya-yajïas.

Text 28 

däna-térthasya puëyasya
     kaläà närhati çoòaçém
badrikäçrama-yäträyäà
     yat phalaà labhate naraù

     däna-térthasya—Däna-tértha; puëyasya—sacred; kaläm—a part; na—not; arhati—is worthy; çoòaçém—sixteenth; badrikäçrama-yäträyäm—on a pilgrimage to Badarikäçrama; yat—what; phalam—result; labhate—attains; naraù—a person.

     The pious result one attains by a pilgrimage to Badarikäçrama is not equal to one sixteenth of the result of a pilgrimage to Däna-tértha.

Texts 29 and 30 

saindhaväraëya-yäträyäà
     meça-sthe ca diväkare

utpalävarta-yäträyäà
     våça-sthe bhäskare sati
snänaà dänaà lakça-guëaà
     bhavatéha na saàçayaù

     saindhaväraëya-yäträyäm—on a pilgrimage to Saindhaväraëya; meça-sthe—in Aires; ca—and; diväkare—the sun; utpalävarta-yäträyäm—on a pilgrimage to Utpala-varta; våça-sthe—in Taurus; bhäskare—the sun; sati—being; snänam—bath; dänam—charity; lakça-guëam—a hundred thousand times greater; bhavati—is; iha—here; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     One who bathes and gives charity at Saindhaväraëya when the sun is in Aires attains a great pious result. One who bathes and gives charity at Utpalävarta when the sun is in Taurus attains a pious result a hundred thousand times greater. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 31 

tasmät koöi-guëaà puëyaà
     däna-térthe videha-räö
mäsam ekaà ca yat snänaà
     dänaà térthe karoti hi

     tasmät—than this; koöi-guëam—ten million times greater; puëyam—piety; däna-térthe—at Däna-tértha; videha-räö—O king of Videha; mäsam—month; ekam—one; ca—and; yat—which; snänam—bath; dänam—charity; térthe—at the holy place; karoti—gives; hi—indeed.

     O king of Videha, a person who for one month bathes and gives charity at Däna-tértha attains a pious reuslt ten million times greater than that.

Text 32 

tasya jätaà ca yat-puëyaà
     citragupto na vetti tam
tasya térthasya mähätmyaà
     vaktuà nälaà catur-mukhaù

     tasya—of him; jätam—manifested; ca—and; yat-puëyam—the piety; citraguptaù—Citragupta; na—not; vetti—knows; tam—that; tasya—of him; térthasya—of the holy place; mähätmyam—the glory; vaktum—to speak; na alam—unable; catur-mukhaù—Brahmä.

     Yamaräja's scribe, Citragupta, cannot understand how great is his pious benefit. The demigod Brahmä cannot describe the glories of Däna-tértha.

Text 33 

sarveçäà caiva dänänäà
     açva-dänaà paraà småtam
açva-dänäd gajasyäpi
     gaja-dänäd rathasya ca

     sarveçäm—of all; ca—and; eva—indeed; dänänäm—charities; açva-dänam—charity of a horse; param—best; småtam—considered; açva-dänät—than charity of a horse; gajasya—of an elephant; api—even; gaja-dänät—than charity of an elephant; rathasya—of a chariot; ca—and.

     Giving a horse in charity is great charity. Still, giving an elephant is better than giving a horse and giving a chariot is better than giving an elephant. 

Text 34 

ratha-dänät paraà räjan
     bhümi-dänaà viçiçyate
bhümi-dänäd anna-dänaà
     mahä-dänaà prakathyate

     ratha-dänät—than giving a chariot; param—better; räjan—O king; bhümi-dänam—giving land; viçiçyate—is better; bhümi-dänät—than giving land; anna-dänam—giving food; mahä-dänam—great charity; prakathyate—is said.

     O king, giving land is better than giving a chariot, and giving food is better than giving land. Giving food is said be be great charity.

Text 35 

anna-däna-samaà dänaà
     na bhütaà na bhaviçyati
devarçi-pitå-bhütänäà
     tåptir annena jäyate

     anna-däna-samam—equal to giving food; dänam—charity; na—not; bhütam—has been; na—not; bhaviçyati—will be; devarçi-pitå-bhütänäm—the demigods, sages, pitäs, and bhütas; tåptiù—satisfaction; annena—by food; jäyate—is born.

     There never has been nor will there ever be another charity as good as giving food. The demigods, sages, pitäs and bhütas are all pleased by a gift of food.

Text 36 

däna-térthe hy anna-dänaà
     yaù karoti mahä-manäù
åëa-trayaà vimucyätha
     yäti viçëoù paraà padam

     däna-térthe—at Däna-tértha; hy—indeed; anna-dänam—gift of food; yaù—who; karoti—does; mahä-manaù—noble-hearted; åëa-trayam—three kinds of debt; vimucya—becoming free; atha—then; yäti—goes; viçëoù—of Lord Viçëu; param—to the supreme; padam—abode.

     A noble-hearted person who gives charity at Däna-tértha becomes free of the three debts and goes to the transcendental abode of Lord Viçëu.

Text 37 

daçaiva mätåke pakçe
     räjendra daça paitåke
priyäyä daça pakçe tu
     puruçän uddharen naraù

     daça—tne; eva—indeed; mätåke—on his mother's; pakçe—side; räjendra—O king of kings; daça—ten; paitåke—on his father's side; priyayä—of his wife; daça—ten; pakçe—on the side; tu—indeed; puruçän—people; uddharen—delivers; naraù—a person.

     He delivers ten relatives in his father's family, ten in his mother's family, and ten in his wife's family.

Text 38 

catur-bhujä divya-rüpä
     nägaré-kåta-ketanäù
sragvinaù péta-vasträs te
     prayänti hari-mandiram

     catur-bhujä—four arms; divya-rüpä—splendid transcendental fvorms; nägaré-kåta-ketanäù—riding on Garuòa; sragvinaù—decorated with flower garlands; péta—yellow; vasträù—garments; te—they; prayänti—attain; hari-mandiram—the abode of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     They all attain splendid four-armed spiritual forms. Dressed in yellow garments, wearing garlands of flowers, and riding on Garuòa, they fly to the Supreme Lord's transcendental abode.

Text 39 

bhagavan-mandiräd räjann
     uttarasyäà disi çrutaà
kroçärdhe nåpa-çärdüla
     mäyä-térthaà manoharam

     bhagavan-mandirät—from the palace of Lord Kåçëa; räjann—O king; uttarasyäm—to the north; disi—direction; çrutam—heard; kroçärdhe—one mile; nåpa-çärdüla—O tiger among kings; mäyä-tértham—Mäyä-tértha; manoharam—beautuful.

     O tiger of kings, one mile north of Lord Kåçëa's palace is beautiful Mäyä-tértha.

Text 40 

viräjate yatra nityaà
     durgä durgati-näçiné
siàhärüòhä bhadrakälé
     caëòa-muëòa-vinäçiné

     viräjate—is splendidly maniufested; yatra—where; nityam—always; durgä—goddess Durgä; durgati—troubles; näçiné—destroying; siàha—on a lion; ärüòhä—riding; bhadrakälé—Bhadrakälé; caëòa-muëòa-vinäçiné—killing the cruel and wicked.

     Goddess Durgä, who removes all troubles and kills the cruel and wicked, always stays there.

Text 41 

syamantakaà samahärtuà
     åkça-räja-bilaà gate
putre ca devaké devéà
     püjayäm äsa sat-phalaiù

     syamantakam—the Syamantaka jewel; samahärtum—to take; åkça-räja-bilam—to the cave of the king of the åkças; gate—gone; putre—son; ca—and; devaké—Devaké; devém—Goddess Durgä; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; sat-phalaiù—with the best of fruits.

     In this place, when her son had gone to Jämbavän's cave to recover the Syamantaka jewel, Devaké worshiped Goddess Durgä and offered her the best of fruits.

Text 42 

tadäjagäma priyayä
     sa-maëir bhagavän hariù
tad-bilät tat-prasiddhaà syän
     mäyä-térthaà phala-pradam

     tadä—then; äjagäma—returned; priyayä—with His wife; sa-maëiù—with the jewel; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåçëa; tad-bilät—from that cave; tat-prasiddham—that result; syän—is; mäyä-tértham—Mäyä-tértha; phala-pradam—giving the result.

     When Lord Kåçëa returned from that cave with Satyabhämä and the Syamantaka jewel, Devaké considered that was the result of her worship at Mäyä-tértha.

Text 43 

mäyä-térthe ca yaù snätvä
     mäyäà sampüjya mänavaù
sarväà manoratha-präptià
     präpnuyän nätra saàçayaù

     mäyä-térthe—at mäyä-tértha; ca—and; yaù—one who; snätvä—having bathed; mäyäm—Goddess Durgä; sampüjya—woirshiping; mänavaù—a human; sarväm—all; manoratha—of desires; präptim—attainment; präpnuyät—attains; na—not; atra—here; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who bathes at Mäyä-tértha and worships Goddess Durgä attains all his desires. Of this there is no doubt.

Chapter Twenty
Dvitéya-durge Indra-tértha-brahma-tértha-sürya-kuëòa-naila-lohita-säpta-samudra-mähätmya
In the Description of the Second Fort, the Glories of Indra-tértha, Brahma-tértha, Sürya-kuëòa, Nailalohita-tértha, and Sapta-sämudra-tértha

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

dvitéyasyäpi durgasya
     pürva-dväre videha-räö
indra-térthaà mahä-puëyaà
     käma-daà siddhi-däyakam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; dvitéyasya—of the second; api—also; durgasya—fort; pürva-dväre—the eastern door; videha-räö—O king of Videha; indra-tértham—Indra-tértha; mahä-puëyam—very sacred; käma-dam—fuldilling desires; siddhi-däyakam—granting perfection.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Videha, at the eastern gate of the second fortress is sacred Indra-tértha, which grants perfection and fulfills all desires.

Text 2 

tatra snätvä naro räjann
     indralokaà prayäti hi
ihaiva candra-sädåçyaà
     vaibhavaà präpyate naraù

     tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; räjann—O king; indralokam—Indraloka; prayäti—goes; hi—indeed; iha—here; eva—indeed; candra-sädåçyam—like the moon; vaibhavam—power; präpyate—attains; naraù—a person.

     O king, a person who bathes there goes to Indraloka. There he becomes glorious like the moon.

Text 3 

tathä vai dakçiëe dväre
     sürya-kuëòo 'bhidhéyate
yadä saträjitenäpi
     püjito 'bhüt syamantakaù

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; dakçiëe—at the southern; dväre—gate; sürya-kuëòaù—Sürya-kuëòa; abhidhéyate—is called; yadä—when; saträjitena—by saträjit; api—also; püjitaù—worshiped; abhüt—was; syamantakaù—the Syamantaka.

     At the southern gate is Sürya-kuëòa, where Saträjit worshiped the Syamantaka jewel.

Text 4 

tatra snätvä padmarägaà
     yo dadäti nåpeçvara
sürya-prabha-vimänena
     süryalokaà prayäti hi

     tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; padmarägam—ruby; yaù—who; dadäti—gives; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; sürya-prabha—splendid as the sun; vimänena—with an airplane; süryalokam—to Süryaloka; prayäti—goes; hi—indeed.

     A person who bathes there and gives a ruby in charity flies to the sun planet in an airplane effulgent like the sun.

Texts 5-7 

tathä vai paçcime dväre
     brahma-térthaà viçiçyate
tatra snätvä naro räjan
     svarëa-pätre ca päyäsam

yo dadäti mahä-buddhis
     tasya puëya-phalaà çåëu
brahma-hä pitå-hä go-ghno
     mätå-häcärya-häghavän

indraloke padaà dhåtvä
     bibhrad brahmamayaà vapuù
candräbhena vimänena
     yäti brahma-padaà sa ca

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; paçcime—in the western; dväre—gate; brahma-tértham—Brahma-tértha; viçiçyate—is distinguished; tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; räjan—O king; svarëa—golden; pätre—in a cup; ca—and; päyäsam—päyasa; yaù—one who; dadäti—gives; mahä-buddhiù—very intelligent; tasya—of him; puëya-phalam—the pious result; çåëu—please hear; brahma-hä—the sin of killing a ;brähmaë pitå-hä—the sin of killing one;s father; go-ghnaù—the sin of killing a cow; mätå-hä—the sin of killing one's mother; äcärya-hä—the sin of killing one's guru; aghavän—sinful; indraloke—in Indraloka; padam—the state; dhåtvä—holding; bibhrat—hoilding; brahmamayam—like Lord Brahmä; vapuù—form; candräbhena—splendid as the moon; vimänena—with an airplane; yäti—goes; brahma-padam—to Brahmaloka; sa—he; ca—and.

     At the western gate is Brahma-tértha. Please here the pious result attained by one who bathes there and gives charity of päyasa in a golden cup. Such a person is very wise. Even if he has killed his father, his mother, his guru, a brähmaëa, or a cow, or even if he has committed many very terrible sins, he attains a form like that of Lord Brahmä and, riding in an airplane effulgent as the moon, goes to Brahmaloka.

Text 8 

tathä vai uttare dväre
     kçetraà syän nailalohitam
yatra säkçän mahä-devo
     räjate nélalohitaù

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; uttare—at the northern; dväre—gate; kçetram—the place; syän—is; nailalohitam—Nailalohita; yatra—where; säkçät—directly; mahä-devaù—Lord Çiva; räjate—is splendidly manifested; nélalohitaù—as Nélalohita.

     At the northern gate is Nailalohita-tértha, where Lord Çiva is splendidly manifested in his form of Nélalohita.

Text 9 

devatä munayaù sarve
     tathä säptarçayaù pare
vasanti yatra vaideha
     tathä sarve marud-gaëäù

     devatä—the demigods; munayaù—the sages; sarve—all; tathä—so; säptarçayaù—the seven sages; pare—others; vasanti—reside; yatra—where; vaideha—O king of Videha; tathä—so; sarve—all; marud-gaëäù—the Maruts.

     All the demigods and sages, the seven åçis, all the Maruts, and many others all reside in that place.

Text 10 

nélalohita-liëgaà tu
     yatra sampüjya yatnataù
aiçvaryam atulaà lebhe
     rävaëo loka-rävaëaù

     nélalohita-liëgam—the Deity of Lord Çiva; tu—indeed; yatra—where; sampüjya—worshiping; yatnataù—carefully; aiçvaryam—opulence; atulam—unequalled; lebhe—attains; rävaëaù—Rävaëa; loka-rävaëaù—who made the entire world cry out.

     At this place the demon Rävaëa, who made the entire world scream with grief, worshiped the liëga of Lord Çiva and attained incomparable power and opulence.

Text 11 

kailäsasyäpi yäträyäà
     yat phalaà labhate nåpa
tasmäc chata-guëaà puëyaà
     nélalohita-darçanät

     kailäsasya—of Mount Kailäsa; api—also; yäträyäm—on pilgrimage; yat—what; phalam—result; labhate—attains; nåpa—O king; tasmät—than that; çata—a hundred times; guëam—multiplied; puëyam—piety; nélalohita-darçanät—by seeing Nélalohita.

     O king, by seeing the liëga of Lord Çiva there one attains a pious result a hundred times greater than the result attained by going on pilgrimage to Mount Kailäsa.

Text 12 

nélalohita-kuëòe vai
     snäto yas tri-dinaà naraù
sa yäti çiva-lokäkhyaà
     päpäyuta-yuto 'pi hi

     nélalohita-kuëòe—in Nélalohita-kuëòe; vai—indeed; snätaù—bathing; yaù—who; tri-dinam—three days; naraù—a person; sa—he; yäti—goes; çiva-lokäkhyam—to Çivaloka; päpäyuta-yutaù—having millions of sins; api—even; hi—indeed.

     A person who visits for three days and bathes in Nélalohita-kuëòa goes to Çivaloka, even though he may have committed many millions of sins.

Text 13 

sapta-sämudrakaà näma
     térthaà yatra viräjate
tatra snätvä naraù päpi
     päpa-saëghaiù pramucyate

     sapta-sämudrakam—Sapta-sämudraka; näma—named; tértham—holy place; yatra—where; viräjate—is splendidly manifested; tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; päpi—sinful; päpa-saëghaiù—from many sins; pramucyate—is freed.

     There also is Sapta-sämudraka-tértha. A sinner who bathes there is freed from a great host of sins.

Texts 14 and 15 

saptänäà ca samudräëäà
     snäna-puëyaà labhet tvaram
viçëur viriïco giriça
     indro väyur yamo raviù

parjanyo dhanadaù somaù
     kçitir agnir apäà patiù
tat-pärçveçu sadä hy ete
     tiçöhanti manujeçvara

     saptänäm—of the seven; ca—and; samudräëäm—seas; snäna-puëyam—the pious result of bathing; labhet—attains; tvaram—at once; viçëuù—Lord Viçëu; viriïcaù—Brahmä; giriça—Çiva; indraù—Indra; väyuù—Väyu; yamaù—Yama; raviù—Sürya; parjanyaù—Indra; dhanadaù—Kuvera; somaù—Candra; kçitiù—Kçiti; agniù—Agni; apäà patiù—Varuëa; tat-pärçveçu—in its sides; sadä—always; hy—indeed; ete—they; tiçöhanti—stay; manujeçvara—O king.

     He attains the pious result of bathing in the seven oceans. O king, Lord Viçëu, Brahmä, Çiva, Indra, Väyu, Yama, Sürya, Indra, Kuvera, Candra, Kçiti, Agni, and Varuëa always stay on the shores of Sapta-sämudraka-tértha.

Text 16 

säpta-koöéni térthäni
     brahmäëòe yäni käni ca
sarväëi tatra tiçöhanti
     sapta-sämudrake nåpa

     säpta-koöéni—seventy million; térthäni—holy places; brahmäëòe—in the universe; yäni—which; käni—which?; ca—and; sarväëi—all; tatra—there; tiçöhanti—stay; sapta-sämudrake—at Sapta-sämudraka; nåpa—O king.

     O king, all the seventy million holy places of the universe are present at Sapta-sämudraka-tértha.

Text 17 

tatra snätvä naraù paçcät
     kåtvä sarva-parikramam
präpnoti dvärakäyäç ca
     yäträyäù sakalaà phalam

     tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù— aperson; paçcät—after; kåtvä—doing; sarva-parikramam—circumambulation; präpnoti—attains; dvärakäyäù—of Dvärakä; ca—and; yäträyäù—pilgirmage; sakalam—all; phalam—the result.

     A person who bathes there and circumambulates that holy place attains all the pious results of going on a pilgrimage to Dvärakä.

Text 18 

sapta-sämudrakam åte
     na yäträ phala-dä småtä
sapta-sämudrakaà térthaà
     viçëu-rüpaà viduù suräù

     sapta-sämudrakam—Sapta-sämudraka; åte—without; na—not; yäträ—a pilgrimage; phala-dä—giving e\results; småtä—considered; sapta-sämudrakaà tértham—to Sapta-sämudra-tértha; viçëu-rüpam—the form of Lord Viçëu; viduù—consider; suräù—the demigods.

     Without visiting Sapta-sämudraka-tértha, a pilgrimage to Dvärakä will not bring any results. The demigods know that Sapta-sämudraka-tértha is an incarnation of Lord Viçëu.

Chapter Twenty-one
Tåtéye Durge Piëòäraka-mähätmya
In the Description of the Third Fort, the Glories of Piëòäraka-tértha

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

tåtéyasyäpi durgasya
     pürva-dväre mahä-balaù
rakçaty ahar-niçaà räjan
     hanumän aïjané-sutaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tåtéyasya—of the third; api—also; durgasya—fort; pürva-dväre—at the eastern gate; mahä-balaù—very powerful; rakçaty—protects; ahar-niçam—day and night; räjan—O king; hanumän—hanumän; aïjané-sutaù—the son of Aïané.

     Çré Närada said: Day and night Aïané's very powerful son Hanumän guards the eastern gate ofthe third fortress.
     
Text 2 

taà prekçya bhagavad-bhaktaà
     hanumantaà mahä-balam
jäyate bhagavad-bhakto
     hanumän iva mänavaù

     tam—him; prekçya—seeing; bhagavad-bhaktam—the devotee of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hanumantam—Hanumän; mahä-balam—very powerful; jäyate—is born; bhagavad-bhaktaù—a devotee of the Lord; hanumän—Hanumän; iva—like; mänavaù—a human being.

     A person who sees the very powerful devotee Hanumän becomes a great devotee of the Lord.

Text 3 

tathä vai dakçiëä-dväre
     cakraà näma sudarçanam
rakçaty ahar-niçaà räjaï
     chré-kåçëa-gata-mänasam

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; dakçiëä-dväre—at the southern door; cakram—the disc; näma—named; sudarçanam—Sudarçana; rakçaty—guards; ahar-niçam—day and night; räjan—O king; çré-kåçëa-gata-mänasam—his heart meditating on Lord Kåçëa.

     Meditating on Lord Kåçëa in his heart, the Sudarçana-cakra, guards the southern gate day and night.

Text 4 

tasya darçana-mätreëa
     bhaved bhakto hareù paraù
bhaktasyäpi sadä rakçäà
     karoti hi sudarçanam

     tasya—of him; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; bhavet—becomes; bhaktaù—a devotee of the Lord; hareù—Kåçëa; paraù—great; bhaktasya—of a devotee; api—also; sadä—always; rakçäm—protection; karoti—does; hi—indeed; sudarçanam—Sudarçana.

     Simply by seeing the Sudarçana-cakra one becomes a devotee of the Lord. The Sudarçana-cakra guards the devotees eternally.

Text 5 

tathä vai paçcimaà dväraà
     jämbavän åkça-räd balé
rakçaty ahar-niçaà räjan
     bhagavad-bhakti-samyutaù

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; paçcimam—the western; dväram—gate; jämbavän—Jambavän; åkça-rät—the king of the åkças; balé—powerful; rakçaty—guards; ahar-niçam—day and night; räjan—O king; bhagavad-bhakti-samyutaù—devoted to the Lord.

     Filled with love for the Lord, powerful Jämbavän, the king of the åkças, guards the western gate day and night.

Text 6 

taà prekçya bhagavad-bhaktaà
     jämbavantaà mahä-balam
ciraï-jévé harer bhakto
     bhavatéha ca mänavaù

     tam—him; prekçya—seeing; bhagavad-bhaktam—a devotee of the Lord; jämbavantam—jämbavän; mahä-balam—very powerful; ciraï-jévé—living eternally; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; bhaktaù—a devotee; bhavati—becomes; iha—here; ca—and; mänavaù—a person.

     A person who sees the very powerful devotee Jämbavän becomes a devotee of the Lord eternally.
     
Text 7 

tathä vai cottare dväre
     viçvakseno mahä-balaù
rakçaty ahar-niçaà räjaï
     chré-kåçëa-hådayo mahän

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; ca—and; uttare—at the northern; dväre—gate; viçvaksenaù—Viçvaksena; mahä-balaù—very powerful; rakçaty—protects; ahar-niçam—day and night; räjan—O king; çré-kåçëa-hådayaù—who keeps Lord Kåçëa in his heart; mahän—the great soul.

     Meditating on Lord Kåçëa in his heart, powerful Viçvaksena guards the northern gate day and night.
     
Text 8 

tasya darçana-mätreëa
     naro yäti kåtärthatäm
çåëu räjan bahir durgät
     térthaà piëòärakaà småtam

     tasya—him; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; naraù—a person; yäti—attains; kåtärthatäm—success; çåëu—please hear; räjan—O king; bahiù—outside; durgät—the fortress; tértham—the holy place; piëòärakam—Piëòäraka; småtam—considered.

     Simply by seeing Viçvaksena one attains the goal of life. O king, please hear of Piëòäraka-tértha, which is situated outside the third fortress.

Text 9 

piëòärakasya mähätmyaà
     çåëutäd räja-sattama
yasya smaraëa-mätreëa
     mahä-päpät pramucyate

     piëòärakasya—of Piëòäraka; mähätmyam—the glory; çåëutät—hear; räja-sattama—O best of kings; yasya—of which; smaraëa-mätreëa—simply be remembering; mahä-päpät—from the greatest sin; pramucyate—is freed.

     O best of kings, please hear the glories of Piëòäraka-tértha. Simply by hearing its glories one becomes free from the greatest sin.

Text 10 

artha-siddhyor iva dväre
     raivatädri-samudrayoù
madhye piëòäraka-kçetraà
     térthänäà tértham uttamam

     artha—the goal of life; siddhyoù—and perfection; iva—like; dväre—at the gate; raivatädri—of Mount Raivata; samudrayoù—and the ocean; madhye—between; piëòäraka-kçetram—Piëòäraka-tértha; térthänäm—of holy places; tértham—the holy place; uttamam—the best.

     As if it were standing between perfection and the goal of life, Piëòäraka-tértha, the best of holy places, stands between Mount Raivata and the ocean.

Text 11 

kratu-räjaà räjasüyaà
     yadu-räjo mahä-balaù
cakära yatra vaideha
     pairpürëatamäjïayä

     kratu-räjam—the king of yajnas; räjasüyam—Rajasuya; yadu-räjaù—the king of the Yädavas; mahä-balaù—very powerful; cakära—did; yatra—where; vaideha—O king of Videha; pairpürëatama—of the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead; äjïayä—by the order.

     By the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead's order, powerful Ugrasena, the king of the Yädavas, performed a Räjasüya-yajïa, the best of yajïas, at Piëòäraka-tértha.

Text 12 

sarväëi yatra térthäni
     samähutäni sarvataù
niväsaà cakrire räjann
     ugrasena-kratüttame

     sarväëi—all; yatra—where; térthäni—holy places; samähutäni—called; sarvataù—in all respects; niväsam—residence; cakrire—did; räjan—O king; ugrasena—of Ugrasena; kratu-uttame—at the Rajasuya-yajna.

     When they were called, all holy places came to King Ugrasena's Räjasüya-yajïa.

Text 13 

tena piëòärakaà näma
     sarva-térthasya piëòataù
tatra snätvä naraù sadyo
     räjasüya-phalaà labhet

     tena—by this; piëòärakam—Piëòäraka; näma—named; sarva-térthasya—of all holy places; piëòataù—from the convergence; tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; sadyaù—at once; räjasüya-phalam—the result ofa Rajasuya-yajna; labhet—attains.

     Because all the holy places converged (piëò) at that place, it was named Piëòäraka-tértha. A person who bathes there attains the result of performing a Räjasüya-yajïa.

Text 14 

tatraiva tri-dinaà snätvä
     vraté bhütvä samähitaù
brähmaëebhyaù svarëa-dänaà
     dattvä yaù praëato bhavet

ihaiva nara-devaù syät
     sa mahätmä na saàçayaù
nityaà çåëoti satataà
     vandi-vägbhir yaçaù svayam

     tatra—there; eva—indeed; tri-dinam—for three days; snätvä—bathing; vraté—following vows; bhütvä—becoming; samähitaù—careful; brähmaëebhyaù—top the brähmaëas; svarëa-dänam—a gift of gold; dattvä—giving; yaù—one who; praëataù—bowing down; bhavet—becomes; iha—here; eva—indeed; nara-devaù—a great king; syät—becomes; sa—he; mahätmä—a great soul; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; nityam—always; çåëoti—hears; satatam—always; vandi-vägbhiù—by the poets' words; yaçaù—glories; svayam—personally.

     A person who, carefully following religious vows, stays there for three days, bathes there, gives gold in charity to the brähmaëas, and humbly bows down before them, becomes a great saintly king in this world. Again and again he hears the poets chanting his glories.
     
Text 16 

suvarëa-ratna-vasträdyaiù
     sucandra-vadanaiù paraiù
stré-saëghaiù sevito nityaà
     håçöa-puçöo mahä-balaù

     suvarëa—with gold; ratna—jewels; vastra—and costly garments; ädyaiù—beginning; sucandra-vadanaiù—with moonlike faces; paraiù—great; stré-saëghaiù—by wives; sevitaù—served; nityam—always; håçöa-puçöaù—happy; mahä-balaù—powerful.

     He is dressed in costly garments and decorated with gold and jewels. Many beautiful moon-faced wives serve him always. He is powerful and and happy.

Text 17 

aho-rätraà prataòyante
     dväri dundubhayo ghanäù
karéndräëäà ca cétkärair
     açva-hreçaiù samanvitam

     aho-rätram—day and night; prataòyante—are struck; dväri—at the door; dundubhayaù—drums; ghanäù—great; karindräëäm—of elephants; ca—and; cétkäraiù—of trumpeting; açva-hreçaiù—with neighing of horses; samanvitam—with.

     Day and night at the gateway to his palace many drums are sounded, many regal elephants trumpet, and many horses neigh.

Text 18 

viräjate räja-saëghaiù
     prekçayan präëganäjiram
ratna-präsäda-nicayaà
     dhvaja-maëòala-maëòitam

     viräjate—is splendidly manifested; räja-saëghaiù—with many kings; prekçayan—showing; präëganäjiram—the courtyard; ratna—jewel; präsäda—palaces; nicayam—multitude; dhvaja-maëòala-maëòitam—decorated with many flags.

     Surrounded by his entourage, he is splendidly manifested in his many jewel palaces decorated with flags and enveloping charming gardens and courtyards.

Text 19 

matta-kuïjara-karëäbhyäà
     täòitä bhåëga-maëòalé
alaëkaroti tad-dväraà
     maëòitaà maëòaleçvaraiù

     matta-kuïjara-karëäbhyäm—by the ears of maddened elephants; täòitä—struck; bhåëga-maëòalé—the bees; alaëkaroti—decorates; tad-dväram—his door; maëòitam—decorated; maëòaleçvaraiù—with regal attendants.

     The entrance to his palace is decorated with regal attendants and with swarms of bees struck by the ears of intoxicated elephants.

Text 20 

piëòäraka-snänam åte
     kathaà räjyaà bhaved iha
ante mokçaà kathaà yäti
     naraù päpa-yuto 'pi hi

     piëòäraka-snänam—bathing in Piëòäraka-tértha; åte—without; katham—how?; räjyam—a kingdom; bhavet—may be; iha—here; ante—at the end; mokçam—liberation; katham—how?; yäti—attains; naraù—a person; päpa-yutaù—sinful; api—even; hi—certainly.

     Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha, how can one attain a kingdom in this world? How can even a sinner attain liberation? 

Text 21 

piëòäraka-snänam åte na çarma
     piëòäraka-snänam åte na karma
piëòäraka-snänam åte na dharma
     piëòäraka-snänam åte na varma

     piëòäraka-snänam—bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha; åte—without; na—not; çarma—happiness; piëòäraka-snänam—bathing in Piëòäraka-tértha; åte—without; na—not; karma—pious deeds; piëòäraka-snänam—bathing in Piëòäraka-tértha; åte—without; na—not; dharma—religionj; piëòäraka-snänam—btahing in Piëòäraka-tértha; åte—without; na—not; varma—protection.

     Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha there is no happiness. Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha there are no pious deeds. Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha there is no religion. Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha there is no protection.

Text 22 

piëòäraka-snänam åte viyogé
     piëòäraka-snäna-karas tu yogé
piëòäraka-snäna-karaù su-bhogé 
     piëòäraka-snäna-karo na rogé

     piëòäraka-snänam åte—without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha; viyogé—not a yogi; piëòäraka-snäna-karaù—bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha; tu—indeed; yogé—a yogi; piëòäraka-snäna-karaù—bathign at Piëòäraka-tértha; su-bhogé—happy; piëòäraka-snäna-karaù—bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha; na—not; rogé—diseased.

     Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha one cannot be a yogé. One who bathes at Piëòäraka-tértha becomes a yogé. One who bathes at Piëòäraka-tértha enjoys all happiness. One who bathes at Piëòäraka-tértha is never diseased.

Text 23

dväravatéà mädhava-mäsa-madhye
     pradakçiëé-kåtya namaskaroti
sarvä ihämütra ca siddhayo 'pi
     vaideha tat-päëi-tale bhavanti

     dväravatém—to Dvärakä; mädhava-mäsa-madhye—in the middle of th emonth of Mädhava; pradakçiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; namaskaroti—bows; sarvä—all; iha—in this life; amütra—and in the next; ca—and; siddhayaù—perfections; api—also; vaideha—O king of Videha; tat-päëi-tale—in the palm of his hand; bhavanti—are.

     A person who in the month of Mädhava (April-May) circumambulates Dvärakä finds that in both this life and the next all perfections rest in the palm of his hand.

Texts 24 and 25 

térthäpluto-'dhaù-çayanaù çuciç ca
     mauné vraté vä yava-bhojanena
ärabhya caitréà kila paurëamäséà
     yo mädhavém etya karoti yäträm

tat-puëya-saëkhyaà gadituà na çakyas
     catur-mukho vedamayo vidhätä
yo megha-dhäraà gaëayet kadäcit
     kälena puëyäni na kåçëa-puryäù

     tértha—in the holy place; äplutaù—bathing; adhaù—below; çayanaù—resting; çuciç—pure; ca—and; mauné—silent; vraté—following vows; vä—or; yava-bhojanena—by eating barley; ärabhya—beginning; caitrém—the month of Caitra; kila—indeed; paurëamäsém—on the fuill moon; yaù—one who; mädhavém—in the month of Mädhava; etya—going; karoti—does; yäträm—pilgrimage; tat-puëya-saëkhyam—that piety; gaditum—to speak; na—not; çakyaù—able; catur-mukhaù—Brahmä; vedamayaù—the master of the Vedas; vidhätä—the creator; yaù—who; megha-dhäram—the water of the clouds; gaëayet—may count; kadäcit—sometime; kälena—in time; puëyäni—the piety; na—not; kåçëa-puryäù—of Lord Kåçëa's city.

     A person who, following many vows, including a vow of silence and a vow of eating only barley, goes on a pilgrimage to Dvärakä and bathes and sleeps at Dvärakä on the full-moon day of the month of Caitra (March-April) or the full-moon day of the month of Mädhava (April-May) attains piety so great even the demigod Brahmä, who is the creator of the planets and the master of Vedas, cannot measure it. If one could somehow, with a great effort and after a long time, count the drops of rain that fall during the monsoon rains, still he could never measure the piety one gains by visiting Lord Kåçëa's city of Dvärakä.

Texts 26 and 27

yathä tithénäà hari-väsaraà ca
     yathä hi çeçaù phaëinäà phaëéndraù
yathä garutmän divi pakçiëäà ca
     yathä puräëeçu ca bhärataà ca

yathä hi deveçu ca deva-devaù
     çré-väsudevo yadu-deva-devaù
tathä puré kçetra-samasta-madhye
     dväravaté puëyavaté praçastä

     yathä—as; tithénäm—of days; hari-väsaram—ekädaçé; ca—and; yathä—as; hi—indeed; çeçaù—Çeça; phaëinäm—of snakes; phaëéndraù—the king of snakes; yathä—as; garutmän—Garuòa; divi—in the sky; pakçiëäm—of birds; ca—and; yathä—as; puräëeçu—in the Puräëas; ca—and; bhäratam—the Mahäbhärata; ca—and; yathä—as; hi—indeed; deveçu—among the demigods; ca—and; deva-devaù—the master of the demigods; çré-väsudevaù—Çré Väsudeva; yadu-deva-devaù—the master of the Yädavas; tathä—so; puré—the city; kçetra-samasta-madhye—among all holy places; dväravaté—Dvärakä; puëyavaté—sacred; praçastä—glorious.

     As Ekädaçé is glorious among sacred days, as Lord Çeça, the king of serpents, is glorious among serpents, as Garuòa is glorious among birds in the sky, as the Mahäbhärata is glorious among the Puräëas, and as Çré Kåçëa, the master of the demigods and the Yädavas, is glorious among all deities, so sacred Dvärakä is glorious among all sacred places.

Text 28

aho 'ti-dhanyä yadu-maëòalébhir
     viräjate bhümi-tale manoharä
vaikuëöha-lélädhikåtä kuçasthalé
     yathä taòidbhir jaladävalir divi

     ahaù—Oh; ati-dhanyä—very glorious; yadu-maëòalébhiù—with the Yädavas; viräjate—splendidly manifest; bhümi-tale—on the earth; manoharä—beautiful; vaikuëöha-lélädhikåtä—with the pastimes of Vaikuëöha; kuçasthalé—Dvärakä; yathä—as; taòidbhiù—with lightning; jaladävaliù—many clouds; divi—in the sky.

     Beautiful and glorious Dvärakä, in this world the home of the Yädavas and the pastimes of Vaikuëöha, is splendid like monsoon clouds and lightning.

Text 29

yatraiva säkçät puruçaù pareçvaro
     dhåtvä catur-vyüham alaà viräjate
yas tügrasenäya dadau nåpeçatäà
     kåçëäya tasmai haraye namo namaù

     yatra—where; eva—indeed; säkçät—directly; puruçaù—the Supreme Person; pareçvaraù—the master of all; dhåtvä—manifesting; catur-vyüham—the catur-vyüha expansions; alam—greatly; viräjate—is splendidly manifested; yaù—who; tu—indeed; ugrasenäya—to King Ugrasena; dadau—gave; nåpeçatäm—the post of emperor; kåçëäya—to Lord Kåçëa; tasmai—to Him; haraye—to Lord Hari; namo namaù—obeisances.

     I offer my respectful obeisances to Çré Kåçëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who expands as the catur-vyüha, and who gave the Yädavas' kingdom to Ugrasena. 

Text 30

yadä sva-lokaà bhagavän gamiçyati
     samplävayiçyaty atha täà tadärëavaù
vaideha divyaà hari-mandiraà vinä
     tasmin niväsaà bhagavän kariçyati

     yadä—when; sva-lokam—to His own abode; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; gamiçyati—will go; samplävayiçyaty—will cause of be flooded; atha—then; täm—that; tadä—then; arëavaù—the ocean; vaideha—O king of Videha; divyam—-tértha; hari-mandiram—Lord Kåçëa's palace; vinä—without; tasmin—there; niväsam—residence; bhagavän—theLord; kariçyati—will do.

     When Lord Kåçëa returns to His own abode, the ocean will flood Dvärakä City. O king of Videha, the Lord will not reside then in that palace on the earth.

Text 31

çåëvanti tatraiva kalau jala-dhvanià
     kåçëoktam itthaà satataà dine dine
bhaved avidyo yadi vä sa-vidyo
     yo brähmaëo vai sa tu mämaké tanuù

     çåëvanti—hear; tatra—there; eva—indeed; kalau—in the Kali-yuga; jala-dhvanim—the sound of water; kåçëoktam—spoken by Lord Kåçëa; ittham—thus; satatam—always; dine dine—day after day; bhavet—may be; avidyaù—ignorant; yadi—if; vä—or; sa-vidyaù—knowledgable; yaù—one who; brähmaëaù—a brähmaëa; vai—indeed; sa—he; tu—indeed; mämaké—My; tanuù—body.

     In the Kali-yuga if a person, either unlettered or a learned brähmaëa, hears Lord Kåçëa's voice in the sound of the Dvärakä ocean's waves, then Lord Kåçëa Himself declares, “That person represents Me."

Text 32

bhütvätha vipro 'bdhi-tatäd agädhaà
     gatvä gåhétvä pratimäà parasya
kåtvä pratiçöhäà ca vidhäya saudhaà
     kariçyate sthäpanam arka eçaù

     bhütvä—having become; atha—then; vipraù—a brähmaëa; abdhi-taöät——from the seashore; agädham—deep; gatvä—going; gåhétvä—taking; pratimäm—the Deity form; parasya—of the Supreme; kåtvä—doing; pratiçöhäm—basis; ca—and; vidhäya—placing; saudham—palace; kariçyate—making; sthäpanam—establishment; arka—the sun; eçaù—he.

     A brähmaëa who establishes a Deity form of the Lord in a great temple by the ocean at Dvärakä becomes glorious like the sun.

Text 33

çré-dvärakä-nätham iti svarüpaà
     paçyanti ye bhakta-janäù kalau yuge
gacchanti te viçëu-padaà nå-deva
     yogéçvaräëäm api durlabhaà yat

     çré-dvärakä-nätham—the Lord of Dvärakä; iti—thus; svarüpam—the form; paçyanti—see; ye—they who; bhakta-janäù—devotees; kalau yuge—in the Kali-yuga; gacchanti—go; te—they; viçëu-padam—to Lord Kåçëa's abode; nå-deva—O king; yogéçvaräëäm—by the kings of the yogés; api—even; durlabham—unattainable; yat—which.

     In Kali-yuga the devotees who gaze on the Deity of Lord Kåçëa, the master of Dvärakä, go to Lord Viçëu's transcendental abode, which even the greatest yogés cannot attain.

Text 34

idaà mayä te kathitaà nå-deva
     mähätmyam etat kila kåçëa-puryäù
çåëoti yaù çrävayate ca bhaktyä
     çré-dvärakä-väsa-phalaà labhet saù

     idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; nå-deva—O king; mähätmyam—the glory; etat—this; kila—indeed; kåçëa—of Lord Kåçëa; puryäù—of the city; çåëoti—hear; yaù—one who; çrävayate—cauases to hear; ca—and; bhaktyä—with devotion; çré-dvärakä-väsa-phalam—the result of residing in Dvärakä; labhet—attains; saù—he.

     O king, thus I have spoken to you the glories of Lord Kåçëa's Dvärakä City. A person who with devotion hears or causes others to hear these glories of Dvärakä attains the spiritual result of having lived there.

Text 35 

çré-dvärakäyä nåpa khaëòam etan
     mayä tavägre kathitaà su-puëyam
kértià kulaà bhaktim atéva muktià
     dadäti räjyaà ca sadaiva çåëvatäm

     çré-dvärakäyä—of Çré Dvärakä; nåpa—O king; khaëòam—the khaëòa; etan—this; mayä—by me; tava—of you; agre—in the presence; kathitam—spoken; su-puëyam—very sacred; kértim—glory; kulam—family; bhaktim—devotional service; atéva—great; muktim—liberation; dadäti—gives; räjyam—kingdom; ca—and; sadä—always; eva—indeed; çåëvatäm—of they who hear.

     O king, now I have spoken to you the very sacred Dvärakä-khaëòa, which gives fame, good family, devotional service, and liberation to they who regularly hear it.

Chapter Twenty-two
Çré Sudäma-vipropakhyäna-varëaëa
The Story of Çré Sudäma-vipra

Text 1

çré-kåçëasya sakhä kaçcit
     sudämä näma brähmaëaù
sa uväsa sva-puryäà tu
     satyä ca bhäryayä\våtaù

     çré-kåçëasya—of Lord Kåçëa; sakhä—the friend; kaçcit—one; sudämä—Sudämä; näma—named; brähmaëaù—a brähmaëa; sa—he; uväsa—resided; sva-puryäm—in his own city; tu—indeed; satyä—saintly; ca—and; bhäryayä ävåtaù—with his wife.

     Lord Kåçëa had a friend named Sudämä, who was a brähmaëa living with his wife in his own city.

Text 2 

virakto dhana-hénaç ca
     veda-vedäëga-päragaù
samäna-çélayä patnyä
     cakre våttim ayäcitäm

     viraktaù—renounced; dhana-hénaù—poverty-stricken; ca—and; veda-vedäëga-päragaù—traveled to the farther shore of the Vedas and Vedäëgas; samäna—equal; çélayä—disposition; patnyä—with his wife; cakre—did; våttim—mode of livelihood; ayäcitäm—without begging.

     He was poor and renounced. He had traveled to the farther shore of the Vedas and Vedäëgas. He and his saintly like-minded wife lived without begging for their livelihood.

Text 3 

sa kadäcit priyäà präha
     sédamänäà daridrataù
çré-kåçëo dvärakä-nätho
     mitraà mama pati-vrate

     saù—he; kadäcit—once; priyäm—to his wife; präha—said; sédamänäm—morose; daridrataù—because of poverty; çré-kåçëaù—Çré Kåçëa; dvärakä-näthaù—the king of Dvärakä; mitram—a friend; mama—of mine; pati-vrate—O wife devoted to your husband.

     When his wife was unhappy because of their poverty, he said to her, “O chaste and devoted one, Çré Kåçëa, the king of Dvärakä, is my friend.

Texts 4-7

mayä tenäpi paöhitä
     vidyä sändépaner gåhe
punar na dåçöaù çré-kåçëo
     bhoja-våçëy-andhakeçvaraù

trailokya-nätho bhagavän
     duùkha-hä déna-vatsalaù
iti çrutvä vacas tasya
     çuçka-vakträ pati-vratä

jérëa-vastra-dharä dénä
     patià präha bubhukçitä
yadi brahman nanu hariù
     sakhä te kamalä-patiù

bubhukçitaù katham-bhüto
     jérëa-karpaöa-dhäraëaù
dvärakäyäà janä gatvä
     dåçövä säkçäc chréyaù patià 
dhana-yuktäù samäyänti 
     tasmät tvaà gantum arhasi

     mayä—by me; tena—by Him; api—also; paöhitä—studied; vidyä—knowledge; sändépaneù—of Sändépani; gåhe—in the home; punaù—again; na—not; dåçöaù—seen; çré-kåçëaù—Çré Kåçëa; bhoja-våçëy-andhakeçvaraù—the Lord of Bhojas, Våçëis and Andhakas; trailokya-näthaù—the king of the three worlds; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; duùkha-hä—destroying suffering; déna-vatsalaù—affectionate to the poor; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—the words; tasya—of him; çuçka—dry; vakträ—throat; pati-vratä—devoted to her husband; jérëa-vastra-dharä—wearing ragged clothing; dénä—poor; patim—to her husbvand; präha—said; bubhukçitä—hungry; yadi—if; brahman—O brähmaëa; nanu—indeed; hariù—Lord Kåçëa; sakhä—the friend; te—of you; kamalä-patiù—the husband of the goddess of fortune; bubhukçitaù—hungry; katham-bhütaù—why?; jérëa-karpaöa-dhäraëaù—wearing ragged clothes; dvärakäyäm—in Dvärakä; janä—the people; gatvä—going; dåçövä—seeing; säkçät—directly; çréyaù patim—the goddess of fortune's husband; dhana-yuktäù—wealthy; samäyänti—return; tasmät—therefore; tvam—you; gantum—to go; arhasi—should.

     “He and I studied in Sändépani Muni's home together. When He became the king of the Bhojas, Våçëis and Andhakas, I never saw Him again. He is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the three worlds. Affectionate to the poor and suffering, He removes all their troubles."
     When she heard these words, the brähmaëa's chaste and devoted wife, troubled by hunger, her garments ragged, and her voice now dry, said to her husband. “O brähmaëa, if Lord Kåçëa, the goddess of fortune's husband, is your friend, then why are we hungry and why do we wear ragged clothes? Everyone that goes to Dvärakä and sees Lord Kåçëa, the goddess of fortune's husband, returns wealthy. For this reason, please go to see Him."

Text 8 

çré-sudämoväca 

sarveçäà çikçako 'haà tvaà
     kasmai çikçäà pradäsyasi
viprasya viduço bhikçä
     dhanaà prakathitaà priye

     çré-sudämä uväca—Çré Sudämä said; sarveçäm—of all; çikçakaù—the teacher; aham—I; tvam—you; kasmai—to that; çikçäm—teaching; pradäsyasi—you give; viprasya—of a brähmaëa; viduçaù—learned; bhikçä—begging; dhanam—wealth; prakathitam—said; priye—O beloved.

     Çré Sudämä said: I am a brähmaëa, the teacher of all. Why do you try to teach me? O dear one, it is said that the wealth of a learned brähmaëa is obtained by accepting alms."

Text 9 

çré-priyoväca 

sakhä te çré-patir yasya
     näti-düre pravartate
tam upehi sa te duùkhaà
     däridryaà näçayiçyati

     çré-priyä uväca—the wife said; sakhä—the friend; te—of you; çré-patiù—the goddess of fortune's husband; yasya—of whom; na—not; ati-düre—very far away; pravartate—is; tam—Him; upehi—approach; sa—He; te—your; duùkham—unhappiness; däridryam—poverty; näçayiçyati—will destroy.

     His wife said: Your friend, Lord Kåçëa, the goddess of fortune's husband, lives not far from here. Please go to Him. He will remove your miserable poverty.

Text 10 

gatä avasthä mama te 
     duùkha-däridrya-bhujïatoù
dätuù kåpa-nidheù känta
     mitratäyäç ca kià phalam

     gatä—gone; avasthä—the condition; mama—of me; te —of you; duùkha-däridrya-bhujïatoù—suffering in poverty; dätuù—giving; kåpa-nidheù—an ocean of kindness; känta—O beloved; mitratäyäù—of friendship; ca—and; kim—what?; phalam—the result.

     Generous Lord Kåçëa, who is an ocean of kindness, will remove our miserable poverty. O my beloved, will this not be the result of your friendship with Him?

Text 11

çré-sudämoväca 

vidhinä likhitaà bhägyaà
     tat tathaiva bhaviçyati
yätäyätena kià bhadre
     harer dhyänaà karomy aham

     çré-sudämä uväca”Çré Sudämä said; vidhinä—by fate; likhitam—written; bhägyam—good fortune; tat—that; tathä—so; eva—indeed; bhaviçyati—will be; yätäyätena—by coming and going; kim—what?; bhadre—O beautiful one; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; dhyänam—meditation; karomy—do; aham—I.

     Çré Sudämä said: Everyone's destiny is already written. What will be will be. O beautiful one, what is the use of running here and there to try to alter what is already destined? I will meditate of Lord Kåçëa.

Text 12

yad-dväri deçe räjäno
     deva-gandharva-kinnaräù
äjïäà vinä na yäsyanti
     dénasya mama kä kathä

     yad-dväri—at His door; deçe—in the country\; räjänaù—many kings; deva-gandharva-kinnaräù—demigods, gandharvas, and kinnaras; äjïäm—by the order; vinä—without; na—not; yäsyanti—will go; dénasya—poor; mama—of me; kä—what?; kathä—can be said.

     Many demigods, gandharvas, kinnaras, and great kings approach the entrance to His palace, but without His permission none can enter. What can be said of poor me?

Text 13

çré-priyoväca 

vinäjïäà naiva yäsyanti
     deva-gandharva-kinnaräù
äntar-yämé hariù çéghraà
     dütäis tvam ähvayiçyati

     çré-priyä uväca—his wife said; vinä—without; äjïäm—the order; na—not; eva—indeed; yäsyanti—will go; deva-gandharva-kinnaräù—demigods, gandharvas, and kinnaras; äntar-yämé—staying in everyone's heart; hariù—Lord Kåçëa; çéghram—for a long time; dütäiù—with messengers; tvam—you; ähvayiçyati—will call.

     His wife said: Without His permission the demigods, gandharvas, and kinnaras cannot enter. Still, He is the Supersoul in everyone's heart. He will send His messengers to call you to Him. 

Text 14

çré-vipra uväca 

dayälur édåçaù kåçëo
     paraà tu çåëu bhämini
vipatti-käle mitrasya
     na gacched gåham uttamam

     çré-vipra uväca—the brähmaëa said; brähman—the Supreme Brahman; dayäluù—merciful; édåçaù—like this; kåçëaù—Çré Kåçëa; param—great; tu—indeed; çåëu—hear; bhämini—O beautiful one; vipatti-käle—at the time of catastrophe; mitrasya—of a friend; na—not; gacchet—went; gåham—to the home; uttamam—great.

     The brähmaëa said: It is true. Lord Kåçëa is merciful like that. Still, O beautiful one, please listen. When a wealthy friend was in trouble once, still Lord Kåçëa did not go to visit his palace.

Text 15

kathaà tu yäcanäà kurve
     ciräd dåçövä svakaà priyam
nirlobhät tu bhavet prétir
     yäcanät tu gamiçyati

     katham—how?; tu—indeed; yäcanäm—request; kurve—I do; cirät—for a long time; dåçövä—having seen; svakam—own; priyam—dear one; nirlobhät—out of greed; tu—indeed; bhavet—may be; prétiù—love; yäcanät—from the request; tu—indeed; gamiçyati—will go.

     How can I see my old friend and then ask something from Him? My greedy request will chase away His love for me.

Text 16

çré-priyoväca 

duùkha-däridrya-haraëaà
     çré-harer darçanaà kuru
yäcanä naiva kartavyä
     sa te 'rthaà bahu däsyati 
evaà tu priyayä vipro 
     bahudhaivaà prabhäçitaù

     çré-priyä uväca—his wife said; duùkha-däridrya-haraëam—removing the unhappy poverty; çré-hareù—of Lored Kåçëa; darçanam—the sight; kuru—please do; yäcanä—request; na—not; eva—indeed; kartavyä—should be done; sa—He; te—to you; artham—wealth; bahu—great; däsyati—will give; evam—thus; tu—indeed; priyayä—by his wife; vipraù—the brähmaëa; bahudhä—in many ways; evam—thus; prabhäçitaù—was addressed.

     His wife said: Simply seeing Lord Kåçëa will remove your unhappy poverty. You need not ask Him for anything. Of His own accord He will give great wealth to you. 

     In this way she spoke many words to the brähmaëa.

Text 17

ayaà hi paramo läbhaù
     kåtvä mitrasya darçanam
upäyanaà tu kià däsye
     lajjito 'haà daridrataù

     ayam—this; hi—indeed; paramaù—the ultimate; läbhaù—attainment; kåtvä—havign done; mitrasya—of a friend; darçanam—the sight; upäyanam—a gift; tu—indeed; kim—what; däsye—I will give; lajjitaù—embarrassed; aham—I; daridrataù—from poverty.

     The brähmaëa said: Seeing my friend, Lord Kåçëa is the greatest attainment. Still, what gift will i give to Him when I see Him? I will be embarrassed by my poverty.

Text 18

ity uktvä sä gatä çéghraà
     para-gehaà tadä saté
taëòuläàç caturo muçöén
     yäcitvä sva-gåhaà yayau

     ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; sa—she; gatä—wnrt; çéghram—at once; para-geham—to another's home; tadä—then; saté—the saintly wife; taëòulän—some rice; caturaù—four; muçöén—palmsfull; yäcitvä—begging; sva-gåham—to her oen home; yayau—went.

     Then the saintly woman went to a neighbor's home, begged four palmsful of rice, and returned.

Text 19

jérëa-karpaöa-khaëòe ca
     baddhvä tän pataye dadau

     jérëa-karpaöa-khaëòe—in a ragged piece of cloth; ca—and; baddhvä—binding; tän—that; pataye—to her husband; dadau—gave.

     Then, tying the rice in a ragged piece of cloth, she gave it to her husband.

Text 20

tato gåhétvä påthukäàç ca taëòulän
     kucaila-dhäré malinaç ca durbalaù
jagäma kåçëasya puréà çanaiù çanair
     brahmaëya-devaà manasä ca saàsmaran

     tataù—then; gåhétvä—taking; påthukän—flat; ca—and; taëòulän—rice; kucaila-dhäré—wearing ragged clothes; malinaù—dirty; ca—and; durbalaù—weak; jagäma—went; kåçëasya—of Lord Kåçëa; purém—to the city; çanaiù çanaiù—very slowly; brahmaëya-devam—to the master of the brähmaëas; manasä—with his mind; ca—and; saàsmaran—remembering.

     Taking that chipped rice with him, weak, dirty, dressed in rags, and always meditating on Lord Kåçëa, the master of the brähmaëas, the brähmaëa went to Lord Kåçëa's city of Dvärakä.

Text 21

sottérya sindhum uòupena dadarça tatra
     çré-dvärakäà hari-puréà kanakair viciträm
çreëé-sabhä-vividha-durga-gåhaiù patäkaiù
     çåë\gäöakair ati-balair yadubhiç ca guptäm

     sottérya—crossing; sindhum—the ocean; uòupena—in a boat; dadarça—saw; tatra—there; çré-dvärakäm—Çré Dvärakä; hari-purém—Lord Kåçëa's city; kanakaiù—with gold; viciträm—wonderful; çreëé-sabhä-vividha-durga-gåhaiù—with many palaces, assembly-halls, and fortresses; patäkaiù—with flags; çåë\gäöakaiù—with many crossroards; ati-balaiù—very powerful; yadubhiç—by the Yädavas; ca—and; guptäm—protected.

     Crossing the ocean in a boat, the brähmaëa gazed at Lord Kåçëa Dvärakä City, which was carefully protected by the powerful Yädavas, and which was wonderful with many golden palaces, assembly-halls, fortresses, and crossroads.

Text 22

dåçövä kåçëa-puréà vipro
     janän äpåcchya çré-hareù
çré-mandiraà tu kuträste
     sarve vadata sämpratam

     dåçövä—seeing; kåçëa-purém—Lord Kåçëa's city; vipraù—the brähmaëa; janän—the people; äpåcchya—asking; çré-hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; çré-mandiram—the beautiful palace; tu—indeed; kutra—where?; äste—is; sarve—all; vadata—said; sämpratam—then.

     Gazing at Lord Kåçëa's city, the brähmaëa asked the people, “Where is Lord Kåçëa's beautiful palace?" The people replied, “All are Lord Kåçëa's palaces."

Text 23

iti çrutvä mädhavasya
     bhavanänäà ca rakçakäù
ücus te vartate kåçëaù
     sarveçu mandireçu ca

     iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; mädhavasya—of Lord Kåçëa; bhavanänäm—of the palaces; ca—and; rakçakäù—the guards; ücuù—said; te—they; vartate—are; kåçëaù—Lord Kåçëa; sarveçu—in all; mandireçu—palaces; ca—and.

     Hearing this, the brähmaëa asked the palace guards, “In which palace is Lord Kåçëa at this moment?" the guards replied, “He is in all of them at this moment."

Text 24

ity upaçrutya sadanaà
     praviçyaikatamaà dvijaù
brahmänandaà gataù kåçëaà
     paryaëka-sthaà vilokya ca

     ity—thus; upaçrutya—hearing; sadanam—palace; praviçya—entering; ekatamam—one; dvijaù—the brähmaëa; brahmänandam—spiritual bliss; gataù—attained; kåçëam—Lord Kåçëa; paryaëka-stham—sitting on a bed; vilokya—seeing; ca—and.

     Hearing this, entering one of the palaces, and then seeing Lord Kåçëa sitting on His bed, the brähmaëa became filled with spiritual bliss.

Text 25

sakhäyam ägataà jïätvä
     sahasotthäya mädhavaù
dorbhyäà militvä cänyonyaà
     premëä hy açru-kuläkulaù

     sakhäyam—His friend; ägatam—come; jïätvä—aware; sahasä—at once; utthäya—rising; mädhavaù—Lord Kåçëa; dorbhyäm—with both arms; militvä—meeting; ca—and; anyonyam—together; premëä—with love; hy—indeed; açru-kuläkulaù—flooded with tears.

     Seeing that he had come, Lord Kåçëa at once stood up and, His eyes flooded with tears, embraced His friend with both arms.

Text 26

svarëa-pätreëa tasyäpi
     pädau prakçälya taj-jalam
gåhétvä çirasä taà tu
     paryaëka upaveçya ca

     svarëa—golden; pätreëa—-with a basin; tasya—of him; api—also; pädau—the feet; prakçälya—washing; taj-jalam—that water; gåhétvä—taking; çirasä—on the head; tam—him; tu—indeed; paryaëka—on the bed; upaveçya—placing; ca—and.

     In a golden basin the Lord washed his feet and then sprinkled the water on His own head. Then Lord had him sit on the bed.

Text 27

arcanaà kåtavän gandha-
     candanäguru-kuëkumaiù
pakvännair dhüpa-dépaiç ca
     madhu-parkair vidhänataù

     arcanam—worship; kåtavän—did; gandha—with fragrances; candana—sandal; aguru—aguru; kuëkumaiù—and kunkuma; pakva—cooked; annaiù—with grains; dhüpa—with incense; dépaiù—with lamps; ca—and; madhu-parkaiù—with madhuparka; vidhänataù—properly.

     Then the Lord worshiped him, offering him, fragrances, sandal paste, aguru, kuëkuma, incense, lamps, madhu-parka, and cooked grains.

Text 28

paçcäd ävedya tämbülaà
     gäà ca svägatam abravét
våddhaà kucailaà malinaà
     durbalaà çveta-murdhajam

     paçcät—then; ävedya—offering; tämbülam—betelnuts; gäm—to the brähmaëa; ca—and; svägatam—welcome; abravét—said; våddham—old; kucailam—dressed in rags; malinam—dirty; durbalam—weak; çveta-murdhajam—with white hair.

     After offering him betelnuts, the Lord spoke words of welcome to the weak, dirty, old, white-haired, dressed-in-rags brähmaëa.

Text 29  

mitravindä paryacarad
     vyajanena smitänvitä
çré-kåçëasya priyäù sarvä
     vismitä jahasus tadä

     mitravindä—Mitravindä; paryacarat—worshiped; vyajanena—with a fan; smitänvitä—smiling; çré-kåçëasya—of Çré Kåçëa; priyäù—the dear queens; sarvä—all; vismitä—astonished; jahasuù—smiled; tadä—then.

     Then smiling Mitravindä worshiped and fanned him. Filled with wonder, all of Lord Kåçëa's queens smiled.

Text 30 

ücuù parasparaà naryaù
     prekçya vipraà samärcitam
bhékçunä hy avadhütena
     kim anena kåtaà tapaù

     ücuù—said; parasparam—among themselves; naryaù—the women; prekçya—seeing; vipram—the brähmaëa; samärcitam—worshiped; bhékçunä—by the brähmaëa; hy—indeed; avadhütena—avadhüta; kim—what?; anena—by him; kåtam—done; tapaù—austerities.

     Seeing him worshiped in this way, the queens said among themselves, “What austerities must this brähmaëa avadhüta have performed?"

Text 31 

yena trailokya-näthena
     sat-kåtaç cägrajo yathä
etasminn antare tau dvau
     kathäyäà cakratuù kathäù 
pürvä guru-kule jätä 
     hastau gåhya parasparam

     yena—by whom; trailokya-näthena—the master of the three worlds; sat-kåtaù—honored; ca—and; agrajaù—an elder brother; yathä—as; etasminn—here; antare—within; tau—they; dvau—both; kathäyäà cakratuù kathäù—talked; pürvä—before; guru-kule—in the guru's home; jätä—born; hastau—hands; gåhya—grasping; parasparam—each other.

     Lord Kåçëa honored him as if he were an elder brother. Holding hands in the palace, the two of them talked about their days in the home of their guru.

Text 32 

çré-kåçëa uväca 

çåëu brahman prapaöhitä
     sarva-vidyä tvayä mayä
gurave dakçiëäà dattvä
     punas tvaà naiva dåçyase

     çré-kåçëa uväca—Çré Kåçëa said; çåëu—please hear; brahman—O brähmaëa; prapaöhitä—studied; sarva-vidyä—all knowledge; tvayä—by you; mayä—by me; gurave—to the guru; dakçiëäm—dakçiëä; dattvä—giving; punaù—again; tvam—you; na—not; eva—indeed; dåçyase—seen.

     Çré Kåçëa said: O brähmaëa, you and I studied all branches of knowledge. Then we offered dakçiëä to our guru. Since then we have not seen each other.

Text 33 

ahaà tu dvärakäà yäto
     jaräsandha-bhayät sakhe
kutra sthale tava vibho
     niväso vada me khalu

     aham—I; tu—indeed; dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; yätaù—went; jaräsandha-bhayät—out of fear of Jarasandha; sakhe—O friernd; kutra—where?; sthale—place; tava—of you; vibhaù—o great once; niväsaù—residence; vada—please tell; me—me; khalu—certainly.

     O friend, because I was afraid of Jaräsandha, I went to Dvärakä. O great one, where do you live? Please tell Me.

Text 34 

kadäcid indhanärthe vai
     guru-däraiù praëoditäù
vidyärthino vayaà sarve
     vanaà jagmur bhayaëkaram

     kadäcit—one time; indhanärthe—for firewood; vai—indeed; guru-däraiù—by the guru's wife; praëoditäù—sent; vidyärthinaù—students; vayam—we; sarve—all; vanam—top the forest; jagmuù—went; bhayaëkaram—fearful.

     One time, sent by our guru's wife, we students went to the fearful forest to gather firewood.

Text 35 

vipattir abhavat tatra
     väta-varça-bhayaëkaré
ravir astaà gato rätryäà
     andhakäro 'bhavan mahän

     vipattiù—calamity; abhavat—was; tatra—there; väta-varça-bhayaëkaré—a fearful hurricane; raviù—the sun; astam—on the western horizon; gataù—went; rätryäm—at night; andhakäraù—blinding darkness; abhavat—was; mahän—great.

     Then there was a ferocious and frightening hurricane. The sun set in the west, and then at night there was a great blinding darkness.

Text 36 

sarvaà jalamayaà jätaà
     sthalaà naiva tu dåçyate
vayaà parasparaà sarve
     gåhéta-kara-paëkajäù

     sarvam—all; jalamayam—made of water; jätam—was manifested; sthalam—the place; na—not; eva—indeed; tu—indeed; dåçyate—is seen; vayam—we; parasparam—each other; sarve—all; gåhéta-kara-paëkajäù—holding each other's lotus hands.

     Everything was flooded with water. Unable to see anything, all of us tightly held each other's lotus hands.

Texts 37-39 

vidyut-prakäçe paçyanto
     dékçu sarväsu babhramuù
tataù süryodaye jäte
     guruù sändépanir mahän

jale çiçyäàç ca çétärtän
     vanaà gatvä dadarça ha
jalän sarvän sthale kåtvä
     gurur açru-pariplutaù

uväca bälakä yüyaà
     asmad-äjïä-paräyaëaù
çreçöhas tu präëinäm ätmä
     tam anädåtya mat-paräù

     vidyut-prakäçe—in the lightning flash; paçyantaù—seeing; dékçu—the directions; sarväsu—all; babhramuù—wandering; tataù—then; süryodaye—at sunrise; jäte—manifested; guruù—the guru; sändépaniù—Sändépani; mahän—great; jale—in the water; çiçyän—students; ca—and; çétärtän—troubled by cold; vanam—to the forest; gatvä—went; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed; jalän—the water; sarvän—all; sthale—the place; kåtvä—doing; guruù—the guru; açru—tears; pariplutaù—flooded; uväca—said; bälakä—boys; yüyam—you; asmad-äjïä—to my order; paräyaëaù—devoted; çreçöhäù—the best; tu—indeed; präëinäm—of living entities; ätmä—himself; tam—indeed; anädåtya—ignoring; mat-paräù—for my sake.

     Seeing by the light of lightning flashes, we wandered in all directions. When the sun rose our guru, Sändépani Muni, went to the forest and saw his students trapped in a flooded place and suffering from the cold. His eyes flooded with tears, our guru said, “You boys have dedicated your lives to fulfilling my order. You are the best of all living entities. Ignorning your own benefit, you are devoted to me.

Texts 40 and 41 

tasmäd bhavadbhyaù santuçöo
     varaà däsyämi durlabham
bhavatäà cäpi sarvatra
     pürëaù santu manorathäù

veda-çästra-puräëäni
     kaëöha-sthäni bhavantu hi
tasmäd guroç ca kåpayä
     pürëo 'haà sarva-saukhyataù

     tasmät—therefore; bhavadbhyaù—with you; santuçöaù—pleased; varam—blessing; däsyämi—I will give; durlabham—rare; bhavatäm—of you; ca—and; api—also; sarvatra—in all circumstances; pürëaù—fulfilled; santu—may be; manorathäù—desires; veda-çästra—the Vedas; puräëäni—and Puräëas; kaëöha-sthäni—staying in your voices; bhavantu—may be; hi—indeed; tasmät—therefore; guroù—of the guru; ca—and; kåpayä—by the mercy; pürëaù—fulfilled; aham—I; sarva-saukhyataù—with all happiness.

     “For this reason I will give you all a rare blessing. I bless you that the Vedas and Puräëas will always stay in your voices and your desires will always be fulfilled." For this reason, by our guru's mercy, I am always filled with happiness.

Text 42 

çré-sudamoväca 

deva-deva gurus tvaà tu
     koöi-brahmäëòa-näyakaù
çré-pates tasya guruçu
     väso 'tyanta-viòambanam

     çré-sudamä uväca—Çré Sudämä said; deva-deva—O master of the demigods; guruù—the guru; tvam—You; tu—indeed; koöi—of millions; brahmäëòa—of universes; näyakaù—the master; çré-pateù—of the goddess of fortune's husband; tasya—of Him; guruçu—in the gurus; väsaù—the residenbce; atyanta—great; viòambanam—imitation.

     Çré Sudämä said: O master of the demigods, You are the guru of everyone. You are the master of millions of universes. You are the origin of Lord Näräyaëa, the husband of the goddess of fortune. You were only pretending to be an ordinary student at our guru's home.

Text 43 

tataù sudämä vipras tu
     kåçëäya paramätmane
påthukäàs taëòulän räjan
     na prayacchad aväë-mukhaù

     tataù—then; sudämä—Sudämä; vipraù—brähmaëa; tu—indeed; kåçëäya—to Lord Kåçëa; paramätmane—the Supersoul; påthukän—chipped; taëòulän—rice; räjan—O king; na—not; prayacchat—offered; aväë-mukhaù—his head down.

     Hanging his head down, Sudämä brähmaëa did not offer the chipped rice to Lord Kåçëa, the all-pervading Supersoul.

Text 44 

sarvätmä bhagaväàs tasya
     jïätvägamana-käraëam
näyaà vipras tu çré-kämo
     mukty-arthaà mäà tu sevate

     sarvätmä—the all-pervading Suoersoul; bhagaväàù—the Supreme Person; tasya—of him; jïätvä—underatanding; ägamana—of coming; käraëam—the reason; na—not; ayam—this; vipraù—brähmaëa; tu—certainly; çré-kämaù—desiring wealth; mukty-artham—desiring liberation; mäm—Me; tu—indeed; sevate—serves.

     Aware of the reason for the brähmaëa's visit, Lord Kåçëa, who is the Supersoul present in everyone's heart, thought, “This brähmaëa does not serve Me because he wants material opulence or liberation.

Text 45 

bhäryä pati-vratä duùkhäd
     dhanäçäà cäsya kurvaté
tasmäd dhanaà kathaà däsye
     adätroç ca tayor aham

     bhäryä—his wife; pati-vratä—chaste; duùkhät—out of unhappiness; dhanäçäm—the desire for wealth; ca—and; asya—of him; kurvaté—doing; tasmät—therefore; dhanam—wealth; katham—how?; däsye—I give; adätroç—not giving; ca—and; tayoù—of them; aham—I.

     “His chaste and devoted wife is distressed and she desires wealth, but how can I give wealth to them when they have not given anything to Me?"

Text 46 

iti bruvan punar jïätvä
     hetor mama sa taëòulam
pragåhya gatavän atra
     lajjayä naiva däsyati

     iti—thus; bruvan—saying; punaù—again; jïätvä—understanding; hetoù—for that reason; mama—of Me; sa—he; taëòulam—rice; pragåhya—taking; gatavän—came; atra—here; lajjayä—with embarassment; na—not; eva—indeed; däsyati—will give.

     After saying this to Himself, the Lord understood what had happened. He thought, “He came here taking a gift of rice for Me, but now he is embarrassed and he will not give it.

Text 47 

tasmät tu yäcanäà kurve
     viditvaivaà vaco 'bravét

     tasmät—therefore; tu—inded; yäcanäm—asking; kurve—I will do; viditvä—understanding; evam—thus; vacaù—words; abravét—said. 

     “Therefore I will ask him for it."  After thinking in this way, Lord Kåçëa spoke.

Text 48 

çré-kåçëa uväca 

gåhän mad-arthe bhavatä
     kim änétam upäyanaà
anv apy upähåtaà yac ca
     bhaktyä bhüri bhaviçyati

     çré-kåçëa uväca—Çré Kåçëa said; gåhat—from home; mad-arthe—for my sake; bhavatä—by you; kim—what?; änétam—brought; upäyanam—gift; anv—following; apy—also; upähåtam—brought; yac—what; ca—and; bhaktyä—with love; bhüri—great; bhaviçyati—will be.

     Çré Kåçëa said: Did you bring from your home a gift for Me? Is there a gift that with great love you will offer to Me?

Text 49 

patraà puçpaà phalaà toyaà
     yo me bhaktyä prayacchati
tad ahaà bhakty-upahåtaà
     asnä\mi prayatätmanaù

     patram—aleaf; puçpam—a flower; phalam—a fruit; toyam—water; yaù—whoever; me—unto Me; bhaktyä—with devotion; prayacchati—offers; tat—that; aham—I; bhakty-upahåtam—offered in devotion; asnä\mi—accept; prayatätmanaù—from one in pure consciousness.

     If one offers Me with love and devotion a leaf, a flower, fruit or water, I will accept it.*

Text 50 

ittham äbhäçya bhagavän
     adätuç ca dvijanmanaù
céra-khaëòät taëòuläàç ca
     jahära kim idaà svayam

     ittham—thus; äbhäçya—saying; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; adätuù—not giving; ca—and; dvijanmanaù—of the brähmana; céra-khaëòät—from the ragged cloth; taëòulän—the rice; ca—and; jahära—grabbed; kim—what?; idam—is this; svayam—personally.

     After speaking these words, the Supreme Personality of Godhead suddenly grabbed the ragged pouch of rice and said, “What is this?

Text 51 

etat tvayopanétaà me
     sakhe parama-préëanam
viçvaà mäà tarpayiçyanti
     brahmann ete ca taëòuläù

     etat—this; tvayä—by you; upanétam—brought; me—to Me; sakhe—O friend; parama-préëanam—very pleasing; viçvam—the world; mäm—Me; tarpayiçyanti—will satisfy; brahmann—O brähmaëa; ete—this; ca—and; taëòuläù—rice.

     “O friend, you have brought something that is very pleasing. O brähmaëa, this rice will satisfy bith Me and the entire universe.

Text 52 

édåçä gokule bhuktäù
     çreçöhäù påthuka-taëòuläù
mätra yasodayä dattäù
     punas tan naiva dåçöavän

     édåçäù—like this; gokule—in Gokula; bhuktäù—eaten; çreçöhäù—the best; påthuka-taëòuläù—chipped rice; mätra—by My mother; yasodayä—Yaçodä; dattäù—given; punaù—again; tan—that; na—not; eva—indeed; dåçöavän—seen.

     “I used to eat excellent chipped rice like this in Gokula. My mother, Yaçodä-devé, would always give me rice like this. After that time I had never seen this kind of rice again."

Text 53 

ity eka-muçöià jagdhvä ca
     bhümijäà sampadaà dadau
dvitéyaà jagdhum ärebhe
     dätuà pätäla-sampadam

     ity—thus; eka-muçöim—with one hand; jagdhvä—eating; ca—and; bhümijäm—rice; sampadam—opulence; dadau—gave; dvitéyam—a second; jagdhum—to eat; ärebhe—began; dätum—to give; pätäla-sampadam—opulence.

     Lord Kåçëa then ate one palmful of that rice and He was about to eat a second.

Text 54 

tävad vakça-sthaläc chéghraà
     jaghåe çréù karaà hareù
aparädhäd vinä nätha
     kathaà mäà tyaktum icchasi

     tävat—then; vakça-sthaläc—from His chest; çéghram—quickly; jaghåe—grabbed; çréù—the goddess of fortune; karam—the hand; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; aparädhät—an offense; vinä—without; nätha—O Lord; katham—why?; mäm—me; tyaktum—to abandon; icchasi—desire.

     Then the goddess of fortune, who was resting on His chest, suddenly grasped His hand and said, “Lord, I have not offended You. Why do You wish to leave Me?

Text 55 

etävatälaà çré-kåçëa
     çakra-tulyo dvijo bhavet
dvijena nirdhanenäpi
     na jïätaà tad-rahasyakam

     etävatä—by this; alam—greatly; çré-kåçëa—O Çré Kåçëa; çakra-tulyaù—equal to Lord Indra; dvijaù—the brähmaëa; abhavet—will become; dvijena—by the brähmaëa; nirdhanena—poor; api—also; na—not; jïätam—known; tad-rahasyakam—that secret.

     “Because of what You have just done, this brähmaëa will become King Indra's equal." The poverty-stricken brähmaëa did not understand the secret of what had just happened.

Text 56 

sampürëaà ca dhanaà präptaà
     sva-gåhe viçëu-mäyayä
uçitvä rajanim ekaà
     bhuktvä pétvä sukhaà gataù

     sampürëam—full; ca—and; dhanam—wealth; präptam—attained; sva-gåhe—in his own home; viçëu-mäyayä—by the potency of Lord Viçëu; uçitvä—residing; rajanim—night; ekam—one; bhuktvä—eating; pétvä—and drinking; sukham—happiness; gataù—attained.

     The brähmaëa stayed there for one night. Eating and drinking, he became happy. Meanwhile, Lord Viçëu's yogamäyä potency filled his home with all opulences.

Text 57 

çvo-bhüte sva-gåhän gantuà
     kåçëaà natvä mano dadhe
sa cäjïäpto bhagavatä
     vanditaù parirambhitaù

     çvo-bhüte—on the following day; sva-gåhän—his own home; gantum—to go; kåçëam—to Lord Kåçëa; natvä—bowing down; manaù—mind; dadhe—decided; sa—he; ca—and; äjïä—permission; äptaù—attained; bhagavatä—by the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vanditaù—bowed down; parirambhitaù—embraced.

     The next day the brähmaëa decided to return to his own home. He bowed down before Lord Kåçëa and received permission to leave. Then the Lord bowed before him and embraced him.

Text 58 

yäcanä na kåtä tena
     vréòitaù sva-gåhän yayau
brahmaëyatä mayä dåçöä
     vipra-devasya çré-pateù

     yäcanä—request; na—not; kåtä—done; tena—by him; vréòitaù—embarrassed; sva-gåhän—to his own home; yayau—went; brahmaëyatä—love for the brähmaëas; mayä—by me; dåçöä—seen; vipra-devasya—of the master of the brähmaëas; çré-pateù—the goddess of fortune's husband.

     Embarrassed, he had not asked for anything. As he returned home, he thought, “I have seen how Lord Kåçëa, the master of the brähmaëas and the husband of the goddess of fortune, dearly loves the brähmaëas.

Text 59 

ahaà daridraù kåçëasya
     bähubhyäà parirambhitaù
priyä-juçöe ca paryaëke
     bhräteva sthäpito dvijaù

     aham—I; daridraù—poor; kåçëasya—of Lord Kåçëa; bähubhyäm—bvy the arms; parirambhitaù—embraced; priyä-juçöe—with His wife; ca—and; paryaëke—on the bed; bhrätä—a brother; iva—like; sthäpitaù—placed; dvijaù—a brähmaëa.

     “I am only a poor brähmaëa. Still, Lord Kåçëa embraced me with His arms and had me sit on His wife's bed as if I were His brother.

Text 60 

véjito vyajanenäpi
     rukmiëyä satyabhämayä
nirdhanas tu dhanaà labdhvä
     çré-patià naiva saàsmaret

     véjitaù—fanned; vyajanenäpi—with afan; rukmiëyä—by Rukmiëé; satyabhämayä—and Satyabhämä; nirdhanaù—poor; tu—indeed; dhanam—wealth; labdhvä—attaining; çré-patim—the husband of the goddess of fortune; na—not; eva—indeed; saàsmaret—would remember.

     “Rukmiëé and Satyabhämä both fanned me. I am poor because if I became rich I would not continue to fix my thoights on Lord Kåçëa, the goddess of fortune's husband.

Text 61 

itthaà karuëayä mahyaà
     dhanaà kåçëo na dattavän
itthaà vicärayan gacchan
     saàsmaran brähmaëéà ruçä

     ittham—thus; karuëayä—with mercy; mahyam—to me; dhanam—wealth; kåçëaù—Lord Kåçëa; na—not; dattavän—gave; ittham—thus; vicärayan—thinking; gacchan—going; saàsmaran—remembering; brähmaëém—the brähmaëa's wife; ruçä—with anger.

     “It is for this reason that Lord Kåçëa, out of His great kindness, did not offer me any wealth." Then the brähmaëa remembered his wife. The thought made him angry.

Texts 62 and 63 

gåhäëa dhana-koöià ca
     gåhaà gatvä bravémy aham
brahmaëya-devo dätä ca
     çré-kåçëo 'yaà mayä çrutaù

pratyakça-dåçöaù kåpaëo
     garvito dhana-püritaù
çäpaà däsye kathaà mitre
     dhana-lobhäd ahaà våthä

     gåhäëa—take; dhana-koöim—wealth many millions fo times over; ca—and; gåham—hom; gatvä—going; bravémy—say; aham—I; brahmaëya-devaù—the master of the brähmaëas; dätä—generous; ca—and; çré-kåçëaù—Çré Kåçëa; ayam—He; mayä—by me; çrutaù—heard; pratyakça-dåçöaù—directly seen; kåpaëaù—a miser; garvitaù—proud; dhana-püritaù—filled with wealth; çäpam—a curse; däsye—I will give; katham—why?; mitre—to My friend; dhana-lobhät—out of greed for money; aham—I; våthä—for no reason.

     He thought, “If when I saw Him I had heard generous Lord Kåçëa, the master of the brähmaëas, say, `I say please take wealth many millions of times over,' then I would become a proud and wealthy miser. Lord Kåçëa must have thought, “Why should I curse My friend in this way, so for no reason he will become a greedy miser."

Texts 64 and 65 

yädåçé me kåtä prétis
     tädåçéà präpayiçyati
pitaräv asya kaàsena
     kärägare kåtau purä

kåçëas tu nanda-sadane
     para-gehe ca vardhitaù
sa däsyati kathaà dravyaà
     dhana-yukto 'pi nirdhanaù

     yädåçé—like which; me—for me; kåtä—done; prétiù—love; tädåçém—like that; präpayiçyati—will attain; pitarau—the parents; asya—of Him; kaàsena—by Kaàsa; kärägare—in prsion; kåtau—done; purä—before; kåçëaù—Lord Kåçëa; tu—indeed; nanda-sadane—in nanda's home; para-gehe—in the home of another; ca—and; vardhitaù—grew up; sa—He; däsyati—will give; katham—why; dravyam—wealth; dhana-yuktaù—wealthy; api—even; nirdhanaù—poor.

     “He will give me what makes me love Him more. He did that to His parents when they were locked in Kaàsa's prison and when He grew up in the home of His stepfather Nanda. Why would Kåçëa give me wealth if when I became wealthy with money I would also become poor in love for Him?

Text 66 

ratnaiù prapüritän gehän
     dåçövä väïchäà na kärayet
laläöe likhitaà yad yan
     na tan nyünaà bhaviçyati

     ratnaiù—with jewels; prapüritän—filled; gehän—home; dåçövä—seeing; väïchäm—desire; na—not; kärayet—does; laläöe—on the forehead; likhitam—written; yat yat—whatever; na—not; tat—that; nyünam—reduced; bhaviçyati—will be.

     “Even if one sees a palace filled with jewels, he should not desire to have it. A person's destiny is written on his forehead. That destiny cannot be changed."

Text 67 

iti saëkathayan vipro
     nija-pury-antike gataù
suvarëa-durga-samyuktaà
     kapäöa-dhvaja-maëòitam

     iti—thus; saëkathayan—saying; vipraù—the brähmaëa; nija-pury-antike—near his own home; gataù—came; suvarëa-durga—golden walls; samyuktam—with; kapäöa-dhvaja-maëòitam—decorated with flags and great gates.

     As he was thinking in this way, the brähmaëa came to his own home, which was surrounded by golden fortress walls, decorated with flags and great gates, . . .

Text 68 

toraëaiù kalaçaiç citraiù
     präsädaiù sujanair våtam
dvärakäm iva çobhäòhyäà
     sarva-ratnaiù prapüritäm

     toraëaiù—with arches; kalaçaiç—with domes; citraiù—wonderful; präsädaiù—with palaces; sujanaiù—with beautiful people; våtam—filled; dvärakäm—Dvärakä; iva—like; çobhäòhyäm—beautiful and opulent; sarva-ratnaiù—with all jewels; prapüritäm—filled.

 . . . filled with many palaces, great archways, and wonderful and colorful domes. It way made of jewels. It was filled with beautiful people. It was beautiful and opulent like Dvärakä.

Text 69 

dåçövä vipras tu kim idaà
     kasya sthänam iti bruvan
rathyäà rathyäà bhramantaà taà
     pratyagåhnan striyo naräù

     dåçövä—seeing; vipraù—the brähmaëa; tu—indeed; kim—what?; idam—this; kasya—of whom?; sthänam—the place; iti—thus; bruvan—saying; rathyäm—on path; rathyäm—after path; bhramantam—wandering; tam—that; pratyagåhnan—taking; striyaù—women; naräù—and men.

     As beautiful men and women walked on the wide pathways in the palace, the brähmaëa stared at everything and said, “What is this? Whose home is this?" 

Text 70

nägacchantaà dvijaà dåçövä
     kiëkaryaù kiëkaräs tathä
svaminyai kathayäm äsuù
     çrutvä sa vismayaà gatä

     na—not; ägacchantam—coming; dvijam—the brähmaëa; dåçövä—seeing; kiëkaryaù—the maidservants; kiëkaräù—the servants; tathä—so; svaminyai—to the mistress of the house; kathayäm äsuù—said; çrutvä—hearing; sä—she; vismayam—astonishment; gatä—attained.

     Seeing that the brähmaëa did not enter the palace, the servants and maidservants went to the queen of the house told her of it. When she heard of it she was very surprised.

Text 71

bhartäram ägataà çrutvä
     patné sambhrama-samyutä
niçcakrämälayät türëaà
     säkçäc chrér iva rüpiëé

     bhartäram—husband; ägatam—arrived; çrutvä—hearing; patné—the wife; sambhrama-samyutä—with great haste; niçcakräma—went; älayät—from the palace; türëam—at once; säkçät—directly; çréù—the goddess of fortune; iva—like; rüpiëé—beautiful.

     Hearing that her husband had come, the brähmaëa's wife hastily left the palace to greet him. She was now as beautiful as the goddess of fortune.

Text 72 

brähmaëé çibikärüòhä
     däsé-däsa-gaëair våtä
bhramantam agrahéd vipraà
     darçayitvä svakaà sukham

     brähmaëé—the brähmaëa's wife; çibikärüòhä—riding on a palanquin; däsé-däsa-gaëaiù—many servants and maidservants; våtä—with; bhramantam—wandering; agrahét—grasped; vipram—the brähmaëa; darçayitvä—showing; svakam—her own; sukham—happiness.

     Surrounded by many servants and maidservants, she rode to him on a palanquin. Showing how happy she was to see him, she embraced her husband as he was walking about.

Text 73 

dåçövä sphurantéà taruëéà ca bhäryäà
     svarëämbarai ratna-vibhüçaëaòhyäm
yathendiräà rüpavatéà vimäne
     mudänvitaù kåçëa-kåpäà ca mene

     dåçövä—seeing; sphurantém—splendid; taruëém—young girl; ca—and; bhäryäm—wife; svarëämbarai—with golden garments; ratna-vibhüçaëaòhyäm—rich with jewel ornaments; yathä—as; indiräm—the goddess of fortune; rüpavatém—beautiful; vimäne—in a spiritual airplane; mudänvitaù—happy; kåçëa—of Lord Kåçëa; kåpäm—the mercy; ca—and; mene—considered.

     Seeing that his wife had become a splendid young girl dressed in exquisite golden clothing, decorated with jewels, and beautiful like the goddess of fortune riding in a spiritual airplane, the brähmaëa became very happy and thought that this was all done by the mercy of Lord Kåçëa.

Texts 74 and 75 

nija-gehaà tayä yuktaù
     çré-kåçëa-bhavanopamaà
bhojanair dravya-ratnaiç ca
     paryaëka-vyajanäsanaiù

vitänaiù svarëa-pätraiç ca
     toraëaiù samalaëkåtam
dåçövä kåçëasya kåpayä
     sudämä taruëo 'bhavat

     nija-geham—to his home; tayä—her; yuktaù—with; çré-kåçëa-bhavanopamam—like Lord Kåçëa's palace; bhojanaiù—with food; dravya-ratnaiù—with jewels; ca—and; paryaëka-vyajanäsanaiù—with opulent beds, seats, and fans; vitänaiù—with awning; svarëa-pätraiç—golden vessels; ca—and; toraëaiù—with arches; samalaëkåtam—decorated; dåçövä—seeing; kåçëasya—of Lord Kåçëa; kåpayä—by the mercy; sudämä—Sudämä; taruëaù—youthful; abhavat—became.

     Accompanied by his wife, the brähmaëa looked at the palace, which, like Lord Kåçëa's own palace, was filled with jewels, comfortable beds and chairs, fans, awnings, archways, golden dishes, and delicious foods. Then Sudämä suddenly became a young man. 

Text 76 

bubhuje 'lampaöo vipraù
     samåddhià sväm ahaitukém
manasä jäyayä tyakçaï
     jïäna-vairägya-bhaktitaù

     bubhuje—enjoyed; alampaöaù—not materialistic; vipraù—the brähmaëa; samåddhim—opulence; sväm—own; ahaitukém—causeless; manasä—by the heart; jäyayä—with his wife; tyakçan—renouncing; jïäna—with knowledge; vairägya—renunciation; bhaktitaù—and devotion.

     Without becoming materialistic, the brähmaëa enjoyed the wealth he received by the Lord's causeless mercy. Filled with knowledge, renunciation, and devotion for the Lord, in their hearts he and his wife abandoned all material desires.

Text 77 

cakära tarkanäà vipraù
     kuto mama samåddhayaù
dattä brahmaëya-devena
     devänäm api durlabhäù

     cakära—did; tarkanäm—guess; vipraù—the brähmaëa; kutaù—from where?; mama—my; samåddhayaù—opulences; dattä—given; brahmaëya-devena—by the Lord of the brähmaëas; devänäm—by the demigods; api—even; durlabhaù—unattainable.

     The brähmaëa thought: Who gave me these opulences? It must be that Lord Kåçëa, who is the master of the brähmaëas, gave me these opulences even the great demigods cannot achieve.

Text 78 

idåçéà sampadaà dattvä
     näcaret kim api svayam
mama taëòula-muçöià ca
     prétyä pratyagrahéd dhariù

     idåçém—like this; sampadam—opulence; dattvä—giving; na—not; äcaret—may do; kim api—something; svayam—personally; mama—of me; taëòula-muçöim—the palmful of rice; ca—and; prétyä—with love; pratyagrahét—reciprocated; hariù—Lord Kåçëa.

     I did not do anything to make Lord Kåçëa give me opulence like this. It must be that He was pleased by the palmful of rice and out of love He gave me this in return.

Text 79 

tasya sakhyaà ca däsyaà ca
     bhüyän me janma-janmani
tat-padämburuha-dhyänät
     tariçye 'haà bhavärëavam

     tasya—of Him; sakhyam—the friendship; ca—and; däsyam—the service; ca—and; bhüyät—may be; me—of me; janma-janmani—birth after birth; tat-padämburuha-dhyänät—by meditating on His lotus feet; tariçye—will cross; aham—I; bhava—of birth and death; arëavam—the ocean.

     I pray that I may be His servant and friend birth after birth. By meditating on His lotus feet, I will cross the ocean of birth and death.

Text 80 

vicintya cetthaà manasä sudämä
     patnyävåtaù kåçëa-padäravinde
manaç ca kåtvä dhanam eva viprän
     dattvä harer dhäma paraà jagäma

     vicintya—thinking; ca—and; ittham—inj this way; manasä—in his mind; sudämä—Sudämä; patnyävåtaù—accompanied by his wife; kåçëa—of Lord Kåçëa; padäravinde—at the lotus feet; manaù—mind; ca—and; kåtvä—doing; dhanam—wealth; eva—indeed; viprän—to the brähmaëas; dattvä—giving; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; dhäma—to the abode; param—supreme; jagäma—went.

     Engaged in meditating on Lord Kåçëa's lotus feet and giving charity to the brähmaëas, Sudämä and his wife finally returned to Lord Kåçëa's supreme abode.

Text 81 

etac chré-kåçëadevasya
     caritaà çåëuyän naraù
däridryän mucyate çéghraà
     bhakto bhagavato bhavet

     etat—this; çré-kåçëadevasya—of Lord Kåçëadeva; caritam—the pastimes; çåëuyän—may hear; naraù—a person; däridryän—from poverty; mucyate—si liberated; çéghram—quickly; bhaktaù—a devotee; bhagavataù—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhavet—becomes.

     A person who hears these pastimes of Lord Kåçëa becomes free of poverty and becomes a devotee of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 82 

çré-dvärakäyä nåpa khaëòam etan
     mayä tavägre kathitaà su-puëyam
kértià kulaà bhaktim atéva muktià
     dadäti räjyaà ca sadaiva çåëvatäm

     çré-dvärakäyä—of Çré Dvärakä; nåpa—O king; khaëòam—the khaëòa; etan—this; mayä—by me; tava—of you; agre—in the presence; kathitam—spoken; su-puëyam—very sacred; kértim—glory; kulam—family; bhaktim—devotional service; atéva—great; muktim—liberation; dadäti—gives; räjyam—kingdom; ca—and; sadä—always; eva—indeed; çåëvatäm—of they who hear.

     O king, now I have spoken to you the very sacred Dvärakä-khaëòa, which gives fame, good family, devotional service, and liberation to they who regularly hear it.

Canto Eight

Chapter Nine
Çré Räma-räsa-krédä
Lord Balaräma's Räsa Dance

Text 1

     duryodhana uväca muni-çärdüla bhagavän balabhadro näga-
kanyäbhir gopébhih kadä kälindé-küle vijahära.

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; muni-çärdüla—O tiger of sages; bhagavän—Lord; balabhadrah—Balaräma; näga—snake; kanyäbhih—with the girls; gopébhih—with the gopés; kadä—when?; kälindé-küle—on the Yamunä's shore; vijahära—enjoyed pastimes.

     Duryodhana said: O tiger of sages, when did Lord Balaräma enjoy the räsa dance on the Yamunä's shore with gopés that had been snake-girls in their previous birth?

Text 2 

     çré-präòvipäka uväca ekadä dvärakä-nägaräd dhi täläìkaà 
ratham ästhäpya surän didåkñuh param utkaëöho nanda-räja-gokula-
go-gopäla-gopé-gaëa-saìkulah saìkarñaëa ägataç cirotkaëöhäbhyäà 
nandaräja-yaçodäbhyäà pariñvakto gopé-gopäla-gobhir militvä tatra 
dvau masau vasantikau cävatsét.

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Supreme Personality of Godhe; ekadä—one day; dvärakä-nägarät—from Dvärakä; hi—indeed; täläìkam—marked with the sign of the palm tree; ratham—chariot; ästhäpya—mounting; surän—the demigods; didåkñuh—desiring to see; param—greatly; utkaëöhah—eager; nanda-räja-gokula—in King Nanda's Gokula; go-gopäla-gopé-gaëa—the cows, gopas, and gopés; saìkulah—agitated; saìkarñaëa—Lord Balaräma; ägataç—came; cirotkaëöhäbhyäm—yearning for a long time; nandaräja-yaçodäbhyäm—by Yaçodä and King Nanda; pariñvaktah—embraced; gopé-gopäla-gobhih—by the gopas and gopés; militvä—meeting; tatra—there; dvau—two; masau—months; vasantikau—in spirngtime; ca—and; ävatsét—resided.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: One day, eager to see His devotees, Lord Balaräma mounted His chariot bearing a palm-tree flag, left Dvärakä, and, yearning to see the gopas, gopés, and cows, went to Gokula. Yaçodä and King Nanda embraced Him when He arrived. Later He met with the gopas and gopés. He stayed there for two months.

Text 3 

     atha ca yä näga-kanyäh pürvoktäs tä gopa-kanyä bhütvä 
balabhadra-präpty-arthaà gargäcäryäd balabhadrapaïcäìgaà 
gåhétvä tenaiva siddhä babhüvuh. täbhir baladeva ekadä prasannah 
kälindé-küle räsa-maëòalaà samärebhe. tadaiva caitra-pürëimäyäà 
pürëa-candro 'ruëa-varëah sampürëaà vanaà raïjayan vireje.

     atha—then; ca—and; ya—who; näga-kanyäh—the snake girls; pürvoktah—previously described; ta—they; gopa-kanyä—gopés; bhütvä—becoming; balabhadra-präpty-artham—to attain Lord Balaräma; gargäcäryät—from Garga Muni; balabhadra—of Lord Balaräma; païcäìgam—the five methods of worship; gåhétvä—accepting; tena—by that; eva—indeed; siddha—perfect; babhüvuh—became; täbhih—with them; baladeva—Balaräma; ekadä—one day; prasannah—happy; kälindé—of the Yamunä; küle—on the shore; räsa-maëòalam—the rasa-dance circle; samärebhe—attained; tadä—then; eva—indeed; caitra-pürëimäyäm—on the full moon of the month of Caitra; pürëa—full; candrah—moon; aruëa-varëah—red; sampürëam—full; vanam—forest; raïjayan—making red; vireje—shone.

     The previously described snake-girls became gopés and, in order to attain Lord Balaräma's association, on Garga Muni's advice followed the five methods of worshiping Lord Balaräma. In this way they became perfect. Pleased with them, Lord Balaräma enjoyed a räsa-dance with them on the full-moon night of the month of Caitra (March-April), a night when the red moon reddened the whole of Våndävana forest.

Text 4 

     çétalä manda-yänäh kamala-makaranda-reëu-vånda-
samvåtäh sarvato väyavah parivavuh kalinda-giri-nandiné-cala-
laharébhir änanda-däyiné pulinaà vimalaà hy acitaà cakära. tathä 
ca kuïja-präìgana-nikuïja-puïjaih 
sphural-lalita-pallava-puñpa-parägair mayüra-kokila-puàskokila-
küjitair madhupa-madhura-dhvanibhir vraja-bhümir vibhräjamänä 
babhüva.

     çétalä—cool; manda-yänäh—slowly moving; kamala-makaranda-reëu-vånda-samvåtäh—filled with lotus pollen; sarvatah—everywhere; väyavah—breezes; parivavuh—blew; kalinda-giri-nandiné-cala-laharébhih—moving the Yamunä's waves; änanda-däyiné—delightful; pulinam—the shore; vimalam—splendid; hy—indeed; acitam—collected; cakära.—did; tathä—so; ca—and; kuïja-präìgana-nikuïja-puïjaih—with the forest goves and courtyards; sphural-lalita-pallava—playfully blossoming petals; puñpa—flowers; parägaih—with pollen; mayüra—peacocks; kokila-puàskokila—and cuckoos; küjitaih—cooing; madhupa-madhura-dhvanibhih—with the sweet hummingof bees; vraja-bhümih—the land of Vraja; vibhräjamänä—shining; babhüva—became.

     Cooling, gentle, delightful, lotus-pollen filled breezes pushed the Yamunä's waves and blew to the splendid shore. Then the land of Vraja became very splendid, its many forest groves and courtyards filled with the fragrant pollen of playfully and gracefully blossoming flowers, with the cooing of cuckoos and peacocks, and with the sweet humming of bees.

Text 5 

     tatra kvaëad-ghaëöikä-nüpurah sphuran-maëi-maya-kaöaka-
kaöi-sütra-keyüra-hära-kiréöa-kuëòalayor upari kamala-patrair 
nélämbaro vimala-kamala-paträkño yakñébhir yakña-räò iva gopébhir 
gopa-räò räsa-maëòale reje.

     tatra—there; kvaëat—sounding; ghaëöikä—bells; nüpurah—anklets; sphuran-maëi-maya-kaöaka—glittering gend bracelets with jewels; kaöi-sütra—belts; keyüra—armlets; hära—necklaces; kiréöa—crowns; kuëòalayoh—and earrings; upari—above; kamala-patraih—with lotus petals; nélämbarah—blue garments; vimala-kamala-paträkñah—glistening lotus eyes; yakñébhih—with Yakñés; yakña-räò—Kuvera; iva—like; gopébhih—with the gopés; gopa-räò—the king of the gopas; räsa-maëòale—in the rasa-dance circle; reje—shone.

     Decorated with tinkling ankle-bells, glittering gold and jewel necklace, armlets, belt, crown, and earrings, and with many lotus petals, dressed in blue garments, and His eyes like glittering lotus petals, Lord Balaräma was splendid with the gopés in the räsa-dance circle. He was like Kuvera surrounded by a host of beautiful yakñés. 

Text 6 

     atha varuëa-preñitä väruëé devé puñpa-bhara-gandhi-lobhi-
milinda-nädita-våkña-koöarebhyah patanté sarvato vanaà surabhé-
cakära. tat-päna-mada-vihvalah kamala-viçäla-tämräkño 
makaradhväjäveça-calad-dhuryäìga-bhaìgo vihära-kheda-
prasvedämbu-kaëair galad-gaëòa-sthala-patra-bhaìgo gajendra-
gatir gajendra-çuëòädaëòa-sama-dordaëòa-maëòito gajébhir 
gaja-räjendra ivonmattah siàhäsane nyasta-halo musala-päëih 
koöéndu-pürëa-maëòala-saìkäçah prodgamad-ratna-maïjéra-
pracala-nüpura-prakvaëat-kanaka-kiìkinébhih kaìkaëa-sphurat-
täöaìka-puraöa-hära-çré-kaëöhäìguléya-çiromaëibhih 
praviòambiné-kåta-sarpiëé-çyäma-veëé-kuntala-lalita-gaëòa-
sthala-paträvalébhih sundarébhir bhagavän bhuvaneçvaro 
vibhräjamäno viraräja atha ca reme.

     atha—then; varuëa—by Varuëa; preñitä—sent; väruëé—Varu.né; devé—goddess; puñpa-bhara-gandhi-lobhi—made greedy by the scent of the flowers; milinda—of bees; nädita—sounded; våkña—of the trees; koöarebhyah—from the hollows; patanti—fall; sarvatah—everywheer; vanam—the forest; surabhé—fragrant; cakära—made; tat-päna-mada-vihvalah—eager to drink it; kamala-viçäla-tämräkñah—His eyes large red lotus flowers; makaradhväja—of Kämadeva; äveça—from the entrance; calat—moving; dhuryäìga-bhaìgah—great limbs; vihära-kheda—exhausted from pastimes; prasvedämbu-kaëaih—with drops of perspiration; galad-gaëòa-sthala-patra-bhaìgah—trickling down His cheeks; gajendra—of the king of elephants; gatih—walking; gajendra-çuëòädaëòa-sama-dordaëòa-maëòitah—decorated with arms like elephants' trunks; gajébhih—with female elephants; gaja-räjendra—the king of the kings of the kings of elephants; iva—like; unmattah—intoxicated; siàhäsane—on a throne; nyasta-halah—weakened; musala-päëih—club in hand; koöéndu-pürëa-maëòala-saìkäçah—splendid like millions of moons; prodgamad-ratna-ma 24jéra-pracala-nüpura-prakvaëat-kanaka-kiìkinébhih—with tinkling anklets and ornaments; kaìkaëa—bracelets; sphurat—glistening; täöaìka—earrings; puraöa—golden; hära—necklace; çré-kaëöha—graceful neck; aìguléya—rings; çiromaëibhih—crest jewels; praviòambiné-kåta—mocking; sarpiëé—snake girls; çyäma—black; veëé—braids; kuntala—hair; lalita—graceful; gaëòa-sthala—cheeks; paträvalébhih—with pictures and decorations; sundarébhih—beautiful; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhuvaneçvarah—the master of the worlds; vibhräjamänah—shining; viraräja—shone; atha—then; ca—and; reme—enjoyed.

     Then, sent by the demigod Varuëa, Goddess Varuëé, in the form of honey oozing from the hollows of trees filled with the humming of bees made greedy by the sweet scent of the flowers, made the entire forest very fragrant. Eager to drink that honey, His eyes now red lotus flowers, His limbs weakened by enjoying amorous pastimes, perspiration born from the fatigue of His pastimes now streaming down His cheeks and washing away the pictures and designs drawn there, walking like an elephant king, decorated with mighty arms like the trunks of elephant kings, as if intoxicated, sitting on a throne, relinquishing His plow, His club still in His hand, splendid like ten million full moons, His jewel anklets, bracelets, and other ornaments tinkling, His gold earrings, necklaces, finger-rings, and jewel crown glittering, and surrounded by beautiful gopés, their cheeks decorated with graceful pictures and designs and their black braids mocking the beautiful snake girls, Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the worlds, shone with great splendor, and enjoyed transcendental pastimes.

Text 7 

     atha ha väva kälindé-küla-käntära-paryaöana-vihära-
pariçramodyat-sveda-bindu-vyäpta-mukhäravindah snänärthaà jala-
kréòärthaà yamunäà dürät sa äjuhäva. tatas tv anägataà taöinéà 
halägreëa kupito vicakarña iti hoväca ca.

     atha—then; ha—indeed; väva—blew; kälindé-küla-käntära-paryaöana—wandering on the Yamunä's shore; vihära—from pastimes; pariçrama—from fatigue; udyat—manifesting; sveda-bindu—drops of perspiration; vyäpta—covered; mukhäravindah—lotus face; snänärtham—to bathe; jala—water; kréòä—pastimes; artham—for the purpose; yamunäm—the Yamunä; dürät—from afare; sa—He; äjuhäva.—called; tatah—then; tv—indeed; anägatam—not come; taöiném—the shore; hala—of His plow; agreëa—with the tip; kupitah—angered; vicakarña—dragged; iti—thus; ha—indeed; uväca—spoke; ca—also.

     His lotus face covered with perspiration born from the fatigue of wandering along the Yamunä's shore and enjoying many pastimes, Lord Balaräma called for the Yamunä to come to Him so He could bathe and enjoy water-pastimes. When the Yamunä did not come, Lord Balaräma became angry and began to drag it to Him, scratching its shore with the tip of His plow. Lord Balaräma said:

Text 8 

     adya mäm avajïäya nayasi mayähütäpi musalena tvaà käma-
cäriëéà çatadhä neñya eva nirbhartsitä sa bhüri-bhétä yamunä 
cakitä tat-pädayoh patitoväca.

     adya—today; mäm—Me; avajïäya—disrespecting; nayasi—you go; mayä—by Me; ähüta—called; api—even thoguh; musalena—with the club; tväm—you; käma-cäriëém—going as you like; çatadhä—into a hundred streams; neñye—I will lead; eva—indeed; nirbhartsitä—rebuked; sa—she; bhüri-bhétä—very afraid; yamunä—the Yamunä; cakitä—frightened; tat-pädayoh—at His feet; patitä—fallen; uväca—spoke.

     "Today you have no respect for Me. Even though I call, you ignore My order and go your own way as you wish. Now I will divide you into a hundred tiny streams." Rebuked with these words and now very afraid, the Yamunä came before Lord Balaräma, fell at His feet, and said:

Text 9 

     räma räma saìkarñaëa balabhadra mahä-bäho tava paraà 
vikramaà na jäne. yasyaikasmin mürdhni sarñapavat sarvaà 
bhü-khaëòa-maëòalaà dåçyate. tasya tava param anubhävam ajänantéà 
prapannäà mäà moktuà yogyo 'si. tvaà bhakta-vatsalo 'si.

     räma räma—Räma Räma; saìkarñaëa—Saìkarñaëa; balabhadra—Balabhadra; mahä-bähah—O mighty-armed; tava—of You; param—great; vikramam—power; na—not; jäne.—know; yasya—of whom; ekasmin—in one; mürdhni—head; sarñapavat—like a mustard seed; sarvam—entire; bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam—earth; dåçyate.—is seed; tasya—of Him; tava—of Yoiu; param—great; anubhävam—power; ajänantém—not knowing; prapannäm—surrenedered; mäm—to me; moktum—to realso; yogyah—is appropriate; asi—You are; tvam—You; bhakta-vatsalah—the lover of Your devotees; asi—are.

     "Räma! Räma! Saìkarñaëa! Balabhadra! O mighty-armed one! I did not know Your great power. The entire earth is seen resting like a single tiny mustard-seed on one of Your many heads. It is proper for You to release Me, who have now surrendered to You and who did not know Your true glories. You should release me because You are always affectionate to Your devotees.

Text 10 

     ity evaà yäcito balabhadro yamunäà tato vyamuïcat punah 
kareëubhih karéva gopébhir gopa-räò jale vijagäha. punar jaläd 
vinirgatya tata-sthäya balabhadräya sahasä yamunä copäyanaà 
nélämbaräëi hema-ratna-maya-bhüñaëäni divyäni ca dadau ha väva täni gopé-yüthäya påthak påthak vibhajya svayaà nélämbare vasitvä 
käïcanéà mäläà nava-ratna-mayéà dhåtvä mahendro väraëendra iva 
balabhadro vireje.

     ity evam—thus; yäcitah—requested; balabhadrah—Lord Balaräma; yamunäm—the Yamunä; tatah—then; vyamuïcat—released; punah—again; kareëubhih—with many female elephants; karé—a male elephant; iva—like; gopébhih—with the gopés; gopa-räò—the king of gopas; jale—in the water; vijagäha.—enjoyed pastimes; punah—again; jalät—from the water; vinirgatya—emerging; tata-sthäya—staying on the shore; balabhadräya—to Lord Balaräma; sahasä—quickly; yamunä—the Yamunä; ca—and; upäyanam—approach; nélämbaräëi—blue garments; hema-ratna-maya-bhüñaëäni—ornaments of gold and jewels; divyäni—splendid; ca—and; dadau—gave; ha—indeed; väva—went; täni—them; gopé-yüthäya—to the gopés; påthak påthak—each one; vibhajya—dividing; svayam—personally; nélämbare—the blue garments; vasitvä—dressing; käïcaném—gold; mäläm—necklace; nava-ratna-mayém—made of nine jewels; dhåtvä—taking; mahendrah—Indra; väraëendra—the king of elephants; iva—like; balabhadrah—Lord Balaräma; vireje—shone.

     Begged in this way, Lord Balaräma released the Yamunä. Then He enjoyed in the Yamunä's waters, as an elephant enjoys with its many wives. When He returned to the shore the Yamunä approached and gave Him gifts of many blue garments and many ornaments of gold and jewels. Lord Balaräma divided the gifts among the girls, giving some to each gopé. Then He dressed in one of the blue garments and decorated Himself with a necklace of gold and nine kinds of jewels. Then He enjoyed with the gopés as the king of elephants enjoys with its many wives.

Text 11 

     itthaà kauravendra yädavendrasya rämatah sarvä väsantikér 
niçä vyatétä babhüvuh. bhagavato balabhadrasya hastinäpuram iva 
véryaà sücayatéva hy adyäpi ca kåñöa-vartmanä yamunä vahati. imaà 
rämasya räsa-kathäà yah çåëoti çrävayati ca sa sarva-päpa-paöalaà 
chittvä tasya parasparam änanda-padaà pratiyäti. kià bhüyah çrotum icchasi.

     ittham—thus; kauravendra—O king of the Kauravas; yädavendrasya—of the king of the Yädavas; rämatah—from Lord Balaräma; sarvä—all; väsantikéh—springtime; niçä—night; vyatétä—passed; babhüvuh.—became; bhagavatah—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; balabhadrasya—Lord Balaräma; hastinäpuram—to Hastinäpura; iva—like; véryam—power; sücayati—shows; iva—like; hy—indeed; adyäpi—even today; ca—and; kåñöa-vartmanä—by the dragged path; yamunä—the Yamunä; vahati—flows; imam—this; rämasya—of Lord Balaräma; räsa—ofd the räsa dance; kathäm—the narration; yah—one who; çåëoti—hears; çrävayati—recounts; ca—and; sa—he; sarva-päpa-paöalam—the entirety of a great host of sins; chittvä—destroying; tasya—of him; parasparam—mutual; änanda-padam—the abode of bliss; pratiyäti—goes; kim—what?; bhüyah—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—do you wish.

     O king of the Kauravas, in this way Lord Balaräma, the king of the Yädavas, spent that springtime night with the gopés. Even today the Yamunä flows in many divided streams at that place, a testimony to the great strength, equal to that of a host of elephants, of Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. A person who hears or recounts these pastimes of Lord Balaräma destroys the entirety of a great host of sins and attains transcendental bliss. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Ten
Çré Balaräma-paddhati-paöala
The Paddhati and Paöala of Lord Balaräma

Text 1

     duryodhana uväca bhagavan gargäcäryeëa gopé-yüthäya kathäà 
dattaà balabhadra-païcäìgaà tat-krpayä vadatät. tvaà sarvajïo 'si.

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; bhagavan—O master; gargäcäryeëa—by Garga Muni; gopé-yüthäya—to the gopés; kathäm—description; dattam—given; balabhadra-païcäìgam—the five metjods of worshiping Lord Balaräma; tat—that; krpayä—kindly; vadatät.—should tell; tvam—you; sarvajïah—all-knowing; asi—are.

     Duryodhana said: O master, you know everything. Please kindly repeat to me what Garga Muni spoke to the gopés to tell them of the five-part worship of Lord Balaräma.

Text 2 

     çré-präòvipäka uväca kauravendra ekadä gargäcäryah 
kalinda-nandinéà snätuà gargäcaläd vraja-maëòalaà cäjagäma. 
tatraikänte marul-léläijal-lalita-latä-taru-pallava-puñpa-gandha-
matta-milinda-puïje kälindé-küla-kalita-nikuïje çré-räma-kåñëa-
dhyäna-tat-paraà gargäcäryaà praëamya nagendra-kanyäh sma iti 
jäti-smarä gopa-kanyäh çrémad-balabhadra-präpty-arthaà sevanaà 
papracchus täsäà paramäà bhaktià vékñya paddhati-paöala-stotra-
kavaca-sahasra-nämäni gopé-yüthäya sa pradadau. kià bhüyas tvaà 
tad-grahaëaà kartum icchasi vadatät.

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Präòvipäka Muni said; kauravendra—O king of the Kauravas; ekadä—one day; gargäcäryah—Garga Muni; kalinda-nandiném—to the Yamunä; snätum—to bathe; gargäcalät—from Mount Garga; vraja-maëòalam—to the circle of Vraja; ca—and; äjagäma—came; tatra—there; ekänte—in one place; marut—breezes; lélä—pastimes; ejat—moving; lalita—graceful; latä—vines; taru—trees; pallava—sprouts; puñpa—flowers; gandha—scent; matta—maddened; milinda-puïje—a host of bees; kälindé-küla—on the shore of the Yamunä; kalita—perceived; nikuïje—in the forest grove; çré-räma-kåñëa—of Kåñëa and Balaräma; dhyäna—meditation; tat—to that; param—intent; gargäcäryam—to Garga Muni; praëamya—bowing down; nagendra-kanyäh—the snake princesses; sma—indeed; iti—thus; jäti-smarä—remembering their previous birth; gopa-kanyäh—gopés; çrémad-balabhadra-präpty-artham—to attain Lord Balaräma; sevanam—service; papracchuh—asked; täsäm—of them; paramam—great; bhaktim—devotion; vékñya—seeing; paddhati-paöala-stotra-kavaca-sahasra-nämäni—the paddhati, paöala, stotra, kavaca, and sahasra-näma; gopé-yüthäya—to the gopés; sa—he; pradadau—gave; kim—what?; bhüyah—more; tvam—you; tad-grahaëam—understanding that; kartum—to do; icchasi—wish; vadatät—may speak.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: O king of the Kauravas, one day Garga Muni left Mount Garga and went to Vraja to bathe in the Yamunä. In a certain forest grove by the Yamunä's shore, where gentle breezes moved the graceful trees, flowering vines, and new sprouts, and where the bees were maddened by the sweet scent of the flowers, some gopés bowed down before Garga Muni, who was rapt in meditation on Lord Kåñëa and Lord Balaräma. Remembering their previous birth as snake-princesses, the gopés asked him what kind of devotional service they should perform to attain the company of Lord Balaräma. Seeing their great devotion, Garga Muni gave these gopés the paddhati, paöala, stotra, kavaca, and sahasra-näma of Lord Balaräma. What more do you wish to hear? You may ask.

Text 3 

duryodhana uväca 

rämasya paddhatià brühi
     yayä siddhià vrajämy aham
tvaà bhakta-vatsalo brahman
     guru-deva namo 'stu te

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; rämasya—of Lord Balaräma; paddhatim—the paddhati; brühi—please tell; yayä—by which; siddhim—perfection; vrajämy—attain; aham—I; tvam—you; bhakta-vatsalah—affectionate to the devotees; brahman—O Brähmaëa; guru-deva—O Gurudeva; namah—obeisances; astu—should be; te—unto you.

     Duryodhana said: Please describe the paddhati of Lord Balaräma, reciting which I may attain perfection. O brähmaëa, you are affectionate to the devotees. O gurudeva, I bow down before you.

Text 4 

çré-präòvipäka uväca 

räma-märgasya niyamaà
     çåëu pärthiva-sattama
yena prasanno bhavati
     balabhadro mahä-prabhuh

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Präòvipäka Muni said; räma-märgasya—of the path to Lord Balaräma; niyamam—the restrictions; çåëu—please hear; pärthiva-sattama—O best of kings; yena—by which; prasannah—pleased; bhavati—is; balabhadrah—Lord Balaräma; mahä-prabhuh—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: O best of kings, please hear the regulative principles of the path to Lord Balaräma. When one follows these principles Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, becomes pleased with him.

Text 5 

sahasra-vadano devo
     bhagavän bhuvaneçvarah
na dänair na ca térthaiç ca
     bhaktyä labhyas tv ananyayä

     sahasra-vadanah—who has a thousand heads; devah—the Lord; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhuvaneçvarah—the master of the worlds; na—not; danaih—by charity; na—not; ca—and; térthaih—by pilgrimages; ca—and; bhaktyä—by devotional service; labhyah—attainable; tv—indeed; ananyayä—without anything else.

     Lord Balaräma, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the worlds, and who is also thousand-headed Lord Ananta, is not attained by giving charity or going on pilgrimage. He is attained only by devotional service. 

Text 6 

sat-saìgam etyäçu çikñed
     bhaktià vai çré-harer guroh
sa siddhah kathito jätaà
     yasya vai prema-lakñaëam

     sat-saìgam—association with devotees; etya—attaining; äçu—quickly; sékñet—should learn; bhaktim—devotion; vai—indeed; çré-hareh—of Lord Kåñëa; guroh—of the guru; sa—he; siddhah—perfect; kathitah—said; jätam—born; yasya—of whom; vai—indeed; prema-lakñaëam—characterized by love.

     By associating with the devotees, one quickly learns the truth of devotion to Lord Kåñëa and to one's guru. A person who learns this is said to have attained perfection. He has attained love for Lord Kåñëa.

Text 7 

brähme muhürte cotthäya
     räma-kåñëeti ca bruvan
natvä guruà bhuvaà caiva
     tato bhümyäà padaà nyaset

     brähme muhürte—at brahma-muhurta; ca—and; utthäya—rising; räma-kåñëa—Räma Kåñëa; iti—thus; ca—and; bruvan—saying; natvä—bowing; gurum—to the guru; bhuvam—the world; ca—and; eva—indeed; tatah—then; bhümyäm—on the ground; padam—foot; nyaset—should place.

     One should rise at brähma-muhürta, chant the holy names of Lord Kåñëa and Lord Balaräma, and bow down before one's guru. Only then should one place his feet on the ground.

Text 8 

väry upasparçya rahasi
     sthito bhütvä kuçäsane
hastäv utsaìga ädhäya
     sva-näsägra-nirékñaëah

     väry—water; upasparçya—touching; rahasi—in a secluded place; sthitah—staying; bhütvä—becoming; kuçäsane—on a kuça mat; hastäv—hands; utsaìge—in his lap; ädhäya—placing; sva-näsägra-nirékñaëah—gazing at the tip of the nose.

     In a secluded place one should touch water, sit on a kuça-grass mat, place his hands on his lap, and gaze at the tip of his nose.

Text 9 

dhyäyet paraà harià devaà
     balabhadraà sanätanam
gauraà nélämbaraà hy ädyaà
     vana-mälä-vibhüñitam

     dhyäyet—should meditate; param—then; harim—on Lord Hari; devam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; balabhadram—Lord Balaräma; sanätanam—eternal; gauram—fair; nélämbaram—with blue garmwents; hy—indeed; ädyam—the first; vana-mälä-vibhüñitam—decorated with a forest garland.

     Then one should meditate on Lord Balaräma, the eternal Supreme Personality of Godhead, whose compelxion is fair, and who is dressed in blue garments and decorated with a forest garland.

Texts 10 and 11 
evaà dhyäna-paro nityaà
     préty-arthaà halinah prabhoh
tri-käla-sandhyä-kåc chuddho
     mauné krodha-vivarjitah

akämé gata-lobhaç ca
     nirmohah satya-väg bhavet
dvi-väraà jala-pänärthé
     eka-bhukto jitendriyah

     evam—thus; dhyäna-parah—rapt in meditation; nityam—always; préty-artham—for the pleasure; halinah—of Lord Balaräma; prabhoh—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tri-käla-sandhyä—at sunrise, noon, and sunset; kåt—doing; çuddhah—pure; mauné—silent; krodha-vivarjitah—free from anger; akämé—free from lust; gata-lobhaç—free from greed; ca—and; nirmohah—free from ilussion; satya-väg—speaking truthfully; bhavet—should be; dvi-väram—twice; jala-pänärthé—drinking water; eka-bhuktah—eating once; jitendriyah—ccontrolling the senses.

     Pure, silent, free from anger, lust, greed, and illusion, speaking truthfully, controlling the senses, drinking water twice in a day and eating only once, to please Lord Balaräma one should thus meditate on Him at sunrise, noon, and sunset.

Text 12 
kñaumämbaro bhümi-çäyé
     bhütvä päyasa-bhojanah
evaà nirjita-ñaò-vargo
     bhaved ekägra-mänasah

     kñaumämbarah—wearing simple cotton clothing; bhümi-çäyé—sleeping on the ground; bhütvä—becoming; päyasa-bhojanah—eating milk; evam—thus; nirjita-ñaò-vargah—controlling the sex material tendencies; bhavet—should become; ekägra-mänasah—meditating with single-pointed concentration.

     Wearing simple cotton clothing, sleeping on the ground, and fasting from all but milk, one may conquer the six material tendencies and meditate with single-pointed concentration.

Text 13 
tasya prasanno bhavati
     sadä saìkarñaëo harih
paripürëatamah säkñät
     sarva-käraëa-käraëah

     tasya—with him; prasannah—pleased; bhavati—is; sadä—always; saìkarñaëah—Lord Balaräma; harih—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; paripürëatamah—perfect and complete; säkñät—directly; sarva-käraëa-käraëah—the cause of all causes.

     With such a person Lord Balaräma, the perfect and complete Supreme Personality of Godhead, the cause of all causes, becomes pleased.

Text 14 
itthaà çré-balabhadrasya
     kathitä paddhatir mayä
kauravendra mahä-bäho
     kià bhüyah çrotum icchasi

     ittham—thus; çré-balabhadrasya—of Lord Balaräma; kathitä—spoken; paddhatih—the paddhati; mayä—by me; kauravendra—O king of the kurus; mahä-bähah—O mighty-armed one; kim—what?; bhüyah—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—do you wish.

     O mighty-armed Kaurava king, now I have described to you the paddhati of Lord Balaräma. What more do you wish to hear.

Text 15 
duryodhana uväca 
munéndra deva-devasya
     paöalaà brühi me prabhoh
yena seväà karisyämi
     tat-padämbujayoh sadä

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; munéndra—O king of sages; deva-devasya—O master of the demigods; paöalam—the paöalam; brühi—please tell; me—me; prabhoh—of the Lord; yena—by whcih; seväm—service; karisyämi—I will do; tat-padämbujayoh—at His lotus feet; sadä—always.

     Duryodhana said: O king of sages, O master of the demigods, please describe to me the paöala of Lord Balaräma, following which I will always serve Lord Balaräma's lotus feet.

Text 16 
çré-präòvipäka uväca 
balasya paöalaà guhyaà
     viddhi siddhi-pradäyakam
ekänte brahmaëä dattaà
     näradäya mahätmane

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Präòvipäka Muni said; balasya—of Lord Balaräma; paöalam—the paöala; guhyam—secret; viddhi—please know; siddhi—perfection; pradäyakam—giving; ekänte—at one place; brahmaëä—by Lord Brahmä; dattam—given; näradäya—to närada; mahätmane—the great soul.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: Now please understand Lord Balaräma's paöala, which brings perfection, and which the demigod Brahmä gave to Närada Muni.

Text 17 
praëavaà pürvam uddhåtya
     käma-béjaà tatah param
kälindé-bhedana-padaà
     saìkarñaëam atah param

     praëavam—Oà; pürvam—first; uddhåtya—speaking; käma-béjam—the Kama-bija syllable; tatah—then; param—after; kälindé-bhedana-padam—the breaker of the Yamunä; saìkarñaëam—Lord Balaräma; atah param—then.

     First, speak the syllable Oà. Then, speak the Käma-béja syllable (kléà). Then recite the names Kälindé-bhedana (the breaker of the Yamunä) and Saìkarñaëa.

Text 18 

caturthyaà taà dvayaà kåtvä
     svähäà paçcäd vidhäya ca
mantra-räjam imaà räjan
     brahmoktaà ñoòaçäkñäram

     caturthyäm—fourth; tam—that; dvayam—both; kåtvä—doing; svähäm—Svähä; paçcät—then; vidhäya—placing; ca—and; mantra-räjam—king of mantras; imam—this; räjan—O king; brahmoktam—spoken by Brahmä; ñoòaçäkñäram—sixteen syllables.

     After speaking these two names, then recite the word svähä. O king, this sixteen-syllable king of mantras was spoken by the demigod Brahmä.

     Note: The mantra then is Oà kléà kälindé-bhedanäya saìkarñaëäya svähä.

Text 19 
japel lakñaà vraté bhütvä
     sahasräëi ca ñoòaça
ihämütra paräà siddhià
     sampräpnoti na saàçayah

     japet—one should chant; lakñam—a hundred thousand times; vraté—following a vow; bhütvä—becoming; sahasräëi—thousand; ca—and; ñoòaça—sixteen; iha—in this life; amütra—and the next; paräm—supreme; siddhim—perfection; sampräpnoti—attains; na—no; saàçayah—doubt.

     Following this vow one should chant this mantra 116,000 times. Thus one will attain the supreme perfection in this life and the next. Of this there is no doubt.

Texts 20 and 21

atha japtasya mantrasya
     mahä-püjäà samäcaret
dvatriàçat-patra-samyuktaà
     karëikä-keçarojjvalam

bhavyaà kaïjaà païca-varëaà
     likhitvä sthaëòile çubhe
tasyopari nyased räjan
     hema-siàhäsanaà çubham tasmin çré-baladevasya      paräm arcäà prapüjayet

     atha—then; japtasya—chanted; mantrasya—of the mantra; mahä-püjäm—great worship; samäcaret—should perform; dvatriàçat—32; patra—petals; samyuktam—with; karëikä-keçarojjvalam—splendid lotus whorl; bhavyam—beautiful; kaïjam—lotus flower; païca-varëam—five colors; likhitvä—drawing; sthaëòile—on the ground; çubhe—auspicious; tasya—that; upari—above; nyaset—should place; räjan—O king; hema-siàhäsanam—a golden trhone; çubham—beautiful; tasmin—there; çré-baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; paräm—supreme; arcäm—worship; prapüjayet—should worship.

     Then the person who has chanted the mantra this number of times should perform the great worship of Lord Balaräma. On auspicious ground he should draw a thirty-two petal lotus of five colors and with a splendid whorl. O king, he should place there a beautiful golden throne, and on that throne He should place Lord Balaräma. Then he should perform the great worship of Lord Balaräma.

Text 22

     oà namo bhagavate puruñottamäya väsudeväya saìkarñaëäya 
sahasra-vadanäya mahänantäya svähä. anena mantreëa çikhä-
bandhanaà kåtvä sarvatas taà praëamya tat-sammukho bhütvä svayaà 
nato bhavet. oà jaya jayänanta balabhadra käma-päla täläìka 
kälindé-bhaïjana ävirävirbhüya mama sammukho bhaveti. 
anena mantreëävähanaà kuryät. oà namas te 'stu séra-päëe 
hala-musala-dhara rauhiëeya nélämbara räma revaté-ramaëa namo 
'stu te. anena mantreëäsana-padyärghya-snäna-madhuparka-dhüpa-
dépa-yajïopavéta-naivedya-vastra-bhüñaëa-gandha-
puñpäkñata-puñpäïjali-néräjaëädén upacärän 
prakalpayet. oà viñëave madhusüdanäya vämanäya trivikramäya 
çrédharäya håñékeçäya padmanäbhäya dämodaräya saìkarñaëäya 
väsudeväya pradyumnäyäniruddhäyädhokñajäya puruñottamäya çré-
kåñëäya namah. iti päda-gulpha-jänüru-kaöy-udara-pärçva-påñöhi-
bhuja-kandhara-netra-çiräàsi påthak påthak püjayäméti 
mantreëa sarväìga-püjäà kuryät. atha çaìkha-cakra-gadä-
padmäsi-dhanur-bäëa-hala-musala-kaustubha-vanamälä-çrévatsa-
pétämbara-nélämbara-vaàçé-vetra-garuòäìka-täläìka-ratha-
däruka-sumati-kumuda-kumudäkña-çrédämädén praëava-pürvena 
cäturthyaà tena namah samyuktena näma-mantreëa påthak påthak 
sampüjya. tathä viñvaksena-vedavyäsa-durgä-vinäyaka-dikpäla-
grahädén kamale sarvatah sve sve sthäne sampüjayet. punah 
parisamühanädé-sthälé-päka-vidhänena vaiçvänaraà sampüjya 
pürvoktena müla-mantreëa païca-viàçati-sahasräëy 
ähutér juhuyät. tathäñöau sahasräëi dvädasäkñäreëa 
tathäñöau sahasräëi catur-vyüha-mantreëähütir juhuyät. 
tato 'gnià pradakñiëé-kåtya namaskåtyäcäryaà mahärha-vastra-
suvarëäbharaëa-tämra-patra-savatsa-go-suvarëa-dakñiëäbhih 
sampüjya tathä brahmaëän bhojanädyaih sampüjya nagara-janebhyo 
bhojanaà dattväcäryän praëamet. itthaà balasya paöalänusäreëa 
yo 'nusmarati ihämütra siddhi-samåddhibhih samvåto bhavati. çré-
räma-paöalaà guhyaà mayä te hy anuvarëitam. sarva-siddhi-pradaà 
räjan kià bhüyah çrotum icchasi.

     om—Oà; namah—obeisances; bhagavate—to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; puruñottamäya—the supreme person; väsudeväya—the son of Vasudeva; saìkarñaëäya—Lord Saìkarñaëa; sahasra-vadanäya—who has a thousand heads; mahänantäya—the great Lord Anbanta; svähä—svähä; anena—with this; mantreëa—mantra; çikhä—çikhä; bandhanam—tying; kåtvä—doing; sarvatah—in all respects; tam—to Him; praëamya—bowing; tat-sammukhah—before Him; bhütvä—becing; svayam—personally; natah—bowed; bhavet.—should be; om—Oà; jaya—vitory; jaya—victory; ananta—O limitless one; balabhadra—O Balaräma; käma-päla—O fulfiller of desires; täläìka—O Lord who acrries the mark of the palm tree; kälindé-bhaïjana—O breaker of the Yamunä; ävirävirbhüya—appearing; mama—of me; sammukhah—in the presence; bhava—please become; iti—thus; anena—with this; mantreëa—mantra; ävähanam—invoking the presence; kuryät.—should do; om—Oà; namah—obeisances; te—to you; astu—should be; séra-päëe—plow in hand; hala-musala—plow and club; dhara—holding; rauhiëeya—O son of Rohiëé; nélämbara—dressed in blue garments; räma—O Balaräma; revaté-ramaëa—O lover of Revaté; namah—obeisances; astu—should be; te—to You; anena—with this; mantreëa—mantra; äsana—seat; padya—padya; arghya—arghya; snäna—bath; madhuparka—madhuparka; dhüpa—incense; dépa—lamp; yajïopavéta—sacred thread; naivedya—food; vastra—garments; bhüñaëa—ornaments; gandha—scent; puñpa—flowers; akñata—unbroken rice; puñpa—of flowers; aïjali—handful; néräjaëa—arati; ädén—beginning with; upacärän—services; prakalpayet—should perform; om—Oà; viñëave—to Lord Viñëu; madhusüdanäya—the killer of Madhu; vämanäya—Vämana; trivikramäya—Trivikrama; çrédharäya—Çrédhära; håñékeçäya—Håñékeça; padmanäbhäya—whose navel is a lotus flower; dämodaräya—who waist is bound with a rope; saìkarñaëäya—who was pulled from Devaké's womb; väsudeväya—the son of Vasudeva; pradyumnäya—Pradyumna; aniruddhäya—Aniruddha; adhokñajäya—Adhokñaja; puruñottamäya—the Supreme Person; çré-kåñëäya—Çré Kåñëa; namah.—obeisances; iti—thus; päda—feet; gulpha—ankles; jänu—knees; üru—thighs; kaöy—hips; udara—belly; pärçva—sides; påñöhi—back; bhuja—arms; kandhara—shoulders; netra—eyes; çiräàsi—and head; påthak påthak—each one individually; püjayämi—I worship; iti—thus; mantreëa—with the mantra; sarväìga-püjäm—the worship of all limbs; kuryät.—should perform; atha—then; çaìkha—conchshell; cakra—disc; gadä—club; padma—lotus; asi—sword; dhanuh—bow; bäëa—arrow; hala—plow; musala—club; kaustubha—Kaustubha jewel; vanamälä—forest garland; çrévatsa—Çrévatsa mark; pétämbara—yellow garments; nélämbara—blue garments; vaàçé—flute; vetra—stick; garuòa—Garuòa; aìka—mark; täla—palm tree; aìka—mark; ratha—chariot; däruka—Däruka; sumati—Sumati; kumuda—Kumuda; kumudäkña—Kumudäkña; çrédäma—Çrédäma; ädén—beginning with; praëava-pürvena—with Oà first; cäturthyam—fourth; tena—by that; namah—obeisances; samyuktena—with; näma-mantreëa—by tha mantras of names; påthak påthak—one after another; sampüjya.—should worship; tathä—so; viñvaksena—Viñvaksena; vedavyäsa—Vedavyäsa; durgä—Durgä; vinäyaka—Vinäyaka; dikpäla—the protectors of the directions; graha—the planets; ädén—beginning with; kamale—on the lotus flower; sarvatah—each; sve sve sthäne—in his own place; sampüjayet.—should worship; punah—again; parisamühana—sprinkling water; ädi—beginning with; sthaléin an earthen pot; päka—cooking; vidhänena—by the action; vaiçvänaram—Vaiçvänara; sampüjya—worshiping; pürvoktena—previously spoken; müla-mantreëa—with the mula-mantra; païca-viàçati-sahasräëy—25,000; ähutéh—oblations; juhuyät—should offer; tathä—so; añöau sahasräëi—8,000; dvädasäkñäreëa—with 12 syllables; tathä—then; añöau sahasräëi—8,000; catur-vyüha-mantreëa—with mantras to the catur-vyüha; ähutéh—oblations; juhuyät.—should offer; tatah—then; agnim—the sacred fire; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; namaskåtya—bowing down; äcäryam—to the guru; mahärha—very valuable; vastra—garments; suvarëa—golden; äbharaëa—ornaments; tämra—red; patra—petals; savatsa—with calves; gah—cows; suvarëa—and gold; dakñiëäbhih—with dakñiëä; sampüjya—worshiping; tathä—so; brahmaëän—the brähmaëas; bhojanädyaih—beginning with food; sampüjya—worshiping; nagara-janebhyah—the residents of the city; bhojanam—food; dattvä—giving; äcäryän—to the gurus; praëamet—should offer obeisances; ittham—thus; balasya—of Lord Balaräma; paöalänusäreëa—by following the paöala; yah—one who; anusmarati—remembers; iha—in this life; amütra—and the next; siddhi—of perfection; samåddhibhih—with increase; samvåtah—accompanied; bhavati.—becomes; çré-räma-paöalam—the paöala of Lord Balaräma; guhyam—secret; mayä—by me; te—to you; hy—indeed; anuvarëitam.—described; sarva-siddhi-pradam—giving all perfection; räjan—O king; kim—what?; bhüyah—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     Chanting the mantra "oà namo bhagavate puruñottamäya väsudeväya saìkarñaëäya sahasra-vadanäya mahänantäya svähä" (Obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Saìkarñana, who is thousand-headed Lord Ananta, and who is the son of Vasudeva), one should tie his çikhä. Then one should bow down before the deity and in all directions.      Then, chanting the mantra "oà jaya jayänanta balabhadra käma-päla täläìka kälindé-bhaïjana ävirävirbhüya mama sammukho bhava" (Oà. O Lord Balaräma, O Lord Ananta, O fulfiller of desires, O Lord who carries a palm-tree flag, O Lord who broke the Yamunä, all glories to You! O Lord, please appear before me.), one should request Lord Balaräma to appear.      Then, chanting the mantra "oà namas te 'stu séra-päëe hala-musala-dhara rauhiëeya nélämbara räma revaté-ramaëa namo 'stu te" (O Lord who holds a plow in Your hand, O Lord who holds a plow and club, O son of Rohiëé, O Lord dressed in blue garments, O Balaräma, O husband of Revaté, obeisances to You!), one should offer a throne, padya, arghya, bath, madhuparka, incense, lamp, sacred thread, food, garments, ornaments, fragrant flowers, unbroken grains of rice, handsful of flowers, ärati, and other services.      Then, chanting the mantra, "oà viñëave madhusüdanäya vämanäya trivikramäya çrédharäya håñékeçäya padmanäbhäya dämodaräya saìkarñaëäya väsudeväya pradyumnäyäniruddhäyädhokñajäya puruñottamäya çré-kåñëäya namah. (Oà. Obeisances to Lord Viñëu, the killer of Madhu, the Lord who is the Vämana incarnation, the Lord who covered the universe in three steps, the Lord who maintains the goddess of fortune, the master of the senses, the Lord whose navel is a lotus flower, the Lord whose waist was bound by a rope, the Lord who was carried from Devaké's womb, the Lord who is the son of Vasudeva, the Lord who is Pradyumna, the Lord who is Aniruddha, the Lord who is beyond the material senses, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is all-attractive Çré Kåñëa!) and also the mantra "päda-gulpha-jänüru-kaöy-udara-pärçva-påñöhi-bhuja-kandhara-netra-çiräàsi påthak påthak püjayämi" (I worship the Lord's feet, ankles, knees, thighs, hips, belly, sides, back, arms, shoulders, eyes, and head.), one should worship all the limbs of Lord Balaräma.      Then, chanting the word namah before each one, and putting each word in the dative case, one should worship Lord Balaräma's conchshell (with the mantra çaìkhäya namah), disc (cakräya namah), club (gadäyai namah), lotus (padmäya namah), sword (asaye namah), bow (dhanuñe namah), arrows (bäëebhyah namah), plow (haläya namah), club (musaläya namah), Kaustubha jewel (kaustubhäya namah), forest garland (vanamäläyai namah), Çrévatsa mark (çrévatsäya namah), yellow garments (pétämbaräya namah), blue garments (nélämbaräya namah), flute (vaàçyai namah), stick (veträya namah), chariot marked with the flag of Garuòa (garuòäìka-rathäya namah), chariot marked with the flag of a palm tree (täläìka-rathäya namah), and His associates Däruka (darukäya namah), Sumati (sumataye namah), Kumuda (kumudäya namah), Kumudäkña (kumudäkñäya namah), and Çrédämä (çrédämäya namah).      Then one should place Viñvaksena, Vedavyäsa, Durgä, Gaëeça, the planets, and the protectors of the directions in their respective places in the lotus and then one should worship them. Then, sprinkling water and offering food cooked in an earthen pot, one should worship the sacred fire.      Then, chanting the previously described müla-mantra (oà kléà kälindé-bhedanäya saìkarñaëäya svähä) one should offer 25,000 oblations. Then, chanting the twelve-syllable mantra (oà namo bhagavate väsudeväya), one should offer 8,000 oblations. Then, chanting the catur-vyüha mantra (oà namo bhagavate tubhyaà väsudeväya säkñiëe, pradyumnäyäniruddhäya namah saìkarñaëäya ca), one should again offer 8,000 oblations.      Then one should circumambulate the sacred fire, bow down before the guru, worship him with dakñiëä of valuable garments, gold ornaments, copper vessels, cows with their newborn calves, and much gold, worship the brähmaëas by offering them food and gifts, feed the people of the city, and bow down before the gurus. Meditating on Lord Balaräma by following this paddhati, one attains perfection in this life and the next. In this way I have described to you Lord Balaräma's confidential paddhati, which gives all perfection. O king, what more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Eleven
Çré Balabhadra-stava-räja
The King of Prayers to Lord Balaräma

Text 1

duryodhana uväca 
stotraà çré-baladevasya
     präòvipäka mahä-mune
vada mäà kåpayä säkñät
     sarva-siddhi-pradäyakam

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; stotram—prayer; çré-baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; präòvipäka—Çré Präòvipäka Muni; mahä-mune—O great sages; vada—please tell; mäm—me; kåpayä—mercifully; säkñät—directly; sarva-siddhi-pradäyakam—giving all perfection.

     Duryodhana said: O Präòvipäka, O great sage, please kindly tell me the prayer of Lord Balaräma, which grants all perfection.

Text 2 
çré-präòvipäka uväca 
stava-räjaà tu rämasya
     vedavyäsa-kåtaà çubham
 sarva-siddhi-pradaà räjan
     chånu kaivalyadaà nåëäm

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Präòvipäka Muni said; stava—of prayers; räjam—the king; tu—indeed; rämasya—of Lord Balaräma; vedavyäsa-kåtam—written by Vedavyäsa; çubham—auspicious; sarva-siddhi-pradam—giving all perfection; räjan—O king; çånu—please hear; kaivalyadam—giving liberation; nåëäm—to the living entities.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: O king, please hear the regal and beautiful prayer of Lord Balaräma, a prayer that brings liberation and all perfection. 
Text 3 
devädi-deva bhagavan
     käma-päla namo 'stu te
namo 'nantäya çeñäya
     säkñäd-rämäya te namah

     devädi-deva—O master of the demigods; bhagavan—O Supreme Personality of Godhead; käma-päla—O fulfiller of desires; namah—obeisances; astu—should be; te—to You; namah—obeisances; anantäya çeñäya—to Ananta Çeña; säkñäd-rämäya—who is directly Lord Balaräma; te—to You; namah—obeisances.

     O master of the demigods, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, O fulfiller of desires, obeisances to You! O Lord Ananta Çeña, obeisances to You! O Lord Balaräma, obeisances to You!

Text 4 
dharä-dharäya pürëäya
     sva-dhämne séra-päëaye
sahasra-çirase nityaà
     namah saìkarñaëäya te

     dharä-dharäya—the maintainer of the earth; pürëäya—perfect and complete; sva-dhämne—glorious; séra-päëaye—plow in hand; sahasra-çirase—a thousand heads; nityam—always; namah—obeisances; saìkarñaëäyA—to Lord Saìkarñaëa; te—to You.

     O Lord who maintains the earth, O glorious Lord, O perfect and complete Lord, O Lord who holds a plow in Your hand, O Lord who has a thousand heads, O Lord Saìkarñaëa, eternal obeisances to You!

Text 5 
revaté-ramaëa tvaà vai
     baladeväcyutägraja
haläyudha pralamba-ghna
     pähi mäà puruñottama

     revaté-ramaëa—O husband of Revaté; tvam—You; vai—indeed; baladeva—Balaräma; acyutägraja—O elder brother of Lord Kåñëa; haläyudha—carrying a plow-weapon; pralamba-ghna—killer of Pralambäsura; pähi—please proetct; mäm—me; puruñottama—O Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     O husband of Revaté, O Lord Balaräma, O elder brother of Lord Kåñëa, O Lord who holds a plow-weapon, O killer of Pralambäsura, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, please protect me!

Text 6 
baläya balabhadräya
     täläìkäya namo namah
nélämbaräya gauräya
     rauhiëeyäya te namah

     baläya—to Lord Balaräma; balabhadräya—to Lord Balaräma; täläìkäya—who carries the palm-tree flag; namah—obeisances; namah—obeisances; nélämbaräya—who wears blue garments; gauräya—whose complexion is fair; rauhiëeyäya—to the son of Rohiëé; te—to You; namah—obeisances.

     O Lord Balaräma, who carries a palm-tree flag, obeisances to You! O son of Rohiëé, O fair-complexioned Lord dressed in blue garments, obeisances to You! 
Text 7 
dhenukärir muñöikärih
     küöärir balvaläntakah
rukmy-arih küpakarëärih
     kumbhandäris tvam eva hi

     dhenukärih—the enemy of Dhenuka; muñöikärih—the enemy of Muñöika; küöärih—the enemy of Küöa; balvaläntakah—the killer of Balvala; rukmy-arih—the enemy of Rukmi; küpakarëärih—the enemy of Kupakarna; kumbhandärih—the enemy of Kumbandha; tvam—You; eva—indeed; hi—indeed.

     You are the enemy of Dhenuka, the enemy of Muñöika, the enemy of Küöa, the killer of Balvala, the enemy of Rukmé, the enemy of Küpakarëa, and the enemy of Kumbhanda.

Text 8 
kälindé-bhedano 'si tvaà
     hastinäpura-karñakah
dvividärir yädavendro
     vraja-maëòala-maëòaëah

     kälindé—of the Yamunä; bhedanah—the breaker; asi—You are; tvam—You; hastinäpura-karñakah—the dragger of Hastinäpura; dvividärih—the enemy of Dvivida; yädavendrah—the king of the Yadavas; vraja-maëòala-maëòaëah—the ornament of the circle of Vraja.

     You are the Lord who broke the Yamunä and dragged Hastinäpura. You are the enemy of Dvivida. You are the king of the Yädavas. You are the ornament of Vraja's circle.

Text 9 
kaàsa-bhrätå-prahantäsi
     tértha-yäträ-karah prabhuh
duryodhana-guruh säkñät
     pähi pähi prabho tv atah

     kaàsa-bhrätå-prahantä—the killer of Kaàsa's brothers; asi—You are; tértha-yäträ-karah—a pilgrim; prabhuh—the master; duryodhana-guruh—the guru of Duryodhana; säkñät—directly; pähi—please protect; pähi—please protect; prabhah—O Lord; tv—indeed; atah—then.

     You are the killer of Kaàsa's brothers. You are the supreme master, the Lord who went on pilgrimage, and Duryodhana's guru. O master, please protect me! Please protect me!

Text 10 

jaya jayäcyuta-deva parät para      svayam ananta-dig-anta-gata-çruta
sura-munéndra-phaëéndra-caräya te
     musaline baline haline namaù

     jaya—glory; jaya—glory; acyuta-deva—O infallible Lord; parät—than the greatest; para—greater; svayam—directly; ananta-dig-anta-gata-çruta—whose glories are heard in all directions without limit; sura-munéndra-phaëéndra-caräya—worshiped by the demigods, the kings of the sages, and the kings of the serpents; te—to You; musaline—holding a club; baline—powerful; haline—holding a plow; namaù—obeisances.

     O infallible Lord, greater than the greatest, O Lord whose glories are heard in all directions without limit, glory to You! Glory to You! O Lord served by the demigods, the kings of the sages, and the kings of the serpents, O powerful Lord who holds a plow and a club, obeisances to You!

Text 11 
yah paöhet satataà stavanaà narah
     sa tu hareh paramaà padam ävrajet
jagati sarva-balaà tv ari-mardanaà
     bhavati tasya dhanaà sva-janaà dhanam

     yah—one who; paöhet—recites; satatam—regulalrly; stavanam—prayer; narah—person; sa—he; tu—indeed; hareh—of Lord Hari; paramam—supreme; padam—abode; ävrajet—attains; jagati—in the universe; sarva-balam—all strength; tv—indeed; ari-mardanam—crushing enemies; bhavati—is; tasya—of him; dhanam—wealth; sva-janam—kinsmen; dhanam—wealth.

     A person who regularly recites this prayer attains Lord Hari's transcendental abode. All the strength in the universe is his. He crushes his enemies. He attains great wealth and a great dynasty.
.pa

Chapter Twelve
Çré Balabhadra-stotra-kavaca
The Prayer and Armor of Lord Balaräma

Text 1

duryodhana uväca 
gopébhyäà kavacaà dattaà
     gargäcäryena dhématä
sarva-rakñä-karaà divyaà
     dehi mahyaà mahä-mune

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; gopébhyäm—to the gopés; kavacam—the armor; dattam—given; gargäcäryena—by Garga Muni; dhématä—intelligent; sarva-rakña-karam—giving all protection; divyam—transcendental; dehi—please give; mahyam—to me; mahä-mune—O great sage.

     Duryodhana said: O great sage, please give me the transcendental Balaräma-kavaca, which wise Garga Muni gave to the gopés, and which gives all protection.

Text 2 
çré-präòvipäka uväca 
snätvä jale kñauma-dharah kuçäsanah
     pavitra-päëih kåta-mantra-marjanah
småtvätha natvä balam acyutägrajaà
     sandhärayed dharma-samähito bhavet

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Präòvipäka Muni said; snätvä—bathing; jale—in water; kñauma-dharah—wearing clean cotton garments; kuçäsanah—sitting on a kuça grass mat; pavitra-päëih—clean hands; kåta-mantra-marjanah—purified by mantra; småtvä—meditating; atha—then; natvä—bowing; balam—to Lord Balaräma; acyutägrajam—the elder brother of Lord Kåñëa; sandhärayet—should meditate; dharma-samähitah—concentrating; bhavet—should be.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: After bathing and dressing in clean cotton garments, a person should sit on a kuça-grass mat, purify his hands with mantras, bow down, and with fixed intelligence meditate on Lord Kåñëa's elder brother, Lord Balaräma.

Text 3 
goloka-dhämädhipatih pareçvarah
     pareñu mäà pätu pavitra-kértanaù

bhü-maëòalaà sarñapavad vilakñyate
     yan-mürdhni mäà pätu sa bhümi-maëòale

     goloka-dhämädhipatih—the master of the realm of Goloka; pareçvarah—the supreme controller; pareñu—among all controllers; mäm—me; pätu—may protect; pavitra—pure; kértanah—glories; bhü-maëòalam—the circle of the earth; sarñapavat—like a mustard seed; vilakñyate—is characterized; yan-mürdhni—on whose head; mäm—me; pätu—may protect; sa—he; bhümi-maëòale—in the circle of the earth.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the master of Goloka, who is the supreme controller of all controllers, and whose fame is spotless, protect me. May Lord Balaräma, who on His head holds the earth as if it were a single mustard seed, protect me in this world.

Text 4 
senäsu mäà rakñatu séra-päëir
     yuddhe sadä rakñatu mäà halé ca
durgeñu cävyän musalé sadä mäà
     vaneñu saìkarñaëa ädi-devah

     senäsu—among armies; mäm—me; rakñatu—may protect; séra-päëih—who holds a plow in His hand; yuddhe—in battle; sadä—always; rakñatu—may protect; mäm—me; halé—holding a plow; ca—and; durgeñu—in fortresses; ca—and; avyät—may protect; musalé—holding a club; sadä—always; mäm—me; vaneñu—in forests; saìkarñaëa—Lord Balaräma; ädi-devah—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     May Lord Balaräma protect me when I am surrounded by many armies. May Lord Balaräma, who holds a plow, always protect me in battle. May Lord Balaräma, who holds a club, always protect me in many fortresses. May Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead protect me in the forest.

Text 5 
kalindajä-vega-haro jaleñu
     nélämbaro rakñatu mäà sadägnau
väyau ca rämo 'vatu khe balaç ca
     mahärëave 'nanta-vapuh sadä mäm

     kalindajä—of the Yamunä; vega—the power; harah—removing; jaleñu—in water; nélämbarah—dressed in blue garments; rakñatu—may protect; mäm—me; sadä—always; agnau—in fire; väyau—in wind; ca—and; rämah—Lord Balaräma; avatu—may protect; khe—in the sky; balah—Lord Balaräma; ca—and; mahärëave—in the great ocean; ananta-vapuh—whose form has no end; sadä—always; mäm—me.

     May Lord Balaräma, who wears blue garments and who stopped the Yamunä, always protect me in fire. May Lord Balaräma protect me in the wind. May Lord Balaräma protect me in the sky. May Lord Balaräma, who is Lord Ananta Himself, always protect me in the great ocean.

Text 6

çré-väsudevo 'vatu parvateñu
     sahasra-çérñä ca mahä-viväde
rogeñu mäà rakñatu rauhiëeyo
     mäà käma-pälo 'vatu va vipatsu

     çré-väsudevah—the son of Vasudeva; avatu—may protect; parvateñu—in the mountains; sahasra-çérñä—who has a thousand heads; ca—and; mahä-viväde—in great disputes; rogeñu—in diseases; mäm—me; rakñatu—may protect; rauhiëeyah—the son of Rohiëé; mäm—me; käma-pälah—the fulfiller of desires; avatu—may protect; vä—or; vipatsu—in calamities.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is Vasudeva's son, protect me on mountains. May Lord Balaräma, who has a thousand heads, protect me in great disputes. May Lord Balaräma, who is Rohiëé's son, protect me from diseases. May Lord Balaräma, who fulfills desires, protect me from catastrophes.

Text 7 
kämät sadä rakñatu dhenukärih
     krodhät sadä mäà dvivida-prahäré
lobhät sadä rakñatu balvalärir
     mohät sadä mäà kila mägadhärih

     kämät—from lust; sadä—always; rakñatu—may protect; dhenukärih—the enemy of Dhenuka; krodhät—from anger; sadä—always; mäm—me; dvivida-prahäré—the killer of Dvivida; lobhät—from greed; sadä—always; rakñatu—may protect; balvalärih—the enemy of Balvala; mohät—from illusion; sadä—always; mäm—me; kila—indeed; mägadhärih—the enemy of Jaräsandha.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the enemy of Dhenukäsura, always protect me from lust. May Lord Balaräma, who killed Dvivida, always protect me from anger. May Lord Balaräma, who is the enemy of Balvala, always protect me from greed. May Lord Balaräma, who is the enemy of Jaräsandha, always protect me from illusion.

Text 8 
prätah sadä rakñatu våñëi-dhuryah
     prähne sadä mäà mathurä-purendrah
madhyandine gopa-sakhah prapätu
     svarät parähne 'vatu mäà sadaiva

     prätah—at sunrise; sadä—always; rakñatu—may protect; våñëi-dhuryah—the greatst of the Våñëis; prähne—in the morning; sadä—always; mäm—me; mathurä-purendrah—the king of Mathurä City; madhyandine—at noon; gopa-sakhah—the friend of the gopas; prapätu—may protect; svaräö—independent; parähne—in the afternoon; avatu—may protect; mäm—me; sadä—always; eva—indeed.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the best of the Våñëis, always protect me at sunrise. May Lord Balaräma, who is the king of Mathurä City, always protect me in the morning. May Lord Balaräma, who is the friend of the gopas, always protect me at midday. May Lord Balaräma, who is supremely independent, always protect me in the afternoon.

Text 9 
säyaà phaëéndro 'vatu mäà sadaiva
     parät paro rakñatu mäà pradoñe
pürëe niçéthe ca duranta-véryah
     pratyüña-käle 'vatu mäà sadaiva

     säyam—at sunset; phaëéndrah—the king of serpents; avatu—may protect; mäm—me; sadä—always; eva—indeed; parät—than the greatest; parah—greater; rakñatu—may protect; mäm—me; pradoñe—in the evening; pürëe—full; niçéthe—in the middle of the night; ca—and; duranta-véryah—whose power is invicible; pratyüña-käle—at the next sunrise; avatu—may protect; mäm—me; sadä—always; eva—indeed.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the king of serpents, always protect me at sunset. May Lord Balaräma, who is greater than the greatest, always protect me in the evening. May Lord Balaräma, whose power is invicible, always protect me in the middle of the night. May Lord Balaräma always protect me at every sunrise.

Text 10 
vidikñu mäà rakñatu revaté-patir
     dékñu pralambärir adho yadüdvahah
ürdhvaà sadä mäà balabhadra ärät
     tathä samantäd baladeva eva hi

     vidikñu—in the directions; mäm—me; rakñatu—may protect; revaté-patih—the husband of Revaté; dékñu—in the directions; pralambärih—the enemy of Pralamba; adhah—below; yadüdvahah—the best of the Yädavas; ürdhvam—above; sadä—alwys; mäm—me; balabhadra—Balaräma; ärät—near and far; tathä—so; samantät—everywhere; baladeva—Lord Balaräma; eva—indeed; hi—indeed.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the master of Revaté, protect me from every direction. May Lord Balaräma, who is the enemy of Pralamba, protect me from every direction. May Lord Balaräma, who is the best of the Yädavas, protect me from below. May Lord Balaräma always protect me from above. May Lord Balaräma protect me from near and far. May Lord Balaräma protect me everywhere.

Text 11

antah sadävyät puruñottamo bahir
     nägendra-lélo 'vatu mäà mahä-balah
sadäntarätmä ca vasan harih svayaà
     prapätu pürëah parameçvaro mahän

     antah—within; sadä—always; avyät—may protect; puruñottamah—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bahih—without; nägendra-lélah—who enjoys pastimes as the king of serpents; avatu—may protect; mäm—me; mahä-balah—very powerful; sadä—always; antarätmä—within the heart; ca—and; vasan—residing; harih—Lord Hari; svayam—personally; prapätu—may protect; pürëah—perfect and complete; parameçvarah—the supreme controller; mahän—great.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, always protect me from within. May powerful Lord Balaräma, who enjoys pastimes as the king of serpents, protect me from without. May Lord Balaräma, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Supersoul residing in everyone's heart, always protect me. 
Text 12

deväsuräëäà bhaya-näçanaà ca
     hutäçanaà päpa-cayendhanänäm
vinäçanaà vighna-ghatasya viddhi
     siddhäsanaà varma-varaà balasya

     deväsuräëäm—of the demigods and demons; bhaya—of fear; näçanam—the destruction; ca—and; hutäçanam—the fire; päpa-cayendhanänäm—of the fuel of a host sins; vinäçanam—destruction; vighna-ghatasya—of a host of obstacles; viddhi—please know; siddhäsanam—the abode of perfection; varma-varam—the best of armors; balasya—of Lord Balaräma.

     Please know that this kavaca of Lord Balaräma is the best of armors. It destroys the fears of the demigods and demons. It is a blazing fire that burns up the fuel of a host of sins. It is the death of a host of obstacles. It is the abode of spiritual perfection.
.pa

Chapter Thirteen
Çré Balabhadra-sahasra-näma
A Thousand Names of Lord Balaräma

Text 1

duryodhana uväca 
balabhadrasya devasya
     präòvipäka mahä-mune
nämnäà sahasraà me brühi
     guhyaà deva-gaëair api

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; balabhadrasya—of Lord Balaräma; devasya—Lord; präòvipäka—O Pradvipaka; mahä—great; mune—sage; nämnäm—of the names; sahasram—thousand; me—to me; brühi—please tell; guhyam—secret; deva-gaëaih—by the demigods; api—even.

     Duryodhana said: O great sage Präòvipäka, please tell me the thousand names of Lord Balaräma, names kept secret from even the demigods.

Text 2 
çré-präòvipäka uväca 
sädhu sädhu mahä-räja
     sädhu te vimalaà yaçah
yat påcchase param idaà
     gargoktaà deva-durlabham

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Pradvipaka said; sädhu—good; sädhu—good; mahä-räja—O king; sädhu—good; te—of you; vimalam—pure; yaçah—fame; yat—what; påcchase—you ask; param—great; idam—this; gargoktam—spoken by Garga Muni; deva—to the demigods; durlabham—rare.

     Çré Präòvipäka said: Well done! Well done! Well done! O king, your fame is spotless. Your question has been answered by Garga Muni in words rarely heard by even the demigods.

Text 3 
nämnäà saharsaà divyänäà
     vakñyämi tava cägratah
gargäcäryeëa gopébhyo
     dattaà kåñëä-taöe çubhe

     nämnäm—of names; saharsam—thousand; divyänäm—divine; vakñyämi—I will tell; tava—to you; ca—and; agratah—in the presence; gargäcäryeëa—by Garga Muni; gopébhyah—to the gopés; dattam—given; kåñëä-taöe—on the shore of the Yamunä; çubhe—beautiful.

     I will tell you Lord Balaräma's thousand transcendental names, names that Garga Muni gave to the gopés on the beautiful bank of the Yamunä.

Text 4 
     oà asya çré-balabhadra-sahasra-näma-stotra-mantrasya gargäcärya åñih anuñöup chandah saìkarñaëah paramätmä devatä balabhadra iti béjaà revatéti çaktih ananta iti kélakaà balabhadra-préty-arthe jape viniyogah.

     om—Oà; asya—of Him; çré-balabhadra-sahasra-näma-stotra-mantrasya—of the mantra-prayer of thethousand names of Lord Balaräma; gargäcärya—Garga Muni; åñih—the sage; anuñöup—Anuñöup; chandah—the meter; saìkarñaëah—Balaräma; paramätmä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devatä—the Deity; balabhadra—balabhadra; iti—thus; béjam—the béja; revaté—Revaté; iti—thus; çaktih—the potency; anantah—Ananta; iti—thus; kélakam—the kélaka; balabhadra-préty-arthe—for the satisfaction of Lord Balaräma; jape—in chanting; viniyogah—stablished.

     Oà. Of the mantra-prayer of the thousand names of Lord Balaräma the sage is Garga Muni, the meter is anuñöup, the Deity is Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the béja is Balabhadra, the çakti is Revaté, the kélaka is Ananta, and the purpose of chanting the names is the pleasure of Lord Balaräma.

Text 4 (b)

atha dhyänam 
sphurad-amala-kiréöaà kiìkiëé-kaìkaëärhaà
     calad-alaka-kapolaà kuëòala-çré-mukhäbjam
tuhina-giri-manojïaà néla-meghämbaräòhyaà
     hala-musala-viçälaà käma-pälaà saméòe

     atha—now; dhyänam—the meditation; sphurad-amala-kiréöam—a splendid crown; kiìkiëé-kaìkaëärham—with bracelets and tinkling ornaments; calad-alaka-kapolam—with locks of hair moving on His cheeks; kuëòala-çré-mukhäbjam—His lotus face decorated with earrings; tuhina-giri-manojnam—charming like a mountain of ice and snow; néla-meghämbaräòhyam—dressed in garmants like dark clouds; hala-musala-viçälam—holding a great plow and club; käma-pälam—fulfilling desires; saméòe—I praise.

Meditation

     I glorify Lord Balaräma, decorated with a glittering crown, bracelets, tinkling ornaments, moving locks of hair on His cheeks, splendid earrings on His handsome lotus face, and garments dark like monsoon clouds, holding a great club and plow, fulfilling all desires, and handsome like a mountain of ice and snow.

Text 5

oà balabhadro rämabhadro
     rämah saìkarñaëo 'cyutah
revaté-ramaëo devah
     käma-pälo haläyudhah

     Oà. Lord Balaräma is supremely powerful and happy (balabhadra), the supreme enjoyer (rämabhadra and (räma), all-attractive (saìkarñaëa), infallible (acyuta), the lover of Revaté (revaté-ramaëa), the splendid Supreme Personality of Godhead (deva), the Lord who fulfills desires (käma-päla), and He who carries a plow-weapon (haläyudha).

Text 6 

nélämbarah çveta-varëo
     baladevo 'cyutägrajah
pralambaghno mahä-véro
     rauhiëeyah pratäpavän

     He is dressed in blue garments (nélämbara), fair-complexioned (çveta-varëa), splendid and powerful (baladeva), the elder brother of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead (acyutägraja), the killer of Pralamba (pralambaghna), a great hero (mahä-véra), the son of Rohiëé (rauhiëeya), and very powerful (pratäpavän).

Text 7 

täläìko musalé halé
     harir yadu-varo balé
séra-päëih padma-päëir
     laguòé venu-vädanah

     He bears the insignia of a palm tree (täläìka), holds a club (musalé), holds a plow (halé), takes away all that is inauspicious (hari), is the best of the Yadus (yadu-vara), is powerful (balé), holds a plow in His hand (séra-päëi), has lotus hands (padma-päëi), holds a club (laguòé), and plays the flute (venu-vädana).

Text 8 

kälindé-bhedano véro
     balah prabalah ürdhvagah
väsudeva-kalänantah
     sahasra-vadanah svaräö

     He divided the Yamunä (kälindé-bhedana). He is a heroic (véra), powerful (bala, and prabala), exalted (ürdhvaga), a plenary expansion of Lord Kåñëa (väsudeva-kalä), and limitless (ananta), has a thousand heads (sahasra-vadana), and is independent (svaräö).

Text 9 

vasur vasumaté-bhartä
     väsudevo vasüttamah
yadüttamo yädavendro
     mädhavo våñëi-vallabhah

     He is opulent (vasu), the goddess of fortune's husband (vasumaté-bhartä), the son of Vasudeva (väsudeva), the best of the Vasus (vasüttama), the best of the Yädavas (yadüttama), the king of the Yädavas (yädavendra), the goddess of fortune's husband (mädhava), and dear to the Våñëis (våñëi-vallabha).

Text 10 
dvärakeço mäthureço
     däné mäné mahä-manäh
pürëah puräëah puruñah
     pareçah parameçvarah

     He is the king of Dvärakä (dvärakeça), the king of Mathurä (mäthureça), generous (däné), noble (mäné), noble-hearted (mahä-manä), perfect (pürëa), the ancient Supreme Personality of Godhead (puräëa), the Supreme Person (puruña), the Supreme Master (pareça), and the Supreme Controller (parameçvara).

Text 11 
paripürëatamah säkñät
     paramah puruñottamah
anantah çäçvatah çeño
     bhagavän prakåteh parah

     He is the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead (paripürëatama), the Supreme Personality of Godhead directly (säkñät-parama), the Supreme Person (puruñottama), limitless (ananta), eternal (çäçvata), Lord Çeña (çeña), the supremely opulent Lord (bhagavän), and beyond the world of matter (prakåteh para).

Text 12 
jévätmä paramätmä ca
     hy antarätmä dhruvo 'vyayah
catur-vyühaç catur-vedaç
     catur-mürtiç catuñ-padah

     He is the father of all living entities (jévätmä), the Supersoul present in everyone's heart (paramätmä and antarätmä), eternal (dhruva), imperishable (avyaya), the origin of the catur-vyüha expansions (catur-vyüha), the author of the four Vedas (catur-veda), the origin of the catur-vyüha (catur-mürti), and the master of the four worlds (catuñ-pada).

Text 13 
pradhänaà prakåtih säkñé
     saìghätah saìghavän sakhé
mahä-manä buddhi-sakhaç
     ceto 'haìkära ävåtah

     He is pradhäna (pradhäna), prakåti (prakåti), the witness (säkñé), accompanied by His associates (saìghäta, saìghavän, and sakhé), noble-hearted (mahä-manä), and the best counselor (buddhi-sakha). He is consciousness (ceta), and ego (ahaìkära). He is accompanied by His associates (ävåta).

Text 14 
indriyeço devatätmä
     jïänaà karma ca çarma ca
advitéyo dvitéyaç ca
     niräkäro niraïjanah

     He is the master of the senses (indriyeça), the Supreme Personality of Godhead (devatä), the Supersoul (ätmä), knowledge (jïäna), action (karma), auspiciousness (çarma), one without a second (advitéya), different from the individual living entities (dvitéya), a person whose form is not material (niräkära), and not touched by matter (niraïjana).

Text 15 
viräö samräö mahaughaç ca
     dhärah sthäsnuç cariñëumän
phaëéndrah phaëi-räjaç ca
     sahasra-phaëa-maëòitah 

     He is the entire universe (viräö), the supreme monarch (samräö), a great flood (mahaugha), the maintainer of all (dhära), unmoving (sthäsnu), going everywhere (cariñëumän), the king of serpents (phaëéndra, and phaëi-räja), and the serpent with a thousand hoods (sahasra-phaëa-maëòita).

Text 16 
phaëéçvarah phaëé sphürtih
     phutkäré citkarah prabhuh
maëi-häro maëi-dharo
     vitalé sutalé talé

     He is the king of serpents (phaëéçvara, and phaëé), the Supreme Personality of Godhead who has appeared in the material world (sphürti), a hissing serpent (phutkäré, and citkara), the supreme master (prabhu), and decorated with a jewel necklace (maëi-hära, and maëi-dhara). He resides in Vitalaloka (vitalé), Sutalaloka (sutalé), and Talaloka (talé).

Text 17 
atalé sutaleçaç ca
     pätälaç ca talätalah
rasätalo bhogitalah
     sphurad-danto mahätalah

     He resides in Atalaloka (atalé), and is the king of Sutalaloka (sutaleça). He resides in Pätälaloka (pätäla), Talätalaloka (talätala), and Rasätalaloka (rasätala). He has great hoods (bhogitala), and glittering fangs (sphurad-danta). He resides on Mahätalaloka (mahätala).

Text 18 
väsukih çaìkhacüòäbho
     devadatto dhanaïjayah
kambaläçvo vegataro
     dhåtaräñöo mahä-bhujah

     He is Väsuki (väsuki). He is splendid like a conch-jewel (çaìkhacüòäbha), is the benefactor of the demigods (devadatta), and is the winner of wealth (dhanaïjaya). He is Kambaläçva (kambaläçva). He is the fastest (vegatara), the king (dhåtaräñöa), and the hero of mighty arms (mahä-bhuja).

Text 19 
väruëé-mada-mattäìgo
     mada-ghürëita-locanah
padmäkñah padma-mälé ca
     vanamälé madhuçraväh

     He is intoxicated by drinking väruëé (väruëé-mada-mattäìga), His eyes roll in intoxication (mada-ghürëita-locana), His eyes are lotus flowers (padmäkña), He wears a lotus garland (padma-mälé), and a forest garland (vanamälé), and His fame is sweet (madhuçravä).

Text 20 
koöi-kandarpa-lävaëyo
     näga-kanyä-samärcitah
nüpuré kaöisütré ca
     kaöaké kanakäìgadé

     He is more handsome than millions of Kämadevas (koöi-kandarpa-lävaëya), and He is worshiped by the näga-kanyäs (näga-kanyä-samärcita). He wears tinkling anklets (nüpuré), a belt (kaöisütré), golden bracelets (kaöaké), and golden armlets (kanakäìgadé).

Text 21 
mukuöé kuëòalé daëòé
     çikhaëòé khaëòa-maëòalé
kalih kali-priyah kälo
     niväta-kavaceçvarah

     He wears a crown (mukuöé) and earrings (kuëòalé). He carries a staff (daëòé). He wears a peacock featHer (çikhaëòé), and a khaëòa-maëòala (khaëòa-maëòalé). He likes to fight (kali and kali-priya), He is time (käla), and He is fitted with armor (niväta-kavaceçvara).

Text 22 
saàhära-kåd rudra-vapuh
     kälägnih pralayo layah
mahähih päëinih çästra-
     bhäñyä-kärah pataïjalih

     He destroys the universe (saàhära-kåt). He is the forms of the Rudras (rudra-vapu), the fire of time (kälägni), the destruction of the universe (pralaya and laya), a great serpent (mahähi), Päëini (päëini), the author of commentaries (çästra-bhäñyä-kära), and Pataïjali (pataïjali).

Text 23 
kätyäyanah pakvimäbhah
     sphoöäyana uraìgamah
vaikuëöho yäjïiko yajïo
     vämano hariëo harih

     He is Kätyäyana (kätyäyana), and He is glorious (pakvimäbhah and sphoöäyana). He is the serpent Ananta (uraìgama). He is the master of the spiritual world (vaikuëöha), the performer of yajïas  (yäjïika) yajïa itself (yajïa), Vämana (vämana), fair-compexioned (hariëa), and Lord Hari (hari).

Text 24 
kåñëo viñëur mahä-viñëuh
     prabhaviñëur viçeña-vit
haàso yogeçvaro kürmo
     varäho närado munih

     He is Kåñëa (kåñëa), Viñëu (viñëu), Mahä-viñëu (mahä-viñëu), all-powerful (prabhaviñëu), all-knowing (viçeña-vit), like a swan (haàsa), the master of yoga (yogeçvara), Kürma (kürma), Varäha (varäha), Närada (närada), and a great sage (muni).

Text 25 
sanakah kapilo matsyah
     kamaöho deva-maìgalaù
dattätreyah påthur våddha
     åñabho bhärgavottamah

     He is Sanaka (sanaka), Kapila (kapila), Matsya (matsya and kamaöha), the auspiciousness of the demigods (deva-maìgala), Dattätreya (dattätreya), Påthu (påthu), Våddha (våddha), Åñabha (åñabha), and the best of the Bhågu dynasty (bhärgavottama).

Text 26 
dhanvantarir nåsiàhaç ca
     kalkir näräyaëo narah
rämacandro räghavendrah
     koçalendro raghüdvahah

     He is Dhanvantari (dhanvantari), Nåsiàha (nåsiàha), Kalki (kalki), Näräyaëa (näräyaëa), Nara (nara), and Rämacandra (rämacandra, räghavendra, koçalendra, and raghüdvaha).

Text 27 
käkutsthah karuëä-sindhu
     räjendrah sarva-lakñaëah
çüro däçarathis trätä
     kauçalyänanda-vardhanah

     He is the most exalted (käkutstha), and ocean of mercy (karuëä-sindhu), the king of kings (räjendra), all glorious (sarva-lakñaëa), heroic (çüra), the son od Daçaratha (däçarathi), the great protector (trätä), and the bliss of Kauçalyä (kauçalyänanda-vardhana).

Text 28 
saumitrir bharato dhanvé
     çatrughnah çatru-täpanah
niñäìgé kavacé khaògé
     çaré jyähata-koñöhakah

     He is the son of Sumiträ (saumitri), Bharata (bharata), a great bowman (dhanvé), Çatrughna (çatrughna and çatru-täpana), a great bowman (niñäìgé), a warrior wearing armor (kavacé), a warrior carrying a sword (khaògé), and a great bowman (çaré and jyähata-koñöhaka).

Text 29 
baddha-godhäìguli-träëah
     çambhu-kodaëòa-bhaïjanah
yajïa-trätä yajïa-bhartä
     märéca-vadha-kärakah

     He wears the shoulder and finger armor of a bowman (baddha-godhäìguli-traëa). He broke Lord Çiva's bow (çambhu-kodaëòa-bhaïjana). He protected the yajïa (yajïa-trätä and yajïa-bhartä). He killed Maréca (märéca-vadha-käraka).

Text 30 
asuräris täöakärir
     vibhéñaëa-sahäya-kåt
pitå-väkya-karo harñé
     virädhärir vanecarah

     He is the enemy of the demons (asuräri), the enemy of Täöaka (täöakäri), the ally of Vibhéñaëa (vibhéñaëa-sahäya-kåt), a son who followed His father's order (pitå-väkya-kara), (harñé), happy (virädhäri), and the Lord who wandered in the forest (vanecara).

Text 31 
munir muni-priyaç citra-
     kutaräëya-niväsa-kåt
kabandhahä daëòakeço
     rämo räjiva-locanah

     He is a sage (muni), dear to the sages (muni-priya), a resident of Citraküöa forest (citraküöaräëya-niväsa-kåt), the killer of Kabandha (kabandhahä), the master of Daëòaka forest (daëòakeça), Lord Räma (räma), and lotus-eyed (räjiva-locana).

Text 32 
mataìga-vana-saïcäré
     netä païcavaté-patih
sugrévah sugréva-sakho
     hanumat-préta-mänasah

     He wandered in Mataìga forest (mataìga-vana-saïcäré). He is supreme leader (netä). He is the master of Païcavaté forest (païcavaté-pati). He has a graceful neck (sugréva), and is the friend of Sugréva (sugréva-sakha). In His heart He loves Hanumän (hanumat-préta-mänasa).

Text 33 
setubandho rävaëärir
     laìkä-dahana-tat-parah
rävaëyärih puñpakastho
     jänaké-virahäturah

     He built the bridge at Setubandha (setubandha), is the enemy of Rävaëa (rävaëäri), burned Laìkä to the ground (laìkä-dahana-tat-para), is the enemy of Rävaëa (rävaëyäri), traveled in a flower-chariot (puñpakastha), and was distressed in separation from Sétä (jänaké-virahätura).

Text 34 

ayodhyädhipatih çrémal
     lavaëärih surärcitah
sürya-vaàçé candra-vaàçé
     vaàçé-vädya-viçäradah

     He was the king of Ayodhyä (ayodhyädhipati), handsome and glorious (çrémal), the enemy of Lavaëäsura (lavaëäri), worshiped by the devas (surärcita), born in the Sürya dynasty (sürya-vaàçé), born in the Candra dynasty (candra-vaàçé), and expert at playful the flute (vaàçé-vädya-viçärada).

Text 35 
gopatir gopa-våndeço
     gopo gopéçatävåtaù
gokuleço gopa-putro
     gopälo go-gaëäçrayaù

     He is the master of the surabhi cows (gopati), the master of the gopas (gopa-våndeça), a gopa (gopa), surrounded by hundred of gopés (gopéçatävåta), the master of Gokula (gokuleça), the son of a gopa (gopa-putra), the protector of the cows (gopäla), and the shelter of the cows (go-gaëäçraya).

Text 36 
pütanärir bakäriç ca
     tåëävarta-nipätakah
aghärir dhenukäriç ca
     pralambärir vrajeçvarah

     He is the enemy of Pütanä (pütanäri), the enemy of Baka (bakäri), the killer of Tåëävarta (tåëävarta-nipätaka), the enemy of Aghäsura (aghäri), the enemy of Dhenuka (dhenukäri), the enemy of Pralamba (pralambäri), and the king of Vraja (vrajeçvara).

Text 37 
ariñöa-hä keçi-çatrur
     vyomäsura-vinäça-kåt
agni-päno dugdha-päno
     våndävana-latäçritah

     He is the killer of Ariñöa (ariñöa-hä), the enemy of Keçé (keçi-çatru), the killer of Vyomäsura (vyomäsura-vinäça-kåt), the swallower of a forest-fire (agni-päna), a child who drinks milk (dugdha-päna), and a boy who stays among the flowering vines of Våndävana forest (våndävana-latäçrita).

Text 38 
yaçomati-suto bhavyo
     rohiné-lalitah çiçuh
räsa-maëòala-madhya-stho

     räsa-maëòala-maëòaëah

     He is the son of Yaçodä (yaçomati-suta), glorious, charming, handsome, and auspicious (bhavya), a child who plays with Rohiëé (rohiné-lalita), a child (çiçu), the dancer in the middle of the räsa-dance circle (räsa-maëòala-madhya-stha), and the ornament of the räsa-dance circle (räsa-maëòala-maëòaëa).

Text 39 
gopikä-çata-yüthärthé
     çaìkhacüòa-vadhodyatah
govardhana-samuddhartä
     çakra-jid vraja-rakñakah

     He yearns to enjoy pastimes with hundreds of gopés (gopikä-çata-yüthärthé). He is the killer of Çaìkhacüòa (çaìkhacüòa-vadhodyata), the lifter of Givardhana Hill (govardhana-samuddhartä), the warrior who defeated Indra (çakra-jid), and the protector of Vraja (vraja-rakñaka).

Text 40 
våñabhänu-varo nanda
     änando nanda-vardhanah
nanda-räja-sutah çréçah
     kaàsärih käliyäntakah

     He is the groom King Våñabhänu chose for his daughter (våñabhänu-vara). He is bliss personified (nanda and änanda), delightful (nanda-vardhana), the son of King Nanda (nanda-räja-suta), the master of the goddess of fortune (çréça), the enemy of Kaàsa (kaàsäri), and the subduer of Käliya (käliyäntaka).

Text 41 
rajakärir muñöikärih
     kaàsa-kodaëòa-bhaïjanah
cänurärih küöa-hantä
     çaläris toçaläntakah

     He is the enemy of a washerman (rajakäri), the enemy of Muñöika (muñöikäri), the breaker of Kaàsa's bow (kaàsa-kodaëòa-bhaïjana), the enemy of Cäëüra (cäëüräri), the killer of Küöa (küöa-hantä), the enemy of Çäla (çaläri), and the killer of Toçala (toçaläntaka).

Text 42 
kaàsa-bhratå-nihantä ca
     malla-yuddha-pravärtakah
gaja-hantä kaàsa-hantä
     käla-hantä kalaìka-hä

     He is the killer of Kaàsa's brothers (kaàsa-bhratå-nihantä), an expert wrestler (malla-yuddha-pravärtaka), the killer of an elephant (gaja-hantä), the killer of Kaàsa (kaàsa-hantä), the killer of Käla (käla-hantä), and the killer of Kalaìka (kalaìka-hä).

Text 43 
mägadhärir yavana-hä
     päëòu-putra-sahäya-kåt
catur-bhujah çyämaläìgah
     saumyaç caupagavi-priyah

     He is the enemy of Jaräsandha (mägadhäri), the killer of Kälayavana (yavana-hä), the ally of the Päëòavas (päëòu-putra-sahäya-kåt), four-armed Lord Näräyaëa (catur-bhuja), dark-complexioned Lord Kåñëa (çyämaläìga), gentle (saumya), and dear to Aupagavi (aupagavi-priya).

Text 44 
yuddha-bhåd uddhava-sakhä
     mantré mantra-viçäradah
véra-hä véra-mathanah
     çaìkha-cakra-gadä-dharah

     He is a warrior (yuddha-bhåd), the friend of Uddhava (uddhava-sakhä), a counselor (mantré), expert at giving counsel (mantra-viçärada), a killer of great warriors (véra-hä and véra-mathana), and the holder of a conch, disc, and club (çaìkha-cakra-gadä-dhara).

Text 45 
revaté-citta-hartä ca
     raivaté-harña-vardhanah
revaté-präëa-näthaç ca
     revaté-priya-kärakah

     He charmed Revaté's heart (revaté-citta-hartä), delighted Revaté (raivaté-harña-vardhana), is the Lord of Revaté's life (revaté-präëa-nätha), and is the delight of Revaté (revaté-priya-käraka).

Text 46 
jyotir jyotiñmaté-bhartä
     revatädri-vihära-kåt
dhåta-nätho dhanädhyakño
     dänädhyakño dhaneçvarah

     He is splendor (jyoti), the master of Jyotiñmaté (jyotiñmaté-bhartä), the enjoyer of pastimes on Mount Revata (revatädri-vihära-kåt), the master of patience and tolerance (dhåta-nätha), the final judge (dhanädhyakña), (dänädhyakña), and the master of wealth (dhaneçvara).

Text 47 
maithilärcita-pädabjo
     mänado bhakta-vatsalah
duryodhana-gurur gurvé
     gadä-çikñä-karah kñamé

     His lotus feet were worshiped by the people of Mithilä (maithilärcita-pädabja), He gives honor to others (mänada), He loves His devotees (bhakta-vatsala), He is the guru of Duryodhana (duryodhana-guru), He is devoted to His guru (gurvé), He taught the art of fighting with a club (gadä-çikñä-kara), and He is tolerant and forgiving (kñamé).

Text 48 
murärir madano mando
     'niruddho dhanvinäà varah
kalpa-våkñah kalpa-våkñé
     kalpa-våkña-vana-prabhuh

     He is the enemy of Mura (muräri), handsome like Kämadeva (madana), gentle (manda), invincible (aniruddha), the best of bowmen (dhanvinäà vara), a kalpa-våkña tree (kalpa-våkña and kalpa-våkñé), and the master of a forest of (kalpa-våkña trees (kalpa-våkña-vana-prabhu).

Text 49 
symantaka-maëir mänyo
     gäëòivé kairaveçvarah
kumbhäëòa-khaëòana-karah
     küpakarëa-prahära-kåt

     He is the owner of the Syamantaka jewel (symantaka-maëi), glorious (mänya), the friend of Arjuna (gäëòivé), the king of the Kauravas (kauraveçvara), the killer of Kumbäëòha (kumbhäëòa-khaëòana-kara), and the killer of Küpakarëa (küpakarëa-prahära-kåt).

Text 50 
sevyo raivata-jämätä
     madhu-mädhava-sevitah
baliñöha-puñöa-sarväìgo
     håñöah puñöah praharñitah

     He is the final object of devotional service (sevya), the son-in-law of King Revata (raivata-jämätä), served by Lord Kåñëa and the residents of Mathurä (madhu-mädhava-sevita), most powerful in every limb (baliñöha-puñöa-sarväìga), happy (håñöa and praharñita), and stout and strong (puñöa).

Text 51 

väräëasé-gatah kruddhah
     sarvah pauëòraka-ghätakah
sunandé çikharé çilpé
     dviviòäìga-niñüdanah

     He traveled to Väräëasé (väräëasé-gata). He may become angry (kruddha). He is everything (sarva). He killed Pauëòraka (pauëòraka-ghätaka). He carries the sword Sunanda (sunandé), wears a crown (çikharé), is artistic (çilpé), and killed Dviviòa (dviviòäìga-niñüdana).

     Note: Sunanda is the name of Lord Kåñëa's sword.

Text 52 

hastinäpura-saìkarñé
     rathé kaurava-püjitah
viçva-karmä viçva-dharmä
     deva-çarmä dayä-nidhih

     He dragged the city of Hastinäpura (hastinäpura-saìkarñé), is a great chariot-warrior (rathé), is worshiped by the Kauravas (kaurava-püjita), created the universes (viçva-karmä), is the giver of religon to the universes (viçva-dharmä), is the happiness of the demigods (deva-çarmä), and is an ocean of mercy (dayä-nidhi).

Text 53 
mahä-räja-cchatra-dharo
     mahä-räjopalakñaëah
siddha-gétah siddha-kathah
     çukla-cämara-véjitah

     He holds the royal parasol (mahä-räja-cchatra-dhara), has all the qualities of a great king (mahä-räjopalakñaëa), is glorified by the siddhas (siddha-géta and siddha-katha), and is fanned with white cämaras (çukla-cämara-véjita).

Text 54 
täräkñah kéranäsaç ca
     bimboñöhah su-smita-cchavih
karéndra-kära-kodaëòah
     pracaëòo megha-maëòalah

     His eyes are glittering stars (täräkña), His nose is graceful like a parrot's beak (kéranäsa), His lips are bimba fruits (bimboñöha), His gentle smile is splendid and glorious (su-smita-cchavi), His arms are elephants' trunks (karéndra-kära-kodaëòa), He is ferocious (pracaëòa), and He is splendid like a host of monsoon clouds (megha-maëòala).

Text 55 

kapäöa-vakñah pénäàsah
     padma-päda-sphurad-dyutih
mahä-vibhütir bhüteço
     bandha-mokñé samékñaëah

     His chest is a great door (kapäöa-vakña), His shoulders are broad (pénäàsa), His feet are splendid lotus flowers (padma-päda-sphurad-dyuti), He is very powerful and glorious (mahä-vibhüti), He is the master of all living entities (bhüteça), He is the liberator from material bondage (bandha-mokñé), and He is the most wise and intelligent (samékñaëa).

Text 56 
caidya-çatruh çatru-sandho
     dantavakra-niñüdakah
ajäta-çatruh päpa-ghno
    hari-däsa-sahäya-kåt

     He is the enemy of Çiçupäla (caidya-çatru), the end of His enemies (çatru-sandha), the killer of Dantavakra (dantavakra-niñüdaka), a person who has no enemy (ajäta-çatru), the destroyer of sins (päpa-ghna), and the ally of Lord Kåñëa's servants (hari-däsa-sahäya-kåt).

Text 57 
çäla-bähuh çälva-hantä
     tértha-yäyé janeçvarah
naimiñäraëya-yäträrthé
     gomaté-téra-väsa-kåt

     His arms are like palm trees (çäla-bähu). He is the killer of Çälva (çälva-hantä), a pilgrim (tértha-yäyé), the master of all living entities (janeçvara), a pilgrim to Naimiñäraëya (naimiñäraëya-yäträrthé), and He who lived by the Gomaté river (gomaté-téra-väsa-kåt).

Text 58 
gaëòaké-snäna-vän sragvé
     vaijayanté-viräjitah
amläna-paìkaja-dharo
     vipäçé soëa-samplutah

     He bathed in the Gaëòaké river (gaëòaké-snäna-vän), wears a garland (sragvé), is splendid with a Vaijayanté garland (vaijayanté-viräjita), holds an unfading lotus (amläna-paìkaja-dhara), visited the Vipäçä river (vipäçé), and bathed in the Soëa river (soëa-sampluta).

Text 59 
prayäga-tértha-räjaç ca
     sarayüh setu-bandhanah
gayä-çiraç ca dhanadah
     paulastyah pulahäçramah

     He visited Prayäga, the king of holy places (prayäga-tértha-räja), and He also visited the Saräyu river (sarayü), and Setubandha (setu-bandhana). He touched His head to the holy city of Gayä (gayä-çira). He gives wealth in charity (dhanada). He visited the sage Pulastya (paulastya), and He visted the äçrama of the sage Pulaha (pulahäçrama).

Text 60 
gaìgä-sägara-saìgärthé
     sapta-godävaré-patih
veëé bhimärthé godä
     tämraparëé vaöodakä

     He visited Gaìgä-sägara (gaìgä-sägara-saìgärthé). He is the master of the seven Godävarés (sapta-godävaré-pati). He is the Veëé (veëé), Bhémarathé (bhémarathé), Godä (godä), Tämraparëé (tämraparëé), and Vaöodakä rivers (vaöodakä).

Text 61 
kåtamälä mahä-puëyä
     kaveré ca payasviné
pratécé suprabhä veëé
     triveëé sarayüpamä

     He is the Kåtamälä) (kåtamälä), Mahä-puëyä (mahä-puëyä), Kaveré (kaveré), Payasviné (payasviné), Pratécé (pratécé), Suprabhä (suprabhä), Veëé (veëé), Triveëé (triveëé), and and Sarayüpamä rivers (sarayüpamä).

Text 62 
kåñëä pampä narmadä ca
     gaìgä bhägérathé nadé
siddhäçramah prabhäsaç ca
     bindur bindu-sarovarah

     He is the Kåñëä (kåñëä), Pampä (pampä), Narmadä (narmadä), Gaìgä (gaìgä), and Bhägérathé rivers (bhägérathé). He is all sacred rivers (nadé). He is Siddhäçrama (siddhäçrama), Prabhäsa (prabhäsa), Bindu (bindu), and Bindu-sarovara (bindu-sarovara).

Text 63 
puñkarah saindhavo jambü
     nara-näräyaëäçramah
kurukñetra-paté rämo
     jämadagnyo mahä-munih

     He is Puñkara (puñkara), Saindhava (saindhava), Jambü (jambü), and Nara-näräyaëäçrama (nara-näräyaëäçrama). He is the master of Kurukñetra (kurukñetra-paté). He is Lord Räma (räma). He is Paraçuräma (jämadagnya). He is a great sage (mahä-muni).

Text 64 
ilvalätmaja-hantä ca
     sudäma-saukhya-däyakah
viçva-jid viçva-näthaç ca
     triloka-vijayé jayé

     He killed Narakäsura (ilvalätmaja-hantä), delighted Sudhämä (sudäma-saukhya-däyaka), conquered the universe (viçva-jid), is the master of the universe (viçva-nätha), is the master of the three worlds (triloka-vijayé), and is victorious (jayé).

Text 65 
vasanta-mälaté-karñé
     gado gadyo gadägrajah
guëärëavo guëa-nidhir
     guëa-pätro guëäkarah

     He is glorious with vasanta and mälaté flowers (vasanta-mälaté-karñé). He is strong like a great mace (gada). He is expert at fighting with a mace (gadya). He is the elder brother of Gada (gadägraja). He is an ocean of virtues (guëärëava and guëa-nidhi), and a reservoir of virtues (guëa-pätra and guëäkara).

Text 66 
raìgavallé-jaläkäro
     nirguëah saguëo båhat
dåñöah çruto bhavad bhüto
     bhaviñyac cälpa-vigrahah

     He is decorated with vine-flowers (raìgavallé), enjoys water-pastimes (jaläkära), is beyond the modes of material nature (nirguëa), is filled with transcendental qualities (saguëa), is the greatest (båhat), is seen by the great devotees (dåñöa), is heard by the great devotees (çruta), and is the present (bhavad), the past (bhüta), and the future (bhaviñyat). He is the Supersoul, whose form is so small He stays in every atom (alpa-vigraha).

Text 67 
anädir ädir änandah
     pratyag-dhäma nirantarah
guëätétah samah sämyah
     sama-dåì nirvikalpakah

     He is without beginning (anädi), is the beginning of everything (ädi), is bliss personified (änanda), is the Supersoul who stays in everyone's heart (pratyag-dhäma), is eternal (nirantara), is beyond the modes of nature (guëätéta), is equal to all (sama, sämya and nirvikalpaka), and sees everyone with equal vision (sama-dåk).

Text 68 
güòha-vyüòho guëo gauëo
     guëäbhäso guëävåtah
nityo 'kñaro nirvikäro
     'kñaro 'jasra-sukho 'måtah

     He is concealed (güòhä) and He is openly manifested (vyüòha). He is filled with transcendental virtues (guëa, gauëa, guëäbhäsa, and guëävåta). He eternal (nitya), imperishable (akñara), unchanging (nirvikära), undying (akñara), always happy (ajasra-sukha), and like nectar (amåta).

Text 69 
sarvagah sarvavit särthah
     sama-buddhih sama-prabhah
akledyo 'cchedya äpürëo
     'çoñyo 'dähyo nivartakah

     He is all-pervading (sarvaga), all-knowing (sarvavit), the most valuable (särtha), equal to all (sama-buddhi and sama-prabha), untouched by water (akledya), unbreakable (acchedya), perfect and complete (äpürëa), never dried or withered (açoñya), and never to be burned by fire (adähya). He is the destroyer of the worlds (nivartaka).

Text 70 
brahma brahma-dharo brahmä
     jïäpako vyäpakah kavih
adhyätmako 'dhibhütaç cä-
     dhidaivah sväçrayäçrayah

     He is Brahman (brahma), the origin of Brahman (brahma-dhara), the origin of demigod Brahmä (brahmä), the supreme teacher (jïäpaka), all-pervading (vyäpaka), and the greatest philosopher (kavi). He is present in the hearts of all living entities (adhyätmaka). He is present in the material elements (adhibhüta). He is present among the demigods (adhidaiva). He is the shelter of all shelters (sväçrayäçraya).

Text 71 
mahä-väyur mahä-véraç
     ceñöä-rüpa-tanu-sthitah
prerako bodhako bodhé
     trayo-viàçatiko gaëah

     He is the great wind (mahä-väyu). He is a great hero (mahä-véra). As the power of action He stays in every body (ceñöä-rüpa-tanu-sthita). He inspires the living entities (preraka), and enlightens them (bodhaka). He is the mist wise (bodhé). He is the master of the demigods (trayo-viàçatika-gaëa).

Text 72 
aàçäàçaç ca naräveço
     'vatäro bhüpari-sthitah
mahar janas tapah satyaà
     bhür bhuvah svar iti tridhä

     He expands in many incarnations (aàçäàça). He appears as a çakty-äveça incarnation (naräveça). He descends to the material world (avatära and bhüpari-sthita). He is Maharloka (mahah), Janaloka (jana), Tapoloka (tapah), and Satyaloka (satyam). He is the three planetary systems: Bhüloka (bhü), Bhuvarloka (bhuvah), Svarloka (svah). 
Text 73 
naimittikah präkåtika
     ätyantika-mayo layah
sargo visargah sargädir
     nirodho rodha ütimän

     Although He appears in the material world (naimittika and präkåtika), He is eternal (ätyantika-maya). He is cosmic devastation (laya), cosmic creation (sarga), the secondary stage of cosmic creation (visarga), and the beginning of creation (
sargädi). He is the greatest obstacle (nirodha and rodha), and the greatest protector (ütimän).

Text 74 
manvantarävatäraç ca
     manur manu-suto 'naghah
svayambhüh çämbhavah çaìkuh
     sväyambhuva-sahäya-kåt

     He appears as the Manvantarävatäras (manvantarävatära). He is Manu (manu) and the sons of Manu (manu-suta). He is sinless (anagha), self-born (svayambhü), and a friend of Lord Çiva (çämbhava). He is like a great lance (çaìku). He is the ally of Sväyambhuva Manu (sväyambhuva-sahäya-kåt).

Text 75 
surälayo deva-girir
     merur hemärcito girih
giriço gaëa-näthaç ca
     gairéço giri-gahvarah

     He is the home of the demigods (surälaya), the mountain of the demigods (deva-giri), Mount Meru (meru), splendid like gold (hemärcita), and a great ountain (giri). He stays on a mountain (giriça). He is the master of the devotees (gaëa-nätha) and a friend of Lord Çiva (gairéça). He stays in a mountain cave (giri-gahvara).

Text 76 
vindhyas triküöo mainäkah
     subalah päribhadrakah
pataìgah çiçirah kaìko
     järudhih çaila-sattamah

     He is the Vindhyä mountains (vindhya), Mount Triküöa (triküöa), and Mount Mainäka (mainäka). He is very powerful (subala). He is the päribhadraka tree (päribhadraka), the sun (pataìga), the winter season ( çiçira), Yama (kaìka), Järudhi (järudhi), and the best of mountains (çaila-sattama).

Text 77 
kälaïjaro brhat-sänur
     daré-bhån nandikeçvarah
santänas taru-räjaç ca
     mandärah pärijätakah

     He is Kälaïjara (kälaïjara) and Brhat-sänu (brhat-sänu). He stays in a mountain cave (daré-bhåt). He is Nandikeçvara (nandikeçvara), the santäna tree (santäna), the king of trees (taru-räja), the mandära tree (mandära), and the pärijäta tree (pärijätaka).

Text 78 
jayanta-kåj jayantäìgo
     jayanté-dig jayäkulah
våtra-hä devalokaç ca
     çaçé kumuda-bändhavah

     He is victorious (jayanta-kåt jayantäìga, jayanté-dig, and jayäkula). He is the killer of Våtra (våtra-hä). He is the planets of the demigods (devaloka), and the moon (çaçé and kumuda-bändhava).

Text 79 
nakñatreçah sudhä-sindhur
     mågah puñyah punarvasuh
hasto 'bhijic ca çravaëo
     vaidhåtir bhäskarodayah

     He is the moon (nakñatreça), an ocean of nectar (sudhä-sindhu), the star Mågaçérña (måga), the star Puñya (puñya), the star Punarvasu (punarvasu), the star Hasta (hasta), the star Abhijit (abhijit), and the star Çravaëa (çravaëa). He is the vaidhåti formation of the stars (vaidhåti), and He is the sunrise (bhäskarodaya).

Text 80 
aindrah sädhyah çubhah çuklo
     vyatépäto dhruvah sitah
çiçumäro devamayo
     brahmaloko vilakñaëah

     He is the star Aindra (aindra). He is Sädhyaloka (sädhya). He is the auspicious conjunction of stars (çubha). He is the bright fortnight (çukla). He is the astrological condition known as vyatépäta (vyatépäta). He is Dhruvaloka (dhruva). He is the bright fortnight (sita), the Çiçumära-cakra (çiçumära), the planets of the demigods (devamaya), and Brahmaloka (brahmaloka). He is beyond the material world (vilakñaëa).

Text 81 
rämo vaikuëöha-näthaç ca
     vyäpé vaikuëöha-näyakah
svetadvépo jita-pado
     lokälokäcaläçritah

     He is Lord Räma (räma). He is the master of Vaikuëöha (vaikuëöha-nätha and vaikuëöha-näyaka). He is all-pervading (vyäpé), the master of Çvetadvépa (svetadvépa), the Lord who has conquered everything (jita-pada), and the Lord who stays on Mount Lokäloka (lokälokäcaläçrita).

Text 82 
bhümi-vaikuëöha-devaç ca
     koöi-brahmäëòa-kärakah
asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     golokeço gaväm-patih

     He is the master of Bhümi-vaikuëöha (bhümi-vaikuëöha-deva), the creator of millions of universes (koöi-brahmäëòa-käraka), the master of countless universes (asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-pati), the master of Goloka (golokeça), and the master of the cows (gaväm-pati).

Text 83 
goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëo
     gopikä-kaëöha-bhüñaëah
çrédharah çrédharo lélä-
     dharo giri-dharo dhuré

     He resides in Goloka (goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëa). The gopés' embraces have become His necklace (gopikä-kaëöha-bhüñaëa). He is the master of the goddess of fortune (çrédhara). He is the master of all handsomeness, glory, and opulence (çrédhara). He is playful (lélä-dhara). He lifted Govardhana Hill (giri-dhara). He is the maintainer of the world (dhuré).

Text 84 
kunta-dhäré triçülé ca
     bébhatsé gharghara-svanah
çüla-sücy-arpita-gajo
     gaja-carma-dharo gajé

     He is Lord Çiva who carries a trident (kunta-dhäré and triçülé), who is terrifying (bébhatsé), who roars ferociously (gharghara-svana), who with His trident attacked an elephant (çüla-sücy-arpita-gaja), who wears an elephant-skin garemnt (gaja-carma-dhara), and who rides on an elephant (gajé).

Text 85 
antra-mälé muëòa-mälé
     vyälé daëòaka-maëòaluh
vetäla-bhåd bhüta-saìghah
     küñmäëòa-gaëa-samvåtah

     He is Lord Nåsiàha who wears a garland of entrails (antra-mälé). He is Lord Çiva who wears a necklace of skulls (muëòa-mälé), who is ferocious (vyälé), who carries a club (daëòaka-maëòalu), who is accompanied by Vetälas (vetäla-bhåd), who is accompanied by ghosts (bhüta-saìgha), and who is accompanied by Küñmäëòas (küñmäëòa-gaëa-samvåta).

Text 86 
pramatheçah paçu-patir
     måòänéço måòo våñah
kåtänta-käla-saìghärih
     küöah kalpänta-bhairavah

     He is Lord Çiva who is the master of the Pramathas (pramatheça), the master of the Paçus (paçu-pati), the husband of Pärvaté (måòänéça), gentle (måòa), powerful (våña), the killer of His enemies (kåtänta-käla-saìghäri), most exalted (küöa), and who appears as Bhairava at the end of time (kalpänta-bhairava).

Text 87 
ñaò-änano véra-bhadro
     dakña-yajïa-vighätakah
kharparäsé viñäçé ca
     çakti-hastah çivärthadah

     He is Kärttikeya, who has six heads (ñaò-änana). He is Vérabhadra (véra-bhadra). He destroyed the Dakña-yajïa (dakña-yajïa-vighätaka). He eats from a bowl that is a skull (kharparäsé). He drinks poison (viñäçé), holds a çakti weapon in His hand (çakti-hasta), and grants auspiciousness (çivärthada).

Text 88 
pinäka-öaìkära-karaç
     cala-jhaìkara-nüpurah
paëòitas tarka-vidvän vai
     veda-päöhé çrutéçvarah

     When He releases arrows from His bow it makes a great twanging sound (pinäka-öaìkära-kara). He wears tinkling anklets (cala-jhaìkara-nüpura). He is wise (paëòita), a master logician (tarka-vidvän), learned in the Vedas (veda-päöhé), and the master of the Vedas (çrutéçvara).

Text 89 
vedänta-kåt saìkhya-çästré
     mémäàsé kaëa-näma-bhäk
käëädir gautamo vädé
     vädo naiyäyiko nayah

     He is the author of Vedänta (vedänta-kåt), learned in Saìkhya (saìkhya-çästré), learned in Mémäàsä (mémäàsé), known by the name Kaëäda (kaëa-näma-bhäk and käëädi), known as Gautama (gautama), and expert in philosophical debate (vädé, väda, naiyäyika, and naya).

Text 90 
vaiçeñiko dharma-çästré
     sarva-çästrärtha-tattva-gah
vaiyäkaraëa-kåc chando
     vaiyyäsah präkåtir vacah

     He is learned in the Vaiçeña philosophy (vaiçeñika), learned in the dharma-çästras (dharma-çästré), learned in all the scriptures (sarva-çästrärtha-tattva-ga), the author of grammar (vaiyäkaraëa-kåt), learned in the meters of poetry (chanda), the Vyäsa's son (vaiyyäsa), nature (präkåti), and speech (vacah).

Text 91 
päräçaré-saàhita-vit
     kävya-kån näöaka-pradah
pauräëikah småti-karo
     vaidyo vidyä-viçäradah

     He is learned in the Paräçara-çästra (päräçaré-saàhita-vit), the author of poetry (kävya-kåt), the giver of dramas (näöaka-prada), learned in the Puräëas (pauräëika), the author of the Vedas (småti-kara), the first physician (vaidya), and very learned (vidyä-viçärada).

Text 92 
alaìkäro lakñaëärtho
     vyaìgya-viddhanavad-dhvanih
väkya-sphoöah pada-sphoöah
     sphoöa-våttiç ca särtha-vit

     He is the ornaments of poetry (alaìkära), the secondary meanings of words (lakñaëärtha), the hinted meanings of words (vyaìgya-viddhanavad-dhvani), and the meaning that first comes to mind when one hears a statement (väkya-sphoöa, pada-sphoöa, and (sphoöa-våtti). He knows the meanings of words (särtha-vit).

Text 93 
çåìgära ujjvalah svaccho
     'dbhuto häsyo bhayänakah
açvattho yava-bhojé ca
     yava-kréto yaväçanah

     He is decoration (çåìgära), splendor (ujjvala and svaccha), wonder (adbhuta), joking (häsya), fear (bhayänaka), the banyan tree (açvattha), and the philosopher Kaëäda (yava-bhojé, yava-kréta, and yaväçana).

Text 94 
prahläda-rakñakah snigdha
     aila-vaàça-vivardhanah
gatädhir ambaréñäìgo
     vigädhir gädhinäà varah

     He is the protector of Prahläda (prahläda-rakñaka), affectionate (snigdha), the glory of the Aila dynasty (aila-vaàça-vivardhana), free of anxiety (gatädhi), Ambaréña (ambaréñäìga), Gädhi (vigädhi), the best of Gädhi's descendents (gädhinäà vara).

Text 95 
nänä-maëi-samäkérëo
     nänä-ratna-vibhüñaëah
nänä-puñpa-dharah puñpé
     puñpa-dhanva su-puñpitah

     He is decorated with many jewels (nänä-maëi-samäkérëa and nänä-ratna-vibhüñaëa) and decorated with many flowers (nänä-puñpa-dhara, puñpé, and su-puñpita). He is Kämadeva who holds a bow of flowers (puñpa-dhanva).

Text 96 
nänä-candana-gandhäòhyo
     nänä-puñpa-rasärcitah
nänä-varëa-mayo varëo
     nänä-vastra-dharah sadä

     He is fragrant with sandal paste (nänä-candana-gandhäòhya), anointed with the fragrant juices of many flowers (nänä-puñpa-rasärcita), decorated with garments and ornaments of many colors (nänä-varëa-maya), glorious (varëa), always dressed in opulent and elaborate garments (nänä-vastra-dhara sadä).

Text 97 
nänä-padma-karah kauçé
     nänä-kauçeya-veña-dhåk
ratna-kambala-dhäré ca
     dhauta-vastra-samävåtah

     He holds many lotus flowers in His hand (nänä-padma-kara), is dressed in silk garments (kauçé nänä-kauçeya-veña-dhåk), wears a jewel cloak (ratna-kambala-dhäré), and is dressed in splendid clean garments (dhauta-vastra-samävåta).

Text 98 
uttaréya-dharah purëo
     ghana-kaïcuka-saìghavän
pétoñëéñah sitoñëéño
     raktoñëéño dig-ambarah

     He wears an upper garment (uttaréya-dhara). He is perfect (purëa). He wears strong armor (ghana-kaïcuka-saìghavän), a yellow turban (pétoñnéña), a white turban (sitoñëéña), or a red turban (raktoñëéña). Sometimes He wears the four directions as His garment (dig-ambara).

Text 99 
divyäìgo divya-racano
     divya-loka-vilokitah
sarvopamo nirupamo
     golokäìké-kåtäìgaëah

     His limbs are splendid (divyäìga), He is decorated with great splendor (divya-racana), the residents of Devaloka gaze on Him (divya-loka-vilokita), He is the best of all (sarvopama), He is without peer ( nirupama), and He stays with His associates in the realm of Goloka (golokäìké-kåtäìgaëa).

Text 100

kåta-svotsäìga-go lokah
     kuëòalé-bhüta ästhitah
mäthuro mathurä-darçé
     calat-khaïjana-locanah

     He stays in Goloka (kåta-svotsäìga-goloka), He is Lord Ananta (kuëòalé-bhüta), He is all-pervading (ästhita), He stays in Mathurä (mäthura), He gazes at the sights of Mathurä (mathurä-darçé), and His eyes are like restless khaïjana birds (calat-khaïjana-locana).

Text 101

dadhi-hartä dugdha-haro
     navanéta-sitäçanah
takra-bhuk takra-häré ca
     dadhi-caurya-kåta-çramah

     As a child He is a yogurt thief (dadhi-hartä), a milk thief (dugdha-hara), an eater of butter (navanéta-sitäçana), a drinker of buttermilk (takra-bhuk), a thief of buttermilk (takra-häré), and exhausted by stealing yogurt (dadhi-caurya-kåta-çrama).

Text 102 
prabhävaté-baddha-karo
     dämé dämodaro damé
sikatä-bhümi-cäré ca
     bäla-kelir vrajärbhakah

     As a child His hands were tied by His powerful mother (prabhävaté-baddha-kara), He was tied up (dämé), He was tied at the waist (dämodara), He was tied up (damé), He crawled on the ground (sikatä-bhümi-cäré), and He enjoyed the pastimes of a child (bäla-keli). He was a child in Vraja (vrajärbhaka).

Text 103 
dhüli-dhüsara-sarväìgah
     käka-pakña-dharah sudhéh
mukta-keço vatsa-våndäh
     kälindé-küla-vékñaëah

     As a child all His limbs were sometimes covered with dust (dhüli-dhüsara-sarväìga), He was decorated with crow's feathers (käka-pakña-dhara), He was intelligent (sudhé), His hair was sometimes dishevelled (mukta-keça), He stayed with the calves (vatsa-våndä), and He gazed at the Yamunä's shore (kälindé-küla-vékñaëa).

Text 104 
jala-kolähalé külé
     paìka-präìgana-lepakah
çré-våndävana-saïcäré
     vaàçévaöa-taöa-sthitah

     He played in the Yamunä's waves (jala-kolähalé), and on its shore (külé), As He crawled in the courtyard He became anointed with mud (paìka-präìgana-lepaka), He wandered in Våndävana forest (çré-våndävana-saïcäré), and He rested at Vaàçévaöa (vaàçévaöa-taöa-sthita).

Text 105 
mahävana-niväsé ca
     lohärgala-vanädhipah
sädhuh priyatamah sädhyah
     sädhv-éço gata-sädhvasah

     He resided in Mahävana (mahävana-niväsé), He was the king of Lohärgalavana (lohärgala-vanädhipa), He was a great saint (sädhu), the most dear (priyatama), attainable by the devotees (sädhya), the Lord of the devotees (sädhv-éça), and fearless (gata-sädhvasa).

Text 106 
raìga-nätho viööaleço
     mukti-nätho 'gha-näçakah
su-kértih su-yaçäh sphéto
     yaçasvé raìga-raïjanah

     He is the Lord of Raìgakñetra (raìga-nätha), the Lord of Viööala (viööaleça), the Lord of liberation (mukti-nätha), the destroyer of sins (agha-näçaka), glorious (su-kérti, su-yaçä, sphéta), and yaçasvé), and the delight of the devotees (raìga-raïjana).

Text 107 
räga-ñaöko räga-putro
     rägiëé-ramaëotsukah
dépako megha-mallärah
     çré-rägo mäla-koçakah

     He is the six kinds of rägas (räga-ñaöka). He is the rägas Räga-putra (räga-putra), Rägiëé-ramaëotsuka (rägiëé-ramaëotsuka), Dépaka (dépaka), Megha-mallära (megha-mallära), Çré-räga (çré-räga), and Mäla-koçaka (mäla-koçaka).

Text 108 
hindolo bhairaväkhyaç ca
     svara-jäti-smaro måduh
tälo mäna-pramäëaç ca
     svara-gamyah kaläkñarah

     He is the räas Hindola (hindola) and Bhairava (bhairaväkhya). He is love born by hearing beautiful melodies (svara-jäti-smara). He is gentle (mådu). He is graceful musical rhythms (täla and mäna-pramäëa). He is melody (svara-gamya), and He is graceful singing (kaläkñara).

Text 109 
çamé çyämé çatänandah
     çata-yämah çata-kratuh
jägarah supta äsuptah
     suñuptah svapna urvarah

     He self-controlled (çamé). He is dark-complexioned Lord Kåñëa (çyämé). He has a hundred blisses (çatänanda), He forgives a hundred offenses (çata-yäma), He performed a hundred yajïas (çata-kratu), He is awake and alert (jägara), He sleeps (supta, äsupta, suñupta, svapna). He is great (urvara).

Text 110 
ürjah sphürjo nirjaraç ca
     vijvaro jvara-varjitah
jvara-jij jvara-kartä ca
     jvara-yuk tri-jvaro jvarah

     He is power (ürja), and glory (sphürja). He is free from the fever of anxiety (nirjara, vijvara, jvara-varjita, and jvara-jit), He lights the fever of anxiety in the demons (jvara-kartä), He is passionate (jvara-yuk), He is the three passions (tri-jvara), and He is passion (jvara).

Text 111 
jämbavän jambukäsaìké
     jambudvépo dvipäri-hä
çälmalih çälmali-dvépah
     plakñah plakñavaneçvarah

     He is Jämbavän (jämbavän), He does not trust the demons (jambukäsaìké), He resides in Jambudvépa (jambudvépa), He killed an elephant that attacked Him (dvipäri-hä), He is Çälmali (çälmali), He resides in Çälmalidvépa (çälmali-dvépa), He is Plakña (plakña), and He is the master of Plakñavana forest (plakñavaneçvara).

Text 112 
kuça-dhäré kuçah kausé
     kauçikah kuça-vigrahah
kuçasthalé-patih käçé-
     nätho bhairava-çäsanah

     He holds a blade of kuça grass (kuça-dhäré, kuça, kauçé, kauçika, and kuça-vigraha). He is the king of Dvärakä (kuçasthalé-pati), the king of Väräëasé (käçé-nätha), and the master of Bhairava (bhairava-çäsana).

Text 113 
däçärhah sätvato våñëir
     bhojo 'ndhaka-niväsa-kåt
andhako dundubhir dyotah
     pradyotah satvatäm-patih

     He is the great descendent of King Daçärha (däçärha), and a great king of the Satvata dynasty (sätvata), the Våñëi dynasty (våñëi), and the Bhoja dynasty (bhoja). He stays among the kings of the Andhaka dynasty (andhaka-niväsa-kåt and andhaka). He is glorified by the sounding of Dundubhi drums (dundubhi). He is glorious (dyota and pradyota). He is the master of the Satvatas (satvatäm-pati).

Text 114 
çüraseno 'nuviñayo
     bhoja-våñëy-andhakeçvarah
ähukah sarva-néti-jïa
     ugraseno mahogra-väk

     He is Çürasena (çürasena), He is Anuviñaya (anuviñaya), He is the king of the Bhoja, Våñëi, and Andhaka dynasties (bhoja-våñëy-andhakeçvara), He is Ahüka (ähuka), He knows what is right (sarva-néti-jïa), He is Ugrasena (ugrasena), and He can speak very fiercely (mahogra-väk).

Text 115 
ugrasena-priyah prärthyah
     päryo yadu-sabhä-patih
sudharmädhipatih sattvaà
     våñëi-cakrävåto bhiñak

     He is dear to King Ugrasena (ugrasena-priya), the devotees offer prayers to Him (prärthya), He is the Päëòavas (pärtha), He is the leader of the assembled Yädavas (yadu-sabhä-pati), He is the leader of the Sudharma assembly (sudharmädhipati), He is existence (sattvaà), He is surrounded by the Våñëis (våñëi-cakrävåta), and He is the supreme physician (bhiñak).

Text 116 
sabhä-çélah sabhä-dépah
     sabhägniç ca sabhä-ravih
sabhä-candrah sabhä-bhäsah
     sabhä-devah sabhä-patih

     He is an exalted member of the assembly (sabhä-çéla), He is a lamp shining in the assembly (sabhä-dépa), the fire of the assembly (sabhägni), the sun of the assembly (sabhä-ravi), the moon of the assembly (sabhä-candra), the splendor of the assembly (sabhä-bhäsa), the Deity of the assembly (sabhä-deva), and the master of the assembly (sabhä-pati).

Text 117 
prajärthadah prajä-bhartä
     prajä-pälana-tat-parah
dvärakä-durga-saïcäré
     dvärakä-graha-vigrahah

     He fulfills the desires of the citizens (prajärthada), maintains the citizens (prajä-bhartä), protects the citizens (prajä-pälana-tat-para), guards the Dvärakä fort (dvärakä-durga-saïcäré), and stays in Dvärakä (dvärakä-graha-vigraha).

Text 118 
dvärakä-duhkha-saàhartä
     dvärakä-jana-maìgalah
jagan-mätä jagat-trätä
     jagad-bhartä jagat-pitä

     He removes all sufferings from Dvärakä (dvärakä-duhkha-saàhartä). He is the auspiciousness of Dvärakä's citizens (dvärakä-jana-maìgala), the mother of the universes (jagan-mätä), the protector of the universes (jagat-trätä), the maintainer of the universes (jagad-bhartä), and the father of the universes (jagat-pitä).

Text 119 
jagad-bandhur jagad-bhrätä
     jagan-mitro jagat-sakhah
brahmaëya-devo brahmaëyo
     brahma-päda-rajo-dadhat

     He is the friend of the universes (jagad-bandhu, jagan-mitra, and jagat-sakha), the creator of the universes (jagad-dhätä), and the Deity worshiped by the brähmaëas (brahmaëya-deva and brahmaëya). He respectfully touches the dust of the brähmaëas' feet (brahma-päda-rajo-dadhat).

Text 120 
brahma-päda-rajah-sparçé
     brahma-päda-niñevakah
vipräìghri-jala-pütäìgo
     vipra-sevä-paräyaëah

     He respectfully touches the dust of the brähmaëas' feet (brahma-päda-rajah-sparçé), He serves the brähmaëas' feet (brahma-päda-niñevaka), He purifies Himself by sprinkling on His head the water that has washed the brähmaëas' feet (vipräìghri-jala-pütäìga), and He devotedly serves the brähmaëas (vipra-sevä-paräyaëa).

Text 121 
vipra-mukhyo vipra-hito
     vipra-géta-mahä-kathah
vipra-päda-jalärdräìgo
     vipra-pädodaka-priyah

     He is the best of the brähmaëas (vipra-mukhya), the auspiciousness of the brähmaëas (vipra-hita), the supreme master whose glories are sung by the brähmaëas (vipra-géta-mahä-katha), and the supreme master who sprinkles on Himself the water that has washed the brähmaëas' feet (vipra-päda-jalärdräìga and vipra-pädodaka-priya).

Text 122 
vipra-bhakto vipra-gurur
     vipro vipra-padänugah
akñauhiëé-våto yoddhä
     pratimä-païca-samyutah

     He is devoted to the brähmaëas (vipra-bhakta), the guru of the brähmaëas (vipra-guru), a brähmaëa (vipra), a follower of the brähmaëas (vipra-padänuga), accompanied by an akñauhiëé military division (akñauhiëé-våta), a great warrior (yoddhä), and manifested as five Deities (pratimä-païca-samyuta).

Text 123 
catur aìgiräh padma-varté
     samäntoddhåta-pädukah
gaja-koöi-prayäyé ca
     ratha-koöi-jaya-dhvajah

     He is Catu (catu), Aìgirä (aìgirä), and Padmavarté (padma-varté). Samänta Muni worships His feet (samäntoddhåta-päduka). He is powerful like ten million elephants (gaja-koöi-prayäyé). His flag of victory flies over the defeat of ten million chariot-warriors (ratha-koöi-jaya-dhvaja).

Text 124 
mahärathaç cätiratho
     jaitraà syandanam ästhitah
näräyaëästré brahmästré
     raëa-çläghé raëodbhaöah

     He is a great chariot warrior (mahäratha and atiratha). He rides a victory-chariot jaitraà-syandanam-ästhita). He wields the näräyaëästra weapon (näräyaëästré) and the brahmästra weapon (brahmästré). He is a famous warrior (raëa-çläghé and raëodbhaöa).

Text 125 
madotkaöo yuddha-véro
     deväsura-bhayaìkarah
kari-karëa-marut-prejat-
     kuntala-vyäpta-kuëòalah

     He is a ferocious warrior (madotkaöa), a hero in battle (yuddha-véra), and frightening even to the demigods and demons (deväsura-bhayaìkara). Moving in the wind, His long hair and earrings are like a great elephant's ear (kari-karëa-marut-prejat-kuntala-vyäpta-kuëòala).

Text 126 
agrago véra-sammärdo
     mardalo raëa-durmadah
bhaöah pratibhaöah procyo
     bäëa-varñéñutoyadah

     He is the first before all others (agraga). He crushes the enemy warriors in battle (véra-sammärda, mardala, raëa-durmada, bhaöa, and pratibhaöa). He is glorious (procya). He rains a shower of arrows on the enemy (bäëa-varñé and iñu-toyada).

Text 127 
khaòga-khaëdéta-sarväìgah
     ñoòaçäbdah ñaò-akñarah
véra-ghoñah kliñöa-vapur
     vajräìgo vajra-bhedanah

     With His sword He cuts the enemy to pieces (khaòga-khaëdéta-sarväìga). He is a sixteen-year-old youth eternally (ñoòaçäbda). He does not suffer the six material distresses (ñaò-akñara). He makes a heroic roar (véra-ghoña). He brings distress to His enemies (kliñöa-vapu). His limbs are powerful like a series of thunderbolts (vajräìga). He breaks apart the thunderbolt weapons of His enemies (vajra-bhedana).

Text 128 
rugna-vajro bhagna-dantah
     çatru-nirbhartsanodyatah
aööa-häsah paööa-dhärah
     paööa-räjïé-patih paöuh

     He breaks apart the thunderbolt weapons of His enemies (rugna-vajra). He breaks His enemies' teeth (bhagna-danta). He rebukes His enemies (çatru-nirbhartsanodyata). He laughs loudly (aööa-häsa). He wears silk garments (paööa-dhära). He is the husband of a noble queen (paööa-räjïé-pati). He is very intelligent (paöu).

Text 129 
kälah pataha-väditro
     huìkäro garjita-svanah
sädhur bhakta-parädhénah
     svatantrah sädhu-bhüñaëah

     He is time (käla). Paöaha drums are sounded to celebrate His victory (pataha-väditra). He roars ferociously (huìkära and garjita-svana). He is saintly (sädhu), submissive to His devotees (bhakta-parädhéna), independent (svatantra), and decorated with the ornaments of saintly qualities (sädhu-bhüñaëa).

Text 130 
asvatantrah sädhumayah
     sädhu-grasta-manä manäk
sädhu-priyah sädhu-dhanah
     sädhu-jïätih sudhä-ghanah

     He is not independent (asvatantra). He is dependent on His devotees (sädhumaya). His heart is rapt in thinking of His devotees (sädhu-grasta-manä). He loves His devotees and they love Him (sädhu-priya). He is charitable to His devotees (sädhu-dhana). He is His devotees' kinsman (sädhu-jïäti). He is a monsoon cloud of nectar (sudhä-ghana).

Text 131 
sädhu-cäré sädhu-cittah
     sädhu-väsé çubhäspadah
iti nämnäà sahasraà tu
     balabhadrasya kértitam

     He stays among His devotees (sädhu-cäré and sädhu-väsé). His devotees stay in His heart (sädhu-citta). He is the abode of auspiciousness.      These are the thousand names of Lord Balaräma.

Text 132 
sarva-siddhi-pradaà nåëäà
     catur-varga-phala-pradam
çata-varaà paöhed yas tu
     sa vidyävän bhaved iha

     sarva-siddhi-pradam—giving all perfection; nåëäm—to the living entities; catur-varga-phala-pradam—giving the four goals of life; çata—a hundred; varam—times; paöhet—recites; yah—one who; tu—indeed; sa—he; vidyavän—wise; bhavet—becomes; iha—here.

     He becomes wise who a hundred times recites these names, which give the four goals of life and all perfection.

Text 133 
indiräà ca vimürtià cä-
     bhijanaà rüpam eva ca
bala-bhojaç ca paöhanät
     sarvaà präpnoti mänavah

     indiräm—wealth; ca—and; vimürtim—glory; ca—and; abhijanam—dynasty; rüpam—handsomeness; eva—indeed; ca—and; bala—strength; bhojah—enjoyment; ca—and; paöhanät—from reciting; sarvam—all; präpnoti—attains; mänavah—a person.

     One who recites these names pleases Lord Balaräma and thus attains all wealth, glory, good descendents, and handsomeness.

Text 134 
gaìgä-küle 'tha kälindé-
     küle devälaye tathä
sahasrävärta-päöhena
     balät siddhih präjayate

     gaìgä-küle—on the bank of the Gaìgä; atha—then; kälindé-küle—on the bank of the Yamunä; devälaye—in the temple of the Lord; tathä—so; sahasrävärta—a thousand times; päöhena—by reciting; balät—from Lord Balaräma; siddhih—perfection; präjayate—is born.

     By reciting these names a thousand times on the Gaìgä's shore, on the Yamunä's shore, or in the Lord's temple, by Lord Balaräma's mercy one attains perfection.

Text 135 
puträrthé labhate putraà
     dhanärtho labhate dhanam
bandhät pramucyate baddho
     rogé rogän nivartate

     puträrthé—desiring a son; labhate—attains; putram—a son; dhanärthah—desiring wealth; labhate—attains; dhanam—wealth; bandhät—from bondage; pramucyate—is freed; baddhah—bound; rogé—diseased; rogän—from disease; nivartate—is freed.

     One who desires a son attains a good son. One who desires wealth attains wealth. One who is imprisoned becomes free from prison. One who is diseased becomes cured of his disease.

Text 136 
ayutävärta-päöhe ca
     puräçcarya-vidhänatah
homa-tarpaëa-godäna-
     viprärcana-kåtodyamät

paöalaà paddhatéà stotraà
     kavacaà tu vidhäya ca
mahä-maëòala-bhartä syän
     maëòito maëòaleçvaraih

     ayuta—ten thousand; ävärta—times; päöhe—in reciting; ca—and; puräçcarya-vidhänatah—after performing puraçcarya; homa—homa; tarpaëa—tarpaëa; godäna—giving cows in charity; vipra—brähmaëas; arcana—worshiping; kåta-udyamät—than pious deeds; paöalam—paöala; paddhatém—paddhaté; stotram—stotra; kavacam—kavaca; tu—indeed; vidhäya—doing; ca—and; mahä-maëòala-bhartä—a great king; syän—becomes; maëòitah—decorated; maëòaleçvaraih—with many great kings.

     One who performs puräçcarya, recites the paöala, paddhaté, stotra, and kavaca, recites these names ten thousand times, offers homa and tarpaëa, gives cows in charity, and worships the brähmaëas becomes a great king decorated with a great host of vassal-kings.

Text 138 
mattebha-karëa-prahitä
     mada-gandhena vihvalä
alaìkaroti tad-dvaraà
     bhramad-bhåìgävalé bhåçam

     matta—maddened; ibha—elephant; karëa—ears; prahitä—sent; mada-gandhena—with the sweet freagtance; vihvalä—agitated; alaìkaroti—decorates; tad-dvaram—his door; bhramad-bhåìgävalé—many flying bees; bhåçam—greatly.

     Pushed by an elephant's ear, and maddened by the sweet fragrance they find there, a host of bees decorates his door.

Text 139 
niñkäraëah paöhed yas tu
     préty-arthaà revaté-pateh
nämnäà sahasraà räjendra
     sa jévan-mukta ucyate

     niñkäraëah—without any motive; paöhet—recites; yah—who; tu—indeed; préty-artham—for the pleasure; revaté-pateh—of Lord Balaräma; nämnäm—of names; sahasram—a thousand; räjendra—O great king; sa—he; jévan-mukta—liberated in this life; ucyate—is said.

     O great king, one who without any personal motive, only to please Lord Balaräma, recites these thousand names, is said to be liberated in this life.

Text 140

sadä vaset tasya gåhe
     balabhadro 'cyutägrajah
mahä-patäky api janah
     paöhen näma-sahasrakam

     sadä—eternally; vaset—resides; tasya—of him; gåhe—in the home; balabhadrah—Lord Balaräma; acyuta—of Lord Kåñëa; agrajah—the elder brother; mahä-patäky—a great sinner; api—even; janah—a person; paöhet—recites; näma-sahasrakam—thousand names.

     Lord Balaräma, the elder brother of Lord Kåñëa, eternally resides in the home of even a great sinner who recites these thousand names.

Text 141

chittvä meru-samaà päpaà
     bhuktvä sarva-sukhaà tv iha
parät paraà mahä-räja
     golokaà dhäma yäti hi

     chittvä—breaking; meru-samam—like Mount Meru; päpam—sin; bhuktvä—enjoying; sarva-sukham—all happiness; tv—indeed; iha—here; parät—than the greatest; param—greater; mahä-räja—O great king; golokam—to Goloka; dhäma—the realm; yäti—goes; hi—indeed.

     O great king, that person destroys a host of sins equal to Mount Meru. He enjoys great happiness, and then He goes to the realm of Goloka, which is above the highest place in the spiritual world.

Text 142

     çré-närada uväca iti çrutvacyutägrajasya baladevasya païcäìgaà dhåtimän dhärtaräñörah saparyayä sahitayä parayä bhaktyä präòvipäkaà püjayäm äsa tam anujïäpyäçiñaà dattvä präòvipäko munéndro gajähvayät sväçramaà jagäma.

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutva acyutägrajasya—hearing of Kåñëa's elder brother; baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; païcäìgam—five limbs; dhåtimän—self-controlled; dhärtaräñörah—the son of Dhrtarastra; saparyäya—wor5shiping; sahitäya—with; paräya—great; bhaktyä—devotion; präòvipäkam—Präòvipäka; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; tam—him; anujïäpya—taking permission;; äçiñam—blessing; dattvä—giving; präòvipäkah—Präòvipäka; munéndrah—the sage; gajähvayät—from Hastinäpura; sväçramam—to his own äçrama; jagäma—went.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing these five procedures for worshiping Lord Balaräma, the saintly son of Dhåtaräñötra worshiped Präòvipäka Muni with great devotion. After giving his blessings, Präòvipäka, the king of sages, left Hastinäpura and returned to his own äçrama. 
Text 143

     bhagavato 'nantasya balabhadrasya para-brahmaëah kathäà yah çåëute çrävayate tayänanda-mayo bhavati.

     bhagavatah—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; anantasya—Ananta; balabhadrasya—Lord Balaräma; para-brahmaëah—the Supreme Brahman; kathäm—topics; yah—one who; çåëute—hears; çrävayate—causes others to hear; tayä—by that; änanda-mayah—filled with bliss; bhavati—becomes.

     One who hears or repeats these descriptions of limitless Lord Balaräma. the Supreme Personality of Godhead, becomes filled with bliss.

Text 144

idaà mayä te kathitaà nåpendra
     sarvärthadaà çré-balabhadra-khaëòam
çåëoti yo dhäma hareh sa yäti
     viçokam änandam akhaëòa-rüpam

     idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; nåpendra—O great king; sarvärthadam—giving all desires; çré-balabhadra—of Lord Balaräma; khaëòam—the canto; çåëoti—hears; yah—one who; dhäma—to the abode; hareh—of Lord Kåñëa; sa—he; yäti—goes; viçokam—without sufferings; änandam—bliss; akhaëòa—unbroken; rüpam—form.

     O great king, thus I have recited for you the Balaräma-khaëòa, which fulfills all desires. Anyone who hears it goes to Lord Kåñëa transcendental abode, which is eternal, full of bliss, and free of any suffering.
.pa

TEXT NUMBERS OF LORD BALARAMA'S THOUSAND NAMES

(The name is placed first and the Text Number follows.)

Abhijit, 79 * Acchedya, 69 * Acyuta, 5 * Acyutagraja, 6 * Adahya, 69 * Adbhuta, 93 * Adhibhuta, 70 * Adhidaiva, 70 * Adhyatmaka, 70 * Adi, 67 * Advitiya, 14 * Agha-nasaka, 106 * Aghari, 36 * Agni-pana, 37 * Agraga, 126 * Ahankara, 13 * Ahuka, 114 * Aila-vamsa-vivardhana, 94 * Aindra, 80 * Ajasra-sukha, 68 * Ajata-satru, 56 * Akledya, 69 * Aksara, 68 * Aksauhini-vrta, 122 * Alankara, 92 * Alpa-vigraha, 66 * Ambarisanga, 94 * Amlana-pankaja-dhara, 58 * Amrta, 68 * Amsamsa, 72 * Anadi, 67 * Anagha, 74 * Ananda, 40, 67 * Ananta, 11 * Andhaka, 113 * Andhaka-nivasa-krt, 113 * Angira, 123 * Aniruddha, 48 * Antaratma, 12 * Antra-mali, 85 * Anuvisaya, 114 * Apurna, 69 * Arista-ha, 37 * Asankhya-brahmanda-pati, 82 * Asosya, 69 * Asthita, 100, 124 * Asupta, 109 * Asurari, 30 * Asvatantra, 130 * Asvattha, 93 * Atali, 17 * Atiratha, 124 * Atta-hasa, 128 * Atyantika-maya, 73 * Aupagavi-priya, 43 * Avatara, 72 * Avrta, 13 * Avyaya, 12 * Ayodhyadhipati, 34 *  * Baddha-godhanguli-trana, 29 * Bakari, 36 * Bala, 8 * Bala-keli, 102 * Balabhadra, 5 * Baladeva, 6 * Bali, 7 * Balistha-pusta-sarvanga, 50 * Bana-varsi, 126 * Bandha-moksi, 55 * Bhagavan, 11 * Bhagirathi, 62 * Bhagna-danta, 128 * Bhairava-sasana, 112 * Bhairavakhya, 108 * Bhakta-paradhina, 129 * Bhakta-vatsala, 47 * Bharata, 28 * Bhargavottama, 25 * Bhaskarodaya, 79 * Bhata, 126 * Bhavad, 66 * Bhavisyat, 66 * Bhavya, 38 * Bhayanaka, 93 * Bhimarthi, 60 * Bhisak, 115 * Bhogitala, 17 * Bhoja, 113 * Bhoja-vrsny-andhakesvara, 114 * Bhu, 72 * Bhumi-vaikuntha-deva, 82 * Bhupari-sthita, 72 * Bhuta, 66 * Bhuta-sangha, 85 * Bhutesa, 55 * Bhuva, 72 * Bibhatsi, 84 * Bimbostha, 54 * Bindu, 62 * Bindu-sarovara, 62 * Bodhaka, 71 * Bodhi, 71 * Brahma, 70 * Brahma-dhara, 70 * Brahma-pada-nisevaka, 120 * Brahma-pada-rajah-sparsi, 120 * Brahma-pada-rajo-dadhat, 119 * Brahmaloka, 80 * Brahmanya, 119 * Brahmanya-deva, 119 * Brahmastri, 124 * Brhat, 66 * Brhat-sanu, 77 * Buddhi-sakha, 13 *  * Caidya-satru, 56 * Cala-jhankara-nupura, 88 * Calat-khanjana-locana, 100 * Candra-vamsi, 34 * Canurari, 41 * Carisnuman, 15 * Catu, 123 * Catur-bhuja, 43 * Catur-murti, 12 * Catur-veda, 12 * Catur-vyuha, 12 * Catus-pada, 12 * Cesta-rupa-tanu-sthita, 71 * Ceta, 13 * Chanda, 90 * Citkara, 16 * Citra-kutaranya-nivasa-krt, 31 *  * Dadhi-caurya-krta-srama, 101 * Dadhi-harta, 101 * Daksa-yajna-vighataka, 87 * Dami, 102 * Damodara, 102 * Danadhyaksa, 46 * Dandaka-mandalu, 85 * Dandakesa, 31 * Dandi, 21 * Dani, 10 * Dantavakra-nisudaka, 56 * Dari-bhrn, 77 * Dasarathi, 27 * Dasarha, 113 * Dattatreya, 25 * Daya-nidhi, 52 * Deva, 5 * Deva-giri, 75 * Deva-mangala, 25 * Deva-sarma, 52 * Devadatta, 18 * Devaloka, 78 * Devamaya, 80 * Devasura-bhayankara, 125 * Devatatma, 14 * Dhanada, 59 * Dhanadhyaksa, 46 * Dhananjaya, 18 * Dhanesvara, 46 * Dhanvantari, 26 * Dhanvi, 28 * Dhanvinam, 48 * Dhara, 15 * Dharma-sastri, 90 * Dhauta-vastra-samavrta, 97 * Dhenukari, 36 * Dhrta-natha, 46 * Dhrtarasta, 18 * Dhruva, 12, 80 * Dhuli-dhusara-sarvanga, 103 * Dhuri, 83 * Dig-ambara, 98 * Dipaka, 107 * Divya-loka-vilokita, 99 * Divya-racana, 99 * Divyanga, 99 * Dravayu, 22 * Drsta, 66 * Dugdha-hara, 101 * Dugdha-pana, 37 * Dundubhi, 113 * Duryodhana-guru, 47 * Dvaraka-duhkha-samharta, 118 * Dvaraka-durga-sancari, 117 * Dvaraka-graha-vigraha, 117 * Dvaraka-jana-mangala, 118 * Dvarakesa, 10 * Dvipari-ha, 111 * Dvitiya, 14 * Dvividanga-nisudana, 51 * Dyota, 113 *  * Gada, 65 * Gada-siksa-kara, 47 * Gadagraja, 65 * Gadhinam, 94 * Gadya, 65 * Gairisa, 75 * Gaja-carma-dhara, 84 * Gaja-hanta, 42 * Gaja-koti-prayayi, 123 * Gaji, 84 * Gana, 71 * Gana-natha, 75 * Gandaki-snana-van, 58 * Gandivi, 49 * Ganga, 62 * Ganga-sagara-sangarthi, 60 * Garjita-svana, 129 * Gata-sadhvasa, 105 * Gatadhi, 94 * Gauna, 68 * Gautama, 89 * Gavam-pati, 82 * Gaya-sira, 59 * Ghana-kancuka-sanghavan, 98 * Gharghara-svana, 84 * Giri, 75 * Giri-dhara, 83 * Giri-gahvara, 75 * Girisa, 75 * Go-ganasraya, 35 * Goda, 60 * Gokulesa, 35 * Goloka-dhama-dhisana, 83 * Golokanki-krtam-gana, 99 * Golokesa, 82 * Gomati-tira-vasa-krt, 57 * Gopa, 35 * Gopa-putra, 35 * Gopa-vrndesa, 35 * Gopala, 35 * Gopati, 35 * Gopika-kantha-bhusana, 83 * Gopika-sata-yutharthi, 39 * Gopisatavrta, 35 * Govardhana-samuddharta, 39 * Gudha-vyudha, 68 * Guna, 68 * Guna-nidhi, 65 * Guna-patra, 65 * Gunabhasa, 68 * Gunakara, 65 * Gunarnava, 65 * Gunatita, 67 * Gunavrta, 68 * Gurvi, 47 *  * Halayudha, 5 * Hali, 7 * Hamsa, 24 * Hanumat-prita-manasa, 32 * Hari, 7, 23 * Hari-dasa-sahaya-krt, 56 * Harina, 23 * Harsi, 30 * Hasta, 79 * Hastinapura-sankarsi, 52 * Hasya, 93 * Hemarcita, 75 * Hindola, 108 * Hrsta, 50 * Hunkara, 129 * Hy, 12 *  * Ilvalatmaja-hanta, 64 * Indriyesa, 14 *  * Jagad-bandhu, 119 * Jagad-bharta, 118 * Jagad-bhrata, 119 * Jagan-mata, 118 * Jagan-mitra, 119 * Jagara, 109 * Jagat-pita, 118 * Jagat-sakha, 119 * Jagat-trata, 118 * Jaitram, 124 * Jala-kolahali, 104 * Jamadagnya, 63 * Jambavan, 111 * Jambu, 63 * Jambudvipa, 111 * Jambukasanki, 111 * Jana, 72 * Janaki-virahatura, 33 * Janesvara, 57 * Jarudhi, 76 * Jayakula, 78 * Jayanta-krt, 78 * Jayantanga, 78 * Jayanti-dig, 78 * Jayi, 64 * Jita-pada, 81 * Jivatma, 12 * Jnanam, 14 * Jnapaka, 70 * Jvara, 110 * Jvara-jit, 110 * Jvara-karta, 110 * Jvara-varjita, 110 * Jvara-yuk, 110 * Jyahata-kosthaka, 28 * Jyoti, 46 * Jyotismati-bharta, 46 *  * Kabandhaha, 31 * Kairavesvara, 49 * Kaka-paksa-dhara, 103 * Kakutstha, 27 * Kala, 21, 129 * Kala-hanta, 42 * Kalagni, 22 * Kalaksara, 108 * Kalanjara, 77 * Kalanka-ha, 42 * Kali, 21 * Kali-priya, 21 * Kalindi-bhedana, 8 * Kalindi-kula-viksana, 103 * Kaliyantaka, 40 * Kalki, 26 * Kalpa-vrksa, 48 * Kalpa-vrksa-vana-prabhu, 48 * Kalpa-vrksi, 48 * Kalpanta-bhairava, 86 * Kama-pala, 5 * Kamatha, 25 * Kambalasva, 18 * Kamsa-bhratr-nihanta, 42 * Kamsa-hanta, 42 * Kamsa-kodanda-bhanjana, 41 * Kamsari, 40 * Kana-nama-bhak, 89 * Kanadi, 89 * Kanakangadi, 20 * Kanka, 76 * Kapata-vaksa, 55 * Kapila, 25 * Kari-karna-marut-prejat-kuntala-vyapta-kundala, 125 * Karindra-kara-kodanda, 54 * Karma, 14 * Karuna-sindhu, 27 * Kasi-natha, 112 * Kataki, 20 * Katisutri, 20 * Katyayana, 23 * Kaurava-pujita, 52 * Kausalyananda-vardhana, 27 * Kausi, 97, 112 * Kausika, 112 * Kavaci, 28 * Kaveri, 61 * Kavi, 70 * Kavya-krn, 91 * Kesi-satru, 37 * Khadga-khadnita-sarvanga, 127 * Khadgi, 28 * Khanda-mandali, 21 * Kharparasi, 87 * Kiranasa, 54 * Klista-vapu, 127 * Kosalendra, 26 * Koti-brahmanda-karaka, 82 * Koti-kandarpa-lavanya, 20 * Krsna, 24, 62 * Krta-svotsanga-ga, 100 * Krtamala, 61 * Krtanta-kala-sanghari, 86 * Kruddha, 51 * Ksami, 47 * Kuli, 104 * Kumbhanda-khandana-kara, 49 * Kumuda-bandhava, 78 * Kundali, 21 * Kundali-bhuta, 100 * Kunta-dhari, 84 * Kupakarna-prahara-krt, 49 * Kurma, 24 * Kuruksetra-pati, 63 * Kusa, 112 * Kusa-dhari, 112 * Kusa-vigraha, 112 * Kusasthali-pati, 112 * Kusmanda-gana-samvrta, 85 * Kuta, 86 * Kuta-hanta, 41 *  * Lagudi, 7 * Laksanartha, 92 * Lanka-dahana-tat-para, 33 * Lavanari, 34 * Laya, 22, 73 * Lila-dhara, 83 * Lohargala-vanadhipa, 105 * Loka, 100 * Lokalokacalasrita, 81 *  * Mada-ghurnita-locana, 19 * Madana, 48 * Madhava, 9 * Madhu-madhava-sevita, 50 * Madhusrava, 19 * Madotkata, 125 * Magadhari, 43 * Maha, 72 * Maha-bhuja, 18 * Maha-mana, 10, 13 * Maha-muni, 63 * Maha-punya, 61 * Maha-raja-cchatra-dhara, 53 * Maha-rajopalaksana, 53 * Maha-vayu, 71 * Maha-vibhuti, 55 * Maha-vira, 6, 71 * Maha-visnu, 24 * Mahahi, 22 * Maharatha, 124 * Mahatala, 17 * Mahaugha, 15 * Mahavana-nivasi, 105 * Mahogra-vak, 114 * Mainaka, 76 * Maithilarcita-padabja, 47 * Mala-kosaka, 107 * Malla-yuddha-pravartaka, 42 * Mana-pramana, 108 * Manada, 47 * Manak, 130 * Manda, 48 * Mandara, 77 * Mani, 10 * Mani-dhara, 16 * Mani-hara, 16 * Mantra-visarada, 44 * Mantri, 44 * Manu, 74 * Manu-suta, 74 * Manvantaravatara, 74 * Manya, 49 * Mardala, 126 * Marica-vadha-karaka, 29 * Matanga-vana-sancari, 32 * Mathura, 100 * Mathura-darsi, 100 * Mathuresa, 10 * Matsya, 25 * Megha-mallara, 107 * Megha-mandala, 54 * Meru, 75 * Mimamsi, 89 * Mrda, 86 * Mrdanisa, 86 * Mrdu, 108 * Mrga, 79 * Mukta-kesa, 103 * Mukti-natha, 106 * Mukuti, 21 * Munda-mali, 85 * Muni, 24, 31 * Muni-priya, 31 * Murari, 48 * Musali, 7 * Mustikari, 41 *  * Nadi, 62 * Naga-kanya-samarcita, 20 * Naimisaranya-yatrarthi, 57 * Naimittika, 73 * Naiyayika, 89 * Naksatresa, 79 * Nana-candana-gandhadhya, 96 * Nana-kauseya-vesa-dhrk, 97 * Nana-mani-samakirna, 95 * Nana-padma-kara, 97 * Nana-puspa-dhara, 95 * Nana-puspa-rasarcita, 96 * Nana-ratna-vibhusana, 95 * Nana-varna-maya, 96 * Nana-vastra-dhara, 96 * Nanda, 40 * Nanda-raja-suta, 40 * Nanda-vardhana, 40 * Nandikesvara, 77 * Nara, 26 * Nara-narayanasrama, 63 * Narada, 24 * Naravesa, 72 * Narayana, 26 * Narayanastri, 124 * Narmada, 62 * Nataka-prada, 91 * Navanita-sitasana, 101 * Naya, 89 * Neta, 32 * Nilambara, 6 * Nirakara, 14 * Niranjana, 14 * Nirantara, 67 * Nirguna, 66 * Nirjara, 110 * Nirodha, 73 * Nirupama, 99 * Nirvikalpaka, 67 * Nirvikara, 68 * Nisangi, 28 * Nitya, 68 * Nivartaka, 69 * Nivata-kavacesvara, 21 * Nrsimha, 26 * Nupuri, 20 *  * Pada-sphota, 92 * Padma-mali, 19 * Padma-pada-sphurad-dyuti, 55 * Padma-pani, 7 * Padma-varti, 123 * Padmaksa, 19 * Pakvimabha, 23 * Pampa, 62 * Pancavati-pati, 32 * Pandita, 88 * Pandu-putra-sahaya-krt, 43 * Panini, 22 * Panka-prangana-lepaka, 104 * Papa-ghna, 56 * Para, 11 * Parama, 11 * Paramatma, 12 * Paramesvara, 10 * Parasari-samhita-vit, 91 * Paresa, 10 * Paribhadraka, 76 * Parijataka, 77 * Paripurnatama, 11 * Parna, 98 * Parya, 115 * Pasu-pati, 86 * Pataha-vaditra, 129 * Patala, 17 * Patanga, 76 * Patanjali, 22 * Patta-dhara, 128 * Patta-rajni-pati, 128 * Patu, 128 * Paulastya, 59 * Paundraka-ghataka, 51 * Pauranika, 91 * Payasvini, 61 * Phani, 16 * Phani-raja, 15 * Phanindra, 15 * Phanisvara, 16 * Phutkari, 16 * Pinaka-tankara-kara, 88 * Pinamsa, 55 * Pitosnisa, 98 * Pitr-vakya-kara, 30 * Plaksa, 111 * Plaksavanesvara, 111 * Prabala, 8 * Prabhasa, 62 * Prabhavati-baddha-kara, 102 * Prabhavisnu, 24 * Prabhu, 16 * Pracanda, 54 * Pradhanam, 13 * Pradyota, 113 * Praharsita, 50 * Prahlada-raksaka, 94 * Praja-bharta, 117 * Praja-palana-tat-para, 117 * Prajarthada, 117 * Prakrte, 11 * Prakrti, 13, 90 * Prakrtika, 73 * Pralambaghna, 6 * Pralambari, 36 * Pralaya, 22 * Pramathesa, 86 * Prarthya, 115 * Pratapavan, 6 * Pratibhata, 126 * Pratici, 61 * Pratima-panca-samyuta, 122 * Pratyag-dhama, 67 * Prayaga-tirtha-raja, 59 * Preraka, 71 * Priyatama, 105 * Procya, 126 * Prthu, 25 * Pulahasrama, 59 * Punarvasu, 79 * Purana, 10 * Purna, 10 * Purusa, 10 * Purusottama, 11 * Puskara, 63 * Puspa-dhanva, 95 * Puspakastha, 33 * Puspi, 95 * Pusta, 50 * Pusya, 79 * Putanari, 36 *  * Raga-putra, 107 * Raga-satka, 107 * Raghavendra, 26 * Raghudvaha, 26 * Ragini-ramanotsuka, 107 * Raivata-jamata, 50 * Raivati-harsa-vardhana, 45 * Rajakari, 41 * Rajendra, 27 * Rajiva-locana, 31 * Raktosnisa, 98 * Rama, 5, 31, 63, 81 * Ramabhadra, 5 * Ramacandra, 26 * Rana-durmada, 126 * Rana-slaghi, 124 * Ranga-natha, 106 * Ranga-ranjana, 106 * Rangavalli-jalakara, 66 * Ranodbhata, 124 * Rasa-mandala-madhya-stha, 38 * Rasa-mandala-mandana, 38 * Rasatala, 17 * Ratha-koti-jaya-dhvaja, 123 * Rathi, 52 * Ratna-kambala-dhari, 97 * Rauhineya, 6 * Ravanari, 33 * Ravanyari, 33 * Revatadri-vihara-krt, 46 * Revati-citta-harta, 45 * Revati-prana-natha, 45 * Revati-priya-karaka, 45 * Revati-ramana, 5 * Rodha, 73 * Rohini-lalita, 38 * Rsabha, 25 * Rugna-vajra, 128 *  * Sabha-bhasa, 116 * Sabha-candra, 116 * Sabha-deva, 116 * Sabha-dipa, 116 * Sabha-pati, 116 * Sabha-ravi, 116 * Sabha-sila, 116 * Sabhagni, 116 * Sad-aksara, 127 * Sad-anana, 87 * Sada, 96 * Sadhu, 105, 129 * Sadhu-bhusana, 129 * Sadhu-cari, 131 * Sadhu-citta, 131 * Sadhu-dhana, 130 * Sadhu-grasta-mana, 130 * Sadhu-jnati, 130 * Sadhu-priya, 130 * Sadhu-vasi, 131 * Sadhumaya, 130 * Sadhv-isa, 105 * Sadhya, 80, 105 * Saguna, 66 * Sahasra-phana-mandita, 15 * Sahasra-vadana, 8 * Saila-sattama, 76 * Saindhava, 63 * Sakhi, 13 * Sakra-jid, 39 * Saksat, 11 * Saksi, 13 * Sakti-hasta, 87 * Sala-bahu, 57 * Salari, 41 * Salmali, 111 * Salmali-dvipa, 111 * Salva-hanta, 57 * Sama, 67 * Sama-buddhi, 69 * Sama-drn, 67 * Sama-prabha, 69 * Samantoddhrta-paduka, 123 * Sambhava, 74 * Sambhu-kodanda-bhanjana, 29 * Samhara-kadru, 22 * Sami, 109 * Samiksana, 55 * Samrat, 15 * Samya, 67 * Sanaka, 25 * Sanghata, 13 * Sanghavan, 13 * Sankarsana, 5 * Sankha-cakra-gada-dhara, 44 * Sankhacuda-vadhodyata, 39 * Sankhacudabha, 18 * Sankhya-sastri, 89 * Sanku, 74 * Santana, 77 * Sapta-godavari-pati, 60 * Sarayu, 59 * Sarayupama, 61 * Sarga, 73 * Sargadi, 73 * Sari, 28 * Sarma, 14 * Sartha, 69 * Sartha-vit, 92 * Sarva, 51 * Sarva-laksana, 27 * Sarva-niti-jna, 114 * Sarva-sastrartha-tattva-ga, 90 * Sarvaga, 69 * Sarvavit, 69 * Sarvopama, 99 * Sasi, 78 * Sastra-bhasya-kara, 22 * Sasvata, 11 * Sata-kratu, 109 * Sata-yama, 109 * Satananda, 109 * Satru-nirbhartsanodyata, 128 * Satru-sandha, 56 * Satru-tapana, 28 * Satrughna, 28 * Sattvam, 115 * Satvata, 113 * Satvatam-pati, 113 * Satyam, 72 * Saumitri, 28 * Saumya, 43 * Sesa, 11 * Setu-bandhana, 59 * Setubandha, 33 * Sevya, 50 * Siddha-gita, 53 * Siddha-katha, 53 * Siddhasrama, 62 * Sikata-bhumi-cari, 102 * Sikhandi, 21 * Sikhari, 51 * Silpi, 51 * Sira-pani, 7 * Sisira, 76 * Sisu, 38 * Sisumara, 80 * Sita, 80 * Sitosnisa, 98 * Sivarthada, 87 * Smrti-kara, 91 * Snigdha, 94 * Sodasabda, 127 * Sona-sampluta, 58 * Sphita, 106 * Sphota-vrtti, 92 * Sphotayana, 23 * Sphurad-danta, 17 * Sphurja, 110 * Sphurti, 16 * Sragvi, 58 * Sravana, 79 * Sri-raga, 107 * Sri-vrndavana-sancari, 104 * Sridhara, 83 * Srimal, 34 * Srisa, 40 * Srngara, 93 * Sruta, 66 * Srutisvara, 88 * Sthanu, 15 * Su-kirti, 106 * Su-puspita, 95 * Su-smita-cchavi, 54 * Su-yasa, 106 * Subala, 76 * Subha, 80 * Subhaspada, 131 * Sudama-saukhya-dayaka, 64 * Sudha-ghana, 130 * Sudha-sindhu, 79 * Sudharmadhipati, 115 * Sudhi, 103 * Sugriva, 32 * Sugriva-sakha, 32 * Sukla, 80 * Sukla-camara-vijita, 53 * Sula-sucy-arpita-gaja, 84 * Sunandi, 51 * Suprabha, 61 * Supta, 109 * Sura, 27 * Suralaya, 75 * Surarcita, 34 * Surasena, 114 * Surya-vamsi, 34 * Susupta, 109 * Sutalesa, 17 * Sutali, 16 * Sutoyada, 126 * Sva, 72 * Svaccha, 93 * Svapna, 109 * Svara-gamya, 108 * Svara-jati-smara, 108 * Svarat, 8 * Svasrayasraya, 70 * Svatantra, 129 * Svayambhu, 74 * Svayambhuva-sahaya-krt, 74 * Sveta-varna, 6 * Svetadvipa, 81 * Syamalanga, 43 * Syami, 109 * Syandanam, 124 * Symantaka-mani, 49 *  * Takra-bhuk, 101 * Takra-hari, 101 * Tala, 108 * Talanka, 7 * Talatala, 17 * Tali, 16 * Tamraparni, 60 * Tapa, 72 * Taraksa, 54 * Tarka-vidvan, 88 * Taru-raja, 77 * Tatakari, 30 * Tirtha-yayi, 57 * Tosalantaka, 41 * Trata, 27 * Trayo-vimsatika, 71 * Tri-jvara, 110 * Tridha, 72 * Trikuta, 76 * Triloka-vijayi, 64 * Trisuli, 84 * Triveni, 61 * Trnavarta-nipataka, 36 *  * Uddhava-sakha, 44 * Ugrasena, 114 * Ugrasena-priya, 115 * Ujjvala, 93 * Urangama, 23 * Urdhvaga, 8 * Urja, 110 * Urvara, 109 * Utiman, 73 * Uttariya-dhara, 98 *  * Vaca, 90 * Vada, 89 * Vadi, 89 * Vai, 88 * Vaidhrti, 79 * Vaidya, 91 * Vaijayanti-virajita, 58 * Vaikuntha, 23 * Vaikuntha-natha, 81 * Vaikuntha-nayaka, 81 * Vaisesika, 90 * Vaiyakarana-krt, 90 * Vaiyyasa, 90 * Vajra-bhedana, 127 * Vajranga, 127 * Vakya-sphota, 92 * Vamana, 23 * Vamsi-vadya-visarada, 34 * Vamsivata-tata-sthita, 104 * Vanamali, 19 * Vanecara, 30 * Vara, 48, 94 * Varaha, 24 * Varanasi-gata, 51 * Varna, 96 * Varuni-mada-mattanga, 19 * Vasanta-malati-karsi, 65 * Vasu, 9 * Vasudeva, 9 * Vasudeva-kalananta, 8 * Vasuki, 18 * Vasumati-bharta, 9 * Vasuttama, 9 * Vatodaka, 60 * Vatsa-vrnda, 103 * Veda-pathi, 88 * Vedanta-krt, 89 * Vegatara, 18 * Veni, 60, 61 * Venu-vadana, 7 * Vetala-bhrd, 85 * Vibhisana-sahaya-krt, 30 * Vidya-visarada, 91 * Vigadhi, 94 * Vijvara, 110 * Vilaksana, 80 * Vindhya, 76 * Vipasi, 58 * Vipra, 122 * Vipra-bhakta, 122 * Vipra-gita-maha-katha, 121 * Vipra-guru, 122 * Vipra-hita, 121 * Vipra-mukhya, 121 * Vipra-pada-jalardranga, 121 * Vipra-padanuga, 122 * Vipra-padodaka-priya, 121 * Vipra-seva-parayana, 120 * Vipranghri-jala-putanga, 120 * Vira, 8 * Vira-bhadra, 87 * Vira-ghosa, 127 * Vira-ha, 44 * Vira-mathana, 44 * Vira-sammarda, 126 * Viradhari, 30 * Virat, 15 * Visarga, 73 * Visasi, 87 * Visesa-vit, 24 * Visnu, 24 * Visva-dharma, 52 * Visva-jid, 64 * Visva-karma, 52 * Visva-natha, 64 * Vitali, 16 * Vittalesa, 106 * Vraja-raksaka, 39 * Vrajarbhaka, 102 * Vrajesvara, 36 * Vrddha, 25 * Vrndavana-latasrita, 37 * Vrsa, 86 * Vrsabhanu-vara, 40 * Vrsni, 113 * Vrsni-cakravrta, 115 * Vrsni-vallabha, 9 * Vrtra-ha, 78 * Vyali, 85 * Vyangya-viddhanavad-dhvani, 92 * Vyapaka, 70 * Vyapi, 81 * Vyatipata, 80 * Vyomasura-vinasa-krt, 37 *  * Yadavendra, 9 * Yadu-sabha-pati, 115 * Yadu-vara, 7 * Yaduttama, 9 * Yajna, 23 * Yajna-bharta, 29 * Yajna-trata, 29 * Yajnika, 23 * Yasasvi, 106 * Yasomati-suta, 38 * Yava-bhoji, 93 * Yava-krita, 93 * Yavana-ha, 43 * Yavasana, 93 * Yoddha, 122 * Yogesvara, 24 * Yuddha-bhrd, 44 * Yuddha-vira, 125